2010 Catalogo Americano Completo

Full-Line Product Catalog
Electrical products for hazardous, industrial and commercial applications worldwide
General Information Section G
Description
Organization of the Catalog Catalog Page Layout Reference Information
Hazardous (Classified) Locations Classes Zones Methods of Protection Hazardous Substances Used in Business and Industry Materials and Finishes Enclosure Types/Levels of Protection Quality and Compliances 3rd Party Certifications Testing Authorities
Page No. see page G55 see page G56 see page G57
see page G66 see page G70 see page G71
Quick Ship Delivery Services
see page G72
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Copyright 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds
G54
General Information
Organization of catalog
Organization of the Catalog

The Cooper Crouse-Hinds catalog includes products from nine major offerings; Industrial Fittings, Commercial Products, Control, Apparatus, Enclosures, Industrial Lighting, Signaling Devices, Plugs and Receptacles, and Wireless Solutions/Solar Power Sources
Major Sections
The nine product lines are broken down into major sections to catalog similar items. The sections are: Product Line Fittings Commercial Products Control Apparatus Enclosures Industrial Lighting Signaling Devices - Visual and Audible Plugs & Receptacles Wireless Solutions and Solar Power Sources Major Section Section F Section CP Section C Section A Section E Section L Section S Section P Section W
Product Sections
Each of the nine major product sections is broken down into minor product sections to make it easier to find and select desired items. Each minor product section has an index for that section. Product Line Fittings Commercial Products Control Apparatus Enclosures Industrial Lighting Signaling Devices - Visual and Audible Plugs & Receptacles Wireless Solutions and Solar Power Sources Major Section Section F Section CP Section C Section A Section E Section L Section S Section P Section W Minor Sections 1F 6F CP 1C 7C 1A 3A 1E 6E 1L 11L 1S 6S 1P 10P 1W 5W
Transition Pages
Black transition pages help identify each product section for easy reference. The transition pages provide information on new products within the product section, as well as notable changes to the product section since the last printing of the Cooper Crouse-Hinds full line catalog.
G55
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
General Information
Catalog Page Layout
To make it easier to find specific information about a product, all catalog pages follow the same general layout. A Sample follows.
Product Section and Product Family
General Hazardous (Classied) Locations Suitability Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3,4,7ABCD,9EFG EABX Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations
3F
Condulet Conduit Outlet Boxes With Covers

EAB Series
3F
Applications:
EAB series conduit outlet boxes are installed in conduit systems within hazardous areas to: Provide protection against exterior explosion where acetylene, hydrogen and other hazardous gases are present Protect conductors in threaded rigid conduit Act as pull and splice boxes Interconnect lengths of conduit Change conduit direction Provide access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes
EABC
Hub Size /2 3 /4 1
1
Cat. # EABC16 EABC26 EABC36
Hub Size
1 3
Cat. # EABX16 EABX26 EABX36
Typical Product Applications & Key Product Features
/2 /4 1
EABT
Features:
EAB series conduit outlet boxes have: Five different hub congurations Taper threaded hubs to provide ground continuity Smooth integral hub bushing to protect conductor insulation when pulling Threaded cover openings Surface covers furnished with boxes Neoprene "o"-ring gasket and green ground screw are both standard. Four standard mounting pads, except for EABY. Cover threads are 16 pitch.
EABY Ordering Information
Hub Size /2 3 /4 1
1
Hub Size Cat. # EABT16 EABT26 EABT36

1 3
Cat. # EABY16 EABY26
/2 /4
EABL
Replacement Cover:
Size 3" Cat. # EAB06
Complete Certications and Compliances
Certications and Compliances:

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III UL Standard: 886 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
Replacement O-Ring:
Description Replacement O-Ring Hub Size
1 3
Cat. # GASK1151
Cat. # EABL16 EABL26 EABL36
/2 /4 1
Fixture Cover
Union Hub Type
Standard Finishes: Standard Materials and Standard Finishes of Construction

Feraloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Aluminum natural
Dimensions
In Inches:
Standard Materials:
Bodies Feraloy iron alloy Covers Copper-free aluminum Cover Opening Dia. Suffix SA* WOD S752 3" Fixt. Stem Size
3
Options:
Description Bodies copper-free aluminum Covers Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Corro-free epoxy powder coat
Cat. # EAB0687*
/4
Options, Accessories and Additional Technical Specs
EAB Series
Cat. # 16 26 36 EAB Series
Available in copper-free aluminum, add sufx -SA. *EAB0687 is listed for Group C & D only.
Dimensional Information
c 11/2 13/4 13/4 d /4 /8 7 /8
3 7
a 33/4 33/4 33/4
b 217/32 225/32 225/32
e 55/16 59/16 59/16
f 33/32 33/32 33/32
Size Ranges:
Hub 1/2" to 1" Cover opening 3" dia.
54
www.crouse-hinds.com
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
G56
General Information
Reference Information Hazardous (Classified) Locations
The installation and maintenance of equipment for use in Hazardous (Classified) Locations is governed by the National Electrical Code (NEC), Canadian Electrical Code (CEC), and/or other local codes. The information that follows is not intended to be a comprehensive discussion of Hazardous Areas, but a general overview which can be used to assist in the selection of appropriate equipment.
Hazardous (Classified) Locations

A source of energy is all that is needed to touch off an explosion when flammable gases, vapors or combustible dusts are mixed in the proper proportion with air. The explosion triangle is an effective way to remember this principle.
Division 1 atmospheres cover locations where the hazardous material can exist under normal operating conditions. Division 1 is referred to as "normally hazardous". An example of an area that could be rated as Class I, Division 1 would be an area surrounding a vat where a product is being produced and flammable vapors are released as a normal byproduct of the manufacturing process. Division 2 atmospheres cover locations where the hazardous material does not typically exist. Division 2 is referred to as "not normally hazardous". Examples of areas that could be rated as Class I, Division 2 would be a location where flammable gases or vapors are handled in a closed system, or confined within suitable enclosures, or where hazardous concentrations are normally prevented by positive mechanical ventilation. Areas adjacent to Division 1 locations, into which gases might occasionally flow, would also belong to Division 2. Class II areas are also divided into Division 1 and Division 2 depending on the quantity of dust present in the area. In Class II, Division 1 areas the combustible dust is in the air under normal operating conditions in quantities sufficient to produce explosive or ignitable mixtures. In Class II, Division 2 areas the combustible dust is not normally in the air in quantities sufficent to produce explosive or ignitible mixtures. A Class III, Division 1 location is a location in which easily ignitible fibers or materials producing combustible flyings are manufactured or used. A Class III, Division 2 location is a location in which easily ignitible fibers are stored or andled other than in the process of manufacture.
In selecting equipment, equipment must be approved not only for the class of location but also for the explosive, combustible, or ignitible properties of the specific gas, vapor, dust, fiber or flyings that will be present. In addition, heat producing equipment, such as light fixtures and heaters, must not operate with temperatures, as appropriately measured, that are above the temperature, which could potentially be a source of ignition. An identification number is used to identify the maximum temperature of the equipment and is marked on the equipment. The identification number is referred to as a "T-number". The chart below shows maximum temperature for each of the 14 T-numbers.
Temperature Identification Numbers.

Maximum Temperature Deg.C Deg.F 450 842 300 572 280 536 260 500 230 446 215 419 200 392 180 356 165 329 160 320 135 275 120 248 100 212 85 185 Identification Number T1 T2 T2A T2B T2C T2D T3 T3A T3B T3C T4 T4A T5 T6
In an industrial enviroment, sparks or heat from electrical equipment can be the source of ignition, which can ignite surrounding gases or combustible dusts with disastrous results. Users, insurance underwriters and engineering companies classify hazardous areas. Cooper Crouse-Hinds cannot classify hazardous areas. There are two methods for classifying hazardous areas: Classes and Zones. Using the Classes methodology, hazardous areas are broken down into three distinct classes based upon the material that makes the area hazardous.
Zones:
The 2008 edition of the NEC and the 2009 edition of the CEC gave industries in North America a choice of how to classify hazardous areas. The Zone Classification addresses areas made hazardous due to the presence of flammable gases or vapors, or flammable liquids and is based upon the IEC three zone system. A Class I, Zone 0 location is a location in which ignitible concentrations of flammable gases or vapors are present continuously or for long periods of time. An example of an area that could be classified as Class I, Zone 0 is the vapor space within a vented tank.
Classes:
Class I areas are hazardous because of the presence of Gases & Vapors. Examples of areas that may have Class 1 areas are: refineries, chemical plants, paint spray areas, waste water treatment facilities, printing presses, and pharmaceutical facilities. Class II areas are hazardous because of the presence of Combustible Dusts. Examples of areas that may have Class II areas are: grain processing and storage facilities, coal handling and storage areas, cocoa plants, metal grinding areas, and munitions plants. Class III areas are hazardous because of the presence of Easily Ignitable Fibers & Flyings. Examples of areas that may have Class III areas are: textile mills, wood cutting and pulverizing facilities, insulation manufacturing areas, cotton mills and wool processing areas.
Groups:
Hazardous areas are then broken down into sub-categories grouped based on the characteristics of the materials. Class I areas (gases and vapors) are divided into four groups; A, B, C, D. Class II areas (dusts) are divided into three groups; E, F, G. (For areas rated Class II, Group E there is no Division 2, only Division 1). There are no groups for Class III (easily ignitible fibers and flyings). The chart below shows typical hazardous material for each group. Class I (Gases & Vapors) A Acetylene B Hydrogen C Ethylene D Propane
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Divisions:
Within the Classes classification, areas are divided into two distinct Divisions; Division 1 and Division 2. G57
Class II (Dusts) E Metal F Carbonaceous G Grain (organic)
Class III (Fibers & Flyings) No groups
US: 1-866-764-5454
General Information
Reference Information Hazardous (Classified) Locations
A Class I, Zone 1 location is a location in which ignitible concentrations of flammable gases or vapors are likely to exist under normal operating conditions. An area adjacent to a Class I, Zone 0 location would also be a Zone 1 location. An example of an area that could be classified Class I, Zone 1 would be a container filling area in a refinery. (Zone 0 and Zone 1 locations are similar to Division 1). A Class I, Zone 2 location is a location in which ignitible concentrations of flammable gases or vapors are not likely to occur in normal operation and if they do occur will exist only for a short period. An example of an area that could be classified Class I, Zone 2 would be a container storage area. (Zone 2 locations are similar to Division 2).
Methods of Protection
Many of the products offered in this Cooper Crouse-Hinds catalog are designed and manufactured for safe use within a hazardous (classified) location, when properly installed and maintained. Some of the more commonly used protection techniques incorporated into product design and manufacture are listed below. Explosionproof equipment contains the explosion and allows gases to cool as they escape the enclosure across threaded, flat or serrated joints. These metallic enclosures are drilled and tapped for conduit or cable glands. Intrinsic Safety allows instrumentation and control circuits to operate properly under normal conditions, but protects them if an electrical fault occurs, by limiting the voltage and current, thus preventing ignition from sparks or overheating. Flameproof enclosures With this type ofprotection those parts that are capable of igniting an explosive atmosphere are built into a flameproof enclosure that withstands the explosion pressure if a flammable mixture is ignited inside it. The transmission of the explosion to the surrounding atmosphere is prevented. Increased Safety This type of protection is used for electrical apparatus that, under normal operating conditions, does not form an ignition. Apparatus that produces arcs or sparks in the course of normal operation or apparatus that generates "excessive" heat are not suitable for this type of protection. Therefore, this type of protection in not used for equipment such as switchgear, pushbuttons and motors. Dust-ignition Proof This type of protection used for applications in Class II (dusts)in North America excludes ignitible concentrations of dusts and offers cool operating temperatures.
ATEX, IECEx, GB, GOST, and Other International Hazardous Locations Requirements:
Outside of North America, much of the world uses the IEC system of standards as the basis for classifying and specifying hazardous locations equipment. The IEC system uses the zone classification method for defining the type and degree of hazard. Gas groups, temperature codes and protection techniques are similar to those used for NEC/CEC zone classifications. For further information on Zones and ATEX/IEC Type protection techniques, refer to the Cooper Crouse-Hinds Ex Digest.
Groups:
Similar to the Classes method of classifying hazardous areas, the Zone method also groups the hazardous gases or vapors together based upon characteristics of those gases or vapors. In the Zone classification system, there are three groups; IIC, IIB, and IIA. The chart below shows typical hazardous material for each group. Group IIC IIB IIA Typical Gas or Vapor Acetylene and Hydrogen Acetaldehyde and Ethylene Methane, Gasoline, and Propane
Also similiar to the Class method, the Zone method requires equipment be marked to show the operating temperature or temperature range. The temperature range is identified through the use of an identification number. The table below shows the maximum surface temperature for the six temperature classes. Classification of Maximum Surface Temperature for Group II Electrical Equipment Temp. Class T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 Max. Surface Temp. (C) 450 300 200 135 100 85
Please note, the above information is provided only as an overview of hazardous (classified) locations and protection techniques. For more detailed information, including a comprehensive list of hazardous atmospheres and their characteristics as well as a glossary of terms, consult the appropriate governing code, the Cooper Crouse-Hinds Code Digest, or contact your local Cooper Crouse-Hinds representative.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
G58
General Information
Reference Information Gases and Vapors Hazardous Substances Used in Business and Industry
TABLE I
Auto*Ignition Temp. Class I* Group C D D D D D A B(C) D D D C D B(C) D D D D D D B(D) D D D D D D D D C B(C) C D D D C D C C D C D D C D D D D D D D C D D D D D D C D C D C C C C Substance Acetaldehyde Acetic Acid Acetic Anhydride Acetone Acetone Cyanohydrin Acetonitrile Acetylene Acrolein (inhibited) Acrylic Acid Acrylonitrile Adiponitrile Allyl Alcohol Allyl Chloride Allyl Glycidyl Ether Ammonia n-Amyl Acetate sec-Amyl Acetate Aniline Benzene Benzyl Chloride 1,3-Butadiene Butane 1-Butanol 2-Butanol n-Butyl Acetate iso-Butyl Acetate sec-Butyl Acetate t-Butyl Acetate n-Butyl Acrylate (inhibited) n-Butyl Formal n-Butyl Glycidyl Ether Butyl Mercaptan t-Butyl Toluene Butylamine Butylene n-Butyraldehyde n-Butyric Acid Carbon Disulfide Carbon Monoxide Chloroacetaldehyde Chlorobenzene 1-Chloro-1-Nitropropane Chloroprene Cresol Crotonaldehyde Cumene Cyclohexane Cyclohexanol Cyclohexanone Cyclohexene Cyclopropane p-Cymene n-Decaldehyde n-Decanol Decene Diacetone Alcohol o-Dichlorobenzene 1,1-Dichloroethane 1,2-Dichloroethylene 1,1-Dichloro-1-Nitroethane 1,3-Dichloropropene Dicyclopentadiene Diethyl Benzene Diethyl Ether Diethylamine Diethylaminoethanol Diethylene Glycol Monobutyl Ether F 347 867 600 869 1270 975 581 455 820 898 713 905 928 680 1139 928 1085 788 550 650 761 790 790 559 594 725 425 830 194 1128 1099 1038-1110 450 795 473 572 473 471 938 817 550 455 1118 1198 820 860 937 743-842 320 594 442
US: 1-866-764-5454
Flash Point F -38 103 120 -4 165 42 gas -15 122 32 200 70 -25 gas 60 89 158 12 153 gas -76 98 75 72 88 118 35 10 gas -8 161 -22 gas 82 144 -4 178-187 55 96 -4 154 111 <20 gas 117 180 <131 148 151 22 36 168 95 90 133-135 -49 -9 172 C -39 39 49 -20 74 6 gas -26 50 0 93 21 -32 gas 16 32 70 -11 67 gas -60 37 24 22 31 48 2 -12 gas -22 72 -30 gas 28 62 -20 81-86 13 36 -20 68 44 <-7 gas 47 82 <5 64 66 -6 2 76 35 32 56-57 -45 -23 78
Flammable Limits Percent by Volume Lower Upper Vapor Density (Air Equals 1.0) 1.5 2.1 3.5 2 2.9 1.4 0.9 1.9 2.5 1.8 2 2.6 0.6 4.5 4.5 3.2 2.8 4.4 1.9 2 2.6 2.6 4 4 4.4 3.1 2.5 1.9 2.5 3 2.6 1 3.9 4.3 3 2.4 4.1 2.9 3.5 3.4 2.8 1.5 4.6 5.5 4.84 4 5.1 3.4 5 3.8 4.6 2.6 2.5 5.6
C 175 464 316 465 688 524 305 235 438 481 378 485 498 360 615 498 585 420 288 343 405 421 421 293 312 385 218 443 90 609 593 559-599 232 424 245 300 245 244 503 436 288 c225 603 647 438 460 503 395-450 160 312 228
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
4 60 4 19.9 @ 200F 2.7 10.3 2.5 13 2.2 12 3 16 2.5 100 2.8 31 2.4 8 3 17 2.5 18 2.9 11.1 15 28 1.1 7.5 1.3 11 1.3 7.9 1.1 2 12 1.6 8.4 1.4 11.2 1.7 @ 212F 9.8 @ 212F 1.7 7.6 1.7 9.8 1.5 9.9 1.7 9.8 1.6 10 1.9 12.5 2 10 1.3 50 12.5 74 1.3 9.6 4 20 1.1-1.4 2.1 15.5 0.9 6.5 1.3 8 1.1 @212 9.4 2.4 10.4 0.7 @212F 5.6 1.8 6.9 2.2 9.2 5.6 5.6 12.8 5.3 14.5 1.9 36 1.8 10.1 0.85 24.6
G59
General Information
TABLE I (contd)
Auto*Ignition Temp. Class I* Group Substance C D D C C D D C C D C D C D D D D D D D D D D D D C C C D D C D D C C C C D B(C) D C C B D B Diethylene Glycol Monomethyl Ether Di-isobutyl Ketone Di-isobutylene Di-isopropylamine N-N-Dimethyl Aniline Dimethyl Formamide Dimethyl Sulfate Dimethylamine 1,4-Dioxane Dipentene Di-n-propylamine Dipropylene Glycol Methyl Ether Dodecene Epichlorohydrin Ethane Ethanol Ethyl Acetate Ethyl Acrylate (inhibited) Ethyl sec-Amyl Ketone Ethyl Benzene Ethyl Butanol Ethyl Butyl Ketone Ethyl Chloride Ethyl Formate 2-Ethyl Hexanol 2-Ethyl Hexyl Acrylate Ethyl Mercaptan n-Ethyl Morpholine 2-Ethyl-3-Propyl Acrolein Ethyl Silicate Ethylamine Ethylene Ethylene Chlorohydrin Ethylene Dichloride Ethylene Glycol Monobutyl Ether Ethylene Glycol Monobutyl Ether Acetate Ethylene Glycol Monomethyl ether Ethylene Glycol Monoethyl Ether Acetate Ethylene Glycol Monomethyl Ether Ethylene Oxide Ethylenediamine Ethylenimine 2-Ethylhexaldehyde Formaldehyde (Gas) Formic Acid (90%) Fuel and Combustible Process Gas (containing more than 30 percent H2 by volume) Fuel Oils Furfural Furfuryl Alcohol Gasoline Heptane Heptene Hexane Hexanol 2-Hexanone Hexenes sec-Hexyl Acetate Hydrazine F 465 745 736 600 700 833 370 752 356 458 570 491 772 882 685 800 702 810 966 851 448 485 572 725 842 797 775 460 645 455 715 545 804 725 608 375 795 813 C 241 396 391 316 371 455 188 400 180 237 299 255 411 472 363 427 372 432 519 455 231 252 300 385 450 425 413 238 340 235 379 285 429 385 320 191 429 434 Flash Point F 205 120 23 30 145 136 182 gas 54 113 63 186 88 gas 55 24 50 70 115 -58 -4 164 180 <0 155 125 <0 gas 140 56 143 160 110 124 102 -20 104 12 112 gas 122 C 96 49 -5 -1 63 58 83 gas 12 45 17 86 31 gas 13 -4 10 21 46 -50 -20 73 82 <-18 -32 gas <-18 68 52 62 71 43 52 39 -28 40 -11 44 gas 50 Flammable Limits Percent by Volume Lower 0.8 @ 200F 0.8 1.1 2.2 @ 212F 2.8 2 0.7 @ 302F 3.8 3 3.3 2 1.4 0.8 3.8 2.8 0.88 2.8 3.5 2.7 4.9 6.2 1.1 @ 200F 1.7 @ 200F 1.7 @ 200F 1.7 1.8 @ STP 3.0 2.5 3.3 0.85 @ 200F 7.0 18 0.7 2.1 1.8 1.2-1.5 1.05 1.1 2.9 Upper 7.1 @ 200F 4.8 7.1 15.2 14.4 22 6.1 @ 302F 21 12.5 19 11.5 14 6.7 15.4 16 9.7 18 14 36 15.9 16 12.7 @ 275F 8.54 @ 275F 15.6 @ 200F 14 @ STP 100 12.0 54.8 7.2 @ 275F 73 57 5 19.3 16.3 7.1-7.6 6.7 7.5 8 9.8
Vapor Density (Air Equals 1.0) 4.9 3.9 3.5 4.2 2.5 4.4 1.6 3 4.7 3.5 5.11 3.2 1 1.6 3 3.5 3.7 4 2.2 2.6 4.5 2.1 4.4 7.2 1.6 1 2.8 3.4 4.1 3.0 4.72 2.6 1.5 2.1 1.5 4.4 1.0 1.6 3.3 3.4 3.4 3.5 3.39 3 3.5 3.5 3 1.1
D C C D D D D D D D D C
410-765 210-407 100-336 38-169 600 316 140 60 915 490 167 75 536-880 280-471 -36 to -50 -38 to -46 399 204 25 -4 500 260 <32 <0 437 225 -7 -22 145 63 795 424 77 25 473 245 <20 <-7 74-518 23-270 100 38
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
G60
General Information
TABLE I (contd)
Auto*Ignition Temp. Class I* Group B C C C D D D C C C C D D D D C D D D Substance Hydrogen Hydrogen Cyanide Hydrogen Selenide Hydrogen Sulfide lsoamyl Acetate lsoamyl Alcohol lsobutyl Acrylate lsobutyraldehyde lsodecaldehyde lso-octyl Alcohol lso-octyl Aldehyde lsophorone lsoprene lsopropyl Acetate lsopropyl Ether lsopropyl Glycidyl Ether lsopropylamine Kerosene Liquefied Petroleum Gas Manufactured Gas (see Fuel and Combustible Process Gas) Mesityl Oxide Methane Methanol Methyl Acetate Methyl Acrylate Methyl Amyl Alcohol Methyl n-Amyl Ketone Methyl Ether Methyl Ethyl Ketone 2-Methyl-5-Ethyl Pyridine Methyl Formal Methyl Formate Methyl lsobutyl Ketone Methyl lsocyanate Methyl Mercaptan Methyl Methacrylate 2-Methyl-1-Propanol 2-Methyl-2-Propanol alpha-Methyl Styrene Methylacetylene MethylacetylenePropadiene (stabilized) Methylamine Methylcyclohexane Methylcyclohexanol o-Methylcyclohexanone Monoethanolamine Monoisopropanolamine Monomethyl Aniline Monomethyl Hydrazine Morpholine Naphtha (Coal Tar) Naphtha (Petroleum) Nitrobenzene Nitroethane Nitromethane 1-Nitropropane 2-Nitropropane Nonane Nonene Nonyl Alcohol Octane Octene n-Octyl Alcohol F 968 1000 500 680 662 800 385 387 860 428 860 830 756 410 761-842 652 999 725 850 875 740 662 759 460 840 840 994 792 780 892 1066 806 482 565 770 705 900 382 590 531 550 900 778 785 789 802 401 403 446 C 520 538 260 360 350 427 196 197 460 220 460 443 402 210 405-450 344 537 385 454 468 393 350 404 238 449 440 534 422 416 478 574 430 250 296 410 374 482 194 310 277 288 482 414 418 421 428 205 206 230 F Flash Point C Lower
Flammable Limits Percent by Volume Upper 75 40 44 7.5 9.0 @ 212F 10.6 3.8 8.9 8 7.9 5 7.2 15.0 36 16 25 5.5 7.9 @ 250F 27.0 11.4 @ 200F 6.6 23 8.0 @ 200F 26 21.8 8.2 10.6 @ 202F 8.0 6.1 20.7 6.7 92 11.2 5.9 11.0 2.9 6.1 @ 212F 6.5 Vapor Density (Air Equals 1.0) 0.1 0.9 1.2 4.5 3 4.42 2.5 5.4 2.4 3.5 3.5 2 3.4 0.6 1.1 2.8 3.0 3.9 1.6 2.5 4.2 2.1 3.5 1.97 1.7 3.6 2.6 2.6 1.4 1.0 3.4 3.9 3.9 2.1 2.6 3.7 1.6 3.0 2.5 4.3 2.6 2.1 3.1 3.1 4.4 4.35 5.0 3.9 3.9 4.5
gas gas 0 -18 gas gas 77 25 109 43 86 30 -1 -18 185 85 180 82 184 84 -65 -54 35 2 -18 -28 -35 -37 110-162 43-72 87 gas 52 14 27 106 102 gas 16 155 -2 64 19 50 82 52 129 gas gas 25 149 118 185 171 185 17 98 107 <0 190 82 95 96 75 88 78 165 56 70 178 31 gas 11 -10 -3 41 39 gas -9 68 -19 18 -7 10 28 11 54 gas gas -4 65 48 85 77 85 -8 37 42 <-18 88 28 35 36 24 31 26 74 13 21 81
4 5.6 4 1.0 @ 212F 1.2 1.6 0.8 1.5 1.8 @ 100F 1.4 0.7 1.4 5.0 6.0 3.1 2.8 1.0 @ 151F 3.4 @ 200F 1.1 4.5 @ 200F 5.3 3.9 1.7 @ 123F 2.4 1.9 1.7 4.9 1.2 2.5 1.4 1.1 1.8 @ 200F 3.4 7.3 2.2 2.6 0.8 0.8 @ 212F 1.0
D D D D D D D C D D C D D D C D D D D C C D D D D D D C C C D D D C C C C D D D D D D
1.1 1.7
1.2
1.7
G61
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
General Information
TABLE I (contd)
Auto*Ignition Temp. Class I* Group D D D D D D D D D C D D D C B D D B(C) D D C D C D D C D D D D C C D D D D D Substance Pentane 1-Pentanol 2-Pentanone 1-Pentene Phenylhydrazine Propane 1-Propanol 2-Propanol Propiolactone Propionaldehyde Propionic Acid Propionic Anhydride n-Propyl Acetate n-Propyl Ether Propyl Nitrate Propylene Propylene Dichloride Propylene Oxide Pyridine Styrene Tetrahydrofuran Tetrahydronaphthalene Tetramethyl Lead Toluene Tridecene Triethylamine Triethylbenzene Tripropylamine Turpentine Undecene Unsymmetrical Dimethyl Hydrazine (UDMH) Valeraldehyde Vinyl Acetate Vinyl Chloride Vinyl Toluene Vinylidene Chloride Xylenes F 470 572 846 527 842 775 750 405 870 545 842 419 347 851 1035 840 900 914 610 725 896 480 488 480 432 756 882 921 1058 867-984 C 243 300 452 275 450 413 399 207 466 285 450 215 175 455 557 449 482 490 321 385 480 249 253 249 222 402 472 494 570 464-529 Flash Point F <-40 91 45 0 190 gas 74 53 165 -22 126 145 55 70 68 gas 60 -35 68 88 6 160 100 40 16 181 105 95 5 54 18 -108.4 127 -19 81-90 C <-40 33 7 -18 88 gas 23 12 74 -30 52 63 13 21 20 gas 16 -37 20 31 -14 71 38 4 -9 83 41 35 -15 12 -8 -78 53 -28 27-32 Flammable Limits Percent by Volume Lower 1.5 1.2 1.5 1.5 2.1 2.2 2.0 2.9 2.6 2.9 1.3 1.7 @ 100F 1.3 2 2.0 3.4 2.3 1.8 0.9 2.0 0.8 @ 212F 1.1 1.2 0.8 2 2.6 3.6 0.8 6.5 1.0-1.1 Upper 7.8 10.0 @ 212F 8.2 8.7 9.5 13.7 12.7 @ 200F 17 12.1 9.5 8 7.0 100 11.1 14.5 36 12.4 6.8 11.8 5.0 @ 302F 7.1 8.0 95 13.4 33.0 11.0 15.5 7.0
Vapor Density (Air Equals 1.0) 2.5 3.0 3.0 2.4 1.6 2.1 2.1 2.5 2.0 2.5 4.5 3.5 3.53 1.5 3.9 2.0 2.7 3.6 2.5 4.6 6.5 3.1 3.5 5.6 4.9 2.0 3.0 3.0 2.2 4.1 3.4 3.7
*Data from NFPA 499 - "Recommended Practice for the Classification of Flammable Liquids, Gases or Vapors and of Hazardous (Classified) Locations for Electrical Installations in Chemical Process Areas". If equipment is isolated by sealing all conduit 1/ 2 in. or larger, in accordance with Section 501.15(A) of NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, equipment for the group classification shown in parentheses is permitted. For classification of areas involving Ammonia, see Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration, ANSI/ASHRAE 15, and Safety Requirements for the Storage and Handling of Anhydrous Ammonia, ANSl/CGA G2.1. Certain chemicals may have characteristics that require safeguards beyond those required for any of the above groups. Carbon disulfide is one of these chemicals because of its low autoignition temperature and the small joint clearance to arrest its flame propagation. Petroleum Naphtha is a saturated hydrocarbon mixture whose boiling range is 20 to 135C. It is also known as benzine, ligroin, petroleum ether, and naphtha.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
G62
General Information
Reference Information Dusts Hazardous Substances Used in Business and Industry
TABLE II
Material* Class II, Group E Aluminum, atomized collector fines Aluminum, A422 flake Aluminum cobalt alloy (60-40) Aluminum copper alloy (50-50) Aluminum lithium alloy (15% Li) Aluminum magnesium alloy (Dowmetal) Aluminum nickel alloy (58-42) Aluminum silicon alloy (12% Si) Boron, commercial-amorphous (85% B) Calcium Silicide Chromium, (97%) electrolytic, milled Ferromanganese, medium carbon Ferrosilicon (88%, 9% Fe) Ferrotitanium (19% Ti, 74.1% Fe, 0.06% C) Iron, 98%, H2 reduced Iron, 99%, Carbonyl Magnesium, Grade B, milled Manganese Silicon, 96%, milled Tantalum Thorium, 1.2%, O2 Tin, 96%, atomized (2% Pb) Titanium, 99% Titanium Hydride, (95% Ti, 3.8% H2) Vanadium, 86.4% Zirconium Hydride, (93.6% Zr, 2.1% H2) Class II, Group F CARBONACEOUS DUSTS Asphalt, (Blown Petroleum Resin) Charcoal Coal, Kentucky Bituminous Coal, Pittsburgh Experimental Coal, Wyoming Gilsonite Lignite, California Pitch, Coal Tar Pitch, Petroleum Shale, Oil Class II, Group G AGRICULTURAL DUSTS Alfalfa Meal Almond Shell Apricot Pit Cellulose Cherry Pit Cinnamon Citrus Peel Cocoa Bean Shell Cocoa, natural, 19% fat Coconut Shell Corn Corncob Grit Corn Dextrine Cornstarch, commercial Cornstarch, modified Cork Cottonseed Meal Cube Root, South Amer. Flax Shive Garlic, dehydrated Guar Seed Gum, Arabic Gum, Karaya Gum, Manila (copal) Gum, Tragacanth Hemp Hurd
Minimum Cloud or Layer Ignition Temp. F C 1022 608 1058 1526 752 806 1004 1238 752 1004 752 554 1472 698 554 590 806 464 1436 572 518 806 626 896 914 518 Cl 550 320 570 830 400 430 540 670 400 540 400 290 800 370 290 310 430 240 780 300 270 430 330 480 490 270
Cl NL
Cl
Cl Cl Cl Cl
950 356 356 338 932 356 1310 1166
CI
NL NL
510 180 180 170 500 180 710 630
Material* Class II, Group G (cont'd) Lycopodium Malt Barley Milk, Skimmed Pea Flour Peach Pit Shell Peanut Hull Peat, Sphagnum Pecan Nut Shell Pectin Potato Starch, Dextrinated Pyrethrum Rauwolfia Vomitoria Root Rice Rice Bran Rice Hull Safflower Meal Soy Flour Soy Protein Sucrose Sugar, Powdered Tung, Kernels, Oil-Free Walnut Shell, Black Wheat Wheat Flour Wheat Gluten, gum Wheat Starch Wheat Straw Woodbark, Ground Wood Flour Yeast, Torula CHEMICALS Acetoacetanilide Acetoacet-p-phenetidide Adipic Acid Anthranilic Acid Aryl-nitrosomethylamide Azelaic Acid 2,2-Azo-bis-butyronitrile Benzoic Acid Benzotriazole Bisphenol-A Chloroacetoacetanilide Diallyl Phthalate Dicumyl Peroxide (suspended on CaCO3), 40-60 Dicyclopentadiene Dioxide Dihydroacetic Acid Dimethyl lsophthalate Dimethyl Terephthalate 3,5 - Dinitrobenzoic Acid Dinitrotoluamide Diphenyl Ditertiary Butyl Paracresol Ethyl Hydroxyethyl Cellulose Fumaric Acid Hexamethylene Tetramine Hydroxyethyl Cellulose lsotoic Anhydride Methionine Nitrosoamine Para-oxy-benzaldehyde Paraphenylene Diamine Paratertiary Butyl Benzoic Acid Pentaerythritol Phenylbetanaphthylamine Phthalic Anydride Phthalimide
Minimum Cloud or Layer Ignition Temp. F C 590 482 392 500 410 410 464 410 392 824 410 446 428 914 428 410 374 500 662 698 464 428 428 680 968 716 428 482 500 500 824 1040 1022 1076 914 1130 662 824 824 1058 1184 896 356 788 806 1076 1058 860 932 1166 878 734 968 770 770 1292 680 518 716 1148 1040 752 1256 1202 1166 310 250 200 260 210 210 240 210 200 440 210 230 220 490 220 210 190 260 350 370 240 220 220 360 520 380 220 250 260 260 440 560 550 580 490 610 350 440 440 570 640 480 180 420 430 580 570 460 500 630 470 390 520 410 410 700 360 270 380 620 560 400 680 650 630
NL
NL
Cl CI
NL NL
M NL M M NL M M M M M M NL NL M M NL NL M NL NL M S NL NL NL Cl M M M NL M M
392 392 446 500 428 446 518 698 464 428 482 464 698 626 392 410 392 446 446 680 932 500 464 680 500 428
NL NL Cl
200 200 230 260 220 230 270 370 240 220 250 240 370 330 200 210 200 230 230 360 500 260 240 360 260 220
G63
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
General Information
TABLE II
Material* Class II, Group G (cont'd) Salicylanilide Sorbic Acid Stearic Acid, Aluminum Salt Stearic Acid, Zinc Salt Sulfur Terephthalic Acid DRUGS 2-Acetylamino-5-nitrothiazole 2-Amino-5-nitrothiazole Aspirin Gulasonic Acid, Diacetone Mannitol Nitropyridone 1-Sorbose Vitamin B1, mononitrate Vitamin C (Ascorbic Acid) DYES, PIGMENTS, INTERMEDIATES Beta-naphthalene-azo-Dimethylaniline Green Base Harmon Dye Red Dye Intermediate Violet 200 Dye PESTICIDES Benzethonium Chloride Bis(2-Hydroxy-5-chlorophenyl) methane Crag No. 974 Dieldrin (20%) 2, 6-Ditertiary-butyl-paracresol Dithane Ferbam Manganese Vancide Sevin - Trithiobis (N,N-Dimethylthio-formamide) Minimum Cloud or Layer Ignition Temp. F C 1130 860 572 950 428 1256 842 860 1220 788 860 806 698 680 536 347 347 347 347 716 1058 590 1022 788 356 302 248 284 446 Cl NL Cl NL NL M M NL 610 460 300 510 220 680 450 460 660 420 460 430 370 360 280 175 175 175 175 380 570 310 550 420 180 150 120 140 230 Material* Class II, Group G (cont'd) Chlorinated Polyether Resins Chlorinated Polyether Alcohol Nylon (Polyamide) Resins Nylon Polymer (Polyhexa-methylene Adipamide) Polycarbonate Resins Polycarbonate Polyethylene Resins Polyethylene, High Pressure Process Polyethylene, Low Pressure Process Polyethylene Wax Polymethylene Resins Carboxypolymethylene Polypropylene Resins Polypropylene (No Antioxidant) Rayon Resins Rayon (Viscose) Flock Styrene Resins Polystyrene Molding Cmpd. Polystyrene Latex Styrene-Acrylonitrile (70-30) Styrene-Butadiene Latex(>75% Styrene; Alum Coagulated) Vinyl Resins Polyvinyl Acetate Polyvinyl Acetate/Alcohol Polyvinyl Butyral Vinyl Chloride-Acrylonitrile Copolymer Polyvinyl Chloride-Dioctyl Phthalate Mixture Vinyl Toluene-Acrylonitrile Butadiene Copolymer
Minimum Cloud or Layer Ignition Temp. F C
860 806 1310 716 788 752 968 788 482 1040 932 932 824 1022 824 734 878 608 936 NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL
460 430 710 380 420 400 520 420 250
M NL M M M NL
NL NL NL NL
380 570
550 440 390 470 320 530
THERMOPLASTlC RESINS AND MOLDING COMPOUNDS Acetal Resins Acetal, Linear (Polyformaldehyde) 824 NL 440 Acrylic Resins Acrylamide Polymer Acrylonitrile Polymer Acrylonitrile-Vinyl Pyridine Copolymer Acrylonitrile-Vinyl ChlorideVinylidene Chloride Copolymer (70-20-10) Methyl Methacrylate Polymer Methyl Methacrylate-Ethyl Acrylate Copolymer Methyl Methacrylate-Ethyl Acrylate-Styrene Copolymer Methyl Methacrylate-StyreneButadiene-Acrylonitrile Copolymer Methacrylic Acid Polymer Cellulosic Resins Cellulose Acetate Cellulose Triacetate Cellulose Acetate Butyrate Cellulose Propionate Ethyl Cellulose Methyl Cellulose Carboxymethyl Cellulose Hydroxyethyl Cellulose 464 860 464 410 824 896 824 896 554 644 806 698 860 608 644 554 644 NL 240 460 240 210 440 480 440 480 290 340 430 370 460 320 340 290 340
THERMOSETTlNG RESINS AND MOLDING COMPOUNDS Allyl Resins Allyl Alcohol Derivative (CR-39) 932 NL 500 Amino Resins Urea Formaldehyde Molding Compound Urea Formaldehyde-Phenol Formaldehyde Molding Compound (Wood Flour Filler) Epoxy Resins Epoxy Epoxy - Bisphenol A Phenol Furfural Phenolic Resins Phenol Formaldehyde Phenol Formaldehyde Molding Cmpd. (Wood Flour Filler) Phenol Formaldehyde, PolyalkylenePolyamine Modified Polyester Resins Polyethylene Terephthalate Styrene Modified Polyester-Glass Fiber Mixture Polyurethane Resins Polyurethane Foam, No Fire Retardant Polyurethane Foam, Fire Retardant 860 464 1004 950 590 1076 932 554 932 680 824 734 NL NL NL NL 460 240 540 510 310 580 500 290 500 360 440 390
NL NL NL NL
NL NL
NL NL NL Cl
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
G64
General Information
TABLE II
Material* Minimum Cloud or Layer Ignition Temp. F C
Class II, Group G (cont'd) SPECIAL RESINS AND MOLDING COMPOUNDS Alkyl Ketone Dimer Sizing Compound 320 Cashew Oil, Phenolic, Hard 356 Chlorinated Phenol 1058 Coumarone-lndene, Hard 968 Ethylene Oxide Polymer 662 Ethylene-Maleic Anhydride Copolymer 1004 Lignin, Hydrolized, Wood-Type, Fines 842 Petrin Acrylate Monomer 428 Petroleum Resin (Blown Asphalt) 932 Rosin, DK 734 Rubber, Crude, Hard 662 Rubber, Synthetic, Hard (33% S) 608 Shellac 752 Sodium Resinate 428 Styrene Maleic Anhydride Copolymer 878
NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL NL Cl
160 180 570 520 350 540 450 220 500 390 350 320 400 220 470
Normally, the minimum ignition temperature of a layer of a specific dust is lower than the minimum ignition temperature of a cloud of that dust. Since this is not universally true, the lower of the two minimum ignition temperatures is listed. If no symbol appears between the two temperature columns, then the layer ignition temperature is shown. "Cl" means the cloud ignition temperature is shown. "NL" means that no layer ignition temperature is available and the cloud ignition temperature is shown. "M" signifies that the dust layer melts before it ignites; the cloud ignition temperature is shown. "S" signifies that the dust layer sublimes before it ignites; the cloud ignition temperature is shown. * Certain metal dusts may have characteristics that require safeguards beyond those required for atmospheres containing the dusts of aluminum, magnesium, and their commercial alloys. For example, zirconium, thorium, and uranium dusts have extremely low ignition temperatures (as low as 20C and minimum ignition energies lower than any material classified in any of the Class I or Class II groups. Data from NFPA 499 - "Recommended Practice for the Classification of Flammable Liquids, Gases or Vapors and of Hazardous (Classified) Locations for Electrical Installations in Chemical Process Areas".
G65
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
General Information
Reference Information Standard Materials and Finishes
Standard Materials and Finishes
Cooper Crouse-Hinds offers products of numerous types of materials with numerous finishes to have an offering for virtually all types of applications. The information below summarizes some of the most commonly used materials and finishes. For information relating to materials and finishes for a particular product or product family, consult the specific catalog page. Aluminum: Copper-free aluminum is particularly resistant to salt atmospheres, sulfur gases and ammonium nitrate. Cooper Crouse-Hinds copper-free aluminum alloy contains a maximum of 4/10 of 1% copper. Above this level, the rate of corrosion due to galvanic action within the structure of the metal increases rapidly. Cooper Crouse-Hinds copperfree aluminum products provide optimum protection against galvanic corrosion. Sand cast copper-free contains maximum of 4/10 of 1% copper (21,000-25,000 psi tensile) Permanent mold copper-free contains maximum of 4/10 of 1% copper (21,00025,000 psi tensile). Die-cast copper-free ASTM B85 except with maximum of 4/10 of 1% copper Krydon Material: Krydon is the trade name for Cooper Crouse-Hinds properietary formulation of fiberglass-reinforced polyester. It is specifically formulated for electrical products intended for use in the harshest corrosive environments. Krydon material has proven itself superior to all other commercially available materials used in corrosive environments. Besides being corrosion resistant, Krydon material has high impact strength, is fire retardant, heat resistant and withstands weathering even over extended periods of time. Brass: ASTM B16 Diallyl Phthalate (DAP): Acme #1-502 compound or equal Glass-Filled Alkyd: Glaskyd #3001 or equal Malleable iron: ASTM A47 Neoprene: ASTM D2000 Nylon: Type 6/6 Silicon Bronze: This metal was developed for structural and engineering uses requiring metals with high strength and fabrication capabilities, along with a corrosion resistance equal to that of copper. Silicon bronze is resistant to most dry gases and has excellent marine, industrial and rural atmospheric corrosion resistance. With variation of temper and chemical composition, a variety of nonmagnetic, high strength, readily fabricated copper-silicon alloys can be achieved. ASTM B584
Standard Finishes:
Zinc Electroplate and Aluminum Acrylic Paint: Electrolytically deposited zinc plate Finished with aluminum acrylic paint on all cast Feraloy iron alloy products unless otherwise specified Electrogalvanized and Chromate Treatment: Applied to steel parts Zinc Chromate Primer and Aluminum Acrylic Paint: Applied to certain ferrous castings Zinc Mechanical Plating: Applied to certain ferrous castings and steel parts Hot Dip Galvanize: Zinc plate by dipping in molten zinc Natural Finish: Unplated, unpainted (non-ferrous metals only) Corro-free Epoxy Powder Coat: Corro-free powdered epoxy finish is applied electrostatically, resulting in a tough, durable coating. Powder epoxy finish has many advantages over enamel, lacquer, aluminum paint, or epoxy paint. Powder epoxy finish has superior adhesion. Coating over the entire casting is uniform, even in hidden crevices. Electrostatic application reduces galvanic action.
Stainless Steel: Turned (bar) ASTM A582 Stamped (sheet) ASTM A167 Tellurium Copper: ASTM B301 Vellum: ASTM F104 Vestamid: Thermoplastic polymer, corrosion and weather resistant Wrought Aluminum: Turned (bar) ASTM B211 Stamped (sheet) ASTM B209 Wrought Steel: Turned (bar) ASTM A108 leaded Stamped (sheet) ASTM A366
Standard Materials:
Feraloy Iron Alloy: Feraloy, a Cooper Crouse-Hinds proprietary gray-iron alloy, offers strength, versatility, adaptability, and economy. Cast iron generally resists corrosion from alkalies, organic compounds, neutral and slightly acidic solutions, and certain concentrated acids and neutral brines. Cast Feraloy products are normally supplied with a finish of electrolytically deposited zinc plate covered with an aluminum acrylic paint. Physical properties similar to ASTM-A48 Class 30A (30,000 psi tensile) Feraloy iron alloy with zinc electroplate o hot dip galvanize finish resists corrosion.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
G66
General Information
Reference Information Corrosion Resistant Materials
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Products Available in Corrosion Resistant Materials

The following guide is intended as a convenient aid in quickly selecting the material or finish best suited to reducing your corrosion problem. Refer to previous page for more detailed information on standard materials and finishes available for all products. Product Quick Selector Copper-Free Aluminum
Products Material Guide Conduit Outlet Bodies & Boxes Cable & Cord Fittings Enclosures and Junction Boxes Unions, Couplings, Plugs, Grounding Devices & Seals Motor Control & Circuit Breakers Control Stations Panelboards Switches LED Luminaires Incandescent Luminaires Fluorescent Luminaires HID Luminaires Lighting Accessories Heavy Duty Plugs & Receptacles Interlocked Plugs & Receptacles Emergency Lighting
Krydon
Feraloy
Corro-Free Epoxy Coating
Engineered Plastics
* *
Product types shown above are available as standard in materials indicated. Availability of those not shown depends on specific requirements. CSR Compact Interlock and NSR disconnect switches manufactured from Valox *N2MV Champ lighting fixtures available in PPS.
G67
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
General Information
Reference Information General Guide for Product Material Selection
When designing a new facility or improving an old one, corrosion control can mean the difference between trouble-free operation and costly downtime. A = Excellent B = Good C = Adequate At Cooper Crouse-Hinds, our years of experience in corrosion control can help you reduce equipment failures, costly repairs and loss of production. D = Unsatisfactory
The general guide below can help you in selecting the most suitable material for products used in corrosive enviroments.
57 Valox 3
Krydon
y Feralo um Alumin r-Free Coppe
Bronze Silicon oating poxy C Free E Corro-
PPS Steel inless 316 Sta
57 Valox 3
Krydon
CHEMICAL ATMOSPHERE Acetic Acid Acetic Anhydride Acetone Acetylene Aluminum Chloride Aluminum Sulfate Ammonium Carbonate Ammonium Chloride Ammonium Hydroxide Ammonium Nitrate Ammonium Phosphate Amyl Acetate Amyl Alcohol Aniline Arsenious Acid Asphalt Barium Carbonate Barium Chloride Barium Hydroxide Beer Beet Sugar Liquors Benzene Benzoic Acid Borax Boric Acid Bromine, Wet Butane Butyl Alcohol Butyric Acid Calcium Bisulfite Calcium Chloride Calcium Hydroxide Calcium Hypochlorite
A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A B A A A A A A A

C A A A D C A D A A C A A B A A D D D A A A A B B D A A A A C D B
C D A A D D A D B B B B A D D A A D A A A A D A A D A B D D B A D
Bronze Silicon oating poxy C Free E CorroC C C A A A A A A A A C A B A A A A A A A C A A A C A A C A A A A
C C A D C C D D D D D A A C C A A C A A A A A A A C A A A C A A C
US: 1-866-764-5454

A A A A D B A D B A B A B A B A B B A A A A A A B D B A B D D B D
CHEMICAL ATMOSPHERE A A A A A A C A A A A A B A D B B B B B B A A B B D B B A B A A D A C C B B B C C D B B D D D B A B A C A A D D A B D B A B B A B C Calcium Sulfate Cane Sugar Liquors Carbon Dioxide, Dry Carbon Dioxide, Wet Carbon Disulfide Carbon Tetrachloride Carbonic Acid Castor Oil Chlorine Chloroform Citric Acid Cottonseed Oil Chromic Acid Crude Oil Ethyl Acetate Ethyl Alcohol Ethyl Chloride Ethylene Dichloride Ethylene Glycol Fatty Acids Ferric Chloride Ferric Sulfate Formaldehyde Formic Acid Freons, Dry Fuel Oil Furfural Gasoline Glue Glycerine Concd. Hydrochloric Acid Hydrofluoric Acid Hydrogen A A A A A A A A A B A A A A A A A B A A A A A A A A D A A A C D A A A A A A A A A D B A A B A A A B A A A D D A B A A A A A A D D A A A A B B B B A A C D A B A A A B A A B D D B D A A A A A A D D A A A A A C C A A B B A A C A C A B C A A A A A A A A C A A A C C A A A A C C A C A D A A A D A A A A A A C D D A A A A A A A A D D A B A A A B A B B B C B B C A B A A B B B D B B B B B B A B A D D A B A B C B C C A D C A B B A A B B B A A B A B C A B A A B A D C A B B A A C C B B C D A C D C D B B D B C B B D B A A C A B C B D A
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
G68
General Information
Reference Information General Guide for Product Material Selection
When designing a new facility or improving an old one, corrosion control can mean the difference between trouble-free operation and costly downtime. A = Excellent B = Good C = Adequate
At Cooper Crouse-Hinds, our years of experience in corrosion control can help you reduce equipment failures, costly repairs and loss of production. D = Unsatisfactory
The general guide below can help you in selecting the most suitable material for products used in corrosive enviroments.
57 Valox 3
Krydon
CHEMICAL ATMOSPHERE Hydrogen Peroxide Hydrogen Sulfide Kerosene Ketones Lacquers Lacquer Solvents Lactic Acid Lime Linseed Oil Magnesium Chloride Magnesium Hydroxide Magnesium Sulfate Marine Atmosphere Mercuric Chloride Mercury Methyl Alcohol Methyl Chloride Methyl Ethyl Ketone Mine Waters Motor Oil Nickel Chloride Nickel Sulfate Nitric Acid Oleic Acid Oxalic Acid Oxygen Perchloric Acid Phenol Phosphoric Acid Picric Acid Potassium Carbonate Potassium Chloride Potassium Cyanide Potassium Hydroxide Potassium Nitrate Potassium Sulfate
A A A A A A A B A A A A A A A A B A A A A A C A A A A A A A A A A C A A

A A A A A A B B A B D A A D D A D A B A D D A A B A D A D A B D D D A A
D C A A B B D A A D A A D D B A B B D A D D D B B A D B C B A B B A A A
Bronze Silicon oating poxy C Free E CorroC A A C A C B B A A A A A A A A D B B A A A A A A A C B B B A A A B A A
C B A A A A B A A A A A A D D A B A B A D C D B A A D A B D A B D C B A

B B B B A A B B B B A B B D A B A B A B D B B B D B D A C B A B B B B A
57 Valox 3
Krydon
CHEMICAL ATMOSPHERE
Bronze Silicon oating poxy C Free E Corro-
D B A A C C A C A A A A A D D B A B B A D B D D B B D A B D A A A A A A
C C C D B C B C A B C B A B B D D D B A A B B C D A C C C C A B B B A A
Propane Rosin Sea Water Sodium Bicarbonate Sodium Bisulfate Sodium Bisulfite Sodium Carbonate Sodium Chloride Sodium Cyanide Sodium Hydroxide Sodium Hypochlorite Sodium Nitrate Sodium Phosphate Sodium Silicate Sodium Sulfate Sodium Sulfite Stearic Acid Sulfur Sulfur Dioxide, Dry Sulfur Trioxide, Dry Sulfur Trioxide, Wet Sulfuric Acid Sulfurous Acid Tannic Acid Tar Tartaric Acid Toluene Trichlorethylene Turpentine Vegetable Oils Vinegar Vinyl Chloride Waxes Xylene Zinc Chloride Zinc Sulfate
A A A A A A A A A B A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
A A B A B B C D D D D A D B A A A A B A D A B A A A A A A A B B A A B B
A B D B D D A B B A D A A A A B B A A A D D D B A B A B A A B B A A B B
A A A A A A A A A B B A A A A A A A A A B B B A A B C C A A A B A C A A
A A A A A B A A D B B B B A A A B D A A C C B A A B A A A A A D A A D C
B A B A B B B B A B C B B A A B A A B B C D D B A A A B A A B B B B B A
B C A A B B A A B B D A B A A A A A B C C A B B D A A C A B B D B A B C
B C B A B B A B B C C A B B C C B A B C C B B B C C D C C A A D A D B A
G69
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
General Information
Reference Information Enclosure Type/Levels of Protection
Enclosure Type: NEMA, CEC and NEC Types
A North American system of rating standard levels of protection provided to electrical apparatus by enclosures for (1) the protection of persons against contact with live or moving parts inside the enclosure; (2) the protection provided by enclosure against ingress of solids and/or liquids; (3) the protection provided by the enclosure against the deleterious effects of corrosion; and (4) the protection provided by the enclosure against damage due to the formation of external ice. This enclosure type is in addition to (and not an alternative to) the types of protection necessary to ensure protection against ignition in hazardous (classified) locations.
The chart below shows typical NEMA, CEC and NEC types of enclosure.
NEMA Classification
Typical NEMA, CEC and NEC types of enclosures are listed below:
Type 3 Enclosure Type 3R Enclosure Type 4 Enclosure Type 4X Enclosure Type 7 Enclosure Type 9 Enclosure Type 12 Enclosure are intended for outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against dust, rain, sleet, and external formation. are intended for outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against falling rain, and external ice formation (these enclosures may be ventilated). are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against windblown dust and rain, splashing water, hose-directed water, and external ice formation. are intended for indoor or outdoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against corrosion, windblown dust and rain, splashing water, hose-directed water, and external ice formation. are for use in indoor locations classified as Class I, Groups A, B, C, or D, as defined in the National Electrical Code. are for use in indoor locations classified as Class II, Groups E, F, or G, as defined in the National Electrical Code. are intended for indoor use primarily to provide a degree of protection against dust, falling dirt, and dripping noncorrosive liquids.
Degree of Protection (IP):

The Ingress Protection (IP) System of Enclosure Protection originated under the IEC system. However, it is now widely accepted and used in North America. It is a system of rating standard levels of protection provided by apparatus for the protection of persons against contact with live or moving parts inside the apparatus, as well as the protection provided by apparatus against ingress of solids and/or liquids. This type of protection classification is in addition to (and not an alternative to) the types of protection necessary to ensure protection against ignition in hazardous (classified) locations. The chart below shows ingress protection codes.
Ingress Protection: (IP) Codes

First Numeral Protection against solid bodies 0 NO PROTECTION 1 OBJECTS EQUAL TO OR GREATER THAN 50mm 2 OBJECTS EQUAL TO OR GREATER THAN 12.5mm 3 OBJECTS EQUAL TO OR GREATER THAN 2.5mm 4 OBJECTS EQUAL TO OR GREATER THAN 1.0mm 5 DUST-PROTECTED 6 DUST-TIGHT Second Numeral Protection against liquid 0 NO PROTECTION 1 VERTICALLY DRIPPING WATER 2 75 TO 105 ANGLED DRIPPING WATER 3 SPRAYING WATER 4 SPLASHING WATER 5 WATER JETS 6 HEAVY SEAS, POWERFUL WATER JETS 7 EFFECTS OF IMMERSION 8 INDEFINITE IMMERSION i.e. An enclosure rated IP68 is rated to exclude dust (dust-tight) and rated for indefinite immersion.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
G70
General Information
Reference Information Quality, Compliances & Third Party Certifications
Statement of Accuracy
The information published in this catalog and other literature has been compiled with great care and is sufficiently accurate for most purposes, but is not guaranteed. All statements, technical information and recommendations contained herein are based on information and tests we believe to be reliable. This catalog and the products contained within is subject to change without notice. The purchaser should determine the suitabilty of the product for his or her application and assumes all risk and liability whatsoever in connection therewith.
Worldwide Testing Authorities

Country USA USA USA Canada Mexico Austria Austria Belgium Denmark Finland China Korea Russia Kazakhstan Testing Authority Underwriters Laboratories Factory Mutual ETL CSA ANCE TUV-A BVFA ISSEP DEMKO VTT NEPSI KOSHA GOST-R GOST-K Country France France Italy Netherlands Norway Spain Sweden United Kingdom United Kingdom Germany Germany Hungary Testing Authority INERIS LCIE CESI KEMA NEMKO LOM SP BASEEFA/EECS SIRA PTB BVS BKI
Compliances and Third Party Certifications

The products described in this catalog are of the highest possible quality. Cooper Crouse-Hinds products have been tested and field proven in a wide variety of applications. Products are designed and manufactured to meet or exceed, in numerous products, multiple world wide standards. The designs of Cooper Crouse-Hinds products are original and proprietary. Some are patented. The product information in this catalog, though current at the catalog printing, is subject to improvements and modifications. Due to the breadth of our product offering with regard to the design, materials, components and the variations of these products available to our customers, it is impractical to adequately identify third-party certification of all items in this publication. Product improvements and other developments may at times affect thirdparty approval of testing laboratories such as Underwriters Laboratories, the Canadian Standards Association, Factory Mutual and others. To avoid publishing possibly superseded product certification information, Cooper CrouseHinds has elected not to show specific certification references in this catalog. Cooper Crouse-Hinds products are designed to meet or exceed the performance requirements of applicable standards. Where the term "compliances" is used in this catalog in conjunction with a UL/CSA standard number, it identifies the criteria which have governed the design and Company testing of the products listed on that page. The term "compliances" is not to be construed to mean that the products have been listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories/CSA. Such listing is a matter of independent record signified by product marking, carton marking, or other approved means. The individual product offerings in this catalog comply with the national and thirdparty standards identified under the 'Certifications and Compliances' sections. To obtain specific third-party approval information for these products contact Cooper Crouse-Hinds or the applicable agency. G71
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
General Information
Reference Information Quick Ship Delivery Services
Quick Ship Delivery Services

NEED IT ON-SITE NOW?
THINK "SOS" SMALL ORDER EMERGENCY SERVICE
Request "SOS" Service through your distributor and well ship any of our 4,000+ stock items direct to your site the fastest way. The "SOS" program supplements your distributor's local inventory by providing same-day, premium (first- or second-day air) shipment of stock material from our distribution center. Your order can be shipped to the distributor warehouse or direct to your job site. Orders placed with us by your Cooper Crouse-Hinds distributor before 2:00 p.m.* can ship out that same day. Emergency service is available 24/7. Contact your distributor to facilitate.
*Orders received via fax after 2:00 p.m.Eastern time will be shipped next business day.
NEED A JOB-SPECIFIC ITEM FAST?

ASK FOR LIGHTNING SERVICES DELIVERY
Our commitment to getting you "what you need, when you need it" goes beyond instock inventory to include more than 15,000 build-to-order and hard-to-find products. We're ready to build, machine, package and ship what you need in a fraction of the time you might expect. Lightning Service is available for many of our most popular products, and were adding more all the time. Visit the Quick Ship area of our website for the most up-to-date listing of Lightning Service products. Lightning Service products are also designated in the Cooper Crouse-Hinds price list. Look for "LIGHTNING" in the stock status column.
LIGHTNING SERVICES PRODUCT CATEGORIES

CHAMP HID LUMINAIRES 24-hour shipping
Select from VMV, VMV High Wattage, DMV and LMV Low Profile Series. Two ordering options are available: components or complete fixture unit pack (complete fixture packed by components in a single carton). Just choose the alternative that works best for you. Complete fixtures must be made up of the components listed below. Section 3L Ballast Housings High-Pressure Sodium DMVS100/MT LMVS070/120 VMVS070/MT VMVS150/MT-LX Top Hats APM2 APM3 CM2 CM3 HPM2 TWM2 JM5 PM5 Globes G24 G54 G303 Guards P21 P241 P33 P50 Refractors* G241 G245 GR305 Reflectors* GRD4 RA636 (RA66) RA70 RA739 (RA79) RD636 (RD66) RD70 RD739 (RD79) VMVS250/MT VMVS400/MT DMVS150/MT-LX LMVS100/120 VMVS100/MT
Metal Halide VMVM100/MT VMVM250/MT-S828 VMVM175/MT-S828 VMVM400/MT-S828
Maximum line item quantities for Lightning Service: VMVS250, VMVS400, VMVM250, VMVM400 12 All other CHAMP fixtures 25 For larger quantities Consult Factory.
All fixtures ordered with suffixes BG, FA, IR, QTZ, S658, S714 and S806 will ship in 4 weeks. *Refractors and reflectors will ship in separate cartons
In Canada: Complete fixtures will be shipped as components. Unit pack not available. /MT not available on CSA certified fixtures select /120 or /347 in place of /MT. Suffix S658 not available on CSA certified fixtures.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
G72
General Information
NFL SERIES NONMETALLIC FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES
Shipped from stock: NFL4232/UNV fixtures, 120-277V 5060Hz
Maximum line item quantity for Lightning Service 10 For larger quantities typically 24 weeks. All fixtures ordered with suffixes FA or S658 will ship in 4 weeks. In Canada: Suffix S658 not available on CSA certified fixtures.
Section 6L
VAPORGARD INCANDESCENT AND FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES

Shipped within 48 hours Two ordering options are available: components or complete fixture unit pack (complete fixture packed by components in a single carton). Incandescent: All components and all complete fixtures (packed by components in a single carton). Fluorescent: Complete fixtures consisting of VFH122, VFA222 and VFC222.
Maximum line item quantity for Lightning Service 12 For larger quantities typically 24 weeks. Refractors and reflectors will ship in separate cartons. In Canada: Lightning Service not available for fluorescent fixtures.
Section 1L and 6L
HAZARDOUS LOCATION EJB, GU AND GUB JUNCTION BOXES

Lightning Service for EJB, GU and GUB junction boxes lets you select various styles and sizes of boxes in the configurations that best meet your requirements. Shipped from stock: GUB01, GUB02 Shipped within 24 hours: All enclosures listed below without drilled and tapped openings, hinges or a mounting plate. EJB (bolted covers) Style C
EJB121206 EJB121208 EJB161606 EJB161608 EJB241808
Shipped within 72 hours: All enclosures listed below with standard drilled and tapped openings and/or hinges and/or a mounting plate. See Section 1E for details on ordering standard openings.
Section 1E
GU/GUB (threaded covers) Style D

EJB060404 EJB060404-SA EJB080604 EJB080606 EJB080606-SA EJB100606 EJB101008-SA EJB120804 EJB120804-SA GU GU-SA GUB01 GUB02
Maximum line item quantity for Lightning Service 5 For larger quantities Consult Factory
SPECTRUM EBM HAZARDOUS LOCATION MOTOR CONTROL ENCLOSURES

Apparatus-ready circuit breaker enclosures and combination line starter enclosures are available from inventory. Additional larger size apparatus-ready enclosures and frequently ordered enclosures with circuit breakers installed are available to ship in two weeks. Shipped from stock: Apparatus-Ready Enclosures Section 2A, 1C and 3C
EBMBA EBMBB EBMCFB EBMCFD
Shipped within 2 weeks: Apparatus-Ready Enclosures

EBMBG EBMBK EBMBL EBMCFH EBMCFL EBMCFM
Enclosures Complete with Circuit Breakers

EBMBA EBMBB
Maximum line item quantity for Lightning Service 5 For larger quantities Consult Factory In Canada: Lightning Service not available for Apparatus-Ready EBMBA, EBMBB, EBMCFB and EBMCFD. All other indicated Apparatus-Ready enclosures and enclosures complete with Circuit Breakers are shipped within 3 weeks.
G73
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
General Information
POWERPLUS FACTORY-SEALED HAZARDOUS LOCATION PANELBOARDS
Section 1A
Job-specific panelboards are available within 3 to 4 weeks to meet your power or lighting requirements in 1-, 2- or 3-pole configurations, with or without main circuit breakers. See the Cooper Crouse-Hinds catalog for complete ordering information. Shipped within 3 weeks: EPL/D2L Shipped within 4 weeks: EXD/D2D (Lighting Panel) (Power Panel) Some panelboards require modifications for Group B, GFI and EPD branch breakers Consult Factory for lead times. Maximum line item quantity for Lightning Service 5 For larger quantities Consult Factory. In Canada: EPL/D2L shipped within 4 weeks. EXD/D2D shipped within 5 weeks.
ARKTITE WSR AND WSRD INTERLOCK RECEPTACLES AND MATING AP PLUGS

Shipped from stock: Many of the WSR and WSRD fusible and nonfusible interlock receptacles with enclosed disconnect switch and mating APJ plugs are readily available from inventory: 30A Interlocks
WSRD3352
60A
WSRDW6352 WSRD6352 WSRD63542 WSR6352 WSR63542 WSRDW6352 CH S901 WSRD63541
100A
WSRD10352
Section 3P
30A Mating Plugs

APJ3485 NPJ3483 NPJ3484
60A
APJ6485 APJ6375 NPJ6484
100A
APJ10487 NPJ10486 NPJ10487
Maximum line item quantity for Lightning Service 5 For larger quantities Consult Factory.
CUSTOM-BUILT EJB CONTROL PANELS

Shipped within 3 weeks: Your custom panel with windows, devices, drilled and tapped holes, etc. will be complete and available to ship within 3 weeks. Specify your exact requirements in the Custom Control Panel Order form in Section 1E. Consult Factory for delivery on other combinations of control panels or for a copy of the ordering brochure. Also Consult Factory for delivery of control panels using EMP039 pushbuttons and EMP059, -079 or -089 selector switches. Section 1E
In Canada: Shipped within 4 weeks
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
G74
G
G75
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Industrial Fittings
Section F
Time-tested and innovative conduit fittings, cord connectors and cable glands move power where you need it simply and safely in any electrical installation.
New Products in the Industrial Fittings Product Line

BUBXL Extra Large Moguls Stainless Steel Conduit Outlet Bodies Stainless Steel Conduit Device Boxes ATEX Certified Conduit Outlet Bodies for IEC Applications Elbows and Tees with IEC Certifications Unions, Reducers, Adapters and Plugs with IEC Certifications Conduit Sealing Fittings with IEC Certifications Ultra High Pressure Seal Secondary Process Seal with Rupture Sensor
Section
1F 1F 2F 3F 3F 5F 6F 6F 6F
Notable changes to the Industrial Fittings section of this catalog

Section 1F now includes all Non-hazadous Conduit Outlet Bodies and Outlet Boxes (previously 1F and 2F) Section 2F is now Non-hazardous Conduit Device Boxes (previously 3F) Section 3F is now Hazardous Conduit Outlet Bodies and Outlet Boxes (previously 4F) Section 4F is now Cable Glands and Cable Accessories (previously 5F) Section 5F is now Elbows, Couplings, Hubs, Grounding Devices, Plugs, Reducers, Service Entrance and Unions - Hazardous and Non-Hazardous (previously 7F) Section 6F is now Seals, Breathers, and Drains (previously 8F) Junction Boxes (previously 6F) have moved into the new Enclosures product line
Electrical Fittings
Table of Contents
Section F of the Cooper Crouse-Hinds Product Catalog lists a wide variety of conduit outlet bodies and boxes, cable fittings, unions, connectors, seals, breathers, and drains for both hazardous and non-hazardous area use. Information on applications, features, standard materials, standard finishes, options, size ranges, compliances and accessories is presented for ease of product selection. Information relating to product families in Section F is grouped as follows:
Section 4F
Cable Glands and Cable Accessories
(for hazardous and non-hazardous areas) Includes listings of cable and cord connectors and cable terminators for armored and unarmored cable and cord, and aluminum sheathed cable. Used to: Provide means for passing cord, cable or flexible conduit through bulkhead and into boxes and cabinets Form watertight seal Form non-slip connection or termination for flexible cord, cable or flexible conduit Provide grounding continuity CAPRI CGB CGFP EBY LCC LCCF TAB TACFB TGC THRU-WALL TMC TMCX TUCFB TUSC TWDC
Section 1F
Condulet Conduit Bodies and Outlet Boxes
(for non-hazardous areas) Conduit bodies for installation in conduit systems to act as pull outlets, make 90 bends, provide for splices, taps, mounting outlets, etc. Form 7 Mogul SLB Form 8 LBD LBY Mark 9 LBNEC ET Form 5 Series 5 Form 7 SnapPack Round cast outlet boxes and accessories for use in conjunction with threaded rigid conduit to serve as junction boxes, pull outlets, accommodate wiring devices and support lighting fixtures. GRF VXF
Section 5F
Elbows, Couplings, Hubs, Grounding Devices, Plugs, Reducers, Service Entrance and Unions
(for hazardous and non-hazardous areas) Includes: Service entrance heads Grounding receptacles and straps Unions and elbows for threaded conduit systems Couplings for use where allowance must be made in conduit system for difficult bends or vibration Reducers for connecting conduit of different dimensions Plugs for unused conduit openings and hubs ECGJH ECLK EL F GC GCR GCT HUBS LNR PLG RE REC UNA UNF UNFL UNL UNY UNYL XD XJG
Section 2F
Condulet Device Boxes
(for non-hazardous areas) For installation in conduit systems to: Accommodate wiring devices Act as pull boxes Provide openings for taps and splices Provided in two box depths with a wide variety of hub configurations and sizes. Boxes can accommodate single or multiple devices. FS FD Covers
Section 6F
Seals, Breathers and Drains
(for hazardous areas) Includes: Seals used to prevent passage of gases or flames in conduit runs and from device enclosures Sealing/drain fittings for retrofit applications Breathers used to provide ventilation for enclosures Drains used to prevent accumulation of moisture in conduit systems and enclosures Chico sealing compound and fiber Seal Seal and drain EYS EYD EZS EZD EYSR EYDX EYSX Secondary Process Sealing Fitting EYS Tool Kit Breather and drain ECD CD
Section 3F
(for hazardous areas) For use with rigid conduit systems: Act as pull and splice boxes Act as mounting outlets or supports for lighting fixtures Act as sealing fittings CPS EAB EKC ET GUA HTL LBH LBY OE STL EAJ GUR
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Condulet Conduit Bodies and Outlet Boxes Non-Hazardous
1F
1F
Description
Application/Selection Shape Selector Chart Conduit Bodies - Cast Iron or Aluminum
Forms 7 & 8, Mark 9, Series 5 and Form 5 Form 7 SnapPack Mogul Series LBD Series LBNEC Mogul Pulling Elbows
Page No. see page 4 see page 5 see pages 612 see page 9 see pages 1314 see page 15 see page 16
1F
Covers for Cast Iron or Aluminum Conduit Bodies Blank

Forms 7 & 8, Mark 9, Series 5 and Form 5 Mogul Series
see page 8 see pages 1314 see page 8 see page 15 see pages 1314 see pages 1718 see page 19 see page 19 see page 20 see page 20
Gaskets for Cast Iron or Aluminum Conduit Bodies

Forms 7 & 8, Mark 9, Series 5 and Form 5 LBD Series Mogul Series
Conduit Bodies, Covers and Gaskets - Stainless Steel Condulet Outlet Boxes
GRF Series VXF Series
Service Entrance Elbows & Tees

ET Tees LBY & SLB Elbows
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1F

Application and Selection
1F
Applications:
Conduit bodies and outlet boxes are installed at appropriate locations in threaded rigid conduit systems to: Act as pull outlets for conductors to be installed in a conduit system Provide openings for splices and taps in conductors Act as mounting outlets for luminaires and wiriing devices, or as support for luminaires (with hub and fixture hanging covers) Act as junction or fuse boxes when fitted with connection blocks or fuse blocks Connect conduit sections and change direction of conduit runs Make 90 bends in conduit runs Provide access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes
Considerations for Selection:

Shape required determine from configuration of conduit system and intended function of conduit bodies or outlet boxes Size required determine from conduit and conductor size Material required determine from environmental conditions (corrosive fumes, buried in concrete, etc.)
Quick Selector Chart - Conduit Bodies

Series Form 7 Form 8 Mark 9 Form 5 Series 5 Conduit Sizes 1 /2" - 4"
1
Configuration Styles C, E, L, LB, LL, LR, T, TA, TB and X C, LB, LL, LR, T, TB and X C, LB, LL, LR, T, TB and X C, LB, LL, LR, T, TB and X C, LB, LL, LR and T
Standard Material Feraloy iron or aluminum Feraloy iron Copper-free aluminum Durable malleable iron construction Corrosion-resistant copper-free aluminum construction
/2" - 4" /2" - 4" /2" - 4" /2" - 4"
Quick Selector Chart - Conduit Outlet Boxes

Inside Dimensions Conduit Sizes 1 /2 and 3/4 No. of Conduit Openings 4 or 5 Surface or Flush Mtg. S Standard Material Copper-free aluminum Feraloy iron alloy or aluminum
Series VXF
Depth 13/4
Dia. 41/4
Finish Epoxy enamel
Covers When box is used as junction or pull box, install GRF covers, gaskets. Blank, hub, standard 4" octagonal box covers, wiring devices, lighting fixture hangers, gaskets.
GRF
/2 to 1
13/8 to 31/8
311/16
0 to 4
SF
Electrogalvanized and aluminum paint
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Shape Selector Chart
1F
Series C
Page
Series T
Page
Series GRF
Page
1F
Form 7 Form 8 Mark 9 Form 5 Series 5 E
see see see see see
pages pages pages pages pages
612 612 612 612 612
Form 7 Form 8 Mark 9 Form 5 Series 5 TB
see see see see see
612 612 612 612 612
Outlet Box BT
see page 19
Form 7 LB
see pages 612 Form 7 Form 8 Mark 9 Form 5 see see see see see pages pages pages pages pages 612 612 612 612 612 X see see see see pages pages pages pages 612 612 612 612
Mogul LBD
see pages 1314
Form 7 Form 8 Mark 9 Form 5 Series 5 LL
/2 1"
see page 15
LBD Form 7 Form 8 Mark 9 Form 5
see see see see
pages pages pages pages
612 612 612 612
11/4 6" SLB
see page 15
Form 7 Form 8 Mark 9 Form 5 Series 5 LR
see see see see see
612 612 612 612 612
LBNEC
LBNEC BC
see page 16
Service Entrance Elbows LBY
see page 20
Form 7 Form 8 Mark 9 Form 5 Series 5 L
see see see see see
612 612 612 612 612
Mogul BLB
see pages 1314
Service Entrance Elbows Mogul BUB see pages 1314 ET
see page 20
Form 7
see pages 612 Mogul
TA VXF
see pages 1314 Service Entrance Elbows see page 20
Form 7
see pages 612
Outlet Box
see page 19
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1F
Condulet Conduit Bodies Cast Iron or Aluminum

Gasket and Covers see page 8
1F
Applications:
Conduit outlet bodies are installed in conduit systems to: Act as pull outlets for conductors being installed Provide openings for making splices and taps in conductors Connect conduit sections Provide taps for branch conduit runs Make 90 bends in conduit runs Provide for access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes
Certifications and Compliances:

Outlet Bodies UL Standard: 514B Fed. Spec.: W-C-586D CSA Standard 22.2 No. 18 NEMA 3R Raintight (when installed with cover and gasket)
Standard Materials:
Form 7, Form 8 outlet bodies Feraloy iron alloy Mark 9 outlet bodies copper-free aluminum Form 5 malleable iron Series 5 die cast aluminum
Features:
Conduit Outlet Bodies
Form 7 Condulet outlet bodies approach conduit in size for neat, compact installations Form 8 and Mark 9 bodies provide more room for heavier conductors Many shapes and sizes are available for rigid threaded conduit for complete listings see pages 612 Conduit hubs have tapered threads and feature integral bushings for protection of wire insulation Form 7 has exclusive snaptight and wedgenut cover attachment to provide clear, unobstructed cover opening Built-in rollers on all Form 5 11/4" to 4" C and LB bodies to facilitate wire pulling Series 5 bodies available in optional configuration with set screws on hubs for EMT conduit (add suffix -MT to catalog number)
Standard Finishes:
Form 7, Form 8 outlet bodies electrogalvanized with aluminum acrylic paint Mark 9 outlet bodies natural Form 5 electrogalvanized with aluminum acrylic paint Series 5 aluminum acrylic paint
Options:
Description Suffix Form 7 body and cover only: Copper-free aluminum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SA Corro-free epoxy powder coat - external body only . . . . . . . . . S752 Corro-free epoxy powder coat - internal and external . . . . . . . S753 Series 5 in an EMT version with set screws on all hubs . . . . . . . MT Series 5 pre-packaged with neoprene gasket and cover . . . . . . CGN
Gaskets
Solid gaskets: Are used with blank covers For Mark 9 and Form 5, can be converted to open type gaskets by tearing out center section along scored lines 1/2" to 2" sizes For Form 7 are used with all covers Open gaskets: For Form 8 1/2" to 4" sizes For Mark 9 21/2" to 4" sizes Form 7
Blank Covers
Stainless steel cover screws are standard on Form 7, Form 8, Mark 9, Series 5 and Form 5 covers. Form 7 Wedge nut design facilitates installation and removal. Nuts are held captive in cover. Covers can be used with or without gaskets. SNAPTIGHT Form 7 Covers with integral sealing gaskets are installed without the use of screws, reducing installation time and costs. Covers are reusable. Form 8 Two cover screws provided on all sizes to provide tight cover and gasket assembly. Feraloy iron alloy covers have dome shapes for added strength and extra wiring room. Mark 9 Self-retaining cover screws.
Mark 9
Form 8
Mogul
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Dimensions Pgs. see pages 1012 (Dimensions for Form 5 see Section CP)
Threaded Rigid Bodies
Shape Style C Form 7 Form 8 Mark 9 Form 5 Series 5 E Form 7 L Form 7 Hub Size 1 3 /2 /4 C17 C18 C19 C50M C15 E17 C27 C28 C29 C75M C25 E27 1 C37 C38 C39 C100M C35 E37 11/4 C47 C448 C49 C125M* C45 11/2 C57 C58 C59 C150M* C55 2 C67 C68 C69 C200M* C65 21/2 C77 C78 C789 C250M* C75 3 C87 C88 C889 C300M* C85 31/2 4
1F
1F
C989 C350M* C95*
C1089 C400M* C105*
L17
L27
L37
L47
L57
L67
Double faced may be used as LL or LR has 2 openings, one of which is furnished with a blank sheet steel cover LB Form 7 Form 8 Mark 9 Form 5 Series 5 LL Form 7 Form 8 Mark 9 Form 5 Series 5 LR Form 7 Form 8 Mark 9 Form 5 Series 5 T Form 7 Form 8 Mark 9 Form 5 Series 5 TA Form 7 LB17 LB18 LB19 LB50M LB15 LL17 LL18 LL19 LL50M LL15 LR17 LR18 LR19 LR50M LR15 T17 T18 T19 T50M T15 TA17 LB27 LB28 LB29 LB75M LB25 LL27 LL28 LL29 LL75M LL25 LR27 LR28 LR29 LR75M LR25 T27 T28 T29 T75M T25 TA27 LB37 LB38 LB39 LB100M LB35 LL37 LL38 LL39 LL100M LL35 LR37 LR38 LR39 LR100M LR35 T37 T38 T39 T100M T35 TA37 LB47 LB448 LB49 LB125M* LB45 LL47 LL448 LL49 LL125M LL45 LR47 LR448 LR49 LR125M LR45 T47 T448 T49 T125M T45 TA47 LB57 LB58 LB59 LB150M* LB55 LL57 LL58 LL59 LL150M LL55 LR57 LR58 LR59 LR150M LR55 T57 T58 T59 T150M T55 TA57 LB67 LB68 LB69 LB200M* LB65 LL67 LL68 LL69 LL200M LL65 LR67 LR68 LR69 LR200M LR65 T67 T68 T69 T200M T65 TA67 LB777 LB78 LB789 LB250M* LB75 LL777 LL78 LL789 LL250M LL75 LR777 LR78 LR789 LR250M LR75 T77 T78 T789 T250M T75 LB87 LB888 LB889 LB300M* LB85 LL87 LL888 LL889 LL300M LL85 LR87 LR888 LR889 LR300M LR85 T87 T88 T889 T300M T85 LB97 LB98 LB989 LB350M* LB95 LL97 LL989 LL350M LL95 LR97 LR989 LR350M LR95 T97 T989 T350M T95* LB107 LB108 LB1089 LB400M* LB105 LL107 LL1089 LL400M LL105 LR107 LR1089 LR400M LR105 T107 T1089 T400M T105*
TB Form 7 Form 8 Mark 9 Series 5 Form 5 X Form 7 Form 8 Mark 9 Series 5 Form 5
TB17 TB18 TB19 TB15 TB50M X17 X18 X19 X15 X50M
TB47 TB448 TB49 TB45 TB125M X47 X448 X45 X125M
* 11/4" - 4" Form 5 LB and C bodies are supplied with built-in rollers to facilitate wire pulling.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1F
Condulet Conduit Bodies - Cast Iron or Aluminum

Covers and Gaskets Dimensions Pgs. see pages 1012 (Dimensions for Form 5 see Section CP)
1F
Blank Covers
Sheet Steel Form 7 Wedgenut Cat. # 170 270 370 470 570 670 870 870 970 970 Form 7 Snaptight Covers Cat. # 170SG 270SG 370SG 470SG 570SG 670SG 870G 970G Form 7 Wedgenut w/Integral Gasket Cat. # 170G 270G 370G 470G 570G 670G Form 8 w/Integral Gasket Cat. # 180G 280G 380G 480G 580G 680G Form 5 w/Integral Gasket** Cat. # K50SG K75SG K100SG K125SG K125SG K200SG K250SG K250SG K350SG K350SG
Size
1 3
Form 8 Cat. # 180 280 380 480 580 680 880 880 980 980
/2 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4
Form 7 Snaptight covers with integral sealing gasket are installed without the use of screws. Two cover screws on 1/2" to 2" Form 8 covers and four cover screws on 21/2" and larger Form 8 covers. **For cover without integral gasket, remove G from catalog number.
Sheet Aluminum Mark 9 w/Integral Gasket Cat. # 190G 290G 390G 490G 590G 690G Form 7 w/Integral Gasket Cat. # 170G 270G 370G 470G 570G 670G SA SA SA SA SA SA Series 5 w/Integral Form 7 Gasket** Wedgenut Cat. # Cat. # 150 250 350 450 450 650 850 850 950 950 G G G G G G G G G G 170F 270F 370F 470F 570F 670F 870F 870F 970F 970F
Feraloy Iron Alloy Form 7 Wedgenut w/Integral Gasket Cat. # 170FG 270FG 370FG 470FG 570FG 670FG
Cast Aluminum
Mark 9 Size Cat. #

1 3
Form 7 Cat. # 170 270 370 470 570 670 870 870 970 970 SA SA SA SA SA SA SA SA SA SA
Form 8 Cat. # 180F 280F 380F 480F 580F 680F 880F 880F 980F 980F
Form 5 Cat. # K50CM K75CM K100CM K125CM K125CM K200CM K250CM K250CM K350CM K350CM
Form 7 Wedgenut Cat. # 170F 270F 370F 470F 570F 670F 870F 870F 970F 970F SA SA SA SA SA SA SA SA SA SA
/2 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4
190 290 390 490 590 690 889 889 989 989
Malleable iron covers. Two cover screws on 1/2" to 2" Form 8 covers and four cover screws on 21/2" and larger Form 8 covers. **For cover without integral gasket, remove G from catalog number.
Solid Gaskets - Neoprene
Size
1 3
Form 7 Cat. # GASK571 GASK572 GASK573 GASK574 GASK575 GASK576 GASK578 GASK578 GASK579 GASK579
Form 8* Cat. # GASK851N GASK852N GASK853N GASK854N GASK805N GASK806N GASK808N GASK808N GASK809N GASK809N
Mark 9 Cat. # GASK1941 GASK1942 GASK1943 GASK1944 GASK1945 GASK1946 GASK808N GASK808N GASK809N GASK809N
Form 5 Cat. # GK50N GK75N GK100N GK125N GK125N GK200N GK250N GK250N GK350N GK350N
Series 5 Cat. # GASK015N GASK025N GASK035N GASK045N GASK045N GASK065N GASK085N GASK085N GASK095N GASK095N
/2 /4 1 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 3-1/2 4
*1/2 11/4 are solid gaskets; 11/2 4 are open gaskets. 1/2 2 are solid gaskets; 21/2 4 are open gaskets.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Condulet Conduit Bodies - Cast Iron or Aluminum

Form 7 SnapPack Pre-Assembled Body, Gasket and Cover
1F
Applications:
Form 7 Condulets are installed in conduit systems to: Act as pull outlets for conductors being installed Provide an opening for making splices and taps in conductors Connect conduit sections Provide taps for branch conduit runs Make 90-degree bends in conduit runs Provide access to conductors in a conduit system for maintenance and future system changes
Ordering Information
Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"
1
1F
Shape C C C C C C LB LB LB LB LB LB LL LL LL LL LL LL LR LR LR LR LR LR T T T T T T TB TB TB TB TB TB X X X X X X
Cat. # C17 C27 C37 C47 C57 C67 CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG
/2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"

1 3
LB17 LB27 LB37 LB47 LB57 LB67 LL17 LL27 LL37 LL47 LL57 LL67 LR17 LR27 LR37 LR47 LR57 LR67 T17 T27 T37 T47 T57 T67
Features:
All SnapPack product is individually bar coded to facilitate more efficient inventory control Distributors and end-users need to stock a single SKU instead of three separate component numbers order the body, cover and gasket with one catalog number saving transaction costs, and making product selection and merchandising fast and easy Form 7 conduit bodies are compact with a round back design for neat, efficient installations Conduit hubs have tapered threads and integral bushings for protection of wire insulation Many shapes and trade sizes available Sheet-steel wedge nut cover is provided with integral gasket. The wedge nut design facilitates installation and removal. Nuts and screws are held captive in cover Cover screws are stainless steel with a combination slotted and Phillips head, for easy installation and superior corrosion protection
/2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"

1 3
/2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"

1 3
/2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"

1 3
CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG CG
/2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"

1 3
TB17 TB27 TB37 TB47 TB57 TB67 X17 X27 X37 X47 X57 X67
/2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"

1 3
CG CG CG CG CG CG

UL Standard: 514B CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 18
Form 7 Condulets and covers are available in additional configurations, sizes and materials. For a complete listing of Form 7, Form 8 and Mark 9 conduit bodies and covers see pages 612.
Standard Materials:
Body Feraloy iron alloy Gasket urethane Cover sheet steel Cover screws stainless steel
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy electrogalvanized with aluminum acrylic paint Sheet steel electrogalvanized
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1F

Dimensions (In Inches)
1F
Form 7 C
Size a b c d e
1
/2
3
/4
1 7 17/8 13/4 13/8 41/2
11/4 7 /16 25/16 23/16 13/4 5

7
11/2 8 /16 29/16 27/16 115/16 57/16

3
2 9 /16 31/8 3 27/16 63/8

3
21/2 12 35/8 41/4 39/16 83/8
3 113/4 43/8 41/4 39/16 83/8
5 /8 13/8 13/8 15 /16 33/16
6 15/8 19/16 11/8 313/16
Form 8 C
Size a b c d e
1
/2
11
/4
9
1 7 /16 115/16 13/4 13/8 49/16

5
11/4 8 /2 23/8 23/16 13/4 55/16

1
11/2 10 /8 225/32 23/4 21/8 61/2

3
2 12 /4 39/16 33/4 3 89/16

1
21/2 155/8 47/16 5 41/4 107/8
3 155/8 413/16 5 41/4 107/8
5 /16 17/16 13/8 1 35/16
6 /32 111/16 13/16 13/16 315/16
Mark 9 C
Size a b c d e
1
/2
/4
11
1 6 /32 17/8 13/4 11/2 49/16

19
11/4 7 /2 21/2 23/16 115/16 55/16

1
11/2 8 /4 23/4 21/2 21/4 6

1
2 10 /2 37/16 33/16 27/8 81/16

1
21/2 15 /8 47/16 5 41/4 107/8

5
3 15 /8 413/16 5 41/4 107/8

5
31/2 183/4 511/16 61/4 57/16 137/16
4 183/4 515/16 61/4 57/16 137/16
5 13/8 13/8 13/16 35/16
5 /16 15/8 19/16 13/8 315/16
Form 7 E
Size a b c d e
1
Form 7 L
/2
9 3
/4
3
1 6 17/8 13/4 13/8 41/2
4 /16 13/8 13/8 15 /16 33/16
5 /16 15/8 19/16 11/8 313/16
Size a b c d e
/2
9
/4
3
1 6 17/8 23/4 13/8 41/2
11/4 6 /2 25/16 33/16 13/4 5

1
11/2 71/8 29/16 39/16 115/16 57/16
2 31/8 31/8 41/8 27/16 63/8
4 /16 13/8 21/4 15 /16 33/16
5 /16 15/8 27/16 11/8 313/16
10
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

1F
1F
LB
Form 7 LB
Size a b c d e
1
/2
/4
1 6 27/8 13/4 13/8 41/2
11/4 61/2 35/16 23/16 13/4 5
11/2 71/8 311/16 27/16 115/16 57/16
2 81/8 41/4 3 27/16 63/8
21/2 101/2 51/8 41/4 39/16 83/8
3 101/2 57/8 41/4 39/16 83/8
31/2 1211/16 69/16 51/4 41/2 101/4
4 1211/16 71/16 51/4 41/2 101/4
49/16 21/4 13/8 15 /16 33/16
53/16 21/2 19/16 11/8 313/16
Form 8 LB
Size a b c d e
1
/2
15
/4
9
1 6 /32 213/16 13/4 13/8 49/16

15
11/4 7 /32 311/32 23/16 13/4 55/16

17
11/2 9 /8 41/32 23/4 21/8 61/2

1
2 11 413/16 33/4 3 89/16
21/2 13 /16 61/8 5 41/4 107/8

15
3 13 /16 61/2 5 41/4 107/8

15
31/2 167/8 79/16 61/4 57/16 137/16
4 167/8 713/16 61/4 57/16 137/16
4 /16 27/32 13/8 1 35/16
5 /16 27/16 19/16 13/16 315/16
Mark 9 LB
Size a b c d e
1
/2
19
/4
1
1 6 /32 227/32 13/4 11/2 49/16

3
11/4 7 /32 315/32 23/16 115/16 55/16

1
11/2 7 /4 33/4 21/2 21/4 6

3
2 10 /32 415/32 33/16 27/8 81/16

1
21/2 13 /16 61/8 5 41/4 107/8

15
3 13 /16 61/2 5 41/4 107/8

15
31/2 16 /8 79/16 61/4 57/16 137/16

7
4 167/8 713/16 61/4 57/16 137/16
4 /32 21/8 13/8 13/16 35/16
5 /4 213/32 19/16 13/8 315/16
LL
LR
Form 7 LL & LR
Size a b c d e
1
/2
9
/4
3
1 6 17/8 23/4 13/8 41/2
11/4 6 /2 25/16 33/16 13/4 5

1
11/2 7 /8 29/16 39/16 115/16 57/16

1
2 8 /8 31/8 41/8 27/16 63/8

1
21/2 10 /2 35/8 53/4 39/16 83/8

1
3 10 /2 43/8 53/4 39/16 83/8

1
31/2 1211/16 47/8 615/16 41/2 101/4
4 1211/16 53/8 615/16 41/2 101/4
4 /16 13/8 21/4 15 /16 33/16
5 /16 15/8 27/16 11/8 313/16
Form 8 LL & LR
Size a b c d e
1
/2
15
/4
9
1 6 /32 115/16 25/8 13/8 49/16

15
11/4 7 /32 23/8 35/32 13/4 55/16

17
11/2 9 /8 225/32 4 21/8 61/2

1
2 11 39/16 5 3 89/16
21/2 1315/16 47/16 611/16 41/4 107/8
3 1315/16 413/16 611/16 41/4 107/8
4 /16 17/16 25/32 1 35/16
5 /16 111/16 25/16 13/16 315/16
Mark 9 LL & LR
Size a b c d e
1
/2
19
/4
1
1 6 /32 17/8 25/8 11/2 49/16

3
11/4 7 /32 21/2 33/32 115/16 55/16

1
11/2 7 /4 23/4 37/16 21/4 6

3
2 10 /32 37/16 41/8 27/8 81/16

1
21/2 13 /16 47/16 611/16 41/4 107/8

15
3 13 /16 413/16 611/16 41/4 107/8

15
31/2 16 /8 511/16 81/8 57/16 137/16

7
4 167/8 515/16 81/8 57/16 137/16
4 /32 13/8 21/8 13/16 35/16
5 /4 15/8 23/8 13/8 315/16
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
11
1F

1F
TB T
Form 7TB
d /16 11/8 13/8 13/4 115/16 27/16 39/16 39/16 41/2 41/2
15
Form 7T
Size 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4 a 55/8 61/4 71/4 77/16 83/16 93/16 12 121/16 145/16 145/16 b 13/4 2 21/4 25/16 29/16 31/8 35/8 43/8 47/8 53/8 c 27/16 25/8 3 33/16 39/16 41/8 53/4 53/4 615/16 615/16 e 33/16 313/16 41/2 5 57/16 63/8 83/8 83/8 101/4 101/4
Size 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2
a 55/8 61/4 71/4 77/16 83/16 93/16 511/16 69/32 75/16 81/2 103/8 121/4 5 511/16 619/32 71/2 811/32 105/8
b 25/8 27/8 31/4 35/16 5 61/8 217/32 23/4 31/8 311/32 41/32 413/16 21/8 213/32 227/32 315/32 37/8 419/32
c 19/16 13/4 2 23/16 27/16 3 13/8 19/16 13/4 23/16 23/4 33/4 13/8 19/16 13/4 23/16 21/2 37/32
d /16 11/8 13/8 13/4 115/16

15
e 33/16 313/16 41/2 5 57/16 63/8 35/16 315/16 49/16 55/16 61/2 89/16 35/16 315/16 49/16 55/16 57/8 83/32
27/16 1 13/16 13/8 13/4 21/8 3 13/16 13/8 11/2 115/16 25/32 213/16
Form 8TB
3
Form 8T
/2 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3
1 3
/2 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2
1
511/16 69/32 75/16 81/2 103/8 121/4 155/8 155/8
13/4 2 21/4 25/8 225/32 39/16 47/16 413/16
25/32 25/16 25/8 35/32 4 5 611/16 611/16
1 13/16 13/8 13/4 21/8 3 41/4 41/4
35/16 315/16 49/16 55/16 61/2 89/16 107/8 107/8
Mark 9TB
/2 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2
1 3
Mark 9T
3
/2 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4

1
5 511/16 619/32 71/2 81/4 101/2 155/8 155/8 183/4 183/4
13/8 15 /8 17/8 21/2 23/4 37/16 47/16 413/16 511/16 515/16
21/8 23/8 25/8 33/32 37/16 41/8 611/16 611/16 81/8 81/8
13/16 13/8 11/2 115/16 21/4 27/8 41/4 41/4 57/16 57/16
35/16 315/16 49/16 55/16 6 81/16 107/8 107/8 137/16 137/16
Form 7X
Size 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 a 55/8 61/4 71/4 77/16 83/16 93/16 511/16 69/32 75/16 81/2 103/8 121/4 511/16 69/32 75/16 b 35/16 31/2 4 41/8 45/8 53/16 229/32 31/16 31/2 41/8 51/4 61/4 229/32 31/16 31/2 c 13/4 2 21/4 25/16 29/16 31/8 13/4 2 21/4 25/8 215/32 39/16 13/4 2 21/4 d /16 11/8 13/8 13/4 115/16 27/16
15
e 33/16 313/16 41/2 5 57/16 63/8 35/16 315/16 49/16 55/16 61/2 89/16 35/16 315/16 49/16
Form 8X
3
TA
Form 7TA
Size 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 a 5 /8 61/4 71/4 77/16 83/16 93/16
5
b 2 /8 27/8 31/4 35/16 311/16 41/4

5
c 2 /16 25/8 3 33/16 39/16 41/8

7
d /16 11/8 13/8 13/4 115/16 27/16

15
e 33/16 313/16 41/2 5 57/16 63/8
/2 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2
1
1 13/16 13/8 13/4 21/8 3 1 13/16 13/8
Mark 9X
/2 /4 1
1 3
12
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Mogul Bodies, Covers and Gaskets
Applications:
Mogul bodies are installed in conduit systems to: Act as pull outlets for conductors that are stiff, due to large size or type of insulation Provide the longer openings needed when pulling large conductors Prevent sharp bends and kinks in large conductors (protects insulation during installation) Provide ample openings for splices and taps Provide access to wiring for maintenance and future system changes
1F
BC
BLB
1F
Mogul Series
Size 1 1 /4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4 Cat. # BC3 BC4 BC5 BC6 BC7 BC8 BC9 BC10
Mogul Series
Size 1 1 /4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4
For 5" size use LBD012. For 6" size use LBD014.
Cat. # BLB3 BLB4 BLB5 BLB6 BLB7 BLB8 BLB9 BLB10
Features:
Mogul bodies have: Long openings Provision for easy bends Taper tapped hubs with integral bushings Stainless steel cover screws Covers are provided with integral gasket
Dimensions
In Inches:

UL Standard: 514B Fed. Spec.: W-C-586d CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 18
Standard Materials:
Feraloy iron alloy BC BLB
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint
Mogul Series BC
Size a b c d e 1 9 /16 17/8 23/16 17/8 6
9
11/4 9 /16 25/16 23/16 17/8 6

9
11/2 13 /4 29/16 3 25/8 10

3
2 13 /4 31/8 3 25/8 10
3
21/2 18 /8 35/8 41/4 313/16 15

3
3 18 /8 43/8 41/4 313/16 15

3
31/2 233/4 47/8 51/4 43/4 20
4 233/4 53/8 51/4 43/4 20
Options:
Description Material copper-free aluminum Hot dipped galvanized Suffix SA HDG
Mogul Series BLB

Size a b c d e 1 8 /32 227/32 23/16 17/8 6
19
11/4 8 /32 39/32 23/16 17/8 6

19
11/2 12 /16 35/8 3 25/8 10

11
2 12 /16 43/16 3 25/8 10

11
21/2 16 /32 53/32 41/4 313/16 15

29
3 16 /32 527/32 41/4 313/16 15

29
31/2 221/8 61/2 51/4 43/4 20
4 221/8 7 51/4 43/4 20
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
13
1F

Mogul Bodies, Covers and Gaskets
1F
BUB
BT
Blank Covers
Mogul Series
Size 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4 Cat. # BUB3 BUB4 BUB5 BUB6 BUB7 BUB8 BUB9 BUB10
Mogul Series
Size 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4 Cat. # BT3 BT4 BT5 BT6 BT7 BT8 BT9 BT10
Feraloy iron alloy (for all Mogul Series except BUBXL)

Size 1 or 11/4 11/2 or 2 21/2 or 3 31/2 or 4 With Round Neoprene Gasket Cat. # BG48 BG68 BG88 BG98
BUBXL with Cover & Gasket
New BUBXL Moguls

XL Mogul conduit bodies and covers are designed to ease installation, saving time and money while maintaining the quality you have come to expect from Cooper Crouse-Hinds. Larger internal volume provides additional space for bending and pulling large conductors (complies with the 6x wirebending rule) New rollers improve the ability to pull larger conductors and protect the insulation when the wire is being pulled, greatly reducing cut cable incidents
Extra Large Mogul Series

Size 2 3 Cat. # BUBXL6 BUBXL8
New cover design takes less time to install and can be used as a solid or with the center removed for more internal volume
Dimensions
In Inches:
B A E C
BUB BT BUBXL
Mogul Series BUB

Size a b c d e 1 93/16 211/16 23/16 17/8 6 11/4 95/16 33/16 23/16 17/8 6 11/2 131/2 31/2 3 25/8 10 2 131/2 41/8 3 25/8 10 21/2 173/4 413/16 41/4 313/16 15 3 177/8 55/8 41/4 313/16 15 31/2 233/8 63/8 51/4 43/4 20 4 231/4 613/16 51/4 43/4 20
Mogul Series BUBXL

Size a b c d e 2 15.28 4.07 3.00 2.25 12.25 3 22.85 5.58 4.25 3.38 15.25
Mogul Series BT
Size a b c d e 1 99/16 17/8 35/32 17/8 6 11/4 99/16 25/16 35/32 17/8 6 11/2 133/4 29/16 41/16 25/8 10 2 133/4 31/8 41/16 25/8 10 21/2 183/8 35/8 519/32 313/16 15 3 183/8 43/8 523/32 313/16 15 31/2 233/4 47/8 67/8 43/4 20 4 233/4 53/8 67/8 43/4 20
14
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

LBD Mogul
Applications:
LBD bodies are installed at 90 bends in rigid conduit to: Act as pull outlets for conductors that are stiff due to large size or type of insulation Make 90 bends in conduit system, allowing straight pull in either direction Provide for conduit service entrance to buildings Provide for conductor entrance to motors Provide access to wiring for maintenance and future expansion Size
1 3 1
1F
1F
/2 1" Size 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3
11/4 2", 5" 6" Cat. # LBD4400 LBD5500 LBD6600 LBD7700 LBD8800 Size 31/2 4 5 6
21/2 4" Cat. # LBD9900 LBD10900 LBD012 LBD014
Cat. # LBD1100 LBD2200 LBD3300
/2 /4 1
Features:
LBD bodies have: Cover openings on an angle permitting conductors to be pulled straight through hubs from either direction Domed covers to permit easy conductor bends (relieves strain on insulation) Cover and gasket furnished Taper tapped hubs with integral bushings
Replacement Gaskets for Above Sizes

Rubber
Size /2 /4 1
1 3
Cat. # GASK680R GASK681R GASK682R
Size 1 /4 11/2 2 21/2 3

1
Cat. # GASK683R GASK684R GASK684R GASK990R GASK990R
Size 3 /2 4 5 6
1
Cat. # GASK989R GASK989R GASK687R GASK688R
Replacement Cover Assembly with Hardware

Size /2 3 /4 1
1
Cat. # LBD100 LBD200 LBD300
Size 11/4 11/2 2 21/2
Cat. # LBD400 LBD600 LBD600 LBD800
Size 3 31/2 4 5 6
Cat. # LBD800 LBD900 LBD900 LBD120 LBD140

UL Standard: 514B Fed. Spec.: W-C-586d CSA 22.2 No. 18
Dimensions
In Inches:
Standard Materials:
Body and cover Feraloy iron alloy Gasket Neoprene
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy: 1 /2" to 4" sizes, electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint; 5" and 6" sizes, zinc chromate primer and aluminum lacquer Neoprene natural Cat. # LBD1100 LBD2200 LBD3300 LBD4400 LBD5500 LBD6600 LBD7700 LBD8800 LBD9900 (iron) LBD10900 (iron) LBD9900 (-SA) LBD10900 (-SA) LBD012 LBD014 Size /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4 31/2 4 5 6
1
a 5 61/4 61/4 85/8 127/16 127/16 1911/16 1911/16 207/8 207/8 2713/16 2713/16 327/16 411/2
b 25/16 25/8 215/16 41/4 57/16 57/16 99/16 99/16 107/8 107/8 117/8 117/8 121/2 15
c 15/16 19/16 113/16 31/2 45/8 45/8 55/8 55/8 73/4 73/4 71/8 71/8 85/8 93/4
d 1 11/4 11/2 113/16 25/8 25/8 3 3 43/4 43/4 4 4 57/8 7
e 311/32 417/32 411/32 73/16 107/8 107/8 153/4 153/4 197/8 197/8 24 24 30 39
Options:
Description Material All sizes, copper-free aluminum Suffix SA
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
15
1F

Mogul Pulling Elbows
Weather Resistant
1F
Applications:
Die cast mogul pulling elbows are installed in conduit systems to provide: An accessible weather resistant chamber for containing heavy duty conductors A chamber for containing 90 turn in large stiff conductors. Used either to change conductor direction or to enter buildings A pull box for pulling large conductors A chamber for making splices and taps An accessible opening to accommodate future changes of the system
LBNEC Furnished With Cover, Gasket and Screws
Size 21/2 3 31/2 4
Cat. # LBNEC7 LBNEC8 LBNEC9 LBNEC10
Bending Radius 51/4 53/4 7 73/8
Features:
Large dome cover permits easy, straight through pull Dimension from centerline of back hub to bushing of end hub exceeds six times the trade diameter of the conduit Tapered threads provide easy assembly, tight construction Heavy duty machine screws for cover Cover is gasketed Smooth design and finish make handling easy and complement any construction job
Dimensions
In Inches:
Cat. #
Size 21/2 3 31/2 4
a 2111/16 2111/16 2811/16 2811/16
b 89/32 89/32 97/32 97/32
c 41/2 41/2 51/2 51/2

UL Standard: 514A NEC: Article 314 CSA C22.2 No. 18 CEC: 22.1
LBNEC7 LBNEC8 LBNEC9 LBNEC10
Standard Materials:
Die cast copper-free aluminum
Standard Finishes:
Aluminum lacquer
16
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Condulet Conduit Outlet Bodies, Covers and Gaskets - Stainless Steel
1F
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Condulet stainless steel fittings deliver power where you need it, saving you time and money throughout the life of your facility. Superior resistance to corrosion and heat, combined with unmatched strength, make stainless steel Condulet bodies and boxes a longterm solution for even the most extreme environments.
1F
Applications:
Conduit outlet bodies are installed in conduit systems to: Act as pull outlets for conductors being installed Provide openings for making splices and taps in conductors Act as mounting outlets for lighting fixtures and wiring devices Connect conduit sections Provide taps for branch conduit runs Make 90 bends in conduit runs Provide for access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes
Features:
Self-healing properties of stainless steel fittings help reduce the penetration of rust/corrosion and eliminate damage to the fitting Stainless steel fittings retain their strength in extreme heat and extreme cold conditions Fitting surface is easy to maintain and keep clean Easy cleaning capabilities make these fittings perfect for food processing and other hygienic areas where wash downs are common Superior strength and durability greatly reduce replacement of fittings - this will lower your total cost of ownership and increase your return on investment Stainless steel fittings do not require harsh environment-damaging cleaners to keep them looking like new Conduit hubs have tapered threads and feature integral bushing for protection of wire insulation Outlet bodies designed to match conduit size for neat, compact installations
Dimension
A B C D E Overall length Overall height Overall width Width of opening Length of opening

UL Standard 514A CSA Standard C22.2 No. 18.1-04 Raintight - when installed with cover and gasket
Standard Materials:
Bodies - 316 stainless steel Covers - 316 stainless steel Cover Screws - 316 stainless steel Gasket - neoprene
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
17
1F
Ordering information - Conduit body supplied with cover and gasket T Conduit Body, Cover and Gasket
Catalog Number T18SS T28SS T38SS T58SS T68SS Trade Size " " 1" 1" 2" A 5.56 6.61 7.53 9.37 11.50 B 1.75 2.00 2.31 2.75 3.38 C 1.31 1.63 1.78 2.47 3.13 D 1.02 1.27 1.42 2.03 2.50 E 3.15 3.92 4.61 6.12 8.00
1F
LB Conduit Body, Cover and Gasket

Catalog Number LB18SS LB28SS LB38SS LB58SS LB68SS Trade Size " " 1" 1" 2 A 4.86 5.75 6.48 8.38 10.50 B 1.35 1.63 2.00 2.75 3.38 C 1.31 1.63 1.78 2.47 3.13 D 1.02 1.27 1.42 2.03 2.50 E 3.15 3.94 4.55 6.13 8.00
TB Conduit Body, Cover and Gasket

Catalog Number TB28SS TB38SS TB58SS TB68SS Trade Size 1 1 2 A 6.61 7.53 9.37 11.50 B 2.88 3.23 3.75 4.38 C 1.63 1.78 2.47 3.13 D 1.27 1.42 2.03 2.50 E 3.95 4.61 6.12 8.00
C Conduit Body, Cover and Gasket

Catalog Number C18SS C28SS C38SS Trade Size 1 A 5.56 6.56 7.50 B 1.38 1.63 2.00 C 1.31 1.63 1.78 D 1.02 1.27 1.42 E 3.15 3.94 4.61
LL Conduit Body, Cover and Gasket

Catalog Number LL28SS LL38SS Trade Size 1 A 5.72 6.59 B 1.63 2.00 C 1.63 1.78 D 1.27 1.42 E 3.95 4.61
LR Conduit Body, Cover and Gasket

Catalog Number LR28SS LR38SS Trade Size 1 A 5.72 6.59 B 1.63 2.00 C 1.63 1.78 D 1.27 1.42 E 3.95 4.61
18
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Condulet Outlet Boxes Cast Iron or Aluminum

Covers and Gaskets
Applications:
VXF and GRF cast outlet boxes are installed in threaded rigid conduit systems to: Act as junction boxes Act as pull outlets Accept round base wiring devices and covers intended for use on 4" outlet boxes (GRF boxes only) Act as ceiling or wall mounting for Vaporgard lighting fixtures (VXF boxes) Mount enclosed and gasketed lighting fixtures: Series ARB and VGR; Series ARB fixture hangers (GRF boxes)
1F
VXF Tapped Surface With Lugs
GRF Blank Cover
1F
4 Hubs, 3 Plugs
Hub Size
1 3
Cat. # VXF10 VXF20
Description Surface
Steel Cat. # GRF10
Aluminum Cat. # GRF110
/2 /4
Surface With Lugs

5 Hubs, 4 Plugs
Hub Size /2 3 /4
1
GRF Hub Covers
Cat. # VXFT10 VXFT20 Fixture weight to 125 lbs. Description Size Surface Surface
1 3
Features VXF:
Compact, shallow design Takes GRF covers Multiple tapped conduit openings and pipe plugs for versatility 4 hubs and 3 plugs on VXF10 and VXF20 5 hubs and 4 plugs on VXFT10 and VXFT20 Inside Depth 13/8 115/16 31/8 Cat. # GRF19 GRF29 GRF39
GRF Blank Surface With Lugs
Iron Cat. # GRF11 GRF12
Aluminum Cat. # GRF11 SA GRF12 SA
/2 /4
GRF Gasket
Features GRF:
Surface mounting. Flush mounting can be obtained by nailing box to concrete form through mounting lug Drilled mounting lugs Four conduit bosses spaced 90 apart on sides and one boss on back Blank or drilled and tapped bodies (with 4 side bosses tapped and plugged, plus blank back boss)
GRFX Tapped Surface With Lugs
Description Neoprene
Cat. # GASK643

UL Standard: boxes and covers 514A CSA Standard: C22.2
4 Hubs, 3 Plugs Blank Back Boss

Inside Depth 13/8 13/8 21/16 21/16 21/16 31/8 31/8 31/8 Size Tap /2 /4 /2 3 /4 1 1 /2 3 /4 1
1 3 1
Iron Cat. # GRFX119 GRFX219 GRFX129 GRFX229 GRFX329 GRFX139 GRFX239 GRFX339
Aluminum Cat. # GRF119 GRF219 GRF129 GRF229 GRF329 GRF139 GRF239 GRF339
Standard Materials:
VXF copper-free aluminum GRF Feraloy iron alloy or copper-free aluminum
Standard Finishes:
VXF epoxy enamel GRF electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint
Dimensions
In Inches:
VXF-VXFT
VXFT has hubs on 4 sides and back; VXF has hubs on 4 sides only. See lighting section 8L for complete listing of lighting fixtures and hangers.
GRF-GRFX
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
19
1F
Condulet Service Entrance Elbows and Tees
1F
Applications:
SLB and LBY elbows are installed in conduit systems to: Act as service entrance elbows between service entrance and vertical weatherhead conduit runs Make 90 bends in conduit systems where space is limited Act as pull outlets Provide access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes ET short radius tees are installed in conduit systems: In concealed conduit runs allowing single conduit stub up to outlet boxes located above or below main conduit run. Eliminates separate feed and return conduits to flush floor box or junction box
Options:
Description Finishes LBY elbows: Corro-free epoxy power coat Material (LBY only) copper-free aluminum construction Suffix S752 SA
LBY (includes cover)
SLB (includes cover)
Size /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2

1
Cat. # LBY15 LBY25 LBY35 LBY45 LBY55
Size /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2

1
Cat. # SLB1 SLB2 SLB3 SLB4 SLB5 SLB6
ET
Size /4 1/2 1/2 3 /4 3/4 3/4 1 3/4 3/4 Largest hub shown at top
3
Cat. # ET218 ET228 ET328 of photo
Features:
SLB elbows have: Compact overall size and short hubs Taper tapped hubs and integral bushing for standard threaded conduit Covers and gaskets furnished LBY elbows have: Maximum volume for bends within a compact overall size Screw-on cover for ease of installation and removal Cover openings on an angle, permitting conductors to be pulled straight through either hub Taper tapped hubs and integral bushing for standard threaded conduit ET short radius tees have: Compact size, small radius of bend for use in concealed or open conduit systems. Particularly suited for use in shallow floors or partitions Taper tapped hubs and integral bushing for standard threaded conduit ET
Dimensions
In Inches:
LBY
SLB

UL Standard: 514B Fed. Spec.: W-C-586a
SLB
Size a b c d e
1
/2
/4
1 41/8 19 /32 111/16 115/32 311/32

3
13/4 53/8 225/32 23/32 17/8 43/4 1 3 /4 21/2

1 3
11/2 623/32 31/32 23/8 25/32 61/32 13/4 3 /32 215/16

25
2 73/4 329/32 3 25/8 631/32 11/2 41/2 33/8 1 3/4 3/4 4 3 11/2 13/4
Standard Materials:
SLB elbows copperfree aluminum LBY elbows Feraloy iron alloy ET tees Feraloy iron alloy
31/8 125/32 13/16 1 211/16

1
31/2 2 13/8 13/16 215/16 /4

3
LBY
Size a b /2
13
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum natural Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint
2 /16 2
3
3 /16 21/4 /4 1/2 1/2
ET
Size a b c d /4 3/4 3/4 4 25/8 11/4 11/2 4 3 11/2 11/2
20
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Condulet Device Boxes Non-hazardous
2F
2F
Description
Application/Selection Shape Selector Charts Device Boxes - Cast Iron or Aluminum
FS/FD Series
Single gang Blank Cast hubs Multi-gang Blank Cast hubs
Page No.
see page 22 see page 23
see page 31 see pages 2526 see page 31 see pages 2930
Covers for Cast Iron or Aluminum Device Boxes

WLR and WLG Wet Locations Covers For NEMA Configuration and GFCI Receptacles
Blank Pilot light Push button Receptacle Switch
see see see see see
page page page page page
39 43 41 37 39
Device Boxes and Covers - Stainless Steel

FS/FD Series see pages 3536
Plugs and Receptacles

DS Series DS/WP Series FSE Series see page 42 see page 42 see page 46
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
21
2F
Condulet Cast Device Boxes and Covers

2F
Applications:
Cast device boxes are installed in conduit and cable systems to: Accommodate wiring devices Act as pull boxes for conductors in a conduit system Provide openings to make splices and taps in conductors Provide access to condutors for maintenance and future system changes
Considerations for Selection of Covers, Devices, and Accessories

Both general purpose and weatherproof, waterproof devices and covers are available. Selection will depend on individual conditions. To provide for a wide variety of applications, the following covers and devices are available: Covers General use snap switch Pushbutton switch Plug and receptacle Blank Pilot light Receptacle Devices Receptacle Pilot lights Wiring device Accessories Gaskets Box extensions Flush mtg. adapter Pg. See pages 3941 and 4445 See page 41 See pages 3739, 42, and 4446 See pages 39 and 4445 See page 43 See pages 3739, 42, and 4446 Pg. See page 42 See page 43 See page 42 Pg. See page 43 See page 43 See page 43
Considerations for Selection of Device Box

Type of conduit system: Should be compatible with conduit or cable system. Boxes are standard with mounting lugs and internal green ground screw. Boxes are available for rigid steel, IMC; rigid aluminum; flexible conduit and cable systems. Number of devices to be used in the box: Standard flush devices require one gang each Depth: Two box types are available standard (FS) and deep (FD), single through five gang. Standard flush wiring devices will normally fit in the FS boxes. Some special purpose devices of higher ratings will require the deeper box (FD). In addition, the need for additional wiring space will require the deep box. Hub configuration and size: The layout of the conduit system dictates the conduit opening locations of the box. The table below indicates the types of conduit and the boxes available. Drilled and tapped openings can be supplied in blank boxes to meet your requirements. Hub size is the same as conduit size. A variety of hub sizes are available. Where the specific hub size is not available, reducing bushings can be used. Materials and finishes: The environment and the use of the box will determine the material and finish needed. Areas of the country with harsh weather and corrosive environments may require different aterials and finishes for added protection. Standard material and finish is Feraloy iron alloy with electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint. Many items are also available in copper-free aluminum. Optional finishes can be obtained if environment warrants. See Options listings.
Options:
Description Corro-free epoxy powder coat Suffix S752
Quick Selector Chart

Box FS Depth 111/16 Gang 1-3 Conduit Type Threaded rigid Standard Material Feraloy iron alloy (some are copper-free aluminum) Feraloy iron alloy Stainless steel Feraloy iron alloy Feraloy iron alloy Standard Finish Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint. Copper-free aluminum natural Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Natural Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint
FD FD-SS FS blank bodies Drilled and tapped FD blank bodies Drilled & tapped
21/2 3.03 115/16 21/2
1-3 1 1-4 1-3 1-5 1-3
Threaded rigid Threaded rigid Threaded rigid Threaded rigid
22
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Condulet Cast Device Boxes with Hubs

Single Gang Shape Selector Chart
2F
Series
Page
Series
Page
Series
Page
2F
FS/FD FS (Double face) FS-SA
see pages 2526 see pages 2528 see pages 2526
FSSA
see pages 2526 FSY (With flange) see pages 2527
FSCA FSR/FDR see pages 2526
see pages 2526 FSX/FDX see pages 2527
FSS FDD
see pages 2526 see pages 2526 FDXC see pages 2527
FSL/FDL
see pages 2526
FSLA/FDLA
see pages 2526
FSC FDC FSC (Double face) FSC-SA
see pages 2526 see pages 2526 see pages 2528 see pages 2526 FSCC/FDCC see pages 2526 FSCD see pages 2527
FSA/FDA
see pages 2526
FSCT/FDCT
see pages 2527
FD Stainless Steel
see pages 3536
FST/FDT
see pages 2527
If the hub configurations required are not available, drilled and tapped openings can be provided in blank boxes per your specifications. See pages 3134 for details.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
23
2F
Condulet Cast Device Boxes with Hubs

Multi-Gang Shape Selector Chart
2F
Series
Page
Series
Page
Series
Page
FSC (Two gang tandem)
see pages 2930
FSD (Two gang)
see pages 2930
FS/FD (Three gang)
see pages 2930
FS/FD (Two gang)
see pages 2930
FSS/FDS (Two gang)
see pages 2930
FSS (Three gang)
see pages 2930
FSC/FDC (Two gang)
see pages 2930
FSE (Two gang)
see pages 2930
If the hub configurations required are not available, drilled and tapped openings can be provided in blank boxes per your specifications. See pages 3134 for details.
24
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Condulet Single Gang Device Boxes Cast Iron or Aluminum

With and Without Mounting Lugs for Threaded Rigid and IMC Conduit
Applications:
Cast device boxes are installed to: Accommodate wiring devices Act as pull boxes for conductors in a conduit system Provide openings to make splices and taps in conductors Provide access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes Connect conduit sections FSY boxes for mounting surface devices on floor or bench (used with single gang covers)
Accessories see pages 3745
2F
Options:
Description Finishes: Corro-free epoxy powder coat - external body Corro-free epoxy powder coat - internal and external Suffix
2F
S752 S753
Size Ranges:
Hubs 1/ 2" to 1"
FS & FD
Die Cast Aluminum
Features:
Internal green ground screw standard on boxes Suitable for use in wet locations when used with gasketed covers Mounting lugs standard on most boxes Tapered threaded hubs (NPT) with integral bushing Available for surface mounting (with mounting lugs) or flush mounting (without mounting lugs) as listed Available as shallow (FS) or deep (FD) configuration. Use FD if device to be enclosed exceeds 15/ 8" in depth Ample wiring room provided in either FS or FD configuration Wide selection of surface or flush covers available in three materials (sheet steel, Feraloy, aluminum) Covers for flush mounting extend to conceal the rough plaster line Available in single gang and multi-gang configurations with hubs, and as blank bodies for drilled and tapped openings
Size Size
1 3
Cat. # FS1 SA FS2 SA
Cat. # FSC1 SA FSC2 SA
Cat. # FS1* FS2* FS3
Cat. # FD1 FD2 FD3
/2 /4 1
/2 3 /4
1
Mounting lugs and ground screw are not offered with standard die cast aluminum box. For sand cast aluminum box with mounting lugs and ground screw, change "SA" in catalog number to "SCA" (Example: FS1 SCA).
Size /2 3 /4
1
Cat. # FSR1 FSR2
Cat. # FDR1 FDR2*

UL Standard: 514 ANSI Standard: C33.84 Fed. Spec.: W-C-5860 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 18
Size /2 3 /4 1
1
Cat. # FSC1* FSC2* FSC3
Cat. # FDC1 FDC2 FDC3
Standard Materials:
Feraloy iron alloy or copper-free aluminum.
Standard Finishes:
Size /2 3 /4
1
Cat. # FSL1 FSL2
Cat. # FDL1 FDL2*
*Available in sand cast copper-free aluminum add suffix SCA to Cat. No. Available in sand cast copper-free aluminum add suffix SA to Cat. No.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
25
2F

2F
FS & FD
Dimensions
In Inches:
Size /2 3 /4
1
Cat. # FSA1 FSA2
Cat. # FDA1 FDA2
Size /2 3 /4 1
1
Cat. # FSS1* FSS2* FSS3
Cat. # FDD1 FDD2* FDD3 Series FS Hub Size 1 /2 3 /4 1 /2 /4 1

1 3
a /8 /8 1
7 7
b 1 /8 17/8 17/8
7
c 1 /16 111/16 111/16

11
d
5 3 7 5 3
/8 /4 /8
Size /2 3 /4
1
Cat. # FSCC1 FSCC2
Cat. # FDCC1 FDCC2
FD
/8 /8 1
7 7
211/16 211/16 211/16
21/2 21/2 21/2
/8 /4 7 /8
Size /2 3 /4
1
Cat. # FSCA1 FSCA2
Size
3
Cat. # FSSA2
/4
Size /2 3 /4
1
Cat. # FSLA1 FSLA2*
Cat. # FDLA1 FDLA2
*Available in copper-free aluminum; add suffix "SA". Mounting lugs not available.
26
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

FS & FD FSY
2F
FDXC
2F
Size /2 3 /4 1
1
Cat. # FSCT1 FSCT2* FSCT3
Cat. # FDCT1 FDCT2* FDCT3
Hub Size
3
Cat. # FDXC219
/4
Description Single face Double face
Hub Size 1 1
Cat. # FSY311 FSY312
Dimensions
In Inches:
Size /2 /4 1
1 3
Cat. # FST1* FST2*
Cat. # FDT1 FDT2 FDT3
FSCT, FSX, FST, FSCD
Size
1 3
Cat. # FSX1 FSX2
Cat. # FDX1 FDX2 FDX3
/2 /4 1
Size /2 3 /4
1
Cat. # FSCD1 FSCD2
*Available in copper-free aluminum; add suffix "SA". 6 Hubs all 3/ 4" pipe tap. Not avaliable with mounting lugs.
FSY
FDXC
FSCT, FSX, FST, FSCD

Series FS Hub Size /2 3 /4 1
1
a /8 7 /8 1
7
b 17/8 17/8 17/8 a 23/4 23/4
c 111/16 111/16 111/16 b
d
5 3 7
/8 /4 /8
FSY
Description Single gang, single face Single gang, double face Hub Size 1 1 115/16 33/8
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
27
2F

With and Without Mounting Lugs
2F
FS
Double Face
Size /2 3 /4
1
Double Face
Cat. # FS152 FS252 Size /2 3 /4
1
Cat. # FSC152 FSC252
Mounting lugs not available.
Dimensions
In Inches:
Double face Series FS Hub Size /2 3 /4

1
a 35/16 311/16
b 31/8 31/2
c 11/4 11/2
28
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Condulet Multi-Gang Device Boxes Cast Iron or Aluminum

FS FSC
2F
FSE
2F
Two Gang
Size
3
Cat. # FSE22
/4
Two Gang Tandem

Size /2 3 /4
1
Two Gang Tandem

Size /2 3 /4
1
*Available in copper-free aluminum; add suffix "SA".
Cat. # FS17 FS27
Cat. # FSC17 FSC27
Use single gang covers only.
FS & FD
Dimensions
In Inches:
Two Gang
Size /2 3 /4 1
1
Cat. # FS12* FS22* FS32
Cat. # FD12 FD22* FD32
FSC & FDC
Two gang tandem
Two gang
Two gang tandem

Series FS Hub Size /2 3 /4
1
a /8 7 /8
7
b /8 3 /4
5
e 11/4 11/2
Two gang Two Gang

Size /2 /4 1
1 3
Cat. # FSC12 FSC222 FSC32
Cat. # FDC12 FDC222* FDC32
Series FS
Hub Size /2 3 /4 1
1 3
a /8 7 /8 1
7
b 21/4 21/4 21/2 21/4 21/4 21/2
c 17/8 17/8 17/8 211/16 211/16 211/16
d 111/16 111/16 111/16 21/2 21/2 21/2
h /8 /4 7 /8
5 3
FD
/2 /4 1
1
/8 /8 1
7 7
/8 /4 7 /8
5 3
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
29
2F
Condulet Multi-Gang Device Boxes Cast Iron or Aluminum

2F
FSS & FDS
FSD
Two Gang
Size
3
Two Gang
Cat. # FDS222 Size
3
Cat. # FSS222
Cat. # FSD212*
/4
/4
*Hubs on 2 hub side are 1/2"
FS & FD
FSS
Three Gang
Size
3
Three Gang
Cat. # FD23 Size
3
Cat. # FS23 FS33
Cat. # FSS23
/4 1
/4
Dimensions
In Inches:
Three gang
Series FS Two gang with mounting lugs Three gang FD Hub Size /4 1
3 3
a
7
c 17/8 17/8 211/16
d 111/16 111/16 21/2
/8 1 /8
/4
30
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Condulet Blank Device Boxes - Cast Iron

Blank Bodies With Mounting Lugs for Drilling and Tapping Single Gang, Multi-Gang, Tandem
Applications:
Blank cast device boxes are used: Where several wiring devices are to be grouped together To assemble special combinations of wiring devices Where special arrangements of conduit hubs or entrances are required
2F
2F
FS062, FD062 two gang
FS019, FD019 single gang
Features:
Available in shallow (FS) or deep (FD) configurations. FS/FD bodies have thick walls for drilling and tapping conduit entrances. Internal green ground screw standard on boxes. Available in single, two, three, four and five gang and two gang tandem bodies. Cast mounting lugs at diagonally opposite corners. For a wide selection of standard surface or flush covers see pages 3745. FS094, FD094 four gang FS029, FD029 two gang FS063, FD063 three gang

UL Standard: 514A CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 18 FS039, FD039 three gang FS097, FD097 two gang tandem
Standard Materials:
Feraloy iron alloy
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint FD04 four gang
Ordering Information:
Description Single gang Two gang Three gang Four gang Five gang Two gang (takes one two gang cover) FD05 five gang Three gang (takes one three gang cover) Four gang (takes one four gang cover) Two gang tandem FS062 FS063 FS094 FS097 Shallow Deep Cat. # Cat. # FS019 FS029 FS039 FD019* FD029* FD039* FD04 FD05 FD062 FD063 FD094 FD097
*Available in copper-free aluminum. To order add suffix SA to Cat. No.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
31
2F
Condulet Blank Device Boxes - Cast Iron

Blank Bodies for Drilling and Tapping Ordering Information
2F
To order one of the blank bodies with drilled and tapped holes see page 31, proceed as follows: Step 1 Select the required box. Step 2 Select the arrangement that meets the requirements from Table 1. Step 3 Determine the maximum size and spacing of conduit openings from Table 2. Step 4 Substitute the appropriate symbol from Table 4 for each conduit entrance, using 0 (zero) for those locations on arrangement where an entrance is not required. Example: Step 1 box required FS062 Step 2 arrangement 1 Step 3 conduit entrances 1/2" at "a", none at "b"; 1" at "c" and "d"; none at "e" and "f". Step 4 symbols are substituted and written in alphabetical order starting with location "a". For this example A0CC00. Complete Cat. No. is made up of three parts: Part 1 box number; Part 2 arrangement number; Part 3 symbols for conduit entrances. For this example: FS062-1-A0CC00.
Table 1/Drilling and Tapping Arrangements*

Two, Three, Four and Five Gang
*Drilling and tapping arrangements other than those in Table 1 are available. Consult Cooper Crouse-Hinds. If only one conduit entry is specified or permitted (see Table 2) on a side wall that conduit entry will be centered on the wall.
Single Gang Only (FS or FD019)
Two Gang Tandem (FS or FD097)
32
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Condulet Cast Device Boxes

Blank Bodies for Drilling and Tapping Single-Gang, Multi-Gang, Tandem
2F
2F
Table 2/Maximum Number, Size and Spacing of Conduit Openings

Cat. # FS019 FD019* FS029 FD029* FS039 FD039* FD04 FD05 FS062 FD062 FS063 FD063 FS094 FD094 FS097 FD097 Maximum Conduit Opening Size Top and Bottom 1 2 3 4 5 1 11/2 1 11/2 1 11/2 11/2 11/2 1 11/2 1 11/2 1 11/2 1 11/2 Sides 1 1 11/2 1 11/2 1 11/2 11/2 11/2 1 11/2 1 11/2 1 11/2 1 11/2 2 Back 2 Spacings s v w x y z
1 11/2 1 11/2 11/2 11/2 1 11/4 1 11/4 1 11/2 11/2 11/2
1 1 1 11/2 11/2 11/2 3 /4 3 /4 1 1 1 11/2
/4 /4 1 11/2 11/2 11/2

3 3
1 1 11/2
/4 /4 1 1
3 3
3 3
/4 /4
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11/2
1 1 1 11/4 1 11/4 1 1 11/2 11/2
1 1
13/16 13/16 11/4 1 11/4 1 11/4 11/8 15/16 15/16
17/8 17/8 33/4 33/4 17/8 33/4 29 /32 1 113/16 113/16 113/16 11/2 3 /4 3 /4
17/8 17/8 33/4 33/4 33/4 33/4 15/8 13/8 113/16 2 113/16 25/8
15/16 15/16 21/2 21/2 33/4 33/4 15/8 17/16 113/16 113/16
17/8 17/8 33/4
15/8 15/8
Table 3/Distance From Mounting Surface to Centerline of Conduit Opening ("u")

Cat. # FS019 FD019* FS029 FD029* FS039 FD039* FD04 FD05 FS062 FD062 FS063 FD063 FS094 FD094 FS097 FD097 u /32 13/8 29 /32 13/8 31 /32 13/8 19/16 19/16 15/32 15/8 15/32 15/8 15/32 19/16 15/32 19/16
29
Table 4/Symbols for Openings

Conduit Size 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 None Symbol A B C E F 0
*Available in copper-free aluminum. To order add suffix SA to Cat. No.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
33
2F
Condulet Cast Device Boxes

Blank Bodies for Drilling and Tapping Single-Gang, Multi-Gang, Tandem Dimensions (In Inches)
2F
Cat. # FS/FD019 FS/FD029 FS/FD039 FD04 FD05
a 31/4 7 103/4 143/8 181/8
b 31/4 7 103/4 15 183/4
FS/FD062 Cat. # FS062 FD062 a 27/8 215/16 b c d 23/16 31/16 e f Cat. # FS094 FD094 a
FS/FD094 b 145/64 21/2
53/4 5 57/8 51/16
11/2 43/8 21/2 45/16
23/16 3
Cat. # FS063 FD063 34
a 313/16 37/8
FS/FD063 b c d 75/8 67/8 71/4 71/16 23/16 31/32
FS/FD097 e f Cat. # FS097 FD097

CAN: 1-800-265-0502
a 21/32 227/32
b 11/2 25/16
11/2 61/4 21/2 63/16
US: 1-866-764-5454
Condulet Stainless Steel Conduit Device Boxes, Covers and Gaskets
2F
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Condulet Stainless Steel Device Boxes deliver power where you need it, saving you time and money throughout the life of your facility. Superior resistance to corrosion and heat, combined with unmatched strength, make stainless steel Condulet bodies and boxes a longterm solution for even the most extreme environments.
2F
Applications:
Cast device boxes are installed in conduit systems to: Accommodate wiring devices Act as pull boxes for conductors in a conduit system Provide openings to make splices and taps in conductors Provide access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes Connect conduit systems
Features:
Self-healing properties of stainless steel fittings help reduce the penetration of rust/corrosion and eliminate damage to the fitting Stainless steel fittings retain their strength in extreme heat and extreme cold conditions Fitting surface is easy to maintain and keep clean Easy cleaning capabilities make these fittings perfect for food processing and other hygienic areas where wash downs are common Superior strength and durability greatly reduce replacement of fittings - this will lower your total cost of ownership and increase your return on investment Stainless steel fittings do not require harsh environment-damaging cleaners to keep them looking like new Internal green grounding screw - standard Tapered threads for protection of wire insulation Wide selection of covers available Single or double conduit entry Ample wiring room provided for easy installations
Dimension
A B C D E F Length of box Overall length (including hubs) Width of box Overall width (including hubs) Height of box Overall height (including hubs)

Standard Materials:
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
35
2F

The Ultimate in Corrosion Resistance and Durability
2F
Ordering Information FDC Device Body

Catalog Number FDC2SS Trade Size " A 4.63 B 6.19 C 2.94 D 2.94 E 3.03 F 3.03
FDS Device Body

Catalog Number FDS2SS Trade Size " A 4.63 B 5.41 C 2.94 D 2.94 E 3.03 F 3.03
FDA Device Body

Catalog Number FDA2SS Trade Size " A 4.63 B 4.63 C 2.94 D 2.94 E 3.03 F 3.80
FDX Device Body

Catalog Number FDX2SS Trade Size " A 4.63 B 6.19 C 2.94 D 4.50 E 3.03 F 3.03
Ordering Information - Device Box Cover and Gasket Blank Cover

Catalog Number DS7000BC Catalog Number DS7000BF
Blank Formed Cover
Switch Formed Cover

Catalog Number DS7000SF
Receptacle Formed Cover

Catalog Number DS7000RF
36
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Covers for Cast Iron or Aluminum Device Boxes WLRS and WLG Wet Location Covers
For NEMA Configuration Receptacle Interiors and GFCI Receptacles
Applications:
WLRS, WLRD and WLGF series wiring device covers are designed to meet the total NEC Code requirements for wet locations. WLRS, WLRD and WLGF series covers are suitable for use in wet and damp locations: Wherever portable equipment is required As general purpose utility receptacle covers For industrial, commercial or residential use In areas where electrical requirements do not exceed medium duty ratings To mount FS and FD single-gang or multi-gang boxes having individual cover openings (see Sect. 2F for listings) To mount on most flush device boxes (see Accessories)
2F
Standard Materials:
WLRS, WLRD and WLGF face plate and cover die cast copper-free aluminum Cover hinge spring stainless steel Cover screws corrosion resistant metal Gasket ethylene propylene rubber (EPDM)
2F
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum aluminum lacquer
Electrical Rating Ranges:

15 amperes; 125, 250, or 277 volts 20 and 30 amperes; 125, 250, 277, 480, 600, 125 / 250, 208 / 120, 480 / 277 or 600 / 347 volts Typical installation
Accessories:
Flush mounting adapter WLRA-1 required for mounting on device boxes. (Order separately)
Features:
WLRS, WLRD and WLGF covers:: Self-closing spring door assures protection of wiring device at all times, in wet and damp locations One piece EPDM gasket provides environmental protection of wiring device at all times EPDM gasketing material offers excellent resistance to ozone, weather and temperature extremes of 50F to 260F Die cast, copper-free aluminum construction with aluminum lacquer finish provides maximum corrosion resistance Positive ground path ensured for all exposed metal parts NEMA configuration receptacle interiors: Comply with NEMA Standards WD-1 and WD-5 Grounded through an extra contact in all types except 3-phase applications; self grounded in duplex variety Back and side wired Offered in single and duplex configurations for use with standard plugs Specification grade
Spring Door Covers with Gasket*

For NEMA Configuration Round Receptacles
Single cover Cat. # WLRS1 WLRS2

*Patent Number 4,058,358 Horizontal mount only.
Diameter 13/8" 11/2"
Duplex cover Cat. # WLRD1
Diameter 13/8"

For GFCI Receptacles in Wet Locations

ANSI/UL Standard 514A NECode 410-57 OSHA Standards, Subpart "S" NEMA Standards WD-1, 1974 (Straight Blade) and WD-5, 1972 (Locking Type) Horizontal Mount for flush device boxes Cat. # WLGF Horizontal Mount for FS and FD device boxes Cat. # WLGF FS Vertical Mount for FS and FD device boxes Cat. # WLGF FSV
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
37
2F
Covers for Cast Iron or Aluminum Device Boxes WLRS and WLG Wet Location Covers
For NEMA Configuration Receptacle Interiors and GFCI Receptacles
Ordering Information - Covers with and without NEMA Configuration Receptacles

For Non-Locking Blade Plugs
NEMA Configuration 5-15R 6-15R 5-20R 6-20R Complete Cover with Receptacle Assy. Cat. # WLRS 5 15 WLRS 6 15 WLRS 5 20 WLRS 6 20 Complete Cover with Receptacle Assy. Cat. # WLRD 5 15 WLRD 6 15 WLRD 5 20 WLRD 6 20 Spring Door Cover & Gasket Only Cat. #* WLRS1 WLRS1 WLRS1 WLRS1 Spring Door Cover & Gasket Only Cat. #* WLRD1 WLRD1 WLRD1 WLRD1
2F
Dimensions
In Inches:
Type Volts Single Device 2-Pole 125V 3-Wire Grounding 250V 15 Amp 2-Pole 3-Wire Grounding 20 Amp 125V 250V
Type Volts Duplex Device 2-Pole 125V 3-Wire Grounding 250V 15 Amp 2-Pole 3-Wire Grounding 20 Amp 125V 250V
NEMA Configuration 5-15R 6-15R 5-20R 6-20R
WLGF
Ordering Information - Covers with and without NEMA Configuration Receptacles

For Locking Blade Plugs
NEMA Configuration L5-15R L6-15R L5-20R L6-20R Complete Cover with Receptacle Assy. Cat. # Spring Door Cover & Gasket Only Cat. #* WLGF-FS & WLGF-FSV WLRS L5 15 WLRS1 WLRS L6 15 WLRS1 WLRS L5 20 WLRS2 WLRS L6 20 WLRS2 Complete Cover with Receptacle Assy. Cat. # Spring Door Cover & Gasket Only Cat. #*
Type Volts Single Device 2-Pole 125V 3-Wire Grounding 250V 15 Amp 2-Pole 3-Wire Grounding 20 Amp 125V 250V
Type Volts Duplex Device 2-Pole 3-Wire 125V Grounding 15 Amp
NEMA Configuration
L5-15R
WLRD L5 15 WLRD1
*Must be used with a wet locations rated wiring device.
38
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Single Gang
2F
2F
For square handle general use snap or toggle switches unguarded. Description Surface Surface Material Cat. #
Blank cover for enclosing splices and taps where device not used. Description Surface Flush Material Sheet aluminum Sheet steel Cat. # DS100 DSS100
For GFI receptacles. Description Surface Material Sheet steel Cat. # DS23 GFI
Sheet steel DS32 Sheet aluminum DS32 SA
For flush plug receptacle requiring 15/8" opening diameter. Blank cover with gasket for enclosing splices and taps where device not used. Description Surface or Flush Material Cast aluminum Cat. # DS100G Description Surface Material Sheet steel Cat. # DS35 For square handle general use snap or toggle switches guarded. Description Surface or flush Surface Material Feraloy iron alloy with gasket
Cat. # DS32G DS52
Sheet steel
For duplex convenience receptacles. Description Surface Surface Flush Material Cat. # Sheet steel DS23 Sheet aluminum DS23 SA Sheet steel DSS23 Adapter plate for mounting WLRS/ WLRD covers to flush device boxes. Description Flush Device Adapter Cat. # WLRA1
DS21
DS21G
For standard and 3-pole, 2-wire grounding type round flush receptacles. Opening diameter 17/16". Description Surface Surface Surface or flush Material Sheet steel Sheet aluminum Feraloy iron alloy with gasket Cat. # DS21 DS21 SA DS21G
Also can be used to mount all covers with four corner screws listed see page 3743 to flush device boxes. For standard and 3-pole, 2-wire grounding type duplex convenience receptacles. Gasket included. Description Material Cat. # Surface or flush
www.crouse-hinds.com *See page 42 and see this page for receptacle specifications and listings of complete receptacle/cover combinations. Must be used with a wet locations rated wiring device.
Feraloy iron alloy

US: 1-866-764-5454
DS23G
CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds
39
2F

Single Gang - Raintight Covers (Gasket Included)
2F
For general use snap switches. Includes gasket. Description For standard ON-OFF operation Material Copper-free aluminum Cat. # DS181
For general use snap switches. Includes gasket. Description For standard ON-OFF operation. With hole for lock Material Die cast aluminum Cat. #
For general use snap switches. Includes gasket. Description For standard operation. Marked ON-OFF handle Material Cast aluminum Cat. #
DS185
DS128
40
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Single Gang - Switches and Motor Control Push Button
Raintight
2F
2F
For manual motor starting switches. Fits FS and FD boxes. Takes Westinghouse switches MST01 (1-pole) and MST02 (2-pole). Includes gasket. Description For standard ON-OFF operation Material Feraloy iron alloy Cat. # DS199
Furnished with buttons for operating motor control push button switches. Includes gasket. Description Button (normally open) marked START Button (normally closed) marked STOP Button (normally open) marked START and button (normally closed) marked STOP Description Two push button No. 2 Push Buttons No. Color Material 1 1 1 1 Green Red Green Red Feraloy iron alloy Feraloy iron alloy Feraloy iron alloy Cat. # DS171F DS171G DS171
Color Black
Material Feraloy iron alloy
Cat. # DS171J
If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below:
HAND EMER. REVERSE LGT. ON
CLOSE DOWN STOP
OFF JOG TRIP
AUTO. FORWARD OPEN
UP START ON
RUN RESET TEST
Heavy duty motor control push button switch No. of Buttons 1 2
Normal Positions 1 circuit universal 2 circuits universal
Cat. # ED11 ED12
Two universal contact blocks, must be wired as two circuits, with one normally open and one normally closed.
DS Covers use the switches shown in the list below.

Cover DS171 DS171G DS265 Takes Switch ED12 ED11 ED11 Cover DS171F DS266 Takes Switch ED11 ED12
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
41
2F

Single Gang - DS Receptacles and WP Plugs
Weatherproof
2F
Applications:
WP plugs and DS receptacles are used: Wherever dust, dirt, moisture and corrosion are a problem Outdoors or in locations where frequent washdowns occur, as in dairies and food processing plants
Features:
DS receptacle housings are used: With FS and FD cast device boxes, either surface mounted or installed flush in a wall With single gang, two gang tandem and multiple gang boxes having individual cover openings A threaded cap which effectively seals housing when not in use WP plugs include: A molded Neoprene hood with integral sleeve to seal the cord entrance An aluminum ring which clamps the hood to receptacle housing face, to complete watertight seal when plug is in use DS Receptacle housings WP Plugs CC Replacement receptacle
Grounding Type Receptacles

For Plugs with U shaped or Round Grounding Contacts
Rating Cover With Recept. Cat. # Diagram Style 2-wire, 3-pole
NEMA: 5-15R
Plug Cat. # WP820
Diagram
Repl. Recept. Cord Dia. Cat. # .500 to .625 CC55
15 amps DS96* 125 volts 20 amps DS222 125 volts

NEMA: 5-20R
NEMA: 5-15P
2-wire, 3-pole 2-wire, 3-pole

NEMA: 6-20R
WP832
NEMA: 5-20P
.500 to .625 .500 to .625

NEMA: 6-20P
CC71
20 amps DS290 250 volts

Third pole grounded. *Compliance
WP930
CC90

UL Standards: 498; 514A NEMA/EEMAC: WD-1; WD-5 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 42*
*Compliance.
For listing of typical FS cast devices boxes, see pages 2324.
Standard Materials:
Receptacle housings: body Feraloy iron alloy cap copper-free aluminum Plug exteriors: hood Neoprene; fastening ring copper-free aluminum
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Copper-free aluminum natural Neoprene natural (black or yellow)

15 amperes, 125 volts 20 amperes, 125, 250 volts
42
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Single Gang - Pilot Light Covers, Extensions and Adapters
2F
2F
Pilot light (with transformer), FD only For pilot light units (furnished with jewels) Description Surface Material Jewel Color Cat. # DS24 Circuit Lamp Voltage Base 440 Candelabra FS flush mounting adapter (can be used with multi-gang bodies having individual cover openings. Furnished with gasket and screws) Mtg. Style Wall Cat. # FS031
Watts Cat. # 6 C333
Sheet steel Red
Transformer 5060 cycle, 440 / 110 volts.
For pilot light units (furnished with jewel and gasket). Description Surface or flush Jewel Material Color Cat. # Feraloy Red iron alloy DS24G
EXF Extensions (takes covers and flush rectangular wiring devices, or plug receptacles with housings) Ext. Depth 1" 21/2" Cat. # EXF11 EXF21
Gaskets for use between device boxes and covers. Material Neoprene Cat. # GASK91
Not recommended as watertight.
Pilot light unit (without transformer) Circuit Lamp Voltage Base 110 Candelabra Watts Cat. # 6 C3310
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
43
2F

Two Gang
2F
For flush general use snap switches with square handles Material Sheet steel Cat. # S32232
For duplex convenience receptacles, standard and 2-wire, 3-pole grounding Description Surface Material Sheet steel Cat. # S232
Blank. Feraloy iron alloy with gasket Description Surface Surface or flush Surface or flush Material Sheet steel Feraloy iron alloy Cat. # S1002 S1002G
Copper-free S1002G SA aluminum
For flush general use snap switches with square handles Description For round plug flush receptacles. Surface Material Cat. #
For GFI receptacles Description Surface Material Sheet steel Cat. # S232 GFI For flush general use snap switches with square handles Description Surface Material Sheet steel Cat. # S322
Sheet steel S32212
For round flush receptacles, duplex convenience receptacles, standard and 2-wire, 3-pole grounding For standard and 2-wire, 3-pole grounding Description For round plug flush receptacles. Surface Material Cat. # Description Surface Material Sheet steel Cat. # S21232 For flush general use snap switches with square handles Description Surface or flush Material Feraloy iron alloy Cat. # S322G
Sheet steel S212
For 20 amp., 250 volt receptacles Description 2-pole, Surface Material Sheet steel Cat. # S612
44
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Two Gang
2F
2F
For flush general use snap switches with square handles Cat. # S1003 S1003G Description Surface, four gang Material Cat. # Sheet steel S324
Blank with gasket Description Surface Surface or flush Surface or flush

*Includes gasket
With operating mechanism and gasket Description Two gang. For operation of general use snap switches. Surface or flush Material
Material Sheet steel Feraloy iron alloy
For FS094 and FD094 boxes.
Cat. #
Feraloy DS1282 iron alloy
Copper-free S1003G SA aluminum
Gasket for use between device box and cover For flush general use snap switches with square handles With operating mechanism and gasket Description Three gang with gasket. For external operation of general use snap switches. Surface or flush. Material Cat. # Description Surface, three gang Material Cat. # Sheet steel S323 Description Two gang Three gang Four gang Material Rubber Rubber Rubber Cat. # GASK434 GASK460 GASK461
Feraloy DS1283 iron alloy
Blank with gasket Description Surface or flush Material Feraloy iron alloy Cat. # S1004G
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
45
2F
FSE Receptacle and Breaker Assemblies
2F
Applications:
FSE series assemblies are used in outdoor areas for supplying power in remote locations, particularly parking lots, automobile engine block heaters, marinas, drive-in theaters, trailer camps, etc.
Features:
Compact design. Suitable for a variety of combinations. U ground duplex receptacle. Circuit breaker protection. Breakers cannot be manually tripped. FSE 6121 FSE 612
Cat. # Description FSE612 Double face receptacle body only FSE6121 Fitting complete with 1-15 amp. duplex receptacle and blank cover. FSE6122 Fitting complete with 2-15 amp. duplex receptacles. FSE61212 Fitting complete with 1-15 amp. duplex receptacle and two 1- pole Minibreakers FSE61211 Fitting complete with 1-15 amp. duplex receptacle and one 1- pole Minibreaker.
Other combinations available on request

CSA Standard C22.2 No. 18
Standard Materials:
Body and cover copper-free aluminum
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum natural
Electrical Ratings:
15A 120V
Size:
2" integral hub for pole mounting.
46
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Condulet Conduit Bodies and Outlet Boxes Hazardous
3F
3F
Description
Application/Selection Lubricants
HTL STL
Page No.
see page 48 see page 63 see page 63
Conduit Bodies & Outlet Boxes Cylindrical

EKC
see page 60 see page 62 see page 61 see page 61 see page 59 see page 57 see page 58 see pages 5051 see page 54 see page 55 see page 56 see page 53
90 Elbow
FE LBH LBY
Rectangular
OE
Round
C30 and C31 for IEC Applications CPS GUA EAB EAB ATEX EAJ GUR Universal
Tees Short Radius

ET FT
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
47
3F

3F
Applications:
Hazardous area conduit bodies and outlet boxes are installed in rigid conduit systems in Class I and II hazardous locations to: Protect conductors Act as pull and splice boxes Connect lengths of conduit Change conduit direction Provide access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes Act as mounting outlets for fixtures (with appropriate covers) Act as sealing fittings (with appropriate covers)

Determine the area classification per National Electrical Code Hazardous Area Groups. Based on this classification, select the product families that are acceptable for use in the particular location.: Establish functional physical requirements these will help to determine box size, cover, shape and mounting for the particular installation. Each product family has features suitable for specific functions: i.e., boxes used as mountings for lighting fixtures are generally of a small size, and provided with mounting lugs when required to support lighting fixtures. Boxes used for wire pulling should generally be larger to provide room for easy pulling. Boxes used to splice and/or tap conductors should be large enough to permit ease of work and sufficient room for the required size and number of conductors. Hub size and configuration dependent on the conduit system configuration and the conduit size used. Material and finish determine from environmental conditions (corrosive fumes, weather, buried in concrete, etc.)
Options and Accessories:

Flat blank covers (surface and flanged flush), fixture support and sealing covers and extensions are available. See specific product listing for details. Lubricant (STL and HTL) are available to make joints raintight, provide for easy cover removal and to lubricate shafts over a wide temperature range. Corro-free epoxy powder coat information available on request.

NEC Class I & II Groups C, D E, F, G A, B, C, D E, F, G Ex II 2 G EEx d IIC T6 Ex II 2 D IP66 T 85C A, B, C, D E, F, G A, B, C, D E, F, G C, D E, F, G C, D E, F, G C, D E, F, G Flameproof, Exd, IIB, IP67, Zone 1 Combustible Dust Zone 21 & 22 C, D E, F, G B, C, D E, F, G Flameproof, Exd, IIB, IP67, Zone 1 Combustible Dust Zone 21 & 22 C, D E, F, G C, D E, F, G II 2 G EEx d IIC T5 PTB 05 ATEX 1052 IEC Certifications Normal Function Mtg. ltg. fixt., taps, pulling, splicing Pulling, splicing, taps Pulling, splicing, taps Pulling, splicing, taps Pulling, splicing, taps Fixt. support, pulling, splicing Pulling Stub up Stub up Cover Opening Diameter 25 33/16 & 5 98mm (C30) 130mm (C31) 3 3 /4
3
Series GUA EAJ C30 / C31 EAB EAB ATEX CPS OE ET FT
Hub Size 1 /2-2

1 1
Cover Type Threaded Threaded Threaded Threaded Threaded Ground joint Ground joint Threaded
/2-2 /2-1 /2-1 /2-1 /2 & 3/4 /2-1 /2-1
31/2
1 1
20mm 25mm
LBY LBH FE
Pulling Pulling Pulling
1 1
/2 11/4 /2-4
Threaded Ground joint Threaded
20mm 25mm
EKC GUR
Pulling Pulling, splicing
1 1
/2-3 /2-1
Ground joint Threaded
See following table for standard hub configuration.
48
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Standard Shape and Hub Selector
Shape
Series Page
3F
Hub Style
3F
GUA
GUAB
GUAC
GUAD
GUAL
GUAM
GUAN
GUAT
GUAW
GUAX
GUA
see pages 5052
EABC EAB see page 54
EABL
EABT
EABX
EABY
C30 / C31
see page 57
C30 / C31
C30 / C31
EAJB EAJ see page 56
EAJC
EAJD
EAJL
EAJT
EAJX
CPS
see page 58
CPS
GUR GUR see page 53
OELB OE see page 59
OEC
OELL
OELR
OET
The fittings below are available only in the configurations shown.
LBH
See page 61
LBY
See page 61
FE
See page 62 EKC
See page 60
ET
See page 61
FT
See page 62
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
49
3F

GUA Series
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG GUAB
Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations
3F
Applications:
GUA series conduit outlet boxes are installed within hazardous area conduit systems to: Protect conductors in threaded rigid conduit Act as pull and splice boxes Connect lengths of conduit Change conduit direction Provide access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes Act as mounting outlets for fixtures (with appropriate covers) Act as sealing fittings (with appropriate covers)
Options:
Description Suffix Bodies copper-free aluminum SA* Covers Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint WOD GUA Form 6 (with 3" cover opening) are available with optional cover with viewing window. VW Corro-free epoxy powder coat S752 To order box less cover add "0" to end of catalog number ie.GUAT260.
When assembled with sealing type cover, GUA series outlet boxes provide adequate sealing for 40% fill in hazardous areas Class I, Groups C, D; Class II, Groups E, F, G; and Class III. Seals can be made in either horizontal or vertical positions. Use Chico "A" sealing compound or Chico SpeedSeal only. Conductor splices or connections must not be made in enclosures where sealing compound is to be used per NEC.
Hub Size /2 3 /4 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2

1
Cover Opening Dia. 2 2 3 3 3 35/8 5 5
Cat. # GUAB14 GUAB24 GUAB16* GUAB26* GUAB36* GUAB47 GUAB59 GUAB69
Features:
GUA conduit boxes have: Neoprene "O" ring standard to meet NEMA 4 requirements Cast ears on cover to permit easy removal and tightening Four standard mounting pads except for boxes with bottom hubs Threaded cover openings Ten different hub arrangements Taper threaded hubs to provide grounding continuity Smooth integral hub bushing protects conductor insulation when pulling Surface covers furnished with boxes Sealing covers, dome covers, and fixture hanger covers are available Cover threads are 12 pitch
GUAD
GUA
Cover Opening Dia. 2 2 3 3 3 5
Hub Size Cover Opening Dia. 2 2 3 3 3 35/8 5 /2 3 /4 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4

1
Cat. # GUAD14 GUAD24 GUAD16 GUAD26 GUAD36 GUAD49
Hub Size /2 3 /4 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2

1
Cat. # GUA14 GUA24 GUA16 GUA26* GUA36 GUA47 GUA59
Dimensions
In Inches:

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III UL Standard: 886 ANSI Standard: C33.27 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30 NEMA/EEMAC 3, 4
GUAC
GUAB Only Hub Size /2 /4 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/4 11/2 2

1 3
All others
Cover Opening Dia. 2 2 3 3 3 35/8 5 5 5
Cat. # GUAC14 GUAC24 GUAC16* GUAC26* GUAC36* GUAC47 GUAC49 GUAC59 GUAC69
GUA, GUAD, GUAM, GUAW, GUAX

Cat. # 14 24 16 26 36 37 47 49 59 69 a 21/2 21/2 31/2 31/2 31/2 41/4 41/4 53/4 53/4 53/4 b 113/16 2 2 2 25/16 25/16 211/16 313/16 313/16 41/16 c 13/4 2 17/8 17/8 23/16 23/8 23/4 33/4 33/4 4 d /8 /4 5 /8 3 /4 7 /8 7 /8 13/32 13/32 19/32 19/16
5 3
Standard Materials:
Bodies Feraloy iron alloy Covers Copper-free aluminum
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Aluminum natural
Size Ranges:
Hub 1/2" to 2" Cover opening 2" to 5" dia. 50
Available in copper-free aluminum, add suffix -SA. *Available in copper-free aluminum, add suffix -SA. GUA outlet boxes marked with * when ordered with suffix -SA are listed for Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C and D, Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G and Class III. Covers have 16 pitch threads. Replacement cover is a GUA06-GB. US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Length of Hub Hub Size 1 /2 - 3/4 1 11/4 11/2 2
Dimension "e" Length

7 /8 1 11/16

GUA Series
GUAL
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG GUAN
3F
GUAT
3F
Hub Size /2 3 /4 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/4 11/2 2

1
Cover Opening Dia. 2 2 3 3 3 35/8 5 5 5
Cat. # GUAL14 GUAL24 GUAL16* GUAL26* GUAL36* GUAL47 GUAL49 GUAL59 GUAL69
Hub Size /2 3 /4 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2

1
Cover Opening Dia. 2 2 3 3 3 35/8 5 5
Cat. # GUAN14 GUAN24 GUAN16 GUAN26 GUAN36 GUAN47 GUAN59 GUAN69
Hub Size /2 3 /4 1 /2 3 /4 1 1 11/4 11/4 11/2 2

1
Cover Opening Dia. 2 2 3 3 3 35/8 35/8 5 5 5
Cat. # GUAT14 GUAT24 GUAT16* GUAT26* GUAT36* GUAT37 GUAT47 GUAT49 GUAT59 GUAT69
GUAX
GUAM
GUAW
Hub Size /2 3 /4 1 /2 3 /4 1 1 11/4 11/4 11/2 2

1
Cover Opening Dia. 2 2 3 3 3 35/8 35/8 5 5 5
Cat. # GUAX14 GUAX24 GUAX16* GUAX26* GUAX36* GUAX37 GUAX47 GUAX49 GUAX59 GUAX69
Hub Size /2 3 /4 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 2

1
Cover Opening Dia. 2 2 3 3 3 35/8 5
Cat. # GUAM14 GUAM24 GUAM16 GUAM26 GUAM36 GUAM47 GUAM69
Hub Size /2 3 /4 1 /2 3 /4
1
Cover Opening Dia. 2 2 3 3
Cat. # GUAW14 GUAW24 GUAW16 GUAL26*
Dimensions
GUAC, GUAT
Cat. # 14 24 16 26 36 37 47 49 59 69 a 2 /2 21/2 31/2 31/2 31/2 41/4 41/4 53/4 53/4 53/4
1
GUAN
b 2 /4 2 2 2 25/16 25/16 211/16 313/16 313/16 41/16
1
GUAB, GUAL
a 2 /2 21/2 31/2 31/2 31/2 41/4 53/4 53/4
1
c 2 /16 2 17/8 17/8 23/16 23/8 23/4 33/4 33/4 4

3
d /8 /4 /8 3 /4 7 /8 7 /8 13/32 15/32 19/32 19/16

5 3 5
Cat. # 14 24 16 26 36 47 59 69
b 2 /8 25/16 2 2 25/16 211/16 41/16 41/16

1
c 2 /16 21/4 17/8 17/8 23/8 23/4 4 4

1
d /8 /4 /4 3 /4 7 /8 13/32 19/32 19/16

5 3 3
Cat. # 14 24 16 26 36 47 49 59 69
a 2 /2 21/2 31/2 31/2 31/2 41/4 53/4 53/4 53/4

1
b 2 /4 21/2 2 2 25/16 211/16 313/16 313/16 41/16

1
c 2 /16 27/16 17/8 17/8 23/16 23/4 33/4 33/4 4

3
d /8 /4 /8 3 /4 7 /8 13/32 15/32 19/32 19/16

5 3 5
Available in copper-free aluminum, add suffix -SA. *Available in copper-free aluminum, add suffix -SA. GUA outlet boxes marked with * when ordered with suffix -SA are listed for Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C and D, Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G and Class III. Covers have 16 pitch threads. Replacement cover is a GUA06-GB.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
51
3F
Covers and Accessories

For GUA Condulet Conduit Outlet Boxes
3F
Applications:
Threaded covers, canopies and extensions are used: To provide a seal in hazardous areas (sealing cover). See note below. To mount pendant lighting fixtures such as EVA listed in lighting section (fixture canopy) To mount EVA pendant lighting fixtures on cover which is then screwed into outlet box without twisting conductors (union hub cover) To mount pendant lighting fixtures on cover which is then screwed into outlet box as above, for wiring after fixture stem is installed (nipple cover) To provide means of increasing outlet box depth (threaded extension)
GUA Threaded Extension
Sealing Cover
Cover Opening Dia. 3 GUA Cover Opening 2" 3" 35/8" 5"
Ext. Depth 11/4
Cat. # GUA0631
Cover Opening Dia. 2 3 3 35/8 5
Thread Pitch 12 12 16 12 12
Cat. # GUA041 GUA062 GUA062 GB* GUA072 GUA092
Replacement O-Ring Gasket Cat. # GASK1713 GASK1151 GASK1589 GASK925
Nipple Cover
Features:
Surface covers are supplied with GUA boxes Sealing cover has removable plug for filling enclosure with sealing compound after installation. Sealing cover meets 40% fill requirement of the NEC. See note below. Fixture canopy has a threaded cover in its side to provide access for making splices or taps. Fixture with its conduit stem and canopy can be assembled and wired before installation and conductors can be spliced in canopy after it has been screwed into the body Cover threads are 12 pitch.
Surface Cover
Cover Opening Dia. Cover Opening Dia. 2 3 3 35/8 5 3 Thread Pitch 12 12 16 12 12 Cat. # GUA04 GUA06 GUA06 GB* GUA07 GUA09 Fixt. Stem Size
3
Thread Pitch 12
Cat. # GUA0672
/4
Fixture Cover
Union Hub Type
Standard Materials:
Surface and dome covers, union hub covers, nipple covers copper-free aluminum Sealing covers, fixture canopies, threaded extensions Feraloy iron alloy
Dome Cover
Cover Opening Dia. 3 Fixt. Stem Size
3
Thread Pitch 12
Cat. # GUA0672
/4
Standard Finishes:
Aluminum natural Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Cover Opening Dia. 2 3 35/8 35/8 5 5 Ext. Depth 2 2 2 4 4 10 Thread Pitch 12 12 12 12 12 12
Fixture Canopy
Options:
Description Corro-free epoxy powder coat To order an iron surface cover Suffix S752 WOD
Cat. # GUA047 GUA067 GUA077 GUA0716 GUA514 GUA5110
Size Ranges:
Fixture stems 3/4" Body openings 2" to 5"
Note: Depth of sealing compound in body must satisfy requirements of NEC section 501-5 (C-3). Splices and taps in sealing fittings are prohibited by NEC.
Cover Opening Dia. 3
Fixt. Stem Size

3
Thread Pitch 12
Cat. # GUA068
/4
Also used with GUP bodies see page 717 or GU and GUE bodies see page 686. *GUA covers with 16 pitch threads are used with GUA bodies ordered with -SA suffix identified with * symbol see pages 5051.
52
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

GUR Series
Applications:
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 4
3F
3F
GUR conduit outlet boxes are installed within hazardous areas: To protect conductors in threaded rigid conduit To act as pull and splice boxes To connect lengths of conduit To provide access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes To change conduit direction Where space is limited, such as underneath gasoline pumps
Features:
GUR outlet boxes feature: Neoprene O-ring standard in cover to meet NEMA 4/UL Type 4 requirements Internal green ground screw Five standard hubs with three pipe plugs included Threaded cover opening Recesses in cover to assist in cover tightening and removal Smooth, integral hub bushing to protect conductor insulation when pulling Compact design for confined spaces UL and cUL listing Optional all-aluminum construction

NEC/CEC Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups C and D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F and G Class III Zone 1 and 2 UL Standard 886 cUL to CSA Standard C22.2 No. 30 NEMA 4
Hub Size /2" 3 /4" 1"
1
Cat. # GUR1 GUR2 GUR3
Standard Materials:
Bodies Feraloy iron alloy Covers copper-free aluminum
Dimensions
In Inches:
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized with aluminum acrylic paint Aluminum natural
Options:
Description Bodies copper-free aluminum Suffix SA
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
53
3F

EAB Series
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3,4,7ABCD,9EFG EABX
3F
Applications:
EAB series conduit outlet boxes are installed in conduit systems within hazardous areas to: Provide protection against exterior explosion where acetylene, hydrogen and other hazardous gases are present Protect conductors in threaded rigid conduit Act as pull and splice boxes Interconnect lengths of conduit Change conduit direction Provide access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes
EABC
Hub Size
1 3
Cat. # EABC16 EABC26 EABC36
/2 /4 1
Hub Size /2 3 /4 1
1
Cat. # EABX16 EABX26 EABX36
EABT
Features:
EAB series conduit outlet boxes have: Five different hub configurations Taper threaded hubs to provide ground continuity Smooth integral hub bushing to protect conductor insulation when pulling Threaded cover openings Surface covers furnished with boxes Neoprene "o"-ring gasket and green ground screw are both standard. Four standard mounting pads, except for EABY. Cover threads are 16 pitch.
EABY
Hub Size /2 3 /4 1
1
Hub Size Cat. # EABT16 EABT26 EABT36 /2 3 /4

1
Cat. # EABY16 EABY26
Replacement Cover:
Size 3" Cat. # EAB06
EABL

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III UL Standard: 886 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
Replacement O-Ring:
Description Replacement O-Ring Hub Size /2 3 /4 1
1
Cat. # GASK1151
Cat. # EABL16 EABL26 EABL36
Fixture Cover
Union Hub Type
Standard Finishes:
Dimensions
In Inches:
Standard Materials:
Bodies Feraloy iron alloy Covers Copper-free aluminum
Cover Opening Dia. 3" Suffix SA* WOD S752
Fixt. Stem Size

3
Cat. # EAB0687*
Options:
/4
EAB Series
Cat. # 16 26 36 EAB Series
Available in copper-free aluminum, add suffix -SA. *EAB0687 is listed for Group C & D only.
Size Ranges:
Hub /2" to 1" Cover opening 3" dia.
1
a 33/4 33/4 33/4
b 217/32 225/32 225/32
c 11/2 13/4 13/4
d /4 7 /8 7 /8
3
e 55/16 59/16 59/16
f 33/32 33/32 33/32
54
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

EAB Series with UL, cUL and ATEX Certifications
Applications:
EAB ATEX series conduit outlet boxes are installed in conduit systems within hazardous areas to: Provide protection against exterior explosion where acetylene, hydrogen and other hazardous gases are present Protect conductors in threaded rigid conduit Act as pull and splice boxes Interconnect lengths of conduit Change conduit direction Provide access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1 & 2, Groups E, F, G II 2 G EEx d IIC T5 PTB 05 ATEX 1052 UL and cUL Listed Options:
Description Covers Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Corro-free epoxy powder coat Suffix to be added to Cat. #
Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Type 4 Enclosure / IP66 EABY
3F
3F
WOD S752 Hub Size Body Material Cat. #

1 1 3
Size Ranges:
Hub 1/2" to 1" Cover opening 3" dia.
/2 /2 /4 /4
EABX
Features:
EAB ATEX series conduit outlet boxes have: Two different hub configurations Taper threaded hubs to provide ground continuity Smooth integral hub bushing to protect conductor insulation when pulling Threaded cover openings Surface covers furnished with boxes Neoprene "o"-ring gasket and green ground screw are both standard. Cover threads are 16 pitch.
Feraloy Iron Copper-free Aluminum Feraloy Iron Copper-free Aluminum
EABY16 ATEX EABY16 SA ATEX EABY26 ATEX EABY26 SA ATEX
Replacement Cover:
Size Hub Size Body Material
1 1 3 3
Cat. # EAB06
Cat. # EABX16 ATEX EABX16 SA ATEX EABX26 ATEX EABX26 SA ATEX EABX36 ATEX EABX36 SA ATEX
3"
/2 /2 /4 /4

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Division 1 & 2, Groups E, F, G Class III II 2 G EEx d IIC T5 PTB 05 ATEX 1052 UL Standard: 886 cUL Listed to CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30 Type 4 Enclosure IP66
1 1
Feraloy Iron Copper-free Aluminum Feraloy Iron Copper-free Aluminum Feraloy Iron Copper-free Aluminum
Replacement O-Ring:
Description Replacement O-Ring Cat. # GASK1151
Dimensions
In Inches:
Fixture Cover
Union Hub Type
Standard Materials:
Bodies Feraloy iron alloy or copperfree aluminum Covers Copper-free aluminum
Cover Opening Dia. 3"
Fixt. Stem Size

3
Cat. # EAB0687*
/4
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Aluminum natural EAB Series
Available with 6-point Phoenix MBK type terminal block mounted on DIN rail. Add suffix DIN16 before ATEX. Ordering example: EABX26 DIN16 ATEX *EAB0687 is listed for Group C & D only.
EAB Series
Cat. # a 16 26 36 33/4 33/4 33/4 b 217/32 225/32 225/32 c 11/2 13/4 13/4 d /4 7 /8 7 /8
3
e 55/16 59/16 59/16
f 33/32 33/32 33/32
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
55
3F

EAJ Series
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7ABCD, 9EFG EAJX
Suffix SA
3F
Applications:
EAJ series conduit outlet boxes are installed in conduit systems within hazardous areas to: Protect conductors in threaded rigid conduit Act as pull and splice boxes Interconnect lengths of conduit Change conduit direction Provide access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes Act as mounting outlets for fixtures (with appropriate covers) Act as sealing fittings (with appropriate covers)
Options:
Cover Opening Dia. 33/16 33/16 33/16
Hub. Size Cat. # /2 /4 1

1 3
WOD S752
EAJX16 EAJX26 EAJX36
EAJ Threaded Covers Size Ranges:

Hub 1/2" to 2" Cover opening 33/16" to 5" dia.
EAJB
Cover Opening Dia. 33/16 33/16 33/16 Hub Size Cat. # /2 /4 1
1 3
Flat Covers
Cover Opening Dia. 33/16 5 Cat. # EAJ06 EAJ09
Features:
EAJ conduit outlet boxes have: Water shedding cover suitable for wet locations when mounted in upright position External cover threads on body protecting conductors from damage during pulling No pinching of conductors during cover installation Six different hub arrangements Taper threaded hubs to provide ground continuity Smooth integral hub bushing to protect conductor insulation when pulling Internally threaded cover openings for additional wiring room Flat overlapping threaded covers furnished with boxes Weather-resistant finish Green ground screw standard in all boxes Four standard mounting pads, except for EAJB and EAJD
EAJB16 EAJB26 EAJB36
Dome Covers
Cover Opening Dia. Depth Cat. #
EAJC
Hub Size Cat. #

1 3
33/16
EAJ0612
/2 /4 1
EAJC16 EAJC26 EAJC36
Fixture Covers
Union Hub Type
Cover Opening Dia. 33/16 Fixt. Stem Size Cat. #
3
EAJD
Hub Size Cat. # /2 3 /4 1

1
EAJD16 EAJD26 EAJD36
/4
EAJ0687*
Dimensions
In Inches:

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups A,B,C,D Class II, Division 1, Groups E,F,G Class II, Division 2, Groups F,G Class III UL Standard: 886 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
EAJL
Hub Size Cat. # /2 /4 1

1 3
EAJL16 EAJL26 EAJL36
EAJT
Standard Materials:
Body Feraloy iron alloy Cover copper-free aluminum
Cover Opening Dia. 33/16 33/16 33/16 5 5 5
Hub Size Cat. #

1 3
Cat. # a 16 26 36 49 59 69 33/4 33/4 33/4 53/4 53/4 53/4
b 217/32 225/32 225/32 41/16 41/16 41/16
e 55/16 59/16 59/16 75/16 713/16 713/16
f 33/32 33/32 33/32 43/4 43/4 43/4
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Aluminum natural
/2 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2
EAJT16 EAJT26 EAJT36 EAJT49 EAJT59 EAJT69
11/2 3/4 13/4 7/8 13/4 7/8 23/16 13/32 3 11/2 3 11/2
*EAJ0687 is listed for Group C & D only. Available in copper-free aluminum, add suffix -SA. Form 9 products with 5" cover opening are not suitable for Group A.
56
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

for IEC Applications
Applications:
C30 and C31 series conduit outlet boxes are installed in electrical systems within hazardous areas to: Provide protection against exterior explosion where acetylene, hydrogen and other hazardous gases are present Protect conductors in threaded rigid conduit Act as pull and splice boxes Interconnect lengths of conduit Change conduit direction Provide access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes
Ex II 2 G EEx d IIC T6 Ex II 2 D IP66 T 85C
Zone 1, 2, 21 and 22
3F
C30 Series
C31 Series
3F
Features:
C30 and C31 series conduit outlet boxes have: Taper threaded hubs to provide ground continuity Smooth integral hub bushing to protect conductor insulation when pulling Threaded cover openings Surface covers furnished with boxes Neoprene "o"-ring gasket and green ground screw are both standard. Cover threads are 16 pitch.
Series C30 C30 C30 C30 C31 C31 C31 C31 C31 C31 Shape T T X X T T T X X X Hub Size 3 3 4 4 3 3 3 4 4 4 x x x x x x x x x x / 2" / 4" / 2" 3 / 4" 1 / 2" 3 / 4" 1" 1 / 2" 3 / 4" 1"
1 3 1
Cat. # NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 001 001 001 001 111 111 111 111 111 111 151 151 151 151 150 150 150 150 150 150 181 199 206 214 001 002 003 004 005 006

IEC: Ex d IIC T6 Ex tD A21 IP67 T85C EC-Type examination certificate LOM 02 ATEX 2037 X Compliant to EN60079-0 IP67
Accessories
Description C30 Mounting plate with pillar terminals 4 x 4mm2 C30 support rail DIN 46877 C30 mounting plate without terminals C30 pending support C31 mounting plate with pillar terminals 4 x 4mm2 C31 mounting plate without terminals C31 support rail DIN 46877 Cat. # NOR 000 NOR 000 NOR 000 NOR 000 NOR 000 NOR 000 NOR 000 001 000 000 000 111 000 000 151 115 115 115 150 115 115 222 314 302 311 009 306 315
Standard Materials:
Bodies Light alloy, natural finish Covers Light alloy, natural finish
Dimensions
In Inches:
Technical Specifications
Operating temperature range Degree of protection Rated voltage Rated current Terminals -50C to +55C IP67 up to 690V Acc. terminals C30 Series: up to 6mm2 C31 Series: up to 10 mm2
C30 Series
Other entries available upon request.
C31 Series
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
57
3F

CPS Series
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 7CD,9EFG
Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof
3F
Applications:
CPS series conduit outlet boxes are installed in conduit systems in hazardous areas to: Protect conductors in threaded rigid conduit Act as pull and splice boxes Change conduit direction Interconnect lengths of conduit Act as fixture hangers with hub covers Provide access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes
Box with Hub Cover
CPS Covers
Blank Covers
Description Hub Size Body /4 3 /4
3
Cat. # CPS026
Cover /2 3 /4
1
Cat. # CPS12021 CPS12022
Form 20
Features:
CPS conduit outlet boxes have: Two types of cover: blank for splice or pull box use threaded hub for mounting light fixtures Wide, accurately machined body and cover mating surfaces, to insure flametight joint Blind tapped holes for cover screws to further insure flametightness Removable mounting feet for flush or surface mounting to wall or ceiling
Hub Covers*
Furnished with four 3/4" standard taper tapped, integrally bushed hubs. Three hubs are plugged.
Box with Blank Cover
Description Form 20 Form 20 Hub Size

3
Hub Size Cat. # 1/2 3/4 CPS021 CPS022

NEC/CEC Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III UL Standard: 886 CSA Standard C22.2 No. 30
Cat. # CPS12026
*Fixture weight up to 125 lbs.
/4
Dimensions
In Inches:
Standard Materials:
Feraloy iron alloy
Standard Finishes:
Electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint
Options:
Complete line of fixture hangers are located in section 8L of this catalog.
58
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Condulet Conduit Bodies With Covers

OE Series
Applications:
OE series are installed in conduit systems within hazardous areas to: Protect conductors in threaded rigid conduit Act as pulling and splice fittings Interconnect lengths of conduit Change direction of conduit Provide access for maintenance and future system changes
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 7CD, 9EFG OEC
3F
OET
3F
Features:
OE conduit outlet bodies have: Taper threaded hubs for ground continuity Smooth integral hub bushings to protect conductor insulation when pulling Five different hub arrangements Accurately machined body with blind tapped screw holes Most compact design of all hazardous area outlet bodies
Hub Size 1 /2 3 /4 1
Cat. # OEC1 OEC2 OEC3 SA
Hub Size
1 3
Cat. # OET1 OET2 OET3 SA
/2 /4 1
OELL
OELB

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III UL Standard: 886 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
Hub Size
1 3
Cat. # OELL1 OELL2 OELL3 SA
Hub Size /2 3 /4 1
1
Cat. # OELB1 OELB2 OELB3 SA
/2 /4 1
OELR
Standard Materials:
Feraloy iron alloy (1/2" and 3/4" fittings) Copper-free aluminum (1" fittings)
Standard Finishes:
Hub Size
Cat. # OELR1 OELR2 OELR3 SA
Dimensions
In Inches:
Suffix S752
1 3
Options:
Description Corro-free epoxy powder coat
/2 /4 1
Size Ranges:
Hub - 1/ 2" to 1"
OE Series Hub Size in. a 1 /2 41/16 3 /4 45/16 b 19/16 17/8 c 113/16 21/16 d /16 11 /16
11
e /8 7 /8
7
f
5 3
/8 /4
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
59
3F
Condulet Conduit Bodies With Covers

EKC Series
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Explosionproof Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Dust-Ignitionproof Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 7CD,9EFG
3F
Applications:
EKC series conduit outlet bodies are installed in conduit systems within hazardous areas to: Provide convenient opening in conduit system for pulling or splicing conductors
Features:
EKC bodies have: Accurately machined body and cover mating surfaces to ensure flametight joint when properly assembled Extra long cover opening to facilitate pulling and splicing of conductors Taper threaded hubs and integral bushing for rigid threaded conduit Hub Size
1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3
EKC Cat. # EKC30 EKC40 EKC50 EKC60 EKC70 EKC80
Dimensions
In Inches:

NEC: EKC 30 60 Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III EKC 70, 80 Class I, Division 1 & 2, Group D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III UL Standard: 886 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
Standard Materials:
EKC bodies Feraloy iron alloy
EKC
EKC
Size
1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint
a 125/8 1515/16 213/4
b 31/16 37/8 51/2
c 37/16 45/16 6
d 13/4 21/2 33/4
e 9 12 16
f 4 5 65/8
Options:
Description EKC series: Corro-free epoxy powder coat Suffix S752
Size Ranges:
EKC bodies hub size 1" to 3"
60
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Condulet Conduit Bodies With Covers; Elbows and Tees

LBH, LBY, ET Series
Applications:
LBH conduit outlet bodies are installed in hazardous areas to: Act as pull outlets especially for conductors that are stiff due to large size or type of insulation Make 90 bends in conduit system, allowing straight pull in either direction Provide for conduit service entrance to buildings Provide for conductor entrance to motors Provide access to wiring for maintenance and future system changes LBY elbows are installed in conduit systems within hazardous areas to: Make 90 bends in conduit systems where space is limited Act as pull outlets Provide access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes ET series short radius tees are installed in conduit systems within hazardous areas to: Allow single conduit stub up to outlet and device boxes located above or below main conduit runs. Eliminates separate feed and return conduits
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D* Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 7ABCD,9EFG
3F

NEC: LBH 10-20 Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III LBH 30-100 Class I, Division 1 & 2, Group D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III LBY Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III ET Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III UL Standard: 886 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
Options:
Description LBH and LBY series copper-free aluminum LBH and LBY series Corro-free epoxy powder coat Suffix SA S752
3F
Size Ranges:
LBH bodies hub size 1/2" to 4" LBY elbows hub size 1/2" to 11/2"
Ordering Information Hub Size Cat. # LBH

LBH10 LBH20 1 LBH30 1 1 /4 LBH40 11/2 LBH50 2 LBH60 21/2 LBH70 3 LBH80 1 3 /2 LBH90 4 LBH100 Hub Size Cat. #
1 3 1 3
/2 /4
LBY
/2 /4
Features:
LBH bodies have: Cover openings on an angle, permitting conductors to be pulled straight through hubs from either direction Domed covers to permit easy conductor bends (relieves strain on insulation) Taper threaded hubs with integral bushings LBY elbows have: Maximum volume for bends within a compact overall size Screw on cover for ease of installation and removal Over opening on an angle, permitting conductors to be pulled straight through either hub Taper threaded hubs and integral bushing for rigid threaded conduit ET short radius tees have: Compact size and small radius of bend for use in concealed, or open conduit systems. Particularly suited for use in shallow floors or partitions Taper threaded hubs and integral bushing for rigid threaded conduit
Standard Materials:
LBH, LBY and ET Feraloy iron alloy
1 11/4 11/2
LBY15 LBY25 LBY35 LBY45 LBY55
Standard Finishes:
LBH, LBY and ET electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint
ET
Hub Size /41/21/2 3 /43/43/4 13/43/4

3
Cat. # ET218 ET228 ET328
Dimensions
In Inches:
Largest hub is shown at top of photo.
LBY
ET
LBY
Size 1 /2 3 /4
1 11/4 11/2
ET
a 29/16 213/16 33/32 33/4 41/4 e 4 7 10 10 153/4 24 f 23/4 4 5 5 55/8 71/8 b 2 21/4 21/2 215/16 33/8 Size 3 /41/21/2 3 /43/43/4 13/43/4 a 4 4 4 b 25/8 3 3 c 11/4 11/2 11/2 d 11/2 11/2 13/4
LBH
LBH
Size 1 /23/4 11/4 11/2
2 2-1/23 3-1/24
a 5 /16 77/8 1015/16 1021/32 155/8 239/16

1
b 2 /32 313/32 41/2 425/32 51/2 611/16

19
c 4 51/4 73/32 73/32 91/2 113/4
d 1 /16 13/4 21/2 21/2 3 4

3
*See Compliances for classification of each product.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
61
3F
Condulet Elbows and Tees IEC Certifications

FE and FT Series
Zone 1 Zone 2
Zone 21 Zone 22
3F
Applications:
FE and FT conduit fittings are installed in hazardous areas to: Act as draw-in outlets especially for cables that are stiff due to large size or type of insulation Make 90 bends in conduit systems, allowing for a straight pull in either direction Provide access to wiring for maintenance and future system changes
Features:
Maximum volume for bends within a compact overall size Large openings to facilitate cable pulling
Inspection Elbows and Tees Selection
Cat. # FE1 FE2 FT1 FT2 Type Elbow Elbow Tee Tee Entry Size (metric) M20 M25 M20 M25 (F)-M20 (F)-M25 (F)-M20 (F)-M25 (F) (F) (F) (F)

Type of Protection Ex d, DIP A21, IP67 Degree of Protection IP67 Gas Group IIB Approvals Ex1108U
Dimensions (mm)
Standard Materials:
Body Copper-free aluminum Cover Brass
Standard Finishes:
Natural
Options:
Description Suffix NPT & BSP thread sizes Consult Factory
62
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Lubricants
3F
Applications:
STL thread lubricant is used between any screw thread and its tapped opening, on any rotating shaft threaded or plain, and to inhibit corrosion on any metal-to-metal joint of apparatus and control enclosures. HTL high temperature lubricant is used on lighting fixture threaded joints and on threaded joints of the enclosures of any heatproducing apparatus or control.

Complies with NEC 2008, Article 300.6
3F
Features:
STL thread lubricant is lithium based, antigalling and: Is especially effective between parts made of dissimilar metals Is effective and stable from 20F to +300F Maintains grounding continuity; should not be used on exposed current-carrying parts Has excellent adhesion qualities; a liberal application on threaded joints maintains raintightness and inhibits corrosion HTL is a high temperature, anti-seize, conductive thread lubricant: Effective and stable from 70F to +1800F Prevents seizure, galling, rust, galvanic action Maintains grounding continuity; should not be used on exposed current-carrying parts Effective between parts made of dissimilar metals
STL Thread Lubricant
HTL High Temperature Thread Lubricant
Net Wt. 13/ 4 oz. (tube) 8 oz. (can)
Cat. # STL2 STL8
Net Wt.
Cat. #
4 oz. (tube) HTL4 MSDS Sheets are available at www.crouse-hinds.com
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
63
3F
64
3F
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Cable Glands and Cable Accessories Hazardous and Non-hazardous
4F
Description
Application Cable Glands - International Standards Quick Selection Guide Flameproof and Increased Safety
ADE 1F ADE 4F ADE 6F ADE 6FC TWAB TWAX TWAE Ex - e Ex - i Trumpet Enlargement and Multiple
Page No. see page 66
Description
Cable Glands - Accessories
A Series B Series C Series D Series E Series Breathers and Drains
Page No.
4F
see pages 6770
see see see see see see see see see see see
page page page page page page page page page page page
71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81
see page 98 see page 102 see page 103 see page 104 see page 105 see page 106
Cable Tray Clamps Conduit

LCC, LCCF Series
Grounding Conductor
TGC Series
Cable/Conduit Sealing Devices Thru-Wall Barrier

TW Series
Link Seal For Conduit

Environmental Seal Fire Seal
Industrial
ADE 4I TWA TUA
Cable Glands - North American Standards Quick Selection Guide Explosionproof

TMCX ADE 6FC ADE 1FC CGBS EBY
see pages 6770 see see see see see page page page page page 85 86 87 88 88
General Pupose
TMC TECK CGB CGD CGE CGB1013 CGFP NCG NCGB
see page 89 see page 90 see pages 9192 see page 93 see page 94 see page 95 see page 96 see page 97 see page 97
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
65
4F
Cable Glands and Cable Accessories

4F
Applications:
Cable glands and cord fittings: Provide means for passing a cord, cable (armored or unarmored) or flexible conduit into an enclosure, through a bulkhead or into a rigid conduit Form a mechanical grip and water and/or oil resistant seal for cord and unarmored or jacketed armored, round cables Form a non-slip connection or termination for flexible cord, cable (armored or unarmored), or flexible conduit Provide grounding continuity for cable armor and flexible conduit Cable glands with sealing fitting or epoxy are installed to: Provide means for passing armored, metal clad, jacketed or unjacketed and unarmored cables through a bulkhead or enclosure in hazardous areas. These fittings are suitable for use in Class I, Groups C, D, locations only when Chico A sealing compound or TSC epoxy (TMCX) is used to make the seal in the fitting.* Form a mechanical grip and water and/or oil-resistant termination Provide ground continuity of cable armor and flexible conduit TMC (non-hazardous) and TMCX (hazardous) fittings are designed for use with Type MC jacketed steel or aluminum metal clad cables with interlocked or corrugated armor and Type TC tray cable (TMCX). LCC cable tray conduit clamps are used for installation on cable tray side rails with inside flanges (requiring inside tray mounting) and outside flanges; LCCF clamps are for use exclusively on inside flanges. LCC/LCCF series cable tray conduit clamps are installed to: Provide a means of clamping metal conduit (rigid steel or aluminum, IMC and EMT) to cable tray for the exit of power and/or control cables from tray Provide a means to firmly bond exiting conduit to cable tray for best grounding continuity TW series THRU-WALL BARRIER cable/conduit sealing devices are installed to: Seal cables or conduits penetrating firerated walls, ceilings or floors Restrict entrance of water and dust and contain treated air Provide a seal for cable/conduit penetrations through steel, masonry or concrete; to restrict the entrance of contaminants through cable/conduit penetrations into clean areas TGC cable tray grounding conductor clamp provides a means for securely attaching a grounding conductor to cable tray to provide grounding continuity for the entire tray system. TGC cable tray grounding conductor clamps provide a reliable method for carrying ground fault current for equipment protection. TGC clamp may be installed on most types of cable trays with inside or outside flanges.

Selection of the proper cable gland involves consideration of the type of cable to be installed and the environment that will surround the cable after installation. A proper matching of the cable and its gland is necessary to prevent physical damage to the cable when installed. Some types of cable glands depend on gripping methods (set screws etc.) which may lead to damage of the cable outer covering. Cooper Crouse-Hinds cable glands and cord fittings utilize compression of split lead or tapered neoprene bushings to provide high gripping strength for adequate cable support and strain relief without damage to the cable sheath. Compression of bushing provides a strong electrical bond that assures grounding continuity. Compression of a tapered neoprene bushing, assures the watertight integrity of Cooper Crouse-Hinds cable glands. Additional watertightness, to prevent water seepage into the fitting body, can be obtained by use of a potting head filled with a hot pouring compound. To meet National Electrical Code requirements for electrical installations in hazardous atmospheres, a sealing fitting may be required in conjunction with the cable or cord fitting.
*With specific cords and cables when installed in accordance with NEC/CEC requirements.
66
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Global Cable Glands

Quick Selection Guide - International Standards
4F
4F
CABLE GLAND
ILLUSTRATION
CABLE TYPE
GLAND TYPE
STANDARD MATERIAL
CERTIFICATION
PROTECTION TYPE
ADE 1F (page 71)
Non-armoured, armoured and tray Non-armoured Nickel-plated brass cable (does not terminate the armour)
Flameproof & Increased Safety
ADE 1FC (page 87)
Non-armoured, armoured and tray Non-armoured Nickel-plated brass cable (does not barrier terminate the armour)
ADE 4F (page 72)
SWA, SWB, STA, braided marine shipboard and lead sheathed (with addition of earthing washer)
Armoured
Nickel-plated brass
ADE 6F (page 73)
SWA, SWB, STA and braided marine shipboard
Armoured
Nickel-plated brass
ADE 6FC (page 74)
SWA, SWB, STA, braided marine shipboard and lead sheathed (with addition of earthing washer)
Armoured barrier
Nickel-plated brass
TWAB (page 75)
SWA
Armoured barrier
Nickel-plated brass
Flameproof
TWAX (page 76)
SWA
Armoured
Nickel-plated brass
Flameproof
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
67
4F
Global Cable Glands

Quick Selection Guide - International Standards
CABLE GLAND
ILLUSTRATION
CABLE TYPE
GLAND TYPE
STANDARD MATERIAL
CERTIFICATION
PROTECTION TYPE
4F
TWAE (page 77)
SWA
Armoured
Nickel-plated brass
Increased Safety
EX-e (page 78)
Nonarmoured
Non-armoured
Polyamide
Increased Safety
EX-i (page 79)
Nonarmoured
Non-armoured
Polyamide
Increased Safety
Trumpet (page 80)
Nonarmoured
Non-armoured
Polyamide
Increased Safety
Enlargement and Multiple (page 81)
Nonarmoured
Non-armoured
Polyamide
Increased Safety
ADE 4I (page 82)
SWA, SWB, STA, braided marine shipboard and lead Armoured sheathed (with addition of earthing washer)
Nickel-plated brass
Industrial
TWA (page 83)
SWA
Armoured
Nickel-plated brass
Industrial
TUA (page 84)
Nonarmoured
Non-armoured
Nickel-plated brass
Industrial
68
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Global Cable Glands

Quick Selection Guide - North American Standards
CABLE GLAND CABLE TYPE Metal-clad with interlocked or continuously-welded corrugated, TECK armoured, non-armoured and tray cable Non-armoured, armoured and tray cable (does not terminate the armour) SWA, SWB, STA, braided marine shipboard and lead sheathed (with addition of earthing washer) GLAND TYPE STANDARD MATERIAL
4F
ILLUSTRATION
CERTIFICATION
PROTECTION TYPE
4F
TMCX (page 85)
Armoured barrier and non-armoured barrier
Aluminum
Explosionproof
ADE 1FC (page 87)
Non-armoured barrier
Nickel-plated brass
ADE 6FC (page 86)
Armoured barrier
Nickel-plated brass
CGBS (page 88)
Non-armoured and tray cable
Portable cord connector
Body: steel Gland nut: aluminum
Explosionproof
EBY (page 88)
Non-armoured
Aluminum
Explosionproof
TMC (page 89)
Metal-clad with interlocked or continuously-welded corrugated, TECK armoured, non-armoured and tray cable
Armoured or non-armoured
Aluminum
General Purpose
TECK (page 90)
TECK armoured
Armoured
Aluminum
General Purpose
CGB (page 91)
Non-armoured
Body steel Form A-D steel Form E-F iron
General Purpose
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
69
4F
Global Cable Glands

Quick Selection Guide - North American Standards
CABLE GLAND
ILLUSTRATION
CABLE TYPE
GLAND TYPE
STANDARD MATERIAL
CERTIFICATION
PROTECTION TYPE
4F
CGD (page 93)
Non-armoured
Body: iron Gland nut: steel
General Purpose
CGE (page 94)
Non-armoured
Body: iron Gland nut: steel
General Purpose
CGB1013 (page 95)
Body: steel Gland nut: aluminum
General Purpose
CGFP (page 96)
Non-armoured
Form B-C: steel Form D-G: iron
General Purpose
NCG (page 97)
Non-armoured
Polyamide
General Purpose
NCGB (page 97)
Non-armoured
Thermoplastic polyester
General Purpose
70
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
ADE 1F
International Standards Flameproof and Increased Safety
Gland Type
Non-armoured
ATEX IECEx cULus Listed for Class I Zone 2 cULus Marine Listed for Class I Zone 2
CEPEL GOST-R NEPSI NEMA 4X and IP68
4F
4F
Cable Type
Non-armoured, armoured and tray cable (does not terminate the armour)

ATEX LCIE 97 ATEX 6008X Exd IIC/Exe II/Ex tD /Ex II 2 GD IECEx LCI 05.0004X cULus Listed for Class I Zone 2 AEx e II/Ex e II E310130 cULus Marine Listed for Class I Zone 2 AEx e II/Ex e II E314047 NEMA 4X and IP68 CEPEL cepel-EX-558/05X GOST-R POCC FR.B02011 NEPSI N GYJ071336U & GYJ071337U
Features:
Standard material is nickel-plated brass for superior corrosion resistance Provides a flameproof and weatherproof seal on the outer sheath of the cable Standard neoprene seal suitable for use in operating temperatures ATEX (-60C to 100C), IECEx and cULus (-40C to 100C) Available with optional silicone seal for extreme temperatures Available with metric or NPT threads See pages 98101 for related accessories
SELECTION TABLE
Entry Thread Size A Gland Size 4 4 5 4 5 6 5 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 11 12 12 13 14 15 16 Metric Size M12 M16 M16 M20 M20 M20 M25 M25 M25 M32 M32 M40 M40 M50 M50 M63 M63 M75 M75 M90 M90 M110 Metric Catalog # CAP816404 CAP816594 CAP816504 CAP816674 CAP816694 CAP816604 CAP816774 CAP816794 CAP816704 CAP816894 CAP816804 CAP816994 CAP816904 CAP817094 CAP817004 CAP817294 CAP817204 CAP817394 CAP817304 CAP817594 CAP817504 CAP817794 NPT Size 1 /4" 3 /8" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 1" 1" 11/4" 11/4" 11/2" 11/2" 2" 2" 21/2" 21/2" 3" 3" 31/2"
NPT Catalog #
CAP818404 CAP818594 CAP818694 CAP818674 CAP818694 CAP818604 CAP818774 CAP818794 CAP818704 CAP818894 CAP818804 CAP818994 CAP818904 CAP819094 CAP819004 CAP819294 CAP819204 CAP819494 CAP819404 CAP819594 CAP819504 CAP819604
Thread Length B Metric (NPT) 15 (12.0) 15 (12.0) 15 (12.0) 15 (20.2) 15 (20.2) 15 (20.2) 15 (20.2) 15 (20.2) 15 (20.2) 15 (25.3) 15 (25.3) 15 (26.0) 15 (26.0) 15 (26.5) 15 (26.5) 17 (27.2) 17 (27.2) 18 (40.5) 18 (40.5) 22 (42.0) 22 (42.0) 22 (43.2)
Cable Acceptance Outer SheathE Min 4.0 4.0 6.0 4.0 6.0 8.5 6.0 8.5 12.0 12.0 16.0 16.0 21.0 21.0 27.0 33.0 40.0 40.0 47.0 54.0 63.0 72.0 Max 8.0 8.5 12.0 8.5 12.0 16.0 12.0 16.0 21.0 21.0 27.5 27.5 34.0 34.0 41.0 48.0 56.0 56.0 65.0 74.0 78.0 92.0
Gland Length F (less entry) 20 20 22 20 22 25 22 25 27 27 34 34 36 36 39 41 43 43 49 56 61 62
Hexagon Dimensions Across Flats Across Corners G 16.5 20.9 20.9 26.4 26.4 26.4 33 33 33 39.6 45.1 48.4 52.8 60.5 60.5 73.7 79.2 88 93.5 104.5 121 132
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
71
4F
ADE 4F
CEPEL ATEX GOST-R IECEx NEPSI cULus listed for Class I Zone 2 cULus Marine listed for Class I, Zone 1 NEMA 4X and IP68
4F
Gland Type:
Armoured
Cable Type:
Steel wire armoured, steel wire braided, steel tape armoured, braided marine shipboard and lead sheathed (with addition of earthing washer)

ATEX LCIE 97 ATEX 6008X Exd IIC/Exe II/Ex tD/Ex II 2 GD IECEx LCI 05.0004X cULus listed for Class I, Zone 2 AEx e II/Ex e II E310130 cULus Marine listed for Class I, Zone 1 AEx e II/Ex e II E314047 NEMA 4X and IP68 CEPEL cepel-EX-559/05X GOST-R POCC FR.B02011 NEPSI N GYJ071336U & GYJ071337U
Features:
Standard material is nickel-plated brass for superior corrosion resistance Armour clamping and bonding with no reversible components for easy installation, minimizing error Provides flameproof seal on inner jacket and weatherproof seal on outer sheath of cable Optional earthing washer for use with lead sheathed cable (see page 99) Standard neoprene seal suitable for use in operating temperatures ATEX (-60C to 100C), IECEx and cULus (-40C to 100C) Available with optional silicone seal for extreme temperatures Available with metric or NPT threads See pages 98101 for related accessories
SELECTION TABLE
Entry Thread Size A Thread Length B Metric NPT (NPT) Size NPT Catalog # 1 /4" CAP848404 15 (12.0) 3 /8" CAP848594 15 (12.0) 3 /8" CAP848504 15 (12.0) 1 /2" CAP848674 15 (20.2) 1 /2" CAP848694 15 (20.2) 1 /2" CAP848604 15 (20.2) 3 /4" CAP848774 15 (20.2) 3 /4" CAP848794 15 (20.2) 3 /4" CAP848704 15 (20.2) 1" CAP848894 15 (25.3) 1" CAP848804 15 (25.3) 15 (26.0) 11/4" CAP848994 11/4" CAP848904 15 (26.0) 11/2" CAP849094 15 (26.5) 15 (26.5) 11/2" CAP849004 2" CAP849294 17 (27.2) 2" CAP849204 17 (27.2) 21/2" CAP849494 18 (40.5) 21/2" CAP849404 18 (40.5) 3" CAP849594 22 (42.0) 3" CAP849504 22 (42.0) N/A (43.2) 31/2" CAP849604 4" CAP849704 22 (44.5) Cable Acceptance Inner Sheath Outer Sheath D E Min 4.0 4.0 6.0 4.0 6.0 8.5 6.0 8.5 12.0 12.0 16.0 16.0 21.0 21.0 27.0 27.0 33.0 40.0 47.0 54.0 63.0 63.0 72.0 Max 8.0 8.5 12.0 8.5 12.0 16.0 12.0 16.0 20.5 21.0 27.5 27.5 34.0 34.0 41.0 41.0 48.0 56.0 65.0 74.0 82.0 82.0 92.0 Min 6.0 6.0 8.5 6.0 8.5 12.0 8.5 12.0 16.0 16.0 21.0 21.0 27.0 27.0 33.0 33.0 47.0 47.0 54.0 63.0 72.0 72.0* 85.0 Max 12.0 12.0 16.0 12.0 16.0 21.0 16.0 21.0 27.5 27.5 34.0 34.0 41.0 41.0 48.0 48.0 56.0 65.0 74.0 83.0 93.0 93.0* 107.0 Hexagon Dimensions Gland Length Across Armour F (less Across Corners entry) Flats G (max) 0.9 36 20.9 0.9 36 20.9 1.25 42 26.4 0.9 36 26.4 1.25 42 26.4 1.25 46 33.0 1.25 42 33.0 1.25 46 33.0 1.6 56 45.1 1.6 56 45.1 1.6 63 52.8 1.6 63 52.8 2.0 68 60.5 2.0 68 60.5 2.5 74 70.4 2.5 77 79.2 2.5 85 93.5 2.5 85 93.5 2.5 92 104.5 3.15 104 121.0 3.15 108 132.0 3.15 108 132.0 3.15 115 148.5
Gland Metric Size Size 5 M12 5 M16 6 M16 5 M20 6 M20 7 M20 6 M25 7 M25 8 M25 8 M32 9 M32 9 M40 10 M40 10 M50 11 M50 12 M63 13 M63 13 M75 14 M75 15 M90 16 M90 16 M90 17 M110
Metric Catalog # CAP846404 CAP846594 CAP846504 CAP846674 CAP846694 CAP846604 CAP846774 CAP846794 CAP846704 CAP846894 CAP846804 CAP846994 CAP846904 CAP847094 CAP847004 CAP847294 CAP847204 CAP847394 CAP847304 CAP847794 CAP847504 CAP847574 CAP847794
All dimensions in millimeters unless otherwise noted * CAP849604 outer sheath min: 85 max: 107.
72
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
ADE 6F
Gland Type
Armoured
ATEX IECEx cULus Listed for Class I Zone 2 cULus Marine Listed for Class I, Zone 2
CEPEL GOST-R NEPSI NEMA 4X and IP68
4F
4F
Cable Type
Steel wire armoured, steel wire braided, steel tape armoured and braided marine shipboard

ATEX LCIE 97 6008X - Exd IIC / Exe II / Ex tD / Ex II 2GD IECEx LCI 05.0004X cULus Listed for Class I, Zone 2 AEx e II / Ex e II E310130 cULus Marine Listed for Class I, Zone 2 AEx e II / Ex e II E314047 NEMA 4X and IP68 CEPEL GOST-R NEPSI
Features:
Standard material is nickel-plated brass for superior corrosion resistance Armour clamping and bonding with no reversible components for easy installation, minimizing error Provides fully inspectable inner seal after installation Flameproof diaphragm seal on inner jacket does not damage cables exhibiting cold-flow; weatherproof seal on outer sheath of cable Deluge boot provides enhanced protection from water ingress Standard neoprene seal suitable for use in operating temperatures ATEX (-60C to 100C), IECEx and cULus (-40C to 100C) Available with metric or NPT threads See pages 98101 for related accessories
SELECTION TABLE
Entry Thread Size A Gland Size 5 5 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 Metric Size M16 M20 M20 M20 M25 M25 M32 M32 M40 M40 M50 M50 Metric Catalog # CAP965594 CAP965674 CAP965694 CAP965604 CAP965794 CAP965704 CAP965894 CAP965804 CAP965994 CAP965904 CAP966094 CAP966004 NPT Size 3 /8" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 3 /4" 3 /4" 1" 1" 11/4" 11/4" 2" NPT Catalog # CAP967594 CAP967674 CAP967694 CAP967604 CAP967794 CAP967704 CAP967894 CAP967804 CAP967994 CAP967904 CAP968094 CAP968294 Thread Length B Metric (NPT) 15 (12.0) 15 (20.2) 15 (20.2) 15 (20.2) 15 (20.2) 15 (20.2) 15 (25.3) 15 (25.3) 15 (26.0) 15 (26.0) 16 (26.5) 16 (27.2) Cable Acceptance Inner Outer Sheath D Sheath E Min 3.0 3.0 6.5 9.0 9.0 12.0 12.0 17.5 17.5 23.0 23.0 28.5 Max 7.5 7.5 11.0 14.5 14.5 19.5 19.5 26.0 26.0 33.0 33.0 41.0 Min 6.0 6.0 8.5 12.0 12.0 16.0 16.0 21.0 21.0 27.0 27.0 33.0 Max 12.0 12.0 16.0 21.0 21.0 27.5 27.5 34.0 34.0 41.0 41.0 48.0 Armour (max) 0.9 0.9 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 2.0 2.0 2.5 Gland Length F (less entry) 46.0 46.0 53.0 59.0 59.0 74.5 74.5 83.5 83.5 92.0 92.0 104.0 Hexagon Dimensions Across Across Corners Flats G 20.9 26.4 26.4 33.0 33.0 45.1 45.1 52.8 52.8 60.5 60.5 70.4
Larger sizes available in ADE 4F design, please refer back to page see page 72. All dimensions in millimeters unless otherwise noted.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
73
4F
ADE 6FC
ATEX IECEx cULus listed for Class I, Zone 2 cULus Marine listed for Class I, Div. 1
CEPEL GOST-R NEMA 4X and IP68
4F
Gland Type
Armoured barrier
Cable Type

ATEX LCIE 97 ATEX 6008X - Exd IIC/Exe II/Ex tD/Ex II GD IECEx LCI 05.0004X cULus listed for Class I, Zone 2 AEx e II/Ex e II cULus Marine listed for Class I, Div. 2 AEx e II/Ex e II NEMA 4X and IP68 CEPEL GOST-R
Features:
Standard material is nickel-plated brass for superior corrosion resistance Armour clamping with no reversible components for easy installation, minimizing error Provides exposionproof compound seal (denoted by red back nut) on conductors and weatherproof seal on outer sheath of cable Deluge boot provides enhanced protection from water ingress Standard neoprene seal suitable for use in operating temperatures -60C to 80C Available with metric or NPT threads See pages 98-101 for related accessories
SELECTION TABLE
Entry Thread Size A Cable Acceptance Hexagon Dimensions Inner Sheath Outer and Cores Sheath E Thread Max Max Length Gland Across Over Inner Max B Length Metric Cores Sheath No. of Armour F (less Across Corners G 'C' 'D' Cores Min Max (max) Flats (NPT) entry) 15 (12.0) 0.9 46.0 20.9 6.5 7.5 6.0 6.0 12.0 15 (20.2) 15 (20.2) 15 (20.2) 15 (20.5) 15 (20.5) 15 (25.3) 15 (25.3) 15 (26.0) 15 (26.0) 16 (26.5) 16 (27.2) 6.5 9.5 12.0 12.0 17.0 17.0 23.0 23.0 29.0 29.0 36.5 7.5 11.0 14.5 14.5 19.5 19.5 28.0 28.0 33.0 33.0 41.0 6.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 21.0 21.0 42.0 42.0 60.0 60.0 80.0 6.0 8.5 12.0 12.0 16.0 16.0 21.0 21.0 27.0 27.0 33.0 12.0 16.0 21.0 21.0 27.5 27.5 34.0 34.0 41.0 41.0 48.0 0.9 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 2.0 2.0 2.5 46.0 53.0 59.0 59.0 74.5 74.5 83.5 83.5 92.0 92.0 104.0 26.4 26.4 33.0 33.0 45.1 45.1 52.8 52.8 60.5 60.5 70.4
Gland Metric Size Size 5 M16 5 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 M20 M20 M20 M25 M25 M32 M32 M40 M40 M50 M50
Metric Catalog # CAP969594 CAP969674 CAP969694 CAP969604 CAP969794 CAP969704 CAP969894 CAP969804 CAP969994 CAP969904 CAP970094 CAP970004
NPT Size 3 /8"

1 1 1 3 3
NPT Catalog # CAP974594 CAP971674 CAP971674 CAP971604 CAP971794 CAP971704 CAP971894 CAP971804 CAP971994 CAP971904 CAP972094 CAP972004
/2" /2" /2" /4" /4"
1" 1" 11/4" 11/4" 1 /2"

1
2"
Larger sizes available soon. All dimensions in millimeters unless otherwise noted.
74
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
TWAB
Gland Type
Armoured barrier
IECEx
IP66 and 67
4F
4F
Cable Type
Steel wire armoured

IECEx TSA 08.0004 - Exd IIC IP66 and 67
Features:
Standard material is nickel-plated brass Armour clamping and bonding for steel wire armoured cable Provides flameproof compound seal on conductors and weatherproof seal on outer sheath of cable Standard neoprene seal suitable for use in operating temperatures -20 to 40C Available with metric, NPT or BSP threads See page 103 for related accessories
SELECTION TABLE
Entry Thread Size A Thread Length B Metric 14 14 16 20 20 20 22 22 Cable Acceptance Inner Sheath D Min 6.0 7.0 11.0 17.0 24.0 30.0 40.0 53.0 Max 8.0 12.0 18.0 25.0 31.0 41.0 54.0 65.0 Outer Sheath E Min 10.2 14.0 18.0 25.0 30.0 36.0 51.0 63.0 Max 15.8 20.8 27.2 33.5 35.9 52.6 65.3 78.0 Armour Range 0.9 - 1.25 0.9 - 1.25 1.25 - 1.6 1.6 - 2.0 1.6 - 2.0 2.0 - 2.5 2.0 - 2.5 2.5 - 3.5 Gland Length F (less entry) 58.0 58.0 60.0 72.0 74.0 82.0 90.0 98.0 Hexagon Dimensions Across Across Corners Flats G 27.0 31.0 30.4 34.0 38.1 43.0 47.6 53.0 55.0 63.5 70.0 78.0 80.0 88.0 101.0 112.0
Gland Size 20 20 25 32 40 50 63 75
Metric Size M20 M20 M25 M32 M40 M50 M63 M75
Metric Catalog # TWAB1M16 TWAB1M20 TWAB2M27 TWAB3M34 TWAB4M40 TWAB5M53 TWAB6M66 TWAB7M78
NPT Size 1 /2" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2"
NPT Catalog # TWAB1N16 TWAB1N20 TWAB2N27 TWAB3N34 TWAB4N40 TWAB5N53 TWAB6N66 TWAB7N78
All dimensions in millimeters unless otherwise noted.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
75
4F
TWAX
IECEx
IP66 and 67
4F
Gland Type:
Armoured
Cable Type:
Steel wire armoured

IECEx TSA 08.0004 - Exd IIC IP66 and 67
Features:
Standard material is nickel-plated brass Armour clamping and bonding for steel wire armour cable Flameproof seal on inner jacket and weatherproof seal on outer sheath of cable Standard neoprene seal suitable for use in operating temperatures -20 to 40C Available with metric, NPT or BSP threads See page 103 for related accessories
SELECTION TABLE
Entry Thread Size A Thread Length B Metric 14.0 14.0 14.0 16.0 16.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 Cable Acceptance Inner Outer Sheath D Sheath E Min 6.3 8.4 11.0 13.5 16.5 19.5 23.5 25.8 30.8 35.5 39.5 43.5 48.5 55.5 61.0 Max 8.6 11.6 13.9 16.9 19.9 23.9 26.2 31.2 36.2 40.0 44.0 49.0 55.9 61.9 67.9 Min 10.2 13.0 15.5 19.5 23.5 27.0 30.0 33.0 38.0 43.0 48.0 52.0 58.0 64.3 70.6 Max 13.2 15.8 19.8 23.8 27.2 30.5 33.5 38.5 43.5 48.5 52.6 58.9 65.3 71.6 78.0 Armour Range 0.9 - 1.25 0.9 - 1.25 0.9 - 1.25 1.25 - 1.6 1.25 - 1.6 1.6 - 2.0 1.6 - 2.0 1.6 - 2.0 2.0 - 2.5 2.0 - 2.5 2.0 - 2.5 2.0 - 2.5 2.0 - 2.5 2.5 - 3.15 2.5 - 3.15 Gland Length F (less entry) 58.0 58.0 58.0 60.0 60.0 72.0 72.0 74.0 82.0 82.0 82.0 90.0 90.0 98.0 98.0 Hexagon Dimensions Across Flats 23.3 27.0 30.5 33.3 38.1 42.2 47.0 55.0 57.0 63.5 70.0 76.0 80.0 89.0 101.0 Across Corners G 26.0 31.0 34.0 37.0 43.0 47.0 53.0 64.0 62.0 71.0 78.0 85.0 88.0 102.0 112.0
Gland Size 20 20 20 25 25 32 32 40 50 50 50 63 63 75 75
Metric Size M20 M20 M20 M25 M25 M32 M32 M40 M50 M50 M50 M63 M63 M75 M75
Metric Catalog # TWAX1M13 TWAX1M16 TWAX1M20 TWAX2M24 TWAX2M27 TWAX3M30 TWAX3M33 TWAX4M38 TWAX5M43 TWAX5M48 TWAX5M52 TWAX6M60 TWAX6M65 TWAX7M71 TWAX7M78
NPT Size 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 3 /4" 3 /4" 1" 1" 11/4" 11/ 2" 11/2" 2" 2" 21/2" 21/2" 3"
NPT Catalog # TWAX1N13 TWAX1N16 TWAX1N20 TWAX2N24 TWAX2N27 TWAX3N30 TWAX3N33 TWAX4N38 TWAX5N43 TWAX5N48 TWAX6N52 TWAX6N60 TWAX7N65 TWAX7N71 TWAX8N78
76
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
TWAE
IECEx
IP66 and 67
4F
Gland Type:
Armoured
4F
Cable Type:
Steel wire armoured

IECEx TSA 08.0004 - Ex e II IP66 and 67 rated
Features:
Standard material is nickel-plated brass Armour clamping and bonding for steel wire armour cable Forms weatherproof seal on outer sheath of cable Standard neoprene seal suitable for use in operating temperatures -20 to 40C Available with metric, NPT or BSP threads A captive sealing gasket on entry threads See page 103 for related accessories
SELECTION TABLE
Entry Thread Size A Gland Size 20 20 25 32 40 50 63 75 Metric Size M20 M20 M25 M32 M40 M50 M63 M75 Metric Catalog # TWAE1M16 TWAE1M20 TWAE2M27 TWAE3M34 TWAE4M40 TWAE5M53 TWAE6M66 TWAE7M78 NPT Size (in.) 1 /2" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" NPT Catalog # TWAE1N16 TWAE1N20 TWAE2N27 TWAE3N34 TWAE4N40 TWAE5N53 TWAE6N66 TWAE7N78 Thread Length B Metric 14.0 14.0 16.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 22.0 22.0 Cable Acceptance Outer Inner Sheath E Sheath D Min 6.0 7.0 11.0 17.0 24.0 30.0 40.0 53.0 Max 11.0 13.0 19.0 25.0 31.0 41.0 54.0 65.0 Min 10.2 14.0 18.0 25.0 30.0 36.0 51.0 63.0 Max 15.8 20.8 27.2 33.5 39.5 52.6 65.3 78.0 Armour Range 0.9 - 1.25 0.9 - 1.25 1.25 - 1.6 1.6 - 2.0 1.6 - 2.0 2.0 - 2.5 2.0 - 2.5 2.5 - 3.5 Gland Length F (less entry) 58.0 58.0 60.0 72.0 74.0 82.0 90.0 98.0 Hexagon Dimensions Across Across Corners Flats G 27.0 31.0 30.4 34.0 38.5 43.0 47.2 53.0 55.0 62.0 70.0 78.0 80.0 88.0 101.0 112.0
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
77
4F
Ex-e
Sizes M12-M16: PTB 99 ATEX 3101 X Sizes M20-M63: PTB 99 ATEX 3128 X IECEx
IP66
4F
Gland Type:
Non-armoured
Cable Type:
Non-armoured

Sizes M12-M16: PTB 99 ATEX 3101 X Sizes M20-M63: PTB 99 ATEX 3128 X Ex II 2 G Ex e II/Ex II 2 D Ex tD A21 IECEx PTB 05.0004X IP66
Features:
Standard material is high-impact resistant polyamide Forms weatherproof seal on outer sheath of cable Standard silicone seal suitable for use in operating temperatures -55 to 70C (M12 and M16 for use in operating temperatures -20 to 70C) Available with optional silicone seal for extreme temperatures Available with metric threads See page 104 for related accessories
SELECTION TABLE - SHORT THREAD

Entry Thread Size A Gland Size Metric Size 12 M12 16 M16 20 M20 25 M25 32 M32 Metric Catalog # GHG 960 1955 R 0001 GHG 960 1955 R 0002 GHG 960 1955 R 0003 GHG 960 1955 R 0004 GHG 960 1955 R 0005 Thread Length B Metric 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 10.0 Cable Acceptance Outer Sheath E Min Max 4.0 7.0 5.5 10.0 5.5 13.0 8.0 17.0 12.0 21.0 Hexagon Dimensions Gland Length F (less entry) Across Flats Across Corners G 19.3 15.0 16.5 23.0 20.0 22.0 25.0 24.0 26.4 29.5 29.0 31.9 35.5 36.0 39.6
SELECTION TABLE - LONG THREAD

Entry Thread Size A Gland Size Metric Size 12 M12 16 M16 20 M20 25 M25 32 M32 40 M40 50 M50 63 M63 Metric Catalog # GHG 960 1955 R 0021 GHG 960 1955 R 0022 GHG 960 1955 R 0023 GHG 960 1955 R 0024 GHG 960 1955 R 0025 GHG 960 1955 R 0026 GHG 960 1955 R 0027 GHG 960 1955 R 0028 Cable Acceptance Thread Length B Metric 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 10.0 15.0 16.0 16.0 Outer Sheath E Min 4.0 5.5 5.5 8.0 12.0 17.0 22.0 27.0 Max 7.0 10.0 13.0 27.0 21.0 28.0 35.0 48.0 Gland Length F (less entry) 19.3 23.0 25.0 29.5 35.5 39.5 44.0 47.0 Hexagon Dimensions Across Flats Across Corners G 15.0 16.5 20.0 22.0 24.0 26.4 29.0 31.9 36.0 39.6 46.0 50.6 55.0 60.5 68.0 74.8
78
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Ex-i
Sizes M12-M16: PTB 99 ATEX 3101 X Sizes M20-M63: PTB 99 ATEX 3128 X IECEx
IP66
4F
Gland Type:
Non-armoured
4F
Cable Type:
Non-armoured

Sizes M12-M16: PTB 99 ATEX 3101 X Sizes M20-M63: PTB 99 ATEX 3128 X Ex II 2 G Ex e II/Ex II 2 D Ex tD A21 IECEx PTB 05.0004X IP66
Features:
Standard material is high-impact resistant polyamide (gland nut is blue for intrinsically safe circuits) Forms weatherproof seal on outer sheath of cable Standard silicone seal suitable for use in operating temperatures -55 to 70C (M12 and M16 for use in operating temperatures -20 to 70C) Available with metric threads See page 104 for related accessories
SELECTION TABLE SHORT THREAD

Entry Thread Size A Gland Size Metric Size 12 M12 16 M16 20 M20 25 M25 32 M32 Metric Catalog # GHG 960 1955 R 0101 GHG 960 1955 R 0102 GHG 960 1955 R 0103 GHG 960 1955 R 0104 GHG 960 1955 R 0105 Thread Length B Metric 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0 10.0 Cable Acceptance Outer Sheath E Min Max 4.0 7.0 5.5 10.0 5.5 13.0 8.0 17.0 12.0 21.0 Gland Length F (less entry) 19.3 23.0 25.0 29.5 35.5 Hexagon Dimensions Across Flats 15.0 20.0 24.0 29.0 36.0 Across Corners G 16.5 22.0 26.4 31.9 39.6
SELECTION TABLE LONG THREAD

Entry Thread Size A Gland Size Metric Size 12 M12 16 M16 20 M20 25 M25 32 M32 40 M40 50 M50 63 M63 Metric Catalog # GHG 960 1955 R 0121 GHG 960 1955 R 0122 GHG 960 1955 R 0123 GHG 960 1955 R 0124 GHG 960 1955 R 0125 GHG 960 1955 R 0126 GHG 960 1955 R 0127 GHG 960 1955 R 0128 Cable Acceptance Thread Length B Outer Sheath E Metric Min Max 12.0 4.0 7.0 12.0 5.5 10.0 13.0 5.5 13.0 13.0 8.0 17.0 15.0 12.0 21.0 15.0 17.0 28.0 16.0 22.0 35.0 16.0 27.0 48.0 Gland Length F (less entry) 19.3 23.0 25.0 29.5 35.5 39.5 44.0 47.0 Hexagon Dimensions Across Flats 15.0 20.0 24.0 29.0 36.0 46.0 55.0 68.0 Across Corners G 16.5 22.0 26.4 31.9 39.6 50.6 60.5 74.8
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
79
4F
Trumpet
ATEX
IP66
4F
Gland Type:
Non-armoured
Cable Type:
Non-armoured

ATEX PTB 00ATEX3121X Ex II 2 G Ex e II/Ex II 2 D Ex tD A21 IP66
Features:
Standard material is high-impact resistant polyamide Forms weatherproof seal on outer sheath of cable Flared rear seal provides protection for cable Standard neoprene seal suitable for use in operating temperatures -40 to 85C Available with metric threads See page 104 for related accessories
SELECTION TABLE
Gland Size 20 25 32 40 50 60 Entry Metric Size M20 M25 M32 M40 M50 M60 Thread Size A Metric Catalog # GHG 960 1949 GHG 960 1949 GHG 960 1949 GHG 960 1949 GHG 960 1949 GHG 960 1949 Thread Length B Metric 15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 16.0 16.0 Cable Acceptance Outer Sheath E Min Max 8.0 13.0 11.0 16.0 15.0 20.0 19.0 27.0 26.0 34.0 35.0 46.0 Gland Length F (less entry) 49.0 50.0 65.0 71.0 79.0 89.0 Hexagon Dimensions Across Across Flats Corners G 26.0 28.6 32.0 35.2 41.0 45.1 50.0 55.0 60.0 66.0 75.0 82.5
R0111 R0112 R0113 R0114 R0115 R0116
80
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Enlargement and Multiple

Sizes M16: PTB 99 ATEX 3101 X Sizes M20-M63: PTB 99 ATEX 3128 X IECEx
IP66
4F
Gland Type:
Non-armoured
4F
Cable Type:
Non-armoured

Sizes M16: PTB 99 ATEX 3101 X Sizes M20-M63: PTB 99 ATEX 3128 X Ex II 2 G Ex e II/Ex II 2 D Ex tD A21 IECEx PTB 05.0004X IP66
Features:
Standard material is high-impact resistant polyamide Forms weatherproof seal on outer sheath of cable Provides reduced entry threads for larger gland size Standard silicone seal suitable for use in operating temperatures -55 to 70C (M16 for use in operating temperatures -20 to 70C) Available with metric threads See page 104 for related accessories
SELECTION TABLE ENLARGEMENT

Gland Size 16/20 20/25 25/32 32/40 40/50 50/63 Entry Metric Size M16 M20 M25 M32 M40 M50 Thread Size A Metric Catalog # GHG 960 1956 R0002 GHG 960 1956 R0003 GHG 960 1956 R0004 GHG 960 1956 R0005 GHG 960 1956 R0006 GHG 960 1956 R0007 Thread Length B Metric 12.0 13.0 13.0 15.0 15.0 16.0 Cable Acceptance Outer Sheath E Min Max 5.5 13.0 8.0 17.0 12.0 21.0 16.0 28.0 21.0 35.0 27.0 48.0 Gland Length F (less entry) 25.0 29.5 35.5 39.5 44.0 47.0 Hexagon Dimensions Across Across Flats Corners G 24.0 26.4 29.0 31.9 36.0 39.6 46.0 50.6 55.0 60.5 68.0 74.8
SELECTION TABLE MULTIPLE

Gland Size 25 32 Entry Thread Size A Metric Size Metric Catalog # M25 GHG 960 1955 R0054 M32 GHG 960 1955 R0055 Thread Length B Metric 8.0 10.0 Cable Acceptance Outer Sheath E Min Max 4.5 7.0 4.5 7.0 Maximum Number of Conductors 2 4 Gland Length F (less entry) 29.5 39.5 Hexagon Dimensions Across Across Flats Corners G 36.0 39.6 46.0 50.6
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
81
4F
ADE 4I
International Standards Industrial
NEMA 4X and IP68
4F
Gland Type
Armoured
Cable Type
Steel wire armoured, steel wire braided, steel tape armoured, braided marine shipboard lead sheathed (with addition of earthing washer) and tray cable

NEMA 4X and IP68
Features:
Standard material is nickel-plated brass for superior corrosion resistance Armour clamping and bonding with no reversible components for easy installation, minimizing error Provides seal on inner jacket and weatherproof seal on outer sheath of the cable An optional earthing washer for use with lead sheathed cable (see page 99) Standard neoprene seal suitable for use in operating temperatures of -60C to 100C Available with optional silicone seal for extreme temperatures Available with metric or NPT threads See pages 98101 for related accessories
SELECTION TABLE
Entry Thread Size A Cable Acceptance Thread Length Inner Sheath Outer Sheath E D B Metric Min Max Min Max (NPT) 15 (12.0) 4.0 8.0 6.0 12.0 15 (12.0) 4.0 8.5 6.0 12.0 15 (12.0) 6.0 12.0 8.5 16.0 15 (20.2) 4.0 8.5 6.0 12.0 15 (20.2) 6.0 12.0 8.5 16.0 15 (20.2) 8.5 16.0 12.0 21.0 15 (20.2) 6.0 12.0 8.5 16.0 15 (20.2) 8.5 16.0 12.0 21.0 15 (20.2) 12.0 20.5 16.0 27.5 15 (25.3) 12.0 21.0 16.0 27.5 15 (25.3) 16.0 27.5 21.0 34.0 15 (26.0) 16.0 27.5 21.0 34.0 15 (26.0) 21.0 34.0 27.0 41.0 16 (26.5) 21.0 34.0 27.0 41.0 16 (26.5) 27.0 41.0 33.0 48.0 17 (27.2) 27.0 41.0 33.0 48.0 17 (27.2) 33.0 48.0 40.0 56.0 18 (40.5) 40.0 56.0 47.0 65.0 18 (40.5) 47.0 65.0 54.0 74.0 22 (42.0) 54.0 74.0 63.0 83.0 22 (42.0) 63.0 82.0 72.0 93.0 (43.2) 63.0 82.0 72.0 93.0 22 (44.5) 72.0 92.0 85.0 107.0 Gland Length F (less entry) 36.0 36.0 42.0 36.0 42.0 46.0 42.0 46.0 56.0 56.0 63.0 63.0 68.0 68.0 74.0 77.0 85.0 85.0 92.0 104.0 108.0 108.0 115.0 Hexagon Dimensions Across Flats Across Corners G 20.9 20.9 26.4 26.4 26.4 33.0 33.0 33.0 45.1 45.1 52.8 52.8 60.5 60.5 70.4 79.2 93.5 93.5 104.5 121.0 132.0 132.0 148.5
Gland Size 5 5 6 5 6 7 6 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 12 13 13 14 15 16 16 17
Metric Size M12 M16 M16 M20 M20 M20 M25 M25 M25 M32 M32 M40 M40 M50 M50 M63 M63 M75 M75 M90 M90 M110
Metric Catalog # CAP946404 CAP946594 CAP946504 CAP946674 CAP946694 CAP946604 CAP946774 CAP946794 CAP946704 CAP946894 CAP946804 CAP946994 CAP946904 CAP947094 CAP947004 CAP947294 CAP947204 CAP947394 CAP947304 CAP947594 CAP947504 CAP947794
NPT Size 1 /4" 3 /8" 3 /8" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 1" 1" 11/4" 11/4" 11/2" 11/2" 2" 2" 21/2" 21/2" 3" 3" 31/2" 4"
NPT Catalog # CAP948404 CAP948594 CAP948504 CAP948674 CAP948694 CAP948604 CAP948774 CAP948795 CAP948704 CAP948894 CAP948804 CAP948994 CAP948904 CAP949904 CAP949004 CAP949294 CAP949204 CAP949949 CAP949404 CAP949564 CAP949504 CAP949604 CAP949704
Armour (max) 0.9 0.9 1.25 0.9 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 2.0 2.0 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.15 3.15 3.15 3.15
82
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
TWA
Gland Type
Armoured
IP66 and 67
4F
4F
Cable Type
Steel wire armoured

IP66 and 67
Features:
Standard material is nickel-plated brass Armour clamping and bonding for steel wire armoured cable Forms weatherproof seal on outer sheath of cable Standard neoprene seal suitable for use in operating temperatures -20 to 40C Available with metric, NPT or BSP threads See page 103 for related accessories
SELECTION TABLE
Entry Thread Size A Gland Size 20 20 20 25 32 40 50 63 75 Metric Size M20 M20 M20 M25 M32 M40 M50 M63 M75 Metric Catalog # TWA1M13 TWA1M16 TWA1M20 TWA2M27 TWA3M34 TWA4M40 TWA5M53 TWA6M66 TWA7M78 NPT Size 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" NPT Catalog # TWA1N13 TWA1N16 TWA1N20 TWA2N27 TWA3N34 TWA4N40 TWA5N53 TWA6N66 TWA7N78 Thread Length B Metric 14.0 14.0 14.0 16.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 22.0 22.0 Cable Acceptance Inner Sheath D Min Max 3.0 8.0 6.0 11.0 7.0 13.0 11.0 19.0 17.0 25.0 24.0 31.0 30.0 41.0 40.0 54.0 53.0 65.0 Outer Sheath E Min Max 8.0 13.0 10.2 15.8 14.0 20.8 18.0 27.2 25.0 33.5 30.0 39.5 36.0 52.6 51.0 65.3 63.0 78.0 Armour Range 0.5 - 0.9 0.9 - 1.25 0.9 - 1.25 1.25 - 1.6 1.6 - 2.0 1.6 - 2.0 2.0 - 2.5 2.0 - 2.5 2.5 - 3.5 Gland Length F (less entry) 56.0 58.0 58.0 60.0 72.0 74.0 82.0 90.0 98.0 Hexagon Dimensions Across Across Corners G Flats 27.0 31.0 27.0 31.0 30.4 34.0 38.5 43.0 47.2 53.0 57.0 64.0 70.0 78.0 80.0 88.0 101.0 112.0
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
83
4F
TUA
IP66 and 67
4F
Gland Type
Non-armoured
Cable Type
Non-armoured

IP66 and 67
Features:
Standard material is nickel-plated brass Forms weatherproof seal on outer sheath of cable Standard neoprene seal suitable for use in operating temperatures -20 to 40C Available with metric, NPT or BSP threads See page 103 for related accessories
SELECTION TABLE
Entry Thread Size A Gland Size 16 20 20 20 25 32 32 40 50 50 50 63 63 75 75 Metric Size M16 M20 M20 M20 M25 M32 M32 M40 M50 M50 M50 M63 M63 M75 M75 Metric Catalog # TUA16M7 TUA1M10 TUA1M12 TUA1M15 TUA2M18 TUA3M23 TUA3M25 TUA4M29 TUA5M34 TUA5M38 TUA5M42 TUA6M48 TUA6M54 TUA7M60 TUA7M66 NPT Size N/A 1 /2" 1 /2" 3 /4" 3 /4" 1" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 11/2" 2" 2" 21/2" 21/2" 3" NPT Catalog # N/A TUA1N10 TUA1N12 TUA1N15 TUA2N18 TUA3N23 TUA3N25 TUA4N29 TUA5N34 TUA5N38 TUA5N42 TUA6N48 TUA7N54 TUA7N60 TUA8N66 Thread Length B Metric 14.0 14.0 14.0 16.0 16.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 22.0 Cable Acceptance Outer Sheath E Min 10.2 13.0 15.5 19.5 23.5 27.0 30.0 33.0 38.0 43.0 48.0 52.0 58.0 64.3 70.6 Max 13.2 15.8 19.8 23.8 27.2 30.5 33.5 38.5 43.5 48.5 52.6 58.9 65.3 71.6 78.0 Gland Length F (less entry) 58.0 58.0 58.0 60.0 60.0 72.0 72.0 74.0 82.0 82.0 82.0 90.0 90.0 98.0 98.0 Hexagon Dimensions Across Flats 23.3 27.0 30.5 33.3 38.1 42.2 47.0 55.0 57.0 63.5 70.0 76.0 80.0 89.0 101.0 Across Corners G 26.0 31.0 34.0 37.0 43.0 47.0 53.0 64.0 62.0 71.0 78.0 85.0 88.0 102.0 112.0
84
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
TMCX
North American Standards Explosionproof
Gland Type
UL Listed CSA Certified Class I, Div. 1 Groups, A, B, C, D Class II; Class III
NEMA 4 and IP56 Wet locations
4F
4F
Armoured barrier, TECK armoured and non-armoured barrier
Cable Type
Metal-clad (interlocked or continuously welded corrugated armoured), non-armoured and tray cable

UL Listed, CSA Certified Class I, Div. 1, Groups, A, B, C, D; Class II; Class III UL File E122485, CSA File LR13046 NEMA 4 and IP56 rated Wet locations
Features:
Standard material is aluminum Stainless steel copper-plated spring provides grounding continuity of cable armour (MC cable only) Provides explosionproof compound seal on conductors and watertight seal on outer sheath of cable Standard neoprene seal suitable for use in operating temperatures -25 to 60C Cold Shrink Kit is available for extra protection in aggressive environments (see page 105) Available with NPT threads See page 105 for related accessories
SELECTION TABLE
Entry Thread Size A NPT Size 1 /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" NPT Catalog # TMCX165 TMCX285 TMCX3112 TMCX4140 TMCX5161 TMCX6206 TMCX7247 TMCX8302 TMCX9352 TMCX10402 Thread Length B NPT 0.750 0.781 0.938 0.969 0.969 1.000 1.438 1.438 1.625 1.625 Min 0.440 0.600 0.800 1.100 1.330 1.570 1.930 2.450 2.950 3.500 Cable Acceptance Armour Range H Max 0.650 0.850 1.120 1.400 1.610 2.060 2.470 3.020 3.520 4.020 Outer Sheath E Min 0.490 0.650 0.850 1.150 1.380 1.630 1.990 2.525 3.025 3.585 Max 0.781 1.000 1.313 1.625 1.781 2.313 2.719 3.281 3.781 4.281 Gland Length F (less entry) 2.625 2.875 3.125 3.125 3.375 5.313 6.063 6.063 7.750 8.313 Hexagon Dimensions Across Flats 1.250 1.500 1.875 2.250 2.500 3.250 3.750 4.500 5.000 5.500 Across Corners G 1.375 1.625 2.000 2.438 2.750 3.500 4.000 4.875 5.375 5.875
All dimensions in inches unless otherwise noted.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
85
4F
ADE 6FC
CEPEL ATEX GOST-R IECEx NEMA 4X and IP68 cULus listed for Class I, Zone 2 cULus Marine listed for Class I, Div. 1
4F
Gland Type
Armoured barrier
Cable Type

Features:
Standard material is nickel-plated brass for superior corrosion resistance Armour clamping with no reversible components for easy installation, minimizing error Provides exposionproof compound seal (denoted by red back nut) on conductors and weatherproof seal on outer sheath of cable Deluge boot provides enhanced protection from water ingress Standard neoprene seal suitable for use in operating temperatures -60C to 80C Available with metric or NPT threads See pages 98101 for related accessories
SELECTION TABLE
Entry Thread Size A Cable Acceptance Inner Sheath and Cores Thread Max Max Length Over Inner Max B Metric Cores Sheath No. of 'C' 'D' Cores (NPT) 15 (12.0) 6.5 7.5 6 15 (20.2) 6.5 7.5 6 15 (20.2) 9.5 11.0 6 15 (20.2) 12.0 14.5 10 15 (20.5) 12.0 14.5 10 15 (20.5) 17.0 19.5 21 15 (25.3) 17.0 19.5 21.0 15 (25.3) 23.0 28.0 42.0 15 (26.0) 23.0 28.0 42.0 15 (26.0) 29.0 33.0 60.0 16 (26.5) 29.0 33.0 60.0 16 (27.2) 36.5 41.0 80.0 Outer Sheath E Hexagon Dimensions
Gland Metric Metric NPT NPT Size Size Catalog # Size Catalog # 5 M16 CAP969594 3/8" CAP974594 5 M20 CAP969674 1/2" CAP971674 6 M20 CAP969694 1/2" CAP971674 7 M20 CAP969604 1/2" CAP971604 7 M25 CAP969794 3/4" CAP971794 8 M25 CAP969704 3/4" CAP971704 8 M32 CAP969894 1" CAP971894 9 M32 CAP969804 1" CAP971804 9 M40 CAP969994 11/4" CAP971994 10 M40 CAP969904 11/4" CAP971904 10 M50 CAP970094 11/2" CAP972094 11 M50 CAP970004 2" CAP972004
Gland Length F Armour (less Across Min Max (max) entry) Flats 6.0 12.0 0.9 46 6.0 12.0 0.9 46 8.5 16.0 1.25 53 12.0 21.0 1.25 59 12.0 21.0 1.25 59 16.0 27.5 1.6 74.5 16.0 27.5 1.6 74.5 21.0 34.0 1.6 83.5 21.0 34.0 1.6 83.5 27.0 41.0 2.0 92 27.0 41.0 2.0 92 33.0 48.0 2.5 104
Across Corners G 20.9 26.4 26.4 33 33 45.1 45.1 52.8 52.8 60.5 60.5 70.4
86
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
ADE 1FC
Gland Type
Non-armoured barrier
ATEX IECEx cULus listed for Class I, Zone 2 cULus Marine listed for Class I, Div. 1
CEPEL GOST-R NEMA 4X and IP68
4F
4F
Cable Type
Non-armoured, armoured and tray cable (does not terminate the armour)

Features:
Standard material is nickel-plated brass for superior corrosion resistance Provides a flameproof and weatherproof seal on outer sheath of cable Provides explosionproof compound seal (denoted by red back nut) on conductors Deluge boot provides enhanced protection from water ingress Standard neoprene seal suitable for use in operating temperatures -60C to 80C Available with metric or NPT threads See pages 98101 for related accessories
SELECTION TABLE
Entry Thread Size A Gland Size 4 4 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 Metric Size M16 M20 M20 M20 M25 M25 M32 M32 M40 M40 M50 M50 M63 Metric Catalog # CAP019594 CAP019674 CAP019694 CAP019604 CAP019794 CAP019704 CAP019894 CAP019804 CAP019994 CAP019904 CAP019094 CAP019004 CAP019204 NPT Size 3 /8" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 3 /4" 3 /4" 1" 1" 11/4" 11/4" 11/2" 2" --NPT Catalog # CAP011594 CAP971674 CAP011674 CAP011604 CAP011794 CAP011704 CAP011894 CAP011804 CAP011994 CAP011904 CAP011094 CAP011004 --Thread Cable Acceptance Length B Outer Sheath E Metric (NPT) Max Min 15 (12.0) 4.0 7.5 15 (22.2) 4.0 7.5 15 (22.2) 6.5 11.0 15 (22.2) 9.0 14.5 15 (22.5) 9.0 14.5 15 (22.5) 12.0 19.5 15 (27.3) 12.0 19.5 15 (27.3) 17.5 26.0 15 (28.0) 17.5 26.0 15 (28.0) 23.0 33.0 16 (28.5) 23.0 33.0 16 (29.2) 28.5 41.0 16 28.5 41.0 Max No. Cores 6.0 6.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 21.0 21.0 42.0 42.0 60.0 60.0 80.0 80.0 Gland Length F (less entry) 46.0 46.0 53.0 59.0 59.0 74.5 74.5 83.5 83.5 92.0 92.0 104.0 Hexagon Dimensions Across Across Flats Corners G 20.9 26.4 26.4 33.0 33.0 45.1 45.1 52.8 52.8 60.5 60.5 70.4 73.7
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
87
4F
CGBS and EBY

CGBS: CSA Certified Class I, Div 1. Groups C, D Class II, Div. 1 & 2, Groups E, F, G Class III
EBY: UL, cUL Listed Class I, Div. 1 Groups, B, C, D Class II, Div. 1 Groups, F, G
4F
Gland Type
Cable Type

CSA Certified Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D Class II, Div. 1 & 2, Groups E, F, G Class III CSA File LR13046
CGBS Features:
Body steel with zinc electroplate and chromate finish coat Gland nut aluminum Body well for Chico A sealing compound (for ordering information please contact customer service) Standard neoprene seal suitable for use in operating temperatures -25 to 40C Available with NPT threads
SELECTION TABLE
Entry NPT Size 1 /2" 3 /4" 3 /4" 1" 1" 11/4" 11/4" 11/4" Thread Size A NPT Catalog # CGBS1013 CGBS2013 CGBS2014 CGBS3015 CGBS3016 CGBS4017 CGBS4018 CGBS4019 Form A A A B B B B B Outer Sheath E Min 0.312 0.312 0.375 0.500 0.625 0.750 0.875 1.000 Max 0.437 0.437 0.500 0.625 0.750 0.875 1.000 1.188 Gland Length F (less entry) 51/4" 51/4" 51/4" 27/8" 215/16" 213/16" 31/2" 39/16"
Gland Type
Cable Type
Non-armoured
Certifications and Compliances

UL, cUL Listed Class I, Div. 1, Groups, B, C, D Class II, Div. 1, Groups, F, G UL File E10279
EBY Features:
Standard material is aluminum Factory sealed conductors and seal on outer sheath of cable Three, 12-inch long, #12 type SF-2 (150C rating) stranded pigtails; two circuit wires and one identified grounding wire Three pressure connectors for 3-conductor cord, range #18 to #12 AWG Standard neoprene seal suitable for use in operating temperatures -25 to 40C Available with NPT threads
SELECTION TABLE
Entry Thread Size A NPT Size 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" NPT Catalog # EBY2672 EBY2682 EBY26102 Outer Sheath E Min Max 0.250 0.437 0.375 0.500 0.500 0.625
88
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
TMC
North American Standards General Purpose
Gland Type
Armoured, TECK armoured and non-armoured
UL, cUL Listed
NEMA 4 and IP56 Wet locations
4F
4F
Cable Type
Metal-clad (interlocked or continuously welded corrugated armoured), non-armoured and tray cable

UL, cUL Listed UL File E36379 NEMA 4 and IP56 Wet locations
Features:
Standard material is aluminum Stainless steel copper-plated spring provides grounding continuity of cable armour (MC cable only) Watertight seal on outer sheath of cable Standard neoprene seal suitable for use in operating temperatures -25 to 60C Cold Shrink Kit is available for extra protection in aggressive environments (see page 105) Available with NPT threads See page 105 for related accessories
SELECTION TABLE
Entry Thread Size A NPT Size 1 /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" NPT Catalog # TMC165 TMC285 TMC3112 TMC4140 TMC5161 TMC6206 TMC7247 TMC8302 TMC9352 TMC10402 Thread Length B NPT 0.750 0.781 0.938 0.969 0.969 1.000 1.438 1.438 1.625 1.625 Cable Acceptance Armour Range H Min Max 0.440 0.650 0.600 0.850 0.800 1.120 1.100 1.400 1.330 1.610 1.570 2.060 1.930 2.470 2.450 3.020 2.950 3.520 3.500 4.020 Outer Sheath E Min Max 0.490 0.781 0.650 1.000 0.850 1.313 1.150 1.625 1.380 1.781 1.630 2.313 1.990 2.719 2.525 3.281 3.025 3.781 3.585 4.281 Gland Length F (less entry) 2.375 2.625 2.625 2.750 2.750 4.500 4.750 4.875 5.375 5.500 Hexagon Dimensions Across Flats 1.250 1.500 1.875 2.250 2.500 3.250 3.750 4.500 5.000 5.500 Across Corners G 1.375 1.625 2.000 2.438 2.75 3.500 4.000 4.875 5.375 5.875
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
89
4F
TECK
CSA Certified Class II, Div. 1, Div 2 Groups, E, F, G Type 4 and IP56 Class III - CSA Wet locations
4F
Gland Type
Armoured
Cable Type
TECK armoured

CSA Certified Class II, Div. 1 & Div. 2, Groups, E, F, G; Class III CSA File LR13046 Type 4 and IP56 Wet locations
Features:
Standard material is aluminum Stainless steel copper-plated spring provides grounding continuity of cable armour (TECK cable only) Watertight seal on outer sheath of cable Standard neoprene seal suitable for use in operating temperatures -25 to 60C Cold Shrink Kit is available for extra protection in aggressive environments ( see page 105) An integral o-ring seal on entry threads Available with NPT threads See page 105 for related accessories
SELECTION TABLE
Stainless Steel Catalog # TECK050 1SS TECK050 2SS TECK050 3SS TECK050 4SS TECK075 5SS TECK075 6SS TECK100 7SS Hexagon Gland Entry Cable Acceptance Dimensions Length Thread F Across Size A Thread Armour Range H Outer Sheath E (less Across Corners NPT Length Min Max Min Max entry) Size B NPT G Flats 1 /2" 0.630 0.415 0.570 0.525 0.650 2.300 1.250 1.350 1 /2" 0.630 0.490 0.680 0.600 0.760 2.300 1.375 1.500 1 /2" 0.630 0.615 0.805 0.725 0.885 2.300 1.500 1.600 1 /2" 0.630 0.715 0.905 0.825 0.985 2.300 1.500 1.600 3 /4" 0.630 0.770 0.985 0.880 1.065 2.500 2.000 2.125 3 /4" 0.630 0.915 1.125 1.025 1.205 2.500 2.000 2.125 1" 0.750 1.077 1.295 1.187 1.375 2.625 2.250 2.400 0.800 1.240 1.545 1.350 1.625 3.500 3.000 3.125 11/4" 0.800 1.390 1.545 1.500 1.625 3.400 3.000 3.125 11/4" 0.800 1.490 1.795 1.600 1.875 3.500 3.000 3.125 11/4" 0.800 1.590 1.885 1.700 1.965 3.800 3.750 3.600 11/2" 0.800 1.790 2.107 1.900 2.187 3.900 3.500 3.750 11/2" 2" 0.825 1.790 2.107 1.900 2.187 4.000 3.750 4.000 2" 0.825 1.990 2.280 2.100 2.375 4.000 3.750 4.000 2" 0.875 2.190 2.485 2.300 2.565 4.000 4.125 4.400 2" 0.875 2.390 2.656 2.500 2.750 4.000 4.125 4.400 1.300 2.240 2.560 2.380 2.640 5.000 4.500 4.750 21/2" 1.300 2.440 2.750 2.580 2.840 5.000 4.500 4.750 21/2" 3" 1.400 2.640 2.970 2.790 3.060 5.000 4.600 4.900 3" 1.400 2.870 3.190 3.000 3.270 5.000 4.900 5.250 3" 1.400 3.042 3.390 3.210 3.480 5.000 5.000 5.250 1.400 3.270 3.590 3.420 3.690 5.000 5.600 5.900 31/2" 31/2" 1.400 3.440 3.770 3.610 3.870 5.000 5.500 5.900 4" 1.400 3.600 3.930 3.810 4.030 5.000 6.125 6.500 4" 1.400 3.755 4.065 3.965 4.185 5.000 6.125 6.500 4" 1.400 3.910 4.220 4.120 4.340 5.000 6.125 6.500
Aluminum Catalog # TECK050 1 TECK050 2 TECK050 3 TECK050 4 TECK075 5 TECK075 6 TECK100 7 TECK125 8 TECK125 9 TECK125 10 TECK150 11 TECK150 12 TECK200 13 TECK200 14 TECK200 15 TECK200 16 TECK250 17 TECK250 18 TECK300 19 TECK300 20 TECK300 21 TECK350 22 TECK350 23 TECK400 24 TECK400 25 TECK400 26
Steel Catalog # TECK050 1S TECK050 2S TECK050 3S TECK050 4S TECK075 5S TECK075 6S TECK100 7S TECK125 8S TECK125 9S TECK125 10S TECK150 11S TECK150 12S TECK200 13S TECK200 14S TECK200 15S TECK200 16S TECK250 17S TECK250 18S TECK300 19S TECK300 20S TECK300 21S TECK350 22S TECK350 23S TECK400 24S TECK400 25S TECK400 26S
PVC Catalog # TECK050 1PVC TECK050 2 PVC TECK0503PVC TECK050 4PVC TECK075 5PVC TECK075 6PVC TECK1007PVC TECK125 8PVC TECK125 9PVC TECK125 10PVC TECK150 11PVC TECK150 12PVC TECK200 13PVC TECK200 14PVC TECK200 15PVC TECK200 16PVC TECK250 17PVC TECK250 18PVC TECK300 19PVC TECK300 20PVC TECK300 21PVC TECK350 22PVC TECK350 23PVC
90
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
CGB
Gland Type
Non-armoured
cULus Listed
4F
4F
Cable Type

cULus Listed - UL File E23223
Features:
Form A - D bodies and gland nuts steel with zinc electroplate and chromate finish coat Form E - F bodies and gland nuts Feraloy iron alloy with electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Weatherproof seal on outer sheath of cable Standard neoprene seal suitable for use in operating temperatures -25 to 40C Available with NPT threads Available in all aluminum construction See page 105 for related accessories
SELECTION TABLE
Entry Thread Size A NPT Size 3 /8" 3 /8" 3 /8" 3 /8" 3 /8" 3 /8" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" NPT Catalog # CGB3814 CGB3816 CGB3817 CGB3892 CGB3893 CGB3894 CGB114 CGB116 CGB117 CGB192* CGB193* CGB194* CGB195* CGB196* CGB197* CGB292 CGB293 CGB294 CGB295 CGB296* CGB297* CGB298* CGB393 CGB394 CGB395* CGB396* CGB397* CGB3239 CGB398* CGB399* CGB3911* Form A A A B B B A A A B B B B C C B B B B C C D B B C C C C D D D Thread Length B NPT 0.438 0.438 0.438 0.438 0.438 0.438 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.750* 0.750* 0.750* 0.750* 0.625* 0.625* 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625 0.625* 0.625* 0.625* 0.688 0.688 0.688* 0.688* 0.688* 0.688 0.625* 0.625* 0.625* Cable Acceptance Outer Sheath E Min 0.125 0.250 0.375 0.125 0.250 0.375 0.125 0.250 0.375 0.125 0.250 0.375 0.500 0.625 0.750 0.125 0.250 0.375 0.500 0.625 0.750 0.875 0.250 0.375 0.500 0.625 0.750 0.875 0.875 1.000 1.188 Max 0.250 0.375 0.437 0.250 0.375 0.500 0.250 0.375 0.437 0.250 0.375 0.500 0.625 0.750 0.875 0.250 0.375 0.500 0.625 0.750 0.875 1.000 0.375 0.500 0.625 0.750 0.875 1.000 1.000 1.188 1.375 Gland Length F (less entry) 1.063 1.063 1.063 1.313 1.313 1.313 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.313 1.313 1.313 1.313 1.750 1.750 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.750 1.750 2.500 1.375 1.375 1.688 1.688 1.688 1.688 2.375 2.375 2.375 External Diameter G 2.250 2.375 2.375 2.375 Hexagon Dimensions Across Flats 0.750 0.750 0.750 1.000 1.000 1.000 0.875 0.875 0.875 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.500 1.500 1.060 1.060 1.060 1.060 1.630 1.630 1.375 1.375 1.500 1.500 1.500 Across Corners G 0.875 0.875 0.875 1.188 1.188 1.188 1.188 1.188 1.188 1.188 1.188 1.188 1.188 1.656 1.656 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.250 1.656 1.656 1.625 1.625 1.875 1.875 1.875 1.875
All dimensions in inches unless otherwise noted. *With optional Sealing Gasket. With optional Aluminum Construction.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
91
4F
CGB
cULus Listed
4F
Entry Thread Size A NPT Size 11/4" 11/4" 11/4" 11/4" 11/4" 11/2" 11/2" 11/2" 11/2" 11/2" 2" 2" 2" 2" 21/2" 21/2" 21/2" 21/2" 3" 3" NPT Catalog # CGB498 CGB499 CGB4911 CGB4913 CGB4915 CGB598 CGB599 CGB5911 CGB5913 CGB5915 CGB6913 CGB6915 CGB6917 CGB6920 CGB7913 CGB7915 CGB7917 CGB7920 CGB8917 CGB8920 Form D D D E E D D D E E E E F F E E F F F F
Thread Length B NPT 0.688 0.688 0.688 0.688 0.688 0.813 0.813 0.813 0.813 0.813 0.813 0.813 0.813 0.813 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000 1.000
Cable Acceptance Outer Sheath E Min 0.875 1.000 1.188 1.375 1.625 0.875 1.000 1.188 1.375 1.625 1.375 1.625 1.875 2.188 1.375 1.625 1.875 2.188 1.875 2.188 Max 1.000 1.188 1.375 1.625 1.875 1.000 1.188 1.375 1.625 1.875 1.625 1.875 2.188 2.500 1.625 1.875 2.188 2.500 2.188 2.500
Gland Length F (less entry) 2.313 2.313 2.313 2.625 2.625 2.313 2.313 2.313 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.563 2.563 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625 2.625
External Diameter G 2.250 2.250 2.250 3.000 3.000 2.250 2.250 2.250 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.750 3.750 3.125 3.125 3.750 3.750 3.750 3.750
Hexagon Dimensions Across Flats Across Corners G
92
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
CGD
cULus Listed
4F
Gland Type
Non-armoured
4F
Cable Type

cULus Listed - Ul File E23223
Features:
45 angle with male thread Standard body material is Feraloy iron alloy Standard gland nut material is steel Weatherproof seal on outer sheath of cable Standard neoprene seal suitable for use in operating temperatures -25 to 40C Available with NPT threads See page 105 for related accessories
SELECTION TABLE
Entry Thread Size A NPT Size NPT Catalog # 1 /2" CGD192 /2" /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4"
1 1
Thread Length B NPT 0.630 0.630 0.630 0.630 0.630 0.630 0.630 0.630 0.630 0.630 0.630 0.630
Cable Acceptance Outer Sheath E Min Max 0.125 0.250 0.250 0.375 0.500 0.625 0.750 0.125 0.250 0.375 0.500 0.625 0.750 0.375 0.500 0.625 0.750 0.875 0.250 0.375 0.500 0.625 0.750 0.875
Gland Length F (less entry) 1.688 1.688 1.688 1.688 2.063 2.063 1.938 1.938 1.938 1.938 2.000 2.000
External Diameter G 1.188 1.188 1.188 1.188 1.625 1.625 1.141 1.141 1.125 1.125 1.625 1.625
CGD193 CGD194 CGD195 CGD196 CGD197 CGD292 CGD293 CGD294 CGD295 CGD296 CGD297
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
93
4F
CGE
cULus Listed
4F
Gland Type
Non-armoured
Cable Type

Features:
90 angle with male thread Standard body material is Feraloy iron alloy Standard gland nut material is steel Weatherproof seal on outer sheath of cable Standard neoprene seal suitable for use in operating temperatures -25 to 40C Available with NPT threads See page 105 for related accessories
SELECTION TABLE
Entry Thread Size A NPT Size /2" /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 1"
1 1
NPT Catalog # CGE192 CGE193 CGE194 CGE195 CGE196 CGE197 CGE292 CGE293 CGE294 CGE295 CGE296 CGE297 CGE395 CGE396 CGE397 CGE3239 CGE398 CGE399 CGE3911
Thread Length B NPT 0.710 0.710 0.710 0.710 0.710 0.710 0.710 0.710 0.710 0.710 0.710 0.710 0.710 0.710 0.710 0.710 0.710 0.710 0.710
Cable Acceptance Outer Sheath E Min 0.1250 0.2500 0.3750 0.5000 0.6250 0.7500 0.1250 0.2500 0.3750 0.5000 0.6250 0.7500 0.5000 0.6250 0.7500 0.8750 0.8750 1.0000 1.1880 Max 0.2500 0.3750 0.5000 0.6250 0.7500 0.8750 0.2500 0.3750 0.5000 0.6250 0.7500 0.8750 0.6250 0.7500 0.8750 1.0000 1.0000 1.1880 1.3750
Gland Length F (less entry) 1.438 1.438 1.438 1.438 2.000 2.000 1.406 1.406 1.406 1.406 1.875 1.875 2.063 2.094 2.094 2.094 2.656 2.656 2.656
External Diameter G 1.188 1.188 1.188 1.188 1.625 1.625 1.188 1.188 1.188 1.188 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 1.625 2.250 2.250 1.625 2.250
94
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
CGB1013
cULus Listed
4F
Gland Type
4F
Cable Type

Features:
Body steel with zinc electroplate and chromate finish coat Gland nut material is aluminum Standard neoprene seal suitable for use in operating temperatures -25 to 40C Available with NPT threads See page 105 for related accessories
SELECTION TABLE
Entry Thread Size A NPT Size NPT Catalog # 1 /2" CGB1013 1 /2" CGB1014 1 /2" CGB1015 3 /4" CGB2013 3 /4" CGB2014 3 /4" CGB2015
Outer Sheath E Min 0.312 0.375 0.500 0.312 0.375 0.500 Max 0.437 0.500 0.625 0.437 0.500 0.625
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
95
4F
CGFP
4F
Gland Type:
Non-armoured
Cable Type:
Features:
Form B - C standard body and gland nut are turned steel Form D - G standard body and gland nut are Feraloy iron alloy Weatherproof seal on outer sheath of cable Standard neoprene seal suitable for use in operating temperatures -25 to 40C Available with NPT threads See page 105 for related accessories
SELECTION TABLE
Entry Thread Size A NPT Size 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 1" 1" 1" 11/4" 11/4" 11/2" 11/2" 2" 2" 21/2" 21/2" 3" 3" 31/2" 31/2" 4" 4" NPT Catalog # CGFP192 CGFP193 CGFP194 CGFP195 CGFP296 CGFP297 CGFP2239 CGFP396 CGFP397 CGFP3239 CGFP499 CGFP4911 CGFP599 CGFP5911 CGFP6913 CGFP6915 CGFP7917 CGFP7920 CGFP8917 CGFP8920 CGFP923 CGFP927 CGFP1023 CGFP1027 Form B B B B C C C C C C D D D D E E F F F F G G G G Thread Length B NPT 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.750 0.938 0.938 0.938 0.938 0.938 0.938 0.938 1.000 1.000 1.438 1.438 1.500 1.500 1.563 1.563 1.625 1.625 Cable Acceptance Outer Sheath E Min Max 0.1250 0.2500 0.2500 0.3750 0.3750 0.5000 0.5000 0.6250 0.6250 0.7500 0.7500 0.8750 0.8750 1.0000 0.6250 0.7500 0.7500 0.8750 0.8750 1.0000 1.0000 1.1880 1.1880 1.3750 1.0000 1.1880 1.1880 1.3750 1.3750 1.6250 1.6250 1.8750 1.8750 2.1880 2.1880 2.5000 1.8750 2.1880 2.1880 2.5000 2.5000 3.0000 3.0000 3.5000 2.5000 3.0000 3.0000 3.5000 Gland Length F (less entry) 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.375 1.750 1.750 1.750 1.750 1.750 1.750 2.375 2.375 2.375 2.375 3.250 3.250 3.250 3.250 3.250 3.250 4.250 4.250 4.250 4.250 External Diameter G 1.281 1.281 1.281 1.281 1.781 1.781 1.781 1.781 1.781 1.781 2.250 2.250 2.250 2.250 3.250 3.250 3.875 3.875 3.875 3.875 5.500 5.500 5.500 5.500
96
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
NCG and NCGB

cULus Listed NEMA 3, 4X (NCGB only)
4F
Gland Type:
Non-armoured
4F
Cable Type:

SELECTION TABLE
Entry Thread Size A NPT Size NPT Catalog # 3 /8" NCG38 35 1 /2" NCG50 50 3 /4" NCG75 75 1" NCG100 100
NCG Features:
Outer Sheath E Min Max 0.10 0.35 0.20 0.50 0.35 0.75 0.55 1.00 Standard material is polyamide 6 Weatherproof seal on outer sheath of cable Standard neoprene seal suitable for use in operating temperatures -25 to 40C Available with NPT threads
POLYAMIDE LOCK NUT SELECTION TABLE

Size 3 /8"
1 3
Catalog # 10N 11N 12N 13N
/2" /4"
1"
Gland Type:
Non-armoured
Cable Type:

cULus Listed - UL File E23223 NEMA 3, 4X
SELECTION TABLE
NPT Size 1 /2" 1 /2" 3 /4" 3 /4" 1" 1" NPT Catalog # NCGB1231 NCGB1232 NCGB2233 NCGB2234 NCGB3235 NCGB3236 Cable Acceptance Range 'E' Min Max 0.25 0.42 0.40 0.57 0.54 0.68 0.64 0.78 0.76 0.91 0.89 1.03 Gland Length (Less Entry) 'F' 2.25 2.25 2.52 2.52 3.19 3.19 External Diameter 'G' 1.33 1.33 1.58 1.58 2.02 2.02
NCGB Features:
Standard material is thermoplastic polyester Tightens by hand to create a watertight seal Gasket on entry threads included Compact design allows close grouping of connectors Available with NPT threads
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
97
4F
Accessories A Series
4F
A Series Lock Nut

Entry Thread M16 M20 M25 M32 M40 M50 M63 M75 A 3 3 3 3.5 4 5 6 8 B 18 23 28 36 44 54 70 85
Standard material is nickel-plated brass
METRIC SELECTION TABLE

Catalog # CAP221694 CAP222094 CAP222594 CAP223294 CAP224094 CAP225094 CAP226394 CAP227594
1
NPT SELECTION TABLE

Entry Thread /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" A 3.5 3.5 4.5 4.5 5 5.5 6.5 B 24 30 37 47 52 64 77 Catalog # CAP280124 CAP280134 CAP280144 CAP280154 CAP280164 CAP280174 CAP280184
* For stainless steel replace last digit with "9".
A Series Sealing Washer Standard material is neoprene METRIC SELECTION TABLE NPT SELECTION TABLE
Metric Metric Size Catalog # 10 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 CAP221049 CAP221249 CAP221649 CAP222049 CAP222549 CAP223249 CAP224049 CAP225049 CAP226349 Metric Diam. D 15.0 18.0 22.0 24.0 30.0 42.0 52.0 63.0 77.0 Metric Thickness E 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 NPT Size /4" /8" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2"
1 3
NPT Catalog # CAP229014 CAP229038 CAP229012 CAP229034 CAP229010 CAP229114 CAP229112 CAP229020 CAP229212 CAP229300 CAP229312
NPT Diam. D 20.0 22.0 27.0 33.0 41.0 52.0 57.0 71.0 85.0 104.0 120.0
NPT Thickness E 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
A Series Earth Tag Standard material is nickel-plated brass METRIC SELECTION TABLE
Entry Thread M16 M20 M25 M32 M40 M50 M63 M75 A 48.75 53.8 61.5 73 86.5 111.5 125.5 137.5 B 30 33 36 41 44.5 58 67 73 C 6.75 7 10.5 12.2 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5 D 24.5 28.6 34 42 54 67 77 89 Catalog # CAP567034 CAP567054 CAP567074 CAP567094 CAP567124 CAP567154 CAP567184 CAP567194
NPT SELECTION TABLE

Entry Thread /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2"
1
A 61.5 73 73 86.5 111.5 125.5 137.5
B 36 41 41 44.5 58 67 73
C 10.5 12.2 12.2 13.5 13.5 13.5 13.5
D 34 42 42 54 67 77 89
Catalog # CAP567064 CAP567084 CAP567104 CAP567134 CAP567154 CAP567174 CAP567194
98
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
4F
A Series Serrated Lock Washer

Standard material is stainless steel
A-Series Shroud
Standard material is PVC
4F
SELECTION TABLE
Gland Size Catalog # CAP506040 CAP506050 CAP506060 CAP506070 CAP506080 CAP506090 CAP506100 CAP506110 CAP506120 CAP506130 CAP506140 CAP506150 CAP506160
SELECTION TABLE
Metric Size 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 75 90 External Diameter 25.5 32.5 39.5 49.5 64.5 80.5 100 112 123 Catalog # CAP280069 CAP280029 CAP280259 CAP280329 CAP280409 CAP280509 CAP280639 CAP280759 CAP280099
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
A Series Clamping Module

Standard materials are nickel-plated brass body with stainless steel screws and washers
SELECTION TABLE
Cable Range Gland Size 4-8.5 6-11 8.5-16 12-21 16-27.5 21-34 27-41 33-48 40-56 47-65 54-74 63-83 72-93 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Across Flats 15 19 24 30 41 48 55 64 72 85 95 110 120 Width 18 22 27.5 33.5 45 52 59 69 78 92 103 118 128 Thickness Catalog # 5 5 6 8 8 9.5 9.5 12 12 16 16 18 18 CAP810434 CAP810534 CAP810634 CAP810734 CAP810834 CAP810934 CAP811034 CAP811134 CAP811234 CAP811334 CAP811434 CAP811534 CAP811634
A Series Earthing Washer Standard material is brass METRIC SELECTION TABLE

Lead Sheath Sealing Range Gland Size 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Min 4 6 9 12 16 21 28 33 40 46.5 54 63 Max 7.5 11 15 20 26.5 32.5 39.5 46.5 54.5 61 72.5 81.5 Cable Diameter 10 13.9 18.3 23.8 31 38.3 45.3 52.8 60.8 71 80.5 89.5 Catalog # CAP560530 CAP560630 CAP560730 CAP560830 CAP560930 CAP561030 CAP561130 CAP561230 CAP561330 CAP561430 CAP561530 CAP561630
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
99
4F
Standard material is nickel-plated brass A Series Adaptors and Reducers ATEX Exe Exd with LCIE 98 ATEX 00010
4F
METRIC x METRIC SELECTION TABLE

Female Male
M12 M16 M20 M25 M32 M40 M50 M63 M75 M90 M110
M12
745834 745844
M16
745334
M20
740274
M25
M32
M40
M50
M63
M75
M80
M90
M110
740024 740034
740544 740294 740304 740814 740564 740574 741084 740834 740844 741354 741104 741114 741624 741374 741384 741894 741644 745864 745394
METRIC x NPT SELECTION TABLE

Female Male
1
/4"
/8"
/2"
/4"
1"
11/4"
11/2"
2"
21/2"
3"
31/2"
M12 744104 M16 M20 744204 M25 M32 M40 M50 M63 M75 M90 M110
744194 744214
744694 744704 744714 744724
744964 744974 744984 744994
745234 745244 745254 745264
745504 745514 745524
745774 745784 745794
746044 746054 746064
746314 746324
746584 744304
Size available no part number Size not available
NPT x METRIC SELECTION TABLE

Female Male 1 /4" 3 /8" 1 /2" 3 /4"
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
M12
740614 740884 740914
M16
740624 740894 740194 740204
M20
740904 740454 740464 740474
M25
M32
M40
M50
M63
M75
M90
M100
M110
740714 740724 740734 740744
740984 740994 741004 741104
741264 741274 741284
741524 741534 741544 741554
741794 741804 741814 741824
742064
NPT x NPT SELECTION TABLE

Female Male 1 /4" 3 /8" 1 /2" 3 /4"
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1
/4"
/8"
/2"
/4"
1"
11/4"
11/2"
2"
21/2"
3"
31/2"
4"
745574 745594
744624 745134 744884 744894 745404 745154 745164 745674 745424 745434 745944 745694 745704 746214 745964 746234 746244 746484 746504
100
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
4F
A Series Stopping Plug Standard material is nickel-plated brass;

ATEX Exe Exd with LCIE 98 ATEX 00010
4F

Metric Size
12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 75 80 90 100
Metric Catalog #*
CAP190124 CAP190164 CAP190204 CAP190254 CAP190324 CAP190404 CAP190504 CAP190634 CAP190754 CAP190804 CAP199904 CAP191004
Across Flats A
14 18 23 28 36 44 54 67 80 85 95 110
Hex Thickness B
2.8 3.0 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.0 5.0 5.5 6.0 7.0 8.0 10.0
Thread Length E
15 15 15 15 15 15 16 17 18 20 22 22
NPT SELECTION TABLE

NPT Size NPT Catalog #* /4" 3 /8" 1 /2" 3 /4"
1
Across Flats A
14 18 22 28 36 44 50 64 75 90 110
Hex Thickness B
2.8 2.8 3.0 3.0 3.5 4.0 5.0 5.5 6.0 6.0 10.0
Thread Length E
12 12 16 16 20 20 20 20 28 30 32
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2"
CAP190194 CAP109294 CAP190394 CAP190494 CAP190594 CAP190694 CAP190794 CAP190894 CAP190994 CAP191094 CAP191194
All dimensions in millimeters unless otherwise noted. *For stainless steel replace last digit with "9".
A Series Nonmetallic Stopping Plug
Standard material is polyamide 6; ATEX certified Ex e II with LCIE 97ATEX6007X
Washer and locknut are required for non-threaded holes (not included) see page 98
POLYAMIDE SELECTION TABLE

Metric Size
12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63
Metric Catalog #*
CAP191127 CAP191167 CAP191207 CAP191257 CAP191327 CAP191407 CAP191507 CAP191637
Across Flats A
15 19 23 28 36 44 54 67
Hex Thickness B
4 4 4 5 5.5 5.5 6 6.5
Thread Length E
15 15 15 15 15 15 16 17
*For stainless steel replace last digit with "9".
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
101
4F
Accessories B Series
4F
B Series Lock Nut Standard material is brass

Metric Entry Thread M16 M20 M25 M32 M40 M50 M63 M75 M80 M85 M90 M100 Catalog # BLN/M16 BLN/M20 BLN/M25 BLN/M32 BLN/M40 BLN/M50 BLN/M63 BLN/M75 BLN/M80 BLN/M85 BLN/M90 BLN/M100 /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1
NPT SELECTION TABLE

NPT Entry Thread Catalog # BLN/050NPT BLN/075NPT BLN/100NPT BLN/125NPT BLN/150NPT BLN/200NPT BLN/250NPT BLN/300NPT BLN/350NPT BLN/400NPT
B Series Sealing Washer Standard material is nylon

Metric Entry Thread M16 M20 M25 M32 M40 M50 M63 M75 M80 M85 M90 M100 Catalog # RNSW/M16 RNSW/M20 RNSW/M25 RNSW/M32 RNSW/M40 RNSW/M50 RNSW/M63 RNSW/M75 RNSW/M80 RNSW/M85 RNSW/M90 RNSW/M100 /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1
NPT SELECTION TABLE

NPT Entry Thread Catalog # RNSW/050NPT RNSW/075NPT RNSW/100NPT RNSW/125NPT RNSW/150NPT RNSW/200NPT RNSW/250NPT RNSW/300NPT RNSW/350NPT RNSW/400NPT
B Series Earth Tag Standard material is brass

Metric Entry Thread M16 M20 M25 M32 M40 M50 M63 M75 M80 M85 M90 M100 Catalog # BET/M16 BET/M20 BET/M25 BET/M32 BET/M40 BET/M50 BET/M63 BET/M75 BET/M80 BET/M85 BET/M90 BET/M100 /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1
NPT SELECTION TABLE

NPT Entry Thread Catalog # BET/050NPT BET/075NPT BET/100NPT BET/125NPT BET/150NPT BET/200NPT BET/250NPT BET/300NPT BET/350NPT BET/400NPT
B Series Shroud
PVC SELECTION TABLE
Size (Gland Size) L24 (16, 20s) L30 (20) L38 (25) L46 (32) L55 (40) L65 (50, 50s) L80 (63, 63s) L90 (75, 75s) L104 (80,85) L114 (90, 100) Catalog # PVC-L24 PVC-L30 PVC-L38 PVC-L46 PVC-L55 PVC-L65 PVC-L80 PVC-L90 PVC-L104 PVC-L114 Size L24 (16, 20s) L30 (20) L38 (25) L46 (32) L55 (40) L65 (50, 50s) L80 (63, 63s) L90 (75, 75s) L104 (80, 85)
PCP SELECTION TABLE

Catalog # PCP-L24 PCP-L30 PCP-L38 PCP-L46 PCP-L55 PCP-L65 PCP-L80 PCP-L90 PCP-L104
PVC
PCP
102
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Accessories C Series
4F
C Series Lock Nut

Metric Entry Diameter 20 25 32 40 50 63 75 80
Standard material is brass
4F

Catalog # LNM1 LNM2 LNM3 LNM4 LNM5 LNM6 LNM7 LNM8 /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3"
1
NPT SELECTION TABLE

NPT Entry Diameter Catalog # LNN1 LNN2 LNN3 LNN4 LNN5 LNN6 LNN7 LNN8
C Series Sealing Washer/Gaskets

Metric Entry Diameter 20 25 32 40 50 63 75 80 Catalog # SGM1 SGM2 SGM3 SGM4 SGM5 SGM6 SGM7 SGM8
Standard material is nylon
NPT SELECTION TABLE

NPT Entry Diameter /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3"
1
Catalog # SGN1 SGN2 SGN3 SGN4 SGN5 SGN6 SGN7 SGN8
C Series Earth Tag

Metric Entry Diameter 20 25 32 40 50 63 75 80
Standard material is nickel-plated brass
SELECTION TABLE
NPT Entry Thread /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3"
1
Catalog # ET1 ET2 ET3 ET4 ET5 ET6 ET7 ET8
C Series Shroud
Catalog Number SH1 SH2 SH3 SH4 SH5 SH6 SH7 SH8 SH9 SH10 SH11 SH12 SH13 SH14
Standard material is PVC
SELECTION TABLE
To Suit Gland TUA1M10 TUA1M12 TUA1M15 TUA2M18 TUA3M23 TUA3M25 TUA5M34 TUA5M38 TUA5M42 TUA6M48 TUA6M54 TUA7M60 TUA7M66 TWA1M13 TWA1M16 TWA1M20 TWA2M27 TWA3M34 TWA4M40 TWA5M53 TWA6M66 TWA7M78 TWAE1M16 TWAE1M20 TWAE2M27 TWAE3M34 TWAE4M40 TWAE5M53 TWAE6M66 TWAE7M78 TWAX1M13 TWAX1M16 TWAX1M20 TWAX2M24 TWAX2M27 TWAX3M30 TWAX3M33 TWAX4M38 TWAX5M43 TWAX5M48 TWAX5M52 TWAX6M60 TWAX6M65 TWAX7M71 TWAX7M78 TWAB1M16 TWAB1M20 TWAB2M27 TWAB3M34 TWAB4M40 TWAB5M53 TWAB6M66 TWAB7M78
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
103
4F
Accessories D Series
4F
D Series Lock Nut

Metric Entry Diameter M12 M16 M20 M25 M32 M40 M50 M63 x x x x x x x x 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5
Standard material is polyamide
SELECTION TABLE
Width 17.00 22.00 26.00 32.00 41.00 50.00 60.00 75.00 Thickness 5.00 5.00 6.00 6.00 7.00 7.00 8.00 8.00 Catalog # GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG 960 960 960 960 960 960 960 960 1941 1941 1941 1941 1941 1941 1941 1941 R0031 R0032 R0033 R0034 R0035 R0036 R0037 R0038
D Series Reducing Ring
SELECTION TABLE
Thread 1 Thread 2 20 25 32 32 40 40 50 50 63 63 x x x x x x x x x x 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 M16 M20 M20 M25 M25 M32 M32 M40 M40 M50 x x x x x x x x x x 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 Length 1 12.00 14.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 16.00 18.00 18.00 18.00 18.00 Length 2 8.00 8.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 12.00 Length 3 8.00 8.00 6.00 10.00 8.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 12.00 Across Flats 24.00 29.00 36.00 36.00 46.00 46.00 55.00 68.00 68.00 68.00 Catalog # GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG 960 960 960 960 960 960 960 960 960 960 1946 1946 1946 1946 1946 1946 1946 1946 1946 1946 R0071 R0072 R0056 R0074 R0059 R0077 R0062 R0080 R0065 R0083
D Series Screw Plug

Thread 1 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 x x x x x x x 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 Diameter 21.50 25.50 30.50 37.50 45.50 55.50 85.00
SELECTION TABLE
Length 1 4.00 4.00 4.00 5.50 5.50 5.50 6.50 Length 2 12.00 13.00 13.00 15.00 15.00 16.00 16.00 Catalog # GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG 960 960 960 960 960 960 960 1952 1952 1952 1952 1952 1952 1952 R0111 R0112 R0113 R0114 R0115 R0116 R0117
D Series Blanking Plug

Thread 1 12 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 Diameter 6.00 7.00 8.50 11.00 14.00 20.00 26.00 34.00
For sealing unused cable glands; Standard material is polyamide
SELECTION TABLE
Length 1 30.30 33.00 34.50 36.00 39.50 42.00 44.00 45.00 Catalog # GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG 960 960 960 960 960 960 960 960 1944 1944 1944 1944 1944 1944 1944 1944 R0101 R0102 R0103 R0104 R0105 R0106 R0107 R0108
104
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Accessories E Series
4F
E Series TSC Epoxy Sealing Compound SELECTION TABLE

Std. Carton Qty. 10 10 5 Tube Size 0.5 oz. 1.0 oz. 4.0 oz. Catalog # TSC05 TSC1 TSC4
4F
E Series Wire Mesh Grip SELECTION TABLE

Cord Range Diameter .375 to .500 .500 to .625 .500 to .625 .625 to .750 .750 to .875 .875 to 1.000 .875 to 1.000 .875 to 1.000 .875 to 1.000 1.000 to 1.188 1.188 to 1.375 1.375 to 1.625 1.625 to 1.875 Gland Nut NUT94 NUT94 NUT95 NUT95 NUT95 NUT98 NUT98 NUT95 NUT98 NUT98 NUT98 NUT913 NUT913 Wire Mesh Grip Catalog # RPE417-115 RPE417-116 RPE417-129 RPE417-117 RPE421-119 16676N 16676N RPE421-120 16676N RPE421-121 RPE433-122 RPE433-123 17317N
E Series Cold Shrink Kit SELECTION TABLE

Entry Thread /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1
Catalog # TMC-K1 TMC-K2 TMC-K3 TMC-K4 TMC-K5 TMC-K6 TMC-K7 TMC-K8 TMC-K9 TMC-K10
Cold ShrinkTM Corrosion Protection Kits are specially designed for Cooper Crouse-Hinds TMC, TMCX and TECK fittings to provide protection against corrosive elements like salt spray and moisture. The TMC-K kit is made of a Cold Shrink material that is quick and easy to install on the gland. The Cold Shrink material is made of EPDM rubber that contains no chlorides or sulfurs. The protection kit installs easily over the gland without the use of a heat source to shrink the material tightly over the seal. The Cold Shrink material can be removed easily from the gland by simply cutting it off. See ordering information for complete offering of TMC-K Cold Shrink kits for corrosion protection. Cold Shrink is a registered trademark of the 3M Company.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
105
4F
Accessories Breathers & Drains
4F
Breather Drain SIRA 99 ATEX 3050 U
I M2 II, 2GD, EExe I & II (Stainless steel & brass only) II 2GD, EExe II (Nylon only) Enclosure type 4X IP66
SELECTION TABLE
Entry Thread M20 M20 M20 M25 M25 M25 1 /2" 1 /2" 3 /4" 3 /4" Material Brass Stainless Nylon Brass Stainless Nylon Brass Stainless Brass Stainless Steel Steel Steel Steel Catalog # ACDPEB/M20/15 ACDPES/M20/15 ACDPEN/M20/15 ACDPEB/M25/15 ACDPES/M25/15 ACDPEN/M25/15 ACDPEB/050NPT/15 ACDPES/050NPT/15 ACDPEB/075NPT/15 ACDPES/075NPT/15
Drainage Plug Standard material is polyamide; PTB01 ATEX 1128X Ex 1126 Exe II SELECTION TABLE
Thread 1 M25 x 1.5 Diameter 30.00 Length 1 19.00 Length 2 4.50 Catalog # GHG 960 1927 R0105
Breathing and Drainage Plug Standard material is glass-filled polyamide;

SIRA 99 ATEX 3050 U Ex 1126 Exe II
SELECTION TABLE
Thread 1 M25 x 1.5 Catalog # GHG 960 1954 R0002
Please refer to section 6F for additional breather and drain options.
106
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
LCC Series Cable Tray Conduit Clamps
4F
Applications:
LCC cable tray conduit clamps are used for installation on cable tray side rails with inside flanges (requiring inside tray mounting) and outside flanges; LCCF clamps are for use exclusively on inside flanges. LCC/LCCF cable tray conduit clamps: Provide a means of clamping metal conduit (rigid steel or aluminum, IMC and EMT) to cable tray to provide for the exit of power and/or control cables from tray Provide a means to firmly bond exit conduit to cable tray for best grounding continuity Provide strong mechanical support for exit conduits and cables Can be used indoors or outdoors, wherever cable tray systems are installed Facilitate the safe exit of cables from tray insure protection of cables from damage
4F
LCC
LCCF
For use with outside rail tray
For use with inside rail tray
Conduit Size /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4
1
Cat. # LCC1 LCC2 LCC3 LCC4 LCC5 LCC6 LCC7 LCC8 LCC9 LCC010
Cat. # LCCF1 LCCF2 LCCF3 LCCF4 LCCF5 LCCF6 LCCF7 LCCF8 LCCF9 LCCF010
Features:
Quick and easy installation low installed cost. Merely tighten clamp nut and/or set screw(s) Swivel hook clears conduit. No disassembly required for installation No drilling or welding necessary for installation Provides superior ground continuity between conduit and cable tray Clamps conduit at any angle with relation to tray facilitates wire pulling, minimizes conduit bending Malleable iron body provides great strength Knurled body has no-slip surface for conduit and tray positive grip assured Compact design has low profile minimum tray space required for assembly Design accommodates all popular types of cable tray Accommodates wide range of conduit sizes 1/2" through 4" LCCF features: Outside mounting facilitates inside rail installation Adjustable hook assures positive grip on inside rail Accommodates 3/4" through 13/4" wide flange
Dimensions
In Inches:

UL Standard: 467 (Grounding and Bonding Equipment)
Standard Materials:
Body cast iron Hook steel Set screws and clamping nut steel Hook cap vinyl Conduit Size 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4 LCC a 33/16 37/16 39/16 4 413/16 55/16 513/16 613/16 75/16 713/16 b 111/16 111/16 111/16 111/16 211/16 211/16 211/16 33/4 33/4 33/4 LCCF a 31/8 311/32 319/32 315/16 43/4 51/4 53/4 63/4 71/4 73/4 b 15/8 15/8 15/8 15/8 23/4 23/4 23/4 311/16 311/16 311/16 c 111/32 111/32 111/32 111/32 111/16 111/16 111/16 23/16 23/16 23/16 LCC LCCF
Standard Finishes:
Cast iron electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Steel zinc electroplate Vinyl natural
Conduit Size Ranges:

1/2" to 4"
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
107
4F
TGC Cable Tray Ground Conductor Clamp
4F
Applications:
Cable tray grounding conductor clamps are designed for use in heavy industrial applications: To provide a means for securely attaching a grounding conductor to cable tray to maintain grounding continuity for the entire cable tray system To provide protection of equipment through a reliable method for carrying ground fault currents To meet UL and NEC Code requirements For installation indoors or outdoors, with most types of cable trays with inside or outside flanges
Ground Wire Size #6 to 2/ 0
Cat. # TGC40
TGC Clamp installs on cable trays with inside or outside flanges
Features:
Meets requirements of NEC Code Article 318-7 for grounding and bonding Quick and easy installation low installed cost. No drilling or special tools required. Accommodates solid (where suitable) or stranded aluminum or copper grounding conductors in sizes from #6 to 2/0 Set screw bonds the clamp to the tray and another set screw securely attaches the grounding conductor to the clamp outstanding pull-out and vibration resistance Design accommodates most popular types of cable tray Mechanical device can be easily inspected Malleable iron body provides high strength
Dimensions
In Inches:

UL Standard: 467 (Grounding and Bonding Equipment)
Standard Materials:
Body malleable iron Set screws steel
Standard Finishes:
Malleable iron and steel electrogalvanized
108
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
TW Series THRU-WALL BARRIER Cable/Conduit Sealing Device
4F
4F
Applications:
THRU-WALL BARRIER cable/conduit sealing device is used wherever there is a need to seal cables or conduits penetrating fireor non-fire-rated walls, ceilings, floors, bulkheads or decks. For nonfire-rated walls, ceilings, floors, bulkheads or decks, THRU-WALL BARRIER also restricts water and dust and will help contain treated air. THRU-WALL BARRIER is designed: To provide a seal for cable/conduit penetrations through masonry, concrete or steel; to restrict the entrance of contaminants through cable/conduit penetrations into clean areas For use with most types of power, instrument and control cables as well as conduits To be used indoors or outdoors, in new construction or existing structures

ASTM Standard E-119 NFPA 251 UL Classification per UL Standard 1479 USCG Acceptance consult Cooper Crouse-Hinds NAVSEA Approval Electric Plant Installation Standard Methods No. S9300- AW-EDG-010/EPISM TWFS/TWBS assemblies
Features:
System Few parts required to seal a wide range of diameters of cables or conduits Easy and fast installation, using factory assembled components High degree of flexibility with interchangeable sealing block assemblies and a selection of different sizes of frames Mounting frame One-piece cast malleable iron or steel mounting frame can be cast into concrete during wall construction, grouted in masonry surfaces or welded into steel bulkheads at any time Retrofit frame allows for easy installation of frame where cables/conduit are already installed Available in sizes to accommodate a wide range of cable tray sizes and loadings including single and multiple layers of cables for power or instrument applications Cast keyways in mounting frame align and position sealing block assemblies Frames can be installed in wall such that sealing block assemblies can be inserted in either horizontal or vertical position Sealing block assembly Specially formulated elastomeric material between cast malleable iron pressure plates protects cable from mechanical damage; provides high pull-out resistance and positive cable separation; expands during fire to seal any voids left by burned cable insulation Interchangeable sealing block assemblies fit all THRU-WALL BARRIER mounting frames Cast stops on front pressure plate prevent sealing block assembly from slipping through mounting frame during installation Assemblies are offered for all cable/conduit outside diameters from .250" to 4.500" (6.4 mm to 114.3 mm). Cables with diameters less than .250" can be accommodated consult Cooper Crouse-Hinds. Sealing block openings will accommodate undersize and out-of-round cable Each sealing block assembly seals multiple cables/conduits. Compact design permits close nesting of cables, saving space. Reducers permit sealing block assemblies to accept cables with smaller O.D. than the specified range Plugs are used to fill unused openings in sealing block assemblies. Blank sealing block assemblies fill unused spaces in mounting frames, providing for future expansion.
Standard Materials:
Mounting frame: TWF, TWFR cast malleable iron TWFS cast carbon steel, ASTM A27 Grade 60-30 Pressure plate cast malleable iron Sealing material special elastomeric material Clamping hardware steel
Standard Finishes:
Malleable iron and hardware electrogalvanized Steel aluminized weldable paint Special elastomeric material natural
Easy three step installation
1. Cast, grout or weld the onepiece mounting frame into masonry or steel surface.
2. Feed cables/conduit through the frame.
3. Position cables/conduit, insert factory assembled sealing blocks into keyways in mounting frame, and tighten nuts on clamping hardware to effect the seal.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
109
4F

Sealing Block Assemblies & Mounting Frames Ordering Information
4F
TWB Sealing Block Assemblies

TWB sealing block assemblies are offered for cable/conduit outside diameters (O.D.) from .250" to 4.500" (6.4 mm to 114.3 mm). Cables with diameters less than .250" can be accommodated consult Cooper Crouse-Hinds. Each assembly opening will accommodate a .250" (6.4 mm) O.D. range. When clamping hardware is tightened, the elastomeric material is uniformly compressed around all cable/conduits for a completely tight fit. Sealing block assemblies are offered for use in marine applications. Each assembly has the required lubrication and sealing gaskets to meet U.S. Navy Hydrostatic Pressure Test Requirements. Assemblies for marine applications are available for cable/conduit outside diameters (O.D.) from .250" (6.4 mm) through 3.500" (88.9 mm). To order, add suffix S to TWB sealing block assembly Cat. No. Example: TWBS4036.
TWB2063 Depending on opening size range, a standard sealing block assembly will seal from one to eleven cables
Opening Size Range No. Openings In Block
In. .250.500 mm 6.412.7 11
.500.750 .7501.000 1.0001.250 1.2501.500 1.5001.750 1.7502.000 2.0002.250 2.2502.500 12.719.1 19.125.4 25.431.8 5 31.838.1 4 38.144.5 3 44.550.8 3 50.857.2 3 57.263.5 2
11 11 6 6 Added* Added*
Sealing Block Assembly Cat. # Frame Spaces Required Plug Cat. # Reducer Cat. #
TWB2111 TWB1111
TWB2062 TWB2112 TWB2063 TWB3054 TWB3045 TWB30355 TWB4036 TWB40366 TWB5027
2 2
2 TWP3
3 TWP5
4 TWP6
5 TWP7
TWP1 TWR2
TWR3
TWR4
TWR5
TWR55
TWR6
TWR66
TWR7
TWF Mounting Frames

TWF(S) mounting frames may be installed either horizontally or vertically. TWFR retrofit frames are used wherever cables/conduits are already installed through a fire- or nonfire-rated wall, floor or ceiling. They are designed with a removable section to permit installation around cables/conduits. TWFR retrofit frames can be grouted into walls, floors, or ceilings, or welded into steel bulkheads or decks. TWFR retrofit frames will perform in the same manner as the onepiece TWF(S) frames. TWFS steel mounting frames are welded directly into steel bulkheads, decks and prepared sleeves. For marine applications, keeper bars are provided to securely hold TWBS sealing block assemblies in position when installed.
TWF6 TWF12 No. of Spaces Available 6 10 12 20 24 30

Includes removable partition.
TWF10 Retrofit Frame Cat. # TWFR6 TWFR10 TWFR12 TWFR20 TWFR24 TWFR30
TWFS10 Cast Steel Frame Cat. # TWFS10 TWFS20 TWFS30
Frame Cat. # TWF6 TWF10 TWF12J TWF20 TWF24 TWF30
For 3.5" - 4" cable/conduit use TWB7011010 assembly and reduce down using TWR reducers. *Catalog # TWB1111 and TWB2112 are used between TWB2111 and TWB2062 in cases where the number of cables to be sealed in .250-.750 range exceeds the number of openings in standard assemblies. Use as many of these higher density assemblies as needed, sandwiched between halves of a standard assembly. TWR reducers match TWB sealing block assemblies shown in column above Cat. No. and reduce openings to accept cable size ranges shown in adjacent column to the left (in direction of arrow).
110
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Plugs, Reducers, Closure Cover Kits, Anchors & Lubricant Ordering Information
TWP Plugs TWR Reducers
4F
4F
TWP plugs will close any unused openings in sealing block assemblies. See table for plug catalog numbers which match specific sealing block assemblies. TWB2112 TWB2062
TWR reducers will reduce openings by .250" (6.4 mm) in sealing block assemblies. See table for reducer catalog numbers which match specific sealing block assemblies. More than one reducer can be used in a single opening.
It is possible to increase cable fill density with double-sided sealing block assemblies (TWB1111 and TWB2112) sandwiched between halves of a standard assembly. 2.5002.750 63.569.9 2 2.7503.000 69.976.2 2 3.0003.250 76.282.6 2 3.2503.500 82.688.9 2 3.5004.250 101.6108.0 1 4.2504.500 108.0114.3 1
Blank No Openings None None
TWB50277
TWB5028
TWB60288
TWB6029
TWB7011010
TWB70111
TWB1
TWB3
5 TWP7 TWR77
5 TWP8 TWR8
6 TWP9
7 TWP10 TWR1010 TWR10
7 TWP11 TWR11
TWR88
TWR9 TWR99
TWB Closure Cover Kits

TWB closure cover kits offer an optional method to close TWF frames installed for future expansion or those that are abandoned. Closure cover kits include two covers clamped to opposite sides of the frame with hardware provided. The insulating material provided is sandwiched between the two covers to maintain the fire rating of the assembly. See table below for closure kit catalog numbers. No. of Spaces Available 6 10 12 20 24 30 Closure Cover Kit Cat. #* TWB600 TWB1000 TWB600 TWB2000 TWB2400 TWB3000
TWK Anchors
TWK anchor assemblies are used to attach mounting frames to wall, ceiling or floor when grouting in frames. Mounting Type Flush Recessed Cat. # TWK1 TWK2
*TWB closure cover kits are not designed to provide a watertight seal in marine/shipboard applications or washdown areas. One kit seals one unused frame opening of same size. Example: use one TWB2000 kit to seal one TWF20, or TWFR20 frame. Use two TWB600 kits to seal one TWF12 or TWFR12 frame opening.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
111
4F

Ordering Example A
4F
Product Information
Selecting and specifying THRU-WALL BARRIER components is a simple procedure. Primary components for the THRU-WALL BARRIER consist of TWF mounting frames in various sizes and TWB sealing block assemblies for cable/conduit outside diameters (O.D.) in 1/4-inch increments from .250" to 4.500" (6.4 mm to 114.3 mm). Cables with diameters less than .250" can be accommodated consult Cooper Crouse-Hinds. Cable/conduit sizes can be mixed within a sealing block assembly by inserting TWR reducers to accommodate smaller diameters. The use of reducers can decrease the number of sealing block assemblies required. More than one reducer can be used in a single opening. Another way to increase density is to use TWB1111 and TWB2112 sealing block assemblies wherever there is a large number of cables/conduits in sizes ranging from .250" to .750". TWB2112
Specifying & Ordering

The selection of components is based on the quantity and sizes of cables or conduits going through the penetrations. Once these are known, the sealing block assemblies and frames can be selected. Step 1. Group cables/conduits by outside diameter (O.D.) and rank from the largest to the smallest. Step 2. Keeping in mind that sealing block assemblies are available in one-quarter inch increments, group cables/conduits that fall within the same sealing block assembly O.D. size range. Step 3. Starting with the largest cable/ conduit O.D., select the sealing block assemblies required. All openings in each sealing block assembly must be filled. Specify TWR reducers to accommodate smaller diameter cables where possible and TWP plugs to fill openings not used. Step 4. Total the frame spaces required for the specified sealing block assemblies and select an appropriate mounting frame(s). Frames are available in 6-, 10-, 12-, 20-, 24- and 30-space sizes. Keep future expansion requirements in mind when specifying frame. Specify blank sealing block assemblies to fill unused mounting frame space and TWB closure cover kits to fill unused frames. Step 5. Check specification/order to be sure it includes 1) frames, 2) sealing block assemblies, 3) plugs and 4) reducers.
Ordering Example A:
Cable tray size: 24" Cables specified: 5 power cables sizes ranging from 1.960" to 2.200" O.D. Spare capacity required: 50% Step 1. Group cables by O.D. and rank from largest to smallest. Cable Cable Qty. O.D. 4 2.200 1 1.960 Total 5 Step 2. Group cables that fall within the same sealing block assembly size. Sealing Block Cable Qty. O.D. Range diameter cables where possible and TWP plugs to fill openings not used. (See Example A diagram.)
Note: In the example, one TWR66 reducer is required to accommodate the cable with 1.960 O.D. and one TWP6 plug is required for the unused opening.
Step 4. Total the frame spaces required for sealing block assemblies and select appropriate size mounting frame. Factor in spare capacity required for future expansion. Total frame spaces required Specification requires 50% spare capacity Total spaces 8 4 12
TWB2062
TWB2062
Shown here is a double-sided sealing block assembly (TWB2112) sandwiched between halves of a standard sealing block assembly (TWB2062). Additional double-sided sealing block assemblies may be used to accommodate larger quantities of cables or conduits. Unused sealing block openings must be closed with TWP plugs. Blank sealing block assemblies TWB1 and TWB3 are used to fill each unused space in the mounting frame and permit future expansion of the system. Typical practice is to include space allowance of 20 to 50% for future expansion. TWB closure kits are used to seal entire frames and permit future system expansion.
4 2.0002.250 1 1.7502.000 Total 5 Step 3. Starting with the largest cable O.D., select the quantity of sealing block assemblies required. Specify TWR reducers to accommodate smaller Sealing Block Assy Cat. # TWB40366 TWB40366 Number of Openings 3 3 66
Selection: One TWF12 mounting frame with capacity of 12 spaces. Four TWB1 blank sealing block assemblies to fill unused frame space. (Choice of frame could vary based on future expansion needs and/or specific cable arrangement.)
O.D. Range 2.0002.250 2.0002.250 Totals
Cables to be Sealed 3 2 5
Number of Openings 1 1
Cables to be Sealed 4 4 8
Step 5. Bill of materials for specification/order should read: (1) TWF12 (2) TWB40366 (4) TWB1 (1) TWR66 (1) TWP6
Example A diagram 112

www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds

Ordering Example B Dimensions
Ordering Example B:
Cable tray size: 24" Cables specified: 6 power cables sizes ranging from 2.140" to 2.180" O.D. 31 control cables sizes ranging from .550" to .945" O.D. Spare capacity required: 25% Step 1. Group cables by O.D. and rank from largest to smallest. Cable Qty. Cable O.D. 4 2 1 4 7 9 10 37 2.180 2.140 .945 .890 .700 .637 .550
4F
4F
Sealing Block Assy Cat. # TWB40366 TWB40366 TWB2063 TWB2062 TWB2112 TWB2112
Number of O.D. Range Openings 2.0002.250 2.0002.250 .7501.000 .500.750 .500.750 .500.750 Totals 3 3 6 6 11 11 40
Cables to be Sealed 3 3 5 6 11 9 37
Openings Not Used 1 2 3
Frame Spaces Required 4 4 2 2 2 2 16
Note: In this example, two TWB2112 sealing block assemblies are sandwiched between two halves of a TWB2062. This dramatically increases cable density in minimum frame space. One TWP3 plug is required for unused opening in TWB2063 and two TWP1 plugs are required for unused openings in the TWB2112.
Total
Step 4. Total the frame spaces required for sealing block assemblies and select appropriate size mounting frame(s). Factor in spare capacity required for future expansion. Total frame spaces required Specification requires 25% spare capacity Total 16 4 20
Step 5. Bill of materials for specification/order should read: (2) TWF10 or (1) TWF20 (2) TWB40366 (1) TWB2063 (1) TWB2062 (2) TWB2112 (1) TWP3 (2) TWP1 (1) TWB3 (1) TWB1
Step 2. Group cables that fall within the same sealing block assembly size. Sealing Block Cable Qty. O.D. Range 6 2.0002.250 5 .7501.000 26 .500.750 Total 37 Step 3. Starting with the largest cable O.D., select the quantity of sealing block assemblies required. Specify TWR reducers to accommodate smaller diameter cables where possible and TWP plugs to fill openings not used. (See Example B diagram.)
Selection: Two TWF10 (or one TWF20) mounting frames with total capacity of 20 spaces. One TWB3 and one TWB1 blank sealing block assembly to fill unused frame space. (Choice of frame could vary based on future expansion needs and/or specific cable/conduit arrangement.) Example B diagram
*For TWFS mounting frame hole dimensions, contact Cooper Crouse-Hinds ECM field representative or headquarters.
Dimensions
In Inches:
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
113
4F

Dimensions*
4F
Dimensions
In Inches:
TWF6 (20 lbs.)
TWF12 (38 lbs.)
TWF10 (25 lbs.)
TWF20 (82 lbs.)
TWB TWF24 (88 lbs.)
TWK
1. Dimensions are shown as inches (mm). 2. Dimensions shown for TWF frames also apply for TWFR retrofit frames.
TWF30 (97 lbs.) *For TWF mounting frame hole dimensions, contact Cooper Crouse-Hinds ECM field representative or headquarters.
114
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Link-Seal Devices
Environmental Seal for Conduit passing through Concrete Walls, Floors or Ceilings
Link-Seal Devices Applications:
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Link-Seal is the quick, economical way to seal around conduit in concrete walls, floors and casings. Link-Seal is a modular mechanical seal used for any type of penetration.
Wet Locations Corrosive Environments
4F
Environmental Conduit Seal Ordering Information:

Its easy. Locate the conduit size and type you are installing in the columns on the left. Then locate the seal and sleeve part numbers under the installation method youve selected. No sleeve is needed for cored or cast hole installation.
4F
Features and Benefits:

Saves time and money Link-Seal installs in up to 75% less time than competition products Positive Hydrostatic Sealing properly installed, Link-Seal is rated at 20 psig (40 feet of head), which exceeds the performance requirements of most applications Environment Seals Link-Seal environmental seal is designed for long life and use as a permanent seal. Seal elements are specially compounded to resist aging, ozone, sunlight, water and a wide range of chemicals Fire Seals for fire protection in floor and wall penetrations Link-Seal is Factory Mutual approved Resistance to high and low temperatures Link-Seal environmental seal is manufactured from special compounds that resist temperatures from 40F to +250F. Link-Seal Fire Seal is manufactured from a silicone material that resists temperatures from 67F to +400F Corrosion protection where installation against galvanic corrosion (or electrolysis) is required, Link-Seal provides complete separation pipe and casing. Metal-to-metal contact is eliminated Compensates for misalignment Link-Seal allows for some angular and off-center conduit conditions and still seals effectively Absorbs shock, sound and vibration this inherent benefit of Link-Seal helps reduce conduit failure due to fatigue and threaded connections
Cored or Cast Hole Method:

Note the appropriate hole diameter and select the seal part number. Example: For 3/4" EMT conduit through a cored hole Core a 2" diameter hole and install the conduit using Link-Seal Part number LSA200-C-04.
Materials:
The standard product for environmental conduit seals is made from EPDM supplied with steel bolts and nuts with a zinc dichromate finish. These seals are suitable for use in water, direct ground burial and atmospheric conditions. They provide electrical insulation where cathodic protection is required. EPDM rubber is resistant to most inorganic acids and alkalis, and some organic chemicals (acetone, alcohol, ketones).
Sleeve Methods:
Select either the plastic or metal sleeve. Both types of sleeves are designed to be cast into concrete walls or floors. Sleeves are ordered separately. Remember to add the wall or floor thickness to the steel sleeve part number to insure the sleeve is provided in the proper length. Plastic sleeves are a standard 16 long and can be modified in the field.
Options:
To order the standard product with 316 stainless steel bolts and nuts, for corrosive environments, replace the "C" in the seal catalog number with "S316". For example, a 1/2" seal for rigid steel conduit for a cored hole is an LSA200-C-04; ordered with stainless steel bolts and nuts the catalog number becomes LSA200-S316-04.
Standard Materials:
Rubber Seal Elements: EPDM (Black) Environmental Seals Silicone (Grey) Fire Seals Pressure Plates: Glass Reinforced Nylon Environmental Seals Steel w/Zinc Dichromate Plate Fire Seals Fasteners: Carbon Steel, Zinc Dichromate Plate Environmental Seals 316 Stainless Steel Environmental with Option S316 Carbon Steel w/Zinc Dichromate Fire Seals
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
115
4F
Link-Seal Devices
Environmental Seal for Conduit passing through Concrete Walls, Floors or Ceilings
Wet Locations Corrosive Environments
4F
Ordering Information - Environmental Conduit Seal

Conduit Nominal Size /2" /2" 1 /2"
1 1 3 3 3
Conduit Type* EMT IMC RSC EMT IMC RSC EMT IMC RSC EMT IMC RSC EMT IMC RSC EMT IMC RSC EMT/RSC IMC EMT/RSC IMC EMT/RSC IMC EMT/RSC IMC RSC RSC
Conduit Actual O.D. (inches) .706 .815 .840 .922 1.029 1.050 1.163 1.290 1.315 1.510 1.638 1.660 1.740 1.883 1.900 2.197 2.360 2.375 2.875 2.857 3.500 3.476 4.000 3.971 4.500 4.466 5.563 6.625
Cast/Cored Hole Dia. (inches) 2.000 2.000 2.000 2.000 2.500 2.500 2.500 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.500 3.500 3.500 4.000 4.000 4.000 4.000 4.000 5.000 5.000 6.000 6.000 6.000 6.000 8.000 10.000
Seal for Cast/Cored Hole Cat. # LSA275 C 04 LSA200 C 04 LSA200 C 04 LSA200 C 04 LSA275 C 06 LSA275 C 06 LSA315 C 04 LSA300 C 04 LSA300 C 04 LSA300 C 04 LSA275 C 07 LSA275 C 07 LSA315 C 05 LSA300 C 05 LSA300 C 05 LSA315 C 06 LSA300 C 06 LSA300 C 06 LSA200 C 09 LSA200 C 09 LSA300 C 08 LSA300 C 08 LSA325 C 05 LSA325 C 05 LSA300 C 10 LSA300 C 10 LSA425 C 06 LSA475 C 10
Plastic Sleeve Cat. # LS CS 2 16 LS CS 2 16 LS CS 2 16 LS CS 3 16 LS CS 3 16 LS CS 3 16 LS CS 3 16 LS CS 3 16 LS CS 3 16
Seal for Plastic Sleeve Cat. # LSA200 C 04 LSA200 C 04 LSA200 C 04 LSA315 C 04 LSA315 C 04 LSA315 C 04 LSA300 C 04 LSA300 C 04 LSA300 C 04
Steel Sleeve Cat. # WS2 15 WS2 21 WS2 21
Seal for Steel Sleeve Cat. # LSA275 C 04 LSA200 C 04 LSA200 C 04
/4" /4" /4"
WS2 15 LSA200 C 04 WS2 15 LSA200 C 04 WS2.5 20 LSA275 C 06 WS2.5 20 LSA275 C 06 WS2.5 10 LSA275 C 06 WS2.5 20 LSA200 C 05 WS3.5 22 LSA315 C 05 WS3.5 22 LSA315 C 05 WS3.5 22 LSA315 C 05 WS3.5 32 LSA315 C 05 WS3.5 22 LSA300 C 05 WS3.5 22 LSA300 C 05 WS4 23 WS4 23 WS4 23 WS4 23 WS4 23 WS5 25 WS5 25 WS6 28 WS6 28 WS6 28 WS6 28 WS8 32 WS8 18 LSA315 C 06 LSA300 C 06 LSA300 C 06 LSA200 C 09 LSA200 C 09 LSA300 C 08 LSA300 C 08 LSA325 C 05 LSA325 C 05 LSA300 C 10 LSA300 C 10 LSA425 C 06 LSA300 C 15
1" 1" 1" 11/4" 11/4" 11/4" 11/2" 11/2" 11/2" 2" 2" 2" 21/2" 21/2" 3" 3" 31/2" 31/2" 4" 4" 5" 6"
LS CS 3.5 16 LSA315 C 05 LS CS 3.5 16 LSA300 C 05 LS CS 3 16 LSA200 C 06 LS CS 3.5 16 LSA300 C 05 LS CS 3.5 16 LSA275 C 08 LS CS 3.5 16 LSA275 C 08 LS CS 4 16 LS CS 4 16 LS CS 4 16 LS CS 4 16 LS CS 4 16 LS CS 5 16 LS CS 5 16 LS CS 6 16 LS CS 6 16 LS CS 6 16 LS CS 6 16 LS CS 8 16 LS CS 10 16 LSA315 C 06 LSA300 C 06 LSA300 C 06 LSA200 C 09 LSA200 C 09 LSA300 C 08 LSA300 C 08 LSA325 C 05 LSA325 C 05 LSA300 C 10 LSA300 C 10 LSA425 C 06 LSA475 C 10
*EMT Electrical Metallic Tubing; IMC Intermediate Metal Conduit; RSC Rigid Steel Conduit Specify length of steel sleeve in inches. Example: S6-28-08 is 8" long. All plastic sleeves come in standard 16" lengths and can be field cut to desired length. The last two digits of the seal part number indicate the number of links (and the number of bolts) per seal.
116
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Link-Seal Devices
Fire Seal for Conduit passing through Concrete Walls, Floors or Ceilings
Fire Conduit Seal Ordering Information:
Locate the conduit size and type you are installing in the columns on the left. Then locate the seal and sleeve part number under the installation method you've selected. No sleeve is needed for cored or cast hole installation.
Fire Rated
4F
4F
Sleeve Methods:
Select the appropriate metal sleeve for the size and type of conduit being installed. The sleeve should be ordered separately. Remember to add the wall or floor thickness to the steel sleeve part number to insure the sleeve is provided in the proper length.
Options:
To order the fire seal for a 3-hour rating, replace the "T" in the seal catalog number with a "FS". For example, a 1/ 2" seal for rigid steel conduit for a cored hole is an LSA200-T-04; ordered with option FS the catalog number becomes LSA200-FS-04. A 3-hour fire seal can also be made by using two Model Ts back-to-back. The Model FS is basically two Model T's back-to-back. In Model FS, a tie rod tightens both seals simultaneously for use when only one side of an opening is accessible.
Cored or Cast Hole Method:

Note the appropriate hole diameter and select the seal part number. Example: For 3 / 4" EMT conduit through a cored hole Core a 2" diameter hole and install the conduit using Link-Seal Part number LSA200-T-04.
Materials:
The standard product for fire conduit seals is made from grey silicone supplied with steel bolts and nuts with a zinc dichromate finish. These seals are Factory Mutual approved for use as a 1-hour fire stop and can handle temperature extremes of 67F to +400F.
Fire Conduit Seal - Ordering Information

Conduit Nominal Size
1 1
Conduit Type*
Conduit Actual O.D. (inches) 0.706 0.815 0.840 0.922 1.029 1.050 1.163 1.290 1.315 1.510 1.638 1.660 1.740 1.883 1.900 2.197 2.360 2.375 2.875 2.857 3.500 3.476 4.000 3.971 4.500 4.466 5.563 6.625
Cast/Cored Hole Dia. (inches) 2.000 2.000 2.000 2.000 2.500 2.500 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.000 3.500 3.500 3.500 4.000 4.000 4.000 4.000 4.000 5.000 5.000 6.000 6.000 6.000 6.000 8.000 10.000
Seal for Cast/Cored Hole Cat. # LSA275 LSA200 LSA200 LSA200 LSA275 LSA275 LSA315 LSA300 LSA300 LSA300 LSA275 LSA275 LSA315 LSA300 LSA300 LSA315 LSA300 LSA300 LSA200 LSA200 LSA300 LSA300 LSA325 LSA325 LSA300 LSA300 LSA425 LSA475 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T 04 04 04 04 06 06 04 04 04 04 07 07 05 05 05 06 06 06 09 09 08 08 05 05 10 10 06 10
Steel Sleeve Cat. # WS2 15 WS2 21 WS2 21 WS2 15 WS2 15 WS2.5 20 WS2.5 20 WS2.5 10 WS2.5 20 WS3.5 22 WS3.5 22 WS3.5 22 WS3.5 32 WS3.5 22 WS3.5 22 WS4 23 WS4 23 WS4 23 WS4 23 WS4 23 WS5 25 WS5 25 WS6 28 WS6 28 WS6 28 WS6 28 WS8 32 WS8 18
Seal for Steel Sleeve Cat. # LSA275 LSA200 LSA200 LSA200 LSA200 LSA275 LSA275 LSA275 LSA200 LSA315 LSA315 LSA300 LSA300 LSA300 LSA275 LSA315 LSA300 LSA300 LSA200 LSA200 LSA300 LSA300 LSA325 LSA325 LSA300 LSA300 LSA425 LSA300 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T 04 04 04 04 04 06 06 06 05 05 05 05 05 05 08 06 06 06 09 09 08 08 05 05 10 10 06 15
Example: WS6-28-08 is 8" long. *EMT Electrical Metallic Tubing; IMC Intermediate Metal Conduit; RSC Rigid Steel Conduit The last two digits of the seal part number indicate the number of links (and the number of bolts) per seal.
EMT /2" IMC /2" 1 RSC /2" 3 EMT /4" 3 /4" IMC 3 /4" RSC 1" EMT 1" IMC 1" RSC 11/4" EMT 11/4" IMC 11/4" RSC 11/2" EMT 11/2" IMC 11/2" RSC 2" EMT 2" IMC 2" RSC 21/2" EMT/RSC 21/2" IMC 3" EMT/RSC 3" IMC EMT/RSC 31/2" 31/2" IMC 4" EMT/RSC 4" IMC 5" RSC 6" RSC Specify length of steel sleeve in inches.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
117
4F
Link-Seal Devices
Dimensions
4F
Dimensions
In Inches:
Technical Information
Link-Seal Cat. # LSA200 C LSA275 C LSA300 C LSA315 C LSA325 C LSA425 C LSA475 C Actual Thickness (inches) .478 .607 .687 .807 .875 1.062 1.562 Rubber Sealing Element Free Avg. Length After Length Tightening (inches) (inches) 13/4 13/4 21/2 21/2 3 31/2 31/2 13/8 13/8 2 2 2 /8
3
Pressure Plate A (inches) 11/6

7
Bolt Hex Across Flats M5 slotted hex M5 slotted hex

1 1 1 9 9
R (inches) 21/4 17/8 21/2 21/2 2 3 31/2
T (inches)
5
H (inches) .180 .180

7 7 7 1 1
Thread Size (inches) M5 M5 5/165/18 5/165/18 5/165/18 3/83/16 3/83/16
L 21/2 21/2 31/2 31/2 4 5 41/2
/16 /16 /16 /16 /2 /4 /2
/8
11/2 17/16 3 /8
1
7 7
/2 /2 /2 /16 /16
/32 /32 /32 /4 /4
1 3 1
23/4 23/4
31/2 31/2
118
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Elbows, Couplings, Hubs, Grounding Devices, Plugs, Reducers, Service Entrance and Unions Hazardous and Non-hazardous
Description
Application/Selection Elbows
EL Series FE / FT Series
5F
5F
Page No.
see page 120 see page 123 see page 125 see pages 132133 see page 134 see page 135 see page 136 see page 137 see page 139 see page 138 see page 127 see page 128 see page 131 see see see see see see page page page page page page 130 127 127 127 129 131
Description
Service Entrance Fittings Heads
F Series
Page No.
see page 140
Unions Non-Expansion
UNA Series UNF Series UNFA Series UNL Series UNY Series UNYA Series
Flexible & Expansion Joint Couplings

EC Series XD Series XJG Series XJG-EMT Series XJGD Series
Grounding Devices, Straps, Clamps

GC Series
see see see see see see see see see see
page page page page page page page page page page
123 122 124 122 122 124 126 126 126 126
Expansion
UNF Series UNY Series UNFL Series UNYL Series
Hubs
HUB Series
Pipe Plugs
PLG Series PLM / PLN Series NOR Series
Nipples
NOR Series
Conduit Liners
LNR Series
Reducers and Adapters

AMN / ANM Series RE Series REA Series REC Series REM / REN Series NOR Series
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
119
5F
Series F Page see page 140 Series UNL Page see page 122 Series XD Page see page 134
5F
Applications:
Service entrance heads, elbows, unions, couplings, grounding receptacle and stud and grounding straps with clamps are the miscellaneous fittings needed to complete an electrical conduit system from the overhead service entrance to machinery, lighting fixtures and/or final electrical outlets. These fittings are installed in conduit systems within non-hazardous areas to: Plug Connect Reduce Terminate Change direction Ground
GCT
see page 139
UNF / UNFA
see page 122
XJG
see page 135
Use in Hazardous Areas:

Most of the items shown above are also suitable for hazardous areas (see specific listings for compliance information). GC see page 139 EL / FE see pages 123 and 125 RE / REM see page 127

Service Heads: Size required determine from size and number of conductors in service and conduit or mast size. Type required (threaded, slip fit, clamp) determine from conduit used with service head. Elbows, Unions, Reducers, Couplings and Grounding Receptacles/Connectors: Size required determine from conduit size. Type required determine from intended function in system (i.e. male and female thread for connecting conduit to outlet box etc.) Material and finish required determine from environmental conditions (corrosive fumes, buried in concrete, etc.)
GCR
see page 139
LNR
see page 141
REA / AMN
see page 127
UNYL
see page 126
PLG / PLM
see page 127
REC
see page 127
Options:
Description Corro-free epoxy powder coat Suffix S752 EC see pages 132133
HUB
see page 138
XJGD
see page 137
XJG-EMT
see page 136
120
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Series XD Description Expansion/deflection coupling Threaded service entrance head Clamp type service entrance head Ground connector and stud Size Range 1" to 6" Conduit Type Threaded rigid
5F
5F
Standard Materials Feraloy iron alloy hubs, neoprene outer jacket, tinned copper grounding strap Copper-free aluminum Copper-free aluminum Bronze connector body; aluminum cable clamp; brass stud Flexible copper, tinned Bronze body, cap and chain; brass grounding stud Brass Steel or Feraloy iron alloy Feraloy iron alloy
F F GCT
/2" to 4" conduit /4" to 2" conduit
Threaded rigid Threadless rigid or EMT Used to provide "quick connect" static electricity grounding connections with portable cable Used for bonding and grounding Used to provide static electricity grounding connection Used as clamp for GC100 Threaded rigid Threaded rigid
.312" to .406"
GC100 GCR
Grounding strap Grounding receptacle
50' coil
3 /4" threaded grounding rod
GC102 HUB UNL
Grounding clamp Conduit hub Union, 90 angle; for connecting conduit to cast boxes Union, male; for connecting conduit to cast boxes Expansion union, male; for connecting conduit to cast boxes
Adjustable
1 1
/2" to 4" /2" - 1/2" to 3/4" - 3/4"
UNY / UNYA
/2" to 6" / 20mm to 50mm /2" to 1"
Threaded rigid Threaded rigid
Steel or Feraloy iron alloy Steel
UNF / UNFA
Union, female; for connecting conduit to conduit Expansion union, female; for connecting conduit to conduit
/2" to 6" / 20mm to 50mm /2" to 1"
Steel or Feraloy iron alloy Steel
UNA Male
Union, 90 to 180 adjustable; for connecting conduit to boxes for conduit support 45 elbow, female 90 elbow, male; 90 elbow, female; 90 elbow, male and female 90 elbow, metric Reducer, threaded Adapter fitting
/2" to 1"
Threaded rigid
Feraloy iron alloy
EL-45 EL-90
12" to 4" /2" to 11/4" male; 1/2" to 21/2" female; 1/2" to 11/4" male and female
1
Feraloy iron alloy Feraloy iron alloy
FE RE / REM REA / AMN
20mm to 25mm /2" - 1/8" to 6" - 5" / 20mm to 50mm

1 1 /2" male to 3/4" female; 3/4" male to 1" female; 1" male to 11/4" female; 16mm to 63mm 3 1
Threaded rigid Threaded rigid Threaded rigid
Cooper-free aluminium Steel or Feraloy iron alloy Steel or Brass
REC PLG / PLM EC LNR XJG XJG-EMT XJGD
Reducer coupling Pipe plug, recessed head or square head Flexible coupling Conduit liner Expansion fitting Expansion fitting Expansion-deflection
/4" - 1/2" to 5" - 4" /2" to 4" / 20mm to 63mm /2" to 4" /2" to 4" /2" to 6" /2" to 4"
Threaded rigid Threaded rigid See catalog page 7F for details Threaded rigid & IMC Threaded rigid or IMC EMT Threaded rigid
Feraloy iron alloy Steel or Feraloy iron alloy or Brass
1 1 1
Polypropylene Feraloy iron alloy Feraloy iron alloy Feraloy iron alloy
1" to 4"
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
121
5F
Unions and Elbows
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III
5F
Applications:
UNY and UNF unions are installed in threaded thickwall conduit systems: UNY to connect conduit to a conduit fitting, junction box or device enclosure UNF to connect conduit to conduit, or to provide a means for future modification of the conduit system UNA unions are used in conduit and fitting installations when entrance angle is between 90 and 180. EL elbows are installed in conduit run or in box or fitting hub: To change direction in threaded rigid conduit run by 90, or when terminating at a box or fitting
Standard Materials:
UNY, UNF unions 1/2" to 1" steel UNY, UNF unions 11/4" to 6" Feraloy iron alloy UNL, UNA unions Feraloy iron alloy EL elbows Feraloy iron alloy or ductile iron
UNY Male
UNF Female
Standard Finishes:
Steel electrogalvanized with chromate treatment Feraloy iron alloy, malleable iron electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint
1
/2" 4"
/2" 4"
Options:
Description Copper-free aluminum Not available on UNA or 5" and 6" UNY/UNF Suffix SA 5" 6" Size Cat. # UNY105 UNY215 UNY205 UNY305 UNY405 UNY406 UNY505 UNY506 UNY605 UNY606 UNY705 UNY706 UNY805 UNY806 UNY905 UNY1005 UNY012 UNY014 Size
1 3 3
Features:
UNY, UNF and UNL unions have: Compact design which permits assembly with a minimum of clearance to other adjacent conduit and/or equipment Strong and durable construction UNA unions: Have a single clamping nut on angle, making it both a union and a connector Permit conduit joints at angles between 90 and 180 EL elbows have a smooth interior and are both strong and compact.
5" 6" Cat. # UNF105 UNF215 UNF205 UNF305 UNF405 UNF406 UNF505 UNF506 UNF605 UNF606 UNF705 UNF706 UNF805 UNF806 UNF905 UNF1005 UNF012 UNF014
UNL

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III EL 1/2", 3/4", 1" UNF/UNY 105, -215, -205, -305 UNL 105, -125, -215, -205 Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III UNF/UNY406, -506, -606, -706, -806, -905, -1005 Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III EL, UNF, UNL, UNY - all sizes Class I, Division 1 & 2, Group D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III UNA UL Standard: 886 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
See compliances for classification of each product.
90 Angle
Size /2 3 /4 1 /2 3 /4
1
Cat. # UNL105 UNL125 UNL215 UNL205
to 1/2 female to 1/2 male female to 3/4 male to 3/4
Dimensions
In Inches:
/2 /2 female to 3/4 male 3 /4 1 11/4 11/4 11/2 11/2 2 2 21/2 21/2 3 3 31/2 4 5 6
1 1
/2 /4 to 1/2
/4 1 11/4 11/4 11/2 11/2 2 2 21/2 21/2 3 3 31/2 4 5 6
UNY
Size 1 /2 3 /4 1/2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4 5 6 Max. Length Dia. 23/8 11/2 27/16 113/16 27/16 113/16 23/4 17/8 33/16 23/4 39/16 31/16 33/4 313/16 45/8 45/16 5 51/ 16 51/2 511/16 55/8 63/ 16 51/4 83/ 16 53/8 95/ 16 105 211/16 117/32 21/16 17/16 125 211/16 113/16 21/16 17/16
UNF
Length 113/16 13/4 13/4 2 21/4 25/8 29/16 33/16 37/16 41/8 41/8 313/16 313/16 215 27/8 113/16 21/4 15/8 Max. Dia. 11/2 113/16 113/16 17/8 23/4 31/16 313/16 45/16 51/16 511/16 63/16 83/16 95/16 205 27/8 113/16 21/4 15/8
UNL
Dim. a b c d
122
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Unions and Elbows
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III
5F
UNA
EL
5F
Male (with removable nipple)
Male
Size /2 3 /4 1
1
90 Female Cat. # UNA16 UNA26 UNA36 90 Male
45 Female
90 Male and female
90 Male
Size /2 3 /4 1
1
90 Female
Cat. # EL195 EL295 EL395 Cat. # EL1 EL2 EL3 EL4 EL5 EL6 EL7 EL8 EL9 EL10 Size /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2
1
Cat. # EL19* EL29* EL39* EL49* EL59* EL69* EL79 Cat. # EL196* EL296* EL396* EL496
45 Female
Size /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4
1
90 Male and Female

Size /2 3 /4 1 11/4
1
*Available in copper free aluminum add suffix SA to catalog number.
Dimensions
In Inches:
UNA
Male
Size 1 /2 3 /4 1 Length 45/16 413/16 511/16 Width 25/8 27/8 31/2
EL
45 90 90 Female Male Female Size 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4 a 13/16 13/8 121/32 13/4 115/16 21/4 23/4 31/6 37/16 35/8 a 17/16 15/8 17/8 a 117/32 13/4 2 21/4 4 5 67/16 90 Male & Female a 117/32 15/8 17/8 21/8
90 Male
90 Female
45 Female EL
90 Male and female

See compliances for classification of each product.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
123
5F
UNFA / UNYA Unions For IEC Applications
Zone 1 Zone 2
Zone 21 Zone 22
5F
Application:
Unions are used to join male to female or male to male threads of the same size and type on a wide range of BSP, NPT and metric electrical conduit used in hazardous areas.
Certifications & Compliances:

Type of Protection Ex d, DIP A21, IP67 Degree of Protection IP66/67 Gas Group IIC Approvals Ex1108U
Options:
Stainless steel - Replace NP with SS BSP thread size (consult factory)
Standard Materials:
Brass, nickel plated
Size Ranges:
Standard sizes listed in table below; other sizes may be available; please consult factory
Standard Finish:
Natural
Cat. # UNFA1MNP UNFA2MNP UNFA3MNP UNFA4MNP UNFA5MNP UNFA6MNP UNYA1MNP UNYA2MNP UNYA3MNP UNYA4MNP UNYA5MNP UNFA1NNP UNFA2NNP UNYA1NNP UNYA2NNP Type Female/Female Female/Female Female/Female Female/Female Female/Female Female/Female Male/Female Male/Female Male/Female Male/Female Male/Female Female/Female Female/Female Male/Female Male/Female Description M20 (F) - M20 (F) M25 (F) - M25 (F) M32 (F) - M32 (F) M40 (F) - M40 (F) M50 (F) - M50 (F) M63 (F) - M63 (F) M20 (M) - M20 (F) M25 (M) - M25 (F) M32 (M) - M32 (F) M40 (M) - M40 (F) M50 (M) - M50 (F)
1
/2" NPT (F) - 1/2" NPT (F) /4" NPT (F) - 3/4" NPT (F) /2" NPT (M) - 1/2" NPT (F) /4" NPT (M) - 3/4" NPT (F)
124
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Condulet Elbows and Tees For IEC Applications

FE and FT Series
Zone 1 Zone 2
Zone 21 Zone 22
5F
5F
Applications:
FE and FT conduit fittings are installed in hazardous areas to: Act as draw-in outlets especially for cables that are stiff due to large size or type of insulation Make 90 bends in conduit systems, allowing for a straight pull in either direction Provide access to wiring for maintenance and future system changes
Features:
Maximum volume for bends within a compact overall size Large openings to facilitate cable pulling
Inspection Elbows and Tees Selection
Cat. # FE1 FE2 FT1 FT2 Type Elbow Elbow Tee Tee Entry Size (metric) M20 M25 M20 M25 (F)-M20 (F)-M25 (F)-M20 (F)-M25 (F) (F) (F) (F)

Type of Protection Ex d, DIP A21, IP67 Degree of Protection IP67 Gas Group IIB Approvals Ex1108U
Dimensions (mm)
Standard Materials:
Body Copper-free aluminum Cover Brass
Standard Finishes:
Natural
Options:
Description NPT & BSP thread sizes Suffix Consult Factory
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
125
5F
UNF/UNY Expansion Unions
5F
Applications:
UNF/UNY expansion unions are designed to be used in all threaded rigid metal conduit systems indoors and outdoors, in hazardous locations to: Connect conduit to conduit Connect conduit to a junction box or device enclosure Compensate for conduit cut too short Allow for expansion and contraction of conduit Connect stub-ups to threaded conduit Replace sections of conduit runs UNYL UNFL
UNYL with sleeve extended
UNFL with sleeve extended
UNY
Male Short
Conduit Size /2 3 /4 1
1
UNF
Female Short
Cat. # UNY17 UNY27 UNY37 Conduit Size /2 3 /4 1
1
Features:
Compact design Internal beryllium copper grounding spring to insure positive grounding continuity. Knurled surface on body and sleeve allows secure gripping with wrench. Steel construction for maximum strength. Available in two styles short length where space is limited, long length when extra expansion is required.
Cat. # UNF17 UNF27 UNF37
UNYL
Male Long
1
UNFL
Female Long
Cat. # UNYL17 UNYL27 UNYL37 Conduit Size /2 3 /4 1
1
Cat. # UNFL17 UNFL27 UNFL37
Dimensions
In Inches:

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III UL Standard: 886 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30 Size UNY 1 /2 3 /4 1 UNYL 1 /2 3 /4 1 Size UNF 1 /2 3 /4 1 UNFL 1 /2 3 /4 1
*Overall length at maximum expansion Maximum expansion Suitable with intermediate Metal Conduit in non-hazardous locations
Dimension a* 35/16 33/8 313/16 45/16 41/2 53/16 Dimension a* 33/8 37/16 313/16 43/8 49/16 51/8
b 13/16 17/16 111/16 13/16 17/16 111/16 b 13/16 17/16 111/16 13/16 17/16 111/16
c
1 1
d 21/16 21/8 21/4 29/16 211/16 215/16 d 27/8 215/16 33/16 33/8 31/2 313/16
Standard Materials:
Body and sleeve steel Grounding spring beryllium copper
/2 /2 5 /8
Standard Finishes:
Steel electrogalvanized with chromate finish Beryllium copper natural
1 11/16 15/16 c /2 /2 5 /8
1 1
1 11/16 15/16
126
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Reducers, Couplings and Plugs
5F
Applications:
RE and REC reducers are used in threaded heavy wall conduit systems. RE reduces conduit hubs to a smaller size. REA adapters enlarge drilled and tapped openings by 1 NPT size. REC connects two different sizes of conduit together or is used to replace a coupling and reducer in an installation. PLG plugs are used for closing threaded conduit hubs.
RE
REA
5F
Size /2 1/8 1 /2 1/4 1 /2 3/8 3 /4 1/2 1 1/2 1 1/2 11/4 1/2 11/4 3/4 11/4 1 11/2 1/2 11/2 3/4 11/2 1 11/2 11/4 2 1/2 2 3/4 21 2 11/4 2 11/2 21/2 1 21/2 11/4 21/2 11/2 21/2 2 31 3 11/4 3 11/2 32 3 21/2 31/2 2 31/2 21/2 31/2 3 42 4 21/2 43 4 31/2 54 65
1
Cat. # RE1108* RE1208* RE1308 RE21 RE31 RE32 RE41 RE42 RE43 RE51 RE52 RE53 RE54 RE61 RE62 RE63 RE64 RE65 RE73 RE74 RE75 RE76 RE83 RE84 RE85 RE86 RE87 RE96 RE97 RE98 RE106 RE107 RE108 RE109 RE01210 RE01412
Male Hub Size /2 3 /4 1

1
Female Hub Size /4 1 11/4

3
Cat. # REA12 REA23 REA34
Features:
RE reducers have: Integral bushing which prevents damage to wires Full, clean cut tapered threads REC reducers have: Integral bushings in both ends which prevents damage to wires Funnel shaped interior to guide the wires from large to small conduit, making it easy to pull wire REA adapters have: Smooth integral bushing to protect wire insulation Knurled body for easy wrenching PLG plugs: Have clean tapered threads Are available in two styles, flush (recessed), or square head type
PLG
Recessed
Square Head
Recessed
Size /4 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4
1
Cat. # PLG28 PLG1 PLG2 PLG3 PLG4 PLG5 PLG6 PLG7 PLG8 PLG9 PLG10

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III (see listings for specific Cat. Nos. suitable for Groups A or B) UL Standard: 886 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
REC
Square Head
Size Large Hub Size /4 1 1 11/4 11/4 11/2 11/2 11/2 2 2 2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4 5
3
Cat. # PLG15 PLG25 PLG35 PLG45 PLG55 PLG65 PLG75 PLG85 PLG95 PLG105
Standard Materials:
RE reducers RE1108 through RE54 in steel; all others in Feraloy iron alloy REA adapters steel REC reducers REC21 and REC32 in steel; all others in Feraloy iron alloy PLG plugs Feraloy iron alloy and/or steel
Small Hub Size /2 1 /2 3 /4 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 11/4 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 11/2 2 21/2 3 4

1
Cat. # REC21 REC31 REC32 REC42 REC43 REC52 REC53 REC54 REC602 REC603 REC604 REC605 REC75 REC86 REC97* REC108* REC01210*
/2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4

1
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Steel electrogalvanized with chromate treatment
Options:
Description Copper-free aluminum Suffix SA
*Not available in aluminum. Suitable for use in Class I, Groups A and B areas. Suitable for use in Class I, Group B areas.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
127
5F
PLM / PLN Stopping Plugs For IEC Applications
Zone 1 Zone 2
Zone 21 Zone 22
5F
Application:
Stopping Plugs are used to safely close unused threaded entries.
Size Ranges:

Standard Materials:
Standard Finish:
Natural
Options:
Description Stainless steel Suffix Replace NP with SS
Exd Stopping Plug Selection
Cat. # PLM1NP PLM2NP PLM3NP PLM4NP PLM5NP PLM6NP Entry Size (Metric) 20mm 25mm 32mm 40mm 50mm 63mm Cat. # PLN1NP PLN2NP PLN3NP PLN4NP PLN5NP PLN6NP PLN7NP Entry Size (NPT)
1
Cat. # PLB1NP PLB2NP PLB3NP PLB4NP PLB5NP
Entry Size (BSP)

1
/2" NPT /4" NPT
/2" BSP
/4" BSP
1" NPT 11/4" NPT 11/2" NPT 2" NPT 21/2" NPT
1" BSP 11/4" BSP 11/2" BSP
128
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
REM / REN Reducers For IEC Applications
Zone 1 Zone 21 Zone 2 Zone 22
5F
Application:
Reducers are used to reduce the size on a wide range of BSP, NPT, and metric conduit used in the electrical construction industry, to a smaller size of the same thread.
Size Ranges:
5F

Standard Materials:
Standard Finish:
Natural
Options:
Stainless steel - replace NP with SS BSP thread size (consult factory)
Male Thread Metric
Cat. # REM116NP REM21NP REM31NP REM32NP REM41NP REM42NP REM43NP Description M20 - 16mm (F) M25 - M20 (F) M32 - M20 (F) M32 - M25 (F) M40 - M20 (F) M40 - M25 (F) M40 - M32 (F) Cat. # REM52NP REM53NP REM54NP REM61NP REM62NP REM63NP REM64NP REM65NP Description M50 - M25 (F) M50 - M32 (F) M50 - M40 (F) M63 - M20 (F) M63 - M25 (F) M63 - M32 (F) M63 - M40 (F) M63 - M50 (F) Cat. # REN21NP REN31NP REN32NP REN41NP REN42NP REN43NP REN51NP REN52NP
3
Male Thread NPT

Description /4" - 1/2" (F) Cat. # REN53NP REN54NP REN61NP REN62NP REN63NP REN64NP REN65NP REN76NP Description 11/2" - 1" (F) 11/2" - 11/4" (F) 2" - 1/2" (F) 2" - 3/4" (F) 2" - 1" (F) 2" - 11/4" (F) 2" - 11/2" (F) 21/2" - 2" (F)
1" - 1/2" (F) 1" - 3/4" (F) 11/4" - 1/2" (F) 11/4" - 3/4" (F) 11/4" - 1" (F) 11/2" - 1/2" (F) 11/2" - 3/4" (F)
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
129
5F
AMN / ANM Adapters For IEC Applications
Zone 1 Zone 2
Zone 21 Zone 22
5F
Application:
Adapters are used to change the thread form and/or size in a wide range of BSP, NPT, and metric cable and conduit entries.

Notes:
1. Adapters have different size thread at each end 2. Adapters may step up the same type of thread 3. Downwards adapters are Type A; upward or same size adapters are Type B 4. For downward adapters of same thread type, see Reducers Catalog Page 5. For same size and type of thread, see Unions Catalog Page
Standard Materials:
Standard Finish:
Natural
Options:
Stainless Steel - Replace NP with SS
Size Ranges:
130
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Reducers, Adapters, Plugs and Nipples for IEC Applications
Ex II 2 G EEx e II Ex II 2 G EEx d IIC Ex II 2 D
IP 67
5F
Applications:
Reducers are used in threaded heavy wall conduit systems to reduce conduit hubs to a smaller size or to connect two different sizes of conduit together Adapters enlarge drilled and tapped openings by 1 NPT size Plugs are used for closing unused threaded conduit hubs Nipples are used
5F
Features:
Reducers: Integral bushing which prevents damage to wires Full, clean cut tapered threads Funnel shaped interior to guide the wires from large to small conduit, making it easy to pull wire Adapters: Smooth integral bushing to protect wire insulation Knurled body for easy wrenching Plugs: Full, clean cut tapered threads
Ordering Information - Reducers

Male Thread /4" ISO 7/1 1" ISO 7/1 1 /2" ISO 7/1 3 /4" ISO 7/1
3
Female Thread /2" ISO 7/1 3 /4" ISO 7/1 3 /4" ISO 7/1 1" ISO 7/1
1
Cat. # NOR NOR NOR NOR 000 000 000 000 002 002 002 002 190 190 190 190 112 188 675 740
Ordering Information - Adapters

Male Thread Female Thread /2" ISO 7/1 1 /2" ISO 7/1 1 /2" ISO 7/1 3 /4" ISO 7/1 3 /4" ISO 7/1 3 /4" ISO 7/1 3 /4" ISO 7/1 3 /4" ISO 7/1 M20 x 1.5 M20 x 1.5 M20 x 1.5 M20 x 1.5A M25 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 PG13 PG13 PG16 PG16 PG16 PG16 PG21
1
Cat. # NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 112 112 112 112 112 112 112 112 112 112 112 112 112 112 112 112 112 112 112 112 112 190 190 190 190 190 190 190 190 190 190 190 190 190 190 190 190 190 190 190 190 190 010 015 014 009 008 013 012 011 002 001 017 016 000 020 007 005 006 004 018 019 003

Plugs: Ex II 2 G EEx e II Ex II 2 G EEx d IIC EC-Type examination certificate LOM 02 ATEX 3035U IP67 Reducers and Adapters: Ex II 2 G EEx e II Ex II 2 G EEx d IIC Ex II 2 D EC-Type examination certificate LOM 03 ATEX 3019U IP67 Nipples: Ex II 2 G EEx d IIC EC-Type examination certificate LOM 03 ATEX 3019U IP67
Standard Materials:
Reducers, Adapters, Plugs and Nipples - Zinc Plated
M20 x 1.5 PG13 PG16 M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 PG13 PG16 PG21 1 /2" ISO 7/1 3 /4" ISO 7/1 PG13 PG16 3 /4" ISO 7/1 PG16 1 /2" ISO 7/1 3 /4" ISO 7/1 1 /2" ISO 7/1 3 /4" ISO 7/1 M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 3 /4" ISO 7/1
Ordering Information - Plugs

Thread Size /2" ISO 7/1 3 /4" ISO 7/1 1" ISO 7/1 1" NPT M20 x 1.5 M25 x 1.5 M32 x 1.5 M50 x 1.5 M60 x 1.5
1
Ordering Information - Nipples

Thread Size Type EMM 1 EMM 2 EMM 3 EMF 1 EMF 2 EMF 3 Cat. # NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR 000 000 000 000 000 000 002 002 002 002 002 002 130 130 130 130 130 130 118 126 134 217 225 233 /2" ISO 7/1 3 /4" ISO 7/1 1" ISO 7/1 1 /2" ISO 7/1 3 /4" ISO 7/1 1" ISO 7/1
1
Cat. # NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 002 002 002 002 002 002 002 002 002 140 140 140 140 140 140 140 140 140 117 125 133 365 655 656 657 658 659
Type PLG
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
131
5F
Couplings
/2"2" Brass Construction All Stainless Steel with suffix S516 2-1/24" Stainless Steel construction only
1
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Wet Locations Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III
5F
Applications:
EC couplings are used: In hazardous areas where a flexible member is required in a conduit system to accomplish difficult bends, or to allow for movement or vibration of connected equipment or units
ECGJH (Male connections both ends)

Flexible Length (In.) 4 4 6 6 6 8 8 8 10 10 10 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 18 18 Flexible Length Size Cat. # (In.) 1 /2 ECGJH14 18 3 /4 ECGJH24 18 1 /2 ECGJH16 18 3 /4 ECGJH26 18 1 ECGJH36 18 1 /2 ECGJH18 18 3 /4 ECGJH28 18 1 ECGJH38 21 1 /2 ECGJH110 21 3 /4 ECGJH210 21 1 ECGJH310 21 1 /2 ECGJH112 21 3 /4 ECGJH212 21 1 ECGJH312 21 1 1 /4 ECGJH412 21 1 1 /2 ECGJH512 21 2 ECGJH612 24 21/2 ECGJH712 24 3 ECGJH812 24 4 ECGJH1012 24 1 /2 ECGJH115 24 3 /4 ECGJH215 24 1 ECGJH315 24 11/4 ECGJH415 24 11/2 ECGJH515 24 2 ECGJH615 27 21/2 ECGJH715 27 3 ECGJH815 27 4 ECGJH1015 27 1 /2 ECGJH118 27 3 /4 ECGJH218 27 Flexible Length Size Cat. # (In.) 1 ECGJH318 27 11/4 ECGJH418 27 11/2 ECGJH518 27 2 ECGJH618 30 21/2 ECGJH718 30 3 ECGJH818 30 4 ECGJH1018 30 1 /2 ECGJH121 30 3 /4 ECGJH221 30 1 ECGJH321 30 11/4 ECGJH421 30 11/2 ECGJH521 30 2 ECGJH621 33 21/2 ECGJH721 33 3 ECGJH821 33 4 ECGJH1021 33 1 /2 ECGJH124 33 3 /4 ECGJH224 33 1 ECGJH324 33 11/4 ECGJH424 33 1 1 /2 ECGJH524 33 2 ECGJH624 36 21/2 ECGJH724 36 3 ECGJH824 36 4 ECGJH1024 36 1 /2 ECGJH127 36 3 /4 ECGJH227 36 1 ECGJH327 36 11/4 ECGJH427 36 11/2 ECGJH527 36 2 ECGJH627 Size Cat. # 21/2 3 4 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 4 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 4 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 4 ECGJH727 ECGJH827 ECGJH1027 ECGJH130 ECGJH230 ECGJH330 ECGJH430 ECGJH530 ECGJH630 ECGJH730 ECGJH830 ECGJH1030 ECGJH133 ECGJH233 ECGJH333 ECGJH433 ECGJH533 ECGJH633 ECGJH733 ECGJH833 ECGJH1033 ECGJH136 ECGJH236 ECGJH336 ECGJH436 ECGJH536 ECGJH636 ECGJH736 ECGJH836 ECGJH1036
Features:
Rugged design to withstand explosive pressure (Class I) Mechanical abuse Liquid-tight for wet locations For use where lack of space makes use of rigid conduit difficult Wire duct liner in sizes 1/2" to 2" insulates against grounds and burnthrough from short circuit No bonding jumpers required, metallic braid provides continuous electrical path ECGJH combination has two threaded male end fittings ECLK combination has one female union and one male threaded end fitting

NEC: 1 /2" and 3/4" (Brass and S516) Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D 1" to 2" (Brass and S516) Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D 21/2" to 4" (Stainless Steel) Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D All sizes also for use in Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G, Division 2, Groups F, G and Class III UL Standard: 886
Dimensions
In Inches:
Standard Materials:
End fittings: 1 /2" to 2" forged brass 21/2" to 4" stainless steel Female unions: 1 /2" to 1" steel 11/4" to 4" Feraloy iron alloy 1/2" to 2" have bronze braid covering and flexible brass inner core; packing is woven cotton braid impregnated with asphalt 21/2" to 4" have a Type 304 stainless steel braid
Standard Finishes:
Brass and bronze natural Steel electrogalvanized with chromate treatment Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized with aluminum acrylic paint Stainless steel natural
ECGJH
Options:
Description Suffix All stainless steel S516 For severely corrosive locations, a flexible PVC protective coating will be supplied S758 Special coupling lengths available up to 144 inches. To order, change last two digits in any standard catalog number to the two or three digit length desired in whole inches i.e. To order a 3/4" trade size 110 inches long, use catalog number ECGJH2110. 132
www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502
ECLK
See certifications and compliances.
Couplings
/2"2" Brass Construction All Stainless Steel with suffix S516 2-1/24" Stainless Steel construction only
1
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Wet Locations Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III
5F
5F
ECLK (ECGJH provide with UNF Female union male connection 1 end, female connection 1 end)
Flexible Length (In.) Size 4 4 6 6 6 8 8 8 10 10 10 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 18 18 /2 3 /4 1 /2 3 /4 1 1 /2 3 /4 1 1 /2 3 /4 1 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 4 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 4 1 /2 3 /4
1
Cat. # ECLK14 ECLK24 ECLK16 ECLK26 ECLK36 ECLK18 ECLK28 ECLK38 ECLK110 ECLK210 ECLK310 ECLK112 ECLK212 ECLK312 ECLK412 ECLK512 ECLK612 ECLK712 ECLK812 ECLK1012 ECLK115 ECLK215 ECLK315 ECLK415 ECLK515 ECLK615 ECLK715 ECLK815 ECLK1015 ECLK118 ECLK218
Flexible Length (In.) Size 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 27 27 27 27 27 27 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 4 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 4 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 4 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2
Cat. # ECLK318 ECLK418 ECLK518 ECLK618 ECLK718 ECLK818 ECLK1018 ECLK121 ECLK221 ECLK321 ECLK421 ECLK521 ECLK621 ECLK721 ECLK821 ECLK1021 ECLK124 ECLK224 ECLK324 ECLK424 ECLK524 ECLK624 ECLK724 ECLK824 ECLK1024 ECLK127 ECLK227 ECLK327 ECLK427 ECLK527 ECLK627
Flexible Length (In.) 27 27 27 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 33 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 36
Size 21/2 3 4 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 4 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 4 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 4
Cat. # ECLK727 ECLK827 ECLK1027 ECLK130 ECLK230 ECLK330 ECLK430 ECLK530 ECLK630 ECLK730 ECLK830 ECLK1030 ECLK133 ECLK233 ECLK333 ECLK433 ECLK533 ECLK633 ECLK733 ECLK833 ECLK1033 ECLK136 ECLK236 ECLK336 ECLK436 ECLK536 ECLK636 ECLK736 ECLK836 ECLK1036
ECGJH and ECLK

Size 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 4 a 17/8 21/16 21/2 27/8 35/16 31/4 3 31/8 45/8 b 11/2 17/8 21/8 215/16 31/2 41/4 47/16 49/16 415/16 c 11/8 13/16 11/2 17/8 17/8 2 15/8 13/4 31/4 d 3 31/4 35/8 43/16 53/16 51/16 51/16 53/8 71/2 e 19/16 113/16 17/8 23/4 31/16 313/16 45/16 51/16 63/16
Minimum Recommended Radius of Bend

Size 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 Radius 10 12 14 14 16 Size 2 21/2 3 4 Radius 16 16 18 30
See certifications and compliances.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
133
5F
XD Expansion/Deflection Coupling
Watertight Corrosion-Resistant
5F
Applications:
XD couplings can be installed indoors, outdoors, buried underground, or embedded in concrete in non-hazardous areas. XD's are used with standard rigid conduit or PVC rigid conduit. (PVC requires rigid metal conduit nipples and rigid metal-to-PVC conduit adapters.) XD's provide a flexible and watertight connection for protection of conduit wiring systems from damage due to movement. Typical applications include: Underground conduit feeder runs Runs between sections of concrete subject to relative movement Runs between fixed structures Conduit entrances in high-rise buildings Bridges Marinas, docks, piers
XD
1. Axial expansion/contraction.
2. Angular misalignment.
Hub Hub Size Cat. # Size 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 XD3 XD4 XD5 XD6 XD7 3 31/2 4 5 6 Cat. # XD8 XD9 XD010 XD012 XD014
Features:
XD couplings accommodate the following movements without collapsing or fracturing the conduit, and damaging the wires it contains: 1. Axial expansion or contraction up to 3/4" 2. Angular misalignment of the axes of the coupled conduit runs in any direction to 30 3. Parallel misalignment of the axes of coupled conduit runs in any direction to 3/4" Inner sleeve maintains constant I.D. in any position and provides a smooth insulated wireway for protection of wire insulation Watertight flexible neoprene outer jacket is corrosion resistant and protects the grounding strap and the attachment points of the hubs Tinned copper flexible braid grounding straps assure grounding continuity Stainless steel jacket clamps for strength and corrosion resistance Standard tapered electrical threads fit standard rigid conduit Integral hub bushing protects insulation of conductors
3. Parallel misalignment.

UL Standard: 514B
Standard Materials:
Hubs Feraloy iron alloy Outer jacket molded neoprene Jacket clamps stainless steel Inner sleeve molded plastic Grounding straps tinned copper flexible braid
Dimensions
In Inches:
Hub Size 1 1- 1/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4 5 6 a 7 73/8 71/4 71/4 71/2 75/8 73/4 77/8 73/4 83/8 b 315/16 41/4 41/2 415/16 55/16 515/16 61/2 615/16 8 9
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy electrogalvanized Neoprene natural (black) Molded plastic natural (brown)
Options:
Description Hot dipped galvanized Suffix HDG
Size Ranges:
1" to 6" (Smaller sizes can be obtained by using reducing bushings)
134
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
XJG Conduit Expansion Joints With Internal Grounding For Rigid Metal Conduit and IMC
Applications:
XJG expansion couplings are used with rigid metal conduit and IMC: Without the need for an external bonding jumper and clamps (up to 4") To couple together two (2) sections of conduit subject to longitudinal movement In long conduit runs to permit linear movement caused by thermal expansion and contraction On long conduit runs to prevent conduit from buckling and ensuing circuit failures Indoors or outdoors where conduit expansion occurs and there are wide temperature ranges In conduit runs that cross structural joints In conduit runs to prevent damage to conduit supports such as in a building or on a bridge With optional redundant visible grounding strap
Wet Locations
5F
5F
Patented Design
Conduit Size
1
Maximum Conduit Movement 4 8 4 8 4 8 4 8 4 8 4 8 4 8 4 8 4 8 4 8 8 8
Cat. # XJG14 XJG18 XJG24 XJG28 XJG34 XJG38 XJG44 XJG48 XJG54 XJG58 XJG64 XJG68 XJG74 XJG78 XJG84 XJG88 XJG94 XJG98 XJG104 XJG108 XJ128 XJ148
Optional Bonding Jumper BJ14 BJ18 BJ24 BJ28 BJ34 BJ38 BJ44 BJ48 BJ54 BJ58 BJ64 BJ68 BJ74 BJ78 BJ84 BJ88 BJ94 BJ98 BJ104 BJ108
A Diameter 1.75 1.75 2.12 2.12 2.43 2.43 3.19 3.19 3.68 3.68 4.75 4.75 4.87 4.87 5.37 5.37 6.62 6.62 6.62 6.62 7.64 9.56
B Length 6.75 10.75 6.75 10.75 7.25 11.25 7.56 11.56 7.87 11.87 8.25 12.25 9.31 13.31 10.00 14.00 9.81 13.81 9.81 13.81 15.50 16.00
Bonding Jumper Length 20" 30" 20" 30" 20" 30" 24" 30" 24" 30" 24" 30" 24" 36" 30" 36" 30" 36" 30" 36"
/2 /4
1 11/4 11/2 2

UL Standard: 514B CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 18 NEC Articles 250-77 and 300-7 (b) NEMA FB1 Wet Locations
21/2 3 31/2 4 5 6
Standard Materials and Finishes:

Body Steel - electrogalvanized Copper-free aluminum - natural Feraloy iron alloy - electrogalvanized (5" + 6" only) Reducer 1/2" through 1" - Steel - electrogalvanized 11/4" through 6" - Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum paint Copper-free aluminum - natural Gland Nut 1/2" through 1" - Steel - electrogalvanized 11/4" through 6" - Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum paint Copper-free aluminum - natural Packing Teflon (trademark of E.I. DuPont Co.) Washer Steel - electrogalvanized Copper-free aluminum - natural Gasket Vellum
XJG expansion couplings use a metallic bushing and ground springs to create a high integrity internal ground connection. External ground straps offer a redundant ground path and easy visible indication of ground. XJ128 and XJ148 are not internally grounded. A pair of 36" bonding jumpers are provided with fitting.
Bushing 1/2" through 1" - Steel - electrogalvanized 11/4" through 6" - Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum paint Copper-free aluminum - natural Ground Springs Phosphor bronze - electrogalvanized Ground Strap Braided tinned copper U-Bolts Malleable iron electrogalvanized
Dimensions
In Inches:
Options:
Description Available in copper-free aluminum Not available on 5" and 6" sizes Hot dipped galvanized Available with redundant ground strap for visible indication of grounding order separately (BJ Series) Suffix SA HDG XJG shown with optional bonding jumper
Size Ranges:
1/2" through 6" conduit size 4" and 8" maximum conduit movement
135
5F
XJG-EMT Conduit Expansion Joints With Internal Grounding For EMT Conduit
Options:
Available with redundant ground strap for visible indication of grounding order separately (BJ Series)
5F
Applications:
XJG expansion couplings are used with EMT Conduit: Without the need for an external bonding jumper and clamps To couple together two (2) sections of conduit subject to longitudinal movement In long conduit runs to permit linear movement caused by thermal expansion and contraction On long conduit runs to prevent conduit from buckling and ensuing circuit failures Indoors or outdoors where conduit expansion occurs and there are wide temperature ranges In conduit runs that cross structural joints In conduit runs to prevent damage to conduit supports such as in a building or on a bridge With optional redundant visible grounding strap
Size Ranges:
1/ 2" through 4" conduit size 4" maximum conduit movement
Conduit Size
1 3
Maximum Conduit Movement Cat. # 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" XJG14 EMT XJG24 EMT XJG34 EMT XJG44 EMT XJG54 EMT XJG64 EMT XJG74 EMT XJG84 EMT XJG94 EMT XJG104 EMT
Optional Bonding Jumper BJ14 BJ24 BJ34 BJ44 BJ54 BJ64 BJ74 BJ84 BJ94 BJ104
A B Diameter Length 13/4" 21/8" 27/16" 31/8" 35/8" 43/4" 47/8" 53/8" 65/8" 65/8" 103/4" 11" 111/2" 151/4" 151/2" 151/2" 183/4" 197/8" 211/4" 211/4"

UL Standard: 514B CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 18 NEC Articles 250-77 and 300-7 (b) NEMA FB1
/2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"

Body Steel - electrogalvanized Copper-free aluminum - natural Reducer 1/2" through 1" - Steel - electrogalvanized 11/4" through 4" - Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum paint Gland Nut 1/2" through 1" - Steel - electrogalvanized 11/4" through 4" - Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum paint Packing Teflon (trademark of E.I. DuPont Co.) Washer Steel - electrogalvanized Gasket Vellum Bushing 1/2" through 1" - Steel - electrogalvanized 11/4" through 4" - Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum paint Ground Springs Phosphor bronze - electrogalvanized Ground Strap Braided tinned copper U-Bolts Malleable iron electrogalvanized 136
XJG shown with optional bonding jumper
XJG expansion couplings use a metallic bushing and ground springs to create a high integrity internal ground connection. External ground straps offer a redundant ground path and easy visible indication of ground.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
XJGD Combination Expansion/Deflection Coupling and Expansion Joint Internally Grounded

Applications:
XJGD combination fittings are used with rigid metal conduit and IMC: To accommodate axial expansion, angular misalignment and parallel misalignment To couple together two (2) sections of conduit subject to longitudinal movement To maintain a ground connection without the need for an external bonding jumper and clamps In long conduit runs to prevent conduit from buckling and causing circuit failures Indoors or outdoors where conduit expansion occurs and there are wide temperature swings In conduit runs that cross structural joints In conduit runs to prevent damage to conduit supports such as in a building or on a bridge
Wet Locations
5F
5F
Maximum Conduit Hub Size Movement 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4"
Cat. # XJGD34 XJGD44 XJGD54 XJGD64 XJGD74 XJGD84 XJGD94 XJGD104
A Diameter 315/16" 41/4" 41/2" 415/16" 55/16" 515/16" 61/2" 8"
B Length 173/4" 181/8" 185/8" 191/4" 203/4" 215/8" 215/8" 273/4"

UL Standard: 514B
Standard Materials:
Body, Hubs, Gland Nut, Washer, Bushing Feraloy Packing Teflon Gasket vellum Ground Spring phosphor bronze Outer Jacket molded neoprene Jacket Clamps stainless steel Inner Sleeve molded plastic Ground Straps tinned copper braid
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy electrogalvanized
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
137
5F
Conduit Hubs
(Also see Myers Hubs see page 218)
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D
Watertight
5F
Applications:
HUB Conduit Hubs: Provide a convenient means for installing a threaded conduit hub on a junction box or device enclosure Are used to connect conduit to a sheet metal or cast enclosure Are used with threaded rigid conduit or IMC, steel or aluminum; indoors or outdoors
Conduit Size /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4
1
Cat. # HUB1 HUB2 HUB3 HUB4 HUB5 HUB6 HUB7 HUB8 HUB9 HUB10
Features:
Smooth insulated throat provides easier wire pulling and protection for conductors during installation. Neoprene sealing gasket provides a watertight seal. Compact design permits close spacing of conduit. Wide range of sizes from 1/2" to 4".
Dimensions
In Inches:

UL Standard: 514B CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 18 NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Per NEC 501-4(b), 502-4(a) and 503-3(a)
Cat. # HUB1 HUB2 HUB3 HUB4 HUB5 HUB6 HUB7 HUB8 HUB9 HUB10
Conduit Size /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4

1
a 1 11/8 13/8 11/2 15/8 111/16 23/16 27/16 27/16 29/16
b 11/4 19/16 17/8 25/16 21/2 3 35/8 41/4 43/4 51/4
c 1 13/8 15/8 2 23/8 213/16 37/16 41/16 411/16 51/16
d /8 5 /32 3 /16 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 5 /16 5 /16

1
x /64 /4 9 /32 7 /16 7 /16 7 /16 7 /16 7 /16 3 /4 11/8

9 1
Standard Materials:
1/2" to 4" malleable iron
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint
Size Ranges:
1/2" to 4"
Dimension "x" is maximum wall thickness of box that will meet the requirement for three full threads engagement of nipple and fitting body when liquidtight box connector or rigid conduit hub is installed in a knockout or slip hole.
138
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Grounding Devices Straps and Clamps
5F
Applications:
GCR grounding receptacles are used to provide static electricity grounding connections; particularly suited for, but not limited to, use in aircraft hangar floors and airport aprons. GCT ground connector and studs are used to provide "quick-connect" static electricity grounding connections with portable cable. GC grounding strap and clamp are suitable for bonding and grounding equipment in wiring systems, such as meter circuits, service entrance equipment, and appliances per NEC requirements.
GCT Grounding Connector
GCR Receptacles
For Static Electricity Grounding
5F
Cable Dia. .312" to .406"
Cat. # GCT8
GCT Stud*
Description Brass
Thread Size
3
Cat. # GCT2 Description Thread Size

5
Features:
GCR grounding receptacles have: Grounding stud integral with housing Grounding stud designed to accept standard battery clip Thread at bottom for attaching to 3/4" threaded grounding rod Cover attached to receptacle by chain to prevent loss of cover Corrosion resistant material GCT grounding connector and studs have: Substantial clip tension for grounding Integral cable clamp to prevent cable from breaking free of connector or fraying at connector Lock washer on stud to maintain good electrical contact GC strap: Is pliable, strong and corrosion resistant Assures a lasting bond. Prongs on strap clamp engage strap perforations, preventing slippage.
/8 - 16
*Not a replacement for grounding stud in GCR receptacle.
Cat. # GCR210
GC Grounding Strap
With cap and chain
/16 - 18
Strap Clamp
Used with GC102 Strap Clamp Description Cat. # 50' coil, 1" wide GC100
Description Brass
Cat. # GC102
Dimensions
In Inches:

UL Standard: GC strap and clamps 467 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 41
Standard Materials:
GCR Bronze body, cap and chain brass grounding stud GCT Bronze connector body, aluminum cable clamp, brass stud Strap flexible copper Clamp brass
GCR
Standard Finishes:
Bronze, brass, aluminum parts natural Flexible copper strap tinned
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
139
5F
Service Entrance Heads and Replacement Covers
5F
Applications:
F type service entrance heads are used: For overhead service entrance to buildings With threaded rigid, threadless rigid or threadless thinwall (EMT) conduit and rigid conduit masts
F Service Heads
Threaded Rigid
Features:
Two types available: Threaded rigid threads to conduit. Threadless rigid or EMT clamps to conduit. Available knockouts in covers allow use with variety of sizes and numbers of wires. Simple construction and easy assembly. Consists of only two pieces plus the insulating knockout cover. Easy to install.
1
/2" size
/4" 2" size Cat. # F186 F285 F385 F485 F585
/2" size Replacement Cover Cat. # CF690 5H 5 NS 5 NL 5 NL CF60 CF707 CF707 CF708 CF708
Conduit Size
1 3
Number and Dia. of Cover Knockouts 6 9/32 2 3/8 and 3 13/32 2 7/16 and 3 1/2 2 27/64 and 3 5/8 2 27/64 and 3 5/8 2 /8, 1 /16, 1 /16,1 /16 and 1 /32
7 13 11 9 21
/2 /4
1
1 1 /4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4

UL Standard: 514B CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 18
F686 F766 F866 F966 F1066
2 17/16, 1 17/32, 1 11/64, 1 61/64 and 1 55/64 2 17/16, 1 17/32, 1 11/64, 1 61/64 and 1 55/64 3 13/4, 1 17/16, 1 15/16 and 1 13/16 3 13/4, 1 17/16, 1 15/16 and 1 13/16
Standard Materials:
Copper-free aluminum
Overall Dimensions of Replacement Covers for F Series Service Heads

Cat. # CF690 5H 5 NS 5 NL CF60 CF707 CF708 Dim. 11/2 dia. 131/32 dia. 215/64 dia. 219/32 dia. 33/16 dia. 713/16 311/16 101/4 43/4
Standard Finishes:
Natural
Clamp Type
Threaded Rigid or EMT
Conduit Size
3
Number and Dia. of Cover Knockouts 2 3/8 and 3 13/32 2 7/16 and 3 1/2 2 /64 and 3 /8
27 5
Cat. # F235 F335 F435 F535 F636
Replacement Cover Cat. # 5H 5 NS 5 NL 5 NL CF60
/4
1
1 1 /4 11/2 2
2 27/64 and 3 5/8 2 7/8, 1 13/16, 1 11/16, 1 9/16 and 1 21/32
140
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
LNR Conduit Liner
5F
Applications:
LNR conduit liners are installed in rigid metal conduit or IMC: To provide a smooth wire entry from conduit into enclosures to protect wires from abrasion as they are pulled. With thin wall or thick wall enclosures. Entering drilled and tapped openings or slip holes. Entering an enclosure vertically or horizontally. Regardless of where the conduit ends in relation to the enclosure wall.
5F
Features:
UL listed and CSA certified. No need for threaded bushings, reducers, or special machining. Corrosion and heat resistant polypropylene material. Smooth flange providing easy wire pulling and protects conductors being installed. Space saving. Molded ribs ensure a tight fit, preventing the liner from sliding out while conductors are being pulled. Quick and easy to install.
Cat. # LNR1 LNR2 LNR3 LNR4 LNR5 LNR6 LNR7 LNR8 LNR9 LNR10 Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1
A 13/16" 19/16" 21/16" 21/16" 29/16" 29/16" 27/8" 27/8" 31/16" 31/16"
B /8" 11/8" 13/8" 13/4" 2" 27/16" 27/16" 39/16" 41/16" 49/16"
7
C /8" 13 /16" 11/16" 13/8" 15/8" 21/16" 21/4" 31/16" 39/16" 4"
5
D /16" /4" /8" 11/4" 17/16" 17/8"

9 3 7
27/8" 33/8" 37/8"

NEC Article 346-8 UL Standard 514B CSA Standard C22.2 No. 18 U.S. Patent No. 5,383,688
Dimensions
In Inches:
Standard Materials:
Polypropylene
Standard Finishes:
Natural (clear)
Sizes:
1/2" through 4"
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
141
5F
142
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Conduit Seals, Breathers and Drains Hazardous
6F
6F
Description
Application/Selection Breathers & Drains Standard
ECD Series CD Series (Non-hazardous)
Page No.
see page 144
see page 164 see page 165 see page 164 see pages 161162 see pages 161162 see pages 161162 see page 163
Universal
ECD Series
Sealing Compound
Chico A Chico SpeedSeal
Sealing Fiber
Chico X
Sealing Fittings Tool Kit

EYS Tool Kit
Seals Drains
EYD Series EZD Series EYDX Series
see page 150 see page 151 see page 153 see page 146 see see see see see page page page page page 155 146 148 149 152
Elbows
EYS
Horizontal/Vertical
ES Series EYS Series EYS Series with ATEX EYSA Series EYSX Series
Inspection
EZD Series
see page 151 see page 154 see page 146 see page 148 see page 156 see pages 157160
Retrofit
EYSR Series
Universal
EZS Series EZS Series with ATEX
Secondary Process Seals

Ultra High Pressure Seal Secondary Process Seal Assembly with Rupture Sensor
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
143
6F
Conduit Seals Breathers and Drains

6F
Applications:
Seals: Seals are installed in conduit runs to prevent the passage of gases, vapors or flames from one portion of the electrical installation to another through the conduit, limiting any explosion to the enclosure and preventing precompression or "pressure piling." While not a National Electrical Code requirement, many engineers consider it good practice to sectionalize long conduit runs by inserting seals not more than 50' to 100' apart, depending on the conduit size, to minimize the effects of "pressure piling." Breathers: Breathers (vents), are installed in the top of enclosures to provide ventilation to minimize condensation in enclosures. Drains: Drains are used in humid atmospheres or in wet locations where it is likely that water can gain entrance to the interiors of enclosures or raceways. The raceways should be inclined so that water will not collect in enclosures or on seals, but will be led to low points where it may pass out through ECD drains. Frequently the arrangement of raceway runs makes this method impractical if not impossible. In such instances, EZD or EYD drain seal fittings should be used. These fittings prevent harmful accumulations of water above the seal.
EZS Horizontal seal
EYSR Retrofit seal
EYS Horizontal seal

Seals: Select the proper sealing fitting for the hazardous vapor involved; i.e., Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C or D. Select the appropriate seal for new or retrofit installations. Select a sealing fitting for the proper use in respect to mounting position. This is particularly critical when the conduit runs between hazardous and nonhazardous areas. Improper positioning of a seal may permit hazardous gases or vapors to enter the system beyond the seal and permit them to escape into another portion of the hazardous area or to enter a non-hazardous area. Some seals are designed to be mounted in any position; others are restricted to vertical mounting.
The amount of Chico fiber and compound required for any seal is determined by volume, hub size and mounting position of the seal.
Drains: In locations which are usually considered dry, surprising amounts of water frequently collect in conduit systems. No conduit system is airtight, therefore, it may "breathe". Alternate increases and decreases in temperature and/or in barometric pressure, due to weather changes or due to the nature of the process carried on in the location where the conduit is installed, will cause "breathing," resulting in condensation and water accumulation. In view of this likelihood, it is therefore good practice to insure against such water accumulations and probable subsequent insulation failures by installing breathers, drain seals, or inspection seals, even though conditions prevailing at the time of planning or installing do not indicate their need.
EYS 1 Vertical sealing
Options:
144
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Conduit Seals Breathers and Drains

Shape Selector Chart Quick Selector Chart
6F
6F
Series EYS / EYSA
Page Series see page 146 EZD
Page Series see ECD page 151 Standard
Page Series see ECD page 164 Universal
Page Series see page 164 EYSX
Page Series see page 152 EYDX
Page see page 153
EYS see Elbow Seal page 146 ES
see page 155
EYD
see page 150 EYSR
see page 150 EZS
see page 147

Series EYS EYS ATEX EYSA EYS 29 EYSR Description Seal Seal Seal Elbow Seal Retrofit Seal/Drain Seal* NEC Hazardous Group Class I, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Groups E, F, G Ex II 2 G EEx d IIC Flameproof, Exd, IIC Class I, Groups C, D Class II, Groups E, F, G Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D Class II, Div. 2, Groups E, F, G Class III Class I, Groups B, C, D Class II, Groups E, F, G Class I, Groups C, D Class II, Groups E, F, G Ex II 2 G EEx d IIC Class I, Groups C, D Class I, Groups B, C, D Class II, Groups F, G Class I, Groups B, C, D Class II, Groups F, G Class I, Groups C, D Class II, Groups E, F, G Class I, Groups B, C, D Class II, Groups E, F, G Class III Class I, Groups C, D Class II, Groups F, G For Conduit Angle Vertical and Horizontal Vertical and Horizontal Vertical and Horizontal 90 turn Vertical and Horizontal
EYSX EZS EZS ATEX ES EYD EYDX EZD ECD
Expanded Fill Sealing Fittings Seal Seal Sealing Hub Seal and Drain Expanded Fill Sealing Fittings and Drain Inspection Seal and Drain Inspection Seal only Standard Breather only Drain only Universal Drain Breather Non-hazardous Drain Ultra High Pressure Seal Secondary Process Seal with Rupture Sensor
Vertical and Horizontal All All Vertical Vertical Vertical Vertical
ECD CD UHPS SPSR
Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C, D Certified to CSA Standards through QPS Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 1 & 2 IIB + H2 Cl. II, Div. 1 & 2, Groups E, F, G
*Drain purchased separately.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
145
6F
Conduit Sealing Fittings

Chico Sealing Compound and Fiber see pages 161162
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III
6F
Applications:
EYS and EZS sealing fittings: Restrict the passage of gases, vapors or flames from one portion of the electrical installation to another at atmospheric pressure and normal ambient temperatures Limit explosions to the sealed off enclosure Limit precompression or pressure "piling" in conduit systems Sealing fittings are required: At each entrance to an enclosure housing an arcing or sparking device when used in Class I, Division 1 and 2 hazardous locations. To be located as close as practicable and, in no case, more than 18" from such enclosures At each conduit entrance of 2" size or larger to an enclosure or fitting housing terminals, splices or taps when used in Class I, Division 1 hazardous locations. To be located as close as practicable and, in no case, more than 18" from such enclosures In conduit systems when leaving Class I, Division 1 or Division 2 hazardous locations In cable systems when the cables either do not have a gas/vaportight continuous sheath or are capable of transmitting gases or vapors through the cable core when those cables leave the Class I, Division 1 or Division 2 hazardous locations
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy and ductile iron electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Steel electrogalvanized
Options:
Description Copper-free aluminum bodies, nipples and enclosures Suffix SA
Size Ranges:
1/2" 6"
Ordering Information - EYS
Features:
EYS and EZS sealing fittings include: Minimum turning radius Large openings with threaded closures to provide easy access to conduit hubs for making dams Integral bushings in conduit hubs to protect conductor insulation from damage Taper-tapped hubs to ensure ground continuity EYS sealing fittings are available for installation in either vertical only or in both horizontal or vertical positions. EZS sealing fittings for installation at any angle; the covers with opening for sealing compound can be properly positioned to accept the compound.
Vertical female
Vertical male & female
Vertical or horizontal female
Vertical or horizontal male & female
For Sealing in Vertical Positions Only

Hub Size
1 3
Female Hub Cat. # EYS1* EYS2* EYS3*
Male & Female Hub Cat. # EYS16* EYS26* EYS36*
Approximate Internal Volume in Cubic Inches 1 2 33/4 Approximate Internal Volume in Cubic Inches
/2 /4 1
For Sealing in Vertical or Horizontal Positions

NEC/CEC: EYS1-3, 11-31, 16-36, 116-316 Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III EYS41-101, 416-1016 Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III EYS29, 4-014, 46-0146 EZS1-8, 16-86 Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III UL Standard: 886 CSA Standard: C22.2
Sealing fittings are approved for use in hazardous locations only when Chico X fiber and Chico A sealing compound or Chico SpeedSeal are used to make the seal.
Hub Size /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4

1
Female Hub Cat. # EYS11* EYS21* EYS31* EYS41 EYS51 EYS61 EYS71 EYS81 EYS91 EYS101
Male & Female Hub Cat. # EYS116* EYS216* EYS316* EYS416 EYS516 EYS616 EYS716 EYS816 EYS916 EYS1016
Vertical 1 2 3 6 103/4 19 251/2 56 72 95
Horizontal 1 2 33/4 8 121/4 223/4 30 641/2 82 110
*Available in copper-free aluminum to order, add suffix SA to Cat. No.

EYS 16 Series
Size 1 /2 3 /4 1 a 39/32 312/16 45/16 b 11/4 11/2 13/4 Turning Radius 15/8 129/32 23/8
EYS 116 Series

a 311/16 311/16 45/16 b 11/4 11/2 13/4 Turning Radius 15/32 11/4 13/8
EYS 46 Series
11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4 5 6 51/16 51/2 61/4 71/2 81/2 93/16 93/4 111/16 121/8 23/16 27/16 3 31/2 41/4 43/4 51/4 61/2 75/8 123/32 21/16 25/16 211/16 35/16 37/16 311/16 419/32 511/32
EYS 116 Series

51/16 51/2 61/4 71/2 81/2 93/16 93/4 23/16 27/16 3 31/2 41/4 43/4 51/4 123/32 21/16 25/16 211/16 35/16 37/16 311/16
Standard Materials:
Bodies Feraloy iron alloy and/or ductile iron Plugs Feraloy iron alloy and/or steel Removable nipples steel 146
With cover removed. Copyright 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds

Ordering Information - EYS
6F
Ordering Information - EZS
6F
Vertical or horizontal male & female
Male & female hub

Hub Size 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4 5 6 Female Hub Cat. # EYS4* EYS5* EYS6* EYS7* EYS8* EYS9* EYS10* EYS012 EYS014 Male & Female Hub Cat. # EYS46* EYS56* EYS66* EYS76* EYS86* EYS96* EYS106* EYS0126 EYS0146 Approximate Internal Volume in Cubic Inches Vert. 6 103/4 19 251/2 56 72 95 200 290 Horiz. 8 121/4 223/4 30 641/2 82 110 222 315
For Sealing at Any Angle

Hub Size /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3
1
Female Hub Cat. # EZS1 EZS2 EZS3 EZS4 EZS5 EZS6 EZS7 EZS8
Male & Female Hub Cat. # EZS16 EZS26 EZS36 EZS46 EZS56 EZS66 EZS76 EZS86
Approximate Internal Volume in Cubic Inches Vert. 61/4 61/2 101/4 121/2 141/2 46 55 90 Horiz. 61/4 61/2 101/4 121/2 141/2 46 55 90
*Available in copper-free aluminum to order, add suffix SA to Cat. No.
EYS
Dimensions
In Inches
Elbow seal
For Sealing in Vertical Positions

Hub Size
3
Cat. # EYS29
Approximate Internal Volume in Cubic Inches 13/4
EYS 16 Series
EYS 46 and EYS 116 Series
EYS Elbow Seal
EZS Series
/4
EYS Elbow Seal

Size 3 /4 a 311/16 b 13/4 Turning Radius (Vertical) 17/8
EZS Series
Size 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 a 43/16 43/16 415/16 51/16 53/16 71/16 715/16 85/8 b 35/8 35/8 331/32 413/32 49/16 513/32 527/32 61/2 c 21/2 21/2 3 3 31/4 53/16 53/16 57/8 Turning Radius 17/8 17/8 21/8 25/16 211/32 39/32 33/8 37/8
With cover removed.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
147
6F

for IEC Applications
Ex II 2 G EEx d IIC
Zone 1 and 2
6F
Applications:
EYS and EZS sealing fittings: Restrict the passage of gases, vapors or flames from one portion of the electrical installation to another at atmospheric pressure and normal ambient temperatures Limit explosions to the sealed off enclosure Limit precompression or pressure "piling" in conduit systems Sealing fittings are required: At each entrance to an enclosure housing an arcing or sparking device when used in Class I, Division 1 and 2 hazardous locations. To be located as close as practicable and, in no case, more than 18" from such enclosures At each conduit entrance of 2" size or larger to an enclosure or fitting housing terminals, splices or taps when used in Class I, Division 1 hazardous locations. To be located as close as practicable and, in no case, more than 18" from such enclosures In conduit systems when leaving Class I, Division 1 or Division 2 hazardous locations In cable systems when the cables either do not have a gas/vaportight continuous sheath or are capable of transmitting gases or vapors through the cable core when those cables leave the Class I, Division 1 or Division 2 hazardous locations
EZS
EYS

IEC: Ex II 2 G EEx d IIC EC-Type examination certificate LOM 03 ATEX 2108 IP67 according to EN 60529
Standard Materials:
Bodies Light alloy, natural finish Plugs Light alloy, natural finish Removable nipples Light alloy, natural finish
Features:
EYS and EZS sealing fittings include: Minimum turning radius Large openings with threaded closures to provide easy access to conduit hubs for making dams Integral bushings in conduit hubs to protect conductor insulation from damage Taper-tapped hubs to ensure ground continuity EYS sealing fittings are available for installation in either vertical only or in both horizontal or vertical positions. EZS sealing fittings for installation at any angle; the covers with opening for sealing compound can be properly positioned to accept the compound.
Size Ranges:
EYS - 1/2" 4" EZS - 1/2" 1"
Series EYS EYS EYS EYS EYS EYS EZS EZS EZS EZS Mounting Direction Vertical Vertical Vertical Vertical Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal Horizontal Hub Size /2" NPT 3 /4" NPT 1" NPT 1" NPT 11/2" NPT 2" NPT 1 /2" NPT 3 /4"NPT 1" NPT 1" NPT
1
Cat. # NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 002 002 002 002 002 002 002 002 002 002 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 117 125 133 620 160 168 216 224 232 729
148
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

EYSA Flameproof Sealing Fitting
Applications:
EYSA sealing fittings: Restrict the passage of gases, vapors, or flames from one portion of the electrical installation to another at atmospheric pressure and normal ambient temperatures Limit explosions to the sealed off enclosure Prevent pre-compression or "pressure piling" in conduit systems Sealing fittings are required: At each entrance to an enclosure housing an arcing or sparking device when used in Zone 1, hazardous locations to be located as close as practicable and in no case more than 450mm from such enclosures In conduit systems when leaving the Zone 1 area and entering an area of lesser hazard
Zone 1 Zone 2
Zone 21 Zone 22
6F
6F
Features:
Minimum turning radius Large openings with threaded closures to provide easy access to conduit hubs for making dams Integral bushings to protect conductor insulation from damage Removable male nipple supplied when male and female hub style is ordered

Type of Protection: Ex d, DIP A21, T60C, IP66 Degree of Protection: IP66 Gas Group: IIC Approvals: IEC Ex TSA07.0015-1
Male & Female EYSA16M EYSA26M EYSA36M EYSA46M EYSA56M EYSA26B Weight of Sealing Compound per Seal (g) 50 100 188 406 550 100 50 50 100 100 Weight of Chico X Fiber per Seal (g) 1 2 3.5 7 14 2 1 1 2 2
Entry Size 20mm/20mm 25mm/25mm 32mm/32mm 40mm/40mm 50mm/50mm 3 /4" BSP/3/4" BSP 20mm/1/2" BSP 20mm/3/4" BSP 25mm/1/2" BSP 25mm/3/4" BSP
Female EYSA1M EYSA2M EYSA3M EYSA4M EYSA5M EYSA2B EYSA11MB EYSA12MB EYSA21MB EYSA22MB
Standard Materials:
Bodies - copper-free aluminum Removable nipples and plugs - brass
Standard Finishes:
Body - polyurethane gray Nipples and plugs - natural
Options:
Stainless steel body - add suffix "SS" to catalog number
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
149
6F
Conduit Sealing Fittings With Drains

Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III
6F
Applications:
EYD drain and EZD drain and inspection sealing fittings: Restrict the passage of gases, vapors or flames from one portion of the electrical installation to another at atmospheric pressure and normal ambient temperatures Limit explosions to the sealed-off enclosure Prevent precompression or "pressure piling" in conduit systems Drain sealing fittings are installed in vertical conduit runs and at low points in conduit systems to prevent accumulation of condensate above seal. For sealing fitting requirements see page 145.
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy and ductile iron electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Copper-free aluminum natural Stainless steel natural Steel electrogalvanized
Options:
Description Copper-free aluminum bodies, nipples and enclosures Suffix SA
Size Ranges:
EYD 1/2" 4" EZD 1/2" 2"
Ordering Information - EYD
Features:
EYD and EZD drain sealing fittings include: Drain to provide continuous, automatic drainage of condensate Large openings with threaded closures to provide easy access to conduit hubs for making dams Integral bushings to protect conductor insulation from damage Taper-tapped hubs to ensure ground continuity EZD drain and inspection sealing fittings also include: Removable covers for periodic inspection of seals Barrier for sealing compound easily installed after dams are made and before compound is poured.
1 /2" 1" Female hub
/2" 1" Male & female hub

1
11/4" 4" Female hub Male & Female Hub Cat. # EYD116 EYD216 EYD316 EYD416 EYD516 EYD616 EYD716 EYD816 EYD916 EYD1016
11/4" 4" Male & female hub Approximate Internal Volume in Cubic Inches 1 2 33/4 8 103/4 20 35 57 75 105
Hub Size /2 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4

1 3
Female Hub Cat. # EYD1* EYD2* EYD3* EYD4* EYD5* EYD6* EYD7* EYD8* EYD9* EYD10*
Male & Female Hub Cat. # EYD16* EYD26* EYD36* EYD46* EYD56* EYD66* EYD76* EYD86* EYD96* EYD106*
Female Hub Cat. # EYD11 EYD21 EYD31 EYD41 EYD51 EYD61 EYD71 EYD81 EYD91 EYD101

NEC/CEC: EYD11-101, 116-1016 Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III EYD1-10, 16-106, EZD10-60, 111-611 Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III UL Standard: 886 CSA Standard: C22.2
Dimensions
In Inches EYD Drain Seal
Size 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4 a 39/32 311/16 45/16 51/16 51/2 61/4 71/2 81/2 93/16 93/4 b 11/4 11/2 23/16 23/16 27/16 3 31/2 41/4 43/4 51/4 Turning Radius 15/8 129/32 23/8 127/32 21/16 25/16 211/16 35/16 37/16 31/2
Standard Materials:
Bodies, and inspection or drain covers Feraloy iron alloy and/or ductile iron Closure for drain copper-free aluminum or ductile iron Small closure plug Feraloy iron alloy and/or steel Drain stainless steel Removable nipples steel 150
EYD 1/2" 1"
EYD 11/4" 4"
With cover removed. *Available in copper-free aluminum to order, add suffix SA to Cat. No. Sealing Fittings are approved for use in hazardous locations only when Chico X fiber and Chico A sealing compound or Chico SpeedSeal are used to make the seal. See Certifications and Compliances for classification of each product.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Conduit Sealing Fittings with Drain and Inspection Cover

EZD With Drain Cover
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Explosionproof Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Dust-Ignitionproof Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III
6F
Dimensions
In Inches:
6F
Hub Size /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2

1
Cat. # EZD111 EZD211 EZD311 EZD411 EZD511 EZD611
Approximate Internal Volume in Cubic Inches 5 6 10 11 13 40
EZD Drain and Inspection Seals

Size 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 a 43/16 43/16 415/16 415/16 53/16 71/8 b 3 3 31/2 31/2 31/2 59/16 Drain Cover c 33/8 35/8 37/8 45/16 49/16 51/4 Turning Radius 21/16 23/16 27/16 25/8 211/16 311/16
With cover removed.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
151
6F
EYSX Expanded Fill Sealing Fittings

Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III
6F
Applications:
EYSX Expanded Fill Sealing Fittings: Restrict the passage of gases, vapors or flames from one portion of the electrical installation to another at atmospheric pressure and normal ambient temperatures Limit explosions to the sealed-off enclosure Limit precompression or "pressure piling" in conduit systems Provide 40% wire fill capacity to allow uninterrupted runs in a conduit system Sealing fittings are required: At each entrance to an enclosure housing an arcing or sparking device when used in Class I, Division 1 and 2 hazardous locations. To be located as close as practicable and, in no case, more than 18" from such enclosures At each entrance of 2" size or larger to an enclosure or fitting housing terminals, splices or taps when used in Class I, Division 1 hazardous locations. To be located as close as practicable and, in no case, more than 18" from such enclosures In conduit systems when leaving Class I, Division 1 or 2 hazardous locations In cable systems when the cables either do not have a gas/vaportight continuous sheath or are capable of transmitting gases or vapors through the cable core when those cables leave the Class I, Division 1 or 2 hazardous locations
EYSX9, EYSX10, EYSX1 SA EYSX10 SA Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III UL Standard: 886 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
Standard Materials:
Bodies Feraloy iron alloy and/or ductile iron or copper-free aluminum (SA Suffix) Closures Feraloy iron alloy and/or steel or copper-free aluminum (SA Suffix)
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy and ductile iron electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Steel electrogalvanized Copper-free aluminum natural
Vertical or horizontal female

Sealing fittings are approved for use in hazardous locations only when Chico X fiber and Chico A sealing compound or Chico SpeedSeal are used to make the seal.
Options:
Description Copper-free aluminum bodies and enclosures Suffix SA
Dimensions
In Inches:
Size Ranges:
1/2" 4"
Internal Volume Hub Female Hub in Cubic Inches Size Cat. # Vertical Horizontal /2 /2 3 /4 3 /4 1 1 11/4 11/4 11/2 11/2 2 2 21/2 21/2 3 3 31/2 31/2 4 4
1 1
Features:
EYSX Expanded Fill Sealing Fittings provide: A 40% wire fill capacity for expanded fill sealing Large openings with threaded closures to provide easy access to conduit hubs for making dams Integral bushings in conduit hubs to protect conductor insulation from damage Taper-tapped hubs to ensure ground continuity Minimum turning radius EYSX Expanded Fill Sealing Fittings are available for installation in both horizontal or vertical positions.

NEC/CEC: EYSX11 EYSX81 Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III
EYSX11* EYSX1 SA EYSX21* EYSX2 SA EYSX31 EYSX3 SA EYSX41 EYSX4 SA EYSX51 EYSX5 SA EYSX61 EYSX6 SA EYSX71 EYSX7 SA EYSX81 EYSX8 SA EYSX9* EYSX9 SA EYSX10* EYSX10 SA
2 2 3 3 6 6 19 19 19 19 56 56 72 72 95 95 200 200 200 200
2 2 33/4 33/4 8 8 223/4 223/4 223/4 223/4 641/2 641/2 82 82 110 110 222 222 222 222
NPT Size 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4
A 311/16 45/16 51/16 61/4 61/4 81/2 93/16 93/4 111/16 111/16
B 11/2 13/4 23/16 3 3 41/4 43/4 51/4 61/2 61/2
Turning Radius 11/4 13/8 123/32 25/16 25/16 35/16 3-7/16 3-11/16 4-19/32 4-19/32
See Certifications and Compliances for classsification of each product. With plug cover removed. *Feraloy
152
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EYDX Expanded Fill Sealing Fittings With Drains

Applications:
EYDX Expanded Fill Sealing Fittings with drains: Restrict the passage of gases, vapors or flames from one portion of the electrical installation to another at atmospheric pressure and normal ambient temperatures Limit explosions to the sealed-off enclosure Prevent precompression or "pressure piling" in conduit systems Provide 40% wire fill capacity to allow uninterrupted runs in a conduit system Drain sealing fittings are installed in vertical conduit runs and at low points in conduit systems to prevent accumulation of condensate above seal. For sealing fitting requirements see page 145.
6F
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy and ductile iron electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Copper-free aluminum natural Stainless steel natural Steel electrogalvanized
6F
Options:
Description Copper-free aluminum bodies and enclosures Suffix SA
Size Ranges:
EYDX 1/2" 3"
Sealing Fittings are approved for use in hazardous locations only when Chico X fiber and Chico A sealing compound or Chico SpeedSeal are used to make the seal.
1
/2" 3/4"
1" 3"
Features:
EYDX Expanded Fill drain sealing fittings provide: A 40% wire fill capacity for expanded fill sealing Drain to provide continuous, automatic drainage of condensate Large openings with threaded closures to provide easy access to conduit hubs for making dams Integral bushings to protect conductor insulation from damage Taper-tapped hubs to ensure ground continuity
Hub Female Hub Size Cat # /2 /2 3 /4 3 /4 1 1 11/4 11/4 11/2 11/2 2 2 21/2 21/2 3 3
1 1
Dimensions
In Inches:
Internal Volume in Cubic Inches 2 2 33/4 33/4 8 8 20 20 20 20 57 57 75 75 105 105

NEC/CEC: EYDX11 EYDX81 Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III EYDX1 SA EYDX8 SA Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III UL Standard: 886 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
EYDX11* EYDX1 SA EYDX21* EYDX2 SA EYDX31 EYDX3 SA EYDX41 EYDX4 SA EYDX51 EYDX5 SA EYDX61 EYDX6 SA EYDX71 EYDX7 SA EYDX81 EYDX8 SA
See Certifications and Compliances for classification of each product. * Feraloy
EYDX NPT
Size 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21 /2 3 A 311/16 45/16 51/16 61/4 61/4 81/2 93/16 93/4 B
13
Turning Radius 129/32 23/8 1-27/32 2-5/16 2-5/16 3-5/16 3-7/16 3-1/2
/4 23/16 23/16 3 3 41/4 43/4 51/4
With drain cover removed.
Standard Materials:
Bodies and drain covers Feraloy iron alloy, and ductile iron or copper-free aluminum (SA Suffix) Closure for drain copper-free aluminum or malleable iron Small closure plug Feraloy iron alloy and/or steel or copper-free aluminum (SA Suffix) Drain stainless steel
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
153
6F
EYSR Retrofit Sealing Fitting

Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups E, F, G Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof
6F
Applications:
EYSR retrofit sealing fittings are installed: In rigid metal conduit systems in Class I, Division 2 hazardous locations To replace installed Cooper CrouseHinds type EYS or EYD sealing fittings Without disassembly of the conduit system In vertical or horizontal positions, indoors or outdoors To restrict the passage of gases, vapors, or flames from one portion of the electrical system to another at atmospheric pressures and normal ambient temperatures To limit explosions to the sealed-off enclosure To limit precompression or "pressure piling" in the conduit system To prevent accumulation of water in the conduit system when installed with an ECD15 drain
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Steel electrogalvanized Gasket natural
Options:
Description Copper-free aluminum Suffix SA
Size Ranges:
3/4" 4"
Features:
Seal may be installed in the existing conduit run without disassembly of the conduit system saving time and labor Overall length and spacing requirements do not exceed those of standard EYS seals; permits close nesting of seals Pipe plugs permit the installation of a standard ECD15 drain fitting (order separately) for use in vertical conduit runs to drain any water that might accumulate in the conduit system Steel set screws provide grounding continuity Suitable for vertical and horizontal installations for indoor and outdoor applications Available in 3/4" to 4" NPT sizes
Approximate Internal Volume in Cubic Inches* Vert. Horiz. 31/2 43/4 7 121/4 253/4 48 861/2 147 186 53/4 91/2 131/2 241/4 401/2 751/2 126 210 252 Approximate Amount (oz.) of Fiber per Hub Vert. Horiz. /16 /8 1 /4 1 /2 1 11/2 2 41/2 41/2
1 1
Hub Size /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4

3
Cat. # EYSR2 EYSR3 EYSR4 EYSR5 EYSR6 EYSR7 EYSR8 EYSR9 EYSR10

NEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 2, Groups E, F, G UL Standard: 886, 1203 CEC: Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
EYSR sealing fittings are approved for use in hazardous locations only when Chico A sealing compound and Chico X fiber are used to make the seal.
/8 /4 1 /2 1 2 3 4 9 9
1 1
*Use the approximate internal volume in cubic inches to determine how much Chico A sealing compound is required.
Dimensions
In Inches:
Standard Materials:
Body Feraloy iron alloy Pipe plugs, bolts and set screws steel Gasket neoprene Cat. # EYSR2 EYSR3 EYSR4 EYSR5 EYSR6 A 311/16 43/8 5 51/4 61/4 B 21/2 31/8 33/8 35/8 4 C 11/2 31/8 3 3 3 Cat. # EYSR7 EYSR8 EYSR9 EYSR10 A 71/2 81/2 913/64 93/4 B 5 51/2 61/16 65/8 C 37/8 41/4 43/4 51/4
154
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
ES Sealing Hubs
Applications:
ES sealing hubs are used to: Seal vertical conduit risers at switchgear and motor control centers, sheet metal structures or cast boxes and enclosures Seal horizontal conduit runs at enclosures when used with TSC sealing compound
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Explosionproof Watertight
6F
Note: Sealing hubs are approved for use in hazardous locations when Chico X fiber and Chico A sealing compound are used to make the seal. Sealing hubs are approved for horizontal conduit runs for use in hazardous locations when used with TSC sealing compound, order 1 oz. tube as TSC1.
6F
TSC Epoxy Sealing Compound

Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C & D UL Standard: 886 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
Female Male Hub Hub Size Size Cat. # /2 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 3 4 5
1 3
Standard Materials:
Feraloy iron alloy
Approximate Internal Volume in Cubic Inches .65 .65 3.2 4.9 4.7 9.1 36.0 95.0 155.0
Standard Finishes:
Options:
ES sealing hubs, when used with SG armored gaskets and locknuts, provide a water and oiltight connection Description Suffix Sealing gaskets and locknuts SG
1 1 11/2 2 2 21/2 4 5 6
ES31 ES32 ES53 ES64 ES65 ES76 ES108 ES01210 ES014012
A two part epoxy sealing compound may be used to seal ES sealing hubs. It is quick and easy to measure, mix and install. The compound is kneaded until a uniform color is obtained. It is then packed around the conductors to effectively seal the cable. Std. Ctn. Qty. 10 10 5 Tube Size 0.5 oz 1.0 oz 4.0 oz Cat. # TSC05 TSC1 TSC4
Order quantity of one (1) TSC05 or TSC1 equals 10 tubes; one (1) TSC4 equals 5 4.0 oz tubes.
Typical Installations
Dimensions
In Inches:
1. ES Sealing Hub 2. EJB Junction Box 3. UNY Union 4. EDS Factory Sealed Control Station 5. EYS Horizontal Seal 6. Explosion-Proof Motor
1. ES Sealing Hub 2. LT Connector 3. Locknut 4. Sealing Gasket 5. Junction Box 6. UNY Union 7. Synchronous Motor 8. EDS Factory Sealed Control Station 9. LT Conduit a 19/16 113/16 21/4 23/4 23/4 31/2 51/4 65/8 71/4 b /8 7 /8 13/8 13/4 15/8 21/16 35/8 45/8 525/32
7
1. ES Sealing Hub 2. Locknut 3. Sealing Gasket 4. Sheet Metal Structure, Motor Control Center, Panelboard, Unit Substation, Etc.
Cat. # ES31 ES32 ES53 ES64 ES65 ES76 ES108 ES01210 ES014012
c 2 2 23/4 23/4 31/16 39/16 43/4 63/4 71/4
d 25/32 25 /32 115/16 115/16 2 2 231/32 427/32 511/32
e 11/4 11/2 13/4 23/16 27/16 3 41/4 51/4 61/2
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
155
6F
Ultra High Pressure Seal

Rated to 1500 PSI
Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups B, C, D Certified to CSA Standards through QPS
6F
Applications:
If the primary seal in an instrument should fail, the Cooper CrouseHinds Ultra High Pressure Seal (UHPS) will prevent gases from migrating through the electrical system into a non-classified location. Are designed to prevent the passage of gases under pressure through conduits, cables and conductors. Are ideal where volatile liquids or gases are stored, processed or transported under pressure.

Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, D Certified to CSA Standards through QPS 24 Volt DC - 120 Volt AC Wire grade is rated to a 600 Volt safety factor 1 /2 MNPT x 1/2 NPT Conforms to Section 18-108 and 18-158 of the CEC for The Requirements of a Secondary Seal.
Standard Materials & Finishes:

Stainless steel body - natural finish
Quality Assurance:
Each fitting is tested at 1.5 times working pressure (max. working pressure 1500 PSI) as a gas and liquidtight explosionproof fitting. Each seal is also di-electric and resistance tested.
Catalog Number CH6DR500X002D14G CH6DR500X002D16G CH6DR500X002D18G CH6DR500X002D22G CH6DR500X004D14G CH6DR500X004D16G CH6DR500X004D18G CH6DR500X004D22G CH6DR500X234D14G CH6DR500X264D16G CH6DR500X294D16G CH6DR500X2D2D16G Description UHPS, 2 wire, UHPS, 2 wire, UHPS, 2 wire, UHPS, 2 wire, UHPS, 4 wire, UHPS, 4 wire, UHPS, 4 wire, UHPS, 4 wire, UHPS, 4 wire, UHPS, 4 wire, UHPS, 4 wire, UHPS, 2 wire, 14 gauge 16 gauge 18 gauge 22 gauge 14 gauge 16 gauge 18 gauge 22 gauge 14G, 2' input, 16G, 2' input, 16G, 2' input, 16G, 2' input,
3' output 6' output 9' output CF output
INSTALLATION EXAMPLE:
156
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Secondary Process Seal Assemblies
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 1 & 2 IIB + H2 Cl. II, Div. 1 & 2, Groups E, F, G
NEMA 3, 4, 7BCD, 9
6F
Applications:
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Secondary Process Seal Assembly with Rupture Indication Sensor is designed to prevent the passage of gases under pressure through conduit, cables and conductors while providing immediate notification of a dangerous, potentially explosive seal rupture. These assemblies are ideal where volatile liquids or gases are stored, processed or transported under pressure. If the primary seal in an instrument should fail, the Cooper Crouse-Hinds Secondary Process Seal will prevent gases, vapors and liquids from migrating into the non-classified location through the electrical system.
6F
Rupture Indication Sensor:

The Secondary Process Seal features a rupture indication sensor that opens safely at 60 psi minimum and activates a circuit to a control system or alarm, which immediately alerts maintenance personnel that the primary seal has ruptured. The location of the problem can be pinpointed so the problem can be quickly addressed. Innovative, intelligent technology combined with easy installation and low maintenance cost provides a safe and reliable solution for detection of a process seal rupture within your facility.

Secondary Process Seal
CSA and CSAus certified Meets or exceeds ANSI / ISA / CSA / CEC / NEC / API requirements for a secondary process seal and explosionproof conduit seal Sealed to 1500 psi, operates in any position Simplified design allows for easier installation in new and existing applications Integrated packaging contains all necessary components for installation The explosionproof drain allows for the safe release of gas, vapor or liquid from the electrical system to meet required codes Explosionproof terminal box features a simple design to provide access for quick connection of circuits Assembly with drain provides local "make obvious" indication of primary seal failure
Assembly with Vent/Drain 2 2 2 2 4 4 4 4 wire, wire, wire, wire, wire, wire, wire, wire, 14 16 18 22 14 16 18 22 gauge gauge gauge gauge gauge gauge gauge gauge SPS214 SPS216 SPS218 SPS222 SPS414 SPS416 SPS418 SPS422 Assembly with Rupture Indication Sensor and Vent/Drain SPS214R SPS216R SPS218R SPS222R SPS414R SPS416R SPS418R SPS422R
For Process Seal Rupture Indication Sensor replacement, order catalog #PSRIS.
Options:
Description No terminal blocks 2 terminal blocks 4 terminal blocks Suffix (leave option blank) DIN12 DIN14
Rupture Indication Sensor

Rupture detection and indication at 60 psi Provides remote, immediate notification of a seal rupture, allowing for maintenance to quickly address the problem and isolate safety concerns Stainless steel construction provides superior corrosion resistance and durability
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
157
6F
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D NEMA 3, 4, 7BCD, 9 Cl. I, Zone 1 & 2 IIB + H2 Cl. II, Div. 1 & 2, Groups E, F, G
6F
Assembly Information
Assembly with process seal rupture indication sensor
*60 psi internal pressure rating at 25C ambient. Activation pressure may vary +/ - 10% depending on ambient variation.
158
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
NEMA 3, 4, 7BCD, 9
6F
Installation Examples
Secondary Process Seal with local "make obvious" indication using an ECD explosionproof drain Secondary Process Seal with Rupture Indication Sensor for remote indication, and ECD explosionproof drain for local "make obvious" indication
6F
Technical Data - Assembly

Product Certification
The Secondary Process Seal and Assemblies are CSA certified (Canada, U.S.)
Operating Pressure Rating

Rupture protection to 1500 psi Rupture indication at 60 psi minimum
Operating Temperature Range

-25C to +50C
Note: For more extreme temperature and/or pressure requirements, please consult factory.
Technical Data - Components

Components Construction Hub - 316 stainless steel Process Seal Rupture Indication Sensor Certifications and Compliances ANSI / ISA 12.27.01 - 2003 CEC 18 - 108, 158 NEC 501.15(F)(3) Rating 174 mA 24VDC Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups T6 (Tamb 40C) T5 (40C < Tamb 55C) B, C, D T4 (55C < Tamb 80C) Cl. II, Div. 1 & 2, Groups E, F, G Zone 1 IIB+H2 and 24VDC Zone 2 IIB+H2 120VAC NEMA 3, 4, 7BCD, 9 Area Suitability
Switch Assembly - (Div. 1, Zone 1) intrinsically safe hermetically sealed, (Div. 2, Zone 2) non-incendive nickeled brass, with Simple apparatus (NEC 504.4) silicon cable CSA 22.2 No. 30 - 03 CSA 22.2 No. 14 - 2005 ANSI / ISA 12.27.01 - 2003 CEC 18 - 108, 158 NEC 501.15(F)(3) UL886 CSA C22.2 No. 30 UL886 CSA C22.2 No. 30
Ultra High Pressure Seal
Stainless steel
Terminal Housing Drain / Vent
Copper-free aluminum Stainless steel
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
159
6F
NEMA 3, 4, 7BCD, 9
Dimensions (Inches):
6F
Assembly with rupture sensor and vent/drain

Note: Assemblies shown with DIN12 terminal blocks (optional)
Assembly with vent/drain
160
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Chico A and Chico A-P Sealing Compound Chico X Fiber Chico SpeedSeal
For Sealing Fittings and Hubs
Applications:
Chico X fiber: Forms a dam between the integral bushing of the sealing fitting and the end of the conduit and around the electrical conductors entering the hub Chico A sealing compound: Forms a seal around each electrical conductor and between them and inside of the sealing fitting to restrict the passage of gases, vapors or flames through the sealing fitting at atmospheric pressure and at normal ambient temperatures Chico SpeedSeal Compound: Designed to separate and form an explosionproof seal around each electrical conductor in Crouse-Hinds EYS and EYD sealing fittings Restricts the passage of gases, vapors or flames through the sealing fitting Creates a seal for Class I, Division 1, Groups C & D and Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F & G hazardous areas
6F
Size Ranges:
Chico A compound 1 lb. to 5 lbs. (provides 23115 cubic inches of compound) Chico X fiber 2 oz. to 1 lb. Chico A-P (5 pouches per carton) provides 25 and 55 cubic inches of compound Chico SpeedSeal - 2 oz. or 6 oz. cartridge
Cooper Crouse-Hinds sealing fitting are approved for use in hazardous locations only when Chico X fiber and Chico A Sealing Compound or Chico SpeedSeal are used to make the seal.
6F
Ordering Information - Chico A

Net Weight 1 lb. 1 lb. 5 lb. Vol. Cu. In. 23 23 115 Cat. # Chico A3 Chico A4 Chico A05
Features:
Chico A sealing compound: A water soluble powder that can be easily mixed and poured. The compound, unusually dense, expands slightly when hardening and bonds to inner walls of sealing fittings. Compound hardens in 6070 minutes Chico A cure time is 8 hours for Class I, Group C and D applications and 72 hours for Class I, Group A and B applications. Chico A has a 1 year shelf life from date of manufacture. Chico A ambient temperature range (after curing) is 40F to +165F. Chico A-P Intrapak: Packaged in two-compartment plastic pouch with precise amount of water for mixing. No mixing or measuring implements required. A hard squeeze of the water compartment forces the water into the compartment containing the Chico compound. Mixing is completed by kneading the pouch for one minute. The mixed sealing compound is poured directly into the sealing fitting no funnel required. The package label indicates the size and quantity of sealing fittings each pouch will properly fill. Compound hardens in 6070 minutes. Chico X fiber: A mineral wool that packs easily, forming around each conductor Chico SpeedSeal Compound: Installs a reliable seal in five minutes - every time Hardens to a dense, strong mass that is suitable for Class I, Division 1, Groups C & D and Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F & G hazardous applications. UL and cUL Listed for use with 1/2" to 2" Copper Crouse-Hinds sealing fittings only. Packaged in a 2 oz. or 6 oz. pre-measured cartridge, eliminating the need for measuring before mixing. Packaged with a screw-on nozzle for accurate dispensing. Expands four times its original size in the sealing fitting, eliminating the need to separate the individual conductors with Chico X fiber. Chico X fiber dams are not required in horizontal applications, reducing installation times. Completely hardens in 20 minutes, simplifying use for OEMs. Suitable for cold temperature environments without the costly need to build a temporary shelter around sealing fittings. All ice crystals must be removed from inside the conduit seal before dispensing Chico SpeedSeal compound. The Chico SpeedSeal compound should be kept above 10C (50F) prior to mixing. The sealing fitting must be kept at or above 4C (40F) during the 4 to 10 minute expansion/gel time of the compound. One year shelf-life. Patent pending.
Ordering Information - Chico A-P Intrapak

Cu. In. Fill per Pouch 5 11 No. of Pouches per Carton 5 5 Cat. # Chico A19 PX* Chico A39 PX*
*A sixth pouch, containing an appropriate quantity of Chico X fiber, is included in these cartons. Number of cubic inches this amount will fill when set. See internal volume requirements for EYS, EZS, EYD, EZD and EYSR sealing fittings and ES sealing hubs (see pages 146155). Includes 1 oz. Chico X fiber.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
161
6F
Chico A and Chico A-P Sealing Compound Chico X Fiber Chico SpeedSeal
For Sealing Fittings and Hubs
Ordering Information - Chico SpeedSeal
Class I, Div. 1, Groups C & D and Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F and G
Ordering Information Chico X Fiber
6F
Net Weight 2 oz. 8 oz. 1 lb.
Cat. # Chico X4 Chico X6 Chico X7
Chart for Approximate Amount of Fiber Per Hub

Hub Size 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4 5 6 Ozs. Required /32 /16 1 /8 1 /4 1 /2 1 11/2 2 3 41/2 7 10
1 1
Sealing Fitting Cat. # EYS1, EYS16; EYS11, EYS116 EYD1, EYD16, EYD11, EYD116 EYS2, EYS26, EYS21, EYS216 EYD2, EYD26, EYD21, EYD216 EYSX11, EYDX11 EYS3, EYS36, EYS31, EYS316 EYD3, EYD36, EYD31, EYD316 EYSX21, EYDX21 EYS41, EYS416, EYS4, EYS46 EYD4, EYD46, EYD41, EYD416 EYS51, EYS516, EYS5, EYS56 EYD5, EYD56, EYD51, EYD516 EYSX31, EYDX31 EYSX41, EYDX41 EYS61, EYS616, EYS6, EYS66 EYD6, EYD66, EYD61, EYD616 EYSX51, EYDX51
Amount of SpeedSeal Material needed per fitting (in ounces)
SpeedSeal Cat. # CHICO SS2 (2 oz. Cartridge)
CHICO SS2 (2 oz. Cartridge)
MSDS sheets are available at www.crouse-hinds.com
162
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EYS Tool Kit

For Use with Sealing Fittings and Hubs
The Cooper Crouse-Hinds EYS Tool Kit lets you safely and reliably pack the fiber dam in explosionproof sealing fittings. Consisting of five patented, two-sided tools in a handy canvas bag, the EYS Tool Kit makes the critical steps of separating electrical conductors and packing fiber dams quick and easy.
6F
6F

The EYS Tool Kit consists of five tools and a canvas tool bag. Four tools have two unique ends for a total of 9 different tools. Each tool is numbered for easy identification. Tools are constructed of durable plastic with smooth and rounded surfaces that will not abrade the electrical insulation. The Hook tool (#3) with a large hook on one end and a small hook on the other end is designed to lift and separate individual wires. The Packing tools (#1, #2 & #4) have rounded ends designed for packing fiber in between and around electrical conductors. The Wedge tools (#2 & #5) are designed for hands-free separation of conductors while packing fiber. The Mirrored tool (#5) allows for easy inspection of the sealing fittings. All tools are sized and precisely angled to accomodate various sizes of fittings. The canvas tool bag is designed to neatly store and protect tools while not in use.
Description EYS Tool Kit Cat. # EYS TOOL KIT
The large hook on Tool #3 quickly lifts all the conductors.
With one of the packing tools, packing fiber in between and around electrical conductors is effortless.
The mirrored tool allows for proper inspection of the fiber dam in difficult to see areas.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
163
6F
Drains and Breathers
II 2 G Ex d IIB (ECD15) II 2 G Ex d IIB + Hydrogen (ECD Type 4X Series) Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof
6F
Applications:
ECD drains and breathers are installed in enclosures or conduit systems to: Provide ventilation to minimize condensation Drain accumulated condensate At least one breather should be used with each drain A breather is installed in top of enclosure or upper section of conduit system A "standard" drain is installed in bottom of enclosure or in lower section of conduit system "Universal" breather or drain functions as a breather when mounted at the top of an enclosure, or as a drain when mounted in the bottom of an enclosure "Combination" breather and drain is used in those applications where the use of a top mounted breather is not practical due to limited space; or in offshore and marine installations where moisture may enter the enclosure through the breather located on top of enclosure Drains and breathers are installed in hubs or drilled and tapped openings

NEC/CEC:
ECD 16, ECD387, ECD-N4D, ECD-N4B

Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III
ECD11
ECD13
IP46 (ECD-N4D and ECD-N4B only) IIB + Hydrogen (ECD-N4D and ECD-N4B only) ECD11, ECD13, ECD281
Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III
ECD15
ECD16
ECD18, ECD384, ECD15, ECD385

Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III IP42 IIB (ECD 15 only)
ECD18
ECD284
Class I, Division 1 & 2, Group C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G UL Standard: 886 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30 Type 4X: ECD-N4D and ECD-N4B ATEX Certificate # ITS07ATEX15639U
Features:
ECD284, ECD384, ECD385 and ECD15 "Universal" drains and breathers have:
Patented labyrinth design, suitable for use in Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C,D and Class II, Division 1 & 2, Groups F,G areas Capability to pass 50 cc of water per minute and 0.2 cubic feet or air per minute at atmospheric pressure ECD15 and ECD385 each have a well inside the inner, threaded end to provide for accumulation of sediment without clogging when used as a drain
Ordering Information ECD "Type 4X"

Drain and Breather
Size
3 1
Drain Cat. # ECD38 N4D ECD1 N4D
Breather Cat. # ECD38 N4B ECD1 N4B
/8 /2
Standard Materials:
ECD11, ECD15, ECD281, ECD284, ECD384, ECD385 stainless steel ECD13 stainless steel with aluminum cap ECD16, ECD-N4D, ECD-N4B stainless steel ECD387 stainless steel ECD18 stainless steel with neoprene tube
ECD "Standard"
Drain and Breather
Size /4 /8 1 /2
1 3
"Standard" ECD drains and breathers have:

Thread-in-thread design, suitable for use in Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C,D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E,F,G; Class II, Division 2, Groups F,G and Class III areas ECD 11, 13 have capability to pass 25 cc of water per minute and .05 cubic feet of air per minute at atmospheric pressure ECD387 and ECD16 are a unique thread-inshaft design for use in Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B,C,D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E,F,G; Class II, Division 2, Groups F,G; Class III areas. The ECD387 and ECD16 can pass 15cc of water per minute. The ECD16 can pass .01 cubic feet of air per minute.
Drain Cat. # ECD281 ECD387 ECD11
Breather Cat. #
ECD13
Size Ranges:
1/4" to 1/2"
ECD "Universal"
Breather
Drain or Breather
Size /4 3 /8 3 /8 1 /2 1 /2
1
Cat. # ECD284 ECD384 ECD385 ECD15 ECD16
"Combination" ECD breather and drain:

Provides ventilation to minimize condensation and drains accumulated condensate two functions performed by a single device installed in the bottom of an enclosure or conduit system Have the capability to pass 25 cc of water per minute and .10 cubic feet of air per minute at atmospheric pressure Thread-in-thread and labyrinth design, suitable for use in Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C and D; Class II, Division 1 & 2, Groups F and G; and Class III areas
Shorter overall length than ECD15 and ECD385. For use in confined spaces such as panelboard assemblies.
Drain Typical installation of drain and breather in a combination motor starter

1. At least 5 full threads of drain or breather must be engaged in matching female thread, taper-tapped in accordance with NEMA/EEMAC Standard FB-1, Type NTC or National Bureau of Standards Handbook H28, Part II, Table 7.6. 2. These breathers and drains can be factory installed on various explosion-proof equipment. See options on applicable equipment pages for suffixes to be used.
ECD "Combination"
Drain or Breather
Size
1
Cat. # ECD18
/2
164
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
CD Series Ordinary Location Drain

Straight Body Male Thread
Applications:
CD Series drains are for use in conduit systems to: Drain accumulated condensate. Provide ventilation to minimize condensation. Drains are installed in hubs or drilled and tapped openings.
6F
6F

UL Standard 514B
Standard Materials:
CD bodies and nuts steel or aluminum CD screen stainless steel
Standard Finishes:
Steel electrogalvanized with chromate treatment.
Size Cat. # CD1 CD2 /2 3 /4
1
Options:
Description Copper-free aluminum construction Suffix SA
NEMA 4X Breather/Drain
ATEX and CENELEC Range
Applications:
I M2 II 2GD, E Exe I & II (Stainless Steel & Brass only) II 2GD, E Exe II (Nylon version) CSA Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C & D, Exe II
Enclosure Type 4X IP66
For use in enclosures to provide a method to effectively drain moisture while allowing the enclosure to breathe.
Features:
All NEMA 4X breather/drains offer: Castellated locknuts that allow moisture to pass between the enclosure and the locknut to the drain holes in the fitting. Available in brass, stainless steel (Type 316) or 30% glass filled nylon. Captive "O" ring on recess of the face of the breather/drain to optimize ingress protection. Ordering Information ATEX and CSA Certified for worldwide market acceptance. Entry Available with metric or NPT threads. Method Material
Cat. # ACDPEB/M20/15 ACDPES/M20/15 ACDPEN/M20/15 ACDPEB/M25/15 ACDPES/M25/15 ACDPEN/M25/15 ACDPEB/050NPT/15 ACDPES/050NPT/15 ACDPEB/075NPT/15 ACDPES/075NPT/15

SIRA 99 ATEX 3050U I M2 II 2GD, E Exe I & II (Stainless Steel & Brass only) II 2GD, E Exe II (Nylon only) CSA Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C & D, Exe II Enclosure Type 4X IP66
M20 M20 M20 M25 M25 M25 1 /2" 1 /2" 3 /4" 3 /4"
Brass Stainless Nylon Brass Stainless Nylon Brass Stainless Brass Stainless
Steel Steel Steel Steel
Operating Temperature:
50C to +85C
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
165
6F
6F
166
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Commercial Products
Section CP
A complete solution combining reliability & expertise in every product, providing you with labor and maintenance savings, simplified installation, and improved productivity
New Products in the Commercial Products Product Line

PRE-formance Solar Combiner Boxes and Disconnects Stainless Steel Fittings and Conduit PVC Fittings Steel EMT Fittings "Made in the USA" SmartGuard and MetalGuard Protect Plates Complete line of Zinc Die Cast Fittings Fiberglass Enclosures Plus an additional 50+ new commercial products
Section
CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP CP
Notable changes to the Commercial Products section of this catalog

Commercial Fittings has been reorganized and moved to the front of the CP section Outlet Boxes & Covers has been reorganized so that the most popular boxes are first More technical, application and dimensional information included
CP
168
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Commercial Products
Description
Commercial Fittings
EMT Rigid/IMC Conduit Outlet Bodies Series 5 Form 5 FS/FD Hubs Liquidtight AC/MC FMC Non-metallic Sheathed Service Entrance PVC Products (fitings, junction boxes, covers conduit bodies, etc.) Stainless Steel Fittings
Page No.
see pages 170182 see pages 183205 see pages 206211 see pages 212215 see page 216 see pages 218225 see pages 226242 see pages 243247 see pages 248255 see page 256 see pages 257258 see pages 264277 see pages 278287 see see see see see see see see see see see see see see pages 289342 pages 291293 pages 294304 pages 305309 see page 310 pages 311318 pages 319320 pages 321322 pages 323326 pages 327328 pages 329330 pages 331332 pages 333334 pages 336339 pages 340342
CP
Outlet Boxes & Covers

Outlet Box Technical Data 4" Steel Square Boxes and Covers 411/16" Steel Square Boxes and Covers Steel Utllity Boxes and Covers Steel Switch Boxes and Covers Steel Gang Boxes and Covers Steel Masonry Boxes Steel Octagon Boxes & Pans Steel Octagon Covers Steel Octagon Concrete Boxes Ceiling Fan Boxes Outlet Box Accessories PVC Switch and Outlet Boxes Non-metallic Ceiling and Fan Boxes
PRE-formance Weatherproof Products (boxes, covers,vaporproof lighting) Enclosures

W-Series Junction Boxes Conduit Expansion Joints Fiberglass HomeRunner
see pages 343362 see pages 363378 see pages 379384 see pages 385388 see pages 390418 see page 389 see pages 419424 see page 425 see page 426
Solar
Solar Combiner Boxes Solar Pass Through Boxes Solar Cord Grips
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
169
Thin Wall Conduit Fittings (For EMT Conduit)

Set Screw Type Fittings - Steel
SET SCREW TYPE FITTINGS Features:
Tri-head screws may be installed using a slotted, phillips or Robertson head screwdriver Male Hub Threads - NPSM
Straight Connectors Non-Insulated

UL File No. E-22132
CP
Steel Locknuts Heavy Steel Walls Standard Material: Steel Standard Finish: Zinc Plated Concrete Tight when taped Cat. # 450S 451 452 453* 454* 455* 456* 457* 458* 459* Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/ 2" 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 50 25 20 10 10 5 2 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 9 15 23 46 50 77 130 140 180 225
Straight Connectors Insulated

UL File No. E-22132
*Two Tightening Screws UL and cUL Listed for EMT, IMC and Rigid Conduit
Cat. # 1450 1451 1452 1453* 1454* 1455* 1456* 1457* 1458* 1459*
Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1
Unit Qty. 50 25 20 10 10 5 2 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 9 14 23 46 50 78 130 140 180 225
Couplings
UL File No. E-22132
*Two Tightening Screws UL and cUL Listed for EMT, IMC and Rigid Conduit
Cat. # 460 461 462 463* 464* 465* 466* 467* 468* 469*
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 50 25 20 10 10 5 2 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 9 16 23 42 50 77 130 140 240 250
*Four Tightening Screws UL and cUL Listed for EMT, IMC and Rigid Conduit
170
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Set Screw Type Fittings - Space-Saver
SPACE-SAVER EMT SET-SCREW CONNECTORS - STEEL
UL File No. E22132
Applications:
Use to join EMT conduit to box or enclosure
CP
Features:
Male threads on locknut allow for more room inside the box Smooth pulling surface wont strip cable no bushing or insulated throat required Angled teeth on locknut bite into enclosure, preventing loosening from vibration Knurled wrenching surface for easy tightening Zinc electroplated for corrosion resistance Concrete tight when taped SET-SCREW CONNECTOR Tri-head set screw may be installed using a slotted, Phillips, or Robertson head screwdriver
Set Screw Type Connector Unit Qty. 100 50 25 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 8 12 12
Cat. # Size Set Screw Connector 1 /2" SSBC50 3 SSBC75 /4" SSBC100 1"

UL Listed CUL Listed
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Traditional EMT The Space Saver Space Saver EMT connector protrudes EMT Connector's low Connector (on right) inside box and profile design provides maximum creates the eliminates this useable space inside cumbersome and cumbersome and the box unlike a labor intensive need labor intensive traditional connector to clip the device requirement. with bushing. mounting screw to install device.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
171

Set Screw Type Fittings - Made in the USA
MADE IN THE USA FITTINGS Applications:
Made in the USA conduit fittings are used: To join EMT to a box or enclosure To couple two ends of EMT conduit

UL File No. E-22132
CP
Features:
All connectors available with or without insulated throat Hex surfaces on fitting body and compression nut for easy wrenching Couplings utilize a ridge center stop for easy identification of adequate conduit sealing within the coupling Set screw connectors and couplings utilize a #2 combination head screw for secure installation Thick, steel conduit locknut provides a strong, secure installation Made in the USA Cat. # 450SUS 451US 452US 453US 454US 455US 456US 457US 458US 459US Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 50 25 20 5 5 20 6 6 3 3
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 10 14 23 40 52 80 142 183 250 283

cULus Listed Set screw connectors & couplings - concrete tight when tapped
Couplings
UL File No. E-22132

1/2" - 2" Steel 21/2" - 4" Malleable Iron Zinc electroplated Unit Qty. 50 25 10 5 5 20 5 3 2 2 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 10 15 24 44 68 90 158 217 250 283

UL File No. E-22132
Cat. # 460US 461US 462US 463US 464US 465US 466US 467US 468US 469US
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 50 25 20 5 5 20 6 6 3 3
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 10 14 23 40 52 80 142 183 250 283
172
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Set Screw Type Fittings - Zinc Die Cast
SET SCREW TYPE FITTINGS ZINC DIE CAST Features:
Tri-head Set Screw may be installed using a slotted, Phillips or Robertson head screwdriver Concrete Tight when taped
Couplings
UL File No. E-22132
CP
Standard Materials:
Zinc Cat. # 460DC 461DC 462DC 463DC* 464DC* 465DC* 466DC* 467DC* 468DC* 469DC* Wt. Lbs. Per 100 5 8 11 20 25 37 59 78 101 120 Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 50 25 20 10 10 5 12 12 6 6
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 5 7 13 18 28 36 64 81 98 116
Standard Finishes:
Natural

UL File No. E-22132
*Four Tightening Screws
Cat. # 1450DC 1451DC 1452DC 1453DC* 1454DC* 1455DC* 1456DC* 1457DC* 1458DC* 1459DC*
*Two Tightening Screws
Size 1 /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
Unit Qty. 50 25 25 10 10 5 12 12 6 6
Offset Connectors Non-Insulated

UL File No. E-22132
Cat. # 2400 2401 2402
Size /2" /4" 1"

1 3
Unit Qty. 10 10 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 11 18 25

UL File No. E-22132
Cat. # 450DC 451DC 452DC 453DC* 454DC* 455DC* 456DC* 457DC* 458DC* 459DC*
*Two Tightening Screws
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 50 25 25 10 10 5 12 12 6 6
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 5 7 11 21 25 36 58 77 98 117
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
173

Compression Type Fittings - Steel
COMPRESSION TYPE FITTINGS STEEL Applications:
Thinwall conduit fittings are used: To join EMT to a box or enclosure To couple two ends of EMT conduit

UL File No. E-22132
CP
Features:
Compression Type Male Hub Threads - NPSM Steel Locknuts Heavy Steel Walls Standard Material: Steel Standard Finish: Zinc Plated Cat. # 650S 651S 652 653 654 655 656 657 658 659 Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 50 25 25 10 10 5 2 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 9 16 25 43 54 76 190 300 280 360
Concrete Tight Straight Connectors Insulated

UL File No. E-22132
Couplings
UL File No. E-22132
Cat. # 1650 1651 1652 1653 1654 1655 1656 1657 1658 1659
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 50 25 25 10 10 5 2 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 11 16 25 43 54 76 190 300 330 360
Cat. # 660S 661S 662 663 664 665 666 667 668 669
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 50 25 25 10 10 5 2 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 12 18 27 46 63 92 250 410 390 485
174
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Compression Type Fittings - Space Saver
SPACE-SAVER EMT COMPRESSION CONNECTORS - STEEL
UL File No. E22132
SPACE-SAVER EMT RAINTIGHT COMPRESSION CONNECTORS - STEEL

UL File No. E22132
Applications:
Applications:
CP
Features:
Male threads on locknut allow for more room inside the box Smooth pulling surface wont strip cable no bushing or insulated throat required Angled teeth on locknut bite into enclosure, preventing loosening from vibration Knurled wrenching surface for easy tightening Zinc electroplated for corrosion resistance Concrete tight when taped COMPRESSION CONNECTOR The split compression ring assures solid attachment to the conduit and good ground continuity The hex surface on the compression nut provide for easy wrenching to quickly and easily tighten the nut
Features:
The only Space Saver EMT compression connector UL Listed Raintight Male threads on the lock nut maximize space in box or enclosure and provides a smooth pulling surface eliminating the need for a bushing or insulated throat fitting No disassembly of the gland nut is required for installation of the conduit. Hex shaped gland nut allows for easy wrenching, providing a fast tight application Distinct black gland nut allows inspectors to tell at a glance that the fitting is raintight Gasket seals installation for raintight connection between box and the connector

UL Listed CUL Listed

UL Listed UL Standard 514B cUL Listed cUL Standard C22.2 No. 18 Listed Raintight Concrete Tight
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Traditional EMT The Space Saver Space Saver EMT connector protrudes EMT Connector's low Connector (on right) inside box and profile design provides maximum creates the eliminates this useable space inside cumbersome and cumbersome and the box unlike a labor intensive need labor intensive traditional connector to clip the device requirement. with bushing. mounting screw to install device.
Unit Cat. # Size Qty. Compression Connector 1 /2" 50 SSRT50 3 SSRT75 /4" 25 SSRT100 1" 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 13 18 26
Dim A 11/8 13/8 111/16
Dim. B 13/8 15/8 113/16
Compression Connector Unit Qty. 50 25 25 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 8 12 12
Cat. # Size Compression Connector 1 /2" SSC50 3 SSC75 /4" SSC100 1"
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
175

Compression Type Fittings - Made in the USA
MADE IN THE USA FITTINGS Applications:
Made in the USA conduit fittings are used: To join EMT to a box or enclosure To couple two ends of EMT conduit
Connector Non-Insulated
UL File No. E-22132
CP
Features:
All connectors available with or without insulated throat Hex surfaces on fitting body and compression nut for easy wrenching Couplings utilize a ridge center stop for easy identification of adequate conduit sealing within the coupling Set screw connectors and couplings utilize a #2 combination head screw for secure installation Thick, steel conduit locknut provides a strong, secure installation Made in the USA Cat. # 650SUS 651SUS 652US 653US 654US 655US 656US 657US 658US 659US Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 50 25 20 5 5 5 5 3 3 2
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 8 12 19 30 46 55 242 307 390 492

cULus Listed Compression connectors & couplings - concrete tight
Couplings
UL File No. E-22132

1/2" - 2" Steel 21/2" - 4" Malleable Iron Zinc electroplated Unit Qty. 50 25 20 5 5 5 5 3 2 2 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 8 13 19 30 46 60 360 405 545 635
Connector Insulated
UL File No. E-22132
Cat. # 660SUS 661SUS 662US 663US 664US 665US 666US 667US 668US 669US
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 50 25 20 5 5 5 5 3 3 2
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 8 12 19 30 46 55 242 307 390 492
176
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Compression Type Fittings - Raintight
COMPRESSION TYPE FITTINGS RAINTIGHT CONNECTORS Applications:
The Cooper Crouse-Hinds Raintight EMT connectors are used to join EMT conduit to a box or enclosure in Raintight environments. The design prevents water seepage into conduit, box or enclosure.
Straight Connectors Non-Insulated Raintight

UL File No. E-22132
CP

All steel construction with zinc electroplate finish provides for durable corrosion resistance Flat surface on Gland nut provides smooth, flat surface for easy wrenching Distinct black gland nut provides quick raintight identification Integral gasketed compression ring secures and seals for reliable installation Interior shoulder conduit stop provides positive seating of conduit inside the body Gasket on male threads of box connector seals installation for raintight connection between the box and the connector Available in insulated and non-insulated versions to meet any customer preference Angled teeth on locknut for secure bite into enclosure Extruded locknut with shoulder provides more threads for more secure installation Concrete tight Standard material: Steel Standard finish: Zinc plated Cat. # 660RT 661RT 662RT 663RT 664RT 665RT 666RT 667RT 668RT 669RT Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Cat. # 650RT 651RT 652RT 653RT 654RT 655RT 656RT 657RT 658RT 659RT
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 50 25 25 10 10 5 2 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 11 17 23 41 50 67 177 234 280 360
Couplings Raintight
UL File No. E-22132

UL Listed cUL Listed Concrete Tight Raintight
Unit Qty. 50 25 25 10 10 5 2 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 14 21 28 49 60 79 187 245 390 485
Straight Connectors Insulated Raintight

UL File No. E-22132
Cat. # 1650RT 1651RT 1652RT 1653RT 1654RT 1655RT 1656RT 1657RT 1658RT 1659RT
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 50 25 25 10 10 5 2 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 11 17 23 41 50 67 177 234 330 360
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
177

Compression Type Fittings - Zinc Die Cast
COMPRESSION TYPE FITTINGS ZINC DIE CAST Features:
The split compression ring assures solid attachment to the conduit and good ground continuity

UL File No. E-22132
CP
The hex surfaces on the compression nut provide for easy wrenching to quickly and easily tighten the nut Concrete tight Unit Qty. 50 25 15 10 10 5 12 12 6 6 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 8 11 17 31 39 56 93 120 149 172
Standard Materials:
Zinc
Cat. # 650DC 651DC 652DC 653DC 654DC 655DC 656DC 657DC 658DC 659DC
Size
1 3
Standard Finishes:
Natural

UL File No. E-22132
/2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
Couplings
UL File No. E-22132
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 50 25 15 10 10 5 12 12 6 6
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 8 11 17 31 39 56 93 120 149 172
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 50 25 15 10 10 5 12 12 6 6
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 11 16 22 40 48 64 124 144 190 228
178
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Combination Couplings
COMBINATION COUPLINGS STEEL Standard Materials:
Steel
Compression Coupling EMT (Compression) To FMC (Screw-in)

UL File No. E-19189
Standard Finishes:
Zinc plated
CP
EMT (Set Screw) to Rigid (Set Screw)

UL File No. E-19189 Cat. # FECC50DC FECC75DC FECC100DC Cat. # 420 421 422 Size /2" /4" 1"
1 3
Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1"

1
Unit Qty. 50 25 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 41 31 46
Unit Qty. 25 20 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 17 25 37
ACC SERIES COMBINATION COUPLINGS STEEL Applications:

ACC combination couplings are used to join EMT conduit to armored cable, metal clad cable or flexible metallic conduit.
COMBINATION COUPLINGS STEEL

Concrete Tight EMT (Compression) To Rigid (Threaded)
UL File No. E-19189

Dual gripping saddle design on the coupling safely secures cable or conduit in place and prevents loosening from vibration Steel compression ring & nut provide a strong, secure termination point for EMT conduit. Tri-head set screw may be installed using a slotted, Phillips or Robertson head screwdriver.
Cat. # 690S 691 692
Size /2" 1/2" /4" 3/4" 1" 1"

1 3
Unit Qty. 25 20 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 9 13 19
Steel combination coupling is zinc electroplated for corrosion resistance.

UL Listed cUL Listed
COMBINATION COUPLINGS ZINC DIE CAST

EMT (Set Screw) to FMC (Clamp)
UL File No. E-19189
Materials and Finishes:

Body: Steel Zinc electroplated Saddle: Steel Zinc electroplated Screw: Steel Zinc electroplated
Compression Coupling:
AC/MC, FMC to EMT
Cat. # 780DC
Size
1
Unit Qty. 50
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 8 Cat. # ACC38 ACC50 ACC75 Trade Size 3 /8" 1 /2" 3 /4" Cable Opening Max. Min. 0.656 0.437 0.937 0.750 1.125 0.906 Unit Qty. 25 10 10
/2" 3/8"
FLEXIBLE METALLIC COMBINATION COUPLINGS ZINC DIE CAST

Set Screw Squeeze Type EMT (Set Screw) To FMC (Clamp)
UL File No. E-19189
Set-Screw Coupling:
Cat. # Cat. # FECS38DC FECS50DC FECS75DC Trade Size /2" to 3/8" / 2" to 1/2" 3 /4" to 3/4"
1 1
Trade Size /8" 1 /2" 3 /4"

3
Unit Qty. 25 10 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 9 12 14
Unit Qty. 50 25 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 34 22 36
ACCSS38* ACCSS50 ACCSS75

*not UL Listed
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
179

EMT Elbows with Integral Coupling and Pulling Elbows
EMT ELBOWS WITH INTEGRAL COUPLING Applications:
Used to make a 45 or 90 bend between two lengths of thin-wall or EMT conduit without the use of additional couplings
90 DEGREE PULLING ELBOWS ZINC DIE CAST Applications:

To connect EMT to form a 90 bend, or to connect EMT to box or enclosure Removable cover and gasket facilitate wire pulling
CP
Features:
Curvature of the conduit is used to fit specific locations and/or make turns or change directions Concrete tight when taped EMT elbows have integral set-screw couplings that replace traditional EMT coupling fittings used to connect the elbows to conduit so there is no longer a need for additional components or extra steps in installation saving the contractor time and money! Made of steel and zinc plated for corrosion resistance
EMT To Box
UL File No. E-19189

UL Listed cUL Listed Cat. # 850EB DC 875EB DC 8100EB DC 8125EB DC Size
1 3
Unit Qty. 20 15 6 3
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 17 24 54 80
EMT Elbows with Integral Coupling
/2" /4" 1" 11/4"
EMT To EMT
UL File No. E-19189
Cat. # 90 Degree Elbow ELB5090 ELB7590 ELB10090 ELB12590 ELB15090 ELB20090 45 Degree Elbow ELB5045 ELB7545 ELB10045 ELB12545 ELB15045 ELB20045
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"

1 3
Unit Qty. 50 50 20 20 15 10 50 50 20 20 15 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 28 46 78 150 184 250 20 36 59 100 153 181 Cat. # 850EE DC 875EE DC 8100EE DC 8125EE DC Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 20 15 6 3
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 15 22 52 80
/2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"

1 3
180
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Straps, Clamps, Clampbacks/Spacers
STRAPS STEEL GALVANIZED
Two Hole
UL File No. E-184283
CLAMPBACKS/SPACERS MALLEABLE IRON Applications:

Provides space between conduit and mounting surface
Standard Materials:
Malleable Iron Unit Qty. 250 150 100 50 50 25 25 25 25 10 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 2 3 5 8 13 14 19 23 93 108
CP
Standard Finishes:
Zinc plated UL File No. E-184283
Cat. # 497 497 497 497 497 497 496 496 496 496 1 2 3 4 5 6 9 10 11 12
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Cat. # CB1 CB2 CB3 CB4 CB5 CB6 CB7 CB8 CB9 CB10 CB11 CB12
Not UL Listed
Size
1 3
Unit Qty. 25 25 25 25 25 10 10 10 10 10 5 5
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 8 10 12 21 42 40 49 62 91 110 135 225
CLAMPS MALLEABLE IRON

Cat. # 516* 517* 518* 519*
Size 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
Unit Qty. 5 2 2 2
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 104 120 150 220
/2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 5" 6"
CLAMPS "SNAP-ON" STEEL Applications:

To support EMT conduit to mounting surface
*Also for use with Rigid/IMC Conduit
Heavy Gauge
Cat. # 200 201 202 203 204 205 206* 207* 208* 209*
*Not UL LIsted
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 100 100 100 50 25 25 25 25 10 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 5 6 6 13 17 20 64 71 120 130
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
181

Nailing Straps - Steel
NAILING STRAPS CAST STEEL Applications:
To secure EMT conduit, flexible metallic conduit, armored cable and metal clad cable to mounting surface
NAILING STRAPS STAMPED STEEL Applications:

To secure EMT conduit
CP
Standard Materials:
Cast steel
Certifications:
UL File No. E184283
Standard Finishes:
Zinc plated
Standard Materials:
Pre-galvanized stamped steel
Conduit Sizes Cat. # NS 1 NS 2 NS 3 EMT

1 3
Conduit Sizes Wt. Lbs. Per 100 2 2 3 Cat. # NSS1 NSS2 NSS3 EMT
1 3
Rigid /8" /2" 3 /4"

3 1
Rigid /8" /2" 3 /4"

3 1
Unit Qty. 100 100 100
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 2 2 3
/2" /4" 1"
/2" /4" 1"
Dimensions
Cat. # NS 1 NS 2 NS 3 A /16 3 /4 3 /16
3
B 1 11/4 11/2
C 17/8 2 21/2
D /4 /16 11/8
3 15
182
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Rigid/Intermediate Grade Conduit Fittings

Compression Fittings - Type CPR
TYPE CPR COMPRESSION FITTINGS Applications:
Use type CPR compression fittings for: Both IMC and metallic rigid conduit. New work in poured concrete. Maintenance, repairs and alterations. Connections at panels and boxes. New, altered or damaged stubups. Applicable locations where field threading is impractical or undesirable. Cat. # CPR1 CPR2 CPR3 CPR4 CPR5 CPR6 CPR7 CPR8 CPR9 CPR10 Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3

UL File No. E-19189
CP
Unit Qty. 50 25 10 10 5 5 2 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 19 23 42 64 87 113 130 220 280 320

UL Listed for use with IMC as well as metallic rigid conduit. Unequalled versatility for the installer. Unique gland ring design tightens up in fewer turns; provides outstanding pull-out strength; saves time and adds confidence. Advanced, thoughtful design and premium materials team up for an installation you can be proud of.
Couplings
UL File No. E-19189

UL 514B Fittings for Conduit and Outlet Boxes
Standard Materials:
Bodies malleable iron Compression nuts iron Compression rings zinc plated steel Locknuts zinc plated steel Insuliners glass-reinforced polypropylene Cat. # CPR21 CPR22 CPR23 CPR24 CPR25 CPR26 CPR27 CPR28 CPR29 CPR30 Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 25 20 10 5 5 2 2 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 26 38 59 85 124 162 220 320 380 440

UL File No. E-19189
Cat. # CPR11 CPR12 CPR13 CPR14 CPR15 CPR16 CPR17 CPR18 CPR19 CPR20
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 50 25 10 10 5 5 2 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 19 23 42 64 87 113 130 220 280 320
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
183

Set Screw Type Fittings - Steel
SET SCREW TYPE FITTINGS - STEEL
UL File No. E-19189
Couplings
UL File No. E-19189
CP
Cat. # Unit Qty. 50 25 5 10 5 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 16 27 40 50 76 110 210 282 380 400 850 1100 160 161 162 163 164 165* 466* 467* 468* 469* 170C* 171C*
*Four Tightening Screws Malleable Iron
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 5" 6"
1 3
Unit Qty. 25 20 5 10 5 2 2 1 1 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 27 40 52 70 104 160 300 400 500 600 1500 1800
Cat. # 150S 151 152 153 154 155* 1456* 1457* 1458* 1459* 160I* 161I*
Size
1 3
/2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 5" 6"
*Two Tightening Screws Malleable Iron
1456 1459, 456 459 & 466 469 are UL and cUL Listed for EMT, Rigid, and IMC conduit.

UL File No. E-19189
Cat. # 150P 151P 152P 153P 154P 155P* 456* 457* 458* 459* 160P* 161P*
*Two Tightening Screws Malleable Iron
Size
1 3
Unit Qty. 50 25 5 10 5 2 2 1 1 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 16 26 40 50 76 110 210 281 380 400 850 1100
/2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 5" 6"
184
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Rigid/Intermediate Grade Conduit Fittings Concrete Tight

Set Screw Type Fittings - Raintight (SSR Series)
SET SCREW TYPE FITTINGS - RAINTIGHT Applications:
Rainboot connectors and couplings are used with rigid conduit for IMC, steel or aluminum. Outdoors or indoors. Use Rainboot fittings for: Conduit systems expansion and alterations. Maintenance and repair operations. New, altered or damaged stubups. Connections at panels and boxes. Embedment in concrete. Installations in tight quarters: near corners, walls, ceilings, overhangs, obstacles or adjacent raceways. Situations where threading equipment or heavy pipe wrenches are impractical. Conduit systems in NEC wet locations. Cat. # SSR11 SSR12 SSR13 SSR14 SSR15 SSR16 Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"
1 3
CP
Unit Qty. 20 20 20 5 5 4
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 20 30 40 64 85 97

The only line of rigid/IMC threadless fittings suitable for raintight applications. The only alternative to field threading in NEC wet locations. May be installed in any position. Tough and durable, long lasting, trouble free installations. Requires only a 3/8" wrench for installation. Full line 1/2" through 2". Faster, easier method to install raintight rigid/IMC raceway systems.
Cat. # SSR1 SSR2 SSR3 SSR4 SSR5 SSR6*
Size
1 3
Unit Qty. 20 20 20 5 5 4
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 21 23 40 64 85 96

UL 514B Fittings for cable and conduit
/2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"
Standard Materials:
Bodies Connectors 1/2" 2" steel Couplings 1/2" 2" steel Boots injection molded PVC attached with special epoxy. Setscrews hardened steel coated with special sealing resin compound.
*Two Tightening Screws For sealing at enclosure, use Type SG sealing gaskets
Couplings
Cat. # SSR21 SSR22 SSR23 SSR24 SSR25 SSR26

Four Tightening Screws
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"

1 3
Unit Qty. 20 20 5 5 4 4
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 31 45 64 86 116 165
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
185

Split Conduit Couplings and Combination Couplings
SPLIT CONDUIT COUPLINGS Applications:
Provides a quick and easy method of joining two pieces of threaded rigid or IMC conduit.
COMBINATION COUPLINGS STEEL

Concrete Tight EMT (Compression) To Rigid (Threaded)
UL File No. E-19189
CP
Features:
Concrete Tight Suitable for use in Class I, Division 2 Areas
Body Ductile Iron Clamping Hardware Electrogalvanized Steel Gasket-Neoprene
Cat. # 690S 691 692
Size /2" 1/2" /4" 3/4" 1" 1"

1 3
Unit Qty. 25 20 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 9 13 19
COMBINATION COUPLINGS ZINC PLATED STEEL

Concrete Tight
Cat. # TCC1 TCC2 TCC3 TCC4 TCC5 TCC6 TCC7 TCC8 TCC9 TCC10 TCC12 TCC14 Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 5" 6"
1
Unit Qty. 10 10 10 5 5 5 2 2 1 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 39 45 68 82 116 111 283 323 395 506 944 1218
EMT (Set Screw) To Rigid (Set Screw) UL File No. E-19189
Cat. # 420 421 422
Size /2" 1/2" /4" 3/4" 1" 1"

1 3
Unit Qty. 25 20 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 17 25 37
COMBINATION COUPLINGS - MALLEABLE IRON

Flexible Steel (Squeeze Type) To Rigid (Threaded) UL File No. E-19189
Cat. # 65 66 67 68
Size
1 3
Unit Qty. 10 10 5 5
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 17 22 31 31
/2" 1/2" /4" 3/4" 1" 1" 11/4" 11/4"
186
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Conduit Couplings
THREE PIECE CONDUIT COUPLINGS MALLEABLE IRON Applications:
Used to join two lengths of threaded conduit. Couples conduit when conduit cannot be turned.
RIGID CONDUIT COUPLINGS - STEEL Applications:

Used to join two lengths of threaded rigid or IMC conduit. They can be used in both indoor and outdoor applications
Standard Materials:
Galvanized steel
CP
Standard Materials:
Heavy duty casting
Galvanized steel
Standard Finishes:
Zinc Plated
Options:
Mechanically galvanized Suffix HDG Cat. # RC50 RC75 RC100 RC125 RC150 RC200 RC250 RC300 RC350 RC400 RC500 RC600 Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 5" 6"
1 3
Malleable Iron (Concrete Tight)

UL File No. E-19189
Unit Qty. 10 10 10 5 5 5 2 1 1 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 12 18 29 38 52 69 181 220 377 298 477 684
Cat. # 190M 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 188 189
Not UL Listed
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 5" 6"
1 3
Unit Qty. 25 25 10 5 5 5 2 1 1 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 23 35 60 91 167 215 430 463 655 800 1200 2100
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
187

Rigid Elbows
RIGID ELBOWS - STEEL Applications:
Used in conjunction with rigid couplings (CCH catalog numbers RC50-RC400) to make a 45 or 90 bend between two lengths of threaded rigid or IMC conduit.
Rigid Elbows
CP
Features:
Curvature of the conduit is used to fit specific locations and/or make turns or change directions in the installation Can be used in both indoor and outdoor applications, offering the customer increased flexibility Made of steel and galvanized for corrosion resistance Cat. # 90 Degree Elbow RLB5090 RLB7590 RLB10090 RLB12590 RLB15090 RLB20090 RLB25090 RLB30090 RLB35090 RLB40090 45 Degree Elbow RLB5045 RLB7545 RLB10045 RLB12545 RLB15045 RLB20045 RLB25045 RLB30045 RLB35045 RLB40045 Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 50 50 20 20 10 10 1 1 1 1 50 50 25 20 15 10 1 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 76 113 197 312 440 660 1180 1650 2700 3300 70 103 161 236 306 470 800 1301 1601 2101

/2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
188
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Mogul Pulling Elbows
MOGUL PULLING ELBOWS - DIE CAST COPPER-FREE ALUMINUM Applications:
Used as a chamber for containing heavy-duty conductors For use as a chamber for containing a 90 turn in large stiff conductors to change conductor direction or to enter buildings For use as a pull box for pulling large conductors For use as a chamber for making splices and taps Can be used as an accessible opening to accommodate future changes of the system
CP
Features & Benefits:

Large dome cover permits easy, straight through pull Dimension from center-line of back hub to bushing of end hub exceeds six times the trade diameter of the conduit Tapered threads provide easy assembly, tight construction Heavy-duty machine screws for cover Cover gasket provides long dependable service and protection against the elements; such as fuel, oil and water Smooth design and finish make handling easy and complement any construction job Body and Cover: Die-cast copper-free aluminum GasketFuel, oil, and water resistant flex seal Cooper Crouse-Hinds mogul pulling elbows facilitate wire pulling in 90 bends to allow changes in conductor direction. The pulling elbows can also be used to allow conductor entrance into buildings. With the smooth finish and large dome cover, wires can be easily pulled through without compromising the wire insulation. The gasketed cover creates a raintight chamber and the copper-free aluminum construction provides increased corrosion resistance, making the mogul pulling elbow ideal for any outdoor application.

UL Standard: 514A NEC: Article 314 CSA C22.2 No. 18 CEC: 22.1
Standard Finishes:
Corrosion-resistant metallic paint
Dimensions
Catalog No. LBNEC3 LBNEC4 LBNEC5 LBNEC6 LBNEC7 LBNEC8 LBNEC9 LBNEC10 Size 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" A 921/32" 921/32" 1417/32" 1417/32" 22" 22" 2827/32" 2827/32" B 317/32" 317/32" 513/32" 513/32" 717/32" 717/32" 815/16" 815/16" C 21/2" 21/2" 31/8" 31/8" 41/2" 41/2" 51/2" 51/2" D 71/2" 71/2" 121/20" 121/20" 185/32" 185/32" 241/8" 241/8" Max Wire Size 2 AWG 2 AWG 250 kcmil 250 kcmil 500 kcmil 500 kcmil 900 kcmil 900 kcmil Unit Qty. 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 Wt. Lbs Per 100 146 132 258 230 1003 938 2158 2060
Dimensions
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
189

90 Pull Elbows
90 DEGREE PULL ELBOWS MALLEABLE IRON Features:
Raintight Furnished with Neoprene gasketed steel cover
90 DEGREE PULL ELBOWS ZINC DIE CAST Applications:

For connecting threaded rigid or IMC to form a 90 bend, or for connecting rigid or IMC to box or enclosure Removable cover and gasket facilitate wire pulling
CP
Furnished with Steel lock nut Furnished with Stamped Steel cover Threaded for rigid conduit and IMC For outdoor use Standard Finish: Zinc plated
Standard Materials:
Body zinc Gasket neoprene Cover aluminum
Gasketed Rigid to Box (Male To Female)

UL File No. E-19189
Gasketed Rigid to Box (Male To Female)

UL File No. E-19189
Cat. # 810 811 812 813 814 815
Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"

1
Unit Qty. 20 10 5 2 2 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 34 56 88 92 200 344
Cat. # 850RB DC 875RB DC 8100RB DC 8125RB DC
Size
1 3
Unit Qty. 20 15 6 3
Wt. Lbs. per 100 17 25 53 80
/2" /4" 1" 11/4"
Rigid to Rigid (Female To Female)

UL File No. E-19189
Rigid to Rigid (Female To Female)

UL File No. E-19189
Cat. # Unit Qty. 20 10 5 2 2 1 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 36 49 94 140 200 344 850RR DC 875RR DC 8100RR DC 8125RR DC
Size
1 3
Unit Qty. 20 15 6 3
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 15 23 50 80
Cat. # 820 821 822 823 824 825
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"

1 3
/2" /4" 1" 11/4"
190
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Insulating and Throat Bushings
THROAT BUSHINGS - MALLEABLE IRON
Threaded 105C Rated Plastic Throat Liner
UL File No. E-19189
INSULATED THROAT BUSHINGS MALLEABLE IRON Features:

Plastic liner will not chip, crack, swell or shrink. It resists corrosion, chemicals and temperature extremes.
Standard Materials:
Body Malleable Iron Insuliner ULTEM1000 rated at 150C Cat. # Insulated 1031 1032 1033 1034 1035 1036 1037 1038 1039 1040 1041* 1042*
*Not UL Listed
CP
Size
1 3
Unit Qty. 100 100 50 50 10 20 10 10 5 5 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 3 4 7 15 19 22 44 54 72 95 100 127
Standard Finishes:
Body Zinc Plated
/2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 5" 6"
150C Rated
Threaded UL File No. E-19189
Threadless 105C Rated Plastic Throat Liner

UL File No. E-19189
Cat. # H1031 H1032 H1033 H1034 H1035 H1036 H1037 H1038 H1039 H1040 H1041 H1042
Trade Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 5" 6"
1 3
Unit Qty. 100 100 50 50 10 20 10 10 5 5 1 1
Wt. Lbs. per 100 6 8 11 14 17 24 51 62 85 104 130 167
Cat. # S1031 S1032 S1033 S1034 S1035 S1036 S1037 S1038 S1039 S1040 S1041 S1042
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 5" 6"
1 3
Unit Qty. 100 100 50 50 10 20 10 10 5 5 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 3 4 7 15 19 22 44 54 72 95 100 127
INSULATED THROAT BUSHINGS

150C Rated
Threadless Set Screw Type UL File No. E-19189
Cat. # HS1031 HS1032 HS1033 HS1034 HS1035 HS1036 HS1037 HS1038 HS1039 HS1040 HS1041 HS1042
Trade Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 5" 6"
1 3
Unit Qty. 100 100 50 50 10 20 10 10 5 5 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 6 7 10 13 15 21 42 51 65 80 100 128
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
191

Grounding Bushings
INSULATED THROAT BUSHINGS ZINC DIE CAST
150C Rated Zinc Die Cast
Threaded UL File No. E-19189
NON-INSULATED THROAT BUSHINGS ZINC DIE CAST Features:

Used with locknut to terminate threaded rigid conduit or IMC to enclosure Threaded
CP
Cat. # H1031DC H1032DC H1033DC H1034DC H1035DC H1036DC H1037DC H1038DC H1039DC H1040DC
Trade Size / 2" 3 / 4" 1" 11/ 4" 11/ 2" 2" 21/ 2" 3" 31/ 2" 4"
1
Unit Qty. 100 100 50 50 20 10 10 5 5 2
Wt. Lbs. per 100 2 3 5 7 9 11 27 33 39 46 Cat. # 1031DC 1032DC 1033DC 1034DC 1035DC 1036DC 1037DC 1038DC 1039DC 1040DC
Trade Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 100 100 50 50 20 10 10 5 5 2
Wt. Lbs. per 100 2 3 5 7 9 10 26 32 37 43
NON-INSULATED THROAT BUSHINGS MALLEABLE IRON Features:

Used with locknut to terminate threaded rigid conduit or IMC to enclosure
INSULATING BUSHINGS Standard Materials:

Plastic UL File No. E-19189
Threaded 105C Rated Non-insulated
Non-Insulated
Cat. # 1031NI 1032NI 1033NI 1034NI 1035NI 1036NI 1037NI 1038NI 1039NI 1040NI Size
1 3
Rated 105C Cat. # Unit Qty. 100 100 50 50 10 20 10 10 5 5 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 3 4 7 15 19 22 44 54 72 95 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942
Rated 150C Cat. # H H H H H H H H H H H H 931 932 933 934 935 936 937 938 939 940 941 942
Trade Size / 2" / 4" 1" 11/ 4" 11/ 2" 2" 21/ 2" 3" 31/ 2" 4" 5" 6"
1 3
Unit Qty. 50 50 50 50 25 25 10 10 5 5 5 5
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 1 1 2 3 3 4 8 10 11 11 40 42
/2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
192
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Grounding Bushings
INSULATED THROAT GROUNDING BUSHINGS - MALLEABLE IRON Applications:
For use on threaded rigid/IMC conduit to provide a means of grounding conduit through an insulated bushing
105C Rated Plastic Throat Liner Copper Lug For Copper Grounding Conductors Threaded
UL File No. E-6225
CP
105C Rated Plastic Throat Liner Aluminum Lug For Copper Or Aluminum Grounding Conductors Threaded
UL File No. E-6225
Cat. # GLL1C GLL2C GLL3C GLL4 10C GLL4C GLL5 10C GLL5C GLL6C GLL6 10C GLL7C GLL7 30C GLL7 250C GLL8C GLL8 30C GLL8 250C GLL9C GLL9 250C GLL10C GLL10 250C GLL11C GLL11 250C GLL12C GLL12 250C
Trade Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/4" 11/2" 11/2" 2" 2" 21/2" 21/2" 21/2" 3" 3" 3" 31/2" 31/2" 4" 4" 5" 5" 6" 6"
1 3
Lug Size #4 #14 #4 #14 #4 #14 #4 #14 #1/0 #8 #4 #14 #1/0 #8 #4 #14 #1/0 #8 #1/0 #8 #3/0 #6 250MCM #1/0 #8 #3/0 #6 250MCM #3/0 #6 250MCM #3/0 #6 250MCM #3/0 #6 250MCM #3/0 #6 250MCM
Unit Qty. 50 50 50 25 25 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 8 12 14 19 30 21 32 29 40 65 88 97 77 100 109 125 134 145 154 165 174 195 204
Cat. # GLL1 GLL2 GLL3 GLL4 GLL4 10 GLL5 GLL5 10 GLL6 GLL6 10 GLL7 GLL7 30 GLL7 250 GLL8 GLL8 30 GLL8 250 GLL9 GLL9 250 GLL10 GLL10 250 GLL11 GLL11 250 GLL12 GLL12 250
Trade Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/4" 11/2" 11/2" 2" 2" 21/2" 21/2" 21/2" 3" 3" 3" 31/2" 31/2" 4" 4" 5" 5" 6" 6"
1 3
Unit Qty. 50 50 50 25 25 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 5 9 12 19 23 24 28 26 32 53 60 67 70 72 76 100 100 110 120 140 143 160 163
#6 #6 #6 #6 #6 #6
#6 #6 #6 #6 #6 #6
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
193

Grounding Bushings
INSULATED THROAT GROUNDING BUSHINGS - MALLEABLE IRON Applications:
For use on threaded rigid/IMC conduit to provide a means of grounding conduit through an insulated bushing
Copper Lug For Copper Grounding Conductors Threadless Set Screw Type 105C Rated Plastic Throat Liner
UL File No. E-6225
Aluminum Lug For Copper Or Aluminum Grounding Conductors Threadless Set Screw Type 105C Rated Plastic Throat Liner
UL File No. E-6225 Trade Size
1 3
CP
Cat. # GLS1C GLS2C GLS3C GLS4C GLS4 10C GLS5C GLS5 10C GLS6C GLS6 10C GLS 7C GLS7 30C GLS7 250C GLS8C GLS8 30C GLS8 250C GLS9C GLS9 250C GLS10C GLS10 250C GLS11C GLS11 250C GLS12C GLS12 250C
Unit Qty. 50 50 50 25 25 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 8 12 14 19 30 21 32 29 40 65 88 97 77 100 109 125 134 145 154 165 174 195 204
Cat. # GLS1 GLS2 GLS3 GLS4 GLS4 10 GLS5 GLS5 10 GLS6 GLS6 10 GLS7 GLS7 30 GLS7 250 GLS8 GLS8 30 GLS8 250 GLS9 GLS9 250 GLS10 GLS10 250 GLS11 GLS11 250 GLS12 GLS12 250
Trade Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/4" 11/2" 11/2" 2" 2" 21/2" 21/2" 21/2" 3" 3" 3" 31/2" 31/2" 4" 4" 5" 5" 6" 6"
1 3
Unit Qty. 50 50 50 25 25 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 5 9 12 19 23 24 28 26 32 53 60 67 70 72 76 100 100 110 120 140 143 160 163
#6 #6 #6 #6 #6 #6
/2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/4" 11/2" 11/2" 2" 2" 21/2" 21/2" 21/2" 3" 3" 3" 31/2" 31/2" 4" 4" 5" 5" 6" 6"
#6 #6 #6 #6 #6 #6
194
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Grounding Bushings
INSULATED THROAT GROUNDING BUSHINGS - MALLEABLE IRON Features:
Resilient plastic liner, resists corrosion, chemicals and temperature extremes Insuliner ULTEM1000 rated at 150C 1 Set screw provided with each fitting locks bushing in any desired position External stainless steel hardware as standard
150C Rated Copper Lug For Copper Grounding Conductors Threaded

UL File No. E-6225
CP
Standard Finishes:
Zinc Plated Cat. # HGLL1C HGLL2C HGLL3C HGLL4C HGLL4 10C HGLL5C HGLL5 10C HGLL 6C HGLL6 10C HGLL7C HGLL7 30C HGLL7 250C HGLL8C HGLL8 30C HGLL8 250C HGLL9C HGLL9 250C HGLL10C HGLL10 250C HGLL 11C HGLL11 250C HGLL 12C HGLL 12 250C
Trade Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/4" 11/2" 11/2" 2" 2" 21/2" 21/2" 21/2" 3" 3" 3" 31/2" 31/2" 4" 4" 5" 5" 6" 6"
1 3
Unit Qty. 50 50 50 25 25 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 12 14 17 20 32 23 35 30 42 69 92 101 80 103 112 126 135 145 155 171 180 210 317
150C Rated Aluminum Lug For Copper Or Aluminum Grounding Conductors Threaded
UL File No. E-6225
#6 #6 #6 #6 #6 #6
Cat. # HGLL 1 HGLL 2 HGLL 3 HGLL 4 HGLL4 10 HGLL 5 HGLL5 10 HGLL 6 HGLL6 10 HGLL 7 HGLL7 30 HGLL7 250 HGLL 8 HGLL8 30 HGLL8 250 HGLL 9 HGLL9 250 HGLL 10 HGLL10 250 HGLL 11 HGLL 11 250 HGLL 12 HGLL 12 250
Trade Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/4" 11/2" 11/2" 2" 2" 21/2" 21/2" 21/2" 3" 3" 3" 31/2" 31/2" 4" 4" 5" 5" 6" 6"
1 3
Unit Qty. 50 50 50 25 25 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 9 11 14 17 24 20 24 27 31 58 67 70 69 78 81 101 104 120 123 145 150 185 186
INSULATED THROAT GROUNDING BUSHINGS - ZINC DIE CAST

150C Rated Plastic Throat Liner Aluminum Lug for Copper or Aluminum Grounding Conductors
UL File No. E-6225
#6 #6 #6 #6 #6 #6
Cat. # GLL1 DC GLL2 DC GLL3 DC GLL4 DC GLL5 DC GLL6 DC GLL7 DC GLL8 DC GLL9 DC GLL10 DC
Trade Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 50 40 25 25 25 10 5 5 4 4
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 3 4 5 9 10 14 25 33 38 44
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
195

Grounding Bushings
INSULATED THROAT GROUNDING BUSHINGS - MALLEABLE IRON
150C Rated Set Screw Type Aluminum Lug For Copper Or Aluminum Grounding Conductors Threadless CP
UL File No. E-6225
Features:
Resilient plastic liner resists corossion, chemicals and temperature extremes Insuliner ULTEM1000 rated at 150C 2 Set-screws provided with each fitting, locks bushings in any desired position
Standard Finishes:
Body Zinc Plated
150C Rated Set Screw Type Copper Lug For Copper Grounding Conductors Threadless
UL File No. E-6225
Cat. # HGLS1 HGLS2 HGLS3 HGLS4 HGLS4 10 HGLS5 HGLS5 10 HGLS6 HGLS6 10 HGLS7 HGLS7 30 HGLS7 250 HGLS8 HGLS8 30 HGLS8 250 HGLS9 HGLS9 250 HGLS10 HGLS10 250 HGLS11 HGLS11 250 HGLS12 HGLS12 250
Trade Size
1 3
Unit Qty. 50 50 50 25 25 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 9 10 13 16 20 18 22 24 28 50 58 60 58 67 70 80 85 90 100 115 120 145 150
/2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/4" 11/2" 11/2" 2" 2" 21/2" 21/2" 21/2" 3" 3" 3" 31/2" 31/2" 4" 4" 5" 5" 6" 6"
Cat. # HGLS1C HGLS2C HGLS3C HGLS4C HGLS4 10C HGLS5C HGLS5 10C HGLS6C HGLS6 10C HGLS7C HGLS7 30C HGLS7 250C HGLS8C HGLS8 30C HGLS8 250C HGLS9C HGLS9 250C HGLS10C HGLS10 250C HGLS11C HGLS11 250C HGLS12C HGLS12 250C
Trade Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/4" 11/2" 11/2" 2" 2" 21/2" 21/2" 21/2" 3" 3" 3" 31/2" 31/2" 4" 4" 5" 5" 6" 6"
1 3
Unit Qty. 50 50 50 25 25 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 12 13 16 19 31 21 33 27 39 60 83 92 70 92 100 105 115 100 130 140 150 170 180
#6 #6 #6 #6 #6 #6
#6 #6 #6 #6 #6 #6
196
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Bushing Pennies and Nailing Straps
BUSHING PENNIES STEEL Applications:
A penny under a bushing will seal the end of conduit during construction.
NAILING STRAPS STAMPED STEEL Applications:

To secure Rigid/IMC conduit
Certifications:
UL File No. E184283
CP
Standard Materials:
Pre-galvanized stamped steel
Cat. # 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 100 100 100 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 1 1 1 1 2 3 5 7 10 14
Conduit Sizes Cat. # NSS1 NSS2 NSS3 EMT /2" /4" 1"
1 3
Rigid /8" /2" 3 /4"

3 1
Unit Qty. 100 100 100
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 2 2 3
NAILING STRAPS CAST STEEL Standard Materials:

Cast Steel
Standard Finishes:
Zinc plated
Support rigid conduit and IMC to mounting surface
Conduit Sizes Cat. # NS 1 NS 2 NS 3 EMT /2" /4" 1"

1 3
Rigid /8" /2" 3 /4"

3 1
Unit Qty. 100 100 100
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 2 2 3
Dimensions
In Inches:
Cat. # NS 1 NS 2 NS 3 A /16 3 /4 3 /16
3
B 1 11/4 11/2
C 17/8 2 21/2
D /4 /16 11/8
3 15
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
197

Conduit Clamps, Straps, Hangers
CLAMPS MALLEABLE IRON Applications:
To support rigid conduit and IMC to mounting surface
STRAPS STEEL GALVANIZED Applications:

Used to secure rigid conduit or IMC to mounting surface
Options:
Description Hot dipped galvanized UL File No. E-184283 Suffix HDG
Two Hole
CP
Cat. # Cat. # 510 511 512 513 514 515 516* 517* 518* 519* 520 521 Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 5" 6"
1 3
Size /8" /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
3 1
Unit Qty. 250 150 100 50 50 50 25 25 25 25 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 2 2 3 7 8 10 15 19 23 93 108
Unit Qty. 100 50 50 25 20 10 5 2 2 2 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 6 8 13 20 30 64 104 120 150 220 380 690
496 496 496 496 496 496 496 496 496 496 496
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
CLAMPS "SNAP-ON" STEEL Applications:

To support rigid conduit and IMC to mounting surface
*Also for use with Thinwall (EMT) Conduit Not UL Listed
CLAMPBACKS/SPACERS MALLEABLE IRON Applications:

To provide space between conduit and mounting surface
Light Gauge
Options:
Description Hot dipped galvanized UL File No. E-184283 Suffix HDG
Cat. # 566 567
Conduit Sizes Rigid

1 3
Size of Strap Inside .540 .675
Unit Qty. 500 200
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 2 2
/4" /8"
Heavy Gauge
Cat. # CB1 CB2 CB3 CB4 CB5 CB6 CB7 CB8 CB9 CB10 CB11 CB12
Not UL Listed
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 5" 6"
1 3
Unit Qty. 25 25 25 25 25 10 10 10 10 10 5 5
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 8 10 12 21 42 40 49 62 91 110 135 225
Cat. # 410* 411* 412* 413* 414 415 206* 207* 208* 209*
*CSA Certified
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 100 50 50 50 25 25 25 25 10 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 5 6 11 13 20 22 64 71 120 130
198
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

CABLE AND CONDUIT HANGERS STEEL Certifications and Compliances:
UL Listed
BEAM CLAMPS/INSULATOR SUPPORTS MALLEABLE IRON Standard Finishes:

Zinc Plated UL File No. E-184283
With Bolt
CP
Cat. # 0B 1B 2B 2 1/2 B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B
Conduit Size EMT /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Conduit Sizes Rigid /8" & 1/2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4
3 3
Unit Qty. 100 100 100 100 100 100 50 50 25 10 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 6 6 8 10 11 16 23 29 31 38 38
Base Cat. # Size 528 529 530 531 532 533 534 /4" /4" 1" 1" 11/2" 2" 21/2"
3 3
Jaw Open /8" /8" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 7 /8" 7 /8"

5 5
Max. Wt. Support 230 230 230 230 290 330 800
Tapped Holes 10 24 /4" 20 10 24 1 /4" 20 5 /16" 18 3 /8" 16 1 /2" 13

1
Unit Qty. 25 25 25 25 50 25 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 14 13 23 24 47 81 155
BEAM CLAMPS/INSULATOR SUPPORTS STEEL
CABLE AND CONDUIT HANGERS - STEEL Applications:

Used to provide mechanical support to conduit and raceway systems

Cat. # 529 S
Base Size
3
Jaw Opening
5
Tapped Holes
1
Unit Qty. 50
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 13
/4"
/8"
/4" 20
With Extruded Hole and Bolt
CONDUIT CLAMPS - RIGHT ANGLE TYPE Applications:

Right Angle to attach the conduit run at a 90 angle to a beam or structural member Paralled Type to attach the conduit run parallel to a beam or structural member
Cat. #
0BX 1BX 2BX 2 1/2BX 3BX 4BX 5BX
Description
3 3
Unit Qty.
100 100 100 100 100 100 50
Wt. Lbs. Per 100

6 7 11 10 13 16 17
/8 AND 1/2 RGD 1/2 EMT /4 RGD 3/4 EMT

RGD 1 EMT 1 /4 EMT 1 /4 RGD 1 1/2 EMT 1 /2 RGD RGD 2 EMT
1 1 1 1 2
Cat. # RAC50HD RAC75HD RAC100HD RAC125HD RAC150HD RAC200HD RAC250HD RAC300HD RAC350HD RAC400HD
Trade Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Load Rating Lbs. 30 50 60 75 80 100 125 165 200 330
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 37 40 42 49 54 71 95 107 120 131
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
199

PARALLEL TYPE CONDUIT CLAMPS ELECTROGALVANIZED IRON J TYPE CONDUIT BEAM CLAMPS - IRON Features:
JCC Series conduit beam clamps are: Available in 1/2" to 4" sizes Suitable for IMC, EMT and rigid conduit
CP
Designed to exceed UL load requirements Made from ductile iron with an electrogalvanized finish Load Rating Lbs. 30 50 60 75 80 100 125 165 200 330 Designed to support conduit on vertical or horizontal beams Wt. Lbs. Per 100 50 53 60 70 82 132 192 194 216 232 UL File No. E-184283
Cat. # PARC50HD PARC75HD PARC100HD PARC125HD PARC150HD PARC200HD PARC250HD PARC300HD PARC350HD PARC400HD
Trade Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Cat. # JCC1 JCC2 JCC34 JCC56 JCC78 JCC910
Size /2" /4" 1" & 11/4" 11/2" & 2" 21/2" & 3" 31/2" & 4"
1 3
Max Weight Support 150 150 225 300 500 700
Unit Qty. 25 25 10 5 2 2
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 35 43 90 190 380 575
EDGE TYPE CONDUIT CLAMPS ELECTROGALVANIZED IRON Applications:

Edge Type to attach the conduit run at a 90 angle to a thin beam or structural member
HEAVY-DUTY CONDUIT U-BOLTS WITH HEX NUTS - ELECTROGALVANIZED IRON
Cat. # ETC50HD ETC75HD ETC100HD ETC125HD ETC150HD ETC200HD ETC250HD ETC300HD
Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3"
1
Unit Qty. 50 50 50 25 25 25 25 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 63 69 82 95 108 121 153 214
Cat. # UBM50HD UBM75HD UBM100HD UBM125HD UBM150HD UBM200HD UBM250HD UBM300HD UBM350HD UBM400HD
Trade Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Thread Size /16" 18 /16" 18 5 /16" 18 5 /16" 18 5 /16" 18 3 /8" 16 3 /8" 16 3 /8" 16 3 /8" 16 3 /8" 16
5 5
Unit Qty. 200 200 100 50 50 50 25 25 20 20
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 12 14 17 19 21 28 37 42 46 51
200
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Conduit Locknuts
CONDUIT LOCKNUTS
/8" 2" Steel, 21/2" UL File No. E-19189
3
CONDUIT LOCKNUTS - ZINC DIE CAST
6" Malleable Iron
CP
Cat. #
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 22 23
Size /8" /2" 3 /4"

3 1
Unit Qty.
100 100 100 50 100 50 50 20 10 10 5 2 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100

1 1 2 3 4 5 7 10 15 18 22 79 166
Cat. #
11DC 12DC 13DC 14DC 15DC 16DC 17DC 18DC 19DC 20DC
Size
1 3
Unit Qty.
400 250 100 60 50 30 20 15 10 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100

1 1 2 3 5 8 10 15 16 19
/2" /4"
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 5" 6"
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
GROUNDING LOCKNUTS - STEEL Applications:

For use with bushing to bond 1/2" to 4" rigid conduit to boxes, cabinets or other enclosures, only where a locknut is exposed. UL File No. E-6225
THIN CONSTRUCTION LOCKNUTS - STEEL
Cat. #
11X 12X 13X 14X 15X 16X 17X 18X 19X 20X
Size
1 3
Unit Qty.
500 100 50 100 50 50 25 20 10 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100

1 1 3 3 4 4 10 15 18 22
/2" /4"
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
Cat. #
GL GL GL GL GL GL GL GL GL GL 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Size
1 3
Unit Qty.
100 50 50 50 50 25 20 10 10 5
Wt. Lbs. Per 100

2 3 4 6 7 9 28 38 48 52
/2" /4"
CONDUIT LOCKNUTS - ALUMINUM
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
SELF RETAINING PVC GASKET WITH STEEL RING

UL File no. E-22133 Unit Qty.
100 100 50 100 50 50 20 10 10 5
Cat. #
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 SA SA SA SA SA SA SA SA SA SA
Size
1 3
Wt. Lbs. Per 100

1 1 1 2 2 3 9 13 16 52
/2" /4"
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
Cat. #
SG1 SG2 SG3 SG4 SG5 SG6 SG7 SG8 SG9 SG10 SG11 SG12
Conduit Size
3 3
Unit Qty.
100 50 50 25 25 25 10 10 10 10 5 5
Wt. Lbs. Per 100

1 2 2 2 4 3 5 10 12 10 15 22
/8" 1/2" /4"
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 5" 6"
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
201

Sealing Locknuts
SEALING LOCKNUTS Applications
Only one Sealing Locknut is required to: Functionally replace rigid threaded enclosure connectors. Provide raintight, watertight, or oiltight seal in any position. Provide positive ground connection. Provide economies in installation and fitting costs.
UL File No. E-19189
CP
Features And Benefits:

Integrally fused PVC gasket provides positive seal against water, oils and other liquids. Designed for use with raintight, watertight and oiltight enclosures, NEMA 2, 3, 3R, 4 and 12. UL Listed Raintight. UL Listed Liquidtight. Can be used with either sheet metal or standard cast metal boxes. CSA Certified watertight. 1/2" 2" Heavy-duty steel. 21/2" 6" Malleable iron. U.S. Patent #4022262 Cat. # SL1 SL2 SL3 SL4 SL5 SL6 SL7 SL8 SL9 SL10 SL11 SL12 Size
1 3
Unit Qty. 100 50 25 25 25 25 10 10 10 5 2 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 1 2 4 4 5 8 28 38 46 52 125 140
/2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 5" 6"
202
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Conduit Bushed Nipples Offset Conduit Nipples
CONDUIT BUSHED NIPPLES MALLEABLE IRON AND ZINC DIE CAST
Malleable Iron and Zinc Die Cast
Non-Insulated and Insulated Threaded NPSM for rigid conduit and IMC UL File No. E-19189
Applications:
Used thru knockout to connect box to conduit coupling. Used with a locknut to connect two boxes side by side or back to back. Used with a locknut to connect fixture housing to continuous runs.
CP
Cat. # Non-insulated Malleable Iron

50* 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61
*Steel Not UL Listed
Cat. # Insulated Malleable Iron

1050* 1051 1052 1053 1054 1055 1056 1057 1058 1059 1060 1061
Cat. # Non-insulated Zinc Die Cast

50D 51D 52D 53D 54D 55D 56D 57D 58D 59D
Size
1 3
Unit Qty.
50 25 10 10 10 10 5 5 1 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 Non-insulated Malleable Iron

3 8 13 19 30 37 68 92 130 200 350 425
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 Insulated Malleable Iron

3 4 11 19 30 37 72 96 113 187 350 450
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 Non-insulated Zinc Die Cast

4 5 10 11 20 30 40 49 68 70
/2" /4"
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 5" 6"
OFFSET CONDUIT NIPPLES MALLEABLE IRON AND ZINC DIE CAST Features:
Threaded NPSM for rigid conduit and IMC Standard Finish on Malleable Iron: Zinc Plated USE: To offset the axis of raceways 3/4 of an inch
UL File No. E-19189
Cat. # Malleable
300 301 302 303
Cat. # Zinc Die Cast

300DC 301DC 302DC 303DC 304DC 305DC
Size
1 3
Unit Qty.
25 25 10 10 5 2
Wt. Lbs. Per 100

24 34 49 54 40 60
/2" /4"
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
203

Push Plugs, Snap-In Blanks, Reducing Washers
PUSH PLUGS PLASTIC* KNOCKOUT SNAP-IN BLANKS STEEL
CP
Cat. # PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC PPC 50 75 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400
Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1
Unit Qty. 100 100 50 50 25 25 100 100 50 50
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 6 8
Cat. # 335 336 337 338 339 340
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"

1 3
Unit Qty. 100 100 50 50 50 20
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 2 2 2 3 5 7
CONCRETE SLAB INSERTS - 90 DEGREE Application:

For use with Rigid and IMC For conduit installed in poured concrete slabs 90 Degree design eliminates the need to bend conduit Provides flush threaded conduit hub for connecting Rigid and IMC conduit and allows future access to conduit system Used in in-slab ceiling & floor poured applications
*Temperature Rating: 180 200F Tensile Strength: 600 2300 PSI
KNOCKOUT REDUCING WASHERS STEEL
Standard Materials:
Zinc Die Cast Unit Qty. 100 100 100 100 100 100 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 1 2 2 3 2 2 5 4 4 3 7 7 6 5 3 7 7 7 7 7 7 14 14 14 14 14 25 25 25 25 35 35 35 35
Cat. # 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350S 351 352 353 354 355 356 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 S 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378
Size
3 /4" 1/2" 1" 1/2" 1" 3/4" 11/ 4" 1/2" 11/4" 3/4" 11/4" 1" 11/2" 1/2" 11/2" 3/4" 11/2 1" 11/2 11/4" 2" 1/2" 2" 3/4 2" 1" 2" 11/4" 2" 11/2" 21/2" 1/2" 21/2" 3/4" 21/2" 1" 21/2" 11/4" 21/2" 11/2 21/2" 2" 3" 1" 3" 11/4" 3" 11/2" 3" 2" 3" 21/2" 3" 11/2" 31/2" 2" 31/2" 21/2" 31/2" 3" 4" 2" 4" 21/2" 4" 3" 4" 31/2"
Cat. # ESL75 ESL100
EMT
3 /4" 1"
Unit Qty. 5 5
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 41 57
Dimensions
In Inches:
Cat. # A B C D E F G ESL75 4.55 3.72 3.49 3.15 2.13 1.14 0.20 ESL100 4.68 3.84 3.46 3.10 2.44 1.47 0.19
204
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Reducers & Plugs
CONDUIT REDUCERS STEEL/IRON PLUGS CAST IRON
Recessed
CP
Cat. # Steel 251 252 253 254 255 260 261 262 263 268 269 270 S 275 276 281 Iron 282 283 285 288 289 290M 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299
Size /4" /2" 1" 1/2" 11/4" 1/2" 11/2" 1/2 2" 1/2" 1" 3/4" 11/4" 3/4" 11/2" 3/4" 2" 3/4" 11/4" 1" 11/2" 1" 2" 1" 11/2" 11/4" 2" 11/4" 2" 11/2"
3 1
Unit Qty. 50 25 10 10 5 25 10 10 5 10 10 5 10 5 5 10 10 10 5 2 5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 Cat. # 4 13 30 43 83 7 23 40 79 18 27 66 13 24 27 120 130 150 210 160 120 200 225 150 270 270 260 160 385 475 PLG1M PLG2M PLG3M PLG4M PLG5M PLG6M PLG7M PLG8M PLG9M PLG10M Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 50 50 25 25 10 10 2 2 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 6 11 22 34 48 82 150 222 340 380
Square Head
21/2" 1" 21/2" 11/4" 21/2" 2" 3" 11/2" 3" 2" 3" 21/2" 31/2" 2" 31/2" 21/2" 31/2" 3" 4" 2" 4" 21/2" 4" 3" 4" 31/2" 5" 4" 6" 5"
Cat. # PLG15M PLG25M PLG35M PLG45M PLG55M PLG65M PLG75M PLG85M PLG95M PLG105M
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 50 50 25 25 10 10 1 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 12 16 25 34 48 80 116 185 232 310
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
205
Series 5 Die Cast Aluminum Conduit Outlet Bodies, Covers and Gaskets
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Series 5 die cast copper-free aluminum conduit bodies, covers and gaskets are available for use with rigid or EMT conduit (with set screw). Conduit bodies are available in trade sizes 1/2"4"; in the most popular conduit body shapes (C, LB, LL, LR, T) and 1/2"2" in TB & X shapes. The Series 5 family is available as components or pre-packaged in various configurations as a SnapPackTM assembly. In addition, Series 5 is completely interchangeable with other manufacturers.
Series 5 Features:
Integral gasket covers. The new sheet aluminum covers feature a raised dome with stainless steel screws supplied with nylon washers and a gasket for simplifying installation reducing inventory and labor costs. These innovative covers are UL and cUL Listed and are NEMA 4 Rated. SnapPackTM. Designed for ordering and receiving convenience, the SnapPack combines a body, gasket, and sheet aluminum cover in a single assembly. Rigid body with traditional cover and gasket (e.g. LB15 CGN)
CP
Applications:
Act as pull outlets for conductors being installed Provide openings for making splices and taps in conductors Act as mounting outlets for lighting fixtures and wiring devices Connect conduit sections Provide taps for branch conduit runs Make 90 bends in conduit runs Provide for access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes
Combination body with traditional cover and gasket (e.g. LB15 MTC )
Features/Benefits:
Die cast copper-free aluminum construction is lightweight and corrosion resistant for long reliable service Epoxy powder coat finish provides additional corrosion resistance in an aesthetically pleasing appearance Conduit bodies are supplied with threaded hubs for use with Rigid/IMC conduit or as a combination body (threaded and with set screws for use with EMT or Rigid/IMC conduit on trade sizes) Domed aluminum cover provides additional cubic capacity SnapPack available in choice of 3 configurations to match customer preferences.
NEMA 4 rigid body with new integral gasketed cover (e.g. X15 ICG)

UL Listed cUL Listed UL File No. E-15022
Standard Materials:
BodiesCopper-Free Aluminum with epoxy powder paint CoversAluminum with stainless steel screws, natural finish GasketsNeoprene
206
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
CP
TYPE LB
Outlet Body Combo EMT, Trade Rigid/IMC Rigid/IMC Size Cat# Cat# 1 /2" LB15 LB15 MT 3 /4" LB25 LB25 MT 1" LB35 LB35 MT 11/4" LB45 LB45 MT 11/2" LB55 LB55 MT 2" LB65 LB65 MT 21/2" LB75 LB75 MT* 3" LB85 LB85 MT* 31/2" LB95 LB95 MT* 4" LB105 LB105 MT* Rigid/IMC Body, Traditional Cover, and Gasket Cat# LB15 LB25 LB35 LB45 LB55 LB65 CGN CGN CGN CGN CGN CGN SnapPack Combo EMT, Body, Traditional Cover, and Gasket Cat# LB15 LB25 LB35 LB45 LB55 LB65 MTC MTC MTC MTC MTC MTC NEMA 4 Rigid/IMC Internal Body and Integral Col.In Unit Cover & Gasket Cat# Cu. In. Qty LB15 ICG LB25 ICG LB35 ICG 4.35 7.3 12.2 32.3 33.8 71.2 71.2 183.5 304.9 308 10 10 5 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 Weight Lbs Per Max # of 100* Conductors 26 48 64 140 160 260 500 600 900 1000 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 # # # # # # # # # 6 AWG 4 AWG 2 AWG 1 /0 AWG 4 /0 AWG 300 MCM 350 MCM 350 MCM 350 MCM
Combo EMT, Rigid/IMC Fittings greater than 2" trade size are SET-SCREW ONLY (not combination threaded and set-screw) *Weight Lbs Per 100 is listed for outlet body only
TYPE LR
Outlet Body Combo EMT, Trade Rigid/IMC Rigid/IMC Size Cat# Cat# 1 /2" LR15 LR15 MT 3 /4" LR25 LR25 MT 1" LR35 LR35 MT 11/4" LR45 LR45 MT 11/2" LR55 LR55 MT 2" LR65 LR65 MT 1 2 /2" LR75 3" LR85 31/2" LR95 4" LR105 Rigid/IMC Body, Traditional Cover, and Gasket Cat# LR15 LR25 LR35 LR45 LR55 LR65 CGN CGN CGN CGN CGN CGN SnapPack Combo EMT, Body, Traditional Cover, and Gasket Cat# LR15 LR25 LR35 LR45 LR55 LR65 MTC MTC MTC MTC MTC MTC NEMA 4 Rigid/IMC Internal Body and Integral Col.In Unit Cover & Gasket Cat# Cu. In. Qty LR15 ICG LR25 ICG LR35 ICG 4.35 7.3 12.2 35.8 35.8 69.7 69.7 186 306 308 10 10 5 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 Weight Lbs Per Max # of 100* Conductors 26 48 64 140 160 260 500 600 900 1000 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 # # # # # # # # # 6 AWG 4 AWG 2 AWG 1 / 0 AWG 4 / 0 AWG 300 MCM 350 MCM 350 MCM 350 MCM
*Weight Lbs Per 100 is listed for outlet body only
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
207
CP
TYPE LL
Outlet Body Combo EMT, Trade Rigid/IMC Rigid/IMC Size Cat# Cat# 1 /2" LL15 LL15 MT 3 /4" LL25 LL25 MT 1" LL35 LL35 MT 1 1/4" LL45 LL45 MT 1 1/2" LL55 LL55 MT 2" LL65 LL65 MT 1 2 /2" LL75 3" LL85 3 1/2" LL95 4" LL105 Rigid/IMC Body, Traditional Cover, and Gasket Cat# LL15 LL25 LL35 LL45 LL55 LL65 CGN CGN CGN CGN CGN CGN SnapPack Combo EMT, Body, Traditional Cover, and Gasket Cat# LL15 LL25 LL35 LL45 LL55 LL65 MTC MTC MTC MTC MTC MTC NEMA 4 Rigid/IMC Internal Body and Integral Col.In Unit Cover & Gasket Cat# Cu. In. Qty LL15 ICG LL25 ICG LL35 ICG 4.35 7.3 12.2 35.8 35.8 69.7 69.7 186 306 308 10 10 5 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 Weight Lbs Per Max # of 100* Conductors 30 48 64 140 160 270 500 600 900 1000 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 # # # # # # # # # 6 AWG 4 AWG 2 AWG 1 /0 AWG 4 /0 AWG 300 MCM 350 MCM 350 MCM 350 MCM
TYPE C
Outlet Body Combo EMT, Trade Rigid/IMC Rigid/IMC Size Cat# Cat# 1 /2" C15 C15 MT 3 /4" C25 C25 MT 1" C35 C35 MT 1 1/4" C45 C45 MT 1 1/2" C55 C55 MT 2" C65 C65 MT 2 1/2" C75 3" C85 1 3 /2" C95* 4" C105* Rigid/IMC Body, Traditional Cover, and Gasket Cat# C15 C25 C35 C45 C55 C65 CGN CGN CGN CGN CGN CGN SnapPack Combo EMT, Body, Traditional Cover, and Gasket Cat# C15 C25 C35 C45 C55 C65 MTC MTC MTC MTC MTC MTC NEMA 4 Rigid/IMC Internal Body and Integral Col.In Unit Cover & Gasket Cat# Cu. In. Qty C15 ICG C25 ICG C35 ICG 4.35 7.3 12.2 32.3 33.8 69.5 69.5 188 307 309 10 10 5 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 Weight Lbs Per Max # of 100* Conductors 27 40 64 165 150 270 500 600 900 1000 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 # # # # # # # # # 6 AWG 4 AWG 2 AWG 1 /0 AWG 4 /0 AWG 300 MCM 350 MCM 350 MCM 350 MCM
208
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
CP
TYPE T
Outlet Body Combo EMT, Trade Rigid/IMC Rigid/IMC Size Cat# Cat# 1 /2" T15 T15 MT 3 /4" T25 T25 MT 1" T35 T35 MT 1 1 /4" T45 T45 MT 11/2" T55 T55 MT 2" T65 T65 MT 21/2" T75 3" T85 31/2" T95* 4" T105* Rigid/IMC Body, Traditional Cover, and Gasket Cat# T15 T25 T35 T45 T55 T65 CGN CGN CGN CGN CGN CGN SnapPack Combo EMT, Body, Traditional Cover, and Gasket Cat# T15 T25 T35 T45 T55 T65 MTC MTC MTC MTC MTC MTC NEMA 4 Rigid/IMC Internal Body and Integral Col.In Unit Cover & Gasket Cat# Cu. In. Qty T15 ICG T25 ICG T35 ICG 4.35 7.3 12.2 33.1 33.1 67 67 175 298 300 10 10 5 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 Weight Lbs Per Max # of 100* Conductors 27 40 64 165 150 270 500 600 900 1000 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 # # # # # # # # # 6 AWG 4 AWG 2 AWG 1 /0 AWG 4 /0 AWG 300 MCM 350 MCM 350 MCM 350 MCM
TYPE TB
Outlet Body Combo EMT, Trade Rigid/IMC Rigid/IMC Size Cat# Cat# 1 /2" TB15 3 /4" TB25 1" TB35 1 1 /4" TB45 11/2" TB55 2" TB65 Rigid/IMC Body, Traditional Cover, and Gasket Cat# SnapPack Combo EMT, Body, Traditional Cover, and Gasket Cat# NEMA 4 Rigid/IMC Internal Body and Integral Col.In Unit Cover & Gasket Cat# Cu. In. Qty TB15 ICG TB25 ICG TB35 ICG 4.5 7.5 10.8 32.3 34.2 71.4 10 10 5 2 2 1 Weight Lbs Per Max # of 100* Conductors 29 42 58 110 109 192 3 3 3 3 3 # # # # # 6 AWG 4 AWG 2 AWG 2 AWG 2 /0 AWG
TYPE X
Outlet Body Combo EMT, Trade Rigid/IMC Rigid/IMC Size Cat# Cat# 1 /2" X15 3 /4" X25 1" X35 1 1 /4" X45 11/2" X55 2" X65 Rigid/IMC Body, Traditional Cover, and Gasket Cat# SnapPack Combo EMT, Body, Traditional Cover, and Gasket Cat# NEMA 4 Rigid/IMC Internal Body and Integral Col.In Unit Cover & Gasket Cat# Cu. In. Qty X15 ICG X25 ICG X35 ICG 4.5 7.5 10.8 32.3 34.2 71.4 10 10 5 2 2 1 Weight Lbs Per Max # of 100* Conductors 31 47 62 118 118 213 3 3 3 3 3 # # # # # 6 AWG 4 AWG 2 AWG 2 AWG 2 /0 AWG
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
209
INTEGRAL GASKET COVERS
Aluminum Cover with Neoprene Integral Gasket
Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" - 11/2" 2" 21/2" - 3" 31/2" - 4"
1
1
ALUMINUM COVERS
Aluminum
Trade Size
Cat. # 150 250 350 450 650 850 950
Unit Qty. 50 50 50 50 25 10 10
Weight Lbs. Per 100 5 6 7 15 24 78 140
CP
Cat. # 150G 250G 350G 450G 650G 850G 950G
Unit Qty. 50 50 50 50 25 10 10
Weight Lbs. Per 100 6 7 8 17 26 80 145
/2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" - 11/2" 2" 21/2" - 3" 31/2" - 4"
1
1
/2" - 3" are NEMA 4 Rated
/2" - 3" are NEMA 4 Rated
GASKETS
Neoprene
Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" - 11/2" 2" 21/2" - 3" 31/2" - 4"
1
Cat. # GASK015N GASK025N GASK035N GASK045N GASK065N GASK085N GASK095N
Unit Qty. 50 50 50 50 25 10 10
Weight Lbs. Per 100 2 2 3 6 10 20 30
TYPE LB DIMENSIONSTHREADED & SET SCREW

Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1
A 1.31 1.53 1.74 2.49 2.49 3.10 4.44 4.44 5.42 5.42
B 3.87 4.67 5.37 7.23 7.23 9.46 12.22 12.22 14.83 14.83
C 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00
D 2.11 2.38 2.74 3.50 3.65 4.24 5.75 6.41 7.11 7.20
E 4.24 4.97 5.79 7.79 7.81 10.20 13.14 13.14 15.46 15.46
F 1.07 1.28 1.56 1.99 2.27 2.91 3.43 4.13 4.65 5.16
TYPE LR DIMENSIONSTHREADED & SET SCREW

Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1
A 1.31 1.53 1.74 2.49 2.49 3.10 4.50 4.65 5.42 5.42
B 3.87 4.67 5.37 7.23 7.23 9.46 12.22 12.22 14.83 14.83
C 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00
D 2.06 2.28 2.51 3.50 3.50 3.83 6.00 6.10 6.40 6.40
E 4.40 5.07 5.94 7.87 7.87 9.88 13.14 13.00 15.45 15.45
F 1.40 1.64 1.90 2.85 2.85 3.41 4.00 4.70 5.43 5.43
210
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
TYPE LL DIMENSIONSTHREADED & SET SCREW
Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1
A 1.31 1.53 1.74 2.49 2.49 3.10 4.50 4.65 5.42 5.42
B 3.87 4.67 5.37 7.23 7.23 9.46 12.22 12.22 14.83 14.83
C 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00
D 2.06 2.28 2.68 3.50 3.50 3.83 6.00 6.10 6.05 6.05
E 4.40 5.07 5.94 7.87 7.87 10.20 13.14 13.00 15.35 15.35
F 1.40 1.64 1.90 2.85 2.85 3.41 4.00 4.70 5.43 5.43
CP
TYPE C DIMENSIONSTHREADED & SET SCREW

Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1
A 1.31 1.53 1.74 2.49 2.49 3.10 4.50 4.65 5.42 5.42
B 3.87 4.67 5.37 7.23 7.23 9.46 12.22 12.22 14.83 14.83
C 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00
D 1.40 1.64 1.90 2.73 2.73 3.41 4.30 4.66 5.36 5.36
E 4.82 5.50 6.44 8.45 8.45 10.71 14.00 13.80 16.10 16.10
F 1.07 1.35 1.67 2.27 2.27 2.91 3.50 4.13 5.30 5.30
TYPE T DIMENSIONSTHREADED & SET SCREW

Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1
A 1.31 1.53 1.74 2.49 2.49 3.10 4.50 4.65 5.42 5.42
B 3.87 4.67 5.37 7.23 7.23 9.46 12.22 12.22 14.83 14.83
C 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 3.50 4.00
D 1.40 1.64 1.90 2.73 2.73 3.41 4.00 4.66 5.40 5.40
E 4.82 5.40 6.33 8.45 8.45 10.71 14.00 13.80 16.00 16.00
F 1.07 1.35 1.15 2.27 2.27 2.91 3.50 4.13 5.30 5.30
TYPE TB DIMENSIONSTHREADED & SET SCREW

Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"
1
A 1.31 1.53 1.74 2.49 2.49 3.10
B 3.92 4.64 5.38 7.24 7.24 9.50
C 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 2.00
D 2.10 2.40 2.77 3.53 3.53 4.50
E 4.72 5.51 6.47 8.25 8.25 10.50
F 1.07 1.28 1.56 1.99 2.27 2.91
TYPE X DIMENSIONSTHREADED & SET SCREW

Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"
1
A 1.31 1.53 1.74 2.49 2.49 3.10
B 3.92 4.64 5.38 7.24 7.24 9.50
C 0.50 0.75 1.00 1.25 1.50 2.00
D 1.37 1.63 1.88 2.51 2.50 3.40
E 4.72 5.51 6.47 8.25 8.25 10.50
F 1.07 1.28 1.56 1.99 2.27 2.91
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
211
Form 5 Conduit Outlet Bodies, Covers & Gaskets Malleable Iron

Applications:
Form 5 Malleable Iron Conduit Bodies are used in conduit systems to: Act as pull outlets for conductors being installed Provide openings for making splices and taps in conductors Act as mounting outlets for lighting fixtures and wiring devices
Standard Finishes:
Malleable iron electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Neoprene natural Sheet steel electrogalvanized Stainless steel natural
CP
Connect conduit sections Provide taps for branch conduit runs Make 90 degree bends in conduit runs Provide for access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes
Options:
Conduit Bodies & Cast Covers Hot dipped galvanized Suffix HDG
Features:
Interchangeable with Appleton Form 35 Conduit Bodies Builtin rollers on 11/4" to 4" C and LB bodies to facilitate wire pulling Smooth and rounded integral bushings for protection of wire insulation Solid neoprene gaskets may be converted to open type by pulling out perforated center section Stainless steel cover screws Domed sheet steel covers provide additional cubic capacity Integral gasket cover provides NEMA 4 rating

UL File No. E-15022 UL Standard 514B cUL to CSA Standard C22.2 No. 18
Standard Materials:
Bodies Malleable iron Gaskets Neoprene Covers sheet steel or malleable Cover screws stainless steel
Form 35 is a registered trademark of Appleton Electric/EGS.
212
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Options:
Description Snapack - packaged body and integral gasket cover Available on all configurations (1/2" - 2") Suffix CG
TYPE C
TYPE LB
Siz e
1 3
Cat.# C50M C75M C100M C125M* C150M* C200M* C250M* C300M* C350M* C400M*
Internal Vol. in Cu. In. 4.5 7.5 12.5 35.0 35.3 75.0 153.0 181.0 290.0 320.0
Unit Qty. 10 10 10 5 5 1 1 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 98 118 170 309 368 552 1216 1437 2210 2321
CP
Max. # of Conductors N/A 3 #6 AWG 3 #4 XHHW 3 #2 XHHW 3 #1/0 XHHW 3 #4/0 XHHW 3 #300 MCM XHHW 3 #300 MCM XHHW 3 #350 MCM XHHW 3 #350 MCM XHHW
Cat.# LB50M LB75M LB100M LB125M* LB150M* LB200M* LB250M* LB300M* LB350M* LB400M*
Internal Vol. in Size Cu. In. /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 10 10 10 5 5 1 1 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Max. # of Per 100 Conductors 71 97 143 287 331 534 1105 1160 1989 2099 N/A 3 #6 AWG 3 #4 XHHW 3 #2 XHHW 3 #1/0 XHHW 3 #4/0 XHHW 3 #300 MCM XHHW 3 #400 MCM XHHW 3 #500 MCM XHHW 3 #500 MCM XHHW
4.5 7.5 12.5 32.0 35.3 73.0 142.0 173.0 292.0 324.0
/2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
*11/4" 4" LB and C Bodies supplied with built in rollers to facilitate wire pulling.
TYPE LR
*11/4" 4" LB and C Bodies supplied with built in rollers to facilitate wire pulling.
TYPE LL
Cat.# LR50M LR75M LR100M LR125M LR150M LR200M LR250M LR300M LR350M LR400M
Siz e /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Internal Vol. in Cu. In. 4.5 7.5 12.5 32.0 35.3 68.0 142.0 173.0 292.0 324.0
Unit Qty. 10 10 10 5 5 1 1 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 71 100 157 332 345 626 1105 1437 2321 2500
Max. # of Conductors N/A 3 #6 AWG 3 #4 XHHW 3 #2 XHHW 3 #2 XHHW 3 #4/0 XHHW 3 #300 MCM XHHW 3 #350 MCM XHHW 3 #350 MCM XHHW 3 #350 MCM XHHW
Cat.# LL50M LL75M LL100M LL125M LL150M LL200M LL250M LL300M LL350M LL400M
Internal Vol. in Size Cu. In.

1 3
Unit Qty. 10 10 10 5 5 1 1 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Max. # of Per 100 Conductors 76 95 138 309 332 497 1105 1437 2321 2431 N/A 3 #6 AWG 3 #4 XHHW 3 #2 XHHW 3 #2 XHHW 3 #4/0 XHHW 3 #300 MCM XHHW 3 #350 MCM XHHW 3 #350 MCM XHHW 3 #350 MCM XHHW
/2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
4.5 7.5 12.5 32.0 33.0 68.0 142.0 173.0 292.0 324.0
TYPE T
Cat.# T50M T75M T100M T125M T150M T200M T250M T300M T350M T400M
Internal Vol. in Size Cu. In. /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 10 10 10 5 5 1 1 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Max. # of Per 100 Conductors 111 137 196 332 368 663 1271 1547 2542 2542 N/A 3 #6 AWG 3 #4 XHHW 3 #2 XHHW 3 #1 XHHW 3 #2/0 XHHW 3 #300 MCM XHHW 3 #300 MCM XHHW 3 #350 MCM XHHW 3 #350 MCM XHHW
6.0 9.5 15.0 33.0 36.0 76.0 142.0 173.0 292.0 324.0
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
213

TYPE TB CAST IRON COVERS
Cat.# TB50M TB75M TB100M TB125M TB150M TB200M
Internal Vol. in Size Cu. In. /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"
1 3
Unit Qty. 10 10 10 5 5 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 88 120 197 342 420 691
Cat. # Max. # of Conductors N/A 3 #6 AWG 3 #6 AWG 3 #6 AWG 3 #4 XHHW 3 #1/0 XHHW K50CM K75CM K100CM K125CM K200CM K250CM K350CM
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" & 11/2" 2" 21/2" & 3" 31/2" & 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 50 50 25 20 5 5 5
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 23 31 41 91 208 358 550
CP
6.0 9.5 15.0 33.0 36.0 76.0
NEOPRENE GASKETS - PERFORATED CENTER
TYPE X
Cat.# X50M X75M X100M X125M X150M X200M
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"

1 3
Internal Vol. in Cu. In. 6.0 9.5 15.0 33.0 36.0 76.0
Unit Qty. 10 10 10 5 5 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 139 172 247 416 463 833
Cat. # Max. # of Conductors N/A 3 #6 AWG 3 #4 XHHW 3 #2 XHHW 3 #1/0 XHHW 3 #2/0 XHHW GK50N GK75N GK100N GK125N GK200N GK250N GK350N
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" & 11/2" 2" 21/2" & 3" 31/2" & 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 100 100 50 25 25 25 25
INTEGRAL GASKET COVER - SHEET STEEL
SHEET STEEL COVERS
Cat. # Unit Qty. 50 50 25 20 5 5 5 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 9 13 19 31 50 94 138 K50SG K75SG K100SG K125SG K200SG K250SG K350SG
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" & 11/2" 2" 21/2" & 3" 31/2" & 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 50 50 25 20 5 5 5
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 14 16 46 62 70 190 340
Cat. # K50S K75S K100S K125S K200S K250S K350S
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" & 11/2" 2" 21/2" & 3" 31/2" & 4"
1 3
214
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

DIMENSIONS (In Inches):
Form 5 Iron LB
Size A B C
1
/2
/4
1 1.80 6.20 2.65
11/4 2.60 8.12 2.75
11/2 2.60 8.12 2.83
2 3.12 10.50 4.42
21/2 4.31 13.60 5.40
3 4.31 13.87 5.90
31/2 5.62 16.25 6.90
4 5.62 16.60 7.21
1.34 4.68 2.05
1.50 5.37 2.25
CP
Form 5 Iron LL
Conduit A B C
1
/2
/4
1 2.65 6.20 1.90
11/4 2.75 8.12 2.75
11/2 3.50 8.12 2.83
2 4.12 10.50 3.31
21/2 5.71 13.60 3.90
3 5.87 13.87 4.75
31/2 7.13 16.50 6.81
4 7.13 16.50 7.19
2.05 4.68 1.37
2.25 5.37 1.70
Form 5 Iron LR
Conduit A B C
1
/2
/4
1 2.65 6.20 1.90
11/4 2.75 8.12 2.75
11/2 3.50 8.12 2.83
2 4.12 10.50 3.31
21/2 5.71 13.60 3.90
3 5.87 13.87 4.75
31/2 6.10 6.25 5.62
4 6.95 16.25 5.62
2.05 4.68 1.37
2.25 5.37 1.70
Form 5 Iron C
Conduit A B C
1
/2
/4
1 1.80 7.05 1.90
11/4 2.60 9.00 2.75
11/2 2.60 9.00 2.83
2 3.12 11.50 3.31
21/2 4.31 15.00 3.90
3 4.31 15.12 4.75
31/2 4.88 18.13 5.19
4 4.88 18.13 5.56
1.34 5.38 1.37
1.50 6.00 1.70
Form 5 Iron T
Conduit A B C
1
/2
/4
1 2.65 7.05 1.80
11/4 2.75 9.00 2.60
11/2 3.50 9.00 2.60
2 4.12 11.50 3.12
21/2 5.71 15.00 4.31
3 5.87 15.12 4.31
31/2 6.81 18.13 5.19
4 7.15 18.13 5.56
2.05 5.38 1.34
2.25 6.00 1.50
Form 5 Iron TB
Conduit A B C
1
/2
/4
1 1.80 7.05 2.65
11/4 2.60 9.00 2.75
11/2 2.60 9.00 2.83
2 3.12 11.50 4.42
1.34 5.38 2.05
1.50 6.00 2.25
Form 5 Type X
Conduit A B C
1
/2
/4
1 3.56 7.1 2.25
11/4 4.43 9.1 2.55
11/2 4.43 9.1 2.75
2 5.4 11.75 3.45
2.79 5.41 1.75
2.93 6.08 1.97
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
215
Cast Device Boxes

FS and FD Boxes
Applications:
Cast device boxes are installed to: Accommodate wiring devices Act as pull boxes for conductors in a conduit system Provide openings to make splices and taps in conductors Use indoors and outdoors
CP
Use in applications where boxes may be subjected to rough use
Features:
Green ground screw is located on the flange of the box for easy ground wire termination and is standard on boxes Suitable for use in wet locations when used with gasket and flat blank covers Mounting lugs standard Tapered threaded hubs (NPT) with integral bushing Available as shallow (FS) or deep (FD) configuration. Ample wiring room provided in either FS or FD configuration Wide selection of surface or flush covers available in three materials (sheet malleable, steel, aluminum) Malleable iron construction provides high tensile strength for strong, dependable service Covers are individually bagged and supplied with screws

c UL us c CSA us
Standard Materials:
Malleable iron
Standard Finishes:
Malleable iron zinc electroplate
FS BOXES
FD BOXES
FS and FD Dimensions
FSM1 Cat. # FSM1 FSM2 FSM3 Trade Size /2" /4" 1"
1 3
FDM1 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 222 234 243 Cat. # FDM1 FDM2 FDM3 Trade Size /2" /4" 1"
1 3
Unit Qty. 5 5 5
Unit Qty. 2 2 2
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 278 273 284
FSC BOXES
FDC BOXES
FSC and FDC Dimensions
FSCM1 Cat. # FSCM1 FSCM2 FSCM3 Trade Size

1 3
FDCM1 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 234 241 250 Trade Size /2" /4" 1"
1 3
Unit Qty. 5 5 5
Cat. # FDCM1 FDCM2 FDCM3
Unit Qty. 2 2 2
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 313 294 306
/2" /4" 1"
216
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Cast Device Boxes

FS and FD Covers
Cast Device Covers - Malleable FS AND FD COVERS - MALLEABLE
CP
FBCM1
SWCM1 Unit Qty. 25 25 25
RCM1 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 56 63 55
Cat. # FBCM1 SWCM1 RCM1
Description Malleable Iron Flat Blank Cover Malleable Iron Switch Cover Malleable Iron Duplex Receptacle Cover
FS AND FD COVERS - STEEL
FBCS1
SWCS1
RCS1
GFICS1
Cat. # FBCS1 SWCS1 RCS1 GFICS1
Description Steel Steel Steel Steel Flat Blank Cover Switch Cover Duplex Receptacle Cover GFCI Cover
Unit Qty. 25 25 25 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 18 16 13 12
FS AND FD COVERS - ALUMINUM
FS AND FD BOX GASKET
FBCA1 Cat. # FBCA1 Description Aluminum Flat Blank Cover Unit Qty. 25 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 9 Cat. # FSGSK1 Description
FSGSK1 Unit Qty. 25 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 3.5
Neoprene Gasket
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
217
Myers Hubs
Applications:
Myers Scru-tite and Ground hub are used in the termination of electrical circuits through wall of the enclosure Ideal for pharmaceutical, chemical and food processing, pulp/paper and nuclear industries. Resistant to a variety of chemicals, including acetic, citric and salt water. The O-ring is a special "Viton (75)" and has excellent chemical resistance. Hub is provided with a stainless steel ground nut.
Hub Basic Scru-Tite NEMA 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X and 12

Zinc UL File No. E-27258
CP
Cat. # ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST 03 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11* 12*
Size /8" /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 5" 6"
3 1
Unit Qty. 25 25 25 25 10 10 10 5 2 2 2 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 12 20 32 40 60 70 90 200 250 300 350 600 800
Features:
Vibration proof Grounding screw for added safety Captive o-ring gasket No welding Posi-Lok insulated throat (insuliner) Fit standard knockouts Easy installation Controlled thread lengths NPSL on male thread No sharp edges (along parting line)
Optional Nickel-Chrome Plate Finish. Add suffix -CP. See price list. *Not supplied with insulator.
Hub Basic Scru-Tite NEMA 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X and 12

Aluminum UL File No. E-27258

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 2 Class II, Division 1 & 2 Class III, Division 1 & 2 UL Listed UL Standard 514B CSA Certified Certified by UL to CSA standard C22.2 No. 18 NEMA Type 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 (std hub) NEMA Type 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 (ground hub)
Cat. # STA STA STA STA STA STA STA STA STA STA STA STA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 5" 6"
1 3
Unit Qty. 25 25 25 10 10 10 5 2 2 2 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 8 16 16 30 30 50 80 100 150 150 300 300
Standard Materials:
Nut: Zamek-2, Zamek-3, Aluminium (Al 360), Stainless (316) Body: Zamek-2, Zamek-3, Aluminium (Al 360), Stainless (316) Insuliner: Lexan O-Ring: Gasket Vi Ton Ground Screw: Steel
Standard Finishes:
Aluminum: Natural Zinc: Natural
Stainless Steel Ground Hub NEMA 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X and 12

Stainless Steel Type 316 UL File No. E-59509
Optional Materials and Finishes:

Stainless: Natural Zinc: Chrome-plate Cat. # SSTG SSTG SSTG SSTG SSTG SSTG SSTG SSTG SSTG SSTG 218 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 10 10 10 5 5 5 2 2 2 2
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 20 30 43 55 73 95
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Myers Hubs
Ground Hub NEMA 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X and 12

Zinc UL File No. E-59509
Ground Hub Basic Scru-Tite

Zinc ATEX Approval with DEMKO 07 ATEX 0618172U II 2 G Ex e II UL File No. 187273 Class I, Zone 1, AEx e II Class I, Zone 1, Ex e II
CP
Max. Copper Grd. Wire Size Cat. # STG STG STG STG STG STG STG STG STG STG STG STG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11* 12* Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 5" 6"
1 3
Unit Qty. 25 25 25 10 10 10 5 2 2 2 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 20 30 43 55 73 95 190 263 300 350 625 750
CSA #8 #8 #8 #8 #6 #4 #2 1/ 2/ 2/ 2/ 3/
UL #8 #8 #8 #8 #8 #8 #6 #6 #6 #4 #2 #1
Cat. # STGK STGK STGK STGK STGK STGK 1 2 3 4 5 6
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"

1 3
Unit Qty. 10 10 10 5 5 5
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 20 30 43 55 73 95
0 0 0 0 0
Stainless Steel Type 316

ATEX Approval with DEMKO 07 ATEX 0618172U II 2 G Ex e II Class I, Zone 1, AEx e II UL File No. E-187273 Class I, Zone 1, Ex e II
*Not supplied with insulator
Ground Hub NEMA 2, 3, 3R, 4, 4X and 12

Aluminum Type 360 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 20 30 43 55 73 95
Cat. # SSTGK SSTGK SSTGK SSTGK SSTGK SSTGK 1 2 3 4 5 6
Size /2" /4" 1 11/4" 11/2" 2

1 3
Unit Qty. 10 10 10 5 5 5
Max. Copper Grd. Wire Size Cat. # STAG STAG STAG STAG STAG STAG STAG STAG STAG STAG STAG STAG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 5" 6"
1
Unit Qty. 25 25 25 10 10 10 5 2 2 2 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 10 14 18 25 33 45 90 125 138 150 325 350
CSA #8 #8 #8 #8 #6 #4 #2 1/ 2/ 2/ 3/ 3/
UL #8 #8 #8 #8 #8 #8 #6 #6 #6 #4 #2 #1
Ground Nut
Zinc
0 0 0 0 0
Max. Copper Grd. Wire Size Cat. # STGN STGN STGN STGN STGN STGN 1 2 3 4 5 6 Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"
1
Unit Qty. 25 25 25 10 10 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 6 10 13 15 23 30
CSA #8 #8 #8 #8 #6 #4
UL #8 #8 #8 #8 #8 #8
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
219
Myers Hubs
Ground Nut
Aluminum
Through-Bulkhead Fitting
Aluminum Packaged as two pieces unassembled
CP
Cat. # STAGN STAGN STAGN STAGN STAGN STAGN 1 2 3 4 5 6
Size
1 3
Unit Qty. Wt. Lbs. Per 100 25 25 25 10 10 10 3 5 6 8 10 13
Max. Copper Grd. Wire Size CSA UL #8 #8 #8 #8 #6 #4 #8 #8 #8 #8 #8 #8
Cat. # STTBA STTBA STTBA STTBA STTBA STTBA STTBA STTBA

*UL Listed
Size 1* 2* 3* 4* 5* 6* 7 8 /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3"

1
Unit Qty. 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 2
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 20 35 30 40 50 70 106 138
/2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"
Cap-Off
Zinc
Through-Bulkhead Fitting without nipples

Zinc Packaged as two pieces unassembled Cat. # STC STC STC STC STC STC 1 2 3 4 5 6 Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"
1
Unit Qty. 25 25 25 10 10 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 13 20 28 40 53 70 Cat. # STTTB STTTB STTTB STTTB STTTB STTTB 1 2 3 4 5 6 Size / 2" 3 / 4" 1" 11/ 4" 11/ 2" 2"
1
Unit Qty. 5 5 5 5 5 5
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 35 60 75 85 120 170
Cap-Off
Aluminum
ThroughBulkhead Fitting without nipples

Aluminum Cat. # STAC 1 STAC 2 STAC 3 Zinc Size /2" /4" 1"
1 3
Unit Qty. 25 25 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 6 8 12 Cat. # STTTBA STTTBA STTTBA STTTBA STTTBA STTTBA 1 2 3 4 5 6 Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"
1 3
Unit Qty. 5 5 5 5 5 5
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 15 25 35 40 50 75
Through-Bulkhead Fitting
Cat. # STTB 1* STTB 2* STTB 3* STTB 4* STTB 5* STTB 6* STTB 7 STTB 8 STTB 9 STTB 10
*UL Listed
Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1
Unit Qty. 5 5 5 5 5 5 4 2 2 2
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 30 50 70 85 110 160 244 312 350 400
220
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Myers Hubs
Non-Hazadous Drain Plug

Stainless Steel UL File No. E-23223
Metric To NPT Adapter

Zinc
Cat. # Cat. # SSTC 1 SSTC 1CD

Note:
Size M20 M25 M32 M40 M50 M63 to to to to to to /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"
1
Unit Qty. 25 25 25 10 10 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 12 32 32 40 50 70
Size /2" 1 /2"

1
Unit Qty. 25 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 13 13
SSTC-1 is for knockouts and is supplied with a locknut and straight threads. SSTC-1CD is for threaded openings and is supplied without locknut and NPT threads. Not gasketed to allow for water drainage
STM STM STM STM STM STM

Note:
1 2 3 4 5 6
CP
Non-Hazadous Drain Plug

Aluminum UL File No. E-23223
The Myers Metric to NPT hub adapter is used to convert a threaded metric entry to a NPT entry. The female thread is NPT and the male thread is metric.

Stainless Steel
Cat. # STAC 1ST STAC 1CD

Note:
Size /2" 1 /2"

1
Unit Qty. 25 25
Cat. # SSTM SSTM SSTM SSTM SSTM SSTM 1 2 3 4 5 6
Size M20 M25 M32 M40 M50 M63 to to to to to to /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"
1
Unit Qty. 10 10 10 5 5 5
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 12 20 32 40 50 70
STAC-1ST is for knockouts and is supplied with a locknut and straight threads. STAC-1CD is for threaded openings and is supplied without locknut and NPT threads. Not gasketed to allow for water drainage
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
221
Myers Hubs
SCHEDULE OF DIMENSIONS
Pipe Size /4 /8 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4 5 6
1 3
E Cat. # ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST ST 02 03 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11* 12* A 1 /2 13/2 111/32 115/32 121/32 111/16 111/16 13/4 27/32 25/16 23/8 27/16 215/16 3
3
J "O" Ring Max. .364 .493 .622 .824 1.049 1.380 1.610 2.067 2.469 3.068 3.548 4.026 5.047 6.065 F /4 NPT /8 NPT 1 /2 NPT 3 /4 NPT 1 NPT 11/4 NPT 11/2 NPT 2 NPT 21/2 NPT 3 NPT 31/2 NPT 4 NPT 5 NPT 6 NPT
1 3
K Min. /64 /64 55 /64 11/16 121/64 143/64 159/64 225/64 257/64 333/64 41/64 433/64 537/64 641/64
35 43
B /16 11/8 17/16 123/32 2 23/8 23/4 31/4 33/4 43/8 5 51/2 67/8 711/16
15
C /32 /32 13 /16 29 /32 11/32 11/32 11/32 13/32 19/32 13/8 17/16 11/2 2 2
21 21
D /8 /8 3 /16 3 /16 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 5 /16

1 1
Min. .350 .468 .591 .783 .997 1.311 1.529 1.964 2.346 2.915 3.371 3.825 4.795 5.762
G /4 NPS /8 NPS 1 /2 NPS 3 /4 NPS 1 NPS 11/4 NPS 11/2 NPS 2 NPS 21/2 NPS 3 NPS 31/2 NPS 4 NPS 5 NPS 6 NPS
1 3
H 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 45 45 45 45 45
C.S. /21 /32 1 /8 1 /8 1 /8 1 /8 1 /8 1 /8 1 /8 1 /8 1 /8 1 /8 1 /8 1 /8

3 3
O.D. /4 /16 11/2 17/16 13/4 21/8 21/2 3 31/2 41/8 45/8 51/8 61/2 71/4
3 15
Max.
9 11 7
/16 /16 /8 11/8 13/8 13/4 2 21/2 3 35/8 41/8 45/8 511/16 63/4
CP
*Not supplied with insulator.
Options:
Description Optional Nickel-Chrome Plate Finish. See price list. Tolerance Decimal Fractional Angular & Draft +/.010 +/1/16 +/2 Cat. # ST STA SSTG Material Zinc Aluminium Stainless PLAN VIEW SIDE VIEW Suffix -CP
Dimensions and materials specified are subject to change without prior notice.
SPACING CHART FOR MYERS HUBS

CONDUIT OR PIPE SIZE
HOLE COND. SIZE. SIZE. /16 11 /16 7 /8 11/8 13/8 13/4 2 21/2 3 35/8 41/8 45/8 511/16 63/4
9 1
"D" dimension indicated maximum panel thickness which hub will accommodate.
/4
/8
/2
/4
11/4
11/2
21/2
31/2
/4 3 /8 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4 5 6

1
11/16 15/32 15/16 17/16 19/32 125/32 131/32 27/32 215/32 225/32 33/32 311/32 41/32 413/32 19 /32
11/4 113/32 117/32 111/16 17/8 21/16 25/16 29/16 27/8 33/16 37/16 41/8 41/2 11 /16
19/16 111/16 127 /32 21/32 27/32 215/32 223/32 31/32 311/32 319/32 49/32 421/32 27/32
113/16 131/32 25/32 211/32 219/32 227/32 35/32 315/32 323/32 413/32 425/32 31 /32
21/8 25/16 21/2 23/4 3 35/16 35/8 37/8 49/16 415/16 11/8
21/2 211/16 215/16 33/16 31/2 313/16 41/16 43/4 51/8 15/16
27/8 31/8 33/8 311/16 4 41/4 415/16 55/16 11/2
33/8 35/8 315/16 41/4 41/2 53/16 59/16 13/4
37/8 43/16 41/2 43/4 57/16 513/16 2
41/2 413/16 51/16 53/4 61/8 25/16
51/8 53/8 61/16 67/16 25/8
53/4 63/16 611/16 27/8
71/8 73/8 39/16
73/4 315/16
Minimum space from center of pipe or conduit to nearest obstruction. 1. Dimensions in dark gray shaded squares are centers for conduits of same size. Example: How close may 3 conduits be spaced? Answer 41/2" 2. Dimensions in lighter gray shaded squares are for centers of conduits NOT of the same size. Example: What is the minimum spacing for 2" and 3/4" conduit? Read down column marked 3/4" to figure opposite 2" and find dimensions is 211/32". 3. Minimum spacing dimensions as shown will give approximately 1/8" clearance between locking nuts.
222
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Commercial Hubs

Commercial Hubs are a dependable low profile hub that meet the requirements of UL standards Neoprene-grade chloroprene gasket firms into an elastic compound (similar to rubber) and provides environmental protection for industrial applications Medium viscosity flame retardant insuliner provides a smooth pulling surface Cast threads to meet UL standards and allow quick and easy installation Hex surfaces on the body make tightening with a wrench easy Thinner, lighter weight construction Available in standard and grounded version to meet customer preferences The use of rigid/IMC conduit remains the preferred choice in many applications because of the physical protection of conductors and long service life of the installation. Consequently, the need to terminate conduit into a box or enclosure creates the need for a hub. The Commercial Hub has been developed to provide a light-weight hub that installs quickly and easily, providing a secure termination.
CP

UL and cUL Listed UL File No. E-19189
Standard Material & Finishes:

Body & Nut: Corrosion resistant Zamek-2 & Zamek-3 Type Zinc Gasket: neoprene-grade chloroprene Insuliner: Lexan920A, medium viscosity flame retardant grade Finish - Natural
CHB HUBS ORDERING AND DIMENSIONAL INFORMATION

Cat. No. CHB1 CHB2 CHB3 CHB4 CHB5 CHB6 CHB7 CHB8 CHB9 CHB10 Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1
A 17/32" 11/2" 157/64" 21/4" 235/64" 33/64" 39/16" 43/16" 425/32" 523/64"
B /64" 21 /32" 13 /16" 53 /64" 55 /64" 31 /32" 11/64" 11/64" 31 /32" 11/64"
39
C 17/16" 139/64" 155/64" 2" 27/64" 27/32" 25/8" 241/64" 241/64" 241/64"
Unit Qty 25 25 25 10 10 10 2 2 2 1
B
Wt. Lbs Per 100 14 20 33 43 56 71 135 156 193 229
C D NPT THREADS
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
223
Commercial Hubs
CHG GROUNDED HUBS ORDERING AND DIMENSIONAL INFORMATION

Cat. No. CHG1 CHG2 CHG3 CHG4 CHG5 CHG6 CHG7 CHG8 CHG9 CHG10 Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1
A 17/32" 11/2" 157/64" 21/4" 235/64" 33/64" 39/16" 43/16" 425/32" 523/64"
B /64" 21 /32" 13 /16" 53 /64" 55 /64" 31 /32" 11/64" 11/64" 31 /32" 11/64"
39
C 17/16" 139/64" 155/64" 2" 27/64" 27/32" 25/8" 241/64" 241/64" 241/64"
B
D 134/64" 155/64" 25/64" 29/32" 223/64" 225/64" 249/64" 253/64" 215/16" 231/32"
Unit Qty 25 25 25 10 10 10 2 2 2 1
Wt. Lbs Per 100 14 21 34 45 59 75 145 161 196 234
CP
NPT THREADS
CHGN GROUND NUT ORDERING AND DIMENSIONAL INFORMATION

Cat. No. CHGN1 CHGN2 CHGN3 CHGN4 CHGN5 CHGN6 CHGN7 CHGN8 CHGN9 CHGN10 Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1
A 17/32" 11/2" 157/64" 21/4" 235/64" 33/64" 39/16" 43/16" 425/32" 523/64"
B /32" 53 /64" 59 /64" 31 /32" 63 /64" 63 /64" 1" 15/64" 17/64" 15/32"
21
Ground Screw Size 10 - 32 10 - 32 10 - 32 11/4 - 20 11/4 - 20 11/4 - 20 11/4 - 20 11/4 - 20 11/4 - 20 11/4 - 20
Unit Qty 25 25 25 10 10 10 2 2 2 1
Wt. Lbs Per 100 4 5 10 11 14 16 22 29 31 40
224
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Conduit Hubs
CONDUIT HUBS - MALLEABLE IRON Applications:

Ideal for terminating electrical conduit through the walls of enclosures. Designed for use indoors or outdoors with rigid conduit and IMC, specific applications include food processing plants, distilleries, breweries, sewage disposal plants, chemical plants, paper processing mills and refineries.
CONDUIT HUBS - IRON SPACE SAVER Applications:

Ideal for terminating electrical conduit through the walls of enclosures. Designed for use indoors or outdoors with rigid conduit and IMC, specific applications include food processing plants, distilleries, breweries, sewage disposal plants, chemical plants, paper processing mills and refineries.
CP
Features:
Male thread is on the nut for space saving. Quick and easy when installing rigid conduit nipple between two existing enclosures. Insulated throat provides smooth pulling surface. Furnished with SG sealing gasket. Hub fits standard knockouts. No special tools required.
Features:
Male thread type Tapered female thread for rigid conduit and IMC Recessed O-ring gasket assures raintight and secure environmental connections Insulated throat provides smooth pulling surface Locking screw on the nut doubles as a grounding screw for added safety Complete size range from 1/2" to 6" Hubs fit standard knockouts. No special tools required

Class I, Division 2 Class II, Divisions 1 & 2 Class III, Division 1 & 2 UL Listed - UL Standard 514B. cUL Listed - Certified by UL to CSA Standard C22.2 No. 18. NEMA: FB-1 Suitable for wet locations.

Class I, Division 2 Class II, Divisions 1 & 2 Class III, Divisions 1 & 2 UL Listed UL Standard 514B cUL Listed Certified by UL to CSA Standard C22.2 No. 18 NEMA: FB-1 Suitable for wet locations

Material: Malleable Iron Finish: Zinc Electroplate
Options:
Mechanically galvanized Suffix HDG
Dimensions
In Inches:
Cat. # MHUB1 MHUB2 MHUB3 MHUB4 MHUB5 MHUB6 MHUB7 MHUB8 MHUB9 MHUB10 MHUB11 MHUB12
Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 5" 6"
1
Unit Qty. 25 25 5 5 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 18 25 50 25 20 10 10 5 5 2 1 1 Cat. # HUB1 HUB2 HUB3 HUB4 HUB5 HUB6 HUB7 HUB8 HUB9 HUB10
Note:
Conduit Size /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4

1
Unit Qty. 25 10 5 5 2 1 1 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 18 25 50 25 20 10 10 5 5 2
a 1 11/8 13/8 11/2 15/8 111/16 23/16 27/16 27/16 29/16
b 11/4 19/16 17/8 25/16 21/2 3 35/8 41/4 43/4 51/4
c 1 13/8 15/8 2 23/8 213/16 37/16 41/16 411/16 51/16
d
1
/8 9/64 5 /32 1/4 3 /16 9/32 1 /4 7/16 1 /4 7/16 1 /4 7/16 1 /4 7/16 1 /4 7/16 5 /16 3/4 5 /16 11/8
Dimension "x" is maximum wall thickness of box that will meet the requirement for three full threads engagement of nipple and fitting body when box connector or rigid conduit hub is installed in a knockout or slip hole.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
225
Liquidtight Conduit Fittings

Liquidator Liquidtight Flexible Metallic Conduit Fittings
Cooper Crouse-Hinds liquidtight product line offers high-quality, high-performance fittings. Designed to the toughest standards and integrating the latest technology, not only do you get a reliable and durable product, you also get one that reduces installation time and cost. Our versatile lines of liquidtight fittings are designed for a wide range of applications. Choose from our Liquidator, LiQuik, Zinc Die Cast, Non-Metallic or Low Profile liquidtight fittings.
CP
Applications:
Typical applications for liquidtight conduit and liquidtight fittings include the wiring of machine tools, motors, transformers, food processing equipment, robotics, air conditioning units, illuminated store front signs and billboards, etc. The flexible metallic conduit and fittings protect conductors from mechanical damage due to vibration and movement, and seal out cutting oils, coolants, water, dust, etc. Applications such as these can be found in, but are not limited to, industries such as: Machine tool manufacturers Electric power generating plants Waste treatment facilities Paint manufacturing facilities Automobile manufacturing facilities Aerospace industries Breweries Food processing plants Dairies Pulp and paper mills Petroleum refineries Chemical and petrochemical plants

UL Listed liquidtight flexible metal conduit fittings are suitable for use in the following hazardous locations under NEC, Class I, Division 2; Class II, Division 1 and 2; and Class III, Division 1 and 2, and are suitable for grounding in sizes 3/ 8" through 11/ 4" under NEC. UL Standards: 514B, 467 cUL Standard: C22.2 No. 18F UL File No. E-19189
Standard Materials:
Body Straight: 3/8" through 6" malleable iron, or 3/8" through 4" aluminum 45 3/8" through 4" malleable iron 90 3/8" through 4" malleable iron or aluminum Gland nut malleable iron or aluminum Ferrule 3/8" through 6" steel Gland nut sealing ring polyethylene Sealing gasket thermoplastic elastomer Locknut steel or aluminum
Standard Finishes:
Malleable iron zinc electroplate Polyethylene, thermoplastic elastomer, aluminum and die cast natural User Benefits Assurance of safe and reliable performance. End user peace of mind. Meets NEC and UL requirements for use in wet locations. Reduces downtime and replacement costs. Complete selection of styles and sizes. Easy selection from one source, saves time and money. Easy wrenching. Fast, easy installation results in labor savings. Eliminates leakage, potential downtime and replacement costs. Provides a reliable ground and safety of personnel and equipment. Wont vibrate loose. Provides excellent pullout strength, prevents conduit popout and provides grounding for safety of personnel and equipment.
Product Features UL Listed, cUL Certified. Provides protection in wet locations. Available in various configurations in various trade sizes and materials. Hex surfaces on gland nut and body. Thermoplastic elastomer sealing gasket effectively seals out water, oil, dust and dirt. Lock nut bites into box. Cupped long grounding ferrule is distortion-free.
Liquidtight Fittings Selection Chart Family Liquidator Liquidator Aluminum LT-SA LTK Low Profile LTQ LiQuik LTDC Zinc Die Cast LTNM Non-Metallic
* 90 LT-SA available in
3
Material Malleable Iron Copper-free Aluminum Steel/Malleable Iron Malleable Iron Zinc Die Cast Nylon
Size/Range 3 /8"6"
3
Configurations Straight, 45, 90 Straight & 90* Straight, 45, 90 Straight, 45,90 Straight & 90 Straight & 90
Typical Applications Tough, industrial, corrosive for STANDARD APPLICATIONS Tough, industrial, corrosive applications where ALUMINUM MATERIAL PREFERRED Tough, industrial, corrosive applications with SPACE RESTRICTIONS Tough, industrial, corrosive applications needing NO DISASSEMBLY INSTALLATIONS Tough, industrial, corrosive applications where ZINC DIE CAST MATERIAL PREFERRED Tough, industrial, corrosive for use with NON-METALLIC TYPE B LIQUIDTIGHT CONDUIT
/8"4" /8"2" /8"2" /8"4" /8"2"
/ "2" only
8
226
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

CP
Straight Connectors
Malleable Iron Conduit Size /8" /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 5" 6"
3 1
Aluminum Insulated Cat. No. LTB38 LTB50 LTB75 LTB100 LTB125 LTB150 LTB200 LTB250 LTB300 LTB350 LTB400 LTB500 LTB600 Non-Insulated with Aluminum Grounding Lug Cat. No. LT38G LT50G LT75G LT100G LT125G LT150G LT200G LT250G LT300G LT350G LT400G LT500G LT600G Insulated with Aluminum Grounding Lug Cat. No. LTB38G LTB50G LTB75G LTB100G LTB125G LTB150G LTB200G LTB250G LTB300G LTB350G LTB400G LTB500G LTB600G Insulated with Copper Grounding Lug Cat. No. LTB38GC LTB50GC LTB75GC LTB100GC LTB125GC LTB150GC LTB200GC LTB250GC LTB300GC LTB350GC LTB400GC Non-Insulated Aluminum Cat. No. LT38-SA LT50-SA LT75-SA LT100-SA LT125-SA LT150-SA LT200-SA LT250-SA LT300-SA LT350-SA LT400-SA Non-Insulated with Aluminum Grounding Lug Cat. No. LT38G-SA LT50G-SA LT75G-SA LT100G-SA LT125G-SA LT150G-SA LT200G-SA LT250G-SA LT300G-SA LT350G-SA LT400G-SA
Non-Insulated Cat. No. LT38 LT50 LT75 LT100 LT125 LT150 LT200 LT250 LT300 LT350 LT400 LT500 LT600
Lug Size
#4-#14 #4-#14 #4-#14 #4-#14 #4-#14 #4-#14 #4-#14 #1/0-#8 #1/0-#8 #3/0-#6 #3/0-#6 250MCM-#6 250MCM-#6
Not UL Listed or CSA Certified
45 Angle Connectors
Malleable Iron Conduit Size /8" /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
3 1
Aluminum Insulated Cat. No. LTB3845 LTB5045 LTB7545 LTB10045 LTB12545 LTB15045 LTB20045 LTB25045 LTB30045 LTB35045 LTB40045 Non-Insulated with Aluminum Grounding Lug Cat. No. LT3845G LT5045G LT7545G LT10045G LT12545G LT15045G LT20045G LT25045G LT30045G LT35045G LT40045G Insulated with Aluminum Grounding Lug Cat. No. LTB3845G LTB5045G LTB7545G LTB10045G LTB12545G LTB15045G LTB20045G LTB25045G LTB30045G LTB35045G LTB40045G Insulated with Copper Grounding Lug Cat. No. LTB3845GC LTB5045GC LTB7545GC LTB10045GC LTB12545GC LTB15045GC LTB20045GC LTB25045GC LTB30045GC LTB35045GC LTB40045GC Non-Insulated Aluminum Cat. No.
Non-Insulated Cat. No. LT3845 LT5045 LT7545 LT10045 LT12545 LT15045 LT20045 LT25045 LT30045 LT35045 LT40045
Lug Size
#4-#14 #4-#14 #4-#14 #4-#14 #4-#14 #4-#14 #4-#14 #1/0-#8 #1/0-#8 #3/0-#6 #3/0-#6
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
227

CP
90 Angle Connectors
Malleable Iron Conduit Size /8" /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
3 1
Aluminum Insulated Cat. No. LTB3890 LTB5090 LTB7590 LTB10090 LTB12590 LTB15090 LTB20090 LTB25090 LTB30090 LTB35090 LTB40090 Non-Insulated with Aluminum Grounding Lug Cat. No. LT3890G LT5090G LT7590G LT10090G LT12590G LT15090G LT20090G LT25090G LT30090G LT35090G LT40090G Insulated with Aluminum Grounding Lug Cat. No. LTB3890G LTB5090G LTB7590G LTB10090G LTB12590G LTB15090G LTB20090G LTB25090G LTB30090G LTB35090G LTB40090G Insulated with Copper Grounding Lug Cat. No. LTB3890GC LTB5090GC LTB7590GC LTB10090GC LTB12590GC LTB15090GC LTB20090GC LTB25090GC LTB30090GC LTB35090GC LTB40090GC Non-Insulated Aluminum Cat. No. LT3890-SA LT5090-SA LT7590-SA LT10090-SA LT12590-SA LT15090-SA LT20090-SA LT25090-SA LT30090-SA LT35090-SA LT40090-SA Non-Insulated with Aluminum Grounding Lug Cat. No. LT3890G-SA LT5090G-SA LT7590G-SA LT10090G-SA LT12590G-SA LT15090G-SA LT20090G-SA LT25090G-SA LT30090G-SA LT35090G-SA LT40090G-SA
NonInsulated Cat. No. LT3890 LT5090 LT7590 LT10090 LT12590 LT15090 LT20090 LT25090 LT30090 LT35090 LT40090
Lug Size
#4-#14 #4-#14 #4-#14 #4-#14 #4-#14 #4-#14 #4-#14 #1/0-#8 #1/0-#8 #3/0-#6 #3/0-#6
228
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Non-Insulated Malleable Iron Dimensions (in inches)
A B
F B
D B
C
G
E
CP
C
H C
Trade Size /8" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 5" 6"
3
A 11/8" 11/4" 11/4" 17/16" 11/2" 15/8" 13/4" 23/16" 21/2" 25/8" 23/4" 31/8" 33/8"
B /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 5 /8" 11 /16" 3 /4" 3 /4" 1" 11/8" 13/16" 11/4" 17/16" 11/2"
1
C 11/8" 11/4" 19/16" 113/16" 21/4" 27/16" 3" 4" 43/16" 51/4" 53/4" 61/16" 73/4"
D 15/16" 17/16" 15/8" 25/16" 23/8" 311/16" 33/16" 85/16" 913/16" 113/16" 13"
E 15/8" 15/8" 13/4" 21/8" 21/4" 23/8" 23/4" 83/16" 93/8" 111/4" 129/16"
F 115/16" 2" 23/16" 21/2" 213/16" 3" 311/16" 75/16" 75/8" 95/8" 111/16"
G 11/2" 11/2" 19/16" 113/16" 23/16" 27/16" 213/16" 47/16" 51/2" 515/16" 85/16"
H /4" /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 11/8" 11/8" 11/2" 11/2" 111/16" 111/16"
3 3
Non-Insulated Aluminum Dimensions

D B
Trade Size /8" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
3
A 13/16" 15/16" 15/16" 17/16" 19/16" 113/16" 13/4" 21/4" 27/16" 27/8" 215/16"
B /32" 19 /32" 19 /32" 13 /16" 13 /16" 13 /16" 7 /8" 11/16" 11/8" 13/16" 11/4"
19
C 11/4" 11/4" 11/2" 13/4" 21/4" 21/2" 3" 33/4" 41/2" 51/8" 55/8"
D 17/16" 11/2" 111/16" 2" 27/16" 213/16" 33/16"
E 13/8" 13/8" 11/2" 113/16" 25/32" 27/16" 27/8"
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
229

Liquidtight Fittings - Zinc Die Cast
ZINC DIE CAST LIQUIDTIGHT FITTING Applications:
To terminate and seal liquidtight flexible metal conduit to oiltight, liquidtight, or raintight box or enclosure. Connectors can be used with tapered thread female entry or unthreaded knockout using the provided sealing washer and lock nut.
90 Angle Connectors Non-Insulated

UL File No. E-19189
CP
Features:
Furnished with lock nut and sealing ring Liquidtight/Raintight/Oiltight Suitable for wet locations Cat. # LT3890DC LT5090DC LT7590DC LT10090DC LT12590DC LT15090DC LT20090DC LT25090DC LT30090DC LT35090DC LT40090DC Conduit Size /8" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
3
Unit Qty. 25 25 15 8 5 4 2 1 1 1 1
A .62 .62 .80 1.02 1.36 1.61 2.08 2.51 3.13 3.58 4.06
B .81 .91 1.15 1.38 1.77 2.01 2.58 3.15 3.67 4.17 4.74
C .92 1.02 1.27 1.48 1.93 2.17 2.68 3.21 3.74 4.23 4.75
D 1.22 1.22 1.36 1.73 2.11 2.43 2.93 3.62 4.28 4.84 5.37
Standard Materials:
Zinc Die Cast
Standard Finishes:
Natural
90 Angle Connectors Insulated
Cat. # LT38DC LT50DC LT75DC LT100DC LT125DC LT150DC LT200DC LT250DC LT300DC LT350DC LT400DC
Conduit Size /8" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
3
Unit Qty. 25 25 15 8 5 4 2 1 1 1 1
A 1.07 1.07 1.07 1.34 1.15 1.52 1.54 2.20 2.22 2.36 2.44
B .96 1.08 1.33 1.56 1.94 2.19 2.66 3.28 3.80 4.28 4.78
C .62 .62 .82 1.02 1.36 1.60 2.07 2.51 3.13 3.58 4.05
D .47 .47 .47 .57 .71 .71 .71 1.06 1.06 1.06 1.06
Cat. # LTB3890DC LTB5090DC LTB7590DC LTB10090DC LTB12590DC LTB15090DC LTB20090DC LTB25090DC LTB30090DC LTB35090DC LTB40090DC
Conduit Size /8" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
3
Unit Qty. 25 25 15 8 5 4 2 1 1 1 1
A .62 .62 .80 1.02 1.36 1.61 2.08 2.51 3.13 3.58 4.06
B .81 .91 1.15 1.38 1.77 2.01 2.58 3.15 3.67 4.17 4.74
C .92 1.02 1.27 1.48 1.93 2.17 2.68 3.21 3.74 4.23 4.75
D 1.22 1.22 1.36 1.73 2.11 2.43 2.93 3.62 4.28 4.84 5.37

UL File No. E-19189
Cat. # LTB38DC LTB50DC LTB75DC LTB100DC LTB125DC LTB150DC LTB200DC LTB250DC LTB300DC LTB350DC LTB400DC
Conduit Size /8" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
3
Unit Qty. 25 25 15 8 5 4 2 1 1 1 1
A 1.44 1.44 1.56 2.01 2.18 2.19 2.21 2.89 2.93 3.07 3.15
B .96 1.08 1.33 1.56 1.94 2.19 2.66 3.28 3.80 4.28 4.78
C .62 .62 .82 1.02 1.36 1.60 2.07 2.51 3.13 3.58 4.05
D .47 .47 .47 .57 .71 .71 .71 1.06 1.06 1.06 1.06
230
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Liquidtight Fittings Accessories
SELF RETAINING PVC GASKET WITH STEEL RING
UL File no. E-22133 Cat. # SG1 SG2 SG3 SG4 SG5 SG6 SG7 SG8 SG9 SG10 SG11 SG12 Conduit Size
3 3
WIRE MESH GRIPS FOR LIQUIDTIGHT METALLIC CONDUIT FITTINGS
Unit Qty. 100 50 50 25 25 25 10 10 10 10 5 5
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 1 2 2 2 4 3 5 10 12 10 15 22
/8" 1/2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 5" 6"
CP
Applications:
Wire mesh grips are used with Liquidator liquidtight conduit fittings to prevent conduit pullout due to stress, tension, strain, vibration, or movement. Typical applications include the wiring of machine tools, motors, transformers, food processing, equipment, robotics, or any application that requires a flexible liquidtight conduit connection.
Materials:
Nut - Malleable iron, Ring - Aluminum, Mesh - Stainless steel
COMBINATION COUPLINGS FOR COUPLING LIQUIDTIGHT TO THREADED RIGID/IMC CONDUIT

Cat. # LTR38* LTR50 LTR75 LTR100 LTR125 LTR150 LTR200 Conduit Size /8" /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"
3 1
Wire Mesh Grip Dimensions
Unit Qty. 25 25 25 5 2 2 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 17 29 33 59 105 105 160 Dimensions Cat. # WMG38 WMG50 WMG75 WMG100 WMG125 WMG150 WMG200 Conduit Size /8" /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"
3 1
A 67/ 16" 61/ 8" 615/ 16" 83/ 16" 103/ 4" 1113/ 16" 147/ 16"
B 11/4" 17/16" 15/8" 115/16" 23/8" 23/4" 35/16"
Unit Qty. 10 10 10 10 2 2 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 10 12 17 21 37 56 79
*For 3/8" Liquidtight to 1/2" Rigid/IMC
COMBINATION COUPLINGS FOR COUPLING LIQUIDTIGHT TO THREADED RIGID/IMC GROUNDING TYPE ALUMINUM LUG
Cat. # LTR38G* LTR50G LTR75G LTR100G LTR125G LTR150G LTR200G
Note:
REPLACEMENT LIQUIDTIGHT FERRULES

For Liquidator Liquidtight Fittings Only
Cat. # FEA38 FEA50 FEA75 FEA100 FEA125 FEA150 FEA200 FEA250 FEA300 FEA350 FEA400 Conduit Size /8" /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
3 1
Conduit Lug Size Size /8" /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"
3 1 3
Unit Qty. #14 #14 #14 #14 #14 #14 #14 25 25 25 5 5 2 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 24 30 35 59 81 107 162
#4 #4 #4 #4 #4 #4 #4
Unit Qty. 100 100 100 100 50 50 10 10 10 10 10
*For 3/8" Liquidtight to 1/2" Rigid/IMC For other connector and lug combinations, consult factory. Copper lugs are available also. Consult factory for details.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
231

LiQuik Liquidtight Fittings
LiQuik LIQUIDTIGHT FITTINGS
No disassembly required! The LiQuik liquidtight fittings are quick and easy to install in 2 steps, offering huge labor saving potential. Available in trade sizes 3/8"2" straight, 45 and 90; in insulated or noninsulated. Product features a black gland nut for easy identification and no disassembly required.
LiQuik Liquidtight Fittings Straight, Insulated
CP
Dimensions Cat. # LTQB38 LTQB50 LTQB75 LTQB100 LTQB125 LTQB150 LTQB200 Conduit Size /8" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"
3
KO Size /2" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"

1
Unit Qty. 25 25 25 5 5 2 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 16 18 29 40 56 71 100
A 11/8" 11/4" 11/4" 17/16" 11/2" 15/8" 13/4"
B /16" 9 /16" 9 /16" 11 /16" 3 /4" 13 /16" 13 /16"

9
C 11/8" 11/4" 19/16" 113/16" 21/4" 27/16" 3"
Traditional Assembly Installation
1. Slide nut over conduit.
4. Slide the conduit assembly inside body.
LiQuik Liquidtight Fittings 45, Insulated and Non-Insulated
2. Slide compression ring over conduit.
5. Slide compression nut and ring towards the connector. Cat. # Non-Insulated LTQ5045 LTQ7545 LTQ10045 Insulated LTQB5045 LTQB7545 LTQB10045
Conduit Size
1 3
KO Size
1 3
Unit Qty. 25 10 10 25 10 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 29 41 70 29 33 70
3. Thread ferrule inside the conduit. 6. Tighten the nut.
/2" /4" 1" /2" /4" 1"
/2" /4" 1" /2" /4" 1"
New LiQuik Assembly Installation In Just 2 Steps:
1 3
1 3
LiQuik Liquidtight Fittings 90, Insulated and Non-Insulated

1. Slide conduit inside the fully assembled connector. 2. Turn the connector assembly or the conduit until the ferrule threads engage the spirals in the conduit. The pins in the ferrule are locked inside the holes in the connector body, preventing the ferrule from turning. Tighten the nut against the connector.
Cat. # Non-Insulated LTQ5090 LTQ7590 LTQ10090 Insulated LTQB5090 LTQB7590 LTQB10090
Conduit Size
1 3
KO Size
1 3
Unit Qty. 25 10 10 25 10 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 33 41 76 33 48 76
/2" /4" 1" /2" /4" 1"
/2" /4" 1" /2" /4" 1"
LiQuik Liquidtight Fittings Straight, Non-Insulated
1 3
1 3
Replacement LiQuik Ferrules

Cat. # Dimensions Cat. # LTQ38 LTQ50 LTQ75 LTQ100 LTQ125 LTQ150 LTQ200 Conduit Size /8" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"
3
Conduit Size /8" /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"

3 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 100 100 100 100 50 50 10
KO Size /2" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"

1
Unit Qty. 25 25 25 5 5 2 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 15 18 29 40 55 71 99
A 11/8" 11/4" 11/4" 17/16" 11/2" 15/8" 13/4"
B /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 5 /8" 11 /16" 3 /4" 3 /4"

1
C 11/8" 11/4" 19/16" 113/16" 21/4" 27/16" 3"
LTQF38 LTQF50 LTQF75 LTQF100 LTQF125 LTQF150 LTQF200
232
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

LTK Low Profile Liquidtight Fittings
Low Profile Liquidtight Fittings Applications:
Flexible metalic (liquidtight) conduit used with Cooper CrouseHinds Liquidtight fittings is designed to protect conductors from mechanical damage due to vibration and movement while sealing out cutting oils, coolants, water, dust, etc. Typical applications include the wiring of machine tools, motors, transformers, food processing equipment, robotics, air conditioning units, illuminated signs, etc. The low profile liquidtight fittings are designed specifically for OEM applications that require close side-by-side mounting of multiple liquidtight fittings in tight spaces.
Standard Materials:
Body steel (straight fittings), malleable iron (angle fittings) Gland nut steel Ferrule steel Gland nut sealing ring nylon Sealing gasket polypropylene
Standard Finishes:
Steel zinc electroplate Malleable iron zinc electroplate Nylon natural Polypropylene natural
CP

NEC: Class I, Division 2 (Zone 2) Class II, Division 1 and 2 Class III, Division 1 and 2 UL Standards: 514B, 467 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 18
Replacement Ferrules
Conduit Size /8" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"
3
Cat. # LTKF38 LTKF50 LTKF75 LTKF100 LTKF125 LTKF150 LTKF200
Ordering & Dimensional Information Straight Connectors Steel

Conduit Size
A1 A2
Non-Insulated Cat. No. LTK38 LTK50 LTK75 LTK100 LTK125 LTK150 LTK200
Insulated Cat. No. LTBK38 LTBK50 LTBK75 LTBK100 LTBK125 LTBK150 LTBK200
Over Round Corner A1 13/32" 13/16" 17/16" 13/4" 25/32" 23/8" 27/8"
Hex A2 11/32" 11/8" 13/8" 111/16" 21/16" 29/32" 225/32"
B 13/16" 111/32" 17/16" 15/8" 127/32" 2" 21/8"
N.P.T. Thread Length C /32" /32" 19 /32" 21 /32" 43 /64" 23 /32" 23 /32"
19 19
B C N.P.T. HUB
/8" /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"

3 1
45 Angle Connectors Malleable Iron

A1 A2
Conduit Size
B
Hex A2 11/32" 11/32" 13/8" 111/16" 21/16" 29/32" 225/32"
B 17/32" 15/16" 13/8" 121/32" 123/32" 2" 29/32"
C 11/32" 11/32" 11/8" 11/4" 111/32" 115/32" 15/8"
N.P.T. Thread Length D /32" /32" /32" 21 /32" 11 /16" 23 /32" 23 /32"
19 19 13
D 45 N.P.T. HUB
/8" /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"

3 1
90 Angle Connectors Malleable Iron

A1 A2
Conduit Size /8" /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"

3 1
Hex A2 11/32" 11/8" 13/8" 111/16" 21/16" 29/32" 225/32"
B 119/32" 121/32" 125/32" 23/16" 23/8" 25/8" 31/16"
C 11/4" 11/4" 117/32" 127/32" 115/16" 23/32" 213/32"
N.P.T. Thread Length D /16" /16" /16" 21 /32" 11 /16" 23 /32" 23 /32"
9 9 9
B N.P.T. HUB D C 90
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
233

Space Saver Liquidtight Fittings
SPACE SAVER LIQUIDTIGHT FITTING Features & Benefits:
Liquidtight, Raintight, Oiltight for protection and long life in wet, dusty and corrosive environments Compact, slim diameter for tight space and neat appearance Male threads on the nut maximize space in box or enclosure and provides a smooth pulling surface eliminating the need for a bushing or insulated throat fitting- saving time & money Reusable, long ferrule prevents pull out and tight bend conduit "pop out" Hex shaped gland nut is allows for easy wrenching, providing a fast tight installation Split sealing ring allows sealing ring to be installed after installation of ferrule and is reversible to ensure correct installation. Impossible to install incorrectly! Grooved design on rubber gasket allows for a snug, captive fit ensuring the gasket will not fall off during installation Available with optional aluminum grounding lug for easy ground wire termination
CP
Cat. # SSLT38 SSLT50 SSLT75 SSLT100
Size KO Size Unit Qty Wt. Lbs./100 /8" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1"
3
A 13/8" 13/8" 11/2" 15/8"
B 13/16" 15/16" 19/16" 17/8"
/2" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1"

1
25 25 5
19 21 31 44

Standard Materials:
Body: Malleable Iron Locknut: Steel Gasket: Rubber Lug: Aluminum Cat. # SSLT38G SSLT50G SSLT75G SSLT100G Size KO Size Unit Qty Wt. Lbs./100 A /8" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1"
3
B 13/16" 15/16" 19/16" 17/8"
C /4" /4" 3 /4" 3 /4"

3 3
/2" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1"

1
25 25 5
23 26 36 48
13/8" 13/8" 11/2" 15/8"
Standard Finishes:
Zinc Plated
234
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Non-Metallic Liquidtight Fittings
NON-METALLIC LIQUIDTIGHT CONDUIT FITTINGS Applications:
For use with nonmetallic Type B liquidtight conduit to terminate and seal conduit to liquidtight, oiltight, or raintight box or enclosure. Typical applications include wiring motors, transformers, processing equipment, pumps, etc.
LIQUIDTIGHT
CP
Features:
Liquidtight, Raintight Oiltight Furnished with locknut and sealing ring Suitable for wet locations No-Spin ferrule 90 has smooth interior to prevent abrasion of conductors Molded of Type Nylon 6 Flammability classification 94V-2; temperature index of 125 C No disassembly required No threading of conduit or tubing required to install Corrosion resistant
LT38NM
LT38NMBL
LT3890NM
LT3890NMBL
Standard Materials:
Body Nylon Locknut Steel Unit Qty. Wt. Lbs. Per 100
Cat. # STRAIGHT GRAY LT38NM LT50NM LT75NM LT100NM LT125NM LT150NM LT200NM 90 ANGLE GRAY LT3890NM LT5090NM LT7590NM LT10090NM LT12590NM LT15090NM LT20090NM
Cat. # BLACK LT38NMBL LT50NMBL LT75NMBL LT100NMBL LT125NMBL LT150NMBL LT200NMBL BLACK LT3890NMBL LT5090NMBL LT7590NMBL LT10090NMBL LT12590NMBL LT15090NMBL LT20090NMBL
Trade Size
Certification
1NPT
/8" /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"

3 1
25 25 10 5 5 2 2
cULus cULus cULus cULus cULus cULus cULus
5 5 7 14 20 30 40
2.000" 2.000" 2.200" 2.280" 2.44" 2.700" 2.990"
0.540" 0.540" 0.635" 0.740" 0.76" 0.800" 0.850"
1.400" 1.400" 1.700" 2.000" 2.4" 2.670" 3.280"
/8" /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"

3 1
10 10 10 5 5 2 2
cULus cULus cULus cULus cULus cULus cULus
5 5 10 16 28 40 50
2.120" 2.120" 2.500" 3.125" 4.450" 4.750" 5.420"
0.500" 0.500" 0.520" 0.700" 0.760" 0.800" 0.860"
3.120" 3.120" 3.600" 4.125" 5.200" 5.200" 5.800"
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
235

MULTI-ANGLE CONNECTORS Features:
Swivel design can change from a 0 degree to a 90 degree angle
CP
No disassembly required Eliminate inventory by using the swivel design as a straight or 90 degree connector Unit Qty. 10 10 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 10 15
LT50U90NM
Cat. #
Trade Size
Certification cULus cULus
A Pos 1 = 3.350" / Pos 2 = 3.025" Pos 1 = 4.30" / Pos 2 = 3.850"
B Pos 1 = 2.15" / Pos 2 = 2.395" Pos 1 = 2.65" / Pos 2 = 3.350"
C Pos 1 = .5" / Pos 2 = .5 Pos 1 = .520" / Pos 2 = .520
LT50U90NM 1/2" LT75U90NM 3/4"
SCREW ON CONNECTORS Features:

1 piece design Design allows for excellent liquidtight seal and optimum pull strength without compression nut
1/2 NP T
T ENN I G PAT ND PE
LT50NMSCR Unit Qty. 25 25 10 10 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 5 7 7 9
LT5090NMSCR
Cat. # Trade Size STRAIGHT CONNECTOR 1 /2" LT50NMSCR 3 LT75NMSCR /4" 90 ANGLE CONNECTOR 1 LT5090NMSCR /2" 3 LT7590NMSCR /4"
Certification cULus cULus cULus cULus
A 1.750" 1.800" 1.875" 2.375"
B 0.500" 0.625" 0.500" 0.625"
C 1.250" 1.500" 3.125" 3.500"
LIQUIDTIGHT WHIPS Features:

Available in 1/2" and 3/4" conduit size 4 FT and 6 FT lengths Easy installation Assembled with all UL components Resists corrosion, oil and water 1/2" filled with three #10 AWG THHN copper stranded wire /4" filled with one #10 AWG THHN copper stranded wire and two #8 AWG THHN copper stranded wire
3
LTWHP50NM4 Unit Qty. 24 24 24 12 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 138 188 196 267
Cat. # 4 FOOT LTWHP50NM4 LTWHP75NM4 6 FOOT LTWHP50NM6 LTWHP75NM6
Trade Size
1 3
Certification Listed Components Listed Components Listed Components Listed Components
/2" /4" /2" /4"
1 3
236
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

UL TYPE B FLEXIBLE, NON-METALLIC LIQUIDTIGHT CONDUIT Applications:
For use with nonmetallic liquidtight fittings to terminate and seal conduit to liquidtight, oiltight, or raintight box or enclosure. Typical applications include wiring motors, transformers, processing equipment, pumps, etc.
CP
Features:
Resists abrasion, oil, water, acid and metal shavings Smooth inside for easier wire pulling, no hazardous sharp edges or burrs, will not damage conductors Corrosion resistant for tough environmental conditions Suitable for wet locations Quick installation, cuts with utility knife or PVC cutter 90 has smooth interior to prevent abrasion of conductors
LTCOND38NM100 - GRAY
LTCOND38NMBL100 - BLACK
Standard Materials:
Integral rigid and flexible PVC construction Cat. # Type B 80C Dry 60C Wet 70C - GRAY LTCOND38NM100 LTCOND50NM100 LTCOND75NM100 LTCOND100NM100 LTCOND125NM100 LTCOND150NM50 LTCOND200NM50 LTCOND38NM1200 LTCOND50NM1000 LTCOND75NM800 LTCOND100NM500 Cat. # Type B 105C Dry 60C Wet 70C - BLACK LTCOND38NMBL100 LTCOND50NMBL100 LTCOND75NMBL100 LTCOND100NMBL100 LTCOND125NMBL100 LTCOND150NMBL50 LTCOND200NMBL50 Trade Size Certification Wt. Lbs. Per 100 Ft. Coil / Reel Size O.D. Min - Max I.D. Min - Max
/ 8" / 2" 3 / 4" 1" 11/ 4" 11/ 2" 2" 3 / 8" 1 / 2" 3 / 4" 1"
3 1
UL UL UL UL UL UL UL UL UL UL UL
and and and and and and and and and and and
CSA CSA CSA CSA CSA CSA CSA CSA CSA CSA CSA
13 15 20 27 35 46 66 14 17 22 30
100 FT 100 FT 100 FT 100 FT 100 FT 50 FT 50 FT 1200 FT 1000 FT 800 FT 500 FT
.690 - .710" .820 - .840" 1.030 - 1.050" 1.290 - 1.315" 1.630 - 1.660" 1.865 - 1.900" 2.340 - 2.375" .690 - .710" .820 - .840" 1.030 - 1.050" 1.290 - 1.315"
.484 - .504" .622 - .642" .820 - .840" 1.041 - 1.066" 1.380 - 1.410" 1.575 - 1.600" 2.020 - 2.045" .484 - .504" .622 - .642" .820 - .840" 1.041 - 1.066"
NON-METALLIC LIQUIDTIGHT ELECTRICAL TUBING Features:

Quick installation. Cuts with utility knife or PVC cutter Suitable for use in high vibration or flexing applications Resists corrosion, oil and water Maximum flexibility. Can be used in extremely tight areas Resists abuse, pulling and crushing ET25NM100 Cat. # Trade Size Non-Metallic Electrical Tubing 1 / 4" ET25NM100 3 ET38NM100 / 8" 1 ET50NM100 / 2" 3 ET75NM100 / 4" ET100NM100 1" ET125NM100 11/ 4" ET150NM50 11/ 2" ET200NM50 2" Certification UL UL UL UL UL UL UL UL Wt. Lbs. Per 100 Ft. 8 9 10 14 19 22 28 42 Coil / Reel Size 100 FT 100 FT 100 FT 100 FT 100 FT 100 FT 50 FT 50 FT O.D. Min - Max .560 - .575" .690 - .710" .820 - .840" 1.030 - 1.050" 1.290 - 1.315" 1.630 - 1.660" 1.865 - 1.900" 2.340 - 2.375" I.D. Min - Max .385 - .405" .484 - .504" .622 - .642" .820 - .840" 1.041 - 1.066" 1.380 - 1.410" 1.575 - 1.600" 2.020 - 2.045"
and and and and and and and
CSA CSA CSA CSA CSA CSA CSA
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
237
Cord And Cable Connectors CG Series Color-Coded Cord Grips
Applications:
CG Series color-coded grips with neoprene bushings are for use with portable cords, including S, SO, STO, ST, SJ, SJT, SJTO, and SVO. CG cord grips are installed to: Provide a means for passing a cord into an enclosure Form a watertight seal for cord

UL Standard: 514B UL File No. E-23223 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 18 Suitable for NEMA 4 enclosures and other wet locations Suitable for use in Class I, Div. 2 hazardous locations when installed in accordance with NEC 501.10(B)(2).
CP
Provide pullout protection for cord, ensuring a secure connection
Features:
Neoprene bushings are color coded by cable diameter for quick and easy identification of proper cord grip. Rugged construction protects cord from damage. Compact design permits close spacing of fittings on panel applications. Tightening one nut creates watertight seal. Male tapered thread NPT. Straight cord grips available in steel or aluminum, 45 and 90 cord grips available in malleable iron.
Standard Materials:
Body Straight: 1/2" through 11/2" steel, or 1/2" through 1" aluminum Body 45 1/2" through 1" malleable iron Body 90 1/2" through 1" malleable iron Nut steel or aluminum Bushing neoprene
Standard Finishes:
Body (steel or malleable Iron) electrogalvanized Body (aluminum) natural Nut (steel) electrogalvanized Nut (aluminum) natural
Straight Connector
Steel Cat. # CG50 250 CG50 350 CG50 450 CG50 560 CG50 650 CG75 250 CG75 350 CG75 450 CG75 560 CG75 650 CG75 750 CG75 850 CG100 560 CG100 650 CG100 750 CG100 850 CG100 950 CG100 1050 CG125 850 CG125 950 CG125 1050 CG125 1150 CG125 1250 CG125 1375 CG150 1050 CG150 1150 CG150 1250 CG150 1375 Alum. Cat. # CG50 250SA CG50 350SA CG50 450SA CG50 560SA CG50 650SA CG75 250SA CG75 350SA CG75 450SA CG75 560SA CG75 650SA CG75 750SA CG75 850SA CG100 560SA CG100 650SA CG100 750SA CG100 850SA CG100 950SA CG100 1050SA Trade Size /2" /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 11/4" 11/4" 11/4" 11/4" 11/4" 11/4" 11/2" 11/2" 11/2" 11/2"
1 1
Color Size Red White Blue Green Brown Red White Blue Green Brown Yellow Purple Green Brown Yellow Purple Gray Black Purple Gray Black Orange Red White Black Orange Red White
Cable Range Min. 0.15 0.25 0.35 0.45 0.55 0.15 0.25 0.35 0.45 0.55 0.65 0.75 0.45 0.55 0.65 0.75 0.85 0.95 0.75 0.85 0.95 1.05 1.15 1.25 0.95 1.05 1.15 1.25
Cable Range Max. 0.25 0.35 0.45 0.56 0.65 0.25 0.35 0.45 0.56 0.65 0.75 0.85 0.56 0.65 0.75 0.85 0.95 1.05 0.85 0.95 1.05 1.15 1.25 1.375 1.05 1.15 1.25 1.375
Unit Qty. 25 25 25 25 25 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 2 2 2 2
Wt. Lbs.* Per 100 10 10 10 10 10 14 14 14 14 14 14 14 20 20 20 20 20 20 40 40 40 40 40 40 70 70 70 70
*Wt. Lbs. Per 100 is for steel connectors only
238
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
45 Connector
Steel Cat. # CG5045 250 CG5045 350 CG5045 450 CG5045 560 CG5045 650 CG7545 250 CG7545 350 CG7545 450 CG7545 560 CG7545 650 CG7545 750 CG7545 850 CG10045 560 CG10045 650 CG10045 750 CG10045 850 CG10045 950 CG10045 1050 Trade Size /2" /2" /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 1"
1 1 1
Color Size Red White Blue Green Brown Red White Blue Green Brown Yellow Purple Green Brown Yellow Purple Gray Black
Cable Range Min. 0.15 0.25 0.35 0.45 0.55 0.15 0.25 0.35 0.45 0.55 0.65 0.75 0.45 0.55 0.65 0.75 0.85 0.95
Cable Range Max. 0.25 0.35 0.45 0.56 0.65 0.25 0.35 0.45 0.56 0.65 0.75 0.85 0.56 0.65 0.75 0.85 0.95 1.05
Unit Qty. 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 5 5 5
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 24 24 24 24 24 36 36 36 36 36 36 36 68 68 68 68 68 68
CP
90 Connector
Steel Cat. # CG5090 250 CG5090 350 CG5090 450 CG5090 560 CG5090 650 CG7590 250 CG7590 350 CG7590 450 CG7590 560 CG7590 650 CG7590 750 CG7590 850 CG10090 560 CG10090 650 CG10090 750 CG10090 850 CG10090 950 CG10090 1050 Trade Size /2" /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 1"
1 1
Color Size Red White Blue Green Brown Red White Blue Green Brown Yellow Purple Green Brown Yellow Purple Gray Black
Cable Range Min. 0.15 0.25 0.35 0.45 0.55 0.15 0.25 0.35 0.45 0.55 0.65 0.75 0.45 0.55 0.65 0.75 0.85 0.95
Cable Range Max. 0.25 0.35 0.45 0.56 0.65 0.25 0.35 0.45 0.56 0.65 0.75 0.85 0.56 0.65 0.75 0.85 0.95 1.05
Unit Qty. 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 5 5 5
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 26 26 26 26 26 48 48 48 48 48 48 48 68 68 68 68 68 68
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
239
Cord Grips Dimensional Information
CP
F E
A CABLE RANGES Cat. # CG50 250SA CG50 350SA CG50 450SA CG50 560SA CG50 650SA CG75 250SA CG75 350SA CG75 450SA CG75 560SA CG75 650SA CG75 750SA CG75 850SA CG100 560SA CG100 650SA CG100 750SA CG100 850SA CG100 950SA CG100 1050SA Size /2 /2 1 /2 1 /2 1 /2 3 /4 3 /4 3 /4 3 /4 3 /4 3 /4 3 /4 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1
B MAX. CABLE 0.640 0.640 0.640 0.640 0.640 0.687 0.687 0.687 0.687 0.687 0.845 0.845 0.937 0.937 0.937 0.937 1.050 1.050 MAX. 0.250 0.350 0.450 0.560 0.650 0.250 0.350 0.450 0.560 0.650 0.750 0.850 0.560 0.650 0.750 0.850 0.950 1.050
C CROSS CORNER 1.070 1.070 1.070 1.070 1.070 1.070 1.070 1.070 1.070 1.070 1.330 1.330 1.330 1.330 1.330 1.330 1.625 1.625
D HEX BODY 0.975 0.975 0.975 0.975 0.975 1.220 1.220 1.220 1.220 1.220 1.220 1.220 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500 1.500
E OVERALL LENGTH 15/16 15/16 15/16 15/16 15/16 15/16 15/16 15/16 15/16 15/16 19/16 19/16 13/4 13/4 13/4 13/4 17/8 17/8
F EXPOSED LENGTH 13 /16 13 /16 13 /16 13 /16 13 /16 13 /16 13 /16 13 /16 13 /16 13 /16 11/32 11/32 11/8 11/8 11/8 11/8 13/16 13/16
MIN. 0.150 0.250 0.350 0.450 0.560 0.150 0.250 0.350 0.450 0.560 0.650 0.750 0.450 0.560 0.650 0.750 0.850 0.950
240
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Cord And Cable Connectors

NCG Non-Metallic Cord Grips
NCG SERIES NONMETALLIC CORD GRIPS Applications:
For use with portable cord, NCG Series watertight cord grips terminate and protect conductors from mechanical damage due to vibration and movement. A neoprene bushing seals out oils, coolants, water, dust and other abusive agents. NCG cord grips may be used with types S, SO, STO, SJ, SJT, SJTO and SVO portable cords. Typical applications include the termination of wiring for: Machine tools Motors Transformers Food processing equipment Robotics Air conditioning units Illuminated signs Terminal boxes Control cabinets
Features:
Available in 3/8" to 1" trade sizes. Neoprene bushings cover a large cable range, reducing the number of different fittings required. Polyamide nonmetallic construction stands up to most corrosive environments. Polyamide locknut available, order separately. UL listed and cUL third party certified. Rain-tight and watertight construction for outdoor use. Tightening one nut creates watertight seal.
CP

UL Standard 514B cUL to CSA Standard C22.2 No.18 IP 68 NEMA 4X Watertight Zone 2, Division 2 use per Code
Standard Materials:
Cable gland body and nut polyamide 6 Bushing neoprene Locknut polyamide 6
Cat. # NCG38 35 NCG50 50 NCG75 75 NCG100 100
Trade Size /8" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1"

3
Cable Range Inches (MM) 0.10.35 (2.58) 0.200.50 (512) 0.350.75 (918) 0.551.00 (1425)
Locknuts must be ordered separately

Cat. # 10N 11N 12N 13N Trade Size
3 1 3
Std. Pkg. 25 25 25 20
/8" /2" /4" 1"
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
241

NCGS Non-Metallic Solar Cord Grips
Applications:
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Solar Cord Grips are used in both commercial and residential grid-tied PV solar applications and are designed to accommodate the entry of multiple PV wires coming into a combiner or pass through box. The Solar Cord Grips provide mechanical strain relief as well as a liquid tight seal around the solar panel wires.
CP
Features:
Multi-hole cord grip to allow for entry of multiple PV wires. Solar cord grips offer customer flexibility by allowing the termination from 1 to 13 PV wires in a single connector. Skinned over glands provide a durable, liquid tight seal around the wires. No disassembly required for installation. Accommodates USE-2, 12AWG and 10AWG wire. Temperature rating: -22F (-30C) to 212F (100C) to meet the most demanding environmental conditions. Photo shown with steel locknut (locknuts must be ordered separately)

UL/cUL listed IP68 Flammability rating: 94-V2
Standard Materials:
6/6 nylon with TPE/Buna N sealing glands
Cat. # NCGS39 NCGS413 Trade Size 1" 11/4" Description 9 Hole Solar Cord Grip 13 Hole Solar Cord Grip
Locknut Ordering Information:

Material Steel Aluminum Non-metallic Zinc Cat. No. 13 14 13 SA 14 SA 13N 14N 13DC 14DC Trade Size 1" 11/4" 1" 11/4" 1" 11/4" 1" 11/4"
242
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
AC/MC Fittings
ACB Series
ACB SERIES STEEL Applications:
ACB Series Connectors are used to connect armored cable, metal clad cable or flexible metallic conduit to a box or enclosure.
Straight Connectors

Dual gripping saddle design on the connector safely secures cable or conduit in place and prevents loosening from vibration. Insulated throat provides a smooth pulling surface that won't strip cable. Angled teeth on locknut bite into enclosure, preventing loosening from vibration. Tri-head set screw may be installed using a slotted, Phillips or Robertson head Screwdriver. Steel connector is zinc electroplated for corrosion resistance. Cat. # ACB38* ACB50* ACB75 ACB100 ACB125 ACB150 ACB200 ACB250 ACB300 ACB350 ACB400 Cable Opening Trade Size /8" /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
3 1 3
CP
Dimensions Unit Qty. 50 25 10 5 5 5 1 1 1 1 1 A 1 /16" 13/8" 13/8" 19/16" 23/16" 27/16" 29/16" 211/16" 213/16" 215/16" 3"
3
Max. 0.656 0.937 1.125 1.468 1.500 1.750 2.031 3.062 3.562 4.060 4.560
Min. 0.437 0.750 0.906 1.250 1.312 1.562 1.812 2.812 3.312 3.620 4.120
B 1 /4" 11/4" 17/16" 113/16" 21/8" 21/2" 3" 35/8" 41/4" 33/4" 53/16"
1
C /2" /16" /16" 1 /2" 5 /8" 5 /8" 5 /8" 13 /16" 15 /16" 1" 11/16"
1 7 7

45 Connectors

Body: Steel Zinc electroplated Saddle: Steel Zinc electroplated Screw: Steel Zinc electroplated Insulated throat: Thermoplastic Natural Cable Opening Cat. # ACB3845* ACB5045* ACB7545 Trade Size /8" 1 /2" 3 /4"
3
Dimensions Unit Qty. 50 25 10 A 113/16" 21/8" 23/8" B 113/16" 21/8" 23/8" C

15
Max. 0.656 0.937 1.125
Min. 0.437 0.750 0.906
/16" 11/4" 17/16"
45 not available in 1" size
90 Connectors
Cable Opening Cat. # ACB3890* ACB5090* ACB7590 ACB10090 Trade Size /8" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1"
3
Dimensions Unit Qty. A 13/4" 21/8" 21/2" 213/16" B 21/16" 21/4" 21/2" 27/8" C 1" 11/4" 13/8" 111/16"
Max. 0.656 0.937 1.125 1.468
Min.
0.437 50 0.750 25 0.906 10 1.250 5
*UL approved for use with aluminum interlocking grounding metal clad cable, Type MCIA (Southwire MCAP) MCAP is a registered trademark of Soutwire Company.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
243
AC/MC Fittings
Space Saver ACB Series & Quick-Lok
SPACE SAVER ACB SERIES STEEL Features:
Male threads on locknut allow for more room inside the box Smooth pulling surface eliminates the need for insulated throat fittings and/or conduit bushings Angled teeth on locknut bite into enclosure, preventing loosening from vibration Dual gripping saddle design on the fitting safely secures cable or conduit in place and prevents loosening from vibration Tri-head set screw may be installed using a slotted, Philips, or Robertson head screwdriver Steel fitting is zinc electroplated for corrosion resistance Suitable for use with steel or aluminum cables
QUICK-LOK CONNECTORS STEEL Features:

No Locknut required Single-unit or duplex construction with captive clamp Connects 50 MC, AC, and Flex RW cable sizes with just three fittings Easy to install: tilt, insert and snap down Single unit construction eliminates loose component parts, integral green plastic insulated throat bushing provides maximum protection for wire installation
CP
Standard Materials:
Tubular Steel
Standard Finishes:

Cable Opening Cat. # SSACB38* SSACB50* SSACB75 SSACB100
Dimensions B /4" 11/16" 11/4" 19/16"

3
Cat. # QLK50S*
Trade Size
1
Unit Qty.
Wt. Lbs. Per 100
/2" single
Trade KO Unit Wt. Lbs. Size Size Max. Min. Qty. Per 100 A /8" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1"
3
50 9 For 14 / 4 to 1 0/ 3 3 For /8" FMC 25 11 For 14 / 4 to 10 / 3 25 11.5 For 10 / 3 to 6 / 3 3 1 For /8" and /2" FMC
/2" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1"

1
0.640 0.930 1.125 1.405
0.280 0.635 0.810 0.775
50 25 20 5
9 12 14 30
13/8" 13/8" 11/2" 2"
QLK50D QLK75*
/2" duplex /4"
244
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
AC/MC Fittings
Set Screw, Clamp & Duplex Type - Malleable Iron
SET SCREW TYPE MALLEABLE IRON
UL File No. E-19188
CLAMP TYPE 45 ANGLE MALLEABLE IRON Features:

Male hub treads NPSM
Standard Materials:
Mallable Iron Steel locknut Trade Size
3
CP
Cat. # 702V
Diam. of Opening for Cable

5
Diam. of Bushed Hole

7
Stamped steel covers Unit Qty. 100 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 7
Standard Finishes:
Zinc Plated
/8"
/8"
/16"
For 2 conductor No.'s 14, 12 3 conductor No.'s 14, 12 4 conductor No. 14, 5/16" flex
Clamp Type 45 Angle Non-Insulated

UL File No. E-19188 or E-19189
DUPLEX TYPE MALLEABLE IRON

UL File No. E-19188
Cat. # Straight 699*
Trade Size
3

5

9
Cat. # Unit Qty. 25 25 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 20 14 735 723
Trade Size
3

21

17
Unit Qty. 50
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 14
/8"
/32"
/32"
/8"
/8" /8"
/16" /16"
For 2 conductor No.'s 14, 12, 10 3 conductor No.'s 14, 12, 10 4 conductor No.'s 14, 12 Flexible metallic conduit 5/16" and 3/8"
1
90 Degree 3 700* /8"
/2"
15
/16"
/16"
25
18
*UL Listed as grounding means.
For 2 conductor No. 8 Flexible metallic conduit 1/2"
737
/4"
11/8"
25
/32"
25
24
For 2 conductor No.'s 6, 4 3 conductor No.'s 6, 4 Flexible metallic conduit 3/4"
Clamp Type 45 Angle Insulated

Cat. # 1723 1735 1737
Trade Size /8" /2" 3 /4"

3 1

21 15

17 9
Unit Qty. 50 25 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 14 17 24
/32" /16" 11/8"
25
/32" /16" /32"
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
245
AC/MC Fittings
Set Screw & Duplex Type - Zinc Die Cast Combination Couplings - Steel
SET SCREW TYPE ZINC DIE CAST
UL File No. E-19188

CP

Dual gripping saddle design on the coupling safely secures cable or conduit in place and prevents loosening from vibration BX 38 BX 38R Cable Opening Cat. # BX38 BX38R Trade Size /8" 3 /8"
3
Steel compression ring & nut provide a strong, secure termination point for EMT conduit. Unit Qty. 50 50 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 5 5 Tri-head set screw may be installed using a slotted, Phillips or Robertson head screwdriver. Steel combination coupling is zinc electroplated for corrosion resistance.
Desc. Oval Round
Max. .469 .460
Min. .610 .600

UL File No. E-19188


ACMF ACB38DC Cable Opening Cat. # ACMF38 ACB38DC Trade Size
3 3
AC/MC, FMC to EMT
Min. .469 .468
Max. .610 .610
Unit Qty. 100 50
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 25 35 Cable Opening Cat. # ACC38 ACC50 ACC75 Trade Size /8" /2" 3 /4"
3 1
/8" /8"
DUPLEX TYPE ZINC DIE CAST

UL File No. E-19188
Max. 0.656 0.937 1.125
Min. 0.437 0.750 0.906
Unit Qty. 25 10 10
Set-Screw Coupling:
Trade Size
3
Cat. # 2699*

5

9
Unit Qty. 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 13 Trade Size /8" /2" 3 /4"

3 1
/8"
/8"
/16"
Cat. # ACCSS38* ACCSS50 ACCSS75

*not UL Listed
Unit Qty. 25 10 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 9 12 14
246
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
AC/MC Fittings
Clamps & Bushings
CLAMPS "SNAP-ON" STEEL
Light Gauge
ANTI-SHORT BUSHINGS
CP
Cat. # 566 567BX
Conduit Sizes Rigid

1 3
Unit Qty. 500 100
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 2 14
FMC Trade Cat. # Size ASB 0 5/16" ASB 1 3/8" ASB 2 7/16" ASB 3 1/2" ASB 4 3/4" ASB 5 1"
Armored Cable Size 14 2, 14 3, 12 2 14 4, 12 3, 6 1, 4 1 12 4, 10 2, 10 3, 2 1 10 4, 8 2, 8 3, 1 1 8 4, 6 4, 6 3, 6 2, 4 3, 4 2 3 1, 2 1, 2 1 / 0, 1 300 MCM 1 350 MCM, 1 400 MCM, 1 450 MCM, 1 500 MCM 4 1, 4 1 / 0, 4 2 / 0, 3 1 / 0, 3 2 / 0, 3 3 / 0, 2 2 / 0, 2 3 / 0 2 4 / 0, 1 600 MCM, 1 650 MCM, 1 700 MCM, 1 750 MCM, 1 800 MCM, 1 900 MCM 4 3 / 0, 4 4 / 0, 3 4 / 0, 3 250 MCM, 3 300 MCM, 2 250 MCM, 2 300 MCM, 2 350 MCM, 1 1000 MCM 250 350 450 350 450 400 500 MCM, MCM, MCM, MCM, MCM, MCM, MCM 4 4 4 3 3 2 300 400 500 400 500 450 MCM, MCM, MCM, MCM, MCM, MCM,
Unit Qty. 100 100 50 50 50 25
/4" /8"
ASB 6 11/4"
10
ASB 7 1 /2"
1
10
4 4 4 1 ASB 8 2" to 2 /2" 3 3 2 2
10
Bushings are packed in clear poly bags. Anti-short bushings have a temperature rating of 90C
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
247
Flexible Metallic Conduit Fittings

ACB Series
ACB SERIES STEEL Applications:
ACB Series Connectors are used to connect armored cable, metal clad cable or flexible metallic conduit to a box or enclosure.
Straight Connectors
CP

Dual gripping saddle design on the connector safely secures cable or conduit in place and prevents loosening from vibration. Insulated throat provides a smooth pulling surface that won't strip cable. Angled teeth on locknut bite into enclosure, preventing loosening from vibration. Tri-head set screw may be installed using a slotted, Phillips or Robertson head Screwdriver. Steel connector is zinc electroplated for corrosion resistance. Cat. # ACB38* ACB50* ACB75 ACB100 ACB125 ACB150 ACB200 ACB250 ACB300 ACB350 ACB400 Cable Opening Trade Size /8" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
3
Dimensions Unit Qty. 50 25 10 5 5 5 1 1 1 1 1 A 13/16" 13/8" 13/8" 19/16" 23/16" 27/16" 29/16" 211/16" 213/16" 215/16" 3" B 11/4" 11/4" 17/16" 113/16" 21/8" 21/2" 3" 35/8" 41/4" 33/4" 53/16" C /2" /16" 7 /16" 1 /2" 5 /8" 5 /8" 5 /8" 13 /16" 15 /16" 1" 11/16"
1 7
Max. 0.656 0.937 1.125 1.468 1.500 1.750 2.031 3.062 3.562 4.060 4.560
Min. 0.437 0.750 0.906 1.250 1.312 1.562 1.812 2.812 3.312 3.620 4.120


Body: Steel Zinc electroplated Saddle: Steel Zinc electroplated Screw: Steel Zinc electroplated Insulated throat: Thermoplastic Natural
45 Connectors
Cable Opening Cat. # ACB3845* ACB5045* ACB7545 Trade Size /8" 1 /2" 3 /4"
3
Dimensions Unit Qty. 50 25 10 A 113/16" 21/8" 23/8" B 113/16" 21/8" 23/8" C

15
Max. 0.656 0.937 1.125
Min. 0.437 0.750 0.906
/16" 11/4" 17/16"
45 not available in 1" size
90 Connectors
Cable Opening Cat. # ACB3890* ACB5090* ACB7590 ACB10090 Trade Size /8" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1"
3
Dimensions Unit Qty. A 13/4" 21/8" 21/2" 213/16" B 21/16" 21/4" 21/2" 27/8" C 1" 11/4" 13/8" 111/16"
Max. 0.656 0.937 1.125 1.468
Min.
0.437 50 0.750 25 0.906 10 1.250 5
248
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Space Saver ACB Series & Quick-Lok
SPACE SAVER ACB SERIES STEEL Features:
Male threads on locknut allow for more room inside the box Smooth pulling surface eliminates the need for insulated throat fittings and/or conduit bushings Angled teeth on locknut bite into enclosure, preventing loosening from vibration Dual gripping saddle design on the fitting safely secures cable or conduit in place and prevents loosening from vibration Tri-head set screw may be installed using a slotted, Philips, or Robertson head screwdriver Steel fitting is zinc electroplated for corrosion resistance Suitable for use with steel or aluminum cables
QUICK-LOK CONNECTORS STEEL Features:

No Locknut required Single-unit or duplex construction with captive clamp Connects 50 MC, AC, and Flex RW cable sizes with just three fittings Easy to install: tilt, insert and snap down Single unit construction eliminates loose component parts, integral green plastic insulated throat bushing provides maximum protection for wire installation
CP
Standard Materials:
Tubular Steel
Standard Finishes:

Cable Opening Cat. # SSACB38* SSACB50* SSACB75 SSACB100 Trade KO Unit Size Size Max. Min. Qty. /8" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1"
3
Dimensions Wt. Lbs. Per 100 9 12 14 30 A 13/8" 13/8" 11/2" 2" B /4" 11/16" 11/4" 19/16"
3
Cat. # QLK50S*
Trade Size
1
Unit Qty.
Wt. Lbs. Per 100
/2" single
50 9 For 14 / 4 to 1 0/ 3 For 3/8" FMC 25 11 For 14 / 4 to 10 / 3 25 11.5 For 10 / 3 to 6 / 3 For 3/8" and 1/2" FMC
/2" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1"

1
0.640 0.930 1.125 1.405
0.280 0.635 0.810 0.775
50 25 10 5
QLK50D QLK75*
/2" duplex /4"
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
249

Squeeze Type
SQUEEZE TYPE MALLEABLE IRON Standard Materials:
Malleable Iron Steel Locknut
SQUEEZE TYPE ZINC DIE CAST

Squeeze Type* Straight Non-Insulated
Standard Finishes:
Zinc plated
CP
Squeeze Type* - Non-Insulated

UL File No. E-19189 Cat. # 707DC 708DC 709DC 710DC 711DC 712DC 713DC 714DC 715DC 721DC 722DC Trade Size /8" /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
3 1
Unit Qty. 50 25 25 10 10 5 4 2 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 6 8 11 16 21 28 36 85 109 144 183
Cat. # 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 721 722
Trade Size /8" /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
3 1
Diam. of Opening. for Cable /8" /16" 11/8" 13/8" 121/32" 17/8" 21/2" 27/8" 39/16" 4" 419/32"
5 15
Diam. of Bushed Hole /8" /8" 3 /4" 1" 15/16" 11/2" 2" 23/8" 3" 213/32" 331/32"
3 5
Unit Qty. 100 50 20 20 10 5 2 2 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 7 14 22 31 46 79 101 161 220 470 610
*UL Listed flexible metallic conduit fittings are suitable as grounding means under NEC 350-5 and suitable for hazardous location use per Class I, Division 2, NEC 501-4(b).
Squeeze Type* Straight Insulated

UL File No. E-19188
*UL Listed flexible metallic conduit fittings are suitable as grounding means under NEC 350-5 and suitable for hazardous location use per Class I, Division 2, NEC 501-4(b). Suitable for use with armored cable. Suitable for use with metal clad cable. UL approved for use with aluminum interlocking grounding metal clad cable, Type MCIA (Southwire MCAP) MCAP is a registered trademark of Soutwire Company.
Cat. # 1707DC 1708DC 1709DC 1710DC 1711DC 1712DC 1713DC 1714DC 1715DC 1721DC 1722DC
Trade Size /8" /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
3 1
Unit Qty. 50 25 25 10 10 5 4 2 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 6 8 11 16 21 28 36 85 109 144 183
Straight Insulated*
UL File No. E-19189
Cat. # 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1721 1722
Trade Size / 8" / 2" 3 / 4" 1" 11/ 4" 11/ 2" 2" 21/ 2" 3" 31/ 2" 4"
3 1

5 / 8" 15/ 16" 11/ 8" 13/ 8" 121/ 32" 17/ 8" 21/ 2" 27/ 8" 39/ 16" 4" 419/ 32"
Diam. of Bushed Hole / 8" / 8" 3 / 4" 1" 15/ 16" 11/ 2" 2" 23/ 8" 3" 313/ 32" 331/ 32"
3 5
Unit Qty. 100 50 20 20 10 5 2 2 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 8 14 17 26 42 77 100 160 221 470 610
*UL Listed flexible metallic conduit fittings are suitable as grounding means under NEC 350-5 and suitable for hazardous location use per Class I, Division 2, NEC 501-4(b). Suitable for use with armored cable. Suitable for use with metal clad cable. UL approved for use with aluminum interlocking grounding metal clad cable, Type MCIA (Southwire MCAP) MCAP is a registered trademark of Soutwire Company.
250
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Clamp Type
CLAMP TYPE 45 ANGLE MALLEABLE IRON Features:
Male hub treads NPSM
CLAMP TYPE 90 ANGLE MALLEABLE IRON

Clamp Type* 90 Angle Non-Insulated
Standard Materials:
Mallable Iron Steel locknut Stamped steel covers Diam. of Opening for Cable
21
CP
Standard Finishes:
Zinc Plated Cat. # 724
Trade Size
3

17
Unit Qty. 50
Wt. Lbs. /100 15
/8"
/32"
/32"
Clamp Type 45 Angle Non-Insulated

UL File No. E-19188 or E-19189 736 738 739 740 741 742 744 745 746 747 /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
15 /16" 11/8" 113/32" 121/32" 17/8" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 419/32" 9 13
Cat. # 723*
Trade Size
3

21

17
Unit Qty. 50
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 14
/16" /16" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 115/16" 21/2" 3" 313/32" 331/32"
25 20 5 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
19 31 50 113 188 236 400 600 1150 1460
/8"
/32"
/32"
*UL Listed flexible metallic conduit fittings are suitable as grounding means under NEC 350-5 and suitable for hazardous location use per Class I, Division 2, NEC 501-4(b). Suitable for use with armored cable. UL approved for use with aluminum interlocking grounding metal clad cable, Type MCIA (Southwire MCAP) MCAP is a registered trademark of Soutwire Company.
735
/2"
15
/16"
/16"
25
18
For 2 conductor No. 8 Flexible metallic conduit 1/2"

737
/4"
11/8"
25
/32"
25
24
For 2 conductor No.'s 6, 4 3 conductor No.'s 6, 4 Flexible metallic conduit 3/4"


UL File No. E-19188 or E-19189 Cat. # 1736 1738 1739 1740 1741 1742 1744 1745 1746 1747 Unit Qty. 50 25 25 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 14 17 24
Trade Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Diam. of Opening for Cable /16" 11/8" 113/32" 121/32" 17/8" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 419/32"
15

9 13
Unit Qty. 25 20 5 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. /100 19 31 50 113 188 236 400 600 1150 1460
Cat. # 1723* 1735 1737
Trade Size /8" /2" 3 /4"

3 1

21 15

17 9
/16" /16" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 115/16" 21/2" 3" 313/32" 331/32"
Suitable for use with armored cable.
/32" /16" 11/8"
25
/32" /16" /32"
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
251

Squeeze, Set Screw & Duplex Type
SQUEEZE TYPE ZINC DIE CAST
Squeeze Type* 90 Angle Non-Insulated
UL File No. 19189
SET SCREW TYPE MALLEABLE IRON

UL File No. E-19188
CP
Trade Size /8" /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
3 1
Unit Qty. 50 25 10 5 10 1 1 1 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 8 11 15 25 41 117 119 286 405 560 642
Trade Size Cat. # 702V

3

5

7
Unit Qty. 100
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 7
/8"
/8"
/16"
For 2 conductor No.'s 14, 12 3 conductor No.'s 14, 12 4 conductor No. 14, 5/16" flex
UL approved for use with aluminum interlocking grounding metal clad cable, Type MCIA (Southwire MCAP) MCAP is a registered trademark of Soutwire Company.
DUPLEX TYPE MALLEABLE IRON

UL File No. E-19188
Squeeze Type* 90 Angle Insulated

UL File No. 19189
Trade Size /8" /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
3 1 3
Unit Qty. 50 25 10 5 10 1 1 1 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 8 11 15 25 41 117 119 286 405 560 642
Cat. # Straight 699* 3/8" 90 Degree 700* 3/8"
Trade Size

5

9
Unit Qty. 25 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 20 14
/8" /8"
/16" /16"
*UL Listed as grounding means. UL approved for use with aluminum interlocking grounding metal clad cable, Type MCIA (Southwire MCAP) MCAP is a registered trademark of Soutwire Company.
252
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Set Screw, Duplex & Screw-In Type - Zinc Die Cast
UL File No. E-19188
SET SCREW FLEX CONNECTOR ZINC DIE CAST

Angled Set Screw
UL File No. E-19189
CP
Cable Opening Cat. # BX38R Trade Size

3
Desc. Round
Min. .460
Max. .600
Unit Qty. 50
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 5
Cat. # 702DC 703DC
Trade Size
1 3
Unit Qty. 25 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 23 35
/8"
/2" /4"

UL File No. E-19188
SCREW-IN TYPE ZINC DIE CAST

UL File No. E-19189
Cable Opening Cat. # ACB38DC Trade Size

3
Cat. # Unit Qty. 50 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 35 770DC 771DC 772DC 773DC 774DC 775DC 776DC
Trade Size /8" /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"

3 1 3
Unit Qty. 80 60 35 15 10 6 3
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 5 5 9 13 24 35 52
Min. .465
Max. .610
/8"

UL File No. E-19188
Couplings
UL File No. 19189
Cat. # 2699*
Trade Size
3

5

9
Unit Qty. 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 13 Cat. # 791DC 792DC 793DC 794DC 795DC 796DC
/8"
/8"
/16"
Trade Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"

1 3
Unit Qty. 40 25 15 10 6 3
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 4 8 12 21 31 44
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
253

Combination Couplings
COMBINATION COUPLINGS ZINC DIE CAST

EMT (Set Screw) to Flexible Steel (Clamp)*
UL File No. E-19189
CP
Features:
Dual gripping saddle design on the coupling safely secures cable or conduit in place and prevents loosening from vibration Steel compression ring & nut provide a strong, secure termination point for EMT conduit. Tri-head set screw may be installed using a slotted, Phillips or Robertson head screwdriver. Steel combination coupling is zinc electroplated for corrosion resistance. Cat. # 780DC Trade Size
1
Unit Qty. 50
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 8
/2" to 3/8"

SET SCREW SQUEEZE TYPE COMBINATION COUPLINGS ZINC DIE CAST

Set Screw Squeeze Type
UL File No. E-19189

Cat. # Cable Opening Cat. # ACC38 ACC50 ACC75 Trade Size

3 1 3
Trade Size /2" to 3/8" /2" to 1/2" 3 /4" to 3/4"

1 1
Unit Qty. 50 25 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 34 22 36
Max. 0.656 0.937 1.125
Min. 0.437 0.750 0.906
Unit Qty. 25 10 10
FECS38DC FECS50DC FECS75DC
/8" /2" /4"
SCREW-IN TYPE COMPRESSION COMBINATION COUPLINGS ZINC DIE CAST

UL File No. E-19189
Set-Screw Coupling:
Cat. # ACCSS38* ACCSS50 ACCSS75

*not UL Listed
Trade Size /8" 1 /2" 3 /4"

3
Unit Qty. 25 10 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 9 12 14 Cat. # FECC50DC FECC75DC FECC100DC
Trade Size /2" /4" 1"

1 3
Unit Qty. 50 25 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 41 31 46
254
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Clamps & Anti-Short Bushings
CLAMPS "SNAP-ON" STEEL
Light Gauge
ANTI-SHORT BUSHINGS
CP
Cat. # 566 567BX
Conduit Sizes Rigid /4" 3 /8"

1
Unit Qty. 500 100
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 2 14
FMC Trade Cat. # Size ASB 0 5/16" ASB 1 3/8" ASB 2 7/16" ASB 3 1/2" ASB 4 /4"
3
Armoured Cable Size 14 2, 14 3, 12 2 14 4, 12 3, 6 1, 4 1 12 4, 10 2, 10 3, 2 1 10 4, 8 2, 8 3, 1 1 8 4, 6 4, 6 3, 6 2, 4 3, 4 2 3 1, 2 1, 2 1 / 0, 1 300 MCM 1 350 MCM, 1 400 MCM, 1 450 MCM, 1 500 MCM 4 1, 4 1 / 0, 4 2 / 0, 3 1 / 0, 3 2 / 0, 3 3 / 0, 2 2 / 0, 2 3 / 0 2 4 / 0, 1 600 MCM, 1 650 MCM, 1 700 MCM, 1 750 MCM, 1 800 MCM, 1 900 MCM 4 3 / 0, 4 4 / 0, 3 4 / 0, 3 250 MCM, 3 300 MCM, 2 250 MCM, 2 300 MCM, 2 350 MCM, 1 1000 MCM 250 350 450 350 450 400 500 MCM, MCM, MCM, MCM, MCM, MCM, MCM 4 4 4 3 3 2 300 400 500 400 500 450 MCM, MCM, MCM, MCM, MCM, MCM,
Unit Qty. 100 100 50 50 50 25
ASB 5 1"
ASB 6 11/4"
10
ASB 7 11/2"
10
4 4 4 ASB 8 2" to 21/2" 3 3 2 2

Note:
10
Bushings are packed in clear poly bags. Anti-short bushings have a temperature rating of 90C
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
255
Non-Metallic Sheathed Cable Connectors

Clamp, Set Screw & Duplex Type
CLAMP TYPE STEEL
UL File No. E-22132
SET SCREW TYPE - ZINC DIE CAST

UL File No. E-19188
CP
Clamp Opening Cat. # 631 K.O. Size

3
Min.
33
Max.
13
Width
13
Unit Qty. 20
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 14 Cat. # 21 ACB38DC Trade Size

3
/4"
/64"
/16"
/16"
For 2 conductor No.'s 8, 6 3 conductor No.'s 8, 6
Unit Qty. 50
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 35
632
1"
/8"
11/64"
11/64"
10
/8"

UL File No. E-19188
CLAMP TYPE ZINC DIE CAST

Cat. # 2699* Cat. # 759DC Trade Size

3
Trade Size
3

5

9
Unit Qty. 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 13
/8"
/8"
/16"
K.O. Size
1
Unit Qty. 100
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 4
/8"
/2"
For 2 conductor No.'s 14, 12, 10 3 conductor No.'s 14, 12
2631 2632 2633 2670 2671
/4"
/4"
50 25 10 5 10
9 12 22 25 40
For 3 conductor No.'s 8, 6
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"
1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"
For 3 conductor No.'s 6, 4 For 3 conductor No.'s 3, 2 For 3 conductor No. 2 / 0 For 3 conductor No. 4 / 0
256
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Service Entrance and Grounding Fittings

Service Entrance Elbows & Connectors
SERVICE ENTRANCE ELBOWS ALUMINUM
Gasketed UL File No. E-19189
SERVICE ENTRANCE CABLE CONNECTORS ZINC DIE CAST

Non-watertight for Oval Cable UL File No. E-10438
CP
Cat. # SLB1 SLB2 SLB3 SLB4 SLB5 SLB6
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"

1 3
Unit Qty. 10 10 5 2 1 1
Std. Pkg. 50 50 25 10 5 5
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 25 30 51 83 117 192
Clamp Opening Cat. # 2631 2632 2633 2670 2671 K.O. Size
3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"
Min. .300" .350" .335" .350" .700"
Max. .075" .920" .960" 1.00" 1.30"
Width .075" .920" .960" 1.00" 1.30"
Unit Qty. 50 25 10 5 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 9 12 22 25 40
SERVICE ENTRANCE CABLE CONNECTORS MALLEABLE IRON

Non-watertight for Oval Cable UL File No. E-22134
SERVICE ENTRANCE CABLE WATERTIGHT CONNECTORS ZINC DIE CAST

UL File No. E-22134
Applications:
Service Entrance Cable Watertight connectors are used for sealing and terminating Oval Type SE or USE cable to a threaded entry of a watertight box or enclosure Wt. Lbs. Per 100 14 Cat. # WTC50U WTC75U WTC1004 WTC1006 WTC1008 WTC1251 WTC1252 WTC1253 WTC1501 WTC1502 WTC2001 WTC2002 WTC2003 WTC2004 WTC2004A Size Description /2" /4" 1" 1" 1" 11/4" 11/4" 11/4" 11/2" 11/2" 2" 2" 2" 2" 2"
1 3
Clamp Opening Width Cat. # 631 K.O. Size

3
Min.
33
Max.
13
/4"
/64"
/16"
Unit Qty. 25 25 10 10 10 10 5 5 5 5 5 10 5 5 5
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 24 38 21 21 22 38 38 39 57 57 88 93 87 85 84
632
1"
/8"
11/64"
21
USE Watertight Connector 12/2 USE Watertight Connector 12/3 Watertight Connector 3#4 Watertight Connector 3#6 Watertight Connector 3#8 Watertight Connector 3#1 Watertight Connector 3#2 Watertight Connector 3#3 Watertight Connector 3#1/0 Watertight Connector 3#2/0 Watertight Connector 3#1/0 Watertight Connector 3#2/0 Watertight Connector 3#3/0 Watertight Connector 3#4/0 Watertight Connector 3#4/0
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
257
Service Entrance and Grounding Fittings

Straps, Clamps & Service Entrance Caps
PERFORATED STRAP STEEL
10 Foot Coils
SERVICE ENTRANCE CAPS Applications:

Use in overhead service entrance Mounts on top of EMT, Rigid or IMC conduit Serves as a connecting point for service entrance wires Available in Clamp Type, Set-Screw, Threaded and Mast Type styles UL File No. E-153721
Cat. # 3000
Description
3 1
Unit Qty. 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 10
CP
/4 x .035 Galvanized /4" holes 1/2" to 1" Centers
GROUND CLAMP ZINC DIE CAST

For Bare or Insulated Wire or Armored Grounding Cable
Cat. # Clamp Type EHC1 EHC2 EHC3 EHC4 EHC5 EHC6 EHC7 EHC8 EHC9 EHC10 Unit Qty. 25 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 16 Threaded Type EHT1 EHT2 EHT3 EHT4 EHT5 EHT6 EHT7 EHT8 EHT9 EHT10 Set Screw Type EHSS1 EHSS2 EHSS3 EHSS4 EHSS5 EHSS6 EHSS7 EHSS8 EHSS9 EHSS10 Lug Conductor Range #8 #2 Mast Type EHMT1 EHMT2 EHMT3 EHMT4 Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 15 10 7 5 3 8 3 3 2 2 15 10 7 5 3 8 3 3 2 2 15 10 7 5 3 8 3 3 2 2 2 1 2 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 11 21 27 32 53 89 300 322 513 519 19 24 24 28 51 81 272 298 538 541 15 18 24 28 58 86 308 308 517 517 45 75 73 75
Cat. # 141DC
Grounding Conductor Electrode Clamping Range

1
Lug Conductor Range #8 #2
/2", 3/4", 1"
GROUND CLAMP BRONZE PLATED

For Bare or Insulated Wire or Armored Grounding Cable
/2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Cat. # 141PDC
Grounding Conductor Electrode Clamping Range

1
/2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 16
/2", 3/4", 1"
11/4" 2" 11/4" 2" 11/2" 21/2" 2" 21/2"
258
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Cable Fittings Reference Chart
Cat. # 631 632 699
AC
MC
FMC
NM
SE
FLEX to EMT
AC/ FLEX to EMT
Cable Ranges For 2 conductor No.'s 8, 6 3 conductor No.'s 8, 6 For 2 conductor No.'s 8, 6 3 conductor No.'s 8, 6
Armored Cables Steel & Aluminum
Metal Clad Cables Steel & Aluminum
Conduit Cable Type
CP
AC 0.470min / 12/4max FE & AL MCI 0.470min / 0.500max FE
14/2, 14/3, 14/4, 12/2, 12/3,12/4 .470/.560 12/4
ST: 14/2, 14/3, 14/4, 12/2, .470/.500
FE RWFMC
700 707 708 709 710 711 712 713 714 715 721 722 723
AC 0.560, MCI 0.500 FE & AL MCI 0.870 AL AL: 14/4 ST: 12/3 AL: 6/3 FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC AC 0.470min / 12/4max FE & AL MCI 0.470min / 0.640max FE MCI 0.500min / 0.630max AL 14/2, 14/3, 14/4, 12/2, 12/3, 12/4, .470/.550 AL: 14/4, 12/2, 12/3, 12/4, 10/2, 10/3, 10/4, 8/2, .500/.630 ST: 14/2, 14/3, 14/4, 12/2, 12/3, 12/4, 10/2, 10/3, 10/4, 8/2, .470/.630 AL: 14/4, 12/2, 12/3, 12/4, 10/2, 10/3, 10/4, 8/2, .500/.630 ST: 12/3, 12/4, 10/2, 10/3, 10/4, 8/2, .500/.630 FE RWFMC
724
AC 0.460min / 12/4max FE & AL MCI 0.500min / 0.630max FE MCI 0.500min / 0.640max AL
14/2, 14/3, 14/4, 12/2, 12/3, 12/4, .460/.550
FE RWFMC
735 736 737 738
AC 0.990 FE & AL MCI 0.950min /1.020max FE & AL AC 0.920min / 4/3max FE & AL MCI 0.840 FE MCI 0.880min / 1.030max AL 4/3 6/4, 4/3, .920/1.100 6/4, 4/3 .950/1.020 AL: 6/3, 6/4, 4/3, .880/1.030 ST: 6/3
FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC
739 740 741 742 744 745 746 747
FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC
AC = Armored Cable MCI = Metal/Clad Interlocked FE RWFMC = Steel Reduced/Wall Flexible Metallic Conduit FE = Steel AL = Aluminum FEFMC = Steel Flexible Metallic Conduit
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
259
Cat. # 1707 1708 1709 1710 1711 1712 1713 1714 1715 1721 1722 1723
AC
MC
FMC
NM
SE
FLEX to EMT
AC/ FLEX to EMT
Cable Ranges AC 0.560, MCI 0.500 FE & AL MCI 0.870 AL
Metal Clad Cables Steel & Aluminum AL: 6/3
Conduit Cable Type FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC
CP
AC 0.470min / 12/4max FE & AL MCI 0.470mon / 0.640max FE MCI 0.500min / 0.630max AL
14/2, 14/3, 14/4, 12/2, 12/3, 12/4, .470/.550
AL: 14/4, 12/2, 12/3, 12/4, 10/2, 10/3, 10/4, 8/2, .500/.630 ST: 14/2, 14/3, 14/4, 12/2, 12/3, 12/4, 10/2, 10/3, 10/4, 8/2, .470/.630
FE RWFMC
1735 1736 1737 1738
AC 0.990 FE & AL MCI 0.950min /1.020max FE & AL AC 0.920min / 4/3max FE & AL MCI 0.840 FE MCI 0.880min / 1.030max AL 4/3 6/4, 4/3, .920/1.100 6/4, 4/3, .950/1.020 AL: 6/3, 6/4, 4/3, .880/1.030 ST: 6/3
FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC
1739 1740 1741 1742 1744 1745 1746 1747 2631 2632 2633 2670 2671 2699 1707DC 1708DC 1709DC 1710DC 1711DC 1712DC 1713DC 1714DC 1715DC 1721DC 1722DC 1724DC 1736DC 1738DC
For 3 conductor No.'s 8, 6 For 3 conductor No.'s 6, 4 For 3 conductor No.'s 3, 2 For 3 conductor No. 2/0 For 3 conductor No. 4/0
FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC FE RWFMC
260
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Cat. # 1739DC 1740DC 1741DC 1742DC 1744DC 1745DC 1746DC 1747DC 702V 707DC 708DC 709DC 710DC 711DC 712DC 713DC 714DC 715DC 721DC 722DC 724DC 736DC 738DC 739DC 740DC 741DC 742DC 744DC 745DC 746DC 747DC 759DC 770DC 771DC 772DC 773DC 774DC 775DC 776DC 780DC 791DC 792DC 793DC 794DC 795DC 796DC
AC
MC
FMC
NM
SE
FLEX to EMT
AC/ FLEX to EMT
Cable Ranges
Metal Clad Cables Steel & Aluminum
Conduit Cable Type
CP
For 2 conductor No.s 14, 12, 10 3 conductor No.'s 14, 12
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
261
Cat. # ACB100
AC
MC
FMC
NM
SE
FLEX to EMT
AC/ FLEX to EMT
Cable Ranges AC 0.930min / 1/4max FE & AL MCI 0.960min / 1.468max FE & AL
Armored Cables Steel & Aluminum 6/4, 4/3, 4/4, 3/2, 3/3, 2/3, 2/4, 1/3, 1/4, .930/1.468
Metal Clad Cables Steel & Aluminum 6/4, 4/3, 4/4, 3/3, 3/4, .960/1.468
Conduit Cable Type FEFMC
CP
ACB125 ACB150 ACB200 ACB250 ACB300 ACB350 ACB38
AC 0.450min / 10/2max FE & AL MCI 0.450min / 0.660max FE & AL 14/2, 14/3, 14/4, 12/2, 12/3, 12/4, 10/2, .450/.660 14/2, 14/3, 14/4, 12/2, 12/3, 12/4, 10/2, .450/.660
FEFMC FEFMC FEFMC FEFMC FEFMC FEFMC FEFMC
ACB400 ACB50
AC 0.550min / 6/3max FE & AL MCI 0.640min / 0.920max FE & AL 12/4, 10/2, 10/3, 10/4, 8/2, 8/3, 8/4, 6/2, 6/3, .550/.920 AL: 8/3, 8/4, 6/2, 6/3, 6/4, 4/2, 4/3, .680/1.075 ST: 6/4, 4/2, 4/3, .930/1.075 10/2, 10/3, 10/4, 8/2, 8/3, .640/.920 FEFMC
ACB75
AC 0.930min / 4/3max FE AC 0.680min / 4/3max AL MCI 0.730min / 1.075max FE MCI 0.930min / 1.075max AL
AL: 6/4, 4/3, 3/3, .930/1.075 ST: 8/3, 8/4, 6/2, 6/3, 6/4, 4/3, 3/3, .730/1.075
FEFMC
ACC38 ACC50 ACC75 ACCSS38 ACCSS50 ACCSS75 ASB 0 ASB 1 ASB 2 ASB 3 ASB 4 ASB 5
14/2, 14/3, 12/2 14/4, 12/3, 6/1, 4/1 12/2, 10/2, 10/3, 2/1 10/4, 8/2, 8/3, 1/1 8/4, 6/4, 6/3, 6/2, 4/3, 4/2 3/1, 2/1, 2-1/0, 1-300 MCM, 1-350 MCM, 1-400 MCM, 1-450 MCM, 1-500 MCM 4/1, 4-1/0, 4-2/0, 3-1/0, 3-2/0, 3-3/0, 2-2/0, 2-3/0, 2-4/0, 1-600 MCM, 1-650 MCM, 1-700 MCM, 1-750 MCM, 1-800 MCM, 1-900 MCM, 4-3/0, 4-4/0, 3-4/0, 3-250 MCM, 3-300 MCM, 2-250MCM, 2-300 MCM, 2-350 MCM, 1-1000 MCM 4-250 4-400 3-350 3-500 2-500 MCM, MCM, MCM, MCM, MCM 4-300 4-450 3-400 2-400 MCM, MCM, MCM, MCM, 4-350 4-500 3-450 2-450 MCM, MCM, MCM, MCM,
ASB 6
ASB 7
ASB 8
262
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Cat. # QLK50D
AC
MC
FMC
NM
SE
FLEX to EMT
AC/ FLEX to EMT
Cable Ranges
Armored Cables Steel & Aluminum 14/2, 14/3, 14/4, 12/2, 12/3, 12/4 14/2, 14/3, 14/4, 12/2, 12/3, 12/4, 10/2, 10/3 10/4, 10/5, 8/3, 8/4, 6/3
Metal Clad Cables Steel & Aluminum 14/2, 14/3, 14/4, 12/2, 12/3, 12/4, 10/2 14/2, 14/3, 14/4, 12/2, 12/3, 12/4, 10/2 10/3, 10/4, 8/2, 8/3, 6/2, .450/.660 .640/3920
Conduit Cable Type
QLK50S
CP
QLK75 SSACB38 SSACB50
AC 0.450min / 10/2max FE & AL MCI 0.450min / 0.660max FE & AL AC 0.550min / 6/3max FE & AL MCI 0.640min / 0920max FE & AL AC 0.930min / 4/3max FE AC 0.680min / 4/3max AL MCI 0.730min / 1.075max FE MCI 0.930min / 1.075max AL AC 0.930min / 1/4max FE & AL MCI 0.960min / 1.468max FE & AL AC 0.450min / 10/2max FE & AL MCI 0.450min / 0.660max FE & AL AC 0.550min / 6/3max FE & AL MCI 0.640min / 0.920max FE & AL AC 0.930min / 4/3max FE AC 0.680min / 4/3max AL MCI 0.730min / 1.075max FE MCI 0.930min / 1.075max AL AC 0.450min / 10/2max FE & AL MCI 0.450min / 0.660max FE & AL AC 0.550min / 6/3max FE & AL MCI 0.640min / 0.920max FE & AL AC 0.930min / 4/3max FE AC 0.680min / 4/3max AL MCI 0.730min / 1.075max FE MCI 0.930min / 1.075max AL AC 0.930min / 1/4max FE & AL MCI 0.960min / 1.468max FE & AL
14/2, 14/3, 14/4, 12/2, 12/3, 12/4, 10/2, .450/.660 12/4, 10/2, 10/3, 10/4, 8/2, 8/3, 8/4, 6/2, 6/3, .550/.920 8/3, 8/4, 6/2, 6/3, 6/4, 4/2, 4/3, .930/1.075 6/4, 4/3, 4/4, 3/3, 3/4, 2/3, 2/4, 1/3, 1/4, .930/1.468 14/2, 14/3, 14/4, 12/2, 12/3, 12/4, 10/2, .450/.660 12/4, 10/2, 10/3, 10/4, 8/2, 8/3, 8/4, 6/2, 6/3, .550/.920 AL: 8/3, 8/4, 6/2, 6/3, 6/4, 4/2, 4/3, .680/1.075 ST: 6/4, 4/2, 4/3, .930/1.075 14/2, 14/3, 14/4, 12/2, 12/3, 12/4, 10/2, .450/.660 12/4, 10/2, 10/3, 10/4, 8/2, 8/3, 8/4, 6/2, 6/3, .550/.920 AL: 8/3, 8/4, 6/2, 6/3, 6/4, 4/2, 4/3, .680/1.075 ST: 6/4, 4/2, 4/3, .930/1.075 6/4, 4/3, 4/4, 3/2, 3/3, 2/3, 2/4, 1/3, 1/4, .930/1.468 14/2 10/4
FEFMC FEFMC
SSACB75
AL: .930/1.075 ST: .730/1.075
FEFMC
SSACB100
.960/1.468
FEFMC
ACB3845
14/2, 14/3, 14/4, 12/2, 12/3, 12/4, 10/2, .450/.660 10/2, 10/3, 10/4, 8/2, 8/3, .640/.920 AL: 6/4, 4/3, 3/3, .930/1.075 ST: 8/3, 8/4, 6/2, 6/3, 6/4, 4/3, 3/3, .730/1.075 14/2, 14/3, 14/4, 12/2, 12/3, 12/4, 10/2, .450/.660 10/2, 10/3, 10/4, 8/2, 8/3, .640/.920 AL: 6/4, 4/3, 3/3, .930/1.075 ST: 8/3, 8/4, 6/2, 6/3, 6/4, 4/3, 3/3, .730/1.075 6/4, 4/3, 4/4, 3/3, 3/4, .960/1.468 14/2 10/2
FEFMC
ACB5045
FEFMC
ACB7545
FEFMC
ACB3890
FEFMC
ACB5090
FEFMC
ACB7590
FEFMC
ACB10090
FEFMC
BX38 BX38R FECC50DC FECC75DC FECC100DC FECS38DC FECS75DC 702DC 703DC ACMF38
FEFMC FEFMC
14-2 through 10-2 FE or AL 14-2 OD .470 through 10-3 OD .610 14-2 OD .469 though 10-3 OD.600 MCI 14-2 OD .465 through 10-3 OD .500 FE 14-2 OD .480 through 10-3 OD .585 AL 0.475 through 0.600 MCI 0.468 through 0.610 ALMCI For 12/2 through 10/3 Oval NMSE Cable 14/2, 10/3 14/2, 10/3
FE RWFMC
ACB38DC
FEFMC
567BX
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
263
PVC Fittings
Adapters
Applications:
PVC Fittings are installed in PVC conduit systems and provide the ability to: Connect or make bends in two lengths of PVC conduit Terminate PVC conduit into a box or enclosure Provide openings for making splices and taps in PVC conduit systems Schedule 40 and 80: Female Adapters, Male Adapters, Couplings, Pull Elbows, Meter Offsets, Reducers, End Bells, Caps, Service Entrance Heads, Straps, FS and FD Boxes, Conduit Outlet Bodies Schedule 40 only: Standard Radius Elbows, Special Radius Elbows

UL Listed CSA Listed - See product for specific details regarding CSA listing (there are a few exceptions) UL Flame Rated to UL 94V-0
CP
FEMALE ADAPTERS
FA50NM
Cat. # FA50NM FA75NM FA100NM FA125NM FA150NM FA200NM FA250NM FA300NM FA350NM FA400NM FA500NM FA600NM
Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 5" 6"
1
Unit Qty. 200 125 70 40 30 40 20 40 30 20 10 8
Std. Pkg. 200 125 70 40 30 40 20 40 30 20 10 8
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 3 4 8 11 14 17 35 52 59 74 120 178
W 1" 11/4" 19/16" 2" 21/4" 211/16" 35/16" 4" 41/2" 5" 61/8" 71/4"
L 17/16" 15/8" 1- 7/8" 115/16" 21/8" 21/8" 3" 31/16" 3" 31/4" 311/16" 43/8"
D /16" /16" 7 /8" 15 /16" 15 /16" 15 /16" 15/16" 11/4" 13/16" 13/8" 15/16" 15/8"
11 11
MALE ADAPTERS
MA50NM
/2" thru 11/2"
2" and larger
Cat. # MA50NM MA75NM MA100NM MA125NM MA150NM MA200NM MA250NM MA300NM MA350NM MA400NM MA500NM MA600NM 264
Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 5" 6"
1
Unit Qty. 200 125 70 40 30 40 20 40 30 20 10 8

US: 1-866-764-5454
Std. Pkg. 200 125 70 40 30 40 20 40 30 20 10 8
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 3 5 7 10 13 15 34 45 60 75 160 163
W 11/16" 11/4" 15/8" 2" 2" 211/16" 35/16" 315/16" 41/2" 5" 61/4" 75/16"
L 111/16" 13/4" 23/16" 21/8" 21/16" 23/16" 27/8" 3" 33/16" 37/16" 43/4" 415/16"
D 11/8" 13/16" 11/2" 15/16" 15/16" 13/8" 2" 23/16" 29/16" 29/16" 3" 211/16"
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
PVC Fittings
Couplings, Pull Elbows and Offsets
COUPLINGS
CP
CP50NM
Cat. # CP50NM CP75NM CP100NM CP125NM CP150NM CP200NM CP250NM CP300NM CP350NM CP400NM CP500NM CP600NM
Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 5" 6"
1
Unit Qty. 200 125 70 40 30 40 20 40 30 20 10 8
Std. Pkg. 200 125 70 40 30 40 20 40 30 20 10 8
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 3 4 8 12 14 19 38 61 71 87 150 228
W 11/16" 15/16" 15/8" 2" 21/4" 211/16" 31/4" 4" 41/8" 5" 51/8" 71/4"
L 11/2" 19/16" 2" 21/8" 23/8" 27/16" 31/2" 37/8" 4" 43/16" 53/8" 63/8"
ID /8" 11/16" 15/16" 111/16" 115/16" 23/8" 27/8" 31/2" 4" 41/2" 55/8" 65/8"
7
D /8" /8" 1" 1" 11/8" 11/4" 13/4" 113/16" 115/16" 2" 21/2" 3"
5 5
PULL ELBOWS
PE50
Cat. # PE50 PE75
Trade Size /2" 3 /4"

1
Unit Qty. 75 50
Std. Pkg. 75 50
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 9 12
A 21/8" 21/2"
B 25/8" 3"
C 11/2" 15/8"
D /8" 11/16"
7
E 11/8" 15/16"
METER OFFSETS
4
303PVC
Cat. # 303PVC 305PVC
Trade Size 11/4" 2"
Unit Qty. 15 8
Std. Pkg. 15 8
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 19 28
Thread Size 11/4" 2"
ID 15/8" 23/8"
ID-2 13/8" 2"
OD 2" 23/16"
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
265
PVC Fittings
Elbows
90 DEGREE ELBOW
CP
EL5090STDNM
Cat. # EL5090STDNM EL7590STDNM EL10090STDNM EL12590STDNM EL15090STDNM EL20090STDNM EL25090STDNM EL30090STDNM EL35090STDNM EL40090STDNM EL50090STDNM EL60090STDNM
Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 5" 6"
1
Unit Qty. 50 35 20 30 30 15 18 14 12 10 30 25
Std. Pkg. 50 35 20 30 30 15 18 14 12 10 30 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 16 26 45 68 97 143 239 393 500 740 1876 1256
R 4" 41/2" 53/4" 71/4" 81/4" 91/2" 101/2" 13" 15" 16" 24" 30"
O 4" 41/2" 53/4" 71/2" 81/4" 91/2" 101/2" 13" 15" 16" 24" 30"
H 4" 41/2" 53/4" 71/4" 81/4" 91/2" 101/2" 13" 15" 16" 24" 30"
S MIN 11/2" 11/2" 17/8" 2" 2" 2" 3" 31/8" 31/4" 33/8" 35/8" 33/4"
L 61/4" 71/8" 9" 113/8" 13" 15" 161/2" 203/8" 231/2" 251/8" 375/8" 471/8"
45 DEGREE ELBOW
EL5045STDNM
Cat. # EL5045STDNM EL7545STDNM EL10045STDNM EL12545STDNM EL15045STDNM EL20045STDNM EL25045STDNM EL30045STDNM EL35045STDNM EL40045STDNM EL50045STDNM EL60045STDNM
Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 5" 6"
1
Unit Qty. 50 25 20 25 20 10 20 8 5 20 30 25
Std. Pkg. 50 25 20 25 20 10 20 8 5 20 30 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 10 18 28 44 49 98 161 248 340 445 688 1040
R 4" 41/2" 53/4" 71/4" 81/4" 91/2" 101/2" 13" 15" 16" 24" 30"
O 13/16" 15/16" 111/16" 21/8" 23/8" 213/16" 29/16" 313/ 16" 43/ 8" 411/16" 7" 813/16"
H 27/8" 33/16" 4" 51/8" 57/8" 63/4" 73/8" 93/16" 105/8" 117/8" 17" 211/4"
S MIN 11/2" 11/2" 17/8" 2" 2" 2" 3" 31/8" 31/4" 33/8" 35/8" 33/4"
L 31/8" 31/2" 41/2" 511/16" 61/2" 71/2" 81/4" 101/4" 117/8" 125/8" 187/8" 237/8"
266
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
PVC Fittings
Elbows and Reducers
SPECIAL RADIUS ELBOWS
CP
EL29024NM
Cat. # EL29024NM EL29036NM EL29048NM EL39024NM EL39036NM EL39048NM EL49024NM EL49036NM EL49048NM EL59036NM EL59048NM EL69036NM EL69048NM
Trade Size 2" 2" 2" 3" 3" 3" 4" 4" 4" 5" 5" 6" 6"
Description 24" 36" 48" 24" 36" 48" 24" 36" 48" 36" 48" 36" 48" R R R R R R R R R R R R R
Unit Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Std. Pkg. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 263 381 500 599 881 1115 892 1260 1628 1760 2260 2354 2865
R 24" 36" 48" 24" 36" 48" 24" 36" 48" 36" 48" 36" 48"
O 24" 36" 48" 24" 36" 48" 24" 36" 48" 36" 48" 36" 48"
H 24" 36" 48" 24" 36" 48" 24" 36" 48" 36" 48" 36" 48"
S MIN 11/2" 2" 2" 31/8" 31/8" 31/8" 33/8" 33/8" 33/8" 35/8" 35/8" 33/4" 33/4"
L 373/4" 561/2" 753/8" 373/4" 561/2" 753/8" 373/4" 561/2" 753/8" 561/2" 753/8" 561/2" 753/8"
REDUCERS
RED7550
Cat. # RED7550 RED10075 RED125100 RED150125 RED200150 RED250200 RED300250 RED400300 RED400350
Trade Size /4" x 1/2" 1" x 3/ 4" 11/4" x 1" 11/2" x 11/4" 2" x 11/2" 21/2" x 2" 3" x 21/2" 4" x 3" 4" x 31/2"
3
Unit Qty. 100 100 50 50 25 25 25 20 20
Std. Pkg. 100 100 50 50 25 25 25 20 20
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 3 4 8 6 20 28 40 90 45
H 1.00" 1.18" 1.42" 1.37" 1.60" 1.90" 2.25" 2.60" 2.60"
C 0.12" 0.12" 0.14" 0.18" 0.25" 0.25" 0.25" 0.37" 0.40"
T 0.63" 0.83" 1.06" 1.39" 1.62" 2.08" 2.48" 3.08" 3.60"
OD 1.05" 1.32" 1.66" 1.90" 2.38" 2.88" 3.50" 4.50" 4.50"
IDE 0.85" 1.06" 1.33" 1.68" 1.92" 2.39" 2.89" 3.52" 4.02"
IDB 0.84" 1.05" 1.31" 1.66" 1.89" 2.37" 2.87" 3.49" 3.99"
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
267
PVC Fittings
Bells and Caps
END BELLS
CP
EB50NM
Cat. # EB50NM EB75NM EB100NM EB125NM EB150NM EB200NM EB250NM EB300NM EB350NM EB400NM EB500NM EB600NM
Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4" 5" 6"
1
Unit Qty. 100 100 50 50 50 40 30 50 50 50 25 15
Std. Pkg. 100 100 50 50 50 40 30 50 50 50 25 15
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 17 17 17 35 35 35 60 155 207 207 207 155
L 1.00" 1.00" 1.25" 1.31" 1.56" 1.56" 1.88" 2.06" 2.25" 2.38" 2.44" 2.88"
D 0.75" 0.75" 1.00" 1.00" 1.25" 1.38" 1.50" 1.63" 1.81" 1.81" 1.81" 2.19"
BB 0.836 1.046 1.310 1.655 1.894 2.369 2.868 3.492 3.992 4.491 5.553 6.614 .004 .004 .005 .005 .006 .006 .007 .008 .008 .009 .010 .011
BE 0.852 1.065 1.330 1.677 1.918 2.393 2.890 3.515 4.015 4.515 4.593 6.658 .004 .004 .005 005 .006 .006 .007 .008 .008 .009 .010 .011
ID 0.63" 0.88" 1.06" 1.38" 1.63" 2.06" 2.50" 3.00" 3.50" 4.00" 5.06" 6.06"
OD 1.25" 1.50" 1.75" 2.13" 2.50" 2.81" 3.38" 4.13" 4.63" 5.13" 6.38" 7.38"
CAPS
EC50NM
Cat. # EC50NM EC75NM EC100NM EC125NM EC150NM EC200NM EC250NM EC300NM EC350NM EC400NM
Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1
Unit Qty. 100 100 50 25 25 50 25 25 25 25
Std. Pkg. 100 100 50 25 25 50 25 25 25 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 2 4 7 8 14 15 27 51 64 74
A /8" 11/16" 13/8" 111/16" 115/16" 23/8" 27/8" 39/16" 4" 41/2"
7
B
7 /8" 11/16" 11/4" 15/16" 19/16" 15/8" 2" 23/8" 25/16" 23/8"
268
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
PVC Fittings
Service Entrance and Straps
SERVICE ENTRANCE
CP
EH50NM
Cat. # EH50NM EH75NM EH100NM EH125NM EH150NM EH200NM EH250NM EH300NM EH350NM EH400NM
Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1
Unit Qty. 10 10 20 20 20 5 5 5 5 1
Std. Pkg. 10 10 20 20 20 5 5 5 5 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 7 10 10 35 95 110 380 410 433 1375
A 2.88" 2.88" 3.31" 5.00" 6.50" 6.50" 15.00" 12.25" 12.50" 16.00"
B 2.88" 2.88" 3.63" 5.00" 6.50" 6.50" 8.25" 9.38" 11.00" 11.00"
C 0.75" 0.88" 1.00" 1.25" 1.75" 1.75" 1.88" 1.75" 2.00" 2.75"
D 0.63" 0.44" 0.75" 1.38" 2.00" 2.00" 1.00" 1.00" 3.13" 2.50"
E 2.19" 2.13" 2.38" 3.31" 4.25" 4.25" 8.25" 8.25" 8.00" 10.25"
F 0.09" 1.06" 1.33" 1.67" 1.99" 2.38" 2.89" 3.52" 4.02" 4.52"
STRAPS
H
W L
ST50PVC
Cat. # ST50PVC ST75PVC ST100PVC ST125PVC ST150PVC ST200PVC ST250PVC ST300PVC ST400PVC
Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 4"
1
Unit Qty. 300 200 200 200 200 200 100 100 100
Std. Pkg. 300 200 200 200 200 200 100 100 100
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 1 1 2 3 3 4 9 10 13
W 23/16" 21/2" 213/16" 31/8" 33/8" 4" 51/2" 6" 7"
L 111/16" 2" 21/4" 21/2" 211/16" 35/16" 49/16" 51/8" 6"
H 1" 11/4" 11/2" 113/16" 21/8" 29/16" 3" 39/16" 45/8"
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
269
PVC Junction and Device Boxes

Junction and FD Boxes
ROUND JUNCTION BOXES
CP
R5075JBOX
Cat. # R5075JBOX
Trade Size
1
Unit Qty. 15
Std. Pkg. 15
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 65
A 43/4"
B 41/16"
C 17/8"
D 11/16"
/2"
JUNCTION BOXES
5.75
Box Lid
5.94
6.75
6.44
5.94
4.00
Top View
Side View
6.44
7.40 8.00
NM442JB
6x6x4
18 x 18 x 6
Cat. # NM442JB NM552JB NM446JB NM887JB NM444JB NM664JB NM666JB NM884JB NM886JB NM12124JB NM12126JB NM16146JB NM18186JB NM24188JB NM241812JB NM24248JB NM36248JB
Trade Size 4x4x2 5x5x2 4x4x6 8x8x7 4x4x4 6x6x4 6x6x6 8x8x4 8x8x6 12x12x4 12x12x6 16x14x6 18x18x6 24x18x8 24x18x12 24x24x8 36x24x8
Unit Qty. 10 10 10 4 10 10 5 5 4 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
Std. Pkg. 10 10 10 4 10 10 5 5 4 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 81 108 150 523 106 208 234 329 383 747 796 1194 1546 2000 2200 2450 4500
TYPE FD - BLANK
FDBLANK
Cat. # FDBLANK
Trade Size -
Unit Qty. 10
Std. Pkg. 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 58
A 2.81"
B 3.31"
C 4.56"
D 3.00"
E 6.38"
270
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

One and Two Gang Device Boxes
TYPE FSE - ONE GANG TYPE FSE - TWO GANG
CP
FSE50
FSE502
Cat. # ONE GANG FSE50 FSE75 FSE100 TWO GANG FSE502 FSE752 FSE1002
Trade Size
1 3
Unit Qty. 10 10 10 5 5 5
Std. Pkg. 10 10 10 5 5 5
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 46 46 44 58 58 58
A 27/8" 27/8" 27/8" 49/16" 49/16" 49/16"
B 49/16" 49/16" 49/16" 49/16" 49/16" 49/16"
C 25/8" 25/8" 25/8" 31/4" 31/4" 31/4"
D 23/8" 23/8" 23/8" 23/8" 23/8" 23/8"
E 37/16" 37/16" 37/16" 51/4" 51/4" 51/4"
F
7 /8" 11/16" 5 1 /16"
/2" /4" 1" /2" /4" 1"
1 3
7 /8" 11/16" 15/16"
TYPE FSC - ONE GANG
TYPE FSC - TWO GANG
FSC50 Unit Qty. 10 10 10 5 5 5

A
FSC502 Std. Pkg. 10 10 10 5 5 5 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 42 42 42 76 76 76
Cat. # ONE GANG FSC50 FSC75 FSC100 TWO GANG FSC502 FSC752 FSC1002
Trade Size /2" /4" 1"

1 3
A 213/16" 213/16" 213/16" 49/16" 49/16" 49/16"
B 49/16" 49/16" 49/16" 49/16" 49/16" 49/16"
C 25/8" 25/8" 25/8" 31/4" 31/4" 31/4"
D 215/16" 215/16" 215/16" 23/8" 23/8" 23/8"
E 31/2" 31/2" 31/2" 51/4" 51/4" 51/4"
F
7 /8" 11/16" 15/16"
/2" /4" 1"

1 3
7 /8" 11/16" 15/16"
TYPE FSS - ONE GANG

F B
VOL 21.8 CU.IN. (357.3 CM ) 3
TYPE FSS - TWO GANG
FSS50 Unit Qty. 10 10 10 5 5 5 Std. Pkg. 10 10 10 5 5 5 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 52 52 52 72 72 72
FSS502
Cat. # ONE GANG FSS50 FSS75 FSS100 TWO GANG FSS502 FSS752 FSS1002
Trade Size / 2" / 4" 1"

1 3
A 213/ 16" 213/ 16" 213/ 16" 49/ 16" 49/ 16" 49/ 16"
B 45/ 8" 45/ 8" 45/ 8" 49/ 16" 49/ 16" 49/ 16"
C 25/ 8" 25/ 8" 25/ 8" 31/ 4" 31/ 4" 31/ 4"
D 23/ 8" 23/ 8" 23/ 8" 23/ 8" 23/ 8" 23/ 8"
E 31/ 2" 31/ 2" 31/ 2" 51/ 4" 51/ 4" 51/ 4"
F
7 / 8" 11/ 16" 5 1 / 16"
/ 2" / 4" 1"

1 3
7 / 8" 11/ 16" 15/ 16"
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
271

One and Two Gang Device Boxes
TYPE FSCC - ONE GANG TYPE FSCC - TWO GANG
CP
FSCC50 Unit Qty. 10 10 10 5 5 5 Std. Pkg. 10 10 10 5 5 5 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 54 54 54 76 76 76
FSCC502
Cat. # ONE GANG FSCC50 FSCC75 FSCC100 TWO GANG FSCC502 FSCC752 FSCC1002
Trade Size
1 3
A 213/16" 213/16" 213/16" 49/16" 49/16" 49/16"
B 45/8" 45/8" 45/8" 49/16" 49/16" 49/16"
C 25/8" 25/8" 25/8" 31/4" 31/4" 31/4"
D 23/8" 23/8" 23/8" 23/8" 23/8" 23/8"
E 37/16" 37/16" 37/16" 51/4" 51/4" 51/4"
F
7 /8" 11/16" 15/16"
/2" /4" 1" /2" /4" 1"
1 3
7 /8" 11/16" 5 1 /16"
TYPE FDC - ONE GANG
FDC50
Cat. # FDC50 FDC75 FDC100
Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1"

1
Unit Qty. 10 10 10
Std. Pkg. 10 10 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 64 64 64
A 2.81" 2.81" 2.81"
B 4.56" 4.56" 4.56"
C 2.63" 2.63" 2.63"
D 2.94" 2.94" 2.94"
E 3.50" 3.50" 3.50"
F 0.88" 1.06" 1.31"
TYPE FDE - ONE GANG
FDE50
Cat. # FDE50 FDE75 FDE100
Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1"

1
Unit Qty. 10 10 10
Std. Pkg. 10 10 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 60 60 54
A 2.69" 2.69" 2.69"
B 5.88" 5.88" 5.88"
C 4.50" 4.50" 4.50"
D 2.88" 2.88" 2.88"
E 0.88" 1.06" 1.31"
272
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
PVC Covers
Blank and Switch Covers
BLANK COVERS
CP
FSBLANK
FSBLANK2
Cat. # FSBLANK FSBLANK2
Description ONE GANG TWO GANG
Unit Qty. 50 25
Std. Pkg. 50 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 11 22
A 17/8" 31/4"
B 43/4" 47/8"
C 35/16" 47/8"
D 3" 1 /4"
E 27/8"
F 29/16"
SWITCH COVERS
TP7214PVC
TP7280PVC
TP7268PVC
Cat. # TP7214PVC TP7280PVC TP7268PVC TP7230PVC
Description SWITCH COVER FOR FS BOXES SINGLE TOGGLE SWITCH COVER DOUBLE TOGGLE SWITCH COVER PLUNGER SWITCH
Unit Qty. 10 10 10 10
Std. Pkg. 10 10 10 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 32 28 36 25
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
273
PVC Covers
Receptacle Covers
RECEPTACLE COVERS
CP
2.85
4.93
TP7218PVC15
TP7240PVC
TP7288PVC
Cat. # TP7218PVC15 TP7218PVC20 TP7218PVC30 TP7218PVC50 TP7240PVC TP7288PVC
Description SINGLE RECEPTACLE COVER 15A SINGLE RECEPTACLE COVER 20A SINGLE RECEPTACLE COVER 30A SINGLE RECEPTACLE COVER 50A GFCI COVER FOR FS BOX DUPLEX COVER RECEPTACLE
Unit Qty. 10 10 10 10 10 10
Std. Pkg. 10 10 10 10 10 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 32 34 32 34 32 32
RECEPTACLE AND SWITCH COVERS
TP7224PVC
TP7229PVC
TP7228PVC
Cat. # TP7224PVC TP7228PVC TP7229PVC
Description GFI & TOGGLE SWITCH COVER DOUBLE DUPLEX COVER 2-GANG DUPLEX AND TOGGLE SWITCH COVER
Unit Qty. 10 10 10
Std. Pkg. 10 10 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 34 79 32
274
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
PVC Conduit Bodies

Conduit Bodies
TYPE LB
CP
LB50NM
Cat. # LB50NM LB75NM LB100NM LB125NM LB150NM LB200NM LB250NM LB300NM LB350NM LB400NM
Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1
Internal Vol. In. Cu. In. 4.3 6.5 11.8 25 36.5 63.5 198 198 305 305
Unit Qty. 25 15 10 10 10 5 5 5 4 4
Std. Pkg. 25 15 10 10 10 5 5 5 4 4
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 21 28 36 76 96 164 460 484 667 630
A /8" 11/16" 15/16" 111/16" 17/8" 23/8" 27/8" 39/14" 4" 4"
7
B 15/16" 11/2" 13/4" 21/2" 55/8" 31/8" 45/8" 45/8" 55/8" 55/8"
C 43/16" 415/16" 57/8" 79/16" 89/16" 913/16" 15" 151/16" 163/16" 163/16"
D 4" 45/8" 53/8" 73/16" 8" 99/16" 127/8" 127/8" 127/8" 127/8"
E 17/16" 15/8" 2" 23/8" 23/4" 33/8" 49/16" 49/16" 51/2" 51/2"
TYPE LL
B E
D A C
LL50NM
Cat. # LL50NM LL75NM LL100NM LL125NM LL150NM LL200NM LL250NM LL300NM LL350NM LL400NM
Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1
Unit Qty. 25 15 10 10 10 5 5 5 4 4
Std. Pkg. 25 15 10 10 10 5 5 5 4 4
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 21 28 40 82 102 164 484 532 800 665
A 1.31" 1.50" 1.75" 2.44" 2.63" 3.06" 4.63" 4.63" 4.63" 5.63"
B 1.44" 1.63" 2.00" 2.44" 2.81" 3.44" 4.63" 4.63" 5.50" 5.50"
C 4.25" 4.94" 6.00" 7.63" 8.56" 9.88" 14.94" 15.00" 16.19" 15.94"
D 4.00" 4.63" 5.38" 7.19" 8.00" 9.58" 12.75" 12.81" 12.81" 12.81"
E 0.88" 1.06" 1.31" 1.63" 1.94" 2.38" 2.88" 3.50" 4.00" 4.50"
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
275
PVC Conduit Bodies

Conduit Bodies
TYPE LR
CP
LR50NM
Cat. # LR50NM LR75NM LR100NM LR125NM LR150NM LR200NM LR250NM LR300NM LR350NM LR400NM
Trade Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 25 15 10 10 10 5 5 5 4 4
Std. Pkg. 25 15 10 10 10 5 5 5 4 4
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 22 29 42 80 100 160 384 560 713 775
A 1.31" 1.50" 1.75" 2.44" 2.63" 3.06" 4.63" 4.63" 4.63" 5.63"
B 1.44" 1.63" 2.00" 2.44" 2.81" 3.44" 4.63" 4.63" 5.50" 5.50"
C 4.25" 4.94" 6.00" 7.63" 8.56" 9.88" 14.94" 15.00" 16.19" 15.94"
D 4.00" 4.63" 5.38" 7.19" 8.00" 9.58" 12.75" 12.81" 12.81" 12.81"
E 0.88" 1.06" 1.31" 1.63" 1.94" 2.38" 2.88" 3.50" 4.00" 4.50"
TYPE T
E B E
D C
T50NM
Cat. # T50NM T75NM T100NM T125NM T150NM T200NM T250NM T300NM T350NM T400NM
Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1
Unit Qty. 25 15 10 10 10 5 2 2 1 1
Std. Pkg. 25 15 10 10 10 5 2 2 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 19 26 37 71 93 156 494 452 883 898
A 15/16" 11/2" 13/4" 21/2" 25/8" 31/8" 45/8" 45/8" 59/16" 59/16"
B 11/2" 111/16" 2" 21/2" 213/16" 33/8" 45/8" 45/8" 59/16" 59/16"
C 45/8" 53/8" 69/16" 83/16" 91/4" 103/8" 19" 19" 203/8" 203/8"
D 4" 45/8" 53/8" 73/16" 8" 91/2" 127/8" 127/8" 133/4" 133/4"
E
7 /8" 11/16" 15/16" 111/16" 115/16" 23/8" 31/2" 31/2" 4" 41/2"
276
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
PVC Conduit Bodies

Conduit Bodies
TYPE C
C50NM
CP
Cat. # C50NM C75NM C100NM C125NM C150NM C200NM C250NM C300NM C350NM C400NM
Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1
Unit Qty. 25 15 10 10 10 5 5 5 4 4
Std. Pkg. 25 15 10 10 10 5 5 5 4 4
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 20 28 38 76 96 164 435 532 605 580
A 15/16" 11/2" 13/4" 21/2" 25/8" 31/8" 45/8" 45/8" 59/16" 59/16"
B 11/2" 111/16" 2" 21/2" 213/16" 33/8" 45/8" 45/8" 59/16" 59/16"
C 45/8 53/8 69/16 83/16 91/4 103/8 19 19 203/8 203/8
D 4 45/8 53/8 73/16 8 91/2 127/8 127/8 137/8 137/8
E /8 11/16 15/16 111/16 115/16 23/8 27/8 31/2 4 41/2

7
TYPE E
E50NM
Cat. # E50NM E75NM E100NM E125NM E150NM E200NM E250NM E300NM E350NM E400NM
Trade Size / 2" 3 / 4" 1" 11/ 4" 11/ 2" 2" 21/ 2" 3" 31/ 2" 4"
1
Unit Qty. 25 15 10 10 10 5 5 5 4 4
Std. Pkg. 25 15 10 10 10 5 5 5 4 4
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 21 28 38 80 92 156 468 324 555 480
A 15/16" 11/2" 13/4" 27/16" 25/8" 31/16" 45/8" 45/8" 55/8" 55/8"
B 17/16" 15/8" 2" 27/16" 213/16" 37/16" 45/8" 45/8" 51/2" 51/2"
C 41/4 415/16 6 75/8 89/16 97/8 15 15 163/16 163/16
D 4 45/8 53/8 73/16 8 91/2 1213/16 1213/16 1213/16 1213/16
E /8 11/16 15/16 15/8 115/16 23/8 21/2 31/2 4 41/2

7
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
277
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Condulet stainless steel fittings deliver power where you need it, saving you time and money throughout the life of your facility. Superior resistance to corrosion and heat, combined with unmatched strength, make stainless steel Condulet bodies and boxes a long-term solution for even the most extreme environments.
CP
Applications:
Conduit outlet bodies are installed in conduit systems to: Act as pull outlets for conductors being installed Provide openings for making splices and taps in conductors Act as mounting outlets for lighting fixtures and wiring devices Connect conduit sections Provide taps for branch conduit runs Make 90 bends in conduit runs Provide for access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes
Dimension
A B C D E Overall length Overall height Overall width Width of opening Length of opening
Ordering Information - conduit body supplied with cover and gasket T Conduit Body, Cover and Gasket
Catalog Number T18SS T28SS T38SS T58SS T68SS Trade Size " " 1" 1" 2" A 5.56 6.61 7.53 9.37 11.50 B 1.75 2.00 2.31 2.75 3.38 C 1.31 1.63 1.78 2.47 3.13 D 1.02 1.27 1.42 2.03 2.50 E 3.15 3.92 4.61 6.12 8.00
Features:
Self-healing properties of stainless steel fittings help reduce the penetration of rust/corrosion and eliminate damage to the fitting Stainless steel fittings retain their strength in extreme heat and extreme cold conditions Fitting surface is easy to maintain and keep clean Easy cleaning capabilities make these fittings perfect for food processing and other hygienic areas where wash downs are common Superior strength and durability greatly reduce replacement of fittings - this will lower your total cost of ownership and increase your return on investment Stainless steel fittings do not require harsh environment-damaging cleaners to keep them looking like new Conduit hubs have tapered threads and feature integral bushing for protection of wire insulation Outlet bodies designed to match conduit size for neat, compact installations
LB Conduit Body, Cover and Gasket

Catalog Number LB18SS LB28SS LB38SS LB58SS LB68SS Trade Size " " 1" 1" 2" A 4.86 5.75 6.48 8.38 10.50 B 1.35 1.63 2.00 2.75 3.38 C 1.31 1.63 1.78 2.47 3.13 D 1.02 1.27 1.42 2.03 2.50 E 3.15 3.94 4.55 6.13 8.00
TB Conduit Body, Cover and Gasket

Catalog Number TB28SS TB38SS TB58SS TB68SS Trade Size " 1" 1" 2" A 6.61 7.53 9.37 11.50 B 2.88 3.23 3.75 4.38 C 1.63 1.78 2.47 3.13 D 1.27 1.42 2.03 2.50 E 3.95 4.61 6.12 8.00
C Conduit Body, Cover and Gasket

Catalog Number C18SS C28SS C38SS Trade Size " " 1" A 5.56 6.56 7.50 B C D E 1.38 1.31 1.02 3.15 1.63 1.63 1.27 3.94 2.00 1.78 1.42 4.61

LL Conduit Body, Cover and Gasket

Catalog Number LL28SS LL38SS Trade Size " 1" A B C D E 5.72 1.63 6.59 2.00 1.63 1.27 3.95 1.78 1.42 4.61
Standard Materials:
www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454
LR Conduit Body, Cover and Gasket

Catalog Number LR28SS LR38SS Trade Size " 1" A B C D E 5.72 1.63 6.59 2.00 1.63 1.27 3.95 1.78 1.42 4.61
278
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Condulet Stainless Steel Device Boxes deliver power where you need it, saving you time and money throughout the life of your facility. Superior resistance to corrosion and heat, combined with unmatched strength, make stainless steel Condulet bodies and boxes a long-term solution for even the most extreme environments.
Applications:
Cast device boxes are installed in conduit systems to: Accommodate wiring devices Act as pull boxes for conductors in a conduit system Provide openings to make splices and taps in conductors Provide access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes Connect conduit systems
CP
Features:
Self-healing properties of stainless steel fittings help reduce the penetration of rust/corrosion and eliminate damage to the fitting Stainless steel fittings retain their strength in extreme heat and extreme cold conditions Fitting surface is easy to maintain and keep clean Easy cleaning capabilities make these fittings perfect for food processing and other hygienic areas where wash downs are common Superior strength and durability greatly reduce replacement of fittings - this will lower your total cost of ownership and increase your return on investment Stainless steel fittings do not require harsh environmentdamaging cleaners to keep them looking like new Internal green grounding screw - standard Tapered threads for protection of wire insulation Wide selection of covers available Single or double conduit entry Ample wiring room provided for easy installations

Standard Materials:
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
279
Dimension
A B C D E F Length of box Overall length (including hubs) Width of box Overall width (including hubs) Height of box Overall height (including hubs)
CP
Ordering Information FDC Device Body

Catalog Number FDC2SS Trade Size A 4.63 B 6.19 C 2.94 D 2.94 E 3.03 F 3.03
FDS Device Body

Catalog Number FDS2SS Trade Size A 4.63 B 5.41 C 2.94 D 2.94 E 3.03 F 3.03
FDA Device Body

Catalog Number FDA2SS Trade Size A 4.63 B 4.63 C 2.94 D 2.94 E 3.03 F 3.80
FDX Device Body

Catalog Number FDX2SS Trade Size A 4.63 B 6.19 C 2.94 D 4.50 E 3.03 F 3.03
Ordering Information - Device Box Cover and Gasket Blank Cover

Catalog Number DS7000BC
Blank Formed Cover

Catalog Number DS7000BF
Switch Formed Cover

Catalog Number DS7000SF
Receptacle Formed Cover

Catalog Number DS7000RF
280
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Stainless Steel Fittings

Locknuts & Bushings
LOCKNUTS
CP
11SS
Features:
316 Stainless Steel Locknuts can be used with conduit or NPS threaded pipe. Coope Crouse-Hinds Stainless Steel fittings deliver unbeatable corrosion protection where you need it, saving you time and money throughout the life of your facility. Superior resistance to corrosion and heat, combined with unmatched strength, make stainless steel fittings a long term solution for even the most extreme environments. Precision-machined threads allow for easy installation. Heavy stock thickness and specially designed tabs tighten securely and will not easily loosen even in the most severe applications. Unit Qty. 1000 500 500 100 100 Std. Pkg. 1000 500 500 100 100 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 2 3 5 10 21 Threads Per Inch 14 14 111/2 111/2 111/2
Features:
Self healing properties of stainless steel fittings help reduce the penetration of rust/corrosion and eliminate damage to the fitting Stainless steel fittings retain their strength in extreme heat and extreme cold conditions Fitting surface is easy to maintain and keep clean Easy cleaning capabilities make these fittings perfect for food processing and other hygienic areas where washdowns are common Superior strength and durability greatly reduce replacement of fittings. This will lower your total cost of ownership and increase your return on investment Stainless steel fittings do not require harsh environment-damaging cleaners to keep them looking like new Stainless Steel fittings are ideal for industrial MRO and OEM applications in food and beverage, pharmaceutical, petrochemical, waste water, salt water, and other corrosive environments.
Cat. # 11SS 12SS 13SS 15SS 16SST
Trade Size
1 3
/2" /4" 1" 11/2" 2"
HEX HEAD REDUCING BUSHINGS
RBSS21 Trade Size

3
Cat. # RBSS21 RBSS31 RBSS32 RBSS51 RBSS52 RBSS53 RBSS61 RBSS62 RBSS63 RBSS65
Unit Qty. 100 100 100 50 50 50 25 25 25 25
Std. Pkg. 100 100 100 50 50 50 25 25 25 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 15 21 17 70 68 61 81 81 81 68
Length 0.95 1.07 1.07 1.50 1.50 1.50 1.30 1.42 1.32 1.42
Hex Nut Size 1.20 1.40 1.40 2.05 2.05 2.05 2.42 2.50 2.43 2.50
Standard Materials:
Fittings - 316 stainless steel Conduit, nipples, couplings and elbows - 316 stainless steel, 304 stainless steel Conduit hangers - 316 stainless steel, 301 stainless steel
/4 - 1/2 1 - 1/2 1 - 3/4 11/2 - 1/2 11/2 - 3/4 11/2 - 1 2 - 1/2 2 - 3/4 2-1 2 - 11/2
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
281

Plugs, Clamps and U-Bolts
HEX HEAD PLUGS
CP
PLG50SS Unit Qty. 100 100 100 50 50 Std. Pkg. 100 100 100 50 50 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 11 16 25 58 100
Cat. # PLG50SS PLG75SS PLG100SS PLG150SS PLG200SS
Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 1 - 1/2" 2"

1
Length 1 1.03 1.16 1.62 1.56
Hex Nut Size 0.93 1.17 1.51 2.1 2.6
BEAM CLAMPS
Features:
This heavy-duty "electrician's" style beam clamp is cast in stainless for superior strength and corrosion resistance. Designed for use on I-beams, channels, and other structural members, this beam clamp provides firm fixturing without drilling holes. Attachment holes in the back and bottom permit a wide variety of applications.
531SS Unit Qty. 50 25 25 Std Pkg. 50 25 25 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 25 80 148
Cat. # 531SST 533SST 534SST
Trade Size 15/16" 2" 21/4"
A /4" - 20 3 /8" - 16 1 /2" - 13

1
B /16" - 18 1 /2" - 13 5 /8" - 11

5
C /8" 13/16" 13/16"

7
D 13/8" 17/8" 23/16"
E 1" 17/8" 21/8"
F 15/16" 2" 21/4"
U-BOLTS
UBM50SS Cat. # UBM50SS UBM75SS UBM100SS UBM125SS UBM150SS UBM200SS UBM250SS UBM300SS UBM350SS UBM400SS Trade Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Unit Qty. 100 100 100 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
Std Pkg. 100 100 100 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 13 14 15 16 18 30 34 38 40 45
A 2.41" 2.73" 3.04" 3.16" 3.48" 4.30" 4.80" 5.36" 5.80" 6.50"
B 1.50" 1.50" 1.50" 1.50" 1.50" 1.75" 1.75" 1.75" 1.75" 1.75"
C 0.94" 1.15" 1.41" 1.76" 2.00" 2.49" 2.99" 3.61" 4.11" 4.61"
Size & Pitch /16" - 18 /16" - 18 5 /16" - 18 5 /16" - 18 5 /16" - 18 3 /8" - 16 3 /8" - 16 3 /8" - 16 3 /8" - 16 3 /8" - 16
5 5
Load Rtg (Lbs) 950 950 950 950 950 1250 1250 1250 1250 1250
282
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Straps
ONE HOLE STRAPS
CP
410SS Unit Qty. 400 200 100 50 50 25 25 10 10 10 Std Pkg. 400 200 100 50 50 25 25 10 10 10 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 4 5 7 10 14 20 42 51 70 78
Cat. # 410SS 411SS 412SS 413SS 414SS 415SS 206SS 207SS 208SS 209SS
Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1
A 0.420" 0.525" 0.655" 0.830" 0.950" 1.185" 1.437" 1.750" 2.000" 2.250"
B 0.390" 0.500" 0.620" 0.800" 0.920" 1.150" 1.400" 1.700" 1.950" 2.200"
C 0.075" 0.090" 0.090" 0.100" 0.125" 0.125" 0.150" 0.150" 0.180" 0.180"
D 0.937" 1.031" 1.125" 1.500" 1.875" 2.125" 2.562" 2.875" 3.250" 3.500"
E 1.375" 1.562" 1.812" 2.000" 2.500" 2.750" 3.312" 3.625" 4.000" 4.250"
F 0.625" 0.750" 0.875" 0.875" 1.000" 1.125" 1.250" 1.250" 1.250" 1.250"
G 0.250" 0.250" 0.312" 0.375" 0.437" 0.562" 0.562" 0.562" 0.562" 0.562"
TWO HOLE STRAPS

(RADIUS)
496 2SS Unit Qty. 400 200 200 100 50 50 50 25 25 25 25 Std Pkg. 400 200 200 100 50 50 50 25 25 25 25 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 2 2 3 4 6 9 12 16 20 29 32
Cat. # 496 496 496 496 496 496 496 496 496 496 496 2SS 3SS 4SS 5SS 6SS 7SS 8SS 9SS 10SS 11SS 12SS
Trade Size /8" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
3
A 0.35" 0.42" 0.52" 0.65" 0.83" 0.95" 1.18" 1.43" 1.75" 2.00" 2.25"
B 0.32" 0.39" 0.5" 0.62" 0.8" 0.92" 1.15" 1.4" 1.7" 1.95" 2.2"
C .024-.030" .024-.030" .024-.030" .033-.038" .033-.038" .043-.050" .043-.050" .053-.060" .053-.060" .068-.075" .068-.075"
D 1.56" 1.78" 2.18" 2.53" 3.16" 3.37" 4.25" 4.95" 5.5" 6.18" 6.81"
E 2" 2.25" 2.62" 3.2" 4" 4.2" 5.12" 5.87" 6.5" 7.12" 7.75"
F 0.5" 0.56" 0.62" 0.75" 0.87" 0.93" 1" 1" 1" 1" 1"
G 0.188" 0.188" 0.188" 0.25" 0.25" 0.25" 0.375" 0.375" 0.375" 0.437" 0.437"
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
283

Clamps
RIGHT ANGLE CLAMPS Features:
Designed to fit pipe/rigid conduit as well as PVC-coated rigid conduit, right angle clamps firmly fix pipe to the flange of a structural member without drilling holes. Cast in CF8M(316) with 316SS U-bolt and nuts, these clamps are designed for both strength and corrosion resistance.
CP
RAC50SS Cat. # RAC50SS RAC75SS RAC100SS RAC125SS RAC150SS RAC200SS RAC250SS RAC300SS RAC350SS RAC400SS Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1
Unit Qty. 50 50 50 25 25 25 25 10 10 10
Std. Pkg. 50 50 50 25 25 25 25 10 10 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 34 36 44 51 61 97 125 148 163 178
A 0.94" 1.15" 1.41" 1.76" 2.00" 2.49" 2.99" 3.61" 4.11" 4.61"
B 1.25" 1.46" 1.72" 2.07" 2.31" 2.87" 3.37" 3.99" 4.49" 4.99"
C 2.41" 2.73" 3.04" 3.16" 3.48" 4.3" 4.8" 5.36" 5.8" 6.5"
D 1.5" 1.5" 1.5" 1.5" 1.5" 1.75" 1.75" 1.75" 1.75" 1.75"
E 2.0" 2.13" 2.63" 2.88" 3.37" 4.62" 4.62" 5.27" 5.75" 6.25"
PARALLEL CLAMPS Features:

Parallel Clamps are used to run pipe or conduit along the flange of I-beams or channels simply and easily without drilling holes. The 100% stainless (CF8M & 316SS) design offers superb corrosion resistance and strength. PARC75SS Cat. # PARC75SS PARC100SS Trade Size /4" 1"
3
These clamps will fit both rigid conduit and PVC-Coated rigid conduit and are available in 3/4" and 1" trade sizes. Unit Qty. 50 50 Std. Pkg. 50 50 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 58 60 Stainless Steel 316 Cat. # 0BSS316 1BSS316 2BSS316 3BSS316 4BSS316 5BSS316 Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"
1
A 2.89" 3.12"
B 1.38" 1.38"
Overall Width 1.1 1.1
CONDUIT HANGERS
Unit Qty. 100 100 100 50 50 25
Std Pkg. 100 100 100 50 50 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 7 9 10 11 18 26
A 0.255" 0.255" 0.255" 0.255" 0.320" 0.320"
B 0.75" 0.875" 0.875" 0.875" 1.00" 1.25"
C 1.90" 2.10" 2.40" 2.80" 3.25" 3.75"
D 0.275" 0.275" 0.275" 0.275" 0.275" 0.275"
E 0.050" 0.050" 0.060" 0.060" 0.060" 0.060"
0BSS316
With Bolt
Stainless Steel 301 Cat. # 0BSS 1BSS 2BSS 21/2BSS 3BSS 4BSS 5BSS 6BSS 7BSS 8BSS 9BSS Description /8 and 1/2 RGD 1/2 EMT hanger with bolt /4 RGD 3/4 EMT hanger with bolt 1 RGD 1 EMT hanger with bolt 11/4 EMT hanger with bolt 11/4 RGD 11/2 EMT hanger with bolt 11/2 RGD hanger with bolt 2 RGD 2 EMT hanger with bolt 21/2 RGD 21/2 EMT hanger with bolt 3 RGD 3 EMT hanger with bolt 31/2 RGD 31/2 EMT hanger with bolt 4 RGD 4 EMT hanger with bolt
3 3
Unit Qty. 100 100 100 100 100 100 50 50 25 10 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 6 7 11 10 13 16 17 32 39 41 44
284
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Elbows
CONDUIT Features:
Stainless Steel threaded conduit polished to a bright finish to further increase corrosion resistance and provide enhanced aesthetic appearance. Provided in 10' lengths with coupling attached and color coded thread protector for the opposite end. Custom sizes are also available RCOND50 304SS Unit Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Std Pkg. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 85 113 168 272 365 5500 7200 10000 85 113 168 272 365 5500 7200 10000 Length without Coupling 9' 111/4" 9' 111/4" 9' 11" 9' 11" 9' 11" 9' 101/2 9' 101/2 9' 103/4 9' 111/4" 9' 111/4" 9' 11" 9' 11" 9' 11" 9-10-1/2 9-10-1/2 9-10-3/4
CP
Cat. # RCOND50 304SS RCOND75 304SS RCOND100 304SS RCOND150 304SS RCOND200 304SS RCOND250 304SS RCOND300 304SS RCOND400 304SS RCOND50 316SS RCOND75 316SS RCOND100 316SS RCOND150 316SS RCOND200 316SS RCOND250 316SS RCOND300 316SS RCOND400 316SS
Trade Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 4" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 4"
1
Threads 14 14 111/2" 111/2" 111/2" 8 8 8 14 14 111/2" 111/2" 111/2" 8 8 8
ID 0.622" 0.824" 1.049" 1.610" 2.067" 2.469" 3.068" 4.026" 0.622" 0.824" 1.049" 1.610" 2.067" 2.469" 3.068" 4.026"
OD 0.84" 1.05" 1.31" 1.90" 2.37" 2.87" 3.5" 4.5" 0.84" 1.05" 1.31" 1.90" 2.37" 2.87" 3.5" 4.5"
Wall Thickness 0.104" 0.107" 0.126" 0.138" 0.146" 0.193" 0.205" 0.225" 0.104" 0.107" 0.126" 0.138" 0.146" 0.193" 0.205" 0.225"
Est. Weight per Foot 0.85 1.13 1.68 2.72 3.65 * * * 0.85 1.13 1.68 2.72 3.65 * * *
STANDARD RADIUS ELBOWS
Features:
Designed for use with stainless threaded rigid conduit. These stainless steel elbows are polished to a bright finish for increased corrosion resistance and improved appearance.
RLB50 304SS Unit Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Std. Pkg. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 76 109 188 422 611 76 109 188 422 611 Radius "C" 4" 4.5" 5.75" 8.25" 9.5" Offset "A" 6.5" 7.25" 8.63" 11.63" 13.31" Straight End "B" 2.12" 2.75" 2.88" 3.38" 3.81"
Cat. # RLB5090 304SS RLB7590 304SS RLB10090 304SS RLB15090 304SS RLB20090 304SS RLB5090 316SS RLB7590 316SS RLB10090 316SS RLB15090 316SS RLB20090 316SS
Trade Size / 2" / 4" 1" 11/ 2" 2" 1 / 2" 3 / 4" 1" 11/ 2" 2"
1 3
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
285

Nipples
CONDUIT NIPPLES Features:
Designed for use with stainless threaded rigid conduit. These nipples are polished to a bright finish for increased corrosion resistance and improved appearance.
CP
Cat. # NPL100500 304SS NPL100600 304SS NPL100800 304SS NPL1001000 304SS NPL1001200 304SS NPL100CL 316SS NPL100200 316SS NPL100250 316SS NPL100300 316SS NPL100350 316SS NPL100400 316SS NPL100500 316SS NPL100600 316SS NPL100800 316SS NPL1001000 316SS NPL1001200 316SS NPL150200 304SS NPL150250 304SS NPL150300 304SS NPL150350 304SS NPL150400 304SS NPL150500 304SS NPL150600 304SS NPL150800 304SS NPL1501000 304SS NPL1501200 304SS NPL150200 316SS NPL150250 316SS NPL150300 316SS NPL150350 316SS NPL150400 316SS NPL150500 316SS NPL150600 316SS NPL150800 316SS NPL1501000 316SS NPL1501200 316SS NPL200200 304SS NPL200250 304SS NPL200300 304SS NPL200350 304SS NPL200400 304SS NPL200500 304SS NPL200600 304SS NPL200800 304SS NPL2001000 304SS NPL2001200 304SS NPL200200 316SS NPL200250 316SS NPL200300 316SS NPL200350 316SS NPL200400 316SS NPL200500 316SS NPL200600 316SS NPL200800 316SS NPL2001000 316SS NPL2001200 316SS
Trade Size 1" x 5"L 1" x 6"L 1" x 8"L 1" x 10"L 1" x 12"L 1" x CLOSE 1" x 2" 1" x 21/2"L 1" x 3"L 1" x 31/2"L 1" x 4"L 1" x 5"L 1" x 6"L 1" x 8"L 1" x 10"L 1" x 12"L 11/2" x 2" 11/2" x 21/2"L 11/2" x 3"L 11/2" x 31/2"L 11/2" x 4"L 11/2" x 5"L 11/2" x 6"L 11/2" x 8"L 11/2" x 10"L 11/2" x 12"L 11/2" x 2" 11/2" x 21/2"L 11/2" x 3"L 11/2" x 31/2"L 11/2" x 4"L 11/2" x 5"L 11/2" x 6"L 11/2" x 8"L 11/2" x 10"L 11/2" x 12"L 2" x 2" 2" x 21/2" L 2" x 3"L 2" x 31/2" L 2" x 4"L 2" x 5"L 2" x 6"L 2" x 8"L 2" x 10"L 2" x 12" L 2" x 2" 2" x 21/2"L 2" x 3"L 2" x 31/2"L 2" x 4"L 2" x 5"L 2" x 6"L 2" x 8"L 2" x 10"L 2" x 12" L
Unit Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Std. Pkg. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 62 72 97 135 152 13 23 26 31 41 51 62 72 97 135 152 25 47 53 64 75 88 114 151 176 243 25 47 53 64 75 88 114 151 176 243 33 47 60 80 100 127 152 204 254 305 33 47 60 80 100 127 152 204 254 305
NPL50200 304SS Cat. # NPL50CL 304SS NPL50200 304SS NPL50250 304SS NPL50300 304SS NPL50350 304SS NPL50400 304SS NPL50500 304SS NPL50600 304SS NPL50800 304SS NPL501000 304SS NPL501200 304SS NPL50CL 316SS NPL50200 316SS NPL50250 316SS NPL50300 316SS NPL50350 316SS NPL50400 316SS NPL50500 316SS NPL50600 316SS NPL50800 316SS NPL501000 316SS NPL501200 316SS NPL75CL 304SS NPL75200 304SS NPL75250 304SS NPL75300 304SS NPL75350 304SS NPL75400 304SS NPL75500 304SS NPL75600 304SS NPL75800 304SS NPL751000 304SS NPL751200 304SS NPL75CL 316SS NPL75200 316SS NPL75250 316SS NPL75300 316SS NPL75350 316SS NPL75400 316SS NPL75500 316SS NPL75600 316SS NPL75800 316SS NPL751000 316SS NPL751200 316SS NPL100CL 304SS NPL100200 304SS NPL100250 304SS NPL100300 304SS NPL100350 304SS NPL100400 304SS Trade Size /2" x CLOSE /2" x 2" 1 /2" x 21/ 2"L 1 /2" x 3"L 1 /2" x 31/ 2"L 1 /2" x 4"L 1 /2" x 5"L 1 /2" x 6"L 1 /2" x 8"L 1 /2" x 10"L 1 /2" x 12"L 1 /2" x CLOSE 1 /2" x 2" 1 /2" x 21/2"L 1 /2" x 3"L 1 /2" x 31/2"L 1 /2" x 4"L 1 /2" x 5"L 1 /2" x 6"L 1 /2" x 8"L 1 /2" x 10"L 1 /2" x 12"L 3 /4" x CLOSE 3 /4" x 2" 3 /4" x 21/2"L 3 /4" x 3"L 3 /4" x 31/2"L 3 /4" x 4"L 3 /4" x 5"L 3 /4" x 6"L 3 /4" x 8"L 3 /4" x 10"L 3 /4" x 12"L 3 /4" x CLOSE 3 /4" x 2" 3 /4" x 21/2"L 3 /4" x 3"L 3 /4" x 31/2"L 3 /4" x 4"L 3 /4" x 5"L 3 /4" x 6"L 3 /4" x 8"L 3 /4" x 10"L 3 /4" x 12"L 1" x CLOSE 1" x 2" 1" x 21/2"L 1" x 3"L 1" x 31/2"L 1" x 4"L
1 1
Unit Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Std. Pkg. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 5 12 14 18 21 24 31 38 51 66 79 5 12 14 18 21 24 31 38 51 66 79 8 14 19 23 27 30 41 50 68 83 103 8 14 19 23 27 30 41 50 68 83 103 13 23 26 31 41 51
286
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Couplings
COUPLINGS
Features:
Designed for use with stainless threaded rigid conduit. These stainless steel elbows are polished to a bright finish for increased corrosion resistance and improved appearance. RC50 304SS Unit Qty. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Std. Pkg. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 18 26 28 51 69 178 229 313 18 26 28 51 69 178 229 313
CP
Cat. # RC50 304SS RC75 304SS RC100 304SS RC150 304SS RC200 304SS RC250 304SS RC300 304SS RC400 304SS RC50 316SS RC75 316SS RC100 316SS RC150 316SS RC200 316SS RC250 316SS RC300 316SS RC400 316SS
Trade Size / 2" 3 / 4" 1" 11/ 2" 2" 21/ 2" 3" 4" 1 / 2" 3 / 4" 1" 11/ 2" 2" 21/ 2" 3" 4"
1
Length 1.625" 1.650" 2.000" 2.063" 2.125" 3.188" 3.313" 3.516" 1.625" 1.650" 2.000" 2.063" 2.125" 3.188" 3.313" 3.516"
Outside Dia. 1.01" 1.25" 1.53" 2.16" 2.65" 3.25" 3.87" 4.88" 1.01" 1.25" 1.53" 2.16" 2.65" 3.25" 3.87" 4.88"
3-PIECE COUPLINGS
Features:
Designed to join and connect threaded ends of rigid conduit where neither length of conduit can be turned. These Stainless Steel Three piece couplings are polished to a bright finish for increased corrosion resistance and improved appearance.
191SS Unit Qty. 50 50 Std. Pkg. 50 50 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 33 33
Cat. # 191SS 192SS
Trade Size /4" 1"

3
Overall Length 1.51" 1.51"
Major Nut Dia. 1.51" 1.66"
Major Body Dia. 1.31" 1.66"
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
287
CP
288
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Commercial Products
Description
Outlet Boxes & Covers
Outlet Box Technical Data 4" Steel Square Boxes and Covers 411/16" Steel Square Boxes and Covers Steel Utllity Boxes and Covers Steel Switch Boxes and Covers Steel Gang Boxes and Covers Steel Masonry Boxes Steel Octagon Boxes & Pans Steel Octagon Covers Steel Octagon Concrete Boxes Ceiling Fan Boxes Outlet Box Accessories PVC Switch and Outlet Boxes Non-metallic Ceiling and Fan Boxes
Page No.
see see see see see see see see see see see see see see pages 289342 pages 291293 pages 294304 pages 305309 see page 310 pages 311318 pages 319320 pages 321322 pages 323326 pages 327328 pages 329330 pages 331332 pages 333334 pages 336339 pages 340342
CP
PRE-formance
see pages 343362
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
289
CP
290
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Switch & Outlet Boxes Technical Data
Article 314 of the National Electrical Code (NEC) covers the installation and use of boxes. The article includes table references that guide the electrician in the selection of the proper size box necessary to safely accommodate electrical service requirements. The box capacity table is reproduced in part from NEC as a quick reference and guide. The NEC should be consulted for complete details. Cooper Crouse-Hinds products are produced in accordance with the requirements of UL-514-A, UL-514-B, UL-514-C and are classified for fire resistance according to the standard, Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials, ANSI/UL 263, ASTM E 119 and NFPA 251. This listing is based on products when used in a fire rated (2 HR) wall or ceiling. Cooper Crouse-Hinds steel boxes are listed with U.L. File #E23156 and Cooper Crouse-Hinds nonmetallic boxes are listed with U.L. File #E102328 and U.L. (2 HR. fire rated) File #R9933. Cooper Crouse-Hinds switch and outlet boxes comply with the requirements of NEMA standard OS-1, NFPA 70-370 and Federal Spec. #W-J-800E. Under File #E23156, Cooper Crouse-Hinds concentric and "Moon" KO style boxes, the following is stated "Suitable for bonding without any additional bonding means around concentric (or Eccentric) knockouts where used in circuits above or below 250V."
Wall thickness on all Steel boxes is 0.0625"
CP
Table 314.16(A) Metal Boxes

Box Dimension, Inches Trade Size or Type 4 x 11/4 Round or Octagonal 4 x 11/2 Round or Octagonal 4 x 21/8 Round or Octagonal 4 x 11/4 Square 4 x 11/2 Square 4 x 21/8 Square 411/16 x 11/4 Square 411/16 x 21/2 Square 411/16 x 21/8 Square 3 x 2 x 11/2 Device 3 x 2 x 2 Device 3 x 2 x 21/4 Device 3 x 2 x 21/2 Device 3 x 2 x 23/4 Device 3 x 2 x 31/2 Device 4 x 21/8 x 11/2 Device 4 x 21/8 x 17/8 Device 4 x 21/8 x 21/8 Device 33/4 x 2 x 21/2 Masonry Box/Gang 33/4 x 2 x 31/2 Masonry Box/Gang FS-Minimum Internal Depth 13/4 Single Cover Gang FD-Minimum Internal Depth 23/8 Single Cover Gang FS-Minimum Internal Depth 13/4 Single Cover Gang FD-Minimum Internal Depth 23/8 Multiple Cover Gang Min. Cu. In. Cap. 12.5 15.5 21.5 18.0 21.0 30.3 25.5 29.5 42.0 7.5 10.0 10.5 12.5 14.0 18.0 10.3 13.0 14.5 14.0 21.0 13.5 18.0 18.0 24.0 Maximum Number of Conductors (arranged by AWG size) No. 18 8 10 14 12 14 20 17 19 28 5 6 7 8 9 12 6 8 9 9 14 9 12 12 16 No. 16 7 8 12 10 12 17 14 16 24 4 5 6 7 8 10 5 7 8 8 12 7 10 10 13 No. 14 6 7 10 9 10 15 12 14 21 3 5 5 6 7 9 5 6 7 7 10 6 9 9 12 No. 12 5 6 9 8 9 13 11 13 18 3 4 4 5 6 8 4 5 6 6 9 6 8 8 10 No. 10 5 6 8 7 8 12 10 11 16 3 4 4 5 5 7 4 5 5 5 8 5 7 7 9 No. 8 4 5 7 6 7 10 8 9 14 2 3 3 4 4 6 3 4 4 4 7 4 6 6 8 No. 6 2 3 4 3 4 6 5 5 8 1 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 2 4 2 3 3 4
Table 314.16(B) Volume Required per Conductor

Size of Conductor No. 18 No. 16 No. 14 No. 12 No. 10 No. 8 No. 6 Free Space Within Box for Each Conductor 1.5 cubic inches 1.75 cubic inches 2 cubic inches 2.25 cubic inches 2.5 cubic inches 3 cubic inches 5 cubic inches
For SI units: one cubic inch = 16.4 cm3. Reprinted with permission from NFPA 70-2005, the National Electrical Code, Copyright 2005 National Fire Protection Association, Quincy MA 02269. This reprinted material is not the complete and official position of the National Fire Protection Asociation, on the referenced subject which is represented only by the standard in its entirety. National Electrical Code and NEC are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association, Inc., Quincy, MA 02269.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
291
COOPER CROUSE-HINDS OUTLET BOXES & COVERS Cooper Crouse-Hinds has assembled one of the most complete outlet box products lines in the business. Weve been leading in quality and selection for decades and throughout the Cooper Crouse-Hinds Steel Outlet Box offering, you will find innovative products and solutions that save labor, cut material costs and increase productivity.
CP
We have a complete offering of: 4" and 411/16" square drawn and welded boxes 4" square and 411/16", switch, masonry, utility, outlet, ceiling, fan and gangable boxes Drawn boxes available with concentric knockouts, combining 1/2" and 3/4" knockout Complete line of covers, partitions, extension rings and accessories Uni-Mount Covers PRE-formance products Pre-assembled boxes which includes Uni-Mount cover attached to 4" square box Pre-fabricated boxes which includes Uni-Mount cover attached to 4" square box with ground screw and lead installed Fire alarm boxes and covers
BRACKETS USED ON COOPER CROUSEHINDS BOXES
"F" BRACKET Mounts on face of stud. See catalog number for set back. For wood studs.
"D" BRACKET Side mount bracket with set up hook & guide tabs for automatic positioning. Standard bracket set back is 5/8". For wood and metal studs.
"S" BRACKET Side mount brackets with set up hook for wood or metal studs. Standard bracket set back is 5/8".
"C" BRACKET Ceiling box bracket for wood studs.
"VS" BRACKET Plain flat mounted bracket for use on wood or metal studs. No set back.
"VMS" BRACKET Side bracket for use with wood or metal studs. Provides set up tabs to position on face of stud.
"VP" BRACKET Side bracket with set up hooks for wood studs.
"SSB" BRACKET Positions box on either side of a steel stud.
292
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
CLAMPS USED ON COOPER CROUSE-HINDS BOXES

Cat. # TP900
CP
MC-BX FOR ARMORED & METAL CLAD (MCI) CABLE
NM-1
NM-2 FOR NONMETALLIC CABLE
NM-4
MOUNTING EARS
Cat. # TP901 Cat. # TP902
ONE SCREW EAR
TWO SCREW EAR
Mounting ears are available on many of our switch boxes. They are set forward in 1/16" the "old way" position. Two-screw ears are generally used on shallow boxes and one-screw ears on deep boxes.
COOPER CROUSE-HINDS BOX ENTRY DETAILS
/2" Conduit KO
/4" Conduit KO
1" Conduit KO
Concentric 1/2" and 3/4" KO Eccentric 1/2" and 3/4" KO
Cable Pry-outs always in pairs.
Knockouts and Pry-outs

Cooper Crouse-Hinds conduit KOs have standard trade size dimensions. KOs are uniform and true for attachment of cable or conduit connectors. Pry-outs for cable entrance are slotted a twist with screwdriver removes them. KOs and Pry-outs are precision stamped to permit easy removal, but remain sufficiently strong and sturdy when not removed. Cooper Crouse-Hinds 4" sq. drawn boxes feature a 1/2" and 3/4" "inverted" concentric KO easily removed. Our 4" sq. welded feature our 1/2" eccentric KO which also features easy removability of both the 1/2" and 3/4" KOs.
Note: These KOs are suitable for bonding without bonding jumpers around concentric (or eccentric) knockouts where used in circuits above or below 250V.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
293
Steel Square Boxes
4" SQUARE OUTLET BOXES AND COVERS
Features:
Ideal for exposed work applications, providing an easy method for the installation of electrical devices (switches, receptacles, fans, lights, etc.) Raised ground screw location in the welded boxes saves time in installation Available with pre-installed ground screws and pigtails for increased labor savings Knockouts are suitable for use without a bonding jumper in circuits above or below 250 volts Available in two depths for differing cubic capacity requirements Welded or drawn construction to match customer preference Extensive cover offering to meet various customer applications and needs
CP
Applications:
For use with conduit Can be ceiling mounted to be used as a junction box or to mount lighting fixtures Available in red for fire alarm applications

UL Listed
4" SQUARE OUTLET BOXES 18.0 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY

11/4" DEEP FOR CONDUIT UL LISTED
TP408 KNOCKOUTS Cat. # TP408 Bracket Description Drawn Sides 12 1/2" Bottom 5 1/2" Unit Qty. 50 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 61
294
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Steel Square Boxes
4" SQUARE OUTLET BOXES 22.0 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY (WELDED) 21.0 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY (DRAWN)
11/2" DEEP FOR CONDUIT UL LISTED CP
TP404/TP404PF
TP404SSB
TP404RED
TP425
TP467
TP469
TP830*
TP405
TP412 TP839*
TP410
TP414RED Metal Stud Sizes All All ALL
TP414
TP418 KNOCKOUTS
TP423RED Unit Qty. /2" /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 3 /4"
1 1 3 3
TP423 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 72 72 72 83 82 81 81 67 67 67 67 67 84 72 81 72 72
Cat. # TP404** TP404RED TP404PF** TP404SSB TP425** TP423** TP423RED TP405 TP410 TP412 TP414 TP414RED TP418 TP467 TP469 Air Plenum TP830* TP839*
Bracket SSB "VP" "VMS" "VMS" "F", Set Flush "VMS"
Description Welded Welded Welded Welded Welded Welded Welded Drawn Drawn Drawn Drawn Drawn Welded Welded Welded Drawn Drawn
Sides 8 1/2", 4 8 1/2", 4 8 1/2", 4 8 1/2", 4 6 1/2", 3 6 1/2", 3 6 1/2", 3 4 1/2", 6 12 1/2" 8 3/4" 8 1/2", 4 8 1/2", 4 6 1/2", 3 8 3/4" 6 3/4" /2" /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2"
1 1
Bottom + 3/4" E + 3/4" E + 3/4" E + 3/4" E + 3/4" E + 3/4" E + 3/4" E & 3/4" C 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 5 3 3 3 2 2 2 /2", /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2" 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2",
1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
+ + + + + + +
/4" /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4"

3 3
E E E E E E E
3/4" 3/4" 1/2" + 3/4" E
/4" /4" 3 /4" 1 /2" + 3/4" E 1 /2" + 3/4" E 1 /2" + 3/4" E
50 50 50 50 25 25 25 50 50 50 50 50 25 50 25 50 50
8 1/2", 4 3/4" 8 3/4" C
3 1/2", 2 3/4" 3 1/2", 2 3/4"
*For Air Plenum (No Mounting Holes) - Not UL Listed **cUL Listed All welded 4" square outlet boxes have a raised dimple for ground screw TP404PF includes ground screw with pigtail lead
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
295
Steel Square Boxes

11/2" DEEP FOR NONMETALLIC CABLE CLAMPS IN EACH END UL LISTED CP
TP444
TP444SSB KNOCKOUTS
TP449
TP446
TP445
Cat. # TP444 TP444SSB TP446 TP445 TP449
Bracket SSB "F", Set Flush "VP" "VMS"
Description Welded Welded Welded Welded Welded
Sides 4 4 4 4 4 Cable, Cable, Cable, Cable, Cable, 4 4 2 2 2 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2",
1
Bottom 2 2 1 1 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2"

1
Unit Qty. 50 50 25 25 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 77 88 88 85 85
& & & & &
/4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4"

3
E E E E E
1 1 1 1 1
/2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2"

1

11/2" DEEP FOR ARMORED & METAL CLAD (MCI) CABLE CLAMPS IN EACH END UL LISTED
TP454
TP454SSB KNOCKOUTS
TP456
TP459
TP461
Cat. # TP459 TP454* TP454PF TP454SSB* TP456* TP456PF TP461*
Bracket "VMS" SSB "F", Set Flush "F", Set Flush "VP"
Description Welded Welded Welded Welded Welded Welded Welded
Sides 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Cable, Cable, Cable, Cable, Cable, Cable, Cable, 2 4 4 4 2 2 2 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2",
1
Bottom 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2"

1
Unit Qty. 25 50 50 25 25 25 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 89 81 81 82 92 92 89
& & & & & & &
/4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4"

3
E E E E E E E
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
/2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2"

1
TP catalog numbers ending in PF includes ground screw with pigtail lead
296
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Steel Square Boxes

21/8" DEEP WITH CONDUIT KOs UL LISTED
CP
TP403/TP403PF
TP403SSB
TP434
TP438 TP831*
TP432
TP432VMS
TP437
TP451
TP403RED
TP434RED KNOCKOUTS
TP451RED
Cat. # TP403** TP403RED TP403PF** TP403SSB TP432** TP432VMS TP436 TP434 TP434RED TP438 TP438PF TP451 TP451PF TP451RED TP437 Air Plenum TP831*
Bracket SSB "VMS" "VMS" "VMS" "VMS" "VP"
Description Welded Welded Welded Welded Welded Welded Welded Drawn Drawn Drawn Drawn Welded Welded Welded Welded Drawn
Sides 8 8 8 8 8 6 8 8 8 4 4 6 6 6 6 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 3 /4" 3 /4" 1" 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2",
1
Bottom 4 4 4 4 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2"

1
Unit Qty. /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2"
1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 84 84 84 95 84 99 84 84 84 84 84 96 96 96 98 90
& & & &
/4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4"

3
E E E E
4 4 6 6 3 3 3 3
/4" /4" /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2"

3 3 1
& & & & & &
/4" /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4"

3 3
C C E E E E
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2
/2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2",
1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
& & & & & & &
/4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4"

3
E E E E E E E
& & & &
/4" /4" 3 /4" 3 /4"

3 3
E E E E
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
8 1/2", 4 3/4"
3 1/2", 2 3/4"
*For Air Plenum (No Mounting Holes) - Not UL Listed TP catalog numbers ending in PF includes ground screw with pigtail lead **cUL Listed
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
297
Steel Square Boxes
4" SQUARE OUTLET BOXES 30.3 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY 21/8" DEEP
FOR NONMETALLIC CABLE CLAMPS IN EACH END UL LISTED CP
TP450 KNOCKOUTS Cat. # TP450 TP450SSB TP452 Bracket SSB "VMS" Description Welded Welded Welded Sides
TP450SSB
TP452
Bottom 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1 1/2"
Unit Qty. 25 25 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 90 101 104
4 Cable, 4 1/2", 2 1/2" & 3/4" E 4 Cable, 4 1/2", 2 1/2" & 3/4" E 4 Cable, 2 1/2", 1 1/2" & 3/4" E

21/8" DEEP FOR ARMORED & METAL CLAD (MCI) CABLE CLAMPS IN EACH END UL LISTED
TP431
TP431SSB KNOCKOUTS
TP440
Cat. # TP431* TP431PF TP431SSB* TP440*
Metal Stud Sizes All
Bracket SSB "VMS"
Description Welded Welded Welded Welded
Sides 4 4 4 4 Cable, Cable, Cable, Cable, 4 4 4 2 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2",

1
Bottom 2 2 2 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2"

1
Unit Qty. 25 25 25 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 91 91 102 103
& & & &
/4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4"

3
E E E E
1 1 1 1
/2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2"

1
TP catalog numbers ending in PF includes ground screw with pigtail lead *UL approved for use with aluminum interlocking grounding metal clad cable, Type MCIA (Southwire MCAP) MCAP is a registered trademark of Soutwire Company.
298
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Steel Square Boxes & Covers
4" SQUARE TWODEVICE BOXES 30.3 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY

21/8" DEEP UL LISTED
CP
TP391 KNOCKOUTS Cat. # TP391 TP395 Bracket "VS", Set 7/8" Description Drawn Drawn Sides 6 1/2", 3 3/4" 8 1/2", 4 3/4"
TP395 Bottom 3 1/2", 2 3/4" 3 1/2", 2 3/4" Std. Unit Pkg. 25 25 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 95 84
4" SQUARE EXTENSION RINGS

11/2" DEEP WITH CONDUIT KNOCKOUTS 21.0 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY 21/8" DEEP WITH CONDUIT KNOCKOUTS 30.3 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY UL LISTED
TP424
TP422 KNOCKOUTS Sides 12 /2" 8 1/2", 4 8 3/4" 8 1/2", 4 8 1/2", 4 8 1/2", 4 8 1" 8 1/2", 4
1
TP426
TP428RED
TP443 (21/8" Deep)
TP428, TP833*
Cat. # TP424 TP422 TP426 TP428 TP428RED TP443 TP465 TP833*
Bottom
Unit Qty. 50 50 50 50 50 25 25 50
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 46 50 46 46 46 66 60 48
1/2" + 3/4" E 3/4" 3/4" 3/4" 3/4"
*For Air Plenum (No Mounting Holes). Requires the use of TP854, purchase separately - Not UL Listed
FLEXIBLE FIXTURE HANGERS

Cooper Crouse-Hinds TPSFH square flexible fixture hangers are used in commercial or light industrial applications where HID high bay and low bay lighting fixtures are used. Specific applications include storage facilities, shipping warehouses, retail and DIY facilities.

UL Listed UL 1598 CSA C22.2 No. 250 Suitable for Damp Locations

Material: Sheet Steel Finish: Zinc Chromate for corrosion resistance

Suitable for use with 1/2" or 3/4" fixture conduit stems these hangers allow the conduit stem of the fixture (luminaire) to swing in any direction. Maximum swing angle is 26 from vertical max slope angles 221/2 Available for attachment to 4" square steel boxes. Quickly and easily attached by two screws. Hangers are drilled and tapped for use with 3/4" conduit stem as standard and come supplied with a 3/4" 1/2" reducer for 1/2" conduit stem applications.
Description For use with 4" Square boxes
Support Wt. (lbs) 50
Cat. # TPSFH12
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
299
Steel Square Covers
COVERS FOR 4" SQUARE BOXES CUBIC INCH CAPACITY (SEE BELOW)
UL LISTED #8-32 screw used on covers
CP
TP472
TP472RED
TP474
TP478 TP487
TP473, TP475, TP476, TP477, TP479, TP483 Unit Qty. 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 25 25 25 25 25 31 31 21 31 29 23 26 27 31 34 37 31 12
TP850*
TP854*
Cat. # TP472 TP472RED TP474 TP478 TP487 TP473 TP476 TP477 TP475 TP479 TP483 Air Plenum TP850* TP854*
Description Flat Blank Flat Blank Flat Blank, Open With Ears 23/4" Flat with 1/2" ko Flat with 3/4" ko Raised 1/4", Open With Ears 23/4" Raised 1/2", Open With Ears 23/4" Raised 5/8", Open With Ears 23/4" Raised 3/4", Open With Ears 23/4" Raised 1", Open With Ears 23/4" Raised 11/4", Open With Ears 23/4" Flat Blank Gasketed With Captive Screws Flat Ring Double Gasketed
Wt. Lbs. Per 100
Capacity Cu. In. 1.3 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.5
*For Air Plenum (No Mounting Holes) - Not UL Listed CSA Certified
MUD RINGS FOR 4" SQUARE STEEL OUTLET BOXES

UL LISTED
TP480
TP482, TP484, TP486, TP489 Description
TP494
TP488, TP490
Cat. # ONE DEVICE TP480 TP482 TP484 TP489 TP486 TP488 TP490 AMR1* TWO DEVICE TP494 TP496 TP498 TP499 TP500 TP501 TP502 AMR2*
TP496, TP499, AMR1 TP500, TP501, TP502 Unit Qty. Wt. Lbs. Per 100 20 21 23 26 30 34 39 47 12 13 18 22 24 31 30 50
AMR2
Capacity Cu. In. 1.8 3.8 4.3 5.5 6.8 8.5 3.0 6.0 8.0 9.0 14.0 11.7 -
Flat /4" Raised 1 /2" Raised 5 /8" Raised 3 /4" Raised 1" Raised 11/4" Raised 3 /4" - 11/2" Raised Adjustable
1
50 50 50 50 50 50 25 25 50 50 50 50 50 25 25 25
Flat 1 /4" Raised 1 /2" Raised 5 /8" Raised 3 /4" Raised 11/4" Raised 1" Raised 5 /8" - 11/2" Raised Adjustable
Slotted design for use with 4" square box partitions *ETL Listed
300
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Steel Square Covers
SMARTGUARD PROTECTIVE PLATES Applications:

For use with single-, two-, three-, four- and five-gang commercial or residential boxes/plaster rings; with or without devices, switches, GFCI, etc. installed Commercial or residential ceiling boxes 6" commercial or residential lighting cans 14" or 24" wide breaker boxes
Material:
High-impact, router-resistant PVC
SmartGuard
CP

Seals out sheetrock mud, sanding dust and paint overspray to keep the electrical box and its wiring free from contaminants Router resistant material provides mechanical protection to box and wiring and speeds up trim process Clear material makes visual inspection quick and easy Less expensive and easier to use than metallic alternatives Reduces risk of call backs and expense of rework because of wire and box damage Description Pre-Fabricated Box, Cover, Ground Screw and Lead Assembly SmartGuard SmartGuard SmartGuard SmartGuard SmartGuard SmartGuard SmartGuard SmartGuard SmartGuard SmartGuard SmartGuard SmartGuard SmartGuard SmartGuard SmartGuard SmartGuard SmartGuard SmartGuard SmartGuard SmartGuard SmartGuard SmartGuard SmartGuard SmartGuard SmartGuard SmartGuard SmartGuard SmartGuard 1G Mud Ring Blank 1G Mud Ring w/Device Installed 1G Mud Ring w/Toggle Installed 2G Mud Ring Blank 2G Mud Ring w/Device Installed 2G Mud Ring w/Toggle Installed 3G Mud Ring Blank 4G Mud Ring Blank 5G Mud Ring Blank 1G PVC Resi Box 2G PVC Resi Box 3G PVC Resi Box 1G Mud Ring Blank 3 1/2" NM Resi Ceiling Box 4" NM Resi Ceiling Box Meter Base Cover Panel/Breaker Box 14" Wide Panel/Breaker Box 20" Wide 1G Mud Ring w/Device InstalledBulk 1G Mud Ring w/Toggle InstalledBulk 2G Mud Ring w/Device InstalledBulk 2G Mud Ring w/Toggle InstalledBulk 3" Round Comm. Ceiling Box Low Voltage Serv Ctr 14" Wide lighting can 6"Halo lighting can 6"Juno Contractor Kit (150-1G, 50-2G, 20-3G, 10-4G, 5-5G, 25-3" ceiling) Residential Kit (150-1G, 50-2G, 20-3G, 10-4G, 20-3-1/2" ceiling, 20-4" ceiling) Std. Unit Pkg. 50 50 50 25 25 25 20 10 5 50 25 20 10 20 20 5 1 1 1000 1000 500 500 25 1 10 10 1 1 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 1 1 2 1 3 3 3 4 5 1 2 3 3 1 1 3 125 219 1 2 3 3 1 125 3 3 50 50
Cat. # SGMR1 SGD1 SGT1 SGMR2 SGD2 SGT2 SGMR3 SGMR4 SGMR5 SGR1 SGR2 SGR3 SGR4 SGR03 SGR04 SGMB1 SGP14 SGP20 SGD1 BULK SGT1 BULK SGD2 BULK SGT2 BULK SGMR0 SGLV14 SGH6 SGJ6 SGCK1 SGRK1
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
301
Steel Square Covers
METALGUARD PROTECTIVE PLATES Applications:

For use with single-, two-, three- and four-gang commercial or residential boxes/plaster rings; with or without devices, switches, GFCI, etc. installed Commercial or residential ceiling boxes
Material & Finish:

18 gauge steel Natural finish
CP

Seals out sheetrock mud, sanding dust and paint overspray to keep the electrical box and its wiring free from contaminants Heavy duty reusable metallic plate provides mechanical protection to box and wiring and speeds up trim process Easy to install. All you have to do is push them in! They come out easyjust put a screwdriver into the slot in front, turn and pull them out Reduces risk of call backs and expense of rework because of wire and box damage MetalGuard serves as a guide for router in cutting out boxes Cat. # MGRK MGR1 MGR2 MGR3 MGR4 MGR0 MGMR1 MGMR2 MGMR0 MGS1 Description Pre-Fabricated Box, Cover, Ground Screw and Lead Assembly Contractor Kit (120-1G, 40-2G, 20-3G, 5-4G, and 20-Rnd) 1G Residential Wire Protector 2G Residential Wire Protector 3G Residential Wire Protector 4G Residential Wire Protector Rnd Residential Wire Protector 1G Wire Protector for Commercial MR 2G Wire Protector for Commercial MR Rnd Wire Protector for Commercial MR Gangable Spacer Wire Protector Std. Unit Pkg. 1 60 20 20 5 20 50 50 50 100 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 -
4" SQUARE SURFACE COVERS 5.5 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY

RAISED 1/2" UL LISTED
TP503
TP504
TP506
TP508
TP510
TP512
TP507, TP514 TP519
TP516
Cat. # TP503 TP504 TP506 TP508 TP510 TP512 TP507 TP514 TP519 TP516 TP509 TP518 TP513 TP511 TP515 TP517
CSA Certified
TP509, TP518
Description
TP513
TP511
TP515
TP517
Unit Qty. 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 35 31 31 35 26 35 37 34 37 31 23 34 31 26 31 26
Raised Blank For One Toggle Switch, One Single Receptacle 113/32" Dia. For One Toggle Switch, One Duplex Receptacle For Two Toggle Switches For Two Duplex Receptacles For One Toggle Switch For One 20 Amp, Single Receptacle 119/32" Dia. For One Single Receptacle 113/32" Dia. For One 30 Amp. Twist-Lock Single Receptacle 123/32" Dia. For One Duplex Receptacle For One 30 60 Amp. Receptacle (4-wire) 27/16" Dia. For One 30 50 Amp. Receptacle 29/64" Dia. For One GFCI Receptacle For Two GFCI Receptacles For One Toggle Switch, One GFCI Receptacle For One Duplex Receptacle, One GFCI Receptacle
302
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Steel Square Boxes
UNI-MOUNT COVERS
The Unimount combines the features of a mounting device plate with those of a box support; giving you one universal plate for all of your needs. Specifically designed for use with metal or wood studs: The new and improved version incorporates four small holes on the left side (support side) of the bracket. These holes allow for the attachment of box mounting brackets to allow for use of both sides of the stud. The holes are strategically located to accept either the BLine BB423 bracket or the Caddy H23 bracket. Additionally, the viewing hole has been significantly enlarged (and is now diamond shaped) to make it even easier to find mark lines on the stud.
CP
Guide tabs ensure consistant alignment on stud Stud alignment hole ensures consistent mounting height Rigid bracket design elminates the need for far side support Available as a single or two device cover Universal design fits all 4" Square boxes Available in 1/2", 5/8" and 3/4" raised. Can be ordered preassembled to popular 4" square boxes. Fast and easy installation Can be used in multiple applications, resulting in less items to stock. Less labor intensive. Less material handling. No multiple assemblies to handle. Can be used in Class 2 communications outlets for low voltage without a box. UL Listed and CSA certified.*
Single Gang Cat. # SINGLE GANG TP30000 TP31000 TP32000 TWO GANG TP35000 TP36000 TP37000 Description
1 5 3
Two Gang Capacity Cu. In. 3.8 4.3 5.5 6 8 9 Unit Qty. 50 50 50 50 50 50 1000 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 43 46 50 38 52 54 .5
/2" Raised /8" Raised /4" Raised
/2" Raised /8" Raised 3 /4" Raised

1 5
LOW PROFILE SCREWS - REDUCES RISK OF SHEETROCK BULGE TP710 L.P. Screws
* CSA requires a far side support.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
303
Steel Square Boxes
TILE WALL COVERS FOR 4" SQUARE BOXES CUBIC INCH CAPACITY (SEE BELOW)
UL LISTED
CP
TP524
TP534
Applications:
Typically used with tile or brick Cat. # ONE DEVICE TP520 TP522 TP524 TP526 TP528 TP530 TWO DEVICE TP532 TP534 TP536 TP538 TP540 TP542 Description /2" Raised /4" Raised 1" Raised 11/4" Raised 11/2" Raised 2" Raised
1 3
Unit Qty. 50 50 50 25 25 25 10 10 10 10 10 10
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 30 36 40 46 50 62 24 30 36 44 50 66
Capacity Cu. In. 3.7 5.5 7.4 9.3 11.0 14.8 5 7.8 10.3 13 15.5 20.8
/2" Raised /4" Raised 1" Raised 11/4" Raised 11/2" Raised 2" Raised
1 3
4" SQUARE BOX PARTITIONS
TP860
TP861
TP862 Unit Qty. 25 25 25 25
TP863 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 13 18 16 21
Cat. # Description FOR 11/2" DEEP BOX WITH SQUARE CUT TILE WALL TWO-GANG COVERS TP860 For 1/2", 3/4", 1" Raised Covers TP861 For 11/4", 11/2", 2" Raised Covers FOR 21/8" DEEP BOX WITH SQUARE CUT TILE WALL TWO-GANG COVERS TP862 For 1/2", 3/4", 1" Raised Covers TP863 For 11/4", 11/2", 2" Raised Covers
304
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Steel Square Boxes
411/16" SQUARE OUTLET BOXES AND COVERS Applications:

For use with conduit For use in commercial and industrial applications, where larger sized conductor or wiring devices are nedded and additional volume is required
CP
Can be ceiling mounted to be used as a junction box or to mount lighting fixtures Available in red for fire alarm applications
Features:
Ideal for exposed work applications, providing an easy method for the installation of electrical devices (switches, receptacles, fans, lights, etc.) Raised ground screw location in the welded boxes saves time in installation Concentric knockouts have a 1/2" and 3/4" knockout in the same location for customer flexibility Knockouts are suitable for use without a bonding jumper in circuits above or below 250 volts Available in two depths for differing cubic capacity requirements Welded or drawn construction to match customer preference Extensive cover offering to meet various customer applications and needs

UL Listed
411/16" SQUARE OUTLET BOXES 29.5 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY

TP523 KNOCKOUTS Cat. # Description 29.5 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY TP523 Welded TP523PF Welded TP548 Drawn TP549 Drawn Sides 12 1/2" & 3/4" C 12 1/2" & 3/4" C 8 1/2", 4 3/4" 6 1/2", 6 1/2" & 3/4" C
TP548
TP549
Bottom 2 2 3 3 /2", /2", 1 /2", 1 /2",

1 1
Unit Qty. /4" /4" 3 /4" 3 /4"

3 3
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 99 99 84 84
2 2 2 2
25 25 25 25
TP catalog numbers ending in PF includes ground screw with pigtail lead
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
305
Steel Square Boxes
411/16" SQUARE OUTLET BOXES 42.0 AND 44.0 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY
CP
TP563
TP554 TP842*
TP556 TP832*
TP556RED
TP558 TP835*
TP560 TP836*
TP562
TP557
TP521
TP525
KNOCKOUTS Cat. # Description 42.0 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY TP563 Drawn TP554 Drawn TP556 Drawn TP556PF Drawn TP556RED Drawn TP558 Drawn TP560 Drawn TP562 Drawn TP557 Drawn 44.0 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY TP521 Welded TP521PF Welded TP525** Welded Air Plenum TP835* TP836* TP842* TP832* Brackets "VS" Sides 6 8 8 8 8 4 8 4 4 /2", 6 /4" 1 /2", 4 1 /2", 4 1 /2", 4 3 /4", 4 1" 11/ 4" 1 /2", 5
1 3
Bottom 1/2" & 3/4" C

3 3 3
Unit Qty. /4" /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4"
3 3
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 104 104 104 104 104 104 104 104 120 115 115 115 115 115 115 115
/4" /4" /4" 1"
1/2" & 3/4" C
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
/2", /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2",

1 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
12 1/ 2" & 3/ 4" C 12 1/ 2" & 3/ 4" C 12 1/ 2" & 3/ 4" E 4 3/4", 4 1" 8 1" 12 3/4" 8 1/2", 4 3/4"
2 1/2", 2 3/4" 2 1/2", 2 3/4" 2 1/2", 2 1/2", 3/4" E 3 3 3 3 /2", /2", 1 /2", 1 /2",
1 1
2 2 2 2
/4" /4" 3 /4" 3 /4"

3 3
*For Air Plenum (No Mounting Holes) - Not UL Listed **Raised ground bump contains holes for 2 ground screws TP catalog numbers ending in PF includes ground screw with pigtail lead Not UL Listed
306
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Steel Square Covers
411/16" SQUARE EXTENSION RINGS

11/2" DEEP WITH CONDUIT KOs - 29.5 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY 21/8" DEEP WITH CONDUIT KOs - 42.0 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY UL LISTED CP
TP550 KNOCKOUTS Sides 8 1/2", 4 3/4" 8 1/2", 4 3/4" 8 1/2", 4 3/4" 21/8" Deep 8 1/2", 4 3/4"
TP564 TP837* Bottom Unit Qty. 25 25 25 25
TP564RED Wt. Lbs. Per 100 66 84 84 115
Cat. # 11/2" Deep TP550 2 /8" Deep TP564 TP564RED

1
Description
Air Plenum TP837*
Note: *For Air Plenum (No Mounting Holes) - Not UL Listed TP837 requires the use of TP852, purchased separately.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
307
Steel Square Covers
411/16" SQUARES COVERS CUBIC INCH CAPACITY (SEE BELOW)

UL LISTED
CP
TP568
TP568RED
TP569, TP570, TP571, TP573, TP575
TP574 TP582, TP529, TP531 Unit Qty. 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 50 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
TP584, TP586, TP589,TP593, TP541, TP543
TP851*
TP852*
Cat. # FLAT AND RAISED TP568 TP568RED TP569 TP570 TP571 TP572 TP573 TP575 AIR PLENUM TP851* TP852* ONE DEVICE TP574 TP576 TP578 TP579 TP580 TP582 TP529 TP531 TWO DEVICE TP590 TP583 TP584 TP587 TP586 TP589 TP593 TP541 TP543
*For Air Plenum (No Mounting Holes) CSA Certified Not UL Listed
Description Flat Blank Flat Blank 1 /2" Raised, With Ears 23/4" Raised 5/8", With Ears 23/4" 3 /4" Raised, With Ears 23/4" Flat, With 1/2" KO 1" Raised, With Ears 23/4" 11/4" Raised, With Ears 23/4" Flat Blank Gasketed Captive Screws Flat Ring Double Gasketed /4" Raised /2" Raised 3 /4" Raised 5 /8" Raised 1" Raised 11/4" Raised 11/2" Raised 2" Raised
1 1
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 40 40 36 38 40 40 44 48 42 20 32 36 42 39 46 52 64 76 21 26 30 32 34 38 42 63 79
Capacity Cu. In. 3.3 3.8 5.0 7.0 9.0 1.8 3.3 5.0 4.5 6.8 8.5 11.3 15.0 3.0 6.0 8.0 8.8 11.7 14.0 18.8 24.5
Flat 1 /4" Raised 1 /2" Raised 5 /8" Raised 3 /4" Raised 1" Raised 11/4" Raised 11/2" Raised 2" Raised
308
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Steel Square Covers
411/16" SQUARE SURFACE COVERS 9.0 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY

1
/ 2" RAISED
CP
TP720
TP722
TP724 TP730 TP736
TP726
TP728 Cat. # TP720 TP722 TP724 TP730 TP736 TP726 TP728 TP732 TP734 TP738 TP740 TP741 Description For For For For For For For For For For For For
TP732
TP734
TP738 Unit Qty. 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 25 10
TP740 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 52 49 53 50 51 52 44 48 45 45 45 43
One Toggle Switch One Duplex Receptacle One Single Receptacle 113/32" Dia. One 20 Amp Single Receptacle 1.620" Dia. One 1.730" Dia. Power Outlet Two Toggle Switches Two Duplex Receptacles One 2.125" Dia. Range/Dryer Receptacle One 2.480" Dia. Power Outlet One Ground Fault Interrupter One GFI Receptacle & One Toggle Two GFI Receptacles
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
309
Steel Utility Boxes & Covers
UTILITY BOXES CUBIC INCH CAPACITY (SEE BELOW)

4" LONG x 21/8" WIDE UL LISTED
CP
TP588, TP647
TP591
TP592, TP600, TP602 KNOCKOUTS
TP598 TP605
TP594, TP596, TP604, TP606,
Cat. # Bracket 11/4" DEEP 8.5 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY TP647 11/2" DEEP 10.3 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY TP588 TP591 "F", Set 1/4"
Sides 8 1/2" 8 1/2" 5 1/2"
Bottom 3 1/2" 3 1/2" 3 1/2" 3 1/2" 3 1/2" 3 1/2" 3 1/2" 3 1/2" 3 1/2"
Unit Qty. 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 40 42 51 36 50 50 60 41 41 56 56 66
11/2" DEEP EXTENSION RINGS 10.3 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY TP592 8 1/2" 17/8" DEEP 13.0 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY TP594 TP596 TP598 "S", SET 1/2" 8 1/2" 6 3/4" 5 1/2"
17/8" DEEP EXTENSION RINGS 13.0 CUBIC INCH CAPACTIY TP600 8 1/2" TP602 6 3/4" 21/8" DEEP 14.5 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY TP604 TP606 TP605 "S", Set 1/2" 8 1/2" 6 3/4" 5 1/2"
UTILITY BOX COVERS

UL LISTED
TP608 Cat. # TP608* TP610* TP612* TP613* TP614* TP616* TP618*

*CSA Certified
TP610 Description
TP612
TP613
TP614
TP616 Unit Qty. 100 100 100 100 100 100 100
TP618 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 10 9 9 7 10 8 10
Blank For 20 and 30 AMP, Twist Lock, 119/32" Diameter Single Receptacle, 113/32" Diameter For GFCI Device 1 /2" KO Duplex Receptacle One Toggle Switch
310
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Steel Switch Boxes
1" DEEP - NON-GANGABLE - 6.5 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY

115/16" WIDE x 33/4" LONG
CP
TP101
TP103 KNOCKOUTS
Cat. # TP101 TP103
Bracket "S" "S"
Plastic Clamp No Yes
Conduit 1 1/2" 1 1/2"
Cable 2 2
Unit Qty. 25 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 38 39
11/2" DEEP - NON-GANGABLE - 7.5 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY

2" WIDE x 3" LONG UL LISTED
TP100
TP104 KNOCKOUTS
TP106
TP114
Cat. # Bracket Ears Each End FOR NONMETALLIC CABLE CLAMPS IN EACH END TP100 Yes 2 Cable TP104 "S", set 1/2" 2 Cable
Each Side
Bottom 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1 1/2"
Unit Qty. 50 50 50 50
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 43 50 44 39
FOR ARMORED & METAL CLAD (MCI) CABLE CLAMPS IN EACH END TP106* Yes 2 Cable FOR CONDUIT NO CLAMPS, FLUSH DEVICE TP114 Yes 1 1/2"
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
311
Steel Switch Boxes
2" DEEP GANGABLE 10.0 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY

CP
TP116
TP118
TP120
TP123
TP124
TP126
TP130
TP132
TP131 Hold-Tite
KNOCKOUTS Cat. # Bracket Ears Each End FOR NONMETALLIC CABLE CLAMPS IN EACH END TP116 Yes 2 Cable 2 Cable TP118 "S", Set 5/8" FOR ARMORED & METAL CLAD TP120* TP123* "F", Set 1/2" TP124* "S", Set 5/8" Each Side Bottom 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1 1 1 1 /2" /2" 1 /2" 1 /2"
1 1
Unit Qty. 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 53 60 54 63 61 47 48 58 52
(MCI) CABLE CLAMPS IN EACH END Yes 2 Cable 2 Cable 2 Cable 1 1 1 1 /2" /2" 1 /2" 1 /2"T
1 1
FOR CONDUIT NO CLAMPS, FLUSH DEVICE TP126 TP130 Yes TP132 "S", Set 5/8" TP131 Hold-Tite Yes
2 1/2" 2 1/2" 2 1/2", 1 Side
312
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Steel Switch Boxes
21/4" DEEP GANGABLE BEVELED CORNERS 10.5 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY

CP
TP134
TP137 Hold-Tite KNOCKOUTS
TP138
Cat. # Description Ears Bumps CLAMP SCREWS THROUGH BEVELED CORNERS TP134 Gangable Yes TP137 Gangable Yes TP138 Gangable Yes
Each End 2 Cable 2 Cable 2 Cable
Each Side
Bottom 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1 1/2"
Unit Qty. 50 50 50
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 51 57 55
21/2" DEEP GANGABLE 12.5 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY

TP158 (Pigtail included not shown in picture)
TP162
TP163
TP164 TP168
TP170
TP161
TP172 KNOCKOUTS
TP174
TP171
Cat. # Bracket Ears FOR NONMETALLIC CABLE TP115* TP158 Yes TP161 Snap-In Yes TP162 Yes TP163 Hold-Tite Yes TP164 "F", Set 1/2" TP168 "F", Set 1/4" TP170 "S", Set 5/8" TP172 "D", Set 5/8" TP174 "D", Set 5/8" TP171 "VP", Set 1/2"
*Not UL Listed
Ground Pigtail Leveling Bumps - CLAMPS IN EACH END Yes Yes Yes
Each End 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Cable, Cable Cable Cable Cable Cable, Cable, Cable, Cable, Cable, Cable, 1 1/2"
Each Side 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Bottom 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1
Unit Qty. 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 59 63 73 62 65 71 71 69 70 71 73
/2" 1 /2" 1 /2"

1
/2" /2"
1 1 1 1 1 1
/2" /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2"

1 1
/2" /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2"

1 1
/2" /2" /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2"

1 1 1
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
313
Steel Switch Boxes

2" WIDE x 3" LONG FOR ARMORED & METAL CLAD (MCI) CABLE CLAMPS IN EACH END UL LISTED
CP
TP177
TP178
TP179 Hold-Tite
TP180
TP184 KNOCKOUTS Cat. # TP177* TP178* TP179* TP180* TP184* TP185* Bracket Snap-In Hold-Tite "F", Set 1/2" "S", Set 5/8" "VP", Set 1/2" Ears Yes Yes Yes Each End 2 2 2 2 2 2 Cable Cable Cable Cable, 1 1/2" Cable, 1 1/2" Cable, 1 1/2"
TP185
Each Side 1 1 1 1 1 /2" 1 /2"

1
Bottom 1 1 1 1 1 /2" /2" /2" 1 /2" 1 /2"

1 1 1
Unit Qty. 50 50 50 50 50 50
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 74 63 66 72 70 74
/2" /2" 1 /2"

1 1
GANG BOXES SET BACK 1/2"

21/2" DEEP 33/4" HIGH UL LISTED
1
/2"
AND
/4"
CONCENTRIC KOs
TP632
TP633 KNOCKOUTS
TP637
TP638
Cat. # TP632 TP633 TP637 TP638
Gang 3 4 3 4
Bracket VP VP VS VS
Width 59/16" 73/8" 59/16" 73/8"
Each End 2 2 2 2
Each Side 3 4 3 4
Bottom 6 8 6 8
Unit Qty. 5 5 5 5
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 143 179 143 179
Capacity Cu. In. 46.5 62.0 46.5 62.0
314
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Steel Switch Boxes
21/2" DEEP "EC" BOXES GANGABLE CUBIC INCH CAPACITY (SEE BELOW)
2" WIDE x 3" LONG CLAMPS IN EACH END UL LISTED CP
TP188
TP190
TP196
Note: The Cubic Capacity of any of our new work 21/2" Deep Switch Boxes can be increased to 18 cubic inches simply by adding our "EC" Extender to the sides of the box. This provides 5.5 extra cubic inches of space necessary to conform to revisions in the National Electrical Code. "EC" boxes are stocked factory assembled in popular styles, however the "EC" Extender can be ordered separately for "Instant-On" assembly on the job with Cooper Crouse-Hinds Switch Boxes.
KNOCKOUTS Cat. # TP188 Bracket Each End 2 Cable, 1 1/2" 2 Cable, 1 1/2" Each Side Bottom 1 1/2" 1 1/2" Unit Qty. 50 25 25 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 32 89 89 Capacity Cu. In. 5.5 18.0 18.0
FOR NONMETALLIC CABLE TP190 "D", Set 5/8" TP196 "S", Set 5/8"

2" WIDE x 3" LONG FOR CONDUIT NO CLAMPS UL LISTED
TP214
TP216
TP217
TP218
TP220
TP222 KNOCKOUTS
TP224
Cat. # TP214 TP216 TP217 TP218 TP220 TP222 TP224
Bracket Snap-In "F", Set 1/2" "S", Set 5/8" Hold-Tite
Ears Yes Yes Yes Yes
Leveling Bumps Yes

Each End 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2"

1
Each Side 1 1 1 1
1
Bottom 1 1 1 1 1 1
1
Unit Qty. 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 55 69 64 58 66 65 61 315
/2"
/2"
/2" 1 /2", 1 Side 1 /2", 1 Side

1
/2" /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2"

1 1
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Steel Switch Boxes

CP
TP660
TP662
TP664
TP668
TP670 KNOCKOUTS Each End IN EACH END 2 Cable 2 Cable 2 Cable
Cat. # Bracket Ears FOR NONMETALLIC CABLE CLAMPS TP660 TP662 Yes TP664 "S", Set 5/ 8"
Each Side 1 1/ 2" 1 1/ 2" 1 1/ 2"
Bottom 1 1/ 2" 1 1/ 2" 1 1/ 2" 1 1/ 2" 1 1/ 2"
Unit Qty. 50 50 50 50 50
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 62 67 70 68 71
FOR ARMORED & METAL CLAD (MCI) CABLE CLAMPS IN EACH END TP668* Yes 2 Cable 1 1/ 2" TP670* "S", Set 5/ 8" 2 Cable 1 1/ 2"
316
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Steel Switch Boxes
23/ 4" DEEP GANGABLE 14.0 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY

2" WIDE x 3" LONG FOR CONDUIT NO CLAMPS UL LISTED CP
TP672 TP674
(TP676 1 screw ear) (TP678 2 screw ear) KNOCKOUTS
TP680 TP677
Cat. # TP672 TP674 TP676 TP678 TP680 TP677
Bracket "S", Set 5/8" "S", Set 5/8"
Ears Yes Yes
Each End 1 1 1 1 1 1 /2" 3 /4" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1 /2" 3 /4"

1
Each Side 1 1 1 1 1 1 /2" 3 /4" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1 /2", 1 Side 3 /4", 1 Side
1
Bottom 1 1 1 1 1 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2"

1
Unit Qty. 50 50 50 50 50 50
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 59 59 61 61 70 70

2" WIDE x 3" LONG FOR NONMETALLIC CABLE CLAMPS IN EACH END UL LISTED
TP236
TP238
TP239
TP240
TP242 KNOCKOUTS Cat. # TP236 TP238 TP239 TP240 TP242 TP243 Bracket "F", Set 1/2" "S", Set 7/8" "S", Set 7/8" Ground Pigtail Yes Yes Ears Yes Yes Each End 2 2 2 2 2 2 Cable, Cable, Cable, Cable, Cable, Cable, 1 1 1 1 1 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2"
1
TP243
Each Side 2 2 2 2 2 2 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2"

1
Bottom 1 1 1 1 1 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2"

1
Unit Qty. 25 25 25 25 25 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 78 80 81 88 87 88
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
317
Steel Switch Boxes

2" WIDE x 3" LONG FOR ARMORED & METAL CLAD (MCI) CABLE CLAMPS IN EACH END UL LISTED CP
TP244
TP249 KNOCKOUTS
TP246
Cat. # TP244* TP249* TP246*
Bracket "S", Set 7/8"
Ground Pigtail Yes
Ears Yes Yes
Each End 2 Cable, 1 1/2" 2 Cable, 1 1/2" 2 Cable, 1 1/2"
Each Side 2 1/2" 2 1/2" 2 1/2"
Bottom 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1 1/2"
Unit Qty. 25 25 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 81 82 88

2" WIDE x 3" LONG FOR CONDUIT NO CLAMPS UL LISTED
TP248 TP250
TP252
TP254
KNOCKOUTS Cat. # TP248 TP250 TP252 TP254 Bracket Ears Yes Yes Each End 2 2 2 2 /2" 3 /4" 1 /2" 3 /4"
1
Each Side 2 2 2 2 /2" 3 /4" 1 /2" 3 /4"

1
Bottom 1 1 1 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2"

1
Unit Qty. 25 25 25 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 74 74 76 76
318
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Steel Gang Boxes
GANG BOXES
15/8" DEEP x 41/2" HIGH 1 /2" & 3/4" KOs UL LISTED CP
TP630 KNOCKOUTS Cat. # TP629 TP630 TP631 TP640 TP641 Gang 2 3 4 5 6 Cubic Inches 45 58 70 85 95 Width 613/16" 85/8" 107/16" 121/4" 141/16" Each Side 2 3 3 4 4 /2", 2 3/4" /2", 2 3/4" 1 /2", 3 3/4" 1 /2", 3 3/4" 1 /2" 4 3/4"
1 1
TP640 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 45 58 70 85 95
Each End 1 1 1 1 1 /2", /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2",

1 1
Bottom /4" /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4"

3 3
Unit Qty. /4" /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4"

3 3
1 1 1 1 1
3 6 6 6 6
/2", /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2",

1 1
2 4 4 4 4
5 5 5 1 1
GANG BOXES
21/ 2" DEEP x 41/ 2" HIGH 3 / 4" & 1" KOs UL LISTED
TP871 KNOCKOUTS Cat. # TP870 TP871 TP872 TP873 TP874 Gang 2 3 4 5 6 Cubic Inches 71 90 110 132 150 Width 613/16" 85/8" 107/16" 121/4" 141/16" Each Side 2 4 2 3 3 /4", /4", 3 /4", 3 /4", 3 /4",
3 3
TP873
Each End 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 1 1 1 1 1 /4", /4", 3 /4", 3 /4", 3 /4",
3 3
Bottom 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 3 6 6 6 6 /2", /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2",
1 1
Unit Qty. /4" /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4"

3 3
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 147 183 216 263 282
1 1 2 2 3
1 1 1 1 1
2 4 4 4 4
10 10 5 5 5
GANG BOX PARTITIONS
TP876 Cat. # TP876 TP877 Description For 15/8" Deep Box For 21/2" Deep Box Unit Qty. 25 50 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 19 24
TP877
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
319
Steel Gang Box Covers
GANG BOX COVERS

RAISED
13
/16"
FOR PLASTER
UL LISTED
CP
TP653 Cat. # TP657 TP653 TP655 TP661 TP667 Gang 2 3 4 5 6 Length 7" 813/16" 105/8" 127/16" 141/4" Unit Qty. 5 5 5 5 5 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 53 60 66 75 85
TP667 Capacity Cu. In. 8.5 13.5 18.3 23.0 28.3
GANG BOX COVERS, FLAT, BLANK

UL LISTED
TP803 Cat. # TP802 TP803 TP804 TP805 TP806 Gang 2 3 4 5 6 Length 7" 813/16" 105/8" 127/16" 141/4" Unit Qty. 5 5 5 1 1 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 66 85 94 122 132
TP806
320
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Steel Masonry Boxes
MASONRY BOXES
21/2" DEEP 33/4" HIGH 1 /2" AND 3/4" CONCENTRIC KOs UL LISTED CP
TP682 KNOCKOUTS Cat. # TP682 TP683 TP684 TP685 TP686 TP687 Gang 1 2 3 4 5 6 Width 115/16" 33/4" 59/16" 73/8" 93/16" 11" Each Side 2 2 2 2 2 2 Each End 1 2 3 4 5 6 Bottom 2 4 6 8 10 12 Unit Qty. 20 10 5 5 5 1 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 70 103 129 165 189 230 Capacity Cu. In. 15.5 31.0 46.5 62.0 77.5 93.0
MASONRY BOXES
31/2" DEEP 33/4" HIGH 1 /2" AND 3/4" CONCENTRIC KOs UL LISTED
TP690 KNOCKOUTS Cat. # TP690 TP691 TP692 TP693 TP694 TP695 Gang 1 2 3 4 5 6 Width 115/16" 33/4" 59/16" 73/8" 93/16" 11" Each Side 2 2 2 2 2 2 Each End 2 4 6 8 10 12 Bottom 2 4 6 8 10 12 Unit Qty. 20 10 10 5 5 1 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 84 120 155 207 235 287 Capacity Cu. In. 22.0 44.0 66.5 88.0 110.0 132.0
MASONRY BOX PARTITIONS

Cat. # TP820 TP821 Description Nonmetallic Partition for 21/2" Deep Masonry Boxes Nonmetallic Partition for 31/2" Deep Masonry Boxes Unit Qty. 25 25
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
321
Steel Masonry Boxes
GANGABLE MASONRY BOXES

UL LISTED
Features:
The gangable feature allows the option of creating a multiple gang box from a single gang box by simply removing the combo head screw holding the side with a #2 bit and connecting the two (or more) boxes together re-using the screws Non-metallic partitions (ordered separately) install quickly and easily without tools in multi-gang boxes and are used to separate power and control circuits within the same box, as required by the National Electrical Code
CP
KNOCKOUTS Cat. # Width Each Side Each End 21/2" DEEP 33/4" HIGH, 1/2" AND 3/4" CONCENTRIC KOs 2 2 TP671 115/16" 31/2" DEEP 33/4" HIGH, 1/2" AND 3/4" CONCENTRIC KOs 2 2 TP675 115/16" Bottom 2 2 Unit Qty. 20 20 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 63 82 Capacity Cu. In. 15.5 22.0
GANGABLE MASONRY BOX PARTITIONS

Cat. # TP654 TP656 Description Nonmetallic Partition for 21/2" Deep Gangable Masonry Boxes Nonmetallic Partition for 31/2" Deep Gangable Masonry Boxes Unit Qty. 25 25
322
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Steel Octagon Boxes & Ceiling Pans
31/4" ROUND CEILING PAN* 4.0 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY

/2" DEEP CLAMPS IN BOTTOM FIXTURE RATED
1
UL LISTED CP
TP266 KNOCKOUTS Cat. # TP266 31/4" ROUND COVERS TP270 TP272 Cable 4 Cable Flat Blank Flat, 1/2" KO in Center Conduit 1 1/2"
TP270
TP272
Unit Qty. 50 100 100
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 30 18 18
4" ROUND CEILING PANS* 6.0 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY

/2" DEEP FIXTURE RATED
1
UL LISTED
TP269 KNOCKOUTS Cat. # TP269 TP267 Description KOs Only KOs and Clamps Sides Bottom 5 1/2" 4 Cable, 3 1/2"
TP267
Unit Qty. 50 50
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 35 39
*Weight limit for 31/4" and 4" octagon outlet boxes and ceiling pans is 50lbs for fixture. Not suitable for fans.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
323
31/4" OCTAGON OUTLET BOXES* 11.5 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY

11/2" DEEP FIXTURE RATED UL LISTED CP
TP256
TP258 KNOCKOUTS
TP259
TP260
TP264
Cat. # Description FOR CONDUIT NO CLAMPS TP256 TP258 Extension Ring
Sides 4 1/2" 4 1/2"
Bottom 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1 1/2"
Unit Qty. 50 50 50 50 50
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 41 31 53 44 47
FOR NONMETALLIC CABLE WITH CLAMPS TP259 "S" Bracket, Set 1/2" 4 Cable, 1 1/2" TP260 4 Cable, 2 1/2" TP264 Two Screw Ears 4 Cable, 2 1/2"
4" OCTAGON OUTLET BOXES 15.5 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY

11/2" DEEP FOR CONDUIT NO CLAMPS FIXTURE RATED UL LISTED
TP274, TP276, TP278, TP834* Cat. # TP274 TP273 TP276 TP278 TP280 TP282 Description Blank Bottom "C" Bracket "S" Bracket, Set 1/2"
TP273 KNOCKOUTS Sides 4 4 4 2 4 3 /2" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1 /2", 2 3/4" 1 /2" 1 /2"
1
TP280
TP282
TP284, TP286
Bottom 5 3 3 5 5
1
Unit Qty. 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 50 51 50 50 60 58 52
/2"
/2", 2 3/4" /2", 2 3/4" 1 /2" 1 /2"

1 1
Air Plenum TP834* For Air Plenum
4 1/2"
5 1/2"
OCTAGON EXTENSION RINGS (SLOT & KEY PERMIT MOUNTING WITHOUT REMOVING BOX SCREWS) TP284 4 1/2" 50 36 TP286 2 1/2", 2 3/4" 50 36
*For Air Plenum (No Mounting Holes) - Not UL Listed Weight limit for 31/4" and 4" octagon outlet boxes and ceiling pans is 50lbs for fixture. Not suitable for fans CSA Certified
324
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

11/2" DEEP FOR ARMORED & METAL CLAD (MCI) CABLE CLAMPS IN EACH END FIXTURE RATED UL LISTED CP
TP310 KNOCKOUTS Cat. # TP310* TP312* TP314* Description "C" Bracket "S" Bracket, Set 1/2" Sides 4 Cable, 2 1/2" 4 Cable, 2 1/2" 4 Cable, 1 1/2"
TP312
TP314
Bottom 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1 1/2"
Unit Qty. 50 50 50
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 57 66 64

11/2" DEEP FOR NONMETALLIC CABLE WITH CLAMPS FIXTURE RATED UL LISTED
TP298 Cat. # TP298 TP300 TP302 TP304 TP306 TP308 Description
TP300
TP302 KNOCKOUTS Sides 4 4 4 4 4 4 Cable, Cable, Cable, Cable, Cable, Cable, 2 2 2 1 2 1 /2" /2" /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2"
1 1 1
TP304 Bottom 1 1 1 1 1 1 /2" /2" /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2"

1 1 1
TP306 Unit Qty. 50 50 50 50 50 50
TP308 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 56 55 65 64 58 64
With Side Nail Holes "C" Bracket "S" Bracket, Set 1/2" Two Screw Ears "F" Bracket, Set 1/2"
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
325

21/8" DEEP FOR CONDUIT NO CLAMPS FIXTURE RATED UL LISTED CP
TP288, TP290, TP294
TP292, TP838* KNOCKOUTS Sides 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 4 4 /2" /2" /4" 3 /4" 1 /2", 2 3/4" 1 /2", 2 3/4" 1 /2", 2 3/4" 1" 1 /2"
1 1 3
TP292RED
TP339
Cat. # TP288 TP288PF TP290 TP290PF TP292 TP292PF TP292RED TP294 TP339 Air Plenum TP838*
Description Blank Bottom Plenum
Bottom 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 /2", /2", /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2", 1 /2",

1 1 1
Unit Qty. /4" /4" /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 3 /4"
3 3 3
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 64 65 62
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
2 1/2", 2 3/4"
3 1/2", 2 3/4"
*For Air Plenum (No Mounting Holes) - Not UL Listed TP catalog numbers ending in PF includes ground screw with pigtail lead

21/8" DEEP WITH CABLE CLAMPS FIXTURE RATED UL LISTED
TP316
TP318 KNOCKOUTS
TP320
TP317
TP338
Cat. # Description FOR NONMETALLIC CABLE TP316 TP318 "C" Bracket TP320 "S" Bracket, Set 1/2" FOR ARMORED TP317* TP338* TP338PF
Sides 4 Cable, 2 1/2" 4 Cable, 2 1/2" 4 Cable, 1 1/2"
Bottom 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1 1/2" 1 1/2"
Unit Qty. 25 25 25 25 25 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 68 88 81 69 82 82
& METAL CLAD (MCI) CABLE-CLAMPS IN EACH END 4 Cable, 2 1/2" "S" Bracket, Set 1/2" 4 Cable, 1 1/2" "S" Bracket, Set 1/2" 4 Cable, 1 1/2"
TP catalog numbers ending in PF includes ground screw with pigtail lead *UL approved for use with aluminum interlocking grounding metal clad cable, Type MCIA (Southwire MCAP) MCAP is a registered trademark of Soutwire Company.
326
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Steel Octagon Covers & Accessories
4" OCTAGON BOX AND ADJUSTABLE BAR SETS 15.5 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY
11/2" DEEP BOX SETS FIXTURE RATED UL LISTED
Weight Limits: 35 lbs. at 16", 15 lbs. at 24"
CP
TP372 Cat. # FOR CONDUIT NO CLAMPS TP372* Stud Spacing 16" 24"
TP377 Stud Yes Unit Qty. 25 25 25 25
TP367 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 85 102 100 100
FOR NONMETALLIC CABLE WITH CLAMPS TP377 16" 24"
FOR ARMORED & METAL CLAD (MCI) CABLE CLAMPS IN EACH END TP367 16" 24" Yes TP367PF 16" 24" Yes
*4" Octagon Box and Adjustable Bar Sets have 1/2" KOs for conduit TP catalog numbers ending in PF includes ground screw with pigtail lead
ADJUSTABLE BAR HANGERS

HOLDING PRONG . . . HOLDS BOX IN PLACE FOR NAILING DESIGN RESISTS BENDING AND TWISTING TP354 AND TP356 HAVE LOCKING TABS TO HOLD BAR IN POSITION UL LISTED
Weight Limits: 50 lbs. at 16", 21 lbs. at 24".
TP356 Cat. # TP356 Stud Spacing 16" & 24" Length 14" 221/2" Stud Unit Qty. 50 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 41
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
327
Steel Octagon Covers & Accessories
4" OCTAGON BOX COVERS CUBIC CAPACITY (SEE BELOW)

UL LISTED
CP
TP322 TP853*
TP323
TP326, TP331, TP332, TP333
TP328
TP330
TP329 Cat. # TP322 TP323 TP333 TP332 TP326 TP331 TP328 TP330 TP329 TP335 TP334 TP336 Air Plenum TP853* Description
TP335
TP334 Capacity Cu. In. 7.0 3.3 3.8 5.0 3.8
TP336 Unit Qty. 50 50 25 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 22 24 30 22 20 26 22 31 24 23 21 18 24
Flat Blank Octagon Shape Flat Blank Round Shape Raised 1", Open With Ears 23/4" Raised 1/2", Open With Ears 23/4" Raised 5/8", Open With Ears 23/4" Raised 3/4", Open With Ears 23/4" Flat With 1/2" KO Octagon Shape Raised 5/8", With 1/2" KO Flat With 1/2" KO Round Shape Flat, For Toggle Switch Flat, Single Receptacle 113/32" Flat, For Duplex Receptacle Flat, Blank With PVC Gasket
*For Air Plenum (No Mounting Holes) CSA Certified Not UL Listed
FLEXIBLE FIXTURE HANGERS

Cooper Crouse-Hinds TPRFH flexible fixture hangers are used in commercial or light industrial applications where HID high bay and low bay lighting fixtures are used. Specific applications include storage facilities, shipping warehouses, retail and DIY facilities.


Suitable for use with 1/2" or 3/4" fixture conduit stems these hangers allow the conduit stem of the fixture (luminaire) to swing in any direction. Maximum swing angle is 26 from vertical max slope angles 221/2 Available for attachment to round or octagonal steel boxes. Quickly and easily attached by two screws. Hangers are drilled and tapped for use with 3/4" conduit stem as standard and come supplied with a 3/4" 1/2" reducer for 1/2" conduit stem applications.
Description For use with 4" Round or Octagon Boxes
Support Wt. (lbs) Cat. # 50 TPRFH12

328
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Steel Specialty Boxes
4" OCTAGON CONCRETE BOXES AND HUNG CEILING BOXES*

UL LISTED
CP
TP620, TP622, TP628
TP635, TP636, TP644
TP623, TP624 (bars not included) Wt. Lbs. Per 100 60 72 85 77 93 93 89 106 113 93 93 Capacity Cu. In. 23.0 29.0 35.0 30.3 43.0 43.0 41.0 47.0 47.0 43.0 43.0
Cat. # TP620 TP622 TP628 TP634 TP635 TP636 TP639 TP642 TP644
Depth 2" 21/2" 3" 3" 31/2" 31/2" 31/2" 4" 4"
KNOCKOUTS /2" & 3/4" Single Row /2" & 3/4" Single Row 1 /2" & 3/4" Single Row 1" & 3/4" Single Row 1 /2" Double Row 1 /2" & 3/4" Double Row 1" & 3/4" Double Row 1" & 3/4" Double Row 1 /2" & 3/4" Double Row
1 1
Unit Qty. 25 25 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
HUNG CEILING BOXES (WITH TP650 COVER, ORDER BARS SEPARATELY) 1 /2" Double Row TP623 31/2" 20 1 /2" & 3/4" Double Row 20 TP624 31/2"
*Weight limit for 4" octagon concrete boxes is 50lbs. Not suitable for fans. Not UL Listed
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
329
Steel Specialty Boxes
4" FAN RATED OCTAGON CONCRETE BOX

UL LISTED
CP
TP643
Applications:
Octagon concrete boxes are used in poured deck applications. Typical construction includes high-rises, apartments, condominiums and restaurants with outdoor dining areas. They are installed on wooden or steel forms and concrete poured around. Upon removal of the forms the box is flush with the concrete. It is common, and continuing to become even more so, to have ceiling fans mounted to these boxes. Because of the additional mounting support boss this new box is suitable for use with fans of up to 70 pounds and fixtures up to 90 pounds.
Features:
1. The TP643 fan rated concrete box is made from two piece welded construction and is supplied with two rows of & dedicated KOs. 2. The box is also supplied with two external mounting ears which are used to secure the box to the forms. 3. The fan (or fixture) is held securely in place by the two 10-32 x 1 long pan head screws and lock washers. The screws attach to the specially designed boss. 4. There are two 8-32 x screws provided for attachment of a box plate/cover (TP648, TP649, or TP650 ordered separately). 5. Mounting support boss & locknuts allows the TP643 box to be used with fans of up to 70 pounds and fixtures up to 90 pounds. Wt. Lbs. Per 100 102 Capacity Cu. In. 46.0
Cat. # TP643
Depth 4"
KNOCKOUTS
1
Unit Qty. 20
/2" & 3/4"
CONCRETE BOX PLATES

UL LISTED
TP648 Cat. # TP648 TP649 TP650 TP652 Description No Stud 3 1/2" & 2 3/4" KOs Flat, Blank 3 /8" Stud 2 1/2" & 2 3/4" KOs Single Receptacle
TP649
TP650 Unit Qty. 50 50 50 50
TP652 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 28 28 33 24
330
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Ceiling Fan Box And Supports
CEILING FAN BOXES AND SUPPORTS CUBIC INCH CAPACITY (SEE BELOW)
UL LISTED
Weight Limits: TP261 35 lbs. max. for fans, 50 lbs. max. for fixture. TP301 Fan is supported independent of outlet box, mounting screws go through box and into joist. Box will support fans up to 70 lbs. and fixtures up to 90 lbs. TP275 70 lbs, max. for fans, 90 lbs. max for fixtures.
CP
TP275
TP261
TP301
TP315 Cubic In. Capacity 15.5 15.5 15.5
TP379 KNOCKOUTS WEIGHT LIMITS Bottom Unit Qty. 20 12 12 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 66.6 192 207 Fans 70 lbs. 35 lbs. 35 lbs. Fixtures 90 lbs. 50 lbs. 50 lbs.
Cat. # TP275 TP315 TP379
Description
Stud Spacing
Sides
11/2" Deep, Clamps and Mounting Screws (polybagged) Fan Box with New Work Bar Hanger 11/2" Deep with Fan Brace Old Work Bar Hanger
5 /8" Deep with External Clamp and Mounting Screws (polybagged) 1 /2" Deep, 4" Round, with NM Snap-In Connector, mtg. screws, Protective Cover (no bag)
4 Cable, 2 1/2" 1 1/2" 2 1/2" 4 1/2" 2 1/2" 2 1/2"
16" 24" 16" 24"
TP261
8.0
2 1/2"
20
50
35 lbs.
50 lbs.
TP301*
6.8
3 1/2"
20
51
70 lbs.*
90 lbs.*
*TP301 fan is supported independent of outlet box TP315 comes with Romex clamp installed on one side. The other 3 sides have a 1/2" KO, a bagged MC clamp and screw and a bagged plastic NM connector
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
331
Ceiling Fan Box And Supports
CEILING FAN BOXES PVC

UL LISTED
Weight Limits: Fans and fixtures are supported independent of outlet box. Mounting screws go through box and into joist. Box will support up to 70 lbs. for fans and 90 lbs. for fixtures. Provided with Romex connector
CP
TP1300 Cat. # TP1300 Description 41/16" diam., 1/2" deep pan section, 4" deep overall with mtg. hardware & external clamp, protective cover Capacity Cu. In. 14.0 Knockouts 3 1/2" Integral Clamp 1 Unit Qty. 24 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 34
NONMETALLIC CEILING FAN BOXES

With clamps for nonmetallic cable. All mounting hardware supplied, suitable for support of fans weighing up to 35 lbs.
Features:
Made of heavy-duty, engineered thermoplastic material Offers the labor-saving feature of quick entry and integral clamping Eliminates the need to use a screwdriver to break open pry-outs The easy access entry-point serves as a wire clamp, eliminating time required to mechanically secure the wire to the box Cat. # TP16511 Diameter 4" Mounting Method Nails only Capacity Cu. In. 22.5 No. of Clamp Openings 6
TP16511
Unit Qty. 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 21
332
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Steel Box Accessories
GROUNDING DEVICES
GROUNDING SCREW AND PIGTAIL
TP711 Cat. # TP701 TP711 TP704 Description
TP701 Std. Pkg. 1000 1000 1000 Unit Qty. 1000 1000 1000
TP704 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 2 2 .5
CP
Grounding Screw with 8" Insulated No. 12 Stranded Wire Grounding Screw with 8" Insulated No. 12 Copper Wire #10-32 x 3/8" Grounding Screw
GROUNDING CLIP
Cat. # TP706
Description
TP706
Std. Pkg. 1000
Unit Qty. 100
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 .5
For Grounding Switch & Outlet Boxes Using Nonmetallic Sheathed Cables No. 14 & No. 12, with Grounding Wire
OLD WORK CLIP
TP651 Cat. # TP651 Description Clips lock old-work steel switch boxes tightly to wall. Two required per box. Std. Pkg. 250 sets Unit Qty. 25 sets Wt. Lbs. Per 100 4
REPLACEMENT PARTS
TP900 Cat. # TP900 TP901 TP902 Description MC-BX Clamp with Screws One Screw Mounting Ear with Screws Two Screw Mounting Ear with Screws
TP901 Unit Qty. 200 200 200 17.3 3.2 2.7
TP902 Wt. Lbs. Per 100
LOW PROFILE MOUNTING SCREWS

Cat. # Description Capacity Cu. In. LOW PROFILE SCREWS - REDUCES RISK OF SHEETROCK BULGE TP710 L.P. Screws Unit Qty. 1000 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 .5
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
333
Steel Box Accessories
HOLD-IT SWITCH BOX SUPPORTS
CP
FIG. 1 Cat. # TP708 Description
FIG. 2
FIG. 3 Unit Qty. 500 Sets Wt. Lbs. Per 100 5
Two metal holders for mounting old-work switch boxes in all types of wall materials
SWITCH BOX EXTENSION
TP709 Cat. # Description Unit Qty. 50 Capacity Cu. In. 3.5 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 13 Fits snugly inside all 3" x 2" width boxes. Maximum adjustable depth 7.8". TP709* Furnished with mounting screws.
*Not UL Listed
P-300 STEEL STUD SAFETY PLATE

Meets requirement of National Electric Code Same size as face of stud No nails required Protects electrical cable and copper water pipes
Cat. # TP659
Description 2" x 31/2" Steel Plate
Unit Qty. 100
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 11
"BACK TO BACK" BOX CONNECTOR ZINC DIE CAST
Applications:
For use as a short raceway between two boxes Cat. # 5050 Size
1
Unit Qty. 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 8
/2"
334
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
CP
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
335
PVC Switch Boxes
Applications:
Cooper Crouse-Hinds nonmetallic switch and outlet boxes are used: In branch circuit wiring as a splice point To mount wiring devices such as switches and receptacles To provide mechanical protection for wiring systems and electrical devices
CP
Features:
Available for use with wood or metal studs to meet any construction preference Quick entry feature on all nonmetallic boxes offers labor savings no need to break out knockouts simply push the nonmetallic cable into the box. No tools are required. No need to remove knockouts. Unique configuration of this quick entry feature on single gang boxes provides a self-feeding feature that eliminates the need to reach inside the box to pull the wire out. Integral labor saving clamping feature on two, three & four gang boxes. The multiple gang box unique entry also serves as a clamp, eliminating the need to mechanically secure the cable inside the box. There are no separate clamps or screws to install or tighten. Each entry into the multiple gang boxes has the quick entry feature allowing the installer to simply push the cable into the box without the need for tools or removal of knock-outs, so the cable can be inserted where it is required.

UL Listed File No. E102328 Classified for use in fire rated (2 HR) wall or ceiling. Fire Rating No. R9933.
Standard Materials:
PVC-Polyvinyl Chloride compound
SWITCH BOXES ANGLED NAILS

UL LISTED
TP1600 Cat. # TP1600 TP1800 TP1802 TP2000 TP2002 TP2300 TP2302 Bracket or Nails Nails Speed-Mount & Nails Nails Nails Speed-Mount & Nails Nails Speed-Mount & Nails
TP1800 Capacity Cu. In. 16.0 18.0 18.0 20.3 20.3 22.5 22.5 H 33/4" 33/4" 311/16" 33/4" 311/16" 33/4" 311/16"
TP2000 W 21/4" 21/4" 21/4" 21/4" 21/4" 21/4" 21/4" D 21/2" 23/4" 23/4" 33/16" 31/8" 37/16" 37/16" Unit Qty. 100 100 100 100 100 50 50
TP2300 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 21 23 20 25 21 27 23
SWITCH BOXES INTEGRAL CLAMPS

UL LISTED
TP1690 (Old Work) Cat. # TP1832 TP1690 TP2020 TP2030 TP2332 336 Bracket or Nails Speed-Mount & Bracket Swing Clips & Integral Clamps Side Bracket (5/8" offset) Face Bracket (1/2" offset) Speed-Mount & Bracket
TP2020 (For Wood or Metal Studs) Capacity Cu. In. 18.0 16.0 20.3 20.3 22.5
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
TP2030 (For Wood or Metal Studs) W 21/4" 25/16" 21/4" 21/4" 21/4" D 23/4" 23/4" 33/16" 33/16" 37/16" Unit Qty. 100 50 50 50 50 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 18 20 24 24 23
H 311/16" 35/8" 311/16" 311/16" 311/16"
PVC Switch Boxes
3" DEEP SWITCH BOXES TWO GANG

UL LISTED
CP
TP3490 (Old Work) Cat. # TP3490 TP3600 TP3602 TP3630* TP3632 TP3635* Bracket or Nails Swing Clips Nails Speed-Mount & Nails Brackets Speed-Mount & Brackets Brackets & Nails
TP3600 Capacity Cu. In. 34.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0 36.0
TP3630
TP3635 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 29 37 34 37 32 39
H 39/16" 33/4" 37/8" 33/4" 37/8" 33/4"
W 4" 4" 37/8" 4" 37/8" 4"
D 33/16" 3" 31/6" 3" 31/6" 3"
Unit Qty. 25 25 25 25 25 25
*Face Bracket on PVC Boxes are offset 1/2" unless stated otherwise
211/16" DEEP SWITCH BOXES THREE GANG

UL LISTED
TP4600 Cat. # TP4600 TP4602 TP4630* TP4632 TP4635* Bracket or Nails Nails Speed-Mount & Nails Brackets Speed-Mount & Brackets Brackets & Nails
TP4630 Capacity Cu. In. 46.0 54.0 46.0 54.0 46.0 Unit Qty. 20 20 20 20 20
TP4635 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 45 42 43 40 46
211/16" DEEP SWITCH BOXES FOUR GANG

UL LISTED
TP6100 Cat. # TP6100 TP6102 TP6132 TP6135* TP6180* Bracket or Nails Nails Speed-Mount & Nails Speed-Mount & Bracket Nails & Brackets Nails, Brackets & Bar Support
TP6135 Capacity Cu. In. 61.0 72.0 72.0 61.0 61.0 Unit Qty. 4 4 4 4 4
TP6180 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 65 53 51 66 87
*Face Bracket on PVC Boxes are offset 1/2" unless otherwise stated Not 2-Hour Fire Rated
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
337
PVC Switch Boxes
LOW VOLTAGE PARTITION TWO, THREE OR FOUR GANG PVC
CP
TP1000 Bracket or Nails Capacity Cu. In. Wt. Lbs. Per 100 3
Cat. # TP1000
Unit Qty. 20
Far Side Support For use with Speed-Mount Switchboxes
Applications:
Far Side Support is designed for use with Speed-Mount switchboxes used with either wood or metal studs to provide a quick, easy economical way for far side support.
How to use:
The multi-gang Speed-Mount boxes have a molded-in-hole in the back for attaching the TPFSS. The molded-in-hole has two flats as you look at the back of the box. There are also two flats on the TPFSS. To install, simply align the flats and push the TPFSS into the hole. Turn 1/4 turn to lock into place. The TPFSS is designed for use with steel studs with a depth of 35/8". For use with 2 4 wood studs, simply break off the tip at the notch of the TPFSS using a pair of pliers. Bracket or Nails Unit Qty. 100
Cat. # TPFSS
Capacity Cu. In.
Description
338
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
PVC Switch Boxes
4" SQUARE WITH INTEGRAL CLAMPS 20.3 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY

CP
TP1900 Cat. # TP1900 TP1930 Bracket "F" Bracket Capacity Cu. In. 20.3 20.3 Unit Qty. 50 50
TP1930 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 26 40
4" SQUARE PVC DEVICE COVERS

UL LISTED
TP1009 Cat. # TP1009 TP1010 TP1020 TP1013 TP1014 TP1023 TP1024 Raised 1 /2" 5 /8" 1 /2" 5 /8"
TP1010 Capacity Cu. In. 3.8 4.8 5.8 7.0
TP1020
TP1013, TP1014 Unit Qty. 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
TP1023, TP1024 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 9 6 4 8 8 8 8
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
339
Ceiling Boxes
31/2" NONMETALLIC CEILING BOXES

Weight limit is 50 lbs for fixture except where indicated. Fan support or fixture support
CP
TP16200, (TP16201 21/8" Deep) Old Work Cat. # TP16200 TP16201 TP16310* TP16311* TP16307* TP16308* TP16317* TP16318* Clamps Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Ground Plate Yes Yes Yes Yes
TP16310 TP16311 Capacity Cu. In. 16.0 16.0 19.3 19.3 19.3 19.3 19.3 19.3
TP16307 TP16308 No. of Clamp Openings 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
TP16317 TP16318 Std. Unit Pkg. 50 50 50 50 25 25 50 50 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 27 29 18 20 57 59 26 20
Bracket/Bar Hgr. Snap Snap Nails Nails 14"22-1/2" 14"22-1/2" "B" "B"
*Nail Bracket is set 19/16" back from the face of the box. Weight limit 15lbs for ceiling mounted fixtures and 6lbs for wall mounted fixtures. Weight limit 15lbs at 24" stud spacing, 35lbs at 16" stud spacing.
LAMPHOLDER
TP16099
Standard Materials:
Plastic molded of heat and impact resistant material that prevents discoloring and reduces breakage Cat. # TP16099 Description Lampholder, Keyless, feed thru Std. Unit Pkg. 50 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 23
340
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Ceiling Boxes
4" NONMETALLIC CEILING BOXES

UL LISTED
Weight limit is 50 lbs for fixture except where indicated
CP
TP16111, TP16110 Cat. # 11/2" DEEP TP16002 TP16003 TP16012 TP16007 TP16008 TP16022* TP16023* 21/4" DEEP TP16111 TP16110 TP16112 TP16113 TP16107 TP16108 TP16122* TP16123* Clamps Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
TP16012, TP16112 Ground Plate Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
TP16007, TP16107 Capacity Cu. In. 14.8 14.8 14.8 14.8 14.8 14.8 14.8 20.3 22.5 20.8 20.8 20.8 20.8 20.8 20.8
TP16002 No. of Cable Pry-outs 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
TP16022, TP16023 Std. Unit Pkg. 50 50 50 50 50 25 25 50 50 50 50 50 50 20 20 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 12 14 24 26 28 56 58 19 21 27 29 28 30 59 61
Bracket/Bar Hgr. "V" "B" "B" 14"22-1/2" 14"22-1/2" Nails Nails "V" "V" "B" "B" 14"22-1/2" 14"22-1/2"
*Weight limit 15 lbs at 24" stud spacing, 35 lbs at 16" stud spacing.
NONMETALLIC CEILING FAN BOXES

With clamps for nonmetallic cable. All mounting hardware supplied, suitable for support of fans weighing up to 35 lbs. Made of heavy-duty, engineered thermoplastic material Offers the labor-saving feature of quick entry and integral clamping Eliminates the need to use a screwdriver to break open pry-outs The easy access entry-point serves as a wire clamp, eliminating time required to mechanically secure the wire to the box Cat. # TP16511 Diameter 4" Mounting Method Nails only Capacity Cu. In. 22.5 No. of Clamp Openings 6 Unit Qty. 25 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 21 TP16511
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
341
Ceiling Boxes
CEILING FAN BOXES PVC

UL LISTED
Weight Limits: Fans and fixtures are supported independent of outlet box. Mounting screws go through box and into joist. Box will support up to 70 lbs. for fans and 90 lbs. for fixtures. Provided with Romex connector
CP
TP1300 Cat. # Description

1 1
Capacity Cu. In. 14.0
Knockouts 3 1/2"
Integral Clamp 1
Std. Unit Pkg. 24
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 34
4 /16" diam., /2" deep pan section, 4" deep TP1300 overall with mtg. hardware & external clamp, protective cover
ROUND BLANK COVER PVC

43/4" DIA. (FOR 31/2" AND 4" ROUND CEILING BOXES)
TP1040, TP1045 Std. Unit Pkg. 100 100 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 10 12
Cat. # TP1040 TP1045*
Color Gray White
Screws White
*TP1045 includes two white-headed wood and two #8-32" machine screws.
342
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
PRE-formance
PRE-formance
Giving you the convenience of a pre-fabricated product-plus the flexibility to accommodate job-site requirements.
Contractors are continually looking for ways to improve job site efficiency and properly align skilled resources to meet tight commercial construction project deadlines. PRE-formance delivers the pre-engineered & pre-assembled combination of mounting method, outlet box, plaster ring, devices and leads to simplify branch wiring installation.
CP

UL Listed and cUL Listed
Basic
Available with the most popular drawn & welded boxes with ground screw and pigtail lead already installed Patented Uni-mount cover combines plaster ring & mounting method Standard Pre-fabricated assemblies with mounting brackets, boxes, mud rings, ground screw and pigtail leads Available from stock
Custom
Cafeteria style selection of Cooper Crouse-Hinds extensive line of mounting brackets, boxes, plaster rings, wiring devices, push-in connectors, and other associated branch wiring accessories Assembled-to-order pre-fabricated products for both AC/MC & EMT applications Can be ordered with devices, customer specified connectors and cable whips attached to suit almost any customer application Assembled from stock components to meet tight job requirements
Complete
The most complete turn-key solution for commercial construction projects. The process begins with your architectural and electrical engineering drawings and delivers a total pre-fabricated branch wiring system: custom produced, labeled, packaged by room and floor, and delivered to your exact location. Ideal for hotel projects, assisted living facilites, dormatories, barracks and office buildings Job specific labeling included with every cable run indicates starting position, ending position, device and mounting type, cable size, length, path, drawing number and date Safe, secure transmission of drawings to secure file exchange server where our technical team completes a preliminary take-off analysis. Innovative PRE-formance products are designed by contractors for contractors to give you the ease of wiring & job site flexibility to get the job done right & on-time! Includes mounting brackets & open back boxes that are designed with pre-fabrication, productivity & job site speed in mind. Contractors can realize 30 to 40% labor savings over traditional "stick-build" wiring methods for greatly improved jobsite efficiency
For more information on all PRE-formance products or how to submit drawings for quotation, please email CCHPREformance@cooperindustries.com or call 315-477-5592
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
343
PRE-formance
Basic Assemblies
Uni-Mount Assemblies
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Pre-Fabricated Boxes take labor savings to a whole new level! Includes the Uni-Mount cover attached to a 4" square box with ground screw and lead installed. Step 1 Receive Uni-Mount Pre-Fabricated Box (Includes Uni-Mount cover attached to box with ground screw + lead installed)
CP
Step 2 Attach to wood or metal stud. You're done! UL and cUL Listed UL File No. E-23156
Uni-Mount Features:
Uni-Mount combines the features of a mounting device plate with those of a box support; giving you one universal plate for all of your needs. Specifically designed for use with metal or wood studs. New and improved Uni-Mount incorporates four small holes on the left side (support side) of the bracket. These holes allow for the attachment of box mounting brackets to allow for use of both sides of the stud. The holes are strategically located to accept either the B-Line BB423 bracket. Additionally, the viewing hole has been significantly enlarged (and is now diamond shaped) to make it even easier to find mark lines on the stud.
Pre-Fabricated Box Features:

Uni-Mount provides a secure box support and features a built-in plaster ring Can be field assembled with outlet box for power applications or used without a box for low voltage applications Pre-fabricated Uni-Mount is available with most popular outlet boxes with a choice of 1/2", 5/8" or 3/4" raised cover and includes ground screw and lead Rigid bracket design eliminates the need for far-side support Guide tabs ensure alignment on studs
TP404 11/2" Deep Welded 22.0" Cubic Capacity Cat. # For Conduit TP30404PF TP30414PF TP31404PF TP31414PF TP32404PF TP32414PF TP35404PF TP35414PF TP36404PF TP36414PF TP37404PF TP37414PF TP30403PF TP30434PF TP31403PF TP31434PF TP31436PF TP32403PF TP32434PF TP35403PF TP35434PF TP36403PF TP36434PF TP37403PF TP37434PF
TP403 21/8" Deep Welded 22.0" Cubic Capacity
TP436 21/8" Deep Welded 30.3" Cubic Capacity Capacity Cu. In. 25.8 24.8 26.3 25.3 27.5 26.5 28.0 27.0 30.0 29.0 31.0 30.0 34.1 34.1 34.6 34.6 26.3 35.8 35.8 36.3 36.3 38.3 38.3 39.3 39.3 Unit Qty. 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 115 110 118 113 122 117 110 105 124 119 126 121 107 127 110 130 130 114 134 102 122 116 136 118 138
Description Pre-Fabricated Box, Cover, Ground Screw and Lead Assembly 11/2" 11/2" 11/2" 11/2" 11/2" 11/2" 11/2" 11/2" 11/2" 11/2" 11/2" 11/2" 21/8" 21/8" 21/8" 21/8" 21/8" 21/8" 21/8" 21/8" 21/8" 21/8" 21/8" 21/8" 21/8" Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Welded Box, 1/2" Raised Single Gang Uni-Mount Cover, ground screw and lead Drawn Box, 1/2" Raised Single Gang Uni-Mount Cover, ground screw and lead Welded Box, 5/8" Raised Single Gang Uni-Mount Cover, ground screw and lead Drawn Box, 5/8" Raised Single Gang Uni-Mount Cover, ground screw and lead Welded Box, 3/4" Raised Single Gang Uni-Mount Cover, ground screw and lead Drawn Box, 3/4" Raised Single Gang Uni-Mount Cover, ground screw and lead Welded Box, 1/2" Raised Two Gang Uni-Mount Cover, ground screw and lead Drawn Box, 1/2" Raised Two Gang Uni-Mount Cover, ground screw and lead Welded Box, 5/8" Raised Two Gang Uni-Mount Cover, ground screw and lead Drawn Box, 5/8" Raised Two Gang Uni-Mount Cover, ground screw and lead Welded Box, 3/4" Raised Two Gang Uni-Mount Cover, ground screw and lead Drawn Box, 3/4" Raised Two Gang Uni-Mount Cover, ground screw and lead Welded Box, 1/2" Raised Single Gang Uni-Mount Cover, ground screw and lead Drawn Box, 1/2" Raised Single Gang Uni-Mount Cover, ground screw and lead Welded Box, 5/8" Raised Single Gang Uni-Mount Cover, ground screw and lead Drawn Box, 5/8" Raised Single Gang Uni-Mount Cover, ground screw and lead Welded Box, 5/8" Raised Single Gang Uni-Mount Cover, ground screw and lead Welded Box, 3/4" Raised Single Gang Uni-Mount Cover, ground screw and lead Drawn Box, 3/4" Raised Single Gang Uni-Mount Cover, ground screw and lead Welded Box, 1/2" Raised Two Gang Uni-Mount Cover, ground screw and lead Drawn Box, 1/2" Raised Two Gang Uni-Mount Cover, ground screw and lead Welded Box, 5/8" Raised Two Gang Uni-Mount Cover, ground screw and lead Drawn Box, 5/8" Raised Two Gang Uni-Mount Cover, ground screw and lead Welded Box, 3/4" Raised Two Gang Uni-Mount Cover, ground screw and lead Drawn Box, 3/4" Raised Two Gang Uni-Mount Cover, ground screw and lead
344
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
PRE-formance
Basic Assemblies
Description Cat. # Pre-Fabricated Box, Cover, Ground Screw and Lead Assembly For AC/MC Cable TP30454PF 11/2" Deep Welded Box assembled to 1/2" Raised Single Gang Uni-Mount Cover TP31454PF 11/2" Deep Welded Box assembled to 5/8" Raised Single Gang Uni-Mount Cover TP32454PF 11/2" Deep Welded Box assembled to 3/4" Raised Single Gang Uni-Mount Cover TP35454PF 11/2" Deep Welded Box assembled to 1/2" Raised Two Gang Uni-Mount Cover TP36454PF 11/2" Deep Welded Box assembled to 5/8" Raised Two Gang Uni-Mount Cover TP37454PF 11/2" Deep Welded Box assembled to 3/4" Raised Two Gang Uni-Mount Cover TP30431PF 21/8" Deep Welded Box assembled to 1/2" Raised Single Gang Uni-Mount Cover TP31431PF 21/8" Deep Welded Box assembled to 5/8" Raised Single Gang Uni-Mount Cover TP32431PF 21/8" Deep Welded Box assembled to 3/4" Raised Single Gang Uni-Mount Cover TP35431PF 21/8" Deep Welded Box assembled to 1/2" Raised Two Gang Uni-Mount Cover TP36431PF 21/8" Deep Welded Box assembled to 5/8" Raised Two Gang Uni-Mount Cover TP37431PF 21/8" Deep Welded Box assembled to 3/4" Raised Two Gang Uni-Mount Cover
Capacity Cu. In. 24.8 25.3 26.5 27.0 29.0 30.0 34.1 34.6 35.8 36.3 38.3 39.3
Unit Qty. 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 114 117 121 109 123 125 134 137 141 129 143 145
CP
Open Back Box Innovative Open Back Boxes maximize working area to reduce wiring time and eliminate interference problems. Eliminates the need for disassembly at the job site. All open back box assemblies are shipped with TP472 flat, blank back covers. Description Cat. # Pre-Fabricated Open Back Box, Cover, Ground Screw and Lead Assembly For Conduit 21/8 Deep Welded Open Back Box, 1/2 Raised Single Gang Uni-Mount Cover, ground clip, lead, TP3040DPF and back cover 21/8 Deep Welded Open Back Box, 5/8 Raised Single Gang Uni-Mount Cover, ground clip, lead, TP3140DPF and back cover 21/8 Deep Welded Open Back Box, 3/4" Raised Single Gang Uni-Mount Cover, ground clip, lead, TP3240DPF and back cover 21/8 Deep Welded Open Back Box, 1/2 Raised Two Gang Uni-Mount Cover, ground clip, lead, TP3540DPF and back cover 21/8 Deep Welded Open Back Box, 5/8 Raised Two Gang Uni-Mount Cover, ground clip, lead, TP3640DPF and back cover 21/8 Deep Welded Open Back Box, 3/4 Raised Two Gang Uni-Mount Cover, ground clip, lead, TP3740DPF and back cover
Additional Uni-Mount / box configurations available. Consult factory for details. Remove the PF for boxes without ground screw and lead. For stranded wire replace PF with PFA For more information on all PRE-formance products or how to submit drawings for quotation, please email CCHPREformance@cooperindustries.com or call 315-477-5592
Capacity Cu. In. 34.1 34.1 34.1 34.1 34.1 34.1
Unit Qty. 25 25 25 25 25 25
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 107 110 114 112 116 118
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
345
PRE-formance
Single Sided, Floor Mount, Telescoping Slider Multi-Mount, Open Bracket and T-Bar Assemblies
Single Sided Assemblies
Single Sided Direct Mount Assemblies - all catalog numbers contain a single sided direct mount bracket (for 21/2" and 31/2" studs), 4" square steel box, mud ring, 8" insulated solid ground wire with ground screw or clip and SmartGuard UL and cUL Listed UL File No. E-324733
CP
Cat. # PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 40D58 40D75 40DAR* 4D58 4D75 4DAR* 4S58 4S75 40D258 40D275 4D258 4D275 4S258 4S275
Description Pre-Fabricated Box, Cover, Ground Screw and Lead Assembly

BB423 BB423 BB423 BB423 BB423 BB423 BB423 BB423 BB423 BB423 BB423 BB423 BB423 BB423 Single Single Single Single Single Single Single Single Single Single Single Single Single Single sided sided sided sided sided sided sided sided sided sided sided sided sided sided bracket, bracket, bracket, bracket, bracket, bracket, bracket, bracket, bracket, bracket, bracket, bracket, bracket, bracket, Open back 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 5/8" raised 1G mud ring Open back 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 3/4" raised 1G mud ring Open back 21/8" deep box with pigtail, Adjustable 1G mud ring TP403 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 5/8" raised 1G mud ring TP403 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 3/4" raised 1G mud ring TP403 21/8" deep box with pigtail, Adjustable 1G mud ring TP404 11/2" deep box with pigtail, 5/8" raised 1G mud ring TP404 11/2" deep box with pigtail, 3/4" raised 1G mud ring Open back 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 5/8" raised 2G mud ring Open back 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 3/4" raised 2G mud ring TP403 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 5/8" raised 2G mud ring TP403 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 3/4" raised 2G mud ring TP404 11/2" deep box with pigtail, 5/8" raised 2G mud ring TP404 11/2" deep box with pigtail, 3/4" raised 2G mud ring
Double Sided Direct Mount Assemblies also available. Substitute PFH3 with PF3DS (BB73). 4" and 6" Far side supports are available. Replace PFH3 (for 21/2" and 31/2" studs) with PFH4 (4") (BB44) or PFH6 (6") (BB46). For double sided, replace PF3DS with PF4DS (BB74) or PF6DS (BB76). Refer to the PRE-formance Catalog Numbering System at the end of this section for additional assembly options and configurations.
Floor Mount Assemblies

Floor Mount Assemblies - all catalog numbers contain a 18" floor mount bracket, 4" square steel box, mud ring, 8" insulated solid ground wire with ground screw or clip and SmartGuard UL and cUL Listed UL File No. E-324733
Cat. # PF18FM PF18FM PF18FM PF18FM PF18FM PF18FM PF18FM PF18FM PF18FM PF18FM PF18FM PF18FM PF18FM PF18FM 40D58 40D75 40DAR* 4D58 4D75 4DAR* 4S58 4S75 40D258 40D275 4D258 4D275 4S258 4S275

BFM184 BFM184 BFM184 BFM184 BFM184 BFM184 BFM184 BFM184 BFM184 BFM184 BFM184 BFM184 BFM184 BFM184 Floor Floor Floor Floor Floor Floor Floor Floor Floor Floor Floor Floor Floor Floor mount mount mount mount mount mount mount mount mount mount mount mount mount mount bracket, bracket, bracket, bracket, bracket, bracket, bracket, bracket, bracket, bracket, bracket, bracket, bracket, bracket, Open back 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 5/8" raised 1G mud ring Open back 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 3/4" raised 1G mud ring Open back 21/8" deep box with pigtail, Adjustable 1G mud ring TP403 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 5/8" raised 1G mud ring TP403 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 3/4" raised 1G mud ring TP403 21/8" deep box with pigtail, Adjustable 1G mud ring TP404 11/2" deep box with pigtail, 5/8" raised 1G mud ring TP404 11/2" deep box with pigtail, 3/4" raised 1G mud ring Open back 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 5/8" raised 2G mud ring Open back 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 3/4" raised 2G mud ring TP403 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 5/8" raised 2G mud ring TP403 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 3/4" raised 2G mud ring TP404 11/2" deep box with pigtail, 5/8" raised 2G mud ring TP404 11/2" deep box with pigtail, 3/4" raised 2G mud ring
Refer to the PRE-formance Catalog Numbering System at the end of this section for additional assembly options and configurations. *Not UL Listed. All components are third party certified.
346
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
PRE-formance
Telescoping Slider Assemblies
Telescoping Slider Assemblies - all catalog numbers contain a 11-18" telescoping slider bracket, 4" square steel box, mud ring, 8" insulated solid ground wire with ground screw and SmartGuard UL and cUL Listed UL File No. E-324733
CP
Cat. # PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS 4D58 4D75 4DAR 4S58 4S75 4D258 4D275 4D2AR 4S258 4S275

BB216TS BB216TS BB216TS BB216TS BB216TS BB216TS BB216TS BB216TS BB216TS BB216TS Telescoping Telescoping Telescoping Telescoping Telescoping Telescoping Telescoping Telescoping Telescoping Telescoping slider slider slider slider slider slider slider slider slider slider bracket, bracket, bracket, bracket, bracket, bracket, bracket, bracket, bracket, bracket, TP403 TP403 TP403 TP404 TP404 TP403 TP403 TP403 TP404 TP404 21/8" 21/8" 21/8" 11/2" 11/2" 21/8" 21/8" 21/8" 11/2" 11/2" deep deep deep deep deep deep deep deep deep deep box box box box box box box box box box with with with with with with with with with with pigtail, pigtail, pigtail, pigtail, pigtail, pigtail, pigtail, pigtail, pigtail, pigtail,
5 3
/8" raised 1G mud ring /4" raised 1G mud ring
Adjustable 1G mud ring /8" raised 1G mud ring 3 /4" raised 1G mud ring 5 /8" raised 2G mud ring 3 /4" raised 2G mud ring adjustable 2G mud ring 5 /8" raised 2G mud ring 3 /4" raised 2G mud ring
5
15"-16" Telescoping slider assemblies are available. Replace PF16TS (BB216TS) with PF24TS (BB224TS). Refer to the PRE-formance Catalog Numbering System at the end of this section for additional assembly options and configurations.
Multi-Mount Assemblies
Multi-Mount Assemblies - all catalog numbers contain a 16" stud spanning Multple Mount Bracket. Each Position may contain a 4" square steel box, mud ring, 8" insulated solid ground wire with ground screw and SmartGuard UL and cUL Listed UL File No. E-324733
Cat. # PF3MM PF3MM PF3MM PF3MM PF3MM
4D58 X X 4D75 X X 4D258 X X 4D275 X X 4D58 5DN58 X
PF3MM 4D75 5DN75 X PF3MM 4D258 5DN58 X PF3MM 4D275 5DN75 X PF3MM PF3MM PF3MM PF3MM PF3MM 40D58 X X 40D75 X X 40D258 X X 40D275 X X 40D58 5DN58 X
Description Pre-Fabricated Box, Cover, Ground Screw and Lead Assembly BB816 Multiple box bracket, 1st Position TP403 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 5/8" raised 1G mud ring, 2nd and 3rd positions open BB816 Multiple box bracket, 1st Position TP403 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 3/4" raised 1G mud ring, 2nd and 3rd positions open BB816 Multiple box bracket, 1st Position TP403 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 5/8" raised 2G mud ring, 2nd and 3rd positions open BB816 Multiple box bracket, 1st Position TP403 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 3/4" raised 2G mud ring, 2nd and 3rd positions open BB816 Multiple box bracket, 1st Position TP403 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 5/8" raised 1G mud ring, 2nd position TP525 411/16" Square 21/8 Deep box, 5/8" raised 1G mud ring, no pigtail, 3rd position open BB816 Multiple box bracket, 1st Position TP403 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 3/4" raised 1G mud ring, 2nd position TP525 411/16" Square 21/ 8 Deep box, 3/4" raised 1G mud ring, no pigtail, 3rd position open BB816 Multiple box bracket, 1st Position TP403 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 5/8" raised 2G mud ring, 2nd position TP525 411/16" Square 21/8 Deep box, 5/8" raised 1G mud ring, no pigtail, 3rd position open BB816 Multiple box bracket, 1st Position TP403 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 3/4" raised 2G mud ring, 2nd position TP525 411/16" Square 21/8 Deep box, 3/4" raised 1G mud ring, no pigtail, 3rd position open BB816 Multiple box bracket, 1st Position Open back 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 5/8" raised 1G mud ring, 2nd and 3rd positions open BB816 Multiple box bracket, 1st Position Open back 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 3/4" raised 1G mud ring, 2nd and 3rd positions open BB816 Multiple box bracket, 1st Position Open back 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 5/8" raised 2G mud ring, 2nd and 3rd positions open BB816 Multiple box bracket, 1st Position Open back 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 3/4" raised 2G mud ring, 2nd and 3rd positions open BB816 Multiple box bracket, 1st Position Open back 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 5/8" raised 1G mud ring, 2nd position TP525 411/16" Square 21/8 Deep box, 5/8" raised 1G mud ring, no pigtail, 3rd position open
BB816 Multiple box bracket, 1st Position Open back 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 3/4" raised 1G mud ring, 2nd position TP525 411/16" Square 21/ 8 Deep box, 3/4" raised 1G mud ring, no pigtail, 3rd position open
PF3MM 40D75 5DN75 X
PF3MM 40D258 5DN58 X BB816 Multiple box bracket, 1st Position Open back 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 5/8" raised 2G mud ring, 2nd position TP525 411/16" Square 21/8 Deep box, 5/8" raised 1G mud ring, no pigtail, 3rd position open PF3MM 40D275 5DN75 X BB816 Multiple box bracket, 1st Position Open back 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 3/4" raised 2G mud ring, 2nd position TP525 411/16" Square 21/8 Deep box, 3/4" raised 1G mud ring, no pigtail, 3rd position open
Refer to the PRE-formance Catalog Numbering System at the end of this section for additional assembly options and configurations.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
347
PRE-formance
Open Bracket Assemblies
Open Bracket Assemblies - all catalog numbers contain a 16" stud spanning Open Bracket. Each Position may contain a 4" square steel box, mud ring, 8" insulated solid ground wire with ground screw and SmartGuard
UL and cUL Listed
CP
Cat. # PF16BO 4D58 X X PF16BO 4D75 X X PF16BO 4D258 X X PF16BO 4D275 X X PF16BO 4D58 5DN58 X PF16BO 4D75 5DN75 X PF16BO 4D258 5DN58 X PF16BO 4D275 5DN75 X PF16BO 40D58 X X PF16BO 40D75 X X PF16BO 40D258 X X PF16BO 40D275 X X PF16BO 40D58 5DN58 X PF16BO 40D75 5DN75 X

BB716 Open bracket, 1st Position TP403 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 5/8" raised 1G mud ring, 2nd and 3rd positions open BB716 Open bracket, 1st Position TP403 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 3/4" raised 1G mud ring, 2nd and 3rd positions open BB716 Open bracket, 1st Position TP403 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 5/8" raised 2G mud ring, 2nd and 3rd positions open BB716 Open bracket, 1st Position TP403 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 3/4" raised 2G mud ring, 2nd and 3rd positions open BB716 Open bracket, 1st Position TP403 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 5/8" raised 1G mud ring, 2nd position TP525 411/16" Square 21/8 Deep box, 5/8" raised 1G mud ring, no pigtail, 3rd position open BB716 Open bracket, 1st Position TP403 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 3/4" raised 1G mud ring, 2nd position TP525 411/16" Square 21/8 Deep box, 3/4" raised 1G mud ring, no pigtail, 3rd position open BB716 Open bracket, 1st Position TP403 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 5/8" raised 2G mud ring, 2nd position TP525 411/16" Square 21/8 Deep box, 5/8" raised 1G mud ring, no pigtail, 3rd position open BB716 Open bracket, 1st Position TP403 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 3/4" raised 2G mud ring, 2nd position TP525 411/16" Square 21/8 Deep box, 3/4" raised 1G mud ring, no pigtail, 3rd position open BB716 Open bracket, 1st Position Open back 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 5/8" raised 1G mud ring, 2nd and 3rd positions open BB716 Open bracket, 1st Position Open back 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 3/4" raised 1G mud ring, 2nd and 3rd positions open BB716 Open bracket, 1st Position Open back 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 5/8" raised 2G mud ring, 2nd and 3rd positions open BB716 Open bracket, 1st Position Open back 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 3/4" raised 2G mud ring, 2nd and 3rd positions open BB716 Open bracket, 1st Position Open back 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 5/8" raised 1G mud ring, 2nd position TP525 411/16" Square 21/8 Deep box, 5/8" raised 1G mud ring, no pigtail, 3rd position open BB716 Open bracket, 1st Position Open back 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 3/4" raised 1G mud ring, 2nd position TP525 411/16" Square 21/8 Deep box, 3/4" raised 1G mud ring, no pigtail, 3rd position open Square 21/8 Deep box, 5/8" raised 1G mud ring, no pigtail, 3rd position open
PF16BO 40D258 5DN58 X BB716 Open bracket, 1st Position Open back 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 5/8" raised 2G mud ring, 2nd position TP525 411/16" PF16BO 40D275 5DN75 X BB716 Open bracket, 1st Position Open back 21/8" deep box with pigtail, 3/4" raised 2G mud ring, 2nd position TP525 411/16"
Square 21/8 Deep box, 3/4" raised 1G mud ring, no pigtail, 3rd position open
Refer to the PRE-formance Catalog Numbering System at the end of this section for additional assembly options and configurations.
T-Bar Assemblies
T-Bar Assemblies - all catalog numbers contain BA50 T-Bar fastener, 4" square or octagon box
UL and cUL Listed UL File No. E-324733
Cat. # PFBH24 PFBH24 PFBH24 PFBH24 4SN 4DN 278N 292N

BA50 BA50 BA50 BA50 Bar Bar Bar Bar hanger, hanger, hanger, hanger, TP404 TP403 TP278 TP292 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" deep deep deep deep box box octagon box octagon box
348
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
PRE-formance
Uni-Mount Assemblies with Wiring Devices
Cooper Crouse-Hinds PRE-formance Uni-Mount Assemblies - All catalog numbers contain a Uni-mount cover (TP31000-37000), 4" square open back box, an 8" insulated solid box ground wire with ground clip, one or two pre-wired Cooper Wiring Devices with leads, push-in connectors, and device protect plates.
Uni-Mount assemblies with wiring devices are shipped standard with open back boxes. Open back boxes maximize the working area to reduce wiring time and eliminate interference problems. They virtually eliminate the need for disassembly at the job site. Open back boxes are available in either 11/2" or 21/8" deep with 1/2 & 3/4 eccentric knockouts. All 4" square open back box assemblies are shipped with TP472 flat, blank back covers. All assemblies are shown with ivory colored devices. At the end of the catalog number, replace the "V" with "W" for white colored device. Other device colors and types are available. Consult factory for details. UL and cUL Listed UL File No. E324733
CP
Commonly ordered catalog examples are listed below

See Uni-Mount assembly catalog numbering system at the end of the Uni-Mount assembly pages for more information on how to construct catalog numbers for almost any customer application Commercial Grade Receptacle Assembly Catalog Number with CR20V Commercial Grade 20A Duplex Receptacle Installed TP3140D C20DV TP3140S C20DV TP3240D C20DV TP3240S C20DV TP3640D C20DDV TP3640S C20DDV TP3740D C20DDV TP3740S C20DDV Industrial Grade Receptacle Assembly Catalog Number with 5362V Industrial Grade 20A Duplex Receptacle Installed TP3140D I20DV TP3140S I20DV TP3240D I20DV TP3240S I20DV TP3640D I20DDV TP3640S I20DDV TP3740D I20DDV TP3740S I20DDV Hospital Grade Receptacle Assembly Catalog 4" Square Uni-Mount Number with 8300V Steel Open Hospital Grade 20A Back Box Duplex Receptacle Installed TP3140D H20DV TP3140S H20DV TP3240D H20DV TP3240S H20DV TP3640D H20DDV TP3640S H20DDV TP3740D H20DDV TP3740S H20DDV 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep /8" /8" 3 /4" 3 /4"
5 5
Duplex Receptacle
Single 20A Duplex Receptacle Single Single Single Single Two Two Two Two Gang Gang Gang Gang
Double 20A Duplex Receptacle /8" /8" 3 /4" 3 /4"

5 5
Gang Gang Gang Gang
Specification Grade GFCI Receptacle Assembly Catalog Number with VGF20 Specification Grade 20A GFCI Receptacle Installed GFCI Receptacle Single 20A GFCI Receptacle TP3140D S20GV TP3140S S20GV TP3240D S20GV TP3240S S20GV Double 20A GFCI Receptacle TP3640D S20GGV TP3640S S20GGV TP3740D S20GGV TP3740S S20GGV
Hospital Grade GFCI Receptacle Assembly Catalog 4" Square Number with VGFH20V Steel Open Hospital Grade 20A GFCI Back Box Receptacle Installed TP3140D H20GV TP3140S H20GV TP3240D H20GV TP3240S H20GV TP3640D H20GGV TP3640S H20GGV TP3740D H20GGV TP3740S H20GGV 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep
Uni-Mount
/8" /8" 3 /4" 3 /4"

5 5 5 5
Single Single Single Single
Gang Gang Gang Gang
/ 8" Two Gang /8" Two Gang 3 /4" Two Gang 3 /4" Two Gang
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
349
PRE-formance
See Uni-Mount assembly catalog numbering system at the end of the Uni-Mount assembly pages for more information on how to construct catalog numbers for almost any customer application Commercial Grade Single Pole Switch Assembly Catalog Number with CS120V Commercial Grade 20A Single Pole Switch Installed TP3140D C20SPV TP3140S C20SPV TP3240D C20SPV TP3240S C20SPV TP3640D C20SPSPV TP3640S C20SPSPV TP3740D C20SPSPV TP3740S C20SPSPV Commercial Grade Three Way Switch Assembly Catalog Number with CS320V Commercial Grade 20A Three Way Switch Installed Single 20A Three Way Switch TP3140D C203WV TP3140S C203WV TP3240D C203WV TP3240S C203WV Double 20A Three Way Switch TP3640D C203W3WV TP3640S C203W3WV TP3740D C203W3WV TP3740S C203W3WV

Single Pole Switch
Industrial Grade Single Pole Switch Assembly Catalog Number 4" Square with AH1221V Industrial Steel Open Grade 20A Single Pole Back Box Switch Installed TP3140D I20SPV TP3140S I20SPV TP3240D I20SPV TP3240S I20SPV TP3640D I20SPSPV TP3640S I20SPSPV TP3740D I20SPSPV TP3740S I20SPSPV Industrial Grade Three Way Switch Assembly Catalog Number with AH1223V Industrial Grade 20A Three Way Switch Installed TP3140D I203WV TP3140S I203WV TP3240D I203WV TP3240S I203WV TP3640D I203W3WV TP3640S I203W3WV TP3740D I203W3WV TP3740S I203W3WV 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep
Uni-Mount
CP
Single 20A Single Pole Switch /8" /8" 3 /4" 3 /4"

5 5
Single Single Single Single Two Two Two Two
Gang Gang Gang Gang
Double 20A Single Pole Switch /8" /8" 3 /4" 3 /4"

5 5
Gang Gang Gang Gang
Three Way Switch
4" Square Steel Open Back Box
Uni-Mount
21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2"
Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep
/8" /8" 3 /4" 3 /4"

5 5
Gang Gang Gang Gang
/8" /8" 3 /4" 3 /4"

5 5
Gang Gang Gang Gang
All open back box assemblies are shipped with TP472 flat, blank back covers, ground clip and lead. Other box types, device colors, mud ring depths, brackets and assembly configurations are available. Consult factory for details. To change the color of device from Ivory (as shown) to white, substitute V (Ivory) with W (White). For ex. TP3140D C20DV becomes TP3140D C20DW. All receptacles are shipped standard ground up. Add suffix DN for ground down. All assemblies shipped standard with metal device protect plates, add suffix SG for SmartGuard plastic protect plate. Pre-installed connectors available on all assembly types. Consult factory for details
350
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
PRE-formance
PRE-formance Catalog Numbering System for Uni-Mount Assemblies with Devices
CP
TP3140D C20DVSG Standard Cooper Wiring Devices used in PRE-formance Assemblies CCH Wiring Device Nomenclature (without color suffix) C20D I20D H20D S20G H20G CWD Catalog Description Number used (shown without color suffix) CR20 5362 8300 VGF20 VGFH20 Commercial Grade 20A Duplex Receptacle Industrial Grade 20A Duplex Receptacle Hospital Grade 20A Duplex Receptacle Specification Grade 20A GFCI Receptacle Hospital Grade 20A GFCI Receptacle CCH Wiring Device Nomenclature (without color suffix) C20SP I20SP C203W I203W CWD Catalog Description Number used (shown without color suffix) CS120 AH1221 CS320 AH1223 Commercial Grade 20A Single Pole Switch Industrial Grade 20A Single Pole Switch Commercial Grade 20A Three Way Switch Industrial Grade 20A Three Way Switch
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
351
PRE-formance
Single Sided Assemblies with Wiring Devices
Cooper Crouse-Hinds PRE-formance Single Sided Assembles - All catalog numbers contain a single sided bracket (BB4-23 for 31/ 2" and 21/ 2" studs), 4" square box, an 8" insulated solid box ground wire with ground clip, one or two pre-wired Cooper Wiring Devices with leads and push-in connectors, and device protect plates
Single Sided Assemblies with wiring devices are shipped standard with open back boxes. Open back boxes maximize the working area to reduce wiring time and eliminate interference problems. They virtually eliminate the need for disassembly at the job site. Open back boxes are available in either 11/2" or 21/8" deep with 1/2 & 3/4 eccentric knockouts. All 4" square open back box assemblies are shipped with TP472 flat, blank back covers.
CP
All assemblies are shown with ivory colored devices. At the end of the catalog number, replace the "V" with "W" for white colored device. Other device colors and types are available. Consult factory for details. Double sided direct mount assemblies are also available. Substitute PFH3 with PF3DS (BB73 double sided bracket) 4" and 6" Far side supports are available. Replace PFH3 (for 21/2" and 31/2" studs) with PFH4 (4") (BB44) or PFH6 (6") (BB46). For double sided, replace PF3DS with PF4DS (BB74) or PF6DS (BB76). UL and cUL Listed UL File No. E-324733

See assembly catalog numbering system at the end of this section for more information on how to construct catalog numbers for almost any customer application Commercial Grade Receptacle Assembly Catalog Number with CR20V Commercial Grade 20A Duplex Receptacle Installed PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 40D58C20DV 40S58C20DV 40D75C20DV 40S75C20DV 40D258C20DDV 40S258C20DDV 40D275C20DDV 40S275C20DDV Industrial Grade Receptacle Assembly Catalog Number with 5362V Industrial Grade 20A Duplex Receptacle Installed PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 40D58I20DV 40S58I20DV 40D75I20DV 40S75I20DV 40D258I20DDV 40S258I20DDV 40D275I20DDV 40S275I20DDV Hospital Grade Receptacle Assembly Catalog Number with 8300V Hospital Grade 20A Duplex Receptacle Installed PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 40D58H20DV 40S58H20DV 40D75H20DV 40S75H20DV 40D258H20DDV 40S258H20DDV 40D275H20DDV 40S275H20DDV
Duplex Receptacle
4" Square Mud Ring Steel Open Back Box
Single 20A Duplex Receptacle 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep /8" /8" 3 /4" 3 /4"
5 5
Gang Gang Gang Gang

5 5
Gang Gang Gang Gang
GFCI Receptacle
Specification Grade GFCI Receptacle Assembly Catalog Number with VGF20 Specification Grade 20A GFCI Receptacle Installed Single 20A GFCI Receptacle PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 40D58S20GV 40S58S20GV 40D75S20GV 40S75S20GV 40D258S20GGV 40S258S20GGV 40D275S20GGV 40S275S20GGV
Hospital Grade GFCI Receptacle Assembly Catalog Number with VGFH20V Hospital Grade 20A GFCI Receptacle Installed PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 40D58H20GV 40S58H20GV 40D75H20GV 40S75H20GV 40D258H20GGV 40S258H20GGV 40D275H20GGV 40S275H20GGV
Mud Ring
21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2"
/8" /8" 3 /4" 3 /4"

5 5
Gang Gang Gang Gang
Double 20A GFCI Receptacle /8" /8" 3 /4" 3 /4"

5 5
Gang Gang Gang Gang
352
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
PRE-formance
Single Sided Assemblies with Wiring Devices
Commercial Grade Single Pole Switch Assembly Catalog Number with CS120V Commercial Grade 20A Single Pole Switch Installed Single 20A Single Pole Switch PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 40D58C20SPV 40S58C20SPV 40D75C20SPV 40S75C20SPV 40D258C20SPSPV 40S258C20SPSPV 40D275C20SPSPV 40S275C20SPSPV PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 40D58I20SPV 40S58I20SPV 40D75I20SPV 40S75I20SPV 40D258I20SPSPV 40S258I20SPSPV 40D275I20SPSPV 40S275I20SPSPV 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep /8" /8" 3 /4" 3 /4"
5 5
Single Pole Switch
Industrial Grade Single Pole Switch Assembly Catalog Number with AH1221V Industrial Grade 20A Single Pole Switch Installed
Mud Ring
Gang Gang Gang Gang
CP
Double 20A Single Pole Switch /8" /8" 3 /4" 3 /4"

5 5
Gang Gang Gang Gang
Three Way Switch
Commercial Grade Three Way Switch Assembly Catalog Number with CS320V Commercial Grade 20A Three Way Switch Installed Single 20A Three Way Switch PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 40D58C203WV 40S58C203WV 40D75C203WV 40S75C203WV 40D258C203W3WV 40S258C203W3WV 40D275C203W3WV 40S275C203W3WV
Industrial Grade Three Way Switch Assembly Catalog Number with AH1223V Industrial Grade 20A Three Way Switch Installed PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 PFH3 40D58I203WV 40S58I203WV 40D75I203WV 40S75I203WV 40D258I203W3WV 40S258I203W3WV 40D275I203W3WV 40S275I203W3WV
4" Square Steel Open Back Box 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep
Mud ring
/8" /8" 3 /4" 3 /4"

5 5
Gang Gang Gang Gang
Double 20A Three Way Switch /8" /8" 3 /4" 3 /4"

5 5
Gang Gang Gang Gang
All open back box assemblies are shipped with TP472 flat, blank back covers, ground clip and lead. Double Sided Direct Mount Assemblies also available. Substitute PFH3 with PF3DS (BB73). Other box types, device colors, mud ring depths, brackets and assembly configurations are available. Consult factory for details. To change the color of device from Ivory (as shown) to white, substitute V (Ivory) with W (White). For ex. PFH3 40D58C20DV becomes PFH3 40D58C20DW. All receptacles are shipped standard ground up. Add suffix DN for ground down. All assemblies shipped standard with metal device protect plates, add suffix SG for SmartGuard plastic protect plate. Pre-installed connectors available on all assembly types. Consult factory for details
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
353
PRE-formance
Floor Mount Assemblies with Wiring Devices
Cooper Crouse-Hinds PRE-formance Floor Mount Assemblies - All catalog numbers contain a floor mount bracket (BFM18-4) which positions device at 18" on center, 4" square Box, an 8" insulated solid box ground wire with ground clip, one or two pre-wired Cooper Wiring Devices with leads and push-in connectors, and device protect plates.
Floor mount assemblies with wiring devices are shipped standard with open back boxes. Open back boxes maximize the working area to reduce wiring time and eliminate interference problems. They virtually eliminate the need for disassembly at the job site. Open back boxes are available in either 11/2" or 21/8" deep with 1/2 & 3/4 eccentric knockouts. All 4" square open back box assemblies are shipped with TP472 flat, blank back covers.
CP
All assemblies are shown with ivory colored devices. At the end of the catalog number, replace the "V" with "W" for white colored device. Other device colors and types are available. Consult factory for details. UL and cUL Listed UL File No. E324733

See assembly catalog numbering system at the end of this section for more information on how to construct catalog numbers for almost any customer application Commercial Grade Receptacle Assembly Catalog Number with CR20V Commercial Grade 20A Duplex Receptacle Installed Industrial Grade Receptacle Assembly Catalog Number with 5362V Industrial Grade 20A Duplex Receptacle Installed PF18FM PF18FM PF18FM PF18FM PF18FM PF18FM PF18FM PF18FM 40D58I20DV 40S58I20DV 40D75I20DV 40S75I20DV 40D258I20DDV 40S258I20DDV 40D275I20DDV 40S275I20DDV Hospital Grade Receptacle Assembly Catalog Number with 8300V Hospital Grade 20A Duplex Receptacle Installed PF18FM PF18FM PF18FM PF18FM PF18FM PF18FM PF18FM PF18FM 40D58H20DV 40S58H20DV 40D75H20DV 40S75H20DV 40D258H20DDV 40S258H20DDV 40D275H20DDV 40S275H20DDV
Duplex Receptacle
Mud Ring
Single 20A Duplex Receptacle PF18FM PF18FM PF18FM PF18FM PF18FM PF18FM PF18FM PF18FM 40D58C20DV 40S58C20DV 40D75C20DV 40S75C20DV 40D258C20DDV 40S258C20DDV 40D275C20DDV 40S275C20DDV 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep /8" /8" 3 /4" 3 /4"
5 5
Gang Gang Gang Gang

5 5
Gang Gang Gang Gang
354
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
PRE-formance
Universal Floor Mount Assemblies with Wiring Devices
Cooper Crouse-Hinds PRE-formance Universal Floor Mount Assemblies - All catalog numbers contain an adjustable Floor Mount bracket (Standard item is shipped pre-set at 18" on center but is also available at other customer specified heights. All catalog numbers contain a 4" Square Box, an 8" insulated solid box ground wire with ground clip, far side support, flat strap for stud spanning support, one or two pre-wired Cooper Wiring Devices with leads and push-in connectors, and device protect plates. All assemblies are shown with ivory colored devices. At the end of the catalog number, replace the "V" with "W" for white colored device. Other device colors and types are available. Consult factory for details. CP
UL and cUL Listed UL File No. E324733

See assembly catalog numbering system at the end of this section for more information on how to construct catalog numbers for almost any customer application Commercial Grade Receptacle Assembly Catalog Number with CR20V Commercial Grade 20A Duplex Receptacle Installed Industrial Grade Receptacle Assembly Catalog Number with 5362V Industrial Grade 20A Duplex Receptacle Installed PFUBV18 PFUBV18 PFUBV18 PFUBV18 PFUBV18 PFUBV18 PFUBV18 PFUBV18 40D58I20DV 40S58I20DV 40D75I20DV 40S75I20DV 40D258I20DDV 40S258I20DDV 40D275I20DDV 40S275I20DDV Hospital Grade Receptacle Assembly Catalog Number 4" Square Mud Ring with 8300V Hospital Grade Steel Open 20A Duplex Receptacle Back Box Installed
Duplex Receptacle
Single 20A Duplex Receptacle PFUBV18 PFUBV18 PFUBV18 PFUBV18 PFUBV18 PFUBV18 PFUBV18 PFUBV18

40D58C20DV 40S58C20DV 40D75C20DV 40S75C20DV 40D258C20DDV 40S258C20DDV 40D275C20DDV 40S275C20DDV
PFUBV18 PFUBV18 PFUBV18 PFUBV18 PFUBV18 PFUBV18 PFUBV18 PFUBV18
40D58H20DV 40S58H20DV 40D75H20DV 40D75H20DV 40D258H20DDV 40S258H20DDV 40D275H20DDV 40S275H20DDV
21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2"
/8" /8" 3 /4" 3 /4"

5 5
Gang Gang Gang Gang

5 5
Gang Gang Gang Gang
All open back box assemblies are shipped with TP472 flat, blank back covers, ground clip and lead. Other box types, device colors, mud ring depths, brackets and assembly configurations are available. Consult factory for details. To change the color of device from Ivory (as shown) to white, substitute V (Ivory) with W (White). For ex. PF18FM 40D58C20DV becomes PF18FM 40D58C20DW. All receptacles are shipped standard ground up. Add suffix DN for ground down. All assemblies shipped standard with metal device protect plates, add suffix SG for SmartGuard plastic protect plate. Pre-installed connectors available on all assembly types. Consult factory for details
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
355
PRE-formance
Telescoping Slider Assemblies with Wiring Devices
Cooper Crouse-Hinds PRE-formance Telescoping Slider Assemblies - All catalog numbers contain a Telescoping Slider Bracket (BB216TS 11"-18"), 4" square traditional closed back box, an 8" insulated stranded box ground wire with ground screw, one or two pre-wired Cooper Wiring Devices with leads and push-in connectors, and device protect plates
All assemblies are shown with ivory colored devices. At the end of the catalog number, replace the "V" with "W" for white colored device. Other device colors and types are available. Consult factory for details. 15"-26" Telescoping Slider assemblies are available. Replace PF16TS (BB216TS) with PF24TS (BB224TS). UL and cUL Listed UL File No. E324733
CP

See assembly catalog numbering system at the end of this section for more information on how to construct catalog numbers for almost any customer application
Duplex Receptacles
Commercial Grade Receptacle Assembly Catalog Number with CR20V Commercial Grade 20A Duplex Receptacle Installed PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS 4DA58C20DV 4SA58C20DV 4DA75C20DV 4SA75C20DV 4DA258C20DDV 4SA258C20DDV 4DA275C20DDV 4SA275C20DDV
Industrial Grade Receptacle Assembly Catalog Number with 5362V Industrial Grade 20A Duplex Receptacle Installed PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS 4DA58I20DV 4SA58I20DV 4DA75I20DV 4SA75I20DV 4DA258I20DDV 4SA258I20DDV 4DA275I20DDV 4SA275I20DDV
Hospital Grade Receptacle Assembly Catalog Number with 8300V Hospital Grade 20A Duplex Receptacle Installed PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS 4DA58H20DV 4SA58H20DV 4DA75H20DV 4SA75H20DV 4DA258H20DDV 4SA258H20DDV 4DA275H20DDV 4SA275H20DDV
4" Square Steel Box (Not Open Back)
Mud Ring
Single 20A Duplex Receptacle 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep /8" /8" 3 /4" 3 /4"
5 5
Gang Gang Gang Gang

5 5
Gang Gang Gang Gang
GFCI Receptacles
Specification Grade GFCI Receptacle Assembly Catalog Number with VGF20 Specification Grade 20A GFCI Receptacle Installed Single 20A GFCI Receptacle PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS 4DA58S20GV 4SA58S20GV 4DA75S20GV 4SA75S20GV 4DA258S20GGV 4SA258S20GGV 4DA275S20GGV 4SA275S20GGV
Hospital Grade GFCI Receptacle Assembly Catalog Number with VGFH20V Hospital Grade 20A GFCI Receptacle Installed PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS 4DA58H20GV 4SA58H20GV 4DA75H20GV 4SA75H20GV 4DA258H20GGV 4SA258H20GGV 4DA275H20GGV 4SA275H20GGV
Mud Ring
21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2"
/8" /8" 3 /4" 3 /4"

5 5
Gang Gang Gang Gang
Double 20A GFCI Receptacle /8" /8" 3 /4" 3 /4"

5 5
Gang Gang Gang Gang
356
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
PRE-formance
Telescoping Slider Assemblies with Wiring Devices
Commercial Grade Single Pole Switch Assembly Catalog Number with CS120V Commercial Grade 20A Single Pole Switch Installed Single 20A Single Pole Switch PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS 4DA58C20SPV 4SA58C20SPV 4DA75C20SPV 4SA75C20SPV 4DA258C20SPSPV 4SA258C20SPSPV 4DA275C20SPSPV 4SA275C20SPSPV PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS 4DA58I20SPV 4SA58I20SPV 4DA75I20SPV 4SA75I20SPV 4DA258I20SPSPV 4SA258I20SPSPV 4DA275I20SPSPV 4SA275I20SPSPV 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep Deep /8" /8" 3 /4" 3 /4"
5 5
Single Pole Switch
Industrial Grade Single Pole Switch Assembly Catalog Number with AH1221V Industrial Grade 20A Single Pole Switch Installed
Mud Ring
CP
Gang Gang Gang Gang
Double 20A Single Pole Switch /8" /8" /4" 3 /4"

5 5 3
Gang Gang Gang Gang
Three Way Switch
Commercial Grade Three Way Switch Assembly Catalog Number with CS320V Commercial Grade 20A Three Way Switch Installed Single 20A Three Way Switch PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS 4DA58C203WV 4SA58C203WV 4DA75C203WV 4SA75C203WV 4DA258C203W3WV 4SA258C203W3WV 4DA275C203W3WV 4SA275C203W3WV
Industrial Grade Three Way Switch Assembly Catalog Number with AH1223V Industrial Grade 20A Three Way Switch Installed PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS PF16TS 4DA58I203WV 4SA58I203WV 4DA75I203WV 4SA75I203WV 4DA258I203W3WV 4SA258I203W3WV 4DA275I203W3WV 4SA275I203W3WV
Mud Ring
21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2" 21/8" 11/2"
/8" /8" 3 /4" 3 /4"

5 5
Gang Gang Gang Gang
Double 20A Three Way Switch /8" /8" /4" 3 /4"

5 5 3
Gang Gang Gang Gang
Other box types, device colors, mud ring depths, brackets and assembly configurations are available. Consult factory for details. To change the color of device from Ivory (as shown) to white, substitute V (Ivory) with W (White). For ex. PF16TS 4DAC20DV becomes PF16TS 4DAC20DW. All receptacles are shipped standard ground up. Add suffix DN for ground down. All assemblies shipped standard with metal device protect plates, add suffix SG for SmartGuard plastic protect plate. Pre-installed connectors available on all assembly types. Consult factory for details Telescoping Slider bracket assemblies are shipped with traditional closed back box, ground screw and stranded leads on box and devices. Device leads and push-in connectors are left inside the box and will not be pulled out of knockouts prior to shipment unless specified by customer. For more information on all PRE-formance products or how to submit drawings for quotation, please email CCHPREformance@cooperindustries.com or call 315-477-5592
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
357
PRE-formance
Multi-Mount Assemblies with Wiring Devices
Cooper Crouse-Hinds PRE-formance Multi Mount Assemblies - All catalog numbers contain a multiple mount bracket (available in either 16" stud spanning or 24" stud spanning). Each position may contain an outlet box, an 8" insulated solid box ground wire with ground screw or clip, one or two pre-wired Cooper Wiring Devices with leads and push-in connectors, and device protect plates.
UL and cUL Listed
CP
UL File No. E324733

See assembly catalog numbering system at the end of this section for more information on how to construct catalog numbers for almost any customer application
PF3MM 40D58C20DV 5D58 X 3MM Bracket BB816 3 hole Multiple Mount Bracket for 16" Stud spacing 4MM Bracket (not shown) BB824 4 hole Multiple Mount Bracket for 24" Stud spacing
PFUBH 40D58C20DV UBH Bracket UBH Universal Horizontal Bracket for 8 - 24" stud spacing
PF16BO 40D58C20DV X 40D258C20DDV 16BO Bracket BB716 Open Mount Bracket for 16" Stud spacing 24BO Bracket (not shown) BB724 Open Mount Bracket for 24" Stud spacing Description Assembly - BB816 Multiple Box Bracket, 4" square open back box with ground clip, lead and back cover, TP489 5/ 8" raise 1G mud ring, pre-wired CR20V 20A commercial duplex receptacle ivory with leads and push-in connectors and protect plate (not shown), 2nd position TP525 411/ 16 box, TP579 411/ 16 5/ 8 raise 1G mud ring, no ground wire Assembly - BB716 Open Bracket, 4" square open back box with ground clip, lead and back cover, TP489 5/ 8" raise 1G mud ring, pre-wired CR20V 20A commercial duplex receptacle ivory with leads, push-in connectors and protect plate, 2nd position open, 3rd position 4" square open back box with ground clip, lead and back cover, TP499 5/ 8" raise 2G mud ring, two pre-wired CR20v 20A commercial duplex receptacles ivory with leads, push-in connectors and protect plates Assembly - Universal Bracket Mounted Horizontally, 4" square open back box with ground clip, lead and back cover, TP489 5/ 8" Raise 1G mud ring, pre-wired CR20V 20A commercial duplex receptacle ivory with leads, push-in connectors and protect plate (not shown)
Commonly Ordered Catalog Numbers PF3MM 40D58C20DV 5DN58 X
PF16BO 40D58C20DV X 40D58C20DDV
PFUBH 40D58C20DV
All open back box assemblies are shipped with TP472 flat, blank back covers, ground clip and lead. Other box types, device colors, mud ring depths, brackets and assembly configurations are available. Consult factory for details. To change the color of device from Ivory (as shown) to white, substitute V (Ivory) with W (White). All receptacles are shipped standard ground up. Add suffix DN for ground down. All assemblies shipped standard with metal device protect plates, add suffix SG for SmartGuard plastic protect plate. Pre-installed connectors available on all assembly types. Consult factory for details
358
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
PRE-formance
Catalog Numbering System for additional assembly configurations
PRE-formance Catalog Numbering System for additional assembly configurations
CP
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
359
PRE-formance
Catalog Numbering System for additional assembly configurations
PFH3 40D58C20DVSG (protect plate not shown)
CP
Standard Cooper Wiring Devices used in PRE-formance Assemblies CCH Wiring Device Nomenclature (without color suffix) C20D I20D H20D S20G H20G CWD Catalog Description Number used (shown without color suffix) CR20 5362 8300 VGF20 VGFH20 Commercial Grade 20A Duplex Receptacle Industrial Grade 20A Duplex Receptacle Hospital Grade 20A Duplex Receptacle Specification Grade 20A GFCI Receptacle Hospital Grade 20A GFCI Receptacle CCH Wiring Device Nomenclature (without color suffix) C20SP I20SP C203W I203W CWD Catalog Description Number used (shown without color suffix) CS120 AH1221 CS320 AH1223 Commercial Grade 20A Single Pole Switch Industrial Grade 20A Single Pole Switch Commercial Grade 20A Three Way Switch Industrial Grade 20A Three Way Switch
360
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
PRE-formance
Complete
Ideal for hotels, condos, commercial and retail offices, hospitals and apartments PRE-formance Complete delivers:
Total prefabricated branch wiring system custom produced with Cooper components, labeled, packaged by room and floor, delivered to your exact location
CP
Lower total cost of ownership Skill set allocation to match job requirements Elimination of job site material "piles" and inefficient searching for pieces and parts at the job site Elimination of job site "engineering" Reduction of overages and scrap, including expensive wire and cable
PRE-formance Complete quotation process provides:

Safe, secure transmission of drawings to secure file exchange server, CDs, or hard copy drawings if customer prefers, where our technical team (consisting of engineers and former contractors) completes a preliminary take-off analysis. A cleary defined, mutually agreed upon scope of work proposal easily identifies inclusions and exclusions and includes formal approval/sign-off procedures to ensure a clear, mutual understanding before work begins. Our team of engineers provides technical support and will answer your questions throughout the entire process. Mutual understanding of the requirements is an integral part of the process.
Product receipt and installation made fast, easy and accurate.

Unique, custom data layout table gets applied and shipped to each CAD drawing for each and every different room or area type Simplifies installation, eliminates guess work and helps eliminate job-site engineering Job specific labeling included with every cable run indicates starting position, ending position, device type, mounting type, cable size, cable length, box type, cable path, drawing number and date
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
361
HomeRunner Box
Commercial construction screw cover junction box with patented clamps
Applications:
The Cooper Crouse-Hinds HomeRunner Junction Box is designed specifically for commercial construction applications to provide a spacious, flexible junction box for terminating Home Run and other electrical wiring. Its patented clamping design and flexibility make it the most convenient, labor savings junction box available.
CP
The HomeRunner Junction Box has extensive built-in features for maximum job site flexibility and efficiency It can be used to terminate multiple wiring methods including AC, MC, MCI-A, NM or EMT Designed for use in commercial construction projects, it is ideal for hotels, motels, condos, assisted living centers, etc.
Features and Call-outs:

1. Patented clamping system - provides maximum flexibility and maximum grip. Third party certified for use with AC, MC, MCI-A or Non-metallic sheathed cable 2. 8 x 8 welded steel construction - provides strong, dependable service and large cubic capacity (177 cu. in.) for ease of wiring 3. Combination eccentric knockouts - on sides for quick & easy access, combination kos in the back of the box are ideal of applications where joist spacing is too tight for side entry 4. Terminal cup washer and flanged nut - quick, easy service ground termination or attachment of grounding bus-bar, if desired 5. 2 cover options - square for surface mounted applications or oversized for flush mount applications 6. Extensive mounting flexibility - pre-drilled holes in side and back for direct mounting or optimal mounting bracket (purchased separately) 7. Far-side support snaps on quickly and easily and is perforated which allows for adjustment in dual thickness, fire-rated walls

For US & Canada : CSA File #248782 Certified to UL50 & UL514B and CSA C22.2, No. 18.3-04 & No. 40-M1989
Standard Materials:
Pre-galvanized steel Built-In Cubic Clamps Volume (1) 10/3 to 10/12, 177 (5) 14/2 to 10/3
Cat.# HR080803
Description Dimensions Homerunner Box 8"H x 8"W x 3"D
Knockouts (10) 1/2 and 3/4 eccentric, (7) 3/4 & 1 eccentric
Wire Fill (7) 14 AWG, (6) 12 AWG, (5) 10 AWG
Unit Qty. Wt. Per 100 5 400
HRC0808S
Surface Mount 8"H x 8"W x .06"D Cover for Homerunner Box Flush Mount 9.38"H x 9.38"W x .06"D Cover for Homerunner Box Stud Bracket for Homerunner Box
100
HRC0808F
160
HRSB1
20
35
362
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Weatherproof Outlet Boxes

Durable die cast aluminum construction for long product life Powder paint finish for corrosive enviroments Plugs supplied as standard with 1/2" and 3/4" hubs are non-metallic, 1" hubs are zinc die cast Boxes supplied with mounting feet Tapered NPT hubs

Boxes: Die Cast Aluminum Self Closing Covers: Zinc Die Cast Toggle Switch Covers: Stamped Aluminum Blank Covers: Steel
CP

UL Standard UL514A UL Listed File No. E15022 cUL Standard CSA-C22.2 No 18.1-04 Suitable for wet locations
SINGLE GANG 18.0 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY 2" DEEP

CAST ALUMINUM UL LISTED FOR WET LOCATIONS
TP7010 TP7012
TP7026, TP7034
TP7042, TP7050 Outlet Holes 3 3 3 3 4 4 5 5 5 5 /2" /2" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1 /2" 3 /4"
1 1
TP7058, TP7066 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 58.3 58.3 58.3 58.3 58.3 58.3 58.3 58.3 58.3 58.3
Cat. # TP7010 TP7011 TP7012 TP7018 TP7026 TP7034 TP7042 TP7050 TP7058 TP7066
Description With Lugs With Lugs With Lugs With Lugs With Lugs With Lugs With Lugs With Lugs Side Entry, With Lugs Side Entry, With Lugs
Color Gray White Bronze Gray Gray Gray Gray Gray Gray Gray
Unit Qty. 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50
SINGLE GANG 24.0 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY 25/8" DEEP

CAST ALUMINUM UL LISTED FOR WET LOCATIONS
TP7074, TP7078, TP7082 Outlet Holes 3 1/2" 3 3/4" 3 1" Wt. Lbs. Per 100 80 80 80
Cat. # TP7074 TP7078 TP7082
Description With Lugs With Lugs With Lugs
Color Gray Gray Gray
Unit Qty. 25 25 25
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
363
TWO GANG 30.5 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY

2" DEEP, ALL TWO GANG BOXES HAVE 2 MOUNTING LUGS AS STANDARD CAST ALUMINUM UL LISTED FOR WET LOCATIONS
CP
TP7086 TP7090
TP7094, TP7098
TP7102, TP7106
TP7110, TP7114
TP7118, TP7122 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 83.3 83.3 83.3 83.3 83.3 83.3 83.3 83.3 83.3 83.3 83.3 83.3
Cat. # TP7086 TP7087 TP7088 TP7090 TP7094 TP7098 TP7102 TP7106 TP7110 TP7114 TP7118 TP7122
Description 3 3 3 3 4 4 5 5 7 7 5 5 /2" /2" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1 /2" 3 /4"
1 1
Unit Qty. 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
Color Gray White Bronze Gray Gray Gray Gray Gray Gray Gray Gray Gray
Holes Holes Holes Holes Holes Holes Holes Holes Holes Holes Holes Holes
TWO AND THREE GANG DEEP

25/8" DEEP, ALL BOXES ARE STANDARD WITH MOUNTING LUGS CAST ALUMINUM UL LISTED FOR WET LOCATIONS
TP7126, TP7130, TP7134
TP7137, TP7138, TP7142
TP7143, TP7144 Capacity Cu. In. 37 37 37 37 37 37 59 59 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 140 140 140 140 140 140 159 159
Cat. # Description TWO GANG DEEP WEATHERPROOF OUTLET BOXES TP7126 5 1/2" Holes TP7130 5 3/4" Holes TP7134 5 1" Holes TP7137 7 1/2" Holes TP7138 7 3/4" Holes TP7142 7 1" Holes THREE GANG DEEP WEATHERPROOF OUTLET BOXES TP7143 7 3/4" Holes TP7144 7 1" Holes
Color Gray Gray Gray Gray Gray Gray Gray Gray
Unit Qty. 6 6 6 6 6 6 5 5
364
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Dimensions
In Inches:
Single Gang Boxes Single Gang Deep Boxes Two Gang Boxes Two Gang Deep Boxes
CP
TP7010 TP7071
TP7074 TP7082
TP7086 TP7122
TP7126 TP7142
ONE & TWO GANG WEATHERPROOF EXTENSIONS

1" DEEP, DIE-CAST ALUMINUM EXTENSION RING GASKET AND MOUNTING SCREWS INCLUDED WITH COVER UL LISTED FOR WET LOCATIONS
TP7120 Cat. # TP7120 TP7123 Description Single Gang Two Gang Color Gray Gray
TP7123 Unit Qty. 25 10 Capacity Cu. In. 9 10 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 27.2 27.2
EXTENSION ADAPTER
DIE-CAST ALUMINUM, UL LISTED FOR WET LOCATIONS 3 CLOSURE PLUGS, MOUNTING SCREW AND GASKET INCLUDED WITH COVER
Cat. # TP7173 TP7174
Description 4 1/2" Holes 4 3/4" Holes
Color Gray Gray
Unit Qty. 25 25
Capacity Cu. In. 13.0 13.0
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 23.6 27.8
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
365
4" ROUND 15.5 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY

11/2" DEEP, DIE-CAST ALUMINUM, UL LISTED FOR WET LOCATIONS 4 CLOSURE PLUGS AND GROUND SCREW INCLUDED WITH BOX GASKET AND 2 MOUNTING SCREWS INCLUDED WITH COVER
CP
Cat. # TP7146 TP7148 TP7149 TP7150 TP7158
Side Holes 4 1/2" 4 1/2" 4 1/2" 4 3/4" Blank Cover Plate
Back Hole /2" /2" /2" 3 /4"

1 1 1
Unit Qty. 25 25 25 25 50 24 24
Color Gray White Bronze Gray Gray Gray Gray
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 79.2 79.2 79.2 79.2 20.8 100 100 58.3
WITH BLANK PLATE TP7147 4 1/2" TP7151 4 3/4"
1 3
/2" /4"
2" DEEP ROUND WEATHERPROOF OUTLET BOX EXTENSION (18.3 CUBIC INCH CAPACITY) TP7152 4 1/2" 25 Gray
Dimensions
In Inches:
Round Boxes Extension Rings and Flanged Boxes
TP7146
TP7120
TP7120
366
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Weatherproof Outlet Covers
CLOSURE PLUGS ZINC DIE-CAST*

Cat. # TP7940 TP7942 TP7944 TP7948
*CSA certified
Description /2" /2" 3 /4" 1"

1 1
Color Gray Bronze Gray Gray
Unit Qty. 100 100 50 50
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 1.5 1.5 2.1 3
ONE GANG
SELF-CLOSING COVERS WITH GASKETS UL LISTED, DIE-CAST ALUMINUM
TP7199
TP7202
TP7206 TP7209
TP7218
TP7236 - TP7238 Cat. # TP7199 TP7202 TP7206 TP7207 TP7208 TP7209 TP7214 TP7218 TP7232 TP7233 TP7236 TP7237 TP7238 TP7240 TP7241 TP7242 Description
TP7240 - TP7242
TP7244 Color Gray Gray Natural Gray White Bronze Gray Gray Natural Gray Gray White Bronze Gray White Bronze
TP7232 Unit Qty. 50 25 50 50 50 50 25 25 50 50 25 25 25 25 25 25 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 61.1 42.0 38.0 38.0 38.0 38.0 61.1 55.6 38.0 38.0 42 42 42 54 54 54
One Gang Vertical Duplex Cover One Gang For Single Receptacle or Switch 1.52" Dia. Opening One Gang For Duplex Receptacle or Combination Switch One Gang For Duplex Receptacle or Combination Switch One Gang For Duplex Receptacle or Combination Switch One Gang For Duplex Receptacle or Combination Switch One Gang Vertical For Single Receptacle or Switch 1.62" Dia. Opening One Gang For 20, 30 and 50 A Receptacles (2.125" Dia.) One Gang Stay Open For Duplex Receptacles, Switches or Combination Devices, Non UL Listed One Gang Stay Open For Duplex Receptacles, Switches or Combination Devices, Non UL Listed One Gang For Horizontal GFI Devices One Gang For Horizontal GFI Devices One Gang For Horizontal GFI Devices One Gang For Vertical GFI Devices One Gang For Vertical GFI Devices One Gang For Vertical GFI Devices
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
367
CP
TWO GANG
SELF-CLOSING GFI COVERS WITH GASKETS UL LISTED, DIE-CAST ALUMINUM
CP
TP7220 Cat. # TP7220 TP7224 TP7228 TP7244 TP7248 TP7252 Description
TP7224
TP7228
TP7248 Color Gray Gray Gray Gray Gray Gray
TP7252 Unit Qty. 10 10 10 10 10 10 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 66.7 62.0 61.1 61.1 61.1 55.6
Two Gang For Two Single Receptacles and/or Switches Two Gang For One Single Receptacle or Switch and One Duplex Receptacle, Switch or Combination Device Two Gang For Two Duplex Receptacles, Switches or Combination Device Two Gang For Vertical GFI Devices and One Single Switch or Receptacle Two Gang For One Vertical GFI Device and One Duplex Receptacle, Switch or Combination Device Two Gang For Two GFI Devices
ONE & TWO GANG

TOGGLE SWITCH COVERS WITH GASKETS STAMPED ALUMINUM UL LISTED
TP7260 /8" Thick
TP7268 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 27.8 16.7 33.3 33.3 34.1
Cat. # TP7260 TP7268 TP7272 TP7276 TP7280
Description One Gang With 15A 125V Single Pole Switch Two Gang Two Gang With 2 15A 125V Single Pole Switch Two Gang With 2 15A 125V 3-Way Switch One Gang Extended Switch Cover (for use with Standard Switch)
Unit Qty. 50 10 10 10 50
368
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
While In Use Covers
WHILE-IN-USE COVERS
FOR ONE & TWO GANG BOXES "CONSTANT USE" DUPLEX/GFI COVER UL & CSA LISTED, POLYCARBONATE
Single gang covers have a patented design with moveable hinges that reposition easily for vertical or horizontal mounting, with no tools required. Cooper Crouse-Hinds new while-in-use covers offer a rugged versatile design that protects against various elements such as rain, snow, and ice. They are available in gray and white, single gang, single gang deep, and double gang to offer 98 different configurations! The single gang covers have a patented design with moveable hinges that reposition easily for vertical or horizontal mounting, with no tools required. They are great for use with vending machines, holiday lighting, portable signs, outdoor lighting, outdoor hot tubs, and more!
Features:
Rugged UV resistant polycarbonate cover and back protects device inside from rain, sleet, and snow without cracking or breaking and is non-corrosive and non-conductive Covers have a versatile product design with moveable hinges that reposition for vertical/horizontal mounting, which reduces the number of SKUs Each cover includes a pre-mounted neoprene gasket on the back, ensuring the gasket cannot fall off or be improperly positioned during installation - assuring a weatherproof installation every time! Available in 1 Gang, Self-closing Cover, Standard (3.25) and Deep (4.75) depths Available in 2 Gang, Self-closing Cover, Standard (3.25) depth Meets and exceeds outdoor lighting requirements Lockable cover (with customer added locking device) adds security Available in both gray and white to meet customer preference
Dimensions

UL and cUL Listed Meets NEMA 3R requirements
TP7488W TP7488 Standard Depth 1 Gang
TP7491W TP7491 Deep Depth 1 Gang
TP7489W TP7489 Standard Depth 2 Gang
Standard Materials:
Cover, Back, and Hinges: Polycarbonate Gasket: Neoprene
Catalog No. Description TP7488 1 Gang, 3.25" Standard Depth, Self-closing Cover, Horizontal/Vertical Mount TP7491 1 Gang, 4.75" Deep Depth, Self-closing Cover, Horizontal/Vertical Mount TP7489 TP7488W TP7491W TP7489W 2 Gang, 3.25" Standard Depth, Self-closing Cover, Vertical Mount 1 Gang, 3.25 Standard Depth, Self-closing Cover, Horizontal/Vertical Mount 1 Gang, 4.75" Deep Depth, Self-closing Cover, Horizontal/Vertical Mount 2 Gang, 3.25 Standard Depth, Self-closing Cover, Vertical Mount # of Configurations using inserts & moveable hinges 16 16 66 16 16 66 Color Gray Gray Gray White White White Unit Qty. 6 3 4 6 3 4 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 45 48 77 45 48 77
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
369
CP
BLANK STEEL
WITH GASKETS UL LISTED FOR WET LOCATIONS
CP
TP7292 TP7294 Cat. # TP7292 TP7293 TP7294 TP7296 TP7297 TP7298 TP7295 TP7158 TP7159 TP7160 Description One Gang One Gang One Gang Two Gang Two Gang Two Gang Three Gang Blank Round Blank Round Blank Round
TP7296 TP7298 Color Gray White Bronze Gray White Bronze Gray Gray White Bronze
TP7295 Unit Qty. 100 100 100 50 50 50 25 50 50 50
TP7158 7160 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 8.3 8.3 8.3 12.5 12.5 12.5 17 21 21 21
ROUND AND RECTANGULAR

WITH GASKETS, DIE-CAST ALUMINUM, UL LISTED FOR WET LOCATIONS FOR USE WITH WEATHERPROOF LAMPHOLDERS
TP7300 7302 Cat. # TP7300 TP7301 TP7302 TP7308* TP7309* TP7310* TP7312 TP7313 TP7314 TP7316 TP7317 TP7318 TP7320 TP7321 TP7322
*Comes with closure plug
TP7308 7310 No. of Outlet Holes 1 1 1 3 3 3 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2" 1 /2"
1
TP7312 7314 Color Gray White Bronze Gray White Bronze Gray White Bronze Gray White Bronze Gray White Bronze Unit Qty. 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
TP7320 7322 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 20.8 20.8 20.8 33.3 33.3 33.3 33.3 33.3 33.3 33.3 33.3 33.3 33.3 33.3 33.3
Description 41/2" Round 41/2" Round 41/2" Round 41/2" Round 41/2" Round 41/2" Round Rectangular Rectangular Rectangular Rectangular Rectangular Rectangular Rectangular Rectangular Rectangular
370
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Weatherproof Lampholders
LAMPHOLDERS AND ACCESSORIES

DIE-CAST ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION, UP TO 150 WATTS, WITH LAMP GASKET, UL LISTED
CP
TP7162 TP7165 Cat. # TP7162 TP7163 TP7164 TP7165 TP7166 TP7170 TP7176 Description Universal Par Lampholder Universal Par Lampholder Universal Par Lampholder Universal Par Lampholder Universal Par Lampholder With External Gasket External Gasket Only Clamp-On Guard
TP7166 Color Natural Gray White Bronze Gray Unit Qty. 36 36 36 36 36 100 24
TP7176 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 47.2 47.2 47.2 47.2 50 3 50
WEATHERPROOF LAMPHOLDERS AND ACCESSORIES

DIE-CAST ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION, UP TO 150 WATTS, WITH LAMP GASKET, UL LISTED
TP7178
TP7186
TP7188 (Aluminum) Color Gray Gray Gray Unit Qty. 6 12 24 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 166.7 100 50
Cat. # TP7178 TP7186 TP7188
Description Par Lampholder With Reflector Portable Par Lampholder With 6' Cord 21/2" Outside Diameter Pole Fitter with 1/2" Male Thread
LAMPHOLDER COMBINATIONS
DIE-CAST ALUMINUM CONSTRUCTION, WITH GASKETS, UL LISTED
TP7330 TP7332 Cat. # TP7330 TP7331 TP7332 Description 2 Par Lampholders and 3-Hole Round Cover 2 Par Lampholders and 3-Hole Round Cover 2 Par Lampholders and 3-Hole Round Cover Color Gray White Bronze Unit Qty. 10 10 10 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 137.5 137.5 137.5
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
371
Dimensions
In Inches:
Single Gang, Duplex Receptacle Covers
CP
TP7206 TP7209 Single Gang, Single Receptacle Covers Vertical Mount Two Gang, Single Receptacle Covers Single Gang, Duplex Receptacle Covers Vertical Mount
TP7202 Two Gang, Duplex Receptacle Covers
TP7220 Single Gang, GFCI Covers Horizontal Mount
TP7199 Single Gang, GFCI Covers Vertical Mount
TP7228
TP7236 TP7238
TP7240 TP7242
372
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Dimensions
In Inches:
Two Gang, GFCI Covers Blank Covers Blank Covers
CP
TP7248
TP7292 TP7294
TP7296 TP7298
Blank Covers
Single Gang, Switch Covers Vertical Mount
Lampholders
TP7158 Hooded Lampholder
TP7256 Rectangular Lampholder Covers
TP7162 TP7165 Round Lampholder Covers
TP7178
TP7312 TP7322
TP7300 TP7310
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
373
Commercial Products Fixture Hangers
Flexible Fixture Hangers

Cooper Crouse-Hinds TPSFH & TPRFH flexible fixture hangers are used in commercial or light industrial applications where HID high bay and low bay lighting fixtures are used. Specific applications include storage facilities, shipping warehouses, retail and DIY facilities.
CP

Suitable for use with 1/2" or 3/4" fixture conduit stems these hangers allow the conduit stem of the fixture (luminaire) to swing in any direction. Maximum swing angle is 26 from vertical max slope angles 221/2 Available in two styles; one for attachment to round or octagonal steel boxes, the other for attachment to 4" square steel boxes. Both styles are quickly and easily attached by two screws. Hangers are drilled and tapped for use with 3/4" conduit stem as standard and come supplied with a 3/4" 1/2" reducer for 1/2" conduit stem applications.
Description For use with 4" Round or Octagon Boxes For use with 4" Square boxes
Support Wt. (lbs) 50 50
Cat. # TPRFH12 TPSFH12


Swiv-L-Drop Canopy Fixture Hangers

The Swiv-L-Drop Canopy hanger utilizes a patented spring design to provide vibration and shock protection for pendant mounted fixtures in both horizontal and vertical directions. Designed to fit 3" or 4" outlet boxes the Swiv-L-Drop is for use with 1/2" fixture conduit stems. The smooth, white canopy provides an aesthetically pleasing appearance and installs quickly and easily without the use of tools.
Description
Support Wt. (lbs) Cat. # S 1 1/2 PAINTED S 1 1/2 UNPAINTED S 1 3/8 PAINTED S 1 3/8 UNPAINTED

UL Listed UL 1598 Suitable for Dry Locations
Swiv-L-Drop Canopy Hanger for use with 3" or 4" Outlet boxes for use 50* with 1/2" Conduit Stems. Painted. Swiv-L-Drop Canopy Hanger for use with 3" or 4" Outlet boxes for use 50* with 1/2" Conduit Stems. Unpainted. For use with 3/8" Conduit Stems. Painted. For use with /8" Conduit Stems. Unpainted.
3

Material: Sheet Steel Finish: Canopy painted white
50* 50*
*65 lbs. rated with a minimum 12inch stem if fully supported by other than an outlet box.
Sway Adapters
The Sway Adapter installs quickly and easily to pendant mounted fixtures and compensates for shocks and motion due to movements, vibration, earthquakes or other sources by allowing for lateral movement up to 45 degrees. The Sway Adapter can be used independently or in conjunction with the Swiv-L-Drop hanger. The Sway Adapter is also finished in an aesthetically pleasing white painted finish and is designed for use with 1/2" conduit stems and has 3/8" male threads.

UL Listed UL 1598 Suitable for Dry Locations

Material: Sheet Steel Finish: sway adapter painted white 374
Description Sway adapter for use with 1/2" Conduit Stem (male thread is 3/8")
Cat. # SA 1W
Vapor Proof Lighting Incandescent
Key Features and Benefits:

Durable die cast housing and guard for long product life Powder paint finish for corrosive enviroments Available in pendant, box and wall mounts Fixtures may be purchased complete or as components Fixtures constructed of Die-Cast Aluminum, Screw on Guards are Zinc Die-Cast Heat Resistant Clear Globe Available on 100 watt series Wire Guard Available

UL Standard UL1598 UL Listed File No. E15625 cUL Standard CSA-C22.2 No 250.0 Suitable for Wet Locations 100W max incandescent series is UL approved for 27W max SBCFL (equivalent to 100W incandescent) 200W max incandescent series is UL approved for 42W max SBCFL (equivalent to 200W incandescent)
CP
Clear glass is standard, colors are available, plastic (polycarbonate) globes which are virtually unbreakable are available in colors and are used as an alternative to glass globe-guard combinations (not recommended to exceed 60 watts).
VAPOR PROOF FIXTURES GASKETED CORROSION RESISTANT

DIE-CAST CONSTRUCTION, GLASS GLOBES, DIE-CAST GUARDS, UL LISTED
TP7600, TP7601,
TP7800, TP7801, TP7860
TP7610, TP7611, TP7805 Description
TP7620, TP7621
TP7810, TP7811
TP7630, TP7815 Hole Size /2" /4" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1 /2" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1 /2"
1 3
TP7640
TP7820
TP7650, TP7825 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 325 324 516.7 516 413 258.3 258 283.3 300 299 350 349 208.4 258.4 275 333.3 216.7 180
Cat. # 4" BOX MOUNTED TP7600* TP7601 TP7800 TP7801 TP7860 TP7610 TP7611 TP7805 PENDANT MOUNT TP7620 TP7621 TP7810 TP7811 TP7630 TP7815
Watts 100 100 200 200 13 100 100 200 100 100 200 200 100 200 100 200 100 200
Std. Unit Carton 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Clear Globe, Cast Guard Clear Globe, Cast Guard Clear Globe, Wire Guard Clear Globe, Wire Guard Fluorescent Clear Globe, Wire Guard Clear Globe Clear Globe Clear Globe Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Clear Globe, Globe, Globe, Globe, Globe Globe Cast Guard Cast Guard Wire Guard Wire Guard
/2" /4" /2" 3 /4" 1 /2" 1 /2"

1 3 1
SURFACE MOUNT, FITS 3" and 4" ROUND BOXES TP7640 Clear Globe, Cast Guard TP7820 Clear Globe, Wire Guard TP7650 Clear Globe TP7825 Clear Globe *Suitable for base-up applications
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
375
CP
TP7670, TP7835 Cat. # Description RIGHT ANGLE BRACKET FIXTURES TP7660 Clear Globe, Cast Guard TP7830 Clear Globe, Wire Guard TP7670 Clear Globe TP7835 Clear Globe BOX MOUNTED TP7680 TP7840 TP7825 FLUORESCENT TP7870 Clear Globe, Cast Guard Clear Globe, Wire Guard Clear Globe Clear Globe, Wire Guard
TP7825 Watts 100 200 100 200 100 200 200 13 Std. Unit Carton 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 300 516.7 200 400 350 560 450 462
VAPOR PROOF COMPONENTS
Pendant
Ceiling Box Cap
Ceiling Box
Right Angle Std. Unit Carton 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 6 1
Right Angle/Box Wt. Lbs. Per 100 18 18 10 10 12 12 19 19 19 19 21 12 3
Cat. # Description PENDANT CAP, PORCELAIN SOCKET GASKET AND SCREWS TP7496 Gray, 1/2" TP7497 Gray, 3/4" TP7498 Gray, 1/2" TP7499 Gray, 3/4" CEILING BOX CAP, SOCKET GASKET AND SCREWS TP7447 Gray TP7479 Gray CEILING MOUNT BOX WITH GASKETS, PORCELAIN SOCKET AND SCREWS TP7450 Gray, 1/2" TP7478 Gray, 3/4" TP7451 Gray, 1/2" TP7479 Gray, 3/4" RIGHT ANGLE BRACKET GASKET, SOCKET, SCREWS TP7445 Gray TP7446 Gray RIGHT ANGLE BRACKET ATTACHED BOX, GASKET, SOCKET AND SCREWS TP7440 Gray, 1/2"
Watts 100 100 200 200 100 200 100 100 200 200 100 200 100
376
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
VAPOR PROOF FIXTURE ACCESSORIES
CP
TP7460 TP7466
TP7468 TP7472
TP7474, TP7475
TP7476 Std. Unit Carton 12 12 12 12 6 12 12 12 12 12 12 6 12 12
TP7477 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 98 120 120 120 200 58.4 58.4 58.4 58.4 58.4 108.4 183.4 62.5 62.5
Cat. # TP7460 TP7462 TP7463 TP7464 TP7466 TP7468 TP7469 TP7470 TP7471 TP7472 TP7474 TP7475 TP7476 TP7477
Description Glass Clear Globe, 130 F Max Glass Amber Globe Glass Blue Globe Glass Green Globe Glass Clear Globe Lexan Clear Prismatic Lexan Blue Prismatic Lexan Red Prismatic Lexan Amber Prismatic Lexan White Bayonet Mount Die-Cast Guard Wire Guard Clamp-On Wire Guard Adapter Plate
Watts 100 100 100 100 200 75 60 75 75 75 100 200 100
VAPOR PROOF DIMENSIONS

100 WATT DIMENSIONS
200 WATT
Cat. # TP7830 TP7840 TP7820 TP7810 TP7800 Length 121/2" 121/2" 71/2" 111/2" 103/4" Overall Width 51/2" 51/2" 41/2" 51/2" 51/2"
Depth 61/8" 8"

US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds
377
Photoelectric Lighting
PHOTOELECTRIC LIGHTING CONTROLS
CP
TP7925
TP7927 TP7928
Applications:
Use for sunset activated automatic contol of night lighting May be used to control outdoor lighting and signs
Features:
Durable weatherproof construction Built-in time delay prevents operation triggered by temporary light flashes Std. Unit Pkg. 10 10 10 Wt. Lbs. Per 100 8.3 8.3 8.3
Cat. # TP7925 TP7927 TP7928
Description 1200W Swivel Photo Cell 120V 300W Photo Cell 120V 1000W Photo Cell 208 277V
378
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
W-Series Junction Boxes

Applications:
Junction boxes, designed for hazardous and non-hazardous locations, are used in a variety of industries to perform the following functions: As a pull box To provide enclosures for splices and taps As a mounting box for multi-device control stations For housing apparatus, instruments, and other devices

Environmental location the physical location of the junction box will call for proper construction of the box to meet National Electrical Code requirements and will affect the material and finish needed to meet weather and corrosive conditions, if present. Number and size of conductors combined with the function to be performed (i.e., splicing, pull box), determines the amount of space needed, and therefore, the required physical dimensions of the box. Conduit layout determines the number, size, and location of the conduit openings in the box. It will also determine the type of mounting required (i.e., flush or surface positioning of the box). Flexibility required if changes in the electrical system are anticipated, the box chosen should be easily adaptable, either by construction or size to the future system.

A wide variety of options and accessories for special application are available for the various junction box families. These can be selected once the type of junction box has been determined. These options are shown on the individual pages. Some of the options available include: Special covers Hinged covers Materials and finishes Equipment mounting plates Conduit or device openings Corro-free epoxy powder coat information available on request
CP

Junction Boxes WAB WCB WJB WJBF WEB Environmental Capability/Type Designation Raintight/Type 3, 4 Dust-tight/Type 12 Raintight/Type 3, Watertight/Type 4, Dust-tight/Type 12 Raintight/Type 3, Watertight/Type 4 Raintight/Type 3, Watertight/Type 4 Raintight/Type 3 Size Range L, W, D Inside 4 x 4 x 2 to 72 x 30 x 16 4 x 4 x 2 to 72 x 30 x 16 4 x 4 x 3 to 72 x 30 x 16 4 x 4 x 4 to 72 x 30 x 16 4 x 4 x 3 to 36 x 36 x 12 Max. Conduit Opening Size 5 5 6 6 6 Cover Type Unflanged Overlapping Flanged External flanged recessed sidewalk Internal Flanged Cover Material Steel Cast iron Steel Steel (checkered) Steel
Mtg. Surface Surface Surface Flush Flush
Length and width are inside dimensions. Depth is inside dimension without cover.
Drilled and Tapped Conduit Openings or Slip Holes:

All W-Series cast-iron junction boxes may be ordered with drilled and tapped conduit openings or slip holes - subject to minimum spacing limitations. To order a box from the factory with conduit openings, consult factory.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
379
WJBF Checkered Cover Sidewalk Junction Boxes

Heavy Duty External Flanged for Flush Mounting
Applications:
WJBF boxes are primarily designed for surface mounting. WJBF heavy duty junction boxes are installed in conduit systems to: Act as pull box for conductors Provide openings and space for making splices and taps in conductors Provide for branch conduit runs Provide access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes Enclose and protect electrical equipment
Weatherproof Watertight Raintight NEMA 3, 4, 5 Cl. II, Groups E, F, G Cl. III
CP
Cat. # WJBF040404 WJBF060404 WJBF060604 WJBF060606 WJBF080604 WJBF080606 WJBF080804 WJBF080806 WJBF080808 WJBF100806 WJBF100808 WJBF101006 WJBF101008 WJBF120606 WJBF120806 WJBF120808 WJBF120810 WJBF121206 WJBF121208 WJBF121212 WJBF121218 WJBF140806 WJBF141410 WJBF161206 WJBF161208 WJBF161606 WJBF180806 WJBF180808 WJBF181006 WJBF181206 WJBF181208 WJBF181210 WJBF181212 WJBF181218 WJBF181806 WJBF181808 WJBF181812 WJBF181818 WJBF241208 WJBF241212 WJBF241808 WJBF241810 WJBF241812 WJBF241818 WJBF242412 WJBF242418 WJBF242424 WJBF302412 WJBF302418 WJBF362418 WJBF362424 Wall Thickness (in.) /4 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 5 /16 1 /4 1 /4 5 /16 5 /16 1 /4 5 /16 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 3 /8 5 /16 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8
1 1
Length (in.) 4 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 10 10 10 10 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 14 14 16 16 16 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 30 30 36 36
Width (in.) 4 4 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 10 10 6 8 8 8 12 12 12 12 8 14 12 12 16 8 8 10 12 12 12 12 12 18 18 18 18 12 12 18 18 18 18 24 24 24 24 24 24 24
Depth (in.) 4 4 4 6 4 6 4 6 8 6 8 6 8 6 6 8 10 6 8 12 18 6 10 6 8 6 6 8 6 6 8 10 12 18 6 8 12 18 8 12 8 10 12 18 12 18 24 12 18 18 24
Features:
Covers are suitable for vehicular traffic (H20 loading) Neoprene gasket cemented to cover Wide range of drilled and tapped conduit entrance sizes and locations permits extreme flexibility of use in conduit system Internal equipment mounting pads may be drilled and tapped for 1/4" 20 mounting screws Blind tapped into internal mounting pads Mounting straps are standard on smaller sized boxes up to 8x8x6, for larger sizes consult factory

CSA Standard C22.2 No. 25 Weatherproof Watertight NEMA 3, 4, 5 NEMA 250 CEC: Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class III Encl. 3, 4, 5 H20 Vehicle Load Rating*
*Self certify to H20 vehicle load rating equivalent to 16,000 lbs. on cover center.
Standard Materials:
Feraloy iron alloy body Heavy-gauge steel (checkered) cover, mounting straps Neoprene gaskets Stainless steel cover screws
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy and heavy-gauge steel hot-dip galvanized
Options:
Description Suffix Factory installed mounting plate MP Material - all sizes, cast aluminum SA Drilled and tapped conduit holes and slip holes available, Consult Factory
Larger sizes available up to 72" x 30" x 16" - Consult Factory
Size Ranges:
4" x 4" x 2" to 72" x 30" x 16" 380
WJB Junction Boxes

Heavy Duty Flanged for Surface Mounting
Applications:
WJB boxes are primarily designed for surface mounting. WJB heavy duty junction boxes are installed in conduit systems to: Act as pull box for conductors Provide openings and space for making splices and taps in conductors Provide for branch conduit runs Provide access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes Enclose and protect electrical equipment
CP
Cat. # WJB040403 WJB040404 WJB060404 WJB060604 WJB060606 WJB080604 WJB080606 WJB080804 WJB080806 WJB080808 WJB100806 WJB100808 WJB101006 WJB101008 WJB120606 WJB120806 WJB120808 WJB120810 WJB121206 WJB121208 WJB121212 WJB121218 WJB140806 WJB141410 WJB161206 WJB161208 WJB161606 WJB180806 WJB180808 WJB181006 WJB181206 WJB181208 WJB181210 WJB181212 WJB181218 WJB181806 WJB181808 WJB181812 WJB181818 WJB241208 WJB241212 WJB241808 WJB241810 WJB241812 WJB241818 WJB242412 WJB242418 WJB242424 WJB302412 WJB302418 WJB362418 WJB362424 Wall Thickness (in.) /4 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 9 /16 9 /16 9 /16 9 /16 9 /16 9 /16 9 /16 9 /16
1 1
Length (in.) 4 4 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 10 10 10 10 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 14 14 16 16 16 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 30 30 36 36
Width (in.) 4 4 4 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 10 10 6 8 8 8 12 12 12 12 8 14 12 12 16 8 8 10 12 12 12 12 12 18 18 18 18 12 12 18 18 18 18 24 24 24 24 24 24 24
Depth (in.) 3 4 4 4 6 4 6 4 6 8 6 8 6 8 6 6 8 10 6 8 12 18 6 10 6 8 6 6 8 6 6 8 10 12 18 6 8 12 18 8 12 8 10 12 18 12 18 24 12 18 18 24
Features:
Covers are suitable for vehicular traffic (H2O loading) Neoprene cover gasket. Wide range of drilled and tapped conduit entrance sizes and locations permits extreme flexibility of use in conduit system. Internal equipment mounting pads may be drilled and tapped for 1/4" 20 mounting screws. Blind tapped into internal mounting pads. Mounting straps are standard on smaller sized boxes up to 8x8x6, for larger sizes consult factory

CSA Standard C22.2 No. 25 Weatherproof Watertight* NEMA 3, 4, 5 NEMA 250 CEC: Class II, E, F, G Class III Encl. 3, 4, 5 H2O Vehicle Load Rating
Standard Materials:
Feraloy iron alloy body Heavy-gauge steel cover and mounting straps Neoprene gaskets Stainless steel cover screws
Standard Finishes:
Options:
Size Ranges:
4" x 4" x 2" to 72" x 30" x 16"
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
381
WAB Junction Boxes

Heavy Duty Unflanged for Surface Mounting
Applications:
Where a heavy duty dustproof, weatherproof enclosure is desired, WAB boxes are installed in conduit system to: Act as pull box for conductors Provide openings and space for making splices and taps in conductors Provide for branch conduit runs Provide access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes Enclose and protect electrical devices
Dust-tight Weatherproof NEMA 3, 4, 12
CP
Ordering Information: Features:

Flat neoprene cover gasket. Wide range of drilled and tapped and slip hole conduit entrance sizes and locations permits extreme flexibility of use in conduit system. Internal equipment mounting pads available blind tapped for 1/4" 20 mounting screws. Blind tapped into internal mounting pads. Mounting straps are standard on smaller sized boxes up to 8x8x6, for larger sizes consult factory Cat. # WAB040402 WAB040403 WAB040404 WAB050503 WAB050504 WAB060403 WAB060404 WAB060603 WAB060604 WAB060606 WAB080403 WAB080604 WAB080606 WAB080804 WAB080806 WAB080808 WAB090604 WAB100604 WAB100804 WAB100806 WAB101006 WAB120604 WAB120606 WAB120806 WAB120808 WAB121204 WAB121206 WAB121208 WAB160606 WAB161208 WAB181206 WAB181208 WAB181210 WAB181806 WAB181812 WAB241212* WAB242408* Wall Thickness (in.) /32 /16 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 7 /32 1 /4 3 /16 9 /32 5 /16 7 /32 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 1 /4 1 /4 9 /32 1 /4 9 /32 9 / 32 9 /32 3 /8 9 / 32 9 /32 9 /32 1 /4 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 3 /8 3 /8 7 / 16 7 /16 11 /32
5 3
Length (in.) 4 4 4 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 10 10 10 10 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 16 16 18 18 18 18 18 24 24
Width (in.) 4 4 4 5 5 4 4 6 6 6 4 6 6 8 8 8 6 6 8 8 10 6 6 8 8 12 12 12 6 12 12 12 12 18 18 12 24
Depth (in.) 2 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 6 3 4 6 4 6 8 4 4 4 6 6 4 6 6 8 4 6 8 6 8 6 8 10 6 12 12 8

Dust-tight Weatherproof NEMA 3, 4, 12 NEMA 250
Standard Materials:
Feraloy iron alloy body Heavy-gauge steel cover Neoprene gaskets Stainless steel cover screws Steel mounting straps
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy and heavy gauge steel hot dip galvanized
Options:
*NEMA 3 only. For NEMA 4 in these sizes, use WCB Larger sizes available up to 72" x 30" x 16" - Consult Factory
Size Ranges:
4" x 4" x 2" to 72" x 30" x 16"
382
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
WCB Junction Boxes

Heavy Duty Overlapping Cover for Surface Mounting
Applications:
Where a heavy duty dust-tight, weatherproof, raintight, or watertight enclosure is desired, WCB boxes are installed in conduit systems to: Act as pull box for conductors Provide openings and space for making splices and taps in conductors Provide for branch conduit runs Provide access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes Enclose and protect electrical devices
Dust-tight Weatherproof Watertight Raintight NEMA 3, 4, 12
CP
Cat. # WCB040402 WCB040403 WCB040404 WCB050503 WCB050504 WCB060403 WCB060404 WCB060603 WCB060604 WCB060606 WCB080403 WCB080604 WCB080606 WCB080804 WCB080806 WCB080808 WCB090604 WCB100604 WCB100804 WCB100806 WCB101006 WCB120604 WCB120606 WCB120806 WCB120808 WCB121204 WCB121206 WCB121208 WCB160606 WCB161208 WCB181206 WCB181208 WCB181210 WCB181806 WCB181812 WCB241212 WCB242408 Wall Thickness (in.) /32 /16 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 7 /32 1 /4 3 /16 9 /32 5 /16 7 /32 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 1 /4 1 /4 9 /32 1 /4 9 /32 9 /32 9 /32 3 /8 9 /32 9 /32 9 /32 1 /4 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 3 /8 3 /8 7 /16 7 /16 11 /32
5 3 1
Features:
Flat neoprene cover gasket. Overlapping cover sheds environment. Wide range of drilled and tapped and slip hole conduit entrance sizes and locations permits maximum flexibility of use in conduit system. Internal equipment mounting pads available blind tapped for 1/4" 20 mounting screws. Blind tapped into internal mounting pads. Mounting straps are standard on smaller sized boxes up to 8x8x6, for larger sizes consult factory
Length (in.) 4 4 4 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 10 10 10 10 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 16 16 18 18 18 18 18 24 24
Width (in.) 4 4 4 5 5 4 4 6 6 6 4 6 6 8 8 8 6 6 8 8 10 6 6 8 8 12 12 12 6 12 12 12 12 18 18 12 24
Depth (in.) 2 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 6 3 4 6 4 6 8 4 4 4 6 6 4 6 6 8 4 6 8 6 8 6 8 10 6 12 12 8

Dust-tight Weatherproof Raintight Watertight NEMA 3, 4, 12 NEMA 250
Standard Materials:
Feraloy iron alloy cover and body Neoprene gaskets Stainless steel cover screws Steel mounting straps
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy hot dip galvanized
Options:
Size Ranges:
4" x 4" x 2" to 72" x 30" x 16"
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
383
WEB Junction Box

Heavy Duty Internal Recess Flange for Flush Mounting
Applications:
WEB Junction Boxes are installed: Where a heavy duty, dust-tight or raintight enclosure is desired To act as pull box for conductors To provide openings and space for making splices and taps in conductors To provide for branch conduit runs To provide access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes To enclose and protect electrical devices
Dust-tight Raintight NEMA 3
CP
Features:
Flat neoprene cover gasket Internal equipment mounting pads Stainless steel cover screws Internal ground screw
Cat. # WEB040403 WEB040404 WEB060604 WEB060606 WEB080804 WEB080806 WEB121206 WEB160606 WEB160806 WEB180808 WEB240606 WEB240808 WEB241010 WEB241210 WEB241212 WEB241812 WEB361212 WEB361812 WEB362412 WEB363612 Wall Thickness (in.) /32 /4 9 /32 1 /4 9 /32 1 /4 9 /32 9 /32 1 /4 5 /16 9 /32 5 /16 3 /8 5 /16 5 /16 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 7 /16 7 /16
7 1
Length (in.) 4 4 6 6 8 8 12 16 16 18 24 24 24 24 24 24 36 36 36 36
Width (in.) 4 4 6 6 8 8 12 6 8 8 6 8 10 12 12 18 12 18 24 36
Depth (in.) 3 4 4 6 4 6 6 6 6 8 6 8 10 10 12 12 12 12 12 12

NEMA 250 NEMA 3
Standard Materials:
Feraloy iron alloy body, hot dip galvanized Heavy-gauge steel cover, hot dip galvanized Stainless steel cover screws Neoprene gaskets
Options:
Description Suffix All boxes are available with optional mounting plate MP Material - all sizes, cast aluminum SA Drilled and tapped conduit holes and slip holes available, Consult Factory
384
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
XD Expansion/Deflection Coupling
Applications:
XD couplings can be installed indoors, outdoors, buried underground, or embedded in concrete in nonhazardous areas. XD's are used with standard rigid conduit or PVC rigid conduit. (PVC requires rigid metal conduit nipples and rigid metal-to-PVC conduit adapters.) XD's provide a flexible and watertight connection for protection of conduit wiring systems from damage due to movement. Typical applications include: Underground conduit feeder runs Runs between sections of concrete subject to relative movement Runs between fixed structures Conduit entrances in high-rise buildings Bridges Marinas, docks, piers
CP
1. Axial expansion/contraction.
2. Angular misalignment.
XD
Hub Size 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 Cat. # XD3 XD4 XD5 XD6 XD7 Hub Size 3 31/2 4 5 6 Cat. # XD8 XD9 XD010 XD012 XD014 3. Parallel misalignment. Hub Size 1 1- 1/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4 5 6
Features:
XD couplings accommodate the following movements without collapsing or fracturing the conduit, and damaging the wires it contains: 1. Axial expansion or contraction up to 3/4" 2. Angular misalignment of the axes of the coupled conduit runs in any direction to 30 3. Parallel misalignment of the axes of coupled conduit runs in any direction to 3/4" Inner sleeve maintains constant I.D. in any position and provides a smooth insulated wireway for protection of wire insulation Watertight flexible neoprene outer jacket is corrosion resistant and protects the grounding strap and the attachment points of the hubs Tinned copper flexible braid grounding straps assure grounding continuity Stainless steel jacket clamps for strength and corrosion resistance Standard tapered electrical threads fit standard rigid conduit
a 7 73/8 71/4 71/4 71/2 75/8 73/4 77/8 73/4 83/8
b 315/16 41/4 41/2 415/16 55/16 515/16 61/2 615/16 8 9

UL standards: 514B
Standard Materials:
Integral hub bushing protects insulation of conductors Hubs Feraloy iron alloy Outer jacket molded neoprene Jacket clamps stainless steel Inner sleeve molded plastic Grounding straps tinned copper flexible braid
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy electrogalvanized Neoprene natural (black) Molded plastic natural (brown)
Options:
Hot dipped galvanized HDG
Size Ranges:
1" to 6" (Smaller sizes can be obtained by using reducing bushings)
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
385
XJG Conduit Expansion Joints With Internal Grounding For Rigid Metal Conduit and IMC
Applications:
XJG expansion couplings are used with rigid metal conduit and IMC: Without the need for an external bonding jumper and clamps (up to 4") To couple together two (2) sections of conduit subject to longitudinal movement In long conduit runs to permit linear movement caused by thermal expansion and contraction. On long conduit runs to prevent conduit from buckling and ensuing circuit failures Indoors or outdoors where conduit expansion occurs and there are wide temperature ranges In conduit runs that cross structural joints In conduit runs to prevent damage to conduit supports such as in a building or on a bridge With optional redundant visible grounding strap
Wet Locations
Patented Design
CP
XJG For use with rigid metal conduit and IMC

Conduit Size 1 /2
3
Maximum Conduit Movement 4 8 4 8 4 8 4 8 4 8 4 8 4 8 4 8 4 8 4 8 8 8
Cat. # XJG14 XJG18 XJG24 XJG28 XJG34 XJG38 XJG44 XJG48 XJG54 XJG58 XJG64 XJG68 XJG74 XJG78 XJG84 XJG88 XJG94 XJG98 XJG104 XJG108 XJ128 XJ148
Optional Bonding Jumper BJ14 BJ18 BJ24 BJ28 BJ34 BJ38 BJ44 BJ48 BJ54 BJ58 BJ64 BJ68 BJ74 BJ78 BJ84 BJ88 BJ94 BJ98 BJ104 BJ108
A Diameter 1.75 1.75 2.12 2.12 2.43 2.43 3.19 3.19 3.68 3.68 4.75 4.75 4.87 4.87 5.37 5.37 6.62 6.62 6.62 6.62 7.64 9.56
B Length 6.75 10.75 6.75 10.75 7.25 11.25 7.56 11.56 7.87 11.87 8.25 12.25 9.31 13.31 10.00 14.00 9.81 13.81 9.81 13.81 15.50 16.00
Bonding Jumper Length 20" 30" 20" 30" 20" 30" 24" 30" 24" 30" 24" 30" 24" 36" 30" 36" 30" 36" 30" 36"
/4
1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4 5 6

UL Standard: 514B CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 18 NEC Articles 250-77 and 300-7 (b) NEMA FB1 Wet Locations

Body Steel-electrogalvanized Copper-free aluminum - natural Feraloy iron alloy - electrogalvanized (5" + 6" only) Reducer 1/2" through 1" - Steel - electrogalvanized 11/4" through 6" - Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum paint Copper-free aluminum - natural Gland Nut 1/2" through 1" - Steel - electrogalvanized 11/4" through 6" - Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum paint Copper-free aluminum - natural Packing Teflon (trademark of E.I. DuPont Co.) Washer Steel - electrogalvanized Copper-free aluminum - natural Gasket Vellum Bushing 1/2" through 1" - Steel - electrogalvanized 11/4" through 6" - Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum paint Copper-free aluminum - natural
XJG expansion couplings use a metallic bushing and ground springs to create a high integrity internal ground connection. External ground straps offer a redundant ground path and easy visible indication of ground XJ128 and XJ148 are not internally grounded. A pair of 36" bonding jumpers are provided with fitting.
Ground Springs Phosphor bronze - electrogalvanized Ground Strap Braided tinned copper U-Bolts Malleable iron electrogalvanized
Dimensions In Inches:
Options:
Description Available in copper-free aluminum Not available on 5" and 6" sizes Hot dipped galvanized Available with redundant ground strap for visible indication of grounding order separately (BJ Series) Suffix SA HDG
Size Ranges:
1/2" through 6" conduit size 4" and 8" maximum conduit movement
XJG shown with optional bonding jumper
386
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
XJG-EMT Conduit Expansion Joints With Internal Grounding For EMT Conduit
Applications:
XJG expansion couplings are used with EMT Conduit: Without the need for an external bonding jumper and clamps To couple together two (2) sections of conduit subject to longitudinal movement In long conduit runs to permit linear movement caused by thermal expansion and contraction. On long conduit runs to prevent conduit from buckling and ensuing circuit failures Indoors or outdoors where conduit expansion occurs and there are wide temperature ranges In conduit runs that cross structural joints In conduit runs to prevent damage to conduit supports such as in a building or on a bridge With optional redundant visible grounding strap
Options:
Available with redundant ground strap for visible indication of grounding order separately (BJ Series)
Size Ranges:
1/2" through 4" conduit size 4" maximum conduit movement
XJG-EMT for use with EMT conduit

CP
Conduit Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1 3
Maximum Conduit Movement 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4"
Cat. # XJG14 EMT XJG24 EMT XJG34 EMT XJG44 EMT XJG54 EMT XJG64 EMT XJG74 EMT XJG84 EMT XJG94 EMT XJG104 EMT
Optional Bonding Jumper BJ14 BJ24 BJ34 BJ44 BJ54 BJ64 BJ74 BJ84 BJ94 BJ104
A Diameter 13/4" 21/8" 27/16" 31/8" 35/8" 43/4" 47/8" 53/8" 65/8" 65/8"
B Length 103/4" 11" 111/2" 151/4" 151/2" 151/2" 183/4" 197/8" 211/4" 211/4"

UL Standard: 514B CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 18 NEC Articles 250-77 and 300-7 (b) NEMA FB1

Body Steel-electrogalvanized Copper-free aluminum - natural Reducer 1/2" through 1" - Steel - electrogalvanized 11/4" through 4" - Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum paint Gland Nut 1/2" through 1" - Steel - electrogalvanized 11/4" through 4" - Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum paint Packing Teflon (trademark of E.I. DuPont Co.) Washer Steel - electrogalvanized Gasket Vellum Bushing 1/2" through 1" - Steel - electrogalvanized 11/4" through 4" - Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum paint Ground Springs Phosphor bronze - electrogalvanized Ground Strap Braided tinned copper U-Bolts Malleable iron electrogalvanized XJG shown with optional bonding jumper
XJG expansion couplings use a metallic bushing and ground springs to create a high integrity internal ground connection. External ground straps offer a redundant ground path and easy visible indication of ground
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
387
XJGD Combination Expansion/Deflection Coupling and Expansion Joint Internally Grounded

Applications:
XJGD combination fittings are used with rigid metal conduit and IMC: To accommodate axial expansion, angular misalignment and parallel misalignment To couple together two (2) sections of conduit subject to longitudinal movement To maintain a ground connection without the need for an external bonding jumper and clamps In long conduit runs to prevent conduit from buckling and causing circuit failures Indoors or outdoors where conduit expansion occurs and there are wide temperature swings In conduit runs that cross structural joints In conduit runs to prevent damage to conduit supports such as in a building or on a bridge
Wet Locations
XJGD Ordering Information
Hub Size 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
Maximum Conduit Movement 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4" 4"
CP
Cat. # XJGD34 XJGD44 XJGD54 XJGD64 XJGD74 XJGD84 XJGD94 XJGD104
A Diameter 315/16" 41/4" 41/2" 415/16" 55/16" 515/16" 61/2" 8"
B Length 173/4" 181/8" 185/8" 191/4" 203/4" 215/8" 215/8" 273/4"

UL standard: 514B
Standard Materials:
Body, Hubs, Gland Nut, Washer, Bushing Feraloy Packing Teflon Gasket vellum Ground Spring phosphor bronze Outer Jacket molded neoprene Jacket Clamps stainless steel Inner Sleeve molded plastic Ground Straps tinned copper braid
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy electrogalvanized
388
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
HomeRunner Box
Commercial construction screw cover junction box with patented clamps
Applications:
The Cooper Crouse-Hinds HomeRunner Junction Box is designed specifically for commercial construction applications to provide a spacious, flexible junction box for terminating Home Run and other electrical wiring. Its patented clamping design and flexibility make it the most convenient, labor savings junction box available. The HomeRunner Junction Box has extensive built-in features for maximum job site flexibility and efficiency It can be used to terminate multiple wiring methods including AC, MC, MCI-A, NM or EMT Designed for use in commercial construction projects, it is ideal for hotels, motels, condos, assisted living centers, etc.
CP
Features and Call-outs:

1. Patented clamping system - provides maximum flexibility and maximum grip. Third party certified for use with AC, MC, MCI-A or Non-metallic sheathed cable 2. 8 x 8 welded steel construction - provides strong, dependable service and large cubic capacity (177 cu. in.) for ease of wiring 3. Combination eccentric knockouts - on sides for quick & easy access, combination kos in the back of the box are ideal of applications where joist spacing is too tight for side entry 4. Terminal cup washer and flanged nut - quick, easy service ground termination or attachment of grounding bus-bar, if desired 5. 2 cover options - square for surface mounted applications or oversized for flush mount applications 6. Extensive mounting flexibility - pre-drilled holes in side and back for direct mounting or optimal mounting bracket (purchased separately) 7. Far-side support snaps on quickly and easily and is perforated which allows for adjustment in dual thickness, fire-rated walls

For US & Canada : CSA File #248782 Certified to UL50 & UL514B and CSA C22.2, No. 18.3-04 & No. 40-M1989
Standard Materials:
Pre-galvanized steel Built-In Cubic Clamps Volume (1) 10/3 to 10/12, 177 (5) 14/2 to 10/3
Cat.# HR080803
Description Dimensions Homerunner Box 8"H x 8"W x 3"D
Knockouts (10) 1/2 and 3/4 eccentric, (7) 3/4 & 1 eccentric
Wire Fill (7) 14 AWG, (6) 12 AWG, (5) 10 AWG
Unit Qty. Wt. Per 100 5 400
HRC0808S
Surface Mount 8"H x 8"W x .06"D Cover for Homerunner Box Flush Mount 9.38"H x 9.38"W x .06"D Cover for Homerunner Box Stud Bracket for Homerunner Box
100
HRC0808F
160
HRSB1
20
35
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
389
Fiberglass Enclosures
Corrosion-Resistant Weatherproof UL Listed
Reliability you can count on for the most corrosive applications

Partnering with Cooper Crouse-Hinds and our dedicated team of industry experts can help you succeed. Since 1897, we have led the development of safer, more reliable ways to power the most challenging harsh and hazardous areas. Cooper Crouse-Hinds has long been established as a leader in enclosures for Hazardous, Industrial and Commercial applications. Enclosures are engineered and manufactured to perform through the most corrosive conditions needed by OEMs, MRO, Waste Water Treatment Facilities and Chemical Plants. These exceptionally durable, corrosion resistant enclosures can withstand extreme abuse and exposure to chemicals, water, and extreme conditions.
CP
Enclosure knowledge and experience with:

Products that deliver superior performance Low maintenance choices, like durable non-metallic enclosures with features designed to provide optimum protection in the harshest environments Dedicated and expert sales support to help select products that perform reliably and cost effectively
A commitment to safety and productivity

Cooper Crouse-Hinds is helping more industrial facility owners, operators and engineers succeed each day safely and cost effectively. Its part of our commitment to focus on industries where our experience, expertise and products can make the biggest impact.
Quick Selection Guide

PRODUCT GROUP CATALOG SERIES & SIZE MATERIALS Fiberglass reinforced thermoset polyester Poured polyurethane seamless gasket Recessed captive stainless steel screws 304 stainless steel used on all external hardware NUMBER OF SIZES ENVIRONMENAL RATING
Small Line Series 3" x 3" to 17" x 3"
11
UL/cUL CSA Std C22.2 NEMA Types 1, 3R, 4X, 6P, 12
Pushbutton Series 6" x 3" to 1 3.5" x 11.5" Inline and multi-hole configurations, 30mm and 22mm configurations offered Junction Box Series 6" x 4" to 20" x 16"
Fiberglass reinforced thermoset polyester Poured polyurethane seamless gasket Recessed captive stainless steel screws 304 stainless steel used on all external hardware Fiberglass reinforced thermoset polyester Poured polyurethane seamless gasket Recessed captive stainless steel screws 304 stainless steel used on all external hardware Fiberglass reinforced thermoset polyester Poured polyurethane seamless gasket Stainless steel screws 304 stainless steel used on all external hardware Fiberglass reinforced thermoset polyester Poured polyurethane seamless gasket Stainless steel screws 304 stainless steel used on all external hardware
21
UL/cUL CSA Std C22.2 NEMA Types 1, 3, 4X, 6P, 12
76
Raised Cover Series 6" x 4" to 20" x 16"
33
Advantage Series 6" x 6" to 20" x 16"
36
UL/cUL CSA Std C22.2 NEMA Types 1, 3, 3S, 4X, 12, 13
390
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
PRODUCT GROUP & SIZE Wall Mount Series 3R & 4X Series 16" x 10" to 48" x 36" NEMA 3R or 4X Wall Mount Series Large Series 48" x 36" to 72" x 49" Large & Free-standing enclosures with double door options Disconnect & Circuit Breaking Series 16 x 10 to 36 x 30 Industrial Control System applications Xtra Deep Series 6" x 4" to 20" x 16" Extra Deep Cover NUMBER OF SIZES
CATALOG SERIES
MATERIALS Fiberglass reinforced thermoset polyester Poured polyurethane seamless gasket Stainless steel screws 304 stainless steel used on all external hardware
ENVIRONMENAL RATING
28
UL/cUL CSA Std C22.2 (3R) NEMA Types 1, 3R (4X) NEMA Types 1, 3, 3R, 4X, 12
CP
Fiberglass reinforced thermoset polyester Poured polyurethane seamless gasket Stainless steel screws 304 stainless steel used on all external hardware
UL/cUL CSA Std C22.2 NEMA Types 1, 3, 3R, 4X, 12
Fiberglass reinforced thermoset polyester Poured polyurethane seamless gasket Recessed captive stainless steel screws 304 stainless steel used on all external hardware
11
UL/cUL CSA Std C22.2 NEMA Types 1, 3, 4X, 12
Cooper Crouse-Hinds has a full line of Krydon material enclosures. These solid, one-piece construction enclosures are made of a proprietary formulation of fiberglass reinforced polyester that has high impact strength, is fire retardant, heat resistant and withstands weathering. Krydon enclosures are: Strong and durable while providing longer service life for equipment Class I, Division 2 Groups B,C,D rating on many Krydon products Are available in an expansive range of product groups Are available in hundreds of sizes and options
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
391
Fiberglass Enclosures Small Line Series
The Cooper Crouse-Hinds Small Line Series offer a lightweight, compact, versatile solution for applications requiring tight or confined spaces. The Small Line Series houses everything from terminal blocks to small positional control. Available in a choice of two body styles, these enclosures are made of fiberglass reinforced polyester and have a memory retaining polyurethane gasket and stainless steel screws for exceptional corrosion and chemical resistance. The Small Line Series will hold up under the most extreme conditions and provide protection in adverse environments such as water, steam, vapor or chemicals.
CP

Lift-off cover design with 4 cover screws Memory retaining continuous polyurethane gasket Captive stainless steel cover screws Chemical resistant fiberglass reinforced polyester Submersible, non-corrosive design Water-tight, dust-tight Non-conductive, impact resistant, UV resistant Material cuts, drills, punches, and saws with ease and accuracy Rounded edges, minimal protrusions or exposed pocket areas for assembly of dust and debris Smooth surface, no color variations, swirls or color pockets, no voids

Hot compression molded fiberglass reinforced thermoset polyester Poured polyurethane seamless gasket provides water-tight dusttight environmental seal Captive stainless steel screws 304 stainless steel used on all external hardware
Certification & Compliances:

UL/cUL 50, Types 1, 3R, 4X, 6P, 12 UL File Number E57656 CSA Std C22.2 - File 244248 Types 1, 3R, 4X, 6P, 12 NEMA Standard 250 - Types 1, 3R, 4X, 6P, 12 Temperature Range - (-76F to +250F) (-60C to +120C) Flammability Rating - UL94-5V Non-flame propagating
Options:
Mounting feet kit available for field installation. Order part number FSJMTGFTKIT
FSJBS Inside HxWxD 3.13 x 3.03 x 2.70 5.38 x 3.03 x 2.87 6.00 x 3.19 x 3.63 7.82 x 3.03 x 2.87 8.26 x 3.19 x 3.63 8.75 x 3.03 x 2.87 10.51 x 3.19 x 3.63 13.19 x 3.03 x 2.87 16.75 x 3.03 x 2.87 6.90 x 5.90 x 2.88 9.15 x 5.90 x 2.88 4 Cover Screws With a Beveled Cover Design FSJBS030302 FSJBS050302 FSJBS060404 FSJBS080302 FSJBS080404 FSJBS090302 FSJBS110404 FSJBS140302 FSJBS170302
FSJS 4 Cover Screws With a Flat Cover Design
NPT Size Mounting Plate**
FSJS070603 FSJS090603
FMP0706 FMP0906
* Flat Cover ** Available in: Aluminum (SA), Fiberglass (FG), Carbon Steel (C), and Stainless Steel (SS) To order, add the suffix to the end of the part number
392
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Dimensional Drawings
W B
C
M
H A A
D
E
L K
CP
N B
SECTION B-B
SECTION A-A
FRONT VIEW WITHOUT COVER
FSJS Configuration Dimensions In Inches (mm)

Catalog Number FSJS070603 FSJS090603 Overall H x W x D 7.63 x 6.63 x 3.19 (194 x 168 x 81) 9.87 x 6.63 x 3.19 (251 x 168 x 81) Inside A x B x C 6.90 x 5.90 x 2.88 (175 x 150 x 73) 9.15 x 5.90 x 2.88 (232 x 150 x 73) Mounting E x F 5.37 x 5.63 (137 x 143) 7.62 x 5.63 (194 x 143) J 2.48 (63) 2.48 (63) K 5.3 (137) 7.62 (194) L 4.25 (108) 4.25 (108) M 4.52 (115) 6.77 (172) N Weight 4.9 3 lbs. (124) 3 lbs. 4.9 (124)
FSJBS Configuration Dimensions In Inches (mm)

Catalog Number FSJBS030302 FSJBS050302 FSJBS060404 FSJBS080302 FSJBS080404 FSJBS090302 FSJBS110404 FSJBS140302 FSJBS170302 Overall H x W x D 3.72 x 3.63 x 2.95 (95 x 92 x 75) 5.97 x 3.63 x 3.14 (152 x 92 x 80) 6.63 x 3.81 x 3.89 (168 x 97 x 99) 8.41 x 3.63 x 3.14 (214 x 92 x 80) 8.88 x 3.81 x 3.89 (225 x 97 x 99) 9.35 x 3.63 x 3.14 (237 x 92 x 80) 11.13 x 3.81 x 3.89 (283 x 97 x 99) 13.78 x 3.63 x 3.14 (350 x 92 x 80) 17.35 x 3.63 x 3.14 (441 x 92 x 80) Inside A x B x C 3.13 x 3.03 x 2.70 (79 x 77 x 69) 5.38 x 3.03 x 2.87 (137 x 77 x 73) 6.00 x 3.19 x 3.63 (153 x 81 x 92) 7.82 x 3.03 x 2.87 (199 x 77 x 73) 8.26 x 3.19 x 3.63 (210 x 81 x 92) 8.75 x 3.03 x 2.87 (222 x 77 x 73) 10.51 x 3.19 x 3.63 (267 x 81 x 92) 13.19 x 3.03 x 2.87 (335 x 77 x 73) 16.75 x 3.03 x 2.87 (426 x 77 x 73) I 0 (0) 4.72 (120) 5.31 (135) 7.16 (182) 7.56 (192) 8.10 (206) 9.81 (249) 12.53 (318) 16.10 (409) J 0 (0) 2.38 (61) 2.50 (64) 2.38 (60) 2.50 (64) 2.38 (60) 2.50 (64) 2.38 (60) 2.38 (60) K 2.31 (59) 4.56 (116) 4.88 (124) 7.00 (178) 7.13 (181) 7.94 (202) 9.37 (238) 12.37 (314) 15.94 (405) L 2.75 (70) 2.75 (70) 2.94 (75) 2.75 (70) 2.94 (75) 2.75 (70) 2.94 (75) 2.75 (70) 2.75 (70) M 1.59 (40) 3.84 (98) 4.13 (105) 6.28 (160) 6.38 (162) 7.22 (183) 8.63 (219) 11.66 (296) 15.22 (387) N 2.03 (52) 2.03 (52) 2.19 (56) 2.03 (52) 2.19 (56) 2.03 (52) 2.19 (56) 2.03 (52) 2.03 (52) Weight 1 lb. 1 lb. 2 lbs. 2 lbs. 2 lbs. 2 lbs. 2 lbs. 2 lbs. 3 lbs.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
393
Fiberglass Enclosures Pushbutton Series
The Cooper Crouse-Hinds Pushbutton Series offer a solution for applications requiring an enclosure with multiple pre-drilled openings for pushbuttons available in 30mm and 22mm configurations. The notched keyhole design and the ability to order up to 25 holes, makes this versatile series a perfect match for your general purpose electrical and control station applications. Available in a choice of two body designs, these enclosures are made of fiberglass reinforced polyester and have a memory retaining polyurethane gasket and stainless steel screws for exceptional corrosion and chemical resistance. The Pushbutton Series will hold up under the most extreme conditions and provide protection in adverse conditions such as water, steam, vapor or chemicals.
CP

Lift-off cover design with 4 cover screws Memory retaining continuous polyurethane gasket Captive stainless steel cover screws Full metal grounding strap Notched key hole design Chemical resistant fiberglass reinforced polyester Submersible, non-corrosive design Water-tight, dust-tight Non-conductive, impact resistant, UV resistant Material cuts, drills, punches, and saws with ease and accuracy Rounded edges, minimal protrusions or exposed pocket areas for assembly of dust and debris Smooth surface, no color variations, swirls or color pockets, no voids

Hot compression molded fiberglass reinforced thermoset polyester Poured polyurethane seamless gasket provides water-tight dust-tight environmental seal Captive stainless steel screws 304 stainless steel used on all external hardware Stainless steel beaded cover retention chain on the FPBM series

UL/cUL 50, Types 1, 3, 4X, 6P, 12 UL File Number E57656 CSA Std C22.2 - File 244248 Types 1, 3, 4X, 6P, 12 NEMA Standard 250 - Types 1, 3, 4X, 6P, 12 Temperature Range - (-76F to +250F) (-60C to +120C) Flammability Rating - UL94-5V Non-flame propagating
Options:
Inside H x W x D 6.00 x 3.19 x 3.63 6.00 x 3.19 x 3.63 8.26 x 3.19 x 3.63 10.51 x 3.19 x 3.63 13.19 x 3.03 x 2.87 16.75 x 3.03 x 2.87 16.75 x 3.03 x 2.87
Holes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
30mm Pushbutton FPB31 FPB32 FPB33 FPB34 FPB35 FPB36 FPB37
Inside H x W x D 6.00 x 3.19 x 3.63 6.00 x 3.19 x 3.63 6.00 x 3.19 x 3.63 8.26 x 3.19 x 3.63
22mm Pushbutton FPB21 FPB22 FPB23 FPB24
30mm Multi-Hole Holes Pushbutton 4 FMP0606C 6 FMP0806C 9 12 16 20 25 FMP1008C FMP1008C FMP1210C FMP1210C FMP1412C
Mounting Plate* FMP0606 FMP0806 FMP1008 FMP1008 FMP1210 FMP1210 FMP1412
10.51 x 3.19 x 3.63 FPB25 10.51 x 3.19 x 3.63 FPB26 13.19 x 3.03 x 2.87 FPB27
* Available in: Aluminum (SA), Fiberglass (FG), Carbon Steel (C), and Stainless Steel (SS) To order, add the suffix to the end of the part number
394
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
30mm
L
W J
D
B
CP
C
N
2.25
(57)
I A A 2.25 (57)
SECTION A-A .190 (5)
1.210 (31)
B
.672 (17)
.190 (5)
22mm
SECTION B-B
W
L
J B
D K
C
N
1.56 (40)
M
H I A A 1.56 (40) 1.56 (40)
.875 (22)
.468 (12)
.190 (5)
X2
Multi-Hole
P
W F B HOLE DIA. 4 PLC'S.
B 2.25 (57)
.190 (5)
C
J
2.25 N (57)
D
A K E H
1.210 (31)
.672 (17)
L SECTION A-A
B P 2.25 (57)
M SECTION B-B
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
395
30mm Pushbutton Series - Configuration Dimensions In Inches (mm)

Catalog Number FPB31 FPB32 Overall H x W x D 6.63 x 3.81 x 3.89 (168 x 97 x 99) 6.63 x 3.81 x 3.89 (168 x 97 x 99) 8.88 x 3.81 x 3.89 (225 x 97 x 99) 11.13 x 3.81 x 3.89 (283 x 97 x 99) 13.78 x 3.63 x 3.14 (350 x 92 x 80) 17.35 x 3.63 x 3.14 (441 x 92 x 80) 17.35 x 3.63 x 3.14 (441 x 92 x 80) Inside A x B x C 6.00 x 3.19 x 3.63 (153 x 81 x 92) 6.00 x 3.19 x 3.63 (153 x 81 x 92) 8.26 x 3.19 x 3.63 (210 x 81 x 92) 10.51 x 3.19 x 3.63 (267 x 81 x 92) 13.19 x 3.03 x 2.87 (335 x 77 x 73) 16.75 x 3.03 x 2.87 (426 x 77 x 73) 16.75 x 3.03 x 2.87 (426 x 77 x 73) I 5.31 (135) 5.31 (135) 7.56 (192) 9.81 (249) 12.53 (318) 16.1 (409) 16.1 (409) J 2.5 (64) 2.5 (64) 2.5 (64) 2.5 (64) 2.38 (60) 2.38 (60) 2.38 (60) K 4.88 (124) 4.88 (124) 7.13 (181) 9.37 (238) 12.37 (314) 15.94 (405) 15.94 (405) L 2.94 (75) 2.94 (75) 2.94 (75) 2.94 (75) 2.75 (70) 2.75 (70) 2.75 (70) M 4.13 (105) 4.13 (105) 6.38 (162) 8.63 (219) 11.66 (296) 15.22 (387) 15.22 (387) N 2.19 (56) 2.19 (56) 2.19 (56) 2.19 (56) 2.03 (52) 2.03 (52) 2.03 (52) O 3.31 (84) 2.19 (56) 2.19 (56) 2.19 (56) 2.39 (61) 3.05 (77) 1.92 (49) Weight 2 lbs. 2 lbs. 2 lbs. 2 lbs. 2 lbs. 3 lbs. 3 lbs.
CP
FBP33 FPB34 FBP35 FBP36 FBP37

Catalog Number FPB21 FPB22 FPB23 FPB24 FPB25 FPB26 FPB27 Overall H x W x D 6.63 x 3.81 x 3.89 (168 x 97 x 99) 6.63 x 3.81 x 3.89 (168 x 97 x 99) 6.63 x 3.81 x 3.89 (168 x 97 x 99) 8.88 x 3.81 x 3.89 (225 x 97 x 99) 11.13 x 3.81 x 3.89 (283 x 97 x 99) 11.13 x 3.81 x 3.89 (283 x 97 x 99) 13.78 x 3.63 x 3.14 (350 x 92 x 80) Inside A x B x C 6.00 x 3.19 x 3.63 (153 x 81 x 92) 6.00 x 3.19 x 3.63 (153 x 81 x 92) 6.00 x 3.19 x 3.63 (153 x 81 x 92) 8.26 x 3.19 x 3.63 (210 x 81 x 92) 10.51 x 3.19 x 3.63 (267 x 81 x 92) 10.51 x 3.19 x 3.63 (267 x 81 x 92) 13.19 x 3.03 x 2.87 (335 x 77 x 73) I 5.31 (135) 5.31 (135) 5.31 (135) 7.56 (192) 9.81 (249) 9.81 (249) 12.53 (318) J 2.5 (64) 2.5 (64) 2.5 (64) 2.5 (64) 2.5 (64) 2.5 (64) 2.38 (60) K 4.88 (124) 4.88 (124) 4.88 (124) 7.13 (181) 9.37 (238) 9.37 (238) 12.37 (314) L 2.94 (75) 2.94 (75) 2.94 (75) 2.94 (75) 2.94 (75) 2.94 (75) 2.75 (70) M 4.13 (105) 4.13 (105) 4.13 (105) 6.38 (162) 8.63 (219) 8.63 (219) 11.66 (296) N 2.19 (56) 2.19 (56) 2.19 (56) 2.19 (56) 2.19 (56) 2.19 (56) 2.03 (52) O 3.31 (84) 2.53 (64) 1.75 (44) 2.09 (53) 2.44 (62) 1.66 (42) 2.20 (56) Weight 2 lbs. 2 lbs. 2 lbs. 2 lbs. 2 lbs. 3 lbs. 3 lbs.
Multi-Hole Pushbutton Series - Configuration Dimensions In Inches (mm)

Catalog Number FPBM34 FPBM36 FPBM39 Overall H x W x D 7.50 x 7.50 x 4.75 (191 x 191 x 121) 9.62 x 7.50 x 4.74 (244 x 191 x 121) 11.62 x 9.41 x 4.25 (295 x 239 x 108) Inside A x B x C 5.72 x 5.72 x 4.45 (145 x 145 x 113) 7.73 x 5.74 x 4.45 (196 x 146 x 113) 9.73 x 7.73 x 3.98 (247 x 196 x 101) 9.73 x 7.73 x 3.98 (247 x 196 x 101) Mounting E x F 6.75 x 4 171 x 101) 8.88 x 4 (225 x 101) 10.75 x 6 (273 x 152) 10.75 x 6 (273 x 152) 12.75 x 8 (324 x 203) 12.75 x 8 324 x 203) J K 4 4.25 (101) (108) 4 6.25 (101) (159) 3.5 (89) 3.5 (89) 8.25 (209) 8.25 (209) L 4.25 (108) 4.25 (108) 6.25 (159) 6.25 (159) M 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) N 7.52 (191) 9.5 (242) O 2.64 (67) 2.64 (67) P 2.64 (67) 2.51 (64) 2.45 (62) 2.45 (62) 2.3 (58) 2.1 (53) 2.25 (57) Hole Dia. 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) Weight 2.75 lbs. 3.5 lbs. 5 lbs. 5 lbs. 6.5 lbs. 6.5 lbs. 8.5 lbs.
11.35 3.43 (288) (87) 11.35 2.3 (288) (58) 13.41 3.33 (341) (85) 13.41 2.2 (341) (56) 15.47 3.24 (393) (82)
11.62 x 9.41 x 4.25 FPBM312 (295 x 239 x 108)
13.56 x 11.43 x 5.21 11.79 x 9.80 x 4.94 FPBM316 (344 x 291 x 132) (299 x 249 x 125) 13.56 x 11.43 x 5.21 11.79 x 9.80 x 4.94 FPBM320 (344 x 291 x 132) (299 x 249 x 125) FPBM325
4.5 10.25 8.25 (114) (260) (209) 4.5 10.25 8.25 (114) (260) (209)
15.50 x 13.50 x 6.25 13.53 x 11.55 x 5.94 14.62 x 10 (394 x 343 x 159) (344 x 293 x 151) (371 x 254)
5.37 12.25 10.25 0.25 (137) (311) (260) (6)
396
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Fiberglass Enclosures Junction Box Series
The Cooper Crouse-Hinds Junction Box Series offer an extensive selection to the industrial application requiring a vast number of configurations and sizes. The Junction Box Series is available in 12 different sizes, each offering a multitude of durable cover options with features such as stainless steel hinges, padlock covers and windows. These enclosures are made of fiberglass reinforced polyester and have a poured polyurethane seamless gasket that provides a watertight and dust-tight environmental seal for exceptional corrosion and chemical resistance. The durable Junction Box Series will hold up under the most extreme applications and provide protection and reliability in the most adverse conditions.
CP

Memory retaining continuous polyurethane gasket Captive stainless steel cover screws Chemical resistant fiberglass reinforced polyester Submersible, non-corrosive design Water-tight, dust-tight Non-conductive, impact resistant, UV resistant Material cuts, drills, punches, and saws with ease and accuracy Rounded edges, minimal protrusions or exposed pocket areas for assembly of dust and debris Smooth surface, no color variations, swirls or color pockets, no voids Stainless steel retention chain on screw cover series Full-length stainless steel hinges on the hinge cover series

Hot compression molded fiberglass reinforced thermoset polyester Poured polyurethane seamless gasket provides water-tight dusttight environmental seal Captive stainless steel screws 304 stainless steel used on all external hardware Molded in mounting flange Panel mounting capability for fixed rear panel Bosses utilize threaded brass inserts accepting 10-32 screws

UL/cUL 50, Types 1, 3, 4X, 6P, 12 UL File Number E57656 CSA Std C22.2 - File 244248 Types 1, 3, 4X, 6P, 12 NEMA Standard 250 - Types 1, 3, 4X, 6P, 12 Temperature Range - (-76F to +250F) (-60C to +120C) Flammability Rating - UL94-5V Window flammability - UL94V-0 Non-flame propagating
Inside H x W x D 5.84 x 3.85 x 4.45 5.72 x 5.72 x 4.45 7.73 x 5.74 x 4.45 7.73 x 7.73 x 4.82 9.73 x 7.73 x 3.98 11.79 x 9.80 x 4.94 11.70 x 11.70 x 6.29 14.00 x 7.00 x 6.56 13.53 x 11.55 x 5.94 15.63 x 13.60 x 5.94 17.69 x 15.69 x 8.45 19.72 x 15.72 x 8.45
4 Cover Screws With Lift Off Cover FJS060404 FJS060604 FJS080604 FJS080804 FJS100804 FJS121005 FJS121206 FJS140707 FJS141206 FJS161406 FJS181608 FJS201608
2 Cover Screws With a Hinged Cover FJHS060404 FJHS060604 FJHS080604 FJHS080804 FJHS100804 FJHS121005 FJHS121206 FJHS140707 FJHS141206 FJHS161406 FJHS181608 FJHS201608
Hinged Cover With a Padlock Latch FJHP060404 FJHP060604 FJHP080604 FJHP080804 FJHP100804 FJHP121005 FJHP121206 FJHP140707 FJHP141206 FJHP161406 FJHP181608 FJHP201608
2 Cover Screws With a Hinged Cover With Window FJHSW060404 FJHSW060604 FJHSW080604 FJHSW080804 FJHSW100804 FJHSW121005 FJHSW121206 FJHSW140707 FJHSW141206 FJHSW161406 FJHSW181608 FJHSW201608
Hinged Cover With a Window & Padlock Latch FJHPW060404 FJHPW060604 FJHPW080604 FJHPW080804 FJHPW100804 FJHPW121005 FJHPW121206 FJHPW140707 FJHPW141206 FJHPW161406 FJHPW181608 FJFHPW201608
Fiberglass Hinged Cover With a Window & Padlock Latch
Mounting Plate* FMP0604 FMP0606 FMP0806 FMP0808 FMP1008 FMP1210 FMP1212 FMP1407 FMP1412 FMP1614 FMP1816 FMP2016
FJFHPW080604 FJFHPW080804 FJFHPW100804 FJFHPW121005 FJFHPW121206 FJFHPW140707 FJFHPW141206 FJFHPW161406 FJFHPW181608 FJFHPW201608
* Available in: Aluminum (SA), Fiberglass (FG), Carbon Steel (C), and Stainless Steel (SS) To order, add the suffix to the end of the part number Available with the deep cover option, please add a D to the part number. For example, FJDHS100804 Not available with a 6P rating
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
397
W
L
F B HOLE DIA. 4 PLC'S.
CP
J B
D K
SECTION A-A
B SECTION B-B
Configuration Dimensions In Inches (mm)

Catalog Number Overall HxWxD Inside AxBxC Window Area Mounting ExF J K L M N Hole Dia. Weight
FJS060404 FJHS060404 FJHP060404 FJHPW060404 FJHSW060404 FJS060604 FJHS060604 FJHP060604 FJHPW060604 FJHSW060604 FJS080604 FJHS080604 FJHP080604 FJHPW080604 FJHSW080604 FJFHPW080604 FJS080804 FJHS080804 FJHP080804 FJHPW080804 FJHSW080804 FJFHPW080804 FJS100804 FJHS100804 FJHP100804 FJHPW100804 FJHSW100804 FJFHPW100804 FJDS100804* FJDHS100804* FJDHP100804* FJDHPW100804* FJDHSW100804* FJDFHPW100804* FJS121005 FJHS121005 FJHP121005 FJHPW121005 FJHSW121005 FJFHPW121005
7.50 x 5.43 x 4.75 (191 x 138 x 121)
5.84 x 3.85 x 4.45 (148 x 98 x 113)
4.25 x 2.25 (108 x 57)
6.75 x 2 (171 x 51)
4 (101)
4.25 (108)
2.25 (57)
0.25 (6)
7.39 (188)
0.31 (8)
2.5 lbs.
7.50 x 7.50 x 4.75 (191 x 191 x 121)
5.72 x 5.72 x 4.45 (145 x 145 x 113)
4.25 x 4.25 (108 x 108)
6.75 x 4 (171 x 101)
4 (101)
4.25 (108)
4.25 (108)
0.25 (6)
7.52 (191)
0.31 (8)
2.75 lbs.
9.62 x 7.50 x 4.74 (244 x 191 x 121)
7.73 x 5.74 x 4.45 (196 x 146 x 113)
6.25 x 4.25 (159 x 108)
8.88 x 4 (225 x 101)
4 (101)
6.25 (159)
4.25 (108)
0.25 (6)
9.5 (242)
0.31 (8)
3.5 lbs.
9.56 x 9.38 x 4.89 (243 x 238 x 124)
7.73 x 7.73 x 4.64 (196 x 196 x 118)
8.75 x 6.00 (222 x 152)
8.75 x 6.00 (222 x 152)
4.06 (103)
6.25 (159)
6.25 (159)
0.25 (6)
9.37 (238)
0.31 (8)
1.71 lbs.
11.62 x 9.41 x 4.25 (295 x 239 x 108)
9.73 x 7.73 x 3.98 (247 x 196 x 101)
8.25 x 6.25 (210 x 159)
10.75 x 6 (273 x 152)
3.5 (89)
8.25 (209)
6.25 (159)
0.25 (6)
11.35 (288)
0.31 (8)
5 lbs.
11.62 x 9.37 x 5.06 (295 x 238 x 129)
9.73 x 7.73 x 4.83 (247 x 196 x 123)
8.25 x 6.25 (210 x 159)
10.75 x 6 (273 x 152)
4.37 (111)
8.25 (209)
6.25 (159)
0.25 (6)
11.37 (289)
0.31 (8)
5 lbs.
13.56 x 11.43 x 5.21 (344 x 291 x 132)
11.79 x 9.80 x 4.94 (299 x 249 x 125)
10.25 x 8.25 (260 x 210)
12.75 x 8 (324 x 203)
4.5 (114)
10.25 (260)
8.25 (209)
0.25 (6)
13.41 (341)
0.31 (8)
6.5 lbs.
*Deep cover - center of cover raised 3/4".
398
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Catalog Number Overall HxWxD Inside AxBxC Window Area Mounting ExF J K L M N Hole Dia. Weight
FJS121206 FJHS121206 FJHP121206 FJHPW121206 FJHSW121206 FJFHPW121206 FJS140707 FJHS140707 FJHP140707 FJHPW140707 FJHSW140707 FJFHPW140707 FJS141206 FJHS141206 FJHP141206 FJHPW141206 FJHSW141206 FJFHPW141206 FJS161406 FJHS161406 FJHP161406 FJHPW161406 FJHSW161406 FJFHPW161406 FJS181608 FJHS181608 FJHP181608 FJHPW181608 FJHSW181608 FJFHPW181608 FJS201608 FJHS201608 FJHP201608 FJHPW201608 FJHSW201608 FJFHPW201608
13.56 x 13.38 x 6.36 (344 x 340 x 161)
11.70 x 11.70 x 6.11 (297 x 297 x 155)
12.75 x 10.00 12.75 x 10.00 (324 x 254) (324 x 254)
5.53 (140)
10.25 (260)
10.25 (260)
0.25 (6)
13.38 (340)
0.31 (8)
3.2 lbs.
CP
15.87 x 8.75 x 6.81 (403 x 222 x 173)
14.00 x 7.00 x 6.56 (356 x 178 x 167)
12.75 x 5.75 (324 x 146)
15 x 5 (381 x 127)
6.12 (156)
12.25 (311)
5.25 (133)
0.25 (6)
15.75 (400)
0.31 (8)
6.25 lbs.
15.50 x 13.50 x 6.25 (394 x 343 x 159)
13.53 x 11.55 x 5.94 (344 x 293 x 151)
12.25 x 10.25 14.62 x 10 (311 x 260) (371 x 254)
5.37 (137)
12.25 (311)
10.25 (260)
0.25 (6)
15.47 (393)
0.31 (8)
8.5 lbs.
17.53 x 15.46 x 6.23 (445 x 393 x 158)
15.63 x 13.60 x 5.94 (397 x 345 x 151)
14.25 x 12.25 16.75 x 12 (362 x 311) (425 x 305)
5.36 (136)
14.25 (362)
12.25 (311)
0.25 (6)
17.45 (443)
0.31 (8)
11.5 lbs.
19.62 x 17.61 x 8.82 (498 x 447 x 224)
17.69 x 15.69 x 8.45 (449 x 399 x 215)
16.25 x 14.25 18.88 x 12 (413 x 362) (479 x 305)
7.99 (203)
16.25 (413)
14.25 (362)
0.25 (6)
19.61 (498)
0.31 (8)
19.25 lbs.
22.00 x 17.68 x 8.83 (559 x 449 x 224)
19.72 x 15.72 x 8.45 (501 x 399 x 215)
18.25 x 14.25 21.25 x 10.00 (464 x 362) (540 x 254)
8 (203)
18.25 (464)
14.25 (362)
0.25 (6)
21.68 (551)
0.31 (8)
20.25 lbs.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
399
Fiberglass Enclosures Raised Cover Series
The Cooper Crouse-Hinds Raised Cover Series offer a solution for applications requiring an enclosure with a raised or deeper cover. The deeper cover is suitable for panel mounting and for use as an operator interface in industrial equipment control stations when required. The deeper cover allows every cubic inch of valuable internal enclosure space to be used. These enclosures are made of fiberglass reinforced polyester and have a poured polyurethane seamless gasket that provides a water-tight and dust-tight environmental seal for exceptional corrosion and chemical resistance. The Raised Cover Series will hold up under the most extreme applications and provide protection and reliability in highend electronics applications, harsh corrosive environments, and industrial applications both indoors and out.
CP

Memory retaining continuous polyurethane gasket Molded in mounting flange Captive stainless steel cover screws Chemical resistant fiberglass reinforced polyester Submersible, non-corrosive design Water-tight, dust-tight Non-conductive, impact resistant, UV resistant Material cuts, drills, punches, and saws with ease and accuracy Rounded edges, minimal protrusions or exposed pocket areas for assembly of dust and debris Smooth surface, no color variations, swirls or color pockets, no voids


Inside H x W x D
4 Cover Screws With Lift Off Cover FRCJS060406 FRCJS060606 FRCJS080606 FRCJS080805 FRCJS100806 FRCJS121006 FRCJS121208 FRCJS141208 FRCJS161408 FRCJS181610 FRCJS201610
2 Cover Screws With a Hinged Cover FRCJHS060406 FRCJHS060606 FRCJHS080606 FRCJHS080805 FRCJHS100806 FRCJHS121006 FRCJHS121208 FRCJHS141208 FRCJHS161408 FRCJHS181610 FRCJHS201610
Hinged Cover With a Padlock Latch FRCJHP060406 FRCJHP060606 FRCJHP080606 FRCJHP080805 FRCJHP100806 FRCJHP121006 FRCJHP121208 FRCJHP141208 FRCJHP161408 FRCJHP181610 FRCJHP201610
Mounting Plate* FMP0604 FMP0606 FMP0806 FMP0808 FMP1008 FMP1210 FMP1212 FMP1412 FMP1614 FMP1816 FMP2016
5.84 x 3.85 x 5.95 5.72 x 5.72 x 5.95 7.73 x 5.74 x 5.95 7.73 x 7.73 x 4.82 9.73 x 7.73 x 6.36 11.79 x 9.80 x 6.32 11.70 x 11.70 x 6.29 13.53 x 11.55 x 7.45 15.63 x 13.60 x 7.45 17.69 x 15.69 x 10.31 19.72 x 15.72 x 10.33
400
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
DIMENSIONAL DRAWINGS

P L
CP
C
J D B K
SECTION A-A
B SECTION B-B
M

Catalog Number FRCJS060406 FRCJHS060406 FRCJHP060406 FRCJS060606 FRCJHS060606 FRCJHP060606 FRCJS080606 FRCJHS080606 FRCJHP080606 FRCJS080805 FRCJHS080805 FRCJHP080805 FRCJS100806 FRCJHS100806 FRCJHP100806 FRCJS121006 FRCJHS121006 FRCJHP121006 FRCJS121208 FRCJHS121208 FRCJHP121208 FRCJS141208 FRCJHS141208 FRCJHP141208 FRCJS161408 FRCJHS161408 FRCJHP161408 FRCJS181610 FRCJHS181610 FRCJHP181610 FRCJS201610 FRCJHS201610 FRCJHP201610 Overall HxWxD 7.50 x 5.47 x 6.22 (191 x 139 x 158) 7.50 x 7.52 x 6.22 (191 x 191 x 158) 9.62 x 7.46 x 6.22 (244 x 190 x158) 9.56 x 9.38 x 6.26 (243 x 238 x 159) 11.62 x 9.37 x 6.61 (295 x 238 x 168) 13.56 x 11.43 x 6.61 (344 x 291 x 168) 13.56 x 13.38 x 7.73 (344 x 340 x 196) 15.50 x 13.38 x 7.69 (394 x 340 x 195) 17.53 x 15.43 x 7.71 (445 x 392 x 196) 19.62 x 17.48 x 10.62 (498 x 444 x 270) 22.00 x 17.56 x 10.64 (559 x 446 x 270) Inside AxBxC 5.84 x 3.85 x 5.95 (148 x 98 x 151) 5.72 x 5.72 x 5.95 (145 x 145 x 151) 7.73 x 5.74 x 5.95 (196 x 146 x 151) 7.73 x 7.73 x 6.01 (196 x 196 x 153) 9.73 x 7.73 x 6.36 (247 x 196 x 162) 11.79 x 9.80 x 6.32 (299 x 249 x 161) 11.70 x 11.70 x 7.48 (297 x 297 x 190) 13.53 x 11.55 x 7.45 (344 x 293 x 189) 15.63 x 13.60 x 7.45 (397 x 345 x 189) 17.69 x 15.69 x 10.31 (449 x 399 x 262) 19.72 x 15.72 x 10.33 (501 x 399 x 262) Mounting ExF 5.84 x 3.85 x 5.95 (148 x 98 x 151) 6.75 x 4 (171 x 101) 8.88 x 4 (225 x 101) 8.75 x 6.00 (222 x 152) 10.75 x 6 (273 x 152) 12.75 x 8 (324 x 203) 12.75 x 10.00 (324 x 254) 14.62 x 10 (371 x 254) 16.75 x 12 (425 x 305) 18.88 x 12 (479 x 305) 21.25 x 10.00 (540 x 254) J 5.49 (140) 5.49 (140) 5.49 (140) 5.43 (138) 5.91 (150) 5.87 (149) 6.90 (175) 6.87 (174) 6.87 (174) 9.86 (250) 9.87 (251) K 4.25 (108) 4.25 (108) 6.25 (159) 6.25 (159) 8.25 (209) L 2.25 (57) 4.25 (108) 4.25 (108) 6.25 (159) 6.25 (159) M N O 5.31 (135) 5.34 (136) 7.25 (185) 7.17 (182) P 3.34 (85) 5.31 (135) 5.28 (134) 7.17 (182) 7.38 (188) 9.23 (234) Hole Dia. 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) Weight 2.5 lbs.
0.25 7.45 (6) (189) 0.25 7.52 (6) (191) 0.25 9.36 (6) (238) 0.25 9.37 (6) (238)
2.75 lbs.
3.5 lbs.
4 lbs.
0.25 11.38 9.3 (6) (289) (236) 0.25 13.41 11.2 (6) (341) (284)
5 lbs.
10.25 8.25 (260) (209)
6.5 lbs.
10.25 10.25 0.25 13.38 11.17 11.17 (260) (260) (6) (340) (284) (284) 12.25 10.25 0.25 15.42 13.2 (311) (260) (6) (392) (335) 14.25 12.25 0.25 17.43 15.2 (362) (311) (6) (443) (386) 11.16 (284) 13.24 (336)
7.4 lbs.
8.5 lbs.
11.5 lbs.
16.25 14.25 0.25 19.49 17.25 15.25 (413) (362) (6) (495) (438) (387) 18.25 14.25 0.25 21.56 19.31 15.39 (464) (362) (6) (548) (490) (391)
19.25 lbs.
20.25 lbs.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
401
Fiberglass Enclosures Xtra Deep Series
The Cooper Crouse-Hinds Xtra Deep Series offer a solution for applications requiring an extra deep enclosure. The deep, durable enclosure has nearly equal capacity in both the cover and the base, giving you ample room for your cover or mounting plate components. The fiberglass reinforced polyester enclosure with flange mount base, stainless steel hardware and poured polyurethane seamless gasket provides exceptional corrosion and chemical resistance in a watertight and dust-tight environmental seal. The Xtra Deep Series will hold up under the most extreme applications and provide protection and reliability in high-end electronics applications, harsh corrosive environments, and industrial applications both indoors and out.
CP

Memory retaining continuous polyurethane gasket Integral mounting flange Molded in panel mounting inserts Chemical resistant fiberglass reinforced polyester Non-corrosive design Full length stainless steel hinge Water-tight, dust-tight Non-conductive, impact resistant, UV resistant Material cuts, drills, punches, and saws with ease and accuracy Rounded edges, minimal protrusions or exposed pocket areas for assembly of dust and debris Smooth surface, no color variations, swirls or color pockets, no voids

Hot compression molded fiberglass reinforced thermoset polyester Poured polyurethane seamless gasket provides water-tight dusttight environmental seal 304 stainless steel used on all external hardware Molded in mounting flange Panel mounting capability for fixed rear panel Bosses utilize threaded brass inserts accepting 10-32 screws

UL/cUL 50, Types 1, 3, 4X, 12 UL File Number E57656 CSA Std C22.2 - File 244248 Types 1, 3, 4X, 12 NEMA Standard 250 - Types 1, 3, 4X, 12 Temperature Range - (-76F to +250F) (-60C to +120C) Flammability Rating - UL94-5V Non-flame propagating
Inside H x W x D 5.84 x 3.85 x 8.81 5.72 x 5.72 x 8.81 7.73 x 5.74 x 8.82 7.73 x 7.73 x 9.18 9.73 x 7.73 x 7.84 11.79 x 9.80 x 9.81 11.70 x 11.70 x 12.12 13.50 x 11.55 x 11.81 15.63 x 13.60 x 11.81 17.69 x 15.69 x 16.81 19.71 x 15.71 x 16.81
Padlockable Twist Latch Mounting Plate* FXDJ060408 FXDJ060608 FXDJ080608 FXDJ080808 FXDJ100808 FXDJ121010 FXDJ121212 FXDJ141212 FXDJ161412 FXDJ181617 FXDJ201617 FMP0604 FMP0606 FMP0806 FMP0808 FMP1008 FMP1210 FMP1212 FMP1412 FMP1614 FMP1816 FMP2016
402
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
CP

Catalog Number FXDJ060408 FXDJ060608 FXDJ08608 FXDJ080808 FXDJ100808 FXDJ121010 FXDJ121212 FXDJ141212 FXDJ161412 FXDJ181617 FXDJ201617 Overall HxWxD 7.50 x 4.94 x 9.07 (190 x 125 x 230) 7.50 x 6.88 x 9.07 (190 x 175 x 230) 9.62 x 6.84 x 9.07 (244 x 174 x 230) 9.56 x 8.84 x 9.43 (243 x 224 x 239) 11.62 x 8.81 x 8.09 (295 x 224 x 206) 13.56 x 10.83 x 10.06 (344 x 275 x 256) 13.56 x 12.84 x 12.37 (344 x 326 x 314) 15.50 x 12.83 x 12.06 (394 x 326 x 306) 17.53 x 14.88 x 12.05 (445 x 378 x 306) 19.62 x 16.91 x 17.19 (498 x 429 x 436) 22.00 x 17.00 x 17.21 (558 x 431 x 437) Inside AxBxC 5.84 x 3.85 x 8.81 (148 x 98 x 224) 5.72 x 5.72 x 8.81 (145 x 145 x 224) 7.73 x 5.74 x 8.82 (196 x 146 x 224) 7.73 x 7.73 x 9.18 (196 x 196 x 233) 9.73 x 7.73 x 7.84 (247 x 196 x 199) 11.79 x 9.80 x 9.81 (299 x 249 x 249) 11.70 x 11.70 x 12.12 (297 x 297 x 308) 13.50 x 11.55 x11.81 (343 x 293 x 300) 17.53 x 14.88 x 12.05 (445 x 378 x 306) 17.69 x 15.69 x 16.81 (449 x 398 x 427) 19.71 x 15.71 x 16.81 (501 x 399 x 427) Mounting ExF 6.75 x 2.00 (171 x 51) 6.75 x 4.00 (171 x 101) 8.88 x 4.00 (225 x 101) 8.75 x 6.00 (222 x 152) 10.75 x 6.00 (273 x 152) 12.75 x 8.00 (324 x 203) 12.75 x 10.00 (324 x 254) 14.62 x 10.00 (371 x 254) 16.75 x 12.00 (425 x 305) 18.88 x 12.00 (479 x 305) 21.25 x 10.00 (540 x 254) J 8.36 (212) 8.36 (212) 8.37 (213) 8.60 (219) 7.39 (188) 9.36 (238) 11.54 (293) 11.23 (285) 11.23 (285) 16.36 (415) 16.36 (415) K 4.25 (108) 4.25 (108) 6.25 (159) 6.25 (159) 8.25 (209) 10.25 (260) 10.25 (260) 12.25 (311) 14.25 (362) 16.25 (413) 18.25 (464) L 2.25 (57) 4.25 (108) 4.25 (108) 6.25 (159) 6.25 (159) 8.25 (209) 10.25 (260) 10.25 (260) 12.25 (311) 14.25 (362) 14.25 (362) M 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 14.25 (362) N 6.89 (175) 6.89 (175) 8.87 (225) 8.84 (224) 10.86 (276) 12.95 (329) 12.84 (326) 14.88 (378) 16.95 (431) 18.91 (480) 21.00 (533) Hole Dia. 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 12.95 (329) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) Weight 3 lbs. 3 lbs. 4 lbs. 5 lbs. 6 lbs. 8 lbs. 9 lbs. 12 lbs. 14 lbs. 22 lbs. 25 lbs.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
403
Fiberglass Enclosures Advantage Series
The Cooper Crouse-Hinds Advantage Series offer is our most extensive selection of durable industrial non-metallic boxes. Available in a wide range of options, the Advantage Series is available in over 36 various configurations with options such as stainless steel hinges or stainless steel pull latches each with or without clear covers. These enclosures are made of fiberglass reinforced polyester and have a poured polyurethane seamless gasket that provides a water-tight and dust-tight environmental seal for exceptional corrosion and chemical resistance. The resilient Advantage Series will provide high impact resistance in the most extreme conditions and provide protection and reliability in the most adverse applications.
CP

Memory retaining continuous polyurethane gasket No penetrating hardware Chemical resistant fiberglass reinforced polyester Non-corrosive design Water-tight, dust-tight Non-conductive, impact resistant, UV resistant Material cuts, drills, punches, and saws with ease and accuracy Rounded edges, minimal protrusions or exposed pocket areas for assembly of dust and debris Smooth surface, no color variations, swirls or color pockets, no voids

Hot compression molded fiberglass reinforced thermoset polyester Poured polyurethane seamless gasket provides water-tight dust-tight environmental seal 304 stainless steel used on all external hardware Panel mounting capability for fixed rear panel Bosses utilize threaded brass inserts accepting 10-32 screws

UL/cUL 50, Types 1, 3, 3S, 4X, 12, 13 UL File Number E57656 CSA Std C22.2 - File 244248 Types 1, 3, 3S, 4X, 12, 13 NEMA Standard 250 - Types 1, 3, 3S, 4X, 12, 13 Temperature Range - (-76F to +250F) (-60C to +120C) Flammability Rating - UL94-5V Non-flame propagating IP66
Options:
Mounting feet kit available for field installation. Order part number FAMTGFTKIT
Inside H x W x D
2 Cover Screws With a Hinged Cover FAHS060604 FAHS080604 FAHS080804 FAHS100806 FAHS121006 FAHS141206 FAHS141208 FAHS161408 FAHS181610 FAHS201610
Hinged Cover With a Padlock Latch FAHP060604 FAHP080604 FAHP080804 FAHP100806 FAHP121006 FAHP141206 FAHP141208 FAHP161408 FAHP181610 FAHP201610
2 Cover Screws With a Clear Hinged Cover FAHSCC060604 FAHSCC080604 FAHSCC080804 FAHSCC100806 FAHSCC121006 FAHSCC141206 FAHSCC141208 FAHSCC161408
Hinged Clear Cover With a Padlock Latch FAHPCC060604 FAHPCC080604 FAHPCC080804 FAHPCC100806 FAHPCC121006 FAHPCC141206 FAHPCC141208 FAHPCC161408
Cover Panel With Mounting Hardware FACP0606SA FACP0806SA FACP0808SA FACP1008SA FACP1210SA FACP1412SA FACP1412SA FACP1614SA FACP1816SA FACP2016SA
Mounting Plate FMP0606 FMP0806 FMP0808 FMP1008 FMP1210 FMP1412 FMP1412 FMP1614 FMP1816 FMP2016
7.41 x 7.79 x 4.31 9.41 x 7.79 x 4.31 9.39 x 9.76 x 4.31 11.42 x 9.79 x 6.31 13.45 x 11.83 x 6.31 15.49 x 13.86 x 6.34 15.49 x 13.86 x 8.34 17.58 x 15.96 x 8.34 19.77 x 18.15 x 10.34 21.79 x 18.16 x 10.34
404
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
CP

Catalog Number FAHS060604 FAHP060604 FAHSCC060604 FAHPCC060604 FAHS080604 FAHP080604 FAHSCC080604 FAHPCC080604 FAHS080804 FAHP080804 FAHSCC080804 FAHPCC080804 FAHS100806 FAHP100806 FAHSCC100806 FAHPCC100806 FAHS121006 FAHP121006 FAHSCC121006 FAHPCC121006 FAHS141206 FAHP141206 FAHSCC141206 FAHPCC141206 FAHS141208 FAHP141208 FAHSCC141208 FAHPCC141208 FAHS161408 FAHP161408 FAHSCC161408 FAHPCC161408 FAHS181610 FAHP181610 FAHS201610 FAHP201610 Overall HxWxD
7.41H (188.3) 7.79W (197.9) 4.31D (109.5) 9.41H (239.1) 7.79W (197.9) 4.31D (109.5) 9.39H (238.5) 9.76W (248.0) 4.31D (109.5) 11.42H (290.1) 9.79W (248.6) 6.31D (160.3)
Inside AxBxC
6.77 x 6.77 x 4.06 (171.9 x 171.9 x 103.2)
Mounting PxR
L
4.25 (108)
S
3.60 (91.5)
Opt. Mtg. Feet E x F
Weight
2.5 lbs.
5.93 x 4.00 4.25 (150.6 x 101.6) (108)
0.38 8.24 x 4.00 9.02 4.56 0.25 (9.6) (209.2 x 101.6) (229.0) (115.8) (6.35)
8.77 x 6.77 x 4.06 (222.7 x 171.9 x 103.2)
7.91 x 4.00 6.25 (200.9 x 101.6) (159)
4.25 (108)
3.60 (91.5)
0.38 10.21 x 4.00 10.98 4.56 0.25 (9.6) (259.3 x 101.6) (279.0) (115.8) (6.35)
3.0 lbs.
8.74 x 8.74 x 4.06 (222.1 x 222.1 x 103.2)
7.91 x 6.00 6.25 (200.9 x 152.4) (159)
6.25 (159)
3.60 (91.5)
0.38 10.21 x 6.00 10.98 4.56 (9.6) (259.3 x 152.4) (279.0) (6.35)
0.25 3.5 lbs. (115.8)
10.73 x 8.73 x 6.06 (272.5 x 221.7 x 153.9)
9.89 x 6.00 8.25 (251.2 x 152.4) (210)
6.25 (159)
5.60 0.38 12.19 x 6.00 12.96 6.56 0.25 (142.3) (9.6) (309.6 x 152.4) (329.3) (166.6) (6.35)
4.5 lbs.
13.45H (341.6) 12.69 x 10.69 x 6.06 11.83W (300.5) (322.3 x 271.5 x 153.9) 6.31D (160.3) 15.49H (393.4) 14.72 x 12.72 x 6.06 13.86W (352.0) (373.9 x 323.1 x 153.9) 6.34D (161.0) 15.49H (393.4) 14.66 x 12.66 x 8.06 13.86W (352.0) (372.4 x 321.6 x 204.7) 8.34D (211.8) 17.58H (446.6) 16.69 x 14.69 x 8.06 15.96W (405.4) (424.0 x 373.1 x 204.7) 8.34D (211.8) 19.77H (502.2) 18.15W (461.0) 10.34D (262.6) 21.79H (553.5) 18.16W (461.2) 10.34D (262.6) 18.63 x 16.63 x 10.06 (473.2 x 422.4 x 255.5) 20.63 x 16.63 x 10.06 (524.0 x 422.4 x 255.5)
11.88 x 8.00 10.25 8.25 (301.7 x 203.2) (260) (210)
5.60 0.38 14.18 x 8.00 14.95 6.56 0.25 (142.3) (9.6) (360.2 x 203.2) (379.7) (166.6) (6.35)
6.0 lbs.
13.91 x 10.00 12.25 10.25 (353.3 x 254.0) (311) (260)
5.60 0.38 16.21 x 10.00 16.98 6.59 0.25 (142.3) (9.6) (411.7 x 254.0) (431.4) (167.4) (6.35)
8.0 lbs.
13.88 x 10.00 12.25 10.25 (352.5 x 254.0) (311) (260)
7.60 0.38 16.19 x 10.00 16.96 8.59 0.25 (193.2) (9.6) (411.2 x 254.0) (430.9) (218.2) (6.35)
9.5 lbs.
15.96 x 12.00 14.25 12.25 (405.4 x 304.8) (362) (311) 17.94 x 14.00 16.25 14.25 (455.6 x 355.6) (413) (362) 19.96 x 14.00 18.25 14.25 (506.9 x 355.6) (463) (362)
7.60 0.38 18.26 x 12.00 19.04 8.59 0.25 (193.2) (9.6) (464.0 x 304.8) (483.5) (218.2) (6.35) 9.60 0.38 20.24 x 14.00 21.02 10.59 0.25 (243.9) (9.6) (514.3 x 355.6) (533.8) (268.9) (6.35) 9.59 0.38 22.26 x 14.00 23.04 10.59 0.25 (243.7) (9.6) (565.6 x 355.6) (585.1) (268.9) (6.35)
11.5 lbs.
16.0 lbs.
17.5 lbs.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
405
Fiberglass Enclosures Wall Mount & Large Fiberglass Enclosure Series

The Cooper Crouse-Hinds Wall Mount and Large Fiberglass Enclosure Series offer a solution for applications requiring a large enclosure especially suited for indoor or outdoor use and to provide protection against falling dirt, rain, sleet, snow, and windblown dust. The fiberglass reinforced polyester Wall Mount Series is available in NEMA 3R and 4X configurations and the poured polyurethane seamless gasket provides a watertight and dust-tight environmental seal for exceptional corrosion and chemical resistance.
CP

Memory retaining continuous polyurethane gasket Lightweight Integral mounting feet Molded in panel mounting inserts Stainless steel full length continuous hinge Built in padlock hasp Chemical resistant fiberglass reinforced polyester Water-tight, dust-tight Non-conductive, impact resistant, UV resistant Rain shield protection against incidental water ingress for NEMA 3R enclosures Material cuts, drills, punches, and saws with ease and accuracy Rounded edges, minimal protrusions or exposed pocket areas for assembly of dust and debris Smooth surface, no color variations, swirls or color pockets, no voids

3R Series
UL/cUL 50, Types 1, 3R UL File Number E57656 CSA Std C22.2 - File 244248 Types 1, 3R NEMA Standard 250 - Types 1, 3R Temperature Range - (-76F to +250F) (-60C to +120C) Flammability Rating - UL94-5V Non-flame propagating UL/cUL 50, Types 1, 3, 3R, 4X, 12 UL File Number E57656 CSA Std C22.2 - File 244248 Types 1, 3, 3R, 4X, 12 NEMA Standard 250 - Types 1, 3, 3R, 4X, 12 Temperature Range - (-76F to +250F) (-60C to +120C) Flammability Rating - UL94-5V Non-flame propagating UL/cUL 50, Types 1, 3, 3R, 4X, 12 UL File Number E57656 CSA Std C22.2 - File 244248 Types 1, 3, 3R, 4X, 12 NEMA Standard 250 - Types 1, 3, 3R, 4X, 12 IP55 & IP66 Temperature Range - (-76F to +250F) (-60C to +120C) Flammability Rating - UL94-5V Non-flame propagating

Hot compression molded fiberglass reinforced polyester hand layup FRP Poured polyurethane seamless gasket provides water-tight dusttight environmental seal 304 stainless steel used on all external hardware Bosses utilize threaded brass inserts accepting 10-32 screws
4X Series
Large Fiberglass
406
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Ordering Information: Number of Latches
Inside Enclosure Dimensions 161007 201606
Mounting Plate* FMPWM1610 FMPWM2016 FMPWM2412 FMPWM2412 FMPWM2420 FMPWM2424 FMPWM2424 FMPWM3020 FMPWM3020 FMPWM3020 FMPWM3020 FMPWM3024 FMPWM3024 FMPWM3024 FMPWM3630 FMPWM3630 FMPWM3630
3R Stainless Steel Hinge 2 2 2 2 2
4X Stainless Steel Hinge 2 2
Inside HxWxD
Stainless Steel Hinged, Latched Down Cover
201612 241206 241210 242008 242410 242412 302006 302008 302010 302012 302407 302410 302412 363008 363010 363012 483612 483616
CP
15.92 19.70 24.00 24.00 24.05 24.05 24.05 29.90 29.90 29.90 29.90 30.46 30.46 30.46 36.31 36.31 36.31
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
10.27 16.04 12.87 12.87 20.39 24.39 24.39 20.14 20.14 20.14 20.14 25.47 25.47 25.47 31.69 31.69 31.69
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
8.53 13.24 7.33 11.33 9.25 11.25 13.25 7.23 9.23 11.23 13.23 8.12 11.27 13.10 9.36 11.36 13.36
F4WMSHL161007 F4WMSHL201612 F4WMSHL241206 F4WMSHL241210 F4WMSHL242008 F4WMSHL242410 F4WMSHL242412 F4WMSHL302006 F4WMSHL302008 F4WMSHL302010 F4WMSHL302012 F4WMSHL302407 F4WMSHL302410 F4WMSHL302412 F4WMSHL363008 F4WMSHL363010 F4WMSHL363012
2 4 2
10
19.70 24.05 29.90 29.90 30.46 30.46 36.31 36.31 36.31 48.33 48.33
x x x x x x x x x x x
16.04 24.39 20.14 20.14 25.47 25.47 31.69 31.69 31.69 36.22 32.22
7.24 11.25 9.23 11.23 11.27 13.10 9.36 11.36 13.36 13.25 17.25
F3WMSHL201606 F3WMSHL242410 F3WMSHL302008 F3WMSHL302010 F3WMSHL302410 F3WMSHL302412 F3WMSHL363008 F3WMSHL363010 F3WMSHL363012 F3WMSHL483612 F3WMSHL483616
FMPWM2016 FMPWM2424 FMPWM3020 FMPWM3020 FMPWM3024 FMPWM3024 FMPWM3630 FMPWM3630 FMPWM3630 FMPWM4836 FMPWM4836
48.33 48.33 60.62 60.62 36.12 72.00 72.00
x x x x x x x
36.22 32.22 36.13 36.13 48.12 25.00 49.00
x x x x x x x
13.25 17.25 13.44 17.44 13.00 25.88 25.88
F4LSHL483612 F4LSHL483616 F4LSHL603612 F4LSHL603616 F4LSHLDD364812 F4LSHLFS722525 F4LSHLFSDD724925
FMPWM4836 FMPWM4836 FMPWM6036 FMPWM6036 FMPWM3648 FMPWM7225 FMPWM7249
* Available in: Aluminum (SA), Fiberglass (FG), Carbon Steel (C), and Stainless Steel (SS). To order, add the suffix to the end of the part number
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
407

W
F B
CP
C B
SECTION A-A
B SECTION B-B
Wall Mount Series - NEMA 4X Configuration Dimensions In Inches (mm)

Catalog Number F4WMSHL161007 F4WMSHL201612 F4WMSHL241206 F4WMSHL241210 F4WMSHL242008 F4WMSHL242410 F4WMSHL242412 F4WMSHL302006 F4WMSHL302008 F4WMSHL302010 F4WMSHL302012 F4WMSHL302407 F4WMSHL302410 F4WMSHL302412 F4WMSHL363008 F4WMSHL363010 F4WMSHL363012 Overall HxWxD 18.75 x 10.96 x 9.03 (476 x 278 x 229) 22.75 x 16.87 x 13.77 (578 x 429 x 350) 26.95 x 13.72 x 7.98 (685 x 348 x 203) 26.95 x 13.72 x 11.99 (685 x 348 x 304) 27.00 x 21.24 x 9.90 (686 x 539 x 252) 27.00 x 25.24 x 11.90 (686 x 641 x 302) 27.00 x 25.24 x 13.90 (686 x 641 x 353) 32.86 x 20.99 x 7.89 (835 x 533 x 200) 32.86 x 20.99 x 9.89 (835 x 533 x 251) 32.86 x 20.99 x 11.89 (835 x 533 x 302) 29.90 x 20.14 x 13.23 (760 x 511 x 336) 33.41 x 26.32 x 8.81 (849 x 668 x 224) 33.41 x 26.32 x 11.95 (849 x 668 x 304) 33.41 x 26.32 x 13.79 (849 x 668 x 350) 39.31 x 32.50 x 10.05 (999 x 826 x 255) 39.31 x 32.50 x 12.05 (999 x 826 x 306) 39.31 x 32.50 x 14.05 (999 x 826 x 357) Inside AxBxC 15.92 x 10.27 x 8.53 (404 x 261 x 217) 19.70 x 16.04 x 13.24 (500 x 407 x 336) 24.00 x 12.87 x 7.33 (610 x 327 x 186) 24.00 x 12.87 x 11.33 (610 x 327 x 288) 24.05 x 20.39 x 9.25 (611 x 518 x 235) 24.05 x 24.39 x 11.25 (611 x 619 x 286) 24.05 x 24.39 x 13.25 (611 x 619 x 336) 29.90 x 20.14 x 7.23 (760 x 511 x 184) 29.90 x 20.14 x 9.23 (760 x 511 x 234) 29.90 x 20.14 x 11.23 (760 x 511 x 285) 29.90 x 20.14 x 13.23 (760 x 511 x 336) 30.46 x 25.47 x 8.12 (774 x 647 x 206) 30.46 x 25.47 x 11.27 (774 x 647 x 286) 30.46 x 25.47 x 13.10 (774 x 647 x 333) 36.31 x 31.69 x 9.36 (922 x 805 x 238) 36.31 x 31.69 x 11.36 (922 x 805 x 289) 36.31 x 31.69 x 13.36 (922 x 805 x 339) Mounting ExF 17.50 x 7.00 (444 x 178) 21.50 x 10.12 (546 x 257) 25.75 x 6.25 (654 x 159) 25.75 x 6.25 (654 x 159) 25.75 x 14.00 (654 x 356) 25.75 x 17.87 (654 x 454) 25.75 x 17.87 (654 x 454) 30.75 x 14.25 (806 x 362) 31.75 x 14.25 (806 x 362) 31.75 x 14.25 (806 x 362) 31.75 x 14.25 (806 x 362) 32.25 x 18.50 (819 x 470) 32.25 x 18.50 (819 x 470) 32.25 x 18.50 (819 x 470) 38.13 x 23.88 (968 x 606) 38.13 x 23.88 (968 x 606) 38.13 x 23.88 (968 x 606) J 7.8 (198) 12.26 (312) 6.33 (161) 10.33 (262) 8.25 (209) 10.25 (260) 12.25 (311) 6.23 (158) 8.23 (209) 10.23 (260) 12.23 (311) 7.12 (181) 10.27 (261) 12.1 (307) 8.36 (212) 10.36 (263) 12.36 (314) K 12 (305) 15.25 (387) 19.25 (489) 19.25 (489) 19.25 (489) 19.25 (489) 19.25 (489) 25.25 (641) 25.25 (641) 25.25 (641) 25.25 (641) 25.25 (641) 25.25 (641) 25.25 (641) 31.25 (794) 31.25 (794) 31.25 (794) L 7.5 (191) 11.25 (286) 7.25 (184) 7.25 (184) 15.25 (387) 19.25 (489) 19.25 (489) 15.25 (387) 15.25 (387) 15.25 (387) 15.25 (387) 19.25 (489) Enclosure Opening M x N 13.14 x 6.00 (334 x 152) 16.75 x 12.19 (425 x 310) 21.00 x 8.37 (533 x 213) 21.00 x 8.37 (533 x 213) 21.25 x 16.00 (540 x 406) 21.25 x 20.00 (540 x 508) 21.25 x 20.00 (540 x 508) 27.00 x 16.50 (686 x 419) 27.00 x 16.50 (686 x 419) 27.00 x 16.50 (686 x 419) 27.00 x 16.50 (686 x 419) 27.38 x 21.25 (695 x 540) Weight 12 lbs. 24 lbs. 21 lbs. 25 lbs. 32 lbs. 42 lbs. 43 lbs. 34 lbs. 36 lbs. 39 lbs. 48 lbs. 45 lbs. 50 lbs. 54 lbs. 75 lbs. 78 lbs. 81 lbs.
19.25 27.38 x 21.25 (489) (695 x 540) 19.25 (489) 25.25 (641) 25.25 (641) 25.25 (641) 27.38 x 21.25 (695 x 540) 33.25 x 27.25 (845 x 692) 33.25 x 27.25 (845 x 692) 33.25 x 27.25 (845 x 692)
408
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Wall Mount Series - NEMA 3R Configuration Dimensions In Inches (mm)
Catalog Number F3WMSHL201606 F3WMSHL242410 F3WMSHL302008 F3WMSHL302010 F3WMSHL302410 F3WMSHL302412 F3WMSHL363008 F3WMSHL363010 F3WMSHL363012 Overall HxWxD 22.75 x 16.87 x 8.27 (578 x 429 x 210) 27.00 x 25.24 x 11.90 (686 x 641 x 302) 32.86 x 20.99 x 9.89 (835 x 533 x 251) 32.86 x 20.99 x 11.89 (835 x 533 x 302) 33.41 x 26.32 x 11.95 (849 x 668 x 304) 33.41 x 26.32 x 13.79 (849 x 668 x 350) 39.31 x 32.50 x 10.05 (999 x 826 x 255) 39.31 x 32.50 x 12.05 (999 x 826 x 306) 39.31 x 32.50 x 14.05 (999 x 826 x 357) Inside AxBxC 19.17 x 16.04 x 7.24 (500 x 407 x 184) 24.05 x 24.39 x 11.25 (611 x 619 x 286) 29.90 x 20.14 x 9.23 (760 x 511 x 234) 29.90 x 20.14 x 11.23 (760 x 511 x 285) 30.46 x 25.47 x 11.27 (774 x 647 x 286) 30.46 x 25.47 x 13.10 (774 x 647 x 333) 36.31 x 31.69 x 9.36 (922 x 805 x 238) 36.31 x 31.69 x 11.36 (922 x 805 x 289) 36.31 x 31.69 x 13.36 (922 x 805 x 339) Mounting ExF 21.50 x 10.12 (546 x 257) 25.75 x 17.87 (654 x 454) 31.75 x 14.25 (806 x 362) 31.75 x 14.25 (806 x 362) 32.25 x 18.50 (819 x 470) 32.25 x 18.50 (819 x 470) 38.13 x 23.88 (968 x 606) 38.13 x 23.88 (968 x 606) 38.13 x 23.88 (968 x 606) J 6.26 (159) 10.25 (260) 8.23 (209) 10.23 (260) 10.27 (261) 12.10 (307) 8.36 (212) 10.36 (263) 12.36 (314) K 15.25 (387) 19.25 (489) 25.25 (641) 25.25 (641) 25.25 (641) 25.25 (641) 31.25 (794) 31.25 (794) 31.25 (794) L 11.25 (286) 19.25 (489) 15.25 (387) 15.25 (387) 19.25 (489) 19.25 (489) 25.25 (641) 25.25 (641) 25.25 (641) Enclosure Opening MxN 16.75 x 12.19 (425 x 310) 21.25 x 20.00 (540 x 508) 27.00 x 16.50 (686 x 419) 27.00 x 16.50 (686 x 419) 27.38 x 21.25 (695 x 540) 27.38 x 21.25 (695 x 540) 33.25 x 27.25 (845 x 692) 33.25 x 27.25 (845 x 692) 33.25 x 27.25 (845 x 692) Weight 17 lbs.
CP
42 lbs. 36 lbs. 39 lbs.
50 lbs. 54 lbs. 75 lbs. 78 lbs. 81 lbs.
NEMA 3R Dimensional Drawing F3WMSHL483612 and F3WMSHL483616 F3WMSHL483612 F3WMSHL483616 51.29 x 36.62 x 13.93 (1303 x 930 x 354) 51.29 x 36.62 x 17.93 (1303 x 930 x 456) 48.33 x 36.22 x 13.25 (1228 x 920 x 336) 48.33 x 32.22 x 17.25 (1228 x 920 x 438) 50.12 x 28.50 (1273 x 724) 50.12 x 28.50 (1273 x 724) 12.25 (311) 16.25 (413) 21.63 (549) 21.63 (549) 31.25 (794) 31.25 (794) 45.25 x 32.00 (1149 x 813) 45.25 x 32.00 (1149 x 813) 146 lbs. 164 lbs.
Wall Mount Series / NEMA 3R Chart reflects the Dimensional Drawings from the previous page.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
409

Large Fiberglass Enclosures Series - Configuration Dimensions In Inches (mm)
Catalog Number F4LSHL483612* Overall HxWxD 51.29 x 36.62 x 13.93 (1303 x 930 x 354) 51.29 x 36.62 x 17.93 (1303 x 930 x 456) 64.00 x 36.50 x 14.12 (1627 x 927 x 359) 64.00 x 36.50 x 18.12 (1627 x 927 x 460) 39.50 x 48.50 x 13.62 (1003 x 1232 x 346) 72.50 x 25.50 x 26.38 (1841 x 648 x 492) Inside AxBxC 48.33 x 36.22 x 13.25 (1228 x 920 x 336) 48.33 x 32.22 x 17.25 (1228 x 920 x 438) 60.62 x 36.13 x 13.44 (1540 x 918 x 441) 60.62 x 36.13 x 17.44 (1540 x 918 x 443) 36.12 x 48.12 x 13.00 (917 x 1222 x 330) 72.00 x 25.00 x 25.88 (1829 x 635 x 657) 72.00 x 49.00 x 25.88 (1829 x 1245 x 654) Mounting ExF 50.12 x 28.50 (1273 x 724) 50.12 x 28.50 (1273 x 724) 62.75 x 28.75 (1594 x 730) 62.75 x 28.75 (1594 x 730) 38.25 x 40.5 (972 x 1029) J 12.25 (311) 16.25 (413) 12.44 (316) 16.44 (418) 11.94 (303) 24.88 (632) 24.88 (628) K 21.63 (549) 21.63 (549) 27.63 (702) 27.63 (702) 14.50 (368) 15.50 (388) 15.50 (394) L 31.25 (794) 31.25 (794) 31.25 (794) 31.25 (794) 20.00 (508) 19.00 (483) 20.00 (508) Enclosure Opening MxN 45.25 x 32.00 (1149 x 813) 45.25 x 32.00 (1149 x 813) 57.25 x 32.00 (1454 x 813) 57.25 x 32.00 (1454 x 813) 32.00 x 20.75 (813 x 527) 64.75 x 21.00 (1645 x 533) 64.75 x 21.00 (1645 x 533) Weight 146 lbs. 164 lbs. 177 lbs. 198 lbs. 146 lbs. 226 lbs. 350 lbs.
CP
F4LSHL483616* F4LSHL603612* F4LSHL603616* F4SHLDD364812 F4SHLFS722525
72.50 x 49.50 x 26.38 F4LSHLFSDD724925 (18.42 x 1257 x 670)
* F4LSHL483612, F4LSHL483616, F4LSHL603612 and F4LSHL603616 reflective of the above chart
Wall Mount & Large Fiberglass Enclosures Series Dimensional Drawings

F4LSHDD364812 F4LSHLFS722525
F4LSHLFSDD724925
410
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Fiberglass Enclosures Disconnect and Circuit Breaker Series
The Cooper Crouse-Hinds Disconnect and Circuit Breaker Series are used in larger industrial control systems and machine tool control panels where a disconnect is desirable in extreme environmental conditions. This durable NEMA 4X rated enclosure provides protection from falling dirt, rain, sleet, snow, windblown dust, splashing water, and hose-directed water; and will be undamaged by the external formation of ice on the enclosure. The poured polyurethane seamless gasket and fiberglass reinforced polyester enclosure provides exceptional corrosion and chemical resistance in adverse conditions.
CP

Integral mounting feet Stainless steel full length continuous hinge Padlockable in off position Lightweight Memory retaining continuous polyurethane gasket Molded in panel mounting inserts Chemical resistant fiberglass reinforced polyester Non-corrosive design Environmentally sealed Type 4X disconnect handle Water-tight, dust-tight Non-conductive, impact resistant, UV resistant Material cuts, drills, punches, and saws with ease and accuracy Rounded edges, minimal protrusions or exposed pocket areas for assembly of dust and debris Smooth surface, no color variations, swirls or color pockets, no voids

Hot compression molded fiberglass reinforced thermoset polyester Poured polyurethane seamless gasket 304 stainless steel used on all external hardware Panel mounting capability for fixed rear panel Bosses utilize threaded brass inserts

UL/cUL 50, Types 1, 3, 3R, 4X, 12 UL File Number E57656 CSA Std C22.2 - File 244248 Types 1, 3, 3R, 4X, 12 NEMA Standard 250 - Types 1, 3, 3R, 4X, 12 Temperature Range - (-76F to +250F) (-60C to +120C) Flammability Rating - UL94-5V Non-flame propagating
Inside H x W x D 16 x 10 x 8 20 x 16 x 9 24 x 12 x 11 24 x 24 x 11 30 x 24 x 11 36 x 30 x 11
Disconnect FDC161008 FDC201608 FDC241212 FDC242412 FDC302412 FDC363012
Mounting Plate* FMPC1610 FMPC2016 FMPC2412 FMPC2424 FMPC3024 FMPC3630
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
411
W F B
CP
O J
E A A
B SECTION B-B
C B
SECTION A-A
AutoCad File: CBOX1

Catalog Number FDC161008 FDC201608 FDC241212 FDC242412 FDC302412 FDC363012 Overall HxWxD 18.75 x 10.96 x 10.25 (476 x 278 x 260) 22.75 x 16.87 x 11.00 (578 x 429 x 279) 26.95 x 13.72 x 13.25 (685 x 348 x 337) 27.00 x 25.24 x 13.19 (686 x 641 x 335) 33.41 x 26.32 x 13.19 (849 x 668 x 335) 39.31 x 32.50 x 13.31 (999 x 826 x 338) Inside AxBxC 15.92 x 10.27 x 8.53 (404 x 261 x 217) 19.70 x 16.04 x 9.24 (500 x 407 x 235) Mounting ExF 17.50 x 7.00 (444 x 178) 21.50 x 10.12 (546 x 257) J 7.8 (198) 8.26 (210) 10.33 (262) 10.25 (260) 10.27 (261) 10.36 (263) K 12 (305) 15.25 (387) 19.25 (489) 19.25 (489) 25.25 (641) 31.25 (794) L 7.5 (191) 11.25 (286) 7.25 (184) 19.25 (489) 19.25 (489) 25.25 (641) Opening Enclosure MxN 13.14 x 6.00 (334 x 152) 16.75 x 12.19 (425 x 310) 21.00 x 8.37 (533 x 213) 21.25 x 20.00 (540 x 508) 27.38 x 21.25 (695 x 540) 33.25 x 27.5 (845 x 692) O 3.50 (89) 3.50 (89) 5.75 (146) 5.75 (146) 12.25 (311) 12.25 (311) Weight 13 lbs. 23 lbs. 26 lbs. 40 lbs. 51 lbs. 79 lbs.
24.00 x 12.87 x 11.33 25.75 x 6.25 (610 x 327 x 288) (654 x 159) 24.05 x 24.39 x 11.25 25.75 x 17.87 (611 x 619 x 286) (654 x 454) 30.46 x 25.47 x 11.27 32.25 x 18.50 (774 x 647 x 286) (819 x 470) 36.31 x 31.69 x 11.36 38.13 x 23.88 (922 x 805 x 289) (968 x 606)
*Disconnect, fuse block, breaker, yoke, switches, or other internal components are not furnished with enclosure.
412
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Fiberglass Enclosures Accessories
Drain & Breather Vent
CP
CHDV - Drain Vent
CHDVKIT - Drain Vent Kit
CHDVKIT4X - Drain Vent Kit 4X
CHBVKIT4X - Breather Vent Kit 4X
Encapsulated Screws
Louver Plate Vent
Carrying Handle
CHENCAP2PK CHENCAP4PK
CHLP1 CHLPKIT
CHHANDLE
Stainless Steel Screws
Corrosion Inhibitor
CHSS2PK CHSS4PK
CHCI21 Radius of Protection: 2 ft. Normal Life Span: 1 yr.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
413
Fiberglass Hole Plug Assembly
Catalog Number FPLG1KIT
Fits /2 Dia. Hole /8 Dia. Hole 3 /4 Dia. Hole 22mm PB, 1 /2 Conduit 3 /4 Conduit 30mm PB
1 5
Hole Dia. Range .50 .63 .75 .88 .56 .69 .81 1.00
FPLG2KIT
CP
1.06 - 1.12 1.22 - 1.28 1.38 - 1.50 1.69 - 1.75 2.00 - 2.12 2.50 - 2.56 3.00 3.62 4.12 4.62
FPLG3KIT FPLG4KIT FPLG5KIT FPLG6KIT FPLG7KIT FPLG8KIT
1 Conduit 11/4 Conduit 11/2 Conduit 2 Conduit 21/2 Conduit 3 Conduit 31/2 Conduit 4 Conduit
Fiberglass Enclosure Mounting Plate Options

BB
BL
BA
OMIT CENTER HOLES WHEN "BK" IS LESS THAN 29"
BK
HOLE DIA.
OMIT CENTER HOLES WHEN "BL" IS LESS THAN 31.25"
BT
End View (Flat)
End View (Formed)
Aluminum (SA) Back Panels Grade Aluminum 3003 H14 - No Finish
Fiberglass (FG) Back Panels All FG Back Panels UL 94 V-0 Rated
Stainless Steel (SS) Back Panels Stainless Steel Grade 304
Carbon Steel (C)Back PanelsCarbon Steel Grade 1010 HRS Painted White Enamel
Mounting Plates for Disconnect & Circuit Breaker Dimensions

Only Available in Carbon Steel (C) FMPC1610 BA 13.00 (330) 16.88 (429) 20.88 (530) 20.88 (530) 26.88 (683) 32.88 (835) BB 8.50 (216) 13.38 (340) 9.38 (238) 21.38 (543) 21.38 (543) 27.38 (695) BK 12.00 (305) 15.25 (387) 19.25 (489) 19.25 (489) 25.25 (641) 31.25 (794) BL 7.50 (191) 11.25 (286) 7.25 (184) 19.25 (489) 19.25 (489) 25.25 (641) Panel Thickness BT 0.08 (2) 0.13 (2) 0.13 (2) 0.13 (2) 0.13 (2) 0.13 (2) Panel Type Flat Hole Dia. 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.50 (13) 0.50 (13) 0.50 (13) 0.50 (13) # of Holes 4 Weight (Carbon Steel) Suffix: C 3.3 lbs. Fits Typical Enclosure Size 16 x 10 Disconnect Enclosure 20 x 16 Disconnect Enclosure 24 x 12 Disconnect Enclosure 24 x 24 Disconnect Enclosure 30 x 24 Disconnect Enclosure 36 x 30 Disconnect Enclosure
FMPC2016
Formed
7.3 lbs.
FMPC2412
Formed
6.5 lbs.
FMPC2424
Formed
14 lbs.
FMPC3024
Formed
19 lbs.
FMPC3630
Formed
27 lbs.
414
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Mounting Plates for NEMA 3R, NEMA 4X & Large Fiberglass Enclosure Dimensions
Catalog Number FMPWM1610SA FMPWM1610C FMPWM2016SA FMPWM2016C FMPWM2412SA FMPWM2412C FMPWM2420SA FMPWM2420C FMPWM2424SA FMPWM2424C FMPWM3020SA FMPWM3020C FMPWM3024SA FMPWM3024C FMPWM3630SA FMPWM3630C FMPWM3636SA FMPWM3636C FMPWM3648SA FMPWM3648C FMPWM4836SA FMPWM4836C FMPWM6036SA FMPWM6036C FMPWM7225SA FMPWM7225C FMPWM7249SA FMPWM7249C BA 13.00 (330) 17.00 (432) 21.00 (533) 21.00 (533) 21.00 (533) 27.00 (686) 27.00 (686) 33.00 (838) 31.00 (787) 31.00 (787) 45.00 (1143) 57.00 (1448) 64.00 (1626) 64.00 (1626) BB 8.50 (216) 13.00 (330) 9.00 (229) 17.00 (432) 21.00 (533) 17.00 (432) 21.00 (533) 27.00 (686) 33.00 (838) 22.00 (559) 33.00 (838) 33.00 (838) 21.00 (533) 22.00 (559) BK 12.00 (305) 15.25 (387) 19.25 (489) 19.25 (489) 19.25 (489) 25.25 (641) 25.25 (641) 31.25 (794) 29.00 (737) 29.00 (737) 43.25 (1099) 55.25 (1403) 62.00 (1575) 62.00 (1575) BL 7.50 (191) 11.25 (286) 7.25 (184) 15.25 (387) 19.25 (489) 15.25 (387) 19.25 (489) 25.25 (641) 31.00 (787) 20.00 (508) 31.25 (794) 31.25 (794) 19.00 (483) 20.00 (508) BT (SA) 0.090 (2) 0.090 (2) 0.090 (2) 0.13 (3) 0.13 (3) 0.13 (3) 0.13 (3) 0.13 (3) 0.13 (3) 0.13 (3) 0.13 (3) 0.13 (3) 0.13 (3) 0.13 (3) BT (C) 0.105 (3) 0.105 (3) 0.105 (3) 0.105 (3) 0.105 (3) 0.105 (3) 0.105 (3) 0.105 (3) 0.105 (3) 0.105 (3) 0.105 (3) 0.105 (3) 0.105 (3) 0.105 (3) Panel Type Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Formed Flat Formed Formed Formed Formed Hole Dia. 0.31 (8) 0.50 (13) 0.50 (13) 0.50 (13) 0.50 (13) 0.50 (13) 0.50 (13) 0.50 (13) 0.50 (13) 0.50 (13) 0.50 (13) 0.50 (13) 0.50 (13) 0.50 (13) # of Holes 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 6 8 8 8 10 10 Weight (Aluminum) Suffix: SA 1 lb 2 lbs 4.5 lbs 5 lbs 5.5 lbs 5.8 lbs 7 lbs 11 lbs 13 lbs 22 lbs 22 lbs 23 lbs 30 lbs 38 lbs Weight (Carbon Steel) Suffix: C 3.3 lbs 6.7 lbs
CP
8.7 lbs 10.8 lbs 13.4 lbs 14 lbs 17 lbs 27 lbs 33 lbs 41 lbs 47 lbs 60 lbs 43 lbs 91 lbs
Mounting Plates for FSJ, FPB, FJ, FRCJ, FXDJ, FA Series Enclosures
Weight (FiberWeight glass) (Aluminum) Suffix: Suffix: SA FG 2 oz. 2 oz. Weight (Stainless) Suffix: SS 5 oz. Weight (Carbon Steel) Suffix: C 5 oz.
Catalog Number FMP0604SA FMP0604FG FMP0604SS FMP0604C FMP0808SA FMP0808FG FMP0808SS FMP0808C FMP0906SA FMP0906FG FMP0906SS FMP0906C FMP1008SA FMP1008FG FMP1008SS FMP1008C FMP1210SA FMP1210FG FMP1210SS FMP1210C FMP1212SA FMP1212FG FMP1212SS FMP1212C
BA 4.88 (124) 6.88 (175) 8.25 (210) 8.88 (225)
BB 2.88 (73) 6.88 (175) 4.88 (124) 6.88 (175)
BK 4.25 (108) 6.25 (159) 7.63 (194) 8.25 (210)
BL 2.25 (57)
BT (SA)
BT (FG)
BT (SS)
BT (C)
Panel Type
Hole Dia. 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6)
# of Holes 4
0.080 0.125 0.060 0.075 Flat (2) (3) (2) (2)
6.25 0.080 0.125 0.060 0.075 Flat (159) (2) (3) (2) (2) 4.25 0.080 0.125 0.060 0.075 Flat (108) (2) (3) (2) (2) 6.25 0.080 0.125 0.060 0.075 Flat (159) (2) (3) (2) (2)
5 oz.
5 oz.
15 oz.
15 oz.
5 oz.
n/a
n/a
14 oz.
8 oz.
8 oz.
19 oz.
21 oz.
10.88 8.88 (276) (225)
10.25 8.25 0.080 0.125 0.060 0.075 Flat (260) (210) (2) (3) (2) (2)
12 oz.
14 oz.
30 oz.
33 oz.
10.88 10.88 10.25 10.25 0.080 0.125 0.060 0.075 Flat (276) (276) (260) (260) (2) (3) (2) (2)
16 oz.
18 oz.
37 oz.
38 oz.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
415
Weight (Aluminum) Suffix: SA 3 oz. Weight (Fiberglass) Suffix: FG 3 oz. Weight (Stainless) Suffix: SS 8 oz. Weight (Carbon Steel) Suffix: C 8 oz.
Catalog Number FMP0606SA FMP0606FG FMP0606SS FMP0606C FMP0706SA FMP0706FG FMP0706SS FMP0706C FMP0806SA FMP0806FG FMP0806SS FMP0806C FMP1407SA FMP1407FG FMP1407SS FMP1407C FMP1412SA FMP1412FG FMP1412SS FMP1412C FMP1614SA FMP1614FG FMP1614SS FMP1614C FMP1816SA FMP1816FG FMP1816SS FMP1816C FMP2016SA FMP2016FG FMP2016SS FMP2016C
BA
BB
BK
BL
BT (SA)
BT (FG)
BT (SS)
BT (C)
Panel Type
Hole # of Dia. Holes 0.25 (6) 4
CP
4.88 4.88 4.25 4.25 0.080 0.125 0.060 0.075 Flat (124) (124) (108) (108) (2) (3) (2) (2)
6 4.88 5.38 4.25 0.080 0.125 0.060 0.075 Flat (152) (124) (137) (108) (2) (3) (2) (2)
0.25 (6)
4 oz.
n/a
n/a
10 oz.
6.88 4.88 6.25 4.25 0.080 0.125 0.060 0.075 Flat (175) (124) (159) (108) (2) (3) (2) (2)
0.25 (6)
4 oz.
4 oz.
12 oz.
12 oz.
12.88 5.88 12.25 5.25 0.080 0.125 0.060 0.075 Flat (327) (149) (311) (133) (2) (3) (2) (2)
0.25 (6)
14 oz.
14 oz.
32 oz.
34 oz.
12.88 10.88 12.25 10.25 0.080 0.125 0.060 0.075 Flat (327) (276) (311) (260) (2) (3) (2) (2) 14.88 12.88 14.25 12.25 0.080 0.125 0.060 0.075 Flat (378) (327) (362) (311) (2) (3) (2) (2)
0.25 (6) 0.25 (6)
18 oz.
20 oz.
45 oz.
48 oz.
24 oz.
23 oz.
60 oz.
66 oz.
16.88 14.88 16.25 14.25 0.080 0.125 0.060 0.075 Flat (429) (378) (413) (362) (2) (3) (2) (2)
0.25 (6)
31 oz.
32 oz.
88 oz.
87 oz.
18.88 14.88 18.25 14.25 0.080 0.125 0.060 0.075 Flat (3) (2) (2) (479) (378) (463) (362) (2)
0.25 (6)
36 oz.
34 oz.
98 oz.
97 oz.
Cover Panel Dimensions

Catalog Number A FACP0606SA FACP0806SA FACP0808SA FACP1008SA FACP1210SA FACP1412SA FACP1614SA FACP1816SA FACP2016SA 5.64 (143) 7.68 (195) 7.68 (195) 9.71 (247) 11.74 (298) 13.78 (350) 15.81 (402) 17.94 (456) 19.76 (502) B 5.64 (143) 5.64 (143) 7.68 (195) 7.71 (196) 9.74 (247) 11.78 (299) 13.81 (351) 15.94 (405) 15.76 (400) C 5.02 (127) 7.05 (179) 7.05 (179) 9.08 (231) 11.12 (282) 13.15 (334) 15.18 (386) 17.31 (440) 19.13 (486) D 5.02 (127) 5.02 (127) 7.05 (179) 7.08 (180) 9.12 (232) Panel Thk. 0.080 (2) 0.080 (2) 0.080 (2) 0.080 (2) 0.080 (2) Panel Type Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Hole Dia. 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) # of Holes 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
11.15 0.080 (283) (2) 13.18 0.080 (334) (2) 15.31 0.080 (389) (2) 15.13 0.080 (384) (2)
Note: Cover panel kit includes cover panel and mounting hardware.
416
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Fiberglass Enclosures Custom Built Solutions for Fast Delivery
Custom Modification Offering

Please consult the factory for a quotation on the following custom modifications that we are pleased to offer to help meet the needs of our customers: Custom molded colors Gasketed windows for the FJ, FRC and the Wall Mount Series Custom sizes Special hole patterns for drilling and tapping configurations Dead front and sub panels Silk screening capabilities Terminal kits and DIN rails available
CP
Custom Built Lighting & Power Panelboards

Motor control, power distribution products and custom control panels designed and built to our customers unique needs and delivered when they are required.
Overview:
Fiberglass panelboards rated for outdoor NEMA 3R and 4X environments.
Ratings:
120/208V 3 Phase, 4 Wire QOB circuit breakers, single or two-pole 120/240 VAC; three-pole 240 VAC
Gasketed Window FJ, FRC & Wall Mount Series
Trip ratings:
10 to 70 amps, single-pole 10 to 125 amps, two-pole 10 to 100 amps, three-pole 480Y/277V 3 Phase, 4 Wire EDB circuit breakers, single or two-pole 277 VAC; three-pole 480Y/277 VAC
Trip ratings:
15 to 70 amps, single-pole 15 to 125 amps, two-pole 15 to 125 amps, three-pole
Certifications:
NEMA 1, 3, 3R, 4X and 12 UL Standard: 67 CSA Standard: C22.2
For more information on Fiberglass Enclosures or for Custom Built Solutions email: fiberglassenclosures@cooperindustries.com
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
417
Custom Built Heavy Duty Disconnects (Circuit Breaker, Fusible and Non-Fusible)
Applications: CP
Fiberglass Heavy Duty Disconnects are for use in disconnecting motor, lighting and other circuits.
Certifications:
NEMA/EEMAC: 1, 3, 3R, 4X and 12 UL Standard: 508 CSA Standard: C22.2
Electrical Ratings Ranges:

3-pole, 60Hz, 600 VAC Starters - NEMA sizes 0, 1, 2 Breakers - 15 - 800 Amp Rating Switches - 30, 60, 100, 200 Amp
Custom Built Control Stations

Overview:
The Pushbutton Series offers an enclosure solution where multiple pre-drilled openings for 30mm pushbuttons are required. Enclosures are available in sizes ranging from 6" x 3" to 13.5" x 11.5" with notched keyhole design and the ability to order up to 25 holes, making this solution a perfect choice for your control station applications.

UL/cUL 50, Types 1, 3, 4X, 6P, 12 UL Standard: 508 CSA Std C22.2 - File 244248 Types 1, 3, 4X, 6P, 12 NEMA Standard 250 - Types 1, 3, 4X, 6P, 12

Pushbutton stations and selector switches - heavy duty 600 VAC maximum Pilot lights, selector switches, push buttons 120 to 600 VAC; 24 VAC/DC
For more information on Fiberglass Enclosures or for Custom Built Solutions email: fiberglassenclosures@cooperindustries.com 418
Solar Combiner Solutions
Built to UL1741 standards NEMA 4X (fiberglass and stainless steel) NEMA 3R (painted steel) Made in America
Combiners and disconnects that offer superior resistance and durability from harsh weather and abusive solar environments
Leading the way in Solar Technology Cooper Crouse-Hinds combiner boxes and disconnects for the solar market integrate a comprehensive line of electrical products with expert support, industry insights, and local availability to improve safety and productivity in the most demanding industrial, commercial and residential environments worldwide.
CP
Solar Background Information A solar array may be one panel or many in series, and may range from a single 12 volt panel up to multi-panel high voltage array for grid-tie systems. Grid-tie systems can go as high as 1000 VDC, while battery systems are typically 12, 24, or 48 V. Higher voltage systems (over 48 V) have different NEC code requirements than those for low voltage battery systems, and the two types are NOT interchangeable. Cooper Crouse-Hinds Solar Combiners are designed for higher voltage circuits used in grid-tie applications. All meet NEC requirements and are made in accordance with UL requirements. Cooper Crouse-Hinds Solar Combiners have additional breakers, disconnects, and fuses for the combined high current buss.
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Product Offering Solar Combiners Cooper Crouse-Hinds Solar Combiners are used to group input wires/circuits from several arrays and/or solar panels. The combined circuit results in fewer output circuits and combines them into one main buss or feed going to the inverter saving labor and material costs. Solar Recombiners Cooper Crouse-Hinds Recombiner boxes are used in larger photovoltaic systems. A Recombiner box effectively groups the output wires from several combiner boxes into one main output feed which then goes to the inverter. Solar Disconnects The National Electrical Code requires a disconnect switch which provides circuit interruption to the down stream inverter. The disconnect can be internally mounted in the combiner or externally mounted between the combiner and inverter. The disconnect switch can be located at one of two places: either inside the building nearest the point of entrance of the system conductors, or outside the building. If the solar disconnect is not located near the utility company's meter, then a plaque is required by the front door stating where the solar disconnect is located. Solar Cable Assemblies A comprehensive offering of solar cable assemblies are also available in molded to cable or mechanical termination configurations. Typical conductor size is #12 or #10. Available in standard or custom cable lengths. Consult factory for more details. Cooper Crouse-Hinds Solar Protection for Fiberglass Enclosures The Cooper Crouse-Hinds solar protection formula provides the enclosure the strength and durability to provide long, dependable service even in the most demanding environmental conditions. Cooper Crouse-Hinds fiberglass enclosures retain gloss and color even when exposed to harsh UV light and offer superior resistance to chemicals and are fire retardant. A special UV absorber is added into this solar protection formula and works to absorb UV energy and release it without damaging the fiberglass enclosure thus providing increased protection of the polyester material and increased resistance to the damaging effects of UV radiation. For additional information on Cooper Crouse-Hinds Solar Protection, choose Fiberglass Enclosures from: http://www.crousehinds.com/contractorcorner
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
419
Solar Combiners
Application:
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Solar Combiner Solutions are designed and built to minimize system costs by providing maximum flexibility. Solar Combiner Solutions offer a range of 1 to 48 input circuits, with a durable non-metallic (NEMA 4X) enclosure, engineered and manufactured to perform in the harshest environmental conditions. Built in accordance with UL1741 standard; providing peace of mind and plenty of wiring room for ease of installation.
CP
Features:
RATED FOR 600 VDC - CONTINUOUS DUTY Built to UL 1741 Standards 90C output terminals Fiberglass enclosures provided as standard; also available in NEMA 3R painted steel or NEMA 4X stainless steel Touch-Safe fuse holders and power distribution blocks for safe operation Configured for positive and negative grounded arrays Optional 1000VDC rated

Hot compression molded fiberglass reinforced thermoset polyester Non-conductive, impact resistant, UV resistant, flame retardant Captive cover screws cant be dropped or lost Poured polyurethane seamless gasket provides water-tight, dusttight environmental seal Stainless steel used on all external hardware
SOLAR COMBINER CATALOG NUMBERING SYSTEM
BASE SOLAR COMBINER WITH OPTIONAL FACTORY SUPPLIED FUSES WITH OPTIONAL INTEGRAL DISCONNECT
WITH OPTIONAL SURGE PROTECTION
CCBF
12
15
CB
200
SP
Enclosure Type
CCBF (Fiberglass N4X) CCBS (Painted Steel N3R) CCBSS (Stainless Steel N4X)
Number of Input Circuit

01 (1 input circuit) 02 (2 input circuit) 03 (3 input circuit) 04 (4 input circuit) 05 (5 input circuit) 06 (6 input circuit) Offered up to 48 circuits
Fused
F (Fuses provided) BLANK (Fuses not supplied by factory)
Fuse Amperage
08 (8A fuse) 10 (10A fuse) 12 (12A fuse) 15 (15A fuse) BLANK (Fuses not provided by factory)
Integral Disconnect
CB (Circuit Breaker for use with 1 - 48 input circuits) DS (Disconnect Switch for use with 1 - 48 input circuits) BLANK (No integral disconnect)
Trip Rating for Integral Disconnect

Circuit Breaker 30 (30A) 50 (50A) 100 (100A) 125 (125A) 150 (150A) 175 (175A) 200 (200A) 225 (225A) 250 (250A) 400 (400A) See Table 1 BLANK (No integral disconnect) Disconnect Switch 100 (100A) 200 (200A) 400 (400A) See Table 2 BLANK (No integral disconnect)
Surge Protection
SP (Surge protection)
Rated 15kA (10/350s) per pole Type I Small size takes up minimal space in the enclosure (Only 1.5 inches wide) Highest fault current clearing, 100kA without backup fuses Thermal and short circuit fusing
Standards manufactured in accordance with IEC 60269 Volts: 1000VDC Amps: 8-15A Breaking Capacity: 33kAdc Min Interrupting:1.3 x In See technical information (pg. 6) for more fuse information
BLANK (No surge protection)
420
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Solar Combiners with Integral Disconnects
Application:
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Solar Combiners with Integral Disconnects provide all the strong and durable features of our standard Solar Combiners and are available with 1-48 input circuits. Integral disconnects save material costs, installation time and labor by joining the combiner box and disconnect within one enclosure and eliminating the need for a disconnect in a separate enclosure.
CP
Features:
RATED FOR 600 VDC - CONTINUOUS DUTY Built to UL 1741 Standards 90C output terminals Fiberglass enclosures provided as standard; also available in NEMA 3R painted steel or NEMA 4X stainless steel Touch-Safe fuse holders and power distribution blocks for safe personnel operation Configured for positive and negative grounded arrays

Hot compression molded fiberglass reinforced thermoset polyester Non-conductive, impact resistant, UV resistant, flame retardant Captive cover screws cant be dropped or lost Poured polyurethane seamless gasket provides water-tight, dusttight environmental seal Stainless steel used on all external hardware
Integral Disconnect Rating:

To determine the rating of the integral disconnect, simply multiply the number of input circuits by the ampacity rating of each fuse in these circuits. Round to the next (higher) trip rating. In NO case can the max current exceed the trip rating of the disconnect switch or breaker. Example: a 12 string combiner box with every input circuit with a fuse rated at 8 Amps is 12 x 8 = 96. Required rating for the switch or circuit breaker would be 100 Amps.

BASE SOLAR COMBINER WITH OPTIONAL FACTORY SUPPLIED FUSES WITH OPTIONAL INTEGRAL DISCONNECT
CCBF
12
15
CB
200
SP
Enclosure Type

Fused
Fuse Amperage
Integral Disconnect

Surge Protection
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
421
Solar Recombiners and Disconnect Switches
RECOMBINERS Application:
In large Photovoltaic (PV) systems, multiple combiner boxes are often necessary, and the outputs of these combiner boxes may need to be combined againrecombinedbefore reaching a central inverter. Cooper Crouse- Hinds Recombiner boxes allow for ease of installation saving time, labor and most importantly system costs.
CP
Consult Factory for ordering information
DISCONNECTS Application:
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Solar Disconnect Solutions are used as a disconnecting means and rated for 600 VDC/AC. The disconnects are offered separately in a sheet steel enclosure or as an integral mounted device to the Cooper Crouse-Hinds Combiner Solutions, offering reduced space and cost of installation, the ability to disconnect power from a remote location, and provide short circuit protection.
Features:
Switches are heavy duty 3-Pole, with visible blades; a quick make-and-break mechanism with reinforced, positive pressure type blade and jaw construction. Fusible types have fuse clips with steel reinforcing springs of positive pressure type. Pressure connectors are used for wire connectors. Switch enclosure covers are interlocked with the body and operating mechanism and cannot be opened when the switch is closed ("ON"). When the switch is open (OFF), the switch cannot be put in a closed ("ON") position with the door open. The switch operating handle may be padlocked in the "ON" or "OFF" position. In addition, the interlock construction has been designed to allow the door of the unit to be padlocked. This feature allows operation while preventing unqualified or unauthorized entry.
Enclosure Certification & Compliances:

NEMA Types 3R UL Standard 98

Enclosure sheet steel Operating handle non-metallic Other exterior parts stainless steel

3 and 4 Pole; fusible or non-fusible; 240 VAC/250 VDC; 600 VAC/600 VDC 30, 60, 100, 200 or 400 amperes
Disconnect Switches Ordering Information Specifications

30 Amp Heavy Duty Disconnect Switch - 600 VDC 3-Pole Catalog Number - Fusible Catalog Number - Non-fusible Sheet Steel CH361R CHU361R 60 Amp Sheet Steel CH362R CHU362R 100 Amp Sheet Steel CH363R CHU363R 200 Amp Sheet Steel CH364R CHU364R
For 4-Pole, 400 Amp or disconnect switches in a fiberglass or stainless steel enclosure - Consult Factory.
422
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Combiner Technical Information

Number of input circuits Catalog number (i.e. CCBF12) Maximum Input Fuse Rating (A) Maximum Continuous Operating Current (A) SCCR at 600VDC (KAIC) Maximum Voltage (VDC) Operating Voltage Range Combiner Only (VDC) 1 TO 4 CCBF (1-4) 15 60 5 TO 6 CCBF (5-6) 15 90 7 TO 12 CCBF (7-12) 15 180 13 TO 20 CCBF (13 TO 20) 15 300 21 TO 24 CCBF (21 TO 24) 15 360 25 TO 28 CCBF (21 TO 28) 15 420 29 TO 37 CCBF (29 TO 41) 15 555 38 TO 48 CCBF (42 TO 48) 15
CP
720
10 600 0-600
10 600 0-600
10 600 0-600
10 600 0-600
10 600 0-600
10 600 0-600
10 600 0-600
10 600 0-600
Operating 0-600 Voltage Range Combiner With Integral Disconnect (VDC) Positive Input #8-#18 Wire Size (AWG) Positive Input 16-22 Terminal Torque (in-lbs) Negative Input #10-#14 Wire Size (AWG) Negative Input 20 Terminal Torque (in-lbs) Positive Output Wire Size (AWG)
1
0-600
0-600
0-600
0-600
0-600
0-600
0-600
#8-#18 16-22
#8-#18 16-22
#8-#18 16-22
#8-#18 16-22
#8-#18 16-22
#8-#18 16-22
#8-#18 16-22
#10-#14 35
#4-#14 35
#4-#14 35
#4-#14 35
#4-#14 35
#4-#14 35
#4-#14 35
/0-#10
/0-#10
350kcmil-#6 (2) 300kcmil-#4 (2) 350kcmil-#6 (2) 350kcmil-#6 (2) 600kcmil-#2 (2) 600kcmil-#2 120 275 120 120 500 500
Positive Output 35 Terminal Torque (in-lbs) Negative Output Wire Size (AWG)
2
35
/0-#8
500kcmil-#6 350kcmil-#6 (2) 300kcmil-#4 (2) 350kcmil-#6 (2) 350kcmil-#6 (2) 600kcmil-#2 (2) 600kcmil-#2 500 120 275 120 120 500 500
Negative Output 120 Terminal Torque (in-lbs) Ground Output Wire Sizes (AWG) #4-#14
#4-#14
250-#6
250-#6
250-#6
250-#6
250-#6
250-#6
Ground Output 20-35 Terminal Torque (in-lbs)
20-35
275
275
275
275
275
275
Enclosure Nema 3/3R/4/4X 3/3R/4/4X Rating Enclosure Size Maximum # of inputs 12X10X5 4 12X10X5 6
3/3R/4/4X 16X14X6 12
3/3R/4/4X 18X16X8 20
3/3R/4/4X 20X16X8 24
3/3R/4/4X 24X20X8 28
3/3R/4/4X 30X20X6 37
3/3R/4/4X 36X30X8 48
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
423
Overcurrent Protection - PV Fuse-Links

Current Rating Energy Integrals (A2s) Pre-Arcing 8A 10A 3 7 10 20 Total at 1000V 32 50 100 200 Power Loss (watts) 0.8 In 0.5 0.6 1.3 1.8 In. 2.0 2.1 2.6 3.0
CP
12A 15A
Combiner Dimensional Information

# of Input Circuits 1-6 7-12 13-20 21-24 25-28 29-37 38-48 Enclosure Size Inches (HxWxD) 12x10x5 16x14x6 18x16x8 20x16x8 24x20x8 30x20x6 36x30x8 Overall Dimensions Inches (HxWxD) 13.56 x 11.43 x 5.21 17.53 x 15.46 x 6.23 19.62 x 17.61 x 8.82 22.00 x 17.68 x 8.83 27.00 x 21.24 x 9.90 32.86 x 20.99 x 7.89 39.31 x 32.50 x 10.05 Inside Dimensions Inches (HxWxD) 11.79 x 9.80 x 4.94 15.63 x 13.60 x 5.94 17.69 x 15.69 x 8.45 19.72 x 15.72 x 8.45 24.05 x 20.39 x 9.25 29.90 x 20.14 x 7.23 36.31 x 31.69 x 9.36 Mounting Dimensions Inches (HxW) 12.75 x 8.00 16.75 x 12.00 18.88 x 12.00 21.25 x 10.00 25.75 x 14.00 30.75 x 14.25 38.13 x 23.88 Approximate Weight (lbs) 10 18 27 33 47 60 112
424
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Solar Pass Through Boxes
Applications:
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Solar Pass Through Boxes (sometimes referred to as transition boxes) are used in residential applications to provide a low profile, cost effective way to group input wires/circuits from several arrays and/or solar panels and transition from solar (PV) cable to regular building wire. The Pass Through Box was designed for PV applications where over current protection is not necessary due to the low power rating of the PV string.

NEMA 4X

Hot compression molded fiberglass reinforced thermoset polyester Non-Conductive, impact resistant, UV resistant, flame retardant Poured Polyurethane seamless gasket provides water-tight, dusttight environmental seal Stainless steel used on all external hardware
CP
Features:
Rated 600VDC continuous duty Constructed in accordance with UL 1741 standards providing spacious wiring room for quick easy wire termination Factory installed multi-hole solar cord grip provides dependable secure wire termination to enclosure and saves field installation eliminating the need for enclosure drilling saving time & labor Fiberglass enclosure (UV absorbing) provided as standard offering long dependable service in the most environmental conditions Available in N3R sheet steel enclosures consult factory Light weight design offers easy mounting capabilities. Optional mounting feet are available for increased customer flexibility
Solar Pass Through Box Ordering Information

Cat. # CPBF03 CPBF04 Description 3 Circuit Pass Through Box 4 Circuit Pass Through Box
For additional configurations, please consult factory
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
425

Solar Non-Metallic Cord Grips
Applications:
CP
Features:

Standard Materials:

426
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Industrial Control & Circuit Breakers

Section C
Innovative, intelligent NEC and IEC solutions safely and efficiently control power and protect circuits in explosive, wet, and corrosive environments worldwide.
New Products in the Control Product Line

EGL Static Grounding Indicator EJB Custom Control Panels Explosionproof Variable Frequency Drives
Section
5C 5C 6C
Notable changes to the Control section of this catalog

Section 4C reorganized to capture all traditional control stations Section 5C reorganized to capture specialty control stations New section 6C for explosionproof variable frequency drives Section 8C has been removed. For Intrinsically Safe products, please visit Cooper Crouse-Hinds MTL Instruments at www.mtl-inst.com
Industrial Control and Circuit Breakers

Table of Contents
Section C of the Cooper Crouse-Hinds Product Catalog lists motor control, circuit breakers, variable frequency drives, and switchracks. Information on application, features, standard materials, standard finishes, size ranges, compliances, options, and accessories are presented for ease of product selection. Information relating to product families in Section C is grouped as follows:
Section 1C
Combination Motor Starters
(for hazardous and non-hazardous areas) Combination magnetic line starters and enclosures for across-theline motor starting, motor disconnect, motor and line protection, and start-stop operations. For hazardous areas EBMC EPC For non-hazardous areas NMC
Section 5C
Specialty Control Stations
(for hazardous and non-hazardous areas) For means of remote and local motor control, visual indicators and circuit control and selection. Offers a selection of push buttons, pilot lights, selector switches. EJB Custom Control Panels EMP / EMPS EGL AFU / AFUX AFA / AFAX D2X EGF
Section 2C
Motor Starters
(for hazardous and non-hazardous areas) Line starters and enclosures for manual and magnetic across-theline starting of motors, motor protection, and remote and manual starting and stopping. Magnetic starters EBMS EPC NMG Manual starters EID GHG EFD NSSC EDS NFSC EMN NMN MC
Section 6C
Explosionproof Variable Frequency Drives
(for hazardous areas) Highly flexible AC drives designed specifically for hazardous area locations. These drives can be mounted next to the motor in the classified area, providing significant installation cost savings - along with the traditional VFD benefits of energy savings, speed and torque control, and system diagnostics. ACE
Section 7C
Rack Assemblies
(for hazardous and non-hazardous areas) For motor control centers in outdoor and/or hazardous areas. For hazardous areas ERK DRK For non-hazardous areas WRK
Section 3C
Circuit Breakers
(for hazardous and non-hazardous areas) For use in conjunction with variety of heating, lighting, and power circuits to provide disconnect means and short circuit protection. For hazardous areas EBMB EFD EPC EIB FLB For non-hazardous areas NCB
Section 4C
Traditional Control Stations
(for hazardous and non-hazardous areas) For means of remote and local motor control, visual indicators and circuit control and selection. Offers a selection of push buttons, pilot lights, selector switches. For hazardous areas FlexStation MC / MCC EDS / EDSC OAC EDSCM GHG43 DSD / DSD-SR N2SU / N2SCU EDS N2FA / N2FAC EDSCM N2S / N2SC EFS MC / MCC OAC For non-hazardous areas MC
428
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Combination Motor Starters Hazardous and Non-hazardous Areas
1C
Description
Application/Selection Combination Line Starters and Enclosures Single speed, non-reversing, with circuit breakers & disconnect switches
EBMC Series EPC Series EBMC Series with Advantage* Starter NMC Nonmetallic Series
see page 431 see page 440 see page 438 see page 444
1C
Single speed, non-reversing, with motor circuit protectors

EBMC Series EPC Series
*Advantage is a trademark of Cutler-Hammer Inc.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
429
1C
Combination Motor Starters

Application and Quick Selector Chart
Applications:
Combination line starters are housed in enclosures suitable for specific environments, and are used for: Across-the-line starting of polyphase AC induction motors Providing disconnect means Branch circuit protection Motor running protection Remote starting and stopping

Standard material on EBMC and EPC Series is copper-free aluminum with natural finish EBMC and EPC optional finish is Corro-free epoxy for use in exceptionally corrosive atmospheres Standard material on NMC Series is Krydon high impact fiberglass-reinforced polyester, providing excellent corrosion resistance and stability to heat

Considerations for selection of proper enclosure: The environment of the enclosure location in accordance with NEC/CEC and NEMA/EEMAC requirements The characteristics of the starter and breaker to be enclosed See "Quick-Selector" below for guidance

Some of the options and accessories available for particular applications are: Push buttons Selector switches Control transformers Extra overload relays Extra interlock contacts Neutral connectors (both insulated and grounded) Breathers and drains See individual listings for specific options. Many are available in kit form for field addition to existing units.
1C

Enclosures for Combination Motor Starters NEMA/ EEMAC Starters Enclosures EBMC NEC/CEC Hazardous Area Certifications and Compliance Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G II, Div. 2, Groups F, G III NEMA/EEMAC Enclosure Type 3, 4*, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 Single Speed Non-Reversing 05
Manufacturers Equipment Enclosed Starter Allen-Bradley G.E. Square D Cutler-Hammer Allen-Bradley G.E. Square D Cutler-Hammer Allen-Bradley G.E. Square D Cutler-Hammer Breaker/Switch G.E. Square D Cutler-Hammer G.E. Square D Cutler-Hammer G.E. Square D Cutler-Hammer Cover Type Bolted/Ground Joint/Gasketed
EPC
3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG, 12
03
Threaded
NMC
3, 4X, 12
04
Gasketed
*Without EMP control devices
430
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EBMC Combination Line Starters and Enclosures
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12
Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight
1C
Applications:
Spectrum EBM hinged cover motor control enclosures are used: For general motor control and circuit protection indoors and outdoors in damp, wet, dirty, dusty hazardous locations without the need for a protective shelter In areas where frequent washdowns are necessary or where heavy rain or water spray is prevalent For across-the-line starting, stopping, speed changing and reversing of polyphase AC induction motors To provide line disconnect means and short circuit protection To provide motor overload and undervoltage protection For service entrance, feeder or branch circuit protection for lighting, heating, appliance and motor circuits On switchracks or other assemblies where it's desired that motor control be centrally located
1C
Features:
Rugged, corrosion resistant, cast copper-free aluminum construction (less than 0.4 of 1%) Component operating handles located through the right side wall of the body permits visual confirmation of correct component assembly and operation Total compliance to the wiring end room requirements of the National Electrical Code*/Canadian Electrical Code Semi-clamshell enclosure design, with an external flanged ground joint between body and cover makes interior components more accessible Minimum enclosure-to-enclosure spacing with little interference between the opened cover and an adjacent enclosure Stainless steel hinges allow the cover to swing well out of the way Stainless steel, quick release, captive, hex head cover bolts. Stainless steel springs provide clear indication cover bolts are fully retracted from body Versatile, internal operating mechanisms allow for field adjustment to accommodate popular manufacturers' starters and breakers Simple, straightforward installation of breaker and starter on predrilled mounting plate within enclosure. Mounting plate also field removable. Circuit breaker motor circuit protector external operating handle can be padlocked in either "ON" or "OFF" positions Neoprene cover gasket permanently attached to the cover seals out moisture Bodies have top and bottom drilled and tapped entrances for power conduits plus one at the bottom for control conduit. Removable reducers are supplied, as standard, to accommodate smaller size conduits. All conduit entrances are plugged. Tap-on mounting feet Optional EMPS control devices may be added to enclosure cover Steel bracket for lifting larger enclosures during installation supplied as standard
*National Electrical Code is a Registered Trademark of the National Fire Protection Association.
Interior components are readily accessible with ample end room for wiring
Side operators leave cover free for control options

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2; Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1; Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2; Groups F, G Class III UL Standards UL1203 Hazardous (classified) locations UL Subject 2062 - High AIC rating (Interrupting Capacity) For Groups C & D only Volt RMS Symm-Amperes 240 65,000 480 50,000 600 25,000 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30 NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 3R, 4, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12
Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators.
Standard Materials:
Body and cover copper-free aluminum Operating handle copper-free aluminum Operating shafts and bushings stainless steel Cover bolts, hinges, washer and retractile springs stainless steel Interior parts sheet steel, electrogalvanized
Electrical Rating Range:

Motor starters NEMA/EEMAC sizes 0-5 Circuit breakers 100, 150, 225, 250, 400, 600, 800, 1000 ampere frame sizes Motor circuit protectors 150, 250, 400 ampere frame sizes
1000 Ampere Frame (max. 800 ampere trip)
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
431
1C
Options:
The following options are available from the factory by adding suffix to catalog number suffixes are added alphanumerically. Catalog Number System Example EBMC1FB--DT30FAL36-W643- Options in this position are additions to the enclosure itself and should be listed alphanumerically. Options in this position are modifications to the starter and/or circuit breaker and should be listed alphanumerically.
EBMC Series motor control enclosures with combination line starters. When specifying any one of the following options with Spectrum EBM Motor Controls (J1, J3, PB23, RR2, RR3) it is necessary to order DSL Legend Plates for identification and marking of the device(s) being used.
Position Description in Cat. # Suffix Ambient compensated circuit breaker trip setting ........................................................................ AC Less overload relays (lighting contactor).................... CL Less overload relays (motor contactor)...................... CM Control Circuit Transformer, 100VA for NEMA/EEMAC sizes 02, 600/480/240120, 50 / 60 Hertz, with provision for fusing both primary leads and one secondary lead (fuses not provided) .............................................................. FTPS100 Control Circuit Transformer, 200VA for NEMA/EEMAC size 3, 600/480/240120, 50 / 60 Hertz, with provision for fusing both primary leads and one secondary lead (fuses not provided) .............................................................. FTPS200 Control Circuit Transformer, 300VA for NEMA/EEMAC size 4, 5 600/480/240120, 50 / 60 Hertz, with provision for fusing both primary leads and one secondary lead (fuses not provided) .............................................................. FTPS300 Pilot light, 120VAC, red jewel, w/blank indicating plate .......................................................... J1 Pilot light, 120VAC, green jewel, w/blank indicating plate .......................................................... J3 LED pilot lights (in place of standard incandescent lamps) .................................................. LED Less heaters in starter overload relay........................... 0 Start-Stop pushbuttons (requires 2 spaces)................ PB23 On-Off selector switch ................................................ RR2 Hand-Off-Auto selector switch ................................... RR3 Space heater, 120 Volt, 25 Watts ................................ R11 Space heater, 240 Volt, 25 Watts ................................ R22 Space heater, 480 Volt, 25 Watts ................................ R44 Automatic reset overload relay .................................... S1 Insulated neutral w/2 connectors ................................ S146 Std. drain, Class I, B,C & D; Class II, E, F & G; Class III ...................................................................... S756 Std. breather & drain, Class I, B,C & D; Class II, E, F & G; Class III ..................................................... S756V External epoxy finish ................................................... S752 Internal and external epoxy finish ................................ S753 Additional control contacts, N.O. or N.C. for single speed, non-reversing starters only (number limited by design of starter. Details on specific makes and sizes on request.) Auxiliary contacts on starter 1 N.O. & 1 N.C................ S781 Auxiliary contacts on starter 2 N.O. & 2 N.C................ S782 Auxiliary contacts on starter 3 N.O. & 3 N.C................ S783 Auxiliary switch on Circuit Breaker 1A and 1B contacts ..................................................................... S784 Auxiliary switch on Circuit Breaker 2A and 2B contacts ..................................................................... S785 12 Point term. block 30 Amp, 300V............................ S786 General purpose control relay, 4 pole N.O., contacts rated 10A@600V, coil 120VAC, 50 / 60 hertz ............................................................... S787*
*Use of this option with NEMA/EEMAC Size 0, or 1 starters necessitates using the larger "D" size enclosure. Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. Breather and drain entries must be plugged for NEMA 4 rating.
1C
432
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1C
Options:
If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below. Insert Legend Plate(s) Catalog Number (i.e. DSL16) immediately after optional device in the EBM Catalog Number. If EMP devices are to be added in the field, DSL Legend Plates must be ordered separately as they are not furnished with the EMP/EMPS devices.
Example:
EBMC1FB-J1-DSL14-J3-DSL09-DT30FAL36-W643 Use the charts below to select the appropriate legend plate(s) for your application. Markings shown in bold print are etched; all others are stamped.
Single Function Legend Plates

Marking Automatic Blank Blank with single field Close Down Emerg. Stop Fast Forward Hand In Jog Lower On Off Open Out Power On Raise Reset Reverse Run Safe Slow Start Stop Test Trip Up Cat. # DSL16 DSL01 DSL02 DSL21 DSL23 DSL17 DSL46 DSL18 DSL15 DSL24 DSL10 DSL27 DSL07 DSL08 DSL20 DSL25 DSL14 DSL26 DSL12 DSL19 DSL09 DSL85 DSL47 DSL05 DSL06 DSL13 DSL11 DSL22
Two Function Legend Plates

Marking Blank with 2 fields For-Rev Hand-Auto In-Out Off-On Open-Close Raise-Lower Run-Jog Safe-Run Start-Stop Slow-Fast Up-Down Cat. # DSL03 DSL30 DSL29 DSL35 DSL48 DSL32 DSL36 DSL28 DSL86 DSL37 DSL65 DSL33
Background color for all legend plates is black with the following exceptions: Marking Start Stop Emerg. Stop Plate Color Green Red Red
1C
Three Function Legend Plates

Marking Auto-Off-Hand Blank with 3 fields Fast-Off-Slow For-Off-Rev Hand-Off-Auto Run-Off-Jog Open-Off-Close Raise-Off-Lower Slow-Off-Fast Up-Off-Down 1-Off-2 Cat. # DSL49 DSL04 DSL41 DSL40 DSL39 DSL38 DSL43 DSL87 DSL88 DSL44 DSL42
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
433
1C

Dimensions (In inches)
Dimensions
In Inches:
1C
*1" Conduit entrance for control conductors (top & bottom).
**Conduit entrance for power conductors (top & bottom). (All conduit entrances supplied with RE reducer and PLG plug.)
Enclosure Enclosure Only Size Cat. # Symbol A B C D Size 0, 1 FVNR combination line starter EBMCFB B 25.75 24.75 26.90 6.00 Size 2 FVNR combination line starter EBMCFD D 28.25 27.25 29.40 6.00 Size 3 FVNR combination line starter EBMCFG G 38.13 36.50 39.28 6.00 EBMCFH H 37.50 36.50 38.65 6.00
J** Conduit Entry Trade Size D&T w/RE 1.5" 2.5" 2.5" 2.5" (2) 2.5" (2) 3.5" (2) 3.5"
P 22.00 24.50 34.06 33.75
13.03 14.78 12.13 2" 13.03 14.67 12.13 3" 13.03 14.78 12.13 3" 14.65 16.65 13.54 3"
3.25 3.13 10.25 3.25 3.13 10.25 3.25 3.13 10.25 3.25 3.94 11.66
Size 4 FVNR combination line starter EBMCFK K 43.12 41.50 42.65 12.00 17.65 20.46 12.80 (2) 3" EBMCFL L 53.47 51.50 53.28 12.00 17.90 20.58 15.00 (2) 4" Size 5 FVNR combination line starter EBMCFM M 64.22 62.50 64.03 12.00 17.90 21.08 15.00 (2) 4"
Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes. Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. Use EBMCFD enclosure when LVR1 or S787 options are ordered with Size 0 or 1 combination starters. For Cutler-Hammer W200 Advantage starters. Drilled & Tapped.
3.25 3.00 10.78 19.97 4.00 3.50 13.03 41.50 18.40 29.88 4.00 3.50 13.03 41.50 18.40 34.46
434
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Single-Speed Non-Reversing with Circuit Breakers 3-Pole 60 hertz, 600VAC Maximum
To order an enclosure complete with starter and breaker, insert the manufacturer's symbols in the designated positions of the catalog number. Symbols are shown in the footnotes see pages 435436.
1C
Select the complete Cat. No. below and specify HP, voltage, frequency, RPM, type and full load ampere rating of motor or specify ampere rating of heaters. Enclosures only can be ordered. Select from listings below. Enclosure Without Breaker & Starter Cat. # EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMCFH
Instantaneous magnetic trip circuit breakers (magnetic circuit interrupters) can be supplied. Consult factory. For combination starters with motor circuit protectors for single speed, non-reversing motors see page 437.
Motor Starter Max. HP Polyphase 2 2 2 3 3 3 5 5 5 5 5 5 71/2 71/2 71/2 10 10 10 10 10 10 15 15 15 15 15 15 20 20 20 25 25 25 20 25 30 Line Volts 120 120 120 240 240 240 480 480 600 240 240 240 240 240 240 480 480 600 240 240 240 240 240 240 480 480 600 480 480 600 480 480 600 240 240 240 NEMA Size 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
Circuit Breaker Amp Rating 30 30 30 20 20 20 15 15 15 30 30 30 50 50 50 30 30 30 50 50 50 70 70 70 40 40 40 50 50 50 70 70 70 90 100 125 Frame Volts 240 480 600 240 480 600 480 600 600 240 480 600 240 480 600 480 600 600 240 480 600 240 480 600 480 600 600 480 600 600 480 600 600 240 240 480 480 600 600 Frame Types FAL, TEB FAL, TED, EHD FAL, TED, FDB FAL, TEB FAL, TED, EHD FAL, TED, FDB FAL, TED, EHD FAL, TED, FDB FAL, TED, FDB FAL, TEB FAL, TED, EHD FAL, TED, FDB FAL, TEB FAL, TED, EHD FAL, TED, FDB FAL, TED, EHD FAL, TED, FDB FAL, TED, FDB FAL, TEB FAL, TED, EHD FAL, TED, FDB FAL, TEB FAL, TED, EHD FAL, TED, FDB FAL, TED, EHD FAL, TED, FDB FAL, TED, FDB FAL, TED, EHD FAL, TED, FDB FAL, TED, FDB FAL, TED, EHD FAL, TED, FDB FAL, TED, FDB FAL, TEB FAL, TEB TED FAL, TED, EHD FAL, TED, FDB FAL, TED, FDB
With Breaker & Starter Cat. # EBMC0FB 3032 613 EBMC0FB 3034 613 EBMC0FB 3036 613 EBMC0FB 2032 623 EBMC0FB 2034 623 EBMC0FB 2036 623 EBMC0FB 1534 643 EBMC0FB 1536 643 EBMC0FB 1536 663 EBMC1FB 3032 623 EBMC1FB 3034 623 EBMC1FB 3036 623 EBMC1FB 5032 623 EBMC1FB 5034 623 EBMC1FB 5036 623 EBMC1FB 3034 643 EBMC1FB 3036 643 EBMC1FB 3036 663 EBMC2FD 5032 623 EBMC2FD 5034 623 EBMC2FD 5036 623 EBMC2FD 7032 623 EBMC2FD 7034 623 EBMC2FD 7036 623 EBMC2FD 4034 643 EBMC2FD 4036 643 EBMC2FD 4036 663 EBMC2FD 5034 643 EBMC2FD 5036 643 EBMC2FD 5036 663 EBMC2FD 7034 643 EBMC2FD 7036 643 EBMC2FD 7036 663 EBMC3FH 9032 623 EBMC3FH 10032 623 EBMC3FH 12534 623 EBMC3FH 7034 643 EBMC3FH 7036 643 EBMC3FH 7036 663
1C
30 480 3 70 30 480 3 70 30 600 3 70 See pages 435436 for configurable options.
To include a 120V coil, insert a "1" between second to last and last character in catalog number. 120V coil standard with FTPS option. Ex. EBMC0FB-3032-613 becomes EBMC0FB-3032-6113 Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. Starters are furnished with 3 heaters, when heater ratings are fully specified.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
435
1C
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Single-Speed Non-Reversing with Circuit Cl. III Breakers and Fusible Disconnect Switches NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12
3-Pole 60 hertz, 600VAC Maximum

Motor Starter Max. HP Polyphase 40 40 40 50 50 50 40 50 60 60 75 75 100 100 125 150 Motor Starter Max. HP Polyphase 5 10 25 30 Circuit Breakers: Manufacturer Cutler-Hammer General Electric Square D Max. Line Volts 600 600 600 600 NEMA Size 0 1 2 3 Symbol WT TT W Line Volts 480 480 600 480 480 600 240 240 480 600 480 600 480 600 480 480 NEMA Size 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 Circuit Breaker Amp Rating 90 90 90 100 100 100 175 200 125 100 150 125 200 150 300 400 Frame Volts 480 600 600 480 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600
Frame Types FAL, TED, EHD FAL, TED, FDB FAL, TED, FDB FAL, TED, EHD FAL, TED, FDB FAL, TED, FDB TFK/ TFK/ TFK/ TFK/ TFK/ TFK/ JD/ JD/ JD/ JD/ JD/ JD/ KAL, KAL, KAL, KAL, KAL, KAL, TFJ, TFJ, TFJ, TFJ, TFJ, TFJ, JDB JDB JDB JDB JDB JDB
Enclosure Without Breaker & Starter Cat. # EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMCFL EBMCFL EBMCFL EBMCFL EBMCFL EBMCFL
With Breaker & Starter Cat. # EBMC3FH 9034 643 EBMC3FH 9036 643 EBMC3FH 9036 663 EBMC3FH 10034 643 EBMC3FH 10036 643 EBMC3FH 10036 663 EBMC4FL EBMC4FL EBMC4FL EBMC4FL EBMC4FL EBMC4FL 17536 20036 12536 10036 15036 12536 623 623 643 663 643 663
1C
TFK/ JD/ KAL, TFJ, JDB EBMCFL TFK/ JD/ KAL, TFJ, JDB EBMCFL TJK/ KD/ LAL, TJJ, KDB EBMCFM TJK/ KD/ LAL, TJJ, KDB EBMCFM
EBMC4FL 20036 643 EBMC4FL 15036 663 EBMC5FM 30036 643 EBMC5FM 40036 643
Fusible Disconnect Switch Amp Rating 30 30 60 100 Max. Volts 600 600 600 600 Switch Type DS161R DS161R DS262R DS363R With Disconnect Switch & Starter Cat. # EBMC0FD EBMC1FD EBMC2FD EBMC3FH WFD30J36 W643 WFD30J36 W643 WFD60J36 W643 WFD100J36 W643
NEMA Size Without Switch & Starter Cat. # 0 1 2 3 EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFH FD FD FD FD
Select Circuit Breaker Frame Type based on Frame Size, Voltage, and Manufacturer desired: 100 Amp. Frame 225 Amp. Frame and and 150 Amp. Frame 250 Amp. Frame 240V 480V 600V Manufacturer AC AC AC 600VAC Cutler-Hammer General Electric Square D Motor Starters: Manufacturer Allen Bradley Square D General Electric Cutler-Hammer TEB FAL EHD TED FAL FDB TED FAL JD Interchangeable Trip Unit JDB Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit TFK Interchangeable Trip Unit TFJ Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit KAL
400 Amp. Frame 600VAC KD Interchangeable Trip Unit KDB Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit TJK Interchangeable Trip Unit TJJ Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit LAL
Symbol AB D G W
Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. Starters are furnished with 3 heaters, when heater ratings are fully specified.
436
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EBMC Combination Line Starters

Single-Speed Non-Reversing with Motor Circuit Protectors 3-Pole 60 hertz, 600VAC Maximum
1C
Select the complete Catalog No. below and specify HP, voltage, frequency, RPM, type and full load ampere rating of motors or specify ampere rating of heaters. Motor Starter Max. HP Polyphase 3 3 3 5 5 71/2 71/2 10 10 10 15 15 20 25 25 30 30 50 50 50 100 100 60 100 125 150 200 200 NEMA Size 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 MCP Amp Rating 15 7 7 15 15 30 15 30 15 50 100 30 30 50 50 100 50 100 100 250* 250* 250* 250* 400 250* 250* 400 400 Enclosure without Starter & MCP Cat. # EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFD EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMCFH EBMCFL EBMCFL EBMCFL EBMCFM EBMCFM EBMCFM EBMCFM EBMCFM EBMCFM Enclosure with Starter & MCP Cat. # EBMC0FB EBMC0FB EBMC0FB EBMC0FB EBMC0FB EBMC1FB EBMC1FB EBMC1FB EBMC1FB EBMC2FD EBMC2FD EBMC2FD EBMC2FD EBMC2FD EBMC2FD EBMC3FH EBMC3FH EBMC3FH EBMC3FH 15A36 623 7A36 643 7A36 663 15A36 643 15A36 663 30A36 15A36 30A36 15A36 623 643 643 663
Volts 240 480 600 480 600 240 480 480 600 240 240 480 600 480 600 240 600 480 600 240 480 600 240 240 480 600 480 600
1C
50A36 623 100A36 623 30A36 643 30A36 663 50A36 643 50A36 663 100A36 623 50A36 663 100A36 643 100A36 663
EBMC4FL 25036 623 EBMC4FL 25036 643 EBMC4FL 25036 663 EBMC5FM EBMC5FM EBMC5FM EBMC5FM EBMC5FM EBMC5FM 25036 40036 25036 25036 40036 40036 623 623 643 663 643 663
Motor Circuit Protectors: Manufacturer Cutler-Hammer General Electric Square D
Symbol WP TP DP
Select Motor Circuit Protector Frame Type based on Frame Size and Manufacturer desired: 150 Amp. 250 Amp. 400 Amp. Frame Frame Frame Cutler-Hammer General Electric Square D Motor Starters: Manufacturer Allen Bradley Square D General Electric Cutler-Hammer HMCP (F-Frame) TEC FAL Symbol AB D G W HMCP (J-Frame) TFC KAL HMCP (K-Frame) TJC LAL
After the MCP amp rating the following character symbol must be entered to designate the trip range. Consult factory for other trip ranges available. MCP Amp Rating Symbol Trip Range Cutler-Hammer (WP) 21 to 70 7 A 45 to 150 15 A 90 to 300 30 A 150 to 500 50 B 300 to 1000 100 B 1250 to 2500 250 J 1250 to 2500 400 G General Electric (TP) 7 15 30 50 100 225 400 Square D (DP) 7 15 30 50 100 250 400 A A A A A B C A A A A A H E 18 to 90 42 to 198 90 to 390 180 to 660 300 to 1308 1000 to 2250 1000 to 3300 18 to 70 50 to 180 100 to 350 150 to 580 300 to 1100 1250 to 2500 1250 to 2500 437
Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. *General Electric motor circuit protectors are 225 Amp. Rated. Starters are furnished with three heaters when heater ratings are fully specified.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1C
Spectrum EBM Enclosures

Supplied with Cutler-Hammer Advantage* Starters
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III Type 3, 3R, 4, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12
Applications:
Spectrum EBM-E series of hinged cover motor control enclosures are used: For general motor control and circuit protection indoors and outdoors in damp, wet, dirty, dusty hazardous locations without the need for protective shelter. In areas where frequent washdowns are necessary or where heavy rain or water spray is prevalent. For across-the-line starting and stopping of polyphase AC induction motors. To provide line disconnect means and short circuit protection (EBMC). To provide motor overload and undervoltage protection. For feeder or branch circuit protection for lighting, heating, appliance, and motor circuits (EBMC). On switchracks or other assemblies where it's desired that motor control be centrally located.
1C
Features:
Total compliance to the wiring end room requirements of the National Electrical Code. Solid state electronic Cutler-Hammer Advantage starter. Smaller enclosures required than for conventional starter applications. Elimination of heater elements, contact chatter, and welding due to low voltage supply. Precise overcurrent protection and constant coil power. Same performance and labor-saving benefits from the versatile Spectrum EBM Enclosure product line. Universal mounting plates and hardware for all major manufacturers' components. Mercury switch electronic overload reset. Optional EMPS control devices may be added to enclosure cover.
Spectrum EBM-E Series Combination Line Starter with Advantage Starter.
Options:
See page 439 for options for the EBM enclosures supplied with Cutler-Hammer Advantage starters. The following suffixes cannot be ordered with this style equipment: C, LVR1, O, S.
Dimensions
In Inches:

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III UL Standards UL1203 Hazardous (classified) locations CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30 UL Subject 2062 - High AIC rating (Interrupting Capacity) Volt RMS Symm-Amperes 240 65,000 480 50,000 600 25,000 NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 3R, 4, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12
Standard Materials:
Body and cover copper-free aluminum Operating handle copper-free aluminum Operating shafts and bushings stainless steel Interior parts sheet steel, electrogalvanized Cover bolts, washers, and retractile springs stainless steel
EBMCFM-E
EBMCFK-E

Motor starters NEMA sizes 15
See page 439 for dimensions of different enclosure sizes. *Advantage is a trademark of Cutler-Hammer Products. Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators.
438
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Supplied with Cutler-Hammer Advantage Starters
Enclosure Only Cat. # EBMCFB E EBMCFG E EBMCFK E EBMCFM E
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III Type 3, 3R, 4, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12
1C
Dimensions (In Inches): A 25.75 38.13 43.12 64.22
B 24.75 36.50 41.50 62.50
C 26.90 39.28 42.65 64.03
D 6.00 6.00 12.00 12.00
F 14.78 14.78 20.46 21.08
**J Conduit Entry Trade Size D&T w/RE 2" 3" (2) 3" (2) 4" 1.5" 2.5" (2) 2.5" (2) 3.5"
K 3.25 3.25 3.25 4.00
L 3.13 3.13 3.25 4.00
"H" Use 1/ 2" diameter bolts for all enclosures listed above. *1" D&T conduit entry for control conductors supplied with PLG plug (top and bottom). **Conduit entrance for power conductors (top & bottom). (All conduit entrances supplied with RE reducer and PLG plug.)
Ordering Information Combination Line Starters

To order an enclosure complete with motor starter and circuit breaker (or motor circuit protector), insert the manufacturer's symbols in the designated positions of the catalog number. Symbols are shown in the footnotes. EBM "E" Series Combination Line Starters and Enclosures for Cutler-Hammer Advantage Starters, Single Speed Non-Reversing Motor Starter Max. HP Polyphase 71/2 71/2 71/2 10 10 10 15 15 15 25 25 25 30 30 30 50 50 50 50 100 100 75 150 200 Line Volt 240 240 240 480 480 600 240 240 240 480 480 600 240 240 240 480 480 600 240 480 600 240 480 600 NEMA Size 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 Circuit Breaker Amp Trip 50 50 50 30 30 30 70 70 70 70 70 50 125 125 125 100 100 90 200 200 150 400 400 400 Symbol WT TT DT Frame Volts 240 480 600 480 600 600 240 480 600 480 600 600 240 480 600 480 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 Frame Type FAL, FAL, FAL, FAL, FAL, FAL, FAL, FAL, FAL, FAL, FAL, FAL, FAL, FAL, FAL, FAL, FAL, FAL, TEB TED, TED, TED, TED, TED, TEB TED, TED, TED, TED, TED, TEB TED, TED, TED, TED, TED, EHD FDB FDB FDB FDB FDB FDB EHD FDB FDB EHD FDB EHD FDB FDB Enclosure Without Breaker & Starter Cat. # EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFB EBMCFG EBMCFG EBMCFG EBMCFG EBMCFG EBMCFG E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E E
1C
With Breaker (or Motor Circuit Protector) & Cutler-Hammer Advantage Starter Cat. # EBMC1FB EBMC1FB EBMC1FB EBMC1FB EBMC1FB EBMC1FB EBMC2FB EBMC2FB EBMC2FB EBMC2FB EBMC2FB EBMC2FB EBMC3FG EBMC3FG EBMC3FG EBMC3FG EBMC3FG EBMC3FG 5032 5034 5036 3034 3036 3036 7032 7034 7036 7034 7036 5036 W6213 W6213 W6213 W6413 W6413 W6613 W6213 W6213 W6213 W6413 W6413 W6413 E E E E E E E E E E E E
12532 W6213 E 12534 W6213 E 12536 W6213 E 10034 W6413 E 10036 W6413 E 9036 W6613 E
TFK, JD, KAL, TFJ, JDB TFK, JD, KAL, TFJ, JDB TFK, JD, KAL, TFJ, JDB TJK, KD, LAL, TJJ, KDB TJK, KD, LAL, TJJ, KDB TJK, KD, LAL, TJJ, KDB
Note:
EBMCFK E EBMCFK E EBMCFK E EBMCFM E EBMCFM E EBMCFM E
EBMC4FK 200W36 W6213 E EBMC4FK 20036 W6413 E EBMC4FK 15036 W6613 E EBMC5FM 40036 W6213 E EBMC5FM 40036 W6413 E EBMC5FM 40036 W6613 E
With Circuit Breakers: Manufacturer Cutler-Hammer General Electric Square D
With Motor Circuit Protectors:

Only units with a frame volts of 600 are available with Motor Circuit Protectors:
Manufacturer Cutler-Hammer General Electric Square D
Symbol WP TP DP 400 Amp Frame 600VAC KD Interchangeable Trip Unit KDB Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit TJK Interchangeable Trip Unit TJJ Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit LAL
Select Circuit Breaker Frame Type based on Frame Size, Voltage, and Manufacturer desired. 100 Amp Frame and 150 Amp Frame 225 Amp Frame and 250 Amp Frame Manufacturer 240VAC 480VAC 600VAC 600VAC Cutler-Hammer EHD TED FAL FDB TED FAL JD Interchangeable Trip Unit JDB Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit TFK Interchangeable Trip Unit TFJ Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit KAL
General Electric TEB Square D FAL
Select Motor Circuit Protector Frame Type based on Frame Size and Manufacturer desired. Before the frame type a character symbol must be entered to designate the trip range. See page 437 for appropriate symbol. Manufacturer 150 Amp Frame (600 V) 250 Amp Frame (600 V) 400 Amp Frame (600 V) Cutler-Hammer HMCP (F-Frame) HMCP (J-Frame) HMCP (K-Frame) General Electric TEC TFC TJC Square D FAL KAL LAL
Note: "Enclosures only" are supplied with necessary operators, linkages, and mercury switch electronic overload resets. Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators.
439
1C
EPC Combination Line Starters and Enclosures
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG, 12
Applications:
EPC combination line starters and enclosures are used:
For across-the-line starting of polyphase AC induction motors In locations which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors, gases or highly combustible dusts In damp, wet or corrosive locations For installation indoors or outdoors at petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist To provide disconnecting means, motor branch circuit protection, motor running protection, undervoltage protection and remote starting and stopping due to the combination of thermal-magnetic circuit breaker and magnetic motor starter

NEC/CEC Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG, 12 UL Standard: 698 CSA Standards: C22.2 No. 30
Standard Materials:
Body and cover copper-free aluminum Operating handle copper-free aluminum Operating shafts stainless steel Interior parts sheet steel
1C
Features:
Quick-opening covers less than two turns to remove or install Three section design for ease of installation Water-shedding construction with female threads on top cover, male threads on bottom cover, and top cover skirted Specially located stops and locks insure adequate thread engagement and prevent overtightening Separate replaceable mounting bracket attached to the rear of the body provides three-point suspension for quick installation and leveling one keyhole slot at top and two open slots at bottom Bodies have two taper-tapped conduit hubs with integral bushings on the top, and two more directly below Universal mounting plate and reset mechanism will accommodate any of the motor starters and circuit breakers in catalog listing When interior mounting plate is removed, feeder and branch circuit conductors are easily pulled into the wiring chamber. The interior assembly, with breaker and starter attached, is then replaced, final connections made, and covers assembled External handle, which operates breaker can be padlocked in either "ON" or "OFF" positions Breaker is trip-free of the handle, therefore it will open under short circuit or overload, even if the external handle is locked in the "ON" position Furnished with third overload relay as standard
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum natural Stainless steel natural Sheet steel electrogalvanized with chromate finish
Assembled unit
Separated view showing major components Suffix
Description

Starters Sizes 0, 1 and 3 inclusive Breakers 100 and 150 ampere frame sizes Motor Circuit Protectors 100 ampere frame size
Options:
The following special options are available from factory by adding suffix to Cat. No. and many are available in kit form or for field addition to existing units: See page 459 for listing of kits
Description
Suffix
Control circuit transformer 600/480/240120 volts, 50 or 60 hertz (Sizes 0 and 1 10050 VA, Size 3 200350 VA) Fusible Secondary............................ FT Fusible Primary and secondary........ FTPS Auxiliary Contacts on Starter or Contactor* 1 N.O./1 N.C................................... S781 2 N.O./2 N.C................................... S782 3 N.O./3 N.C................................... S783 Auxiliary Switch on Circuit Breaker or Motor Circuit Protector* 1A/1B (1P2T)................................... S784 2A/2B (2P2T)................................... S785 Side bosses drilled and tapped same size as standard hubs (except 15" dia. 1" size)..................... S366 Back boss drilled and tapped same size as standard hubs (except 15" dia. 1" size)..................... S367 Pushbuttons (heavy duty): START-STOP.................................. PB3
Selector switches (standard duty): ON-OFF........................................... RR2 HAND-OFF-AUTO........................... RR3 Pilot lights: Red, 120 volt................................... J1 Green, 120 volt................................ J3 LED pilot lights, in place of standard incandescent lamps.............................. LED Pilot light transformers: 240 volt.......................................... T2 480 volt.......................................... T4 600 volt.......................................... T5 Space heaters: 120 volt............................................ R11 240 volt............................................ R22 480 volt............................................ R44 Automatic reset overload relay............. S1 Less overload relays (lighting contactor).............................................. CL Less overload relays (motor contactor) CM Separate AC control circuit.................. Specify Insulated neutral with 2 connectors (50, 100 & 225 amp)............................. S146 Grounded neutral stud with 3 connectors (50, 100 & 225 amp).......... S178 Pilot light holes drilled, tapped and plugged for future addition of pilot lights One hole.......................................... S541 Two holes........................................ S542 Standard Breather (Class I, Groups C, D, Class II, Groups E, F, G, Class III).... S219 Standard Drain (Class I, Groups C, D, Class II, Groups E, F, G, Class III)........ S198 Standard Breather and Drain (Class I, Groups C, D, Class II, Groups E, F, G, Class III)...................... S198V Universal Breather Drain (Class I, Groups C, D, Class II, Groups F, G)..... S454 (2) Universal Breather Drains (Class I, Groups C, D, Class II, Groups F, G).. S454V Less heaters......................................... 0
*Application is limited by starter, contactor, circuit breaker or motor circuit protector design Consult Factory Required for pilot lights on other than 120 volt control circuits. One required for each lamp. Not suitable for NEMA 4.
440
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Dimensions* (In Inches)
1C
1C
Single-Speed Non-Reversing Sizes 0, 1 and 3 starters

EPC87 Int. Dia. a b c d e f g h j k l m n p 7" Dimensions 105/8 261/16 3511/16 1411/16 63/4 711/16 115/8 2 75/8 73/8 21/16 93/8 51/4 11/4 EPC813 11" 161/8 381/2 61 201/4 91/8 85/8 203/4 41/2 18 12 25/8 11 51/2 21/2 EPC87FTPS or EPC87FT 7" Dimensions 105/8 311/16 4711/16 1411/16 113/4 711/16 115/8 9 75/8 73/8 21/16 93/8 51/4 11/4 EPC813FTPS or EPC813FT 11" 161/8 411/2 671/2 201/4 121/8 85/8 203/4 8 18 12 25/8 11 51/2 21/2
*Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes. For units with Control Circuit Transformer (suffix FT or FTPS).
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
441
1C

Single Speed, Non-Reversing with Circuit Breakers 3-Pole 60 hertz, 600 VAC Maximum
To order an enclosure complete with starter and breaker, insert the manufacturer's symbols in the designated positions of the catalog number. Symbols are shown in the footnotes below. Select the complete Cat. No. below and specify HP, voltage, frequency, RPM, type and full load ampere rating of motor or specify ampere rating of heaters. Motor Starter Circuit Breaker
Enclosures only can be ordered. Select from listings below. Instantaneous magnetic trip circuit breakers (magnetic circuit interrupters) can be supplied. Consult factory. For combination starters with motor circuit protectors or single speed, non-reversing motors see page 443.
Enclosure Without Starter & Circuit Breaker Cat. # EPC87 EPC87 EPC87 EPC87 EPC87 EPC87 EPC87 EPC87 EPC87 EPC87 EPC87 EPC87 EPC87 EPC87 EPC87 EPC87 EPC813 EPC813 EPC813 EPC813 EPC813 EPC813 With Starter & Circuit Breaker Cat. # EPC870 30ED 613 EPC870 EPC870 EPC870 EPC870 EPC871 EPC870 EPC870 EPC870 EPC871 EPC871 EPC871 EPC871 20EHD 623 15EHD 643 15FD 643 15FD 653 30EHD 623 15EHD 643 15FD 643 15FD 653 50EHD 623 30EHD 643 30FD 643 30FD 653
1C
Max. HP Polyphase 2 3 3 3 3 5 5 5 5 71/2 71/2 71/2 71/2 10 10 10 40 40 40 50 50 50 Circuit Breakers: Manufacturer General Electric Square D Cutler-Hammer
*Specify Voltage
Volts 120 240 480 480 600 240 480 480 600 240 480 480 600 480 480 600 480 480 600 480 480 600
NEMA Size 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 3 3 3 3 3
Amp Rating 30 20 15 15 15 30 15 15 15 50 30 30 30 30 30 30 90 90 90 100 100 100
Frame EB EHD EHD FDB FD EHD EHD FDB FDB EHD EHD FDB FDB EHD FDB FDB EHD FDB FDB EHD FDB FDB
Hub Size in. 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 21/2 21/2 21/2 21/2 21/2 21/2
Int. Dia. in. 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 11 11 11 11 11 11
EPC871 30EHD 643 EPC871 30FD 643 EPC871 30FD 653 EPC813 90EHB 643 EPC813 90FB 643 EPC813 90FB 653 EPC813 100EHB 643 EPC813 100FB 643 EPC813 100FB 653
Motor Starters: Symbol TT DT WT Frames 100/150AMP 240V 480V 600V TEB FAL* EHD TED* FAL* EHD TED* FAL* FB, FDB Manufacturer Symbol Allen-Bradley AB General Electric G Square D D Cutler-Hammer W When Square D starter is used in EPC813, EPC-KIT 32 must be ordered
Starters are furnished with three heaters when heater ratings are fully specified.
442
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EPC Combination Line Starters

Single-Speed Non-Reversing with Motor Circuit Protectors 3-Pole 60 hertz, 600 VAC Maximum
1C
Select the complete Catalog No. below and specify HP, voltage, frequency, RPM, type and full load ampere rating of motors or specify ampere rating of heaters. Current limiters may be ordered by specification*. Motor Starter Max. HP NEMA Polyphase Volts Size 3 3 3 5 5 71/2 71/2 10 10 240 480 600 480 600 240 480 600 480 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Enclosure with Motor Circuit Protector and Starter Amp Rating Cat. # 15 7 7 15 15 30 15 15 30 EPC870 EPC870 EPC870 EPC870 EPC870 EPC871 EPC871 EPC871 EPC871 Symbol TP DP WP Symbol AB G D W 15HMCP 623 7HMCP 643 7HMCP 653 15HMCP 643 15HMCP 653 30HMCP 15HMCP 15HMCP 30HMCP 623 643 653 643
1C
Motor Circuit Protectors Manufacturer General Electric Square D Cutler-Hammer Motor Starters: Manufacturer Allen-Bradley General Electric Square D Cutler-Hammer
*General Electric or Cutler-Hammer MCPs only.
Starters are furnished with three heaters when heater ratings are fully specified.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
443
1C
NMC Combination Line Starters and Enclosures

600VAC Heavy Duty
Corrosion-Resistant Dust-tight Watertight Weatherproof NEMA 3, 4X, 12
Applications:
NMC combination magnetic line starters are for use in across-the-line motor starting, motor disconnect, motor and line protection and start-stop operations.
Features:
Enclosures are made of Krydon high impact strength fiberglass-reinforced polyester material having excellent corrosion resistance and stability to heat. Unitized, strong and durable enclosure construction provides longer service life for equipment. Provided with top and bottom mounting feet. Enclosure has hinged access door which opens 160 for easy wiring and maintenance. Three screws for door frame are hidden behind access door. Access door may be padlocked to prevent unauthorized access.
1C
Combination line starter with optional START-STOP pushbuttons open view
Combination line starter with optional START-STOP pushbuttons closed view Description Suffix Pilot lights, 120 V primary specify other primary voltages as required: Red pilot light.................................. J1 Green pilot light............................... J3 LED pilot lights in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps LED Pushbutton (heavy duty, uses two device holes): START-STOP................................... PB13 Selector Switch (heavy duty) ONOFF........................................... RR17 HANDOFFAUTO.......................... RR18 JOGRUNOFF............................... RR19 Padlock attachment for: Pushbutton...................................... S708 Automatic reset overload relay....... S1 Less overload relays (contactor)..... C Separate AC control circuit............. Specify Insulated, groundable type terminal block for grounded or ungrounded neutral can be supplied................... S618 Hubs (see "NOTE ON HUBS") see page 646 Grounding plate or bushing see page 646
*Application limited by Size 5 starter, contactor or circuit breaker design consult factory. Option not available on NMC1024B.

NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 4X and 12
Options:
Description Suffix Control circuit transformer 480/240-120 volts, 50 or 60 hertz, (Sizes 0 and 1 50VA, Size 2 100VA, Size 3 150VA, Size 4 300VA) Fusible Secondary.................................... FT Primary and secondary................ FTPS Auxiliary Contact on Starter or Contactor* 1NO/1NC..................................... S781 2 NO/2 NC................................... S782 3 NO/3 NC................................... S783 Auxiliary Switch on Circuit Breaker or Motor Circuit Protector* 1A/1B .......................................... S784 2A/2B .......................................... S785 Time delay low voltage release for 3-wire control with 2, 4 or 6second adjustment. For singlespeed, non-reversing starters only. Control circuit voltage: 120 volt, 60 hertz.............................. LVR1 240 volt, 60 hertz.............................. LVR2 480 volt, 60 hertz.............................. LVR4

3-pole, 60 hertz, 600 VAC max. Starters sizes 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 Breakers 100, 150, 225 and 250 amp frame Switches 30, 60, 100 amp Motor circuit protectors 15, 30, 50, 100, 150 amp
NOTE ON HUBS: The following number and sizes of hubs (not mounted) are included when combination starters are ordered complete. If enclosures only are ordered, hubs must be ordered separately (see "Options").
Starter Size 0 1 2 3 4
Number Included 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
Hub Size
3 3
/4
/4 1 /4 11/2 /4 2 /4 21/2
444
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Single-Speed, Non-Reversing 600VAC Heavy Duty
Ordering Information - With Circuit Breakers
1C
To order an enclosure complete with starter and breaker, insert the manufacturers symbols in the designated positions of the catalog number. Symbols are shown in the footnotes. Select the complete Cat. No. below and specify HP, voltage, frequency, RPM, type and full load ampere rating of motor or specify ampere rating of heaters. Starters are furnished with three heaters. Enclosures only can be ordered. Select from listings below. Specific reference table is shown in the listings below. Instantaneous magnetic trip circuit breakers (magnetic circuit interrupters) can be supplied. Motor Starter Circuit Breaker Enclosure Trip With Starter & Without Starter & Max. HP Volts NEMA Setting Circuit Breaker Circuit Breaker Polyphase (A-C) Size Amps Frame Cat. # Cat. # 2 2 3 5 5 5 71/2 71/2 71/2 10 10 10 15 15 15 20 20 20 25 25 25 30 30 30 40 40 40 50 50 50 60 60 75 75 100 100 120 240 240 240 480 600 240 480 600 240 480 600 240 480 600 240 480 600 240 480 600 240 480 600 240 480 600 240 480 600 480 600 480 600 480 600 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 2 4 3 3 4 3 3 4 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 30 15 20 30 15 15 50 20 20 60 30 30 80 40 40 80 60 50 80 70 60 125 80 60 150 80 80 200 100 100 125 100 150 125 175 150 EB EB EB EB EHD FDB EB EHD FDB EB EHD FDB EB EHD FDB EB EHD FDB EB EHD FDB JDB EHD FDB JDB EHD FDB JDB EHD FDB JDB JDB JDB JDB JDB JDB NMC1024B 30EB 6130 NMC1024B 15EB 6230 NMC1024B 20EB 6230 NMC1024B 30EB 6231 NMC1024B 15EHB 6430 NMC1024B 15FB 6530 NMC1024B 50EB 6231 NMC1024B 20EHB 6431 NMC1024B 20FB 6531 NMC1024B2 60EB 6232 NMC1024B 30EHB 6431 NMC1024B 30FB 6531 NMC1024B2 80EB 6232 NMC1024B2 40EHB 6432 NMC1024B 40FB 6531 NMC1426B 80EB 6233 NMC1024B2 60EHB 6432 NMC1024B2 50FB 6532 NMC1426B 80EB 6233 NMC1024B2 70EHB 6432 NMC1024B2 60FB 6532 NMC2426B 125JB 6234 NMC1426B 80EHB 6433 NMC1426B 60FB 6533 NMC2426B 150JB 6234 NMC1426B 80EHB 6433 NMC1426B 80FB 6533 NMC2426B 200JB 6234 NMC1426B 100EHB 6433 NMC1426B 100FB 6533 NMC2426B 125JB 6434 NMC2426B 100JB 6534 NMC2426B 150JB 6434 NMC2426B 125JB 6534 NMC2426B 175JB 6434 NMC2426B 150JB 6534 Motor Starters: Frames 100/150A Symbol 240V 480V TT DT WT TEB FAL EB 600V 225/250A 600V Manufacturer Allen-Bradley General Electric Square D Cutler-Hammer Symbol AB G D W NMC1024B NMC1024B NMC1024B
1C
NMC1024B NMC1024B NMC1024B NMC1024B NMC1024B NMC1024B NMC1024B2 NMC1024B NMC1024B NMC1024B2 NMC1024B2 NMC1024B NMC1426B NMC1024B2 NMC1024B2 NMC1426B NMC1024B2 NMC1024B2 NMC2426B NMC1426B NMC1426B NMC2426B NMC1426B NMC1426B NMC2426B NMC1426B NMC1426B NMC2426B NMC2426B NMC2426B NMC2426B NMC2426B NMC2426B
Circuit Breakers: Manufacturer General Electric Square D Cutler-Hammer
TED TED TFJ FAL FAL KAL EHB, EHD FB, FDB JB, JDB
Information on other starter manufacturers on request.
NOTE ON HUBS: See page 444.

Specify voltage. Formerly "JB"
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
445
1C

Ordering Information - With Motor Circuit Protector

Motor Starter Max. HP Polyphase 3 5 5 71/2 10 10 15 25 25 Volts (AC) 240 480 600 240 480 600 240 480 600 240 480 600 240 480 600 NEMA Size 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 Symbol G W MCP Trip Setting Amps 15 15 15 30 30 30 50 50 50 100 100 100 150 150 150 Enclosure With Starter & MCP Cat. # NMC1024B 15MCP 6230 NMC1024B 15MCP 6430 NMC1024B 15MCP 6530 NMC1024B 30MCP 6231 NMC1024B 30MCP 6431 NMC1024B 30MCP 6531 NMC1024B2 50MCP 6232 NMC1024B2 50MCP 6432 NMC1024B2 50MCP 6532 NMC1426B 100MCP 6233 NMC1426B 100MCP 6433 NMC1426B 100MCP 6533 NMC2426P 150MCP 6234 NMC2426P 150MCP 6434 NMC2426P 150MCP 6534 Motor Starters: Manufacturer Allen-Bradley Square D General Electric Cutler-Hammer Without Starter & MCP Cat. # NMC1024B NMC1024B NMC1024B NMC1024B NMC1024B NMC1024B NMC1024B2 NMC1024B2 NMC1024B2 NMC1426B NMC1426B NMC1426B NMC2426P NMC2426P NMC2426P Symbol AB D G W
1C
30 50 50 50 100 100
Motor Circuit Protectors: Manufacturer General Electric Cutler-Hammer

With motor circuit protector only. For motor circuit protector with current limiter information on request.
Ordering Information - With Non-fusible Disconnect Switch

To order an enclosure complete with disconnect switch, insert the manufacturer's symbol in the designated positions of the catalog number. Symbols are shown in the footnotes. Enclosures only can be ordered. Select from listings below. Non-fusible Disconnect Switch Switch Size-Amps 30 30 30 30 30 30 60 60 60 100 100 100 Switch Type Type QMW Class 9422 Type DS
Motor Starter Max. HP Polyphase 3 5 5 71/2 10 10 15 25 25 30 50 50
Volts (AC) 240 480 600 240 480 600 240 480 600 240 480 600
NEMA Size 0 0 0 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3
Enclosure With Starter & Disconnect Switch Cat. # NMC1024D 30 6230 NMC1024D 30 6430 NMC1024D 30 6530 NMC1024D 30 6231 NMC1024D 30 6431 NMC1024D 30 6531 NMC1426D 60 6232 NMC1426D 60 6432 NMC1426D 60 6532 NMC2426D 100 6233 NMC2426D 100 6433 NMC2426D 100 6533 Motor Starters: Manufacturer Allen-Bradley Square D General Electric Cutler-Hammer
Without Starter & Disconnect Switch Cat. # NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1426D NMC1426D NMC1426D NMC2426D NMC2426D NMC2426D Symbol AB D G W
Disconnect Switches: Manufacturer Symbol General Electric G Square D D Cutler-Hammer W
446
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

1C
Ordering Information - With Fusible Disconnect Switch

Motor Starter Max. HP Volts Polyphase AC 3 5 5 71/2 71/2 10 10 10 10 15 15 25 25 25 25 30 50 50 50 240 480 600 240 240 480 480 600 600 240 240 480 480 600 600 240 480 480 600 NEMA Size 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 Fusible Disconnect Switch Switch SizeFuse Clip Amps Rating-Amps 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 60 60 60 60 60 60 100 100 100 100 Switch Type Type QMW Class 9422 Type DS 30 30 30 30 60 30 60 30 60 60 100 60 100 60 100 100 100 200 100 Symbol G D W Enclosure With Starter & Disconnect Switch Cat. # NMC1024D 3030 6230 NMC1024D 3030 6430 NMC1024D 3030 6530 NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1426D NMC1426D NMC1426D NMC1426D NMC1426D NMC1426D NMC2426D NMC2426D NMC2426D NMC2426D 3030 3060 3030 3060 3030 3060 6060 6010 6060 6010 6060 6010 1010 1010 1020 1010 6231 6231 6431 6431 6531 6531 6232 6232 6432 6432 6532 6532 6233 6433 6433 6533 Without Starter & Disconnect Switch Cat. # NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1024D NMC1426D NMC1426D NMC1426D NMC1426D NMC1426D NMC1426D NMC2426D NMC2426D NMC2426D NMC2426D Symbol AB D G W
1C
Disconnect Switches: Manufacturer General Electric Square D Cutler-Hammer
R fuses, consult Cooper Crouse-Hinds.
NOTE ON HUBS: See page 444. Fuse clips are arranged for Class H fuses and field modifiable for Class J fuses. For Class
Motor Starters: Manufacturer Allen-Bradley Square D General Electric Cutler-Hammer

US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
447
1C
Dimensions
In Inches:
1C
NMC
Cat. # NMC1024 NMC1426 NMC2426
Outside Dimensions l w 2513/32 2713/32 2713/32 1113/32 1513/32 2513/32
d 823/32 923/32 923/32
Mounting Dimensions mw ml 77/8 117/8 213/4 253/8 271/4 271/4
Door Opening Dimensions dl dw 227/8 2311/16 2311/16 511/16 911/16 1911/16
448
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Motor Starters Hazardous and Non-hazardous
2C
Description
Application/Selection Magnetic Line Starters & Enclosures Single speed, non-reversing
EBMS Series EPC Series EBMC Series with Advantage* Starter NMG Series
see see see see
451452 457458 455456 472473
Manual Line Starters & Enclosures

EMN Series NMN Series
see page 460 see page 471 see page 461 see page 467 see page 462 see pages 465466 see page 469 see page 459
2C
Manual Motor Starting Switches & Enclosures

EFD Series MC Series EDS Series GHG 635 Series NSSC / NFSC
Special Feature Kits

For EPC Series
*Advantage is a trademark of Cutler-Hammer Inc.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
449
2C
Motor Starters
Application and Selection Quick Selector Chart
Applications:
Line starters are housed in enclosures suitable for specific environments, and are used for: Across-the-line starting of motors Motor running protection Undervoltage protection Remote or manual starting and stopping
Selection:
Considerations for selection of proper enclosure: The environment of the enclosure location in accordance with NEC/CEC and NEMA/EEMAC requirements The characteristics of the starter to be enclosed See "Quick-Selector" below for guidance
Options:
Many options are available on: Material and finishes where special atmospheric conditions prevail Special features for specific applications. See individual listings for available options, many of which are available in kit form for field addition to existing units.

Enclosures for Starters NEMA/ EEMAC Enclosure Type 3, 4, 12 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG, 12 NEMA/EEMAC Size Starters Single Speed Non-reversing 0-2 Motor Phase and Type Single-AC Poly-AC Manufacturers Equipment Enclosed Starter Cutler-Hammer Allen-Bradley Cutler-Hammer G.E. Square D Allen-Bradley G.E. Square D Cutler-Hammer Allen-Bradley Cutler-Hammer G.E. Square D Allen-Bradley G.E. Cutler-Hammer G.E. Square D
2C
Enclosures MC EPC
NEC/CEC Hazardous Area Compliance None Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G II, Div. 2, Groups F, G III I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G II, Div. 2, Groups F, G III I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G II, Div. 2, Groups F, G III I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G II, Div. 2, Groups F, G III I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G II, Div. 2, Groups F, G III
Starter Type Manual Magnetic
Cover Type Gasketed Threaded
EBMS
3, 4, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12
Magnetic
0-5
Poly-AC
Bolted/ Ground Joint/ Gasketed Bolted/ Ground Joint
EMN
3, 7CD, 9EFG, 12
Manual
0-1P
Single and Poly-AC
EDS, EDSC
3, 7CD, 9EFG, 12
Manual
DC and Single AC
Bolted/ Ground Joint
EFD
3, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12
Manual
DC and Single and Poly-AC DC and Single and Poly-AC 0-1P Single AC
NSSC / NFSC
None
3, 4X, 12
Manual
Allen-Bradley G.E. Square D Cutler-Hammer Allen-Bradley G.E. Square D Allen-Bradley G.E. Square D Cutler-Hammer Westinghouse
Screw and gasket
NMN
None
3, 4X, 12
Manual
Screw and gasket Hinged, screw and gasket
NMG
None
3, 4X, 12
Manual
0-4
Poly-AC
*Check listings for Group B suitability. For factory sealed units see pages 522523.
450
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EBMS Magnetic Line Starters and Enclosures
2C
Applications:
Spectrum EBM hinged cover motor control enclosures are used: For general motor control indoors or outdoors in damp, wet, dirty, dusty hazardous locations, without the need for a protective shelter. In areas where frequent washdowns are necessary or where heavy rain or water spray is prevalent. For across-the-line starting, stopping, speed changing and reversing of polyphase AC induction motors. To provide motor overload and undervoltage protection. On switchracks or other assemblies where it's desired that motor control be centrally located.
Features:
Rugged, corrosion resistant, cast copper-free aluminum construction (less than 0.4 of 1%). Motor starter operating handle located through the right side wall of the body permits visual confirmation of correct component assembly and operation. Total compliance to the wiring end room requirements of the National Electrical Code and Canadian Electrical Code. Semi-clamshell enclosure design, with an external flanged ground joint between body and cover makes interior components more accessible. Minimum enclosure-to-enclosure spacing with little interference between the opened cover and an adjacent enclosure. Copper-free aluminum hinges allow the cover to swing well out of the way. Stainless steel, quick release, captive, hex head cover bolts. Stainless steel springs provide clear indication cover bolts are fully retracted from body. Versatile, internal operating mechanisms allow for field adjustment to accommodate popular manufacturers' starters. Simple, straightforward installation of starter on pre-drilled mounting plate within enclosure. Mounting plate also field removable. Neoprene cover gasket permanently attached to the cover seals out moisture. Bodies have top and bottom drilled and tapped entrances for power conduits plus one at the bottom for control conduit. Removable reducers are supplied as standard, to accommodate smaller size conduits. All conduit entrances are plugged. Tap-on mounting feet. Optional EMPS control devices may be added to enclosure cover. Steel bracket for lifting larger enclosures during installation supplied as standard.
2C
Spectrum EBM motor control enclosures accommodate popular makes of starters.

NEC/CEC Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III UL Standards: UL1203 NEMA: 3, 3R, 4, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
Standard Materials:
Body and cover copper-free aluminum Operating handle copper-free aluminum Operating shaft and bushing stainless steel Interior parts sheet steel, electrogalvanized Cover bolts, washers and retractile springs stainless steel

Motor starters NEMA/EEMAC sizes 05
Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. National Electrical Code is a Registered Trademark of the National Fire Protection Association.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
451
2C
Options:
The following options are available from the factory by adding suffix to catalog number. Suffixes are added alphanumerically. Catalog Number System Example EBMS1FB--W6413- Options in this position are additions to the enclosures and should be listed alphanumerically. Options in this position are modifications to the motor starter and should be listed alphanumerically. Description Position in Cat. # Less Overload Relays (lighting contactor) ......................................................................................................................... Less Overload Relays (motor contactor) ............................................................................................................................. Control Circuit Transformer, 100VA for NEMA/EEMAC sizes 02, 600/480/240120, 50 / 60 Hertz, with provision for fusing both primary leads and one secondary lead (fuses not included) .................................................... Control Circuit Transformer, 200VA for NEMA/EEMAC size 3, 600/480/240120, 50 / 60 Hertz, with provision for fusing both primary leads and one secondary lead (fuses not included) .................................................... Control Circuit Transformer, 300VA for NEMA/EEMAC size 4, 5 600/480/240120, 50 / 60 Hertz, with provision for fusing both primary leads and one secondary lead (fuses not included) .................................................... Pilot Light, 120VAC, Red Jewel, w/blank indicating plate .................................................................................................... Pilot Light, 120VAC, Green Jewel, w/blank indicating plate ................................................................................................. Less Heaters in Starter Overload Relay ............................................................................................................................... Start-Stop Pushbuttons (requires 2 spaces) ....................................................................................................................... On-Off Selector Switch ....................................................................................................................................................... Hand-Off-Auto Selector Switch .......................................................................................................................................... Space Heater, 120 Volt, 25 Watts ........................................................................................................................................ Space Heater, 240 Volt, 25 Watts ........................................................................................................................................ Space Heater, 480 Volt, 25 Watts ........................................................................................................................................ Automatic Reset Overload Relay ........................................................................................................................................ Std. Drain, Class I, B, C&D; Class II, EF&G; Class III ............................................................................................................. Std. Breather & Drain, Class I, B, C&D; Class II, EF&G; Class III ........................................................................................... External Epoxy Finish .......................................................................................................................................................... Internal and External Epoxy Finish ...................................................................................................................................... Additional control contacts, N.O. or N.C. for single speed, non-reversing starters only (number limited by design of starter. Details on specific makes and sizes on request.) Aux. Contacts on starter 1 N.O. & 1 N.C.............................................................................................................................. Aux. Contacts on starter 2 N.O. & 2 C............................................................................................................................... Aux. Contacts on starter 3 N.O. & 3 N.C............................................................................................................................ 12 Point Term. Block 30 Amp, 300V ............................................................................................................................... General Purpose Control Relay, 4 Pole N.O., contacts rated 10A @ 600V, coil 120VAC, 5060 Hz ............................... Suffix CL CM FTPS100 FTPS200 FTPS300 J1 J3 0 PB23 RR2 RR3 R11 R22 R44 S1 S756 S756V S752 S753
2C
S781 S782 S783 S786 S787*
Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. When specifying non-standard markings on any one of the following options with Spectrum EBM Motor Controls (J1, J3, PB23, RR2, RR3) it is necessary to order DSL Legend Plates for identification and marking of the device(s) being used. See page 433 for DSL Legend Plate listings. * Use of this option with NEMA/EEMAC Size 0 or 1 starters necessitates a larger enclosure. Use "B" size enclosures.
Example:
Enclosure Without Starter Cat. # EBMSFA Enclosure for S787 EBMSFB
452
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Single-Speed Non-Reversing 3-Pole 60 hertz, 600 VAC Maximum
2C
To order an enclosure complete with motor starter, insert the manufacturer's symbol in the designated position (see ) of the catalog number. Symbols are shown in the footnotes. Also specify HP, voltage, frequency, RPM, type and full load ampere rating of motor or specify ampere rating of heaters. Enclosures without starters may be ordered. Select from the listings below.
EBMS Series Enclosures for Magnetic Line Starters Single Speed Non-Reversing
Motor Starter Max. HP Polyphase 2 3 3 5 5 71/2 71/2 10 10 15 15 25 25 30 50 50 50 100 100 100 200 200 Volts 120 120 240 480 600 120 240 480 600 120 240 480 600 240 480 600 240 480 600 240 480 600 NEMA Size 0 1 0 0 0 2 1 1 1 3 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 Enclosure Without Starter Cat. # EBMSFA EBMSFA EBMSFA EBMSFA EBMSFA EBMSFB EBMSFA EBMSFA EBMSFA EBMSFH EBMSFB EBMSFB EBMSFB EBMSFH EBMSFH EBMSFH EBMSFH EBMSFH EBMSFH EBMSFL EBMSFL EBMSFL With Starter Cat. # EBMS0FA 613
2C
EBMS1FA 613 EBMS0FA 623 EBMS0FA 643 EBMS0FA 663 EBMS2FB 613 EBMS1FA 623 EBMS1FA 643 EBMS1FA 663 EBMS3FH 613 EBMS2FB 623 EBMS2FB 643 EBMS2FB 663 EBMS3FH 623 EBMS3FH 643 EBMS3FH 663 EBMS4FH 623 EBMS4FH 643 EBMS4FH 663 EBMS5FL 623 EBMS5FL 643 EBMS5FL 663
EBMS Series starter enclosures are available with magnetic line starters. NEMA sizes 05. Motor starters: Manufacturer Allen Bradley Square D General Electric Cutler-Hammer
Symbol AB D G W
Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. Motor starters are furnished with three heaters when heater ratings are fully specified.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
453
2C

2C
Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes.
Single-Speed Non-Reversing Sizes 0, 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 Starters

Enclosure Enclosure Only Size Cat. # Symbol Size 0,1 FVNR Starter EBMSFA A Size 2 FVNR Starter EBMSFB B Size 3,4 FVNR Starter EBMSFD D EBMSFH H Size 5 FVNR Starter EBMSFK K EBMSFL L J** Conduit Entry Trade Size D&T w/RE 2" 2" 3" 3" (2) 3" (2) 4" 1.5" 1.5" 2.5" 2.5" (2) 2.5" (2) 3.5"
A 18.25 25.75 28.25 37.50 43.12 53.25
B 17.25 24.75 27.25 36.50 41.50 51.50
C 19.00 26.50 29.00 38.25 42.25 52.88
D 6.00 6.00 6.00 6.00 12.00 12.00
E 12.63 12.63 12.63 14.25 17.25 17.50
F 14.38 14.38 14.06 16.00 19.88 20.18
G 12.13 12.13 12.13 13.54 11.00 15.00
K 3.25 3.25 3.25 3.25 3.25 4.00
L 3.13 3.13 3.13 3.94 3.00 3.50
M 10.25 10.25 10.25 11.66 10.78 13.03
N 41.50
O 18.00
Use EBMSFB enclosure when S787 option is ordered with size 0 or 1 starter. *1" Drilled & Tapped conduit entry for control conductors supplied with PLG plug (top & bottom) **Conduit entrance for power conductors (top and bottom). (All conduit entrances supplied with RE reducer and PLG plug.) For Cutler-Hammer W200 Advantage starters. Drilled & Tapped. Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators.
454
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Applications:
2C
Spectrum EBM-E series of hinged cover motor control enclosures are used: For general motor control indoors and outdoors in damp, wet, dirty, dusty hazardous locations without the need for a protective shelter. In areas where frequent washdowns are necessary or where heavy rain or water spray is prevalent. For across-the-line starting and stopping of polyphase AC induction motors. To provide motor overload and undervoltage protection. On switchracks or other assemblies where it's desired that motor control be centrally located.
Features:
Total compliance to the wiring end room requirements of the National Electrical Code Solid state electronic Cutler-Hammer Advantage starter. Smaller enclosures required than for conventional starter applications. Elimination of heater elements, contact chatter, and welding due to low voltage supply. Precise overcurrent protection and constant coil power. Same performance and labor-saving benefits from the versatile Spectrum EBM Enclosure product line. Universal mounting plates and hardware for all major manufacturers' components. Mercury switch electronic overload reset. Optional EMPS control devices may be added to enclosure cover.
2C
Spectrum EBM-E Series Combination Line Starter with Advantage Starter shown. Circuit breakers not provided in EBMS series.
Standard Materials:

NEC/CEC Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G, Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III UL Standards: UL1203 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30 NEMA: 3, 3R, 4 , 7BCD, 9EFG, 12
Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. Breather and drain entries must be plugged for NEMA 4 rating.

Motor starters NEMA sizes 15
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
455
2C

Dimensions
In Inches:
Ordering Information Starters

To order an enclosure, determine the electrical requirements of the system and locate the corresponding catalog number from the chart below. Enclosures can be ordered without starters, universal mounting plates with templates will still be provided. EBM "E" Series Enclosures for Cutler-Hammer Advantage Starters Single Speed, Non-Reversing Motor Starter Max. HP Polyphase 7 /2
1
Volts 240 480 600 240 480 600 240 240 480 600 240 480 600 480 600
NEMA Size 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 4 3 3 5 4 4 5 5
Enclosure Without Starter Cat. # EBMSFA E EBMSFA E EBMSFA E EBMSFA E EBMSFA E EBMSFA E EBMSFD E EBMSFD E EBMSFD E EBMSFD E EBMSFK E EBMSFD E EBMSFD E EBMSFK E EBMSFK E
With Starter Cat. # EBMS1FA W6213 E EBMS1FA W6413 E EBMS1FA W6613 E EBMS2FA W6213 E EBMS2FA W6413 E EBMS2FA W6613 E EBMS3FD W6213 E EBMS4FD W6213 E EBMS3FD W6413 E EBMS3FD W6613 E EBMS5FK W6213 E EBMS4FD W6413 E EBMS4FD W6613 E EBMS5FK W6413 E EBMS5FK W6613 E
2C
10 10 15 25 25 30 50 50 50 100 100 100 200 200
EBMCFM-E
EBMCFK-E
Options: (Starter only)

See page 439 for options for the EBM enclosures supplied with Cutler-Hammer Advantage starters. The following suffixes cannot be ordered with this style equipment: 0, S1.
Enclosure Only Cat. # EBMSFA E EBMSFD E EBMSFK E
Dimensions In Inches: A 18.25 28.25 43.12
B 17.25 27.25 41.50
C 19.40 29.40 42.65
D 6.00 6.00 12.00
F 14.78 14.46 20.58
G 12.13 12.13 15.00
**J Conduit Entry Trade Size D&T w/RE 2" 3" (2) 3" 1.5" 2.5" (2) 2.5"
K 3.25 3.25 2.50
L 3.13 3.13 3.00
"H" Use 1/2" diameter bolts for all enclosures listed above. *1" Drilled & Tapped conduit entry for control conductors supplied with PLG plug (top & bottom). **Conduit entrance for power conductors (top & bottom). (All conduit entrances supplied with RE reducer and PLG plug.) Drilled & Tapped. Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. Breather and drain entries must be plugged for NEMA 4 rating. Note: "Enclosures only" are supplied with necessary operators, linkages, and mercury switch electronic overload resets. Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes.
456
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EPC Magnetic Line Starters and Enclosures
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG, 12 Standard Finishes:
2C
Applications:
EPC magnetic line starters and enclosures are used: For across-the-line starting of polyphase AC induction motors In locations made hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors, gases or highly combustible dusts In damp, wet or corrosive locations Indoors or outdoors at petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist To provide motor running protection, undervoltage protection, and remote starting and stopping

Starter Sizes 0 to 1 inclusive
2C
Features:
Quick-opening covers less than two turns to remove or install Three section design for ease of installation Water-shedding construction with female threads on top cover, male threads on bottom cover, and top cover skirted Specially located stops and locks ensure adequate thread engagement and prevent overtightening Separate replaceable mounting bracket attached to the rear of the body provides three-point suspension for quick installation and leveling one keyhole slot at top and two open slots at bottom Bodies have two taper tapped conduit hubs with integral bushings on the top, and two more directly below Universal mounting plate and reset mechanism will accommodate any of the motor starters in catalog listing When interior mounting plate is removed, line and load conductors are easily pulled into the wiring chamber. The interior assembly with starter attached is then replaced, final connections made, and covers assembled Furnished with third overload relay as standard
Options:
The following special options are available from factory by adding suffix to Cat. No. and many are available in kit form for field addition to existing units: See page 459 for listing of kits Description Suffix Control circuit transformer 600/480/240120 volts, 50 or 60 hertz (Sizes 0 and 1 50VA, 100VA) Fusible Secondary ..................................................... FT Primary and secondary ............................................................................................. FTPS Automatic reset overload relay ....................................................................................... S1 Less overload relays (lighting contactor) ........................................................................ CL Less overload relays (motor contactor) .......................................................................... CM Auxiliary Contacts:* 1NO/1NC ................................................................................................................... S781 2NO/2NC ................................................................................................................... S782 3NO/3NC ................................................................................................................... S783 Pilot light holes drilled, tapped and plugged for future addition of pilot lights one hole ..................................................................................................................... S541 two holes ................................................................................................................... S542 Side bosses drilled and tapped same size as standard hubs ....................................... S366 Back boss drilled and tapped same size as standard hubs .......................................... S367 Standard Breather (Cl. I, Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III) .............................. S219 Standard Drain (Cl. I, Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III) ........................................ S198 Standard Breather and Drain (Cl. I, Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III) ................... S198V Universal Breather-Drain (Cl. I, Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups F, G) ................................... S454 (2) Universal-Breather Drains (Cl. I, Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups F, G) ............................S454V Pushbuttons (heavy duty): START-STOP ............................................................................................................. PB3 Selector switches (standard duty): ON-OFF ..................................................................................................................... RR2 HAND-OFF-AUTO...................................................................................................... RR3 Pilot lights: Red, 120 volt .............................................................................................................. J1 Green, 120 volt ........................................................................................................... J3 Pilot light transformers: 240 volt .................................................................................................................... T2 480 volt .................................................................................................................... T4 600 volt .................................................................................................................... T5 Space heaters: 120 volt ...................................................................................................................... R11 240 volt ...................................................................................................................... R22 480 volt ...................................................................................................................... R44
*Application limited by starter or contactor design consult factory. Required for pilot lights on other than 120 volt control circuits. One required for each lamp. Not suitable for NEMA 4.

NEC/CEC Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG, 12 UL Standard: 1203 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
Standard Materials:
Bodies and covers copper-free aluminum Reset handle copper-free aluminum Reset shaft stainless steel Interior parts stainless steel
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
457
2C
To order an enclosure complete with starter, insert the manufacturer's symbol in the designated position of the catalog number. Symbols are shown in the footnote at the bottom of this page. Specify HP, voltage, frequency, RPM, type and full load ampere rating of motor or specify ampere rating of heaters. Enclosures only can be ordered. Select from listings. Motor Starter Enclosure Without With Int. Starter Starter Dia. in. Cat. # Cat. # 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 EPC97 EPC97 EPC97 EPC97 EPC97 EPC97 EPC97 EPC97 EPC970 EPC971 EPC970 EPC970 EPC970 EPC971 EPC971 EPC971 613 613 623 643 653 623 643 653 Motor Starters: Manufacturer Allen-Bradley General Electric Square D Cutler-Hammer Symbol AB G D W
Max. HP NEMA/EEMAC Hub Polyphase Volts Size Size in. 2 3 3 5 5 71/2 10 10 120 120 240 480 600 240 480 600 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4
2C
Dimensions
In Inches*: Single-Speed Non-Reversing Sizes 0, 1, Starters
EPC97 Int. Dia. a b c d e f g h j k l m n p 7" Dimensions 105/ 8 1913/ 16 2513/ 16 1411/ 16 63/ 4 711/ 16 53/ 8 2 4 73/ 8 21/ 16 93/ 8 51/ 4 11/ 4 EPC97-FT EPC97-FTPS 7" Dimensions 105/ 8 2413/ 16 3713/ 16 1411/ 16 113/ 4 711/ 16 53/ 8 9 4 73/ 8 21/ 16 93/ 8 51/ 4 11/ 4
*Dimensions are approximate, not for construction. For units with Control Circuit Transformer (suffix FT or FTPS). Starters are furnished with three heaters when heater ratings are fully specified.
458
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Special Feature Kits
Pushbutton Station and Selector Switch Kits
EPC magnetic line starter and EPC combination line starter enclosures are provided as standard with switch operating shaft holes drilled, tapped and plugged. Pushbutton stations and selector switches can be assembled in these enclosures in the field, using kits listed below. Applies to 7" and 11" EPC Description START-STOP pushbutton station assembly Replacement pushbutton station only for EPC-PB3-KIT ON-OFF selector switch assembly (2 position) Replacement switch only for EPC-RR2-KIT HAND-OFF-AUTO selector switch assembly (3 position) Replacement switch only for EPC-RR3-KIT Cat. # EPC PB3 KIT 16320 N EPC RR2 KIT ESWP126 EPC RR3 KIT ESWP126
2C
Pilot Light Kits

When EPC magnetic line starter and EPC combination line starter enclosures have been ordered with pilot light holes drilled, tapped and plugged (Cat. No. suffix S541 and S542), pilot lights can be assembled in the field, using kits listed below. Description Pilot light assembly less transformer Applies to 7", 11" EPC Cat. # EMP015 KIT EPC87 KIT
Pilot light assemblies with 7" EPC only transformer and transformer mounting strap (for single pilot light) suffix S541 11" EPC only 2 pilot light assemblies with 2 transformers and transformer mounting strap (for double pilot light) suffix S542 7" EPC only
EPC813 KIT EPC87 KIT
2C
11" EPC only Replacement pilot light transformer only (240V primary) Replacement pilot light transformer only (480V primary) Replacement pilot light transformer only (600V primary) All units All units All units
EPC813 KIT 15129 A 15130 A 15131 A
Insert color symbol from table below and add primary voltage symbol Example: EPC87----KIT with red and green pilot lights for 480 volts is EPC-J1-J3-T4-KIT. Color Red Green Amber Voltage 240 480 600 Symbol J1 J3 J6 Symbol T2 T4 T5 Color Clear Blue Symbol J10 J11
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
459
2C
EMN Series Manual Line Starters and Enclosures

600VAC Maximum
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7CD, 9EFG, 12
Applications:
EMN manual line starters and enclosures are used: For manual across-the-line starting of single and polyphase AC motors To provide motor running protection and manual starting and stopping In locations made hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors, gases, or high combustible dusts For installation in petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants, and other process industry facilities In damp, wet, or corrosive locations
Options:
The following special options are available from factory by adding suffix to Cat. #: Description Suffix Standard Breather (Cl. I, Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III) ........ S219 Standard Drain (Cl. I, Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III) ............ S198 Standard Breather and Drain (Cl. I, Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III) ................................................ S198V Universal Breather-Drain (Cl. I, Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups F, G) .... S454 (2) Universal Breather-Drains (Cl. I, Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups F, G) .... S454V
2C
Features:
Compact, rectangular enclosure makes optimum use of internal space Operating handle may be padlocked in either "ON" or "OFF" position Compact design allows installation in area where space is limited Furnished with drilled and tapped conduit openings Polyphase manual starters are furnished with third overload relay as standard
Specify HP, voltage, frequency, number of phases, RPM, type and full load ampere rating of motor or specify ampere rating of heaters. Two pole starters require one heater; three pole starters have three heaters.

NEC/CEC Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 7CD, 9EFG, 12 UL Standard: 1203 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 14
Motor Starter
NEMA Size M-0 M-1 M-1P M-0 M-1 Poles (Phase) 2 2 2 3 3 3 (1PH) (1PH) (1PH) (3PH) (1PH) (3PH) Max. AC HP Ratings 208/ 115V 240V 1 2 3 2 2 3 2 3 5 3 3 71/2 480/ 600V Enclosure With Starter Cat. # EMN24 W20 EMN24 W21 EMN24 W21P 5 10 EMN24 W30 EMN24 W31
Enclosure Without Starter

Starter Manufacturer Cutler-Hammer Enclosure Cat. # EMN24
Standard Materials:
Bodies, covers and toggle operator copper-free aluminum Operating shaft stainless steel Internal operating bail sheet steel or aluminum
Dimensions*
In Inches:
Standard Finishes:

Starter sizes 0, 1, 1P
Enclosures are furnished with two 11/ 4" drilled and tapped openings with 11/4" to 1" reducers. *Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes.
460
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EFD Series Manual Motor Starting Switches and Enclosures
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG, 12
2C
Applications:
EFD manual motor starting and stopping switch enclosures are used: For manual starting of small AC or DC motors In locations made hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors, gases or highly combustible dusts For installation at petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants and in other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist
Features:
Enclosure is small and compact Accurately ground flange on both body and cover for flame-tight joint Switch can be padlocked in either "ON" or "OFF" positions Dead end (EFD) or through feed (EFDC) hubs in 3/4" to 1" size
2C
EFD dead end
EFDC through feed
Electrical Ratings
Without Overload Protection With Switches
Poles Cat. # Switch Ratings Amps 250VAC 30 600VAC 20 HP 115VAC 1 230VAC 2 460575VAC 3 Square D Class 2510 Type KO-1 GE TC2368S

NEC/CEC Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA: 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG, 12 UL Standard: 1203 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
2 3
30A., 240VAC, 7-1 / 2 hp 20A., 600VAC, 15 hp
Dead end
Poles Hub Size in. With Switch Cat. #
3
Through feed
Poles Hub Size in. With Switch Cat. #
3
2 3
/4 1 /4 1
EFD218 T8 EFD318 T8 EFD2419 EFD3419
2 3
/4 1 /4 1
EFDC218 T8 EFDC318 T8 EFDC2419 EFDC3419
Standard Materials:
Bodies and covers Feraloy iron alloy Operating handle type 6 / 6 nylon Operating shaft stainless steel
Dimensions
In Inches:
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Type 6 / 6 nylon natural (black) Stainless steel natural
Options:
The following special options are available from factory by adding suffix to Cat. #: Description Suffix For use in Group B hazardous areas GB*
Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes Hub Size 3 /4 1 Dim. "h" /8 1
7
Dim."a"
13 15
/16 /16
*Add GB suffix. Seals must be installed within 11/2" of each conduit opening for Group B usage.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
461
2C
EDS Series Factory Sealed Manual Motor Starting Switches and Enclosures
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG
Applications:
Factory sealed enclosures are installed in a rigid metallic conduit system for surface mounting adjacent to or remote from equipment being controlled and are used: To prevent arcing of enclosed device from causing ignition of a specific hazardous atmosphere or atmospheres external to the enclosure In industrial areas such as chemical plants, oil and gas refineries, paint and varnish manufacturing plants, gasoline bulk loading terminals, grain elevators, grain processing industries, coal processing or handling areas, or metal handling or finishing areas where atmosphere may contain hazardous gases and/or dust In non-hazardous areas where sturdy, durable enclosures are required In conjunction with magnetic starters or contactors for remote control of motors Manual motor starting switch enclosures are used: For manual starting of small AC or DC motors To provide manual starting and stopping and, in the case of units with heaters, motor running protection
2C
EDSC2199
EDS2299
Standard Materials:
Bodies Feraloy iron alloy (U.S.); copper-free aluminum (Canada) Shafts & bushings stainless steel Sealing enclosures copper-free aluminum
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Copper-free aluminum natural Type 6 / 6 nylon black Stainless steel natural
Dimensions
In Inches: Side View
Options:
Description Suffix For use in Group B hazardous areas GB* Bodies and covers (single and two gang units) copper-free aluminum SA
Features:
Factory sealed devices have many distinct advantages: Reduce installation problems Eliminate external seals Lower installation costs Improve safety Mounting lugs and taper tapped hubs with integral bushings Large machine screws for fastening covers to bodies Lockout hole for padlock having 1/ 4" hasp is provided Close tolerances in machining of wide, mating flanges and journalled shafts and bearings produce flametightness of enclosure joints Dead end (EDS) or through feed (EDSC) hubs 3/4" or 1" sizes
Hub Size 3 /4 1
Dim. "h"
13 15
Dim. "i"
/16 /16
Front View
Single gang Two gang

NEC/CEC Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG UL Standard: 1203 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
*Seals must be installed within 11/2" of each conduit opening in Division 1.
Surface covers have same length and width as single & 2 gang bodies. Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes.
462
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Ordering Information With Allen-Bradley Bulletin 600 Switches
Maximum HP Ratings 115230 Poles Volts AC 1 2 1 hp 1 hp 115230 Votts DC
3
2C
With General Electric Switches

Maximum HP Ratings 115230 115 Poles Volts AC Votts DC 1 2 1 hp 1 hp 1 hp 1 hp 230 Votts DC / 4 hp 1 hp
1
Cat. # A B BUL 600 TOX4 A B BUL 600 TOX5 Through feed Cat. # EDSC2199 EDSC3199 EDSC21100 EDSC31100 EDSC2299 EDSC3299 EDSC22100 EDSC32100
Cat. # GE CR101 Y GE CR101 H
/4 hp
Hub Poles Size in. Single Gang 3 /4 1 1 2 Two Gang 1 2 /4 1

3 3 /4 1 3 /4 1
Dead end Cat. # EDS2199 EDS3199 EDS21100 EDS31100 EDS2299 EDS3299 EDS22100 EDS32100
Hub Size Poles in. Single Gang 3 /4 1 1 2 Two Gang 1 2

3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1
Through feed Cat. # EDSC21093 EDSC31093 EDSC21094 EDSC31094 EDSC22093 EDSC32093 EDSC22094 EDSC32094
2C
Heater Table (Allen-Bradley)

Max. Motor Full-Load Amps 0.17 0.21 0.25 0.32 0.39 0.46 0.57 0.71 0.79 0.87 0.98 1.08 1.19 1.30 1.43 1.58 1.75 1.88 2.13 2.40 2.58 Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 P17 P18 P19 P20 P21 Max. Motor Full-Load Amps 2.92 3.09 3.32 3.77 4.16 4.51 4.93 5.43 6.03 6.83 7.72 8.24 8.9 9.6 10.8 12.0 13.5 15.2 Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number P22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P27 P28 P29 P30 P31 P32 P33 P34 P35 P36 P37 P38 P39
Heater Table (General Electric)

Max. Motor Full-Load Amps .48 .53 .58 .65 .71 .78 .86 .95 1.04 1.14 1.25 1.37 1.49 1.63 1.78 1.95 2.13 2.32 2.53 2.76 Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 Max. Motor Full-Load Amps 3.01 3.27 3.56 3.88 4.22 4.60 5.00 5.43 5.90 6.41 6.98 7.60 8.25 8.95 9.75 10.6 11.4 12.5 13.6 14.8 16.0 Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number G22 G23 G24 G25 G26 G27 G28 G29 G30 G31 G32 G33 G34 G35 G36 G37 G38 G39 G40 G41 G42
Includes one interchangeable heater. Select heater from the table below individual listings and use symbol number as second section of the Cat. No. Example: EDS2199-P5. Insert symbol 0 (zero) to omit heater. These heaters are for motors rated 40C continuously. For motors rated 50C or 55C, multiply full load motor current by 0.9 and use this value to select heaters. Symbol 0 (zero) must be used to indicate heater omitted.
*Add GB suffix. Seals must be installed within 11/ 2" of each conduit opening for Group B usage.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
463
2C
With Cutler-Hammer Switches

Maximum HP Ratings 120240 32 Poles Volts AC Volts DC 1 2 1 hp 1 hp
1 1
120 Volts DC
1
240 Volts DC Cat. #

1 3
/4 hp /4 hp
/4 hp 1 hp
/4 hp /4 hp
WEST MST01 WEST MST02
Poles Hub Size in. Single Gang 3 /4 1 1

3
Through feed Cat. # EDSC21101 EDSC31101 EDSC21102 EDSC31102 EDSC22101 EDSC32101 EDSC22102 EDSC32102
/4 1
Two Gang 3 /4 1 1
3
2C
/4 1
Heater Table (Cutler-Hammer)

Max. Motor Full-Load Amps .43 .48 .53 .58 .64 .71 .78 .87 .95 1.03 1.15 1.27 1.35 1.51 1.67 1.83 1.99 2.23 2.47 2.71 Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W9 W10 W11 W12 W13 W14 W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20 Max. Motor Full-Load Amps 2.95 3.27 3.59 3.99 4.39 4.79 5.26 5.83 6.39 7.03 7.74 8.46 9.35 10.30 11.35 12.47 13.67 15.12 16.00 Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number W21 W22 W23 W24 W25 W26 W27 W28 W29 W30 W31 W32 W33 W34 W35 W36 W37 W38 W39
Includes one interchangeable heater. Select heater from the table below individual listings and use symbol number as second section of the Cat. No. Example: EDS2199-P5. Insert symbol 0 (zero) to omit heater. These heaters are for motors rated 40C continuously. For motors rated 50C or 55C, multiply full load motor current by 0.9 and use this value to select heaters. Symbol 0 (zero) must be used to indicate heater omitted.
*Add GB suffix. Seals must be installed within 11/ 2" of each conduit opening for Group B usage.
464
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
GHG 635 Series Explosion Protected Manual Motor Starters

Applications:
UL/cUL Listed Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Zones 1 and 2, AEx de IIB + H2, T5, T6 Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G (cUL) 25 Amp, 690 VAC Non-metallic Enclosure
CENELEC - PTB 99 ATEX 1162 Certified Ex de IIC, T6, Zones 1 and 2 Ex de IIC, T6 Zones 21 and 22 IP66, NEMA 4X
2C
Explosion protected manual motor starters are used in a metallic conduit or cable system for surface mounting to protect motors against overload and phase failure.
Features:
Explosion protected factory sealed circuit breaker and manual motor starter Innovative break-line in cover allows full wiring access, making installation quick and easy Switch handle provides clear indication of switch position Lockable handle meets OSHA lockout/tagout requirements, provision for 3 padlocks Large rotary handle provides easy gripping with gloved hands Captive cover screws
2C
Technical Data
Type of Protection Rated Voltage Rated Current Rated Current, Aux. Contact Short Circuit Under Voltage Trip Connection Terminals Connection Terminals, Aux. Contact Conduit or Cable Entries Weight (A)Ex ed IIC T5, T6 Up to 690 VAC Up to 25 A 2A See table on next page Tripping at 15% 75% V-rated Switching - on when V> 80% V-rated Up to 10mm2 2 x 2.5 mm2 2 x 3/4" Myers hubs 5.5 Ibs./2.5 Kg.

UL/cUL Listed Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class I, Zones 1 and 2, Ex de IIB+H2, T6 Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G (cUL) CENELEC - PTB 99-ATEX 1162 Ex de IIC, T6, Zones 1 and 2 IP66, NEMA 4X
Standard Materials:
Enclosure - Fiberglass-reinforced polyester Nonmetallic, corrosion resistant Increased safety Ex-e protection Impact Resistant NEMA 4X, IP66 Protection Enclosure meets UL 94-VO UV rated Enclosure Gasket - Silicon Handle - Impact-resistant thermoplastic Cover Screws - Stainless steel Conduit Entries - Zinc Myers Hubs Brass Mounting plate - Ground continuity
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
465
2C
GHG 635 Series Explosion Protected Manual Motor Starters

25 Amp, 690 VAC Non-metallic Enclosure
UL/cUL Listed Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Zones 1 and 2, AEx de IIB + H2, T5, T6 Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G (cUL)
CENELEC - PTB 99 ATEX 1162 Certified Ex de IIC, T6, Zones 1 and 2 Ex de IIC, T6 Zones 21 and 22 IP66, NEMA 4X
Short Circuit Protection

Setting Range 0.1 A 1.6 A 1.6 A 2.5 A 2.5 A 4.0 A 4.0 A 6.3 A 6.3 A 9.0 A 9.0 A 12.5 A 12.5 A 16.0 A 16.0 A 20.0 A 20.0 A 25.0 A 400 VAC AIC N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* N/A* 75 60 55 50 500 VAC AIC N/A* N/A* 60 40 30 27 25 22 20 690 VAC AIC N/A* 40 10 7 5 4.5 4 3.5 3
* Short-circuit proof. No back-up fuse required.
Setting Range or rated current 0.1 0.16 A 0.16 0.25 A 0.25 0.40 A 0.40 0.63 A 0.63 1.0 A 1.0 1.6 A 1.6 2.5 A 2.5 4.0 A 4.0 6.3 A 6.3 9.0 A 9.0 12.5 A 12.5 16 A 16 20 A 20 25 A Cat. # GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG 635 635 635 635 635 635 635 635 635 635 635 635 635 635 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 1101 L0101 L0102 L0103 L0104 L0105 L0106 L0107 L0108 L0109 L0110 L0111 L0112 L0113 L0114
2C
Accessory Options
1 = without aux. contact 2 = with aux. contact 1 NO + 1NC 3 = with aux. contact 2 NO
Catalog numbers on this page are shown without auxiliary contacts. To add aux. contacts, change last number in "1101" to a 2 or 3. Ex. 1102.
Wiring Diagram
Dimensions
In Inches:
466
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
MC Series Manual Motor Starting Switches and Enclosures
NEMA 3, 4, 12 Raintight Wet Locations
2C
Applications:
MC manual motor starting switches and enclosures are used: For manual starting of small AC and DC motors of one horsepower or less (see next page for ratings) In damp, wet or corrosive locations such as dairies, meat packing plants, chemical plants and outdoor locations To provide motor running protection and manual starting and stopping
Features:
Enclosure is compact and gasketed to meet NEMA/EEMAC 4 requirements for watertightness Switch can be padlocked in either the "ON" or "OFF" positions Provided with dead end (MC) or throughfeed (MCC) hubs 1/2" and 3/4" sizes with mounting feet
2C
MC dead end
MCC through feed
Dimensions
In Inches*:

NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 4, 12 UL Standard: 508 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 14
Standard Materials:
Body and cover Feraloy iron alloy Operating handle copper-free aluminum Operating shaft stainless steel
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Copper-free aluminum natural Stainless steel natural
*Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes.
Hub Size a b
1 7
/2
3 7 3
/4 /8 /4
/8 5 /8
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
467
2C
MC Series Manual Motor Starting Switches and Enclosures
NEMA 3, 4, 12 Raintight Wet Locations
MC Manual Motor Starting Switches

Manufacturer Cutler-Hammer Cutler-Hammer Poles 1 2 Cat. # MST01 MST02
Heater Table
Full Load Motor Current .40 .43 .44 .48 .49 .53 .54 .58 .59 .64 .65 .71 .72 .78 .79 .87 .88 .95 .96 1.03 1.04 1.15 1.16 1.27 1.28 1.35 1.36 1.51 1.52 1.67 1.68 1.83 1.84 1.99 2.00 2.23 2.24 2.47 2.48 2.71 2.72 2.95 2.96 3.27 3.28 3.59 3.60 3.99 4.00 4.39 4.40 4.79 4.80 5.26 5.27 5.83 5.84 6.39 6.40 7.03 7.04 7.74 7.75 8.46 8.47 9.35 9.36 10.30 10.31 11.35 11.36 12.47 12.48 13.67 13.68 15.12 15.13 16.00 Heater Rating .50 .55 .61 .67 .74 .81 .89 .98 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.45 1.60 1.70 1.90 2.10 2.30 2.50 2.80 3.10 3.40 3.70 4.10 4.50 5.00 5.50 6.00 6.60 7.30 8.00 8.80 9.70 10.60 11.70 12.90 14.20 15.60 17.10 18.60 Cooper Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W9 W10 W11 W12 W13 W14 W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20 W21 W22 W23 W24 W25 W26 W27 W28 W29 W30 W31 W32 W33 W34 W35 W36 W37 W38 W39
Maximum Horsepower Ratings

Volts 120 / 240 AC 32 DC 120 / 240 DC 240 DC 1-Pole 1 1 /4
1
2-Pole 1 1 /4 1
/4
Ordering Information - MC
2C Single Gang (Dead End)
Enclosure With Switch Cat. # MC1211 MC2211 MC1212 MC2212 Without Switch Cat. # MC1212B MC2212B MC1212B MC2212B
Poles 1 1 2 2
Hub Size in. /2 /4 1 /2 3 /4

1 3
Ordering Information - MCC

Single Gang (Through Feed)
Enclosure With Switch Cat. # MCC1211 MCC2211 MCC1212 MCC2212 Without Switch Cat. # MCC1212B MCC2212B MCC1212B MCC2212B
Poles 1 1 2 2
Hub Size in. /2 /4 1 /2 3 /4

1 3
Includes one interchangeable heater. Select heater from table above and use symbol number as second section of the Cat. No. Example: MC1211-W5. Symbol 0 (zero) may be used to indicate heater omitted. These heaters are for motors rated 40C continuously. For motors rated 50C or 55C, multiply full load motor current by 0.9 and use this value to select heaters. 468
NSSC Series Manual Motor Starting Switches and NFS Series Fractional HP Starters and Enclosures
Applications:
Motor Starting Switches are used in manual "ON" and "OFF" control of DC and single-phase or three-phase AC motors where overload protection is not required or is provided separately NFSC Fractional Horsepower Starters are used in manual "ON" and "OFF" control and overload protection of small single phase motors Both are suitable for use in wet and/or corrosive environments
2C
Features:
Enclosures are made of Cooper CrouseHinds high-impact strength Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester material which has excellent corrosion resistance and stability to heat Provided with a toggle lever with a molded-in stainless steel shaft Factory installed through feed (NSSC, NFSC) hubs, 1/2" or 3/4" size Indicating plate is made of stainless steel
2C
Ordering Information NSSC Series Manual Motor Starting Switch Without Overload Protection
With Square D Switches
Poles 2 3 Max. HP Rating 115 VAC 200230 VAC 460575 VAC 1 2 2 71/2 3 10 Max. Amp. Ratings 250 VDC 600 VDC 30 30 20 20

NEMA 3, 4X, and 12
Poles
Enclosure With Switch Hub Through Size Feed Cat. #

1 3 1
Options:
Grounding plate or bushing see page 646
2 3
/2 /4 /2 /4
NSSC D12 NSSC D22 NSSC D13 NSSC D23 Hub Size
1 3
Enclosures Only
Enclosure Type Manual Motor Starting Switch Fractional HP Starter Through Feed Cat. # NSSC1 NSSC2 NFSC1 NFSC2
/2 /4 /2 /4
1 3
Dimensions*
In Inches:
*Dimensions are approximate. Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved. www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds
469
2C
NSSC Series Manual Motor Starting Switches and NFS Series Fractional HP Starters and Enclosures
Ordering Information NFSC Series Fractional HP Starters With Overload Protection

With Allen-Bradley Bulletin 600 Switches
Maximum HP Ratings 115230 Poles Volts AC 1 1 hp 2 1 hp 115230 Volts DC
3

Maximum HP Ratings 115230 Poles VAC 1 1 hp 2 1 hp 32 VDC
1 1
115 VDC 1 hp 1 hp
230 VDC
1
/4 hp
/4 hp /4 hp
/4 hp 1 hp
Poles
Enclosure With Starter Hub Through Size Feed Cat. # /2 3 /4

1 1 3
Poles 1 2
Enclosure With Starter Hub Through Size Feed Cat. #

1 3 1 3
1 2
NFSC AB11 NFSC AB21 NFSC AB12 NFSC AB22
/2 /4
NFSC G11 NFSC G21 NFSC G12 NFSC G22
2C
/2 /4 Heater Table (see page 463)
/2 /4 Heater Table (see page 463)

Maximum HP Ratings 115230 Poles Volts AC 1 1 hp 2 1 hp 115230 Volts DC 1 hp
With Square D Switches

Maximum HP Ratings 115230 Poles Volts AC 1 1 hp 2 1 hp 115230 Volts DC
3
/4 hp
Poles 1 2

1 3 1 3
Poles 1 2

1 3 1 3
/2 /4 /2 /4
NFSC C11 NFSC C21 NFSC C12 NFSC C22
/2 /4 /2 /4
NFSC D11 NFSC D21 NFSC D12 NFSC D22 Cooper Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number A3.95 A4.32 A4.79 A5.30 A5.78 A6.20 A6.99 A7.65 A8.38 A9.25 A9.85 A11.0 A11.9 A13.2 A14.1 A14.8 A16.2 A17.9 A19.8 A21.3 A25.2
Heater Table (Cutler-Hammer)

Max. Motor Full-Load Amps .43 .48 .53 .58 .64 .71 .78 .87 .95 1.03 1.15 1.27 1.35 1.51 1.67 1.83 1.99 2.23 2.47 2.71 Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W9 W10 W11 W12 W13 W14 W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20 Max. Motor Full-Load Amps 2.95 3.27 3.59 3.99 4.39 4.79 5.26 5.83 6.39 7.03 7.74 8.46 9.35 10.30 11.35 12.47 13.67 15.12 16.00 Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number W21 W22 W23 W24 W25 W26 W27 W28 W29 W30 W31 W32 W33 W34 W35 W36 W37 W38 W39
Heater Table (Square D)

Full-Load Motor Current 0.410.44 0.450.49 0.500.53 0.540.58 0.590.65 0.660.71 0.720.78 0.790.85 0.860.96 0.971.04 1.051.16 1.171.29 1.301.37 1.381.47 1.481.56 1.571.65 1.661.79 1.801.95 1.962.15 2.162.38 2.392.75 2.762.84 Cooper Crouse-Hinds Symbol Number A.49 A.54 A.59 A.65 A.71 A.78 A.86 A.95 A1.02 A1.16 A1.25 A1.39 A1.54 A1.63 A1.75 A1.86 A1.99 A2.15 A2.31 A2.57 A2.81 A3.61 Full-Load Motor Current 2.853.06 3.073.45 3.463.70 3.714.07 4.084.32 4.334.90 4.915.35 5.365.85 5.866.41 6.426.79 6.807.57 7.588.15 8.168.98 8.999.67 9.689.95 9.9610.8 10.912.1 12.213.1 13.213.9 14.015.0 15.116.0
Includes one interchangeable heater. Select heater suffix from table and add to catalog number. Example: NFSC-D11A.49
470
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
NMN Series Manual Line Starters and Enclosures

600VAC Heavy Duty
Applications:
NMN manual line starters are for use in across-the-line starting of motors, motor protection and manual starting and stopping.
2C

Starter sizes 0, 1, 1P
Options:
Description Suffix Undervoltage protection. Available with toggle operator only ................................................ U Grounding plate see page 646. Insulated, groundable type terminal block for grounded or ungrounded neutral can be supplied ......................................... S618
Features:
Enclosures are made of Cooper CrouseHinds high-impact strength Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester material which has excellent corrosion resistance and stability to heat. Factory installed dead end (NMN) or through feed (NMNC) hubs, 3/4" and 1" sizes.
2C

NEMA/EEMAC 3, 4X and 12 Toggle-operated manual starter with knockout
Starter Enclosure with Starter 3 /4" Hubs Poles 2 2 2 3 3 3 (1 (1 (1 (3 (1 (3 PH) PH) PH) PH) PH) PH) Max. HP 115V 230V 1 2 3 2 2 3 2 3 5 3 3 71/2 460/575V Dead End Cat # NMN NMN NMN NMN 220 221 221P 230 Through Feed Cat # NMNC NMNC NMNC NMNC 220 221 221P 230 Dead End Cat # NMN NMN NMN NMN 320 321 321P 330 1" Hubs Through Feed Cat # NMNC NMNC NMNC NMNC 320 321 321P 330
NEMA
Size M-0 M-1 M-1P M-0 M-1
5 10
NMN 231
NMNC 231
NMN 331 NMN 300
NMNC 300 NMNC 300
Enclosure Only* NMN 200 NMNC 200 Motor Starters: Insert appropriate symbol in Cat. No. Manufacturer Symbol Allen-Bradley AB General Electric G Square D D
Dimensions
In Inches:
NMN
*Furnished with mounting plate and operator installed.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
471
2C
NMG Series Magnetic Line Starters and Enclosures

600VAC Heavy Duty
Applications:
NMG magnetic line starters are used: For magnetic across-the-line starting of motors and remote starting and stopping For across-the-line starting of polyphase AC induction motors To provide motor running protection, undervoltage protection and remote starting and stopping
Features:
Enclosures are made of Cooper CrouseHinds high-impact strength Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester material which has excellent corrosion resistance and stability to heat. Unitized, strong and durable enclosure construction provides longer service life for equipment. Exterior parts of RESET button made of Krydon material.
2C
Magnetic line starter with optional hinged cover with START-STOP pushbuttons.
Options:
Description Hinged cover..................................... Pilot lights, 120 V primary specify other primary voltages as required: Red pilot light............................... Green pilot light............................ LED pilot lights in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps................. Pushbutton (heavy duty, uses two device holes): START-STOP.............................. Selector switches (heavy duty): ON-OFF........................................ HAND-OFF-AUTO........................ JOG-RUN-OFF............................. Padlock attachment for: Pushbutton.................................. Control circuit transformer 480 / 240-120 volts, 50 or 60 hertz, (sizes 0 and 150VA, size 2100VA, size 3150VA, size 4300VA): Fusible Secondary................................... Primary and Secondary............... Automatic reset overload relay.......... Less overload relays (contactor)........ Auxiliary Contact on Starter or Contactor: 1NO/1NC..................................... 2NO/2NC..................................... 3NO/3NC..................................... Suffix NH J1* J3* LED PB13* RR17* RR18* RR19* S708

NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 4X and 12

Starter sizes 0, 1, 2, 3, 4
Description Suffix Time delay low voltage release for 3-wire control with 2, 4 or 6-second adjustment. For single-speed, nonreversing starters only. Control circuit voltage: 120 volt, 60 hertz............................ LVR1 240 volt, 60 hertz............................ LVR2 480 volt, 60 hertz............................ LVR3 Hubs (see "Note on Hubs") see page 646 Grounding plate or bushing see page 646 Insulated, groundable type terminal block for a grounded or ungrounded neutral can be supplied..................... S618 Information on other options or combination of options for a specific enclosure size is available on request.
FT FTPS S1 C S781 S782 S783
Type GP grounding plate only in NMG0710 enclosure. *For optional devices or control circuit transformer, use next larger enclosure size. For NMG0714, two device holes maximum.
472
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
NMG Series Magnetic Line Starters and Enclosures

600VAC Heavy Duty
To order an enclosure complete with starter, insert the manufacturers symbol in the designated position of the catalog number. Symbols are shown in the footnote at the bottom of this page. Specify HP, voltage, frequency, RPM, type and full load ampere rating of motor or specify ampere rating of heaters. Starters are furnished with three heaters. Enclosures only can be ordered. Select from listings. Single-Speed, Non-Reversing Motor Starter Enclosure Max. HP Volts NEMA With Polyphase (AC) Size Starter Cat. # 2 3 3 5 5 71/2 71/2 10 10 15 15 25 25 30 50 50 50 100 100 120 120 240 480 600 120 240 480 600 120 240 480 600 240 240 480 600 480 600 0 1 0 0 0 2 1 1 1 3 2 2 2 3 4 3 3 4 4 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG0714 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG1018 NMG0714 NMG0714 NMG0714 NMG1018 NMG1024 NMG1018 NMG1018 NMG1024 NMG1024 6130 6131 6230 6430 6530 6132 6231 6431 6531 6133 6232 6432 6532 6233 6234* 6433 6533 6434* 6534*
Corrosion-Resistant Dust-tight Watertight Weatherproof NEMA 3, 4X, 12 Dimensions

In Inches:
2C
Without Starter Cat. # NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG0714 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG0710 NMG1018 NMG0714 NMG0714 NMG0714 NMG1018 NMG1024 NMG1018 NMG1018 NMG1024 NMG1024 NMG0710 & 0714
2C
*NEMA Size 4 Allen-Bradley starter must be in NMG1426 enclosure.
NMG1018 & 1024 Mounting Dimensions ml mw 93/8 133/8 193/8 253/8 63/8 63/8 77/8 77/8
Motor Starters: Manufacturer Allen-Bradley Square D Cutler-Hammer General Electric Westinghouse
Symbol AB D C G W Enclosure Cat. # NMG0710 NMG0714 NMG1018 NMG1024 Outside Dimensions l w d 101/2 141/2 1913/32 2513/32 71/2 71/2 1113/32 1113/32 7 7 823/32 823/32
Ordering Information when adding options

When adding options to NMG series enclosures, the base catalog number must be changed according to the table below. NEMA Enclosure Enclosure Size Cat. # w/Options 0, 1 NMG0710 NMG0714 2 NMG0714 NMG1018 3 NMG1018 NMG1024 4 NMG1024 NMG1426 Example: A NEMA size 4, 480 V Westinghouse starter with STARTSTOP pushbuttons would be Cat. No. NMG1426-W6434-PB13.
Note on Hubs: The following number and sizes of hubs (not mounted) are included when magnetic starters are ordered complete. If enclosures only are ordered, hubs must be ordered separately (see "Options").
Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.
Starter Size 0 1 2 3 4
Number Included Hub Size 3 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2

3 3
/4
/4 1 /4 11/2 /4 2 /4 21/2
473
2C
474
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Circuit Breakers Hazardous
3C
Description
Application/Selection Auxiliary Circuit Breakers & Enclosures
EFD, EFDC Series
Page No. see page 476 see page 493
Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers & Enclosures General Information and Dimensions
EPC Series FLB Series EBMB Series
see pages 482483 see page 487 see pages 478481
Non-Interchangeable Trip 100 / 150 ampere frame

EPC Series FLB Series EBMB Series EIB Series NCB Series
3C
see see see see see see see see see
page page page page page page page page page
484 488 480 477 494 486 492 480 495
225 / 250 ampere frame

EPC Series FLB Series EBMB Series NCB Series
400 ampere frame

EBMB Series
see page 480
Interchangeable Trip 225 / 250 ampere frame

FLB Series EBMB Series
400 ampere frame

EBMB Series NCB Series
600 / 800 ampere frame

EBMB Series
1000 ampere frame

EBMB Series
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
475
3C
Circuit Breakers
Applications:
Circuit breakers and their appropriate enclosures are used: In conjunction with service entrance, lighting, heating, appliance and motor protection circuits To provide disconnect means For short circuit protection and thermal time delay overload protection In various types of damp, wet, corrosive and hazardous areas

Considerations for selection of proper enclosure: The environment of the enclosure location in terms of NEC/CEC compliance and NEMA/EEMAC type required The size and type of circuit breaker required for the particular application See "Quick Selector" below for guidance
Options:
Many options are available on: Material and finishes where special atmospheric conditions prevail Special features for specific applications. See individual listings for available options

3C
Enclosures for Circuit Breakers Circuit Breaker NEC/CEC Hazardous Area Certifications and Compliances Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div, 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. I, Zones 1 & 2 Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. III N/A NEMA/ EEMAC Encl. Type 3, 7BCD, 9EFG Ampere Rating Range 1530 Interchangeable Trip No Enclosure Cover Construction Bolted/ Ground Joint
Encl. EFD, EFDC
Type ThermalMagnetic
Voltage Range 120AC
Manufacturer and Frame Size Sq. D QOU
No. of Poles 1
EBMB
3R, 4, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12
ThermalMagnetic
15800
120AC to 600AC 125DC to 250DC
G.E. TEB, TED, TFJ, TFK, TJJ, TJK, TKMA Sq. D FAL, KAL, LAL, MAL Cut.-Ham. EHD, FD, FDB, JD, JDB, KD, KDB, G.E. TEB, TED, TFJ Sq. D FAL, KAL Cut.-Ham. EHD, FD, FDB, JD, JDB
1, 2, 3
Yes
Bolted/ Ground Joint/ Gasketed
EPC
3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG
ThermalMagnetic
15250
1, 2, 3
Yes
Threaded
FLB
3, 7CD, 9EFG
ThermalMagnetic
15225
G.E. TEB, TED, TFJ, TFK Sq. D FAL, KAL Cut.-Ham. EHD, FD, FDB, JD, JDB
1, 2, 3
Yes
Threaded
EIB
3, 3R, 4, 7BCD, 9EFG
Magnetic
15100
480AC to 600AC
Cut. Ham. EG
No
NCB
3, 4X, 12
ThermalMagnetic
15-400
240AC to 600VAC 250DC
G.E. TEB, TED, TFJ Sq. D FAL, KAL, LAL Cut.-Ham. EB, EHB, EHD, FD, FDB, JD, JDB
2, 3
Yes
Hinged, screw and gasket
476
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EIB Series
Compact Circuit Breaker Assemblies With Covers
The EIB Series Compact Circuit Breaker Assemblies are an innovative line of explosionproof motor control now being offered by Cooper Crouse-Hinds. The EIB series utilizes the EJB style D enclosure with its bolted construction, NEMA 4 environmental protection and Class I, Division 1, Group B, C and D hazardous area ratings. The EIB series is a costeffective solution for circuit breaker protection and utilizes the Cutler-Hammer Type EG circuit breakers. Circuit breaker protection is available from 15 to 100 amps.
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. I, Zones 1 & 2 Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 7BCD, 9EFG UL Standard: 1203 cUL to CSA C22.2 No. 30 Options:
Description Suffix Insulated Neutral Lug ....................... S146 Grounded Neutral Lug Kit with Connectors for 50, 100 & 225 Amps ................................................ S178 External Ground Stud ...................... S214 Breather and Drain .......................... S756V Epoxy Powder Coat Finish (exterior only) ................................... S752 Epoxy Powder Coat Finish (exterior and interior) ........................ S753
3C
Electrical Ratings:
480 volts, 600 volts 3 poles 10,000 AIC max.
Features:
Small compact footprint requires less mounting space and reduces enclosure cost Rotary handle operator mounted on cover assembly provides clear indication of on, off and trip positions No internal fork operator, eliminating potential damage to breaker toggle Trip position easily identified from a distance Neoprene cover gasket provides UL Type 4 (hosetight) environmental rating Detachable mounting feet offer flexible mounting alternatives - no need to replace the entire enclosure if a mounting foot is broken Stainless steel hinges provide extreme durability and easy access to inside of enclosure for wiring and maintenance (2) 11/2" NPT conduit entries, one on top and one on bottom for easy top or bottom feed of conductors. For field addition of breather and/or drain; holes come plugged
Weights:
EIBA EIBB 39 lbs. 58 lbs.
3C
Circuit Breaker Rating (amps) 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60 70 80 90 100 Enclosure Enclosure with Only Circuit Breaker EIBA EIBA EIBA EIBA EIBA EIBB EIBB EIBB EIBB EIBB EIBB EIBB EIBB EIBA3015 EIBA3020 EIBA3025 EIBA3030 EIBA3035 EIBB3040 EIBB3045 EIBB3050 EIBB3060 EIBB3070 EIBB3080 EIBB3090 EIBB3100
Dimensions
In Inches:

Class I, Divisions 1 & 2, Groups B, C & D Class I, Zones 1 & 2 Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F and G Class III Enclosure type 3, 3R, 4, 7BCD, 9EFG NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 7BCD, 9EFG UL Standard 886 cUL to CSA C22.2 No. 30
Standard Materials:
Body and Cover Copper-free aluminum Gasket Neoprene Cover Bolts Steel Hinges Stainless Steel Mounting Plate Sheet Aluminum Dimension aa bb xx yy zz Mounting Holes Size A 10.47" 12.47" 11.13" 5.0" 9.6" 7 /16" Size B 12.53" 16.53" 15.13" 7.0" 11.66" 7 /16"
Finishes:
Copper-free Aluminum Natural Steel Electrogalvanized
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
477
3C
EBMB Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures
Applications:
Spectrum EBM hinged cover motor control enclosures are used: For general motor control and circuit protection indoors and outdoors in damp, wet, dirty, dusty hazardous locations without the need for a protective shelter. In areas where frequent washdowns are necessary or where heavy rain or water spray is prevalent. To provide line disconnect means and short circuit protection. For service entrance, feeder or branch circuit protection for lighting, heating, appliance and motor circuits. On switchracks or other assemblies where its desired that motor control be centrally located.
Features:
Rugged, corrosion resistant, cast copper-free aluminum construction (less than 0.4 of 1%). Circuit breaker operating handle located through the right side wall of the body permits visual confirmation of correct component assembly and operation. Total compliance to the wiring end room requirements of the National Electrical Code. Semi-clamshell enclosure design, with an external flanged ground joint between body and cover makes interior components more accessible. Minimum enclosure-to-enclosure spacing with little interference between the opened cover and an adjacent enclosure. Copper-free aluminum hinges allow the cover to swing well out of the way. Stainless steel, quick release, captive, hex head cover bolts. Stainless steel springs provide clear indication cover bolts are fully retracted from body. Versatile, internal operating mechanisms allow for field adjustment to accommodate popular manufacturers' breakers. Simple, straightforward installation of breaker on pre-drilled mounting plate within enclosure. Mounting plate also field removable. Circuit breaker external operating handle can be padlocked in either "ON" or "OFF" positions. Neoprene cover gasket permanently attached to the cover seals out moisture. Bodies have top and bottom drilled and tapped entrances for power conduits and control conduits. Removable reducers are supplied, as standard, to accommodate smaller size conduits. All conduit entrances are plugged. Tap-on mounting feet. Optional EMPS control devices may be added to enclosure cover. Steel bracket for lifting larger enclosures during installation supplied as standard.
3C
Spectrum EBM motor control enclosures accommodate popular makes of circuit breakers.

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III UL Standards UL1203 Hazardous (classified) locations/CSA Standards: C22.2 No. 30 UL Subject 2062 - High AIC rating (Interrupting Capacity) For Groups C & D only 240V 65,000 RMS Symm. Amperes 480V 50,000 RMS Symm. Amperes 600V 25,000 RMS Symm. Amperes NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12
Standard Materials:

Circuit breakers 100, 150, 225, 250, 400, 600, 800, 1000* ampere frame sizes
Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. *1000 Ampere Frame (max. 800 ampere trip) National Electrical Code is a Registered Trademark of The National Fire Protection Association.
478
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
3C
Options:
The following options are available from factory by adding suffix to catalog number. Suffixes are added alphanumerically. Catalog Number System EBMBB--WT30FDB36- Options in this position are additions to the enclosure and should be listed alphanumerically. Options in this position are modifications to the circuit breaker and should be listed alphanumerically. Description Position in Cat. # Suffix AC J1 J3 LED PB23 R11 R22 R44 S146 S178 S756 S756V S752 S753 S784 S785 S786
Ambient compensated circuit breaker trip setting...................................................................... Pilot light, 120VAC, red jewel, w/blank indicating plate......................................................................... Pilot light, 120VAC, green jewel, w/blank indicating plate......................................................... LED pilot lights in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps................................................................ Start-stop pushbuttons (requires 2 spaces).............. Space heater, 120 volt, 25 watts............................... Space heater, 240 volt, 25 watts............................... Space heater, 480 volt, 25 watts............................... Insulated neutral w/2 connectors.............................. Grounded neutral stud w/3 connectors (50, 100, 225 amp)................................................... Std. drain, Class I, B, C & D; Class II, E F & G, Class III..................................................................... Std. breather & drain, Class I, B, C & D; Class II, E, F & G; Class III..................................................... External epoxy finish................................................. Internal and external epoxy finish.............................. Aux. switch on circuit breaker, 1A & 1B contacts................................................................... Aux. switch on circuit breaker, 2A & 2B contacts................................................................... 12 point term. block 30 amp, 300 V..................... General purpose control relay, 4 pole N.O., contacts rated 10A @ 600V, coil 120VAC, 5060 Hertz.........................................................................
3C
EBMB Series circuit breaker enclosures are available with breakers from 100 to 1000* amp frame sizes.
S787
*1000 Ampere Frame (max. 800 ampere trip.) If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. To select from the list of standard markings and DSL Legend Plate listings see page 433. Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
479
3C
To order an enclosure complete with circuit breaker, insert the manufacturer's symbols in the designated positions of the catalog number. Symbols are shown below. Enclosures can be ordered without circuit breakers. Select from listings below.
EBMB Series Enclosures for Circuit Breakers

Circuit Breaker
Poles 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Voltage Rating 240VAC 240VAC 480VAC 480VAC 600VAC 600VAC 240VAC 240VAC 480VAC 480VAC 600VAC 600VAC 600VAC 600VAC 600VAC 600VAC 600VAC or or or or or or or or 125250VDC 125250VDC 250VDC 250VDC 125250VDC 125250VDC 250VDC 250VDC Circuit Breaker Frame Size 100 Amp. Frame 150 Amp. Frame 100 Amp. Frame 150 Amp. Frame 100 Amp. Frame 150 Amp. Frame 100 Amp. Frame 150 Amp. Frame 100 Amp. Frame 150 Amp. Frame 100 Amp. Frame 150 Amp. Frame 250 Amp. Frame 400 Amp. Frame 600 Amp. Frame 800 Amp. Frame 1000 Amp. Frame
Enclosures
Without Circuit Breaker Cat. # EBMBA EBMBA EBMBA EBMBA EBMBA EBMBA EBMBB EBMBB EBMBB EBMBB EBMBB EBMBB EBMBG EBMBK EBMBL EBMBL EBMBL * * * * * * Circuit Breaker Amp Rating 15A through 70A 10A through 70A 15A through 70A 10A through 70A 15A through 70A 10A through 70A 15A through 100A 10A through 150A 15A through 100A 10A through 150A 15A through 100A 15A through 150A 70A through 250A 100A through 400A 250A through 600A 300A through 800A 125A through 800A (max.) With Circuit Breaker Cat. # EBMBA DTFAL32 EBMBA TTTEB32 EBMBA 34 EBMBA TTTED34 EBMBA DTFAL36 EBMBA 36 EBMBB DTFAL32 EBMBB TTTEB32 EBMBB 34 EBMBB TTTED34 EBMBB DTFAL36 EBMBB 36 EBMBG 36 EBMBK 36 EBMBL WT36 EBMBL WT36 EBMBL DT36
3C
or or or or
250VDC 250VDC 250VDC 250VDC Symbol WT TT DT
Circuit Breakers: Manufacturer Cutler-Hammer General Electric Square D
Select Trip Setting from below:

100 Amp Frame (EHD, FAL)* 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 150 Amp. Frame (TDB, TEB, TED) 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150 225 / 250 Amp Frame (JD, JDB, KAL, TFJ, TFK) 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250 400 Amp. Frame (KD, KDB, LAL, TJJ, TJK) 100, 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400 600 Amp. Frame (LD, TJK) 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600 800 Amp Frame (MD, TKMA) 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800 1000 Amp Frame (MAL) 125, 150, 175, 200, 225, 250, 300, 350, 400, 450, 500, 600, 700, 800
Select Circuit Breaker Frame Type based on frame size, voltage, and manufacturer desired: 100 Amp. Frame 240VAC 480VAC TEB FAL EHD FAL 250 Amp. 400 Amp. 600 Amp. 800 Amp. 1000 Amp. 150 Amp. Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame 600VAC 240VAC 480VAC 600VAC 600VAC 600VAC 600VAC 600VAC 600VAC FAL TED FDB TED JD JDB TFK TFJ KAL KD KDB TJK TJJ LAL LD TJK MD TKMA MAL
Manufacturer Cutler-Hammer General Electric Square D
Interchangeable Trip Unit Non-Interchangeable Trip Unit Depending on availability from the circuit breaker manufacturer 1 and 2 pole can be furnished. Information available upon request.
Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. Example of an adjusted part number - EBMBB WT100EDH34 becomes EBMBB WT100EDH24. * EBMBA will accept 15 through 70 amp. trip, EBMBB will accept 15 through 100 amp. trip. EBMBA will accept 10 through 70 amp. trip, EBMBB will accept 10 through 150 amp. trip. General Electric TEB frame available 10 through 100 amp. trip. TED frame available 10 through 150 amp. trip. Westinghouse FDB frame available 15 through 150 amp. trip. General Electric TFJ and TFK types are 225 amp. frame, available 70 though 225 amp. trip. Westinghouse JD and JDB types are 250 amp. frame, available 70, 90, 100 and 125 through 250 amp. trip. Westinghouse KD and KDB frames available 100 through 400 amp. trip. Square D LAL and General Electric TJJ and TJK frames available 125 through 400 amp. trip. Westinghouse LD frame available 300 through 400 and 500, 600 amp. trip. Westinghouse MD frame available 400 and 500 through 800 amp. trip.
480
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
3C
Dimensions
In Inches:
3C

* 1" Drilled & Tapped (D & T) conduit entry for control conductors supplied with PLG plug top and bottom. ** Conduit entrance(s) for power conductors (top and bottom). (All conduit entrance(s) supplied with RE reducer and PLG plug.) *** Use 1/2" diameter bolts for mounting all enclosures. (see H) Note: Lifting bracket will accommodate a maximum 2 ton hook.
Enclosure Enclosure Only Size Cat. # Symbol 100 Amp Frame EBMBA A
Dimensions A B 18.25 17.25 24.75 36.50 41.50
C 19.40 26.90 39.28 42.65 53.28
D 6.00 6.00 6.00 12.00 12.00
E 13.03 13.03 13.03 17.65 17.90
F 14.78 14.78 14.78 20.28 20.58
G 10.25 10.25 10.25 10.92 13.03
J** Conduit Entry Trade Size D&T w/RE 2" 2" 3.0" (2)3" (2)4" 1.5" 1.5" 2.5" (2)2.5" (2)3.5"
Dimensions K L M 3.25 3.13 10.25 3.25 3.13 10.25 3.25 3.13 10.25 3.25 3.00 10.92 4.00 3.50 13.13
N 41.50
O 18.40
P 14.50 22.00 34.06 29.23 29.88
100 and 150 Amp Frame EBMBB B 25.75 225 and 250 Amp Frame EBMBG G 37.50 400 Amp Frame EBMBK K 43.12
600, 800 and 1000 Amp Frame EBMBL L 53.25 51.50
1000 Ampere Frame (max. 800 ampere trip) Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. Breather and drain entries must be plugged for NEMA 4 rating. Drilled & Tapped.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
481
3C
EPC Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG
Applications:
EPC Circuit Breakers and Enclosures are used: For service entrance*, feeder or branch circuit protection for lighting, heating, appliance and motor circuits In areas made hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors, gases or combustible dusts In damp, wet or corrosive locations Indoors or outdoors at petroleum refineries, chemical or petrochemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist To provide disconnect means, short circuit protection and thermal time delay overload protection
Features:
Quick-opening covers less than two turns to remove or install Three section design for ease of installation Water-shedding construction with female threads on top cover, male threads on bottom cover, and top cover skirted Specially located stops and locks insure adequate thread engagement and prevent overtightening Separate replaceable mounting bracket attached to the rear of the body provides three-point suspension for quick installation and leveling one keyhole slot at top and two open slots at bottom Bodies have two taper-tapped conduit hubs with integral bushings on the top, and two more directly below Mounting plates are supplied with all necessary holes and hardware to attach any of the circuit breakers shown in the catalog listings. Breaker and interior mounting frames are easily removed as a unit, providing free access to the wiring chamber Breaker is operated by an external handle which can be padlocked in either "ON" or "OFF" positions by as many as three padlocks. Breaker is trip-free of the handle and will open under short circuit or overload, even if the handle is locked in the "ON" position
3C
Options:
The following special options are available from factory by adding suffix to Cat. #: Description Suffix Auxiliary Switch 1A/1B (1P2T).......................................................................... S784 2A/2B (2P2T).......................................................................... S785 Insulated neutral with 2 connectors (100, 150 and 225 amp.) S146 Grounded neutral stud with 3 connectors (100, 150 and 225 amp.)........................................................................................ S178 Side bosses drilled and tapped same size as standard hubs. S366 Back boss drilled and tapped same size as standard hubs... S367 Standard Breather (Class I, Groups C, D; Class II, Groups E, F, G; Class III)........................................................................... S219 Standard Drain (Class I, Groups C, D; Class II, Groups E, F, G; Class III)............................................................................... S198 Standard Breather and Drain (Class I, Groups C, D; Class II, Groups E, F, G; Class III)......................................................... S198V Universal Breather-Drain (Class I, Groups C, D; Class II, Groups F, G)............................................................................. S454 (2) Universal Breather-Drains (Class I, Groups C, D; Class II, Groups F, G)............................................................................. S454V

NEC/CEC Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA: 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG UL Standard: 698 CSA: C22.2 No. 30
Standard Materials:
Bodies and covers copper-free aluminum Operating handles copper-free aluminum Operating shafts stainless steel Interior parts sheet steel

100, 150, 225, 250 ampere frame sizes
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum natural Stainless steel natural Sheet steel electrogalvanized
*Suffix S146 insulated material must be used to comply with NEC requirements for service entrance. Application is limited by circuit breaker design Consult Factory. Not suitable for NEMA 4.
482
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
3C
Dimensions
In Inches*
3C
Int. Dia. a b c d e f g h j k l m n p
EPC377 7" 105/8 1913/16 2313/16 143/8 63/4 711/16 53/8 2 2 73/8 21/16 93/8 51/4 11/4
EPC387 7"W 1213/16 1913/16 2313/16 143/8 63/4 711/16 53/8 2 2 91/4 21/16 93/8 51/4 2
EPC317 11" 161/8 251/2 351/2 201/4 91/8 85/8 73/4 41/2 51/2 12 25/8 11 51/2 21/2
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
483
3C

100/150A Frame, Thermal Magnetic, 120240 VAC, 125250 VDC
To order an enclosure complete with circuit breaker where there is a choice of manufacturer, insert the manufacturer's symbol in the designated position of the catalog number. Enclosures only can be ordered. Select from listings.
Non-Interchangeable Trip
Circuit Breaker Poles Voltage Rating Enclosure Int. Dia. Hub Size Circuit Bkr. Amp Rating 15 20 30 40 50 70 90 100 70 90 100 15 20 30 40 50 70 90 100 70 90 100 Without Circuit Bkr. Cat. # With Circuit Bkr. Cat. # EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 15EB 2 20EB 2 30EB 2 40EB 2 50EB 2 70EB 2 90EB 2 100EB 2
3C
7 2 240VAC or 125-250VDC
11/4
EPC377
7W
EPC387
EPC387 70EB 2 EPC387 90EB 2 EPC387 100EB 2 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 15EB 3 20EB 3 30EB 3 40EB 3 50EB 3 70EB 3 99EB 3 100EB 3
7 3 240VAC*
11/4
EPC377
7W
*Square D 240VAC/125250VDC
EPC387
EPC387 70EB 3 EPC387 90EB 3 EPC387 100EB 3
Circuit Breakers Manufacturer General Electric Square D Cutler-Hammer
Frame TEB FAL ED
Symbol TT DT WT
484
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Circuit Breaker Poles Voltage Rating Enclosure Int. Dia. Hub Size
3C
Circuit Bkr. Amp Rating 15 20 30 40 50 70 90 100 70 90 100 15 20 30 40 50 70 90 100 70 90 100 15 20 30 40 50 70 90 100 70 90 100 110* 125* 150* 15 20 30 40 50 70 90 100 70 90 100 100* 125* 150* Circuit Breakers Manufacturer General Electric Square D Cutler-Hammer
Without Circuit Bkr. Cat. #
With Circuit Bkr. Cat. # EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 15EHD 2 20EHD 2 30EHD 2 40EHD 2 50EHD 2 70EHD 2 90EHD 2 100EHD 2
7 2 480VAC or 250VDC
11/4
EPC377
7W
EPC387
EPC387 70EHD 2 EPC387 90EHD 2 EPC387 100EHD 2 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 15EHD 3 20EHD 3 30EHD 3 40EHD 3 50EHD 3 70EHD 3 90EHD 3 100EHD 3
3C
7 3 480VAC
11/4
EPC377
7W
EPC387
EPC387 70EHD 3 EPC387 90EHD 3 EPC387 100EHD 3 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC387 EPC387 EPC387 EPC387 EPC387 EPC387 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC377 EPC387 EPC387 EPC387 EPC387 EPC387 EPC387 15FDB 2 20FDB 2 30FDB 2 40FDB 2 50FDB 2 70FDB 2 90FDB 2 100FDB 2 70FDB 2 90FDB 2 100FDB 2 110FDB 2 125FDB 2 150FDB 2 15FDB 3 20FDB 3 30FDB 3 40FDB 3 50FDB 3 70FDB 3 90FDB 3 100FDB 3 70FDB 3 90FDB 3 100FDB 3 110FDB 3 125FDB 3 150FDB 3
7 600VAC or 250VDC
11/4
EPC377
7W
EPC387
11/4
EPC377
600VAC
7W
EPC387
Circuit Breakers Manufacturer General Electric Square D Cutler-Hammer
Frame TED FAL EHD
Symbol TT DT WT
Frame TED FAL FD, FDB
Symbol TT DT WT
*Square D FAL Frame, 100A Max. Square D 480VAC/250VDC Square D 600VAC/250VDC
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
485
3C

Circuit Breaker Poles Voltage Rating 600VAC or 250VDC Enclosure Int. Dia. Hub Size Circuit Bkr. Amp Rating 125 150 175 200 225 250* 125 150 175 200 225 250* Without Circuit Bkr. Cat. # With Circuit Bkr. Cat. # EPC317 EPC317 EPC317 EPC317 EPC317 EPC317 EPC317 EPC317 EPC317 EPC317 EPC317 EPC317 125JB 150JB 175JB 200JB 225JB 250JB 125JB 150JB 175JB 200JB 225JB 250JB 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3
11
21/ 2
EPC317
600VAC
11
21/ 2
EPC317
3C
Circuit Breakers Manufacturer Cutler-Hammer General Electric Square D
Frame JDB TFJ KAL
Symbol WT TT DT
*General Electric TFJ Frame, 225A Max.
486
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
FLB Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures
3C
Applications:
FLB circuit breakers and enclosures are used: For service entrance, feeder or branch circuit protection for lighting, heating, appliance and motor circuits In areas made hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors, gases or combustible dusts In damp, wet or corrosive locations Indoors or outdoors at petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist To provide disconnect means, short circuit protection and thermal time delay overload protection
3C
Features:
Semi-cylindrical body shape for maximum strength at lowest practical weight Round threaded covers at each end, set at an angle to provide ready access to interior for ease of wiring Breaker is operated by an external handle which can be padlocked in either "ON" or "OFF" positions. Breaker is tripfree of the handle and will open under short circuit or overload even if the handle is locked in the "ON" position Bodies have vertical through feed conduit hubs of sizes given in the listings
Options:
The following special options are available from factory by adding suffix to Cat. #: Description Suffix 2 lugs for neutral connections (50, 100 and 225 amp.) ............................................... S146 Ground neutral stud with 3 connectors (50, 100 and 225 amp.) ................................. S168 Standard Breather (Class I, Groups C, D; Class II, Groups E, F, G; Class III) ............ S219 Standard Drain (Class I, Groups C, D; Class II, Groups E, F, G; Class III) .................. S198 Standard Breather and Drain (Class I, Groups C, D; Class II, Groups E, F, G; Class III) ... S198V Universal Breather Drain (Class I, Groups C, D; Class II, Groups F, G) ................... S454* (2) Universal Breather Drains (Class I, Groups C, D; Class II, Groups F, G) ............ S454V* Specify Auxiliary Switch 1A/1B (1P2T) ........................................................................................................... S784 2A/2B (2P2T) ........................................................................................................... S785

NEC/CEC Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG UL Standard: 698 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
Dimensions
In Inches:
Standard Materials:
Bodies, covers and operating handles copper-free aluminum Operating shafts stainless steel Interior parts sheet steel
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum natural Stainless steel natural Sheet steel zinc electroplate with chromate finish
Cat. # FLB140, 220, 221 FLB115, 141, 147, 148, 171, 172, 173, 175, 222, 361, 116, 142, 149, 174, 177, 223, 362 FLB224, 225, 264, 265, 267, 346
*Not suitable for NEMA 4/EEMAC. With two mounting feet, one at upper right and one at lower left. Application is limited by circuit breaker design Consult Factory. Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes.
a 5 /4
1
b 10 /4
1
c 6 /4
1
d
1
f
7
g 11/8 13/4
7 /4 7 93/4 91/8 97/8 151/2
/16 /16
71/2 133/4
133/8 221/2
81/2 161/4
21
/32 27/16

100 and 225 ampere frame sizes
sUS: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
487
3C

100A Frame, Thermal Magnetic, 120 VAC/125 VDC, 240 VAC/250 VDC
To order an enclosure complete with circuit breaker where there is a choice of manufacturer, insert the manufacturer's symbol in the designated position of the catalog number. Enclosures only can be ordered. Select from listings.
100 Ampere Frame Size with Non-Interchangeable Trip 240VAC Max.

Circuit Breaker Poles Voltage Rating 120VAC or 125VDC Enclosure Hub Size Circuit Bkr. Amp Rating 15 20 30 40 50 15 20 30 40 50 70 90 100 15 20 30 40 50 70 90 100 Without Circuit Bkr. Cat. # With Circuit Bkr. General Electric "TEB" Cat. # FLB220 FLB220 FLB220 FLB220 FLB220 FLB221 FLB221 FLB221 FLB221 FLB221 TT15 TT20 TT30 TT40 TT50 TT15 TT20 TT30 TT40 TT50 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2
/4
FLB220
3C
1 2 240VAC or 125250VDC 11/2
FLB221
FLB223
FLB223 TT70 2 FLB223 TT90 2 FLB223 TT100 2 FLB222 FLB222 FLB222 FLB222 FLB222 TT15 TT20 TT30 TT40 TT50 3 3 3 3 3
11/4 3 240VAC 11/2
FLB222
FLB223
FLB223 TT70 3 FLB223 TT90 3 FLB223 TT100 3
488
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

100A Frame, Thermal Magnetic, 120480 VAC, 125250 VDC
Circuit Breaker Poles Voltage Rating 120VAC or 125VDC Enclosure Hub Size Circuit Bkr. Amp Rating 15 20 30 40 50 15 20 30 40 50 70 90 100 15 20 30 40 50 70 90 100
3C

Without Circuit Bkr. Cat. # With Circuit Bkr. Square D "FAL" Cat. # FLB171 FLB171 FLB171 FLB171 FLB171 FLB172 FLB172 FLB172 FLB172 FLB172 DT15 DT20 DT30 DT40 DT50 DT15 DT20 DT30 DT40 DT50 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2
/4
FLB171
1 2 240VAC or 125250VDC 11/ 2
FLB172
3C
FLB174
FLB174 DT70 2 FLB174 DT90 2 FLB174 DT100 2 FLB173 FLB173 FLB173 FLB173 FLB173 DT15 DT20 DT30 DT40 DT50 3 3 3 3 3
11/ 4 3 240VAC or 125250VDC 11/ 2
FLB173
FLB174
FLB174 DT70 3 FLB174 DT90 3 FLB174 DT100 3

Circuit Breaker Poles Voltage Rating Enclosure Hub Size Circuit Bkr. Amp Rating 15 20 30 40 50 70 90 100 15 20 30 40 50 70 90 100 Without Circuit Bkr. Cat. # With Circuit Bkr. Cutler-Hammer "EHD" Cat. # FLB140 FLB140 FLB140 FLB140 FLB140 WT15 WT20 WT30 WT40 WT50 2 2 2 2 2 With Circuit Breaker General Electric "TED" Cat. # FLB140 FLB140 FLB140 FLB140 FLB140 TT15 TT20 TT30 TT40 TT50 2 2 2 2 2
1 2 480VAC or 250VDC 11/ 2
FLB140
FLB142
FLB142 WT70 2 FLB142 WT90 2 FLB142 WT100 2 FLB141 FLB141 FLB141 FLB141 FLB141 WT15 WT20 WT30 WT40 WT50 3 3 3 3 3
FLB142 TT70 2 FLB142 TT90 2 FLB142 TT100 2 FLB141 FLB141 FLB141 FLB141 FLB141 TT15 TT20 TT30 TT40 TT50 3 3 3 3 3
11/ 4 3 480VAC 11/ 2
FLB141
FLB142
FLB142 WT70 3 FLB142 WT90 3 FLB142 WT100 3
FLB142 TT70 3 FLB142 TT90 3 FLB142 TT100 3
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
489
3C


Circuit Breaker Poles Voltage Rating Enclosure Hub Size Circuit Bkr. Amp Rating 15 20 30 40 50 70 90 100 15 20 30 40 50 70 90 100 Without Circuit Bkr. Cat. # With Circuit Bkr. Square D "FAL" Cat. # FLB147 FLB147 FLB147 FLB147 FLB147 DT15 DT20 DT30 DT40 DT50 2 2 2 2 2
11/ 4 2 480VAC or 250VDC 11/ 2
FLB147
FLB149
3C
11/ 4 3 480VAC or 250VDC 11/ 2
FLB148
FLB149
490
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Circuit Breaker Poles Voltage Rating Enclosure Hub Size Circuit Bkr. Amp Rating 15 20 30 40 50 70 90 100 15 20 30 40 50 70 90 100 Circuit Bkr. Amp Rating 15 20 30 40 50 70 90 100 Circuit Bkr. Amp Rating 15 20 30 40 50 70 90 100 15 20 30 40 50 70 90 100
3C

Without Circuit Bkr. Cat. # With Circuit Bkr. Cutler-Hammer "FDB" Cat. # FLB115 FLB115 FLB115 FLB115 FLB115 WT15 WT20 WT30 WT40 WT50 2 2 2 2 2
11/4 2 600VAC or 250VDC 11/2
FLB115
FLB116
FLB116 WT70 2 FLB116 WT90 2 FLB116 WT100 2 FLB115 FLB115 FLB115 FLB115 FLB115 WT15 WT20 WT30 WT40 WT50 3 3 3 3 3
3C
11/4 3 600VAC 11/2 Circuit Breaker Poles Voltage Rating Enclosure Hub Size
FLB115
FLB116
FLB116 WT70 3 FLB116 WT90 3 FLB116 WT100 3
With Circuit Bkr. General Electric "TED" Cat. # FLB361 FLB361 FLB361 FLB361 FLB361 TT15 TT20 TT30 TT40 TT50 3 3 3 3 3
11/4 3 600VAC 11/2 Circuit Breaker Poles Voltage Rating Enclosure Hub Size
FLB361
FLB362
FLB362 TT70 3 FLB362 TT90 3 FLB362 TT100 3 With Circuit Bkr. Square D "FAL" Cat. # FLB175 FLB175 FLB175 FLB175 FLB175 DT15 DT20 DT30 DT40 DT50 2 2 2 2 2
11/4 2 600VAC or 250VDC 11/2
FLB175
FLB177
11/4 3 600VAC or 250VDC 11/2
FLB175
FLB177
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
491
3C


Circuit Breaker Poles Voltage Rating 600VAC or 250VDC Enclosure Hub Size Circuit Bkr. Amp Rating 125 150 175 200 225 125 150 175 200 225 Circuit Bkr. Amp Rating 125 150 175 200 225 125 150 175 200 225 Without Circuit Bkr. Cat. # With Circuit Bkr. Cutler-Hammer "JDB" Cat. # FLB264 FLB264 FLB264 FLB264 FLB264 FLB264 FLB264 FLB264 FLB264 FLB264 WT125 WT150 WT175 WT200 WT225 WT125 WT150 WT175 WT200 WT225 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3
21/ 2
FLB264
600VAC
21/ 2
FLB264
3C
Poles
Voltage Rating 600VAC or 250VDC
Hub Size
With Circuit Bkr. General Electric "TFJ" Cat. #
With Circuit Bkr. Square D "KAL" Cat. # FLB346 FLB346 FLB346 FLB346 FLB346 DT125 DT150 DT175 DT200 DT225 DT125 DT150 DT175 DT200 DT225 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3
21/2
FLB346
600VAC
2 /2
1
FLB224 or FLB346
FLB224 FLB224 FLB224 FLB224 FLB224
TT125 TT150 TT175 TT200 TT225
3 3 3 3 3
FLB346 FLB346 FLB346 FLB346 FLB346
100 Ampere Frame Size with Interchangeable Trip 600VAC Max.

Circuit Breaker Poles Voltage Rating 600VAC or 250VDC Enclosure Hub Size Circuit Bkr. Amp Rating 125 150 175 200 225 125 150 175 200 225 Without Circuit Bkr. Cat. # With Circuit Bkr. Cutler-Hammer "JD"* Cat. # FLB267 FLB267 FLB267 FLB267 FLB267 FLB267 FLB267 FLB267 FLB267 FLB267 WT125 WT150 WT175 WT200 WT225 WT125 WT150 WT175 WT200 WT225 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 FLB225 FLB225 FLB225 FLB225 FLB225 TT125 TT150 TT175 TT200 TT225 3 3 3 3 3 With Circuit Bkr. General Electric "TFK" Cat. #
FLB267
600VAC
FLB267 or FLB225
*Formerly "KB" Formerly "JB"
492
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EFD and EFDC Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures

120VAC, Single Pole
Applications:
3C
EFD circuit breakers and enclosures are used: For branch circuit protection for lighting, appliance, and motor circuits In areas made hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors, gases or combustible dusts In corrosive locations For installation at petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist To provide disconnect means, short circuit protection and thermal time delay overload protection
Features:
Small, compact enclosures with accurately ground, wide flange on both body and cover for flametight joint Dead-end (EFD) or through feed (EFDC) hubs 3/4" to 1" sizes Breaker mounted on cover and back wired for ease of installation Breaker can be padlocked in "ON" or "OFF" positions with trip-free handle mechanism
EFD dead end
EFDC through feed
3C
Electrical Ratings:
Single pole 120 / 240 VAC max. Trip ratings 15, 20 and 30 amp.

NEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG, 12
Options:
Description For use in Group B hazardous areas* Suffix GB
Standard Materials:
Bodies and covers Feraloy iron alloy Operating handles type 6 / 6 nylon Operating shafts stainless steel
Ordering Information With Square D Type "QOU" Circuit Breakers

Hub Size in. 15 Amp Cat. # EFD Single Gang (Dead End) 3 /4 EFD21104 1 EFD31104
3
20 Amp Cat. # EFD21105 EFD31105
30 Amp Cat. # EFD21106 EFD31106 EFDC21106 EFDC31106 EFD22106 EFD32106 EFDC22106 EFDC32106
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Type 6 / 6 nylon black Stainless steel natural
EFDC Single Gang (Through Feed) /4 EFDC21104 EFDC21105 1 EFDC31104 EFDC31105 EFD Two Gang (Dead End) /4 EFD22104 1 EFD32104 EFD22105 EFD32105
EFDC Two Gang (Through Feed) /4 EFDC22104 EFDC22105 1 EFDC32104 EFDC32105
Dimensions
In Inches:
Hub Size 3 /4 1 Dim. "h" /8 1
7
Dim. "l"
13 15
/16 /16
*Seals must be installed within 11/ 2" of each conduit opening, for Group B use. Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
493
3C
NCB Series Circuit Breakers and Enclosures

600VAC, 250VDC Heavy Duty
Applications:
NCB circuit breakers are for use in conjunction with a variety of heating, lighting and power circuits to provide disconnect means and short circuit protection.

NEMA: 3, 4X and 12 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 94 UL Standard: 489
Features:
Enclosures are made of Krydon, Cooper Crouse-Hinds' high impact strength fiberglass-reinforced polyester material having excellent corrosion resistance and stability to heat Unitized, strong and durable enclosure construction provides longer service life for equipment Enclosure has hinged access door which opens 160 for easy wiring and maintenance. Three screws for door frame are hidden behind access door Access door may be padlocked to prevent unauthorized access

100, 150, 225, 250 and 400 amp frames
Options:
Description Insulated, groundable type terminal block for grounded or ungrounded neutral can be supplied Hubs (see "Note on Hubs") see page 646 Grounding plate or bushing see page 646 Suffix
3C
S618 Circuit breaker enclosure with built-in Kyrdon material handle
To order an enclosure complete with circuit breaker, insert the manufacturers symbol in the designated position of the catalog number. Enclosures only can be ordered. Select from listings. Circuit Breaker Voltage Poles Rating Amps 100A Frame (Non-Interchangeable Trip) 15 20 25 30 35 40 240 VAC/ 2 50 250 VDC 60 70 80 90 100 15 20 25 30 35 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Enclosure With Circuit Breaker Cat. # NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F 15EB 22 20EB 22 25EB 22 30EB 22 35EB 22 40EB 22 50EB 22 60EB 22 70EB 22 80EB 22 90EB 22 100EB 22 15EHB 24 20EHB 24 25EHB 24 30EHB 24 35EHB 24 40EHB 24 50EHB 24 60EHB 24 70EHB 24 80EHB 24 90EHB 24 100EHB 24 Without Circuit Breaker Cat. #
NCB1018F
480 VAC/ 250 VDC
NCB1018F
Circuit Breakers: Frames 100/ 150A 240V 480V TEB FAL EB TED FAL EHB, EHD 225/ 250A 600V TFJ KAL JB, JDB LAL 400A 600V
NOTE ON HUBS: The following number and sizes of hubs (not mounted) are included when circuit breakers are ordered complete. If enclosures only are ordered, hubs must be ordered separately (see "Options")
Manufacturer General Electric Square D Cutler-Hammer
Symbol TT DT WT
600V TED FAL FB, FDB
Circuit Breaker Frame EB, EHD*, FDB EB, EHD*, FDB JDB KDB
*Formerly EHB. Formerly FB. Formerly LB. Formerly JB.
Ampere Rating 1550 60100 110225 250400
Number Included 2 2 2 2
Hub Size 11/4 2 21/2 3
Specify voltage.
494
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Circuit Breaker Enclosure With Without Circuit Circuit Voltage Breaker Breaker Poles Rating Amps Cat. # Cat. # 100/150A Frame (Non-Interchangeable Trip) continued 15 NCB1018F 15FB 26 20 NCB1018F 20FB 26 25 NCB1018F 25FB 26 30 NCB1018F 30FB 26 35 NCB1018F 35FB 26 600 VAC/ 40 NCB1018F 40FB 26 2 NCB1018F 250 VDC 50 NCB1018F 50FB 26 70 NCB1018F 70FB 26 80 NCB1018F 80FB 26 90 NCB1018F 90FB 26 100 NCB1018F 100FB 26 15 20 25 30 35 40 50 70 80 90 100 15 20 25 30 35 40 50 70 80 90 100 15 20 25 30 35 40 50 70 80 90 100 NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F NCB1018F 15EB 32 20EB 32 25EB 32 30EB 32 35EB 32 40EB 32 50EB 32 70EB 32 80EB 32 90EB 32 100EB 32 15EHB 34 20EHB 34 25EHB 34 30EHB 34 35EHB 34 40EHB 34 50EHB 34 70EHB 34 80EHB 34 90EHB 34 100EHB 34 15FB 36 20FB 36 25FB 36 30FB 36 35FB 36 40FB 36 50FB 36 70FB 36 80FB 36 90FB 36 100FB 36

Circuit Breaker Enclosure With Circuit Voltage Breaker Poles Rating Amps Cat. # 225/50A Frame (Non-Interchangeable Trip) 110 NCB1024F 110JB 125 NCB1024F 125JB 600 150 NCB1024F 150JB VAC/ 2 175 NCB1024F 175JB 250 200 NCB1024F 200JB VDC 225 NCB1024F 225JB 110 125 150 175 200 225 NCB1024F NCB1024F NCB1024F NCB1024F NCB1024F NCB1024F 110JB 125JB 150JB 175JB 200JB 225JB 250LB 300LB 350LB 400LB 250LB 300LB 350LB 400LB
3C
Without Circuit Breaker Cat. # 26 26 26 26 26 26 36 36 36 36 36 36 26 26 26 26 36 36 36 36
NCB1024F
600 VDC
NCB1024F
3C
240 VDC
NCB1018F
400A Frame (Interchangeable Trip)* 250 NCB1426F 300 NCB1426F 600 VAC/ 2 350 NCB1426F 250 VDC 400 NCB1426F 3 600 VAC 250 300 350 400 NCB1426F NCB1426F NCB1426F NCB1426F
NCB1426F
NCB1426F
Circuit Breakers: Frames 100/ 150A 240V 480V TEB FAL EB TED FAL EHB, EHD 225/ 250A 600V TFJ KAL JB, JDB LAL
480 VAC
NCB1018F
Manufacturer General Electric Square D Cutler-Hammer
Symbol TT DT WT
600V TED FAL FB, FDB
400A 600V
Note on Hubs: The following number and sizes of hubs (not mounted) are included when circuit breakers are ordered complete. If enclosures only are ordered, hubs must be ordered separately (see "Options").
600 VAC
NCB1018F
Circuit Breaker Frame EB, EHD, FDB EB, EHD, FDB JDB Formerly JB Formerly EHB Formerly FB
Ampere Rating 1550 60100 110225
Number Included 2 2 2
Hub Size 11/4 2 21/2
Specify voltage. 2-pole, 600 VAC/250 VDC for Square D circuit breakers only. *For Square D circuit breakers only. Also available with interchangeable trip breakers. Specify on order.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
495
3C

Dimensions
In Inches*
3C
Outside Dimensions Cat. # NCB1018 NCB1024 NCB1426 l 19 /32

13 13
Mounting Dimensions d mw 7 /8
7 7
Door Opening Dimensions dl 16 /8

7 7
w 11 /32
13 13
ml 19 /8
3 3
dw 511/16 511/16 911/16
8 /32
23 23
25 /32 2713/32
11 /32 1513/32
8 /32 923/32
7 /8 117/8
25 /8 271/4
22 /8 2311/16
*Dimensions are approximate, not to be used for construction purposes.
496
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Control Stations Hazardous and Non-hazardous
4C
Description
Application/Selection EDS / EFS Series Control Stations
FlexStation Control Station Components EDSCM Modular Series Bodies DSD Cover and Device Sub-assemblies DSD-SR HP Rated Selector Switch Fully Assembled EDS and EFS Control Stations EDS Pushbutton Stations EFS Pilot Light Stations EDS Combination Pushbutton and Pilot Light Stations EDS Selector Switches EFS Selector Switches EDS Snap Switches EDS Manual Motor Starting Switches EFS Fire Alarm Station EDS / EFS Control Stations Sub-assembly Reference Guide
Page No. see pages 498499 see see see see page page page page 500 505 507 510
see page 513 see pages 516517 see page 518 see page 519 see page 520 see page 521 see pages 522523 see page 524 see page 525 see page 527 see page 530 see page 537 see page 541 see page 542 see page 553 see page 556 see page 557
4C
MC / MCC Pushbutton, Selector Switch, and Pilot Light Stations N2S / N2SC Control Stations N2SU / N2SCU Control Stations N2FA / N2FAC Fire Alarm Control Stations GHG43 Control Stations OAC Pushbutton Stations and Selector Switches Control Station Covers Replacements for Pushbutton and Selector Switch Control Stations
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
497
4C
Control Stations
Applications:
Control stations are used as a remote means of: Motor control Visual indication of equipment performance On-off control of circuits Circuit selection

The environment of the control station location and requirements for construction in terms of NEC/CEC compliances and NEMA/EEMAC type Function to be performed Desirability of factory sealing as compared to field sealing Factory sealing has distinct advantages: Less installation problems Less time consuming Less change of error Lower installed cost Accommodates future changes to circuitry Greater reliability The number of controls required, and the space available for installation. Where space is limited, panel or junction box mounting with many combinations are available See "Quick Selector Chart" for guidance
Options:
Many options are available on: Material and finishes where special atmospheric conditions prevail Special features for specific applications. See individual control station listings for available options
4C

Control Station MC, MCC NEC/CEC Hazardous Area Compliance NEMA/EEMAC Type 3, 4 Function Pushbutton Pilot light Selector switch Pilot light Pushbutton Selector switch Factory Sealed No. of Devices or Units 1-5* Type of Mounting Surface 1-5 gang Surface 1-2 gang Cover Style Gasketed
EDS, EDSC
Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl.
I, Div. 1, Groups C, D I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G II, Div. 2, Groups F, G III I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G II, Div. 2, Groups F, G III I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G II, Div. 2, Groups F, G III I, Div. 1, Groups C, D I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G II, Div. 2, Groups F, G III I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G II, Div. 2, Groups F, G III
3, 7B (Div. 2) CD, 9EFG
Pilot light Pushbutton Selector switch
1-2*
Ground joint
DSD Covers and Device Sub-assemblies DSD-SR
3, 7B, 9EFG
Pilot light Pushbutton Selector switch Selector Switch
Surface 1 gang
Ground joint
3, 5, 7CD, 9EFG, 12
Surface 1 gang
Ground joint
EDSCM
3, 7CD, 9EFG
1-15*
Surface 1-15 gang
Ground joint
EFS
3, 7BCD, 9EFG
1-2*
Surface 1 gang
Ground joint
*Number of devices per unit. Factory-sealed units.
498
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Control Stations
Quick Selector Chart (continued)
Control NEC/CEC Hazardous Area Station Compliances FlexStation Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups C, D Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III GHG43 NEMA/EEMAC Type 3, 7B (Div. 2) CD, 9EFG Function Pilot light Pushbutton Factory Sealed Pilot light Pushbutton
4C
No. of Devices Type of Cover or Units Mounting Style 1-2-3 Surface Ground joint 1-2 gang
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D 4X, IP66 Cl. I, Zones 1 and 2, (A)Ex de IIB + H2, T6 Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G PTB ATEX Certified 3117 CENELEC EEx de IIC, T6, Zones 1 and 2 Eex de IIC, T6 Zones 21 and 22 Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D 3, 7BCD, 12
Pushbutton Signal Lamp Potentiometer Ammeter Selector Switch Terminal Blocks Fire Alarm Pushbutton Selector switch Pilot light Pushbutton Selector switch Combination Pushbutton Selector switch
1-4*
Surface 1 gang
Screw and Gasket
4C
N2FA, N2FAC N2S, N2SC N2SU, N2SCU OAC
Surface 1 gang Surface 1 gang
Screw and Gasket Screw and Gasket
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D
3, 4X, 7BCD, 12
Pilot light Pushbutton Selector switch Combination Pushbutton Selector switch
1-4*
Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III
3, 7ABCD, 9EFG, 12
1-2*
Surface 1 gang
Threaded
*Number of devices per unit.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
499
4C
EDS / EFS Series Control Stations

FlexStation Control Station Components
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B (Div. 2 only) C, D Cl. II, Div. 1 & 2, Groups E, F, G Cl. III Zone 1 & 2 Groups IIB NEMA 3R, 7B* (Div. 2) CD, 9 EFG, 12
Applications:
Five modular components operators, contact blocks, covers, legend plates, and bodies are combined to provide a variety of control stations which are: For use indoors or outdoors, in areas which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable gases and vapors, or combustible dust. Used in conjunction with magnetic starters or contactors for remote control of motors and other electrical apparatus. For installation in petroleum refineries, chemical, petrochemical, and other industrial process facilities; grain processing and storage facilities; and other heavy industrial applications where Class I, Class II, or Class III hazards are present.
4C
Features:
Momentary contact pushbuttons, maintained contact pushbuttons, and pilots lights offer a choice of functions. Selector switches in 2 or 3 position configurations including keyed and spring return options. Single-hole, two-hole, and three-hole covers for one, two, or three devices respectively per station. Rugged control devices for safe, reliable operation in industrial applications. Bodies, with extra room for wire pulling and termination, also include two integral mounting feet for fast, secure installation. Bodies have 1/2", 3/4", or 1" dead-end or through-feed conduit hubs with integral bushing for protection of wire insulation. Covers and bodies are available in Feraloy or copper-free aluminum for light weight and corrosion resistance. DL legend plates have large lettering to give clear indication of device function. Space is available for field markings.
Standard Materials:
Bodies, covers Feraloy or copper-free aluminum. Pushbuttons and guards Type 6 / 6 nylon. Operating shafts, bearings stainless steel.
Options:
Description Suffix Copper-free aluminum bodies and covers SA Corro-free epoxy finish for use in severely corrosive environments. FlexStation covers and bodies. S752
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint. Copper-free aluminum natural. Stainless steel natural.
Electrical Ratings:
Pushbuttons and selector switches 600 VAC heavy duty (NEMA A600). Pilot lights 120 VAC.
Dimensions
In Inches:

NEC Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B* (Div. 2), C, D Class II, Division 1 & 2, Groups E, F, G Class III Zone 1 & 2 Groups IIB* NEMA: 3R, 7B (Div. 2) CD, 9EFG, 12 UL Standard: 1203
Covers have same length and width as back boxes. *For Class I, Division 1, Group B or Zone 1 Hydrogen applications, use the EFS(C) complete control station catalog numbers see page 514.
500
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

STEP 1 Select Operator
Pushbutton front operated, standard black button
Description Single button for 1 contact block Single button for 2 contact blocks Double buttons for 2 contact blocks
4C
Cat. # DEV11 DEV12 DEV22
Options
Suffix
Specify color for each pushbutton button (ex: DEV11G, DEV22GR). Color is black if unspecified. Green button - unmarked G Red button - unmarked (includes lockout with bar and chain) R Momentary red mushroom head style (not available with lockout or with DEV22) S111 Lockout with bar and chain (available on DEV11 and DEV12) S153 Maintained red mushroom head style (lockout comes standard, do not specify S153; not available S769 on DEV22)
4C
Pilot Light factory sealed, incandescent lamp

Description Pilot Pilot Pilot Pilot Pilot light light light light light with with with with with red jewel green jewel amber jewel clear jewel blue LED and clear jewel Cat. # DEV30 DEV30 DEV30 DEV30 DEV30 Suffix LED S300 T2 T4 T5 J1 J3 J6 J10 J11 LED
Options LED lamps (standard clear jewel with colored lamp) 24 V lamp (not available with transformer feature) 240 / 120 V pilot light transformer 480 / 120 V pilot light transformer 600 / 120 V pilot light transformer
Selector Switch with standard lockout

Description 2-position (pos. 1 N.O., pos. 2 N.C.) for use with 1 or 2 contact blocks 3-position (pos. 1 N.O., pos. 2 Open, pos. 3 N.C.) for use with 1 or 2 contact blocks 3-position (pos. 1 N.C., pos. 2 N.O., pos. 3 N.O. for Switch A) (pos. 1 N.O., pos. 2 N.O., pos. 3 N.C. for Switch B) for use with 2 contact blocks Options Spring return to center from right (For DEV43 or DEV44 only) Spring return to center from left (For DEV43 or DEV44 only) Spring return to center from right and left (For DEV43 or DEV44 only) Key Operated removable from all positions Key Operated removable from left position for DEV42 or from center for DEV43 and DEV44 Key Operated removable from right position for DEV42 or from left for DEV43 and DEV44 Key Operated removable from right position for DEV43 and DEV44 Cat. # DEV42 DEV43 DEV44 Suffix S634 S635 S842 S847 S847 S847 S847
K1 K2 K3 K4
STEP 2 Select Contact Block (if required). For product details see page 557.
Contact Block
Description Contact block, 1 NO and 1 NC, 10A, 600VAC, A600 rating For additional technical information see page 557. Note - Each control station will accept a maximum of three contact blocks. Select device operators accordingly. DEV12, DEV22 and DEV44 may not be used on a three-operator (DS443-SA) cover. DEV42 and DEV43 may not be used on a three-operator cover when using them with two contact blocks. Cat. # ESWP126
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
501
4C

STEP 3 Select Desired Legend Plates

For use with single hole covers
Cat. # DL101 DL128 DL129 DL130 DL132 DL133 DL135 DL136 DL137 DL138 DL139 DL140 DL141 DL142 DL143 DL144 DL148 DL149 DL165 DL186 DL187 DL188 DL189 DL190 DL191 DL192 DL193 DL194 DL195 DL196 DL197 DL198 DL199
Note:
For use with 2 or 3 hole covers

Cat. # DL01 DL02 DL03 DL05 DL06 DL07 DL08 DL09 DL10 DL11 DL12 DL13 DL14 DL15 DL16 DL17 DL18 DL19 DL20 DL21 DL22 DL23 DL24 DL25 DL26 DL27 DL28 DL29 DL30 Inscription Blank w/no fields Blank w/single field Blank w/2 fields Start Stop On Off Run Jog Trip Reset Test Power On Hand Automatic Emer Stop Forward Reverse Open Close Up Down In Out Raise Lower Run-Jog Hand-Auto Forward-Reverse Cat. # DL32 DL33 DL35 DL36 DL37 DL38 DL39 DL40 DL41 DL42 DL43 DL44 DL46 DL47 DL48 DL49 DL65 DL85 DL86 DL87 DL88 DL89 DL90 DL91 DL92 DL93 DL94 DL95 DL96 DL97 DL98 DL99 Inscription Open-Close Up-Down In-Out Raise-Lower Start-Stop Run-Off-Jog Hand-Off-Auto For-Off-Rev Fast-Off-Slow 1-Off-2 Open-Off-Close Up-Off-Down Fast Slow Off-On Auto-Off-Hand Slow-Fast Safe Safe-Run Raise-Off-Lower Slow-Off-Fast Odd-Off-Even Stop-Start On-Off Fast-Slow Local-Remote Trip-Reset Auto-Manual Start-Emer Stop Alarm-Silence Maint-Manual Test-Reset
Inscription Blank Run-Jog Hand-Auto Forward-Reverse Open-Close Up-Down In-Out Raise-Lower Start-Stop Run-Off-Jog Hand-Off-Auto For-Off-Rev Fast-Off-Slow 1-Off-2 Open-Off-Close Up-Off-Down Off-On Auto-Off-Hand Slow-Fast Safe-Run Raise-Off-Lower Slow-Off-Fast Odd-Off-Even Stop-Start On-Off Fast-Slow Local-Remote Trip-Reset Auto-Manual Start-Emer Stop Alarm-Silence Maint-Manual Test-Reset
4C
For special markings order DL101-"desired markings" or DL01-"desired markings"
STEP 4 Select Cover

Covers
Description Blank cover with single hole (Single gang) Blank cover with 2 holes (Single gang) Blank cover with 3 holes (To be used with EFD(C)1491-SA, 2491-SA or 3491-SA series of back boxes) Replacement cover plug for unused device operator openings Cat. # DS441 DS442 DS443 SA 206765
Options: Aluminum body (mandatory suffix on DS443 must be included in catalog number) Exterior epoxy powder coat finish Interior & exterior epoxy powder coat finish. Not available on three operator cover (DS443-SA)
Suffix SA S752 S753
502
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

STEP 5 Select Back Box
4C
Back Boxes - for use with DS441 and DS442 covers or with 1 gang and 2 gang DS/DSD Series covers
Dead End EDS171 EDS271 EDS371 EDS172 EDS272 EDS372 Through Feed EDSC171 EDSC271 EDSC371 EDSC172 EDSC272 EDSC372 Hub Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 1 /2" 3 /4" 1"
1
Back Box Arrangement Single gang back box Single gang back box Single gang back box Double gang back box Double gang back box Double gang back box
Options: Aluminum body Exterior epoxy powder coat finish Interior & exterior epoxy powder coat finish
Suffix SA S752 S753
4C
Back Boxes for use with DS443-SA cover or with 11/2 gang DS511 (3-operator) Series covers
Dead End EFD1491 SA EFD2491 SA EFD3491 SA Options Exterior epoxy powder coat finish Interior & exterior epoxy powder coat finish Through Feed EFDC1491 SA EFDC2491 SA EFDC3491 SA Hub Size /2" 3 /4" 1"
1
Back Box Arrangement 11/2 gang back box 11/2 gang back box 11/2 gang back box Suffix S752 S753
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
503
4C

Back Boxes for use with DS441 and DS442 covers

Through Feed EDSC378 Hub Size 1" Back Box Arrangement 3 gang tandem
Common Cover Assemblies Cat. # DS455 DS476 DS456 DS429 DS454 DS510 Description With one pilot light With one pilot light and transformer With two pilot lights With one pushbutton With two pushbuttons With one pushbutton and one pilot light
4C
Add color symbol for each pilot light from table below. Color Symbol Color Red Green J1 J3 Amber Clear
Symbol J6 J10
Color Blue
Symbol J11
Add suffix below for transformer primary voltage:
Transformers Voltages above 125

Nom. Volts 5060Hz Transformer 220 / 110 440 / 110 550 / 110 Primary Voltage Range 220240 440480 550600 Suffix T2 T4 T5
If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: OFF RESET START RUN TRIP STOP JOG TEST ON OPEN DOWN EMERGENCY CLOSE IN FORWARD UP OUT REVERSE
LIGHT ON HAND AUTOMATIC RAISE LOWER
504
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

EDSCM Modular Multi-Gang Control Device Bodies
Applications:
Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups C, D* Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B (Div. 2) CD, 9EFG
4C
For use with DSD device cover sub-assemblies see page 507.
Modular control device bodies are for surface mounting combinations of control device equipment for use in: Industrial areas such as chemical plants, oil and gas refineries, paint and varnish manufacturing plants, gasoline bulk loading terminals, grain elevators, grain processing industries, coal processing or handling areas where atmospheres may contain hazardous gases or dusts, and arcing of enclosed devices must not ignite the surrounding atmosphere. Conjunction with magnetic starters or contactors for remote control and monitoring motors. Manual starting and stopping of small AC or DC motors. Controlling and supplying energy to portable electrical devices such as motor generator sets, compressors, conveyors, portable tools, etc.
4C
Features:
EDSCM Modular Control Stations have many distinct advantages over multiple individual units: Reduce installation costs. A multi-gang device assembly can be installed in less time than several single-gang units. Seals not required between gangs. Improved appearance. No exposed conduit runs between devices. Lightweight. Fifteen-gang aluminum device body can be installed by one person. Mounting feet are provided on the top and bottom of every gang to facilitate installation. Two and three gang tandem bodies have 11/4" through feed inward horizontal hubs and 1" or 2" vertical through feed hubs. Pipe plugs are installed in one horizontal hub and both vertical hubs. Single-gang device bodies have 1" through feed inward horizontal hubs and 3/4" through feed vertical hubs. Pipe plugs are installed in one horizontal hub and both vertical hubs. All hubs are taper tapped and have integral bushings. Close nipples, which are used to join two or more device bodies together, are furnished with EDSCM 21, 32, 33, 62 and 63 units. Any combination of bodies can be joined together horizontally.

(When used with DSD device sub-assemblies)*: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class I, Division 2, Group B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 7B (Div.2) CD, 9EFG UL Standard: 1203 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30 EDSCM21 Description Single Gang Tandem Two Gang Tandem Two Gang Tandem Three Gang Tandem Three Gang EDSCM32 EDSCM62 EDSCM33 EDSCM63 Through Feed Hub Size
3
Cat. # EDSCM21 EDSCM32 EDSCM62 EDSCM33 EDSCM63
/4" 1" 2" 1" 2"
Standard Materials:
* When a CPS receptacle cover device is used, the assembly meets requirements for Class I, Groups C and D areas only. EDSCM32 and EDSCM62 will not accept covers with S697 or S701 suffixes. Bottom gang opening will accept covers with S697 or S701 suffixes. In Class I areas all conduit runs entering bodies must be sealed. As many as five bodies can be joined horizontally without an intervening seal.
Finish:
Natural
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
505
4C

EDSCM Modular Multi-Gang Control Device Bodies
Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups C, D* Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B (Div. 2) CD, 9EFG
Dimensions
In Inches:
4C
EDSCM21
EDSCM32
EDSCM62
EDSCM33
* When a CPS receptacle cover device is used, the assembly meets requirements for Class I, Groups C and D areas only. Dimensions are approximate. Not for construction purposes.
EDSCM63
506
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

DSD Cover and Device Sub-assemblies
For use with EDSCM modular control device bodies see page 505 and EDS/EDSC back boxes.
Cl. I. Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG Standard Finishes:
Feraloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Copper-free aluminum natural
4C
Features:
Large machine screws for fastening covers to bodies Lockout hole for padlock having 1/4" hasp is provided when used with covers for front lever and side rocker type operation Lockout provisions on front operated pushbutton (marked "STOP" and "OFF") and all selector switch covers For covers with front lever and side rocker type operating handles, threaded type shafts and bushings are used to ensure flametightness Accurately ground flange for flametight joint when mated with ground flange on back box
Options:
The following special options are available by adding suffix to Cat. #: Description Suffix Lockout provision on front operated pushbutton cover (standard on buttons marked "STOP" and "OFF")....................................................................................... S153 Three-position selector switches with modified operation: Momentary contact clockwise operation, spring return to center, maintained contact counter-clockwise operation....................................................................... S634 Momentary contact counter-clockwise operation, spring return to center, maintained contact clockwise operation.................................................................. S635 Emergency "STOP" button momentary front operated mushroom button breaks normally closed contacts (DL02 legend plate included - must specify legend text) S111 Bodies and covers copper-free aluminum.............................................................. SA For 24 VDC operation on pilot lights......................................................................... S300 Maintained contact mushroom head with lockout and guard (Will not fit with a pilot light if transformer is required)........................................................................... S769 Spring return to center from right and left (For DEV43 or DEV44 only).................... S842 Key Operated removable from all positions........................................................... S847 K1 Key Operated removable from left position for DEV42 or from center for DEV43 and DEV44................................................................................................................. S847 K2 Key Operated removable from right position for DEV42 or from left for DEV43 and DEV44................................................................................................................. S847 K3 Key Operated removable from right position for DEV43 and DEV44..................... S847 K4
4C

(When used with EDSCM & EDS bodies): NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 7B (Div. 2) CD, 9EFG UL Standards: 894, 698 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30 Pushbuttons, Pilot Lights & Selector Switches (when used with EFS bodies): NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 7BCD, 9EFG UL Standard: 1203 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
Ordering Information Manual Motor Starters

Poles Max. H.P. Max. Volts A.C. With Allen-Bradley Bulletin 600 Switches 1 1 115230 2 1 115230 With General Electric Switches 1 1 2 1 With Cutler-Hammer Switches 1 1 2 1 With Arrow-Hart Switches Without Overload Protection 2 5 2 7.5 3 7.5 3 15 115230 115230 115230 115230 Cat. # DSD910 DSD911 DSD912 DSD913 DSD914 DSD915
Standard Materials:
Covers, front operated Feraloy iron alloy and copper-free aluminum Covers, side operated copper-free aluminum Shafts and shaft bushings stainless steel Rocker handles, pushbuttons and guards type 6 / 6 nylon Sealing enclosures copper-free aluminum CPS delayed action receptacle cover: Receptacle housing copper-free aluminum Insulation diallyl phthalate (DAP) Contacts brass
250 600 250 600
(30A) (30A) (30A) (20A)
DSD916 DSD916 DSD917 DSD917
When a CPS receptacle cover device is used, the assembly meets requirements for Class I, Groups C and D areas only. * For pushbuttons, pilot lights, & selector switches, use EFS back box with required external conduit seal for 1 inch hub size, within 5 feet for Class I, Division 1, Group B applications. A comparable factory sealed cover will fit on the EDSCM21 body, EDS and EDSC bodies and in bottom gang of EDSCM33 and EDSCM63 bodies. To order, add suffix S701 to catalog number.
Includes one interchangeable heater. To select heater see pages 463464. Symbol 0 (zero) may be used to indicate heater omitted.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
507
4C

DSD Cover and Device Sub-Assemblies
Cl. I. Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG
DSD918
DSD922
DSD933
DSD962
DSD970
CPS152R
ENR5201
For use with EDSCM modular control device bodies see page 505 & EFS/EDS back boxes.
4C
Front Operated Pushbutton Stations

600 VAC Heavy Duty, Factory Sealed
Number of Normal Cover Buttons Position 1 1 1 Circuit Universal 2 Circuits Universal 2 Circuits 2 2 Circuits Universal 2 Circuits Start-Stop unless otherwise specified 2 Circuits Universal Mushroom Head 3 Circuits Universal 3 Circuits Universal 3 Circuits Universal Double pilot light single pushbutton combo 3 Circuits Universal Double pushbutton - single pilot light combo Diagram Cat. # DSD918 DSD919 DSD920 DSD921
Delayed Action Receptacles

Factory Sealed
Rating 20 A, 1 HP, 125250 VAC 60 Hertz 20 A, 18 VDC 30 A, 11/2 HP, 125250 VAC 60 Hertz; 7 A, 1/2 HP, 480 VAC, 60 Hertz 30 A, 3 HP, 125250 VAC 60 Hertz; 7A, 1 HP, 480 VAC, 60 Hertz Cat. # CPS152R (2 wire, 3 pole) CPS532R (2 wire, 3 pole) CPS732R (3 wire, 4 pole)
General Purpose, Dead Front

Factory Sealed
Rating Cat. # ENR5201 5-20R Diagram
DSD922
20 A, 125 VAC
2 3 (2-operator) 3 (3-operator)
DSD970 DSD962 DS511 SA
20 A, 250 VAC
ENR6202 6-20R
3 (3-operator)
DS513 SA
If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: OFF RESET LIGHT ON START RUN TRIP HAND STOP JOG TEST AUTOMATIC ON OPEN DOWN RAISE EMERGENCY CLOSE IN LOWER FORWARD UP OUT REVERSE
* For pushbuttons, pilot lights, & selector switches, use EFS back box with required external conduit seal for 1 inch hub size, within 5 feet for Class I, Division 1, Group B applications. When a CPS receptacle cover device is used, the assembly meets requirements for Class I, Groups C and D areas only. Two universal contact blocks, must be wired as two circuits with one normally open and one normally closed. 1 green button, 1 red button, and lockout provision provided as standard. 16 Amp., 125V. 10 Amp., 250V. To order a comparable factory sealed cover for EDS, EDSC, EDSCM21 and the bottom gang of EDSCM33 and EDSCM63 bodies, add suffix S697. Cannot be factory sealed. Can only be used with EFD Series 11/ 2 gang back boxes. Pushbuttons include contact blocks. Standard pushbutton color is black. For optional colors - red, green - write in color. Example: DS511 GREEN BLACK RED-SA. First color is for uppermost button. For optional legend markings write in marking after device operator color. Example: DS513-J3 JOG-J1 STOP GREEN-SA.
3 (3-operator)
DS514 SA
Front Operated General Use Snap Switch

Style 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole 3-Way 4-Way 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Way Amperes 120 VAC 20 20 20 20 30 30 30 277 VAC 20 20 20 20 30 30 30 Cat. # DSD933 DSD934 DSD935 DSD936 DSD937 DSD939 DSD940 DSD941
508
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

DSD Cover and Device Sub-Assemblies
Cl. I. Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG
4C
Pilot Light Devices

Factory Sealed
Description With one pilot light With two pilot lights (Not available with a transformer) DSD951 DSD925 DSD947-J1-J1 With one pilot light and transformer With one pilot light and pushbutton station With one pilot light and 1 double pushbutton station With one pilot light & transformer and 1 double pushbutton station DSD958 DSD957 DSD961-J1 For use with EDSCM modular control device bodies see page 505 & EFS/EDS back boxes. Triple pilot light Double pilot light - single pushbutton combo Double pushbutton - single pilot light combo Diagram Cat. # DSD948
4C
DSD947 DSD948 DSD958 DSD961
4C
DSD961 DS512 SA DS513 SA DS514 SA
Ordering Information Side Operated Pushbutton Station

600 VAC Heavy Duty, Factory Sealed
Normal Position 1 Circuit Universal 2 Circuits Universal 2 Circuits 1 Open - A 1 Closed - B Start-Stop unless otherwise specified Diagram Cat. # DSD949 DSD950
Blank Cover
Description Blank Cover Cat. # DSD957
Add color symbol for each pilot light from table below. Color Symbol Color Symbol Color Symbol Red Green J1 J3 Amber Clear J6 J10 Blue J11
DSD951
Add suffix below for transformer primary voltage:
Transformers Voltages above 125

Nom. Volts 5060Hz Transformer 220 / 110 440 / 110 550 / 110 Primary Voltage Range 220240 440480 550600 Suffix T2 T4 T5
Selector Switches
Maintained Contact 600 VAC Heavy Duty, Factory Sealed
Style Two Circuit Two Position Four Circuit Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Cat. # DSD923
DSD924
DSD925 Two Circuit Three Position Four Circuit DSD926
If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: OFF RESET LIGHT ON START RUN TRIP HAND STOP JOG TEST AUTOMATIC ON OPEN DOWN RAISE EMERGENCY CLOSE IN LOWER FORWARD UP OUT REVERSE Specify indicating plate markings. Standard indicating plate markings available are as follows: Two-Position FAST, SLOW IN, OUT RUN, JOG OPEN, CLOSE RAISE, LOWER HAND, AUTOMATIC UP, DOWN START, STOP FORWARD, REVERSE ON, OFF Three-Position JOG, OFF, RUN 1, OFF, 2 AUTOMATIC, OFF, HAND OPEN, OFF, CLOSE FORWARD, OFF, REVERSE UP, OFF, DOWN FAST, OFF, SLOW
DSD927
* For pushbuttons, pilot lights, & selector switches, use EFS back box with required external conduit seal for 1 inch hub size, within 5 feet for Class I, Division 1, Group B applications. LED pilot lights can be furnished in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps. Add suffix LED to Cat. No. after last color symbol.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
509
4C

DSD-SR Series Horsepower Rated Selector Switch 30 A, 600 V; Front Operated
Cl. I, Groups C & D Cl. II, Groups E, F & G Cl. III Enclosure 3, 5 & 12
Switch Function Cat. # DSD DSD DSD DSD DSD DSD SR30120 SR30220 SR30320 SR30420 SR30520 SR30620 Number of Poles 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 Number of Positions 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1-3 Pole Connecting Diagram
ON/OFF
1-6 Pole
DOUBLE-THROW without OFF
DSD SR30121 DSD SR30221 DSD SR30321
4C
DOUBLE-THROW without OFF with electrically isolated contacts
1 2 3
2 2 2 1-3 Pole
DOUBLE-THROW with OFF
1 2 3
3 3 3 1-3 Pole
DOUBLE-THROW with OFF and electrically isolated contacts
1 2 3
3 3 3 1-3 Pole
Electrical Specification
Horsepower Rating Voltage 3PH 1PH 120 3 1.5 240 7.5 3 480 10 5 600 10 5 Maximum Current: 30 A Heavy-duty A600 rating
Options:
Description Lockout for 2 position switch, handle in either position Lockout for 3 position switch, handle in either position Suffix SX178 S349 DSD-SR cover assembly shown mounted to an EDS back box
510
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Fully Assembled EFS and EDS Factory Sealed Devices
Applications:
4C

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG UL Standard: 1203 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
Factory sealed enclosures are installed in a rigid metallic conduit system for surface mounting adjacent to or remote from equipment being controlled and are used: To prevent arcing of enclosed device from causing ignition of a specific hazardous atmosphere or atmospheres external to the enclosure In industrial areas such as chemical plants, oil and gas refineries, paint and varnish manufacturing plants, gasoline bulk loading terminals, grain elevators, grain processing industries, coal processing or handling areas, or metal handling or finishing areas where atmosphere may contain hazardous gases and/or dust In non-hazardous areas where sturdy, durable enclosures are required In conjunction with magnetic starters or contactors for remote control of motors Manual motor starting switch enclosures are used: For manual starting of small AC or DC motors To provide manual starting and stopping and, in the case of units with heaters, motor running protection
Standard Materials:
Bodies Feraloy iron alloy; copper-free aluminum Front operated pushbutton and pilot light covers Feraloy iron alloy Side operated type pushbutton covers copper-free aluminum Shafts stainless steel Shaft bushings stainless steel Rocker handle and pushbutton guards type 6 / 6 nylon Sealing enclosures copper-free aluminum
4C
Features:
Factory sealed devices have many distinct advantages: Reduce installation problems Eliminate external seals Lower installation costs Improve safety Are used with general purpose snap and pushbutton type switches Standard neoprene covers for front operated pushbuttons. Prevents accumulation of dirt and entrance of water around operating shafts Mounting lugs and taper tapped hubs with integral bushings Large machine screws for fastening covers to bodies Lockout provisions on front operated pushbutton (marked "STOP" and "OFF") and selector switch covers Lockout hole for padlock having 1/4" hasp is provided when used with covers for front lever and side rocker type operation Close tolerances in machining of wide, mating flanges and journalled shafts and bearings for front button operation, produces flametightness of enclosure joints On enclosures with front lever and side rocker type operating handles, threaded type shafts and bushings are used to ensure flametightness Dead end (EFS or EDS) or through feed (EFSC or EDSC) hubs 1/2" to 1" sizes
Standard Finishes:
Options:
The following special options are available from the factory by adding suffix to Cat. #: Description Suffix Emergency "Stop" button (momentary) front operated red mushroom button..................................................................... S111 Lockout provision on front operated pushbutton cover (standard on buttons marked "OFF" and "STOP").................. S153 For 24 VDC operation on pilot lights....................................... S300 Three-position selector switches with modified operation: Momentary contact clockwise operation, spring return to center, maintained contact counter-clockwise operation...... S634 Momentary contact counter-clockwise operation, spring return to center, maintained contact clockwise operation.... S635 Bodies and covers (single and two gang units) copper-free aluminum.................................................................................. SA Where indicated in the catalog listings, EDS units suitable for Class I, Division 1, Group B usage can be supplied, add suffix -GB, EFS units are suitable for Class I, Division 1, Group B as standard............................................................... GB Maintained contact mushroom head with lockout and guard. May not be combined with a pilot light if a transformer is required.................................................................................... S769 Spring return to center from right and left (For DEV43 or DEV44 only).............................................................................. S842 EDS bodies and factory sealed cover and device sub-assemblies are available for field assembly (see page 507).
*See suffix GB in Options section
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
511
4C

Fully Assembled EFS and EDS Factory Sealed Devices
Methods of Factory Sealing EFS/EDS Series EDS Series
4C
Factory sealed EDS and EFS pilot light, pushbutton and selector switch control stations do not need external sealing. Device contacts are factory sealed in explosionproof ESWP contact blocks. Small, compact enclosures have accurately ground wide flanges on both the body and cover for a flame-tight joint.
Dimensions (Inches)
Bodies
EDS factory sealed snap switches or manual motor starting switches do not need external sealing. The switches are enclosed in a unique sealing well with double flanges which mate with the cover and the body. Small, compact enclosures have accurately ground wide flanges on body, cover and sealing well for flame-tight joints. Wiring pigtails are factory sealed from under the sealing well. Reliable pouring of seals at the factory ensures safe sealing. Covers
Hub Size 1 /2 3 /4 1
Dim. Dim. "h" "i"

3 7
/4 /8 1
13 13
/16 /16 15 /16
Side View
General use snap switch front operated and manual motor starting switch
Pushbutton switch rocker type side operated
Front View - Single gang
Front View - Two gang
Pushbutton switch front operated
Selector switch
*See suffix GB in Options section. Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes. Surface covers have same length and width as bodies.
512
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Fully Assembled EDS Factory Sealed Pushbutton Stations Front Operated, 600VAC Heavy Duty
Ordering Information - Single Gang
Normal Pos. 1 Circuit Universal 2 Circuits Universal 2 Circuits STARTSTOP unless otherwise specified
4C
2 Circuits Universal
2 Circuits
Marking
Specify
Specify
Specify
Specify
Diagram Replacement Pushbuttons EDS2184 ED11 ED12 ED12 ED12 ED12 EDS2190
Enclosure with Pushbuttons 4C

Hub Size
1 3
Cat. # Dead End EDS1184 EDS2184 EDS3184 Through Feed EDSC1184 EDSC2184 EDSC3184
Cat. #
Cat. # EDS115 EDS215 EDS315
Cat. #
Cat. # EDS1155 EDS2155 EDS3155 EDSC1155 EDSC2155 EDSC3155 EDSC225
/2 /4 1
EDS2190 EDS3190 EDSC1190 EDSC2190 EDSC3190
EDS2192 EDS3192
/2 3 /4 1
1
EDSC115 EDSC1192 EDSC215 EDSC2192 EDSC315 EDSC3192
Dimensions
see page 512
Ordering Information - Two Gang

Normal Pos. Marking 1 Circuit Universal Specify 2 Circuits Universal Specify 2 Circuits START-STOP unless otherwise specified
Diagram Replacement Pushbuttons ED11 ED12 ED12
Enclosure with Pushbuttons

Hub Size
3
/4 1 /2 /4 1
Cat. # Dead End EDS2284 EDS3284 Through Feed EDSC1284 EDSC2284 EDSC3284
OFF RUN JOG RESET TRIP TEST
Cat. # EDS2290 EDS3290 EDSC1290 EDSC2290 EDSC3290

LIGHT ON HAND AUTOMATIC
Cat. # EDS225 EDS325 EDSC125 EDSC225 EDSC325

EMERGENCY FORWARD REVERSE OPEN CLOSE UP DOWN IN OUT RAISE LOWER
1 3
START STOP ON
* Class I, Group B: Consider using EFS series pushbuttons, see page 514. All enclosures listed above can be modified for Class I, Group B, Div. 1 usage. Add suffix GB to the Cat. No. Seals must be installed within 11/2" of each conduit opening in Division 1. These products are suitable for Group B, Div. 2 as listed, without external seals. In Canada, for Group B applications consult factory. Two universal contact blocks, must be wired as two circuits, with one normally open and one normally closed. Single external button operates both inner buttons simultaneously. For replacement contact blocks, see page 557.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
513
4C

Fully Assembled EFS Factory Sealed Pushbutton Stations Front Operated, 600VAC Heavy Duty
Normal Pos. 1 Circuit Universal 2 Circuits Universal 2 Circuits STARTSTOP unless otherwise specified 2 Circuits Universal 2 Circuits
Marking
Specify
Specify
Specify
Specify
Diagram Replacement Pushbuttons ED11 ED12 ED12 ED12 ED12
Enclosure with Pushbuttons 4C

Hub Size
1 3
EFS2184
Cat. # EFS115 EFS215 EFS315 Cat. # Cat. # EFS1155 EFS2155 EFS3155
EFSC2190
/2 /4 1 /2 /4 1
Cat. # Dead End EFS1184 EFS2184 EFS3184
Cat. #
EFS2190 EFS3190
EFS2192 EFS3192
Dimensions
see page 512
1 3
Through Feed EFSC1184 EFSC1190 EFSC115 EFSC2184 EFSC2190 EFSC215 EFSC3184 EFSC3190 EFSC315
EFSC1192 EFSC1155 EFSC2192 EFSC2155 EFSC3192 EFSC3155
If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: START STOP ON OFF RUN JOG RESET TRIP TEST LIGHT ON HAND AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY FORWARD REVERSE OPEN CLOSE UP DOWN IN OUT RAISE LOWER
*Class I, Group B: All enclosures listed above are suitable for Class I, Group B, Div. 1 usage. Seals only have to be installed on 1 inch conduit within 5 ft. in Division 1. For replacement contact blocks, see page 557. Two universal contact blocks, must be wired as two circuits, with one normally open and one normally closed. Single external button operates both inner buttons simultaneously.
514
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Fully Assembled EDS Factory Sealed Pushbutton Stations Side Rocker Handle, 600VAC Heavy Duty
4C
Dimensions
EDSC2162 EDS2696 see page 512

Normal Pos. 1 Circuit Universal Specify 2 Circuits Universal Specify 2 Circuits START-STOP unless otherwise specified
Two Gang
Normal Pos. 1 Circuit Universal Specify 2 Circuits Universal Specify 2 Circuits
4C
Marking
Marking
START-STOP unless otherwise specified
Diagram Replacement ED11 Pushbuttons ED12 ED12
Diagram Replacement Pushbuttons ED11 ED12 ED12

Hub Size /2 /4 1
1 3 1 3

Cat. # EDS1162 EDS2162 EDS3162 EDSC1162 EDSC2162 EDSC3162 Hub Size
3 /4 1
Cat. # Dead End EDS1596 EDS2596 EDS3596
Cat. #
EDS2194 EDS3194
Cat. # Dead End EDS2696 EDS3696
Cat. # EDS2294 EDS3294
Cat. # EDS2262 EDS3262
/2 /4 1
Through Feed EDSC1596 EDSC1194 EDSC2596 EDSC2194 EDSC3596 EDSC3194
/2 3 /4 1
1
Through Feed EDSC1696 EDSC1294 EDSC1262 EDSC2696 EDSC2294 EDSC2262 EDSC3696 EDSC3294 EDSC3262
If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: START STOP ON OFF RUN JOG RESET TRIP TEST LIGHT ON HAND AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY FORWARD REVERSE OPEN CLOSE UP DOWN IN OUT RAISE LOWER
*Class I, Group B: All enclosures listed above can be modified for Class I, Group B, Div. 1 usage. Add suffix GB to the Cat. No. Seals must be installed within 11/2" of each conduit opening in Division 1. These products are suitable for Group B, Div. 2 as listed, without external seals. For replacement contact blocks, see page 557. Two universal contact blocks, must be wired as two circuits, with one normally open and one normally closed.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
515
4C

Fully Assembled EFS Pilot Lights
Applications:
EFS pilot lights are used: In areas which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors, gases or highly combustible dusts For installation at petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist To visually indicate at a remote location that the desired function is being performed
Features:
Small, compact enclosures with accurately ground flange on both body and cover for flame-tight joint Pilot lights are factory sealed. Conventional external seals are not required Dead end (EFS) or through feed (EFSC) hubs 1/2" to 1" sizes
4C
Options:
The following special options are available from factory by adding suffix to Cat. #: Description Suffix Pilot lights for circuit voltages up to 600 volts maximum (standard voltage range 110125) See Listings LED pilot lights in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps Bodies and covers copper-free aluminum 24 VDC operation on pilot lights LED SA S300

NEC/CEC: Class I, Groups B*, C, D Class II, Groups E, F, G Class III NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG UL Standard: 1203 CSA Standard: C22.2
Standard Materials:
Bodies Feraloy iron alloy (U.S.) and copper-free aluminum (Canada) Pilot light covers Feraloy iron alloy Operating shafts stainless steel
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized with aluminum acrylic paint Copper-free aluminum natural Stainless steel natural

Pilot lights 110 to 600VAC
* External conduit seal required for 1 inch hub size in Division 1, Group B within 5 feet (1.5 meters) of enclosure.
516
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Fully Assembled EFS Pilot Lights
4C
Pilot lights listed below are factory sealed and do not require external seals*. Lamps are 6 watt, type S6, candelabra base for use on 110125 volt circuits. LED pilot lights can be provided in place of standard incandescent lamps by adding suffix LED after the color symbols. For Options see pages 516517. Enclosures with single pilot covers only can be equipped with a transformer for each lamp for high voltages as shown.
Transformer Voltages Above 125

Nominal Volts 5060 Hertz Transformer 220 / 110 440 / 110 550 / 110 Primary Voltage Range 220240 440480 550600 Cat. # Suffix T2 T4 T5
Enclosure with Single Pilot Light Hub Size Dead End Cat. # /2 EFS11524 3 /4 EFS21524 1 EFS31524 Enclosure with Double Pilot Lights Hub Size Dead End Cat. #
1
Through Feed Cat. # EFSC11524 EFSC21524 EFSC31524 Through Feed Cat. # EFSC11561 EFSC21561 EFSC31561
4C
/2 3 /4 1
1
EFS11561 EFS21561 EFS31561
Add color symbol for each pilot light from table below. Example: EFS11561 with red and green lights is EFS11561-J1-J3 Color Symbol Color Symbol Color Symbol Red Green J1 J3 Amber Clear J6 J10 Blue J11
Dimensions
In Inches:
Typical body side view

Front view
Cover
Hub Size 1 /2 3 /4 1
Dim. "h" /4 7 /8 1
3
Dim. "i" /16 /16 15 /16

13 13
* External conduit seal required for 1 inch hub size in Division 1, Group B within 5 feet (1.5 meters) of enclosure. LED pilot lights can be furnished in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps. Add suffix LED to catalog number after color symbol. Surface covers have same length and width dimensions as bodies.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
517
4C EDS / EFS Series Control Stations

Fully Assembled EDS Factory Sealed Combination Pushbutton and Pilot Light Stations 600VAC, Heavy Duty
Pushbutton contacts and pilot light receptacles are sealed in separate chambers. External seals are not required. Lamps are 6 watt, type S6, candelabra base for use on 110125 volt circuits.
Two gang units with single pilot light covers can be furnished with transformers. Specify markings for each button. See table below listings.
Dimensions
see page 512
Ordering Information Single Gang

Description Dead End No. 1 Pushbuttons No. Pilot Lights Diagram 1 Through Feed 1 1
Ordering Information Two Gang

Dead End No. Pushbuttons No. Pilot Lights 2 1 Through Feed 2 1 Dead End 2 2 Through Feed 2 2
4C
Diagram
Hub Size /2 3 /4 1
1
Hub Size Cat. # Cat. # EDS11473 EDSC11473 1/2 EDS21473 EDSC21473 3/4 EDS31473 EDSC31473 1
Cat. # Cat. # EDS12471 EDSC12471 EDS22471 EDSC22471 EDS32471 EDSC32471
Cat. #
Cat. #
EDS22868 EDSC22868 EDS32868 EDSC32868
Add color symbol for each pilot light from table below. Example: EDS21473 with a red light is EDS21473-J1 Color Red Green Symbol J1 J3 Color Amber Clear Symbol J6 J10 Color Blue Symbol J11
If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of stardard markings below: START STOP RESET LIGHT ON EMERGENCY OPEN DOWN RAISE STOP RUN TRIP HAND FORWARD CLOSE IN LOWER ON JOG TEST AUTOMATIC REVERSE UP OUT
* All enclosures listed above can be modified for Class I, Group B, Division 1 usage. Add suffix GB to the Cat. No. Example: EDS11473-J1-GB. Conduit seal(s) must be installed within 11/2" of each conduit opening. These products are suitable for Group B, Div. 2 as listed, without external conduit seals. LED pilot lights can be furnished in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps. Add suffix LED to catalog number after color symbol. For 24 VDC operation on pilot lights add suffix S300.
518
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Fully Assembled EDS Factory Sealed Selector Switches Maintained Contact, 600VAC Heavy Duty
4C
Furnished with pushbuttons, cam actuated by a maintained contact selector mechanism to operate in the sequences shown in the diagrams below. Specify indicating plate markings. See table below listings.
Dimensions
see page 512
4C
EDS11273

Enclosure with Switch Style Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Replacement Contact Blocks Hub Size /2 /4 1
1 3
Dead End Cat. # EDS11271 EDS21271 EDS31271 EDS11272 EDS21272 EDS31272 EDS11273 EDS21273 EDS31273 EDS11274 EDS21274 EDS31274 EDS11275 EDS21275 EDS31275
Through Feed Cat. # EDSC11271 EDSC21271 EDSC31271 EDSC11272 EDSC21272 EDSC31272 EDSC11273 EDSC21273 EDSC31273 EDSC11274 EDSC21274 EDSC31274 EDSC11275 EDSC21275 EDSC31275
Two-Position, Two-Circuit
ED11
Two-Position, Four-Circuit
ED12
/2 /4 1
1 3
Three-Position, Two-Circuit
ED11
/2 /4 1
1 3
ED12 Three-Position, Four-Circuit ED12
/2 /4 1
1 3
/2 /4 1
1 3
If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: Two-Position RUN, JOG HAND, AUTOMATIC FORWARD, REVERSE FAST, SLOW OPEN, CLOSE UP, DOWN ON, OFF IN, OUT RAISE, LOWER START, STOP Three-Position RUN, OFF, JOG HAND, OFF, AUTOMATIC FORWARD, OFF, REVERSE FAST, OFF, SLOW 1, OFF, 2 OPEN, OFF, CLOSE UP, OFF, DOWN
*For Class I, Group B: Consider using EFS series selector switches, see page 520. All enclosures listed above can be modified for Class I, Group B, Div. 1 usage. Add suffix GB to the Cat. No. Seals must be installed within 11/2" of each conduit opening in Division 1. These products are suitable for Group B, Div. 2 as listed, without external seals. In Canada, for Group B applications consult factory. For replacement contact blocks, see page 557. Suffixes S634 or S635 may be used on these catalog numbers. See page 511 for explanation of options.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
519

Fully Assembled EFS Factory Sealed Selector Switches Maintained Contact, 600VAC Heavy Duty
Furnished with pushbuttons, cam actuated by a maintained contact selector mechanism to operate in the sequences shown in the diagrams below. Specify indicating plate markings. See table below listings.
Dimensions
see page 512
4C
EFS11273

Enclosure with Switch Style Two-Position, Two-Circuit Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Replacement Contact Blocks ED11 Hub Size /2 /4 1
1 3
Dead End Cat. # EFS11271 EFS21271 EFS31271 EFS11272 EFS21272 EFS31272 EFS11273 EFS21273 EFS31273 EFS11274 EFS21274 EFS31274 EFS11275 EFS21275 EFS31275
Through Feed Cat. # EFSC11271 EFSC21271 EFSC31271 EFSC11272 EFSC21272 EFSC31272 EFSC11273 EFSC21273 EFSC31273 EFSC11274 EFSC21274 EFSC31274 EFSC11275 EFSC21275 EFSC31275
Two-Position, Four-Circuit
ED12
/2 /4 1
1 3
Three-Position, Two-Circuit
ED11
/2 /4 1
1 3
ED12 Three-Position, Four-Circuit ED12
/2 /4 1
1 3
/2 /4 1
1 3
If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: Two-Position FAST, SLOW IN, OUT RUN, JOG OPEN, CLOSE RAISE, LOWER HAND, AUTOMATIC UP, DOWN START, STOP FORWARD, REVERSE ON, OFF
Three-Position RUN, OFF, JOG 1, OFF, 2 HAND, OFF, AUTOMATIC OPEN, OFF, CLOSE FORWARD, OFF, REVERSE UP, OFF, DOWN FAST, OFF, SLOW
*Class I, Group B: All enclosures listed above are suitable for Class I, Group B, Div. 1 usage. Seals only have to be installed on 1 inch conduit within 5 ft. in Division 1. For replacement contact blocks, see page 557. Suffixes S634 or S635 may be used on these catalog numbers. See page 511 for explanation of options.
520
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Fully Assembled EDS Factory Sealed General Use Snap Switches
4C
Dimensions
see page 512
EDSC2129
EDS2229
Ordering Information - General Use Snap Switch Front Operated

4C Single Gang
Amperes Hub Size
3
Two Gang
Dead End Cat. # EDS2229 EDS2230 Through Feed Cat. # EDSC2229 EDSC228 EDSC2230 EDSC2240 EDS3229 EDS328 EDS3230 EDS3240 EDSC3229 EDSC328 EDSC3230 EDSC3240 Factory Sealed Replacement Switch SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8
Style 1-pole 2-pole 3-way 4-way 1-pole 2-pole 3-way 4-way
120VAC 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
277VAC 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
Dead End Cat. # EDS2129 EDS218 EDS2130 EDS2140 EDS3129 EDS318 EDS3130 EDS3140
Through Feed Cat. # EDSC2129 EDSC218 EDSC2130 EDSC2140 EDSC3129 EDSC318 EDSC3130 EDSC3140
/4 /4 /4
/4 1
3
1 1 1
*Class I, Group B: All units on this page can be modified for Class I, Group B usage. Add suffix GB to the Cat. No. Seals must be installed within 11/2" of each conduit opening in Division 1. In Canada, for Group B applications consult factory. ON-OFF standard marking for 1-pole and 2-pole units. Combinations of switches can be furnished. AC rated switches are tested for resistive, inductive and tungsten filament loads up to the full current rating and for motor loads up to 80% of the ampere rating.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
521

Fully Assembled EDS Factory Sealed Manual Motor Starting Switches and Enclosures
EDSC2199
EDS2229 Heater Max. Motor Full-Load Amps 0.17 0.21 0.25 0.32 0.39 0.46 0.57 0.71 0.79 0.87 0.98 1.08 1.19 1.30 1.43 1.58 1.75 1.88 2.13
4C
With Allen-Bradley Bulletin 600 Switches
Maximum HP Ratings Poles 1 2 115230 Volts AC 1 hp 1 hp Dead End Cat. # EDS2199 EDS3199 EDS21100 EDS31100 EDS2299 EDS3299 EDS22100 EDS32100 115230 Volts DC
3
Table (Allen Bradley)

CrouseHinds Symbol Number P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 P9 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 P17 P18 P19 Max. Motor Full-Load Amps 2.40 2.58 2.92 3.09 3.32 3.77 4.16 4.51 4.93 5.43 6.03 6.83 7.72 8.24 8.90 9.60 10.80 12.00 13.50 15.20 CrouseHinds Symbol Number P20 P21 P22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P27 P28 P29 P30 P31 P32 P33 P34 P35 P36 P37 P38 P39
Allen-Bradley Switch Cat. # A B BUL 600 T0X4 A B BUL 600 T0X5 Through Feed Cat. # EDSC2199 EDSC3199 EDSC21100 EDSC31100 EDSC2299 EDSC3299 EDSC22100 EDSC32100 Factory Sealed Replacement Switch SW9 SW9 SW10 SW10 SW9 SW9 SW10 SW10
/4 hp
Hub Size Poles in. Single Gang 3 /4 1 1 2 /4 1

3
Two Gang 3 /4 1 1 2 /4 1
3
These heaters are for motors rated 40C continuously. For motors rated 50C or 55C, multiply full load motor current by 0.9 and use this value to select heaters. Symbol 0 (zero) must be used to indicate heater omitted. Includes one interchangeable heater. Select heater from the table below individual listings and use symbol number as second section of the Cat. No. Example: EDS21101-W5. Insert symbol 0 (zero) to omit heater.
* Class I, Group B: All units on this page can be modified for Class I, Group B usage. Add suffix GB to the Cat. No. Seals must be installed within 11/2" of each conduit opening in Division 1. In Canada, for Group B applications consult factory. Includes one interchangeable heater. Select from the heater table and use symbol number as second section of the Cat. No. Example: EDS2199-P5. Insert symbol 0 (zero) to omit heater.
522
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Fully Assembled EDS Factory Sealed Manual Motor Starting Switches and Enclosures
Maximum HP Ratings Poles 1 2 115230 Volts AC 1 hp 1 hp Hub Dead Size End in. Cat. # 115 Volts DC 1 hp 1 hp 230 Volts DC
1
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG Ordering Information
4C

Maximum HP Ratings G.E. Switch Cat. # CR101 Y CR101 H Factory Sealed Replacement Switch SW11 SW11 SW12 SW12 SW11 SW11 SW12 SW12 120240 Poles Volts AC 1 2 1 hp 1 hp 32 120 240 Cutler-Hammer Volts DC Volts DC Volts DC Switch Cat. #
1 1
/4 hp 1 hp
/4 hp /4 hp
1 hp
/4 hp 1 hp
MST01 MST02
Poles
Through Feed Cat. #
Single Gang 3 /4 1 1
3
EDS21093 EDSC21093 EDS31093 EDSC31093 EDS21094 EDSC21094 EDS31094 EDSC31094 EDS22093 EDSC22093 EDS32093 EDSC32093 EDS22094 EDSC22094 EDS32094 EDSC32094
Hub Dead Through Factory Sealed Size End Feed Replacement Poles in. Cat. # Cat. # Switch Single Gang 3 /4 EDS21101 EDSC21101 SW13 1 1 EDS31101 EDSC31101 SW13 2
3 /4 1
4C
/4 1
EDS21102 EDSC21102 SW14 EDS31102 EDSC31102 SW14 EDS22101 EDSC22101 SW13 EDS32101 EDSC32101 SW13 EDS22102 EDSC22102 SW14 EDS32102 EDSC32102 SW14
Two Gang 3 /4 1 1
3
Two Gang 3 /4 1 1 2
3 /4 1
/4 1
Heater Max. Motor Full-Load Amps .48 .53 .58 .65 .71 .78 .86 .95 1.04 1.14 1.25 1.37 1.49 1.63 1.78 1.95 2.13 2.32 2.53 2.76
Table (General Electric)

CrouseHinds Symbol Number G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 G17 G18 G19 G20 G21 Max. Motor Full-Load Amps 3.01 3.27 3.56 3.88 4.22 4.60 5.00 5.43 5.90 6.41 6.98 7.60 8.25 8.95 9.75 10.60 11.40 12.50 13.60 14.80 16.00 CrouseHinds Symbol Number G22 G23 G24 G25 G26 G27 G28 G29 G30 G31 G32 G33 G34 G35 G36 G37 G38 G39 G40 G41 G42
Heater Max. Motor Full-Load Amps .43 .48 .53 .58 .64 .71 .78 .87 .95 1.03 1.15 1.27 1.35 1.51 1.67 1.83 1.99 2.23 2.47 2.71
Table (Cutler-Hammer)
CrouseHinds Symbol Number W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 W9 W10 W11 W12 W13 W14 W15 W16 W17 W18 W19 W20 Max. Motor Full-Load Amps 2.95 3.27 3.59 3.99 4.39 4.79 5.26 5.83 6.39 7.03 7.74 8.46 9.35 10.30 11.35 12.47 13.67 15.12 16.00 CrouseHinds Symbol Number W21 W22 W23 W24 W25 W26 W27 W28 W29 W30 W31 W32 W33 W34 W35 W36 W37 W38 W39
Dimensions
see page 512 These heaters are for motors rated 40C continuously. For motors rated 50C or 55C, multiply full load motor current by 0.9 and use this value to select heaters. Symbol 0 (zero) must be used to indicate heater omitted. Includes one interchangeable heater. Select heater from the table below individual listings and use symbol number as second section of the Cat. No. Example: EDS21101-W5. Insert symbol 0 (zero) to omit heater.
*Class I, Group B: All units on this page can be modified for Class I, Group B usage. Add suffix GB to the Cat. No. Seals must be installed within 11/2" of each conduit opening in Division 1. In Canada, for Group B applications consult factory. Includes one interchangeable heater. Select from the heater table and use symbol number as second section of the Cat. No. Example: EDS2199-P5. Insert symbol 0 (zero) to omit heater.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
523
4C

Fully Assembled EFS Fire Alarm Station
Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups B*, C, D Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG
Applications:
EFS Fire Alarm Stations are used: In areas which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors, gases or highly combustible dusts For installation at petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist To indicate at a remote location that a fire exists in the area
Features:
Small, compact enclosures with accurately ground flange on both body and cover for flame-tight joint EFS21095

NEC/CEC Class I, Groups B*, C, D Class II, Groups E, F, G Class III NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG UL Standard: 1203 CSA Standard: C22.2 As indicated under catalog listings, certain units can be supplied for Class I, Division 1, Group B (NEMA/EEMAC 7B). Seals must be installed within 11/ 2" of each conduit opening.
Hub Size
3
4C
Dead End Cat. # EFS21095
Through Feed Cat. # EFSC21095
/4
Dimensions
In Inches:
Standard Materials:
Bodies Feraloy iron alloy (U.S.) and copper-free aluminum (Canada)
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized with aluminum acrylic paint Copper-free aluminum natural Stainless steel natural
Options:
The following special option is available from factory by adding suffix to Cat. #: Description Suffix Where indicated in the catalog listings, units suitable for Class I, Division 1, Group B usage can be supplied............. GB*
Typical body side view Hub Size 1 /2 3 /4 1
Front view
Cover
Dim."h"
3 7
Dim."i"
13 13
/4 /8 1
13
/16 /16 /16
Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes. Surface covers have same length and width dimensions as bodies. *Class I, Group B option: Units listed above can be modified for Class I, Division 1, Group B usage. Add suffix GB to the Cat. No. Example: EFS21095-GB. Seals must be installed within 11/2" of each conduit opening.
524
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Sub-assemby Reference Guide
For a complete list of components for EDS & EFS Control Stations, see page 500 for FlexStation Series
4C
Control Stations and their Sub-assemblies

Complete Control Station PUSHBUTTONS EDS2184 EDSC2184 EDS215 EDSC215 EDS2190 EDSC2190 EDS2184-S769-EM-SP EDSC2184-S769-EM-SP EDS2284 EDSC2284 EDS225 EDSC225 EDS2290 EDSC2290 PILOT LIGHTS EFS21524-J* EFSC21524-J* EFS21561-J*-J* EFSC21561-J*-J* Sub-assembly Cover & Device DSD918 DSD918 DSD922 DSD922 DSD921 DSD921 DSD918-S769-EM-SP DSD918-S769-EM-SP (2) DSD918 (2) DSD918 (2) DSD922 (2) DSD922 (2) DSD921 (2) DSD921 DSD948-J* DSD948-J* DSD947-J*-J* DSD947-J*-J* Cast Back Box EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS272 EDSC272 EDS272 EDSC272 EDS272 EDSC272 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS272 EDSC272 EDS272 EDSC272 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 "-W * " for heater, or "-0" distributor provided "-W * " for heater, or "-0" distributor provided "-W * " for heater, or "-0" distributor provided "-W * " for heater, or "-0" distributor provided "-G * " for heater, or "-0" distributor provided "-G * " for heater, or "-0" distributor provided "-G * " for heater, or "-0" distributor provided "-G * " for heater, or "-0" distributor provided "-P * " for heater, or "-0" distributor provided "-P * " for heater, or "-0" distributor provided "-P * " for heater, or "-0" distributor provided "-P * " for heater, or "-0" distributor provided Notes and Requirements
Start/ Stop Legend included Start/ Stop Legend included
Emergency Stop Legend included Emergency Stop Legend included
4C
Start/ Stop Legend included Start/ Stop Legend included
* Insert pilot light color When using the EFS Series pilot light in Cl. I, Div. 2 applications, the EFS back box is required in place of the EDS.
PUSHBUTTON / PILOT LIGHT COMBINATIONS EDS21473-J* DSD958-J* EDSC21473-J* DSD958-J* EDS22471-J* DSD948-J* & DSD921 EDSC22471-J* DSD948-J* & DSD921 EDS22868-J*-J* DSD947-J*-J* & DSD921 EDSC22868-J*-J* DSD947-J*-J* & DSD921 SELECTOR SWITCHES EDS21271 EDSC21271 EDS21272 EDSC21272 EDS21273 EDSC21273 EDS21274 EDSC21274 EDS21275 EDSC21275 DSD923 DSD923 DSD924 DSD924 DSD925 DSD925 DSD926 DSD926 DSD927 DSD927
* * * * * *
Insert Insert Insert Insert Insert Insert
pilot pilot pilot pilot pilot pilot
light light light light light light
color color color color color color
MANUAL MOTOR STARTER WITH O/L EDS21101 DS415A & SW13 EDSC21101 DS415A & SW13 EDS21102 DS415A & SW14 EDSC21102 DS415A & SW14 EDS21093 DS415A & SW11 EDSC21093 DS415A & SW11 EDS21094 DS415A & SW12 EDSC21094 DS415A & SW12 EDS2199 DS415A & SW9 EDSC2199 DS415A & SW9 EDS21100 DS415A & SW10 EDSC21100 DS415A & SW10
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
525
4C

Sub-assembly Reference Guide
For a complete list of components for EDS & EFS Control Stations, see page 500 for FlexStation Series
Control Stations and their Sub-assemblies

Sub-assembly Complete Control Station MANUAL MOTOR STARTER EFD218-T8 Alternative EFDC218-T8 Alternative EFD2419 Alternative EFDC2419 Alternative SNAP SWITCHES EDS2129 Alternative EDSC2129 Alternative EDS218 Alternative EDSC218 Alternative EDS2130 Alternative EDSC2130 Alternative EDS2140 Alternative EDSC2140 Alternative EDS2229 Alternative EDSC2229 Alternative EDSC228 Alternative EDS2230 Alternative EDSC2230 Alternative EDSC2240 Alternative ROCKER SWITCHES EDS2596 EDSC2596 EDS2162 EDSC2162 EDS2194 EDSC2194 EDS2696 EDSC2696 EDS2262 EDSC2262 EDS2294 EDSC2294 Cover & Device DSD916 DS415A & DSD916 DS415A & DSD917 DS415A & DSD917 DS415A & Cast Back Box EDS271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDSC271 EDS272 EDS272 EDSC272 EDSC272 EDSC272 EDSC272 EDS272 EDS272 EDSC272 EDSC272 EDSC272 EDSC272 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS271 EDSC271 EDS272 EDSC272 EDS272 EDSC272 EDS272 EDSC272 Notes and Requirements
SQ D 2510 KO-1 SQ D 2510 KO-1 GE 2368S GE 2368S
SQ D switch provided by distributor SQ D switch provided by distributor GE switch provided by distributor GE switch provided by distributor
DS652 & SW5 DSD933 DS652 & SW5 DSD933 DS652 & SW6 DSD634 DS652 & SW6 DSD634 DS652 & SW7 DSD936 DS652 & SW7 DSD936 DS652 & SW8 DSD937 DS652 & SW8 DSD937 (2) DS652 & (2) (2) DSD933 (2) DS652 & (2) (2) DSD933 (2) DS652 & (2) (2) DSD634 (2) DS652 & (2) (2) DSD936 (2) DS652 & (2) (2) DSD936 (2) DS652 & (2) (2) DSD937 DSD949 DSD949 DSD951 DSD951 DSD950 DSD950 (2) DSD949 (2) DSD949 (2) DSD951 (2) DSD951 (2) DSD950 (2) DSD950
4C
External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required External Sealing Fitting Required
SW5 SW5 SW6 SW7 SW7 SW8
Start/ Stop Legend included Start/ Stop Legend included Start/ Stop Legend included Start/ Stop Legend included
Additional notes: See Cooper Crouse-Hinds installation instructions for any possible additional sealing requirements. Part numbers listed with 3/4" hub in back box (Ex. EDS2184). For 1/2" hub change the "2" to "1" (EDS1184). For 1" hub change the "2" to "3" (EDS3184). Control Stations with "Stop" legend have Lockout provided as standard. Pilot Light Colors J*-- J1= Red, J3= Green, J6= Amber, J10= Clear, J11= Blue. LED Pilot Lights are available with LED Suffix. Pilot Light Transformers for voltages over 125V. Suffix T2= 240/220 - 110V, T4= 480/440 - 110V, T5= 600/550 - 110V (Not available on double pilot cover). Standard Legend Plate markings are available by adding nomenclature after the part number (EDS2184-Run). Selector Switch Nameplate kits available. 2-Pos = "SS2KIT", 3-Pos = "SS3KIT". See Replacement Parts book for additional information. Copper-Free Aluminum Bodies and Covers available with SA Suffix. Additional Control Station Options may be found in section 4C. Group B ratings may be achieved by adding the GB suffix or using the EFS back box. See part number instructions for the item required. Group B ratings may already be achieved when used in Class I, Division 2 applications. See Certifications and Compliances for item required. Additional Control Station configurations available through the FlexStation Component series.
526
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
MC and MCC Series

Pushbutton Stations, Selector Switches and Pilot Lights 600 VAC Heavy Duty
Applications:
MC pushbuttons or selector switches are used: In conjunction with magnetic starters or contactors for remote control of motors MC pilot lights are used: To visually indicate at a remote point that the desired function is being performed (motor running, etc.) MC pushbuttons, selector switches or pilot lights are used: In damp, wet or corrosive locations such as dairies, meat packing plants, chemical plants and outdoor locations
NEMA 3, 4 Watertight
4C
Options:
The following special options are available by adding suffix to Cat. #: Description Suffix Lockout provision on front operated pushbutton (standard on buttons marked "OFF" and "STOP")........................................................................................................ S153 Neoprene covers for front operated pushbuttons. Meets NEMA 4 requirements and prevents accumulation of dirt around operating shafts................................................. S323 Three-position selector switches with modified operation: Momentary contact clockwise operation, spring return to center, maintained contact counter-clockwise operation....................................................................... S634 Momentary contact counter-clockwise operation, spring return to center, maintained contact clockwise operation.................................................................. S635 Multiple gang bodies. Two gang, two gang tandem and three, four or five gang bodies can be supplied with combinations of single gang devices.............................. Specify LED pilot lights in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps..................................... LED
Features:
Enclosures are compact in design, and gasketed to meet NEMA/EEMAC 3 or 4 requirements as noted in catalog listings Pushbutton stations with side rocker handle are furnished with a lockout arrangement on "STOP" position as standard Dead end (MC) or through feed (MCC) hubs 1/2" and 3/4" sizes with mounting feet Standard lockout on "STOP" and "OFF" button on front operated pushbutton covers Standard lockout on selector switch covers. Locks two or three position switch handle in any position.
Dimensions
In Inches*:
4C

NEMA/EEMAC 3, 4 UL Standard: 508 CSA Encl. 3, 4, 5
Standard Materials:
Bodies Feraloy iron alloy Cover with side rocker handle copperfree aluminum Front pushbutton, selector switch and pilot light covers Feraloy iron alloy Rocker handle and pushbutton guards type 6 / 6 nylon Selector switch handle copper-free aluminum Operating shafts stainless steel
Hub size 1 /2 3 /4
a /8 3 /4
5
Type of Cover Side Rocker Handle Front Pushbutton Selector Switch Pilot Light
b 11/2 23/8 23/8 11/16
Standard Finishes:
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
527
4C
MC and MCC Series

Watertight, NEMA 3, 4
Watertight Weather Resistant NEMA 3, 4
Ordering Information - With Side Rocker Handles

Enclosure with Rocker Handles Normal Positions 1 Circuit Universal 2 Circuits Universal Marking Specify Specify Replacement Contact Diagram Blocks ED11 ED12 Hub Dead End Size Cat. #
1 3 1 3
Through Feed Cat. #
/2 /4 /2 /4
MC1810U1 MCC1810U1 MC2810U1 MCC2810U1 MC1810U MC2810U MC1810 MC2810 MCC1810U MCC2810U MCC1810 MCC2810
MC dead end side rocker handle
START-STOP unless 2 Circuits 1 Open - A otherwise 1 Closed - B specified
ED12*
/2 /4
4C
Ordering Information - With Front Pushbuttons

Weather Resistant, NEMA 3
Enclosure with Pushbuttons Normal Positions MCC through feed side rocker handle 1 Circuit Universal 2 Circuits Universal Marking Specify Specify Replacement Contact Diagram Blocks ED11 ED12 Hub Dead End Size Cat. #
1 3 1 3
Through Feed Cat. #
/2 /4 /2 /4
MC1910U1 MCC1910U1 MC2910U1 MCC2910U1 MC1910U MC2910U MC1910 MC2910 MCC1910U MCC2910U MCC1910 MCC2910
START-STOP unless 2 Circuits 1 Open - A otherwise 1 Closed - B specified
ED12*
/2 /4
If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: START MC dead end front pushbutton STOP ON EMERGENCY FORWARD REVERSE OFF RUN JOG OPEN CLOSE UP RESET TRIP TEST DOWN IN OUT LIGHT ON HAND AUTOMATIC RAISE LOWER
MCC through feed front pushbutton
*Two universal contact blocks, must be wired as two circuits, with one normally open and one normally closed. For Watertight NEMA 4 rating, use suffix S323 (Neoprene button covers). See Options section. For replacement pushbuttons see page 557
528
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
MC and MCC Series

Watertight NEMA 3, 4
4C
Ordering Information - Selector Switches

Furnished with pushbutton contact blocks, cam actuated by a maintained contact selector mechanism to operate in the sequences shown in the diagrams below. Maintained Contact Style TwoPosition, TwoCircuit TwoPosition, FourCircuit ThreePosition, TwoCircuit Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Replacement Contact Blocks* ED11 Enclosure with Selector Switch Hub Size
1 3
Dead End Cat. # MC11271 MC21271 MC11272 MC21272
Through Feed Cat. # MCC11271 MCC21271 MCC11272 MCC21272
/2 /4
MC dead end selector switch
ED12
/2 /4
4C
ED11
/2 /4
MC11273 MC21273 MC11274 MC21274
MCC11273 MCC21273 MCC11274 MCC21274
ED12 ThreePosition, FourCircuit
/2 /4
ED12
/2 /4
MC11275 MC21275
MCC11275 MCC21275
If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: START STOP ON EMERGENCY FORWARD REVERSE OFF RUN JOG OPEN CLOSE UP RESET TRIP TEST DOWN IN OUT LIGHT ON HAND AUTOMATIC RAISE LOWER
Ordering Information - Pilot Lights

Enclosure with Jewel Cover and Lamp Primary Voltage Range 110125 110125 220250 220250 440480 440480 Lamp Base Candelabra Candelabra Intermediate Intermediate Candelabra Candelabra Lamp Watts 6 6 10 10 6 6 Hub Size
1 3
Dead End Cat. # MC180 J1 MC-280-J1 MC184 J1 MC-284-J1 MC182 J1 MC282 J1
Through Feed Cat. # MCC180 J1 MCC280 J1 MCC184 J1 MCC284 J1 MCC182 J1 MCC282 J1
/2 /4 /2 /4 /2 /4
1 3
MC dead end pilot light
1 3
* For replacement contact blocks see page 557. Suffixes S634 or S635 may be used on these catalog numbers. See explanation in Options section. LED pilot lights can be furnished in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps. Add suffix LED after color symbol (J1).
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
529
4C
N2S and N2SC Series Control Stations

Factory Sealed, Corrosion-Resistant 600VAC Heavy Duty
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D NEMA 3, 4X, 7BCD (Div. 2), 12 Watertight Weatherproof Dust-tight
Applications:
N2S and N2SC pushbutton stations, selector switches and pilot lights are suitable for use: In Class I, Groups B, C, D; Division 2 hazardous areas where flammable vapors or gases may be present due to accidental or abnormal operation In damp, wet, or corrosive locations Indoors or outdoors in Division 2 areas of petroleum refineries, chemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist N2S and N2SC pushbutton stations and selector switches are used: In conjunction with magnetic starters or contactors for remote control of motors N2S and N2SC pilot lights are used: To visually indicate at a remote location that the desired function is being performed Optional maintained stop pushbutton(s) are used: As emergency or normal stop button(s) in motor control circuits for positive shutdown.
Options:
The following special options are available from factory by adding suffix to Cat. #: Description Suffix Padlock attachments for all pushbuttons. For "START-STOP" stations, only "STOP" button provided with lockout............................................................................................. S708 Three position selector switches with modified operation: Momentary contact clockwise operation, spring return to center, maintained contact counterclockwise operation............................................................................................... S634 Momentary contact counterclockwise operation, spring return to center, maintained contact clockwise operation.............................................................................................. S635 Control station with maintained stop pushbutton (requires NCD type enclosure): One maintained stop pushbutton...................................................................................... MSR1 Two maintained stop pushbuttons.................................................................................... MSR2
Maintained stop pushbuttons are installed at bottom position(s) of control station unless otherwise specified.
4C
Features:
Pushbutton stations, pilot lights, and selector switch devices are factory sealed. External seals are not required. Enclosures are made of Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester material having excellent corrosion resistance and stability to heat and sunlight. Optional maintained stop feature operates by depressing the mushroom head pushbutton. Pushbutton must be manually pulled before start button can be actuated. Lockout is standard on selector switch devices. Factory installed dead end (N2S) or through feed (N2SC) hubs 1/2", 3/4", and 1" sizes. Indicating plates are available with a choice of 40 standard markings. Grounding plate included with each hub.
LED pilot lights in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps........................................
LED
Dimensions
In Inches:

NEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C & D NEMA: 3, 4X, 7BCD (Division 2) and 12 UL Standard: 1203 CSA Standard: C22.2 Nos. 14 & 30 Maintained Stop Pushbutton
Use dimension "e" for control station with 1" hub or maintained stop pushbutton.
Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes. N2S(C) Body Style 1 or 2 devices 3 or 4 devices Outside Dims. I w 71/4 113/4 313/16 313/16 Mounting (NCS)* (NCD)* Dims. d e ml mw 43/8 43/8 53/8 53/8 63/8 107/8 215/16 215/16
1 /2" & 3/4" Hubs a b

Pushbutton stations and selector switches heavy duty 600 VAC maximum Pilot lights 120 to 600 VAC
1" Hubs a b 11/4 11/4 15/16 15/16
11/8 11/8
11/16 11/16
*NCS box is supplied with units using 1/2" and 3/4" hubs. NCD box is supplied with units using 1" hubs or MSR option. NCD 4 device box used with 1" hubs or MSR option.
530
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Ordering Information - With Pilot Lights*
No. Units 1 Enclosure with Pilot Lights 1 /2" Hubs Dead End Through Cat. # Feed Cat. # N2S1131 N2S1132 N2S1134 N2S1135 N2S1231 N2S1232 N2S1234 N2S1235 N2S1331 N2S1332 N2S1334 N2S1335 N2S1431 N2S1432 N2S1434 N2S1435 N2SC1131 N2SC1132 N2SC1134 N2SC1135 N2SC1231 N2SC1232 N2SC1234 N2SC1235 N2SC1331 N2SC1332 N2SC1334 N2SC1335 N2SC1431 N2SC1432 N2SC1434 N2SC1435 Marking Unless Otherwise Specified START-STOP (or Specify) START-STOP (or Specify)
4C
Diagram
Volts 120 240 480 600 120 240 480 600 120 240 480 600 120 240 480 600
/4" Hubs Dead End Cat. #

3
Through Feed Cat. # N2SC2131 N2SC2132 N2SC2134 N2SC2135 N2SC2231 N2SC2232 N2SC2234 N2SC2235 N2SC2331 N2SC2332 N2SC2334 N2SC2335 N2SC2431 N2SC2432 N2SC2434 N2SC2435
1" Hubs Dead End Cat. # N2S3131 N2S3132 N2S3134 N2S3135 N2S3231 N2S3232 N2S3234 N2S3235 N2S3331 N2S3332 N2S3334 N2S3335 N2S3431 N2S3432 N2S3434 N2S3435
Through Feed Cat. # N2SC3131 N2SC3132 N2SC3134 N2SC3135 N2SC3231 N2SC3232 N2SC3234 N2SC3235 N2SC3331 N2SC3332 N2SC3334 N2SC3335 N2SC3431 N2SC3432 N2SC3434 N2SC3435
N2S2131 N2S2132 N2S2134 N2S2135 N2S2231 N2S2232 N2S2234 N2S2235 N2S2331 N2S2332 N2S2334 N2S2335 N2S2431 N2S2432 N2S2434 N2S2435
4C
Ordering Information - With Selector Switches

Switch Position Style Two-Position, Two-Circuit Two-Position, Four-Circuit Three-Position, Two-Circuit Three-Position, Four-Circuit 1 2 3 Enclosure With Selector Switch Hub Size /2 /4 1
1 3
Dead End Cat. # N2S1121 N2S2121 N2S3121 N2S1122 N2S2122 N2S3122 N2S1123 N2S2123 N2S3123 N2S1124 N2S2124 N2S3124 N2S1125 N2S2125 N2S3125
Through Feed Cat. # N2SC1121 N2SC2121 N2SC3121 N2SC1122 N2SC2122 N2SC3122 N2SC1123 N2SC2123 N2SC3123 N2SC1124 N2SC2124 N2SC3124 N2SC1125 N2SC2125 N2SC3125
/2 /4 1
1 3
Specify
/2 /4 1
1 3
Specify
/2 /4 1
1 3
Three-Position, Four-Circuit
Specify
/2 /4 1
1 3
Specify lens color for each pilot light. As an example, N2S1231 with one red and one green would be ordered as N2S1231-J1-J3. Color Symbol Color Symbol Red Green Amber J1 J3 J6 Clear Blue J10 J11
If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: Marking Pushbuttons: REVERSE Selector Switches Two-Position: Selector Switches Three-Position: OPEN START CLOSE RUN-JOG RUN-OFF-JOG STOP UP HAND-AUTO HAND-OFF-AUTO ON DOWN FOR-REV FOR-OFF-REV OFF IN FAST-SLOW FAST-OFF-SLOW RUN OUT OPEN-CLOSE 1-OFF-2 JOG RAISE UP-DOWN OPEN-OFF-CLOSE TRIP LOWER ON-OFF UP-OFF-DOWN RESET IN-OUT TEST RAISE-LOWER LIGHT ON START-STOP HAND AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY FORWARD
Pilot lights are transformer type except those rated 120 volts. Lamp type is 120MB, 120 volts, 3 watts. * LED pilot lights are available. Add suffix LED after last color symbol. See Options Sections for more information. Suffixes S634 or S635 may be used on these catalog numbers. See explanation in Options section.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
531
4C

Ordering Information - With Pushbuttons Momentary Contact

No. Units 1 Contact Symbol Marking Unless Otherwise Specified START (or Specify) START-STOP (or Specify) Specify Enclosure with Pushbuttons Hub Dead End Size Cat. # /2 /4 1
1 3
Through Feed Cat. # N2SC1110 N2SC2110 N2SC3110 N2SC1210 N2SC2210 N2SC3210 N2SC1310 N2SC2310 N2SC3310 N2SC1410 N2SC2410 N2SC3410
N2S1110 N2S2110 N2S3110 N2S1210 N2S2210 N2S3210 N2S1310 N2S2310 N2S3310 N2S1410 N2S2410 N2S3410
/2 /4 1
1 3
/2 /4 1
1 3
4C
Specify
/2 /4 1
1 3
Ordering Information - Combination Control Stations

Enclosure With Pushbuttons and Pilot Lights Pilot Lights* Pushbuttons Diagram Markings Hub Size /2 /4 1
1 3
Volts 120
Dead End Cat. #
Through Feed Cat. #
Dead End Volts Cat. # 480
Through Feed Cat. #
N2S12411 N2SC12411 N2S22411 N2SC22411 N2S32411 N2SC32411 N2S12412 N2SC12412 N2S22412 N2SC22412 N2S32412 N2SC32412 N2S13421 N2SC13421 N2S23421 N2SC23421 N2S33421 N2SC33421 N2S13422 N2SC13422 N2S23422 N2SC23422 N2S33422 N2SC33422 N2S13411 N2SC13411 N2S23411 N2SC23411 N2S33411 N2SC33411 N2S13412 N2SC13412 N2S23412 N2SC23412 N2S33412 N2SC33412 N2S14421 N2SC14421 N2S24421 N2SC24421 N2S34421 N2SC34421 N2S14422 N2SC14422 N2S24422 N2SC24422 N2S34422 N2SC34422
N2S12414 N2SC12414 N2S22414 N2SC22414 N2S32414 N2SC32414 N2S12415 N2SC12415 N2S22415 N2SC22415 N2S32415 N2SC32415 N2S13424 N2SC13424 N2S23424 N2SC23424 N2S33424 N2SC33424 N2S13425 N2SC13425 N2S23425 N2SC23425 N2S33425 N2SC33425 N2S13414 N2SC13414 N2S23414 N2SC23414 N2S33414 N2SC33414 N2S13415 N2SC13415 N2S23415 N2SC23415 N2S33415 N2SC33415 N2S14424 N2SC14424 N2S24424 N2SC24424 N2S34424 N2SC34424 N2S14425 N2SC14425 N2S24425 N2SC24425 N2S34425 N2SC34425
Specify /2 /4 1
1 3
240
600
Specify
/2 /4 1
1 3
120
480
/2 /4 1
1 3
240
600
/2 /4 1
1 3
120
480
Specify /2 /4 1
1 3
240
600
Specify
/2 /4 1
1 3
120
480
/2 /4 1
1 3
240
600
See page 533 See page 533 * LED pilot lights are available. Add suffix LED after last color symbol. See Options Sections for more information.
532
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

4C
Ordering Information - Combination Control Stations

Selector Switches Position No. Pilot Push Lights* buttons 1 2 1 2 3 Enclosure With Pilot Light, Pushbuttons and Selector Switch Hub Dead End Markings Size Volts Cat. # /2 /4 1
1 3
Through Feed Cat. #
Dead End Volts Cat. #
Through Feed Cat. #
2-Pos, 2-Cct Specify
120
N2S145211 N2SC145211 N2S245211 N2SC245211 480 N2S345211 N2SC345211 N2S145212 N2SC145212 N2S245212 N2SC245212 600 N2S345212 N2SC345212 N2S145231 N2SC145231 N2S245231 N2SC245231 480 N2S345231 N2SC345231 N2S145232 N2SC145232 N2S245232 N2SC245232 600 N2S345232 N2SC345232
N2S145214 N2SC145214 N2S245214 N2SC245214 N2S345214 N2SC345214 N2S145215 N2SC145215 N2S245215 N2SC245215 N2S345215 N2SC345215 N2S145234 N2SC145234 N2S245234 N2SC245234 N2S345234 N2SC345234 N2S145235 N2SC145235 N2S245235 N2SC245235 N2S345235 N2SC345235
/2 /4 1
1 3
240
3-Pos, 2-Cct Specify
/2 /4 1
1 3
120
4C
/2 /4 1
1 3
240
Specify lens color for each pilot light. As an example, N2S1231 with one red and one green would be ordered as N2S1231-J1-J3. Color Symbol Color Symbol Red Green Amber J1 J3 J6 Clear Blue J10 J11
If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: Marking Pushbuttons: REVERSE Selector Switches Two-Position: Selector Switches Three-Position: OPEN START CLOSE RUN-JOG RUN-OFF-JOG STOP UP HAND-AUTO HAND-OFF-AUTO ON DOWN FOR-REV FOR-OFF-REV OFF IN FAST-SLOW FAST-OFF-SLOW RUN OUT OPEN-CLOSE 1-OFF-2 JOG RAISE UP-DOWN OPEN-OFF-CLOSE TRIP LOWER ON-OFF UP-OFF-DOWN RESET IN-OUT TEST RAISE-LOWER LIGHT ON START-STOP HAND AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY FORWARD
Pilot lights are transformer type except those rated 120 volts. Lamp type is 120MB, 120 volts, 3 watts. * LED pilot lights are available. Add suffix LED after last color symbol. See Options Sections for more information. Suffixes S634 or S635 may be used on these catalog numbers. See explanation in Options section.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
533
4C

Ordering Information - Custom-Built, Factory Assembled Control Stations

To order your custom-built factory assembled control station, select the enclosure required and add the desired devices from listings below. Custom-built factory assembled control stations may thus be ordered as follows: Requirements: 3-device control station on Krydon material enclosure with 3/4" through feed hubs, with 1 pilot light with green jewel, rated at 120V; 1 three position, two circuit selector switch marked HAND-OFF-AUTO; and 1 green single circuit pushbutton marked START. ORDER: NCDC23FA N2P310-J3 N2SW11311-HAND-OFF-AUTO N2PS1111G-START Pilot light jewel symbol, pushbutton and selector switch plate markings are selected from footnote tables. Suffix FA indicates factory assembled. Note that order of assembly of control stations should be listed in desired mounting order, reading from top to bottom of enclosure.
4C
Enclosures (NCD or NCDC enclosures must be used with MSR1 or MSR2)

No. of Devices 1 2 3 4 No. of Devices 1 2 3 4 Without Hubs Cat. # NCD01 NCD02 NCD03 NCD04 Without Hubs Cat. # NCS01 NCS02 NCS03 NCS04 With One Hub 1/2" Cat. # NCD11 NCD12 NCD13 NCD14 With One Hub (3/4") Cat. # NCS21 NCS22 NCS23 NCS24 With Two Hub 1/2" Cat. # NCDC11 NCDC12 NCDC13 NCDC14 With Two Hub (3/4") Cat. # NCSC21 NCSC22 NCSC23 NCSC24 With One Hub 3/4" Cat. # NCD21 NCD22 NCD23 NCD24 With One Hub (1/2") Cat. # NCS11 NCS12 NCS13 NCS14 With Two Hub 3/4" Cat. # NCDC21 NCDC22 NCDC23 NCDC24 With Two Hub (1/2") Cat. # NCSC11 NCSC12 NCSC13 NCSC14 Specify lens color for each pilot light using symbols below. Color Symbol Color Symbol Red J1 Clear J10 Green J3 Blue J11 Amber J6 With One Hub 1" Cat. # NCD31 NCD32 NCD33 NCD34 With Two Hub 1" Cat. # NCDC31 NCDC32 NCDC33 NCDC34
Pilot Lights*
Transformer Type
Volts 120 240 480 600 Cat. # N2PL10 N2PL20 N2PL40 N2PL50
Pilot lights to be used in N2SU Series:

Red Green Clear Blue N2PLU10 J1 LED N2PLU10 J3 LED N2PLU10 J10 LED N2PLU10 J11 LED
Amber N2PLU10 J6 LED
Pilot lights are transformer type except those rated 120 volts. Lamp type is 120MB, 120 volts, 3 watts. * LED pilot lights are available. Add suffix LED after last color symbol. See Options Sections for more information.
534
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Pushbutton Stations Momentary Contact
Color of Operator Natural Red Green Red Mushroom Head 1 Circuit Contact Universal Symbol Cat. # N2PS1111 N2PS1111R N2PS1111G N2PM1111 S111 2 Circuit Contact Universal Symbol Cat. # N2PS1211 N2PS1211R N2PS1211G
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D NEMA 3, 4X, 7BCD (Div. 2), 12 Watertight Weatherproof Dust-tight Closure Plug
4C
Description Closure Plug
Cat. # NP2
4C
Selector Switches
Style Two Position Two Circuit Two Position Four Circuit Three Position Two Circuit Three Position Four Circuit Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Cat. # N2SW11211
N2SW12221
N2SW11311
N2SW12321
Three Position Four Circuit
N2SW12322
If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: Marking Pushbuttons: REVERSE Selector Switches Selector Switches START OPEN Two-Positions: Three-Position: STOP CLOSE RUN-JOG RUN-OFF-JOG ON UP HAND-AUTO HAND-OFF-AUTO OFF DOWN FOR-REV FOR-OFF-REV RUN IN FAST-SLOW FAST-OFF-SLOW JOG OUT OPEN-CLOSE 1-OFF-2 TRIP RAISE UP-DOWN OPEN-OFF-CLOSE RESET LOWER ON-OFF UP-OFF-DOWN TEST IN-OUT LIGHT ON RAISE-LOWER HAND START-STOP AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY FORWARD
Suffixes S634 or S635 may be used on these catalog numbers. See explanation in Options section.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
535
4C

Dimensions
In Inches:
4C
N2S For 1/2" and 3/4" hub sizes (for 1" hub and/or MSR option, see page 530). Outside Dimensions l w d 71/4 71/4 91/2 11 /4
3
N2S(C) Body Style 1 device 2 devices 3 devices 4 devices
Mounting Dimensions ml mw 63/8 63/8 85/8 10 /8

7
313/16 313/16 313/16 3 /16

13
43/8 43/8 43/8 4 /8

3
215/16 215/16 215/16 215/16
536
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
N2SU/N2SCU Control Stations

Applications:
N2SU and N2SCU pushbutton stations, selector switches and pilot lights are suitable for use: In Class I, Groups B, C, D; Division 2 and Class I, Zones 1 and 2 hazardous areas where flammable vapors or gases may be present due to accidental or abnormal operation In damp, wet, or corrosive locations Indoors or outdoors in Division 2 and Class I, Zones 1 and 2 areas of petroleum refineries, chemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist N2SU and N2SCU pushbutton stations and selector switches are used: In conjunction with magnetic starters or contactors for remote control of motors N2SU and N2SCU pilot lights are used: To visually indicate at a remote location that the desired function is being performed Optional maintained stop pushbutton(s) are used: As emergency or normal stop button(s) in motor control circuits for positive shutdown.
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G 4C Corrosion-Resistant Cl. I, Zones 1 and 2, Ex de IIB + H2 Dust-tight IP66 Watertight Weatherproof NEMA 3, 4X, 7BCD (Div. 2), 12 Size Ranges:
1, 2, 3 and 4-device units

Pushbutton stations and selector switches heavy duty 600VAC maximum Pilot lights 120 to 600 VAC
Options:
Description Padlock attachments for all pushbuttons. For "START-STOP" stations, only "STOP" button provided with lockout...................................................................... Three-position selector switches with modified operation: Momentary contact clockwise operation, spring return to center, maintained contact counterclockwise operation ............................................................................................. Momentary contact counterclockwise operation, spring return to center, maintained contact clockwise operation ............................................................................................
Note:
Suffix S708
4C
S634 S635
In addition to hub arrangements shown, the following can be obtained by inserting these codes for the 4th and 5th character in the catalog number: D = Double 1/ 2" hubs at bottom CD = Single hub at top, double 1/ 2" hubs at bottom DD = Double 1/ 2" hubs at each end
Dimensions
In Inches:
Features:
Compact, strong, durable enclosures are made of Vestamid a black molded high impact strength, polyester material having excellent corrosion resistance and stability to heat. Exterior parts of pushbuttons, pilot lights, and selector switches are made of Krydon material. See pages 538539 for device part numbers Pushbutton design uses a unique internal neoprene boot which completely encloses all internal parts. A wiping gasket around the pushbutton cleans the wall of the pushbutton guard of any foreign material accumulation as the button is operated. Formed-in-place gasket, and stainless steel screws for added corrosion resistance. Pushbutton and pilot light guards are fluted for no-slip installation. Factory installed dead end (N2SU) or through feed (N2SCU) hubs 1 /2" and 3/4" sizes. Legend plates are available with 40 standard markings. Lockout is standard on selector switch devices. LED lamps are standard to provide longer life.

NEMA: 3, 4X, 7BCD and 12 UL Standard: 508 CSA C22.2 No. 14 & 30
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
537
4C
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Corrosion-Resistant Cl. I, Zones 1 and 2, Ex de IIB + H2 Dust-tight IP66 Watertight Factory Sealed, Corrosion-Resistant Weatherproof 600VAC Heavy Duty NEMA 3, 4X, 7BCD (Div. 2), 12
Ordering Information - With Pushbuttons Momentary Contact

No. Units Contact Symbol 1 2 3 4 Marking Unless Otherwise Specified START (or Specify) START-STOP (or Specify) Specify Specify Enclosure with Pushbuttons Hub Size
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
Dead End Cat. # N2S1110U N2S2110U N2S1210U N2S2210U N2S1310U N2S2310U N2S1410U N2S2410U
Through Feed Cat. # N2SC1110U N2SC2110U N2SC1210U N2SC2210U N2SC1310U N2SC2310U N2SC1410U N2SC2410U Maintained pushbutton with pilot light control station
/2 /4 /2 /4 /2 /4 /2 /4
4C
Ordering Information - With Selector Switches*

Position Style Two-Position, Two-Circuit Two-Position, Four-Circuit Three-Position, Two-Circuit Three-Position, Four-Circuit 1 2 3 Marking Unless Otherwise Specified START-STOP (or Specify) START-STOP (or Specify) Specify Enclosure with One Selector Switch Hub Size
1 3 1 3
Dead End Cat. # N2S1121U N2S2121U N2S1122U N2S2122U N2S1123U N2S2123U N2S1124U N2S2124U N2S1125U N2S2125U
Through Feed Cat. # N2SC1121U N2SC2121U N2SC1122U N2SC2122U N2SC1123U N2SC2123U N2SC1124U N2SC2124U N2SC1125U N2SC2125U
/2 /4 /2 /4
1 3 1 3
/2 /4 /2 /4
Specify
Three-Position, Four-Circuit
Specify
/2 /4
If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: Marking Push Buttons: REVERSE Selector Switches Selector Switches START OPEN Two-Position: Three-Position STOP CLOSE RUN-JOG RUN-OFF-JOG ON UP HAND-AUTO HAND-OFF-AUTO OFF DOWN FOR-REV FOR-OFF-REV RUN IN FAST-SLOW FAST-OFF-SLOW JOG OUT OPEN-CLOSE 1-OFF-2 TRIP RAISE UP-DOWN OPEN-OFF-CLOSE RESET LOWER ON-OFF UP-OFF-DOWN TEST IN-OUT LIGHT ON RAISE-LOWER HAND START-STOP AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY FORWARD
*Replacement switch for selector switches is Cat. No. ESWP126.
538
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G 4C Corrosion-Resistant Cl. I, Zones 1 and 2, Ex de IIB + H2 Dust-tight IP66 Watertight Weatherproof NEMA 3, 4X, 7BCD (Div. 2), 12
Ordering Information - With Pilot Lights - Transformer Type

Enclosure with Pilot Lights
1
/2" Hubs Through Feed Cat. # N2SC1131U N2SC1132U N2SC1231U N2SC1232U N2SC1331U N2SC1332U N2SC1431U N2SC1432U
/4" Hubs Through Feed Cat. # N2SC2131U N2SC2132U N2SC2231U N2SC2232U N2SC2331U N2SC2332U N2SC2431U N2SC2432U
No. Units 1 2 3 4
Diagram
Volts 120 240 120 240 120 240 120 240
4C
Specify lens color for each pilot light. As an example, N2S1231U with one red and one green would be ordered as N2S1231U-J1-J3 Color Symbol Color Symbol Red Green Amber J1 J3 J6 Clear Blue J10 J11
Pilot lights are transformer type except those rated 120 volts.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
539
4C
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Corrosion-Resistant Cl. I, Zones 1 and 2, Ex de IIB + H2 Dust-tight IP66 Watertight Factory Sealed, Corrosion-Resistant Weatherproof 600VAC Heavy Duty NEMA 3, 4X, 7BCD (Div. 2), 12
Ordering Information - Combination Control Stations*

Pilot Lights* Pushbuttons Marking Unless Otherwise Specified Enclosure with Push Buttons and Pilot Lights 3 /2" Hubs /4" Hubs Dead End Through Feed Dead End Cat. # Cat. # Cat. #
1
Diagram
Volts 120 240
Through Feed Cat. # N2SC22411U N2SC22412U
Specify
N2S12411U N2S12412U
N2SC12411U N2SC12412U
N2S22411U N2S22412U
STARTSTOP (or Specify)
120 240
N2S13421U N2S13422U
N2SC13421U N2SC13422U
N2S23421U N2S23422U
N2SC23421U N2SC23422U
4C
Specify
120 240
N2S13411U N2S13412U
N2SC13411U N2SC13412U
N2S23411U N2S23412U
N2SC23411U N2SC23412U
STARTSTOP (or Specify)
120 240
N2S14421U N2S14422U
N2SC14421U N2SC14422U
N2S24421U N2S24422U
N2SC24421U N2SC24422U
Selector Switches Position No. Pilot Lights* 1 Pushbuttons 2 1 2 3 Markings
Enclosure With Pilot Light, Pushbuttons and Selector Switch Hub Dead End Through Feed Size in. Volts Cat. # Cat. #
1 3
Two-Position, Two-Circuit Specify
/2 /4 /2 /4 /2 /4 /2 /4
120 240 120 240
N2S145211U N2S245211U N2S145212U N2S245212U N2S145231U N2S245231U N2S145232U N2S245232U
N2SC145211U N2SC245211U N2SC145212U N2SC245212U N2SC145231U N2SC245231U N2SC145232U N2SC245232U
1 3
Three-Position, Two-Circuit Specify
1 3
1 3
Specify lens color for each pilot light. As an example, N2S1231U with one red and one green would be ordered as N2S1231U-J1-J3 Color Symbol Color Symbol Red Green Amber J1 J3 J6 Clear Blue J10 J11
If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: Marking Push Buttons: Selector Switches Selector Switches Two-Position: Three-Position: START FORWARD RUN-JOG RUN-OFF-JOG STOP REVERSE HAND-AUTO HAND-OFF-AUTO ON OPEN FOR-REV FOR-OFF-REV OFF CLOSE FAST-SLOW FAST-OFF-SLOW RUN UP OPEN-CLOSE 1-OFF-2 JOG DOWN UP-DOWN OPEN-OFF-CLOSE TRIP IN ON-OFF UP-OFF-DOWN RESET OUT IN-OUT TEST RAISE RAISE-LOWER LIGHT ON LOWER START-STOP HAND AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY
*Replacement switch for selector switches is Cat. No. ESWP126. Pilot lights are transformer type except those rated 120 volts.
540
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
N2FA and N2FAC Fire Alarm Stations

Factory Sealed, Corrosion-Resistant
Applications:
N2FA and N2FAC fire alarm stations are used: As break-glass fire alarm stations In conjunction with audible and/or visible signaling devices to alert personnel of a fire hazard In Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C, D hazardous areas where flammable vapors or gases may be present due to an accident or abnormal operation In damp, wet or corrosive locations Indoors or outdoors in Division 2 areas of petroleum refineries, chemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D NEMA 3, 7BCD (Div. 2), 12 Raintight Wet Locations
4C
4C
Features:
Factory sealed. External seals are not required. Enclosures are made of Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester material having excellent corrosion resistance and stability to heat and sunlight. Highly visible molded-in red color for quick identification. Break-glass rod is attached to station with a chain for ready access during an emergency. Factory installed dead end (N2FA) or through feed (N2FAC) hubs 1/2", 3/4" and 1" sizes.
Hub Size /2 3 /4 1
1
Dead End Cat. # N2FA11 N2FA21 N2FA31
Through Feed Cat. # N2FAC11 N2FAC21 N2FAC31
Replacement Glass Cat. # DS K14 DS K14 DS K14
Dimensions*
In Inches:

NEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C, D NEMA 3, 7BCD (Division 2), 12
1 /2" & 3/4" Hubs a b 11/8 11/16
1" Hubs a b 11/4 15/16
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
541
4C GHG43 Series Control Stations

Nonmetallic or 316L Stainless Steel Corrosion Resistant
Applications:
Control stations are used as a remote means of: Motor control Visual indication of equipment performance On-off control of circuits Circuit selection Common applications include: Areas which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors, gases or highly combustible dusts For installation at petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist
UL/cUL listed Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Zones 1 and 2, (A) Ex de IIB + H2 T6 Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G (cUL)
PTB ATEX CERTIFIED 3117 Ex de IIC, T6, Zones 1 and 2 Ex de IIC,T6 Zones 21 and 22 IP 66, NEMA 4X
4C
Features:
NEMA 4X, IP66 enclosure with formedin-place gasket Available with all operators: indicator lights, potentiometers, control switches, pushbuttons, terminal blocks and meters Base-mounted contact blocks Easy change-out components snap in place on DIN rail Enclosure meets UL 94-VO. Also available in anti-static Ex e materials Inserts for mounting DIN rails Available with a maximum of 2 entries top and bottom for conduit fittings or cable glands Suitable for universal mounting plates on pipes, conduit, wall or channels Mounting dimensions data molded on back Captive, corrosion-resistant cover screws Built-in mounting slots for wall installation Available in 316L stainless steel
GHG43 Nonmetallic Control Stations
GHG43 Stainless Steel Control Stations

UL/cUL Listed Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G (cUL) Class I, Zones 1 and 2, Ex de IIB + H2, T6 AEx de IIB + H2, T6 Type 3, 4, 4X; IP66 CENELEC-PTB 00 ATEX 3117 Ex de IIC, T6, Zones 1 and 2, IP66
Options:
Description Cooper Crouse-Hinds GHG43 Series control stations are now available with 316L stainless steel enclosures, making them ideal for corrosive and adverse locations especially offshore platform applications. Suffix
S860
542
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
GHG43 Series Control Stations

How to build a GHG43 Series Catalog Number
4C
GHG43 2 - Size 2 Enclosure
Codes see page 545
4C
Pushbutton DRT
Codes see page 545
Mounting Area*
Double Pushbutton
GHG43 4 - Size 4 Enclosure
Codes see page 545
Key Operated Pushbutton
Codes see page 546
Mushroom-Head Pushbutton
Codes see page 546
Mounting Area*
Signal Lamp
For a GHG43 control station with 316L stainless steel enclosure, add suffix "S860" to end of catalog number. *Unoccupied spaces must be filled in with KLM for correct positioning of devices.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
543
4C

How to build a GHG43 Series Catalog Number
Cable Entries
NPT Codes see page 547 No entries No entries Metric
4C
Potentiometer Two entries
2 x 1/2" Myers Hub, STGK1 Zinc Gland plate
2 x M25 Plastic Cable gland M25 Blanking plug
Codes see page 548 Requires 2 spaces
Measuring Instrument One entry
2 x 3/4" Myers Hub, 2 x M20 STGK2 Zinc Gland Threaded entries plate Gland plate (Stainless Steel Control Stations only) 2 x 1/2" Myers Hub, SSTGK1 Stainless steel Gland plate 2 x M25 Threaded entries Gland plate
Codes see pages 549550
Switch
2 x 3/4" Myers Hub, 1 x M32 Plastic SSTGK2 Stainless Cable gland steel Gland plate (Stainless Steel Control Stations only) Codes see pages 549550 Requires 2 spaces 1 x 3/4" Myers Hub, STGK2, Zone 1 Gland plate 1 x M25 Threaded Entry, Blanking plug and Gland plate 2 x M25 Threaded Entry, 1 blanking plug and Gland plate
Control Switch Ex 23 10A
1 x 1/2" Myers Hub, STGK1, Zone 1 Gland plate
Code see page 547
1 x 1/2" Myers Hub, 1 x M20 SSTGK1 Stainless st. Threaded entry Gland plate Blanking plug and Gland plate 1 x 3/4" Myers Hub, 1 x 3/ 4" SSTGK2 Stainless st. Myers Hub Gland plate SSTGK2 stainless steel, Gland plate
Terminals and cover blanking plug
For a GHG43 control station with 316L stainless steel enclosure, add suffix "S860" to end of catalog number. *Unoccupied spaces must be filled in with KLM for correct positioning of devices.
544
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Pushbuttons:
Used for logic controls in hazardous areas Single or double units Used with all operators Base mounting
Pushbuttons Technical Data
4C
Type of Protection Certificate of Conformity Approvals Rated Voltage Rated Current Terminal Wiring Mechanical and Electrical Life
Pushbutton Ex de IIC T6 PTB No. Ex-87.B.1007U PTB, UL, cUL Up to 400V NEC/CEC 10A IEC 16 A 2 x 2.5mm2 / 14AWG >105 Operations
See page 550 for explanation of contact symbols.
Pushbutton DRT
D Code R A T O B C D
4C
Contact System Code B 13 14 Start 07 15 Special-Text On Order 99
Inscription ALL * 0 I II Stop Code C 01 02 03 04 06 Lockout see page 551 Code D (leave blank if no lockout required)
Double Pushbutton DDTO

Left D Code D A T O B C D E Right E
Contact System Code B Inscription Code C, D Left/Right 43 ALL * 01 0 I II 44 Stop Start 07 45 Special-Text on Order 99
02 03 04 06
Lockout see page 551 Code E (leave blank if no lockout required)
Key-Operated Pushbutton SLT

S Code L A T O B C
Contact System Code B Pushbutton Not Depressed 23 Key Lockable Key Removable Lockable Key Removable Yes Yes Yes No 1 Yes Yes No No 2 Yes No Yes Yes 3 No No Yes Yes 4 No Yes Auto Yes 5 Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 24 25
Depressed Code C
* 01 - Includes the following discs - Start, stop, I, O, and red, green, yellow, white and black blank discs. For Marking Guide for Pushbuttons see page 551.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
545
4C

Pushbuttons and Signal Lamps Technical Data
Mushroom-Head Pushbutton SGT

S Code G A T B C D E F
Contact System
Code B Color of Pushbutton Code C Function Code D Inscription Code E
53 Red 1 Spring Return 1 Stop 06
54 Yellow 2 Maintained 2 Start 07
55 Black Actuator 3 Key Release 3 Black Actuator 11
4C
Lockout see page 551 Code F (leave blank if no lockout required)
Signal Lamp
Used for positive feedback indication High intensity with special reflector and optical lens Accomodates most input voltages Base mounting Type of Protection Certificate of Conformity Approvals Lamp Life Rated Voltages Rated Current Power Consumption Terminal Wiring Colors
Lamp Ex de IIC T6 PTB No. Ex-88.B.2106U PTB, UL, cUL >100,000 Hours (11.5 Years) Up to 240VAC, 50 / 60 Hz Up to 110VDC Max. 15 mA <1.2W 2 x 2.5mm2 / 14AWG Red, Green, Yellow, Clear & Blue
Signal Lamp SIL

S Code I A L B C 1 pkg white, yellow, red, green Green 4 31 5 10-33VAC/DC
Colored Lens Cover White Code B 1 Voltage Code C
Yellow 2 01
Red 3
Blue 6
20-250VAC/DC
546
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Terminal Blocks
Terminal block for easy field connections Base mounting
Terminal Blocks and Potentiometers Technical Data
4C
Type of Protection Certificate of Conformity Rated Voltages Rated Current Conductor Size
Terminal Blocks Ex e II PTB No. Ex-88.B.3112U Up to 400V 23A 4mm2 / 12AWG
Terminals and Cover Plugs KLM

K Code L A 6 Terminals 2 x 4 mm2 Code B 61 M B Undrilled Cover (No Terminals) 00
4C
Potentiometers
Used to adjust resistance to vary motor speed or light levels Scale 0 to 100% Base mounting Type of Protection Certificate of Conformity Approvals Rated Voltages Power Consumption Resistance Angle of Rotation Scale Connection Terminals
Potentiometers Ex de IIC T6 PTB No. Ex-87.B.1007U PTB, UL, cUL >250V 1.0W 10010,000W 270 0100% 2 x 2.5mm2 / 14AWG
Potentiometer POT
P Code O A T B 1W 1,000 4 2,200 7 4,700 5 10,000 6
Power Consumption Resistance W Code B
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
547
4C

Ammeters Technical Data
Ammeters
Used to measure motor current draw for efficiencies and maintenance Slide in scales to accommodate any amperage range Red indicator for quick visual indication to compare set points and actual values Ammeters Ex e II T6 PTB No. Ex-87.B.2016U PTB, UL, cUL Moving iron (core) 2.5% of range (class 2.5) 0-16A direct, C.T. n/1 A Vertical Interchangeable for C.T. n/1 A At instrument 2 x 2.5 mm2 / 14 AWG Red indicator
Type of Protection Certificate of Conformity Approvals Movement Accuracy Measuring Range Operating Position Scale Zero Adjustment Terminal Wiring Rated Current Marking
4C
Ammeter Measuring Instrument AM 72*

M Code 7 A 2
B
C 4-20 mA 6
Movement Direct n/1 A 0 - 2 mA Code B 1 2 3 Movements 0-20 mA and 4-20 mA are only available with 0 - 100 / 120% scale
Direct Measurement Code C Scale 02 03 04 05 07 0 0 0 0 0 -1/1.5A - 2.5/3.75A -5/7.5A - 10/15A - 16/24A
Interchangeable Scale for C.T. n/1A Code C Scale Code C 02 03 04 05 06 08 0 0 0 0 0 0 -1/1.5A - 2.5/3.75A -5/7.5A - 10/15A -15/22.5A - 20/30A 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
Scale 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 - 30/45A - 40/60A - 50/75A - 60/90A -75/112.5A - 100/150A - 150/225A
Code C 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
Scale 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 200/300A 250/375A 300/450A 400/600A 500/750A 600/900A 100/150A
* Requires 2 spaces.
548
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Rotary Control Switches
Used for selectable operations (i.e. HandOffAuto) 2 independent contacts Available in any contact configuration Spring return or maintained position Available with lockout positions
Rotary Switches Technical Data
4C
Type of Protection Certificate of Conformity Approvals Rated Votage Rated Current Terminal Wiring Mechanical Life Electrical Life Switching Capacity
SCT Ex de IIC T6 Ex.87.B.1007U PTB, UL, cUL 400 V NEC 10 A IEC 16 A 2 x 2.5mm2 / 14 AWG >105 Operations >105 Operations AC II: 20V/6A 400V/4A DC II: 24V/6A 60V/0.8A 110V/.5A 220V/.2A
Ex 23 Ex de IIC T6 PTB no. Ex-88.B.1047U PTB, UL, cUL Up to 500 V NEC 10 A IEC 16 A 2 x 2.5mm2 / 14 AWG >105 Operations >105 Operations AC I: 500G/10A AC II: 230V/6A 500V/6A DC II: 24V/6A 48V/4A 60V/0.8A 110V/0.5A 220V/0.4A
4C
Rotary Control Switch SCT

S Code C A T B C D
Switch Mechanism Code B Code C 01 03 04 06 29 Same as SCT above except up to 4 independent contacts Inscription 0 STOP HAND REMOTE OFF I START AUTO LOCAL ON Code C 07 13 14 15 99 Inscription I LOCAL STOP HAND Special text 0 II REMOTE AUTO 0 START 0 AUTO to be given on order
Contact System Code D 1 2 3 4 5 6
Rotary Control Switch Ex 23*

E Code x A 2 3 B C D E
Code B 01 03 04 06 07 13 14 23 24 27 29 32 99
* Requires 2 spaces in cover.
Inscription 0 I STOP START HAND AUTO remote local I 0 LOCAL REMOTE STOP 0 OFF 0 HAND OFF START STOP OFF ON ON OFF Special text to be given on order
AUTO START ON AUTO
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
549
4C

Code C 09
Rotary Switches Technical Data
Code C 00
Contact System
Type 2 Position
Contact System
Type 3 Position
01
2 Position
10
3 Position
02
2 Position
12
3 Position
03
Single Pole Changeover
4C
13
2 Position
05
HOA
14
2 Position
07
3 Position Single Level
15
3 Position Double Pole Changeover
Switched Mechanism Code D
Padlocking Facility Code E
Contact Configurations
Normally Closed Normally Open
Normally Closed Extended Over 2 Positions
Normally Open Early Make/Late Break
Change-Over Break Before Make
Change-Over Make Before Break
Example of Switch Type 10

This example is the switch type 10 Stop-Run-Stop. The switch has 3 positions the normal position is center and can be switched left or right. An arrow () indicates spring return. (See codes for switch mechanism). Contacts 12 only close in the Stop position. Contacts 34 close only in the Start position. Contacts 56 are normally closed and remain closed when switched to the Start position and open when switched to the Stop position.
550
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Lockouts for DRTO Pushbuttons
X Code D Shroud Cover For Pushbutton Y-Lockout with bolt and chain
Lockouts for Pushbuttons and Marking Guide for Pushbuttons
4C
Z Code D Padlocking Fire Alarm Cover For Pushbutton
Lockouts for DDTO Double Pushbuttons

X Code ED Padlocking Cover For Double Pushbutton Without Hole Z Code E Padlocking Cover For Double Pushbutton With Hole
4C
Lockouts for SGT Mushroom-Head Pushbuttons

X Code F Padlocking Cover For Emergency Stop Pushbutton Z Code F Padlocking Cover For Emergency Stop Pushbutton With Bolt & Chain
Marking Guide For Pushbuttons

Special Text
Marking Required Acknowledge Alarm Automatic Close Down Fast Forward Hand High In Jog Local Lower Maintain Manual Normal Off On Open Out Raise Remote Reset Reverse Run Slow Test Trip Up Standard Abbreviation AK AM AU CL DN FS FW HN HI IN JG LC LO MT MN NR OF ON OP OT RA RM RS RV RN SL TT TP UP Actual Marking on Disc ACK ALARM AUTO CLOSE DOWN FAST FWD HAND HIGH IN JOG LOCAL LOWER MAINT MANUAL NORMAL OFF ON OPEN OUT RAISE REMOTE RESET REV RUN SLOW TEST TRIP UP
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
551
4C

Dimensions
GHG43 Nonmetallic Control Stations
4C
GHG43 Size 2 Nonmetallic
GHG43 Size 4 Nonmetallic
End View of Back Box
GHG43 Stainless Steel Control Stations
Box Type A 1 Operator Control Station 2 Operator Control Station 3 Operator Control Station 4 Operator Control Station 4.72 6.69 8.66 10.63 B 4.72 4.72 4.72 4.72 C 4.96 6.93 8.90 10.87 D 4.96 4.96 4.96 4.96 E 3.60 3.60 3.60 3.60
Dimension (inches) F 3.94 5.90 7.87 9.84 G 3.94 3.94 3.94 3.94 H 3.15 5.12 7.09 9.06 J 2.76 2.76 2.76 2.76 K 0.79 0.79 0.79 0.79 L 2.36 4.33 6.30 8.27 M 2.36 2.36 2.36 2.36
552
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
OAC Series Pushbutton Stations and Heavy Duty Selector Switches

600 VAC Standard Factory Sealed
Applications:
OAC Units are used: In areas which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors, gases or highly combustible dusts In damp, wet or corrosive locations Indoors or outdoors at petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist In areas which are hazardous due to the presence of acetylene and hydrogen, or gases or vapors of equivalent hazard such as manufactured gas In conjunction with magnetic starters or contactors for remote control of motors
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7ABCD, 9EFG, 12
4C

NEC/CEC Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 4, 7ABCD, 9EFG, 12 UL Standard: 1203 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30

Pushbutton stations, and selector switches - Air Break heavy duty 600VAC maximum
4C
Features:
Water-shedding construction with female threaded bottom opening and male threaded cover Threaded cover is deep dome type, which surrounds the enclosed device All enclosures are suitable for hazardous area use Pushbutton stations have a guarded rocker type operating handle at the front arranged for padlocking to prevent unauthorized operation Selector switches have a lever type operating handle at the top Provided with vertical through feed conduit hubs of sizes indicated in the listings Units are factory sealed for Cl. I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D Standard lockout on selector switches. Locks two or three-position switch handle in any position.
Options:
The following special options are available from factory by adding suffix to Cat. #: Description Suffix Back boss drilled and tapped for 3/4" and 1" sizes........................................................ Specify Three-position selector switches with modified operation: Momentary contact clockwise operation, spring return to center, maintained contact counter-clockwise operation.................................................. S634 Momentary contact counter-clockwise operation, spring return to center, maintained contact clockwise operation............................................................... S635
Dimensions
In Inches*:
Standard Materials:
Bodies Feraloy iron alloy Covers and operating handle copper-free aluminum Operating shafts stainless steel
OAC
OAC (91 Series only)
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Copper-free aluminum natural Stainless steel natural
Factory sealed for Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D. *Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes. For cover removal, add 21/2" to dimension.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
553
4C

Ordering Information - Pushbutton Stations

4C
Normal Pos. 1 Circuit Universal Oper. Handles Single Replacement ED21 Pushbuttons Diagram Double ED22 2 Circuits Universal 2 Circuits Universal 2 Circuits*
With momentary left handle and maintained right handle. For momentary "START", maintained "STOP" and similar applications. Normal Pos. Diagram 2 Circuit Universal
Single Operating Both Buttons Double ED22 ED22*
Enclosure with Pushbuttons Hub Size Cat. #

3
/4 1
OAC2291 OAC3291
Hub Size
3
Cat. #
Cat. #
Cat. #
Cat. #
/4 1
OAC2101 OAC2133 OAC2139 OAC2103 OAC3101 OAC3133 OAC3139 OAC3103
If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: OFF RESET LIGHT ON START RUN TRIP HAND STOP JOG TEST AUTOMATIC ON OPEN DOWN RAISE EMERGENCY CLOSE IN LOWER FORWARD UP OUT REVERSE
Factory sealed for Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D *Two universal contact blocks, must be wired as two circuits, one normally open and one normally closed.
554
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

4C
Ordering Information - Selector Switches

Style TwoPosition, TwoCircuit TwoPosition, FourCircuit ThreePosition, TwoCircuit Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Replacement Contact Blocks* ED21 Enclosure with Selector Switch Hub Size Cat. #
3
/4 1
OAC2471 OAC3471 OAC2472 OAC3472 OAC Selector Switches are furnished with pushbutton contact blocks, cam actuated by a maintained contact selector mechanism to operate in the sequences shown in the diagrams below.
ED22
/4 1
ED21
/4 1
OAC2473 OAC3473 OAC2474 OAC3474
4C
ED22 ThreePosition, FourCircuit
/4 1
ED22
/4 1
OAC2475 OAC3475
If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: Two-Position FAST, SLOW IN-OUT RUN, JOG OPEN, CLOSE RAISE-LOWER HAND, AUTOMATIC UP,DOWN START-STOP FORWARD, REVERSE ON, OFF Three-Position RUN, OFF, JOG HAND, OFF, AUTOMATIC FORWARD, OFF, REVERSE FAST, OFF, SLOW
Dimensions*
In Inches:
1, OFF, 2 OPEN, OFF, CLOSE UP, OFF, DOWN
Factory sealed for Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Suffixes S634 or S635 may be used on these catalog numbers. See page 553 for explanation of options. *Dimensions are approximate. Not for construction purposes. For cover removal, add 21/2" to dimension.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
555
4C
Control Station Covers

Hinged and Open Front
4C
Open Front Cover
Hinged Cover
Applications:
Added environmental protection for Cooper Crouse-Hinds control stations is now available from a patented "slip on" series of covers. Easy to install, these enclosures are available in hinged and open front styles, and are ideal for corrosive and adverse areas where product endurance is essential. Secured Access Hinged Cover High moisture areas due to weather, steam, or wash down procedures. Areas where dirt, dust, mud, sand, etc. interferes with equipment operation. Prevention of accidental equipment operation. Instances requiring equipment lock out/tag out. Quick Access Open Front Cover Areas requiring quick access to control device. Areas of high moisture from weather or dripping liquid. Prevention of accidental equipment operation. Areas with possible damage from bumping or banging.
Hinged Covers
Single Gang Application EDS(C) and EFD(C) control stations EFS(C) control stations MC(C) control stations FS(C) back box with cover assembly FD(C) back box with cover assembly EGF11 and EGF12 (Ground Fault) N2S(C) Krydon: 1 & 2 devices N2D(C) Krydon: 1 & 2 devices GHG432 control station Single Gang (Long) Application EFD(C) (3 device) N2S(C) Krydon: 3 devices N2S(C) Krydon: 4 devices Double Gang Application EDS(C) control stations EDSCM32: 2 gang tandem EDSCM33: 3 gang tandem FS(C) back box with cover FD(C) back box with cover EDSC378 - 3 gang tandem assembly Cat. # NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 EFS MC FS FD EGF 11 N2S N2D GHG
Cat. # NC CH1 3L NC CH1 N2S 3L NC CH1 N2S 4L Cat. # NC CH2 NC CH2L NC CH3L NC CH2 FS NC CH2 FD NC CH1 MC3

Clear UV stabilized Lexan polycarbonate plastic allows the enduser to see enclosed controls and is strong enough to withstand the rough treatment found in the industrial work place. Downtime due to weather or accidental bumping is eliminated and plant shutdowns caused by inoperable or accidentally operated pushbutton devices are non-existent. Lock out/tag out capabilities conform to OSHA requirements and provides increased personnel safety. Quick and easy slip on installation requires no tools or interruption of service. Hinged cover provides superior sealing through heavy-duty neoprene gaskets. Colored covers are available (e.g. red for emergency, yellow for fire alarm, etc.). Specific chemical resistant covers available (may not be clear) consult factory for minimum order quantity. Capability to engineer cover to fit any size device - consult factory.
Open Front Covers

Single Gang Application EDS(C) and EFD(C) control stations EFS(C) control stations MC(C) control stations FS(C) back box with cover assembly FD(C) back box with cover assembly EGF11 and EGF12 (Ground Fault) N2S(C) Krydon: 2 device assembly N2D(C) Krydon: 3 device assembly Single Gang (Long) Application EFD(C): 3 device control stations N2S(C) Krydon: 3 device assembly N2S(C) Krydon: 4 device assembly Double Gang Application EDS(C) control stations EDSCM32: 2 gang tandem EDSCM 33: 3 gang tandem FS(C) back box with cover assembly FD(C) back box with cover assembly Cat. # NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 NC CH1 QA EFS QA MC QA FS QA FD QA EGF QA N2S QA N2D QA
Cat. # NC CH1 3L QA NC CH1 N2S 3L QA NC CH1 N2S 4L QA Cat. # NC CH2 QA NC CH2L QA NC CH3L QA NC CH2 FS QA NC CH2 FD QA
Custom covers can be supplied but must be accompanied by either a sample of the device to be covered or a copy of a drawing with all actual measurements of the device to be covered. Covers can also be color-coded. Consult factory. 556
Replacements for Pushbutton and Selector Switch Control Stations

600 VAC Heavy Duty
ED Series Pushbutton Contacts*
Complete with Mounting Strap and Hardware
4C
4C
1 Circuit Universal
2 Circuits 1 Open - A 1 Closed - B
Where Used MC, EDS and EFS pushbutton stations and selector switches OAC pushbutton stations and selector switches EWC pushbutton stations EMP pushbutton stations EMP selector switches EFD factory sealed pushbutton stations and selector switches (M90) DSD962 pushbutton cover
Cat. # ED11 ED21 ED38 ED38 ED11
Cat. # ED12 ED22 ED32 ED35 ED35 ED12
Cat. # ED12 ED22 ED32 ED12 ED13
Contact Ratings
Max. Current (Amperes) Volts Make Break 600 VAC Heavy Duty (NEMA 120 60 6.0 240 30 3.0 480 15 1.5 600 12 1.2 Direct Current (NEMA P150) 125 1.1 1.1 Voltamperes Make Break A600) 7200 720 7200 720 7200 720 7200 720 138 138 Continuous Current (Amperes) 10 10 10 10 5
Contact Block Only (less strap)

Description Contact Block Cat. # ESWP126
External Operating Buttons
CF859 Where Used MC, EFS, and EFD current design with nylon guards EMPS019, EMP019, EMPS029 and EMP029 single operator FS, EFS, and EFD previous design with aluminum guards
CF705 Colors Available Cat. #
If desired, markings on indicating plates may be added to catalog number. Select from the list of standard markings below: OFF RESET LIGHT ON START RUN TRIP HAND STOP JOG TEST AUTOMATIC ON EMERGENCY OPEN FORWARD CLOSE REVERSE UP DOWN IN OUT RAISE LOWER
Red, Green, Black CF859 K1
Red, Green, Black CF705-K1
* ESWP126 is the contact block without the mounting strap. Two universal contact blocks, must be wired as two circuits, with one normally open and one normally closed. Use CF705-K1 for DEV11 and DEV12. To order DL legend plates see page 502 for markings.
Note: CF859-K1 and CF705-K1 come with 5 buttons.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
557
4C
558
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Specialty Control Stations Hazardous and Non-hazardous
5C
Description
Controls for Bulk Solids Handling
AFA / AFAX Conveyor Alignment Switches AFU / AFUX Conveyor Control Safety Switches
Page No. see page 573 see page 572 see pages 560567 see page 579 see page 571
Custom Control Panels

EJB Series
Ground Fault Control Stations

EGF Series
Grounding Indication / Control

EGL Series
5C
Mine Signal Switches

AFU Series
see page 574 see pages 577578 see pages 575576 see page 568
Pendant Pushbutton Stations

FLEXITITE Series FLEXITITE D2X Series
Pushbuttons, Pilot Lights, and Selector Switches

EMP Series
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
559
5C
EJB Custom-Built Control Panels

Globally CertifiedIndividually Customized
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Cl. I, Zones 1 & 2 Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III
UL and cUL approved Ex d IIB + H2 T6 Certified to ATEX Directive NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG IP66
The following pages will assist you in choosing the combination of features suited to your needs and requirements. The easy, five-step process will take you through the specification of cover openings, specifying devices, drilled and tapped conduit openings, device locations, and legend and nameplate selection. After filling out your separate order form for each panel, fax it to your local Cooper Crouse-Hinds Distributor. Please consult the factory for alternatives not detailed in these pages, such as other conduit arrangements, terminal blocks, or circuit breaker operating handles.
Applications:
Manufactured for hazardous environments, the EJB Custom-Built Control Panel is an explosionproof enclosure built to customer specific requirements Available in a variety of sizes with an unlimited combination of devices, windows, and markings, these panels are designed to maximize the efficiency of each unique process
Features:
The foundation of the Custom-Built Control Panel is our tried and tested copper-free aluminum EJB enclosure. This corrosion resistant, heavy-duty enclosure features bolted construction, stainless steel hinges, and flexible tap-in mounting feet.
Tap-in mounting feet offer a simple and secure way to mount enclosure, and are replaceable if broken or lost Captive, quick-release stainless steel triple-lead cover bolts make it easier to get in and out of the enclosure
5C
Neoprene cover gasketbetween body and coverprovides NEMA 4, IP66 watertight seal
Optional GUB explosionproof glass window is available when you need to see inside Stainless steel hinges
Internal mounting plate standard
Internal and external ground terminations simplify grounding requirements
NPT or metric entries available
EMP Series the most complete line of devices in the industry pilot lights pushbuttons selector switches potentiometers
Copper-free aluminum construction available with Corro-free epoxy powder coat for additional protection in corrosive atmospheres Optional engraved nameplates
Optional individual device markings to clearly indicate the function of each device May be added in the eld

EJB Custom Control Panels
NEC/CEC: Class I, Divisions 1 & 2, Groups B*, C and D Class I, Zones 1 & 2 Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F and G Class II, Division 2, Groups F and G Class III NEMA: 3, 4, 7B*CD, 9EFG cUL to CSA Standard C22.2 No. 30C22.2 No. 25 Cl. II (E, F, G) Ex d IIB + H2 T6 UL Standard 1203 IP66 Certified to the ATEX Directive when ordered with -ATEX suffix. Custom Control Panel is component certified only. For assembly certification, please consult factory.
*Groups C and D only when ordered with GUB window. Certified to the ATEX Directive when ordered with ATEX suffix.
ATEX Certifications
EJB Enclosure with Conduit Entries & Device Holes II 2 G Ex d IIB + H2 EMP Devices II 2 G Ex d IIB + H2 GUB0108 ATEX Window II 2 G Ex d IIB + H2 ECD Breather/Drain II 2 G Ex d IIB + H2 Certificate #: ITS07ATEX15639U Certificate #: ITS07ATEX15638U Certificate #: ITS07ATEX15652U Certificate #: ITS08ATEX15797U
560
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Ordering Information Building a Custom Solution
5C
5C
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
561
5C

5C
562
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

5C
5C
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
563
5C

5C
564
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Order Form
5C
5C
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
565
5C

Order Form
5C
566
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Order Form
5C
Section 2 Completed Catalog Number: Specify the complete catalog number including conduit designations.
Distributor: Customer:
Contact: Phone Number: CROUSE-HINDS FACTORY USE ONLY
Catalog Number Entered: Reference #: B#
EJB__________________________________
All Cooper Crouse-Hinds Custom-Built Control Panels are provided with a mounting plate and hinges. Hinges are on left side of enclosure. If you desire hinges on one of the other sides, circle choice here: TOP RIGHT BOTTOM
OPTIONS For any of the following options, check here: ____ ATEX Certied (ATEX) ____ Breather and Drain (S756V) ____ Epoxy nish, external (S752) ____ Epoxy nish, internal and external (S753)
size
1 2 3 4 5 A B C Top (column) 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
5C
Section 3Exterior Front View
Location of Devices and Windows in Cover: Outline the cover space available, beginning in the upper left corner of the grid, based upon the EJB selected. See Table 1 for device layout.
size
Left Side (Hinge Side) (row)
D E
Section 4
F G H I
Right Side
Device Markings: Indicate by row and column position markings/legends for each device. Engraved Plate: Specify markings for each nameplate based upon the following:
Maximum Number of Characters/Line
Marking Size Number of Characters
Specify Row Column
J K L
1/8"
3/16"
1/4"
1/2"
M Bottom
Note: All device openings are spaced 2.62" center to center.
36
24
18
Device Marking (DSL) or Engraved Plate Line 1
Engraved Plate Line 2
Marking Size
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
567
5C
EMP and EMPS Barrel Assemblies
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III II 2 G Ex d IIB + H2, T5
Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations NEMA 3, 7BCD, 9EFG
As indicated in the listings, certain barrel assemblies are the same as those used in complete EMP units and may be utilized as replacements. The remainder are primarily for use with hazardous area boxes to assemble special control stations. For additional information, see page 560 describing custom-built control panels.
Single pushbutton Double pushbutton, single operator
Double pushbutton, double operator

Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 2, Groups E, F, G Class III NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 7BCD, 9EFG UL Standard 1203 CSA Standard C22.2 No 30 CENELEC ATEX Certificate ITS07 ATEX 15652U
Diagram
Short Cat. # EMPS019 EMPS029
Standard Cat. # EMP019 Diagram EMP029 Short Assembly Cat. # EMPS039 Standard Assembly Cat. # EMP039
5C
Two-position selector switch
Select the Cat. No. from the listings. For pilot lights and illuminated pushbuttons, specify color of jewel using symbols from the table below. For pushbuttons and selector switches, optional markings may be specified in the tables below. Diagram Position 1 Position 2
Short Assembly Cat. # EMPS049 EMPS059
Standard Assembly Cat. # EMP049 EMP059
Group 1:
Standard assemblies are for replacement in complete EMP units or for custom-built control panels. Short assemblies are for custom-built control panels only. Both assemblies may be used with System 4 Control Stations.
Three-position selector switch

Diagram Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Short Assembly Cat. # EMPS069 EMPS079 EMPS089 Standard Assembly Cat. # EMP069 EMP079 EMP089
Pilot light
Add color symbol for each pilot light from table below. Color Symbol Color Symbol Red J1 Clear J10 Green J3 Blue J11 Amber J6 Diagram (120V)* Standard Assembly Cat. # EMP009
Push Button Station Marking

START STOP ON OFF RESET RUN TRIP JOG TEST LIGHT ON HAND AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY FORWARD REVERSE OPEN CLOSE UP DOWN IN OUT RAISE LOWER
LED pilot lights can be furnished in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps. Add suffix LED to end of catalog number after last color symbol. * Other voltages available. Consult factory. For 24 VDC operation, add suffix S300. The following suffixes may be used with these catalog numbers: S634 - Momentary contact clockwise, spring return to center; S635 - Momentary contact counter-clockwise, spring return to center.
568
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III II 2 G Ex d IIB + H2, T5 Maintained Contact Pushbutton
5C
Group 2: For custom-built control panels. Illuminated pushbutton
Up Long Assembly Cat. # 120V pilot light 120V pilot light EMP0090 EMP0098
Diagram Down
Long Assembly Cat. # EMP098
Diagram
Add color Color Red Green Amber
symbol for each pilot light from table below. Symbol Color Symbol J1 J3 J6 Clear Blue J10 J11
5C
Two-position selector switch, key operated
Push Button Station Marking

START STOP ON OFF RESET RUN TRIP JOG TEST LIGHT ON HAND AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY FORWARD REVERSE OPEN CLOSE UP DOWN IN OUT RAISE LOWER
Diagram Position 1 Position 2 Key Removal Both positions Left only Right only Both positions Left only Right only
Short Assembly Cat. # EMPS0491 EMPS0492 EMPS0493 EMPS0591 EMPS0592 EMPS0593
Standard Assembly Cat. # EMP0491 EMP0492 EMP0493 EMP0591 EMP0592 EMP0593
Three-position selector switch, key operated

Diagram Position 1 Position 2 Position 3 Key Removal All Center only Left only Right only All Center only Left only Right only All Center only Left only Right only Short Assembly Cat. # EMPS0691 EMPS0692 EMPS0693 EMPS0694 EMPS0791 EMPS0792 EMPS0793 EMPS0794 EMPS0891 EMPS0892 EMPS0893 EMPS0894 Standard Assembly Cat. # EMP0691 EMP0692 EMP0693 EMP0694 EMP0791 EMP0792 EMP0793 EMP0794 EMP0891 EMP0892 EMP0893 EMP0894
LED pilot lights can be furnished in place of standard incandescent pilot lamps. Add suffix LED to end of catalog number after last color symbol. The following suffixes may be used with these catalog numbers: S634 - Momentary contact clockwise, spring return to center; S635 - Momentary contact counter-clockwise, spring return to center.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
569
5C
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III II 2 G Ex d IIB + H2, T5
Dimensions*
In Inches:
5C
EMP-EMPS029 EMP009
EMP-EMPS019
EMP-EMPS039
EMP098
EMP0090
EMP-EMPS0491, 0591, 0691, 0791, 0891 Series
EMP0098
*Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes. All barrel assemblies are 3/4"-14 NPSM thread size.
EMP-EMPS049, 059, 069, 079, 089
570
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EGL Static Grounding Indicator

With Automated Pump Control and Static Ground Verification System
Applications:
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 1 & 2 IIB + H2 Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III
UL/cUL Listed NEMA 3, 4X, 7BCD, 9FG, 12 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight / Wet Locations
5C
EGL Static Grounding Indicator is the ideal product for safe loading/unloading of ethanol, biofuel, petroleum, chemicals, plastics and other combustible materials. The EGL is mounted adjacent to loading/unloading areas and connected to transportation tank vehicles, railcars, drums or other portable containers to prevent explosions due to static discharge during product transfer by providing: A ground path for static build-up Automatic pump shutdown when static grounding circuit is broken Visual indication of safe, static grounding before, during and after loading and unloading operations

Static ground verification system provides ground path for static build-up to ensure safe product transfer Integrated control relay allows for safe control of electrically operated pumps or valves, and for energizing remote indicators Stainless steel clamp for grounding connection provides industrial durability, corrosion resistance, and increased product lifetime Interior and exterior epoxy powdered paint finish provides superior corrosion resistance inside and out LED pilot lights provide long-lasting visual identification of status of ground connection ECD Type 4X drain protects interior equipment from environmental moisture and condensation, rain water, and hose-down applications NEMA 4X compact, hose-tight, and corrosion-resistant enclosure offers years of service in harsh industrial environments 25 ft. safety fluorescent yellow cord is easily identifiable to ensure safety and reduce tripping hazard Neoprene cover gasket provides a watertight seal to meet UL Type 4 (NEMA 4) requirements Stainless steel hinges are corrosion resistant while providing safe and easy access to interior of enclosure Waterguard desiccant packet absorbs and removes water/moisture and protects the enclosed equipment when not energized Adjustable mounting feet provide ease of mounting during installation
5C
Description Indicator with two pilot lights*
* Includes one red and one green pilot light
Catalog Number EGL210-J1-J3
Options:
Description Internal space heaters to limit condensation build-up Transformer suitable for both 220/240VAC or 440/480VAC applications 50 foot cord Suffix R11 S883 50FC
Options: Replacement Parts:

Ground clamp Ground clamp assembly (includes 25 ft. cord, connector and clamp) EGL210 universal interior replacement kit Pilot lights (Red) Pilot lights (Green) Mounting feet Transformer (220/240VAC; 440/480VAC) Space heater Pilot light plug kit EGL-K1 EGL:20109-B EGL210-R1 EMP009-J1-LED EMP009-J3-LED EJB-KIT5 EGL S883 KIT EGL R11 KIT EGL PLUG KIT

Class I, Divisions 1 & 2, Groups Class I, Zone 1&2 IIB + H2 B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G UL/cUL Listed Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G IP 65 Class III NEMA 3, 4X, 7BCD, 9FG, 12
Weight & Dimensions:

EGL Assembly: Weight = 32 lbs (14.5 kg) Dimensions = inches (centimeters)
11.07 (28.12) 3/8" (0.95) DIAMETER BOLT
Standard Materials:
Enclosure: Copper-free aluminum with interior and exterior epoxy powder coat Clamp: Stainless steel Clamp Grips: Polyvinylchloride dipped Gasket: Neoprene
12.80 (32.51)
11.13 (28.27)

120-volt AC supply Control relay interlocking contact: 15A at 277VAC; 10A at 600VAC Dual-tapped 240 and 480 VAC Step Down Transformer available Provides 4k ohms or less switching impedance
C L
5.00 (12.70)
1" (2.54) CONDUIT ENTRY WITH 3/4" (1.91) REDUCER
8.41 6.30 (21.36) (16.00) 3.00 (7.62)
1.75 (4.45)
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
571
5C
AFU and AFUX Conveyor Belt Control Switch
Applications:
AFU and AFUX conveyor control switches are used: As emergency or normal "STOP" switch for conveyor lines, cranes, unloaders, bulk handling systems and similar equipment In steel mills, mining and ore and coal handling operations, automotive and other assembly lines, warehouses, loading docks and various process industry facilities In the control circuit of magnetic motor starters to shut down motor-driven conveyors or other machinery when switch is actuated AFU series complies with requirements for use in Class II areas having combustible dusts that may or may not be electrically conductive. AFU series are also gasketed for use in hosedown areas even when combustible dusts are present. AFUX series complies with requirements for use in NEC Class I areas which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors or gases. AFUX series also complies with requirements for use in NEC Class I areas which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors or gases. AFUX series also complies with NEC requirements for use in Class II hazardous areas, or for use in NEC hazardous areas classified simultaneously as Class I and Class II.

AFU Series NEC/CEC: Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III Encl. 3, 5 NEMA: 3, 4, 9EFG IP66 UL Standard: 698 CSA Standard: 22.2 No. 30 AFUX Series NEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA: 3, 7CD, 9EFG IP65 UL Standard: 698 cUL
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Steel electrogalvanized with chromate finish (red acrylic paint on indicating arm) Bronze natural
Options:
Description Finish: Corro-free epoxy powder coat for coating outside only. Suffix S752
Electrical Rating:
Control circuit switch 15 AMP, 600 VAC max.
5C
Standard Materials:
Enclosure Feraloy iron alloy Plunger stainless steel Loop bronze Indicating arm steel
AFU0333-50 Single end left
Features:
Furnished with one or two end units, each containing 2-NO and 2-NC contact arrangements. Precision switches provide maintained contact (switches have a snap action mechanism). Enclosure has three 1" conduit hubs two for horizontal through feed and one at the bottom. Cast mounting lugs on 11/ 2" centers permit attachment to the web of a standard 3" angle iron. In installation, the actuating line or cable is connected from a fixed point to the loop on the end unit. A pull on the line of the required operating force and with a total movement of 1/2" actuates the plunger, opens the switch and trips the red painted indicating arm forward, which locks the plunger in the actuated (switch open) position. Returning the indicating arm to its normal position resets the mechanism. A typical installation would include single end switch units at each end of the conveyor with double end switch units between. Depending on the size and length of line, supports at properly spaced intervals may be necessary to ensure that the line or cable weight alone will not actuate switch.
Maximum Weight of Unsupported Line or Cable Without Actuating Switch (lbs.) 15 25 15 25 15 25 Total Operating Force Required (lbs.) 25 50 25 50 25 50
AFU0333-66 Double end
Description Single end left Single end left Single end right Single end right Double end Double end
Contact Arrangements With 2-NO, 2-NC in Each End Unit Cat. # Cat. # AFU0333 AFU0333 AFU0333 AFU0333 AFU0333 AFU0333 50 60 05 06 55 66 AFUX0333 AFUX0333 AFUX0333 AFUX0333 AFUX0333 AFUX0333 50 60 05 06 55 66
A galvanized steel aircraft cable, supported every 10' is recommended.
Dimensions
In Inches*:
572
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
AFA and AFAX Conveyor Belt Alignment Switch
5C
Applications:
AFA, AFAX conveyor belt alignment switches are used: As emergency or normal "STOP" switch for conveyor belts whenever they become misaligned or run off their tracks due to excessive speed, uneven load, leveling, breakage and/or other problems. In steel mills, mining and ore and coal handling operations, automotive and other assembly lines, warehouses, loading docks, grain loading and handling facilities, and various other bulk handling operations. In the control circuit of magnetic motor starters to shut down motor-driven conveyors in case of abnormal belt misalignment or run-off. AFA series complies with requirements for use in Class II areas having combustible dusts that may or may not be electrically conductive. AFA series are also gasketed for use in hosedown areas even when combustible dusts are present. AFAX series complies with requirements for use in NEC Class I areas which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors or gases. AFAX series also complies with NEC requirements for use in Class II hazardous areas, or for use in NEC hazardous areas classified simultaneously as Class I and Class II.

AFA SERIES NEC/CEC: Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA: 3, 4, 9EFG IP66 UL Standard: 698 CSA C22.2 No. 25 AFAX SERIES NEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA: 3, 7CD, 9EFG IP65 UL Standard: 1203
5C
Electrical Rating:
Control circuit switches 15 AMP, 600 VAC max.
Ordering Information Standard Materials:

Enclosure Feraloy iron alloy Bearing and operating arm stainless steel with plastic end caps Contact Arrangement Diagram 2 normally open 2 normally closed Cat. # AFA20
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Stainless steel natural
AFAX20
Features:
Furnished with precision switches that provide normally open and normally closed contacts (switches have a snap action mechanism). Housing consists of a center section which can be mounted either vertically or horizontally, and a switch housing with an attached switch operating arm. Enclosure has three 1" conduit hubs. Cast mounting lugs on 11/2" center permit attachment to the web of a standard 3" angle iron. Operating arm has 31/2" long stainless steel protective roller. Approximately 3/4" lateral movement of operating arm actuates switch. Spring loaded operating arm will automatically return switch to normal position when belt interference is removed. A severe conveyor belt run-off can rotate the operating arm counter-clockwise up to 85 degrees without damage to the switch mechanism. Installation of AFA or AFAX unit on either side of a conveyor belt allows approximately 1" or a predetermined allowable belt misalignment before switch is actuated. A typical installation would include a pair of AFA or AFAX units at each end of the conveyor belt where belt returns.
Options:
Description Suffix Finish: Corro-free epoxy powder coat for coating outside only. S752
Typical AFA Switch Application
Dimensions
In Inches*:
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
573
5C
AFU Mine Signal Switches

600 VAC
NEMA 3 Raintight Wet Locations
Applications:
AFU mine signal switches are used: For signalling circuits or remote control of magnetic motor starters In non-hazardous areas of mines or process industry facilities where a rugged enclosure is needed for protection from falling ore and other material or dripping water Mounted on walls or in shaft ways and actuated by pulling line or cable attached to the loop at the bottom
Features:
Sturdy raintight enclosure with heavy mounting lugs Wires enter enclosure through clearance holes in the underside Switches are actuated by a springloaded plunger which returns to the normal position when the operating force is removed Units are furnished with heavy duty motor control push buttons. Several of these may be interconnected electrically for remote control of a magnetic motor starter from more than one location
5C
AFU mine signal switch with pushbutton switch (cover removed)
Maximum Wt. of Line or Total Operating Cable Without Actuating Force Required Switch (lbs.) (lbs.) 25 15 50 25 With Pushbutton Heavy Duty 600 VAC Max. Cat. # AFU254 AFU154

NEMA: 3
Standard Materials:
Enclosure Feraloy iron alloy Plunger steel Loop bronze
Dimensions
In Inches*:
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Steel electrogalvanized Bronze natural
574
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
FLEXITITE D2X Series Attachable Pendant Pushbutton Stations

For Class I, Div. 2 Areas
Applications:
FLEXITITE attachable pendant pushbutton stations are used: For safe multi-function motor circuit control of: Hoists Cranes Machine Tools Electromagnets In hazardous areas such as Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C and D (classified) areas or Class II, Division 2, Groups F and G, as defined by the National Electrical Code Where wash downs are necessary in damp, wet, dirty or corrosive locations For control applications requiring 2 to 8 functions
NEMA 3, 4X, 5, 6, 7BCD (Div. 2), 9FG (Div. 2), 12 Watertight Raintight Dust-tight Wet Locations
5C

NEMA: 3, 4X, 5, 6, 7BCD (Div. 2), 9FG (Div. 2), 12 UL Standard: 1203 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
Standard Materials:
Body and cover steel reinforced neoprene Strain relief and reinforcement plates stainless steel Exterior hardware stainless steel
Standard Finishes:
Neoprene safety yellow Stainless steel natural
5C
Features:
Safety cushioned neoprene encapsulation protects internal switches and connectors from impact damage and provides extra protection for personnel. Stress relief for your cable is built-in. A separate cable grip is not needed. Uses Cooper Crouse-Hinds ESWP factory sealed contacts suitable for use in Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C and D Switches are rated for 10 amps 600 VAC (NEMA A600). Indicator plates meet OSHA requirements for clear identification of functions. A full set of plates is included with each station. Jam resistant operator buttons are raised flexible diaphragms an integral part of the molded one-piece cover. Compact design Safety yellow finish.
8-Button Control Station
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
575
5C
FLEXITITE D2X Series Attachable Pendant Pushbutton Stations

For Class I, Div. 2 Areas
NEMA 3, 4X, 5, 6, 7BCD (Div. 2), 9FG (Div. 2), 12 Watertight Raintight Dust-tight Wet Locations
Pendant Pushbutton Stations
Description 2-Button 4-Button 6-Button 8-Button Cable Dia. .31 .75 .50 .75 .59 .81 .59 .92 Cat. # D2X8635 210 D2X8635410 D2X8635 610 D2X8635 810
Replacement Indicator Plates (A full set is included with each control station)
2-Button Cat. # 315116 315116 315116 315116 315116 315116 1 2 3 4 5 6 Description Down/West Start/North Stop/South Off/In On/Out Fwd/Right Cat. # 315116 7 315116 8 Description Rev/Left Up/East
Replacement Switch
Description Replacement Switch Cat. # ESWP126
5C
4, 6 and 8-Button Cat. # 314850 1 314850 2 314850 3 314850 4 314850 5 Description Bridge Trolley Hoist In/Out Up/Down Right/Left East/West Cat. # 314850 6 314850 9 Description Fwd/Rev North/South On/Off Start/Stop
Dimensions
In Inches:
2-Button
4-Button
6-Button
8-Button
576
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
FLEXITITE Attachable Pendant Pushbutton Stations
NEMA 3, 4X, 5, 6, 12
Raintight Watertight Dust-tight Wet Locations
5C
Applications:
FLEXITITE attachable pendant pushbutton stations are used: For safe, multi-function motor circuit control of: Hoists Cranes Machine Tools Electromagnets Non-hazardous control environments requiring from 2 to 8 functions. Where washdowns are necessary in damp, wet, dirty, or corrosive locations.
A cable grip is used with pilot light option, and is included with kit.
Inside Front View
Features:
Safety insulated to meet OSHA requirements for enclosing live parts. The entire unit except the strain relief is insulated with neoprene. Safety cushioned neoprene encapsulation protects internal switches and connectors from impact damage and provides extra protection for personnel. Stress relief for your cable is built-in. A separate cable grip is not needed unless the optional pilot light kit is used. Positive action long life momentary contact switches. Maintained Off-On toggle switch is optionally available on 4, 6, and 8 button units. Jam resistant operator buttons are raised flexible diaphragms an integral part of the molded one-piece cover. Compact 3" x 3" enclosure easily fits your hand. Indicator plates meet OSHA requirements for clear identification of functions. A full set of plates is provided with each station.
5C
1. BODY SEAL Compresses against mating half to form a positive seal. 2. REDUCING GROMMETS Permit use of five different cable sizes while sealing cable entrance. 3. CABLE CLAMP Secures conductors inside switch. Transfers strain to inner steel core of switch. (Not used with pilot light.) 4. TOGGLE SWITCH (OPTIONAL) Maintained off-on switch to control power to pendant stations. 5. GREEN GROUNDING SCREW Makes positive contact between inner steel core and ground wire. 6. INSULATION BARRIERS On 4- and 6-button models. Position switches and separate N.O. and N.C. switch contacts for added safety. 7. SEPARATOR For 4- and 6-button models. Tough polypropylene sheet retains switches and forms an insulated wiring channel. STRAIN RELIEF Integral part of the inner steel core provides tie-off point for strain chain to relieve tension from electrical cable. ELECTRICAL INTERLOCK Schematic furnished to wire switches against opposed operations. LOW COST, EASILY INSTALLED Despite their many advantages, Cooper Crouse-Hinds pendant stations generally cost less than similar metal units. RAISED BUMPER protects lens against damage caused by impact.

NEMA: 3, 4X, 5, 6, 12 UL Standard: 508 CSA Approved
Standard Materials:
Body and cover steel reinforced neoprene Strain relief and reinforcement plates stainless steel Exterior hardware stainless steel
Standard Finishes:
Neoprene safety yellow Steel stainless steel
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
577
5C
FLEXITITE Attachable Pendant Pushbutton Stations
NEMA 3, 4X, 5, 6, 12
Raintight Watertight Dust-tight Wet Locations
Ordering Information - One and Two Speed 2, 4, 6 and 8 Buttons

Style 2-Button 1 Speed 2 Speed DC 20A 460V 10A 230V 10A 125V Switch* 2 hp. 230V 1/2 hp. 230V 1/8 hp. 125V Cable Diameter Shipping Weight (lbs.) Dimensions Length Width Depth
None 4-Button
X8635 21
X8635 22
X8635 20
.555 thru .665
21/2
83/4"
21/4"
3"
3316317 X8635 41B X8635 42B 6-Button 3316317 X8635 61B X8635 62B
X8635 40B
.505 thru .730
131/2"
3"
35/8"
X8635 60B
.590 thru .840
61/ 2
17"
3"
35/8"
5C
8-Button 3316317 X8635 81

*Should be ordered separately. 2 speed includes: 6, 2-speed switches and 2, single speed switches.
X8635 82
X8635 80
.698 thru .968
211/2"
3"
37/16"
Pilot Light Kit for 4, 6 and 8-Button Only

Cable Diameter 4 and 6 Button 8 Button Lamp Voltage .50 thru .62 .63 thru .74 .75 thru .87 .69 thru .97 110125V AC 3316533 3316533 1 3316533 2 3316624 210250V AC 3316534 3316534 1 3316534 2 3316625
Pilot light kit includes: lamp assembly with lens and bulb, cable support grip, and "S" hook. Support grip and "S" hook not required on 8-button. NEMA 3,4,5,12 only.
FLEXITITE 2-Button Attachable Pendant Switch

Cat. # X8995 1 Yellow Contact Style Momentary Switch Voltage 240 AC 120 AC 24 AC 250 VDC 125 VDC Amps Make 7.5 15.0 15.0 0.27 .055 Amps Break 0.75 1.5 2.5 0.27 0.55
Indicator Plates (Replacement only units come with plates standard)

2-Button Cat. # 315116 1 315116 2 315116 3 315116 4 315116 5 315116 6 Description Down/West Start/North Stop/South Off/In On/Out Fwd/Right Cat. # 315116 7 315116 8 315116 9 315116 10 315116 11 Description Rev/Left Up/East Raise/Lower Up/Down Right/Left Cat. # 314850 1 314850 2 314850 3 314850 4 314850 5 Description Bridge Trolley Hoist In/Out (Up/Down) 4, 6 and 8-Button Cat. # 314850 6 314850 9 314850 12 314850 13 Description Fwd/Rev. (North/South) On/Off (Start/Stop) Raise/Lower Inbd/Outbd Off/On
Right/Left (East/West) 314850 14
Shoulder Bolts for Fastening Front to Back Cover 2-Button (P/N 1316311-2); 4- & 6-Button (P/N 1316311-1); 8 button (P/N 1316311-3). NOTE: Refer to price list for identification of stock items.
Replacement Parts
Cat. # Front Cover Back Cover Toggle Switch Kit Switch Element Part Numbers 1 Speed 20A, 460V 2hp, 230V DC Toggle 2 speed 10A, 230V 10A, 125V Off/On 1 /2 hp. 230V 1/8 hp. 125V Element Barrier 314896 314896 314896 314896 314903 314903 314903 314903 314849 1 1316313 (4 Req'd) 314849 1 1316313 (6 Req'd) 335616 (1 Req'd) 335571 (1 Req'd) Parts Separator Kit RX8635 21 RX8635 41 See Above RX8635 61 Chart Pilot Light Kit
Style
2-Button A335578
A335577 1 Not Avail. 3316480 3316480 3316480 3316480
4-Button 3335848 1 3335829 1 3316317 6-Button 3335845 1 3335830 1 3316317 8-Button 3344153 3344154 3316317
1316313 Not Req'd Not Req'd RX8635 80
Toggle switch kit includes: toggle switch, guard, assembly and screws. Parts kit includes cable grommets, legend plates and assembly screws.
578
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EGF Series Ground Fault Control Station
5C
Applications:
EGF Series of control stations are used: For the additional safety of personnel, and for equipment protection in remote areas.
Features:
Copper-free aluminum construction offers lightweight, corrosion resistance and a long, maintenance-free service life. 11/4" throughfeed conduit hubs with 11/4"1" reducers for ease of installation. Compact, internally flanged enclosure requires minimum installation area. Steel mounting feet with electroplate finish for fast, secure, and corrosionresistant mounting. Accepts #14#10 copper wire sizes for application flexibility. Push-to-test button and pilot light (with 10,000 hour incandescent lamp) for easy and constant operational monitoring of unit. Cast aluminum circuit breaker operating handle for durability during use. EPD breakers for protection of heat tracing circuits.
5C
Number of Breakers Number of Poles Milliamp Trip 5 5 5 30 30 30 Cat. # EGF11 EGF12 EGF21 EGF11EPD EGF12EPD EGF21EPD 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 Add 15, 20, 25, or 30 amp breaker rating.

NEC: Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA 3, 7CD, 9EFG, 12
Dimensions
In Inches:
Standard Materials:
Bodies, covers, threaded barrels, guards, collars, and toggle operator copperfree aluminum Pushbuttons type 6 / 6 nylon Operating shafts stainless steel
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum natural Sheet steel zinc electroplate with chromate finish Stainless steel natural
Electrical Rating:
GFI, EPD breakers 120 VAC (single pole), 120 / 240 VAC for two pole (10,000 AIC)
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
579
5C
580
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Explosionproof Variable Frequency Drives
6C
Description
Explosionproof VFDs - Class I, Division 1 & 2
ACE Series
Page No.
see page 582
6C
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
581
6C
ACE Series Explosionproof Variable Frequency Drives

Multiple Patents Pending
Cl. I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D NEMA 3, 4X, 7, 9 UL Listed Raintight Wet locations
The only explosionproof VFD solution utilizing NEMA 7 with active cooling
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Explosionproof VFDs are highly flexible AC drives designed specifically for hazardous area locations. These drives can be mounted next to the motor in the classified area, providing significant installation cost savings - along with the traditional VFD benefits of energy savings, speed and torque control, and system diagnostics. This Cooper Crouse-Hinds innovative product features the first ever NEMA 7 enclosure with active cooling, allowing the solution to be rated Class I, Divisions 1 and 2.
Applications:
Designed to match the high requirements of process industries, such as oil and gas, chemical, and mining Pumps, compressors, fans, separators, and mixers
6C
VFD Benefits:
Improved Process Control
Fine speed and torque control Soft start capability Improved pressure, flow, and motion control
Reduced Operation and Installation Costs

Locate VFD in classified area, eliminating costly conduit/cable tray runs Eliminate control valves Reduced energy consumption No additional space required in sub-station Extract equipment condition and operating information Lower pump maintenance costs
Reliable Performance in Any Environment

Recommended temperature range: 0C to 50C (consult factory for more extreme temperature guidance) Class I, Divisions 1 and 2 Raintight, wet locations

UL Listed Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D Standards UL 1203 cUL: CSA 22.2 No. 30 M1986 Environmental NEMA 3, 4X, 7, 9 Raintight Wet locations
Standard Materials
Enclosure - epoxy powder coated copper-free aluminum Internal Mounting Brackets - natural cooper-free aluminum and natural stainless steel Hinges, Hardware, Filter Assemblies - natural stainless steel Gaskets - neoprene Glass - tempered soda lime
Horsepower Ratings:
Available up to 60HP Higher HP ratings coming soon
582
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
ACE Series Explosionproof Variable Frequency Drives

Multiple Patents Pending
Cl. I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D UL Listed
NEMA 3, 4X, 7, 9 Raintight Wet Locations
6C
Catalog Number ACE10 1 3 ACE10 2 3 ACE10 2 5 ACE10 3 6 ACE10 5 8 ACE10 5 10 ACE10 8 13 ACE10 10 17 ACE10 ACE10 ACE10 ACE10 ACE10 15 20 20 30 30 23 28 32 41 46
Disconnect Rating (Amps)
Disconnect Fuse Type
Input Enclosure Rating Size (Amps) 2.3 3.1 4.0 5.5 6.6 8.7 12 16 20 26 30 36 42 55 65 82
Output Rating (Amps) Nominal 0C Horsepower to 25C 1.0 2.0 2.0 3.0 5.0 5.0 7.5 10 15 20 20 30 30 40 50 60 2.80 3.40 4.50 5.50 7.60 9.70 13.0 16.8 23 28 32 41 46 57 74 90
Output Rating (Amps) 25C to 40C 2.5 3.0 4.0 4.8 6.7 8.5 11.4 14.8 20 25 28 36 40 50 65 79
Output Rating (Amps) 40C to 50C 2.3 2.8 3.7 4.6 6.3 8.1 10.8 13.9 19 23 27 34 38 47 61 75
Weight 257 257 257 257 257 262 262 262
30
6C
60
384 384 384 384 384 397 397 397
ACE10 40 57 ACE10 50 74 ACE10 60 90
100
Data in shaded area is a preliminary approximation. Contact factory for final numbers.
Options
Description Communication Modules Profibus Devicenet CAN Open Modbus Ethernet Potentiometer AB 800H add suffix CP CD CC CM CE POT
Example: ABB 60HP VFD, 90 continuous amps at ambient of less than 25C, with Ethernet Communications and a Potentiometer in cover. ACE10 60 90 CE POT
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
583
6C
584
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Switch Rack Assemblies Hazardous and Non-hazardous
7C
Description
Switch Racks
General Information Bus Duct Assemblies Selection Guide
Page No.
7C
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
585
7C
Switch Rack Assemblies
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4X, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12
Applications:
Free-standing switch rack assemblies are used: To provide a complete motor control center in one integrated package Outdoors and indoors In damp, wet or corrosive locations such as sewage treatment plants, lumber mills, marine installations, and food preparation areas In areas made hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors or gases, such as petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants, gas gathering plants, pipeline compressor stations, and drilling rigs, both onshore and offshore In areas where hazardous dusts are present, such as coal handling facilities, grain processing and handling plants, and certain food process industries
7C

NEC: Class I, Divisions 1 & 2, Groups C, D (Group B optional) Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA: 3, 4X (optional), 7B (optional) CD, 9EFG, 12
Standard Finishes:
Rack frame hot dip galvanized steel or natural aluminum Components see sections A & C for finishes
Features:
Complete factory assembled and wired switch racks Pre-drilled bus boxes allow for quick and easy changing or adding of components Complete assembly covered under one order, eliminates engineering costs, additional costs of placing separate orders with several vendors for various components, and assembly and scheduling problems at job site Wiring is simple. After switch rack is in place, feeders are connected to the main bus and connections made from starters motors. No other field wiring is necessary Maintenance time and costs are reduced by having controls grouped. Work is performed in one location instead of moving from one control to another in various locations Major components are standard EBM, EPC, NMC, NMG, NCB, FLB, D2PB, EXD, D2D, EPL, and D2L enclosures featuring ready access to starters and breakers for inspection and maintenance Custom built racks to meet your exact requirements are a Cooper CrouseHinds specialty. Complete quotations will be supplied for any job, large or small (38' length max)
Options:
Rack frame finish corrosion resistant primer with air dry epoxy Options listed for individual components can be incorporated in complete switch racks
Standard Materials:
Rack frames structural steel or aluminum channel members, bolted and welded Components see sections A & C for material
586
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4X, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 Rack Frame Design:
Structure:
Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Watertight Main Bus Equipment:
7C
Construction:
General:
All construction to be in accordance with current National Electrical Code (NEC), National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA), state and local standards as designated by the purchaser. All hazardous area enclosures for motor starters, combination motor starters, circuit breakers, motor circuit protectors, instrument enclosures, panelboards, main bus, fittings, receptacles, and lighting fixtures shall be made and supplied by the manufacturer. All explosionproof threaded enclosures for combination starters, circuit breakers, motor circuit protectors, and starters shall be UL classified. All other standard hazardous area enclosures shall be UL listed or UL classified. Motor control racks shall be constructed by an approved union shop. Manufacturer shall retain permanent records of all motor control racks and shall have the capability of duplicating, or replacing, any fully-assembled rack or rack component. Manufacturer to assume responsibility for construction, purchase/manufacturer of components, complete circuit continuity testing, and testing of mechanical functions of components.
Switch rack, either single or double face as required, shall be rigid, free-standing structures. Racks shall be factorywelded, assembled and fabricated from standard rolled structural steel or aluminum shapes. Vertical risers will be 6" I-beam and horizontal members shall be 6-inch channel. Mounting feet shall be 6-inch channel. Width of such feet for single-sided racks shall be 41 inches. End mounting feet will be braced (welded) to the upright with 6" T member. Mounting feet shall be anchored at the job site with 1-inch diameter bolts. Anchor bolts and mounting pads will be the responsibility of the user. Maximum horizontal spacing between mounting legs shall not exceed 6 feet. (Specific dimensions to be determined by the manufacturer.) Racks longer than 20 feet will be supplied as bolt-together sections. (Specific section dimensions to be determined by the manufacturer.)
Grounding:
A pressure-type grounding lug with appropriate wire capacity will be provided at each end of frame. Finish: Rack frame shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication or natural aluminum.
Class I, Division 1: Main bus material shall be copper only and capable of withstanding up to 65K amps fault current. Cable bus will be wired to terminal blocks enclosed in cast, copper-free aluminum, explosionproof junction boxes, Cooper Crouse-Hinds type EJB. Such junction boxes for incoming power and distribution wiring shall be provided at either the top or bottom of the rack. Enclosures shall be connected by rigid conduit with conduit seals installed in accordance with the NEC. Load conduit or cable will leave rack either below or above. Manufacturer shall provide conduit layouts. Class I, Division 2: Main bus material shall be copper only and capable of withstanding up to 65K amps fault current. Cable bus will be wired to terminal blocks enclosed in cast, copper-free aluminum weathertight junction boxes, Cooper Crouse-Hinds type WJB. Such junction boxes for incoming power and distribution wiring shall be provided at either the top or bottom of the rack. Enclosures shall be connected by rigid conduit with conduit seals installed as required by the NEC. Load conduit or cable will leave rack either below or above. Manufacturer shall provide conduit layouts.
7C
Bus Duct in Lieu of Junction Boxes (Optional):

Cable bus will be wired to a weathertight bus duct provided at the top or bottom of the rack.
Canopy (Optional):
Single- or double-pitched canopy shall have minimum 15-degree pitch with a minimum 7'6" ground clearance, and 2foot overhang. Roofing material shall be corrugated aluminum. Canopy roof trusses, cross channels, roof material, and mounting hardware shall be shipped unassembled for quick assembly at the job site. All holes in structure shall be provided except for roof mounting holes which will be drilled in the field. Manufacturer will supply drawings and material for complete field assembly of canopy.
Cooper Crouse-Hinds switch rack installed in a fuel storage area.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
587
7C
Motor Control Components:

Explosionproof Quick Opening Enclosures: All circuit breakers, motor circuit protectors and combination or acrossthe-line motor starters shall be enclosed in quick-opening enclosures (Cooper Crouse-Hinds types EBM or EPC). Types: Ground joint bolted cover enclosure shall be Cooper Crouse-Hinds type EBM, Underwriters Laboratories Inc. classified for use in Class I, Groups C, D, Divisions 1 and 2, Class II, Groups E, F, G, Divisions 1 and 2 and Class III hazardous locations and shall also be suitable for Type 3, 3R and/or Type 4 (NEMA 3, 3R and 4) areas. All enclosures shall be cast of a corrosion-resistant copper-free aluminum alloy (less than 0.4% copper) and shall be of a semi clamshell design with external flange to promote ease of apparatus installation, adjustment and maintenance. Most importantly, enclosure inside dimensions shall conform to the wire bending space requirements of the National Electrical code NFPA70 paragraph 373-6. Enclosures with flat covers, internal flanges or those not conforming to NFPA70 paragraph 373-6 are not permitted. Covers shall be hinged on the left side and, when closed, shall be affixed top the body by multiple lead thread bolts to promote quick opening and closing of the enclosure. Cover bolts shall be hex head stainless steel without screwdriver slots, to promote the use of a socket or wrench for proper tightening. They shall be captive to the cover and stainless steel spring loaded to indicate the fully unthreaded position. Spring loading shall give visual indication that the bolts are free of the body when the cover is being opened. The cover flange ground joint shall have an integeral gasket to prevent the entry of windblown dust, rain or sleet.
All enclosures shall be fitted, as standard, with adjustable, extended, corrosion-resistant, copper-free aluminum hinges that shall allow the cover to swing away from the body when opened and shall permit unobstructed working space for maintenance, adjustment or replacement of the internal apparatus. Additionally these hinges shall allow minimum enclosure-to-enclosure spacing with little interference between an open cover and an adjacent enclosure. Enclosures with hinges fabricated from steel or aluminum stampings shall not be permitted. All enclosures shall be provided with drilled, tapped and plugged conduit entrances suitably sized for the electrical application. Power conduit entrances shall be located 1 (or 2) each on (or equally spaced from) the enclosure vertical centerline at top and bottom. A single, plugged 1" entrance for a control conduit shall be provided at the bottom of the enclosure. (Some enclosures can also be provided with a plugged 1" entrance for control conduit at the top.) All conduit entrances shall be furnished with removable copper-free aluminum reducers, each with integral wire pulling bushing. All conduit entrances shall be located the same distance from the enclosure mounting surface to facilitate conduit run layout and/or stub up construction. All enclosures shall have rugged, cast copper-free aluminum circuit breaker and motor starter overload reset operating handles located on the right side of the enclosure. These handles shall operate the internal mechanisms via stainless steel, gasketed shafts and bearings through the side wall of the body. Correct circuit breaker and overload reset operation shall be visually confirmed with the cover open. Circuit breaker handles shall be padlockable in either the "OFF" or "ON" position, and shall be trip-free of the circuit breaker itself. An attached indicating plate shall give clear, visual confirmation of the circuit breaker status. Adjustable circuit breaker handle stops shall be provided to ensure full operation of the circuit breaker and to prevent handle overthrow that could damage the circuit breaker toggle.
Motor starter overload reset operating mechanisms shall be field adjustable. Threaded construction enclosures shall be Cooper Crouse-Hinds type EPC, Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. classified for use in Class I, Groups C, D, Divisions 1 and 2, Class II, Groups E, F, G Divisions 1 and 2 and Class III hazardous locations and shall also be suitable for Type 3, 3R and/or Type 4 (NEMA 3, 3R and 4) areas. All enclosures shall be cast of a corrosion-resistant copper-free aluminum alloy (less than 0.4% copper) and shall be of a three section design. Multiple-start straight buttress threads between the covers and the body shall ensure quick access to the interior in less than two full turns of the covers. A system of stops shall prevent overtightening and thread seizing. A system of locks shall prevent covers from loosening due to external vibration. Female threads on the top cover with male threads on the bottom cover shall ensure inherent water and rain shedding. All exposed screws, bolts and hardware shall be stainless steel. The external circuit breaker operating handle affixed to a stainless steel shaft, shall be padlockable in either the "ON" or "OFF" position with up to three padlocks. Circuit breaker mechanisms shall be trip-free of the circuit breaker itself to allow the circuit breaker to open under overload conditions even if it is locked in the "ON" position. The mounting bracket shall provide a three-point suspension system for quick installation and adjustment. Conduit entrances shall have integral wire pulling bushings and conduit stops. These openings shall be arranged two at the top and two at the bottom and shall be sized for power and control requirements.
7C
General:
All enclosures shall be bolted to the horizontal frame members on either the front or back or both front and back. Enclosures shall be connected to the main bus via conduit seals. (To be field poured). All hardware used to mount the enclosures shall be stainless steel.
588
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
7C
Lighting Panelboards:
Class I, Division 1: Panelboards shall be Cooper CrouseHinds type, factory-sealed EXD or EPL as specified and shall meet the following electrical ratings: EPL 1, 2 or 3 pole, 240 volt maximum, 100 amp maximum branch trip rating, 10,000 AIC. EXD 1, 2 or 3 pole, 600 volt maximum, 100 amp maximum branch trip rating. Class I, Division 2: Lighting panelboard shall be Cooper Crouse-Hinds type D2L factory-sealed, 120 / 240 volt panelboards and be provided with single-pole, two-pole, or three-pole branch circuit breakers with up to 100 amp trip rating; main breaker ranging to 225 amp. Similarly, lighting panelboard shall be type D2PB factorysealed, 120 / 240 volt panelboards and be provided with single-pole or two-pole factory sealed circuit breakers with 15, 20 or 30 amp trip ratings and maximum 10,000 AIC. Power panelboards type D2D factory-sealed, up to 600 volt are provided with single-pole, two-pole, or three-pole branch circuit breakers with up to 100 amp trip ratings; main breaker rating to 225 amp.
Conduit Boxes, Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes:

Conduit boxes, outlet boxes, and device boxes shall be Cooper Crouse-Hinds Condulet fittings. Seals: Seals will be standard Cooper CrouseHinds type Condulet EYS. (Cooper Crouse-Hinds Condulet EYD drains to be specified as required.) Unions: Unions will be Cooper Crouse-Hinds UNY. Breathers and Drains: Breathers and drains shall be Cooper Crouse-Hinds ECD.
Wiring:
Standard wire shall be copper only, 600 volt, 75C minimum rating, UL listed. No power wire less than 12AWG shall be used. Control wire shall be 14AWG minimum, 7 strands, THW minimum. Wiring shall be sized in accordance with the NEC requirements.
Drawings:
Standard drawings supplied for customer approval shall include complete rack wiring diagram, component data, nominal weight of the rack, and overall rack dimensions.
7C
NEMA 4X Option:
All bus boxes, control enclosures and lighting panelboards will be made of KRYDON material to meet NEMA 4X requirements.
Fittings:
All fittings shall be made and provided by the manufacturer. Seals and unions will be provided for each incoming and outgoing conduit as required. All interconnections between components shall be done by the manufacturer with galvanized rigid conduit, and conduit fittings as required to meet the hazardous classification. Interconnecting conduits to be provided with conduit seals as required. All incoming and outgoing rack conduit entrances shall include conduit seals as required by the hazardous location specified. Such seals will be provided by the manufacturer and will not be filled where field wiring is to be introduced.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
589
7C
Bus Duct (Termination Box) Assemblies
NEMA 3R Up to 600 Volts
Applications:
Cooper Crouse-Hinds is now offering NEMA 3R, UL Listed Bus Duct (Termination Box) Assemblies as standard product. Up to 600V, three-phase, 3 or 4 wire, 400Amp or 600Amp service with short circuit ratings of 25K or 50K. Bus ducts or termination boxes provide a means of tapping feeder circuits for power distribution on outdoor switchrack assemblies or indoor wall-mounted applications. Typical application is primarily for bus replacements on existing switchrack installations. New applications may include on-site construction of switchracks or indoor feeder distribution points due to space confinements making local installation more practical.
Features:
UL Listed. NEMA 3R. Maximum voltage rating 600V. 400Amp or 600Amp @ 25KAIC or 50KAIC. External flange on bus duct enclosure and lip on covers prevents water leakage and allows covers to hang freely for ease of installation and maintenance. 3 degree pitch at top, for water run-off, on all flush mounted bottom entry designs. Chorosulfonated polyethlene (Hypalon) gasket material at all bus box section joints, covers and end plates. Standoff (Glastic) insulators moulded of (UL) recognized flameresistant fiberglass-reinforced thermoset polyester moulding compound. Bus bar sizing and bracing complies to UL857 requirements. All welded construction - sheet aluminum, sheet steel (galvanized), or stainless steel. Stainless steel hardware throughout. Two hole compression lugs at all power phase connectors attatched with stainless steel hardware. One (1) drain is standard per bus duct section (typical 4 foot sections). Solid copper bus bars (tin, silver plated and/or insulated optional per customer request). Solid copper ground bar standard. Incoming main lugs supplied size and location specified with customer. Space heaters optional per customer request. Pre-drilled copper bars (when specified by customer). Conduit entries for Myers hubs optional per customer request.
7C
590
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Bus Duct (Termination Box) Catalog Numbering System
7C
7C
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
591
7C

Selection Guide
7C
592
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Selection Guide
7C
7C
Not available with D2PB panelboards.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
593
7C

Selection Guide
7C
594
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Apparatus
Section A
Innovative, intelligent NEC and IEC solutions safely and efficiently control power and protect circuits in explosive, wet, and corrosive environments worldwide.
New Products in the Apparatus Product Line

XLPB Industrial Panelboards EID Disconnect Assembly
Section
1A 2A
Notable changes to the Apparatus section of this catalog

All horns and signals have been moved to Section 5S - Audible Signaling Devices Telephones are now located in Section 3A - Instruments
Apparatus
Table of Contents
Section A of the Cooper Crouse-Hinds catalog contains the following product groupings:
Section 1A
Panelboards
(for use in hazardous and non-hazardous areas) For central control and protection of a large number of feeder or branch circuits and for housing of circuit breakers. D2L XLPB D2PB EXD D2D GUSC EPL D2Z LP N2PB NLP
Section 2A
Switches
(for use in hazardous and non-hazardous areas) Switches and enclosures for disconnecting motor, lighting and other circuits. EDS, EDSC NST FSPC EFD, EFDC NRS GUSC FLS 6810 Series WST EID 7810 Series GHG N2RS EBM
Section 3A
Instrument Housings
(for use in hazardous areas) Housings for a variety of types and makes of meters and instruments, thermostats, heaters and clocks. EMH HRC ETW GUB TCH ETC EIH EXH ETR EIHT XC D2TW
596
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Panelboards Hazardous and Non-hazardous
1A
Description
General Information Application/Selection Wiring Diagrams Hazardous Location Panelboards
Division 1 and 2 PowerPlus EXD PowerPlus EPL Exactra LP GUSC Division 2 PowerPlus D2D PowerPlus D2L Exactra LP D2PB N2PB GUSC D2Z
Page No.
see page 613 see page 606 see page 602 see pages 635636 see page 613 see page 606 see page 602 see page 631 see pages 637639 see pages 635636 see page 622 see page 640 see page 643
1A
Ordinary Location
XLPB NLP Series
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
597
1A
Circuit Breaker Panelboards

General Information
Applications:
Circuit breaker panelboards are used in hazardous and non-hazardous areas (as shown in the individual listings): To provide, in one compact unit, a centrally controlled switching system for a large number of feeder or branch circuits For controlling lighting, heating, appliance, heat tracing, motor and similar circuits In locations where rough usage, moisture, dust, dirt and corrosion are a problem To house thermal-magnetic circuit breakers that provide disconnect means, short circuit protection and thermal time delay overload protection
Ratings Fed. Spec. Single and two-pole, W-C-375a, Class 1a 120 / 240 VAC Two and three-pole, W-C-375a, Class 1b 240 VAC EHD/FDB frame used in EXD and D2D panelboards; 14,000 ampere symmetrical interrupting capacity - 480 VAC Ratings Fed. Spec. Single-pole, 277 VAC W-C-375a, Class 2a or 125 VDC Two and three-pole N/A 480 VAC or 250 VDC
Standard Materials, Finishes, Options and Compliances:

See individual listing pages
Wiring Systems:
See pages 600601 for wiring diagrams. These are the standard systems used for single and three-phase panelboards having single, two and three-pole circuit breakers Standard panelboards are listed with all circuit breakers having the same number of poles and wired for one of these systems To meet the requirements of a specific installation, panelboards can be assembled with a combination of single, two and three-pole breakers. To accomplish this, the three individual wiring systems must have the same main service as, for example, 3-phase, 4-wire, solid neutral. Applicable Wiring Systems 3, 4, 5, 8, 11, 12
Features:
Panelboards: All main and branch circuit wire lugs are solderless and readily accessible for fast, easy installation Are factory wired from main terminal blocks or main bus to line side of branch circuit breakers With circuit breakers in factory sealed housings (LP1, EXD and EPL), are also factory wired from the load side of branch circuit breakers to readily accessible terminal blocks With circuit breakers grouped in one enclosure (LP2, D2D, D2L, D2Z and D2PB factory sealed), branch circuit wires are attached directly to circuit breaker load terminals Circuit breakers (thermal magnetic): Are trip-free of the handles and cannot be held closed under short circuit or overload conditions Four breaker types are used in panelboards manufactured by Cooper Crouse-Hinds. They are as follows: Quicklag used in LP, D2PB, EPL and D2L panelboards; 10,000 ampere symmetrical interrupting capacity
1A
Panelboard Type D2PB
Diagrams show only four, six or eight circuits; are intended to show only the phase connections of each circuit breaker and do not necessarily show their physical location in a panelboard. Panelboards are available with the number of circuits indicated in the listings.
Quicklag is a registered trademark of Cutler-Hammer Inc.
598
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

NEC & NEMA Certifications and Compliances Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D NEMA: 3, 4, 7BCD, 12 Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D NEMA: 3, 4, 7BCD, 12 Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups C, D NEMA: 3, 7CD (Div. 2), 12 Cl. I, Zone 1, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D NEMA: 3, 4X, 7ABCD (Div. 2), 12 Corrosion Resistant, Non-Metallic Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA: 3, 4, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA: 3, 4, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA: 3, 7CD, 9EFG, 12 Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA: 3, 4X, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA: 3, 4X, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G NEMA: 3, 7CD, (Div. 2), 12 Corrosion Resistant, Non-Metallic NEMA 3, 12 NEMA 1, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 Number Circuits Max. 30 42 24 54 Breaker Frame Size Various Quicklag Quicklag CEAG Multi-Pole Voltage Max. 600VAC 250VDC 240VAC 125VDC 240VAC 480VAC Trip Rating Amps Max. 100 100 30 180 Circuit Interrupting Amps Max. 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
1A
Panelboard D2D D2L D2PB D2Z
Factory Sealed Yes Yes Yes Yes
Step Down Transformer Available Yes Yes Yes No
EPL
Yes
42
Quicklag
240VAC 125VDC
100
10,000
No
1A
EXD
Yes
30
Various
600VAC 250VDC
100
10,000
No
GUSC
No
Quicklag
240VAC
30
10,000
No
LP1
Yes
36
Quicklag
240VAC
100
10,000
No
LP2
Yes
36
Quicklag
240VAC
100
10,000
Yes
N2PB
Yes
24
Quicklag
240VAC
30
10,000
No
NLP XLPB
No No
30 42
QO/Qwik-Guard Various
240VAC 600VAC
100 100
10,000 10,000
No Yes
Quicklag is a registered trademark of Cutler-Hammer Inc. QO/Qwik-Guard is a registered trademark of Square D.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
599
1A

Wiring Diagrams
D2PB Panelboards
System 1 Mains2-Wire Branches2-Wire Breakers2-Pole System 3 Mains3-Wire Branches3-Wire Breakers2-Pole Solid Neutral System 4 Mains3-Wire Branches2-Wire BreakersSingle-Pole Solid Neutral
System 5 Mains4-Wire, 3-Phase Branches2-Wire, 1-Phase BreakersSingle-Pole Solid Neutral
System 7 Mains2-Wire Branches2-Wire BreakersSingle-Pole Solid Neutral
System 8 Mains4-Wire, 3-Phase Branches3-Wire, 1-Phase Breakers2-Pole Solid Neutral
1A
System 12 Mains3-Wire, 3-Phase Branches3-Wire, 3-Phase Breakers3-Pole
600
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
PowerPlus Lighting Panelboards

Wiring Diagrams
PowerPlus Power Panelboards
1A
1A
Single Phase Circuit
Three Phase Circuit
PowerPlus Lighting Panelboards
Single Phase Circuit
Three Phase Circuit
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
601
1A
Exactra Panelboards
Lighting and Heat Tracing LP1 Series LP2 Series (Div. 2)
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4*, 4X 7BCD, 9EFG, 12
CSA Enc. 3, 4*, 5 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Factory Sealed Wet Locations Watertight
Exactra Factory-Sealed Lighting Panelboards provide flexibility and labor savings when installed, and for future changes in the field. Panels are prewired to maximum circuit capacity and ratings.

LP1 panelboards
Class I, Groups B, C, D Class I, Zone 1 & 2, IIB + H2 Class II, Groups E, F, G Class III NEMA 3, 4*, 4X, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 CSA Enc. 3, 4*, 5 IP65* Enclosure UL Classified (Standard 1203) cUL Classified (Certified by UL to CSA C22.2 No. 30) Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C, D Class I, Zone 1 & 2, IIB + H2 Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA 3, 4*, 4X, 7BCD (Div 2), 9EFG, 12 CSA Enc. 3, 4*, 5 IP65* Enclosure UL Classified (Standard 1203) cUL Classified (Certified by UL to CSA C22.2 No. 30)
Applications:
Exactra Factory-Sealed Lighting Panelboards are ideal: In areas made hazardous by the presence of flammable gases and vapors, and combustable dusts In areas subject to weather, dampness, and corrosion For branch power distribution and circuit protection for motors, valves, pumps, lighting, heat tracing, receptacles, etc. For indoor and outdoor applications in petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants, and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist In areas where flammable vapors or gases or highly combustible dusts may be present due to accidental or abnormal conditions To accommodate up to 35 amp branch loads
LP2 Panelboards

1A

Factory sealed, no external seals required for branch circuits. External seals are required for Class I, Div. 1 applications Fully wired for circuit breaker housing to pre-numbered terminals in wiring compartment External flange design allows wide unobstructed cover opening for easy wiring access External circuit breaker handles can be padlocked "ON" or "OFF" Furnished with two 3" and ten 11/2" conduit openings Breather and drains available for each enclosure Available with or without main circuit breaker up to 100 amps Isolated neutral and ground bar provided Available with up to 6 GFI and/or EPD branch breakers per panel. GFI and EPD branch breakers available within the same panel Available with ambient compensated breakers throughout panelboard Stainless steel hinges allow the cover to swing wide open or be removed Stainless steel hex head bolts captive design prevents lost bolts Cast copper-free (less than 0.4%) aluminum construction for excellent corrosion resistance Neoprene cover gasket meets NEMA 4 / CSA Enc. 4 / IP65 requirements, provides watertight seal for superior water and corrosion protection Copper bus bar system 602
Standard Materials:
Body and cover cast copper-free aluminum Gasket neoprene Operating handles extruded aluminum (copper-free) Operating shafts, cover bolts, washers, GFI/EPD plungers and hinges stainless steel Circuit breaker operator forks - for 1 pole standard breakers - die-cast aluminum (copper-free) - for 1 and 2 pole GFI / EPD breakers die-cast aluminum (copper-free) - for 2 and 3 pole standard breakers stainless steel Lifting bracket cold rolled steel Bus bar copper LP1 Lighting Panelboard
Standard Finishes:
Aluminum natural Stainless steel natural Cold rolled steel electrogalvanized
* NEMA 4/CSA Enc. 4/IP65 hosetight with breather and drain openings plugged. With suffix -GB. External seals required for Class I, Div. 1. NEMA 4X when ordered with suffix S752 with breather and drain openings plugged.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Exactra Panelboards
Electrical Ratings:
Branch Breaker (120 / 240 VAC Quicklag Bolt On) Trip Ratings 1, 2, 3 pole 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35 amp GFI type 1, 2-pole (5 mA sensitivity) 15, 20, 25, 30 amp EPD type 1, 2-pole (30 mA sensitivity) 15, 20, 25, 30 amp Main Breaker Trip Ratings: Size B & C 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 55, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 amp 2, 3-pole Main Lugs Size B & C 100 amp
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4*, 4X 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 Options:
Description Suffix Alternate feed: incoming power into terminal enclosure from bottom ........................................ A Group B and E suitability (10A not avail.) ............................ GB Lamicoid nameplate with customer-specified panel identification ............................... LID Stainless steel nameplate with customer-specified panel identification ............................... SID 125W@120 VAC, 250W@240 VAC internal space heater in circuit breaker enclosure ............ R22 External epoxy powder coat finish ........................................... S752 Internal and external epoxy powder coat finish ...................... S753 One breather and two drains per enclosure .................................... S756V All conduit entries plugged with PLG recessed head plugs .......... S822 All conduit entries plugged with square headed plugs .................. S872
CSA Enc. 3, 4*, 5 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Factory Sealed Wet Locations Watertight Breaker Options:
1A
Description Suffix EPD branch breaker (up to 6 EPD and/or GFI per panel) ................... E GFI branch breaker (up to 6 EPD and/or GFI per panel) ................... G Ambient compensated (50C) breakers throughout panelboard .. V HID branch breaker for lighting loads ............................................. H
Lighting Panelboard Accessories:

Description Extra circuit breaker operator assemblies 1-pole (qty. 3) ......... Replacement cover plugs for unused circuit breaker positions (qty. 6) ....................................... Extra circuit breaker operator assemblies for 1 pole and 2 pole GFI/EPD breakers (qty. 3) .. GFI/EPD "push to test" plungers (qty. 6) ......................... GFI/EPD entry plugs (qty. 6) ...... Replacement mounting feet (qty. 2) ........................................ Extra circuit breaker operator assembies for 2 pole standard and GFI/EPD breakers .............. Extra circuit breaker operator assembies for 3 pole breakers .. Cat. # LP K1 LP K2 LP K3 LP K4 LP K5 LP K6 LP K7 LP K8
Weight
150 lbs.
1A
Dimensions
In Inches:
Panel Capacity:
Max. No. of Branch Spaces Panel Size B C With Main With Main Breaker Lug Only 2-pole 3-pole 24 36 22 34 21 33 Available w/GFI, Main EPD Breaker Branch Max. Amp Protection 100 100 Yes Yes
* NEMA 4/CSA Enc. 4/IP65 hosetight with breather and drain openings plugged. With suffix -GB. External seals required for Class I, Div. 1. NEMA 4X when ordered with suffix S752 with breather and drain openings plugged. Quicklag is a registered trademark of Cutler-Hammer Inc.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
603
1A
Exactra Panelboards
LP1 & LP2 Factory Sealed 120 / 240 Volt Lighting Panelboards
Division 1 Branch Spaces Needed 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 20 22 22 24 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 Breaker Ready (Empty) 1 Phase 3 Wire LP1B106 LP1B108 LP1B110 LP1B112 LP1B114 LP1B116 LP1B118 LP1B120 LP1C120 LP1B122 LP1C122 LP1B124 LP1C124 LP1C126 LP1C128 LP1C130 LP1C132 LP1C134 LP1C136 LP1B100 LP1C100 3 Phase 4 Wire LP1B306 LP1B308 LP1B310 LP1B312 LP1B314 LP1B316 LP1B318 LP1B320 LP1C320 LP1B322 LP1C322 LP1B324 LP1C324 LP1C326 LP1C328 LP1C330 LP1C332 LP1C334 LP1C336 LP1B300 LP1C300 Division 2 1 Phase 3 Wire LP2B106 LP2B108 LP2B110 LP2B112 LP2B114 LP2B116 LP2B118 LP2B120 LP2C120 LP2B122 LP2C122 LP2B124 LP2C124 LP2C126 LP2C128 LP2C130 LP2C132 LP2C134 LP2C136 LP2B100 LP2C100 3 Phase 4 Wire LP2B306 LP2B308 LP2B310 LP2B312 LP2B314 LP2B316 LP2B318 LP2B320 LP2C320 LP2B322 LP2C322 LP2B324 LP2C324 LP2C326 LP2C328 LP2C330 LP2C332 LP2C334 LP2C336 LP2B300 LP2C300
1.
2.
Select basic panelboard catalog number from listing: Determine phase (available with single-phase or three-phase wiring). Determine a total even number of breaker spaces needed to complete your desired lighting panelboard. Note: 3 breaker spaces = Three-pole breaker 2 breaker spaces = Two-pole breaker 2 breaker spaces = Two-pole GFI (or EPD) breaker 1 breaker space = Single-pole breaker 1 breaker space = Single-pole GFI (or EPD) breaker Review Panel Capacity table see page 603 If GFI or EPD breakers are to be included insert "G", "E" or "EG" after base catalog number (e.g., LP2B316G). Maximum number of GFI and/or EPD breaker spaces is 6 per panel. (e.g. 6 single-pole or 3 two-pole). For more, consult factory. If ambient compensated breakers are required, insert "V" (e.g. LP2B318GV). Using three-pole branch breakers first, select circuit breakers for lighting panel board application: Place an asterisk (*) before each quantity of circuit breakers First insert the quantity of breakers needed. Second insert the quantity of poles (start with three-pole breakers). Note: Single-phase panelboards can have single- or two-pole breakers. Three-phase panelboards can have single, two- or three-pole breakers. Third insert the ampere rating needed (start with highest ampere rating). Insert "G" for GFI or "E" for EPD type breakers, if desired. For additional circuit breakers repeat step 2. If there are more three-poles with different amp ratings, then continue with threepole designations. Otherwise continue with two-pole circuit breakers, and then single-pole breakers. To add a main breaker, insert a space, the number of poles (2 or 3), an "M" to indicate main breaker, then indicate the amp rating (See "ratings" for trip ratings available). If no main breaker is specified, the panelboard will have main lugs. No suffix needed in catalog number for main lug only. For future spaces, to provide for operating mechanism without breaker write 00 (e.g. one three-pole mechanism without breaker: 01300). Unused breaker positions without designations will be blanked and plugged. Complete panel will be provided for future breaker installations.
1A
Items are not available with main circuit breaker. Provided for main lug only; main breaker must be specified with amperage.
Catalog Number Example:

Lighting Panelboards can be furnished with an assortment of breaker ratings and pole configurations. Assortments may be ordered by adding the number of poles and amp rating designations to the catalog number. Example: A three-phase, Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D lighting panelboard with: 5 three-pole breakers with 15 amp rating 6 single-pole breakers with 20 amp GFI personnel protection Three-pole main breaker with 100 amp rating Alternate feed option Breather and drain option 3.
4.
* NEMA 4/CSA Enc. 4/IP65 hosetight without suffix S756V. External seals required for Class I, Div. 1. NEMA 4X when ordered with suffix S752 without suffix S756V. With suffix -GB.
604
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Exactra Panelboards
Wiring Diagrams:
1A
1A
* NEMA 4/CSA Enc. 4/IP65 hosetight without suffix S756V. External seals required for Class I, Div. 1. NEMA 4X when ordered with suffix S752 without suffix S756V. With suffix -GB.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
605
1A
PowerPlus Panelboards
Lighting and Heat Tracing EPL Series (Div. 1 & 2) D2L Series (Div. 2)
EPL Series: Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 1 & 2, IIB + H2 Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA/EEMAC 3, 4, 4X, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12
D2L Series: Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 2, IIB + H2 Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 4, 4X, 7BCD, 12
PowerPlus Series Panelboards provide both premium factory-sealed and value non-factory-sealed solutions for the protection and distribution of lighting, power, and heat tracing circuits. This panel solution is designed, engineered, and manufactured to be the industrys safest and most dependable panelboard for hazardous area locations.
PowerPlus Premium and Value Solutions

Premium Solution: PowerPlus factorysealed panelboards are premium panelboards that provide maximum circuit flexibility with labor savings during installation, operation, and maintenance, and are accommodating for future changes in the field (order with either S or A in base part number). Panels are pre-wired to maximum circuit capacity, allowing for easy and safe replacement or installation of components in the field, while maintaining factory-sealed integrity. Value Solution: PowerPlus non-factorysealed panelboards are value panelboards that offer maximum circuit flexibility and many of the same features and benefits of the PowerPlus premium line. This value solution is provided without terminal housing and factory wiring of circuits (order with N in base part number). The non-factory-sealed solution reduces initial panelboard material costs and requires field wiring to circuit breakers and external seals to be field-installed during installation.
1A

EPL Series:
NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Class I, Zone 1 & 2, IIB + H2 Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 4, 4X, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 CSA Enc. 3, 4, 5 UL Standard: 67, 877, 1203 cUL (to CSA Standard C22.2 Nos. 29 & 30) IP65

Circuit breaker enclosure body and cover copper-free aluminum Terminal housing type 316L stainless steel ("S") or copper-free aluminum ("A") Gasket neoprene (cast aluminum enclosure); foam-in-place (stainless steel enclosure) Operating handles copper-free aluminum Operating shafts and bushings, cover bolts, washers, hinges, breather/drain, retractile springs stainless steel Circuit breaker operators non-metallic Lifting bracket electrogalvanized cold rolled steel Chassis silver-plated copper Breather cap Delrin non-metallic material Neutral and ground bar tin-plated aluminum
Applications:
EPL and D2L PowerPlus panelboards are used: In areas made hazardous by the continuous or abnormal presence of flammable gases, vapors, and combustible dusts In areas subject to weather, dampness, and corrosion For branch power distribution and circuit protection to motors, valves, pumps, lighting, heat tracing, receptacles, etc. For indoor and outdoor applications in petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants, and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist To accommodate up to 100 amp branch loads (only 3 circuits), balance is up to 50 amps
D2L Series (Division 2):

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C, D Class I, Zone 2, IIB + H2 Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 4, 4X, 7BCD, 12 CSA Enc. 3, 4, 5 UL Standard: 67, 877, 1077 cUL (to CSA Standard C22.2 Nos. 29 & 30) IP65
Group B and IIB + H2 is standard on all PowerPlus panels, but requires special brackets to be installed on breakers to ensure long-term operability of circuit breakers. To order with brackets installed at factory, add suffix -GB. For field installable kit, order EPL-GB-KIT separately. NEMA 4X rating is available when ordered with suffix S752 or S753. Delrin is a registered trademark of DuPont.
606
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1A
1A
Group B and IIB + H2 is standard on all PowerPlus panels, but requires special brackets to be installed on breakers to ensure long-term operability of circuit breakers. To order with brackets installed at factory, add suffix -GB. For field installable kit, order EPL-GB-KIT separately. NEMA 4X rating is available when ordered with suffix S752 or S753.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
607
1A
1A
608
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Electrical Ratings:
1A
Accessories:
Gland Plates
Field installable gland plates with factory-provided aluminum Myers Hubs for the D2L stainless steel terminal housing (one 3-inch hub and 12 branch entry hubs - size dependent upon suffix, each kit includes 3 gland plates, 1 for the top or bottom and 1 for each side): Part Number 3 /4" branch entry hub D2L HUB2 KIT 1" branch entry hub D2L HUB3 KIT 1 1/2" branch entry hub D2L HUB5 KIT Replacement gland plate (no hubs) D2L HUB0 KIT
Branch Breakers (120/240VAC Quicklag Bolt-On) Trip Ratings:

1-, 2-, and 3-pole 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50 amp (available in all breaker spaces in panel), 55, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 amp (only 3 breaker spaces available for 55 to 100 amp branch breakers) GFI type, 1- and 2-pole (5mA sensitivity) 15, 20, 25, 30, 40 (50 amp - available 2-pole only) EPD type, 1- and 2-pole (30mA sensitivity) 15, 20, 25, 30, 40 (50 amp - available 2-pole only) HID type, 1- and 2-pole, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 50, 60 Available with GFI, EPD, or a combination of both in one panel with a 21-position electrical test circuit Ambient compensated breakers available to +50C
Circuit Breaker Operator Assemblies:

Operator Assemblies D2L/EPL 1-pole or 3-pole breakers D2L/EPL 2-pole breakers Part Number EPL HDL13 EPL HDL2
Main Breaker Trip Ratings:

2- or 3-pole Size B: 10 to 100 amps Size C and D: 10 to 225 amps
Replacement Cover Plugs:

For unused circuit breaker positions (qty. 5): Plug Kits D2L/EPL Sizes B, C, D Part Number EPL OP PLG
Main Lugs:
Size B, C, and D: 225 amp
Kit for Group B

Standard panels less -GB suffix are applicable for Group B, but it is required to install brackets on breakers. Part Number To order brackets factory installed add suffix -GB For field installable kit EPL GB KIT
1A
Options:
To add the following features to the panelboard, add a dash and then the suffix to the Cat. No. When multiple suffixes are needed, add them to the Cat. No. in alpha-numeric order. Description Suffix Space heater................................................................................. R22 Square head plugs on all conduit openings................................. SP Epoxy powder coat finish, external .............................................. S752 Epoxy powder coat finish, internal and external .......................... S753 Recess head plugs on all conduit openings ................................ RP Stainless steel breaker operator cover (ice shield)....................... HG Group B kit factory installed ......................................................... GB GFI breakers ................................................................................. G EPD breakers ................................................................................ E HID breakers ................................................................................. H Ambient compensated breakers (50C)........................................ V Lamacoid Nameplate.................................................................... LID A standard panelboard has conduit openings for power and branch circuits on top. To order a panelboard with main power feed from the bottom of breaker housing, and branch entries on top (alternate) ........... -A** To order an inverted panelboard with all conduit openings for power and branch circuits on the bottom (inverted) .................... -I
D2L/EPL Stainless Steel Breaker Operator Cover

To protect operators from ice build-up for all Part Number D2L/EPL PowerPlus panels: Kit for Size B panel EPL-HG24-KIT Kit for Size C and D panel EPL HG42-KIT
Space Heater Kit

D2L/EPL PowerPlus Panels EPL R22 KIT
Terminal Housing Mounting Plate Kit:

To adapt depth of terminal housing to same depth as breaker enclosure *** Panel Types / Sizes Part Number Terminal Housing D2L/EPL Sizes B, C, D EPLA-MTG-KIT Aluminum D2L Sizes B, C, D D2LS-MTG-KIT Stainless
To order an inverted panelboard with main power feed on top and bottom (alternate inverted) .............................................. -A-I**
Group B and IIB + H2 is standard on all PowerPlus panels, but requires special brackets to be installed on breakers to ensure long-term operability of circuit breakers. To order with brackets installed at factory, add suffix -GB. For field installable kit, order EPL-GB-KIT separately. NEMA 4X rating is available when ordered with suffix S752 or S753. ** Not available in D2L/EPL Size D panels. *** The weight of the panel is sufficiently supported by mounting of breaker enclosure.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
609
1A
Table A Panel Capacity

Maximum Number of Breaker Spaces:
Panel Size B C D Max. No. of Branch Circuit Breaker Spaces With Main With Main Breaker Lug Only 2-pole 3-pole 24 42 42 22 40 36 42 21 39 36 42 Available Main Breaker Ampacity Up to 100 Up to 100 110 to 225 Up to 225 Available With GFI, EPD Branch Protection Yes Yes Yes Yes
Table B To Size Panels with GFI or EPD Branch Breakers

Maximum Number of GFI or EPD Breakers Panel Size with Main Lug or Main SingleTwoBreaker Pole Pole B C D 12 (10 with 3-pole MCB, 11 with 2-pole MCB) 21 14 EPLDN only - can go up to 42 GFI or EPD circuits. EPLDN will accommodate up to 225 amp main breaker. 21 Each factory-sealed panel is equipped with 42 load wires for GFI/EPD breakers and any combination with standard branch breakers. Determine the total number of load wires required to complete your panel. You may not exceed 42 load wires. Load Wires Required Single-pole breaker 1 Single-pole GFI (or EPD) breaker 2 Two-pole breaker 2 Two-pole GFI (or EPD) breaker 3 Three-pole breaker 3 Maximum Total: 42 load wires (factory sealed) Maximum Total: 82 load EPLDN Panels wires (non-factory sealed)
1A
Group B and IIB + H2 is standard on all PowerPlus panels, but requires special brackets to be installed on breakers to ensure long-term operability of circuit breakers. To order with brackets installed at factory, add suffix -GB. For field installable kit, order EPL-GB-KIT separately. NEMA 4X rating is available when ordered with suffix S752 or S753. All size B and size C panels with main breaker rated up to 100 amps use a back-fed branch breaker. All size D and size C panels with main breaker rated from 110 amps to 225 amps have a dedicated location for main breaker. Size C ordered with suffix 2M00 or 3M00 are provided with 36 branch circuits for maximum breaker ampacity. Main breakers are mounted external to chassis. Main breakers are chassis mounted and back-fed.
610
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Example: Class I, Division 2 / Zone 2, Group B panel with: 240VAC lighting panelboard (28) single-pole 20 amp branch breakers (1) single-pole 15 amp branch GFI breaker 225 amp 3-pole main circuit breaker
1A
Lighting Panelboard Catalog Number Example
1A
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
611
1A
Dimensions Size B Panel* (With Stainless Steel Terminal Housing)
Size C and D Panel* (With Cast Terminal Housing)
6.50 (165.1) 1-1/2" NPT 12 PLACES 4.66 (118.4) 2.81 (71.4)
6.50 (165.1) 4.66 (118.4) 2.81 (71.4) 5.10 3.51 (129.5) (89.2) TYP. TYP. .92 (23.4) 1.31 (33.3)TYP. .50 (12.7) 5.50 (139.7) 3 1/2" NPT
1/2" BOLT (M12)
1.83 (46.5)
20.12 (511.0)
C L
3/8" BOLT (M9)
11.16 (283.5) 4.00 (101.6)
12.93 (328.4) APPROXIMATE
1A
11.52 (292.6) APPROXIMATE 48.63 (1235.2)
3 1/2" NPT ALTERNATE FEED OPTION (SUFFIX 'A') ONLY
61.75 (1568.5)
17.50 (444.5)
29.50 (749.3)
6.00 (152.4)
14.88 (377.8) TYP.
5.75 (146.0)
14.88 (377.8) TYP.
Group B and IIB + H2 is standard on all PowerPlus panels, but requires special brackets to be installed on breakers to ensure long-term operability of circuit breakers. To order with brackets installed at factory, add suffix -GB. For field installable kit, order EPL-GB-KIT separately. NEMA 4X rating is available when ordered with suffix S752 or S753. *Stainless steel and cast aluminum terminal housing for Sizes B, C, and D are the same. Note: Value series non-factory-sealed EPL*N panel dimensions are the breaker housing only and use standard entries shown on cast terminal housing.
612
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Power EXD Series (Div. 1 & 2) D2D Series (Div. 2)
PowerPlus Series Panelboards provide both premium factory-sealed and value non-factory-sealed solutions for the protection and distribution of lighting, power, and heat tracing circuits. This panel solution is designed, engineered, and manufactured to be the industrys safest and most dependable panelboard for hazardous area locations.
EXD Series: Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 1 & 2, IIB + H2 Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA/EEMAC 3, 4, 4X, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12
D2D Series: Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 2, IIB + H2 Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 4, 4X, 7BCD, 12
1A

EXD Series:
NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Class I, Zone 1 & 2, IIB + H2 Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 4, 4X, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 CSA Enc. 3, 4, 5 UL Standard: 67, 877, 1203 cUL (to CSA Standard C22.2 Nos. 29 & 30) IP65
PowerPlus Premium and Value Solutions

Premium Solution: PowerPlus factorysealed panelboards are premium panelboards that provide maximum circuit flexibility with labor savings during installation, operation, and maintenance, and are accommodating for future changes in the field (order with either S or A in base part number). Panels are pre-wired to maximum circuit capacity, allowing for easy and safe replacement or installation of components in the field, while maintaining factory-sealed integrity. Value Solution: PowerPlus non-factorysealed panelboards are value panelboards that offer maximum circuit flexibility and many of the same features and benefits of the PowerPlus premium line. This value solution is provided without terminal housing and factory wiring of circuits (order with N in base part number). The non-factory-sealed solution reduces initial panelboard material costs and requires field wiring to circuit breakers and external seals to be field-installed during installation.
D2D Series (Division 2):

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C, D Class I, Zone 2, IIB + H2 Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 4, 4X, 7BCD, 12 CSA Enc. 3, 4, 5 UL Standard: 67, 877, 1077 cUL (to CSA Standard C22.2 Nos. 29 & 30) IP65
1A

Circuit breaker enclosure body and cover copper-free aluminum Terminal housing type 316L stainless steel ("S") or copper-free aluminum ("A") Gasket neoprene (cast aluminum enclosure); foam-in-place (stainless steel enclosure) Operating handles copper-free aluminum Operating shafts and bushings, cover bolts, washers, hinges, breather/drain, retractile springs stainless steel Circuit breaker operators EXD/D2D Size F: copper-free aluminum; all other types: non-metallic Lifting bracket electrogalvanized cold rolled steel Chassis silver-plated copper Breather cap Delrin non-metallic material Neutral and ground bar tin-plated aluminum
Applications:
EXD and D2D PowerPlus panelboards are used: In areas made hazardous by the continuous or abnormal presence of flammable gases, vapors, and combustible dusts In areas subject to weather, dampness, and corrosion For branch power distribution and circuit protection to motors, valves, pumps, lighting, heat tracing, receptacles, etc. For indoor and outdoor applications in petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants, and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist To accommodate up to 100 amp branch loads (only 3 circuits), balance is up to 50 amps
Group B and IIB + H2 is standard on all PowerPlus panels, but requires special brackets to be installed on breakers to ensure long-term operability of circuit breakers. To order with brackets installed at factory, add suffix -GB. For field installable kit, order EXD-GB-KIT for Sizes B, C, and D separately. NEMA 4X rating is available when ordered with suffix S752 or S753. Delrin is a registered trademark of DuPont.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
613
1A
EXD Series: D2D Series: Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 1 & 2, IIB + H2 Cl. I, Zone 2, IIB + H2 Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III Cl. III NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 4, 4X, 7BCD, 12 NEMA/EEMAC 3, 4, 4X, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12
1A
Group B and IIB + H2 is standard on all PowerPlus panels, but requires special brackets to be installed on breakers to ensure long-term operability of circuit breakers. To order with brackets installed at factory, add suffix -GB. For field installable kit, order EXD-GB-KIT for sizes B, C and D separately. NEMA 4X rating is available when ordered with suffix S752 or S753.
614
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1A
1A
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
615
1A PowerPlus Panelboards
Electrical Ratings:
Branch Breakers Trip Ratings:
Panel Size B C D F Voltage 480Y/277 480 480Y/277 480 480Y/277 480 480Y/277, 480, or 600 Phase / Wire 3P 4W 3P 3W 3P 4W 3P 3W 3P 4W 3P 3W 3P 3W or 3P 4W Main Breaker Amperage Up to 100 Up to 100 Up to 100 Up to 100 Up to 225 Up to 225 Up to 225
Options:
Branch Breaker G-frame G-frame G-frame G-frame G-frame G-frame F-frame To add the following features to the panelboard, add a dash and then the suffix to the Cat. No. When multiple suffixes are needed, add them to the Cat. No. in alpha-numeric order. Description Suffix Space heater ............................................................................ R44 Square head plugs on all conduit openings ............................ SP Epoxy powder coat finish, external ......................................... S752 Epoxy powder coat finish, internal and external ..................... S753 Recess head plugs on all conduit openings ........................... RP Stainless steel breaker operator cover (ice shield) .................. HG Group B kit factory installed .................................................... GB GFI breakers ......................................................................... G EPD breakers ........................................................................ E HID breakers ......................................................................... H Ambient compensated breakers (50C) .................................. V GDB 480 3P 3W system .................................................... GDB FDB 600V breakers* ................................................................ FDB600 FD 600V breakers* ................................................................... FD600 HFD 600V breakers* ................................................................ HFD600 Lamacoid Nameplate ............................................................... LID A standard panelboard has conduit openings for power and branch circuits on top. To order a panelboard with main power feed from the bottom of breaker housing, and branch entries on top (alternate) ..................................................................................... -A** To order an inverted panelboard with all conduit openings for power and branch circuits on the bottom (inverted) ................... -I
Panel Sizes B, C, and D (G-Frame CutlerHammer):

1-, 2-, and 3-pole: GHB 480/277Y (standard offering) 2- and 3-pole: GDB 480 (requires suffix -GDB) 1-, 2-, and 3-pole GBH 600Y/347 (requires suffux -GBH; contact factory) 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50 amp (available in all breaker spaces in panel), 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 amp (only 3 breaker spaces available) Ambient compensated breakers are optional to +50C (suffix V)
1A
Panel Size F (F-frame breaker: EHD CutlerHammer standard):

15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60, 70 amp (available in all breaker spaces in panel), 80, 90, 100 amp (only 3 breaker spaces available) Breaker types available - FDB: 2-, and 3-pole 600V - FD: 1-, 2- (277V), and 3-pole (600V) - HFD: 1-, 2- (277V), and 3-pole (600V) - EHD: 1-, 2- (277V), and 3-pole (480V)
To order an inverted panelboard with main power feed on top and bottom (alternate inverted) ............................................. -A-I**
Main Breaker Trip Ratings:

2- and 3-pole (contact factory for single phase sizes B, C, D) Size B: 15 to 100 amps Size C, D, and F: 15 to 225 amps
Main Lugs:
Size B, C, and F: 225 amps Size D: not available; main breaker only
Ampere Interrupting Capacity:

All size panels are certified to 10kAIC Breaker AIC Ratings: - GHB Breaker: 14kAIC at 480Y/277 - EHD Breaker: 14kAIC at 480V Breaker types optional with Sizes B, C, and D panel only: - GDB Breaker: 14kAIC at 480V Breaker types optional with Size F panel only: - FDB Breaker: 14kAIC at 480V and 600V - FD Breaker: 18kAIC at 600V and 35kAIC at 480V & 277V - HFD Breaker: 25kAIC at 600V and 65kAIC at 480V & 277V
Group B and IIB + H2 is standard on all PowerPlus panels, but requires special brackets to be installed on breakers to ensure long-term operability of circuit breakers. To order with brackets installed at factory, add suffix -GB. For field installable kit, order EXD-GB-KIT for Sizes B, C, and D separately. NEMA 4X rating is available when ordered with suffix S752 or S753. For 480 3P 3W system or for 600VAC, a suffix is required. For 480 system, please contact factory. Note: for single-pole 480, GHB breakers will be furnished for Sizes B, C, and D. Two-pole GDB breakers are only available up to 50 amps. F-frame breakers are only available in Size F panel with up to a maximum of 30 circuit spaces. Please contact factory. Available in D2D and EXD Sizes B, C, and D only. *Available with D2D and EXD Size F panels only. **D2D/EXD Sizes C and D are only available with up to 36 circuits.
616
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Accessories:
Gland Plates
1A
Terminal Housing Mounting Plate Kit:

To adapt depth of terminal housing to same depth as breaker enclosure *** Panel Types / Sizes Part Number D2D/EXD Sizes B, C, D EXDA-MTG-KIT D2D Sizes B, C, D D2DS-MTG-KIT Terminal Housing Aluminum Stainless
Field installable gland plates with factory-provided aluminum Myers Hubs for the D2D stainless steel terminal housing (one 3inch hub and 12 branch entry hubs - size dependent upon suffix, each kit includes 3 gland plates, 1 for the top or bottom and 1 for each side): Part Number 3 /4" branch entry hub D2D HUB2 KIT 1" branch entry hub D2D HUB3 KIT 1 1/2" branch entry hub D2D HUB5 KIT Replacement gland plate (no hubs) D2D HUB0 KIT
Circuit Breaker Operator Assemblies:

Operator Assemblies D2D/EXD All breakers panel Sizes B, C, D D2D/EXD All breakers panel Sizes F Part Number EXD HDL123 EXD K1
Replacement Cover Plugs:

For unused circuit breaker positions (qty. 5): Plug Kits D2D/EXD Sizes B, C, D D2D/EXD Size F Part Number EXD OP PLG EXD K2
1A
Kit for Group B

Standard panels less -GB suffix are applicable for Group B, but it is required to install brackets on breakers. Part Number To order brackets factory installed add suffix -GB For field installable kit (Sizes B, C, D) EXD GB KIT
D2D/EXD Stainless Steel Breaker Operator Cover

To protect operators from ice build-up for all D2D/EXD PowerPlus panels: D2D/EXD PowerPlus panels Part Number Contact Factory
Space Heater Kit

D2D/EXD PowerPlus panels EXD R44 KIT
Group B and IIB + H2 is standard on all PowerPlus panels, but requires special brackets to be installed on breakers to ensure long-term operability of circuit breakers. To order with brackets installed at factory, add suffix -GB. For field installable kit, order EXD-GB-KIT for Sizes B, C, and D separately. *** The weight of the panel is sufficiently supported by mounting of breaker enclosure. NEMA 4X rating is available when ordered with suffix S752 or S753.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
617
1A
D2D Series: EXD Series: Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 1 & 2, IIB + H2 Cl. I, Zone 2, IIB + H2 Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III Cl. III NEMA/EEMAC 3, 4, 4X, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 4, 4X, 7BCD, 12
Table A Panel Capacity

Maximum Number of Breaker Spaces: Max. No. of Branch Circuit Breaker Spaces Panel With Main With Main Breaker Size Lug Only 2-pole* 3-pole B C D F 24 42 N/A 30 22 40 42 30 21 39 42 30 Available Main Breaker Ampacity Up Up Up Up to to to to 100 100 225 225 Available With GFI, EPD Branch Protection*** No No No No
Table B To Size Panels with GFI or EPD Branch Breakers

Maximum Number of GFI or EPD Breakers Panel Size with Main Lug SingleTwoor Main Breaker Pole Pole B C 12 (10 with 3-pole MCB, 11 with 2-pole MCB) 21 14 EPLDN only - can go up to 42 GFI or EPD circuits. EPLDN will accommodate up to 225 amp main breaker. 21 Each factory-sealed panel is equipped with 42 load wires for GFI/EPD breakers and any combination with standard branch breakers. Determine the total number of load wires required to complete your panel. You may not exceed 42 load wires. Load Wires Required Single-pole breaker 1 Single-pole GFI (or EPD) breaker 2 Two-pole breaker 2 Two-pole GFI (or EPD) breaker 3 Three-pole breaker 3 Maximum Total: 42 load wires (factory sealed) Maximum Total: 82 load wires EPLDN Panels (non-factory sealed)
1A
Group B and IIB + H2 is standard on all PowerPlus panels, but requires special brackets to be installed on breakers to ensure long-term operability of circuit breakers. To order with brackets installed at factory, add suffix -GB. For field installable kit, order EXD-GB-KIT for Sizes B, C and D separately. NEMA 4X rating is available when ordered with suffix S752 or S753. * Contact factory for single phase size B, C, or D. Main breakers are mounted external to chassis. Main breakers are chassis mounted and back-fed. ***GFI, EPD for D2D/EXD are not standard options. If required, please contact factory.
618
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1A
Power Panelboard Catalog Number Example

Example: Class I, Division 2 / Zone 2, Group B panel with: 480VAC power panelboard with 3-phase, 3-wire (42) single-pole 20 amp branch breakers 225 amp 3-pole main circuit breaker
1A
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
619
1A
Dimensions Size B Panel* (With Stainless Steel Terminal Housing)
1.83 [46.5]
20.12 [511.2]
11.16 [283.4] 4.00 [101.5] 11.37 [288.9] APPROXIMATE 3 1/2" NPT ALTERNATE FEED OPTION (SUFFIX 'A') ONLY
48.36 [1228.3]
17.25 [438.2]
1A
6.17 [156.7] 21.88 [555.6]
Size C and D Panel* (With Cast Aluminum Terminal Housing)
6.50 4.66 [165.1] 2.81 [118.4] 71.4 6.50 [165.1] 4.66 [118.4] 2.81 71.4 5.10 [129.5] TYP. .92 [23.4] 3.51 [89.2] TYP. 3 1/2" NPT
1-1/2" NPT 12 PLACES
1.31 [33.3] 5.50 [139.7] 13.49 [342.7] APPROXIMATE
.50 [12.7]
62.15 [1578.5]
28.25 [717.6]
6.82 [173.3] 21.88 [555.6]
Group B and IIB + H2 is standard on all PowerPlus panels, but requires special brackets to be installed on breakers to ensure long-term operability of circuit breakers. To order with brackets installed at factory, add suffix -GB. For field installable kit, order EXD-GB-KIT for sizes B, C and D separately. NEMA 4X rating is available when ordered with suffix S752 or S753. *Stainless steel and cast aluminum terminal housing for sizes B, C, and D panels have same dimensions. Note: Value series non-factory-sealed EXD*N panel dimensions are the breaker housing only and use standard entries shown on cast terminal housing.
620
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Size F Panel
1A
1A
Group B and IIB + H2 is standard on all PowerPlus panels, but requires special brackets to be installed on breakers to ensure long-term operability of circuit breakers. To order with brackets installed at factory, add suffix -GB. For field installable kit, order EXD-GB-KIT for sizes B, C and D separately. NEMA 4X rating is available when ordered with suffix S752 or S753. *Stainless steel and cast aluminum terminal housing for sizes B, C, and D panels have same dimensions. Note: Value series non-factory-sealed EXD*N panel dimensions are the breaker housing only and use standard entries shown on cast terminal housing.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
621
1A
D2Z Panelboards Zone 1, Division 2

Non-metallic or Stainless Steel
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 1, Groups IIC Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G
AEx de II C T4, T6 Ex de IIC T4, T6 NEMA 4X, IP 65
Applications:
D2Z panelboards are designed specifically for use in: Class I, Zone 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D hazardous area locations. In damp, wet or corrosive locations. Indoors or outdoors in Zone 1, Division 2 areas of petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants, and other process industry facilities.
Features:
cCSAus, PTB* certified for Class I, Zone 1, Division 2 hazardous areas. Fiberglass-reinforced polyester enclosures: Non-metallic, corrosion-free Increased safety Ex-e protection Impact resistant NEMA 4X, IP65 Enclosure meets UL 94-VO UV listed 316L stainless steel enclosures (suffix S860): Corrosion resistant Industrial grade thickness NEMA 4X, IP65 Unique design allows for panels with more than 42 circuits. Main disconnect switches 40, 80, 125, 180A. Optional flameproof Ex-d fusing of main disconnect. Flameproof Ex-d encapsulated UL 489 branch circuit breakers: Thermal-magnetic protection up to 40A with 240 VAC circuit breakers. Thermal-magnetic protection up to 25A with 480 VAC circuit breakers. Auxiliary contacts (mechanical or electrical).** Lockout on components. Prewired to Increase Safety terminal blocks. GFI branch breakers (EPDs).** Clear, NEMA 4X / IP65 window, hinged for actuation or breakers. Double lockout on windows and breakers. Brass plates for hub or cable gland entries. Enclosures are to be vertically mounted on switchrack frames or walls. Completely pre-wired ready for connection to terminal blocks.
1A
D2Z with fiberglass-reinforced polyester enclosure
Certifications and Compliances*:

Certifications Degree of Protection cCSAus NEMA 4X IP66 to IEC 60529 ISO 4892 Glass-reinforced polyester -55C to 40C*** 480 VAC Max. 180A D2Z with 316L stainless steel enclosure (suffix S860)
UV Resistance Enclosure Material Temperature Ratings Rated Voltage Rated Current NEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class I, Zone 1, Group IIC CEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class I, Zone 1, Group IIC Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G UL Standards: UL60079-0 UL60079-1 UL60079-7 UL60079-18 CSA Standards: C22.2 E60079-0-02 C22.2 E60079-1-02 C22.2 E60079-7-2003 C22.2 E60079-18-95 622
Options:
The following special options are available from the factory by adding the suffix to the Cat. #: Description Suffix D2Z Series panelboards are now available with 316L stainless steel enclosures. This material is ideal for wash down and corrosive areas requiring product endurance in adverse locations. S860
*Available with ATEX certification, please consult factory. **Available with only UL 1077 supplemental protectors. ***For ambients -20C or less, optional heater is required.
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Technical Data
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 1, Group IIC Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G
1A
Branch Circuit Breakers

1-pole, 2-pole, 3-pole, 4-pole; with EPD protection 1-pole + Neutral, 2-pole; 2, 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32 and 40 Amps
Explosion Protection Ex de IIC AEx de IIC Class I, Zone 1, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G cCSAus Up to max. 480 VAC Up to 40A 10k AlC UL489 Circuit Breakers "Z" or "K"* 30mA (up to 300mA on request) Fiberglass-reinforced epoxy
Certifications Rated Operating Voltage Rated Current Rated Switching Capacity Circuit Breaker Characteristics Tripping Characteristics Tripping Current for EPDs Circuit Breaker Enclosure Materials
Large windows permit easy viewing and quick access to breakers without opening the enclosures. Lockouts standard for both windows and breakers Up to 6 single-pole breakers can be installed under one window. NEMA 4X, IP66 protection. Window locks with 5/16" (8mm) Allen Key.
Optional Auxiliary/Signal Contacts**

Rated Voltage Rated Current 250 VAC 5A
Main Disconnect Switch

40, 80, 125, 180A, 4-pole
Explosion Protection Ex de IIC T6 AEx de IIC T6 Class I, Zone 1, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Up to 690 VAC Type 40A 80A 125A 180A 230V 40A 80A 125A 180A 400V 40A 80A 125A 180A 500V 40A 80A 125A 150A 690V 32A 63A 110A 125A
1A
Rated Operating Voltage Motor Switching Capacity AC3***
Main Switch 40A main switch, 4-pole, optional fusing in enclosure with window(s). 80, 125 and 180A main switch, 4-pole, optional fusing in enclosure.
***See IEC 60947-3. * "Z" Branch breakers are used for all general applications such as lighting and heat tracing. Type "K" breakers are used for MOVs and portable power. Contact factory for other application. ** Aux contacts indicate mechanical or electrical tripping Signal contacts indicate only electrical tripping and are used primarily on heat-tracing circuits. Branch breakers with signal contacts require next larger breaker enclosure.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
623
1A

Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 1, Group IICD Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G
Main Fuse, 3-pole

Explosion Protection Ex de IIC AEx de IIC Class 1, Zone 1, Div. 2 Groups A, B, C, D Rated Operating Voltage Up to max. 500 VAC Rated Current Current Temperature Class in Board 25A T6 35A T5 50A T4 63A T4 80A T4 100A T4 125A T4 Recommended manufacturer: Cooper Bussman type NH00G fuses for general use or N00M for motor applications. Specify Amperage (Fuses not provided)
Main Fuse, type NH
Standard Entries
Brass gland plate with Zone 1 Myers adapter hubs: (STM series) Main supply Branches (1) 2" + (3) 1" (9) 3/4" Metric Entries (remove hubs) (1) M63 + (3) M32 (9) M25
1A
Universal Wiring Zone 1 Myers adapter hubs for conduit or Terminator cable glands. Stainless Steel Hubs available upon request.
624
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

1A
SpecOne D2Z Panelboard Construction Layout

Example of D2Z distribution panel with built-in components under the window. (available mounting width = 213mm)
1A
D2Z panel with 3 mounting spaces 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Mounting Space 190mm Mounting Space 190mm Mounting Space 190mm (2) 4 pole breakers width 106mm each (available mounting width 213mm) (3) 3 pole breakers width 70mm each (available mounting width 213mm) (4) 2 pole breakers width 53mm each (available mounting width 213mm) (6) 1 pole breakers width 35mm each (available mounting width 213mm) 40A main switch, 4-pole. 1 mounting space required Main fuse. 1 mounting space required in place of 1 window Window
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
625
1A

Ordering Procedure Step 1: Window

Determine the number of windows required from the following chart based on the number of branch breakers. Multiply breaker space by number of breakers. Round the sum total to the next highest whole number to determine required windows. i.e. For (8) 1-pole and (2) 2-pole breakers: (8 x 0.16) + (2 x 0.25) = 1.78 = 2 windows required. Max. No. Per Window Branch Circuit Breakers (max 40A) 1-pole 6 2-pole or 1-pole with EPD or 1-pole with signal contact 3-pole or 1-pole + Neutral with signal contact or 2-pole with signal contact 4-pole or 2-pole with EPD or 3-pole with signal contact Space Required For Each Breaker .16
.25
1A
.33
.50
Step 2: Disconnect Switch

If a disconnect switch is required, select suffix from table. Main Switch Disconnect 40 80 125 180 3-phase 3S* 40 3S* 80 3S* 125 3S 180 Single Phase 2S* 40 2S* 80 2S* 125
*Add F if fuses required. Fuses supplied by others. see page 624
626
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Step 3: Panel Size
1A
Determine Panel Size Based on Windows Required

Number of Windows Required 1, 2 3 46 79 Type Required A mini panel B panel C panel D panel Disconnect 40A disconnect Integral Optional Adjacent Optional Adjacent Optional Adjacent
Type A Mini Panels with Main Switch

40A 3-Phase D2Z D2Z D2Z D2Z A306 A308 A310 A312 3S40* 3S40* 3S40* 3S40* 40A Fused 3-Phase D2Z A306 - 3SF40* Quantity of Single Circuits 6 8 10 12 Quantity of Single Circuits 6 8 10 12
Single Phase D2Z D2Z D2Z D2Z A106 A108 A110 A112 2S40* 2S40* 2S40* 2S40*
Single Phase D2Z A106 - 2SF40*
1A
*see page 629 to complete catalog number.
Panels Type B, C, and D
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
627
1A

Step 4: Conduit/Cable Entries

Determine if additional entries are required on sides B and C. All panels are supplied with bottom entries (Side A), 1 main supply and remainder as branches. Example: Size D panels with disconnect switch have 1 main supply and 3 branch plates as standard.
Main Entries
Type Main Supply Branches Branches Entries (1) 2" + (3) 1" (9) 3/4" (B panel) (18) 3/4" (C panel) (27) 3/4" (D panel) (9) 3/4" (9) 3/4" Location A (Standard) A (Standard) A (Standard) A (Standard) B (Optional) left side C (Optional) left side
1A Terminal Wiring
Supply Circuits Amperage 40 80 125 180 mm2 16 35 70 95 AWG 6-18 2-6 8-2/0 6-3/0 Branch Circuits Amperage 10 15 20 40 mm2 4 4 10 16 AWG 12-22 12-22 6-14 6-18 628
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

How to Build a Catalog Number
1A
1A
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
629
1A

AEx de II C T4, T6 Ex de IIC T4, T6 NEMA 4X, IP65
Spare Component Information

Lighting Circuits Order Code 10k AIC, max. 480 VAC
Please state rated current on order: 2, 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32 or 40A.* Optional: Auxiliary contact SAH 001 Signal contact SAS 001 (in the case of branch breakers with signal contacts, the next largest component size is used) Example: SIA 001-20 SAH001 Single Pole, 20A with auxiliary contacts
1-pole 6/window SIA 001
Heat-Tracing Order Code EPD with 10k AIC, 30mA leakage, max. 480 VAC
Please state rated current on order: 6, 10, 16, 20, 25, 32 or 40A. Optional: With auxiliary contact FSH 001 With signal contact in Size 4 component FSS001
1A
Example: FSS 004 - 30 FSS001 EPD, 30A, 30mA with signal contact 1-pole + N 4/window FSS 002 2-pole 2/window FSS 004
*25 ampere max. for 480VAC breakers.
Dimensions
Used only for fuses on 80, 125 or 180A disconnect switches
Used only for fuses on 80, 125 or 180A disconnect switches without fuses. Used for 40A switch with fuses and 1 window or 40A switch and 2 windows, or 3 windows of branch breakers.
Dimensions in mm X = mounting dimensions
630
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
D2PB Division 2 Circuit Breaker Panelboards

Factory Sealed, Single & Two-Pole Circuit Breakers
Applications:
D2PB panelboards are designed specifically for use: In Class I, Division 2, Groups C, D hazardous areas where flammable vapors or gases may be present due to accident or abnormal locations In damp, wet or corrosive locations Indoors or outdoors in Division 2 areas of petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants, and other process industry facilities For general application, circuit breaker and wiring system information, see pages 598601.
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups C, D NEMA 3, 7CD (Div. 2), 12 Dust-tight Raintight
Wet Locations
1A
Standard Materials:
Bodies, covers and hinged doors copper-free aluminum Breaker operating handles type 6 / 6 nylon Interior parts sheet steel
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum natural Type 6 / 6 nylon natural (black) Sheet steel electrogalvanized with chromate finish
Options:
Description: Suffix: Panelboard provided with operating handle lockouts for lockout in ON or OFF positions. Stainless steel lockout frame integral to panel faceplate. D2PB Size 1..................................... L12 D2PB Size 2..................................... L24 Branch conduit entries furnished with Cooper Crouse-Hinds type PLG plugs.......................................... S822 Square head plugs in all openings.... S872 Branch circuit conduit openings located at bottom instead of at top.. INV Drilled and tapped conduit openings other than standard available on special order specify.. I Breather and drain............................ DV Circuit breaker operating handle lockout - order D2PB02 Assortment of single-pole and two-pole circuit breakers and trip ratings see listings. Wiring system other than those listed Specify see page 600
Features:
Enclosures are of external flange design, which makes the interior completely accessible when the cover is removed Provided with concealed mounting, which is made possible by having four clearance holes for lag screws or mounting bolts in the back of the enclosure, one in each corner The interior sub-assembly, consisting of a mounting plate, main terminal blocks, and circuit breakers, is removable as a complete unit Ample gutter space is provided for ease of field wiring Circuit breakers are contained in compact, individual factory sealed enclosures suitable for Class I, Division 2, Groups C, D hazardous areas. The individual enclosures are easily removed and replaced, therefore changing or adding individual circuit breakers will not present a problem The main cover, which is gasketed to exclude dirt and moisture, is attached to the body with hex head bolts and is removed only when installing the panelboard or making wiring changes. In the center of the main cover is a gasketed hinged door, which provides access only to the circuit breaker operating handles, and is held closed by two quick release catches. The door can be locked by as many as 3 padlocks to prevent unauthorized operation Tapped conduit openings are provided for main conduit and branch circuits, as shown in the dimensional information. Standard openings can be reduced or plugged to meet most installation requirements Circuit breakers are arranged in two vertical rows and have the circuit numbers marked on the handles. The left row is numbered 1, 3, 5, 7, etc. and the right row 2, 4, 6, 8, etc. Identifying information may be typed on the circuit directory card attached to the inside of the hinged door
1A
Size Ranges:
Panel Size 1 2 Max. No. of Breakers Single-Pole Two-Pole 12 24 6 12

Circuit breakers Single-pole 120/240VAC max. Two-pole 120/240VAC max. Trip ratings 15, 20 and 30 amp
Dimensions
In Inches:

NEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups C, D NEMA: 3, 7CD (Division 2), 12 UL Standard: 67, 877
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
631
1A
D2PB Division 2 Circuit Breaker Panelboards

Factory Sealed, Single & Two-Pole Circuit Breakers
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups C, D NEMA 3, 7CD (Div. 2), 12 Dust-tight Raintight
Wet Locations
D2CB12-20
D2PB with Main Breaker Option
Replacement Circuit Breaker Assemblies

Where D2PB (and N2PB) panelboards have been ordered with less than the maximum number of circuit breakers, breakers can easily be added in the field. Circuit breaker assemblies for field addition or replacement are listed below; they consist of the breaker itself in its factory sealed Class I, Division 2, Groups C, D enclosure, and necessary mounting hardware. These assemblies are not suitable for use as individually mounted units.
Panelboards are available with single-pole and two-pole, 15, 20, or 30 ampere circuit breakers. To order a panelboard with all breakers of the same rating, add the desired rating as a suffix to the Cat. No. For example, the 12 circuit D2PB1512 panelboard with all the circuit breakers rated at 20 amperes would be ordered as D2PB1512-20. Panelboards shown below can also be furnished with an assortment of single-pole and twopole breakers and breaker ampere ratings. To order, the quantities of breakers and ampere ratings are added as a suffix to the Cat. No. The total number of poles will determine the panel size (24 poles maximum), and the wiring systems must be compatible when combining single- and two-pole circuit breakers. For example, a typical D2PB panelboard with a combination of 3 single-pole 15 ampere, 3 single-pole 20 ampere, 2 single-pole 30 ampere, 4 two-pole 20 ampere, and 4 two-pole 30 ampere circuit breakers would be ordered as D2PB2508-315-320-230-808-420-430. The total number of poles is 24 and wiring systems 5 and 8 are compatible 4 wire, 3 phase. The D2PB with a main breaker is available up to 100 amps. To order D2PB with main breaker, add the appropriate suffix. Example: D2PB1512-15 with three-pole, 100 amp main circuit breaker would be ordered as D2PB1512-15-3M100. If two-pole main is required, change the number 3 to 2. If a lower trip rating than 100 is required, the suffix will change accordingly. Single-Pole Circuit Breakers Wiring System 4* Wiring System 5* Mains: 3-Wire Mains: 4-Wire, 3-Phase Branches: 2-Wire Branches: 2-Wire Solid Neutral Solid Neutral Cat. # Cat. # D2PB1406 D2PB1408 D2PB1410 D2PB1412 D2PB2412 D2PB2414 D2PB2416 D2PB2418 D2PB2420 D2PB2422 D2PB2424 D2PB1506 D2PB1508 D2PB1510 D2PB1512 D2PB2512 D2PB2514 D2PB2516 D2PB2518 D2PB2520 D2PB2522 D2PB2524
1A
Circuit Breaker Assemblies

Ampere Rating 15 20 30 Single-Pole Cat. # D2CB11 15 D2CB11 20 D2CB11 30 Two-Pole Cat. # D2CB12 15 D2CB12 20 D2CB12 30
Max. No. of Breakers SinglePole 6 8 10 12 TwoPole 4 5 6 Panel Size 1
Main Lug Size 1/0
Two-Pole Circuit Breakers Wiring System 3* Wiring System 8* Mains: 3-Wire Mains: 4-Wire, 3-Phase Branches: 3-Wire Branches: 3-Wire, 1-Phase Solid Neutral Solid Neutral Cat. # Cat. # D2PB1304 D2PB1305 D2PB1306 D2PB2306 D2PB2307 D2PB2308 D2PB2309 D2PB2310 D2PB2311 D2PB2312 D2PB1804 D2PB1805 D2PB1806 D2PB2806 D2PB2807 D2PB2808 D2PB2809 D2PB2810 D2PB2811 D2PB2812
1/0 lug, rated 125 amps. takes wire sizes #6 to 1/0; 4/0 lug, rated 225 amps. takes wires sizes 1/0 to 4/0. *For description of these standard wiring systems, see page 600.
12 6 14 7 16 8 2 4/0 18 9 20 10 22 11 24 12 Add ampere rating. See ordering information.
Dimensions
Overall and Mounting Dimensions (In.) a b c Panel Size Without Main C.B. 1 203/4 8 16 2 281/4 113/4 231/2 Conduit Openings Spacing (In.) f g h 73/4 113/8 31/2 31/16 5 5 2 115/16 115/16 115/16 j Size (In.) k m 3 3 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 n p Quantity Main Branches 2 2 21/2 21/2 2 2 8 12 8 12
115/16
11/4
Panel Size With Main C.B. 1 203/4 8 16 73/4 2 113/4 231/2 113/8 281/4 Conduit opening "n" not supplied on panel size 1. 632
115/16
11/4
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
D2PB, D2L, D2D Circuit Breaker Panelboard Assemblies

with Transformer
Applications:
D2PB, D2L, D2D circuit breaker panelboard assemblies with transformers are for use: In Class I, Division 2, Group C, D hazardous areas where, due to accident or abnormal operations, flammable vapors or gases may be present, and which are subject to weather, dampness and corrosion Indoors or outdoors in Division 2 areas such as petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants, and other process industry facilities Where high voltage supply must be stepped down to the lower voltage necessary to serve lighting, heating, appliance, heat tracing, motor and similar circuits For general information on panelboard applications, circuit breakers and wiring systems, see pages 598601.
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D NEMA 3, 4, 7BCD (Div. 2), 12 Wet Locations Watertight
1A
Standard Materials:
Frames structural aluminum Mounting hardware stainless steel Transformer enclosure sheet steel, welded For panelboard materials, see individual listing pages
Standard Finishes:
Aluminum natural Stainless steel natural Sheet steel primed and painted For panelboard finishes, see individual listing pages
Options:
Material structural steel frames Finish primed and painted or hot dip galvanized For options available on the panelboards themselves, see individual listings pages
Features:
The factory assembled panelboard and transformer are on one compact frame, suitable for either wall or pole mounting. Wiring between the transformer secondary and main lugs of the panelboard is accomplished at the factory. Easy to install and wire. The main feed is connected to the transformer primary and the branch circuits are wired to the panelboard terminal blocks. The assembly can be installed in the load area to reduce the length of runs of low voltage branch circuits. Panelboards used are standard D2PB, D2L, or D2D units with circuit breakers listed in this section. Transformers are compound filled or epoxy filled to completely seal out moisture and dirt.
1A
Size Ranges:
Transformers Single or three-phase 5kVA to 30kVA Panelboards Max. No. of Breakers SingleTwopole pole D2PB 24 12 D2L 42 20 D2D 30 14
Threepole 14 10

Transformers 480 volt primary Transformers 120 / 240 volt secondary Panelboards see individual listings

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 2, Group B, C, D NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 4, 7BCD (Division 2), 12 UL Standard: 67, 1604 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 213
D2L, D2D with GB suffix and breather and drain holes plugged. NEMA 4 hosetight with breather and drain openings plugged.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
633
1A
D2PB, D2L, D2D Circuit Breaker Panelboard Assemblies

with Transformer
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D NEMA 3, 4, 7BCD (Div. 2), 12 Wet Locations Watertight
Typical Assembly*
24 Circuit D2PB panelboard with single-phase transformer
Ordering Check List

1. Select the D2PB, D2L, D2D panelboard required, together with any applicable options or special features. See individual listing pages. Cat. No. 2. Provide the following information, necessary for selection of the correct transformer: Primary voltage Secondary voltage kVA rating Taps number and percent Frequency (60 cycle unless otherwise specified) Single or three-phase Other requirements
1A
*Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes. D2L, D2D with GB suffix and breather and drain holes plugged. NEMA 4 hosetight with breather and drain openings plugged.
634
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
GUSC Circuit Breaker Load Centers

with Quicklag Circuit Breakers
Applications:
GUSC circuit breaker load centers are used in: Areas which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors, gases or highly combustible dusts, and which are subject to weather, dampness and corrosion Indoors or outdoors at petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist For general application and circuit breaker information, see pages 598599.
1A
Features:
Compact rectangular enclosures with round threaded covers External operating handles can be padlocked in either "ON" or "OFF" positions Not furnished with internal wiring as field wiring connections are made directly to circuit breaker line and load terminals. To meet varying grounding requirements, an insulated neutral terminal block is provided and is equipped with a removable grounding jumper Bodies have 1" vertical throughfeed hubs
Size Ranges:
Max. No. of Breakers Single-pole Two-pole 2 1

Quicklag circuit breakers: single-pole, 240VAC max.; two-pole, 240VAC max. Trip ratings: 10, 15, 20, 30 and 40 amp.
1A
Options:
The following special options are available from factory by adding suffix to Cat. No.: Description Suffix Breather and drain (Class I and Class II)................................................................... S198V Breather and drain (Class I and Class II, Groups F, G)............................................. S454V Assortment of single and two-pole circuit breakers and trip ratings........................ Specify

NEC: Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA: 3, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 UL Standard: 1203
Standard Materials:
Bodies Feraloy iron alloy Covers and operating handles copperfree aluminum Operating shafts stainless steel Interior parts sheet steel
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Copper-free aluminum natural Stainless steel natural Sheet steel electrogalvanized with chromate finish
See listings for catalog numbers which are suitable for use in Group B hazardous locations. Seals must be installed within 11/ 2" of all conduit openings. Quicklag is a registered trademark of Cutler-Hammer Inc.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
635
1A
GUSC Circuit Breaker Load Centers

with Quicklag Circuit Breakers
Circuit Breaker Information No. of Breakers Poles Ampere Rating 10 15 20 30 40 10 15 20 30 40 10 15 20 30 40
Load Center With Circuit Breaker Hub Size 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Standard Units Cat. # GUSC3110 GUSC3110 GUSC3110 GUSC3110 GUSC3110 GUSC3210 GUSC3210 GUSC3210 GUSC3210 GUSC3210 GUSC3120 GUSC3120 GUSC3120 GUSC3120 GUSC3120 10 15 20 30 40 10 15 20 30 40 10 15 20 30 40 Group B Units Cat. # GUSC3110 GUSC3110 GUSC3110 GUSC3110 GUSC3110 GUSC3210 GUSC3210 GUSC3210 GUSC3210 GUSC3210 GUSC3120 GUSC3120 GUSC3120 GUSC3120 GUSC3120 10 15 20 30 40 10 15 20 30 40 10 15 20 30 40 GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB
Dimensions
In Inches:
1A
GUSC single gang

Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes. See listings for catalog numbers which are suitable for use in Group B hazardous locations. Seals must be installed within 11/ 2" of all conduit openings. Quicklag is a registered trademark of Cutler-Hammer Inc.
636
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
N2PB Circuit Breaker Panelboards

Factory Sealed Single & Two-Pole Breakers
Watertight Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups C, D Weatherproof Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Corrosion-Resistant Dust-tight NEMA 3, 7CD (Div. 2), 9FG (Div. 2), 12
1A
Applications:
N2PB panelboards are for use in central control and protection of a large number of feeder or branch circuits and for housing circuit breakers in Class I, Division 2, Groups C & D hazardous areas.
Features:
Enclosures are made of Krydon, Cooper Crouse-Hinds high impact strength fiberglass-reinforced polyester material with excellent corrosion resistance and stability to heat Enclosure access door provided with stainless steel thumb screws for easy access. Access door may be padlocked to prevent unauthorized access Circuit breakers are contained in compact, individual factory sealed enclosures suitable for Class I, Division 2, Groups C & D hazardous areas
1A

NEMA 3, 7CD (Div. 2), 12 NEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G UL Standard: 1604
Circuit breaker panelboard open view

Circuit breakers Single-pole 120/240VAC max. Two-pole 120/240VAC max. Trip ratings 15, 20 and 30 amp.
Size Ranges:
Panel Designation N2PB1426 N2PB2426 Max. No. of Breakers Single-Pole Two-Pole 12 24 6 12
Options:
Description Suffix Panelboard provided with (12) operating handle lockouts for lockout in ON or OFF positions (any circuit). Stainless steel lockout frame integral to panel faceplate. N2PB Size 14 x 26 ........................ L12 N2PB Size 24 x 26 ........................ L24 Circuit breaker operating handle lockout - order D2PB02 Assortment of single-pole and two-pole circuit breakers and trip ratings see listings Grounding plate or bushing see page 646 Replacement circuit breaker assemblies see page 599
Watertight, weatherproof with door closed.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
637
1A

Panelboards are available with 15, 20 or 30 ampere circuit breakers. To order a panelboard with all breakers of the same rating, add the desired rating as a suffix to the Cat. No. For example, the 12 circuit N2PB2426-2512 panelboard with all the circuit breakers rated 20 amperes would be ordered as N2PB2426-2512-20. Panelboards listed below can also be furnished with an assortment of single-pole and two-pole breakers and breaker ratings. To order, the quantities of breakers and ampere ratings are added as suffixes to the Cat. No. The total number of poles will determine the panel size (24 poles max.), and the wiring systems must be compatible when combining single- and two-pole circuit breakers. For example, a typical N2PB panelboard with a combination of 5 single-pole 20 ampere, 3 single-pole 30 ampere, and 4 two-pole 30 ampere breakers would be ordered as N2PB2426-2508-520-330-80430. The total number of poles is 16 and wiring systems 25 and 8 are compatible 4 wire, 3 phase. The N2PB with a main breaker is available up to 100 amps. N2PB with main breaker, add appropriate suffix. Enclosures with Single-Pole Circuit Breakers Wiring System 24 Wiring System 25 Mains: 4-Wire, 3-Phase Branches: 2-Wire, 1-Phase Solid Neutral Cat. # N2PB1426 N2PB1426 N2PB1426 N2PB1426 N2PB2426 N2PB2426 N2PB2426 N2PB2426 N2PB2426 N2PB2426 N2PB2426 2506 2508 2510 2512 2512 2514 2516 2518 2520 2522 2524 Example: N2PB2426-2512-15 with threepole, 100 amp main circuit breaker would be ordered as N2PB2426-2512-15-3M100. If two-pole main is required, change the number 3 to 2. If a lower trip rating is required, the number will change accordingly. Main breaker housing is positioned on top of panel similar to D2PB main. (See Section 1A.)
Enclosures with Two-Pole Circuit Breakers Wiring System 3 Mains: 3-Wire Branches: 3-Wire Solid Neutral Cat. # N2PB1426 304 N2PB1426 305 N2PB1426 306 N2PB2426 N2PB2426 N2PB2426 N2PB2426 N2PB2426 N2PB2426 N2PB2426 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 Wiring System 8 Mains: 4-Wire, 3-Phase Branches: 3-Wire, 1-Phase Solid Neutral Cat. # N2PB1426 804 N2PB1426 805 N2PB1426 806 N2PB2426 N2PB2426 N2PB2426 N2PB2426 N2PB2426 N2PB2426 N2PB2426 806 807 808 809 810 811 812
1A
Mains: 3-Wire Branches: 2-Wire Main Lug Solid Neutral Size Cat. # 2406 2408 2410 2412 2412 2414 2416 2418 2420 2422 2424
Max. No. of Breakers 1 Pole 2 Poles 6 8 10 12 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 4 5 6 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Panel Size
Enclosure Only Cat. #*
N2PB1426 N2PB1426 14 x 26 x 81/ 2 N2PB1426 1 / 0 N2PB1426 N2PB1426 N2PB2426 N2PB2426 N2PB2426 N2PB2426 4 / 0 N2PB2426 N2PB2426 N2PB2426 N2PB2426
24 x 26 x 81/ 2
Note on Hubs: Hubs must be ordered separately. See page 646 for listing.
Add ampere rating. See ordering information above. Watertight, weatherproof with door closed. See page 646 for wiring diagrams. *Accommodates D2CB breakers. Includes complete interiors, wiring system must be specified. Example: N2PB2426 with wiring system 25 would be ordered as N2PB2426-25. 638

Dimensions
In Inches:
1A
1A
N2PB
Cat. # N2PB1426 N2PB2426
Nominal Inside Dimensions nw nl 14 24 26 26
nd 81/ 2 81/ 2
Door Opening Dimensions dw dl 911/ 16 1911/ 16 2311/ 16 2311/ 16
Mounting Dimensions mw ml 117/ 8 213/ 4 271/ 4 271/ 4
Alternate Mounting Dimensions mwa mla 153/ 8 251/ 4 233/ 4 233/ 4
Watertight, weatherproof with door closed.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
639
1A
XLPB Industrial Panelboards
NEMA 1, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 NEMA PB1 UL/cUL Listed
Applications:
XLPB Industrial Panelboards are used / installed: In areas made corrosive due to the presence of chemicals, salt water, and/or moisture In locations where rough usage, moisture, dust, dirt, and corrosion are a problem In areas subject to weather, dampness, or wash down requirements To provide, in one compact unit, a centrally controlled switching system for a large number of feeder or branch circuits For branch power distribution and circuit protection of motors, valves, pumps, lighting, heat tracing, receptacles, etc. In indoor and outdoor installations To house thermal-magnetic circuit breakers that provide disconnect means, short circuit protection, and thermal time delay overload protection
1A

Heavy-duty welded mounting feet provide ease of installation (customer can easily support the panel with bottom mounting feet, while fastening the top feet) High quality foam-in-place gasket prevents ingress of water and corrosive agents, reducing panel failure due to moisture/corrosion An integral drainage channel allows for opening the panel door without moisture or dust seeping into panel from the top side of the enclosure An internal/external ground stud assembly enables rapid and reliable protective ground connection Industrial grade NEMA 4X panel designed for harsh environments provides long product life
XLPB Panelboard Closed
XLPB Panelboard Open

316L stainless steel or painted sheet steel Eaton Pow-R-Line chassis Eaton Cutler-Hammer circuit breakers Stainless steel hardware High integrity foam-in-place gasket Industrial laminate insulate dead-front cover SS316 quarter-turn screw driver entry standard
Electrical Ratings:
120/208, 240, 277/480, 480, and 347/600, 600 voltage panels 100 and 225 amp rated chassis Isolated neutral and ground bars Main breakers up to 225 amps 12, 18, 24, and 42 circuit panels 10kAIC
Panel Capacity:
With Main Breaker 120/208V (3P 120/240V (1P 277/480V (3P 347/600V (3P CSA ONLY 4W) 3W) 4W)* 4W) 480V (3P 3W) 277/480V (3P 4W) 600V (3P 3W) 347/600 (3P 4W) Available w/GFI/EPD Branch Protection Up Up Up Up to to to to 240V* 240V* 240V* 240V*

NEMA 1, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 NEMA PB1 UL508A Listed / cUL Certified (CAN/CSA C22.2, No. 14) (UL File E246968) UL67 components UL489/CAN/CSA C22.2, No. 5 circuit breakers
With Panel Main Size Lug 2-Pole 3-Pole Main Capacity A B C D 12 18 24 42 10 16 22 40 9 15 21 39 Up Up Up Up to to to to 100 100 100 100 Amp Amp Amp Amp
Main Capacity Up Up Up Up to to to to 225 225 225 225 Amp Amp Amp Amp
*277V EPD Branch Protection potentially available - single phase only (requires 2 breaker spaces)
640
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1A
Example: NEMA 4X stainless steel 120/208 VAC 3-phase (8) 1-pole, 20 amp circuit breakers 3-pole, 100 amp main Bottom entry (inverted) Example would be ordered as:
XLPB A S 2 3 08 *08120 -3M100 -I

1. Panel Type XLPB 2. Size Enclosure A = 12 circuit panelboard B = 18 circuit panelboard C = 24 circuit panelboard D = 42 circuit panelboard 3. Enclosure Material Type S = stainless steel P = painted steel 4. Voltage 2 = 120/208, 240 4 = 480/277, 480 6 = 347/600 5. Phase 1 = single phase 3 = 3 phase 6. Total Number of Branch Circuits Refer to step 2 for maximum number of branch circuits per enclosure size. Number of branch circuits equals combined number of branch circuit breaker poles - i.e. qty. (8) 1-pole, 20 amp breakers = 08 poles Option: Ambient compensated breakers for 50C, add suffix V after total number of branch circuits 7. Branch Breaker Series *Quantity, Pole, Amp *08120 = qty. (08), 1-pole, 20 amp circuit breakers Option: For GFI circuit breakers, add suffix G after Total Number of Branch Circuits and Branch Breaker Series (ex. XLPBAS2308G*04120*04115G-3M100 Option: For EPD circuit breakers, add suffix E after Total Number of Branch Circuits and Branch Breaker Series (ex. XLPBAS2308E*04120*04115E-3M100 8. Main Breaker 2 or 3 pole, 15 to 225A Example: 3M100 = 3-pole main breaker, 100 amp 9. Options (see Options Section for more information) Breathers and drains Gland plates Bottom feed inveted panelboard Enclosure access handles Key entry door access External operators Lighting contactor
1A
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
641
1A
Options:
Description Suffix Where Added Ambient compensated breakers for 50C .......................................................V After Total Number of Branch Circuits After Total Number of Branch Circuits and after GFI - 5mA ground fault protection ..................................................................G specific Branch Breaker Series After Total Number of Branch Circuits and after EPD - 30mA equipment protection ...................................... ...........................E specific Branch Breaker Series Breathers and drains to reduce moisture and corrosion.........................S756V End of Catalog Number Gland plates for ease of installation ..................................... ........................GP End of Catalog Number Bottom feed inverted panelboard .....................................................................I End of Catalog Number Enclosure access handles ..........................................................................HLD End of Catalog Number Key entry door access ................................................................................KED End of Catalog Number External operators ...................................................................Contact Factory Lighting contactor ...................................................................Contact Factory
Dimensions:
MOUNTING PLATE
DIMENSIONS (IN INCHES) DIMENSIONS (IN INCHES)
1A
MOUNTING PLATE 24 X 20 32 X 20 38 X 20 44 X 20
A
22" 30" 36" 42"
B
18" 18" 18" 18"
C
20" 28" 34" 40"
D
16" 16" 16" 16"
BOTTOM SIDE B
ENCLOSURE SIZE 24 X 20 X 07
A
24" 32" 38" 44"
B
20" 20" 20" 20"
E
14" 14" 14" 14"
F
12"
H
6"
7 3/16" 25 1/4" 7 3/16" 33 1/4" 7 3/16" 39 1/4" 7 3/16" 45 1/4"
32 X 20 X 07 38 X 20 X 07 44 X 20 X 07
17 3/4" 7 1/8" 23 5/8" 7 3/16" 29 1/2" 7 1/4"
B D
PLAN VIEW OF BOX WITH LID FITTED
7/16"
LEFT SIDE C
D A
A C
PROTECTION REMARK TO DIN 34 MUST BE OBSERVED
4-OFF 7mm THRU HOLES FOR ALL SIZES
2-OFF ADDITIONAL HOLES ON CENTRE LINE FOR 38/20 & 44/20.
7/16" E B
M10 INT/EXT EARTHSTUD
642
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
NLP Circuit Breaker Panelboards With QO Breakers
Corrosion-Resistant Dust-tight Watertight* Weatherproof NEMA 3, 12
1A
Applications:
NLP panelboards are for use in central control and protection of a large number of feeder or branch circuits and for housing circuit breakers.

QO circuit breakers, single or two-pole 120/240VAC; three-pole 240VAC Trip ratings: 10 to 70 amps, single-pole 10 to 70 amps, two-pole 10 to 60 amps, three-pole Qwik-Gard GFI circuit breakers: Single-pole 120 VAC 15 to 30 amps; Two-pole 120/240VAC 15 to 50 amps
Features:
Enclosures are made of Krydon high impact strength fiberglass-reinforced polyester material with excellent corrosion resistance and stability to heat Enclosure access door provided with stainless steel thumb screws for easy access Access door may be padlocked to prevent unauthorized access Standard with plug-on circuit breakers
Panelboards are available with 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60 or 70 ampere circuit breakers. To order a panelboard with all breakers of the same rating, add the desired rating as a suffix to the Cat. No. For example, the 12 circuit NLP1426-2512 with all circuit breakers rated 20 amperes would be ordered as NLP1426-2512-20.

NEMA 3 and 12 UL Standard: 67
1A
Options:
Assortment of circuit breaker trip ratings specify Assortment of single, two and three-pole circuit breakers specify Wiring system other than those listed specify Ground fault interrupter circuit breakers with built-in ground fault circuit interrupters can be provided. These interrupters cause the breaker to open when a ground fault occurs. Suffix "GFI" should be added after each circuit breaker rating to be supplied with ground fault interrupters Bolt on circuit breakers available on NLP panels only consult factory
Panelboards can be furnished with an assortment of breaker ratings. Where all circuit breakers have the same number of poles, assortments may be ordered by adding the quantities and ampere ratings as suffixes to the Cat. No. For example, the 12 circuit NLP1426-2512 with six 15 ampere, four 40 ampere and two 50 ampere singlepole circuit breakers would be ordered as NLP1426-2512-615-440-250.
Example: An NLP panelboard using wiring system 24 with four 15 ampere breakers, two 40 ampere and four 50 ampere reakers and two 15 ampere breakers, one 25 ampere breaker, and one 30 ampere breaker with GFI Catalog No. NLP14262414-415-240-450-215GFI- 125GFI130GFI
Main Circuit Breaker

Two-Pole Main Circuit Breaker (3 Wire Branches)
Enclosure with NQOD Interior, Main and Branch Breakers 1-Pole Branch 2-Pole Branch Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Wiring System 24 Wiring System 3 NLP1426M NLP1426M NLP1426M NLP1426M NLP1426M 2404 2406 2408 2410 2412 NLP1426M 0304 NLP1426M 0306
Size Ranges:
Max. No. of Branch Circuit Breakers Mains Rating 1-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole
No. of Circuits 4 6 8 10 12
Enclosure Only NLP1426M NLP1426M NLP1426M NLP1426M NLP1426M
Mains Rating 100A 100A 100A 100A 100A
3w 4w 3w 4w 3w 4w Panel Type Main Lug Only NLP1426 100A 20 24 10 12 8 NLPQ1426 200A 24 30 12 14 10 Main Breaker NLP1426M 100A 2P 12 NLP1426M 100A 3P 12 6 6 4
Three-Pole Main Circuit Breaker (4 Wire Branches)

Enclosure with NQOD Interior, Main and Branch Breakers 1-Pole Branch 2-Pole Branch 3-Pole Branch Mains Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Circuit Breakers Rating Wiring System 25 Wiring System 28 Wiring System 11 100A 100A 100A 100A 100A NLP1426M NLP1426M NLP1426M NLP1426M NLP1426M 2504 2506 2508 2510 2512 NLP1426M 2804 NLP1426M 1104 NLP1426M 2806
No. of Enclosure Circuits Only 4 6 8 10 12 NLP1426M NLP1426M NLP1426M NLP1426M NLP1426M
* Watertight, weatherproof with door closed. Insert branch circuit breaker rating desired 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60 or 70 amp. See page 646 for wiring diagrams. QO and Qwik-Gard are registered trademarks of Square D Company.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
643
1A
Main Lug Only

3 Wire Branches (100A and 200A MLO)
No of Circuits 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 No of Circuits 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 Enclosure Only NLP1426 NLP1426 NLP1426 NLP1426 NLP1426 NLP1426 NLP1426 NLP1426 NLP1426 Enclosure Only NLPQ1426 NLPQ1426 NLPQ1426 NLPQ1426 NLPQ1426 NLPQ1426 NLPQ1426 NLPQ1426 NLPQ1426 NLPQ1426 NLPQ1426 Main Lug Amps 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 Main Lug Amps 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 200 Enclosures with NQOD Interiors and QO Branch Circuit Breakers 1-Pole Branch Circuit Breakers 2-Pole Branch Circuit Breakers Wiring System 24 Wiring System 3 NLP1426 2404 NLP1426 0304 NLP1426 2406 NLP1426 0306 NLP1426 2408 NLP1426 0308 NLP1426 2410 NLP1426 0310 NLP1426 2412 NLP1426 2414 NLP1426 2416 NLP1426 2418 NLP1426 2420 Enclosures with QON Interiors and QO Branch Circuit Breakers 1-Pole Branch Circuit Breakers 2-Pole Branch Circuit Breakers Wiring System 24 Wiring System 3 NLPQ1426 2404 NLPQ1426 0304 NLPQ1426 2406 NLPQ1426 0306 NLPQ1426 2408 NLPQ1426 0308 NLPQ1426 2410 NLPQ1426 0310 NLPQ1426 2412 NLPQ1426 0312 NLPQ1426 2414 NLPQ1426 2416 NLPQ1426 2418 NLPQ1426 2420 NLPQ1426 2422 NLPQ1426 2424
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1A
4 Wire Branches (100A and 200A MLO)

Enclosures with NQOD Interiors and QO Branch Circuit Breakers No of Enclosure Main Lug 1-Pole Branch Circuit Breakers 2-Pole Branch Circuit Breakers 3-Pole Branch Circuit Breakers Circuits Only Amps Wiring System 25 Wiring System 28 Wiring System 11 NLP1426 100 NLP1426 2504 NLP1426 2804 NLP1426 1104 4 NLP1426 100 NLP1426 2506 NLP1426 2806 NLP1426 1106 6 NLP1426 100 NLP1426 2508 NLP1426 2808 NLP1426 1108 8 NLP1426 100 NLP1426 2510 NLP1426 2810 10 NLP1426 100 NLP1426 2512 NLP1426 2812 12 NLP1426 100 NLP1426 2514 14 NLP1426 100 NLP1426 2516 16 NLP1426 100 NLP1426 2518 18 NLP1426 100 NLP1426 2520 20 NLP1426 100 NLP1426 2522 22 NLP1426 100 NLP1426 2524 24 Enclosures with QON Interiors and QO Branch Circuit Breakers No of Enclosure Main Lug 1-Pole Branch Circuit Breakers 2-Pole Branch Circuit Breakers 3-Pole Branch Circuit Breakers Circuits Only Amps Wiring System 25 Wiring System 28 Wiring System 11 NLPQ1426 3 200 NLPQ1426 2504 NLPQ1426 2804 NLPQ1426 1104 4 NLPQ1426 3 200 NLPQ1426 2506 NLPQ1426 2806 NLPQ1426 1106 6 NLPQ1426 3 200 NLPQ1426 2508 NLPQ1426 2808 NLPQ1426 1108 8 NLPQ1426 3 200 NLPQ1426 2510 NLPQ1426 2810 NLPQ1426 1110 10 NLPQ1426 3 200 NLPQ1426 2512 NLPQ1426 2812 12 NLPQ1426 3 200 NLPQ1426 2514 NLPQ1426 2814 14 NLPQ1426 3 200 NLPQ1426 2516 16 NLPQ1426 3 200 NLPQ1426 2518 18 NLPQ1426 3 200 NLPQ1426 2520 20 NLPQ1426 3 200 NLPQ1426 2522 22 NLPQ1426 3 200 NLPQ1426 2524 24 NLPQ1426 3 200 NLPQ1426 2526 26 NLPQ1426 3 200 NLPQ1426 2528 28 NLPQ1426 3 200 NLPQ1426 2530 30 The NLP and NLPQ panelboards accommodate Square D NQOD and QON interiors as follows. Enclosure 3 Wire Branches 4 Wire Branches NLP1426 NLP1426M NLPQ1426
Note:
NQOD20L100 NQOD12M100 CU QON124L200I
NQOD424L100 NQOD412M100 CU QON330L200
When ordering enclosures only, interiors and circuit breakers are not included and must be ordered separately from Square D.
* Watertight, weatherproof with door closed. Insert branch circuit breaker rating desired, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, 50, 60 or 70 amp. 100A NQOD main lugs are #1/0 Cu/Al. 200A QON main lugs are #4/0 Cu/Al. See page 646 for wiring diagrams. Note: Hubs, grounding plates and bushings must be ordered separately. See page 646 for listing.
644
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1A
Dimensions
In Inches:
1A
NLP Nominal Inside Dimensions nw nl 14 14 26 26 Door Opening Dimensions dw dl 911/16 911/16 2311/16 2311/16 Alternate Mounting Dimensions mwa mla 153/8 153/8 233/4 233/4
Cat. # NLP1426 NLP1426M NLPQ1426
nd 81/2 81/2
Mounting Dimensions mw ml 117/8 117/ 8 271/4 271/4
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
645
1A
Accessories
Hubs
Krydon material hubs for conduit entrances, in sizes 1/2" through 3" are available for factory or field installation in all enclosures made of Krydon material. For factory installation, send drawing showing sizes and locations of hubs. Furnished with and gaskets to assure.
Conduit Size /2 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3

1 3
Hole Size
7 /8 11/8 13/8 13/4 2 21/2 3 35/8
Hub Cat. # NHUB1 NHUB2 NHUB3 NHUB4 NHUB5 NHUB6 NHUB7 NHUB8
Standard Materials:
Up to 11/2" Krydon material with steel interiors 2", 21/2" and 3" Krydon material with Feraloy iron alloy interiors
Grounding Plates and Grounding Bushings
Standard Finishes:
Krydon material natural Steel electrogalvanized and bleached chromate Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized Grounding Plates (1/ 2" through 1") and insulated bushings (1/ 2" through 3") permit use of the conduit as the grounding circuit. Both types have set screws and ground-wire terminals. Conduit Size
1 3
1A
Standard Materials:
Grounding plates steel Grounding bushings steel with thermoplastic insulating throat
Grounding Plate Cat. # GP1 GP2 GP3
Grounding Bushing Cat. # GLS1 GLS2 GLS3 GLS4 GLS5 GLS6 GLS7 GLS8
Standard Finishes:
Steel electrogalvanized
/2 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3
Wiring Diagrams for Circuit Breaker Panelboards

System 3 Mains3-Wire Branches3-Wire Breakers2-Pole Solid Neutral System 8 Mains4-Wire, 3-Phase Branches3-Wire, 1-Phase Breakers2-Pole Solid Neutral System 11 Mains4-Wire, 3-Phase Branches4-Wire, 3-Phase Breakers3-Pole Solid Neutral
System 25 Mains4-Wire, 3-Phase Branches2-Wire BreakersSingle-Pole Solid Neutral
646
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Switches
Hazardous and Non-hazardous
2A
Description
Application/Selection Enclosed Switches Heavy Duty
FLS N2RS WST/W2ST
see page 652 see page 657 see page 663 see pages 661662 see page 659 see page 658 see page 667 see page 649 see page 650 see pages 665666 see pages 668669 see pages 653656 see page 660
General Use Snap Switches

EFD, EFDC, EDS, EDSC FSPC GUSC Manual Contactors
Disconnect Switches
EID EBM NRS NST GHG
2A
Light Switch
GHG273
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
647
2A
Switches
Applications:
Switches and enclosures are used in hazardous and non-hazardous areas to disconnect motor, lighting and other circuits and prevent arcing of the enclosed switch from igniting hazardous atmospheres.

Enclosure Location: NEC/CEC and NEMA/EEMAC compliances for hazardous areas and/or wet and dirty locations Electrical: Consistency with the functions to be performed Application: Selection of appropriate switch and operating mechanism Electrical Rating
Options:
Optional material and finishes available for highly corrosive atmospheres Various hub sizes are available to suit particular applications

Switch Enclosure WST EDS, EDSC, EFD, EFDC
NEC/CEC & NEMA/EEMAC Compliances NEMA/EEMAC: 3R, 4, 12 Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D; Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G; Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G; Cl. III; NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G; Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G; Cl. III; NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 7ABCD, 9EFG, 12 Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D; Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G; Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G; Cl. III; NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 7CD, 9EFG, 12 Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D; Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G; Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G; Cl. III; NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG, 12 Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D; Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G; Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G; Cl. III; NEMA/EEMAC 3, 4, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12 NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 4X, 12 Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D; NEMA: 3, 4X, 12 NEMA: 3, 4X, 12 NEMA/EEMAC: 3R Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G; Cl. I, Zones 1 & 2, Ex de IIB+H, Ex de IIC Cl. Cl. Cl. Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D; I, Zones 1 & 2; II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G; III
Max. Amps 100 30
Max. Volts 600VAC 250VDC 277VAC
Max. HP 75 2
Switch Type Visible blade Heavy duty General use snap
Fused or Unfused Fused & unfused Unfused
2A
FSPC
20
277VAC
General use snap
Unfused
GUSC
30
600VAC
General use snap
Unfused
FLS
100
600VAC
50
Visible blade Disconnect
Unfused
EBM
100
600VAC
75
Visible blade Disconnect
Fused & unfused
NRS N2RS NST Manual Contactors GHG
100 100 200 30 180
600VAC 600VAC 600VAC 250VDC 600VAC 600VAC
75 60 125 15 150
Rotary - Disconnect Rotary - Disconnect Visible blade Disconnect Contacts, snap Rotary, snap
Fused & unfused Unfused Fused & unfused Unfused Unfused
EID
100
600VAC
50
Rotary - Disconnect
Unfused
648
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EID Disconnect Assembly
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B,C,D Cl. I, Zones 1 & 2 Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E,F,G Cl. III
UL/cUL Listed Enclosure Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X*, 7BCD, 9EFG
2A
Applications:
Provides an explosionproof disconnect switch assembly for hazardous area electrical systems Incorporates Cooper Crouse-Hinds' high integrity manufacturing standards for reliability and safety in a compact, space-efficient NEMA 4 enclosure
Certifications:
Class I, Divisions 1 & 2, Groups B, C & D Class I, Zones 1 & 2 Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, & G Class III Enclosure Type 3, 3R, 4 or 4X*, 7BCD, 9EFG UL Standard 886 cUL to CSA C22.2 No. 30

Can be ordered as enclosure only, allowing for field installation of switch while maintaining product certification NEMA 4X breather and drain** provides a moisture control solution in hose-down applications Small, compact footprint - less mounting space required Large red painted aluminum rotary handle operator mounted on cover assembly provides rugged, reliable performance in the field and allows for the position of the switch to be easily identified from a distance Neoprene cover gasket provides UL Type 4 (hosetight) environmental rating Detachable/adjustable mounting feet provide flexible mounting alternatives for ease of installation; no need to replace the entire enclosure if a mounting foot is broken Stainless steel hinges provide easy access to inside of enclosure for wiring and maintenance (2) Conduit entries, one on top and one on bottom (EIDA1" NPT entries, EIDB1 1/2" NPT entries) for easy top or bottom feed of conductors (2) 1/2" NPT conduit entries, one on top and one on bottom, for field addition of breather and/or drain or for use with auxiliary contacts; holes come plugged with Cooper Crouse-Hinds PLG explosionproof as standard Provides lockout/tagout capability which complies with OSHA requirements, allowing for locking in the ON or OFF position for standard maintenance checks Complies with NEC Article 312 wire bending requirements for max gauge wire, allowing for easy and safe installation, and reliable operation of product
Standard Materials:
Body and CoverCopper-free Aluminum GasketNeoprene Cover BoltsSteel HingesStainless Steel Mounting Plate SheetAluminum Rotary Actuating HandleAluminum
Weights:
EIDA EIDB 36 lbs 62 lbs 16 kg 28 kg
Options:
Description Suffix Auxiliary Contact (single block).... S784 Auxiliary Contacts (two blocks).... S785 Breather and Drain........................S756V Epoxy Powder Coat Finish (external only)................................ S752 Epoxy Powder Coat Finish (internal and external)................... S753 External Ground Lug.....................S214
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free AluminumNatural SteelElectro-galvanized
2A
Electrical Ratings:
600 VAC Amperages and Horse Power Ratings HP Rating at: Amp Rating 30 60 100 200V 208V 240V 480V 600V 10 20 25 10 20 25 10 20 30 20 40 50 30 40 50
Switch Rating Enclosure (amps) Only 30 EIDA 60 EIDA 100 EIDB Enclosure with Switch EIDA3030 EIDA3060 EIDB3100
Dimensions:
EIDA A B C D E F 9.65" 245mm 5" 127mm 10.47" 266mm 11.13" 283mm 12.47" 317mm 2.75" EIDB 11.75" 298mm 7" 178mm 12.53" 318mm 15.13" 384mm 16.53" 420mm 2.75"
*When ordered with S752 or S753 suffix. **When ordered with S756V suffix. For both drains and auxiliary contacts, please contact factory.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
649
2A
EBM Disconnect Switches and Enclosures

600 VAC Heavy Duty
Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Watertight Wet Locations
Applications:
EBM series hinged cover disconnect switches are used: To disconnect motor, lighting and other circuits. In locations made hazardous by the presence of flammable gases or vapors or ignitable dusts. Indoors or outdoors in damp, wet and dirty locations, or in areas where frequent washdowns, heavy rain or water spray is prevalent. To provide disconnect means and short circuit protection (fusible version). On switchracks or other assemblies where it is desired that motor control be centrally located.

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III UL Standards: UL1203 High A.I.C. Rating (Interrupting Capacity) - For Class I, Div. 1, Groups C & D only Volt 240 480 600 RMS Symm-Amperes 65,000 50,000 25,000
Features:
Rugged corrosion resistant cast copperfree aluminum construction (less than 0.4 of 1%). Switch operating handle is located through the right side wall of the body, permits visual confirmation of correct alignment and operation. Total compliance to the wiring end room requirements of the National Electrical Code. Semi-clamshell enclosure design, with an external flanged ground joint between body and cover makes interior components more accessible. Minimum enclosure-to-enclosure spacing with little interference between the opened cover and an adjacent enclosure. Stainless steel hinges allow the cover to swing well out of the way. Stainless steel quick release captive hexhead cover bolts. Stainless steel springs provide clear indication that cover bolts are fully retracted from the body. Switch operating handle can be padlocked in either the "ON" or "OFF" position. Neoprene cover gasket permanently attached to the cover seals out moisture. Bodies have top and bottom drilled and tapped conduit entrances for power and conduits. Removable reducers are supplied as standard, to accommodate smaller size conduits. All conduit entrances are plugged. Tap on mounting feet.
CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30 NEMA: 3, 3R, 4, 7BCD, 9EFG, 12
Standard Materials:
Body and cover copper-free aluminum Operating handle copper-free aluminum Operating shaft and bushing stainless steel Interior parts sheet steel, electrogalvanized Cover bolts, washers and retractile springs stainless steel Hinges stainless steel
2A
To order an enclosure complete with the disconnect switch, select the catalog number (based on the necessary rating of the switch), from the listing below. Enclosures only, without the disconnect switch, can be ordered. Select the catalog number for the required enclosure from the listing below.

600 VAC 30, 60 and 100 Amp Max. HP Rating Amp AC Polyphase Rating 200/240V 440/480V Non-Fusible 30 10 20 60 20 40 100 30 75 Fusible 30 60 100 15 5 15 25
550/600V 25 60 75 71/2 15 30
Enclosure DC using 2 poles only With Switch 250V Max. 600VAC Cat. # 71/2 15 25 5 10 20
Without Switch Cat. #
EBMBB FD W30360 EBMBB FD EBMBB FD W60360 EBMBB FD EBMBD FD W10360 EBMBD FD EBMBB FD W30361 EBMBB FD EBMBB FD W60361 EBMBB FD EBMBD FD W10361 EBMBD FD
Options:
For available options, see pages 478479.
650
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EBM Disconnect Switches and Enclosures

600 VAC Heavy Duty
Dimensions
In Inches:
Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Watertight Wet Locations
2A
2A

*1" D & T conduit entry for control conductors supplied with PLG plug top and bottom. **Conduit entrance(s) for power conductors (top and bottom). (All conduit entrance(s) supplied with RE reducer and PLG plug.)
Enclosure Only Cat. # 30 and 60 Amp Frame 100 Amp Frame EBMBB EBMBD
Enclosure Size Symbol B D
A 25.75 28.25
B 24.75 27.25
C 26.90 29.40
D 6.00 6.00
E 13.03 13.03
F 14.46 14.46
G 10.25 10.25
**J Conduit Entry Trade Size D&T w/RE 2" 3" 1.5" 2.5"
K 3.25 3.25
L 3.13 3.13
M 10.25 10.25
P 22.00 24.50
Enclosure not suitable for NEMA 4 with cover mounted operators. Drilled & Tapped.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
651
2A
FLS Enclosed Switches

Heavy Duty
Applications:
FLS heavy duty enclosed switches are used: In a rigid metallic conduit system for surface mounting adjacent to or remote from equipment being controlled As disconnect switches for main feed or individual motor control To prevent arcing of the enclosed switch from causing ignition of a specific hazardous atmosphere, or atmospheres, external to the enclosure In industrial areas such as chemical plants, oil and gas refineries, paint and varnish manufacturing plants, gasoline bulk loading terminals, grain elevators, grain processing industries, coal processing or handling areas and metal handling or finishing areas where atmosphere may contain hazardous gases and/or dust In non-hazardous area where sturdy, durable enclosures are required
Standard Materials:
Body copper-free aluminum Cover copper-free aluminum Shaft stainless steel Shaft bushings stainless steel
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum natural Stainless steel natural
Options:
Description Ground/neutral wire stud provided Breather and Drain Auxiliary switch: 1A, 1B Auxiliary switch: 2A, 2B Suffix S168 S198V S784 S785
Size Ranges:
Hub size 11/2" through feed with top entry having a PLG5 plug
2A
Features:
Enclosed devices are unfused, visible blade motor circuit switches Rugged cast metal enclosures with mounting lugs and taper tapped hubs with integral bushings, in through feed arrangement Interior of the enclosures is readily accessible through threaded cover openings at each end, set at an angle to facilitate wiring Threaded covers and a threaded type operating shaft and bushing provide quick assembly and easy maintenance A padlock can be used to lock the operating handle in an "ON" or "OFF" position Body and cover threads treated with lubricant at factory to provide raintightness
Furnished with Non-Fusible, Visible Blade Motor Circuit Switch
Switch Ratings Maximum HP 3 Phase Volts AC 125 240 480 600 5 10 15 10 20 30 20 40 75 25 60 75 Enclosure With 3-Pole Switch Cat. # FLS30364 1 33 FLS60364 1 44 FLS10364 1 55
Amperes 30 60 100
250 VDC 7.5 15 25
Through Feed Hub Size 11/2" 11/2" 11/2"
Dimensions
In Inches:

NEC: Class I, Divisions 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA: 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG, 12 UL Standard: 1203
a 71/2
b 131/8
c 81/2
d 93/4
e 91/8
f
7
g 13/4
/16
652
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Explosion Protected Disconnect Switches

10, 20, 40, 80, 125 and 180 Amp 600VAC Non-metallic Enclosure
Applications:
Explosion Protected Disconnect Switches are used in a metallic conduit or cable system for surface mounting to control motor, lighting, and other circuits and: For individual motor control Are used to prevent arcing internal to the enclosed switch from causing ignition of a specific hazardous atmosphere or atmospheres Are designed for industrial areas such as chemical plants, oil and gas refineries, paint and varnish manufacturing plants, gasoline bulk loading terminals, and finishing areas where sturdy, durable enclosures are required
cCSAus Certified Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Zones 1 and 2, AEx de IIB+H2, T6 Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G (cUL) ATEX Approved Ex de IIC, T6, Zones 1 and 2, IP66
2A
Features:
Explosion protected factory sealed motor circuit switches. Innovative break-line in cover allows full wiring access, making installation quick and easy. High-impact enclosure is designed for excellent corrosion resistance and will not warp from hot or cold water. Tongue-in-groove seal guarantees IP66 rating and eliminates possibility of accidental opening or leakage. Lockable handle meets OSHA lockout/ tagout requirements. Molded-in-place mounting feet provide a water channel between wall and enclosure. Large rotary handle provides easy gripping with gloved hands. Captive cover screws prevent water exposure and possible corrosion.
Standard Materials:
Enclosure 10A: Impact-resistance thermoplastic 20A 180A: Fiberglass-reinforced polyester Non-metallic, corrosion resistance Increased safety Ex-e protection Impact Resistance NEMA 4X, IP66 Protection Enclosure meets UL 94-V0 UV Rated Enclosure Gasket Silicon Handle Impact-resistant thermoplastic Cover Screws Stainless steel Conduit Entries: Zinc Myers Hubs
2A

cCSAus Certified Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class I, Zones 1 and 2, AEx de IIB+H2, T6 Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G (cUL) ATEX Approved - PTB Ex de IIC, T6, Zones 1 and 2A, IP66 GOST-R and GOST-K CSA Standard: C22.2 No.14 NEMA 4X IP66

Horsepower Ratings: Switches: GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG 261 262 263 264 265 266 10A 20A 40A 80A 125A 180A 240 VAC 0.75 14.3 20 50 40 40 600 VAC 12.2 15 30 75 75
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
653
2A

40 AMP
10 AMP Pole Rated Voltage Auxiliary Contact Auxiliary Connection Connection Terminals Conduit Entries Cat. # Weight Dimensions Wall Mounting Plate 3 Pole 500 V 1 NO, making lagging breaking leading 14 AWG 2 x 2.5 mm2 14 AWG 1 x /4"
3
20 AMP 3 Pole 690 V 1 NO, making lagging breaking leading 12 AWG 2 x 4 mm2 12 AWG 2 x /4"
3
6 Pole 690 V 1 NC 12 AWG 2 x 4 mm2 12 AWG 2 x /4"

3
3 Pole 690 V 1 NO, making lagging breaking leading 12 AWG 2 x 16 mm2 6 AWG 2 x /4"
3
6 Pole 690 V 1 NC 12 AWG 2 x 16 mm2 6 AWG 2 x 1"

GHG 263 0050 L0002
GHG 261 0005 L0002
GHG 262 2301 L0003
GHG 262 2601 L0002 GHG 263 2301 L0002
0.55 kg
1.2 lbs.
1.5 kg
3.3 lbs.
2.3 kg
5.1 lbs. 2.3 kg
5.1 lbs.
6.5 kg
14.3 lbs.
See Figure 1
GHG6101953R0101
See Figure 2
GHG 610 1953 R0104
See Figure 3
See Figure 4
See Figure 5
not required
GHG 610 1953 R0118 GHG 610 1953 R0118
80 AMP
125 AMP 6 Pole 690 V 1 NC 12 AWG 2 x 50 mm2 2 AWG 2 x 1 /2"

1
180 AMP 3 Pole 690 V 1 NO, making lagging breaking leading 12 AWG 1 x 120 mm2 4 / 0 AWG 2 x 2"
GHG 266 0006 L0002
2A
Pole Rated Voltage Auxiliary Contact Auxiliary Connection Connection Terminals Conduit Entries Cat. # Weight Dimensions Wall Mounting Plate
3 Pole 690 V 1 NO, making lagging breaking leading 12 AWG 2 x 50 mm2 2 AWG 1 x 1 /2"
1
3 Pole 690 V 1 NO, making lagging breaking leading 12 AWG 1 x 70 mm2 2 / 0 AWG 2 x 1 /2"
1
GHG 264 0020 L0002
GHG 264 0021 L0002
GHG 265 0010 L0003
6.5 kg
14.3 lbs.
9.0 kg
19.8 lbs.
16.0 kg
not required
35.2 lbs.
16.5 kg
not required
36.3 lbs.
See Figure 6
not required
See Figure 7
not required
See Figure 8
See Figure 8
For Variable Speed, Three Phase Drives

20 AMP Pole Rated Voltage Auxiliary Contact Auxiliary Connection Connection Terminals Conduit Entries Cat. # Weight Dimensions Wall Mounting Plate 3 Pole 690 V 1 NO, making lagging breaking leading 12 AWG 2 x 4 mm2 12 AWG 2 x 3/4"
GHG 262 0014 L0001
40 AMP 3 Pole 690 V 1 NO, making lagging breaking leading 6 AWG 2 x 16 mm2 6 AWG 1 x 1" + 1 x 1/2"
GHG 263 0053 L0001
80 AMP 3 Pole 690 V 1 NO, making lagging breaking leading 2 AWG 2 x 35 mm2 2 AWG 1 x 11/2" + 1 x 1/2"
GHG 264 0024 L0001
1.6 kg
3.5 lbs.
2.3 kg
5.1 lbs.
3.5 kg
7.7 lbs.
See Figure 9
GHG 610 1953 R0118
See Figure 10
GHG 610 1953 R0118
See Figure 11
GHG6101953R0110
Switches can be mounted directly onto a wall. The optional wall mounting plate offers a more convenient method of mounting.
654
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Dimensions
In Inches:
Figure 1 - 10 Amp, 3 Pole
2A
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
655
2A

Dimensions
In Inches:
2A
Figure 8 - 125 Amp, 3 Pole 180 Amp, 3 Pole
Figure 9 - 20 Amp, 3 Phase Variable Speed
656
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
N2RS Enclosed Switches

Heavy-Duty
Applications:
N2RS heavy-duty enclosed switches are used: In a rigid metallic conduit or cable system for surface mounting adjacent to or remote from equipment being controlled. For individual motor control. To prevent arcing internal to the enclosed switch from causing ignition of a specific hazardous atmosphere, or atmospheres. In industrial areas such as chemical plants, oil and gas refineries, paint and varnish manufacturing plants, gasoline bulk loading terminals, and finishing areas where atmospheres may contain hazardous gases. In non-hazardous areas where sturdy, durable enclosures are required. When controlling motor, lighting and other circuits.
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D NEMA 3, 4X, 7 (B, C, D Div. 2), 12 Watertight Dust-tight Factory Sealed Standard Materials:
Enclosure Krydon material External Hardware Stainless Steel Operating Handle Nylon
2A
Size Ranges:
Hub size: (2) 11/2" (30, 60 amps) (2) 21/2" (100 amps) Krydon material hubs included (not mounted)
Furnished with Non-Fusible, Factory Sealed Motor Circuit Switch
Switch Ratings Amperes 30 60 100 Maximum HP 3 Phase Volts AC 240 480 600 10 15 20 20 30 40 25 40 60 Enclosure with 3-Pole Switch Hub Size Cat. # N2RS603 11/2" N2RS603 11/2" N2RS1003 21/2"
2A
Features:
Enclosed devices are unfused, factory sealed motor circuit switches. Exceeds NEC wiring end room requirements for ease of installation. RSWP factory sealed industrial control switch, no external seals are required. Enclosure is made of Krydon highimpact strength fiberglass-reinforced polyester material having excellent corrosion resistance and stability to heat. Krydon material hubs with integral bushings, for dead-end or through-feed arrangements are supplied. Krydon material mounting feet supplied. Suitable for wash down and corrosive areas (Type 4X). A padlock can be used to lock the operating handle in the "OFF" position. Rotary actuator with snap action. Unitized, strong and durable construction provides longer service life for equipment. Factory sealed 10A, 600 VAC auxiliary contact switch provided.
Dimensions
In Inches:

NEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C, D NEMA: 3, 4X, 7 (B, C, D Div. 2), 12 UL Standard: 508, 1604 cUL to CSA Standard C22.2 No.213 IP65
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
657
2A
GUSC Enclosures
with General Use Snap Switches
Applications:
GUSC snap switches are used: In a rigid metallic conduit system for surface mounting adjacent to or remote from the equipment being controlled To prevent arcing of the enclosed switches from causing ignition of a specific hazardous atmosphere, or atmospheres, external to the enclosure In industrial areas such as chemical plants, oil and gas refineries, paint and varnish manufacturing plants, gasoline bulk loading terminals, grain elevators, grain processing industries, coal processing or handling areas, or metal handling or finishing areas where the atmosphere may contain hazardous gases and/or dust In non-hazardous areas where sturdy, durable enclosures are required
Size Ranges:
Hub size 3/4" (through feed arrangement)

2 and 3-pole 30 amps, 250VAC; 20 amps, 600VAC 2 and 3-pole 71/2 hp at 230V; 15 hp at 460V; 20 hp at 575V
Style 2-Pole 3-Pole Rating 30 Ampere, 250 VAC; 20 Ampere, 600 VAC 30 Ampere, 250 VAC; 20 Ampere, 600 VAC Horsepower 71/2 15 Hub Size
3
Through Feed Hubs Cat. # GUSC2052 AH GUSC2013 AH
/4 /4
Features:
Enclosures are of rugged metal construction with mounting lugs and taper tapped hubs with integral bushings, in a through feed or bottom feed arrangement, for connection to the rigid metallic conduit Cover is threaded, which provides for fast and proper assembly Provided with a threaded operating shaft and bushing Provision is made to use a padlock with 1 / 4" hasp, to lock the operating lever in an "ON" or "OFF" position Body and cover threads treated with lubricant at factory to provide raintightness
2A
Dimensions
In Inches:

NEC/CEC: Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 7CD, 9EFG, 12 UL Standard: 1203 CSA Standard: C22.2, No. 30
Type Size Through Feed Hubs Fig. 1 2, 3-Pole Two Hubs at Bottom Fig. 2 2, 3-Pole
a 63/16 57/16
b 61/16 63/8
c 47/8 47/8
d 41/8 41/8
e 53/8 55/8
f 3
3
Standard Materials:
Body Feraloy iron alloy Cover copper-free aluminum Shaft stainless steel Shaft bushing stainless steel
/8
21/4
Standard Finishes:
658
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
FSPC Enclosures
with General Use Snap Switches
Applications:
FSPC snap switches are installed in a rigid metallic conduit system for surface mounting adjacent to or remote from equipment being controlled and are used: To prevent arcing of enclosed switch from causing ignition of a specific hazardous atmosphere or atmospheres external to the enclosure In industrial areas such as chemical plants, oil and gas refineries, paint and varnish manufacturing plants, gasoline bulk loading terminals, grain elevators, grain processing industries, coal processing or handling areas, or metal handling or finishing areas where atmosphere may contain hazardous gases and/or dust In non-hazardous areas where sturdy, durable enclosures are required
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7ABCD, 9EFG, 12 Standard Materials:
Body Feraloy iron alloy Cover copper-free aluminum Shaft stainless steel Bushing stainless steel
2A
Standard Finishes:
Switch Information Hub Size /4 3 /4 3 /4 3 /4
3
Enclosure with Switch 277VAC 20 20 20 Cat. # FSPC21 FSPC22 FSPC230 FSPC23 Cat. # FSPC216 FSPC226 FSPC2306 FSPC236
Features:
Rugged cast metal enclosure with mounting lugs and taper tapped hubs with integral bushings, in a through feed arrangement. Threaded cover to provide fast, proper assembly and easier maintenance. Journalled type operating shaft close tolerance fit for flametightness. Body and cover threads treated with lubricant at factory to provide raintightness.
Style 1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 3-way
Amperes 120VAC 20 20 20
2A
Dimensions
In Inches:

NEC: FSPC 21 series Class I, Divisions 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA: 3, 7CD, 9EFG, 12 NEC: FSPC 216 series Class I, Divisions 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA: 3, 7ABCD, 9EFG, 12 UL Standard: 1203 CEC: FSPC 216 series Class I, Divisions 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III Encl. 3, 5 CSA Standard C22.2, No. 30
Suitable for Groups A & B usage. 30A, 250 VAC; 20A, 600 VAC. See page 661 for AC-rated switch information.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
659
2A
Light Switch
Cl. I, Zone 1 & 2 Ex de IIC T6 cCSAus Certified Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 1 & 2 AEx de IIC T6 Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G
Applications:
GHG273 series of switches are used: To prevent arcing of enclosed switch from causing ignition of a specific hazardous atmosphere external to the enclosure In Division 2, Zone 1 and Zone 2 industrial areas such as: chemical plants, oil and gas refineries, paint and varnish manufacturing plants, gasoline bulk loading terminals, grain elevators and processing industries, coal processing or handling areas, or finishing areas where atmosphere may contain hazardous gases and/or dust In non-hazardous areas where sturdy, durable enclosures are required for both indoor and outdoor installations of light switches
Features:
Small and compact in design. Large grounding plate. Captive cover screws. Protective collar for inadvertent operation. Large actuator surface allows for operation while wearing work gloves. Labyrinth seal to guarantee the degree of protection IP66. The toggle has a luminescent label to locate switch in dark areas. Cable entry from the top is made possible by turning the base.
Cat. # GHG 273 2000 L0005 GHG 273 2000 L0006 GHG 273 6000 L0001 GHG 273 6000 L0002 Contact Arrangement Description 2-pole 2-pole 3-way 3-way Entry Size 1 x 1/2" NPT 1 x 3/4" NPT 1 x 1/2" NPT 1 x 3/4" NPT
2A
Dimensions
In Inches:

cCSAus Listed Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 1, Groups F, G Class I, Zone 1 & 2, EEx de IIC T6 Class I, Zone 1 & 2, AEx de IIC T6 Class I, Zone 1 & 2, Ex de IIC T6 PTB Certificate of Conformity Ex-91.C.1017 IP66
Standard Materials:
Body and cover low temperature, impact-resistant thermoplastic Shaft and screws stainless steel Grounding plate brass
Standard Finishes:
Thermoplastic natural Stainless steel natural Brass nickel plate
Electrical Ratings:
Voltage Current 250VAC 16 Amps 50 / 60 Hz
660
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EDS and EFD Enclosures

with General Use Snap Switches Front Operated
Applications:
EDS and EFD enclosures are installed in a rigid metallic conduit system for surface mounting adjacent to or remote from equipment being controlled and are used: To prevent arcing of enclosed switch from causing ignition of a specific hazardous atmosphere or atmospheres external to the enclosure In industrial areas such as chemical plants, oil and gas refineries, paint and varnish manufacturing plants, gasoline bulk loading terminals, grain elevators, grain processing industries, coal processing or handling areas, or metal handling or finishing areas where atmosphere may contain hazardous gases and/or dust In non-hazardous areas where sturdy, durable enclosures are required
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG, 12 Options:
2A
Description Two or three gang bodies can be supplied with combinations of devices listed for one gang enclosures Refer to modular listing, section 4C Class I Group B, NEMA 7B see listing pages .......... Bodies and Covers: copper-free aluminum ................
Suffix
GB SA
Flush wall mounting cover with 1/2" overhang single gang only dull black instrument finish ...................... S173 EDS Enclosed Snap Switch
Electrical Ratings
Complies with U.L. snap switch test requirements as follows: Type of Test AC-Rated (only) Switch Overload Rated Amp. +380% Power Factor .40 .50 100 cycles, 6 10 cycles per minute Non-Inductive Endurance Inductive Endurance 10,000 cycles, 18 24 cycles per minute at rated current .98 min. P.F. 10,000 cycles, 18 24 cycles per minute .75 .80 P.F.
Features:
Small and compact in design. Used with snap switches. Mounting lugs and taper tapped hubs with integral bushings. Large machine screws for fastening covers to bodies. Lockout hole for padlock having 1/4" hasp is provided. Threaded type shafts and bushings are used to insure flame tightness.
Tungsten Filament Lamp 10,000 cycles, 6 10 cycles per minute at rated current and 120 volts Endurance Temperature Rise Dielectric Withstand Not to exceed 30C 1500 volts
2A
Dimensions
In Inches:

NEC/CEC: Class I, Divisions 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG, 12 UL Standard: 1203 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
Standard Materials:
Bodies and covers Feraloy iron alloy Shafts stainless steel Shaft bushings stainless steel
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Stainless steel natural
Hub Size 3 /4 1
Dim. "h"
7
Dim. "I"
13 15
/8 1
/16 /16
*Class I, Group B: All units listed on this page can be modified for Class I, Group B usage. Add suffix GB to the catalog number. Example: EDS2129-GB. Seals must be installed within 11/ 2" of each conduit opening in Division 1.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
661
2A
EDS and EFD Enclosures

with General Use Snap Switches Front Operated
Dead end
Through feed
Amperes Hub Size /4 /4 3 /4 3 /4 3 /4
3 3
Single Gang 277VAC 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 30 30 30 Dead End Cat. # EDS2129 EDS218 EDS2123 EDS2130 EDS2140 EDS3129 EDS318 EDS3123 EDS3130 EDS3140 EFD3591 EFD3593 EFD3594 Through Feed Cat. # EDSC2129 EDSC218 EDSC2123 EDSC2130 EDSC2140 EDSC3129 EDSC318 EDSC3123 EDSC3130 EDSC3140 EFDC3591 EFDC3593 EFDC3594 Replacement Factory Sealed Switch SW5 SW6 0206500 SW7 SW8 SW5 SW6 0206500 SW7 SW8 AH3991* AH3992* AH3993*
Two Gang Dead End Cat. # EDS2229 EDS2230 EDS3229 EDS328 EDS3230 EDS3240 EFD3691 EFD3694
Style 1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 3-way 4-way 1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 3-way 4-way 1-pole 2-pole 3-way
120VAC 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 30 30 30

Through Feed Cat. # EDSC2229 EDSC228 EDSC2223 EDSC2230 EDSC2240 EDSC3229 EDSC328 EDSC3223 EDSC3230 EDSC3240 EFDC3691 EFDC3693 EFDC3694
2A
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
*Class I, Group B: All units listed on this page can be modified for Class I, Group B usage. Add suffix GB to the catalog number. Example: EDS2129-GB. Seals must be installed within 11/ 2" of each conduit opening in Division 1. ON-OFF standard marking for 1-pole and 2-pole units 15A, 125 VAC; 10A, 250 VAC See page 661 for AC-rated switch information. Combinations of switches can be furnished. *Purchase from Cooper Wiring Devices. Not factory sealed
662
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
WST Enclosed Switches

Heavy Duty 30, 60, 100 Amp
Applications:
WST heavy duty enclosed switches are used in conduit systems: As a means of disconnecting motors, lighting and power circuits. A fusible type switch, when used, also provides for short circuit protection Indoors or outdoors in industrial areas, subways, railroad facilities or any other area that is subjected to dust, dirt, chemical vapors or moisture (rain or hosing) Either pole-mounted or on flat surfaces
NEMA 3R, 4, 12 Wet Locations Watertight
2A
Options:
The following special options are available by adding suffix Cat. No.: Description Suffix Auxiliary switch, 600VAC-DC heavy duty pushbutton station rating, can be supplied, and its contacts will close after switch contacts close and open before switch opens.................................. S483
Size Ranges:
Conduit openings for 1" 11/ 2" inclusive are arranged for through feed. Removal of the threaded bushings permits use of the next larger conduit size. Other sizes and arrangements are available. Detailed information on request. WST shown open
Features:
Enclosure, handle and other exterior parts are lightweight and corrosion resistant. Insulated groundable type terminal block for grounded or ungrounded neutral supplied. Mounting lugs may be rotated 90 degrees or moved to the vertical centerline position for pole-mounting. Side hinged cover is retained in a closed position by compression spring drawpull catches, which permits the opening or closing of the cover without having to use any tools. Lower cover latch is equipped for padlocking. The cover is interlocked with the body and operating mechanism to prevent the opening of the enclosure, except when the switch is in the "OFF" position. The operating handle may be padlocked in the "ON" or "OFF" position, thereby preventing unauthorized operation of the switch and/or opening of the enclosure. Up to three padlocks may be used. Switches are NEMA type HD heavy duty with visible blades, a quick make-andbreak mechanism with reinforced, positive pressure-type blade and jaw construction. Fusible types have fuse clips with steel reinforcing springs of positive pressure type. Pressure connectors are used for wire connection.

2 and 3-pole; fusible or non-fusible; 240VAC, 600VAC and 250VDC 30, 60 and 100 amperes 3 to 75 hp
Conduit Amps Opening 2-Pole No Fuse 1 30 11/4 60 11/2 100 3-Pole No Fuse 1 30 11/4 60 11/2 100 2-Pole No Fuse 1 30 11/4 60 11/2 100 3-Pole No Fuse 1 30 11/4 60 11/2 100 Standard HP Rating 240VAC 250VDC 3 10 15 71/2 15 30 3 10 15 71/2 15 30 5 10 20 5 10 20 5 10 20 5 10 20 600VAC 10 25 40 20 50 75 10 25 40 20 50 75 240VAC 600VAC/250VDC Cat. # WST30254 WST60254 WST10254 WST30354 WST60354 WST10354 WST3025 WST6025 WST10025 WST3035 WST6035 WST10035
2A
Approximate Dimensions
Amps 30 60 100 a 69/16 69/16 99/16 b 201/16 201/16 265/16 c 113/4 123/4 147/8 d 71/4 71/4 81/4
Dimensions
In Inches:

NEMA: 3R, 4, 12 UL Standard: 98 CSA Standard: C22.2 Nos. 4 & 14
Standard Materials:
Enclosure copper-free aluminum Operating handle copper-free aluminum Other exterior parts stainless steel
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum natural Stainless steel natural
Cartridge fuses are not included. Arranged for NEC Class H fuses. May be field converted to NEC Class J fuses.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
663
2A
W2ST Enclosed Switches

Heavy Duty 30, 60, 100 Amp
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D NEMA 3, 12 Raintight
Applications:
W2ST Factory Sealed Industrial Control Switches are used: In hazardous areas rated Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C and D In a rigid metallic conduit or cable system For surface or flush mounting adjacent to or remote from equipment being controlled In industrial applications such as chemical plants, wastewater treatment plants, oil and gas refineries, steel mills or any other areas where atmospheres may contain hazardous gases When controlling motors, pumps, valves, lighting and other circuits
Standard Materials:
Enclosure and operating handle copper-free aluminum Exterior hardware stainless steel
Dimensions
In Inches:
Options:
Description Suffix Auxiliary switch, factory sealed 10A, 600 VAC .................................... S483

3-Pole Switch, No Fuse 30, 60 and 100 amperes 3 to 60 HP 600 VAC
Features:
Enclosed devices are unfused, factory sealed motor circuit switches Exceeds NEC wiring end room requirements for ease of wiring RSWP factory sealed industrial control switch, no external seals are required The cover is interlocked with the body and operating mechanism to prevent the opening of the enclosure, except when the switch is in the "OFF" position Mounting lugs may be rotated 90 or moved to the vertical centerline portion for pole mounting Side hinged covers are retained in a closed position by compression spring draw-pull catches, which permit the opening or closing of the cover without tools The switch operating handle may be padlocked in the "ON" or "OFF" position with up to three padlocks
Amp 30 60 100 Switch 3-pole, No Fuse 3-pole, No Fuse 3-pole, No Fuse Cat. # W2ST30354 W2ST60354 W2ST10354 a 69/16 b 201/16 c 113/4 d 71/4
2A
Horsepower Ratings:
Single Phase W2ST 30A 60A 100A 120V 3 3 5 240V 7.5 7.5 10 480V 20 20 25 600V 25 25 30 3 Phase 120V 7.5 7.5 10 240V 15 15 20 480V 30 30 40 600V 40 40 60

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C and D Type: 3 and 12 UL Standard 698 cUL to CSA Standard C22.2 No. 14
664
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Industrial Disconnect Switches

30, 40, 60, and 100 Amp 600VAC Non-metallic Enclosure
Applications:
Used in manual "ON" and "OFF" control of single-phase or three-phase AC motors where overload protection is not required or is provided separately. Meet NEC Article 430 requirements for a separate disconnect means within sight of all motor loads. Offers the ability to lock directly wired motor loads in the "OFF" position to comply with OSHA lockout/tagout requirements. Meets stringent hosedown requirements.
NEMA Type 3, 4X, 12 Corrosion Resistant Watertight
2A
Standard Materials:
Enclosure VALOX thermoplastic Enclosure Gasket Neoprene Handle Impact-resistant Thermoplastic Cover Screws Stainless Steel Screw Assembly Inserts Brass Conduit Entries See Table 1*
Features:
Enclosures are constructed from high impact thermoplastic, providing superior durability and corrosion resistance. Enclosure designed with tapered edges to keep liquids away from cover opening. Large pistol-grip handle provides easy gripping even with gloved hands. Lockable handle meets OSHA lockout/ tagout requirements. Handles can be locked in the "OFF" position. Hidden hinge cover opens to 145, making installation and maintenance quick and easy. Formed-in-place continuous gasket ensures NEMA 4X full perimeter sealing. Captive cover mounting screws. Brass enclosure assembly cover screw inserts allow for higher torque and prevent stripping.
Cat. # NRS30 NRS30AX NRS30 FS NRS30AX FS NRS60 NRS60AX NRS60FS NRS60AX FS NRS100 NRS100AX NRS100 FS NRS100AX FS NRS K1 NRS K2 NRS K3 Description 40A, 600V, no auxiliary contacts 40A, 600V, with auxiliary contacts 30A, 600V, with fusible switch for short circuit protection
2A
30A, 600V, with auxiliary contacts and fusible switch for short circuit protection 60A, 600V, no auxiliary contacts 60A, 600V, with auxiliary contacts 60A, 600V, with fusible switch for short circuit protection 60A, 600V, with auxiliary contacts and fusible switch for short circuit protection 100A, 600V, no auxiliary contacts 100A, 600V, with auxiliary contacts 100A, 600V, with fusible switch for short circuit protection 100A, 600V, with auxiliary contacts and fusible switch for short circuit protection 40A - 100A nonfused auxiliary contact kit 60A - 100A fused auxiliary contact kit 30A fused auxiliary contact kit

All units cUL NEMA Type 3, 4X, 12 Non-fused Units UL 508 40 & 60 amp UL 98 100 amp Fused Units UL 98 Enclosed Switch
Options:
Auxiliary contacts for use with pilot light of PLC. 10A 600VAC 1 NO. & 1 N.C. Consult Factory.
*Hubs must be ordered separately. See Table 1. VALOX is a registered trademark of General Electric Co.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
665
2A
Industrial Disconnect Switches

30, 40, 60, and 100 Amp 600VAC Non-metallic Enclosure
NEMA Type 3, 4X, 12 Corrosion Resistant Watertight

Horsepower Ratings: Single Phase Switches 40A Nonfused 60A Nonfused 100A Nonfused 30A Fused 60A Fused 100A Fused 120V 1 2 5 2 240V 5 7.5 15 3 Three Phase 208V 10 15 25 7.5 15 25 240V 10 15 30 7.5 15 30 480V 20 30 50 15 30 60 600V 25 30 50 20 50 75
Dimensions
In Inches:
Enclosure Type 40 Amp Nonfused 60 Amp Nonfused 100 Amp Nonfused 30 Amp Fused 60 Amp Fused 100 Amp Fused A 6.0 8.0 10.0 10.0 14.0 14.0 B 6.0 6.0 8.0 8.0 12.0 12.0 C 5.9 5.9 7.9 7.9 7.9 7.9 D 8.1 8.1 10.1 10.1 10.1 10.1 E 6.75 8.75 10.75 10.75 14.75 14.75 F 4.0 4.0 6.0 6.0 8.0 8.0
2A
Table 1 - Conduit Entries

Krydon Cat. # NHUB1 NHUB2 NHUB3 NHUB4 NHUB5 Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2"
1
Myers Zinc Cat. # STG STG STG STG STG 1 2 3 4 5
Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2"

1
Myers Stainless Steel Cat. # SSTG SSTG SSTG SSTG SSTG 1 2 3 4 5
Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2"

1 3
666
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Manual Contactors
AC Only, Full Voltage 30A/40A/60A 600VAC Without Overload Protection
Applications:
Manual Contactors are used: For manual starting of motors up to 30 HP In damp or wet locations
NEMA 3R
2A
Features:
Compact enclosure meets NEMA 3R requirements Can be padlocked to help conform to OSHA lockout requirements Grounding terminal provides ground for box and cover Enclosed switch body does not expose contacts Double break butt-type silver alloy contacts provide long life Two 1/ 2", 3/ 4", 1" knockouts on bottom
Description 2 pole with screw terminals 3 pole with screw terminals 2 pole with screw & clamp terminals 2 pole with box lug terminals 2 pole with box lug terminals 3 pole with screw & clamp terminals 3 pole with box lug terminals 3 pole with box lug terminals Amps 600V 30 30 40 40 60 40 40 60
Horsepower 480/ 120V 240V 600V 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 7.5 5 5 5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 15 15 15 15
Switch Cat. # 6810U
Switch & Enclosure Cat. # 6810W

UL 508 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 14 NEMA 3R
7810UD 7810WD MC240C MC240C-3
2A
MC240L MC240L-3 MC260L MC260L-3
15 / 20 MC340C MC340C-3 15 / 20 MC340L MC340L-3 25 / 30 MC360L MC360L-3
Standard Materials:
.060" thick steel enclosure
Standard Finishes:
6810 / 7810 Series: Gray baked enamel finish MC Series: Polyester urethane
Dimensions
In Inches:

30A/40A/60A 600VAC, two pole, single phase 30A/40A/60A 600VAC, three pole, polyphase
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
667
2A
NST Disconnect Switches and Enclosures

600VAC/250VDC Heavy Duty
Applications:
NST disconnect switches are for use in disconnecting motor, lighting and other circuits.
Options:
Description Suffix Auxiliary switch, 600 VAC-DC heavy duty pushbutton station rating, can be supplied. Its contacts will close after switch contacts close and open before switch opens................................ S483* Hubs (see "Note on Hubs") see page 646 Grounding plate or bushing see page 646
Features:
Enclosures are made of Krydon, Cooper Crouse-Hinds high impact strength fiberglass-reinforced polyester material having excellent corrosion resistance and stability to heat. Unitized, strong and durable enclosure construction provides longer service life for equipment. Enclosure has hinged access door which opens 160 for easy wiring and maintenance. Three screws for door frame are hidden behind access door. Access door may be padlocked to prevent unauthorized access.
2A

NEMA: 3, 4X and 12 UL Standard: 98 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 4 Disconnect switch with built-in Krydon material handle

240 VAC/250 VDC & 600 VAC 30, 60, 100 and 200 amp
To order an enclosure complete with disconnect switch, insert the manufacturers symbol in the designated positions of the catalog number. Symbols are shown in the footnotes. Enclosures only can be ordered. Select from the listings below. Max HP Rating AC Polyphase Amp Rating 200/240V Non-Fusible 30 71/2 60 15 100 30 200 50 Fusible 30 60 100 200 71/2 15 30 50 440/480V 15 30 50 125 15 30 50 125 Symbol G D W 550/600V 20 40 50 100 20 40 50 100 DC using 2 poles only 250V Max. 5 10 20 40 5 10 20 40 Switch Type Type QMW Class 9422 Type DS With Switch 240VAC/250VDC Cat. # NST1018F 30320 NST1018F 60320 NST1426F 10320 NST1426F2 20320 NST1018F 30321 NST1018F 60321 NST1426F 10321 NST1426F2 20321 With Switch 600VAC Cat. # NST1018F 30360 NST1018F 60360 NST1426F 10360 NST1426F2 20360 NST1018F 30361 NST1018F 60361 NST1426F 10361 NST1426F2 20361 Without Switch Cat. # NST1018F NST1018F NST1426F NST1426F2 NST1018F NST1018F NST1426F NST1426F2 Enclosure
Disconnect Switches: Manufacturer General Electric Square D Cutler-Hammer
NOTE ON HUBS: The following number and sizes of hubs (not mounted) are included when disconnect switches are ordered complete. If enclosures only are ordered, hubs must be ordered separately (see "Options").
Switch Size 30 60 100 200
Number Included 2 2 2 2
Hub Size
3
/4 11/4 2 21/2
*For Square D switches only. For Cutler-Hammer and General Electric switches only. Accommodates Class J fuses only. Not available with Cutler-Hammer "W" switch. Fuse clips are arranged for Class H fuses and field modifiable for Class J fuses. For Class R fuses, consult Cooper Crouse-Hinds.
668
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
NST Disconnect Switches and Enclosures

600VAC/250VDC Heavy Duty
Dimensions*
In Inches:
NMC, NCB & NST
2A
Cat. # NST1018 NST1426
Outside Dimensions l w 1913/32 2713/32 1113/32 1513/32
d 823/32 923/32
Mounting Dimensions mw ml 77/8 117/8 193/8 271/4
Door Opening Dimensions dl dw 167/8 2311/16 511/16 911/16
*Dimensions are approximate, not to be used for construction purposes.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
669
2A
670
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Instruments Hazardous
Description
Clocks
TCH
3A
Page No.
see page 679 see page 680 see page 681 see page 677 see pages 672673 see pages 675676
Telephones
ETW D2TW600
Thermostats
HRC
Heaters
EXH XC
3A
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
671
3A
EXH Series Explosionproof Electric Air Heaters
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Group C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G NEMA 7CD, 9EFG
Applications:
EXH explosionproof electric heaters are used: In areas made hazardous by the presence of flammable gases and vapors, and combustible dusts For rugged locations including: oil refineries, petrochemical plants, rigs, pumping stations, turbine compressors, pulp and paper mills, coal mines, grain elevators, etc. In areas where flammable vapors or gases or highly combustible dusts may be present due to accidental or abnormal conditions For standby heat to prevent process heat loss, or for personnel comfort during maintenance/repair operations
Heater shown has optional built-in thermostat.
Options:
The following special options are available: Description Suffix Built-in disconnect switch ................................................................................................ D Built-in pilot light .............................................................................................................. P 3-way switch .................................................................................................................... S Built-in thermostat ............................................................................................................ T Built-in HRC1 explosionproof thermostat ........................................................................ HRC
Features:
Split fan guard for easy access to fan Compact design makes handling during installation easy Evacuated cores heat up quickly with even heat distribution Larger models offer greater kilowatt range providing more economical means to heat large areas Permanently sealed cores improve reliability and make field servicing easier Control box provides easy access for installation and maintenance
3A
Accessories:
Basic mounting kit suitable for applications where the support arm can be bolted or welded directly to structural steel or concrete. Cat. # BMK-EXH5 (insert fan size: 12, 16 or 20) Wall mounting kit suitable for mounting on Z sections. Cat. # WMK-EXH5 (insert fan size: 12, 16 or 20) Hanging mounting kit simple and economical if adequate overhead structure exists. Requires 1/ 2" pipe, cut and threaded not supplied. Cat. # HMK-EXH5 Swivel hanging mount kit swivels 360. Requires 1/2" pipe, cut and threaded not supplied. Cat. # SHMK-EXH5 (insert fan size: 12, 16 or 20) Pipe mounting kit useful in buildings with insufficient strength to use other types of mounts. requires 3" pipe. Cat. # PMKEXH5 (insert fan size: 12, 16 or 20)

Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G NEMA: 7CD, 9EFG UL Standard: 823 CSA Standard: C22.2 Nos. 25, 30, 46

Fan Aluminum blade; steel spider and hub with 5/8 in. (15.875 mm.) bore Core Steel with integral aluminum fins, vacuum charged and hermetically sealed Heating Elements Three long life, low watt-density, high grade metal sheathed elements Heat Transfer Fluid Long life formulated ethylene glycol and water, freeze protected to 49F (45C) Cabinet Material 14 gauge (0.075 in.) (1.90 mm) steel; epoxy coated with 5 stage pre-treatment including iron phosphate Conduit Material Heavy walled, 0.122 in (3.1 mm.) steel cadmium plated
BMK Basic Mounting Kit
SHMK Swivel Hanging Mounting Kit
HMK Hanging Mounting Kit
WMK Wall Mounting Kit
PMK Pipe Mounting Kit
672
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
3A
Specifications
Maximum Altitude Air Delivery @70F @ 21C Horizontal Throw Max. Mounting Height Motor Power Fan Diameter Nominal kW (ft.) (m.) (CFM) (m3/hr) (ft.) (m.) (ft.) (m.) (HP) (kW) (in.) (mm.) Net Weight Shipping Weight (lbs.) (kg.) (lbs.) (kg.) 3 12,000 3,658 500 850 15 4.6 7 2.1
1 /2 0.187
5 8,000 2,438 500 850 15 4.6 7 2.1

1
7.5 10,000 3,048 850 1444 30 9.1 10 3.0

1
10 7,000 2,134 850 1444 30 9.1 10 3.0

1
15 10,000 3,048 1750 2973 40 12.2 10 3.0

1
20 7,000 2,134 1750 2973 40 12.2 10 3.0

1
25 10,000 3,048 3600 6116 70 21.3 20 6.1

1
30 7,000 2,134 3600 6116 70 21.3 20 6.1

1
35 6,000 1,829 3,950 6,711 70 21.3 20 6.1

1
/2 0.187
/2 0.187
/2 0.187
/2 0.187
/2 0.187
/2 0.373
/2 0.373
/2 0.373
12 305 140 63.5 194 88
12 305 140 63.5 194 88
12 305 140 63.5 194 88
12 305 140 63.5 194 88
16 406 168 76.2 218 98.9
16 406 168 76.2 218 98.9
20 508 201 91.2 252 114.3
20 508 201 91.2 252 114.3
20 508 201 91.2 252 114.3
3A
Motor Type Fan Guard Heating Elements Temperature High-Limit Control Circuit Control Transformer Contactor Overpressure Protection Temperature Code Rating Temperature Limitations
Explosionproof. Thermally protected. Permanently lubricated ball bearings. 1725 RPM. Split design with close wiring spacing. 1/4 in. (6.3mm.) probe will not enter. Three long-life, low watt-density, high grade metal-sheathed elements. Automatic reset type, snap-action bimetal, open on temperature rise. Rated 100,000 cycles at 10 amps, handles 0.128 amps. 120 Volts, 0.128 ams, 15 VA. Multi-tap primary, 120V secondary, 50 VA. 60 or 100 amp. rated 1,000,000 cycles at maximum capacity, operating at not more than 84% full load. 120V, 15 VA fuse protected coil. Fusible alloy plug 170 psi (1.17 MPa). T3B 165C (329F) Class I & II. Operational; 49F to 176F (45C to 80C), short term to 248F (120C).
Dimensions
In Inches:
2.5 - 12.5 - 20.9 - Dim. Dimension 10 kW 20 kW 35 kW Tolerance A B C D E F Dimensional tolerances 1/8" (3.2mm) unless otherwise specified. in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm in. mm 87/16 215 183/16 462 27 686 181/2 470 197/15 494 171/2 444 87/16 215 225/16 566 31 787 221/2 572 237/16 596 191/2 495 87/16 215 261/4 667 35 889 261/2 674 277/16 697 2113/16 554
1 /8 3 1 /8 3 3 /16 4 1 /8 3 3 /8 10 5 /16 8
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
673
3A
Nominal Wattage (kW) 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 7.5 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 15.0 20.0 20.0 20.0 25.0 25.0 30.0 30.0 35.0 35.0 Voltage 208 208 240 240 480 480 600 208 208 240 240 480 480 600 208 208 240 240 480 480 600 208 240 240 480 480 600 240 480 480 600 480 480 600 480 600 480 600 480 600 Phase 1 3 1 3 1 3 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 3 3 1 3 1 3 3 3 1 3 3 1 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Cat. # EXH5-208160-030 EXH5-208360-030 EXH5-240160-030 EXH5-240360-030 EXH5-480160-030 EXH5-480360-030 EXH5-600360-030 EXH5-208160-050 EXH5-208360-050 EXH5-240160-050 EXH5-240360-050 EXH5-480160-050 EXH5-480360-050 EXH5-600360-050 EXH5-208160-075 EXH5-208360-075 EXH5-240160-075 EXH5-240360-075 EXH5-480160-075 EXH5-480360-075 EXH5-600360-075 EXH5-208360-100 EXH5-240160-100* EXH5-240360-100 EXH5-480160-100 EXH5-480360-100 EXH5-600360-100 EXH5-240360-150 EXH5-480160-150 EXH5-480360-150 EXH5-600360-150 EXH5-480160-200 EXH5-480360-200 EXH5-600360-200 EXH5-480360-250 EXH5-600360-250 EXH5-480360-300 EXH5-600360-300 EXH5-480360-350 EXH5-600360-350 Maximum Total Current (Amperes) 14.4 8.3 12.5 7.2 6.3 3.6 2.9 24.0 13.9 20.8 12.0 10.4 6.0 4.8 36.1 20.8 31.3 18.0 15.6 9.0 7.2 27.8 41.7 24.1 20.8 12.0 9.6 36.1 31.3 18.0 14.4 41.7 24.1 19.2 30.1 24.1 36.1 28.9 42.1 33.7 Temperature Rise F C 11.2 11.2 11.2 11.2 11.2 11.2 11.2 18.6 18.6 18.6 18.6 18.6 18.6 18.6 27.9 27.9 27.9 27.9 27.9 27.9 27.9 37.2 37.2 37.2 37.2 37.2 37.2 27.1 27.1 27.1 27.1 36.1 36.1 36.1 45.2 45.2 26.4 26.4 30.7 30.7 6.2 6.2 6.2 6.2 6.2 6.2 6.2 10.3 10.3 10.3 10.3 10.3 10.3 10.3 15.5 15.5 15.5 15.5 15.5 15.5 15.5 20.7 20.7 20.7 20.7 20.7 20.7 15.1 15.1 15.1 15.1 20.1 20.1 20.1 25.1 25.1 14.6 14.6 17.1 17.1 Heat Output BTU/Hr. 10,250 10,250 10,250 10,250 10,250 10,250 10,250 17,100 17,100 17,100 17,100 17,100 17,100 17,100 26,600 26,600 26,600 26,600 26,600 26,600 26,600 34,150 34,150 34,150 34,150 34,150 34,150 51,200 51,200 51,200 51,200 68,300 68,300 68,300 85,400 85,400 102,360 102,360 119,450 119,450
3A
Catalog Number Example
* Not available with built-in disconnect switch (option D).
674
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
XC Series Explosionproof Electric Heaters
NEC: Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C & D IEC: Cl. I, Zones 1 & 2, Group IIB & H2* NEMA: 7B*CD
3A
Applications:
Single phase XC explosionproof electric heaters are used: In areas where flammable liquids, gases or vapors are present For rugged locations including: Petroleum refineries, gasoline storage and dispensing areas Wastewater treatment plants Areas that use flammable liquids for cleaning parts in dip tanks Petrochemical plants Paint spraying areas Aircraft hangars and fuel servicing areas Hydrogen fuel cell and battery storage facilities Natural gas plants In areas where flammable vapors or gases may be present due to accidental or abnormal conditions For standby heat to prevent process heat loss or for personnel comfort during maintenance/repair operations

NEC: Class I, Divisions 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D IEC: Class I, Zones 1 & 2, Group IIB + H2* NEMA: 7B*CD UL Standard: 823 CSA Standard: C22.2 Nos. 25, 30, 46 Temperature Code: T2A 280C (536F)
3A
Standard Features:
Sloped-top cabinet prevents objects that restrict airflow from being set on top Corrosion-resistant design with no exposed copper or brass suitable for H2S environments High-velocity airflow heats up area faster with better heat distribution 14-gauge steel cabinet for rugged reliability Short cabinet lengths take up less wall and floor space Optional built-in thermostat (Class I, Division 1, Groups C & D, and Zone 1, Group IIB models) reduces field installation costs Incoloy 840 heating elements have longer life expectancy Radial-embossed aluminum plate fins warp less for better heat transfer Galvanized steel mounting brackets for quick installation

Heating elements resistance wire embedded in a magnesium oxide refractory and sheathed in an Incoloy 840 tube Finned tube assembly aluminum tube with radial-embossed aluminum plate fins Cabinet 14-gauge (0.075"/1.90 mm) steel, green-gray epoxy powder-coated front and side panels, galvanized steel back panel
Accessories and Options:

Built-in thermostat for 120-, 208-, 240-, 277- or 480-volt applications (see ordering information on next page) Remotely mounted HRC85 explosionproof thermostat using Honeywell control for 45F 85F heating range (order separately)
Specifications:
Nominal kW Shipping Weight (lbs.) (kg) Enclosures Mounting Brackets Heating Elements Optional Built-In Thermostat Cabinet Material 1.2 61.3 27.8 1.8 3.6 4.8 7.6 61.3 61.3 88.4 104.3 27.8 27.8 40.1 47.3 NEMA Type 7. For dry indoor use only. Do not immerse in water. Do not store or use in areas exposed to rain or snow. Two 14-gauge galvanized steel brackets. Two Incoloy 840-sheathed elements. Explosionproof room thermostat with 10 settings. 14-gauge (0.075"/1.90 mm) steel. Rear panel is galvanized. Front and side panels are baked green-gray epoxy powder coated with five-stage pre-treatment, including iron phosphate. T2A 280C (536F)
Temperature Code Rating
Temperature Limitations Operational 45C to 40C (49F to 104F) Storage 45C to 80C (49F to 176F)
*Hydrogen applications only apply to heaters without built-in thermostats.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
675
3A
XC Series Explosionproof Electric Heaters
NEC: Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C & D IEC: Cl. I, Zones 1 & 2, Group IIB & H2* NEMA: 7B*CD
Without built-in room thermostat Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C & D; Zones 1 & 2, Group IIB + H2
Cat. # XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 E2 E3 E4 E5 E6 N0 N0 N0 N0 N0 N0 N0 N0 N0 N0 N0 N0 N0 N0 N0 N0 N0 N0 N0 N0 N0 N0 N0 N0 N0 N0 N0 Unit Wattage (kW) 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 4.8 7.6 7.6 7.6 7.6 7.6 Unit Unit Output Voltage (BTU/Hr) (Volts) 4097 4097 4097 4097 4097 4097 6146 6146 6146 6146 6146 6146 12292 12292 12292 12292 12292 16389 16389 16389 16389 16389 25950 25950 25950 25950 25950 120 208 240 480 600 277 120 208 240 480 600 277 208 240 480 600 277 208 240 480 600 277 208 240 480 600 277 Unit Current (Amps) 10.0 5.8 5.0 2.5 2.0 4.3 15.0 8.7 7.5 3.8 3.0 6.5 17.3 15.0 7.5 6.0 13.0 23.1 20.0 10.0 8.0 17.3 36.5 31.7 15.8 12.7 27.4 Maximum Circuit Fuse (Amps)* 15 15 15 15 15 15 20 15 15 15 15 15 20 20 15 15 15 25 25 15 15 20 40 35 20 15 30
With built-in room thermostat Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C & D; Zones 1 & 2, Group IIB
Cat. # XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC XC A1 A2 A3 A4 A6 B1 B2 B3 B4 B6 C2 C3 C4 C6 B1 B2 B3 B4 B6 B1 B2 B3 B4 B6 B2 B3 B4 B6 Unit Unit Unit Unit Wattage Output Voltage Current (kW) (BTU/Hr) (Volts) (Amps) 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 1.8 3.6 3.6 3.6 3.6 4097 4097 4097 4097 4097 6146 6146 6146 6146 6146 12292 12292 12292 12292 16389 16389 16389 25950 120 208 240 480 277 120 208 240 480 277 208 240 480 277 240 480 277 480 10.0 5.8 5.0 2.5 4.3 15.0 8.7 7.5 3.8 6.5 17.3 15.0 7.5 13.0 20.0 10.0 17.3 15.8 Maximum Circuit Fuse (Amps)* 15 15 15 15 15 20 15 15 15 15 20 20 15 15 25 15 20 20
XC D3 B3 4.8 XC D4 B4 4.8 XC D6 B6 4.8 XC E4 B4 7.6
3A
*Or equivalent breaker as per National Electrical Code and Canadian Electrical Code 1. Remote-mounted explosionproof room thermostats are not suitable for Group B & IIC applications. Remote contactors are also required on all 600-volt heaters and heaters with a current draw greater than 22 amps (supplied and installed by others). 2. Remote mounted explosionproof room thermostats suitable for Group B, IIB + H2 applications are a special-order item. 3. Operation at lower than rated voltages will result in reduced kW output and amp draw. Actual Output (kW) = [(Supply Voltage)2 (Rated Voltage)2] x Rated Unit Wattage (kW)
Dimensions
In Inches:
Heater kW Rating 1.2 - 3.6 4.8 7.6

*Hydrogen applications only apply to heaters without built-in thermostats.
A Dimensions 37.0" (940mm) 55.125" (1400mm) 65.125" (1654mm)
B Dimensions 31.34" (796mm) 49.45" (1256mm) 59.49" (1511mm)
676
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
HRC Thermostats with Honeywell Control
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 7CD, 9EFG, 12
3A
Applications:
HRC thermostats with Honeywell control are used: For heavy duty line voltage thermostats to control fan coils, fans, motor starters, valves, contactors, and circulator motors in heating and/or cooling systems. If larger motors than listed are to be controlled, relays or magnetic motor starters must be interconnected between motors and thermostats In specific hazardous atmospheres such as encountered in oil refineries, chemical plants, paint and varnish manufacturing plants, certain hazardous metal finishing areas, coal processing locations, granaries and grain processing plants
Features:
A heavy duty snap switch is mounted in the enclosure; the temperature sensitive element is mounted on the external surface of the cover and actuates the switch through a shaft and bearing mechanism An external knob permits temperature setting within calibrated range; the knob is removable to prevent unauthorized adjustment; room ambient is indicated on thermometer at front

120 / 240 VAC 50 / 60 hertz Full load current in amperes: 120 VAC Heating Cooling 10.2 7.4 240 VAC 6.5 4.0
3A

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA/EEMAC: 7CD, 9EFG, 12 UL Standard: 1203 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
Temperature Range 45 85F Non-Adjustable Operating Differential (approx.) Cat. # 1 F HRC85
Furnished with thermostat and thermometer.
Dimensions*
In Inches:
Standard Materials:
Feraloy iron alloy
Standard Finishes:
Electrogalvanzed and aluminum acrylic paint
Size Ranges:
Hubs 3/4" through-feed
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
677
3A
HRC Bimetal Thermostat
Applications:
HRC Bimetal Thermostats are used: To control heating only, cooling only or ventilation systems in demanding industrial environments In specific hazardous atmospheres such as encountered in oil refineries, chemical plants, paint and varnish manufacturing plants, coal processing locations, waste storage facilities, pulp and paper mills, granaries and grain processing plants or any other location where specific explosive gases or dusts are present
Features:
Bimetal sensing element that is fast acting, reliable and unaffected by altitude Compact, lightweight design makes it easy to install No exposed copper or brass parts for excellent resistance to corrosion Feed-through design for easy installation Durable all aluminum exterior Available for heating only or heating or cooling/ventilation applications
Hub Size
3 3
3A
Description Single Pole, Single Throw (heating only) Single Pole, Double Throw (heating or cooling/ventilation applications)
Cat. # HRC1 HRC2
/4 /4

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class III UL Standard: 1203 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
Dimensions
In Inches:
Standard Materials:
Standard Finishes:
Natural
Size Ranges:
Conduit opening 3/4" hub
Electrical Ratings:

1
480 VAC max / 2 HP @ 120 VAC 1 HP @ 250 VAC 22 amps Res.
Temperature Range:
36F to 82F (2C to 28C) Temperature differential: 2.5F (1.5C)
678
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
TCH Electric Clocks

Factory-sealed
Applications:
Type TCH electric clocks are used: In oil refinery control rooms, hospital operating rooms, chemical plants, grain handling and processing plants and other similar locations where specific hazardous atmospheres may exist
3A
Features:
Sheet steel case may be used where environmental conditions are not severe; electric motor and connections are contained in corrosion-resistant enclosure; dials are 13" in diameter; reset knob protrudes from bottom of case Disassembly for installation and maintenance is easily performed; the motor housing is factory-sealed, with no external seals required

NEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III UL Standard: 1203
Sheet Steel Case
Enclosure with Clock Motor Hub Size 110 VAC 60 hertz Self-Starting Synchronous (3 Watts) Style With Sheet Steel Case Surface Mount Cat. # Enclosing Sheet Metal Band Cat. #
3A
1"
TCH2220
TCH202
Standard Materials:
Clock body and cover sheet steel Motor housing copper-free aluminum
Dimensions*
In Inches:
Standard Finishes:
Aluminum aluminum acrylic paint Sheet steel baked aluminum enamel
Size Ranges:
Hubs 1" through-feed

110VAC, 60 hertz Self-starting synchronous motor 3 watts
Options:
The following special options are available: Description Suffix Sheet metal band notched for conduit, can be supplied for enclosing gap between wall surface See and back of case listings
Cat. # TCH2220
a 17
b 27/8
c 37/16
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
679
3A
ETW Telephones
Applications:
ETW series telephones are used: For communication in areas which may be hazardous due to the presence of flammable gases or vapors, and/or combustible dusts In chemical plants, oil refineries, bulk loading stations, paint and varnish manufacturing plants, grain processing and similar industries
Features:
Modern styled, pushbutton wall-mount unit is very rugged in design, suitable for the harshest industrial applications Large, easy to read keyboard allows gloves-on operation Cast copper-free aluminum housing, with baked on powder coat finish, is highly resistant to corrosive atmospheres Units are tone or pulse compatible and offer superior audio clarity Handset cord features a pin-type connector for easy field replacement; handset circuit is intrinsically safe Up to ten units can be connected on one line ETW401
3A

NEC/CEC: Class I, Divisions 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G UL Standard: 1203, 698 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30 FCC Approved
Description Phone w/ handset Replacement handset (10' cord) ETW Replacement handset (20' cord) ETW Phone w/ headset Phone push-to-talk handset Replacement headset Explosionproof ringer Cat. # ETW401 ETW:301SC ETW:301SC 20 ETW401 HS ETW401 PB ETW:P7200 ETR1
Standard Materials:
Enclosure copper-free aluminum Handset high impact plastic
Dimensions
In Inches:
Standard Finishes:
Enclosure baked powder paint (safety blue)
Accessories:
A standard volume explosionproof ringer (ETR1) is available, see page 682 for listing. For locations with a high level of ambient noise, a louder ringer can be installed. An ESR bell or ETH horn may be used by installing an ETC relay between the telephone line switch and the bell or horn. The relay coil is energized by the ringing current and the relay contacts control a separate power source to the signal.
680
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
D2TW600
Telephone for Hazardous Areas
Applications:
These single-line, fully functional electronic telephones are used: For communication in locations which may be hazardous due to the presence of flammable gases or vapors (Division 2), and/or combustible dusts or fibers As a single line telephone in chemical plants, oil refineries, bulk loading stations, paint and varnish manufacturing plants, grain processing and similar industries
Dust-Ignitionproof Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Watertight Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Wet Locations Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G NEMA 3, 4X*, 7 Div. 2 ABCD, 9 EFG, 12
3A

UL Standard: 1604 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 213, No. 25 UL: Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D CSA: Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G FCC: Parts 15 and 68 hearing aid compatible DOC: 2 Line level: normal telephony voice quality per IEEE standard RS-470
Features:
Water-, dust- and corrosion-resistant enclosure for durability and long-life Corrosion-resistant electronics with conformal coating for dependable performance in the harshest of environments Spring loaded door with auto-latch to prevent unit from being exposed to elements Factory set tone dialing (DTMF) Units are also pulse compatible and offer superior audio clarity Magnetic reed hook-switch operation for ease of use Highly visible safety yellow color Access plate for field wiring Integral backplate mount for ease of installation Conduit hub 1/ 2" NPT Operating environment from 30 to +50C Ringer output: 80dB Internal, adjustable bell ringer Lightning arrester for added unit protection
Standard Materials:
Enclosure General Electric's Valox 357 resin Faceplate anodized aluminum Dial pad overlay silicone rubber Handset cradle ABS polyurethane
3A
Description Telephone Cat. # D2TW600VC
Option:
Pulse Dial D2TW600VC PULSE
Dimensions
In Inches:
Weight:
4.85 lbs.
*Wateright with spring door closed.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
681
3A
Telephone Accessories
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III
Features:
ETC232 power relays are used with ESR bells and ETH, W2H or WH horns; the relay coil is energized by the telephone ringing circuit, and the relay contacts control the separate 115VAC, 60 hertz power source ETR1 external ringer for ETW401 telephone; for low ambient noise areas, ring tone level is similar to a general use telephone; includes a ring detect relay which is powered by the telephone line voltage, (maximum 90VAC)
Power Relay
Ringer

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III UL Standard: 1203 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
Description Rating Relay for 10A 115VAC Horn Signal 60 hertz
Hub Size Cat. #

3
Description Normal volume external ringer for ETW40 telephone
Hub Size
3
Cat. # ETR1
/4"
ETC232
/4"
3A
Standard Materials:
Bodies copper-free aluminum Covers copper-free aluminum
Standard Finishes:
Aluminum baked epoxy powder paint
*For use in Group B hazardous areas, seals must be installed within 11/2" of each conduit entrance.
682
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Enclosures
Section E
Enclosures and junction boxes built and configured to meet the requirements of the most demanding hazardous areas and industrial environmental applications across the globe.
New Products in the Enclosures Product Line

IEC Style GUB Junction Boxes GUBA Exd Junction Boxes IEC Style EJB/EJW Enclosures EJBA Exd Enclosures KBX Die Cast Aluminum Enclosures PTB/PTC Series Pull Boxes (Pencil Boxes) Fiberglass Enclosures
Section
1E 1E 1E 1E 2E 4E 5E
Notable changes to the Enclosures section of this catalog

The Enclosures Product Line is new to the Cooper Crouse-Hinds catalog. In addition to a number of new products, this section consists of products previously found in 6F (Junction Boxes) and the Corrosion Resistant Products Section.
Enclosures
Table of Contents
Section E of the Cooper Crouse-Hinds Product Catalog lists metallic and nonmetallic enclosures for hazardous and industrial applications. Information on application, features, standard materials, standard finishes, size ranges, compliances, options, and accessories are presented for ease of product selection. Information relating to product families in Section E is grouped as follows:
Section 1E
Metallic Enclosures
For explosionproof or flameproof hazardous applications GUE, GUB EIH, EIHT GUA EGJ GUP GHG64 EJB
Section 4E
Metallic Enclosures
For Non-hazardous Applications QBX PTB/PTC W-Series RS, RSM, RSS
Section 2E
Metallic Enclosures
For increased safety hazardous applications or non-hazardous applications Ex-CELL NXT STB HVB KBX
Section 5E
Nonmetallic Enclosures
For Non-hazardous Applications Fiberglass NJB, NCE, NCS, NCD NJBW
Section 6E
Enclosure Accessories
Hubs Grounding Plates Grounding Bushings Drains and Breathers CID 101 Corrosion Inhibitor LNR Conduit Liner
Section 3E
For Hazardous Applications GHG74 Kestrel TBF/TBP
E
684
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Metallic Enclosures
Explosionproof or Flameproof Hazardous Applications
Description
Explosionproof Enclosures
GUE / GUB Series EJB Series GUA Series GUP Series EGJ Series
1E
Page No.
see see see see see
686 694 716 717 718
Flameproof Enclosures
GUBA Series EJB Series GHG64 Series
see page 723 see page 714 see page 715 see pages 719720 see pages 721722 see page 723 see page 724
Instrument Housings
EIH / EIHT Series GUB Series GUBA Series EMH Series
1E
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
685
1E
GUE, GUB Junction Boxes
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 4*, 7BCD, 9EFG Ex d IIC T6, IP66 Ex d IIC, IP66, ATEX certified
Applications:
GUE, GUB series junction boxes are used in threaded rigid conduit systems in hazardous areas: To function as a splice box, pull box or equipment and device enclosure To house wiring Indoors and outdoors
Junction Boxes Without Hubs

GU 415/16" x 415/16" x 41/8" 35/6" cover opening GUE 55/16" x 55/16" x 53/8" 35/6" cover opening
Junction boxes listed can be furnished with drilled and tapped conduit openings, subject to the limitations of maximum opening, number and spacing shown in Tables 1, 2 and 4.
To Order:
Step 1 Select the box required from photos at left and dimensional drawings on next page.
Features:
Threaded construction throughout permits use in hazardous areas Bodies have thick walls so they can be factory or field drilled and tapped to meet NEC/CEC requirements for Class I hazardous areas Covers are provided with a neoprene "O" ring gasket to meet NEMA/EEMAC 4 requirements for a watertight seal Internal grounding lug provides a means to ground enclosed equipment Boxes are machined for field installed mounting plates GUB boxes are ATEX certified when ordered with Suffix SA ATEX (not available for GU and GUE) GUB01 61/2" x 7" x 53/4" 53/8" cover opening GUB02 8" x 10" x 57/8" 7" cover opening GUB06 81/2" x 10" x 67/8" 7" cover opening
GUB03 11" x 12" x 813/16" 95/8" cover opening GUB01110* 14" x 18" x 131/2" 121/4" cover opening 19" x 21" x 165/8" 163/4" cover opening

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III UL Standard: 1203 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30 ATEX: Ex d IIC, IP66 ATEX Certificate: PTB 01 ATEX 1019 U Ex d IIC, IP66, ATEX certified
GUB04 11" x 12" x 811/ 16 95/ 8" cover opening GUB08 81/ 2" 10" 613/ 16 7" cover opening
Step 2 Select standard conduit arrangement from Table 1. Step 3 Determine maximum size conduit opening required from Table 2 (consider conduit opening spacing from Table 4). Step 4 Select appropriate symbol for required drilled and tapped holes from Table 3. Example: Step 1 box required GUB06 Step 2 arrangement 108 Step 3 openings 11/2" at "a" and "c"; 1" at "b" and "d". Step 4 symbols are substituted and written in clockwise order starting with location "a". For this example: FCFC Complete Cat. No. is made up of three parts: Part 1 box number; Part 2 arrangement number; Part 3 symbols for conduit openings. For this example: GUB06-108-FCFC. When no opening is required at a particular location, use symbol "0" (zero). If none of the standard arrangements meet requirements, send a sketch showing junction box number with size and location of each opening desired.
1E
Standard Materials:
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy GU, GUE, GUB01, GUB02 electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint. All other boxes zinc chromate primer and aluminum acrylic paint Copper-free aluminum natural
Options:
Description Suffix Bodies and covers furnished in copper-free aluminum (not available for GU and GUE)............ SA Copper-free aluminum boxes and covers with ATEX certification (not available for GU and GUE).... SA ATEX Factory installed mounting plate for relays, terminal blocks, electrical devices, etc................... MP Factory installed terminal blocks. Information on request 686
For conduit liner ordering information, see page 822. * NEMA 4 not available on GUB01110 and GUB15151. Order suffix SA ATEX. GUB01110 and GUB15151 are rated IP54. Dimensions provided are external. GUB01110 listed for Class I, Div. 1, Groups C & D only in Canada (CSA).
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Table 1
Arrangements of Drilled and Tapped Conduit Openings For other arrangements, send sketch and complete description
1E
Conduit opening arrangements shown in the illustration should meet the majority of requirements. These GUB junction boxes will be supplied with drilled and tapped openings up to the maximum size and number shown in Table 2.
108
109
110
111
Table 2
Maximum Size & No. of Drilled & Tapped Holes
Cat. # Top & Bottom (bb) 1 2 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 5 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 5 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 1 1 11/2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 1 1 11/4 11/2 11/2 11/2 2 2 2 4 1 1 11/4 11/2 11/2 11/2 2 2 2 4 4 Each Side (aa) 1 2 3 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 5 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 5 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 1 1 11/2 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 1 1 11/4 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 1 1 11/4 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 Back 1 2 3 2 1 3 /4 2 2 4 4 6 6 3 2 3 /4 3 /4 2 2 4 4 6 6 3 2 3 /4 3 /4 2 2 4 4 4 4 1 1 3 /4 3 /4 2 2 4 4 6 6 1 1 3 /4 3 /4 2 2 31/2 31/2 6 6 1 1 3 /4 3 /4 2 2 31/2 31/2 4 4 3 /4 /4 3 /4 3 /4 2 2 31/2 31/2 4 6
3 3
4 /4 /4 3 /4 3 /4 2 2 3 3 31/2 6
3 3
Group D*
GU GUE GUB01 GUB02 GUB06 GUB08 GUB03 GUB04 GUB01110 GUB15151
3
/4 1 1 1 11/2 11/2 2 31/2
/4 3 /4 3 /4 1 1 11/2 21/2
3
1 11/2 11/2 11/2 2 2 2 4
/2 1 1 1 11/4 11/4 2 3
1
Group C
GU GUE GUB01 GUB02 GUB06 GUB08 GUB03 GUB04 GUB01110 GUB15151 /2 /4 3 /4 3 /4 11/4 11/4 2 3
1 3
1E
3 3
/4 /4 11/4 2
/2 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/2 11/2 2 31/2

1
/2 /2 /2 1 1 2 21/2
1 1 1
/4 /4 3 /4 3 /4 2 2 21/2 21/2 4 6
3 3
/4 /4 3 /4 3 /4 11/2 11/2 21/2 21/2 31/2 5

3 3
Group B GU GUE GUB01 GUB02 GUB06 GUB08 GUB03 GUB04 GUB01110 GUB15151
/2 /4 3 /4 3 /4 11/4 11/4 2 31/2

1 3
/4 /4 11/4 21/2
3 3
/2 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/2 11/2 2 31/2

1
/2 /2 1 /2 1 1 2 21/2
1 1
/4 /4 3 /4 3 /4 2 2 21/2 21/2 4 4
3 3
/4 /4 /4 3 /4 11/2 11/2 21/2 21/2 4 4

3 3 3
Table 3
Drilled & Tapped Holes
Size 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4 none Symbol A B C E F G H J K L 0
*Group D chart is based on use of staggered unions. If adjacent unions are desired, additional spacing may be necessary. Sidewall and top and bottom sizes are based on all openings being in line. Backwall sizes are based on: two per side diagonal corners; four per side one in each corner; three per side triangular pattern with two on adjacent corners on long wall and third in center of opposite long wall. Conduit seals are required within 11/2" of all conduit entrances for Class I, Group C hazardous locations. Conduit seals are required within 11/2" of all conduit entrances for Class I, Group B hazardous locations. For conduit liner ordering information, see page 822.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
687
1E

Dimensions
Table 4
Conduit Spacings
2, 3 or 4 entrances for conduit opening spacings on top, bottom or sides, all types. All types Type GU GUE GUB01 GUB02 GUB06 GUB08 GUB03 GUB04 GUB01110 GUB15151 p 13/8 17/8 21/16 21/16 21/16 21/16 33/8 33/8 43/4 6 q 1 11/8 15/8 121/32 121/32 121/32 21/2 121/32 3 4 r 11/8 21/8 21/16 25/16 21/16 35/16 35/16 4 51/4 s 21/8 25/16 25/16 21/16 35/16 35/16 6 57/8 t 1 11/8 15/8 121/32 121/32 121/32 3 3 4 4 v 7 /8 11/32 11/32 11/32 15/32 15/32 2 2 w 13/4 21/16 21/16 21/16 25/16 25/16 4 4 x 25 /32 7 /8 7 /8 7 /8 15/32 15/32 121/32 2 y 19/16 13/4 13/4 13/4 25/16 25/16 35/16 4
Dimensions
In Inches:
1E
GUB 01, 02, 03, 06, 01110, and 15151. Dotted mounting feet are included on GUB 03, 01110, and 15151 only. GU and GUE are provided with attachable mounting strap. Type GU GUE GUB01 GUB02 GUB06 GUB08 GUB03 GUB04 GUB01110 GUB15151 a 415/16 55/16 61/2 8 81/2 81/2 11 11 141/16 207/8 b 415/16 55/16 7 10 10 10 12 12 181/16 187/8 c 313/16 43/16 61/2 71/8 73/8 73/8 93/4 93/4 13 191/8 d 313/16 43/16 57/8 91/8 87/8 87/8 103/4 103/4 17 171/8 e 35/8 35/8 53/8 7 7 7 95/8 95/8 121/4 163/4 f 53/4 83/4 83/4 21/2 103/4 31/2 16 18 g 71/2 9 91/2 95/8 121/8 121/8 16 21 h 13 /32 13 /32 7 /16 7 /16 7 /16 7 /16 1 1 j 41/8 53/8 53/4 57/8 73/8 73/8 813/16 811/16 131/2 165/8 k 19/16 21/4 31/16 3 41/4 41/4 5 5 613/16 9 l 37/16 37/16 41/2 45/8 513/16 53/16 73/8 73/8 103/4 133/16 m 23/8 31/2 41/16 41/16 51/4 51/4 65/8 61/2 93/4 113/8 n 41/8 41/8 61/4 73/4 73/4 73/4 11 11 14 18
Inside dimensions. For conduit liner ordering information, see page 822
688
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Mounting Plate Dimensions
Table 5
1E
GUE Mounting Plate Kit Cat. # GU MPK1 GUE MP K1 GUB MP01 GUB MP02 GUB MP03 GUB MP03 GUB MP02 GUB MP02 GUB MP01110 GUB MP15151
GUB
Box Cat. # GU GUE GUB01 GUB02 GUB03 GUB04 GUB06 GUB08 GUB01110 GUB15151
a /32 9 /32 43/8 59/16 8 8 59/16 59/16 83/4 14

9
b 33/8 33/8 5 61/4 9 9 61/4 61/4 12 14
c 143/64 143/64 3 /8 5 /8 15 /16 15 /16 5 /8 5 /8 7 /16 15/8
d 1 15/16 15/16 15/16 15/16 15/16 17/16 15/8
e 1 7 /8 11/2 11/2 7 /8 7 /8 13/4 15/8
1E
For conduit liner ordering information, see page 822
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
689
1E
Threaded Covers for GUB Junction Boxes
Cl. I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 7BCD, 9EFG
Applications:
GUB and EPC threaded covers are used with GUB boxes in control systems in hazardous areas: Indoors and outdoors In three categories: Flat for normal use; furnished with standard GUB boxes Glass window to provide visibility of meter indications when used to enclose meters Domed for increasing volume of GUB to make it easier to splice and pull large conductors
GUB flat cover
GUB glass cover
GUB dome cover
Body Size GUB01 GUB02 GUB06 GUB08 GUB03 GUB04 GUB01110 Flat Cover Cat. # GUB0101 GUB0102 GUB0103 EPC2110 Glass Window Cover Cat. # GUB0110 GUB0108 GUB0109 Dome Cover Nominal Depth 4 10 6 10 17 5
Features:
Domed more suitable for use when splices of heavy conductors are made and enclosed, since the conductors may be pulled in with the ends outside the box. After the splices are made, they do not have to be crowded back into the box Glass window has maximum diameter glass to give best visibility. In selecting, the diameter of the meter face should match or be slightly smaller than window diameter
Cat. # GUB714 GUB7110 GUB726 GUB738 GUB7316 EPC2115
GUB15151 EPC2151 Specify body and conduit openings in normal manner ( see page 687) and state Cat. No. of cover required.
1E

NEC: UL Standard 1203 GUB0101, -0102, -0103, -714, -7110, EPC2110, EPC2151 Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III All other covers: Class I, Division 1 and 2, Group D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III CEC: CSA Standard C22.2 No. 30 Class I, Division 1 and 2, Group D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III
GUB covers are suitable for use in hazardous areas only when used with appropriate GUB series enclosures.
Dimensions
In Inches:
GUB with dome covers
Glass covers
Flat Covers
Cat. # GUB0101 GUB0102 GUB0103 EPC2110 EPC2151 a 6 /16 713/16 111/16 127/8 17
5
Glass Covers
b 1 /32 115/16 23/4 55/32 59/16
23
Thread Size d 5 /8 - 12 71/8 - 12 93/4 - 8 12.660 - 8 16.910 - 8

5
Cat. #
a
5
Window Opening c
Thread Size d 55/8 - 12 71/8 - 12 93/4 - 8
GUB0110 6 /16 113/16 35/8 GUB0108 713/16 21/16 43/4 GUB0109 111/16 115/16 613/16
Standard Materials:
Dome Covers
Cat. # GUB714 GUB7110 GUB726 GUB738 GUB7316 EPC2115 EPC21116 a 51/16 51/16 63/8 87/8 87/8 119/16 119/16 b 23/4 91/8 51/8 8 151/4 39/16 149/16 GUB02
For Dimensions C GUB06 GUB08 all others 43/16 43/16 41/8 51/8 51/8 65/8 65/8 81/2 81/2 d 4 103/8 63/4 101/2 173/8 69/16 179/16
Standard Finishes:
Natural
Bodies are grouped by size of cover opening and take any of the covers shown in the group. Check certifications and compliances for specific hazardous area ratings for each catalog #. For conduit liner ordering information, see page 822.
690
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
GUB Equipment Housings
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 4, 7BCD, 9EFG
1E
Applications:
GUB equipment housings are used in threaded rigid conduit systems in hazardous areas: To house relays, contactors, terminal blocks or other equipment and devices Indoors or outdoors
Features:
Supplied with dome cover and adjustable mounting position plate which extends into dome cover Mounting plate is adjustable. It may be located in center of cover so small devices can be mounted on both sides of plate or toward either side of dome cover when larger devices are mounted on one side of plate (see dimension "P")
GUB with cover removed showing mounting plate.
GUB with dome cover.
Body Size GUB01 GUB03 Nominal Depth of Cover 4 10 10 17 Dimension l m 35/16 913/16 91/8 163/8 4 107/16 101/16 173/8 Width of Mounting Plate 3 /16
13

NEC: GUB3100, GUB3177 Class I, Division 1 & 2, Group D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III GUB1440, GUB1100 Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III UL Standard: 1203 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
Cat. # GUB1440 GUB1100 GUB3100 GUB3177
61/2
Conduit seals are required within 11/2" of all conduit entrances for Class I, Division 1, Group B hazardous areas. For other sealing requirements consult the National Electrical Code/Canadian Electrical Code.
Dimensions
In Inches:
1E
Standard Materials:
Bodies Feraloy iron alloy Covers copper-free aluminum Mounting plates sheet steel
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Copper-free aluminum natural Sheet steel zinc plated
Options:
Description Material Bodies, copper-free aluminum Other sizes of boxes and covers available. Information on request Suffix SA
For conduit liner ordering information, see page 822. Check Certifications and Compliances for specific hazardous area ratings for each catalog #.
Body Size a b c d e f g h j k l m n p q
GUB01 53/4 71/2 7 61/2 61/2 57/8 13 /32 43/16 4 5 see listing see listing 47/8 11/2 max 51/16
GUB03 103/4 121/8 12 11 103/4 93/4 7 /16 65/8 65/8 91/8 75/8 27/8 max 87/8
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
691
1E
GUB Junction Boxes For IEC Applications
Ex d IIC T4-T6, Ex ia for Zone 1, 2, 21, 22 NEMA 4 / IP67 IECEx
ATEX GOST-R GOST-K
Applications:
GUB IEC ATEX Junction Boxes are used in threaded rigid conduit systems in hazardous areas: To function as a splice box, pull box, or equipment and device enclosure Indoors and outdoors
Standard Materials:
Bodies - aluminum Covers - aluminum
Standard Finish:
Epoxy powder coat finish is standard inside and outside GUB 00 Custom Control Panel
Features:
Threaded construction throughout permits use in hazardous areas Bodies have thick walls so they can be factory drilled and tapped to meet IEC requirements for Zone 1, 2, 21, and 22 hazardous areas Covers are provided with a neoprene "O" ring gasket to meet NEMA 4 / IP66 requirements for a watertight seal Internal grounding lug provides a means to ground enclosed equipment Ambient temperature range: -20 to +55C Rated voltage: 690V Rated max. current: 250A / in bus-bars 150A-10kA
Options:
Description
Factory installed mounting plate for relays, terminal blocks, electrical devices, etc. Factory installed pushbuttons, signal lamps, switchgear, glass windows Factory installed terminal blocks
Suffix
Available upon request (please contact factory) Available upon request (please contact factory) Available upon request (please contact factory)
Dissipated Power Type T6 T5 85 145 200
F
T4 150W 255W 360W

C
Rated Current Max. 60A 150A 250A
Cat. No. NOR 000 001 160 116 NOR 000 001 160 124 NOR 000 001 160 132
Kg
Quantity

ATEX Certificate: LOM 03ATEX3107U (Empty Enclosures)
II 2GD Ex d IIC Ex tD A21 IP67 EN60079-0:2006 EN60079-1:2007 EN60079-11:2007
B
GUB 00 60 GUB 20 100 GUB 30 140

A
3.20 1 6.20 1 10.20 1
Dimensions
In Millimeters:
External Type A B C GUB 00 170 170 135 GUB 20 215 215 195 Internal A' B' C' Mounting E F 9 11
1E
B=A
125 125 74 210 175 175 139 250
ATEX Certificate: LOM 04ATEX2018 (Custom Control Panels)

II 2 GD EEx d IIC T4...T6 IP67 T(*) C Ta: -20C / +55C EN60079-0:2006 EN60079-1:2007 EN60079-11:2007
Max. Entries per Face

Type GUB 00 GUB 20 GUB 30
1
/2"
/4"
1" 2 3 5
1 1/4" 2 2 3
11/2" 2 2 3
2" 1 2
21/2" 1 2
4 6 10
3 5 8
Metallic Enclosures*
Marking to 94/9/CE
II 2 G - EEx d IIC T6 - T4 II 2 D - IP67 T
EC - Type Examination Certificate

LOM 03 ATEX 3107U
Degree of Protection
acc. EN60529
Rated Voltage
690V
Max. Rated Current

250A / in bus-bars 150A - 10kA
Material
Light alloy, grey coating
*These enclosures can provide according to LOM 04 ATEX 2018 certification with the following electrical apparatus: Bus-bars, terminals, low voltage transformers, air circuit breakers, automatic circuit breakers, control and operations circuits, servomotors without ventilation, starters and ballasts for discharge lamps, electronic apparatus, associated SI apparatus, etc., according to customer needs. According to the mounted equipment. Available upon request.
692
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
GUBA Exd Junction Boxes
Zone 1, 2, 21, 22
1E
Applications:
GUBA series junction boxes are used in threaded rigid conduit and cable systems in hazardous areas: To function as a splice box, pull box, or equipment device enclosure Indoors and outdoors
Features:
Threaded construction throughout permits use in hazardous areas Wide variety of conduit entry arrangements Covers are sealed with "O" ring gasket

Type of Protection Exd Degree of Protection IP66 Gas Group IIC Approvals ANZEx05.3043X
Type and Description Empty enclosure 195mm x 2175mm x 107mm Flat cover for GUBA01 Glass window for GUBA01 (gas group IIB only) Empty enclosure 253mm x 283mm x 135mm
Note: Entries must be factory drilled, price adder applicable.
Cat. # GUBA01 GUBA0101 GUBA0110 GUBA02
Standard Materials:
Body and cover - cast copper-free aluminum
Dimensions
In Millimeters: 1E
Standard Finish:
Natural
Options:
Cast iron bodies and covers Grey polyurethane finish Metric, imperial, NPT, or BSP threads Glass window Dome covers
Maximum Number of Entries:

Metric Imp. Conduit NPT & BSP Catalog No. Top & Bottom GUBA01 GUBA02 Sides GUBA01 GUBA02 Back GUBA01 GUBA02 6 10 6 8 3 4 5 8 5 7 3 4 3 4 4 2 3 3 1 2 2 20mm 25mm 32mm 40mm 50mm
3 1
/4" /2"
1"
3
11/4" 1"
11/2" 1 /4"
1
2" 11/2"
/4"
Dimensional Data:
Internal Dimensions Cat. # GUBA01 GUAB02 A 195 253 B 220 298 C 175 233 D 146 204 E 146 224 No. of Mounting Feet 2 2 Weight F 130 185 G 107 135 H 76 76 Weight kg 4.2 8.1
Mounting Dimensions Cat. # GUBA01 GUAB02 X 195 264 Y 145 216
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
693
1E
EJB Junction Boxes
Cl. I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 4X*, 7, 9
Ex d IIB + H2 T6, IP66 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations
Applications:
EJB junction boxes are used in threaded rigid conduit systems in hazardous areas:
As a junction or pull box To provide enclosures for splices and branch circuit taps For housing terminal blocks, relays and other electrical devices Indoors or outdoors in damp, wet, dusty, corrosive, hazardous locations Where exposure to frequent or heavy rain, water, spray, moisture, and humidity is common, such as: offshore drilling facilities, cooling towers, coal preparation and handling facilities and sewage and waste water treatment plant In areas which are hazardous due to the presence of hydrogen or gases and vapors of equivalent hazard such as found in process industries, missile bases and gas manufacturing plants
EJB121208 with optional hinged cover
EJB121208 with optional hinged cover and standard neoprene cover gasket

NEC/CEC Class I, Divisions 1 and 2, Groups B*, C and D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F and G Class II, Division 2, Groups F and G Class III Class I, Zones 1 and 2 UL Standard 1203 cUL to CSA Standard C22.2 No. 30 ATEX: Ex d IIB + H2 T6, IP66 ATEX certificate: PTB 01 ATEX 1020 U Enclosure Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X*, 7BCD, 9EFG IEC Standard EN:60079-0 and EN:60079-1
Options:
Description
Hinged covers Hinges mounted on left (short side)................................... Available on all Style C and the following Style D enclosures: EJB101008-SA, EJB120804, EJB120804-SA, EJB120808-SA, and EJB141006-SA Hinge kits for field installation (no field machining required)
Suffix
S598
Features:
Style C boxes provided with aluminum plate cover as standard, allowing for field addition of cover device holes Stainless steel cover bolts (Style C only) Ground joint cover opening provides maximum opening for pulling wires or mounting equipment Walls of bodies may be drilled and tapped for conduit entries as shown in listings Stud bolts in diagonally opposite corners of body aid in aligning cover to body during installation (not furnished with hinged covers) All Style C bodies are provided with captive, triple lead, quick release hex head stainless steel bolts with spring loaded action which provides clear indication that cover bolts are fully retracted from the body External flange design wide unobstructed cover opening provides a completely accessible interior for wiring and electrical equipment Square corners of enclosure body provide maximum interior space and area for conduit openings Internal grounding lug provides a means to ground enclosed equipment Special neoprene cover gasket provides a watertight seal to meet NEMA 4 requirements, and provides superior protection for enclosed equipment against water/corrosion ATEX certified Enclosures are machined for field installed mounting plates Detachable mounting feet provide mounting flexibility. No need to replace enclosure if mounting feet are broken Optional stainless steel hinges provide convenient and easy access for inspection, maintenance and systems changes Enclosures are machined to accept field installed hinges
EJB KIT 1
EJB100806 through 361208........ (2 hinges)
EJB KIT 3
EJB361808.................................. (3 hinges)
EJB KIT 4
1E
Standard Materials:
Body and cover copper-free aluminum (suffix -SA items and all Style C), Feraloy iron alloy (Style D) Gasket neoprene Cover bolts stainless steel (Style C), steel (Style D) Hinges stainless steel
EJB362408.................................. (4 hinges) For EJB101008-SA, EJB120804, EJB120804-SA, EJB120808-SA EJB KIT 5 and EJB141006-SA..................... (2 hinges) Factory installed mounting plates for relays, terminal blocks, electrical devices, etc. Aluminum..................................... MP Mounting plate kit for field installation (kit includes aluminum mounting plate, pillars and mounting hardware). No field machining required. See Ordering Information on next page. Factory installed terminal blocks. Information on request
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum natural Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Steel electrogalvanized Extruded aluminum natural
Gasket Detail
Cross section of cover. Gasket extends beyond flange surface by .05".
Bolted cover and body assembled. Compressed gasket forms watertight seal.
*For Group B, install sealing fitting in each conduit run within 18" of the enclosure. To meet 4X requirement, add suffix S752 or S753. EJB361208, 361808, 362408 and all style D enclosures require sealing fittings within 18" of enclosure for each conduit run for Group C locations. Style D enclosures require sealing fittings within 18" of enclosure for each conduit run for Group D locations. For conduit liner ordering information, see page 822. CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds
694
US: 1-866-764-5454
EJB Junction Boxes
Cl. I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 4X*, 7, 9
Ex d IIB + H2 T6, IP66 Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations Ordering Information:
1E
Junction boxes listed can be furnished with drilled and tapped openings, subject to material required and the limitations of maximum size and number of openings as well as spacing, as shown in Tables 1 and 2.
To Order:
Step 1 Select the box required from photos at left, listings, and dimensional drawings on next pages. Step 2 Select standard conduit arrangement from Table 1 and maximum size conduit opening required from Table 2. Step 3 Select appropriate symbol for required drilled and tapped opening from Table 3. Example: Step 1 Box required EJB080806 Step 2 Arrangement 2 Step 3 Openings two 1" drilled and tapped holes in top and bottom and two 2" drilled and tapped holes on each side. Step 4 Symbols are substituted and written in clockwise order starting with "a." When no opening is required at a particular location, use symbol "0" (zero). For this example: CC, GG, CC, GG. Complete Cat. No. is made up of three parts: Part 1 box number; Part 2 arrangement number; Part 3 symbols for conduit openings. For this example: EJB080806-2-CC-GG-CC-GG If none of the standard arrangements meet requirements, send a sketch showing junction box number with size and location of each conduit opening desired.
Style D
Style C EJB121208* with optional hinged cover
Style D
Nominal Inside Dimensions Top & Sides Bottom (aa) (bb) 4 6 6 8 8 4 SA SA SA SA SA SA SA SA SA SA 4 6 6 8 6 8 8 4 10 10 6 8 8 8 12 16 6 8 8 8 12 12 12 16 10 14
Style C
Nominal Inside Dimensions Top & Sides Bottom (aa) (bb) 10 12 12 12 16 16 12 12 12 12 18 24 24 12 18 18 24 60 8 12 12 12 16 16 18 18 24 24 24 24 24 36 36 36 36 22
Cat. #
Depth 4 4 6 6 4 4 4 4 6 6 4 4 8 4 8 6
Cat. # EJB100806 EJB121204 EJB121206 EJB121208 EJB161606 EJB161608 EJB181206 EJB181208 EJB241208 EJB241210 EJB241808 EJB242408 EJB242410 EJB361208 EJB361808 EJB361810 EJB362408 EJB602212
Depth 6 4 6 8 6 8 6 8 8 10 8 8 10 8 8 10 8 12
Iron
EJB060404 EJB080604 EJB080606 EJB080806 EJB120804 EJB160404
1E
Aluminum
EJB060404 EJB080604 EJB080606 EJB080806 EJB120604 EJB120804 EJB120808 EJB160404 EJB101008 EJB141006
EJB Mounting Plate Kits

(For Field Installation) Select kit number that matches junction box number. Example: EJB-MP1410 is used in EJB141006-SA Cat. # Style C EJB EJB EJB EJB EJB EJB EJB EJB EJB EJB
Class I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups C and D only. Plate has no center hole. *See Compliances on previous page. For conduit liner ordering information, see page 822.
Cat. # Style D EJB EJB EJB EJB EJB EJB EJB EJB MP0604 MP0806 MP0808 MP1206 MP1208 MP1604 MP1010 MP1410
MP1008 MP1212 MP1616 MP1812 MP2412 MP2418 MP2424 MP3612 MP3618 MP3624
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
695
1E
EJB Junction Boxes

Table 1
Conduit Arrangement Diagrams
1E
Table 2
Conduit Arrangements Style D
Maximum Trade Size and Number of Openings Cat. # EJB060404 EJB080604 EJB080606 EJB080806 EJB101008 EJB120604 EJB120804 EJB120808 EJB141006 EJB160404 Top and Bottom (bb)* 1 2 3 2 2 31/2 31/2 4 2 2 4 31/2 2 1 /4 2 2 2 21/2 2 2 4 31/2 2
1
4 1 /2 1 /2 1 /2 1 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/2 2
Sides (aa) 1 2 2 2 31/2 31/2 4 2 2 4 31/2 2 /2 11/4 11/4 2 21/2 11/2 2 2 21/2 1 /2
1
3 1 /2 1 /2 1 11/2 1 /2 1 1 11/2
4 1 /2 1 1 /2 1 /2 1
Spacing Dimensions S L2 S2 2 /8 25/8 33/4 33/4 43/4 23/4 21/8 43/4 37/8 25/8
5
L3 2 /8 23/4 23/4 23/4 35/8 41/8 41/8 41/8 5 6

1
S3 21/8 21/8 23/4 35/8 21/8 23/4 23/4 39/16
L4 21/16 21/16 21/16 29/16 31/8 31/16 31/16 35/8 41/8
S4 21/16 29/16 21/16 21/16 29/16
/2 1 1 1 11/2 2 2 2 21/2 2
1
1 /8 21/8 21/4 21/4 23/4 3 3 31/4 33/4 3

5
1 /16 15/8 15/8 21/4 23/4 15/8 21/4 21/4 23/4 11/16
1
*Top and bottom are longer dimensions on enclosures which are not square. Conduit seals are required in all conduit entrances for Class I, Division 1, Group B hazardous areas, and for EJB361208, EJB361808, EJB361810, EJB362408, and all Style D enclosures when used in Class I, Division 1, Group C hazardous areas. For other sealing requirements, consult the National Electrical Code*. Where standard arrangements are not adequate, special drilling and tapping can be ordered, or instructions can be provided for field drilling and tapping. Breathers and drains must be ordered separately. Maximum trade size for Group B application is 4".
696
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EJB Junction Boxes

Table 2 - Continued
Conduit Arrangements - Style C Drilled and Tapped Openings Groups B, C and D
Cat. # EJB100806 EJB121204 EJB121206 EJB121208 EJB161606 EJB161608 EJB181206 EJB181208 EJB241208 EJB241210 EJB241808 EJB242408 EJB242410 EJB361208 EJB361808 EJB361810 EJB362408 Maximum Trade Size and Number of Openings Top and Bottom (bb)* 1 2 3 4 5 6 31/2 11/2 31/2 5 31/2 5 31/2 5 5 6 5 5 6 5 5 6 5 3 11/2 31/2 31/2 31/2 5 31/2 5 5 6 5 5 6 5 5 6 5 11/2 11/2 11/2 11/2 21/2 3 31/2 31/2 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 2 2 21/2 21/2 31/2 31/2 31/2 31/2 31/2 5 5 5 5 1 1 1 11/2 11/2 11/2 2 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 3 /4 3 /4 3 /4 11/4 11/4 11/2 11/2 21/2 21/2 21/2 21/2 21/2 4 4 4 4 7 1 /2 1 /2 1 /2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 31/2 31/2 31/2 31/2 8 3 /4 3 /4 3 /4 1 11/2 11/2 11/2 11/2 11/2 21/2 21/2 21/2 21/2 Sides (aa) 1 2 31/2 11/2 31/2 5 31/2 5 31/2 5 5 6 5 5 6 5 5 6 5 21/2 11/2 31/2 31/2 31/2 5 31/2 31/2 31/2 31/2 5 5 6 31/2 5 6 5 3 11/2 11/2 11/2 11/2 21/2 3 11/2 11/2 11/2 11/2 31/2 5 5 11/2 31/2 31/2 5 4 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 2 2 11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4 21/2 31/2 31/2 11/4 21/2 21/2 31/2 5 1 1 1 11/2 11/2 1 1 1 1 2 3 3 1 2 2 3 6 /4 3 /4 3 /4 11/4 11/4 3 /4 3 /4 1 1 11/2 21/2 21/2 3 /4 11/2 11/2 21/2
3
1E
7 /2 1 /2 1 /2 1 1 1 /2 1 /2 1 /2 1 /2 11/4 2 2 1 /2 11/4 11/4 2

1
8 3 /4 3 /4 1 11/2 11/2 1 1 11/2
Spacing Dimensions Cat. # S EJB100806 EJB121204 EJB121206 EJB121208 EJB161606 EJB161608 EJB181206 EJB181208 EJB241208 EJB241210 EJB241808 EJB242408 EJB242410 EJB361208 EJB361808 EJB361810 EJB362408 33/8 3 33/4 43/4 33/4 43/4 33/4 43/4 51/8 61/8 51/4 53/8 63/8 43/4 51/2 61/2 6
L2 23/4 21/4 3 3 3 31/4 3 43/16 43/16 43/4 43/16 43/16 43/4 47/16 47/16 43/4 43/4
S2 17/8 21/4 3 3 3 31/4 3 3 3 3 43/16 43/16 43/4 3 47/16 43/4 43/16
L3 3 35/8 35/8 35/8 45/8 45/8 6 6 87/16 87/16 87/16 87/16 87/16 87/16 87/16 87/16 87/16
S3 23/8 35/8 35/8 35/8 45/8 45/8 35/8 35/8 35/8 35/8 6 87/16 87/16 35/8 6 6 87/16
L4 21/4 31/16 31/16 31/16 43/16 43/16 45/8 45/8 6 6 6 6 6 87/16 87/16 87/16 87/16
S4 13/4 31/16 31/16 31/16 43/16 43/16 31/16 31/16 31/16 31/16 45/8 6 6 31/16 45/8 87/16 6
L5 2 2 2 23/4 23/4 23/4 31/4 45/8 45/8 45/8 45/8 45/8 53/4 53/4 53/4 53/4
S5 2 2 2 23/4 23/4 2 2 2 2 31/4 45/8 45/8 2 31/4 31/4 45/8
L6 13/4 13/4 13/4 21/2 21/2 23/4 23/4 37/8 37/8 37/8 37/8 37/8 53/4 53/4 53/4 53/4
S6 13/4 13/4 13/4 21/2 21/2 13/4 13/4 2 2 23/4 37/8 37/8 13/4 23/4 23/4 37/8
L7 11/2 11/2 11/2 2 2 2 2 31/4 31/4 31/4 31/4 31/4 51/8 51/8 51/8 51/8
S7 11/2 11/2 11/2 2 2 11/2 11/2 11/2 11/2 21/2 31/4 31/4 11/2 21/2 21/2 31/4
L8 13/4 13/4 13/4 2 23/4 23/4 23/4 23/4 23/4 37/8 37/8 37/8 37/8
S8 13/4 13/4 2 23/4 23/4 2 2 23/4
1E
Conduit seals are required in all conduit entrances for Class I, Division 1, Group B hazardous areas, and for EJB361208, EJB361808, EJB361810, and EJB362408 enclosures when used in Class I, Division 1, Group C hazardous areas. For other sealing requirements, consult the National Electrical Code. Where standard arrangements are not adequate, special drilling and tapping can be ordered, or instructions can be provided for field drilling and tapping. Breathers and drains must be ordered separately see page 164.
Table 3
Symbols for Openings
Conduit Size 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4 5 6 None Drilled and Tapped Hole Symbol A B C E F G H J K L M N 0
Maximum trade size for Group B applications is 4". *Top and bottom are longer dimensions on enclosures which are not square. Spacing dimensions for Group B boxes are based on use of EYS11-101 sealing fitting in conduit. For conduit liner ordering information, see page 822.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
697
1E
EJB Junction Boxes

Dimensions
Dimensions
In Inches:
Table 4
Outside Dimensions
Cat. # EJB060404 EJB080604 EJB080606 EJB080806 EJB120804 EJB160404 EJB060404 EJB080604 EJB080606 EJB080806 EJB120604 EJB120804 EJB120808 EJB160404 EJB101008 EJB141006 EJB100806 EJB121204 EJB121206 EJB121208 EJB161606 EJB161608 EJB181206 EJB181208 EJB241208 EJB241210 EJB241808 EJB242408 EJB242410 EJB361208 EJB361808 EJB361810 EJB362408 Diagram aa 8 /32 1015/32 1015/32 1215/32 121/2 81/2 811/32 1015/32 1015/32 1215/32 101/2 121/2 121/2 81/2 1421/32 1421/32
11
bb 10 /32 1215/32 1215/32 1215/32 161/2 201/2 1011/32 1215/32 1215/32 1215/32 161/2 161/2 161/2 201/2 1421/32 1821/32
11
Mtg. Hole /16 /16 7 /16 7 /16 7 /16 7 /16 7 /16 7 /16 7 /16 7 /16 7 /16 7 /16 7 /16 7 /16 7 /16 7 /16
7 7
ww 8 /4 1025/32 1025/32 1225/32 1213/16 813/16 83/4 1025/32 1025/32 1225/32 1013/16 1213/18 1213/16 813/16 147/8 147/8
3
xx 6 /8 63/16 83/16 87/32 63/8 65/32 61/8 63/16 83/16 87/32 63/16 63/8 103/8 65/32 103/8 815/32
1
yy 5 7 7 7 11 15 5 7 7 7 11 11 11 15 9 13 51/2 51/2 51/2 51/2 91/2 91/2 111/2 111/2 171/2 171/2 171/4 161/4 161/4 291/2 281/4 281/4 281/4
zz 71/8 91/8 91/8 111/8 111/8 71/8 71/8 91/8 91/8 111/8 91/8 111/8 111/8 71/8 131/8 131/8 111/4 151/8 151/8 151/8 191/8 191/8 151/8 151/8 155/8 155/8 217/8 277/8 277/8 151/8 217/8 217/8 291/2
Net Weight (lbs.) w/ Cover 43 64 84 98 103 86 16 24 32 37 32 39 56 33 59 66 60 60 70 80 103 113 101 110 149 160 243 296 322 185 351 396 571
SA SA SA SA SA SA SA SA SA SA
A, B, D
1E
C and E
131/32 171/16 171/16 171/16 213/16 213/16 175/16 175/16 179/16 179/16 239/16 299/16 299/16 171/16 2315/16 2315/16 303/16
151/32 171/16 171/16 171/16 213/16 213/16 235/16 235/16 299/16 299/16 295/8 299/16 299/16 411/16 4115/16 4115/16 423/16
/16 /16 9 /16 9 /16 9 /16 9 /16 9 /16 9 /16 9 /16 9 /16 11 /16 11 /16 11 /16 9 /16 11 /16 11 /16 11 /16
9 9
121/4 161/8 161/8 161/8 201/8 201/8 161/8 161/8 161/8 161/8 231/2 291/2 291/2 161/8 231/2 233/4 311/4
89/16 613/16 87/8 107/8 87/8 107/8 87/8 107/8 113/4 133/4 121/4 125/16 145/16 1111/16 127/16 141/4 125/8
For conduit liner ordering information, see page 822.
698
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EJB Junction Boxes

Table 5
1E
Style C
Style C
Cat. # EJB EJB EJB EJB EJB EJB EJB EJB EJB EJB MP1008 MP1212 MP1616 MP1812 MP2412 MP2418 MP2424 MP3612 MP3618 MP3624 a 9 11 15 17 23 22 22 34 331/2 34 b 7 11 15 11 11 16 22 10 151/2 22 c 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125 0.125 d 7 9 13 13 19 19 19 31 31 31 e 5 9 13 7 7 13 19 7 13 19 f g h 13/8 13/8 13/8 23/8 23/8 17/8 17/8 17/8 15/8 17/8 j 11/2 11/2 11/2 21/2 21/2 2 2 2 13/4 2 k 1 1 1 2 2 11/2 11/2 11/2 11/4 11/2
81/2 111/2 11 11 17 163/4 17
51/2 51/2 8 11 5 73/4 11
1E
Plate has no center hole. *Certifications and Compliances see page 694. For conduit liner ordering information, see page 822.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
699
1E
EJB602212 Junction Box
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7, 9
Applications:
EJB602212 junction box is used in threaded rigid conduit systems in hazardous areas: As a junction or pull box As an enclosure for splices and branch circuit taps For housing terminal blocks, relays, and other electrical devices As a mounting box for multi-device control panels with EMP barrel assemblies (see section 5C) Indoors or outdoors in damp, wet, dusty, corrosive locations Where exposure to frequent or heavy rain, water, spray, moisture, and humidity is common, such as: offshore drilling facilities, cooling towers, coal preparation and handling facilities, and sewage and waste water treatment plants Which are hazardous due to the presence of gases or vapors such as those found in process industries, missile bases, and gas manufacturing plants

NEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III UL Standard: 1203 UL Raintight CSA 22.2 No. 18 and 30 NEMA 3, 4, 7CD, 9EFG
Standard Materials:
Body and cover copper-free aluminum Gasket neoprene Cover bolts stainless steel Hinges extruded aluminum
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum natural Extruded aluminum natural Stainless steel natural Neoprene natural
Features:
Ground joint cover opening provides maximum opening for pulling wires or mounting equipment Walls of enclosure may be drilled and tapped for conduit entries as shown in Table 2 External flange design wide unobstructed cover opening provides a completely accessible interior for wiring and electrical equipment Square corners of enclosure body provide maximum interior space and area for conduit openings Flat cover provides maximum space for mounting a greater number of control devices Internal grounding lug provides a means to ground enclosed equipment Special neoprene cover gasket provides a watertight seal to meet UL Type 4 (NEMA 4) requirements, and provides superior protection for enclosed equipment against water/corrosion Stainless steel cover bolts provide superior corrosion protection Enclosure is machined for field installed mounting plates Detachable mounting channels provide mounting flexibility. No need to replace enclosure if mounting channel is broken Aluminum hinges provide convenient and easy access for inspection, maintenance, and systems changes Safety chain attached to body and cover prevents accidental damage to hinges
Options:
Description Suffix Mounting plate kit for field installation (kit includes aluminum mounting plate, pillars, and mounting hardware)................................ EJB-MP6022 Factory installed aluminum mounting plate for relays, terminal blocks, electrical devices, etc............................ MP
1E
EJB602212 can be furnished with drilled and tapped openings, subject to the limitations of maximum size and number of openings as well as spacing, as shown in Tables 1 and 2.
To Order:
Step 1 Specify box catalog number EJB602212 Step 2 Select standard conduit arrangement from Table 1 and maximum allowable size conduit opening from Table 2. Step 3 Select appropriate symbol for required drilled and tapped opening from Table 3. Example: Step 1 Box Cat. No. EJB602212 Step 2 Arrangement 2 Step 3 Openings two 2" drilled and tapped holes in top and bottom and two 21/2" drilled and tapped holes evenly spaced on each side. Step 4 Symbols are substituted and written in clockwise order starting with "a". When no opening is required at a particular location, use symbol "0" (zero). For this example:GG-0H0H0-GG-0H0H0. Complete Cat. No. is made up of three parts: Part 1 box number; Part 2 arrangement number; Part 3 symbols for conduit openings. For this example the catalog number is: EJB602212-2-GG-0H0H0-GG-0H0H0.
700
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EJB602212 Junction Box
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7, 9
1E
Table 1
Conduit Arrangement Diagrams
Table 2
Conduit Arrangements
Maximum Trade Size and Number of Openings Top and Bottom (bb) Sides (aa) 1 2 3 4 1 2 EJB602212 6 6 4 3 6 6 Spacing Dimensions 3 6 4 6 5 6 s 6 /4
3
t 10
u 7
v 5 /8
3
w 10
Table 3
Symbols for Openings
Conduit Size 1 /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3 31/2 4 5 6 none Drilled and Tapped Hole Symbol A B C E F G H J K L M N 0
Dimensions
In Inches:
1E
Conduit sealing fittings are required on all conduit entrances (within 18" of the enclosure) when used in Class I, Division 1, Group C hazardous areas. For other sealing requirements consult the National Electrical Code.
Enclosure
Mounting Plate
Nominal Inside Dimensions

Sides 60 Top & Bottom 22 Depth 12
For conduit liner ordering information, see page 822. Class I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups C and D only.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
701
1E

Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Cl. I, Zones 1 & 2 Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III
UL and cUL approved Ex d IIB + H2 T6 Certified to ATEX Directive NEMA 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG IP66
The following pages will assist you in choosing the combination of features suited to your needs and requirements. The easy, five-step process will take you through the specification of cover openings, specifying devices, drilled and tapped conduit openings, device locations, and legend and nameplate selection. After filling out your separate order form for each panel, fax it to your local Cooper Crouse-Hinds Distributor. Please consult the factory for alternatives not detailed in these pages, such as other conduit arrangements, terminal blocks, or circuit breaker operating handles.
Applications:
Manufactured for hazardous environments, the EJB Custom-Built Control Panel is an explosionproof enclosure built to customer specific requirements Available in a variety of sizes with an unlimited combination of devices, windows, and markings, these panels are designed to maximize the efficiency of each unique process
Features:
The foundation of the Custom-Built Control Panel is our tried and tested copper-free aluminum EJB enclosure. This corrosion resistant, heavy-duty enclosure features bolted construction, stainless steel hinges, and flexible tap-in mounting feet.
Tap-in mounting feet offer a simple and secure way to mount enclosure, and are replaceable if broken or lost Captive, quick-release stainless steel triple-lead cover bolts make it easier to get in and out of the enclosure
Neoprene cover gasketbetween body and coverprovides NEMA 4, IP66 watertight seal
Optional GUB explosionproof glass window is available when you need to see inside Stainless steel hinges
1E
Internal mounting plate standard
Internal and external ground terminations simplify grounding requirements
NPT or metric entries available
EMP Series the most complete line of devices in the industry pilot lights pushbuttons selector switches potentiometers
Copper-free aluminum construction available with Corro-free epoxy powder coat for additional protection in corrosive atmospheres Optional engraved nameplates
Optional individual device markings to clearly indicate the function of each device May be added in the eld

EJB Custom Control Panels
NEC/CEC: Class I, Divisions 1 & 2, Groups B*, C and D Class I, Zones 1 & 2 Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F and G Class II, Division 2, Groups F and G Class III NEMA: 3, 7B*CD, 9EFG cUL to CSA Standard C22.2 No. 30C22.2 No. 25 Cl. II (E, F, G) Ex d IIB + H2 T6 UL Standard 1203 IP66 Certified to the ATEX Directive when ordered with -ATEX suffix. Custom Control Panel is component certified only. For assembly certification, please consult factory.
*Groups C and D only when ordered with GUB window. Certified to the ATEX Directive when ordered with ATEX suffix.
ATEX Certifications
EJB Enclosure with Conduit Entries & Device Holes II 2 G Ex d IIB + H2 EMP Devices II 2 G Ex d IIB + H2 GUB0108 ATEX Window II 2 G Ex d IIB + H2 ECD Breather/Drain II 2 G Ex d IIB + H2 Certificate #: ITS07ATEX15639U Certificate #: ITS07ATEX15638U Certificate #: ITS07ATEX15652U Certificate #: ITS08ATEX15797U
702
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

1E
1E
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
703
1E

1E
704
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

1E
1E
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
705
1E

Ordering InformationBuilding a Custom Solution
1E
706
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Order Form
1E
1E
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
707
1E

Order Form
1E
708
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Order Form
1E
Section 2 Completed Catalog Number: Specify the complete catalog number including conduit designations.
Distributor: Customer:
Contact: Phone Number: CROUSE-HINDS FACTORY USE ONLY
Catalog Number Entered: Reference #: B#
EJB__________________________________
All Cooper Crouse-Hinds Custom-Built Control Panels are provided with a mounting plate and hinges. Hinges are on left side of enclosure. If you desire hinges on one of the other sides, circle choice here: TOP RIGHT BOTTOM
OPTIONS For any of the following options, check here: ____ ATEX Certied (ATEX) ____ Breather and Drain (S756V) ____ Epoxy nish, external (S752) ____ Epoxy nish, internal and external (S753)
size
1 2 3 4 5 A B C Top (column) 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Section 3Exterior Front View
Location of Devices and Windows in Cover: Outline the cover space available, beginning in the upper left corner of the grid, based upon the EJB selected. See Table 1 for device layout.
size
Left Side (Hinge Side) (row)
D E
Section 4
F G H I
Right Side
1E
Device Markings: Indicate by row and column position markings/legends for each device. Engraved Plate: Specify markings for each nameplate based upon the following:
Maximum Number of Characters/Line
Marking Size Number of Characters
Specify Row Column
J K L
1/8"
3/16"
1/4"
1/2"
M Bottom
Note: All device openings are spaced 2.62" center to center.
36
24
18
Device Marking (DSL) or Engraved Plate Line 1
Engraved Plate Line 2
Marking Size
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
709
1E
EJB/EJW Enclosures For IEC Applications
Ex d IIB T4-T6, Ex ia for Zone 1, 2, 21, 22 NEMA 4 / IP65 IECEx
ATEX GOST-R GOST-K
Applications:
EJB/EJW IEC ATEX Enclosures are used in threaded rigid conduit systems in hazardous areas: To function as a splice box, pull box, or equipment and device enclosure Indoors and outdoors

ATEX Certificate: LOM 02ATEX3060U (Empty Enclosures)
II 2G Ex d IIB EN60079-0:2006 EN60079-7:2007 EN60079-18:2004
Features:
Ground joint (bolted) construction throughout permits use in hazardous areas Bodies have thick walls so they can be factory drilled and tapped to meet IEC requirements for Zone 1, 2, 21, and 22 hazardous areas Covers are provided with a neoprene "O" ring gasket to meet NEMA/EEMAC 4 requirements for a watertight seal Internal grounding lug provides a means to ground enclosed equipment Ambient temperature range: -20 to +55C Rated voltage: 690V Rated max. current: up to 1200A
ATEX Certificate: LOM 03ATEX2004X (Custom Control Panels)

II 2 G Ex d IIB T4...T6 II 2(1) G Ex d[ia] IIB T4...T6 II 2(2) G Ex d[ib] IIB T4...T6 II 2(1/2) G Ex d[ia/ib] IIB T4...T6 EN60079-0:2006 EN60079-1:2007 EN60079-11:2007
EJB 241 M1
Components
Marking to 94/9/CE II 2 G - EEx d IIB EC - Type Examination Certificate LOM 02 ATEX 3060U Degree of Protection IP65 acc. EN60529
Standard Materials:
Bodies - aluminum Covers - aluminum EJW Series - welded steel
Metallic Enclosures*
Marking to 94/9/CE II 2 G - EEx d IIB T6 - T4 - T6* EC - Type Examination Certificate LOM 02 ATEX 3060U Degree of Protection IP65 acc. EN60529 Rated Voltage 690V Max. Rated Current 1200A Terminals to 240mm Material Light alloy, less EJW family in welded steel; grey coating
*Acc. of the mounted elements.
Standard Finish:
Epoxy powder coat finish is standard inside and outside
1E
Options:
Description Factory installed mounting plate for relays, terminal blocks, electrical devices, etc. Factory installed pushbuttons, signal lamps, switchgear, rotary handles, actuators, rectangular glass windows Factory installed terminal blocks up to 240 sq mm Kg 001 001 001 001 001 001 111 111 001 001 001 001 001 111 111 001 001 001 111 111 170 170 170 170 170 170 170 170 170 170 170 170 170 170 170 190 190 190 190 190 438 446 462 488 496 503 601 606 511 529 537 545 553 469 451 139 197 171 062 066 3.00 3.60 8.30 11.00 22.00 28.50 28.50 28.50 32.00 35.30 39.00 52.30 56.80 54.00 51.00 145.00 167.00 168.00 175.00 380.00 Suffix Available upon request (please contact factory) Available upon request (please contact factory)
Ordering Information - Enclosures:

Dissipation Power Type EJB 12R EJB 12A EJB 14R EJB 23R EJB 110 EJB 120 EJB 120 M3 EJB 120 M4 EJB 121 EJB 130 EJB 131 EJB 240 EJB 241 EJB 241 M1 EJB 241 M2 EJW 250 EJW 251 EJW 350 EJW 351 EJW 561 710 T6 30 30 80 60 125 150 150 150 150 200 200 250 250 250 250 250 380 380 450 600
T5 60 60 140 140 170 270 270 270 280 340 350 400 400 400 400 340 520 520 600 730
T4 100W 100W 240W 240W 295W 480W 480W 480W 500W 590W 610W 700W 700W 700W 700W 560W 850W 850W 1000W 1000W
Rated Current Max. 40A 40A 65A 100A 160A 300A 300A 300A 350A 450A 500A 800A 850A 850A 850A 1200A 1200A 1200A 1200A 1200A
Available upon request (please contact factory) Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Cat. # NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
ATEX GOST-R GOST-K
1E
Ordering Information - Components:

Description Cat. # NOR 000 001 170 004 NOR 000 001 170 005 NOR 000 001 170 006 Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Pushbuttons with 1NO + 1NC contact block:

Sensitive pushbutton + labels White, I, 0, STOP, START Sensitive pushbutton locked by padlock in pressed position + labels White, I, 0, STOP, START Sensitive pushbutton locked by padlock in depressed position + labels White, I, 0, STOP, START
Mushroom sensitive pushbutton + labels 0, STOP, OFF, RED, and YELLOW NOR 000 001 170 007 Mushroom retained pushbutton + labels 0, STOP, OFF, RED, and YELLOW NOR 000 001 170 008 Mushroom retained pushbutton and locked by padlock + labels 0, STOP, OFF, RED, and YELLOW Key pushbutton Mushroom key pushbutton Sensitive pushbutton bottom box + label RESET NOR 000 001 170 009 NOR 000 001 170 010 NOR 000 001 170 011 NOR 000 001 170 012
Contact blocks:
1NO 1NC NOR 000 001 170 013 NOR 000 001 170 014 1 1
Pack labels:
1 label of each inscription II, Arrow, ON, RESET, TEST, Green, Red, Yellow, and Black NOR 000 001 170 015 1
Signal lamps: 1E
Direct lamp 240V + lens White, Amber, Red, Yellow, and Green + Lampholder + 3W lamp Direct lamp 130V + lens White, Amber, Red, Yellow, and Green + Lampholder + 2.6W lamp Direct lamp 24V + lens White, Amber, Red, Yellow, and Green + Lampholder + 1.2W lamp Indirect lamp by Trafo 380-400/6V + lens White, Amber, Red, Yellow, and Green + Lampholder + 1.2W lamp Direct LED 230V + lens White, Amber, Red, Yellow, and Green + Lampholder Direct LED 130V + lens White, Amber, Red, Yellow, and Green + Lampholder NOR 000 001 170 016 NOR 000 001 170 017 NOR 000 001 170 018 NOR 000 001 170 019 NOR 000 001 170 116 NOR 000 001 170 117 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Direct LED 24V + lens White, Amber, Red, Yellow, and Green + Lampholder NOR 000 001 170 118
Control switches, locked by padlock + label:

Reversed 0-1, 2P, 12A + rotary handle Reversed 0-1, 2P, 25A + rotary handle Reversed 0-1, 3P, 25A + rotary handle Reversed 1-2, 1P, 12A + rotary handle Reversed 1-2, 2P, 12A + rotary handle Reversed 1-0-2, 1P, 12A + rotary handle NOR 000 001 170 020 NOR 000 001 170 021 NOR 000 001 170 022 NOR 000 001 170 023 NOR 000 001 170 024 NOR 000 001 170 025 1 1 1 1 1 1
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
711
1E
ATEX GOST-R GOST-K
Description
Cat. # NOR 000 001 170 026 NOR 000 001 170 027 NOR 000 001 170 028 NOR 000 001 170 029 NOR 000 001 170 030 NOR 000 001 170 031 NOR 000 001 170 032
Quantity 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Control switches, locked by padlock + label:

Reversed 1-0-2, 2P, 12A + rotary handle Reversed 0-1, 2P, 12A + rotary handle Reversed 0-1-M, 2P, 12A + rotary handle
Rotary handle bottom enclosure locked by padlock:

Actuator for 25A <63A switch Actuator for 63A <100A switch Actuator for 100A <250A switch Actuator for 250A <1000A switch
Neutral label for switches:

Label 60 x 60 Label 70 x 70 Label 85 x 85 NOR 000 001 170 033 NOR 000 001 170 034 NOR 000 001 170 035 of 1P - ABB + label multi-pole - ABB + label of 1P - M&G + label multi-pole - M&G + label POWER + label NOR NOR NOR NOR NOR 000 000 000 000 000 001 001 111 111 111 170 170 170 170 170 933 925 600 569 565 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Special actuators:
Actuator Actuator Actuator Actuator Actuator for for for for for MCB MCB MCB MCB MCB
Bushings:
3 /4" NPT 3P + N + PE 4x10mm + 1x6mm 50A 1" NPT 3P + N + PE 4x16mm + 1x10mm 75A 11/2" NPT 3P + N + PE x50mm + 1x10mm 150A
NOR 000 001 170 892 NOR 000 001 170 909 NOR 000 001 170 917 000 000 000 000 001 001 001 001 170 170 170 170 036 037 038 039
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Bus-bars:
>350A, 3P + N + T + control 19x1.5mm application size 1 NOR >350A <500A, 3P + N + T + control 19x1.5mm application size 1 NOR >500A <630A, 3P (2 bars per phase) + N + T + control 19x1.5mm application size 2 NOR >630A <800A, 3P (2 bars per phase) + N + T + control 19x1.5mm application size 2 NOR
1E
Windows:
60 x 60mm type: M 6060 75 x 75mm type: M 7575 110 x 50mm type: M 11050 110 x 75mm type: M 11075 NOR NOR NOR NOR 000 000 000 000 001 001 001 001 170 170 170 170 000 001 002 003 1 1 1 1 1
End bars cover:

NOR 000 111 170 154
Length cables 1m; others upon request.
Dimensions
B
In Millimeters:
Type Externals A 216 216 420 337 371 474 474 474 474 577 577 680 680 680 680 890 890 890 890l 1280 B 130 130 150 217 371 371 371 371 371 371 371 474 474 474 474 474 457 572 572 806 C 106 162 143 211 233 233 233 233 305 233 305 233 305 305 305 280 512 396 512 512 Windows Internals A' 178 178 367 274 311 414 414 414 414 517 517 619 619 619 619 816 816 816 816 1194 B' 86 86 104 164 311 311 311 311 311 311 311 414 414 414 414 351 351 466 466 685 C' 59 115 95 166 179 177 177 177 249 177 249 175 247 247 247 200 370 254 370 370 Mounting D 220 220 424 333 327 430 430 430 430 533 533 636 636 636 636 852 852 852 852 1236 E 144 144 159 219 327 327 327 327 327 327 327 430 430 430 430 387 387 502 502 727
EJB 12R EJB 12A EJB 14R EJB 23R EJB 110 EJB 120 EJB 120 M3 EJB 120 M4 EJB 121 EJB 130 EJB 131 EJB 240 EJB 241 EJB 241 M1 EJB 241 M2 EJW 250 EJW 251 EJW 350 EJW 351 EJW 561
75 x 110 180 x 140
230 x 255 465 x 255
712
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
ATEX GOST-R GOST-K
1E
Customized Electrical Equipment

EJB/EJW IEC ATEX Enclosures can be customized to meet individual requirements. Please contact Cooper Crouse-Hinds Customer Service for more information. Possible electrical components mounted inside EJ's: Bus-bars; terminals; low voltage transformers; air circuit breakers; automatic circuit breakers; control and operation circuits; electronic apparatus; heating elements; associated SI apparatus; batteries with volume <1/100 of the free enclosure volume; starters and ballast for discharge lamps; capacitors of 3 seconds discharge time; servomotors without ventilation Marking to 94/9/CE II 2 G - Ex d IIB T6 - T4 - T6 EC - Type Examination Certificate LOM 03 ATEX 2004X T (Ambient of Use) -20C to +55C Rated Voltage 690V Rated Current up to 1200A Degree of Protection IP65 acc. EN60529 Terminals Up to 240mm
1E
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
713
1E
EJBA Exd Enclosures
Zone 1, 2, 21, 22
Applications:
EJBA enclosures are used: As a terminal box or bus bar system As junction boxes with terminals To enclose equipment and control devices, relays, contactors and/or instruments To house custom-built panels
Features:
External flange with machined joint cover opening provides maximum opening for pulling cables or mounting equipment Body walls have sufficient thickness to allow for drilled and tapped entries Special one piece hollow neoprene gasket designed to fully compress to ensure metal to metal contact of cover and body for explosionproof integrity while giving an IP66 weatherproof seal to AS1939 The sealing gasket is placed inward from the cover bolt holes, to prevent ingress of any moisture Hinges provide convenient and easy access for inspection, maintenance, and systems changes; integral cast hinges are fitted as standard on EJBA464, EJBA783, and EJBA786; aluminum hinges are also provided as standard on EJBA211710 up to EJBA361810; optional stainless steel hinges are available for sizes EJBA886 up to EJBA161608 Entries can be drilled and tapped to customer requirements
Nominal inside dimensions (mm): Cat. # Width Height Depth Gas Group Mounting Plate EJBA464 150 100 100 IIB MP0406 200 170 70 IIB or IIC (H2) MP0708 EJBA783 200 170 140 IIB or IIC (H2) MP0708 EJBA786 200 200 150 IIB or IIC (H2) MP0808 EJBA886 200 300 150 IIB or IIC (H2) MP1208 EJBA1286 228 400 150 IIB or IIC (H2) MP0916 EJBA9166 300 300 200 IIB or IIC (H2) MP1212 EJBA121208 400 400 200 IIB or IIC (H2) MP1616 EJBA161608 440 545 255 IIB or IIC (H2) MP2117 EJBA211710 450 600 255 IIB or IIC (H2) MP2418 EJBA241810 600 600 255 IIB or IIC (H2) MP2424 EJBA242410 Note: All drilling and tapping of entries must be carried out by the manufacturer to ensure that certification requirements are not breached. While mounting of devices such as relays, etc. can be carried out in the future if the enclosure is provided with a mounting plate, care should be taken with devices which are likely to raise the surface temperature of the enclosure.
1E
Dimensions
In Millimeters:

Type of Protection Exd Degree of Protection IP66 Gas Group IIB or IIB + H2 Approvals ANZEx 06.3018X
Standard Materials:
Body and cover - cast copper-free aluminum
Dimensional Data:
Cat. # EJBA464 EJBA783 EJBA786 EJBA886 EJBA1286 EJBA9166 EJBA121208 EJBA161608 EJBA211710 EJBA241810 EJBA242410 A 215 280 280 280 280 305 415 516 654 595 750 B 165 240 240 280 380 485 415 516 545 750 750 C 122 87 87 180 175 175 230 230 323 295 295 D 135 115 170 230 225 225 285 285 355 350 350 E 145 230 230 140 168 242 143 242 300 413 413 F 150 192 192 280 305 325 395 505 610 556 708 Mtg. Screws M6 M8 M8 M8 M12 M12 M6 M8 M8 M8 M12
Standard Finish:
EJBA2424, 2418, 211710 cover corrosion resistant grey polyurethane; remainder natural
Options:
Grey polyurethane finish Captive cover screws Marine grade paint
714
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
GHG64 Series Flameproof Enclosures
Ex d IIB (IIB + H2 optional) T5-T6, Ex ia for Zone 1, 2, 21, 22 Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups C, D (Group B optional) NEMA 4 / IP65 (IP66 optional) CSA/UL
IECEx ATEX GOST-R GOST-K
1E
Applications:
GHG64 Series Enclosures are used in threaded rigid conduit systems in hazardous areas: To function as a splice box, pull box, or equipment and device enclosure Indoors and outdoors
Features:
11 sizes (modular design) to suit your requirements with very effective power dissipation Ground joint (bolted) construction throughout permits use in hazardous areas Bodies have thick walls so they can be factory drilled and tapped to meet IEC requirements for Zone 1, 2, 21, and 22 hazardous areas Hinged cover with up to 110 cover opening - designed for easy maintenance Ambient temperature range: -20 to +40C standard (-55 to +55C optional) Rated voltage: 690V Rated max. current: up to 1150A
Standard Materials:
Bodies - die cast aluminum Covers - die cast aluminum
Standard Finish:
Epoxy powder coat finish is standard inside and outside (cover is RAL7032 gray and body RAL7022 beige)
Options:
Description Suffix Factory installed mounting Available upon request (please plate for relays, terminal contact factory) blocks, electrical devices, etc. Factory installed pushbuttons, Available upon request (please signal lamps, switchgear, contact factory) rotary handles, actuators, rectangular glass windows Factory installed terminal Available upon request (please blocks - up to 240 sq mm contact factory) IIB + H2 Please contact factory IP66 Please contact factory

Ex d IIB (IIB + H2 optional) T5-T6, Ex ia for Zone 1, 2, 21, 22 Class I, Division 2, Groups C, D (Group B optional) NEMA 4 / IP65 (IP66 optional) ATEX Certificate: PTB 08 ATEX 1042U CSA/UL IECEx GOST-R GOST-K
1E
Size 11
Size 9
Size 6
Size 4
Size 1
Ordering Information - Ex d Light Alloy Empty Enclosures (IIB), Bolted:

Power Dissipation Version Size Size Size Size Size Size Size Size Size Size Size 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 T6 94 W 112 W 140 W 152 W 197 W 240 W 270 W 270 W 390 W 470 W 470 W (Tamb. = 40C) T5 134 158 195 214 280 335 390 390 430 640 640 W W W W W W W W W W W Weight 10.5 kg 14.0 kg 17.0 kg 18.0 kg 21.0 kg 22.0 kg 27.0 kg 35.0 kg 53.0 kg 73.0 kg 105.0 kg Dimensions LxWxD 210 320 320 320 320 430 430 430 650 650 650 x x x x x x x x x x x 210 210 210 320 320 320 320 430 430 430 650 x x x x x x x x x x x 191 191 284 191 284 191 284 284 284 437 442 mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm Cat. # (without hinge) GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG 640 640 640 640 640 640 640 640 640 640 640 1901 1902 1903 1904 1905 1906 1907 1908 1909 1910 1911 R0001 R0001 R0001 R0001 R0001 R0001 R0001 R0001 R0001 R0001 R0001 Cat. # (with hinge) GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG GHG 640 640 640 640 640 640 640 640 640 640 640 1901 1902 1903 1904 1905 1906 1907 1908 1909 1910 1911 R0013 R0013 R0013 R0013 R0013 R0013 R0013 R0013 R0013 R0013 R0013
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
715
1E
GUA Junction Boxes with Union Hubs
Applications:
GUA junction boxes with union hubs are used in threaded rigid conduit systems in hazardous areas: To allow easy disassembly of conduit system To function as junction and pull box for multiple conductors and conduits Indoors or outdoors where space is limited, such as in gasoline pumps
With Nuts and Sleeves*
Features:
Supplied with union hubs, which makes it a compact assembly Have a variety of hub arrangements Covers are threaded Mounting straps are standard on all boxes

NEC/CEC Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III UL Standard: 1203 CSA standard: C22.2 No. 30 /2 /4 1 /2 3 /4 3 /4 3 /4 1 1 1 3 /4 3 /4
1 3 1 3
GUAG Hub Sizes a b /2 /4 3 /4 1 /2 1 1 3 /4 3 /4 1 3 /4 3 /4
GUAH Cat. # With Nuts and Sleeves* GUAG6665 GUAG7775 GUAG6775 GUAG7665 GUAG7885 GUAG7875 GUAG8775 GUAG8785 GUAG8885
3
GUAP Dimensions x y 11/8 21/4
c /2 /4 /4 1 /2 1 3 /4 3 /4 1 1 3 /4 3 /4
1 3 3
1E
Standard Materials:
13/16
23/8
3 3
/4 /4
/4
GUAH77775 GUAP777775
See GUAH above See GUAP above
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Copper-free aluminum natural
Options:
Description Feraloy iron alloy cover Suffix WOD
Size Ranges:
1/2" to 1" hubs
*Photo shown without standard mounting strap(s). Outside dimensions of body: length, 33/4"; depth, 115/16" at corners, 31/8" over corners; nominal diameter of cover opening, 3"; width, 33/4". For conduit liner ordering information, see page 822.
716
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
GUP Junction Boxes
Cl. I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III
Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight
1E
Applications:
GUP series junction boxes are used in threaded rigid conduit systems in hazardous areas: To function as a junction or pull box Where space is limited such as in gasoline pumps Indoors or outdoors
Features:
Compact in design Supplied with a variety of hubs (6 hubs and 3 plugs or 10 hubs and 7 plugs) Cover sealed with standard "O" ring gasket for raintight enclosure

NEC/CEC Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III UL Standard: 1203 CSA standard C22.2 No. 30
Standard Materials:
1E
Top Hubs 23/4" 23/4" 23/4" Bottom Hubs 23/4" 23/4" 23/4" Side Hubs 13/4" 13/4" 13/4" Back Hubs None 43/4" 41" Cat. # GUP215* GUP214 GUP314
Standard Finishes:
*Furnished with 33/4" pipe plugs. Furnished with 73/4" pipe plugs. Furnished with 43/4" pipe plugs and 31" pipe plugs.
Options:
Description Feraloy iron alloy covers Suffix WOD
Dimensions
In Inches:
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
717
1E
EGJ Junction Boxes
Cl. I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III
Applications:
The EGJ series junction boxes are designed for flush installation in the concrete pump island of gasoline service stations
Features:
Cover sealed with "O" ring gasket to make unit raintight Cover recess will accept tool used to open cover of gasoline storage tank Two drilled and tapped conduit entrances on the bottom and six on the sides Plugs are provided for the two bottom entrances and four of the side entrances for choice of conduit arrangement ES sealing hubs thread into the bottom to seal the mainfeed Caulking compound supplied for filling space between cover flange and body rim to prevent accumulation of water, dirt and ice. Compound remains pliable and is easily removed Unused conduit entrances must be securely plugged with type PLG threaded pipe plugs to maintain flametight conditions (see section 5F). See illustration for method of constructing seals. EGJ421 EGJ422
Body Size Length and Width 53/4 7 Drilled and Tapped Conduit Entrances No. of No. of Hubs Hubs Side Size Back Size Cat. # 6 6 /4 3 /4
3
Replacement Cover
Depth 43/16 59/32
Cat. # EGJ:10706L EGJ:10705L
2 2
/4 1
3
EGJ421 EGJ422
Sealing Hubs (order separately)

For EGJ421 EGJ422 No. 2 2 Female Hub Size 1 11/4 Cat. # ES53 ES64 How to construct seal
Typical Installation

NEC/CEC Class I, Division 1 and 2, Group D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III UL Standard: 1203 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
1E
Standard Materials:
Dimensions
In Inches:
Standard Finishes:
Cat. # EGJ421 EGJ422
a 53/4 7
b 27/8 31/2
c 27/16 3
d 13/4 29/32
e 11/8 13/8
f 15/16 13/8
g 43/16 59/32
h 11/2" entry 2" entry
For conduit liner ordering information, see page 822. Both the EGJ421 and EGJ422 junction boxes have 4 drilled and tapped conduit entrances in the back (see drawing above). The 2 larger diameter holes are for the ES Sealing Hubs and there are provisions for 2 smaller diameter conduit entrances.
718
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EIH Instrument Enclosures
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7BCD, 9EFG Ex d IIB, IP66 ATEX Certified Certifications and Compliances:
NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 4, 7BCD, 9EFG UL Standard: 1203 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30 FM Classification No.: 3615 ATEX Certificate KEMA 02 ATEX 2265U (requires ATEX suffix) IEC Standards EN:60079-0, EN:60079-1, EN:60529 Ex II 2 G Ex d IIB KEMA02ATEX2265U
1E
Applications:
EIH instrument enclosures are used: To enclose instrumentation and control devices such as two-wire transmitters, flow measurement devices, temperature controls, level detectors, pressure switches, etc. As an outlet box for pulling and splicing conductors In hazardous, abusive and wet locations To provide access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes
EIH22
Features:
3/ 4" offset through feed hubs offer maximum interior space and greater working area 2" and 4" deep covers, solid or with glass lens Internal mounting pads for instrument mounting Internal ground screw for safe, continuous grounding Neoprene gasket provides a watertight seal for NEMA/EEMAC 4 and UL/CSA Type 4 applications Wrenching lugs permit easy cover removal and tightening Internal cover threads provide additional space inside body External boss is suitable for drilling and tapping an additional conduit entry
Standard Materials:
Body and cover copper-free aluminum Glass lens heat tempered glass Gasket neoprene
EIH21
Standard Finishes:
Corro-free epoxy powder coat (gray)
Hub Size* Description /4 3 /4 3 /4
3 3
Cat. # standard cover EIH20 glass lens cover EIH21 dome cover EIH22 glass lens EIH23
Options:
Description Suffix Cast mounting feet........................ MF Natural finish - Consult Cooper Crouse-Hinds Additional drilled and tapped opening in external boss: 1 / 2".............................................. 1 3 / 4".............................................. 2 With ATEX certification.................. ATEX
/4
Body with 2" Body with 2" Body with 4" Body with 4" dome cover
1E
*For 1/2" hub size, use RE21-SA.
Dimensions
In Inches:
EIH 20 & 21
EIH 22 & 23
Cat. # EIH20 EIH21 EIH22 EIH23
a 5.00 5.00 5.00 5.00
b 4.25 4.25 4.25 4.25
c 2.60 2.60
d 4.54 4.54 6.54 6.54
e 2.60 2.60 4.60 4.60
f 1.94 1.94 1.94 1.94
g 2.75 4.68
h 2.73 2.73
i 3.62 3.62 3.62 3.62
j 3.10 5.03
k 3.34 5.34
l 5.25 5.25 5.25 5.25
For Group B applications, seal within 11/2"of enclosure in accordance with Sections 501-5 of the National Electrical Code as well as any other applicable codes.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
719
1E
EIHT Instrument Enclosures
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7BCD, 9EFG
Applications:
EIHT instrument enclosures are used: To enclose instrumentation and control devices such as two-wire transmitters, flow measurement devices, temperature controls, level detectors, pressure switches, etc. As an outlet box for pulling and splicing conductors In hazardous, abusive and wet locations To provide access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes
Standard Materials:
Body and cover copper-free aluminum Glass lens heat tempered glass Gasket neoprene
Standard Finishes:
Corro-free epoxy powder coat (gray)
Options:
Description Suffix Additional drilled and tapped opening in external boss: 1 /2"................................. 1 3 /4"................................. 2 Natural finish.................... Consult Cooper Crouse-Hinds
Features:
3/4" offset through feed hubs offer maximum interior space and greater working area 2" and 4" deep covers, solid or with glass lens Internal mounting pads for instrument mounting Internal ground screw for safe, continuous grounding Neoprene gasket provides a watertight seal for NEMA/EEMAC 4 and UL/CSA Type 4 applications Wrenching lugs permit easy cover removal and tightening Internal cover threads provide additional space inside body External boss is suitable for drilling and tapping an additional conduit entry Two seperate chambers for isolation of power supply and instrument 3/4" hub on instrument side Third party certified for drilling enclosure wall between instrument and power side
Hub Size*
3
Description 2" Blank Cover - Power Side 2" Blank Cover - Instrument Side 2" Blank Cover - Power Side 2" Glass Lens Cover - Instrument Side 2" Blank Cover - Power Side 4" Blank Cover - Instrument Side 2" Blank Cover - Power Side 4" Glass Lens Cover - Instrument Side
Cat. # EIHT200 EIHT210 EIHT220 EIHT230
/4 /4 /4 /4
1E
Dimensions
In Inches:

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 4, 7BCD, 9EFG UL Standard: 1203 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30 FM Classification No.: 3615 IEC Standards EN:60079-0, EN:60079-1, EN:60529 II 2 G Ex d IIB KEMA02ATEX2265U
Cat. # EIHT200 EIHT210 EIHT220 EIHT230
a 4.75 4.75
b 5.19 5.19 5.19 5.19
c 6.95 6.95 8.95 8.95
d 3.48 3.48 5.48 5.48
e 3.15 3.15 5.15 5.15
f 3.56 3.56 3.56 3.56
g 1.87 1.87 1.87 1.87
*For 1/ 2" hub size, use RE21-SA.
720
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
GUB Instrument Housings
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Group D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA 3, 7D, 9EFG, 12
Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight/Wet Locations Watertight
1E
Applications:
GUB instrument housings are used: To enclose ammeters, voltmeters, wattmeters, varmeters, power-factor meters, tachometer indicators, pressure controls, temperature control etc., in a threaded rigid metallic conduit system In specific hazardous atmospheres such as encountered in oil refineries, chemical plants, paint and varnish manufacturing plants, certain hazardous metal finishing areas, coal processing locations, granaries and grain processing plants
GUB01 shown with GUB0110 glass cover
Features:
Threaded covers have glass windows for viewing scale, dial or setting of enclosed instrument. Mounting plates, brackets or pillars for mounting a wide variety of instruments not shown on the next page are available on special order. Instrument to be used must be specified by make, complete identification data and dimensions.

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Group D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 7D, 9EFG, 12 UL Standard: 1203 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
Ordering Information - Empty Housing

Conduit Opening Basic Housing GUB01 GUB02 GUB06 GUB03 Size
3
Position Top Bottom Top Bottom Top Bottom Top Bottom
Cat. # GUB110 1 20 GUB110 1 02 GUB218 1 20 GUB218 1 02 GUB619 1 20 GUB619 1 02 GUB319 1 20 GUB319 1 02
/4 /4 /4 /4
1E
Standard Materials:
Body Feraloy iron alloy Cover copper-free aluminum Window heat strengthened plate glass
Dimensions
In Inches:
Standard Finishes:
Options:
Description Other conduit opening sizes and arrangements can be furnished For 3/4" hub top and bottom Suffix
22
GUB 1 2 3 4 6 8
a 71/2 9 121/8 121/8 91/2 95/8
b 53/4 83/4 103/4 31/2 83/4 21/2
c 35/8 43/4 613/16 613/16 43/4 43/4
d 51/2 7 95/8 95/8 7 7
e 53/4 6 85/16 813/16 7 615/16
f 3 3 5 5 4 4
h 57/8 71/8 93/4 93/4 75/8 75/8
j 61/2 91/8 103/4 103/4 91/8 91/8 721
121/4 101/4
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1E
GUB Instrument Housings
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Group D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA 3, 7D, 9EFG, 12
Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight/Wet Locations Watertight
Ordering Information - Housing with Mounting Plate for Standard Meters

Inst. Size 31/2 4 41/2 6 Basic Housing GUB01 GUB06 GUB02 GUB03 Cat. # GUB1103 1 20* GUB11031 1 20 GUB6191 1 20 GUB6192 1 20 GUB6193 1 20 GUB2184 1 20* GUB3190 1 20* GUB3191 1 20
*These boxes available for use in Class I, Division 1 and 2, Group B and C hazardous areas. Add suffix GB to Cat. No. Seals must be installed within 11/2" of each conduit opening for Group B & C usages. Note: Note: These standard instrument housings are furnished with one top feed Meters are not included.
3
/ " drilled and tapped opening.

4
Ordering Information - Housing with Standard Meter Included

Manufacturer G.E. Westinghouse Weston Model Type 250 R-351 Series N-351 Series 301 Series 301 Series 723 KT-11 Elapsed Time Meter Without Reset 236 Elapsed Time Meter Without Reset BH351 Elapsed Time Meter Without Reset Type 250 R-371 Series N-371 Series 1900 Series KX-251 KA-251 KY-25 271 273 AB-14 Series DB-14 Series AB-18 Series DB-18 Series AB-30 Series DB-30 Series AB-40 Series DB-40 Series K-241 Series Inst. Size in. 31/2 31/2 31/2 31/2 31/2 31/2 31/2 Type Flange Rect. Flush Rect. Flush Round Flush Rect. Flush Round Flush Rect. Flush Round Flush or Rect.Flush GUB11031 1 20 31/2 Round Flush or Rect.Flush Cat. # GUB1103 1 20* Max. Inst. Depth
G.E.
1E
Westinghouse
31/2
Rect. Flush
G.E. Westinghouse Weston Westinghouse Weston
41/2 41/2 41/2 41/2 6 6 6 7 9 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 41/2
Rect. Flush Rect. Flush Round Flush Rect. Flush Rect. Rect. Rect. Fan Fan Rect. Rect. Rect. Rect. Rect. Rect. Rect. Rect. Flush Flush Flush Flush Flush Flush Flush Flush
GUB2184 1 20*
GUB3190 1 20* GUB3191 1 20
G.E.
GUB6191 1 20 GUB6192 1 20 GUB6193 1 20
49/16 61/16 711/16
Westinghouse
Rect. Flush
Standard meters are to be purchased separately from manufacturers listed. Select housing based on depth of instrument to be enclosed. *These boxes available for use in Class I, Division 1 and 2, Group B and C hazardous areas. Add suffix GB to Cat. No. Seals must be installed within 11/2" of each conduit opening for Group B & C usages.
722
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
GUBA Flameproof Exd Instrument Housings
Flameproof, Exd, IIC, IP66
Zone 1, 2, 21, 22
1E
Applications:
GUBA instrument housings are used: To enclose ammeters, voltmeters, wattmeters, varmeters, power-factor meters, tachometer, or other indicating devices In specific hazardous atmospheres such as encountered in oil refineries, chemical plants, paint and varnish manufacturing plants
Features:
Threaded covers have glass windows for viewing scale, dial, or setting of enclosed instrument Mounting plates, brackets, or pillars for mounting a wide variety of instruments are available

Certificate of Compliance No. Ex262 to AS2480 IP66 to AS1939
Basic Housing GUBA01 GUBA01 Entry Size 25mm 25mm Position Top Bottom Cat. # GUBA 1103-1-20 GUBA 1103-1-02
Dimensions
In Millimeters:
Standard Materials:
Body - copper-free aluminum Cover - copper-free aluminum Window - toughened
1E
Standard Finish:
Light grey corrosion resistant polyurethane
Options:
Other conduit hub sizes and arrangements can be furnished Meter - 90 quadrant or 250 long scale
Notes:
1) Accommodates any make of meter styles 96Q or 96L 2) Instrument to be used must be specified by make, complete identification data, and dimensions
A 195
B 145
C 93
D 140
E 135
F 77
G 145
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
723
1E
EMH Instrument Housings
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Group D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7D, 9EFG, 12 Instrument Housings
Style Conduit Openings Size
3
Applications:
EMH instrument housings are used: To enclose 21/2" or 31/2" diameter round, flush rim-mounting meters, whose scale or dial would be visible in the 25/8" diameter glass window. Typical types of instruments or meters are ammeters, voltmeters, etc. In specific hazardous atmospheres such as encountered in oil refineries, chemical plants, paint and varnish manufacturing plants, certain hazardous metal finishing areas, coal processing locations, granaries and grain processing plants
Cat. # EMH521 EMH533 EMH521 EMH533 EMH511 EMH534 EMH511 EMH534 20000 20000 20200 20200 20000 20000 20200 20200 Flush
One in Side (Dead End) Surface Two in Sides (Through Feed) One in Side (Dead End) Flush Two in Sides (Through Feed)
/4
/4
Standard Meters
Housed in EMH511, EMH521
Manufacturer Model 201 Series 301 Series N-351 Series 125 135 145 155 25 35 45 55 75 Series Series Series Series Size 21/2 31/2 31/2 21/2 Weston Westinghouse
Features:
Sight-glass in cover permits viewing of instrument dial or setting. Enclosures are non-magnetic, available in surface mounting and flush panel mounting. The cylindrical extension of the cover opening on the flush bodies will project through a hole in panel. Thickness of panel must not exceed 1/4" to insure flametight assembly of cover threads with body threads. Mounting plates and posts in bodies support the instrument close to the heavy glass window in cover. Maximum depth of instrument extending from outboard end of posts towards the back wall of enclosure body is 3". There is ample wiring space in back of instruments. Bodies have bosses on all four sides and back for drilling and tapping of conduit entrances. Dead end and through feed arrangements for 3/4" rigid conduit are standard listings.
Simpson
Series Series Series Series Series
Surface 31/2
Options:
21/2 31/2 Other conduit hub sizes and arrangements can be furnished.
3222 Series 3282 Series 3223 Series 3283 Series

Type-Round Flush
1E
Standard Meters
Housed in EMH533, EMH534
Manufacturer G.E. Weston Model AW-91 Series DW-91 Series 201 Series 1721 Series Size 21/2 21/2 Type Rect. Flush Square Flush Rect. Flush

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Group D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 7D, 9EFG, 12 UL Standard: 886 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
Dimensions
In Inches:
Standard Materials:
Bodies copper-free aluminum Covers copper-free aluminum Windows heat strengthened plate glass
Standard Finishes:
Natural
724
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Metallic Enclosures
Increased Safety Hazardous Applications or Non-hazardous Applications
Description
Ex-CELL Series NXT Series STB Series HVB Series KBX Series TBX Series
2E
Page No.
see pages 726732 see pages 735737 see pages 740744 see pages 746748 see page 749 see pages 750752
2E
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
725
2E
Ex-CELL Stainless Steel and Painted Steel Enclosures

High performance, high reliability enclosures for global applications
Type 3S, 4, 4X Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A,B,C,D cULus to UL50 / C22.2 No. 94-M91 IP66 ATEX and IECEx Certified GOST-R, GOST-K, and KOSHA Certified
Applications:
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Ex-CELL Enclosures are manufactured to meet the most demanding industrial and hazardous area environmental applications. The Ex-CELL Series is a globally certified enclosure and termination solution for Type 3S and 4X applications. They are certified to the impact, thermal, and IP66 ingress requirements of EN 60079-0. Ex-CELL Enclosures are available in a comprehensive range of sizes, each with various configurations for a multitude of applications. The Ex-CELL Series offers unique design features, precision manufacturing, and the highest quality materials, making it the premier choice for instrumentation and electrical applications across the globe. The Ex-CELL product line has been expanded to include: Over 100 standard sizes in both stainless steel and painted steel Single door enclosures up to 63" x 48" x 16" XXL double door enclosures 5 sizes up to 72" X 72" X 24". The only XXL enclosure in the world with ATEX approval! Gangable enclosures up to 48" x 96" x 12" Flush mount enclosures Eagle enclosures with a sloped, water-shedding design
Mounting Information
See Ordering Information for measurements
Width

Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D cULus to UL50 / C22.2 No. 94-M91, Types 3S, 4, 4X ATEX II 2 GD Ex e II T6 IP66 (PTB02ATEX1014) for Zone 1, 2 and 21 IECEx Ex e (IECEx BKI 08.0001U) GOST-R, GOST-K, and KOSHA Certified Ex e ia IIC, T6, T5
2E

Enclosure Options: 316L (1.4404 to EN 10088) Stainless Steel (standard) 304 (1.4301 to EN 10088) Stainless Steel (optional) RAL 7032 Painted Steel Enclosure Finish: Superior corrosion-resistant chromium enriched electro-polished surface** Gasket: High-integrity one piece foam-in place polyurethane gasket Keyed Lock Fastening Mechanism: Chromium-plated zinc metal die cast Door Hardware: Stainless steel hinges on door Enclosure Mounting: 4 x external 3mm stainless steel welded lugs, 11mm holes / slots Equipment Mounting: 4 x stand-off pillars 9mm , 25mm high, tapped M6 x 10, for rail / mounting plate Enclosure Earth: M10 external and internal brass earth stud assembly Mounting Plate: 2mm sheet steel with zintec finish (available in stainless steel)
Height
Door removed for clarity Hinged on left side
Fixing Center (Horizontal)
Vertical Mounting
Horizontal Mounting
Technical Specifications:
Operating Temperature: -20C to +60C (see Options section for optional silicone gasket with -55C to +55C operating temperature) Impact Resistance: 7 J (Nm)
When terminal blocks or approved Class I, Division 2 devices are installed within the enclosure in accordance with NEC/CEC requirements. These enclosures are NOT explosionproof and will NOT contain an explosion. Installation of arcing and sparking devices which are not Class I, Division 2 rated or higher is NOT PERMITTED. **Available on stainless steel enclosures only.
726
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Fixing Center (Vertical)
Depth

Features
2E
The enclosure is mounted using four heavy-duty, 3mm thick, surface welded stainless steel lugs. Bottom lugs are slotted for ease of mounting. These provide a secure, reliable means of mounting the enclosure.
Available with up to 4 gland plates (3mm thick) on each side. Five possible combinations of 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4 gland plates available. All sealed to IP66 rating by a high integrity Chloroprene gasket and secured by rapid xing Hytork xing bolts.
The high integrity one piece sealing gasket provides an IP66 rating and excellent recovery and re-sealing properties for continuous environmental protection.
2E
The standard cover features a 14 turn keyed lock fastening mechanism that provides a rapid means of achieving an IP66 rated seal for reliable environmental protection. Bolted cover and padlockable cover also available.
This external and internal brass earth/ground stud assembly enables rapid and reliable protective earth/ground connection. Mounted on the side of the enclosure for ease of access.
An integral drainage channel prevents liquids or other solid contaminants from running in or falling into the enclosure when the door is opened, and minimizes gasket path contamination.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
727
2E

Catalog numbers below are for stainless steel enclosures with 1 gland plate. Ex-CELL Enclosures are available in a variety of materials and configurations. To customize, utilize the following ordering boxes.
ORDERING EXAMPLE:
ENCLOSURE TYPE:
XLV
Enclosure Type
S1
Material
090605
Size
1
No. Gland Plates
Options
XLV XLH XXL XLE XLF
Standard Ex-CELL Enclosure; North American version with vertical lugs Standard Ex-CELL Enclosure; European version with horizontal lugs Large Ex-CELL Enclosure Ex-CELL Eagle Enclosure with sloping top Ex-CELL Flush Mount Enclosure
MATERIAL:
S1 316L Stainless Steel Grade 0 1 S2 304 Stainless Steel Grade* 2 3 PS
RAL 7032 Painted Steel*
NUMBER OF GLAND PLATES:

No gland plates Bottom gland plate only (STANDARD) Top and bottom gland plates Bottom and side gland plates Top, bottom, and side gland plates
Consult Factory
OPTIONS (add sufx after No. of Gland Plates):

XLNPAHASP B Padlockable hasp (eld-installable) Cover xed with hinges and bolts instead of 14 turn fasteners Rain / Deluge Canopy ID Tag - Label and Bracket Continuous Hinge Enclosure painted with RAL color chip specs Locking Cover Hardware Ground Stud Kits Stand-off Pillars Drawing Pockets Window Kit
See Accessories Page
XLV Enclosures with Vertical Mounting Feet

Enclosure Size (In.) (H x W x D) 9x6x5 10 x 8 x 4 10 x 8 x 6 10 x 10 x 6 12 x 10 x 5 12 x 8 x 6 12 x 10 x 6 12 x 12 x 6 12 x 12 x 8 12 x 12 x 10 16 x 12 x 6 16 x 12 x 8 16 x 12 x 10 16 x 14 x 8 16 x 16 x 6 16 x 16 x 8 16 x 16 x 10 16 x 16 x 12 16 x 20 x 6 16 x 20 x 8 16 x 20 x 10 16 x 20 x 12 20 x 16 x 6 20 x 16 x 8 20 x 16 x 10 20 x 16 x 12 20 x 20 x 6 20 x 20 x 8 20 x 20 x 10 20 x 20 x 12 20 x 24 x 8 20 x 24 x 10 20 x 24 x 12 24 x 16 x 6 24 x 16 x 8 24 x 16 x 10 24 x 16 x 12 24 x 20 x 6 24 x 20 x 8 24 x 20 x 10 24 x 20 x 12 Catalog Number XLVS10906051 XLVS11008041 XLVS11008061 XLVS11010061 XLVS11210051 XLVS11208061 XLVS11210061 XLVS11212061 XLVS11212081 XLVS11212101 XLVS11612061 XLVS11612081 XLVS11612101 XLVS11614081 XLVS11616061 XLVS11616081 XLVS11616101 XLVS11616121 XLVS11620061 XLVS11620081 XLVS11620101 XLVS11620121 XLVS12016061 XLVS12016081 XLVS12016101 XLVS12016121 XLVS12020061 XLVS12020081 XLVS12020101 XLVS12020121 XLVS12024081 XLVS12024101 XLVS12024121 XLVS12416061 XLVS12416081 XLVS12416101 XLVS12416121 XLVS12420061 XLVS12420081 XLVS12420101 XLVS12420121 Fixing Center Vertical (In.) 10.24 11.41 11.41 11.41 13.23 13.23 13.23 13.23 13.23 13.23 17.25 17.25 17.25 17.25 17.25 17.25 17.25 17.25 17.25 17.25 17.25 17.25 21.26 21.26 21.26 21.26 21.26 21.26 21.26 21.26 21.26 21.26 21.26 25.24 25.24 25.24 25.24 25.24 25.24 25.24 25.24 Fixing Center Horizontal (In.) 3.50 5.50 5.50 7.67 7.67 5.50 7.67 9.49 9.49 9.49 9.49 9.49 9.49 9.49 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 14.00 14.00 14.00 14.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 14.00 14.00 14.00 14.00 18.00 18.00 18.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 10.00 14.00 14.00 14.00 14.00 Zinc Coated Steel Mounting Plate Catalog Number XLHZTMP2315 XLHZTMP2620 XLHZTMP2620 XLHZTMP2626 XLHZTMP3026 XLHZTMP3020 XLHZTMP3026 XLHZTMP3030 XLHZTMP3030 XLHZTMP3030 XLHZTMP4030 XLHZTMP4030 XLHZTMP4030 XLHZTMP4035 XLHZTMP4040 XLHZTMP4040 XLHZTMP4040 XLHZTMP4040 XLHZTMP4050 XLHZTMP4050 XLHZTMP4050 XLHZTMP4050 XLHZTMP5040 XLHZTMP5040 XLHZTMP5040 XLHZTMP5040 XLHZTMP5050 XLHZTMP5050 XLHZTMP5050 XLHZTMP5050 XLHZTMP5060 XLHZTMP5060 XLHZTMP5060 XLHZTMP6040 XLHZTMP6040 XLHZTMP6040 XLHZTMP6040 XLHZTMP6050 XLHZTMP6050 XLHZTMP6050 XLHZTMP6050
2E
*For a 304 stainless steel enclosure, change S1 to S2 in catalog number (i.e. XLVS10906051 becomes XLVS20906051). For a RAL 7032 painted steel enclosure, change S1 to PS in catalog number (i.e. XLVS10906051 becomes XLVPS0906051). Consult factory for other RAL colors Enclosure sizes are H x W x D. 20 inch deep enclosures available - consult factory. See Options and Accessories pages for more information. Fits enclosures with both vertical or horizontal mounting feet. For stainless steel or painted steel mounting plates, consult factory.
728
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Enclosure Size (In.) (H x W x D) 24 x 24 x 6 24 x 24 x 8 24 x 24 x 10 24 x 24 x 12 24 x 24 x 16 24 x 30 x 8 24 x 30 x 10 24 x 30 x 12 24 x 30 x 16 30 x 20 x 8 30 x 20 x 10 30 x 20 x 12 30 x 24 x 8 30 x 24 x 10 30 x 24 x 12 30 x 24 x 16 30 x 30 x 8 30 x 30 x 10 30 x 30 x 12 30 x 30 x 16 32 x 24 x 8 32 x 24 x 10 32 x 24 x 12 32 x 24 x 16 32 x 32 x 8 32 x 32 x 10 32 x 32 x 12 32 x 32 x 16 36 x 24 x 8 36 x 24 x 10 36 x 24 x 12 36 x 24 x 16 36 x 30 x 8 36 x 30 x 10 36 x 30 x 12 36 x 30 x 16 36 x 36 x 8 36 x 36 x 10 36 x 36 x 12 36 x 36 x 16 40 x 24 x 8 40 x 24 x 10 40 x 24 x 12 40 x 24 x 16 40 x 32 x 8 40 x 32 x 10 40 x 32 x 12 40 x 32 x 16 40 x 40 x 8 40 x 40 x 10 40 x 40 x 12 40 x 40 x 16 48 x 24 x 10 48 x 24 x 12 48 x 24 x 16 48 x 32 x 10 48 x 32 x 12 48 x 32 x 16 48 x 36 x 10 48 x 36 x 12 48 x 36 x 16 48 x 40 x 12 48 x 40 x 16 48 x 48 x 12 48 x 48 x 16 60 x 36 x 12 60 x 36 x 16 63 x 48 x 16 Catalog Number XLVS12424061 XLVS12424081 XLVS12424101 XLVS12424121 XLVS12424161 XLVS12430081 XLVS12430101 XLVS12430121 XLVS12430161 XLVS13020081 XLVS13020101 XLVS13020121 XLVS13024081 XLVS13024101 XLVS13024121 XLVS13024161 XLVS13030081 XLVS13030101 XLVS13030121 XLVS13030161 XLVS13224081 XLVS13224101 XLVS13224121 XLVS13224161 XLVS13232081 XLVS13232101 XLVS13232121 XLVS13232161 XLVS13624081 XLVS13624101 XLVS13624121 XLVS13624161 XLVS13630081 XLVS13630101 XLVS13630121 XLVS13630161 XLVS13636081 XLVS13636101 XLVS13636121 XLVS13636161 XLVS14024081 XLVS14024101 XLVS14024121 XLVS14024161 XLVS14032081 XLVS14032101 XLVS14032121 XLVS14032161 XLVS14040081 XLVS14040101 XLVS14040121 XLVS14040161 XLVS14824101 XLVS14824121 XLVS14824161 XLVS14832101 XLVS14832121 XLVS14832161 XLVS14836101 XLVS14836121 XLVS14836161 XLVS14840121 XLVS14840161 XLVS14848121 XLVS14848161 XLVS16036121 XLVS16036161 XLVS16348161
Fixing Center Horizontal (In.) 18.00 18.00 18.00 18.00 18.00 24.00 24.00 24.00 24.00 14.00 14.00 14.00 18.00 18.00 18.00 18.00 24.00 24.00 24.00 24.00 18.00 18.00 18.00 18.00 27.56 27.56 27.55 27.56 18.00 18.00 18.00 18.00 24.00 24.00 24.00 24.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 30.00 18.00 18.00 18.00 18.00 27.56 27.56 27.56 27.56 35.43 35.43 35.43 35.43 18.00 18.00 18.00 27.55 27.55 27.56 30.00 30.00 30.00 35.43 35.43 43.30 43.30 30.00 30.00 43.30
2E
Fixing Center Vertical (In.) 25.24 25.24 25.24 25.24 25.24 25.24 25.24 25.24 25.24 31.26 31.26 31.26 31.26 31.26 31.26 31.26 31.26 31.26 31.26 31.26 33.11 33.11 33.11 33.11 33.11 33.11 33.11 33.11 37.25 37.25 37.25 37.25 37.25 37.25 37.25 37.25 37.25 37.25 37.25 37.25 40.95 40.95 40.95 40.95 40.95 40.95 40.95 40.95 40.95 40.95 40.95 40.95 48.81 48.81 48.81 48.81 48.81 48.81 48.81 48.81 48.81 48.81 48.81 48.81 48.81 61.57 61.57 63.82
Zinc Coated Steel Mounting Plate Catalog Number XLHZTMP6060 XLHZTMP6060 XLHZTMP6060 XLHZTMP6060 XLHZTMP6060 XLHZTMP6076 XLHZTMP6076 XLHZTMP6076 XLHZTMP6076 XLHZTMP7650 XLHZTMP7650 XLHZTMP7650 XLHZTMP7660 XLHZTMP7660 XLHZTMP7660 XLHZTMP7660 XLHZTMP7676 XLHZTMP7676 XLHZTMP7676 XLHZTMP7676 XLHZTMP8060 XLHZTMP8060 XLHZTMP8060 XLHZTMP8060 XLHZTMP8080 XLHZTMP8080 XLHZTMP8080 XLHZTMP8080 XLHZTMP9060 XLHZTMP9060 XLHZTMP9060 XLHZTMP9060 XLHZTMP9076 XLHZTMP9076 XLHZTMP9076 XLHZTMP9076 XLHZTMP9090 XLHZTMP9090 XLHZTMP9090 XLHZTMP9090 XLHZTMP10060 XLHZTMP10060 XLHZTMP10060 XLHZTMP10060 XLHZTMP10080 XLHZTMP10080 XLHZTMP10080 XLHZTMP10080 XLHZTMP100100 XLHZTMP100100 XLHZTMP100100 XLHZTMP100100 XLHZTMP12060 XLHZTMP12060 XLHZTMP12060 XLHZTMP12080 XLHZTMP12080 XLHZTMP12080 XLHZTMP12090 XLHZTMP12090 XLHZTMP12090 XLHZTMP120100 XLHZTMP120100 XLHZTMP120120 XLHZTMP120120 XLHZTMP15290 XLHZTMP15290 XLHZTMP160120
2E
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
729
2E

Type 3S, 4, 4X Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A,B,C,D IP66 cULus to UL50 / C22.2 No. 94-M91 ATEX and IECEx Certified GOST-R, GOST-K, and KOSHA Certified
XLH Enclosures with Horizontal Mounting Feet

Enclosure Size (mm) (H x W x D) 229 260 260 260 305 305 305 305 305 305 406 406 406 406 406 406 406 406 406 406 406 406 508 508 508 508 508 508 508 508 508 508 508 610 610 610 610 610 610 610 610 610 610 610 610 610 610 610 610 610 762 762 762 762 762 762 762 762 762 762 762 800 800 800 800 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 152 203 203 260 260 203 260 305 305 305 305 305 305 355 406 406 406 406 508 508 508 508 406 406 406 406 508 508 508 508 610 610 610 406 406 406 406 508 508 508 508 610 610 610 610 610 762 762 762 762 508 508 508 610 610 610 610 762 762 762 762 610 610 610 610 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 127 100 152 152 127 152 152 152 203 250 152 203 250 203 152 203 250 300 152 203 250 300 152 203 250 300 152 203 250 300 203 250 300 152 203 250 300 152 203 250 300 152 203 250 300 400 203 250 300 400 203 250 300 203 250 300 400 203 250 300 400 203 250 300 400 Catalog Number XLHS12315131 XLHS12620101 XLHS12620151 XLHS12626151 XLHS13026131 XLHS13020151 XLHS13026151 XLHS13030151 XLHS13030201 XLHS13030251 XLHS14030151 XLHS14030201 XLHS14030251 XLHS14035201 XLHS14040151 XLHS14040201 XLHS14040251 XLHS14040301 XLHS14050151 XLHS14050201 XLHS14050251 XLHS14050301 XLHS15040151 XLHS15040201 XLHS15040251 XLHS15040351 XLHS15050151 XLHS15050201 XLHS15050251 XLHS15050301 XLHS15060201 XLHS15060251 XLHS15060301 XLHS16040151 XLHS16040201 XLHS16040251 XLHS16040301 XLHS16050151 XLHS16050201 XLHS16050251 XLHS16050301 XLHS16060151 XLHS16060201 XLHS16060251 XLHS16060301 XLHS16060401 XLHS16076201 XLHS16076251 XLHS16076301 XLHS16176401 XLHS17650201 XLHS17650251 XLHS17650301 XLHS17660201 XLHS17660251 XLHS17660301 XLHS17660401 XLHS17676201 XLHS17676251 XLHS17676301 XLHS17676401 XLHS18060201 XLHS18060251 XLHS18060301 XLHS18060401 Fixing Center Vertical (mm) 152 170 170 170 203 203 203 203 203 203 267 267 267 267 267 267 267 267 267 267 267 267 354 354 354 354 354 354 354 354 354 354 354 445 445 445 445 445 445 445 445 445 445 445 445 445 456 456 456 456 608 608 608 608 608 608 608 608 608 608 608 500 500 500 500 Fixing Center Horizontal (mm) 208 259 259 316 316 259 316 361 361 361 361 361 361 386 462 462 462 462 564 564 564 564 462 462 462 462 564 564 564 564 666 666 666 462 462 462 462 564 564 564 564 666 666 666 666 666 818 818 818 818 563 563 563 665 665 665 665 818 818 818 818 655 655 655 665 Zinc Coated Steel Mounting Plate Catalog Number XLHZTMP2315 XLHZTMP2620 XLHZTMP2620 XLHZTMP2626 XLHZTMP3026 XLHZTMP3020 XLHZTMP3026 XLHZTMP3030 XLHZTMP3030 XLHZTMP3030 XLHZTMP4030 XLHZTMP4030 XLHZTMP4030 XLHZTMP4035 XLHZTMP4040 XLHZTMP4040 XLHZTMP4040 XLHZTMP4040 XLHZTMP4050 XLHZTMP4050 XLHZTMP4050 XLHZTMP4050 XLHZTMP5040 XLHZTMP5040 XLHZTMP5040 XLHZTMP5040 XLHZTMP5050 XLHZTMP5050 XLHZTMP5050 XLHZTMP5050 XLHZTMP5060 XLHZTMP5060 XLHZTMP5060 XLHZTMP6040 XLHZTMP6040 XLHZTMP6040 XLHZTMP6040 XLHZTMP6050 XLHZTMP6050 XLHZTMP6050 XLHZTMP6050 XLHZTMP6060 XLHZTMP6060 XLHZTMP6060 XLHZTMP6060 XLHZTMP6060 XLHZTMP6076 XLHZTMP6076 XLHZTMP6076 XLHZTMP6076 XLHZTMP7650 XLHZTMP7650 XLHZTMP7650 XLHZTMP7660 XLHZTMP7660 XLHZTMP7660 XLHZTMP7660 XLHZTMP7676 XLHZTMP7676 XLHZTMP7676 XLHZTMP7676 XLHZTMP8060 XLHZTMP8060 XLHZTMP8060 XLHZTMP8060
2E
730
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Enclosure Size (mm) (H x W x D) Catalog Number 800 x 800 x 203 XLHS18080201 800 x 800 x 250 XLHS18080251 800 x 800 x 300 XLHS18080301 800 x 800 x 400 XLHS18080401 914 x 610 x 203 XLHS19060201 914 x 610 x 250 XLHS19060251 914 x 610 x 300 XLHS19060301 914 x 610 x 400 XLHS19060401 914 x 762 x 203 XLHS19076201 914 x 762 x 250 XLHS19076251 914 x 762 x 300 XLHS19076301 914 x 762 x 400 XLHS19076301 914 x 914 x 203 XLHS19090201 914 x 914 x 250 XLHS19090251 914 x 914 x 300 XLHS19090301 914 x 914 x 400 XLHS19090401 1000 x 610 x 203 XLHS110060201 1000 x 610 x 250 XLHS110060251 1000 x 610 x 300 XLHS110060301 1000 x 610 x 400 XLHS110060401 1000 x 800 x 203 XLHS11008020 1000 x 800 x 250 XLHS110080251 1000 x 800 x 300 XLHS110080301 1000 x 800 x 400 XLHS110080401 1000 x 1000 x 203 XLHS110010020 1000 x 1000 x 250 XLHS1100100251 1000 x 1000 x 300 XLHS1100100301 1000 x 1000 x 400 XLHS1100100401 1200 x 610 x 250 XLHS112060251 1200 x 610 x 300 XLHS112060301 1200 x 610 x 400 XLHS112060401 1200 x 800 x 250 XLHS112080251 1200 x 800 x 300 XLHS112080301 1200 x 800 x 400 XLHS112080401 1200 x 914 x 250 XLHS112090251 1200 x 914 x 300 XLHS112090301 1200 x 914 x 400 XLHS112090401 1200 x 1000 x 300 XLHS1120100301 1200 x 1000 x 400 XLHS1120100401 1200 x 1200 x 300 XLHS1120120301 1200 x 1200 x 400 XLHS1120120401 1524 x 914 x 300 XLHS115290301 1524 x 914 x 400 XLHS115290401 1600 x 1200 x 400 XLHS1160120401
2E
Fixing Center Vertical (mm) 500 500 500 500 650 650 650 650 650 650 650 650 650 650 650 650 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 700 800 800 900 800 800 900 800 800 900 800 900 800 900 1100 1100 1100
Zinc Coated Steel Mounting Plate Catalog Fixing Center Horizontal (mm) Number 856 XLHZTMP8080 856 XLHZTMP8080 856 XLHZTMP8080 856 XLHZTMP8080 665 XLHZTMP9060 665 XLHZTMP9060 665 XLHZTMP9060 666 XLHZTMP9060 818 XLHZTMP9076 818 XLHZTMP9076 818 XLHZTMP9076 818 XLHZTMP9076 970 XLHZTMP9090 970 XLHZTMP9090 970 XLHZTMP9090 970 XLHZTMP9090 665 XLHZTMP10060 665 XLHZTMP10060 665 XLHZTMP10060 665 XLHZTMP10060 856 XLHZTMP10080 856 XLHZTMP10080 856 XLHZTMP10080 856 XLHZTMP10080 1056 XLHZTMP100100 1056 XLHZTMP100100 1056 XLHZTMP100100 1056 XLHZTMP100100 665 XLHZTMP12060 665 XLHZTMP12060 665 XLHZTMP12060 856 XLHZTMP12080 856 XLHZTMP12080 856 XLHZTMP12080 970 XLHZTMP12090 970 XLHZTMP12090 970 XLHZTMP12090 1056 XLHZTMP120100 1056 XLHZTMP120100 1256 XLHZTMP120120 1256 XLHZTMP120120 970 XLHZTMP15290 970 XLHZTMP15290 1256 XLHZTMP160120
2E
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
731
2E

Options for Ex-CELL Standard and Large

Padlockable Hasp (field-installable) Provides a secondary means of security and safety Manufactured from the same material grade as the enclosure Cat. # XLNPAHASP Drawing Pockets Holders for engineering CAD drawings can be installed at the factory Cat. # SHS953324 - A4 Document Holder - Orange Cat. # SHS953326 - Letter Document Holder - Transparent Customer stainless steel drawing pockets available - consult factory Silicone Gasket Provides an operating temperature of -55C to +55C To order, add suffix "SIL" to end of catalog number Rain / Deluge Canopy (consult factory) Can be retrofitted to the enclosure as required using existing fixing positions ID Tag - Label and Bracket (consult factory) Provides an effective solution for labeling enclosure assemblies with ID Tag Labels Continuous Hinge (consult factory) Maintains door alignment by distributing open and close force along the entire length of the door Provides greater strength and support for larger door, ensuring years of smooth opening and closing Removable pin allows cover to be easily removed from enclosure Swing Out Panels Panel swings clear from the front of the enclosure to provide access to electrical and electronic components that are mounted internally (non-hazardous only) Window Kits Available in multiple sizes (listed below) for PLCs/monitors/metering, as well as other applications Window kits maintain NEMA 4X/IP66 rating when installed by our factory or an approved Cooper Crouse-Hinds ATEX local assembler Mounting Plates (Sub Plates) Stainless steel or painted steel mounting plates are available (consult factory)
Accessories
Catalog Number ACCS1WK53 ACCS1WK95 ACCS1WK133 ACCS1WK175 ACCS1WK1212 ACCS1WK1711 ACCS1WK2315 ACCS1WK2919 ACCS1WK3523 Window Kit Sizes 5" x 3" (127 x 76mm) 9" x 5.5" (229 x 140mm) 13" x 3" (330 x 76mm) 17" x 5.5" (432 x 140mm) 12" x 12" (305 x 305mm) 17" x 11" (432 x 279mm) 23" x 15" (584 x 383mm) 29" x 19" (737 x 483mm) 35" x 23" (889 x 584mm)
Double Bit Shape
Square
Accessories
Locking Cover Hardware
Catalog Number QBXLKSLOT QBXLKEE QBXLKDBS QBXLKSQ8 QBXLKSQ7 QBXLKTR8 QBXLKTR7 QBXLKCWN QBXLKWKI QBXLKPAD Type Slot Shape Eastern European (D Shape) Double Bit Shape Square 8mm Square 7mm Triangular 8mm Triangular 7mm Crown Shape Wing Knob Insert with Standard Key L Padlockable Handle 10mm Triangular
Crown Shape
Wing Knob with Standard Key Slot Shape
2E
Eastern European (D Shape)
Ground Stud Kits

Catalog Number ACCBSESM10KIT ACCS1ESM10KIT ACCBSESM14KIT Type M10 Brass M10 Stainless Steel M14 Brass L Padlockable Handle 10mm
Stand-off Pillars
Catalog Number ACCSOP15 ACCSOP20 ACCSOP30 Type SP15 SP20 SP30 Inches 0.60 0.80 1.20
732
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Ex-CELL Sloped and Flush Mount Enclosures

Sloped Eagle Enclosures Applications:
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A,B,C,D IECEx, GOST-R, and GOST-K Type 3S, 4, 4X cULus to UL50 / C22.2 IP66 No. 94-M91 ATEX Certified
2E
Ideal for highway, DOT, transportation, pharmaceutical, and telecommunications applications
Features:
Water shedding design for vertical mounted applications protects critical electronics and instrumentation Electro-polished stainless steel offers higher corrosion resistance than brushed stainless steel Available with 0 or 1 gland plate

Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D ATEX II 2 GD Ex e II IP66 (PTB02ATEX 1021U) Types 3S, 4, 4X and IP66 GOST-R, GOST-K
Eagle
Imperial Sizing (inches) Catalog Number XLE**121208* XLE**161208* XLE**161608* XLE**201608* XLE**202008* XLE**242008* Height 12 16 16 20 20 24 Width 12 12 16 16 20 20 Depth 8 8 8 8 8 8 Metric (mm) Catalog Number XLE**303020* XLE**403020* XLE**404020* XLE**504020* XLE**505020* XLE**605020* Height 305 406 406 508 508 610 Width 305 305 406 406 508 508 Depth 203 203 203 203 203 203
Flush Mount Enclosures Applications:

Ideal for vertical mounting (wall) in a pharmaceutical or clean room application; or horizontal mounting (ceiling) in a plenum application
2E
Features:
Electro-polished stainless steel offers higher corrosion resistance than brushed stainless steel

Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D cULus to UL50 / C22.2 No. 94-M91 ATEX II 2 GD Ex e II IP66 (PTB02ATEX 1021U) IECEx Ex e (IECEx BKI 08.0001U) GOST-R, GOST-K Types 3S, 4, 4X and IP66
Flush Mount
Imperial Sizing (inches) Catalog Number XLF**0906050 XLF**1010060 XLF**1212060 XLF**1616060 Height 9 10 12 16 Width 6 10 12 16 Depth 5 6 6 6 Metric (mm) Catalog Number XLF**2215130 XLF**2626150 XLF**3030150 XLF**4040150 Height 229 260 305 406 Width 152 260 305 406 Depth 127 152 152 152
When terminal blocks or approved Class I, Division 2 devices are installed within the enclosure in accordance with NEC/CEC requirements. These enclosures are NOT explosionproof and will NOT contain an explosion. Installation of arcing and sparking devices which are not Class I, Division 2 rated or higher is NOT PERMITTED. **Designate material. S1 = 316L Stainless Steel; S2 = 304 Stainless Steel; PS = RAL 7032 Painted Steel *Designate 0 or 1 gland plate.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
733
2E
Ex-CELL Large Enclosures

Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A,B,C,D cULus to UL50 ATEX Certified IECEx Certified
GOST-K, GOST-R Certified (Gangable only) Type 3S, 4X IP66
XXL Double Door Enclosures Applications:

Ideal for food and dairy, wastewater treatment plants, and harsh environment wash down / hose down applications Protects extra large electronics and instrumentation such as PLCs, large displays and meters, air conditioners, fans, etc.
Features:
Maintains NEMA 4/4X and IP66 ratings, as well as the certifications and compliances of the standard Ex-CELL enclosure Electro-polished stainless steel offers higher corrosion resistance than brushed stainless steel Floor mounted enclosures available with a number of options, including a liftting eye kit (Cat. # XXLS1LB KIT); see page 732 for door locking options Available with 0 or 1 gland plate XXL

Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D cULus to UL50 Ex e II Gb (ITS09ATEX36875U) Ex tb IIIC Db IP66 IECEx Ex e (IECEX BKI 08.0001U) Types 3S, 4, 4X and IP66 GOST-R, GOST-K
Operating temperature: -20 to +60C
Imperial Sizing (inches) Catalog Number XXL**544208* XXL**604810* XXL**606012* XXL**726020* XXL**727224* Height 54 60 60 72 72 Width 42 48 60 60 72 Depth 8 10 12 20 24 Metric (mm) Catalog Number XXL**14010020* XXL**15012025* XXL**15015030* XXL**18015050* XXL**18018060* Height 1371 1524 1524 1830 1830 Width 1066 1219 1524 1524 1830 Depth 203 254 305 508 610 Mounting Plate Catalog Number XXLHZTMP140100 XXLHZTMP150120 XXLHZTMP150150 XXLHZTMP180150 XXLHZTMP180180
2E
Gangable Enclosures Applications:

Allows versatility for protecting larger electronics and instrumentation such as drives, custom control panels, extra large terminal blocks, etc.
Features:
Maintains NEMA 4/4X and IP66 ratings, as well as the certifications and compliances of the standard Ex-CELL enclosure Electro-polished stainless steel offers higher corrosion resistance than brushed stainless steel
Gangable

Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D cULus to UL50 / C22.2 No. 94-M91 ATEX II 2 GD Ex e II IP66 (PTB02ATEX 1021U) IECEx Ex e Certified (IECEX BKI 08.0001U) GOST-R, GOST-K Types 3S, 4, 4X and IP66
Available up to 48" x 96" x 12" - please consult factory for more information
When terminal blocks or approved Class I, Division 2 devices are installed within the enclosure in accordance with NEC/CEC requirements. These enclosures are NOT explosionproof and will NOT contain an explosion. Installation of arcing and sparking devices which are not Class I, Division 2 rated or higher is NOT PERMITTED. **Designate material. S1 = 316L Stainless Steel; S2 = 304 Stainless Steel; PS = RAL 7032 Painted Steel *Designate 0 or 1 gland plate.
734
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
NXT Series Enclosures

Sheet or Stainless Steel Hinged Cover
Features/Applications:
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D IECEx CEPEL GL Certified IP66 Ex e II
Ex ia IIC AEx Class I, Zone 1, AEx e IIC, T6 GOST-R GOST-K
2E
The NXT series of enclosures available in two types of material finish have been designed to accommodate rail mounted terminals or other electrical components. Stainless steel is recommended to give maximum protection for components in outdoor/aggressive environments. Features of this series include thirteen basic sizes in two standard depths to optimize the accomodation of rail-mountable terminals or components. Fully removable hinged cover, concealed hinges provide 180 opening Cover mounting, two or three stainless steel captive screws on one side Lip on upstand increases gasket contact area, ensuring high degree of ingress protection Internal/external ground stud 40mm wide mounting lugs for assembly on standard frames Option of 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4 gland plates One piece gasket on cover and gland plates Padlock hasp available optional
Specifications:
Description Material Finish Gasket Cover Mounting Grounding Box Mounting Equipment Mounting Ingress Protection Temperature Range Ambient Temperature Type Specification Stainless steel grades: standard is 316L (1.4401) & 304 on request (1.4301) or sheet steel RAL 7032 (Textured) Bright Chemical Dip (polished appearance) Chloroprene gasket (RA104) is standard; optional silicone gasket (HT800) is available Fully detachable hinged cover with 2 or 3 x M6 hexagon head captive stainless steel screws M10 internal/external ground stud 4 x external lugs, 0.394" clearance holes/slots 4 x stand off pillars 0.394" OD, tapped M6 x 0.394" IP66 to IEC529 Chloroprene gasket: 49F (45C) to 176F (80C) Optional silicone gasket: 85F (65C) to 275F (135C) Chloroprene gasket: 49F (45C) to 104F (40C) for T6; 49F (45C) to 131F (55C) for T5 Optional silicone gasket: 85F (65C) to 104F (40C) for T6; 85F (65C) to 131F (55C) for T5 7 J (Nm) to EN 50014 Spec. No. DTS 01
Painted 316L Stainless steel All types All types All types All types All types All types RA104 HT800
2E
Impact Resistance Deluge Test
All types All types
Factory Options (Consult Factory):

Description Material Finish Sizes Equipment Gland plates Ground Studs EMC Cover Attachments Specification Special materials or thickness according to customer specification Special colors according to customer specification Special sizes available (and certified) for customer applications - up to 41.33" x 24.02" x 8.07" (1050mm x 610mm x 200mm) largest Terminals, glands, and Myers Hubs assembled according to customer specification Drilled cable glands fitted to customer specification Also available fitted to gland plates and cover Versions for maximum shielding from EMI/RFI, 0 gland plate only e.g. Handles GOST-R GOST-K ATEX 2. Certificate of Conformity KEMA99ATEX3172X Codes II 2 G Ex e II T6 or T5 II 2 D T100C IP64 II 1 G Ex ia IIC T6 or T5 II 2 D T100C IP64 II 2 (1) G Ex e ia IIC T6 or T5 II 2 D T100C IP64

UL50/C22.2 N094-M91 mild steel: Types 3S, 4; stainless steel: Type 4X. ATEX Codes 1. Component Certificate KEMA99ATEX3174 U II 2 G Ex e II II 2 D IP64 CEPEL-EX-1199/06X GL Certification
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
735
2E

NXT 221513
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D IECEx CEPEL GL Certified IP66

NXT 262616 Height 10.23" Width 10.23" Depth 6.30" Weight 12.13 lb Gland Plate A/B 4.72/10" Gland Plate C/D 4.72/6.06"
Ex e II Ex ia IIC AEx Class I, Zone 1, AEx e IIC, T6 GOST-R GOST-K

NXT 303016 Height 12.05" Width 12.05" Depth 6.30" Weight 15.43 lb Gland Plate A/B 4.33/11.42" Gland Plate C/D 4.33/7.48"
NXT 262620 Height 10.23" Width 10.23" Depth 8.07" Weight 12.13 lb Gland Plate A/B 6.46/10" Gland Plate C/D 6.46/6.06"
Top Bottom Left hand side Right hand side
A B C D
Ordering Data:
Type 0 Gland Plates 1 Gland Plate Side B (Bottom) Description Paint Finish Stainless Steel Finish Paint Finish Stainless Steel Finish
Height 9.02" Width 5.98" Depth 5.31" Weight 7.17 lb Gland Plate A/B 3.54/5.51" Gland Plate C/D 3.54/5.51"
Cat. # NXTPS2215130 NXTS12215130 NXTPS2215131 NXTS12215131 NXTPS2215132 NXTS12215132 NXTPS2215133 NXTS12215133 NXTPS2215134 NXTS12215134
Paint Finish 2 Gland Plates Stainless Steel Finish Sides A + B (Top and Bottom) 3 Gland Plates Paint Finish Sides B, C + D Stainless Steel Finish (Bottom and Sides) 4 Gland Plates Paint Finish Sides A, B, C + D Stainless Steel Finish (All Sides)
Gland Sizes (mm) per Plate (Reference Only):

Brass Glands M16 M20 M25 M32 M40 M50 Top Bottom Left hand side Right hand side A B C D Top/ Bottom 6 3 2 1 1 1 Left/ Right 6 3 2 1 1 1
NXT 303020 Height Width Depth Weight Gland Plate A/B Gland Plate C/D 12.05" 12.05" 8.07" 15.43 lb 4.33/11.42" 4.33/7.48"
Top/ Bottom 20 10 6 3 3 2
NXT 382616 Height Width Depth Weight Gland Plate A/B Gland Plate C/D
Left/ Right 9 6 3 2 1 1
Top/ Bottom 33 15 12 6 5 3
Left/ Right 18 9 5 4 2 1
Top/ Bottom Left Right 26 14 8 4 3 3 20 10 8 3 3 2

NXT 453820 Height Width 18.031" 15.039" 8.071" 21.45 lb
26 14 8 4 3 3
2E
NXT 382620 Height Width Depth Weight Gland Plate A/B Gland Plate C/D 14.96" 10.24" 8.07" 15.43 lb 6.46/10" 6.46/10"
14.96" 10.24" 6.29" 15.43 lb 4.72/10" 4.72/10"
18.031" 15.039" 6.29" 21.45 lb
Depth Weight
Ordering Data:
Type 0 Gland Plates 1 Gland Plate Side B (Bottom) 2 Gland Plates Sides A + B (Top and Bottom) 3 Gland Plates Sides B, C + D (Bottom and Sides) 4 Gland Plates Sides A, B, C + D (All Sides) Description
Gland 3.15/13.27" Plate A/B 4.33/14.57" Gland 3.15/13.27" Plate C/D 4.33/14.57"
Cat. #
Cat. #
Cat. #
Cat. #
NXTPS3030200 Paint Finish Stainless Steel Finish NXTS13030200 NXTPS3030201 Paint Finish Stainless Steel Finish NXTS13030201 NXTPS3030202 Paint Finish Stainless Steel Finish NXTS13030202 NXTPS3030203 Paint Finish Stainless Steel Finish NXTS13030203 NXTPS3030204 Paint Finish Stainless Steel Finish NXTS13030204
NXTPS3826160 NXTPS3826200 NXTPS4538160 NXTS13826160 NXTS13826200 NXTS14538160 NXTPS3826161 NXTPS3826201 NXTPS4538161 NXTS13826161 NXTS13826201 NXTS14538161 NXTPS3826162 NXTPS3826202 NXTPS4538162 NXTS13826162 NXTS13826202 NXTS14538162 NXTPS3826163 NXTPS3826203 NXTPS4538163 NXTS13826163 NXTS13826203 NXTS14538163 NXTPS3826164 NXTPS3826204 NXTPS4538164 NXTS13826164 NXTS13826204 NXTS14538164

Brass Glands M16 M20 M25 M32 M40 M50 736
Top/ Top/ Bottom Left Right Bottom 32 18 15 8 6 3

US: 1-866-764-5454
Left/ Right 20 10 6 3 3 2
Top/ Left/ Bottom Right 33 15 12 6 5 3 33 15 12 6 5 3
Top/ Bottom 29 18 10 6 5 4
Left/ Right 29 18 10 6 5 4
Top/ Left/ Bottom Right 44 24 20 10 8 4 44 24 20 10 8 4
38 15 12 6 5 3
32 18 15 8 6 3
20 10 6 3 3 2
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D IECEx CEPEL GL Certified IP66

NXT 484820 NXT 503520 18.898" 18.898" 8.071" 22.88 lb 4.33/14.57" 4.33/14.57" Height Width Depth Weight Gland Plate A/B Gland Plate C/D
Ex e II Ex ia IIC AEx Class I, Zone 1, AEx e IIC, T6 GOST-R GOST-K

NXT 624520 Height Width Depth Weight Gland Plate A/B Gland Plate C/D 24.41" 17.72" 8.07" 37.48 lb 6.46/17.48" 6.46/17.48" NXT 745520 Height Width Depth Weight Gland Plate A/B Gland Plate C/D
2E
Top Bottom Left hand side Right hand side
A B C D
Ordering Data:
Type 0 Gland Plates 1 Gland Plate Side B (Bottom) 2 Gland Plates Sides A + B (Top and Bottom) 3 Gland Plates Sides B, C + D (Bottom and Sides) 4 Gland Plates Sides A, B, C + D (All Sides) Description Paint Finish Stainless Steel Finish Paint Finish Stainless Steel Finish Paint Finish Stainless Steel Finish Paint Finish Stainless Steel Finish Paint Finish Stainless Steel Finish
Height Width Depth Weight Gland Plate A/B Gland Plate C/D
19.685" 13.78" 8.071" 23.1 lb 6.46/13.54" 6.46/13.54"
29.13" 17.72" 8.07" 37.48 lb 6.46/17.48" 6.46/17.48"

Brass Glands M16 M20 M25 M32 M40 M50 Top Bottom Left hand side Right hand side A B C D Top/ Bottom 53 30 24 14 11 5 Left 44 24 20 10 8 4 Top/ Right Bottom 53 30 24 14 11 5 40 24 18 10 7 4
NXT 866420 30" 20" 8.07" 51.81 lb 4.33/19.69" 4.33/19.69" Height Width Depth Weight Gland Plate A/B Gland Plate C/D 33.86" 25.20" 8.07" 63.93 lb 6.46/24.96" 6.46/24.96"
Left/ Right 40 24 18 10 7 4
Top/ Bottom 53 30 24 14 11 5
Left/ Right 53 30 24 14 11 5
35.99" 24.02" 8.07" 68.34 lb 5.512/23.62" 5.512/23.62"
Top/ Bottom 60 39 30 18 13 6
Left/ Right 60 39 30 18 13 6
38.58" 29.13" 8.07" 83.76 lb 6.46/13.54" 2x6.46/17.48"
2E
Ordering Data:
Type 0 Gland Plates 1 Gland Plate Side B (Bottom) 2 Gland Plates Sides A + B (Top and Bottom) 3 Gland Plates Sides B, C + D (Bottom and Sides) 4 Gland Plates Sides A, B, C + D (All Sides) Description Paint Finish Stainless Steel Finish Paint Finish Stainless Steel Finish Paint Finish Stainless Steel Finish Paint Finish Stainless Steel Finish Paint Finish Stainless Steel Finish

Brass Glands M16 M20 M25 M32 M40 M50 Top/ Bottom 53 30 24 14 11 5
Left/ Right 72 45 35 20 13 7
Top/ Bottom 72 45 35 20 13 7
Left/ Right 40 24 18 10 7 4
Top/ Bottom 72 42 24 18 8 7
Left/ Right 72 42 24 18 8 7
Top/ Bottom 40 24 18 10 7 4
Left/ Right 53 30 24 14 11 5 737
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
2E

Sheet or Stainless Steel Hinged Cover Accessories
Accessories:
Mounting Plates:
Material: Tufnol, zinc coated or stainless steel
Enclosure Size NXT2215 NXT2626 NXT3030 NXT3826 NXT4538 NXT4848 NXT5035 NXT6245 NXT7455 NXT7650 NXT8664 NXT9161 NXT9874 Tufnol Cat. # NXTTLMP2215 NXTTLMP2626 NXTTLMP3030 NXTTLMP3826 NXTTLMP4538 NXTTLMP4848 NXTTLMP5035 NXTTLMP6245 NXTTLMP7455 NXTTLMP7650 NXTTLMP8664 NXTTLMP9161 NXTTLMP9874 Zinc Coated Steel Cat. # NXTZTMP2215 NXTZTMP2626 NXTZTMP3030 NXTZTMP3826 NXTZTMP4538 NXTZTMP4848 NXTZTMP5035 NXTZTMP6245 NXTZTMP7455 NXTZTMP7650 NXTZTMP8664 NXTZTMP9161 NXTZTMP9874 Stainless Steel Cat.# NXTS1MP2215 NXTS1MP2626 NXTS1MP3030 NXTS1MP3826 NXTS1MP4538 NXTS1MP4848 NXTS1MP5035 NXTS1MP6245 NXTS1MP7455 NXTS1MP7650 NXTS1MP8664 NXTS1MP9161 NXTS1MP9874
Stand-off Pillars:
Type SP15 SP20 SP30 Inches 0.60 0.80 1.20 Cat.#. ACCSOP15 ACCSOP20 ACCSOP30
2E
Lock:
Type NP6 Brass Lock and 2 Keys Cat. # NXTNP6BL2K
Hasp:
Type NPA6 Stainless Steel, for Type NP6 Padlocks Mount on Enclosure by Removing Cover Screw and Fitting Hasp Between Cover and Screw. Cat. # NXTNPAHASP
Assembly Rail:
Type TS35 TAS20 Length 78.74" 78.74" Cat. # ACCTS352M ACCTAS202M
Ground Stud Kits:

Type M10 Brass M10 Stainless Steel M14 Brass Cat. # ACCBSES M10 KIT ACCS1ESM10KIT ACCBSESM14KIT
Metric Screws for Mounting Plate:

Description 4/set Cat. # CCH4142
738
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Sheet or Stainless Steel Hinged Cover Accessories
Dimensions
In Inches:
2E
NXT Enclosure Series

Code NXT* Type A B 5.98 10.24 C 5.12 6.30 (8.08) 6.30 (8.08) 6.30 (8.08) 8.08 8.08 8.08 8.08 8.08 8.08 8.08 8.08 8.08 D 3.50 7.76 E 7.48 8.70 F 2.05 6.30 G 5 6.30 H 5.98 6.69 I 8.19 12.44 J 0.98 0.98 K 4.01 4.96 (6.77) 4.96 (6.77) 4.96 (6.77) 6.77 6.77 6.77 6.77 6.77 6.77 6.77 6.77 6.77 L 4.25 4.49 M 2.28 3.15 (4.88) N 4.25 8.43 221513 9.02 262616 10.24 (262620) 303016 12.04 (303020) 382616 14.97 (382620) 453820 484820 503520 624520 745520 765020 866420 916120 987420 18.01 18.90 19.69 24.41 29.13 30.00 33.86 35.98 38.58
2E
NXT
NXT*
12.05
9.57
10.51
8.11
8.11
7.99
14.21
0.98
Left 8.43 3.15 Right (4.88) 10.28 8.43 13.27 3.15 (4.88) 4.88
10.28
NXT NXT* NXT* NXT NXT NXT NXT* NXT NXT* NXT
10.24 15.04 18.90 13.79 17.72 21.66 20.00 25.20 24.02 29.13
7.76 12.56 16.42 11.30 15.24 19.18 17.52 22.72 21.54 26.65
13.43 16.50 17.36 18.15 22.87 27.60 28.47 32.32 34.45 37.05
6.30 11.10 14.96 9.84 13.78 17.72 16.06 21.26 20.08 25.20
11.02 14.09 14.96 15.75 20.47 25.18 26.06 29.92 32.05 34.65
9.84 12.00 12.87 13.78 17.72 21.26 20.00 22.44 22.00 27.56
12.44 17.21 21.06 15.98 19.92 23.86 22.21 27.40 26.22 31.34
0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98 0.98
8.43 13.27 15.91 11.97 15.91 19.84 18.27 23.39 22.28 2 x 11.97
Left 13.27 Right 4.88 15.91 11.97 15.91 19.84 23.39 4.88 4.88 4.88 4.25
2 x 11.97 4.88 22.32 4.25
2 x 15.91 4.88
* Subtract 1.18" from dimension 'I' for mounting center when side gland plates are not used. NXT 221513 has two stand off pillars only, mounted on the center line.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
739
2E
STB Series Enclosures

Sheet or Stainless Steel
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL/cUL NEMA 3S, 4 (Painted Steel), NEMA 4X (Stainless Steel), NEMA 6, IP66 Ex e II Ex ia IIC
GOST-R, GOST-K IECEx GL Certified Zone 1, 2, 21, 22
The STB series of sheet steel enclosures are designed to meet the requirement for distribution and lighting junction boxes. Available in 14 sizes with standard finishes of painted or 316L stainless steel, together with the high IP rating make these enclosures suitable for all environmental conditions. The stainless steel versions are particularly recommended for use in marine or other corrosive environments. Painting of these enclosure uses a two stage elecrophoretic dip coat system. Treatment includes iron phosphate and paint application followed by electrostatic polyester powder coating. When applied to a mild steel substrate gives a minimum of 500 hours salt spray resistance.

Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL/cUL Listed NEMA 3S, 4 (Painted Steel), NEMA 4X (Stainless Steel), NEMA 6, IP66 Ex e II Ex ia IIC GOST-R, GOST-K IECEx GL certified Zone 1, 2, 21, 22
ATEX 1. Component Certificate KEMA99ATEX7895 U

Codes II 2 G Ex e II II 2 D IP64 GOST-R/GOST-K NEMA 6 per CSA Certification GL Certification
ATEX 2. Certificate of Conformity KEMA99ATEX7894 X

Codes II 2 G II 2 D II II II II 1 2 2 2 Ex e II T6 or T5 T100C IP64 G Ex ia IIC T6 or T5 D T100C IP64 (1) G Ex e ia IIC T6 or T5 D T100C IP64
2E
UL50/C22.2 No. 94-M91 mild steel: Types 3S, 4; stainless steel: Type 4X. Germanischer Lloyd (GL) (Excluding STB151208 & STB 191509)
Specifications:
Description Material Finish Gasket Cover Mounting Grounding Box Mounting Equipment Mounting Ingress Protection Temperature Range Ambient Temperature Impact Resistance Gland Plates STB 121208-252512 STB 163812-254013 Specification 1.5mm thick stainless steel grades 316L (1.4401) & 304 (1.4301) or sheet steel Painted RAL 7032, Grey Stainless Steel Bright Chemical Dip Chloroprene gasket (standard); HT800 silicone gasket (optional) 4 x M6 Slotted, Hexagon Head, Captive Screws M6 Internal/External Ground Stud 2 x External Lugs with 0.315" Clearance Holes 4 x External Lugs with 0.315" Clearance Holes TAS 20 Rail Welded to Base of Enclosure, to Which Equipment is Mounted by Means of Sliding Mounting Nut and Screw (1 Rail STB 121208-191910, Rails STB 252512-254030) IP66 BSEN 60529 Chloroprene gasket: 49F (45C) to +185F (85C) Silicone HT800 gasket: 85F (65C) to +275F (135C) Chloroprene gasket: 49F (45C) to +104F (40C) T6; 49F (45C) to +131F (55C) T5 Silicone HT800 gasket: 85F (65C) to +104F (40C) T6; 85F (65C) to +131F (55C) T5 7 J(Nm) to EN 50014 STB 383822- STB 604022 Optional 3mm thick gland plates available in bottom, left, top, and right configurations

Description Finishes Assembly Ambient Temperature Suitability Fireproof STB Enclosure 740
Specification Alternative paint colours Supplied with terminals, glands, drilled or drilled and tapped entries, breather/drains, and Myers Hubs -65 to +135C ambient temperature suitability with optional silicone gasket Fireproof STB enclosure available for 10,000C to 1/2 hour operation with special coating
STB Series Junction Boxes

Sheet or Stainless Steel Ordering Information
2E
A = Top B = Bottom C = Left Hand Side D = Right Hand Side
STB 121208 Height Width Depth Weight
4.73" 4.72" 3.15" 3.09 lb.
STB 151208 Height Width Depth Weight STBPS151208 STBS1151208
5.91" 4.72" 3.15" 3.50 lb.
Ordering Data:
Standard Paint Finish Stainless Steel Finish STBPS121208 STBS1121208
Guide to Gland Entries:

Max. Gland Area Dimensions Sides A, B, C D Size 4.49" x 2.48" 2.76" x 2.48" Sides A, B C D Side D 4 2 1 1 Side A 6 3 2 1 Size 4.49" x 2.48" 5.67" x 2.48" 3.94" x 2.48" Side B 5 2 2 1 Side C 7 4 3 2 Side D 5 3 2 1
Gland Sizes (mm) per Side (Reference Only):

Brass Glands with Locknuts 16 20 25 32 40 50 Side A 5 3 2 1 Side B 5 2 2 1 Side C 6 3 2 2
2E
STB 151509 Height 5.91" Width 5.91" Depth 3.54" Weight 4.19 lb. STBPS151509 STBS1151509
Ordering Data:
Standard Paint Finish Stainless Steel Finish

Max. Gland Area Dimensions Sides A, B, C D Size 5.67" x 2.87" 3.94" x 2.87" Sides A, B C D Side D 6 3 2 1 1 Side A 9 5 3 2 2 Size 5.67" x 2.87" 7.24" x 2.87" 5.12" x 2.87" Side B 8 4 3 2 1 Side C 12 7 4 3 2 Side D 8 5 3 2 2

Brass Glands with Locknuts 16 20 25 32 40 50 Side A 8 5 3 2 1 Side B 8 4 3 2 1 Side C 8 5 3 2 2
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
741
2E

Ordering Data:

Max. Gland Area Dimensions Sides A, B, C D Size 7.24" x 3.27" 5.51" x 3.27" Sides A, B, C D Size 9.61" x 4.05" 7.87" x 4.05"

Brass Glands with Locknuts 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 Side A 13 8 5 3 2 2 Side B 12 7 4 3 2 1 Side C 14 8 5 3 2 2 Side D 9 6 4 2 2 1 Side A 24 13 10 5 3 3 2 Side B 23 12 9 5 3 2 2 Side C 24 13 10 5 3 3 2 Side D 18 10 8 4 3 2 2
2E
Ordering Data:

Max. Gland Area Dimensions Sides A, B, C D Size 14.64" x 4.05" 12.99" x 4.05" Side B 35 21 15 9 5 4 3 Side C 15 7 6 3 2 1 1 Side D 9 5 4 2 1 1 1 Sides A, B, C D Side A 48 27 16 11 7 5 4 Size 15.51" x 4.45" 13.78" x 4.45" Side B 47 27 16 11 6 5 3 Side C 30 17 10 7 4 3 2 Side D 24 14 8 6 3 2 2

Brass Glands with Locknuts 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 Side A 36 21 16 9 6 4 3
742
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

2E
14.96" 14.96" 8.66" 18.70 lb.
14.96" 14.96" 8.66" 25.96 lb.
Ordering Data:
Guide to Gland Entries

Max. Gland Area Dimensions Sides A, B C D Size 14.72" x 7.99" 14.72" x 7.99" 12.76" x 7.99" Sides A, B C D Size 13.27" x 4.88" 13.27" x 4.88" 10.28" x 4.88"

Brass Glands with Locknuts 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 Side A 100 57 40 24 15 8 6 Side B 100 57 40 24 15 8 6 Side C 100 57 40 24 15 8 6 Side D 88 48 33 20 12 7 5 Side A 46 26 21 11 9 4 3 Side B 46 26 21 11 9 4 3 Side C 46 26 21 11 9 4 3 Side D 34 20 15 8 6 3 2
2E
Ordering Data:

Max. Gland Area Dimensions Sides A, B C D Size 23.39" x 7.99" 15.51" x 7.99" 13.54" x 7.99" Sides A, B C D Size 19.84" x 4.88" 11.97" x 4.88" 13.27" x 4.88"

Brass Glands with Locknuts 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 Side A 164 93 65 40 26 14 11 Side B 164 93 65 40 26 14 11 Side C 108 60 40 26 17 9 7 Side D 92 51 35 22 14 7 6
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Side A 70 39 32 17 14 6 5
Side B 70 39 32 17 14 6 5
Side C 46 26 21 11 9 4 3
Side D 40 23 18 10 8 3 3 743
US: 1-866-764-5454
2E

Ordering Data:

Max. Gland Area Dimensions Sides A, B C D Brass Glands with Locknuts 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 Size 15.51" x 7.99" 23.39" x 7.99" 21.42" x 7.99" Sides A, B C D Size 13.27" x 4.88" 13.27" x 4.88" 13.27" x 4.88"

Side A 108 60 40 26 17 9 7 Side B 108 60 40 26 17 9 7 Side C 164 93 65 40 26 14 11 Side D 152 84 60 38 23 13 10 Side A 46 26 21 11 9 4 3 Side B 46 26 21 11 9 4 3 Side C 46 26 21 11 9 4 3 Side D 46 26 21 11 9 4 3
2E
744
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
STB Series Enclosures

Sheet or Stainless Steel Accessories and Dimensions
Accessories:
Mounting Hardware
Sliding mounting nuts and screws for mounting assemblies or components to the support rail type TAS 20
2E
Description M5 screw for TS 32/TS 35 M4 screw for TS15 M3 screw for terminal strips Ground Stud Kits
Type SFNS 5 SFNS 4 SFNS 3 M6 Brass
Cat. # ACCSFNM5 ACCSFNM4 ACCSFNM3 ACCBSES M6 KIT
Dimensions
In Inches:
2E
Cat. # STB STB STB STB STB STB STB STB 121208 151208 151509 191509 191910 252512 163812 254030
A 4.72 5.90 5.90 7.48 7.48 9.84 6.30 9.84
B 4.72 4.72 5.90 5.90 7.48 9.84 14.96 15.75
C 3.15 3.15 3.54 3.54 3.94 4.72 4.72 5.12
D 2.99 2.99 3.39 3.39 3.78 4.57 4.57 4.96
E 5.71 5.71 6.89 6.89 8.46 10.83 15.94 16.73
F N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 3.15 5.90
G 3.94 5.12 3.94 6.69 6.69 9.05 14.17 14.96
H 3.15 3.15 5.12 4.33 5.90 8.27 4.72 8.27
J 2.76 3.94 3.94 5.12 5.51 9.05 12.99 13.78
K 3.94 3.94 5.12 5.51 6.69 9.05 5.51 9.05
L N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A 7.09 11.81 7.09
M 6.26 6.26 7.44 7.44 9.02 11.38 16.50 17.28
N 4.96 6.14 6.14 7.72 7.72 16.08 15.20 15.98
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
745
2E
HVB Series Enclosures

Sheet or Stainless Steel High Voltage Junction Box
IP66 & IP67 Zone 1, 2, 21, 22
The high voltage enclosures have been designed for the termination of high voltage pumps ("down hole" pumps) The HVBs are available in both stainless steel, fully polished or sheet steel with paint finish Gland plates are provided top and bottom for cable entry The units are complete with 3 or 4 pole assemblies to accept standard cable lugs up to 1.18" wide and an M12 hole Live parts are protected by a clear cover, giving protection to IP 2X High voltage warning labels are fitted to the cover and enclosure cover When using the enclosures at their full potential (i.e. 6.6 kV), high voltage cable termination kits have to be used to avoid breakdown of the cable long term

II 2 G Ex e II T6, T5, or T4 ATEX (Baseefa03ATEX0052X) Ex'e' II T4 200A, T5 180A, T6160A UL50/C22.2 No. 94-M91 mild steel: Types 3S, 4; stainless steel: Type 4X
Specifications:
Description Material Type HVB 463820 HVB 765120, 916120 Gland Plates Specification Stainless steel grades: standard is 316L (1.4401) & 304 on request (1.4301) or sheet steel
Finish Gasket Cover Mounting
Painted RAL 7032 Stainless Bright Chemical Dip (polished appearance) Neoprene (cover & gland plates) Fully detachable hinged cover with 4 or 6 x M6 hexagon head captive screws M10 internal/external stud M14 internal/external stud for 5.91in2 phase conductor only 4 x external lugs with 0.39" clearance holes/slots IP66 & IP67 to IEC 529 4F to 104F (ambient) 7 J (Nm) Top & Bottom Voltage 6.6 kV 50Hz* ac 3 phase (grounded or ungrounded supply systems)
2E
Grounding Box Mounting Ingress Protection Temperature Range Impact Resistance Gland Plates Ratings
*At frequencies above 50 Hz, current carrying capacities may require derating (e.g. motor variable speed controllers).
Maximium Current Rating (amps):

To allow American Wire Gauge (AWG) cables and current ratings for T6 to T4 temperature classes. Conductor Size Current A AWG (max. 5.91in2) T6 (185F) T5 (212F) T4 (275F) 6 42 59 65 4 55 80 88 3 64 92 102 2 73 107 118 1 81 121 134 1/0 101 141 156 2/0 150 173 192 3/0 160 180 200
Maximum Wiring Space for HV Cable Termination Kits:

Enclosure Type HVB 463820 HVB 765120 HVB 916126 Distance Between Bolt & Gland Plate 7.09" 13.19" 16.14"
Connections:
3 or 4 pole, consists of 6 or 8 post insulators with 0.24" brass busbars, tin lead plated. Cable alignment restrictors prevent misalignment of the conductors. Accepts standard cable lugs up to 1.18" wide and an M12 hole.
746
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Sheet or Stainless Steel High Voltage Enclosures Ordering Information
Dimensions
In Inches:
IP66 & IP67 Zone 1, 2, 21, 22
2E
HVB463820 (3 pole) A = Top B = Bottom For dimensions marked with a * subtract 1.18" for 2 gland plate versions. HVB463820 (3 pole) Height Width Depth Weight 18.03" 15.04" 7.87" 52.36 Ib
HVB765120 (3 pole)
2E
HVB765120 (3 pole) Height Width Depth Weight 30" 20" 7.87" 81.57 Ib
Ordering Data:
Type M10 Ground Stud Phase Conductor 4.72in2 Max. M14 Ground Stud Phase Conductor 5.91in2 Only Description Standard Paint Finish Stainless Steel Finish Standard Paint Finish Stainless Steel Finish Cat. # HVBPS463820M10 HVBS1463820M10 HVBPS463820M14 HVBS1463820M14 Cat. # HVBPS765120M10 HVBS1765120M10 HVBPS765120M14 HVBS1765120M14

Description Max. Gland Area Dimensions HVB463820 Side Size A+B 13.27" x 4.25" HVB765120 Side Size A+B 18.27" x 4.25"
Gland Sizes (mm) Brass (Per Plate):

Size 40 50 63 75 HVB463820 6 4 3 3 HVB765120 8 6 4 4
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
747
2E

Sheet or Stainless Steel High Voltage Enclosures Ordering Information
IP66 & IP67 Zone 1, 2, 21, 22
Dimensions
In Inches:
HVB916120 (3 pole) A = Top B = Bottom For dimensions marked with a * subtract 1.18" for 2 gland plate versions. HVB916120 (3 pole) Height Width Depth Weight 35.98" 24.20" 7.87" 99.21 Ib
HVB916120 (4 pole)
HVB916120 (4 pole) Height Width Depth Weight 35.98" 24.02" 7.87" 103.62 Ib
2E
Ordering Data:
Type M10 Ground Stud Phase Conductor 4.72in2 Max. M14 Ground Stud Phase Conductor 5.91in2 Only Description Standard Paint Finish Stainless Steel Finish Standard Paint Finish Stainless Steel Finish Cat. # HVBPS916120M10 HVBS1916120M10 HVBPS916120M14 HVBS1916120M14 Cat. # HVBPS916120M104P HVBS1916120M104P HVBPS916120M144P HVBS1916120M144P

Description Max. Gland Area Dimensions HVB916120 (3 pole) Side Size A+B 22.28" x 4.25" HVB916120 (4 pole) Side Size A+B 22.28" x 4.25"
Gland Sizes (mm) Brass (Per Plate):

Size 40 50 63 75 HVB916120 (3 pole) 8 7 5 4 HVB916120 (4 pole) 8 7 5 4
748
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
KBX Die Cast Aluminum Enclosures
ATEX: II 2 G Ex e II UL Listed NEMA 4 IP66 T6
2E
Applications:
The KBX range of Ex e enclosures offers good resistance to industrial, marine, and other arduous environments Suitable for a wide range of applications including terminal junction boxes, housings for switches, pushbuttons, indicator lights, etc.
Features:
Enclosure mounting holes located outside sealing area, thus not impacting IP integrity Equipment mounting via threaded holes suitable for mounting plate or DIN rail

ATEX: II 2 G Ex e II UL50, UL508 NEMA 4 IP66 minimum Temperature range: -50C to +80C
Standard Finish:
Natural or powder coated
Cat. # KBX050503 KBX060605 KBX061005 KBX061505 KBX080806 KBX081306 KBX081806 KBX082506 KBX121208 KBX122208 KBX123608 KBX161609 KBX162609 KBX163609 KBX165609 KBX232011 KBX232018 KBX232811 KBX233311 KBX233318 KBX234011 KBX236011 KBX314011 KBX314018 KBX316011 KBX316018 Dimensions (mm) (h x w x d) 50 x 45 x 32 66 x 60 x 46 100 x 66 x 46 152 x 66 x 46 82 x 77 x 57 127 x 81 x 57 177 x 81 x 57 252 x 81 x 57 125 x 124 x 81 222 x 125 x 81 362 x 125 x 91 136 x 162 x 91 263 x 162 x 91 354 x 162 x 91 564 x 162 x 91 234 x 204 x 111 230 x 200 x 180 284 x 234 x 111 330 x 230 x 110 330 x 230 x 180 410 x 230 x 110 600 x 230 x 110 404 x 316 x 111 402 x 310 x 180 600 x 310 x 110 600 x 310 x 180 Certification ATEX/UL ATEX/UL ATEX/UL ATEX/UL ATEX/UL ATEX/UL ATEX/UL ATEX/UL ATEX/UL ATEX/UL ATEX/UL ATEX/UL ATEX/UL UL ONLY UL ONLY UL ONLY UL ONLY UL ONLY UL ONLY UL ONLY UL ONLY UL ONLY UL ONLY UL ONLY UL ONLY UL ONLY
2E
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
749
2E
TBX Series Enclosures

ATEX: II 2 G Ex e II AEx Class I, Zone 1, AEx e IIC, T6 cULus to UL50
Applications:
The TBX range is an ATEX certified steel and stainless steel junction box solution fully compliant with the impact, UV, thermal, and ingress protection requirements for hazardous locations Available in a wide range of sizes to meet a diverse range of applications; ideal for electrical and instrumentation applications Using the highest quality materials, design benefits, and precision manufacturing, the TBX range is the benchmark for quality and performance in steel enclosures The standard depths of 150mm and 200mm can also be extended to 300mm deep (available upon request) The stainless steel versions are suitable for salt laden atmospheres and harsh environmental conditions
Features:
The retained stainless steel slotted hex bolt fastenings with door retaining hinges provide a rapid means of achieving high integrity ingress protection (IP) of 66 for reliable and rapid environmental protection The high integrity "single piece" sealing gasket for superior ingress protection (IP) of 66 and excellent recovery and re-sealing properties for continuous environmental protection An integral drainage channel prevents liquids or other solid contaminants from running in or falling into the enclosure when the door is opened, and to minimize gasket path contamination An integral external and internal feed-through brass earth/ground stud assembly enables rapid and reliable protective earth/ground connection mounted on the side of the enclosure for ease of access External hinge allows cover to be opened 180 Heavy duty welded mounting lugs Typical TBX assembled and certified for hazardous areas
Gland entries and assembly services available - contact factory for options and customization services
2E
Type Material Description Stainless steel grades: 316L (1.4401) standard; 304 (1.4301) available on request, or sheet steel 1.5mm for TBX 231523 - 484815 2.0mm for TBX 765015 - 916120 3.0mm for all gland plates Stainless steel - electro-chemical polish Sheet steel - powder polyester gray RAL 7032 Neoprene closed cell sponge Lift off external hinged door with 180 opening, all stainless steel and captive hex fastening screws; padlock hasp fitted as standard 4 x external 3mm thick welded lugs, 11mm holes/slots 4 x stand off pillars 9mm, 25mm high, tapped M6 x 10 M10 external/internal brass earth stud assembly; M6 internal stud on door and painted gland plates IP66 Standard: -20C to +80C (neoprene gasket material) 7 J (Nm)

Component Certified: II 2 G Ex e II T4 - ATEX (BAS01ATEX2208U) AEx Class I, Zone 1, AEx e IIC, T6 Certification of Conformity: BAS01ATEX2207X II 2 G Ex e II T6 or T5 II 1 G Ex ia II T6 or T5 II 2 G Ex e [ia] II T6 or T5 Industrial Control Panel: cULus to UL50 / C22.2 No. 94-M91, Types 3S, 4, 4X
Material Thickness
Finish
Gasket Material Door Fastening
Enclosure Mounting Equipment Mounting Enclosure Earth
Ingress Protection Rating Temperature Range Impact Resistance
750
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

2E
Cat. # TBXPS2315131 TBXPS2315133 TBXS12315131 TBXS12315133 TBXS22315131 TBXS22315133 TBXPS3131151 TBXPS3131153 TBXS13131151 TBXS13131153 TBXS23131151 TBXS23131153 TBXPS4638151 TBXPS4638153 TBXS14638151 TBXS14638153 TBXS24638151 TBXS24638153 TBXPS4848151 TBXPS4848153 TBXS14848151 TBXS14848153 TBXS24848151 TBXS24848153 TBXPS7651151 TBXPS7651153 TBXS17651151 TBXS17651153 TBXS27651151 TBXS27651153 TBXPS3131201 TBXPS3131203 TBXS13131201 TBXS13131203 TBXS23131201 TBXS23131203 TBXPS4638201 TBXPS4638203 TBXS14638201 TBXS14638203 TBXS24638201 TBXS24638203 TBXPS4848201 TBXPS4848203 TBXS14848201 TBXS14848203 TBXS24848201 TBXS24848203 TBXPS7651201 TBXPS7651203 TBXS17651201 TBXS17651203 TBXS27651201 TBXS27651203 TBXPS9161201 TBXPS9161203 TBXS19161201 TBXS19161203 TBXS29161201 TBXS29161203
Material Painted Steel Painted Steel 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel 304 Stainless Steel 304 Stainless Steel Painted Steel Painted Steel 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel 304 Stainless Steel 304 Stainless Steel Painted Steel Painted Steel 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel 304 Stainless Steel 304 Stainless Steel Painted Steel Painted Steel 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel 304 Stainless Steel 304 Stainless Steel Painted Steel Painted Steel 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel 304 Stainless Steel 304 Stainless Steel Painted Steel Painted Steel 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel 304 Stainless Steel 304 Stainless Steel Painted Steel Painted Steel 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel 304 Stainless Steel 304 Stainless Steel Painted Steel Painted Steel 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel 304 Stainless Steel 304 Stainless Steel Painted Steel Painted Steel 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel 304 Stainless Steel 304 Stainless Steel Painted Steel Painted Steel 316L Stainless Steel 316L Stainless Steel 304 Stainless Steel 304 Stainless Steel
No. of Gland Plates 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
Dimensions mm (In.) (h x w x d)
Vertical Fixing Center (mm)
Horizontal Fixing Center (0, 1, & 2 Gland Plate Version)
Horizontal Fixing Center (3 & 4 Gland Plate Version)
Weight (kg)
Gland Area Top & Bottom: 108 x 58
229 x 152 x 127 (9" x 6" x 5")
152
178
208
4.00 Left & Right: 108 x 58 Top & Bottom: 261 x 80
306 x 306 x 150 (12" x 12" x 6")
203
331
361
458 x 382 x 150 (18" x 15" x 6")
305
407
437
480 x 480 x 150 (19" x 19" x 6")
327
505
535
2E
762 x 508 x 150 (30" x 20" x 6")
508
534
564
306 x 306 x 200 (12" x 12" x 8")
203
331
361
458 x 382 x 200 (18" x 15" x 8")
305
407
437
480 x 480 x 200 (18.9" x 18.9" x 8")
327
505
535
762 x 508 x 200 (30" x 20" x 8")
508
534
564
25.20 Left & Right: 464 x 108 Top & Bottom: 566 x 108 Left & Right: 566 x 108
914 x 610 x 200 (36" x 24" x 8")
559
636
666
31.00
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
751
2E

Dimensions:
2E
752
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Non-metallic Enclosures
Hazardous Applications
Description
GHG74 Series KESTREL Series TBF / TBP Series
3E
Page No.
3E
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
753
3E
Explosion Protected Terminal Boxes

Series GHG 744, 745, 746, 749
UL/cUL Listed Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Zones 1 & 2, AEx de IIB + H2, T6 Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G (cUL) ATEX CERTIFIED IECEx CEPEL Certified
Ex de IIC, T6, Zones 1 & 2 Ex de IIC, T6 Zones 21 & 22 IP66, NEMA 4X GOST-R GOST-K
Applications:
Explosion protected terminal boxes are used in a metallic conduit or cable system for a marshalling cabinet between main circuits to the control room and branch circuits into the field. Junction boxes for intrinsically safe or increased safety connections Are designed for industrial areas such as chemical plants, oil and gas refineries, paint and varnish manufacturing plants, gasoline bulk loading terminals and finishing areas where nonmetallic, weatherproof enclosures
Features:
Enclosures can be mounted on walls, conduits or strut systems Connection terminals accessible from all sides Snap-out brass plates for metallic entry and grounding continuity Snap-out terminal rails Clip-in grounding PE rail Different sizes to accommodate any number of terminal connections
Ordering Data:
Contact factory for catalog numbers and pricing. Have the following information ready Number and size of terminals (Table 1) Number, size and location of entries (Tables 2 and 3) Required ground points (Table 4) Cooper Crouse-Hinds will provide you with an extended list

UL/cUL Listed Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class I, Zones 1 and 2, (A)Ex de IIB+H2, T6 Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G (cUL) ATEX Certified Ex de IIC, T6, Zones 1 and 2 Ex de IIC, T6, Zones 21 and 22 IP66, NEMA 4X GOST-R and GOST-K
Dimensions
In Inches:
3E
Standard Materials:
Fiberglass-reinforced polyester housings Enclosure gasket silicone Cover screws stainless steel Metal entry plates brass Conduit entries zinc Myers hubs
Technical Data:
Suitable from 1 to 296 terminal blocks (2.5mm2) Suitable for up to 90 3/4" hubs (largest size) Suitable for up to 72 3/4" metallic hubs Suitable for use as control panels Ex-e boxes and brass flanges can be field drilled
754
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Series GHG 744, 745, 746, 749
Panel and Side Designation:
3E
The sides of the enclosures are designated as W, X, Y and Z alphabetically in a clockwise rotation. The narrow sides are always W and Y and the long sides are X and Z.
Dimensions
In Inches:
Table 1
Maximum Number of Built-in Terminals Supplied with Enclosure
Terminal cross section in mm2 Type GHG GHG GHG GHG 2.5 744 745 746 749 39 2 x 40 2 x 94 2 x 148 4 33 2 x 33 2 x 78 2 x 124 6 33 2 x 39 2 x 78 2 x 94 10 33 2 x 33 2 x 35 2 x 75 16 17 40 2 x 45 2 x 63 25 13 30 2 x 34 2 x 63 35 20 2 x 32 2 x 51 Length of terminal rail
3E
(1) (2) (2) (2)
230 235 510 795
mm mm mm mm
Table 2
Flange Arrangement for Each Enclosure
Enclosure Removable Flanges Covers* # of DIN rails 744 2 total 1 - top and bottom Shallow 1 745 4 total 1 per side Deep or shallow 1 or 2 746 6 total 2 top and bottom 1 each side Deep or shallow 1, 2, or 4 749 8 total 3 top and bottom 1 each side Shallow 1, 2, or 6
Table 3
Maximum Number of Glands Per Side
Type NPT equivalent GHG 744 GHG 745 GHG 746 GHG 749 # of glands/flange # of Myers hubs/flange Side X/Z X/Z X/Z X/Z M12 60 60 120 180 46 M16 36 36 72 108 25 M20 /2" 26 26 52 78 20 10
1
M25 /4" 18 18 36 54 11 9
3
M32 1" 10 10 20 30 8 6
M40 11/4" 7 7 14 21 4 3
M50 11/2" 4 4 8 12 3 3
M63 2" 3 3 6 9 2 2
If flanges are used, fewer glands can be installed. See Table 1 for flange arrangement. Example: In the GHG 745 box a maximum of (10) 1/ 2" Myers hubs can be installed on each brass flange plates. Each side will take one brass flange for a total of (40) 1/ 2" Myers hubs. *The shallow cover is standard for terminal boxes. The deep cover is used when mounting larger sized terminal (>95 mm2) or switches for 80 amps and larger.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
755
3E

Series GHG 744, 745, 746, 749
Ground Rails:
Used to connect ground points to common ground PE "potential earth" European designation Designated by 3 number ordering code (see Table 4)
Table 4
Explanation of 14 x 2 x 4 mm2
Number 1st 2nd 3rd Meaning Number of screw terminals # wires that can be connected on each terminal Maximum conductor diameter Example 14 screw terminals on strip 2 ground wires can be connected 4 mm2 conductors can be terminated on the ground rail (28 total, 14 terminals; 2 wires per terminal)
Use Table 5 as a conversion from AWG to mm2
Table 5
Equivalent of AWG Conductor to mm2
AWG 14 12 10 8 6 4 3 2 1 1 /0 2 /0 3 /0 4 /0 Area mm2 2.08 3.31 5.26 8.37 13.3 21.15 26.66 33.63 42.41 53.51 67.44 85.03 107.22
3E
756
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Kestrel Series Polyester Enclosures
GOST-K GOST-R
3E
Kestrel Series Features/Applications:

The Kestrel series of glass reinforced polyester enclosures available in seventeen sizes in black, gray and blue, provide a high quality maintenance free solution for intermediate electrical junctions. Where corrosion resistance, impact strength or ingress protection are key factors the Kestrel series is highly recommended. Black Kestrel "PKE" series Gray Kestrel "POK" series Blue Kestrel "PBE" series (Intrinsic Safety only)

PKE (black) and POK (gray) sizes: 080806, 081106, 081606, 081906, 121309, 122210, 161610, 162610, 163610, 252613, 254013, 256013, 414013 Enclosure with terminals Ex e ll T5 or T6 to EN 60079-7 Certificate of Conformity: PKE: 94C. 102.961 POK: 94C. 102.962X Empty enclosure Ex e ll to EN 60079-7 Component Certificate: PKE: 93C. 102.959U POK: 93C. 102.960U Other enclosures: Industrial applications
Specifications
Material Surface resistance POK, PBE, PKE Type PKE Finish Gasket Sizes 080806, 081106, 081606, 081906 Cover mounting Sizes 082306 Sizes 165610, 256013 All other sizes Box mounting Sizes 080806, 081106, 081606, 081906, 082306 All other sizes Sizes 080806 + 081106 Equipment mounting Ingress protection Temperature range Impact resistance Toxicity Deluge test All sizes Sizes 081606, 081906, 082306 All other sizes All sizes Type POK Type PBE Glassfiber reinforced polyester (GRP) 1G Ohm 1G Ohm Black, similar to RAL 9001 Grey, similar to RAL 7001 Blue, similar to RAL 5012 (IS only) Silicone rubber 4 x M4 captive stainless steel screws 6 x M4 captive stainless steel screws 6 x M6 captive stainless steel screws 4 x M6 captive stainless steel screws 4 x mounting holes for M4 screws 4 x mounting holes for M6 screws Brass mounting studs for M3 screws Brass mounting studs for M4 screws Brass mounting studs for M6 screws IP68 to IEC 529 (EN 60529) (4.92ft/ 1 hour) 4F to 131F (ambient) 7J(Nm) Halogens and cadmium free Spec. No. ATS01 (excluding size 165610 and 256013)
3E
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
757
3E
GOST-K GOST-R
Options:
Assembly Grounding EMC Terminals, Myers Hubs and cable glands fitted to specification. One piece or single brass continuity plate M6/M10 internal/external ground stud. The PKE series can be treated to provide shielding against electromagnetic interference.
A = Top B = Bottom C = Left hand side D = Right hand side E = Back
Size 080806
Size 081106
Black Kestrel "PKE" Series Gray Kestrel "POK" Series Blue Kestrel "PBE" Series Ordering Data Black (GRP) Gray (GRP) Blue (GRP)
Height Width Depth Weight
2.95" 3.15" 2.36" 12 oz Cat. # PKEPE080806 POKPE080806 PBEPE080806
2.95" 4.33" 2.36" 14 oz Cat. # PKEPE081106 POKPE081106 PBEPE081106
Guide to gland entries (Reference only) Max. gland area dimensions through wall or enclosure.
Sides A+B C+D Side A + B 1 1
Size 1.97" x 1.46" 1.14" x 1.26" Side C + D 1
Sides A+B C+D Side A + B 2 2
Size 3.15" x 1.46" 1.14" x 1.26" Side C + D 1
3E
Gland sizes (mm) per side (Reference only) Brass glands with 16 locknuts 20 25 32 40 50
758
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
GOST-K GOST-R
3E
Size 081606
Size 081906
Black Kestrel "PKE" Series Gray Kestrel "POK" Series Blue Kestrel "PBE" Series Ordering Data Black (GRP) Gray (GRP) Blue (GRP)
2.94" 6.30" 2.36" 1 lb 1 oz Cat. # PKEPE081606 POKPE081606 PBEPE081606
Guide to gland entries (Reference only) Max. gland area dimensions through wall or enclosure. Gland sizes (mm) per side (Reference only) Brass glands with 16 locknuts 20 25 32 40 50
Sides A+B C+D
Size 5.12" x 1.46" 1.14" x 1.26"
Sides A+B C+D
Size 6.38" x 1.38" 1.14" x 1.14"
Side A + B Side C + D 4 3 1
Side A + B Side C + D 5 4 1
3E
Size 121309
Size 122210
4.72" 4.92" 3.54" 1 lb 8 oz Cat. # PKEPE121309 POKPE121309 PBEPE121309 Sides A+B C+D Size 3.46" x 2.32" 2.36" x 2.01"
4.72" 8.66" 3.74" 2 lb 5 oz Cat. # PKEPE122210 POKPE122210 PBEPE122210 Sides A+B C+D Size 7.16" x 2.48" 2.36" x 2.24"
Side A + B Side C + D 4 2 1 1
Side A + B Side C + D 12 5 4 3 3 1 1 1 759
2 1 1
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
3E
GOST-K GOST-R
Size 161610
Size 162610
Black Kestrel "PKE" Series Gray Kestrel "POK" Series Blue Kestrel "PBE" Series Ordering Data Supplied with
Black (GRP) Gray (GRP) Blue (GRP)
Guide to gland entries (Reference only) Max. gland area dimensions through wall or enclosure. Gland sizes (mm) per side (Reference only) Brass glands with locknuts 16 20 25 32 40 50
Sides A+B C+D
Size 4.49" x 2.56" 3.31" x 2.32"
Sides A+B C+D
Size 8.42" x 2.56" 3.31" x 2.32"
Side A + B Side C + D 6 3 2 2 1 4 2 1 1
Side A + B Side C + D 14 6 4 3 3 4 2 1 1
3E Size 163610
Size 165610
Size 252613
Sides A+B C+D Side A + B 20 10 7 5 4
Size 12.36" x 2.56" 3.31" x 2.32" Side C + D 4 2 1 1
Sides A+B C+D
Size 2 (9.41" x 2.56") 3.31" x 2.32"
Sides A+B C+D
Size 8.23" x 3.58" 6.85" x 3.39"
Side A + B Side C + D 32 14 10 8 6 4 2 1 1
Side A + B Side C + D 21 10 8 4 3 2 15 8 6 3 2 2
760
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
GOST-K GOST-R
3E
Size 254013
Size 256013
Black Kestrel "PKE" Series Gray Kestrel "POK" Series Blue Kestrel "PBE" Series Ordering Data Black (GRP) Supplied with Gray (GRP) Blue (GRP)
9.84" 15.75" 4.92" 10 lb Cat. # PKEPE254013 POKPE254013 PBEPE254013
Guide to gland entries (Reference only) Max. gland area dimensions through wall or enclosure. Gland sizes (mm) per side (Reference only) Brass glands with 16 locknuts 20 25 32 40 50
Sides A+B C+D
Size 13.94" x 3.58" 6.85" x 3.87"
Sides A+B C+D
Size 2 (10.31" x 3.58") 6.77" x 3.38"
Side A + B Side C + D 33 18 14 7 5 4 15 8 6 3 2 2
Side A + B Side C + D 48 24 20 10 8 6 15 8 6 3 2 2
3E
Size 414013
Size 252617
Size 254017
9.84" 15.75" 6.50" 11 lb 2oz Cat. # PKEPE254017 POKPE254017 PBEPE254017
Sides A+B C+D Side A + B 33 18 14 7 5 4
Size 13.94" x 3.58" 12.95" x 3.39" Side C + D 30 16 13 6 4 4
Size 8.23" x 3.58" 6.85" x 3.39" Side C + D 15 8 6 3 2 2
Sides A+B C+D
Size 13.94" x 3.58" 6.85" x 3.39"
Side A + B Side C + D 33 18 14 7 5 4 15 8 6 3 2 2
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
761
3E
Kestrel Series Accessories
Mounting plates Mounting plates for the PKE, POK, PBE series of enclosures manufactured from 2mm zinc coated sheet steel.
Type 080806 081106 081606 081906 082306 121309 122210 161610 162610 Type 080806 081106 081606 081906 082306 121309 122210 161610 162610 Type (long side) 121309 122210 162610 163610 252613 254013 414013 161610 165610 256013 Type 121309 122210 161610 162610 163610 165610 252613 254013 256013 414013 252617 254017 Type HR 15 HR 30
Cat. # POKZTMP0808 POKZTMP0811 POKZTMP0816 POKZTMP0819 POKZTMP0823 POKZTMP1213 POKZTMP1222 POKZTMP1616 POKZTMP1626 Cat. # POKBSECC1 POKBSECC2 POKBSECC3 POKBSECC31 POKBSECC32 POKBSECC4 POKBSECC5 POKBSECC51 POKBSECC6 Cat. #
Type 163610 165610 252613 254013 256013 414013 252617 254017 Type 163610 165610 252613 254013 256013 414013 252617 254017
Cat. # POKZTMP1636 POKZTMP1656 POKZTMP2526 POKZTMP2540 POKZTMP2560 POKZTMP4140 POKZTMP2526 POKZTMP2540 Cat. # POKBSECC7 POKBSECC71 POKBSECC8 POKBSECC9 POKBSECC91 POKBSECC10 POKBSECC8 POKBSECC9
Ground continuity plates Internal continuity plates manufactured from 0.05" brass, may be used for bonding cable glands in any of the four enclosure faces.
3 mm single brass ground plates Manufactured from 0.19" brass for fitting along sides of enclosure.
Type (short side) Cat. # 121309 122210 162610 163610 252613 / 252617 254013 / 254017 414013 161610 165610 256013 No. of Poles 4 6 6 8 8 8 8 12 12 12 8 12 Height 0.59" 1.18" POKBSECP4S POKBSECP5S POKBSECP6S POKBSECP7S POKBSECP8S POKBSECP9S POKBSECP10S POKBSECP51S POKBSECP71S POKBSECP91S (Vert. bar) Cat. # KBXERVK41 KBXERVK41 KBXERVK52 KBXERVK52 KBXERVK52 KBXERVK52 KBXERVK8 KBXERVK8 KBXERVK8 KBXERHK71 KBXERVK8 KBXERVK8
Ground bar 12 x 0.08" zinc plated steel bar complete with cable clamps having locking tongue which locates in the bar. Bars are secured to base of enclosure either directly to the brass inserts or pillars fitted to brass inserts.
POKBSECP4L POKBSECP5L POKBSECP6L POKBSECP7L / 252617 POKBSECP8L / 254017 POKBSECP9L POKBSECP9L POKBSECP51L (4 off per box) POKBSECP71L (4 off per box) POKBSECP91L Cat. # KBXERHK41 KBXERHK51 KBXERHK52 KBXERHK61 POKERH7 POKERH71 KBXERVK81 KBXERHK81 POKERH91 KBXERHK81 KBXERVK81 KBXERHK81 Cat. # ACCSOP15 ACCSOP30 Cat. # POKBSEPKIT
No. of Poles 2 2 4 4 4 4 6 6 6 8 6 6
3E
Stand off pillars Plated mild steel, supplied in packs of 2. Not suitable for enclosure sizes 080806, 081106, 081606, 081906 or 082306. Ground pillar kit Brass nickel plated grounding kits comprising of 1 ground bar and 2 pillars. Provide additional grounding facilities within enclosure. Suitable for enclosure sizes 080806, 081106, 081906 + 082306 only. Ground studs
Type M6 Brass M6 Stainless steel M10 Brass M10 Stainless steel
Cat. # ACCBSES M6 KIT ACCS1ESM6KIT ACCBSES M10 KIT ACCS1ESM10KIT Cat. # POKMFKIT5 POKMF KIT6 Size Small size 080806, 081106, 081606, 081906, 082306 Large & all other sizes
Mounting feet Supplied in sets of 4. Complete with mounting screws.
Type MF5 MF6
762
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Kestrel Series Accessories
3E
Dimensions
In Inches:
Code
PKE080806 3.15 PKE081106 4.33 PKE081606 6.30 PKE081906 7.48 PKE082306 9.06 PKE121309 4.92 PKE122210 8.66 PKE161610 6.30
2.95 2.40 2.01 0.83 2.68 2.48 2.95 2.40 2.01 0.83 3.86 2.48 2.95 2.40 2.01 0.83 5.83 2.48 2.95 2.40 2.01 0.83 7.01 2.48 2.95 2.40 2.01 0.83 8.58 2.48 4.72 3.54 3.15 0.98 4.29 4.09 4.72 3.74 3.35 1.08 8.03 4.09 1.72 3.74 3.35 0.98 5.51 5.51 3.74 3.35 0.98 9.45 5.51 3.74 3.35 0.98 13.39 5.51 3.74 3.35 0.98 21.26 5.51 4.92 4.53 1.10 9.25 9.06 4.92 4.53 2.68 14.96 9.06 4.92 4.53 1.10 22.84 9.06
1.77 2.56 1.97 1.30 1.77 2.56 3.15 1.30 1.77 2.56 5.19 1.30 1.77 2.56 6.30 1.26 1.77 2.56 7.87 1.26 3.23 4.33 3.23 2.60 3.23 4.33 6.97 2.60 4.33 5.79 4.72 3.54 4.33 5.79 8.66 3.54 4.33 5.79 12.60 3.54 4.33 5.79 20.47 3.54 7.87 9.33 8.47 7.09 7.87 9.33 14.17 7.09 7.87 9.33 21.99 7.03
2.21 0.32 0.34 N/A N/A 2.36 3.39 0.32 0.34 N/A N/A 3.54 5.35 0.32 0.34 N/A N/A 5.47 6.54 0.32 0.34 N/A N/A 6.65 8.11 0.32 0.34 N/A 0.42 8.23 3.66 0.32 0.41 2.05 N/A 3.86 7.40 0.37 0.41 2.05 N/A 7.60 4.72 0.37 0.51 2.99 N/A 5.20 8.66 0.37 0.51 2.99 N/A 9.06
M4 0.32 0.18 0.32 0.35 M4 0.32 0.18 0.32 0.35 M4 0.32 0.18 0.32 0.35 M4 0.32 0.18 0.32 0.35 M4 0.32 0.18 0.32 0.35 M6 0.61 0.18 0.41 0.43 M6 0.61 0.26 0.41 0.43 M6 0.79 0.26 0.47 N/A M6 0.79 0.26 0.47 N/A
3E
PKE162610 10.24 6.30 PKE163610 14.17 6.30 PKE165610 22.05 6.30 PKE252613 10.04 6.30 PKE254013 15.75 9.84 PKE256013 23.62 9.84
12.60 0.39 0.51 2.99 N/A 13.07 M6 0.79 0.26 0.47 N/A 20.47 0.37 0.51 2.99 0.65 20.95 M6 0.79 0.26 0.47 N/A 8.47 0.37 0.47 3.94 N/A 8.98 M6 0.79 0.26 0.47 N/A
14.17 0.37 0.51 3.94 N/A 14.65 M6 0.79 0.26 0.47 N/A 21.99 0.37 0.35 3.94 0.51 22.62 M6 0.79 0.26 0.47 N/A
PKE414013 15.75 15.95 4.92 4.53 1.10 14.96 15.16 13.98 15.43 14.17 13.19 14.17 0.37 0.35 9.76 N/A 14.72 M6 0.79 0.26 0.47 N/A PKE252617 10.04 9.84 PKE254012 15.75 9.84
6.50 6.10 2.68 9.26 9.06 6.50 6.10 2.68 14.96 9.06
7.87 9.33 8.47 7.09 7.87 9.33 14.17 7.09
8.47 0.37 0.51 3.94 N/A 8.98
M6 0.79 0.26 0.08 N/A
14.17 0.37 0.51 3.94 N/A 14.65 M6 0.79 0.26 0.47 N/A
Dimension R: only appears on enclosures with 6 cover mounting screws, dimension is the radius of the center mounting screws.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
763
3E
TBF/TBP Series Glassfiber Reinforced Polyester Enclosures
The TBF and TBP series of enclosures are molded from a glassfiber polyester resin molding compound which is highly resistant to corrosion. Available in nine sizes with a minimum wall thickness of 3mm ensures they are suited to a wide range of applications such as control systems, meters, valves or instruments and are ideally suited for environments where weight is a prime consideration.
Approvals:
Enclosure with TBF 191514-606018 Ex e II T6 to EN 60079-7, (BS 5501: part 6) terminals Certificate of Conformity: Ex 92C 3393X TBP 301918, 303018, 373018 & 603021 Ex e II T6 to BS 4683 part 4 Certificate of Assurance Ex 79255X Empty TBF 191514-606018 Ex e II T6 to EN 60079-7, (BS 5501: part 6) enclosure Component Certificate: 88B.102.698U TBP 301918, 303018, 373018 & 603021 Ex e II to BS 4683: part 4 Component Approval: 3032U
Specifications:
Material Gasket Cover mounting Box mounting
TBF 191514 606018 TBP 301918 603021 Glassfiber reinforced polyester body and cover Glassfiber reinforced polyester body, polycarbonate cover Expanded polyurethane foam 4 or 6 captive square threaded nylon screws Integral 0.217" diameter hole External mounting lugs optional 4 or 6 x M4 threaded inserts TBF 191514 606018 TBP 301918 603021 TBF/TBP T5 T6 TBF 191514 606018 TBP 301918 603021 Glassfiber Reinforced Polyester Polycarbonate IP66/67 to IEC 529 IP66 to IEC 529 4F to +203F 4F to +104F 4F to +140F 4 J (Nm) to EN 50014 7 J (Nm) to BS 4683: Part 4 UL 94 HB UL 94 V2 No halogens 28% (ASTM D2863 77) DIN 53482 12
3E
Equipment mounting Ingress protection Temperature range Ambient temperature Impact resistance Flammability Toxicity Oxygen index Surface resistivity
Options (consult factory):

Assembly Grounding Terminals, cable glands, Myers Hubs, locks fitted to specification. Single brass continuity plates, ground studs.
764
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

A = Top B = Bottom C = Left hand side D = Right hand side
3E
TBF 191514
TBF 301918 TBP 301918
Height Width Depth Weight Ordering Data Supplied with Polyester cover Clear polycarbonate cover
7.32" 5.95" 5.47" 2.33 Ib Cat. # TBFPE191514
11.89" 7.32" 6.89" 3.86 Ib.(TBF) 3.12 Ib (TBP) Cat. # TBFPE301918 TBPPE301918
Guide to gland entries Max. gland area dimensions
Sides A+B C+D
Size 3.94" x 2.76" 5.12" x 2.76"
Sides A+B C+D
Size 5.12" x 3.94" 9.84" x 3.94"
Gland sizes (mm) per side Brass glands with 16 locknuts 20 25 32 40 50
Side A + B Side C + D 4 2 2 6 4 3 1 1
Side A + B Side C + D 10 6 4 3 1 1 22 13 8 5 3
3E
A = Top B = Bottom C = Left hand side D = Right hand side
TBF 303018 TBP 303018
TBF 373018 TBP 373018
11.89" 11.89" 6.89" 5 Ib (TBF) 4.34 Ib (TBP) Cat. # TBFPE303018 TBPPE303018
14.65" 11.89" 6.89" 6.39 Ib. (TBF) 5.22 Ib (TBP) Cat. # TBFPE373018 TBPPE373018
Sides A+B C+D
Size 9.84" x 3.94" 9.84" x 3.94"
Sides A+B C+D
Size 9.84" x 3.94" 12.60" x 3.94"

Side A + B Side C + D 22 13 8 5 3 2
US: 1-866-764-5454
Side A + B Side C + D 22 13 8 5 3 2 28 17 11 7 4 3
22 13 8 5 3 2
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
765
3E

TBF563018 TBF603018 TBP603021
TBF493018
19.21" 11.89" 6.89" 8.29 lb Cat. # TBFPE493018
21.97" 11.89" 6.89" 8.75 lb Cat. # TBFPE563018
23.74" 11.89" 6.89 (TBF) 8.29 (TBP) 9.66 lb (TBF) 8.60 Ib (TBP) Cat. # TBFPE603018 TBPPE603021
Sides A+B C+D Side A + B 22 13 8 5 3 2 A = Top B = Bottom C = Left hand side D = Right hand side
Size 9.84" x 3.94" 17.17" x 3.94" Side C + D 40 24 16 11 7 5
Size 9.84" x 3.94" 2 (8.94" x 3.94") Side C + D 38 24 16 10 6 4
Size 9.84" x 3.94" 2 (9.84" x 3.94") Side C + D 46 26 16 10 6 4
3E
TBF603718
TBF606018
23.74" 14.65" 6.89" 11.79 Ib Cat. # TBFPE603718
23.74" 23.74" 6.89" 16.31 Ib Cat. # TBFPE606018
Sides A+B C+D
Size 12.60" x 3.94" 2 (9.84" x 3.94")
Sides A+B C+D
Size 2 (9.84" x 3.94") 2 (9.84" x 3.94")
Side A + B Side C + D 28 17 11 7 4 3 44 26 16 10 6 4
Side A + B Side C + D 44 26 16 16 6 4 44 26 16 16 6 4
766
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Accessories
Mounting plates For equipment mounting, manufactured from galvanized steel. Type TBF/TBP191514 TBF/TBP301918 TBF/TBP303018 TBF/TBP373018 TBF493018 Type TPF/TBP191514 TPF/TBP301918 TPF/TBP303018 TBF/TBP373018 TBF493018 TBF563018 TBF/TBP603018/21 TBF603718 TBF606018 Type M6 Brass M6 Stainless steel M10 Brass M10 Stainless steel Type Side C+D C+D C+D C+D C+D C+D C+D C+D C+D Cat. # TBFZTMP1915 TBFZTMP3019 TBFZTMP3030 TBFZTMP3730 TBFZTMP4930 Cat. # TBFBSECP1L TBFBSECP2L TBFBSECP2L TBFBSECP4L TBFBSECP4AL TBFBSECP4BL TBFBSECP2L TBFBSECP2L TBFBSECP2L Cat. # ACCBSES M6 KIT ACCS1ESM6KIT ACCBSES M10 KIT ACCS1ESM10KIT Cat. # Type TBF563018 TBF/TBP603018/21 TBF603718 TBF606018 Side A+B A+B A+B A+B A+B A+B A+B A+B A+B (2x) Cat. #
3E
TBFZTMP5630 TBFZTMP6030 TBFZTMP6037 TBFZTMP6060 Cat. # TBFBSECP1S TBFBSECP2S TBFBSECP2L TBFBSECP2L TBFBSECP2L TBFBSECP2L TBFBSECP2L TBFBSECP4L TBFBSECP2L
3mm single brass ground plates Ground continuity plates manufactured from 0.12" brass. Plates must be connected to the internal ground point of the enclosure.
(2x) (2x) (2x) (2x)
Ground studs Tapped M6 for internal ground connection
External mounting lugs For external mounting points, direct mounting through the four corner holes of enclosure. Cover mounting screws
Mounting lugs TBFEMF4SET Set of 4 pieces, glassfiber reinforced polyamide Type Slotted screw Cat. # TBFLIDSCWST Cat. # TBFPADLOCK Cat. # TBFHGESRW Cat. # M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 TBFSOPM4X6 TBFSOPM4X10 TBFSOPM4X15 TBFSOPM4X20 TBFSOPM4X25 TBFSOPM4X30 TBFSOPM4X60 TBFSOPM4X97 TBFSOPM4X102 L (inches) 0.24 0.39 0.59 0.79 0.98 1.18 2.36 3.82 4.02 Thread Size M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 M4 Style A B B B B B B B B
3E
Padlock set Stainless steel, maximum diameter of padlock: 0.32" Hinge screw Cover security device. Note: Box must be mounted prior to fitting the hinge screw. Stand off pilars
Type Padlock set Type Hinge screw Set of 2 pieces Type Spacer Spacer Spacer Spacer Spacer Spacer Spacer Spacer Spacer
Style A
Style B Plastic rain hoods Type Small Large Cat. # TBFPRHSML TBFPRMLGE
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
767
3E
Dimensions
In Inches:
3E
Code TBF/TBP191514 TBF/TBP301918 TBF/TBP303018 TBF/TBP373018 TBF/TBP493018 TBF/TBP563018 TBF/TBP603018 TBF/TBP603718 TBF/TBP606018
A 5.95 7.32 11.89 14.65 19.21 21.97 11.89 14.65 23.74
B 7.32 11.89 11.89 11.89 11.89 11.89 23.74 23.74 23.74
C 5.51 6.85 6.85 6.85 6.87 6.87 6.87 6.93 8.25
D 5.16 6.54 11.10 13.86 18.35 21.10 11.02 13.78 22.87
E 6.54 11.10 11.10 11.10 11.02 11.02 22.87 22.87 22.87
F 5.16 6.54 11.10 13.86 18.39 21.14 11.06 13.82 21.91
G 6.54 10.93 10.91 10.91 10.91 10.91 21.91 31.91 21.91
H 3.74 2.36 8.27 8.27 8.27 8.27 9.47 9.47 8.27
J N/A 2.36 N/A N/A N/A N/A 2.36 2.36 2.36
K 2.36 3.74 8.27 3.74 3.74 3.74 8.27 3.74 8.27
L N/A N/A N/A 3.54 N/A 3.54 N/A 3.54 3.54
M N/A N/A N/A 2.36 N/A 2.36 N/A 2.36 2.36
N N/A 2.36 N/A N/A N/A N/A 2.36 2.39 3.54
P 4.96 9.45 9.45 9.45 9.45 9.45 21.30 21.30 20.10
Q 3.54 4.92 9.45 12.21 16.77 19.53 9.45 12.21 21.26
768
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Metallic Enclosures
Non-hazardous Applications
Description
QBX Series PTB/PTC Series W Series RS / RSM / RSS Series
4E
Page No. see pages 770772 see pages 773774 see page 775 see page 781
4E
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
769
4E
QBX Series Enclosures

Sheet or Stainless Steel Removable Hinge Cover
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D NEMA 3S, 4 (Painted Steel), 4X (Stainless Steel), IP66
QBX Series Features/Applications:

The QBX series of enclosures are available in two types of material and have been developed for the light industrial market. Stainless steel is recommended to give maximum protection for components in outdoor/aggressive environments. Specifically designed for the accommodation of rail mounted terminals or other electro/pneumatic components. The QBX series is user friendly and offers good access internally. Fully removable hinged cover, concealed hinges provide 180 opening Cover mounting, one or two 1/ 4 turn latches (slot shape) 10 key lockable variations Form-in-place polyurethane gasket M6 ground stud in box and cover Mounting through internal holes (types 3S and 4) or with external lugs (type 4X) Pole mounting kit available

Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D cULus to UL50/C22.2 No. 94-M91 mild steel: Types 3S, 4, 4X (E115376) GL Certified
Specifications:
Description Material Type All Types Specification Stainless steel grades 304 (1.4301) or sheet steel Grade 316L (1.4404 to EN 10088) stainless steel available RAL7032 standard paint color for painted steel enclosures (others available upon request) Flat Electro Polished Finish Form-In-Place Polyurethane 2 or 3 Hinges / 1 or 21/4 Turn Latches
4E
Finish Gasket Cover Mounting Gland Plates Grounding
Flat Electro Polished Finish All Types All Types
QBX302012, 303012, 403012, 403022 1 Gland Plate Bottom Face All Other Sizes 2 Gland Plates on Bottom Face All Types M6 Studs in Base and Cover Holes Through Back of Enclosure or Using External Mounting Lugs IP66 to BSEN60529 4F (20C) to +176F (80C)
Enclosure Mounting All Types Equipment Mounting All Types Temperature Range All Types

Material Finish Sizes Equipment Gland Plates Ground Studs Special Materials or Thickness According to Customer Specification 316L stainless steel available on all sizes (change S2 to S1 in the respective catalog number) Special Colors According to Customer Specification Special Sizes According to Customer Specification Terminals, Myers Hubs, and Glands Assembled According to Customer Specification Drilled Cable Glands Fitted to Customer Specification Also Available Fitted to Gland Plates
Cover Attachments e.g. Handles and Locks Mounting Plates All QBX Enclosures have a standard non-painted mounting plate; painted mounting plates and stainless steel mounting plates are available
770
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Sheet or Stainless Steel Removable Hinge Cover Ordering Information and Accessories
4E
QBX Series Ordering Information (All QBX Enclosures include a zinc steel unpainted mounting plate in the single catalog number)
Painted Sheet Steel RAL 7032
Depth 4.72" Size 11.81" 11.81" 15.75" 15.75" 19.68" 23.62" x x x x x x 7.87" 11.81" 11.81" 15.75" 15.75" 15.75" Cat. # QBXPS302012UL QBXPS303012UL QBXPS403012UL QBXPS404012UL QBXPS504012UL QBXPS604012UL Weight (lb) 6.13 7.96 10.74 13.14 14.15 16.33
Stainless Steel (304) Brushed

Depth 4.72" Size 11.81" 11.81" 15.75" 15.75" 19.68" 23.62" x x x x x x 7.87" 11.81" 11.81" 15.75" 15.75" 15.75" Cat. # QBXS2302012UL QBXS2303012UL QBXS2403012UL QBXS2404012UL QBXS2504012UL QBXS2604012UL Weight (lb) 6.48 8.43 10.74 12.34 14.98 18.43

Depth 8.66" Size 11.81" 11.81" 15.75" 15.75" 15.75" 19.68" 19.68" 19.68" 23.62" 23.62" 23.62" 27.56" 27.56" 31.50" 36.00" 36.00" 36.00" x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 11.18" 15.75" 11.81" 15.75" 19.68" 15.75" 19.68" 23.62" 15.75" 19.68" 23.62" 19.68" 23.62" 23.62" 23.62" 31.50"* 36.00"* Cat. # QBXPS303022UL QBXPS304022UL QBXPS403022UL QBXPS404022UL QBXPS405022UL QBXPS504022UL QBXPS505022UL QBXPS506022UL QBXPS604022UL QBXPS605022UL QBXPS606022UL QBXPS705022UL QBXPS706022UL QBXPS806022UL QBXPS906022UL QBXPS908022UL QBXPS909022UL Weight (lb) 11.35 13.73 13.73 16.42 19.11 19.11 22.13 25.15 21.62 25.15 28.66 28.17 31.81 34.50 38.58 48.28 53.13

Depth 8.66" Size 11.81" 11.81" 15.75" 15.75" 15.75" 19.68" 19.68" 19.68" 23.62" 23.62" 23.62" 27.56" 27.56" 31.50" 36.00" 36.00" 36.00" x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 11.81" 15.75" 11.81" 15.75" 19.68" 15.75" 19.68" 23.62" 15.75" 19.68" 23.62" 19.68" 23.62" 23.62" 23.62" 31.50"* 36.00"* Cat. # QBXS2303022UL QBXS2304022UL QBXS2403022UL QBXS2404022UL QBXS2405022UL QBXS2504022UL QBXS2505022UL QBXS2506022UL QBXS2604022UL QBXS2605022UL QBXS2606022UL QBXS2705022UL QBXS2706022UL QBXS2806022UL QBXS2906022UL QBXS2908022UL QBXS2909022UL Weight (lb) 11.40 13.78 13.78 16.49 19.19 19.19 22.22 25.25 22.26 25.25 29.98 28.28 31.95 34.75 39.24 49.01 53.90
4E

Depth 10.00" Size 23.62" 36.00" 36.00" 36.00" x x x x 23.62"* 23.62"* 31.50"* 36.00"* Cat. # QBXPS606025UL QBXPS906025UL QBXPS908025UL QBXPS909025UL Weight (lb) 28.66 39.59 49.22 54.05

Depth 10.00" Size Cat. # Weight (lb) 23.62" x 23.62"* QBXS2606025UL 29.07 36.00" x 23.62"* QBXS2906025UL 39.85 36.00" x 31.50"* QBXS2908025UL 49.60 36.00" x 36.00"* QBXS2909025UL 54.45 Note: For 316L stainless steel, change S2 to S1 in catalog number. All enclosures are supplied with zinc coated mounting plate
Accessories:
Stand-Off Pillars M6:
Type SP15 (Set of 2) SP20 (Set of 2) SP30 (Set of 2) Cat. # ACCSOP15 ACCSOP20 ACCSOP30 Cat. # QBXPSMF QBXS1MF Suitability For All Types (Steel) For All Types (Stainless Steel) Cat. # Length (Inches) 0.59" 0.79" 1.18"
Rail Mounting Bracket:

Type QZB
*Not UL Listed.
Cat. # QBXRMB
Suitability For All Types
Mounting Feet:
Type QMF (Set of 4) QSF (Set of 4) Type Ground Cable Grounding Accessory Kit Type Slot Shape Eastern European (D Shape) Double Bit Shape Square 8mm Square 7mm Triangular 8mm Triangular 7mm Crown Shape Wing Knob Insert with Standard Key L Padlockable Handle 10mm
Further Accessories:
QBXEARTHCAB QBXEARTHKIT Lock Inserts (Key Not Included Unless Stated) Cat. # QBXLKSLOT QBXLKEE QBXLKDBS QBXLKSQ8 QBXLKSQ7 QBXLKTR8 QBXLKTR7 QBXLKCWN QBXLKWKI QBXLKPAD
Keys Cat. # N/A QBXKEYEE QBXKEYDBS QBXKEYSQ8 QBXKEYSQ7 QBXKEYTR8 QBXKEYTR7 QBXKEYCWN QBXKEYWNI N/A
771
4E

Sheet or Stainless Steel Removable Hinge Cover Dimensions
Dimensions
In Inches:
Enclosure Type 4.72" Depth QBX302012 QBX303012 QBX403012 QBX404012 QBX504012 QBX604012 Enclosure Type 8.66" Depth QBX303022 QBX304022 QBX403022 QBX404022 QBX405022 QBX504022 QBX505022 QBX506022 QBX604022 QBX605022 QBX606022 QBX705022 QBX706022 QBX806022
A Length 11.81 11.81 15.75 15.75 19.68 23.62 A Length 11.81 11.81 15.75 15.75 15.75 19.68 19.68 19.68 23.62 23.62 23.62 27.56 27.56 31.49
B Width 7.87 11.81 11.81 15.75 15.75 15.75 B Width 11.81 15.75 11.81 15.75 19.68 15.75 19.68 23.62 15.75 19.68 23.62 19.68 23.62 23.62
C Height 4.72 4.72 4.72 4.72 4.72 4.72 C Height 8.66 8.66 8.66 8.66 8.66 8.66 8.66 8.66 8.66 8.66 8.66 8.66 8.66 8.66
D 9.34 9.34 9.34 9.34 9.34 9.34 D 7.87 7.87 7.87 7.87 7.87 7.87 7.87 7.87 7.87 7.87 7.87 7.87 7.87 7.87
E 9.45 9.45 13.39 13.39 17.32 21.26 E 9.45 9.45 13.39 13.39 13.39 17.32 17.32 17.32 21.26 21.26 21.26 25.2 25.2 29.15
F 5.51 9.45 9.45 13.39 13.39 13.39 F 9.45 13.39 9.45 13.39 17.32 13.39 17.32 21.26 13.39 17.32 21.26 17.32 21.26 21.26
G 7.4 7.4 11.34 11.34 15.28 19.21 G 7.40 7.40 11.34 11.34 11.34 15.28 15.28 15.28 19.21 19.21 19.21 23.15 23.15 27.08
H 3.46 7.40 7.40 11.34 11.34 11.34 H 7.40 11.34 7.40 11.34 15.28 11.34 15.28 19.21 11.34 15.28 19.21 15.28 19.21 19.21
4E
A: Top B: Bottom C: Left D: Right E: Back
772
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
PTB/PTC Series Pull Boxes (Pencil Boxes)

For Use in Threaded Rigid or IMC Conduit Applications
Applications:
Pull Box Enclosures are installed in conduit systems (typically bridges/refineries) to: Act as pull and splice boxes Protect conductors in threaded rigid conduit Interconnect lengths of conduit Change conduit direction Provide access to conductors for maintenenace and future system changes
NEMA 4/4X/IP66
4E
Features:
More internal cubic capacity for different sized conductors Accurately tapped, tapered threads (NPT) for tight, rigid joints and ground continuity Installed NEMA 4/IP66 gasket included with pull box enclosure (NEMA 4X for stainless steel) PTB - 90 pull boxes; PTC - straight pull boxes
Standard Finishes:
Polyester powder coated over zinc primer
Options:
Description Custom lengths and sizes are available Powder coating to any RAL color chip Cable gland options can be supplied Suffix Consult Factory Consult Factory Consult Factory

UL514A CSA C22.2 No. 18
Finish Options:
Electro-chemical polished stainless steel* Brushed stainless steel Polyester powder over painted stainless steel Natural finish stainless steel Polyester powder over painted carbon steel Galvanized carbon steel Zinc electroplating
Standard Materials:
Bodies - painted steel (RAL7032 standard; powder coated any RAL color chip available upon request) Bodies - 304 stainless steel (optional) Bodies - 316L stainless steel (standard grade of SS catalog numbers below) Hubs available in steel, malleable iron, stainless steel, and aluminum Cover bolts - 316L stainless steel
4E
*Depending on size.
Size Range:
12" through 48", hub size 1" to 6"
Ordering Information - Straight Pull Boxes:

Painted Steel Cat. No. PPBPS12100TC PPBPS12125TC PPBPS12150TC PPBPS12200TC PPBPS18125TC PPBPS18150TC PPBPS18200TC PPBPS18250TC PPBPS24150TC PPBPS24200TC PPBPS24250TC PPBPS24300TC PPBPS36250TC PPBPS36300TC PPBPS36350TC PPBPS36400TC PPBPS48300TC PPBPS48350TC PPBPS48400TC PPBPS48500TC PPBPS48600TC Hub Size 1 11/4 11/2 2 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 11/2 2 21/2 3 21/2 3 31/2 4 3 31/2 4 5 6 Length 12" 12" 12" 12" 18" 18" 18" 18" 24" 24" 24" 24" 36" 36" 36" 36" 48" 48" 48" 48" 48" 316L Stainless Steel Cat. No. PPBS112100TC PPBS112125TC PPBS112150TC PPBS112200TC PPBS118125TC PPBS118150TC PPBS118200TC PPBS118250TC PPBS124150TC PPBS124200TC PPBS124250TC PPBS124300TC PPBS136250TC PPBS136300TC PPBS136350TC PPBS136400TC PPBS148300TC PPBS148350TC PPBS148400TC PPBS148500TC PPBS148600TC Hub Size 1 11/4 11/2 2 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 11/2 2 21/2 3 21/2 3 31/2 4 3 31/2 4 5 6 Length 12" 12" 12" 12" 18" 18" 18" 18" 24" 24" 24" 24" 36" 36" 36" 48" 48" 48" 48" 48" 48" 304 Stainless Steel Cat. No. PPBS212100TC PPBS212125TC PPBS212150TC PPBS212200TC PPBS218125TC PPBS218150TC PPBS218200TC PPBS218250TC PPBS224150TC PPBS224200TC PPBS224250TC PPBS224300TC PPBS236250TC PPBS236300TC PPBS236350TC PPBS236400TC PPBS248300TC PPBS248350TC PPBS248400TC PPBS248500TC PPBS248600TC Hub Size 1 11/4 11/2 2 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 11/2 2 21/2 3 21/2 3 31/2 4 3 31/2 4 5 6 Length 12" 12" 12" 12" 18" 18" 18" 18" 24" 24" 24" 24" 36" 36" 36" 36" 48" 48" 48" 48" 48"
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
773
4E
PTB/PTC Series Pull Boxes (Pencil Boxes)

For Use in Threaded Rigid or IMC Conduit Applications
NEMA 4/4X/IP66
Ordering Information - 90 Pull Boxes:

Painted Steel Cat. No. PPBPS12100TB PPBPS12125TB PPBPS12150TB PPBPS12200TB PPBPS18125TB PPBPS18150TB PPBPS18200TB PPBPS18250TB PPBPS24150TB PPBPS24200TB PPBPS24250TB PPBPS24300TB PPBPS36250TB PPBPS36300TB PPBPS36350TB PPBPS36400TB PPBPS48300TB PPBPS48350TB PPBPS48400TB PPBPS48500TB PPBPS48600TB Hub Size 1 11/4 11/2 2 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 11/2 2 21/2 3 21/2 3 31/2 4 3 31/2 4 5 6 Length 12" 12" 12" 12" 18" 18" 18" 18" 24" 24" 24" 24" 36" 36" 36" 36" 48" 48" 48" 48" 48" 316L Stainless Steel Cat. No. PPBS112100TB PPBS112125TB PPBS112150TB PPBS112200TB PPBS118125TB PPBS118150TB PPBS118200TB PPBS118250TB PPBS124150TB PPBS124200TB PPBS124250TB PPBS124300TB PPBS136250TB PPBS136300TB PPBS136350TB PPBS136400TB PPBS148300TB PPBS148350TB PPBS148400TB PPBS148500TB PPBS148600TB Hub Size 1 11/4 11/2 2 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 11/2 2 21/2 3 21/2 3 31/2 4 3 31/2 4 5 6 Length 12" 12" 12" 12" 18" 18" 18" 18" 24" 24" 24" 24" 36" 36" 36" 36" 48" 48" 48" 48" 48" 304 Stainless Steel Cat. No. PPBS212100TB PPBS212125TB PPBS212150TB PPBS212200TB PPBS218125TB PPBS218150TB PPBS218200TB PPBS218250TB PPBS224150TB PPBS224200TB PPBS224250TB PPBS224300TB PPBS236250TB PPBS236300TB PPBS236350TB PPBS236400TB PPBS248300TB PPBS248350TB PPBS248400TB PPBS248500TB PPBS248600TB Hub Size 1 11/4 11/2 2 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 11/2 2 21/2 3 21/2 3 31/2 4 3 31/2 4 5 6 Length 12" 12" 12" 12" 18" 18" 18" 18" 24" 24" 24" 24" 36" 36" 36" 36" 48" 48" 48" 48" 48"
Dimensions:
4E
3" HUB
5" HUB
11.34
15.34
15.34
11.34
35.98 38.74
11.34
5.24
5.12
36 Inch Pull Box Dimensions
7.60
15.34
7.48
48 Inch Pull Box Dimensions
774
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
47.99 51.97
W-Series Junction Boxes

Applications:
Junction boxes, designed for hazardous and non-hazardous locations, are used in a variety of industries to perform the following functions: As a pull box To provide enclosures for splices and taps As a mounting box for multi-device control stations For housing apparatus, instruments, and other devices
4E

Environmental location the physical location of the junction box will call for proper construction of the box to meet National Electrical Code requirements and will affect the material and finish needed to meet weather and corrosive conditions, if present. Number and size of conductors combined with the function to be performed (i.e., splicing, pull box), determines the amount of space needed, and therefore, the required physical dimensions of the box. Conduit layout determines the number, size, and location of the conduit openings in the box. It will also determine the type of mounting required (i.e., flush or surface positioning of the box). Flexibility required if changes in the electrical system are anticipated, the box chosen should be easily adaptable, either by construction or size to the future system.

A wide variety of options and accessories for special application are available for the various junction box families. These can be selected once the type of junction box has been determined. These options are shown on the individual pages. Some of the options available include: Special covers Hinged covers Materials and finishes Equipment mounting plates Conduit or device openings Corro-free epoxy powder coat information available on request
Quick Selector Chart:

Junction Boxes WAB WCB WJB WJBF WEB Environmental Capability/Type Designation Raintight/Type 3, 4 Dust-tight/Type 12 Raintight/Type 3, Watertight/Type 4, Dust-tight/Type 12 Raintight/Type 3, Watertight/Type 4 Raintight/Type 3, Watertight/Type 4 Raintight/Type 3 Size Range L, W, D Inside 4 x 4 x 2 to 72 x 30 x 16 4 x 4 x 2 to 72 x 30 x 16 4 x 4 x 3 to 72 x 30 x 16 4 x 4 x 4 to 72 x 30 x 16 4 x 4 x 3 to 36 x 36 x 12 Max. Conduit Opening Size 5 5 6 6 6 Cover Type Unflanged Overlapping Flanged External flanged recessed sidewalk Internal Flanged Cover Material Steel Cast iron Steel Steel (checkered) Steel
Mtg. Surface Surface Surface Flush Flush
4E
Length and width are inside dimensions. Depth is inside dimension without cover.
Drilled and Tapped Conduit Openings or Slip Holes:

All W-Series cast-iron junction boxes may be ordered with drilled and tapped conduit openings or slip holes - subject to minimum spacing limitations. To order a box from the factory with conduit openings, consult factory.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
775
4E
WJBF Checkered Cover Sidewalk Junction Boxes

Heavy Duty External Flanged for Flush Mounting
Applications:
WJBF boxes are primarily designed for surface mounting. WJBF heavy duty junction boxes are installed in conduit systems to: Act as pull box for conductors Provide openings and space for making splices and taps in conductors Provide for branch conduit runs Provide access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes Enclose and protect electrical equipment
Cat. # WJBF040404 WJBF060404 WJBF060604 WJBF060606 WJBF080604 WJBF080606 WJBF080804 WJBF080806 WJBF080808 WJBF100806 WJBF100808 WJBF101006 WJBF101008 WJBF120606 WJBF120806 WJBF120808 WJBF120810 WJBF121206 WJBF121208 WJBF121212 WJBF121218 WJBF140806 WJBF141410 WJBF161206 WJBF161208 WJBF161606 WJBF180806 WJBF180808 WJBF181006 WJBF181206 WJBF181208 WJBF181210 WJBF181212 WJBF181218 WJBF181806 WJBF181808 WJBF181812 WJBF181818 WJBF241208 WJBF241212 WJBF241808 WJBF241810 WJBF241812 WJBF241818 WJBF242412 WJBF242418 WJBF242424 WJBF302412 WJBF302418 WJBF362418 WJBF362424 Wall Thickness (in.) /4 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 5 /16 1 /4 1 /4 5 /16 5 /16 1 /4 5 /16 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 3 /8 5 /16 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8
1 1
Length (in.) 4 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 10 10 10 10 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 14 14 16 16 16 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 30 30 36 36
Width (in.) 4 4 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 10 10 6 8 8 8 12 12 12 12 8 14 12 12 16 8 8 10 12 12 12 12 12 18 18 18 18 12 12 18 18 18 18 24 24 24 24 24 24 24
Depth (in.) 4 4 4 6 4 6 4 6 8 6 8 6 8 6 6 8 10 6 8 12 18 6 10 6 8 6 6 8 6 6 8 10 12 18 6 8 12 18 8 12 8 10 12 18 12 18 24 12 18 18 24
Features:
Covers are suitable for vehicular traffic (H20 loading) Neoprene gasket cemented to cover Wide range of drilled and tapped conduit entrance sizes and locations permits extreme flexibility of use in conduit system Internal equipment mounting pads may be drilled and tapped for 1/4" 20 mounting screws Blind tapped into internal mounting pads Mounting straps are standard on smaller sized boxes up to 8x8x6, for larger sizes consult factory

CSA Standard C22.2 No. 25 Weatherproof Watertight NEMA 3, 4, 5 NEMA 250 CEC: Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class III Encl. 3, 4, 5 H20 Vehicle Load Rating*
*Self certify to H20 vehicle load rating equivalent to 16,000 lbs. on cover center.
4E
Standard Materials:
Feraloy iron alloy body Heavy-gauge steel (checkered) cover, mounting straps Neoprene gaskets Stainless steel cover screws
Standard Finishes:
Options:
Size Ranges:
4" x 4" x 2" to 72" x 30" x 16" 776
WJB Junction Boxes

Heavy Duty Flanged for Surface Mounting
Applications:
WJB boxes are primarily designed for surface mounting. WJB heavy duty junction boxes are installed in conduit systems to: Act as pull box for conductors Provide openings and space for making splices and taps in conductors Provide for branch conduit runs Provide access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes Enclose and protect electrical equipment
4E
Cat. # WJB040403 WJB040404 WJB060404 WJB060604 WJB060606 WJB080604 WJB080606 WJB080804 WJB080806 WJB080808 WJB100806 WJB100808 WJB101006 WJB101008 WJB120606 WJB120806 WJB120808 WJB120810 WJB121206 WJB121208 WJB121212 WJB121218 WJB140806 WJB141410 WJB161206 WJB161208 WJB161606 WJB180806 WJB180808 WJB181006 WJB181206 WJB181208 WJB181210 WJB181212 WJB181218 WJB181806 WJB181808 WJB181812 WJB181818 WJB241208 WJB241212 WJB241808 WJB241810 WJB241812 WJB241818 WJB242412 WJB242418 WJB242424 WJB302412 WJB302418 WJB362418 WJB362424 Wall Thickness (in.) /4 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 9 /16 9 /16 9 /16 9 /16 9 /16 9 /16 9 /16 9 /16
1 1
Length (in.) 4 4 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 10 10 10 10 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 14 14 16 16 16 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 30 30 36 36
Width (in.) 4 4 4 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 10 10 6 8 8 8 12 12 12 12 8 14 12 12 16 8 8 10 12 12 12 12 12 18 18 18 18 12 12 18 18 18 18 24 24 24 24 24 24 24
Depth (in.) 3 4 4 4 6 4 6 4 6 8 6 8 6 8 6 6 8 10 6 8 12 18 6 10 6 8 6 6 8 6 6 8 10 12 18 6 8 12 18 8 12 8 10 12 18 12 18 24 12 18 18 24
Features:
Covers are suitable for vehicular traffic (H2O loading) Neoprene cover gasket. Wide range of drilled and tapped conduit entrance sizes and locations permits extreme flexibility of use in conduit system. Internal equipment mounting pads may be drilled and tapped for 1/4" 20 mounting screws. Blind tapped into internal mounting pads. Mounting straps are standard on smaller sized boxes up to 8x8x6, for larger sizes consult factory

CSA Standard C22.2 No. 250 Weatherproof Watertight NEMA 3, 4 NEMA 250 CEC: Class II, E, F, G Class III Encl. 3, 4, 5 H2O Vehicle Load Rating
4E
Standard Materials:
Feraloy iron alloy body Heavy-gauge steel cover and mounting straps Neoprene gaskets Stainless steel cover screws
Standard Finishes:
Options:
Size Ranges:
4" x 4" x 2" to 72" x 30" x 16"
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
777
4E
WAB Junction Boxes

Heavy Duty Unflanged for Surface Mounting
Dust-tight Weatherproof NEMA 3, 4, 12
Applications:
Where a heavy duty dustproof, weatherproof enclosure is desired, WAB boxes are installed in conduit system to: Act as pull box for conductors Provide openings and space for making splices and taps in conductors Provide for branch conduit runs Provide access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes Enclose and protect electrical devices
Cat. # WAB040402 WAB040403 WAB040404 WAB050503 WAB050504 WAB060403 WAB060404 WAB060603 WAB060604 WAB060606 WAB080403 WAB080604 WAB080606 WAB080804 WAB080806 WAB080808 WAB090604 WAB100604 WAB100804 WAB100806 WAB101006 WAB120604 WAB120606 WAB120806 WAB120808 WAB121204 WAB121206 WAB121208 WAB160606 WAB161208 WAB181206 WAB181208 WAB181210 WAB181806 WAB181812 WAB241212* WAB242408* Wall Thickness (in.) /32 /16 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 7 /32 1 /4 3 /16 9 /32 5 /16 7 /32 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 1 /4 1 /4 9 /32 1 /4 9 /32 9 /32 9 /32 3 /8 9 /32 9 /32 9 /32 1 /4 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 3 /8 3 /8 7 /16 7 /16 11 /32
5 3 1
Features:
Flat neoprene cover gasket. Wide range of drilled and tapped and slip hole conduit entrance sizes and locations permits extreme flexibility of use in conduit system. Internal equipment mounting pads available blind tapped for 1/4" 20 mounting screws. Blind tapped into internal mounting pads. Mounting straps are standard on smaller sized boxes up to 8x8x6, for larger sizes consult factory
Length (in.) 4 4 4 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 10 10 10 10 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 16 16 18 18 18 18 18 24 24
Width (in.) 4 4 4 5 5 4 4 6 6 6 4 6 6 8 8 8 6 6 8 8 10 6 6 8 8 12 12 12 6 12 12 12 12 18 18 12 24
Depth (in.) 2 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 6 3 4 6 4 6 8 4 4 4 6 6 4 6 6 8 4 6 8 6 8 6 8 10 6 12 12 8

4E
Dust-tight Weatherproof NEMA 3, 4, 12 NEMA 250
Standard Materials:
Feraloy iron alloy body Heavy-gauge steel cover Neoprene gaskets Stainless steel cover screws Steel mounting straps
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy and heavy gauge steel hot dip galvanized
Options:
Description Factory installed mounting plate Material - all sizes, cast aluminum Drilled and tapped conduit holes and slip holes available, Consult Factory Suffix MP SA
*NEMA 3 only. For NEMA 4 in these sizes, use WCB Larger sizes available up to 72" x 30" x 16" - Consult Factory
Size Ranges:
4" x 4" x 2" to 72" x 30" x 16"
778
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
WCB Junction Boxes

Heavy Duty Overlapping Cover for Surface Mounting
Applications:
Where a heavy duty dust-tight, weatherproof, raintight, or watertight enclosure is desired, WCB boxes are installed in conduit systems to: Act as pull box for conductors Provide openings and space for making splices and taps in conductors Provide for branch conduit runs Provide access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes Enclose and protect electrical devices
Dust-tight Weatherproof Watertight Raintight NEMA 3, 4, 12
4E
Cat. # WCB040402 WCB040403 WCB040404 WCB050503 WCB050504 WCB060403 WCB060404 WCB060603 WCB060604 WCB060606 WCB080403 WCB080604 WCB080606 WCB080804 WCB080806 WCB080808 WCB090604 WCB100604 WCB100804 WCB100806 WCB101006 WCB120604 WCB120606 WCB120806 WCB120808 WCB121204 WCB121206 WCB121208 WCB160606 WCB161208 WCB181206 WCB181208 WCB181210 WCB181806 WCB181812 WCB241212 WCB242408 Wall Thickness (in.) /32 /16 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 1 /4 7 /32 1 /4 3 /16 9 /32 5 /16 7 /32 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 1 /4 1 /4 9 /32 1 /4 9 /32 9 /32 9 /32 3 /8 9 /32 9 /32 9 /32 1 /4 5 /16 5 /16 5 /16 3 /8 3 /8 7 /16 7 /16 11 /32
5 3
Features:
Flat neoprene cover gasket. Overlapping cover sheds environment. Wide range of drilled and tapped and slip hole conduit entrance sizes and locations permits maximum flexibility of use in conduit system. Internal equipment mounting pads available blind tapped for 1/4" 20 mounting screws. Blind tapped into internal mounting pads. Mounting straps are standard on smaller sized boxes up to 8x8x6, for larger sizes consult factory
Length (in.) 4 4 4 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 10 10 10 10 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 16 16 18 18 18 18 18 24 24
Width (in.) 4 4 4 5 5 4 4 6 6 6 4 6 6 8 8 8 6 6 8 8 10 6 6 8 8 12 12 12 6 12 12 12 12 18 18 12 24
Depth (in.) 2 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 6 3 4 6 4 6 8 4 4 4 6 6 4 6 6 8 4 6 8 6 8 6 8 10 6 12 12 8

Dust-tight Weatherproof Raintight Watertight NEMA 3, 4, 12 NEMA 250
4E
Standard Materials:
Feraloy iron alloy cover and body Neoprene gaskets Stainless steel cover screws Steel mounting straps
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy hot dip galvanized
Options:
Description Factory installed mounting plate Material - all sizes, cast aluminum Drilled and tapped conduit holes andslip holes available, Consult Factory Suffix MP SA
Size Ranges:
4" x 4" x 2" to 72" x 30" x 16"
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
779
4E
WEB Junction Box

Heavy Duty Internal Recess Flange for Flush Mounting
Dust-tight Raintight NEMA 3
Applications:
WEB Junction Boxes are installed: Where a heavy duty, dust-tight or raintight enclosure is desired To act as pull box for conductors To provide openings and space for making splices and taps in conductors To provide for branch conduit runs To provide access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes To enclose and protect electrical devices
Features:
Flat neoprene cover gasket Internal equipment mounting pads Stainless steel cover screws Internal ground screw
Cat. # WEB040403 WEB040404 WEB060604 WEB060606 WEB080804 WEB080806 WEB121206 WEB160606 WEB160806 WEB180808 WEB240606 WEB240808 WEB241010 WEB241210 WEB241212 WEB241812 WEB361212 WEB361812 WEB362412 WEB363612 Wall Thickness (in.) /32 /4 9 /32 1 /4 9 /32 1 /4 9 /32 9 /32 1 /4 5 /16 9 /32 5 /16 3 /8 5 /16 5 /16 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8 7 /16 7 /16
7 1
Length (in.) 4 4 6 6 8 8 12 16 16 18 24 24 24 24 24 24 36 36 36 36
Width (in.) 4 4 6 6 8 8 12 6 8 8 6 8 10 12 12 18 12 18 24 36
Depth (in.) 3 4 4 6 4 6 6 6 6 8 6 8 10 10 12 12 12 12 12 12

NEMA 250 NEMA 3
Standard Materials:
Feraloy iron alloy body, hot dip galvanized Heavy-gauge steel cover, hot dip galvanized Stainless steel cover screws Neoprene gaskets
4E
Options:
Description Suffix All boxes are available with optional mounting plate MP Material - all sizes, cast aluminum SA Drilled and tapped conduit holes and slip holes available, Consult Factory
780
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
RS, RSM and RSS Junction Boxes

Conduit Hub Plates and Gaskets
Applications:
RS, RSM, RSS junction boxes are installed in conduit systems to: Act as pull box for conductors Provide openings and space for making splices and taps in conductors Provide for branch conduit runs Provide access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes
Raintight NEMA 3
4E
Features:
Junction box bodies accept wide range of hub plates permitting varied hub arrangements and sizes Stocking a few components provides for many specific needs Future system expansion easily accomplished by substituting hub plates for currently installed plates Suitable for use where boxes with integral hubs cannot satisfy requirements Suitable for surface mounting outdoors or indoors in rigid conduit runs
Junction Boxes
Approximate Inside Dimensions
Size 8 /2 x 8 /2 x 4 81/ 2 x 41/2 x 4 41/2 x 41/2 x 4
1 1
Cat. # RS1 RSM1 RSS1

UL Standard: 514A CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 18
Replacement Cover Gaskets

4E
Size
Standard Materials:
Bodies and hub plates Feraloy iron alloy Gaskets cork
Cat. # GASK61 GASK63 GASK64
81/2 x 81/2 81/2 x 41/2 41/2 x 41/2
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint
Conduit Hub Plates

For 81/2 x 4 inch Sides of RS and RSM Boxes
Size /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3
1
For 41/2 x 4 inch Sides of RSM and RSS Boxes

Size One Hub Cat. # /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2
1
One Hub Cat. # RSP1 RSP2 RSP3 RSP4 RSP5 RSP6 RSP7 RSP8
Two Hub Cat. # RSP11 RSP22 RSP33 RSP44 RSP55 RSP66
Three Hub Cat. # RSP111 RSP222 RSP333 RSP444 RSP555
Two Hub Cat. # RSMP11 RSMP22
RSMP1 RSMP2 RSMP3 RSMP4 RSMP5 RSMP6 RSMP7
Replacement Hub Plate Gaskets
For 81/2 x 4 inch Sides of RS and RSM Boxes

Type Blank Hub Plate Cat. # RSP0
For 41/2 x 4 inch Sides of RSM and RSS Boxes

Size 8 /2 x 4
1
Cat. # GASK66
Size 4 /2 x 4
1
Cat. # GASK65
Type Blank Hub Plate
Cat. # RSMP0
Includes body, top cover with gasket, 4 gaskets for side plates, and 20 bolts. Hub plates only. Gaskets not included. For conduit liner ordering information, see page 822.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
781
4E
782
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Non-hazardous Applications
Description
Fiberglass Series NJB / NCE / NCS / NCD Series NJBW Series
5E
Page No. see page 784 see page 813 see page 816
5E
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
783
5E
Corrosion-Resistant Weatherproof UL Listed
Reliability you can count on for the most corrosive applications

Partnering with Cooper Crouse-Hinds and our dedicated team of industry experts can help you succeed. Since 1897, we have led the development of safer, more reliable ways to power the most challenging harsh and hazardous areas. Cooper Crouse-Hinds has long been established as a leader in enclosures for Hazardous, Industrial and Commercial applications. Enclosures are engineered and manufactured to perform through the most corrosive conditions needed by OEMs, MRO, Waste Water Treatment Facilities and Chemical Plants. These exceptionally durable, corrosion resistant enclosures can withstand extreme abuse and exposure to chemicals, water, and extreme conditions.
Enclosure knowledge and experience with:

Products that deliver superior performance Low maintenance choices, like durable non-metallic enclosures with features designed to provide optimum protection in the harshest environments Dedicated and expert sales support to help select products that perform reliably and cost effectively
A commitment to safety and productivity

Cooper Crouse-Hinds is helping more industrial facility owners, operators and engineers succeed each day safely and cost effectively. Its part of our commitment to focus on industries where our experience, expertise and products can make the biggest impact.

5E
PRODUCT GROUP CATALOG SERIES & SIZE MATERIALS Fiberglass reinforced thermoset polyester Poured polyurethane seamless gasket Recessed captive stainless steel screws 304 stainless steel used on all external hardware NUMBER OF SIZES ENVIRONMENAL RATING
Small Line Series 3" x 3" to 17" x 3"
11
UL/cUL CSA Std C22.2 NEMA Types 1, 3R, 4X, 6P, 12
Pushbutton Series 6" x 3" to 13.5" x 11.5" Inline and multi-hole configurations, 30mm and 22mm configurations offered Junction Box Series 6" x 4" to 20" x 16"
Fiberglass reinforced thermoset polyester Poured polyurethane seamless gasket Recessed captive stainless steel screws 304 stainless steel used on all external hardware Fiberglass reinforced thermoset polyester Poured polyurethane seamless gasket Recessed captive stainless steel screws 304 stainless steel used on all external hardware Fiberglass reinforced thermoset polyester Poured polyurethane seamless gasket Stainless steel screws 304 stainless steel used on all external hardware Fiberglass reinforced thermoset polyester Poured polyurethane seamless gasket Stainless steel screws 304 stainless steel used on all external hardware
21
76
Raised Cover Series 6" x 4" to 20" x 16"
33
Advantage Series 6" x 6" to 20" x 16"
36
UL/cUL CSA Std C22.2 NEMA Types 1, 3, 3S, 4X, 12, 13
784
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
5E
CATALOG SERIES
PRODUCT GROUP & SIZE Wall Mount Series 3R & 4X Series 16" x 10" to 48" x 36" NEMA 3R or 4X Wall Mount Series Large Series 48" x 36" to 72" x 49" Large & Free-standing enclosures with double door options Disconnect & Circuit Breaker Series 16" x 10" to 36" x 30" Industrial Control System applications Xtra Deep Series 6" x 4" to 20" x 16" Extra Deep Cover
MATERIALS Fiberglass reinforced thermoset polyester Poured polyurethane seamless gasket Stainless steel screws 304 stainless steel used on all external hardware
NUMBER OF SIZES
ENVIRONMENAL RATING
28
UL/cUL CSA Std C22.2 (3R) NEMA Types 1, 3R (4X) NEMA Types 1, 3, 3R, 4X, 12
Fiberglass reinforced thermoset polyester Poured polyurethane seamless gasket Recessed captive stainless steel screws 304 stainless steel used on all external hardware
5E
11
UL/cUL CSA Std C22.2 NEMA Types 1, 3, 4X, 12
Cooper Crouse-Hinds has a full line of Krydon material enclosures. These solid, one-piece construction enclosures are made of a proprietary formulation of fiberglass reinforced polyester that has high impact strength, is fire retardant, heat resistant and withstands weathering. Krydon enclosures are: Strong and durable while providing longer service life for equipment Class I, Division 2, Groups B,C,D rating on many Krydon products Are available in an expansive range of product groups Are available in hundreds of sizes and options
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
785
5E
The Cooper Crouse-Hinds Small Line Series offer a lightweight, compact, versatile solution for applications requiring tight or confined spaces. The Small Line Series houses everything from terminal blocks to small positional control. Available in a choice of two body styles, these enclosures are made of fiberglass reinforced polyester and have a memory retaining polyurethane gasket and stainless steel screws for exceptional corrosion and chemical resistance. The Small Line Series will hold up under the most extreme conditions and provide protection in adverse environments such as water, steam, vapor or chemicals.

Lift-off cover design with 4 cover screws Memory retaining continuous polyurethane gasket Captive stainless steel cover screws Chemical resistant fiberglass reinforced polyester Submersible, non-corrosive design Water-tight, dust-tight Non-conductive, impact resistant, UV resistant Material cuts, drills, punches, and saws with ease and accuracy Rounded edges, minimal protrusions or exposed pocket areas for assembly of dust and debris Smooth surface, no color variations, swirls or color pockets, no voids

Hot compression molded fiberglass reinforced thermoset polyester Poured polyurethane seamless gasket provides water-tight dusttight environmental seal Captive stainless steel screws 304 stainless steel used on all external hardware

UL/cUL 50, Types 1, 3R, 4X, 6P, 12 UL File Number E57656 CSA Std C22.2 - File 244248 Types 1, 3R, 4X, 6P, 12 NEMA Standard 250 - Types 1, 3R, 4X, 6P, 12 Temperature Range - (-76F to +250F) (-60C to +120C) Flammability Rating - UL94-5V Non-flame propagating
Options:
5E
FSJBS Inside HxWxD 3.13 x 3.03 x 2.70 5.38 x 3.03 x 2.87 6.00 x 3.19 x 3.63 7.82 x 3.03 x 2.87 8.26 x 3.19 x 3.63 8.75 x 3.03 x 2.87 10.51 x 3.19 x 3.63 13.19 x 3.03 x 2.87 16.75 x 3.03 x 2.87 6.90 x 5.90 x 2.88 9.15 x 5.90 x 2.88 4 Cover Screws With a Beveled Cover Design FSJBS030302 FSJBS050302 FSJBS060404 FSJBS080302 FSJBS080404 FSJBS090302 FSJBS110404 FSJBS140302 FSJBS170302 FSJS070603 CAP816804
FSJS 4 Cover Screws With a Flat Cover Design
NPT Size Mounting Plate**
FSJS070603 FSJS090603
FMP0706 FMP0906
* Flat Cover ** Available in: Aluminum (SA), Fiberglass (FG), Carbon Steel (C), and Stainless Steel (SS) To order, add the suffix to the end of the part number
786
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
5E
W B
C
M A
D
E
L K
N B
SECTION B-B
SECTION A-A
FSJS Configuration Dimensions In Inches (mm)

Catalog Number FSJS070603 FSJS090603 Overall H x W x D 7.63 x 6.63 x 3.19 (194 x 168 x 81) 9.87 x 6.63 x 3.19 (251 x 168 x 81) Inside A x B x C 6.90 x 5.90 x 2.88 (175 x 150 x 73) 9.15 x 5.90 x 2.88 (232 x 150 x 73) Mounting E x F 5.37 x 5.63 (137 x 143) 7.62 x 5.63 (194 x 143) J 2.48 (63) 2.48 (63) K 5.3 (137) 7.62 (194) L 4.25 (108) 4.25 (108) M 4.52 (115) 6.77 (172) N Weight 4.9 3 lbs. (124) 4.9 3 lbs. (124)
5E
FSJBS Configuration Dimensions In Inches (mm)

Catalog Number FSJBS030302 FSJBS050302 FSJBS060404 FSJBS080302 FSJBS080404 FSJBS090302 FSJBS110404 FSJBS140302 FSJBS170302 Overall H x W x D 3.72 x 3.63 x 2.95 (95 x 92 x 75) 5.97 x 3.63 x 3.14 (152 x 92 x 80) 6.63 x 3.81 x 3.89 (168 x 97 x 99) 8.41 x 3.63 x 3.14 (214 x 92 x 80) 8.88 x 3.81 x 3.89 (225 x 97 x 99) 9.35 x 3.63 x 3.14 (237 x 92 x 80) 11.13 x 3.81 x 3.89 (283 x 97 x 99) 13.78 x 3.63 x 3.14 (350 x 92 x 80) 17.35 x 3.63 x 3.14 (441 x 92 x 80) Inside A x B x C 3.13 x 3.03 x 2.70 (79 x 77 x 69) 5.38 x 3.03 x 2.87 (137 x 77 x 73) 6.00 x 3.19 x 3.63 (153 x 81 x 92) 7.82 x 3.03 x 2.87 (199 x 77 x 73) 8.26 x 3.19 x 3.63 (210 x 81 x 92) 8.75 x 3.03 x 2.87 (222 x 77 x 73) 10.51 x 3.19 x 3.63 (267 x 81 x 92) 13.19 x 3.03 x 2.87 (335 x 77 x 73) 16.75 x 3.03 x 2.87 (426 x 77 x 73) I 0 (0) 4.72 (120) 5.31 (135) 7.16 (182) 7.56 (192) 8.10 (206) 9.81 (249) 12.53 (318) 16.10 (409) J 0 (0) 2.38 (61) 2.50 (64) 2.38 (60) 2.50 (64) 2.38 (60) 2.50 (64) 2.38 (60) 2.38 (60) K 2.31 (59) 4.56 (116) 4.88 (124) 7.00 (178) 7.13 (181) 7.94 (202) 9.37 (238) 12.37 (314) 15.94 (405) L 2.75 (70) 2.75 (70) 2.94 (75) 2.75 (70) 2.94 (75) 2.75 (70) 2.94 (75) 2.75 (70) 2.75 (70) M 1.59 (40) 3.84 (98) 4.13 (105) 6.28 (160) 6.38 (162) 7.22 (183) 8.63 (219) 11.66 (296) 15.22 (387) N 2.03 (52) 2.03 (52) 2.19 (56) 2.03 (52) 2.19 (56) 2.03 (52) 2.19 (56) 2.03 (52) 2.03 (52) Weight 1 lb. 1 lb. 2 lbs. 2 lbs. 2 lbs. 2 lbs. 2 lbs. 2 lbs. 3 lbs.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
787
5E
The Cooper Crouse-Hinds Pushbutton Series offer a solution for applications requiring an enclosure with multiple pre-drilled openings for pushbuttons available in 30mm and 22mm configurations. The notched keyhole design and the ability to order up to 25 holes, makes this versatile series a perfect match for your general purpose electrical and control station applications. Available in a choice of two body designs, these enclosures are made of fiberglass reinforced polyester and have a memory retaining polyurethane gasket and stainless steel screws for exceptional corrosion and chemical resistance. The Pushbutton Series will hold up under the most extreme conditions and provide protection in adverse conditions such as water, steam, vapor or chemicals.

Lift-off cover design with 4 cover screws Memory retaining continuous polyurethane gasket Captive stainless steel cover screws Full metal grounding strap Notched key hole design Chemical resistant fiberglass reinforced polyester Submersible, non-corrosive design Water-tight, dust-tight Non-conductive, impact resistant, UV resistant Material cuts, drills, punches, and saws with ease and accuracy Rounded edges, minimal protrusions or exposed pocket areas for assembly of dust and debris Smooth surface, no color variations, swirls or color pockets, no voids

Hot compression molded fiberglass reinforced thermoset polyester Poured polyurethane seamless gasket provides water-tight dust-tight environmental seal Captive stainless steel screws 304 stainless steel used on all external hardware Stainless steel beaded cover retention chain on the FPBM series

5E
Options:
30mm Holes Pushbutton 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FPB31 FPB32 FPB33 FPB34 FPB35 FPB36 FPB37
Inside H x W x D 6.00 x 3.19 x 3.63 6.00 x 3.19 x 3.63 6.00 x 3.19 x 3.63 8.26 x 3.19 x 3.63
22mm Pushbutton FPB21 FPB22 FPB23 FPB24
Inside HxWxD 5.72 x 5.72 x 4.45 7.73 x 5.74 x 4.45 9.73 x 7.73 x 3.98 9.73 x 7.73 x 3.98 11.79 x 9.80 x 4.94 11.79 x 9.80 x 4.94 13.53 x 11.55 x 5.94
30mm Multi-Hole Holes Pushbutton 4 6 9 12 16 20 25 FMP0606C FMP0806C FMP1008C FMP1008C FMP1210C FMP1210C FMP1412C
Mounting Plate* FMP0606 FMP0806 FMP1008 FMP1008 FMP1210 FMP1210 FMP1412
10.51 x 3.19 x 3.63 FPB25 10.51 x 3.19 x 3.63 FPB26 13.19 x 3.03 x 2.87 FPB27
788
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
5E
30mm
W J
D
B
K
O
C
2.25 (57)
N B
I A A 2.25 (57)
A
1.210 (31)
.672 (17)
.190 (5)
22mm
SECTION B-B
W
L
J B
D K
O
C
1.56 (40)
N B
5E
A
K
I A A
1.56 (40)
SECTION A-A
1.56 (40)
.125 (3)
.875 (22)
.468 (12)
.190 (5)
Multi-Hole
P
W F B HOLE DIA. 4 PLC'S.
2.25 (57)
.190 (5)
C
J
2.25 N (57)
D B
A K E H
1.210 (31)
.672 (17)
L SECTION A-A
B P 2.25 (57)
M SECTION B-B
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
789
5E

Catalog Number FPB31 FPB32 FBP33 FPB34 FBP35 FBP36 FBP37 Overall H x W x D 6.63 x 3.81 x 3.89 (168 x 97 x 99) 6.63 x 3.81 x 3.89 (168 x 97 x 99) 8.88 x 3.81 x 3.89 (225 x 97 x 99) 11.13 x 3.81 x 3.89 (283 x 97 x 99) 13.78 x 3.63 x 3.14 (350 x 92 x 80) 17.35 x 3.63 x 3.14 (441 x 92 x 80) 17.35 x 3.63 x 3.14 (441 x 92 x 80) Inside A x B x C 6.00 x 3.19 x 3.63 (153 x 81 x 92) 6.00 x 3.19 x 3.63 (153 x 81 x 92) 8.26 x 3.19 x 3.63 (210 x 81 x 92) 10.51 x 3.19 x 3.63 (267 x 81 x 92) 13.19 x 3.03 x 2.87 (335 x 77 x 73) 16.75 x 3.03 x 2.87 (426 x 77 x 73) 16.75 x 3.03 x 2.87 (426 x 77 x 73) I 5.31 (135) 5.31 (135) 7.56 (192) 9.81 (249) 12.53 (318) 16.1 (409) 16.1 (409) J 2.5 (64) 2.5 (64) 2.5 (64) 2.5 (64) 2.38 (60) 2.38 (60) 2.38 (60) K 4.88 (124) 4.88 (124) 7.13 (181) 9.37 (238) 12.37 (314) 15.94 (405) 15.94 (405) L 2.94 (75) 2.94 (75) 2.94 (75) 2.94 (75) 2.75 (70) 2.75 (70) 2.75 (70) M 4.13 (105) 4.13 (105) 6.38 (162) 8.63 (219) 11.66 (296) 15.22 (387) 15.22 (387) N 2.19 (56) 2.19 (56) 2.19 (56) 2.19 (56) 2.03 (52) 2.03 (52) 2.03 (52) O 3.31 (84) 2.19 (56) 2.19 (56) 2.19 (56) 2.39 (61) 3.05 (77) 1.92 (49) Weight 2 lbs. 2 lbs. 2 lbs. 2 lbs. 2 lbs. 3 lbs. 3 lbs.

Catalog Number FPB21 FPB22 FPB23 Overall H x W x D 6.63 x 3.81 x 3.89 (168 x 97 x 99) 6.63 x 3.81 x 3.89 (168 x 97 x 99) 6.63 x 3.81 x 3.89 (168 x 97 x 99) 8.88 x 3.81 x 3.89 (225 x 97 x 99) 11.13 x 3.81 x 3.89 (283 x 97 x 99) 11.13 x 3.81 x 3.89 (283 x 97 x 99) 13.78 x 3.63 x 3.14 (350 x 92 x 80) Inside A x B x C 6.00 x 3.19 x 3.63 (153 x 81 x 92) 6.00 x 3.19 x 3.63 (153 x 81 x 92) 6.00 x 3.19 x 3.63 (153 x 81 x 92) 8.26 x 3.19 x 3.63 (210 x 81 x 92) 10.51 x 3.19 x 3.63 (267 x 81 x 92) 10.51 x 3.19 x 3.63 (267 x 81 x 92) 13.19 x 3.03 x 2.87 (335 x 77 x 73) I 5.31 (135) 5.31 (135) 5.31 (135) 7.56 (192) 9.81 (249) 9.81 (249) 12.53 (318) J 2.5 (64) 2.5 (64) 2.5 (64) 2.5 (64) 2.5 (64) 2.5 (64) 2.38 (60) K 4.88 (124) 4.88 (124) 4.88 (124) 7.13 (181) 9.37 (238) 9.37 (238) 12.37 (314) L 2.94 (75) 2.94 (75) 2.94 (75) 2.94 (75) 2.94 (75) 2.94 (75) 2.75 (70) M 4.13 (105) 4.13 (105) 4.13 (105) 6.38 (162) 8.63 (219) 8.63 (219) 11.66 (296) N 2.19 (56) 2.19 (56) 2.19 (56) 2.19 (56) 2.19 (56) 2.19 (56) 2.03 (52) O 3.31 (84) 2.53 (64) 1.75 (44) 2.09 (53) 2.44 (62) 1.66 (42) 2.20 (56) Weight 2 lbs. 2 lbs. 2 lbs. 2 lbs. 2 lbs. 3 lbs. 3 lbs.
5E
FPB24 FPB25 FPB26 FPB27
Multi-Hole Pushbutton Series - Configuration Dimensions In Inches (mm)

Catalog Number FPBM34 Overall HxWxD 7.50 x 7.50 x 4.75 (191 x 191 x 121) 9.62 x 7.50 x 4.74 (244 x 191 x 121) 11.62 x 9.41 x 4.25 (295 x 239 x 108) 11.62 x 9.41 x 4.25 (295 x 239 x 108) Inside AxBxC 5.72 x 5.72 x 4.45 (145 x 145 x 113) 7.73 x 5.74 x 4.45 (196 x 146 x 113) 9.73 x 7.73 x 3.98 (247 x 196 x 101) 9.73 x 7.73 x 3.98 (247 x 196 x 101) Mounting ExF 6.75 x 4 171 x 101) 8.88 x 4 (225 x 101) 10.75 x 6 (273 x 152) 10.75 x 6 (273 x 152) 12.75 x 8 (324 x 203) 12.75 x 8 324 x 203) J K L 4.25 (108) 4.25 (108) 6.25 (159) 6.25 (159) 8.25 (209) 8.25 (209) 10.25 (260) M 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) N 7.52 (191) 9.5 (242) 11.35 (288) 11.35 (288) 13.41 (341) 13.41 (341) 15.47 (393) O 2.64 (67) 2.64 (67) 3.43 (87) 2.3 (58) 3.33 (85) 2.2 (56) 3.24 (82) P 2.64 (67) 2.51 (64) 2.45 (62) 2.45 (62) 2.3 (58) 2.1 (53) 2.25 (57) Hole Dia. 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) Weight 2.75 lbs.
4 4.25 (101) (108) 4 6.25 (101) (159) 3.5 (89) 3.5 (89) 8.25 (209) 8.25 (209)
FPBM36
3.5 lbs.
FPBM39
5 lbs.
FPBM312
5 lbs.
FPBM316
13.56 x 11.43 x 5.21 11.79 x 9.80 x 4.94 (344 x 291 x 132) (299 x 249 x 125) 13.56 x 11.43 x 5.21 11.79 x 9.80 x 4.94 (344 x 291 x 132) (299 x 249 x 125)
4.5 10.25 (114) (260) 4.5 10.25 (114) (260) 5.37 12.25 (137) (311)
6.5 lbs.
FPBM320
6.5 lbs.
FPBM325
15.50 x 13.50 x 6.25 13.53 x 11.55 x 5.94 14.62 x 10 (394 x 343 x 159) (344 x 293 x 151) (371 x 254)
8.5 lbs.
790
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
5E
The Cooper Crouse-Hinds Junction Box Series offer an extensive selection to the industrial application requiring a vast number of configurations and sizes. The Junction Box Series is available in 12 different sizes, each offering a multitude of durable cover options with features such as stainless steel hinges, padlock covers and windows. These enclosures are made of fiberglass reinforced polyester and have a poured polyurethane seamless gasket that provides a watertight and dust-tight environmental seal for exceptional corrosion and chemical resistance. The durable Junction Box Series will hold up under the most extreme applications and provide protection and reliability in the most adverse conditions.

Memory retaining continuous polyurethane gasket Captive stainless steel cover screws Chemical resistant fiberglass reinforced polyester Submersible, non-corrosive design Water-tight, dust-tight Non-conductive, impact resistant, UV resistant Material cuts, drills, punches, and saws with ease and accuracy Rounded edges, minimal protrusions or exposed pocket areas for assembly of dust and debris Smooth surface, no color variations, swirls or color pockets, no voids Stainless steel retention chain on screw cover series Full-length stainless steel hinges on the hinge cover series


UL/cUL 50, Types 1, 3, 4X, 6P, 12 UL File Number E57656 CSA Std C22.2 - File 244248 Types 1, 3, 4X, 6P, 12 NEMA Standard 250 - Types 1, 3, 4X, 6P, 12 Temperature Range - (-76F to +250F) (-60C to +120C) Flammability Rating - UL94-5V Window flammability - UL94V-0 Non-flame propagating
5E
Inside H x W x D 5.84 x 3.85 x 4.45 5.72 x 5.72 x 4.45 7.73 x 5.74 x 4.45 7.73 x 7.73 x 4.82 9.73 x 7.73 x 3.98 11.79 x 9.80 x 4.94 11.70 x 11.70 x 6.29 14.00 x 7.00 x 6.56 13.53 x 11.55 x 5.94 15.63 x 13.60 x 5.94 17.69 x 15.69 x 8.45 19.72 x 15.72 x 8.45
2 Cover 4 Cover Screws With Screws With a Hinged Lift Off Cover Cover FJS060404 FJS060604 FJS080604 FJS080804 FJS100804 FJS121005 FJS121206 FJS140707 FJS141206 FJS161406 FJS181608 FJS201608 FJHS060404 FJHS060604 FJHS080604 FJHS080804 FJHS100804 FJHS121005 FJHS121206 FJHS140707 FJHS141206 FJHS161406 FJHS181608 FJHS201608
2 Cover Screws Hinged Cover With a Hinged With a Padlock Cover With Latch Window FJHP060404 FJHP060604 FJHP080604 FJHP080804 FJHP100804 FJHP121005 FJHP121206 FJHP140707 FJHP141206 FJHP161406 FJHP181608 FJHP201608 FJHSW060404 FJHSW060604 FJHSW080604 FJHSW080804 FJHSW100804 FJHSW121005 FJHSW121206 FJHSW140707 FJHSW141206 FJHSW161406 FJHSW181608 FJFHPW201608
Hinged Cover With a Window & Padlock Latch FJHPW060404 FJHPW060604 FJHPW080604 FJHPW080804 FJHPW100804 FJHPW121005 FJHPW121206 FJHPW140707 FJHPW141206 FJHPW161406 FJHPW181608 FJHPW201608
Fiberglass Hinged Cover With a Window Mounting & Padlock Latch Plate* FMP0604 FMP0606 FJFHPW080604 FMP0806 FJFHPW080804 FMP0808 FJFHPW100804 FMP1008 FJFHPW121005 FMP1210 FJFHPW121206 FMP1212 FJFHPW140707 FMP1407 FJFHPW141206 FMP1412 FJFHPW161406 FMP1614 FJFHPW181608 FMP1816 FJFHPW201608 FMP2016
* Available in: Aluminum (SA), Fiberglass (FG), Carbon Steel (C), and Stainless Steel (SS) To order, add the suffix to the end of the part number Available with the deep cover option, please add a D to the part number. For example, FJDHS100804 Not available with a 6P rating
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
791
5E
W
L
J B
D K
SECTION A-A
B SECTION B-B

Catalog Number FJS060404 FJHS060404 FJHP060404 FJHPW060404 FJHSW060404 FJS060604 FJHS060604 FJHP060604 FJHPW060604 FJHSW060604 FJS080604 FJHS080604 FJHP080604 FJHPW080604 FJHSW080604 FJFHPW080604 FJS080804 FJHS080804 FJHP080804 FJHPW080804 FJHSW080804 FJFHPW080804 FJS100804 FJHS100804 FJHP100804 FJHPW100804 FJHSW100804 FJFHPW100804 FJDS100804* FJDHS100804* FJDHP100804* FJDHPW100804* FJDHSW100804* FJDFHPW100804* FJS121005 FJHS121005 FJHP121005 FJHPW121005 FJHSW121005 FJFHPW121005 Overall HxWxD 7.50 x 5.43 x 4.75 (191 x 138 x 121) Inside AxBxC Window Area Mounting ExF 6.75 x 2 (171 x 51) J K L 2.25 (57) M 0.25 (6) N 7.39 (188) Hole Dia. 0.31 (8) Weight
5.84 x 3.85 x 4.45 4.25 x 2.25 (148 x 98 x 113) (108 x 57)
4 4.25 (101) (108)
2.5 lbs.
5E
7.50 x 7.50 x 4.75 (191 x 191 x 121)
5.72 x 5.72 x 4.45 4.25 x 4.25 (145 x 145 x 113) (108 x 108)
6.75 x 4 (171 x 101)
4 4.25 (101) (108)
4.25 (108)
0.25 (6)
7.52 (191)
0.31 (8)
2.75 lbs.
9.62 x 7.50 x 4.74 (244 x 191 x 121)
7.73 x 5.74 x 4.45 6.25 x 4.25 (196 x 146 x 113) (159 x 108)
8.88 x 4 (225 x 101)
4 6.25 (101) (159)
4.25 (108)
0.25 (6)
9.5 (242)
0.31 (8)
3.5 lbs.
9.56 x 9.38 x 4.89 (243 x 238 x 124)
7.73 x 7.73 x 4.64 8.75 x 6.00 (196 x 196 x 118) (222 x 152)
8.75 x 6.00 (222 x 152)
4.06 6.25 (103) (159)
6.25 (159)
0.25 (6)
9.37 (238)
0.31 (8)
1.71 lbs.
11.62 x 9.41 x 4.25 (295 x 239 x 108)
9.73 x 7.73 x 3.98 8.25 x 6.25 (247 x 196 x 101) (210 x 159)
10.75 x 6 (273 x 152)
3.5 (89)
8.25 (209)
6.25 (159)
0.25 (6)
11.35 (288)
0.31 (8)
5 lbs.
11.62 x 9.37 x 5.06 (295 x 238 x 129)
9.73 x 7.73 x 4.83 8.25 x 6.25 (247 x 196 x 123) (210 x 159)
10.75 x 6 (273 x 152)
4.37 8.25 (111) (209)
6.25 (159)
0.25 (6)
11.37 (289)
0.31 (8)
5 lbs.
13.56 x 11.43 x 5.21 11.79 x 9.80 x 4.94 10.25 x 8.25 12.75 x 8 (344 x 291 x 132) (299 x 249 x 125) (260 x 210) (324 x 203)
4.5 10.25 (114) (260)
8.25 (209)
0.25 (6)
13.41 (341)
0.31 (8)
6.5 lbs.
*Deep cover - center of cover raised 3/4".
792
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
5E

Catalog Number FJS121206 FJHS121206 FJHP121206 FJHPW121206 FJHSW121206 FJFHPW121206 FJS140707 FJHS140707 FJHP140707 FJHPW140707 FJHSW140707 FJFHPW140707 FJS141206 FJHS141206 FJHP141206 FJHPW141206 FJHSW141206 FJFHPW141206 FJS161406 FJHS161406 FJHP161406 FJHPW161406 FJHSW161406 FJFHPW161406 FJS181608 FJHS181608 FJHP181608 FJHPW181608 FJHSW181608 FJFHPW181608 FJS201608 FJHS201608 FJHP201608 FJHPW201608 FJHSW201608 FJFHPW201608 Overall HxWxD Inside AxBxC Window Area Mounting ExF J K L M N Hole Dia. Weight
13.56 x 13.38 x 6.36 11.70 x 11.70 x 6.11 12.75 x 10.00 (344 x 340 x 161) (297 x 297 x 155) (324 x 254)
12.75 x 10.00 (324 x 254)
5.53 10.25 (140) (260)
10.25 (260)
0.25 (6)
13.38 (340)
0.31 (8)
3.2 lbs.
15.87 x 8.75 x 6.81 (403 x 222 x 173)
14.00 x 7.00 x 6.56 (356 x 178 x 167)
12.75 x 5.75 (324 x 146)
15 x 5 (381 x 127)
6.12 12.25 (156) (311)
5.25 (133)
0.25 (6)
15.75 (400)
0.31 (8)
6.25 lbs.
15.50 x 13.50 x 6.25 13.53 x 11.55 x 5.94 12.25 x 10.25 (394 x 343 x 159) (344 x 293 x 151) (311 x 260)
14.62 x 10 (371 x 254)
5.37 12.25 (137) (311)
10.25 (260)
0.25 (6)
15.47 (393)
0.31 (8)
8.5 lbs.
17.53 x 15.46 x 6.23 15.63 x 13.60 x 5.94 14.25 x 12.25 (445 x 393 x 158) (397 x 345 x 151) (362 x 311)
16.75 x 12 (425 x 305)
5.36 14.25 (136) (362)
12.25 (311)
0.25 (6)
17.45 (443)
0.31 (8)
11.5 lbs.
19.62 x 17.61 x 8.82 17.69 x 15.69 x 8.45 16.25 x 14.25 (498 x 447 x 224) (449 x 399 x 215) (413 x 362)
18.88 x 12 (479 x 305)
7.99 16.25 (203) (413)
14.25 (362)
0.25 (6)
19.61 (498)
0.31 (8)
19.25 lbs.
5E
22.00 x 17.68 x 8.83 19.72 x 15.72 x 8.45 18.25 x 14.25 (559 x 449 x 224) (501 x 399 x 215) (464 x 362)
21.25 x 10.00 (540 x 254)
8 18.25 (203) (464)
14.25 (362)
0.25 (6)
21.68 (551)
0.31 (8)
20.25 lbs.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
793
5E
The Cooper Crouse-Hinds Raised Cover Series offer a solution for applications requiring an enclosure with a raised or deeper cover. The deeper cover is suitable for panel mounting and for use as an operator interface in industrial equipment control stations when required. The deeper cover allows every cubic inch of valuable internal enclosure space to be used. These enclosures are made of fiberglass reinforced polyester and have a poured polyurethane seamless gasket that provides a water-tight and dust-tight environmental seal for exceptional corrosion and chemical resistance. The Raised Cover Series will hold up under the most extreme applications and provide protection and reliability in highend electronics applications, harsh corrosive environments, and industrial applications both indoors and out.

Memory retaining continuous polyurethane gasket Molded in mounting flange Captive stainless steel cover screws Chemical resistant fiberglass reinforced polyester Submersible, non-corrosive design Water-tight, dust-tight Non-conductive, impact resistant, UV resistant Material cuts, drills, punches, and saws with ease and accuracy Rounded edges, minimal protrusions or exposed pocket areas for assembly of dust and debris Smooth surface, no color variations, swirls or color pockets, no voids


5E
4 Cover Screws With Lift Off Cover FRCJS060406 FRCJS060606 FRCJS080606 FRCJS080805 FRCJS100806 FRCJS121006 FRCJS121208 FRCJS141208 FRCJS161408 FRCJS181610 FRCJS201610
2 Cover Screws With a Hinged Cover FRCJHS060406 FRCJHS060606 FRCJHS080606 FRCJHS080805 FRCJHS100806 FRCJHS121006 FRCJHS121208 FRCJHS141208 FRCJHS161408 FRCJHS181610 FRCJHS201610
Hinged Cover With a Padlock Latch FRCJHP060406 FRCJHP060606 FRCJHP080606 FRCJHP080805 FRCJHP100806 FRCJHP121006 FRCJHP121208 FRCJHP141208 FRCJHP161408 FRCJHP181610 FRCJHP201610
794
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
5E
W
J B
SECTION A-A
B SECTION B-B

Catalog Number FRCJS060406 FRCJHS060406 FRCJHP060406 FRCJS060606 FRCJHS060606 FRCJHP060606 FRCJS080606 FRCJHS080606 FRCJHP080606 FRCJS080805 FRCJHS080805 FRCJHP080805 FRCJS100806 FRCJHS100806 FRCJHP100806 FRCJS121006 FRCJHS121006 FRCJHP121006 FRCJS121208 FRCJHS121208 FRCJHP121208 FRCJS141208 FRCJHS141208 FRCJHP141208 FRCJS161408 FRCJHS161408 FRCJHP161408 FRCJS181610 FRCJHS181610 FRCJHP181610 FRCJS201610 FRCJHS201610 FRCJHP201610 Overall HxWxD
7.50 x 5.47 x 6.22 (191 x 139 x 158) 7.50 x 7.52 x 6.22 (191 x 191 x 158) 9.62 x 7.46 x 6.22 (244 x 190 x158) 9.56 x 9.38 x 6.26 (243 x 238 x 159) 11.62 x 9.37 x 6.61 (295 x 238 x 168) 13.56 x 11.43 x 6.61 (344 x 291 x 168) 13.56 x 13.38 x 7.73 (344 x 340 x 196) 15.50 x 13.38 x 7.69 (394 x 340 x 195) 17.53 x 15.43 x 7.71 (445 x 392 x 196)
Inside AxBxC
5.84 x 3.85 x 5.95 (148 x 98 x 151) 5.72 x 5.72 x 5.95 (145 x 145 x 151) 7.73 x 5.74 x 5.95 (196 x 146 x 151) 7.73 x 7.73 x 6.01 (196 x 196 x 153) 9.73 x 7.73 x 6.36 (247 x 196 x 162) 11.79 x 9.80 x 6.32 (299 x 249 x 161) 11.70 x 11.70 x 7.48 (297 x 297 x 190) 13.53 x 11.55 x 7.45 (344 x 293 x 189) 15.63 x 13.60 x 7.45 (397 x 345 x 189)
Mounting ExF
K
4.25 (108) 4.25 (108) 6.25 (159) 6.25 (159) 8.25 (209)
L
2.25 (57) 4.25 (108) 4.25 (108) 6.25 (159) 6.25 (159)
O
5.31 (135) 5.34 (136) 7.25 (185) 7.17 (182)
P
3.34 (85) 5.31 (135) 5.28 (134) 7.17 (182) 7.38 (188) 9.23 (234)
Hole Dia. Weight

0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 2.5 lbs.
5.84 x 3.85 x 5.95 5.49 (148 x 98 x 151) (140) 6.75 x 4 (171 x 101) 8.88 x 4 (225 x 101) 8.75 x 6.00 (222 x 152) 10.75 x 6 (273 x 152) 12.75 x 8 (324 x 203) 12.75 x 10.00 (324 x 254) 14.62 x 10 (371 x 254) 16.75 x 12 (425 x 305) 5.49 (140) 5.49 (140) 5.43 (138) 5.91 (150) 5.87 (149) 6.90 (175) 6.87 (174) 6.87 (174) 9.86 (250) 9.87 (251)
0.25 7.45 (6) (189) 0.25 7.52 (6) (191) 0.25 9.36 (6) (238) 0.25 9.37 (6) (238)
5E
2.75 lbs. 3.5 lbs. 4 lbs.
0.25 11.38 9.3 (6) (289) (236) 0.25 13.41 11.2 (6) (341) (284)
5 lbs.
10.25 8.25 (260) (209)
6.5 lbs.
10.25 10.25 0.25 13.38 11.17 11.17 0.31 (260) (260) (6) (340) (284) (284) (8) 12.25 10.25 0.25 15.42 13.2 (311) (260) (6) (392) (335) 14.25 12.25 0.25 17.43 15.2 (362) (311) (6) (443) (386) 11.16 0.31 (284) (8) 13.24 0.31 (336) (8)
7.4 lbs.
8.5 lbs.
11.5 lbs.
19.62 x 17.48 x 10.62 17.69 x 15.69 x 10.31 18.88 x 12 (498 x 444 x 270) (449 x 399 x 262) (479 x 305) 22.00 x 17.56 x 10.64 19.72 x 15.72 x 10.33 21.25 x 10.00 (559 x 446 x 270) (501 x 399 x 262) (540 x 254)
16.25 14.25 0.25 19.49 17.25 15.25 0.31 (413) (362) (6) (495) (438) (387) (8) 18.25 14.25 0.25 21.56 19.31 15.39 0.31 (464) (362) (6) (548) (490) (391) (8)
19.25 lbs.
20.25 lbs.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
795
5E
The Cooper Crouse-Hinds Xtra Deep Series offer a solution for applications requiring an extra deep enclosure. The deep, durable enclosure has nearly equal capacity in both the cover and the base, giving you ample room for your cover or mounting plate components. The fiberglass reinforced polyester enclosure with flange mount base, stainless steel hardware and poured polyurethane seamless gasket provides exceptional corrosion and chemical resistance in a watertight and dust-tight environmental seal. The Xtra Deep Series will hold up under the most extreme applications and provide protection and reliability in high-end electronics applications, harsh corrosive environments, and industrial applications both indoors and out.

Memory retaining continuous polyurethane gasket Integral mounting flange Molded in panel mounting inserts Chemical resistant fiberglass reinforced polyester Non-corrosive design Full length stainless steel hinge Water-tight, dust-tight Non-conductive, impact resistant, UV resistant Material cuts, drills, punches, and saws with ease and accuracy Rounded edges, minimal protrusions or exposed pocket areas for assembly of dust and debris Smooth surface, no color variations, swirls or color pockets, no voids

Hot compression molded fiberglass reinforced thermoset polyester Poured polyurethane seamless gasket provides water-tight dusttight environmental seal 304 stainless steel used on all external hardware Molded in mounting flange Panel mounting capability for fixed rear panel Bosses utilize threaded brass inserts accepting 10-32 screws

5E
UL/cUL 50, Types 1, 3, 4X, 12 UL File Number E57656 CSA Std C22.2 - File 244248 Types 1, 3, 4X, 12 NEMA Standard 250 - Types 1, 3, 4X, 12 Temperature Range - (-76F to +250F) (-60C to +120C) Flammability Rating - UL94-5V Non-flame propagating
Padlockable Twist Latch FXDJ060408 FXDJ060608 FXDJ080608 FXDJ080808 FXDJ100808 FXDJ121010 FXDJ121212 FXDJ141212 FXDJ161412 FXDJ181617 FXDJ201617
796
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
5E
5E

Catalog Number FXDJ060408 FXDJ060608 FXDJ08608 FXDJ080808 FXDJ100808 FXDJ121010 FXDJ121212 FXDJ141212 FXDJ161412 FXDJ181617 FXDJ201617 Overall HxWxD 7.50 x 4.94 x 9.07 (190 x 125 x 230) 7.50 x 6.88 x 9.07 (190 x 175 x 230) 9.62 x 6.84 x 9.07 (244 x 174 x 230) 9.56 x 8.84 x 9.43 (243 x 224 x 239) 11.62 x 8.81 x 8.09 (295 x 224 x 206) 13.56 x 10.83 x 10.06 (344 x 275 x 256) 13.56 x 12.84 x 12.37 (344 x 326 x 314) 15.50 x 12.83 x 12.06 (394 x 326 x 306) 17.53 x 14.88 x 12.05 (445 x 378 x 306) 19.62 x 16.91 x 17.19 (498 x 429 x 436) 22.00 x 17.00 x 17.21 (558 x 431 x 437) Inside AxBxC 5.84 x 3.85 x 8.81 (148 x 98 x 224) 5.72 x 5.72 x 8.81 (145 x 145 x 224) 7.73 x 5.74 x 8.82 (196 x 146 x 224) 7.73 x 7.73 x 9.18 (196 x 196 x 233) 9.73 x 7.73 x 7.84 (247 x 196 x 199) 11.79 x 9.80 x 9.81 (299 x 249 x 249) 11.70 x 11.70 x 12.12 (297 x 297 x 308) 13.50 x 11.55 x11.81 (343 x 293 x 300) 17.53 x 14.88 x 12.05 (445 x 378 x 306) 17.69 x 15.69 x 16.81 (449 x 398 x 427) 19.71 x 15.71 x 16.81 (501 x 399 x 427) Mounting ExF 6.75 x 2.00 (171 x 51) 6.75 x 4.00 (171 x 101) 8.88 x 4.00 (225 x 101) 8.75 x 6.00 (222 x 152) 10.75 x 6.00 (273 x 152) 12.75 x 8.00 (324 x 203) 12.75 x 10.00 (324 x 254) 14.62 x 10.00 (371 x 254) 16.75 x 12.00 (425 x 305) 18.88 x 12.00 (479 x 305) 21.25 x 10.00 (540 x 254) J 8.36 (212) 8.36 (212) 8.37 (213) 8.60 (219) 7.39 (188) 9.36 (238) K 4.25 (108) 4.25 (108) 6.25 (159) 6.25 (159) 8.25 (209) 10.25 (260) L 2.25 (57) 4.25 (108) 4.25 (108) 6.25 (159) 6.25 (159) 8.25 (209) 10.25 (260) 10.25 (260) 12.25 (311) 14.25 (362) 14.25 (362) M 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 14.25 (362) N 6.89 (175) 6.89 (175) 8.87 (225) 8.84 (224) 10.86 (276) 12.95 (329) 12.84 (326) 14.88 (378) 16.95 (431) 18.91 (480) 21.00 (533) Hole Dia. 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) Weight 3 lbs. 3 lbs. 4 lbs. 5 lbs. 6 lbs.
12.95 8 lbs. (329) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 9 lbs. 12 lbs. 14 lbs. 22 lbs. 25 lbs.
11.54 10.25 (293) (260) 11.23 12.25 (285) (311) 11.23 14.25 (285) (362) 16.36 16.25 (415) (413) 16.36 18.25 (415) (464)
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
797
5E
The Cooper Crouse-Hinds Advantage Series offer is our most extensive selection of durable industrial non-metallic boxes. Available in a wide range of options, the Advantage Series is available in over 36 various configurations with options such as stainless steel hinges or stainless steel pull latches each with or without clear covers. These enclosures are made of fiberglass reinforced polyester and have a poured polyurethane seamless gasket that provides a water-tight and dust-tight environmental seal for exceptional corrosion and chemical resistance. The resilient Advantage Series will provide high impact resistance in the most extreme conditions and provide protection and reliability in the most adverse applications.

Memory retaining continuous polyurethane gasket No penetrating hardware Chemical resistant fiberglass reinforced polyester Non-corrosive design Water-tight, dust-tight Non-conductive, impact resistant, UV resistant Material cuts, drills, punches, and saws with ease and accuracy Rounded edges, minimal protrusions or exposed pocket areas for assembly of dust and debris Smooth surface, no color variations, swirls or color pockets, no voids

Hot compression molded fiberglass reinforced thermoset polyester Poured polyurethane seamless gasket provides water-tight dust-tight environmental seal 304 stainless steel used on all external hardware Panel mounting capability for fixed rear panel Bosses utilize threaded brass inserts accepting 10-32 screws

UL/cUL 50, Types 1, 3, 3S, 4X, 12, 13 UL File Number E57656 CSA Std C22.2 - File 244248 Types 1, 3, 3S, 4X, 12, 13 NEMA Standard 250 - Types 1, 3, 3S, 4X, 12, 13 Temperature Range - (-76F to +250F) (-60C to +120C) Flammability Rating - UL94-5V Non-flame propagating IP66
Options:
Mounting feet kit available for field installation. Order part number FAMTGFTKIT
5E
Inside H x W x D 7.41 x 7.79 x 4.31 9.41 x 7.79 x 4.31 9.39 x 9.76 x 4.31 11.42 x 9.79 x 6.31 13.45 x 11.83 x 6.31 15.49 x 13.86 x 6.34 15.49 x 13.86 x 8.34 17.58 x 15.96 x 8.34 19.77 x 18.15 x 10.34 21.79 x 18.16 x 10.34
2 Cover Screws With a Hinged Cover FAHS060604 FAHS080604 FAHS080804 FAHS100806 FAHS121006 FAHS141206 FAHS141208 FAHS161408 FAHS181610 FAHS201610
Hinged Cover With a Padlock Latch FAHP060604 FAHP080604 FAHP080804 FAHP100806 FAHP121006 FAHP141206 FAHP141208 FAHP161408 FAHP181610 FAHP201610
2 Cover Screws With a Clear Hinged Cover FAHSCC060604 FAHSCC080604 FAHSCC080804 FAHSCC100806 FAHSCC121006 FAHSCC141206 FAHSCC141208 FAHSCC161408
Hinged Clear Cover With a Padlock Latch FAHPCC060604 FAHPCC080604 FAHPCC080804 FAHPCC100806 FAHPCC121006 FAHPCC141206 FAHPCC141208 FAHPCC161408
Cover Panel With Mounting Hardware FACP0606SA FACP0806SA FACP0808SA FACP1008SA FACP1210SA FACP1412SA FACP1412SA FACP1614SA FACP1816SA FACP2016SA
Mounting Plate FMP0606 FMP0806 FMP0808 FMP1008 FMP1210 FMP1412 FMP1412 FMP1614 FMP1816 FMP2016
798
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
5E

Catalog Number FAHS060604 FAHP060604 FAHSCC060604 FAHPCC060604 FAHS080604 FAHP080604 FAHSCC080604 FAHPCC080604 FAHS080804 FAHP080804 FAHSCC080804 FAHPCC080804 FAHS100806 FAHP100806 FAHSCC100806 FAHPCC100806 FAHS121006 FAHP121006 FAHSCC121006 FAHPCC121006 FAHS141206 FAHP141206 FAHSCC141206 FAHPCC141206 FAHS141208 FAHP141208 FAHSCC141208 FAHPCC141208 FAHS161408 FAHP161408 FAHSCC161408 FAHPCC161408 FAHS181610 FAHP181610 FAHS201610 FAHP201610 Overall HxWxD
7.41H (188.3) 7.79W (197.9) 4.31D (109.5) 9.41H (239.1) 7.79W (197.9) 4.31D (109.5) 9.39H (238.5) 9.76W (248.0) 4.31D (109.5) 11.42H (290.1) 9.79W (248.6) 6.31D (160.3)
Inside AxBxC
6.77 x 6.77 x 4.06 (171.9 x 171.9 x 103.2)
Mounting PxR
L
4.25 (108)
S
3.60 (91.5)
Opt. Mtg. Feet ExF
Weight
5.93 x 4.00 4.25 (150.6 x 101.6) (108)
0.38 8.24 x 4.00 9.02 4.56 0.25 (9.6) (209.2 x 101.6) (229.0) (115.8) (6.35)
5E
2.5 lbs.
8.77 x 6.77 x 4.06 (222.7 x 171.9 x 103.2)
7.91 x 4.00 6.25 (200.9 x 101.6) (159)
4.25 (108)
3.60 (91.5)
0.38 10.21 x 4.00 10.98 4.56 0.25 (9.6) (259.3 x 101.6) (279.0) (115.8) (6.35)
3.0 lbs.
8.74 x 8.74 x 4.06 (222.1 x 222.1 x 103.2)
7.91 x 6.00 6.25 (200.9 x 152.4) (159)
6.25 (159)
3.60 (91.5)
0.38 10.21 x 6.00 10.98 4.56 (9.6) (259.3 x 152.4) (279.0) (6.35)
0.25 3.5 lbs. (115.8)
10.73 x 8.73 x 6.06 (272.5 x 221.7 x 153.9)
9.89 x 6.00 8.25 (251.2 x 152.4) (210)
6.25 (159)
5.60 0.38 12.19 x 6.00 12.96 6.56 0.25 (142.3) (9.6) (309.6 x 152.4) (329.3) (166.6) (6.35)
4.5 lbs.
13.45H (341.6) 12.69 x 10.69 x 6.06 11.83W (300.5) (322.3 x 271.5 x 153.9) 6.31D (160.3) 15.49H (393.4) 14.72 x 12.72 x 6.06 13.86W (352.0) (373.9 x 323.1 x 153.9) 6.34D (161.0) 15.49H (393.4) 14.66 x 12.66 x 8.06 13.86W (352.0) (372.4 x 321.6 x 204.7) 8.34D (211.8) 17.58H (446.6) 16.69 x 14.69 x 8.06 15.96W (405.4) (424.0 x 373.1 x 204.7) 8.34D (211.8) 19.77H (502.2) 18.63 x 16.63 x 10.06 18.15W (461.0) (473.2 x 422.4 x 255.5) 10.34D (262.6) 21.79H (553.5) 20.63 x 16.63 x 10.06 18.16W (461.2) (524.0 x 422.4 x 255.5) 10.34D (262.6)
11.88 x 8.00 10.25 8.25 (301.7 x 203.2) (260) (210)
5.60 0.38 14.18 x 8.00 14.95 6.56 0.25 (142.3) (9.6) (360.2 x 203.2) (379.7) (166.6) (6.35)
6.0 lbs.
13.91 x 10.00 12.25 10.25 (353.3 x 254.0) (311) (260)
5.60 0.38 16.21 x 10.00 16.98 6.59 0.25 (142.3) (9.6) (411.7 x 254.0) (431.4) (167.4) (6.35)
8.0 lbs.
13.88 x 10.00 12.25 10.25 (352.5 x 254.0) (311) (260)
7.60 0.38 16.19 x 10.00 16.96 8.59 0.25 (193.2) (9.6) (411.2 x 254.0) (430.9) (218.2) (6.35)
9.5 lbs.
15.96 x 12.00 14.25 12.25 (405.4 x 304.8) (362) (311) 17.94 x 14.00 16.25 14.25 (455.6 x 355.6) (413) (362) 19.96 x 14.00 18.25 14.25 (506.9 x 355.6) (463) (362)
7.60 0.38 18.26 x 12.00 19.04 8.59 0.25 (193.2) (9.6) (464.0 x 304.8) (483.5) (218.2) (6.35) 9.60 0.38 20.24 x 14.00 21.02 10.59 0.25 (243.9) (9.6) (514.3 x 355.6) (533.8) (268.9) (6.35) 9.59 0.38 22.26 x 14.00 23.04 10.59 0.25 (243.7) (9.6) (565.6 x 355.6) (585.1) (268.9) (6.35)
11.5 lbs.
16.0 lbs.
17.5 lbs.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
799
5E
The Cooper Crouse-Hinds Wall Mount and Large Fiberglass Enclosure Series offer a solution for applications requiring a large enclosure especially suited for indoor or outdoor use and to provide protection against falling dirt, rain, sleet, snow, and windblown dust. The fiberglass reinforced polyester Wall Mount Series is available in NEMA 3R and 4X configurations and the poured polyurethane seamless gasket provides a watertight and dust-tight environmental seal for exceptional corrosion and chemical resistance.

Memory retaining continuous polyurethane gasket Lightweight Integral mounting feet Molded in panel mounting inserts Stainless steel full length continuous hinge Built in padlock hasp Chemical resistant fiberglass reinforced polyester Water-tight, dust-tight Non-conductive, impact resistant, UV resistant Rain shield protection against incidental water ingress for NEMA 3R enclosures Material cuts, drills, punches, and saws with ease and accuracy Rounded edges, minimal protrusions or exposed pocket areas for assembly of dust and debris Smooth surface, no color variations, swirls or color pockets, no voids

3R Series
UL/cUL 50, Types 1, 3R UL File Number E57656 CSA Std C22.2 - File 244248 Types 1, 3R NEMA Standard 250 - Types 1, 3R Temperature Range - (-76F to +250F) (-60C to +120C) Flammability Rating - UL94-5V Non-flame propagating UL/cUL 50, Types 1, 3, 3R, 4X, 12 UL File Number E57656 CSA Std C22.2 - File 244248 Types 1, 3, 3R, 4X, 12 NEMA Standard 250 - Types 1, 3, 3R, 4X, 12 Temperature Range - (-76F to +250F) (-60C to +120C) Flammability Rating - UL94-5V Non-flame propagating UL/cUL 50, Types 1, 3, 3R, 4X, 12 UL File Number E57656 CSA Std C22.2 - File 244248 Types 1, 3, 3R, 4X, 12 NEMA Standard 250 - Types 1, 3, 3R, 4X, 12 IP55 & IP66 Temperature Range - (-76F to +250F) (-60C to +120C) Flammability Rating - UL94-5V Non-flame propagating

Hot compression molded fiberglass reinforced polyester hand layup FRP Poured polyurethane seamless gasket provides water-tight dust-tight environmental seal 304 stainless steel used on all external hardware Bosses utilize threaded brass inserts accepting 10-32 screws
5E
4X Series
Large Fiberglass
800
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Ordering Information: Number of Latches
Inside Enclosure Dimensions 161007 201606 201612 241206 241210 242008 242410 242412 302006 302008 302010 302012 302407 302410 302412 363008 363010 363012 483612 483616 3R Stainless Steel Hinge 2 2 2 2 2
5E
4X Stainless Steel Hinge 2 2 2 4 2
Inside HxWxD 15.92 19.70 24.00 24.00 24.05 24.05 24.05 29.90 29.90 29.90 29.90 30.46 30.46 30.46 36.31 36.31 36.31 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 10.27 16.04 12.87 12.87 20.39 24.39 24.39 20.14 20.14 20.14 20.14 25.47 25.47 25.47 31.69 31.69 31.69 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 8.53 13.24 7.33 11.33 9.25 11.25 13.25 7.23 9.23 11.23 13.23 8.12 11.27 13.10 9.36 11.36 13.36
Stainless Steel Hinged, Mounting Latched Down Cover Plate* F4WMSHL161007 F4WMSHL201612 F4WMSHL241206 F4WMSHL241210 F4WMSHL242008 F4WMSHL242410 F4WMSHL242412 F4WMSHL302006 F4WMSHL302008 F4WMSHL302010 F4WMSHL302012 F4WMSHL302407 F4WMSHL302410 F4WMSHL302412 F4WMSHL363008 F4WMSHL363010 F4WMSHL363012 FMPWM1610 FMPWM2016 FMPWM2412 FMPWM2412 FMPWM2420 FMPWM2424 FMPWM2424 FMPWM3020 FMPWM3020 FMPWM3020 FMPWM3020 FMPWM3024 FMPWM3024 FMPWM3024 FMPWM3630 FMPWM3630 FMPWM3630
10
5E
19.70 24.05 29.90 29.90 30.46 30.46 36.31 36.31 36.31 48.33 48.33
16.04 24.39 20.14 20.14 25.47 25.47 31.69 31.69 31.69 36.22 32.22
7.24 11.25 9.23 11.23 11.27 13.10 9.36 11.36 13.36 13.25 17.25
F3WMSHL201606 F3WMSHL242410 F3WMSHL302008 F3WMSHL302010 F3WMSHL302410 F3WMSHL302412 F3WMSHL363008 F3WMSHL363010 F3WMSHL363012 F3WMSHL483612 F3WMSHL483616
FMPWM2016 FMPWM2424 FMPWM3020 FMPWM3020 FMPWM3024 FMPWM3024 FMPWM3630 FMPWM3630 FMPWM3630 FMPWM4836 FMPWM4836
48.33 48.33 60.62 60.62 36.12 72.00 72.00
x x x x x x x
36.22 32.22 36.13 36.13 48.12 25.00 49.00
x x x x x x x
13.25 17.25 13.44 17.44 13.00 25.88 25.88
F4LSHL483612 F4LSHL483616 F4LSHL603612 F4LSHL603616 F4LSHLDD364812 F4LSHLFS722525 F4LSHLFSDD724925
FMPWM4836 FMPWM4836 FMPWM6036 FMPWM6036 FMPWM3648 FMPWM7225 FMPWM7249
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
801
5E
W F B D
C B
L
B SECTION B-B
SECTION A-A
Wall Mount Series - NEMA 4X Configuration Dimensions In Inches (mm)

Catalog Number Overall HxWxD 18.75 x 10.96 x 9.03 (476 x 278 x 229) 22.75 x 16.87 x 13.77 (578 x 429 x 350) 26.95 x 13.72 x 7.98 (685 x 348 x 203) 26.95 x 13.72 x 11.99 (685 x 348 x 304) 27.00 x 21.24 x 9.90 (686 x 539 x 252) 27.00 x 25.24 x 11.90 (686 x 641 x 302) 27.00 x 25.24 x 13.90 (686 x 641 x 353) 32.86 x 20.99 x 7.89 (835 x 533 x 200) 32.86 x 20.99 x 9.89 (835 x 533 x 251) 32.86 x 20.99 x 11.89 (835 x 533 x 302) 29.90 x 20.14 x 13.23 (760 x 511 x 336) 33.41 x 26.32 x 8.81 (849 x 668 x 224) 33.41 x 26.32 x 11.95 (849 x 668 x 304) 33.41 x 26.32 x 13.79 (849 x 668 x 350) 39.31 x 32.50 x 10.05 (999 x 826 x 255) 39.31 x 32.50 x 12.05 (999 x 826 x 306) 39.31 x 32.50 x 14.05 (999 x 826 x 357) Inside AxBxC 15.92 x 10.27 x 8.53 (404 x 261 x 217) 19.70 x 16.04 x 13.24 (500 x 407 x 336) 24.00 x 12.87 x 7.33 (610 x 327 x 186) 24.00 x 12.87 x 11.33 (610 x 327 x 288) 24.05 x 20.39 x 9.25 (611 x 518 x 235) 24.05 x 24.39 x 11.25 (611 x 619 x 286) 24.05 x 24.39 x 13.25 (611 x 619 x 336) 29.90 x 20.14 x 7.23 (760 x 511 x 184) 29.90 x 20.14 x 9.23 (760 x 511 x 234) 29.90 x 20.14 x 11.23 (760 x 511 x 285) 29.90 x 20.14 x 13.23 (760 x 511 x 336) 30.46 x 25.47 x 8.12 (774 x 647 x 206) 30.46 x 25.47 x 11.27 (774 x 647 x 286) 30.46 x 25.47 x 13.10 (774 x 647 x 333) 36.31 x 31.69 x 9.36 (922 x 805 x 238) 36.31 x 31.69 x 11.36 (922 x 805 x 289) 36.31 x 31.69 x 13.36 (922 x 805 x 339) Mounting ExF 17.50 x 7.00 (444 x 178) 21.50 x 10.12 (546 x 257) 25.75 x 6.25 (654 x 159) 25.75 x 6.25 (654 x 159) 25.75 x 14.00 (654 x 356) 25.75 x 17.87 (654 x 454) 25.75 x 17.87 (654 x 454) 30.75 x 14.25 (806 x 362) 31.75 x 14.25 (806 x 362) 31.75 x 14.25 (806 x 362) 31.75 x 14.25 (806 x 362) 32.25 x 18.50 (819 x 470) 32.25 x 18.50 (819 x 470) 32.25 x 18.50 (819 x 470) 38.13 x 23.88 (968 x 606) 38.13 x 23.88 (968 x 606) 38.13 x 23.88 (968 x 606) J 7.8 (198) 12.26 (312) 6.33 (161) 10.33 (262) 8.25 (209) 10.25 (260) 12.25 (311) 6.23 (158) 8.23 (209) 10.23 (260) 12.23 (311) 7.12 (181) 10.27 (261) 12.1 (307) 8.36 (212) 10.36 (263) 12.36 (314) K 12 (305) 15.25 (387) 19.25 (489) 19.25 (489) 19.25 (489) 19.25 (489) 19.25 (489) 25.25 (641) 25.25 (641) 25.25 (641) 25.25 (641) 25.25 (641) 25.25 (641) 25.25 (641) 31.25 (794) 31.25 (794) 31.25 (794) L 7.5 (191) 11.25 (286) 7.25 (184) 7.25 (184) 15.25 (387) 19.25 (489) 19.25 (489) 15.25 (387) 15.25 (387) 15.25 (387) 15.25 (387) 19.25 (489) 19.25 (489) 19.25 (489) 25.25 (641) 25.25 (641) 25.25 (641) Enclosure Opening M x N 13.14 x 6.00 (334 x 152) 16.75 x 12.19 (425 x 310) 21.00 x 8.37 (533 x 213) 21.00 x 8.37 (533 x 213) 21.25 x 16.00 (540 x 406) 21.25 x 20.00 (540 x 508) 21.25 x 20.00 (540 x 508) 27.00 x 16.50 (686 x 419) 27.00 x 16.50 (686 x 419) 27.00 x 16.50 (686 x 419) 27.00 x 16.50 (686 x 419) 27.38 x 21.25 (695 x 540) 27.38 x 21.25 (695 x 540) 27.38 x 21.25 (695 x 540) 33.25 x 27.25 (845 x 692) 33.25 x 27.25 (845 x 692) 33.25 x 27.25 (845 x 692) Weight 12 lbs. 24 lbs. 21 lbs. 25 lbs. 32 lbs. 42 lbs. 43 lbs. 34 lbs. 36 lbs. 39 lbs. 48 lbs. 45 lbs. 50 lbs. 75 lbs. 75 lbs. 78 lbs. 81 lbs.
5E
F4WMSHL161007 F4WMSHL201612 F4WMSHL241206 F4WMSHL241210 F4WMSHL242008 F4WMSHL242410 F4WMSHL242412 F4WMSHL302006 F4WMSHL302008 F4WMSHL302010 F4WMSHL302012 F4WMSHL302407 F4WMSHL302410 F4WMSHL302412 F4WMSHL363008 F4WMSHL363010 F4WMSHL363012
802
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Wall Mount Series - NEMA 3R Configuration Dimensions In Inches (mm)
Catalog Number F3WMSHL201606 F3WMSHL242410 F3WMSHL302008 F3WMSHL302010 F3WMSHL302410 F3WMSHL302412 F3WMSHL363008 F3WMSHL363010 F3WMSHL363012 Overall HxWxD 22.75 x 16.87 x 8.27 (578 x 429 x 210) 27.00 x 25.24 x 11.90 (686 x 641 x 302) 32.86 x 20.99 x 9.89 (835 x 533 x 251) 32.86 x 20.99 x 11.89 (835 x 533 x 302) 33.41 x 26.32 x 11.95 (849 x 668 x 304) 33.41 x 26.32 x 13.79 (849 x 668 x 350) 39.31 x 32.50 x 10.05 (999 x 826 x 255) 39.31 x 32.50 x 12.05 (999 x 826 x 306) 39.31 x 32.50 x 14.05 (999 x 826 x 357) Inside AxBxC 19.17 x 16.04 x 7.24 (500 x 407 x 184) 24.05 x 24.39 x 11.25 (611 x 619 x 286) 29.90 x 20.14 x 9.23 (760 x 511 x 234) 29.90 x 20.14 x 11.23 (760 x 511 x 285) 30.46 x 25.47 x 11.27 (774 x 647 x 286) 30.46 x 25.47 x 13.10 (774 x 647 x 333) 36.31 x 31.69 x 9.36 (922 x 805 x 238) 36.31 x 31.69 x 11.36 (922 x 805 x 289) 36.31 x 31.69 x 13.36 (922 x 805 x 339) Mounting ExF 21.50 x 10.12 (546 x 257) 25.75 x 17.87 (654 x 454) 31.75 x 14.25 (806 x 362) 31.75 x 14.25 (806 x 362) 32.25 x 18.50 (819 x 470) 32.25 x 18.50 (819 x 470) 38.13 x 23.88 (968 x 606) 38.13 x 23.88 (968 x 606) 38.13 x 23.88 (968 x 606) J 6.26 (159) 10.25 (260) 8.23 (209) 10.23 (260) 10.27 (261) 12.10 (307) 8.36 (212) 10.36 (263) 12.36 (314) K 15.25 (387) 19.25 (489) 25.25 (641) 25.25 (641) 25.25 (641) 25.25 (641) 31.25 (794) 31.25 (794) 31.25 (794) L 11.25 (286) 19.25 (489) 15.25 (387) 15.25 (387) 19.25 (489) 19.25 (489) 25.25 (641) 25.25 (641) 25.25 (641) Enclosure Opening MxN 16.75 x 12.19 (425 x 310) 21.25 x 20.00 (540 x 508) 27.00 x 16.50 (686 x 419) 27.00 x 16.50 (686 x 419) 27.38 x 21.25 (695 x 540) 27.38 x 21.25 (695 x 540) 33.25 x 27.25 (845 x 692) 33.25 x 27.25 (845 x 692) 33.25 x 27.25 (845 x 692)
5E
Weight 17 lbs. 42 lbs. 36 lbs. 39 lbs. 50 lbs. 54 lbs. 75 lbs. 78 lbs. 81 lbs.
5E
NEMA 3R Dimensional Drawing F3WMSHL483612 and F3WMSHL483616 F3WMSHL483612 F3WMSHL483616 51.29 x 36.62 x 13.93 (1303 x 930 x 354) 51.29 x 36.62 x 17.93 (1303 x 930 x 456) 48.33 x 36.22 x 13.25 (1228 x 920 x 336) 48.33 x 32.22 x 17.25 (1228 x 920 x 438) 50.12 x 28.50 (1273 x 724) 50.12 x 28.50 (1273 x 724) 12.25 (311) 16.25 (413) 21.63 (549) 21.63 (549) 31.25 (794) 31.25 (794) 45.25 x 32.00 (1149 x 813) 45.25 x 32.00 (1149 x 813) 146 lbs. 164 lbs.
Wall Mount Series / NEMA 3R Chart reflects the Dimensional Drawings from the previous page.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
803
5E
Large Fiberglass Enclosures Series - Configuration Dimensions In Inches (mm)

Catalog Number F4LSHL483612* F4LSHL483616* F4LSHL603612* F4LSHL603616* F4SHLDD364812 F4SHLFS722525 F4LSHLFSDD724 925 Overall HxWxD 51.29 x 36.62 x 13.93 (1303 x 930 x 354) 51.29 x 36.62 x 17.93 (1303 x 930 x 456) 64.00 x 36.50 x 14.12 (1627 x 927 x 359) 64.00 x 36.50 x 18.12 (1627 x 927 x 460) 39.50 x 48.50 x 13.62 (1003 x 1232 x 346) 72.50 x 25.50 x 26.38 (1841 x 648 x 492) 72.50 x 49.50 x 26.38 (18.42 x 1257 x 670) Inside AxBxC 48.33 x 36.22 x 13.25 (1228 x 920 x 336) 48.33 x 32.22 x 17.25 (1228 x 920 x 438) 60.62 x 36.13 x 13.44 (1540 x 918 x 441) 60.62 x 36.13 x 17.44 (1540 x 918 x 443) 36.12 x 48.12 x 13.00 (917 x 1222 x 330) 72.00 x 25.00 x 25.88 (1829 x 635 x 657) 72.00 x 49.00 x 25.88 (1829 x 1245 x 654) Mounting ExF 50.12 x 28.50 (1273 x 724) 50.12 x 28.50 (1273 x 724) 62.75 x 28.75 (1594 x 730) 62.75 x 28.75 (1594 x 730) 38.25 x 40.5 (972 x 1029) J 12.25 (311) 16.25 (413) 12.44 (316) 16.44 (418) 11.94 (303) 24.88 (632) 24.88 (628) K 21.63 (549) 21.63 (549) 27.63 (702) 27.63 (702) 14.50 (368) 15.50 (388) 15.50 (394) L 31.25 (794) 31.25 (794) 31.25 (794) 31.25 (794) 20.00 (508) 19.00 (483) 20.00 (508) Enclosure Opening MxN 45.25 x 32.00 (1149 x 813) 45.25 x 32.00 (1149 x 813) 57.25 x 32.00 (1454 x 813) 57.25 x 32.00 (1454 x 813) 32.00 x 20.75 (813 x 527) 64.75 x 21.00 (1645 x 533) 64.75 x 21.00 (1645 x 533) Weight 146 lbs. 164 lbs. 177 lbs. 198 lbs. 146 lbs. 226 lbs. 350 lbs.
* F4LSHL483612, F4LSHL483616, F4LSHL603612 and F4LSHL603616 reflective of the above chart
Wall Mount & Large Fiberglass Enclosures Series Dimensional Drawings

F4LSHDD364812 F4LSHLFS722525
5E
F4LSHLFSDD724925
804
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
5E
The Cooper Crouse-Hinds Disconnect and Circuit Breaker Series are used in larger industrial control systems and machine tool control panels where a disconnect is desirable in extreme environmental conditions. This durable NEMA 4X rated enclosure provides protection from falling dirt, rain, sleet, snow, windblown dust, splashing water, and hose-directed water; and will be undamaged by the external formation of ice on the enclosure. The poured polyurethane seamless gasket and fiberglass reinforced polyester enclosure provides exceptional corrosion and chemical resistance in adverse conditions.

Integral mounting feet Stainless steel full length continuous hinge Padlockable in off position Lightweight Memory retaining continuous polyurethane gasket Molded in panel mounting inserts Chemical resistant fiberglass reinforced polyester Non-corrosive design Environmentally sealed Type 4X disconnect handle Water-tight, dust-tight Non-conductive, impact resistant, UV resistant Material cuts, drills, punches, and saws with ease and accuracy Rounded edges, minimal protrusions or exposed pocket areas for assembly of dust and debris Smooth surface, no color variations, swirls or color pockets, no voids

Hot compression molded fiberglass reinforced thermoset polyester Poured polyurethane seamless gasket 304 stainless steel used on all external hardware Panel mounting capability for fixed rear panel Bosses utilize threaded brass inserts

UL/cUL 50, Types 1, 3, 3R, 4X, 12 UL File Number E57656 CSA Std C22.2 - File 244248 Types 1, 3, 3R, 4X, 12 NEMA Standard 250 - Types 1, 3, 3R, 4X, 12 Temperature Range - (-76F to +250F) (-60C to +120C) Flammability Rating - UL94-5V Non-flame propagating
5E
Inside H x W x D 16 x 10 x 8 20 x 16 x 9 24 x 12 x 11 24 x 24 x 11 30 x 24 x 11 36 x 30 x 11
Disconnect FDC161008 FDC201608 FDC241212 FDC242412 FDC302412 FDC363012
Mounting Plate* FMPC1610 FMPC2016 FMPC2412 FMPC2424 FMPC3024 FMPC3630
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
805
5E
W F B
O J
E A A
B SECTION B-B
C B
5E
SECTION A-A
AutoCad File: CBOX1

Catalog Number FDC161008 FDC201608 FDC241212 FDC242412 FDC302412 FDC363012 Overall HxWxD 18.75 x 10.96 x 10.25 (476 x 278 x 260) 22.75 x 16.87 x 11.00 (578 x 429 x 279) 26.95 x 13.72 x 13.25 (685 x 348 x 337) 27.00 x 25.24 x 13.19 (686 x 641 x 335) 33.41 x 26.32 x 13.19 (849 x 668 x 335) 39.31 x 32.50 x 13.31 (999 x 826 x 338) Inside AxBxC 15.92 x 10.27 x 8.53 (404 x 261 x 217) 19.70 x 16.04 x 9.24 (500 x 407 x 235) 24.00 x 12.87 x 11.33 (610 x 327 x 288) 24.05 x 24.39 x 11.25 (611 x 619 x 286) 30.46 x 25.47 x 11.27 (774 x 647 x 286) 36.31 x 31.69 x 11.36 (922 x 805 x 289) Mounting ExF 17.50 x 7.00 (444 x 178) 21.50 x 10.12 (546 x 257) 25.75 x 6.25 (654 x 159) 25.75 x 17.87 (654 x 454) 32.25 x 18.50 (819 x 470) 38.13 x 23.88 (968 x 606) J 7.8 (198) 8.26 (210) 10.33 (262) 10.25 (260) 10.27 (261) 10.36 (263) K 12 (305) 15.25 (387) 19.25 (489) 19.25 (489) 25.25 (641) 31.25 (794) L 7.5 (191) 11.25 (286) 7.25 (184) 19.25 (489) 19.25 (489) 25.25 (641) Opening Enclosure MxN 13.14 x 6.00 (334 x 152) 16.75 x 12.19 (425 x 310) 21.00 x 8.37 (533 x 213) 21.25 x 20.00 (540 x 508) 27.38 x 21.25 (695 x 540) 33.25 x 27.5 (845 x 692) O 3.50 (89) 3.50 (89) 5.75 (146) 5.75 (146) 12.25 (311) 12.25 (311) Weight 13 lbs. 23 lbs. 26 lbs. 40 lbs. 51 lbs. 79 lbs.
*Disconnect, fuse block, breaker, yoke, switches, or other internal components are not furnished with enclosure.
806
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Fiberglass Enclosure Accessories
5E
Drain & Breather Vent
CHDV - Drain Vent
CHDVKIT - Drain Vent Kit
CHDVKIT4X - Drain Vent Kit 4X
CHBVKIT4X - Breather Vent Kit 4X
Encapsulated Screws
Louver Plate Vent
Carrying Handle
5E
CHENCAP2PK CHENCAP4PK
CHLP1 CHLPKIT
CHHANDLE
Stainless Steel Screws
Corrosion Inhibitor
CHSS2PK CHSS4PK
CHCI21 Radius of Protection: 2 ft. Normal Life Span: 1 yr.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
807
5E
Fiberglass Hole Plug Assembly
Catalog Number FPLG1KIT
Fits /2" Dia. Hole /8" Dia. Hole 3 /4" Dia. Hole 22mm PB, 1 /2" Conduit 3 /4" Conduit 30mm PB 1" Conduit 11/4" Conduit 11/2" Conduit 2" Conduit 21/2" Conduit 3" Conduit 31/2" Conduit 4" Conduit
1 5
Hole Dia. Range .50" .63" .75" .88" .56" .69" .81" 1.00" 1.12" 1.28" 1.50" 1.75" 2.12" 2.56"
FPLG2KIT
FPLG3KIT FPLG4KIT FPLG5KIT FPLG6KIT FPLG7KIT FPLG8KIT
1.06" 1.22" 1.38" 1.69" 2.00" 2.50" 3.00" 3.62" 4.12" 4.62"
Fiberglass Enclosure Mounting Plate Options

BB
BL
BA
OMIT CENTER HOLES WHEN "BK" IS LESS THAN 29"
BK
HOLE DIA.
5E
OMIT CENTER HOLES WHEN "BL" IS LESS THAN 31.25"
BT
End View (Flat)
End View (Formed)
Aluminum (SA) Back Panels Grade Aluminum 3003 H14 - No Finish
Fiberglass (FG) Back Panels All FG Back Panels UL 94 V-0 Rated
Stainless Steel (SS) Back Panels Stainless Steel Grade 304
Carbon Steel (C) Back Panels Carbon Steel Grade 1010 HRS Painted White Enamel
Mounting Plates for Disconnect & Circuit Breaker Dimensions

Only Available in Carbon Steel (C) FMPC1610 FMPC2016 FMPC2412 FMPC2424 FMPC3024 FMPC3630 BA 13.00 (330) 16.88 (429) 20.88 (530) 20.88 (530) 26.88 (683) 32.88 (835) BB 8.50 (216) 13.38 (340) 9.38 (238) 21.38 (543) 21.38 (543) 27.38 (695) BK 12.00 (305) 15.25 (387) 19.25 (489) 19.25 (489) 25.25 (641) 31.25 (794) BL 7.50 (191) 11.25 (286) 7.25 (184) 19.25 (489) 19.25 (489) 25.25 (641) Panel Thickness BT 0.08 (2) 0.13 (2) 0.13 (2) 0.13 (2) 0.13 (2) 0.13 (2) Panel Type Flat Formed Formed Formed Formed Formed Hole Dia. 0.31 (8) 0.31 (8) 0.50 (13) 0.50 (13) 0.50 (13) 0.50 (13) # of Holes 4 4 4 4 4 5 Weight (Carbon Steel) Suffix: C 3.3 lbs. 7.3 lbs. 6.5 lbs. 14 lbs. 19 lbs. 27 lbs. Fits Typical Enclosure Size 16 x 10 Disconnect enclosure 20 x 16 Disconnect enclosure 24 x 12 Disconnect enclosure 24 x 24 Disconnect enclosure 30 x 24 Disconnect enclosure 36 x 30 Disconnect enclosure
808
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
5E
Mounting Plates for NEMA 3R, NEMA 4X & Large Fiberglass Enclosure Dimensions
Catalog Number FMPWM1610SA FMPWM1610C FMPWM2016SA FMPWM2016C FMPWM2412SA FMPWM2412C FMPWM2420SA FMPWM2420C FMPWM2424SA FMPWM2424C FMPWM3020SA FMPWM3020C FMPWM3024SA FMPWM3024C FMPWM3630SA FMPWM3630C FMPWM3636SA FMPWM3636C FMPWM3648SA FMPWM3648C FMPWM4836SA FMPWM4836C FMPWM6036SA FMPWM6036C FMPWM7225SA FMPWM7225C FMPWM7249SA FMPWM7249C BA 13.00 (330) 17.00 (432) 21.00 (533) 21.00 (533) 21.00 (533) 27.00 (686) 27.00 (686) 33.00 (838) 31.00 (787) 31.00 (787) 45.00 (1143) 57.00 (1448) 64.00 (1626) 64.00 (1626) BB 8.50 (216) 13.00 (330) 9.00 (229) 17.00 (432) 21.00 (533) 17.00 (432) 21.00 (533) 27.00 (686) 33.00 (838) 22.00 (559) 33.00 (838) 33.00 (838) 21.00 (533) 22.00 (559) BK 12.00 (305) 15.25 (387) 19.25 (489) 19.25 (489) 19.25 (489) 25.25 (641) 25.25 (641) 31.25 (794) 29.00 (737) 29.00 (737) 43.25 (1099) 55.25 (1403) 62.00 (1575) 62.00 (1575) BL 7.50 (191) 11.25 (286) 7.25 (184) 15.25 (387) 19.25 (489) 15.25 (387) 19.25 (489) 25.25 (641) 31.00 (787) 20.00 (508) 31.25 (794) 31.25 (794) 19.00 (483) 20.00 (508) BT (SA) 0.090 (2) 0.090 (2) 0.090 (2) 0.13 (3) 0.13 (3) 0.13 (3) 0.13 (3) 0.13 (3) 0.13 (3) 0.13 (3) 0.13 (3) 0.13 (3) 0.13 (3) 0.13 (3) BT (C) 0.105 (3) 0.105 (3) 0.105 (3) 0.105 (3) 0.105 (3) 0.105 (3) 0.105 (3) 0.105 (3) 0.105 (3) 0.105 (3) 0.105 (3) 0.105 (3) 0.105 (3) 0.105 (3) Panel Type Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Formed Flat Formed Formed Formed Formed Hole Dia. 0.31 (8) 0.50 (13) 0.50 (13) 0.50 (13) 0.50 (13) 0.50 (13) 0.50 (13) 0.50 (13) 0.50 (13) 0.50 (13) 0.50 (13) 0.50 (13) 0.50 (13) 0.50 (13) # of Holes 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 6 8 8 8 10 10 Weight (Aluminum) Suffix: SA 1 lb. 2 lbs. 4.5 lbs. 5 lbs. 5.5 lbs. 5.8 lbs. 7 lbs. 11 lbs. 13 lbs. 22 lbs. 22 lbs. 23 lbs. 30 lbs. 38 lbs. Weight (Carbon Steel) Suffix: C 3.3 lbs. 6.7 lbs. 8.7 lbs. 10.8 lbs. 13.4 lbs. 14 lbs. 17 lbs. 27 lbs. 33 lbs. 41 lbs. 47 lbs. 60 lbs. 43 lbs.
5E
91 lbs.
Weight # of (Aluminum) Holes Suffix: SA 4 2 oz. Weight (Fiberglass) Suffix: FG 2 oz. Weight (Stainless) Suffix: SS 5 oz. Weight (Carbon Steel) Suffix: C 5 oz.
Catalog Number FMP0604SA FMP0604FG FMP0604SS FMP0604C FMP0606SA FMP0606FG FMP0606SS FMP0606C FMP0706SA FMP0706FG FMP0706SS FMP0706C FMP0806SA FMP0806FG FMP0806SS FMP0806C FMP0808SA FMP0808FG FMP0808SS FMP0808C FMP0906SA FMP0906FG FMP0906SS FMP0906C
BA
BB
BK
BL
BT (SA)
BT (FG)
BT (SS)
BT (C)
Panel Type Flat
Hole Dia. 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6)
4.88 2.88 (124) (73)
4.25 2.25 (108) (57)
0.080 0.125 0.060 0.075 (2) (3) (2) (2)
4.88 4.88 4.25 4.25 0.080 0.125 0.060 0.075 (124) (124) (108) (108) (2) (3) (2) (2) 6.00 4.88 5.38 4.25 0.080 0.125 0.060 0.075 (152) (124) (137) (108) (2) (3) (2) (2) 6.88 4.88 6.25 4.25 0.080 0.125 0.060 0.075 (175) (124) (159) (108) (2) (3) (2) (2) 6.88 6.88 6.25 6.25 0.080 0.125 0.060 0.075 (2) (2) (175) (175) (159) (159) (2) (3) 8.25 4.88 7.63 4.25 0.080 0.125 0.060 0.075 (210) (124) (194) (108) (2) (3) (2) (2)
Flat
3 oz.
3 oz.
8 oz.
8 oz.
Flat
4 oz.
n/a
n/a
10 oz.
Flat
4 oz.
4 oz.
12 oz.
12 oz.
Flat
5 oz.
5 oz.
15 oz.
15 oz.
Flat
5 oz.
n/a
n/a
14 oz.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
809
5E Fiberglass Enclosure Accessories
Weight Hole # of (Aluminum) Dia. Holes Suffix: SA 0.25 4 (6) 0.25 4 (6) 0.25 4 (6) 0.25 4 (6) 0.25 4 (6) 0.25 4 (6) 0.25 4 (6) 0.25 4 (6) 8 oz. Weight (Fiberglass) Suffix: FG 8 oz. Weight (Stainless) Suffix: SS 19 oz. Weight (Carbon Steel) Suffix: C 21 oz.
Catalog Number FMP1008SA FMP1008FG FMP1008SS FMP1008C FMP1210SA FMP1210FG FMP1210SS FMP1210C FMP1212SA FMP1212FG FMP1212SS FMP1212C FMP1407SA FMP1407FG FMP1407SS FMP1407C FMP1412SA FMP1412FG FMP1412SS FMP1412C FMP1614SA FMP1614FG FMP1614SS FMP1614C FMP1816SA FMP1816FG FMP1816SS FMP1816C FMP2016SA FMP2016FG FMP2016SS FMP2016C
BA 8.88 (225)
BB 6.88 (175)
BK 8.25 (210)
BL 6.25 (159)
BT (SA)
BT (FG)
BT (SS)
BT (C)
Panel Type Flat
0.080 0.125 0.060 0.075 (2) (3) (2) (2) 0.080 0.125 0.060 0.075 (2) (3) (2) (2)
10.88 8.88 (276) (225)
10.25 8.25 (260) (210)
Flat
12 oz.
14 oz.
30 oz.
33 oz.
10.88 10.88 10.25 10.25 0.080 0.125 0.060 0.075 (276) (276) (260) (260) (2) (3) (2) (2) 12.88 5.88 (327) (149) 12.25 5.25 (311) (133) 0.080 0.125 0.060 0.075 (2) (3) (2) (2)
Flat
16 oz.
18 oz.
37 oz.
38 oz.
Flat
14 oz.
14 oz.
32 oz.
34 oz.
12.88 10.88 12.25 10.25 0.080 0.125 0.060 0.075 (2) (2) (327) (276) (311) (260) (2) (3) 14.88 12.88 14.25 12.25 0.080 0.125 0.060 0.075 (378) (327) (362) (311) (2) (3) (2) (2) 16.88 14.88 16.25 14.25 0.080 0.125 0.060 0.075 (429) (378) (413) (362) (2) (3) (2) (2) 18.88 14.88 18.25 14.25 0.080 0.125 0.060 0.075 (479) (378) (463) (362) (2) (3) (2) (2)
Flat
18 oz.
20 oz.
45 oz.
48 oz.
Flat
24 oz.
23 oz.
60 oz.
66 oz.
5E
Flat
31 oz.
32 oz.
88 oz.
87 oz.
Flat
36 oz.
34 oz.
98 oz.
97 oz.
Cover Panel Dimensions

Catalog Number FACP0606SA FACP0806SA FACP0808SA FACP1008SA FACP1210SA FACP1412SA FACP1614SA FACP1816SA FACP2016SA A 5.64 (143) 7.68 (195) 7.68 (195) 9.71 (247) B 5.64 (143) 5.64 (143) 7.68 (195) 7.71 (196) C 5.02 (127) 7.05 (179) 7.05 (179) 9.08 (231) 11.12 (282) 13.15 (334) 15.18 (386) 17.31 (440) 19.13 (486) D 5.02 (127) 5.02 (127) 7.05 (179) 7.08 (180) 9.12 (232) Panel Thk. 0.080 (2) 0.080 (2) 0.080 (2) 0.080 (2) 0.080 (2) Panel Type Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Flat Hole Dia. 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) 0.25 (6) # of Holes 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
11.74 9.74 (298) (247) 13.78 11.78 (350) (299) 15.81 13.81 (402) (351) 17.94 15.94 (456) (405) 19.76 15.76 (502) (400)
11.15 0.080 (283) (2) 13.18 0.080 (334) (2) 15.31 0.080 (389) (2) 15.13 0.080 (384) (2)
Note: Cover panel kit includes cover panel and mounting hardware.
810
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
5E
Custom Modification Offering:

Please consult the factory for a quotation on the following custom modifications that we are pleased to offer to help meet the needs of our customers: Custom molded colors Gasketed windows for the FJ, FRC and the Wall Mount Series Custom sizes Special hole patterns for drilling and tapping configurations Dead front and sub panels Silk screening capabilities Terminal kits and DIN rails available
Custom Built Lighting & Power Panelboards:

Motor control, power distribution products and custom control panels designed and built to our customers unique needs and delivered when they are required.
Overview:
Fiberglass panelboards rated for outdoor NEMA 3R and 4X environments.
Gasketed Window FJ, FRC & Wall Mount Series
Ratings:
120/208V 3 Phase, 4 Wire QOB circuit breakers, single or two-pole 120/240VAC; three-pole 240 VAC
Trip ratings:
10 to 70 amps, single-pole 10 to 125 amps, two-pole 10 to 100 amps, three-pole 480Y/277V 3 Phase, 4 Wire EDB circuit breakers, single or two-pole 277 VAC; three-pole 480Y/277 VAC
5E
Trip ratings:
15 to 70 amps, single-pole 15 to 125 amps, two-pole 15 to 125 amps, three-pole
Certifications:
NEMA 1, 3, 3R, 4X and 12 UL Standard: 67 CSA Standard: C22.2
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
811
5E
Custom Built Heavy Duty Disconnects (Circuit Breaker, Fusible and Non-Fusible)
Applications:
Fiberglass Heavy Duty Disconnects are for use in disconnecting motor, lighting and other circuits.
Certifications
NEMA/EEMAC: 1, 3, 3R, 4X and 12 UL Standard: 508 CSA Standard: C22.2

3-pole, 60Hz, 600 VAC Starters - NEMA sizes 0, 1, 2 Breakers - 15 - 800 Amp Rating Switches - 30, 60, 100, 200 Amp
Custom Built Control Stations

Overview:
The Pushbutton Series offers an enclosure solution where multiple pre-drilled openings for 30mm pushbuttons are required. Enclosures are available in sizes ranging from 6" x 3" to 13.5" x 11.5" with notched keyhole design and the ability to order up to 25 holes, making this solution a perfect choice for your control station applications.
5E

UL/cUL 50, Types 1, 3, 4X, 6P, 12 UL Standard: 508 CSA Std C22.2 - File 244248 Types 1, 3, 4X, 6P, 12 NEMA Standard 250 - Types 1, 3, 4X, 6P, 12

Pushbutton stations and selector switches - heavy duty 600 VAC maximum Pilot lights, selector switches, push buttons 120 to 600 VAC; 24 VAC/DC
812
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
NJB/NCE/NCS/NCD Junction Boxes and Enclosures
5E
Applications:
Where a corrosion-, heat-, and waterresistant enclosure is desired, Krydon type NJB/NCE/NCS/NCD boxes are installed in conduit systems to: Act as pull box for conductors Provide openings and space for making splices and taps in conductors Provide for branch circuit runs Provide access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes Enclose and protect electrical devices
Dimensions Fits Mounting Enclosure Plate Cat. # Length Width 31/4 x 63/4 31/4 x 9 31/4 x 11 5x9 7 x 10 7 x 14 10 x 18 10 x 24 14 x 26 24 x 26 MP0407 MP0409 MP0411 MP0509 MP0710 MP0714 MP1018 MP1024 MP1426 MP2426 41/2 63/4 83/4 63/4 71/2 9 141/2 20 221/2 22 23/4 23/4 23/4 33/4 53/4 53/4 81/2 81/2 123/4 20
Features:
Adjustable mounting feet permit side or top mounting (1018 and larger) Removable enclosure covers with Hypalon gaskets hinged type optional to provide full interior access for ease of wiring Hinged access door standard on NCE control enclosure covers Flat neoprene access door gaskets
Options:
Hubs for factory or field installation see page 818 Grounding plate or bushing see page 818 Hinge and latch kits. For field installation, order the required number of kits Hinge kit NH1 Latch and lockout kit NTL01 Mounting plates, made of steel with electrogalvanized finish, can be custom drilled to your specifications or supplied blank.

NEMA 3, 4X and 12 (raintight only, when latches are used) UL Standard: 50
5E
Junction Boxes Basic Box Cat. # NJB040703 NJB040704 NJB040903 NJB041103 NJB041104 NJB050905 NJB071006 NJB071406 NJB101807 NJB102407 NJB142608 NJB242608 With Hinges (1 side) Cat. # With Trunk Latches (all sides) Cat. # With Hinges (1 side) and Trunk Latches (3 sides) Cat. #
Control Enclosures With Door in Cover Cat. #
Maximum Hub Size Long Sides /4 1 3 /4 3 /4 1 11/2 2 2 2* 2* 21/2 * 21/2 *

3
Short Sides /4 1 3 /4 3 /4 1 11/2 2 2 21/2 21/2 3 3

3
NJB071006 NJB071406 NJB101807 NJB102407 NJB142608 NJB242608
NH NH NH NH NH NH
NJB101807 NJB102407 NJB142608 NJB242608
NTL NTL NTL NTL
NJB101807 NJB102407 NJB142608 NJB242608
NHTL NHTL NHTL NHTL
NCE101807 NCE102407 NCE142608 NCE242608
*Can be increased one hub size when used without mounting plate.
Control Station Enclosures Without Hubs Cat. # NCD01 NCS01 (1 device) NCD02 NCS02 (2 devices) NCD03 NCS03 (3 devices) NCD04 NCS04 (4 devices) With One Hub (1/2") Cat. # NCD11 NCS11 NCD12 NCS12 NCD13 NCS13 NCD14 NCS14 With Two Hubs (1/2") Cat. # NCDC11 NCSC11 NCDC12 NCSC12 NCDC13 NCSC13 NCDC14 NCSC14 With One Hub (3/4") Cat. # NCD21 NCS21 NCD22 NCS22 NCD23 NCS23 NCD24 NCS24 With Two Hubs (3/4") Cat. # NCDC21 NCSC21 NCDC22 NCSC22 NCDC23 NCSC23 NCDC24 NCSC24 With One Hub (1") Cat. # NCD31 With Two Hubs (1") Cat. # NCDC31
NCD32
NCDC32
NCD33
NCDC33
NCD34
NCDC34
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
813
5E

Quick Selector Guide
NEMA 3, 4X, 12
NJB Series Junction Boxes
NJB040703 31/4 x 63/4 x 23/4
NJB040704 31/4 x 63/4 x 33/4
NJB040903 31/4 x 9 x 23/4
NJB041103 31/4 x 11 x 23/4
NJB041104 31/4 x 11 x 33/4
NJB050905 5x9x5
NJB071006 7 x 10 x 61/2
NJB071406 7 x 14 x 61/2
NJB101807 10 x 18 x 71/2
NJB102407 10 x 24 x 71/2
NJB142608 14 x 26 x 81/2
NJB242608 24 x 26 x 81/2
NCE Series Control Enclosures
5E
NCE101807 10 x 18 x 71/2
NCE102407 10 x 24 x 71/2
NCE142608 14 x 26 x 81/2
NCE242608 24 x 26 x 81/2
NCD/NCS Series Control Stations
NCD01 31/4 x 63/4 x 33/4 NCS01 31/4 x 63/4 x 23/4 1 Device
NCD02 31/4 x 63/4 x 33/4 NCS02 31/4 x 63/4 x 23/4 2 Devices
NCS03 31/4 x 9 x 23/4 3 Devices
NCD03 and NCD04 31/4 x 11 x 33/4 NCS04 31/4 x 11 x 23/4 4 Devices
Dimensions
NCD01 31/4 x 63/4 x 33/4 NCS01 31/4 x 63/4 x 23/4 1 Device 814
NCD02 31/4 x 63/4 x 33/4 NCS02 31/4 x 63/4 x 23/4 2 Devices

US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502
NCS03 31/4 x 9 x 23/4 3 Devices

NCD03 and NCD04 31/ 4 x 11 x 33/4 NCS04 31/ 4 x 11 x 23/4 4 Devices

Dimensions (In Inches)*
Figure 1
Dimensions:
5E
Figure 2
Dimensions:
NCD, NCS and NJB Front View Body
NCE Cover
NJB and NCE Front View Body
NJB Cover NJB Cover (no openings) NCD/NCS Cover (with device openings)
NCE Cross Section
NJB Cross Section
NCD, NCS and NJB Cross Section
5E
Nominal Inside Dimensions Cat. # nw nl nd Figure No. 1 (Approx. wall thickness 1/4") NJB101807 10 18 71/2 NCE101807 NJB102407 NCE102407 NJB142608 NCE142608 NJB242608 NCE242608 10 14 24 24 26 26 71/2 81/2 81/2
Plate Dimensions pw pl pd 81/2 81/2 123/4 20 141/2 20 221/2 221/2 71/16 71/16 81/16 81/16
Door Opening Dimensions dw dl 511/16 511/16 911/16 1911/16 167/8 227/8 2311/16 2311/16
Mounting Dimensions mw ml 77/8 77/8 117/8 213/4 193/8 253/8 271/4 271/4
Alternate Mounting Dimensions mwa mla 113/8 113/8 153/8 251/4 157/8 217/8 233/4 253/4
Figure No. 2 (Approx. wall thickness 3/16") NJB040703 63/4 23/4 31/4 NCS01 & 2 NCD01 NJB040704 NCD02 NJB040903 NCS03 NJB041103 NCS04 NCD03 NJB041104 NCD04 NJB050905 NJB071006 NJB071406 31/4 31/4 31/4 31/4 5 7 7 63/4 9 11 11 9 10 14 33/4 23/4 23/4 33/4 53/16 61/2 61/2
23/4 23/4 23/4 23/4 23/4 33/4 53/4 53/4
41/2 41/2 63/4 83/4 83/4 63/4 71/2 9
23/8 33/8 23/8 23/8 33/8 411/16 61/16 61/16
215/16 215/16 215/16 215/16 215/16 43/8 63/8 63/8
63/8 63/8 85/8 107/8 107/8 83/8 93/8 133/8
*Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
815
5E
NJBW Instrument Enclosures
Corrosion-Resistant Dust-tight Watertight Weathertight NEMA 3, 4X, 12
Applications:
NJBW instrument enclosures are used to enclose various instruments which require visual display, including ammeters, voltmeters, watt-hour meters, VAR meters, power factor meters, tachometer indicators, and various pressure and temperature controls
Features:
Enclosure bodies are made of Cooper Crouse-Hinds high-impact strength Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester which has excellent corrosion resistance and stability to heat. Clear cover is a single piece of 3/8" acrylic plastic, gasketed and attached with stainless steel torque limiting screws.

NEMA 3, 4X, 12
Enclosure Cat. # NJBW050905TC NJBW071006TC NJBW071406TC Window Dimensions 41/4 x 53/4 53/4 x 81/8 53/4 x 121/8
Accessories:
Hubs see page 818 Grounding plate or bushing see page 818
5E
Options:
Description Blank mounting plates Suffix MP
Dimensions*
In Inches:
*Not to be used for construction purposes unless approved.
Enclosure Cat. # NJBW050905TC NJBW071006TC NJBW071406TC
Nominal Inside Dimensions nw nl nd 5 7 7 9 10 14 315/16 411/16 411/16
Mounting Dimensions mw ml 43/8 63/8 63/8 83/8 93/8 133/8
Window Dimensions ww wl 41/4 53/4 53/4 53/4 81/8 121/8
816
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Enclosure Accessories
6E
Description
Hubs Grounding Plates Grounding Bushings Drains and Breathers CID 101 Corrosion Inhibitor Device LNR Conduit Liner Cable Glands
Page No.
see page 818 see page 818 see page 818 see page 819 see page 821 see page 822 See Section 4F
6E
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
817
6E
Enclosure Accessories Hubs, Grounding Plates, and Grounding Bushings

Nonmetallic Hubs
Krydon material hubs for conduit entrances, in sizes 1/2" through 3" are available for factory or field installation in all enclosures made of Krydon material. For factory installation, send drawing showing sizes and locations of hubs. Furnished with and gaskets to assure.
Myers Hubs*
Ground Hub Basic Scru-Tite
Zinc ATEX Approval with DEMKO 07 ATEX 0618172U II 2 G Ex e II UL File No. 187273 Class I, Zone 1, AEx e II Class I, Zone 1, Ex e II
Standard Materials:
Up to 11/2" Krydon material with steel interiors 2", 21/2" and 3" Krydon material with Feraloy iron alloy interiors
Standard Finishes:
Cat. # STGK STGK STGK STGK STGK STGK 1 2 3 4 5 6 Size /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2"
1 3
Unit Qty. 10 10 10 5 5 5
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 20 30 43 55 73 95
Krydon material natural Steel electrogalvanized and bleached chromate Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized
Conduit Size
1 3
Hole Size
7
Hub Cat. # NHUB1 NHUB2 NHUB3 NHUB4 NHUB5 NHUB6 NHUB7 NHUB8
Stainless Steel Type 316

ATEX Approval with DEMKO 07 ATEX 0618172U II 2 G Ex e II Class I, Zone 1, AEx e II UL File No. E-187273 Class I, Zone 1, Ex e II
/2 /4 1 11/ 4 11/ 2 2 21/ 2 3
/8 11/ 8 13/ 8 13/ 4 2 21/ 2 3 35/ 8
6E
Cat. # SSTGK SSTGK SSTGK SSTGK SSTGK SSTGK Zinc 1 2 3 4 5 6
Size /2" 3 /4" 1 11/4" 11/2" 2

1
Unit Qty. 10 10 10 5 5 5
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 20 30 43 55 73 95
Grounding Plates and Grounding Bushings

Cat. # STM STM STM STM STM STM
Note:
Grounding Plates (1/2" through 1") and insulated bushings (1/2" through 3") permit use of the conduit as the grounding circuit. Both types have set screws and ground-wire terminals. Wt. Lbs. Per 100 12 32 32 40 50 70
Size M20 M25 M32 M40 M50 M63 to to to to to to

1 3
Unit Qty. /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 25 25 25 10 10 10
Standard Materials:
Grounding plates steel Grounding bushings steel with thermoplastic insulating throat
1 2 3 4 5 6
Standard Finishes:
Steel electrogalvanized
The Myers Metric to NPT hub adapter is used to convert a threaded metric entry to a NPT entry. The female thread is NPT and the male thread is metric.
Conduit Size
1 3
Grounding Plate Cat. # GP1 GP2 GP3
Grounding Bushing Cat. # GLS1 GLS2 GLS3 GLS4 GLS5 GLS6 GLS7 GLS8

Stainless Steel Cat. # SSTM SSTM SSTM SSTM SSTM SSTM 1 2 3 4 5 6 Size M20 M25 M32 M40 M50 M63 to to to to to to
1 3
Unit Qty. /2" /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 10 10 10 5 5 5
Wt. Lbs. Per 100 12 20 32 40 50 70
/2 /4 1 11/4 11/2 2 21/2 3
* For a complete list of Myers Hubs available from Cooper Crouse-Hinds, refer to Section CP.
818
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Enclosure Accessories Drains and Breathers

ECD Series
Applications:
ECD drains and breathers are installed in enclosures or conduit systems to: Provide ventilation to minimize condensation Drain accumulated condensate At least one breather should be used with each drain A breather is installed in top of enclosure or upper section of conduit system A "standard" drain is installed in bottom of enclosure or in lower section of conduit system "Universal" breather or drain functions as a breather when mounted at the top of an enclosure, or as a drain when mounted in the bottom of an enclosure "Combination" breather and drain is used in those applications where the use of a top mounted breather is not practical due to limited space; or in offshore and marine installations where moisture may enter the enclosure through the breather located on top of enclosure Drains and breathers are installed in hubs or drilled and tapped openings
II 2 G Ex d IIB (ECD15) II 2 G Ex d IIB + Hydrogen (ECD Type 4X Series) Explosionproof Dust-Ignitionproof
6E

NEC/CEC:
ECD 16, ECD387, ECD-N4D, ECD-N4B

Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III
ECD11
ECD13
IP46 (ECD-N4D and ECD-N4B only) IIB + Hydrogen (ECD-N4D and ECD-N4B only) ECD11, ECD13, ECD281
Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III
ECD15
ECD16
ECD18, ECD384, ECD15, ECD385

Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III IP42 IIB (ECD 15 only)
Features:
ECD284, ECD384, ECD385 and ECD15 "Universal" drains and breathers have:
Patented labyrinth design, suitable for use in Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C,D and Class II, Division 1 & 2, Groups F,G areas Capability to pass 50 cc of water per minute and 0.2 cubic feet or air per minute at atmospheric pressure ECD15 and ECD385 each have a well inside the inner, threaded end to provide for accumulation of sediment without clogging when used as a drain
ECD284
Class I, Division 1 & 2, Group C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G UL: Standard 886 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30 Type 4X: ECD-N4D and ECD-N4B ATEX Certificate # ITS07ATEX15639U
ECD18
Ordering Information ECD "Type 4X"

Drain and Breather 6E
Size
3 1
Drain Cat. # ECD38 N4D ECD1 N4D
Breather Cat. # ECD38 N4B ECD1 N4B
Standard Materials:
ECD11, ECD15, ECD281, ECD284, ECD384, ECD385 stainless steel ECD13 stainless steel with aluminum cap ECD16, ECD-N4D, ECD-N4B stainless steel ECD387 stainless steel ECD18 stainless steel with neoprene tube
/8 /2
ECD "Standard"
Drain and Breather
Size
1 3 1
"Standard" ECD drains and breathers have:

Thread-in-thread design, suitable for use in Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C,D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E,F,G; Class II, Division 2, Groups F,G and Class III areas ECD 11, 13 have capability to pass 25 cc of water per minute and .05 cubic feet of air per minute at atmospheric pressure ECD387 and ECD16 are a unique thread-inshaft design for use in Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B,C,D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E,F,G; Class II, Division 2, Groups F,G; Class III areas. The ECD387 and ECD16 can pass 15cc of water per minute. The ECD16 can pass .01 cubic feet of air per minute
Drain Cat. # ECD281 ECD387 ECD11
Breather Cat. #
/4 /8 /2
ECD13
Size Ranges:
/4" to /2"
1 1
ECD "Universal"
Drain or Breather
Size /4 3 /8 3 /8 1 /2 1 /2
1
Breather
Cat. # ECD284 ECD384 ECD385 ECD15 ECD16
"Combination" ECD breather and drain:

Provides ventilation to minimize condensation and drains accumulated condensate two functions performed by a single device installed in the bottom of an enclosure or conduit system Have the capability to pass 25 cc of water per minute and .10 cubic feet of air per minute at atmospheric pressure Thread-in-thread and labyrinth design, suitable for use in Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C and D; Class II, Division 1 & 2, Groups F and G; and Class III areas
Shorter overall length than ECD15 and ECD385. For use in confined spaces such as panelboard assemblies.
ECD "Combination"
Drain Typical installation of drain and breather in a combination motor starter
1. At least 5 full threads of drain or breather must be engaged in matching female thread, taper-tapped in accordance with NEMA/EEMAC Standard FB-1, Type NTC or National Bureau of Standards Handbook H28, Part II, Table 7.6. 2. These breathers and drains can be factory installed on various explosion-proof equipment. See options on applicable equipment pages for suffixes to be used. US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds
Drain or Breather
Size
1
Cat. # ECD18
/2
819
6E
Enclosure Accessories Drains and Breathers

CD Series / ACD NEMA 4X Series
Applications:
CD Series drains are for use in conduit systems to: Drain accumulated condensate. Provide ventilation to minimize condensation. Drains are installed in hubs or drilled and tapped openings.

UL Standard 514B
Standard Materials:
CD bodies and nuts steel or aluminum CD screen stainless steel
Standard Finishes:
Steel electrogalvanized with chromate treatment.
Options:
Description Copper-free aluminum construction Suffix SA
Size /2 3 /4
1
Cat. # CD1 CD2
ACD Series NEMA 4X Breather/Drain

ATEX and CENELEC Range
6E
I M2 II 2GD, E Exe I & II (Stainless Steel & Brass only) II 2GD, E Exe II (Nylon version) CSA Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D, Exe II
Enclosure Type 4X IP66
Applications:
For use in enclosures to provide a method to effectively drain moisture while allowing the enclosure to breathe.
Features:
All NEMA 4X breather/drains offer: Castellated locknuts that allow moisture to pass between the enclosure and the locknut to the drain holes in the fitting. Available in brass, stainless steel (Type 316) or 30% glass filled nylon. Captive "O" ring on recess of the face of the breather/drain to optimize ingress protection. ATEX and CSA Certified for worldwide market acceptance. Available with metric or NPT threads.
Entry Method M20 M20 M20 M25 M25 M25 1 /2" 1 /2" 3 /4" 3 /4" Material Brass Stainless Nylon Brass Stainless Nylon Brass Stainless Brass Stainless Steel Steel Steel Steel Cat. # ACDPEB/M20/15 ACDPES/M20/15 ACDPEN/M20/15 ACDPEB/M25/15 ACDPES/M25/15 ACDPEN/M25/15 ACDPEB/050NPT/15 ACDPES/050NPT/15 ACDPEB/075NPT/15 ACDPES/075NPT/15

SIRA 99 ATEX 3050U I M2 II 2GD, E Exe I & II (Stainless Steel & Brass only) II 2GD, E Exe II (Nylon only) CSA Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C & D, Exe II Enclosure Type 4X IP66
Operating Temperature:
50C to +85C
820
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
CID 101 Vapor Phase Corrosion Inhibitor Device
6E
Applications:
CID 101 vapor phase corrosion inhibitor devices are utilized: During use, storage, and shipment of products to provide longterm protection for: Interiors of conduit outlet bodies and boxes, junction boxes, panelboards, and enclosures for motor control and circuit breakers, control stations, instrumentation, and switches interiors of level sensors, speed responsive switches, and various monitoring/alarm systems interiors of pipes, conduits, and wireways electrical and electronic controls and components Within enclosures, indoors, or outdoors at petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants, food processing plants, and various other process industry facilities where airborne corrosion presents problems In onshore and offshore marine environments to protect against salt spray and excessive humidity condensation
Features:
Provide widespread protection for ferrous and nonferrous metals including steel, copper, aluminum, brass, solder, silver, etc. Particularly well-suited for protection of electrical and electronic equipment because the vapors emitted do not change the characteristics of metals they are protecting not chemically, electrically, or metallurgically. Contact resistance, conductivity, or other properties of sensitive electrical/electronic equipment is unaffected Extend life of product and minimize downtime from product failures caused by corrosive attack. Early corrosion symptoms can be avoided before visible signs appear (i.e., electrical shorts, intermittent operation, apparent poor connections, evidences of increased friction, visible dulling of metallic finishes, higher noise levels of moving parts, increased heat generation, etc.) Under normal usage, provide continuous protection of one cubic foot of enclosed space against corrosion for up to two years. Actual operating life expectancy may vary depending on the corrosive atmosphere, temperature, or air movement. For severe exposures at high temperatures use double the normal amount of CID 101 Quickly and easily installed without need for tools, or requiring special surface preparation, oiling, spraying, or dipping. The device is simply removed from its plastic bag and affixed into position through use of a pressure-sensitive adhesive. A convenient to use label is provided as a reminder to note the date of installation and when its replacement should be scheduled Safe to use. Vapors released are regarded as non-toxic under use conditions; and the polyurethane foam material is flame-retardant
Packaging/Storage:
CID 101 Corrosion Inhibitor Devices are individually packaged in sealed plastic bags to ensure their maximum corrosion protection value at time of installation Recommended storage is in the sealed plastic bags as supplied. Ideal ambient storage temperatures should not exceed 30C (86F). Shelf life under normal conditions is 1 year. Continuous service temperatures in excess of 150F (65C) should be avoided CID 101 Corrosion Inhibitor Devices are shipped in standard cartons of 50 units each. Carton shipping weight is .7 lbs
6E

Food and Drug Administration conformance. CFR Title 21 178.3300
Description Vapor Phase Corrosion Inhibitor Device Cat. # CID101
Dimensions
In Inches:
Order quantity of one (1) equals one standard carton of 50 units.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
821
6E
LNR Conduit Liner
Applications:
LNR conduit liners are installed in rigid metal conduit or IMC: To provide a smooth wire entry from conduit into enclosures to protect wires from abrasion as they are pulled With thin wall or thick wall enclosures Entering drilled and tapped openings or slip holes Entering an enclosure vertically or horizontally Regardless of where the conduit ends in relation to the enclosure wall
Dimensions
In Inches:
Features:
UL listed and CSA certified No need for threaded bushings, reducers, or special machining Corrosion and heat resistant polypropylene material Smooth flange providing easy wire pulling and protects conductors being installed Space saving Molded ribs ensure a tight fit, preventing the liner from sliding out while conductors are being pulled Quick and easy to install
Cat. # LNR1 LNR2 LNR3 LNR4 LNR5 LNR6 LNR7 LNR8 LNR9 LNR10
Size /2" 3 /4" 1" 11/4" 11/2" 2" 21/2" 3" 31/2" 4"
1
A 13/16" 19/16" 21/16" 21/16" 29/16" 29/16" 27/8" 27/8" 31/16" 31/16"
B /8" 11/8" 13/8" 13/4" 2" 27/16" 27/16" 39/16" 41/16" 49/16"
7
C /8" 13 /16" 11/16" 13/8" 15/8" 21/16" 21/4" 31/16" 39/16" 4"
5
D /16" /4" 7 /8" 11/4" 17/16" 17/8"

9 3

UL Standard 514B CSA Standard C22.2 No. 18 U.S. Patent No. 5,383,688
6E
27/8" 33/8" 37/8"
Standard Materials:
Polypropylene
Standard Finishes:
Natural (clear)
Sizes:
1/2" through 4"
822
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Industrial Lighting
Section L
Advanced technology, expert support, global certifications and an unmatched selection of proven solutions combine to deliver superior illumination, increased safety, and the lowest possible cost of ownership.
New Products in the Lighting Product Line

EV LED Class I, Division 1 Luminaires Champ VMV LED Class I, Division 2 Luminaires LED Class I, Division 2 Tasklight LED N2LPS LIGHT-PAK Emergency Lighting System Ex-Lite LED Exit Sign CCH UX LED Exit Sign HazardGard LED Lantern Champ NVMV Luminaire for IEC Applications EVLS HazardGard Luminaire Champ Floodlight Family
Section
2L 2L 2L 2L 2L 2L 2L 3L 4L 7L
Notable changes to the Lighting section of this catalog

Section 1L now contains both hazardous and non-hazardous incandescent luminaires (previously 1L & 2L) New Section 2L for harsh and hazardous LED Luminaires Beacons and Strobes (previously 11L) have moved into the Signaling Devices product line Section 11L is now Specialty Lighting (previously 12L)
Industrial Lighting
Table of Contents
Section L of the Cooper Crouse-Hinds Catalog contains information on industrial lighting. Product details on individual luminaires are given in eleven separate sections, as noted below. In addition, a complete section (8L) is devoted to luminaire hangers and accessories.
Section 3L
High Intensity Discharge (H.I.D.) Lighting Enclosed and Gasketed
(for use in hazardous [classified] locations, non-hazardous locations, and marine locations) Indoor and outdoor vaportight luminaires for use in applications where dirt, moisture, and corrosion problems exist. Included are units with integral ballasts. DMV Champ Series LMV Champ Series VMV Champ Series N2MV Champ Series NVMV Champ Series
Section 8L
Luminaire Hangers and Accessories
(for use in hazardous [classified] locations and non-hazardous locations) A variety of luminaire hangers for use with the luminaires listed. Information on mounting accessories required and typical luminaire weights also included. For hazardous For non-hazardous locations locations EAHC, EFHC AL EC AHG EFH ARB GUA, GUF FHM UNR UNE, UNH, UNHC CPS UNJ UNJC
Considerations for Selection

Preceding the eleven product sections is a Selector Guide. Included in this section is information on: A selection of the appropriate light source for a given application A Quick Selector Guide of the luminaires that are designed and approved to meet the various environmental requirements of the National Electric Code Determining the proper size (i.e., wattage) and number of units to achieve the desired light levels in a given application Methods to follow in making a luminaire layout. Cat. Nos. are shown, in many cases, for complete assemblies including mounting, reflector, globe, and guard, as well as individual components. In these cases, ordering can be done by component or by complete assembly. Photometric and other technical data is included in each section for the luminaires it contains Information relating to product families in the Lighting Section is shown as follows:
Section 4L
High Intensity Discharge (H.I.D.) Lighting
(for use in hazardous [classified] locations) Indoor and outdoor luminaires and accessories. Included are luminaires with integral ballasts. HazardGard Series LoPro HazardGard Series
Section 9L
Portable Lighting
A variety of portable luminaires for hazardous and non-hazardous applications. VS EVH RCDER EVP
Section 5L
Luminaires with Induction Lighting System
(for use in hazardous [classified] locations, non-hazardous locations, and marine locations) DMVIG, VMVIG CPMVIG in Section 7L
Section 10L
Emergency Lighting
(for use in hazardous [classified] locations) Emergency lighting for use in power outage situations. Also, exit signs and strobe warning lights. N2LPS Light-Pak Series CPMVFB EXL Exit Sign DMVFB ELPS Light-Pak Series N2MVFB Ex-Lite EVLPFB CCH UX Series
Section 6L
Fluorescent Lighting
(for use in hazardous [classified] locations and non-hazardous locations) Indoor and outdoor fluorescent luminaires and accessories for application in all classes of hazardous and non-hazardous locations. For hazardous For non-hazardous locations locations CPMVF NFL EVF, EVFDR VF Vaporgard Series FVN, FVS EVFT, DMVF N2MVF, EVLPF VF, eLLK, nLLK eLLB20
Section 1L
Incandescent Lighting
(for use in hazardous [classified] and nonhazardous locations) For hazardous For non-hazardous locations locations EVI Series Vaporgard Series EV Series V Series NDA CorroGard Series
Section 11L
Specialty Lighting
Luminaires for use in applications where conventional lighting is not acceptable due to size and/or location, such as tank, instrument, and gauge applications. For hazardous For non-hazardous locations locations EV tank lights V Observation EVTL ELG gauge light
Section 2L
LED Luminaires
(for use in industrial and hazardous [classified] locations) EV LED Series Champ VMV LED Series LED Tasklight N2LPS Light-Pak Series Ex-Lite Series CCH UX Series HazardGard Series
Section 7L
Floodlights
(for use in hazardous [classified] locations and non-hazardous locations) CPMV Champ-Pak Wall Pack EVMA-S812 HazardGard Series FMV Champ Series F2MV, FMV1000 FZD RCDE SSFMV Voyager nR
824
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Industrial Lighting Products

Quick Reference Chart
Application Environment
LED
Light Source Incandescent H.I.D. / Induction Pulse Start Metal Halide Metal Halide High Pressure Sodium Section 1L Vaporgard, V Series, NDA Section 11L V160 Tank light Section 1L Vaporgard , V Series, NDA Section 3L LMV, DMV, VMV, N2MV Champ Section 5L Champ Induction Section 3L LMV, DMV, VMV, N2MV Champ Section 5L Champ Induction
Fluorescent Linear Long Twin Tube Compact
Emergency & Warning Exit Signs Emergency Lighting
WallPacks & Floodlights Pulse Start Metal Halide Metal Halide High Pressure Sodium Incandescent Section 7L F2MV, FMV, FMV1000
General Industrial
Section 2L Champ VMV LED, LED Tasklight
Section 6L VF Series, NFL, FVN, FVS DMVF, N2MVF
Section 2L Ex-Lite, CCH UX Section 10L LED N2LPS Light-Pak, DMVFB, N2MVFB Section 2L Ex-Lite, CCH UX Section 10L DMVFB, N2MVFB, LED N2LPS Light-Pak Section 2L Ex-Lite, CCH UX Section 10L DMVFB, N2MVFB
Wet Locations
Section 2L Champ VMV LED, LED Tasklight, EV LED
Section 6L VF Series, NFL, FVN, FVS, DMVF, N2MVF
Section 7L F2MV, FMV, FMV1000
Marine Locations or 4X
Section 2L Champ VMV LED, LED Tasklight, EV LED Section 2L Champ VMV LED, LED Tasklight, EV LED
Section 1L NDA
Section 3L LMV, DMV, VMV, N2MV Champ Section 4L EVLP Lo-Pro EVM HazardGard Section 3L LMV, DMV, VMV, N2MV Champ Section 5L Champ Induction
Section 6L NFL, FVS, DMVF, N2MVF, CPMVF EVFDR, EVFT Illuminator Section 6L NFL, N2MVF, FVS, VF Series, DMVF, CPMVF
Section 7L CPMV, F2MV, FMV, FMV1000
Corrosive
Section 1L Vaporgard, NDA
Section 2L Ex-Lite, CCH UX Section 10L DMVF-EXD exit, N2MV-EXD exit, LED N2LPS Light-Pak, N2MVFB, DMVFB Section 10L EXL exit, EVLPF-EXD exit, ELPS Light-Pak EVLPFB Section 2L Ex-Lite Section 10L DMVF-EXD exit, LED N2LPS Light-Pak, DMVFB, N2MVFB Section 10L DMVFB, N2MVFB
Section 7L CPMV, F2MV, FMV, FMV1000
Class I, Div. 1 or Section 2L Zone 1 EV LED
Section 1L EV Section 11L EVTL, EVA160, EVO, ELG Section 1L Vaporgard, NDA
Section 4L Section 6L EVLP Lo-Pro EVF, EVFDR, EVM HazardGard EVFT Illuminator, EVLPF, eLLK Section 3L LMV, DMV, VMV, N2MV Champ Section 5L Champ Induction Section 6L VF Series, NFL, nLLK, eLLK, FVN, FVS, CPMVF, DMVF, N2MVF
Section 7L FZD, EVM-S812, RCDE
Class I, Div. 2 and Zone 2
Section 2L Champ VMV LED, LED Tasklight
Section 7L CPMV, F2MV, FMV, FMV1000 FZD
Restricted Breathing Class I, Div 2 and Zone 2 Certified IEC Zone 2 Class II Class III Simultaneous Presence Section 2L Champ VMV LED, EV LED Section 1L EV Section 11L EVTL, EVO
Section 3L LMV, DMV, VMV, N2MV Champ Section 5L Champ Induction Section 3L LMV, DMV, VMV, N2NV Champ Section 4L EVLP Lo-Pro EVM HazardGard Section 5L Champ Induction Section 9L EVP Section 9L EVP
Section 6L CPMVF, DMVF, N2MVF
Section 7L CPMV, F2MV, FMV
Section 6L FVN, nLLK, eLLK, FVS, DMVF, N2MVF EVF, EVFDR, EVFT, EVLP
Section 2L Ex-Lite Section 10L EXL, LED N2LPS Light-Pak, DMVFB, N2MVFB
Section 7L CPMV
Paint Spray Portables Section 2L Section 9L LED HazardGard VS, EVH, Lantern RCDER
Section 6L EVF, EVFT Section 9L EVH
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
825

Lighting Layout Services
Lighting Application and Design

In the past, engineers had to calculate lighting layouts and design using complex mathematical formulas - also known as the "Lumen Method" and "Point-By-Point" Method. Today, there are software programs that can easily run these calculations very quickly. Lighting layouts, analysis, and design from Cooper Crouse-Hinds deliver a real competitive advantage. For over 100 years, Cooper CrouseHinds has been providing hazardous area lighting solutions. Our light fittings are manufactured to the highest standards and will provide years of reliable service and performance under the harshest conditions.
Lighting Software
Cooper Crouse-Hinds' LUXICON software program makes it very easy to perform lighting calculations and professional quality designs. Our latest version, LUXICON 2.5.25, is distributed free of charge and includes a tutorial to introduce users to its operation and several "Wizards" that will assist in a step-by-step process to create your own lighting design. You can also add in objects that will account for light inference caused by equipment, walls, and other obstructions in the work area. It will also provide detail point-by-point calculations and statistical analysis.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Point-by-point light calculation in plan view
Lighting Layout Services

L
Need help with a more complex lighting design or analysis? Then take advantage of our free lighting design service using AGi32 software. Our lighting designers can provide you with lighting layouts for more complex projects that will interface with the latest version of AutoCAD drawings and will provide a more detailed lighting analysis.
Calculations shown with light fitting placement 826

Illuminance rendering

Mercury Vapor Luminaires Discontinuation Notice
Cooper Crouse-Hinds no longer produces luminaires containing Mercury Vapor ballasts in any of our U.S. facilities.
In 2005, the U.S. government signed the Energy Policy Act of 2005. The law, commonly referred to as EPACT 2005, contained many new changes in requirements for energy production, energy transportation, and energy efficiency. Once of those changes calls for the elimination of manufacturing and importation of Mercury Vapor (MV) ballasts in the United States after January 1, 2008. Mercury Vapor ballasts have lower lumens per watt than alternative HID light sources and are far less energy-efficient than High Pressure Sodium (HPS) or Metal Halide (MH) ballasts. As demand for energyefficient lighting grows, we expect a subsequent drop in the usage of Mercury Vapor ballasts globally. This could lead to longer lead times and potentially worldwide discontinuation at some point in the future. Cooper Crouse-Hinds suggests the use of alternative technologies, such as LED, that provide better efficacy, color rendering, length of life, and environmentally friendlier solutions. Alternative HID light sources such as High Pressure Sodium or Metal Halide are also viable product solutions. While we recommend switching to an alternative light source, there are many countries in the world that still allow the use of Mercury Vapor ballasts. As long as the ballasts and lamps remain available, we can still offer Mercury Vapor luminaires out of our manufacturing facilities located outside of the United States. The Mercury Vapor luminaires will be manufactured in our Cooper Crouse-Hinds Mexico facility and shipped directly from there. For available Mercury Vapor products, please contact customer service.
Alternative Solutions
Luminaire Type Mercury Vapor 100W 175W 250W 400W 1000W LED 70W 98W Hours 24,000 24,000 24,000 24,000 24,000 Lumens 4,100 7,900 12,100 21,000 57,500 Lumens per Watt 34 45 48 52 57
60,000 60,000
3,778 6,340
56.5 56.5
High Pressure Sodium 100W 24,000 250W 24,000 400W 24,000 1000W 24,000 Metal Halide 175W 250W 400W 1000W
9,500 28,500 50,000 140,000
95 114 125 140
10,000 20,000 20,000 12,000
13,500 20,500 36,000 110,000
77 82 90 110
Pulse Start Metal Halide 175W 15,000 250W 15,000 400W 20,000 Induction 55W 85W 165W
16,000 23,800 44,000
91 95 100
100,000 100,000 100,000
3,500 6,000 12,000
63 70 72
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
827
Lamps Used With Cooper Crouse-Hinds Luminaires

ANSI Ballast GE Manufacturer
H.I.D. Medium Base Series LMV, EVLP_ 1
Lamp Watts
Lamp Catalog Number Osram/Sylvania Phillips Venture
High Pressure Sodium 50 70 100 150 Metal Halide 70 100 175* M98 M90 M57 MXR70/U/MED MXR100/U/MED MVR175/U/MED MP70/U/MED MP100/U/MED M175/U/MED MHC70/U/M/3K MHC100/U/M/3K MH175/U/M MH70W/U MH100W/U S68 S62 S54 S55 LU50/MED LU70/MED LU100/MED LU150/MED LU50/MED LU70/MED LU100/MED LU150/MED C50S68/M C70S62/M C100S54/M C150S55/M
Pulse Start Metal Halide 150 175

*For export only.
M102 M137
MXR150/U/MED MXR175/VBU/MED/PA
MP150/U/MED
MH150W/U/PS MS175W/BU/MED/PS
L
828
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Lamp Watts ANSI Ballast GE High Pressure Sodium 50 70 100 150 S68 S62 S54 S55 4000/24K 6400/24K 9500/24K 16000/24K 4000/24K 6300/24K 9500/24K 15800/24K O/S Manufacturer Lumens/Life (hrs) PH
H.I.D. Medium Base Series LMV, EVLP_ 1
Manufacturer Bulb Venture GE O/S PH Venture
4000/24K 6300/24K 9500/24K 16000/24K
B17 B17 B17 B17
E17 E17 E17 E17
ED17 ED17 ED17 ED17
Metal Halide 70 100 175* M98 M90 M57 5500/12K 9000/15K 13600/10K 5200/15K 8500/15K 14400/10K 6200/10K 9300/12.5K 13500/10K 5600/15K 9000/15K BD17 BD17 BD17 E17 E17 ED17 ED17 ED17 ED17 ED17 ED17
Pulse Start Metal Halide 150 175

*For export only.
M102 M137
12500/15K 17700/15K
13300/15K
14000/15K 17500/15K
BD17 BD17
E17 E17
ED17 ED17
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
829

Lamp Watts ANSI Ballast GE Manufacturer Osram/Sylvania Phillips
H.I.D. Mogul Base Series - DMV, VMV, CPMV, FMV, F2MV, EVLP_0, FZD
Venture
High Pressure Sodium 50 70 100 150 150 (100V) 200 250 310 400 1000 S68 S62 S54 S55 S56 S66 S50 S67 S51 S52 LU50 LU70 LU100 LU150/55 LU150/100 LU200 LU250 LU310 LU400 LU1000 LU50 LU70 LU100 LU150/55 LU150/100 LU200 LU250 LU310 LU400 LU1000 C50S68 C70S62 C100S54 C150S55 C150S56 C200S66 C250S50 C310S67 C400S51 C1000S52
Metal Halide 70 100 175* 250* 400* 400* 1000 1500 M98 M90 M57 M58 M59 M59 M47 M48 MHC100/U/ED28/HR/4K MH175/U MH250/U MH400/U MH400/U/ED28 MH1000/U MH1500/BD MH70W/U/ED28 MH100W/U/ED28
MVR175/U MVR250/U MVR400/U MVR400/U/ED28 MVR1000/U MVR1500/HBD
M175/U M250U M400/U M400/U/BT-28 M1000/U M1500/BD
Pulse Start Metal Halide 150 175 200 250 M102 M137 M136 M138 M138 M132 M131 M131 M135 M135 M135 M135 M141 MXR175/VBU/PA MXR250/VBU/PA MXR320/VBU/PA
(Base up +/ 15%)
(Base up +/ 15%) CDM150/U/PS/4K ALTO MS175/BU/PS MS250/BU/PS MH150W/U/ED28/PS MS175W/BU/PS MH200W/U/PS MH250W/HBU/PS MH250W/HBD/PS MH320W/U/ED28/PS MH350W/U/PS MH350W/U/ED28/PS MH400W/HBU/PS MH400W/HBD/PS MH400W/HBU/ED28/PS MH400W/HBD/ED28/PS
320 350 400
MS320/PS/BU-ONLY
MS320W/BU/PS
MXR400/VBU/PA
MS400/PS/BU-ONLY
MS400/BU/PS
1000
HID Double Contact Metal Halide for EVP Series 70W

*For export only.
CMH70/TD/830/R7S
HQI-DE 70/WDX
CDM70/TD/830
830
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Lamp Watts ANSI Ballast GE Manufacturer Lumens/Life (hrs) O/S PH
H.I.D. Mogul Base Series - DMV, VMV, CPMV, FMV, F2MV, EVM, EVLP_0, FZD
Manufacturer Bulb Venture GE O/S PH Venture
High Pressure Sodium 50 70 100 150 150 (100V) 200 250 310 400 1000 Metal Halide 70 100 175 250 400 400 1000 1500 M98 M90 M57 M58 M59 M59 M47 M48 5600/15K 9000/15K 13600/10K 20800/10K 36000/20K 36000/20K 105000/12K 155000/3K 14400/10K 22000/10K 36000/20K 36000/20K 110000/15K 155000/3K 13500/10K 20500/20K 36000/20K 36000/20K 110000/12K 165000/3K ED28 ED28 ED37 ED28 BT56 BT56 BT28 BT28 BT37 BT28 BT56 BT56 ED28 ED28 ED37 ED28 BT56 BT56 ED28 ED28 S68 S62 S54 S55 S56 S66 S50 S67 S51 S52 4000/24K 6400/24K 9500/24K 16000/24K 15000/24K 22000/24K 28000/24K 37000/24K 51000/24K 140000/24K 4000/24K 6300/24K 9500/24K 16000/24K 15700/24K 22000/24K 29000/24K 37000/24K 50000/24K 130000/24K 4000/24K 6300/24K 9500/24K 16000/24K 16000/24K 22000/24K 28500/24K 37000/24K 50000/24K 140000/24K ED23 1/2 ED23 1/2 ED23 1/2 ED23 1/2 ED28 ED18 ED18 ED18 ED18 E25 ET23 1/2 ET23 1/2 ET23 1/2 ET23 1/2 BT28 ET18 ET18 ET18 ET18 E25 ED23 1/2 ED23 1/2 ED23 1/2 ED23 1/2 ED28 ED18 ED18 ED18 ED18 E25
Pulse Start Metal Halide 150 175 200 250 320 350 400 M102 M137 M136 M138 M138 M132 M131 M131 M135 M135 M135 M135 M141 17200/15K 23000/15K 31000/15K 44000/20K 32000/20K 41000/20K 44000/20K 13000/24K 16000/15K 23800/15K 14000/15K 17500/15K 21000/15K 25000/15K 25000/15K 33000/20K 37000/20K 37000/20K 44000/20K 44000/20K 44000/20K ED23 1/2 ED28 ED28 ED37 BT28 BT37 ED23 1/2 ED28 ED28 ED28 ED37 ED28 ED28 ED28 ED28 ED28 ED28 ED37 ED28 ED37 ED37 ED28 ED28
1000
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
831

Lamp Watts Luminaire Series GE
Fluorescent Lamps
Base
Manufacturer Osram/Sylvania Phillips
Compact 5W-T4 7W-T4 9W-T4 13W-T4 26W-T4 32W-T4 42W-T4 G23 G23 G23 GX23-2 GX24q-3 GX24q-3 GX24q-4 VF VF VF DMVF (Discontinued) DMVF, N2MVF, CPMVF, EVLPF DMVF, N2MVF, CPMVF, EVLPF DMVF, N2MVF, CPMVF, EVLPF F5BX/SPX41/840 F7BX/SPX35/835 F9BX/SPX35/835 F13DBX23T4/SPX35 F26TBX/SPX35/A/4P F32TBX/SPX35/A/4P F42QBX/SPX35/A/4P CF5DS/841 CF7DS/835 CF9DS/835 CF13DD/835 CF26DT/E/IN/835 CF32DT/E/IN/835 CF42DT/E/IN/835 PL-S5W/27 PL-S7W/35 PL-S9W/35 PL-C13W/35/USA PL-T26W/35/4P/ALTO PL-T32W/35/4P/ALTO PL-T42W/35/4P/ALTO
Long Twin Tube 39 40 2G11 2G11 EVFT NFL, FVS F39/36/BX/SPX35 F40/30BX/SPX35 FT36DL/835 FT40DL/835/RS PL-L36W/35 PL-L40W/35/RS
Linear 32W-T8 40 (34) W-T12 54W-T5HO 60W (800ma)-T12 High Output 110W (1500ma)-T12 Very High Output Medium Bipin Medium Bipin Miniature Bipin Recessed Double Contact Recessed Double Contact NFL, FVN, EVF, EVFDR NFL, FVN, EVF, EVFDR FVN FVN, EVF, EVFDR EVF, EVFDR F32T8/SP35 F40CW/RS/WM F54T5/841/WH/ECO F48T12/CW/HO F48T12/CW/1500 F032/735 F40CW/SS HO54W/835 F48T12/CW/HO F48T12/CW/VHO F32T8/TL735/ALTO F40CW/RS/EW/ALTO F54T5/830/HO/ALTO F48T12/CW/HO F48T12/CW/VHO
L
832
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Incandescent & Quartz (Halogen) Lamps
Lamp Watts
Base
Luminaire Series GE
Manufacturer Lumens/Life (Hrs) Osram/Sylvania Phillips
Compact 5W-T4 7W-T4 9W-T4 13W-T4 26W-T4 32W-T4 42W-T4 G23 G23 G23 GX23-2 GX24q-3 GX24q-3 GX24q-4 VF VF VF DMVF (Discontinued) DMVF, N2MVF, CPMVF, EVLPF DMVF, N2MVF, CPMVF, EVLPF DMVF, N2MVF, CPMVF, EVLPF 250/10K 400/10K 600/10K 810/10K 1800/10K 2200/10K 3200/10K 230/10K 400/10K 580/10K 780/10K 1800/10K 2400/10K 3200/10K 250/10K 400/10K 600/10K 860/10K 1800/10K 2400/10K 3200/10K
Long Twin Tube 39 40 2G11 2G11 EVFT NFL, FVS 2850/12K 3150/20K 2900/12K 3150/20K 2900/12K 3150/20K
Linear 32W-T8 40 (34) W-T12 54W-T5HO 60W (800ma)-T12 High Output 110W (1500ma)-T12 Very High Output Medium Bipin Medium Bipin Miniature Bipin Recessed Double Contact Recessed Double Contact NFL, FVN, EVF, EVFDR NFL, FVN, EVF, EVFDR FVN FVN, EVF, EVFDR EVF, EVFDR 2850/20K 2650/20K 4600/30K 4050/12K 6200/10K 2800/20K 2700/20K 4450/24K 4050/12K 6600/10K 2850/20K 2650/20K 4750/35K 4050/12K 7050/12K
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
833

Luminaire Series GE
Max Watts And Bulb Type
Manufacturer Osram/Sylvania Phillips
25W T10 50W PAR20 52W A19 58W A19 60W T10 65W BR30 75W ER30 100W A19 100W A21 100W A23 100W D.C. Bay 150W A21 150W A23 150W PAR38 200W A23 200W A25 200W PS25 200W PS30 300W PS25
EXLD EVTL ELG ELG EXL EVO2376 EVO2376 EV 40 Series / EVI V160, EV160, EVH, EV 15 Series / EVI VS Suffix QTZ Vaporgard 150W EV 10 Series / EVI EV 20 Series V Series RCDE6 Vaporgard 200W EV 10 Series / EVI Vaporgard 200W EV 15 Series / EVI EV 15 Series / EVI EV 20 Series / EVI EV 30 Series / EVI Vaporgard 300W NDA EV 15 Series / EVI Vaporgard 300W EV 20 Series / EVI EV 15 Series / EVI RCDE6 EV 30 Series / EVI EV 30 Series / EVI RCDE10
25T10 50PAR20/H/SP10 50PAR20/H/FL25 60A52WMP/98 60T10 75R30/SP/65WM 75ER30 100A (IF) 100A21 (IF) 100A23 120V Q100CL/DC 150A (IF)
25T10 50PAR20/CAP/NSP 50PAR20/CAP/NFL 60A52/SS/XL 58A19/62 60T10 65BR30/SP 75ER30 100A (IF) 100A21 (IF) 100A23 100Q/CL/DC 150A (IF) 150A23 (IF) 150PAR/FL 200A23 (IF)
25T10 50PAR20/HAL/NSP9 50PAR20/HAL/NFL30 60A-52A/99/EW 60T10 65BR30/SP20 75ER30 100A (IF) 100A21 (IF) 100A23 100Q/CL/DC 150A (IF) 150A23/CL 150PAR38/2FL 200A (IF) 200A25/35
200PS25/99XL 200 130V 300M 200PS/CL 130V 200 130V 300M
300W PS30 300W R40 300W PS35 500W PS40 500W PAR64
300M/99 (130v) 300R/FL 300 500PS40 500PAR64/MFL
300M/CL 300R40/FL 300/CL
300M/PS30 300BR/FL 300 500PS40 500PAR64/MFL
500PAR64/MFL
834
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Max Watts And Bulb Type GE Manufacturer Lumens O/S
Manufacturer Life-Hours PH GE O/S PH
25W T10 50W PAR20 52W A19 58W A19 60W T10 65W BR30 75W ER30 100W A19 100W A21 100W A23 100W D.C. Bay 150W A21 150W A23 150W PAR38 200W A23 200W A25 200W PS25 200W PS30 300W PS25 300W PS30 300W R40 300W PS35 500W PS40 500W PAR64
248 570 570 670 630 740 775 850 1710 1710 1600 1600 2850 1660 2720 3000 2725 6200 3935 3700 5820 9900 6500
232 530 530 650 630 630 640 750 1750 1690 1600 2780 2810 1660 3930 2720 3000 2665 5870 3030 5700 10100
260 550 550 564 630 745
1000 2500 2500 2500 3000 1000 2000 2000
1000 2500 2500 2500 3000 1000 2000 2000 750 750 750 2000 750 750 2000 750 3500 2500 1875 750 7500 2000 1000 1000 2000
1000 2000 2000 4250 3000 1000 2000 2000 750 750 750 2000 750 1275 2000 750 3500 2500 2120 750 7500 2000 1000 1000 2000
1650 1680 1730 1600 2850 2475 1660 3800 2720 3000 2825 6280 6100 np 5700 10100
750 750 750 2000 750 2000 3500 2500 1950 750 6800 2000 1000 1000 2000
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
835
Ballasts Used With Cooper Crouse-Hinds Luminaires

ANSI Code Type R/HX/CWA R-HPF HX-HPF HX-HPF R-HPF HX-HPF HX-HPF HX-HPF HX-HPF HX-HPF R-HPF HX-HPF HX-HPF HX-HPF HX-HPF HX-HPF R-HPF HX-HPF HX-HPF HX-HPF HX-HPF HX-HPF CWA CWA R-PFC CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA Starting Current 1.0 0.7/0.3 0.3/0.3 0.9 0.8/0.5/0.4/0.4 .8/.4/.3 0.4 0.2 .5/.4 1.5 1.3/0.8/0.7/0.6 1.3/0.6/0.5 0.7 0.4 0.5/0.5 2.3 2.0/1.2/1.0/0.9 2.0/0.9/0.5 1.1 0.5 0.9/0.8 1.2/0.7/0.6/.05 0.3 0.9/1.0 1.4/0.8/0.7/0.6 0.4 1.7 1.7/1.0/0.8/0.7 1.7/0.7/0.6 0.9 0.4 1.0 3.3 3.3/1.8/1.5/1.4 3.3/1.4/1.0 1.6 0.8 1.9 6.4/3.8/3.2/2.8 6.4/2.8/2.2 3.6 1.6 6.0/5.6
High Pressure Sodium Data
Watts
Volts 120 120 / 277 t220/24050 Hz 120 120/208/240/277 120/277/347 220 480 220/24050 Hz 120 120/208/240/277 120/277/347 220 480 220/24050 Hz 120 120/208/240/277 120/277/347 220 480 220/24050 Hz 120/208/240/277 480 220/24050 Hz 120/208/240/277 480 120 120/208/240/277 120/277/347 220 480 23050 Hz 120 120/208/240/277 120/277/347 220 480 23050 Hz 120/208/240/277 120/277/347 220 480 220/24050 Hz
Operating Current 0.6 0.6/0.3 0.6/0.6 0.8 0.8/0.5/0.4/0.4 0.8/0.4/0.3 0.4 0.2 .5/.4 1.1 1.2/0.7/0.6/0.5 1.2/0.5/0.4 0.6 0.3 0.7/0.6 1.5 1.7/1.0/0.8/0.7 1.7/0.7/0.6 0.9 0.4 0.9/0.8 1.8/1.0/0.9/0.8 0.4 0.9/0.8 2.4/1.4/1.2/1.0 0.6 2.5 2.5/1.5/1.3/1.1 2.7/1.2/0.9 1.5 0.7 1.4 3.8 3.8/2.2/1.9/1.7 3.8/1.7/1.3 2.1 1.0 2.0 9.5/5.5/4.8/4.2 9.5/4.2/3.3 5.0 2.3 5.2/4.8
Input Watts 62 66 66 86 91 93 91 93 94 115 130 130 130 130 130 170 188 188 188 188 188 188 188 175 250 250 295 295 295 295 310 300 457 464 464 457 464 465 1100 1100 1100 1100 1100
Kit Cat. # CHRBS050/120 CHRBS050/DT CHRBS050/220 50 CHRBS070/120 CHRBS070/MT CHRBS070/MT CHRBS070/220 CHRBS070/480 CHRBS070/220 50 CHRBS100/120 CHRBS100/MT CHRBS100/TT CHRBS100/220 CHRBS100/480 CHRBS100/220 50 CHRBS150/120 CHRBS150/MT CHRBS150/TT CHRBS150/220 CHRBS150/480 CHRBS150/220 50 CHRBS150/MT CE CHRBS150/480 CE CHRBS150/220 50 CE CHRBS200/MT CHRBS/200/480 CHRBS250/120 CHRBS250/MT CHRBS250/TT CHRBS250/220 CHRBS250/480 CHRBS250/220 50 CHRBS400/120 CHRBS400/MT CHRBS400/TT CHRBS400/220 CHRBS400/480 CHRBS400/220 50 CHRBS1000/MT CHRBS1000/TT CHRBS1000/220 CHRBS1000/480 CHRBS1000/220 50
50
S68
70
S62
100
S54
150 (55v)
S55
150 (100v)
S56
L
200
S66
250
S50
400
S51
1000
S52
836
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

ANSI Code M102 Type R/HX/CWA HX-HPF HX-HPF Super CWA Super CWA Super CWA Super CWA Super CWA Super CWA Super CWA Super CWA Super CWA Super CWA Super CWA Super CWA Super Super Super Super CWA CWA CWA CWA
Pulse Start Metal Halide Data
Watts 150
Volts 120/208/240/277 120/277/347/480 120/208/240/277 120/277/347/480 120/208/240/277 120/277/347 480 120/208/240/277 120/277/347 120/208/240/277 120/277/347 220 480 230 / 50 120/208/240/277 120/277/347 480 230 / 50 120/208/240/277 347 480 220/24050 Hz
Starting Current 1.8/1.3/0.9/0.8 1.8/0.8/0.7 1.0/0.6/0.5/0.4 0.8/0.4/0.3 0.8/0.4/0.4/0.3 0.7/0.3/0.3 0.2 2.3/1.3/1.2/1.0 2.0/0.9/0.8 1.8/1.1/0.9/0.8 2.2/1.0/0.7 1.4 0.5 1.1 2.9/1.7/1.5/1.3 3.2/1.4/1.1 0.8 2.0 7.8/4.0/3.7/3.2 2.3 1.7 4.5/4.1
Operating Current 1.6/1.0/0.8/0.7 1.6/0.7/0.6 1.8/1.1/0.9/0.8 1.9/0.8/0.7 2.0/1.2/1.0/0.9 2.1/0.9/0.7 0.5 2.5/1.5/1.3/1.1 2.5/1.1/0.9 3.3/1.9/1.7/1.4 3.3/1.4/1.1 1.7 0.8 1.6 3.8/2.2/1.9/1.7 3.8/1.7/1.4 1.0 2.1 9.0/5.2/4.5/3.9 3.2 2.4 5.0/4.5
Input Watts 185 185 208 208 232 232 232 288 290 368 368 365 368 365 452 450 452 454 1080 1075 1075 1090
Kit Cat. # CHRBM150/MTS828 CHRBM150/TTS828 CHRBM175/MTS828 CHRBM175/TTS828 CHRBM200/MTS828 CHRBM200/TTS828 CHRBM200/480S828 CHRBM250/MTS828 CHRBM250/TTS828 CHRBM250/MTS828 CHRBM250/TTS828 CHRBM250/220S828 CHRBM250/480S828 CHRBM250/220 50S828 CHRBM400/MT S828 CHRBM400/TTS828 CHRBM400/480S828 CHRBM400/220 50S828 CHRBM1000/MTS828 CHRBM1000/347S828 CHRBM1000/480S828 CHRBM1000/220 50S828
175*
M137
200*
M136
250*
M138
320*
M132
400*
M135
1000
M141
Super CWA Super CWA Super CWA CWA
*EISA compliant.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
837

ANSI Code Volts 120/208/240/277 120/277/347 220 220/24050 Hz 120/208/240/277 120/277/347 220 480 220/24050 Hz 120 120/208/240/277 120/277/347 220 480 230 / 50 120 120/208/240/277 120/277/347 220 480 230 / 50 120 120/208/240/277 120/277/347 220 480 230 / 50 120/208/240/277 120/277/347 220 480 220/24050 Hz 120/208/240/277 120/277/347 220 480 220/24050 Hz Type R/HX/CWA HX-HPF HX-HPE HX-HPF HX-HPF HX-HPF HX-HPF HX-HPF HX-HPF HX-HPF CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA CWA Starting Current 0.6/0.3/0.3/0.3 0.6/0.2/0.2 0.4 0.7/0.6 1.2/0.8/0.7/0.6 1.2/0.5/0.4 0.9 0.3 0.7/0.7 1.3 1.3/0.8/0.7/0.6 1.3/0.6/0.5 0.6 0.4 0.8 1.0 1.0/0.6/0.5/0.5 2.2/1.0/0.8 1.4 0.6 1.0 3.0 3.5/2.0/1.8/1.5 3.5/1.5/1.2 1.9 0.9 1.4 7.8/4.0/3.7/3.2 7.8/3.2/2.5 3.9 1.9 4.5/4.1 13.4/7.7/6.7/5.7 13.4/5.7/4.6 7.3 3.3 6.9/6.3 Operating Current
Metal Halide Data
Watts
Input Watts 88 88 94 95 129 129 129 132 129 210 210 210 210 210 210 294 294 295 295 295 290 456 458 460 458 462 462 1080 1080 1080 1080 1090 1605 1615 1605 1625 1605
Kit Cat. # CHRBM070/MT CHRBM070/TT CHRBM070/220 CHRBM070/220 50 CHRBM100/MT CHRBM100/TT CHRBM100/220 CHRBM100/480 CHRBM100/220 50 CHRBM175/120 CHRBM175/MT CHRBM175/TT CHRBM175/220 CHRBM175/480 CHRBM175/220 50 CHRBM250/120 CHRBM250/MT CHRBM250/TT CHRBM250/220 CHRBM250/480 CHRBM250/220 50 CHRBM400/120 CHRBM400/MT CHRBM400/TT CHRBM400/220 CHRBM400/480 CHRBM400/220 50 CHRBM1000/MT CHRBM1000/TT CHRBM1000/220 CHRBM1000/480 CHRBM1000/220 50 CHRBM1500/MT CHRBM1500/TT CHRBM1500/220 CHRBM1500/480 CHRBM1500/220 50
70
M98
0.8/0.5/0.4/0.4 0.8/0.4/0.3 0.5 0.5/0.4 1.2/0.7/0.6/0.5 1.2/0.5/0.4 0.6 0.3 0.7/0.6 1.8 1.8/1.1/0.9/0.8 1.8/0.8/0.7 1.0 0.5 1.1 2.6 2.6/1.5/1.3/1.1 2.5/1.1/0.9 1.5 0.6 1.3 4.0 4.0/2.2/2.0/1.8 4.0/1.8/1.4 2.2 1.0 2.1 9.0/5.2/4.5/3.9 9.0/3.9/3.2 4.9 2.3 5.0/4.5 13.5/7.8/6.8/5.9 13.5/5.9/4.8 7.4 3.4 7.5/6.9
100
M90
175*
M57
250*
M58
400*
M59
1000
M47
L
1500
M48
*Must purchase directly from Advance.
838
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Luminaire Series Lamp Type & Watts Lamp Base Lamp No. Qty.
Fluorescent Data
Ballast Voltage
Starting Operating Amp
Input Watts
Kit Cat. #
Compact VF 9W T4 26W 26W 26W 26W 26W 26W 26W 32W 32W 32W 32W 32W 32W 32W 42W 42W 42W 42W T4 T4 T4 T4 T4 T4 T4 T4 T4 T4 T4 T4 T4 T4 T4 T4 T4 T4 G23 GX24q-3 GX24q-3 GX24q-3 GX24q-3 GX24q-3 GX24q-3 GX24q-3 GX24q-3 GX24q-3 GX24q-3 GX24q-3 GX24q-3 GX24q-3 GX24q-3 GX24q-4 GX24q-4 GX24q-4 GX24q-4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 120 120 220 / 240 277 347 DC 12V DC 24V DC 125V 120 220 / 240 277 347 DC 12V DC 24V DC 125V 120 277 347 DC 125V 0.4 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.2 3.6 1.8 0.67 0.6 0.3 0.3 0.2 4.4 2.2 0.67 0.8 0.3 0.3 0.67 22 55 55 55 44 43 43 55 68 68 68 62 60 60 68 93 68 80 93 CHRBF2C018/120 CHRBF4C084/UNV CHRBF4C084/UNV CHRBF4C084/UNV CHRBF4C084/347 CHRBF4C084/12VDC CHRBF4C084/24VDC CHRBF4C084/UNV CHRBF4C084/UNV CHRBF4C084/UNV CHRBF4C084/UNV CHRBF4C084/347 CHRBF4C084/12VDC CHRBF4C084/24VDC CHRBF4C084/UNV CHRBF4C084/120 CHRBF4C084/277 CHRBF4C084/347 CHRBF4C084/UNV
DMVF, N2MVF, EVLPF
DMVF, N2MVF, EVLPF
CPMVF, DMVF
Long Twin Tube NFL 40W 40W 40W 40W 40W 40W 40W 40W T5 T5 T5 T5 T5 T5 T5 T5 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 2G11 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 120 277 347 120 - 277 120 277 347 120 - 277 120 277 220 / 240 0.4 0.2 0.1 0.2 0.6 0.3 0.2 0.3 0.6 0.3 0.3 42 42 44 41 76 73 70 74 74 74 71 CHRBFT80/UNV CHRBFT80/UNV CHRBFT80/347 CHRBFT80/UNV CHRBFT080/UNV CHRBFT080/UNV CHRBFT080/347 CHRBFT080/UNV
FVS
EVFT
36/39W 36/39W 36/39W
CHRBFT078/120 CHRBFT078/277 CHRBFT078/220
Note: For 3 lamp luminaires, order one 1 lamp ballast and one 2 lamp, lamp ballast. Add current and watts values. For 4 lamp luminaires, order two 2 lamp, lamp ballasts. Double currents and watts values.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
839
Fluorescent Data
Luminaire Series
Lamp Type & Watts
Lamp Base
Lamp No. Qty.
Ballast Voltage
Starting Operating Amp
Input Watts
Kit Cat. #
LINEAR 32W 32W 32W 32W 32W 32W 32W 32W T8 T8 T8 T8 T8 T8 T8 T8 Med Med Med Med Med Med Med Med Bipin Bipin Bipin Bipin Bipin Bipin Bipin Bipin 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 120 277 347 220 / 240 120 277 347 220 0.3 0.2 0.1 0.3 0.5 0.2 0.1 0.4 35 35 32 38 58 58 50 58 CHRBFL064/UNV CHRBFL064/UNV CHRBFL64/347 CHRBFL064/UNV CHRBFL064/UNV CHRBFL064/UNV CHRBFL64/347 CHRBFL064/UNV
NFL, FVN, EVF & EVFDR
NFL, FVN, EVF & EVFDR
40(34W)T12 40(34W)T12 40(34W)T12 40(34W)T12 40(34W)T12 40(34W)T12 40(34W)T12 40(34W)T12
Med Med Med Med Med Med Med Med
Bipin Bipin Bipin Bipin Bipin Bipin Bipin Bipin
1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2
120 277 347 220 50 120 277 347 220 / 240
0.4 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.6 0.3 0.2 0.2
46 46 52 51 73 80 62 71
CHRBFL080/120 CHRBFL080/277 CHRBFL40/347 CHRBFL40/220 50 CHRBFL080/120 CHRBFL080/277 CHRBFL80/347 CHRBFL80/220
FVN, EVF & EVFDR
60W 60W 60W 60W 60W 60W
(800ma) (800ma) (800ma) (800ma) (800ma) (800ma)
T12 T12 T12 T12 T12 T12
HO HO HO HO HO HO
Recessed Recessed Recessed Recessed Recessed Recessed
Double Double Double Double Double Double
Contact Contact Contact Contact Contact Contact
1 1 1 2 2 2
120 277 220 50 120 277 220 50
0.9 0.5 0.7 1.2 0.5 1.0
79 82 140 133 131 224
CHFBFL120/120 CHFBFL120/277 CHFBFL120/220 50 CHFBFL120/120 CHFBFL120/277 CHFBFL120/220 50
EVF & EVFDR
110W 110W 110W 110W
(1500ma) (1500ma) (1500ma) (1500ma)
T12 T12 T12 T12
VHO VHO VHO VHO
Recessed Recessed Recessed Recessed
Double Double Double Double
Contact Contact Contact Contact
1 1 2 2
120 277 120 277
1.7 0.6 2.2 0.9
130 137 230 241
CHRBFL220/120 CHRBFL220/277 CHRBFL220/120 CHRBFL220/277
Note: For 3 lamp luminaires, order one 1 lamp ballast and one 2 lamp, lamp ballast. Add current and watts values. For 4 lamp luminaires, order two 2 lamp, lamp ballasts. Double currents and watts values.
840
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Incandescent Luminaires Hazardous and Non-hazardous
1L
Description
Application Class I, Division 1 Hazardous Area Luminaires EVI Series
Groups C, D
see pages 843851 see page 852
EV Series
Groups A, B, C, D
Class I, Division 2 and Industrial Luminaires Vaporgard Series V Series NDA CorroGard Series see page 853 see page 862 see page 866
1L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
841
1L
Incandescent Luminaires
General Information
Applications:
Incandescent luminaires are used: Indoors or outdoors in industrial locations; for general area or spot lighting In tunnels, building entrances or similar locations, where moisture, dirt, chemicals, vibration or rough usage are a problem Either mounted directly in the conduit system or attached to cast outlet boxes, by means of pendant, ceiling, wall bracket or stanchion mountings In areas made hazardous by presence of flammable vapors, gases, or dusts
Table 500.8(C) Identification Numbers

Maximum Temperature Deg. C 450 300 280 260 230 215 200 180 165 160 135 120 100 85 Deg. F 842 572 536 500 446 419 392 356 329 320 275 248 212 185 Temp. Class (T Code) T1 T2 T2A T2B T2C T2D T3 T3A T3B T3C T4 T4A T5 T6

Environmental: What is the area classification (NEC)/(CEC) of the location in which the luminaires will be installed? Lighting levels required: What wattage fixture(s) will provide the desired light level? Physical arrangement: Type of luminaire mounting needed
1L
842
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EVI Series Explosionproof Incandescent Luminaires

Factory Sealed 100500W Medium and Mogul Base
Applications:
EVI series incandescent luminaires are used: For Type 4X, marine, wet location and hose down environments. Where a consistent light level relatively unaffected by extremes in ambient temperature (40C to +65C) is required. In areas that require lamps to reach full illumination immediately. In areas that require lamps to be frequently turned on and off. Indoors and outdoors in locations which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors or gases, ignitible dusts, or ignitible fibers and flyings. Where a luminaire is required for tough environmental conditions involving corrosives, water, dust and extreme temperatures. Manufacturing plants, heavy industrial facilities, industrial process facilities such as refineries, chemical, petrochemical, pharmaceutical and platforms. For lighting of loading docks, tunnels, stairways, storage closets and task lighting.
Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups C, D Cl. I, Zone 1 & 2, Group IIB Cl. II, Groups E, F, G (Max 150WMed. base)
Cl. III & Simultaneous Presence (Max 150WMed. base) Marine and Wet Locations Type 4X; IP66
1L

NEC & CEC: Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D Class I, Zone 1, Group IIB Class II, Groups E, F, G Marine Locations, Wet Locations, Enclosure Type 4X, IP66 UL Listed cUL Listed (Certified by UL to CSA Standards) NEC: Class III; Simultaneous Presence UL Standards: 844 Electric Fixture Hangers for Hazardous Locations 1598 Luminaires 1598A Luminaires for Installation on Marine Vessels CSA Standards: C22.2 No. 137
Standard Materials:
Body, mounting modules and guard copper-free aluminum Globe heat and impact-resistant glass Gaskets silicone External hardware stainless steel Reflectors Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester
Features:
Ambient suitability to 65C. Standard 90C rated building wire for 150W max 40C ambient application represents more than 75% of all applications. Type 4X, marine outdoor locations. Factory sealed no external seals required. Quick connect fixture threads onto the mounting module for easy installation. One size luminaire for all medium base incandescent lamps through 300W. One size luminaire for all mogul base incandescent lamps through 500W. Small compact size ceiling mount is 133/4" long. Shock absorbing receptacle. Easy to assemble and relamp. Silicone gaskets seal out dirt and moisture. Epoxy powder coat for corrosion resistance. Same mounting modules as used with the EVM and EVLP series.
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum Corro-free epoxy powder coat Stainless steel Natural Krydon reflectors High reflectance white
1L
Electrical Ratings:
Sources/Wattages Medium Base Maximum 300W (PS25) Mogul Base Maximum 500W (PS40) Voltages Medium Base 120V (250V with suffix /250) Mogul Base 277V Hub Size 3/4" or 1" NPT pendant, ceiling, wall mount 3/4" NPT bulkhead mount
Options:
Description 250V luminaire for export applications (medium base only) Suffix /250
Accessories:
Reflectors For Ordering by Components see page 845.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
843
1L

Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups C, D Cl. I, Zone 1 & 2, Group IIB Cl. II, Groups E, F, G (Max 150WMed. base)
Cl. III & Simultaneous Presence (Max 150WMed. base) Marine and Wet Locations Type 4X; IP66
Mounting Style Pendant Mount
Hub Size 3 /4" 1"
EVI301 Series Medium Base with EV505 Guard (Max. 300W PS25) EVIA2301 EVIA3301
EVI501 Series Mogul Base with EV503 Guard (Max. 500W PS40) EVIA2501 EVIA3501
Ceiling Mount
/4" 1"
EVICX2301 EVICX3301
EVICX2501 EVICX3501
Wall Mount
/4" 1"
EVIBX2301 EVIBX3301
EVIBX2501 EVIBX3501
Bulkhead Mount
/4" 1"
EVIBH2301
Stanchion Mount
11/4"
EVIJ4301
EVIJ4501
1L
Luminaire with Guard Less Mounting Module
EVI301
EVI501
Note: Medium base luminaires (EVI301 Series) For A19 lamps up to 100W, use Leviton socket extension Leviton catalog number 2005. Mogul base luminaires (EVI501 Series) For PS30 medium base lamps, use Cooper Wiring Devices socket adapter catalog number 332.
844
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

EVI Luminaires are available in components.
A complete luminaire consists of: I. II. III. Mounting Module EVI Luminaire Body and Globe Assembly Guard, Reflector
Ordering By Components
1L
I. Mounting Module:
Type Pendant Ceiling and Wall Box Wall Bracket Arm Stanchion Bulk Head Conduit
3
Cat. # EVMP2 EVMP3 EV22 EV33 EV22 & EV87 EV33 & EV87 EVMJ4 EVIJ2
/4" 1" /4" 1" /4" 1" /4"
11/4"
3
II. Luminaire Body and Globe Assembly with Guard:

Type Medium Base Mogul Base Cat. # EVI301 EVI501
III. Guards and Reflectors:

Type Guard Fits EVI301 Series (medium base) Guard Fits EVI501 Series (mogul base) Dome Reflector Fits EVI301 Series (medium base) Angle Reflector Fits EVI301 Series (medium base) Dome Reflector Fits EVI501 Series (mogul base) Angle Reflector Fits EVI501 Series (mogul base) Cat. # EV505 EV503 RD636 RA636 RD739 RA739
1L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
845
1L

Family Tree Temperature Performance Data
Temperature Performance Data:

Type EV1301 Medium Base EV1501 Mogul Base Watts/Lamp 100W/A21 or A19* 150W/A21 200W/A23 or A25 300W/PS25 200W/PS30* 300W/PS35 500W/PS40 Class I, Div. 1 (Class I, Zone 1) Ambient 40C T4 T4 T3 T3 T4A T4 T3A 55C T3C T3C T2D T2D T4 T3C T3 65C T3C T3C T2C T2C T4 T3C T3 Class II Ambient 40C T3C T3C T3A Simultaneous Presence Ambient 40C T3C T3C T3A Supply Wire Temp (C) Ambient 40C 90C 90C 105C 105C 90C 90C 105C 55C 105C 105C 125C 125C 90C 90C 125C 65C 125C 125C 125C 125C 105C 105C 125C
1L
Note: *Medium base luminaires (EVI301 Series) For A19 lamps up to 100W, use Leviton socket extension Leviton catalog number 2005. Mogul base luminaires (EVI501 Series) For PS30 medium base lamps, use Cooper Wiring Devices socket adapter catalog number 332.
846
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Medium Base EVI Luminaire
Pendant Mount Ceiling Mount
Medium Base Dimensions and Weights
1L
Stanchion Mount
Wall Mount
Bulkhead Mount
1L
Medium Base Net Luminaire Weights (lbs.):

EVI301 with guard Add mounting modules: Pendant Ceiling Wall Bulkhead Stanchion 11 lbs. 1.0 2.0 4.5 2.2 2.5 lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs. Add for reflectors: RD636 (Dome Reflector, Small) RA636 (Angle Reflector, Small) RD739 (Dome Reflector, Small) RA739 (Angle Reflector, Small) 1.5 1.0 2.0 1.4 lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
847
1L

Mogul Base Dimensions and Weights
Mogul Base EVI Luminaire

Pendant Mount Ceiling Mount Stanchion Mount
Wall Mount
1L
Mogul Base Net Luminaire Weights (lbs.):

EVI501 with guard Add mounting modules: Pendant Ceiling Wall Bulkhead Stanchion 24 lbs. 1.0 2.0 4.5 2.2 2.5 lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs. Add for reflectors: RD636 (Dome Reflector, Small) RA636 (Angle Reflector, Small) RD739 (Dome Reflector, Small) RA739 (Angle Reflector, Small) 1.5 1.0 2.0 1.4 lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs.
848
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Medium Base
Luminaire with Globe and Guard
EVICX2301 Lamp: 300W/PS25 Incandescent
Photometric Data
1L
Medium Base
Luminaire with Globe and Dome Reflector (Less Guard)
1L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
849
1L

Photometric Data
Medium Base
Luminaire with Globe and 30 Angle Reflector (Less Guard)
Mogul Base
EVIA2501 Lamp: 500W/PS40 Incandescent
1L
850
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Mogul Base
Photometric Data
1L
Mogul Base
Luminaire with Globe and Angle Reflector (Less Guard)
1L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
851
1L
EV Incandescent Luminaires
Factory Sealed
Cl. I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups A, B, C, D Pendant Mount Cl. I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D Ceiling and Bracket Mount Wet Locations NEMA 3, 3R
Applications:
EV292 Series luminaires are used: To provide incandescent lighting in locations made hazardous due to the presence of hydrogen, gases or vapors of an equivalent hazard, such as manufactured gas Hydrogen areas of process industries, missile bases where hydrogen fuel is used and gas manufacturing plants In areas of lesser hazard than indicated above EVA292 pendant mount luminaire is also suitable for use in locations made hazardous due to the presence of acetylene
Features:
Flametight threaded joints no external seal needed Easy to assemble and relamp Shock absorbing receptacle Gasket seals out dirt and liquids Positive locking of globe holder Heat and impact resistant globe Inner reflector eliminates upward spill light Lightweight Corrosion resistant Dome and 30 angle reflectors available Pendant style with RD725 dome reflector Pendant style with RA725 30 angle reflector Pendant style without reflector
Style Pendant Max. Lamp Size 300 watt, PS-30 (medium base) 300 watt, PS-30 (medium base) 300 watt, PS-30 (medium base) With Guard With Guard With Guard Without Dome Hub Reflector Reflector Size (In.) Cat. # Cat. #
3
30 Angle Reflector Cat. # RA725
/4
EVA292
RD725

NEC/CEC: Class I, Divisions 1 and 2, Groups A, B, C, D pendant mount Class I, Divisions 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D ceiling and bracket mount UL Standard: 844 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 137
Ceiling
/4
EVCX292 RD725
RA725
Bracket
/4
EVBX292
Not Applicable
Dimensions
In Inches:
1L
Standard Materials:
Globes heat and impact resistant glass Luminaire and bracket arm copper-free aluminum Reflectors Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester Back box Feraloy iron alloy
Standard Finishes:
Aluminum epoxy powder coat Krydon high reflectance white Feraloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint
EVA
EVBX
EVCX
EVCX
Size Ranges:
3/ 4" conduit hub
Capacity Ranges:
300 watt, PS-30 medium base lamps
a b c
EVA 87/8 163/8 147/8
EVBX 8 /8 181/8 165/8

7
EVCX 8 /8 143/8 127/8

7
Reflector Type Dome 30 Angle
Diameter 16" 16"
Class I Ambient Supply Style UL Temp. C Wire C Pendant T3A 25 / 40 150C Ceiling T3A 25 / 40 150C Bracket T3A 25 / 40 150C Note: Photometric curves and data are the same as shown for EV Groups C, D series. 852
VAPORGARD Incandescent Luminaires
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (All mounting except stanchion) Wet Locations NEMA 3, 3R
1L
Applications:
Vaporgard series incandescent luminaires are used: Indoors or outdoors in industrial locations where enclosed and gasketed fixtures are required In tunnels, building entrances and similar locations, where moisture, dirt, chemicals, vibration or rough usage are a problem For flush or surface mounting on ceiling or wall; pendant or in conduit systems; with or without a cast outlet box

Wet locations NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 2 UL Standard: 1598 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 9 UL/CSA Fixture Fitting
Standard Materials:
Bodies and guards copper-free aluminum Globes -Heat and impact resistant tempered glass -Colored glass non-tempered (G55, G56, G57, G58) -Plastic polycarbonate (G63, G65, G67) Reflectors Krydon fiberglassreinforced polyester
Features:
Designed to exclude dirt, moisture and corrosive vapors from the interior of the luminaires and the conduit system There are no screws to remove as the shock-absorbing socket strap is keyhole slotted and removes quickly for ease of wiring The glass globe-guard assembly is installed and/or removed as a unit, making it necessary to handle only one piece in relamping There are no crevices to accumulate a dirt or dust build-up and fixture has an attractive finish with a smooth, dust and dirt shedding design Configurated glass globe has vertical fluting and stippled bottom which provides for more even light distribution and glare elimination For non-hazardous locations, shatterproof plastic polycarbonate globes are available for use with the 200 watt series Reversible offset socket mounting strap permits use of various size lamps while holding light center in same position for maximum light output and efficiency Shock absorbing medium base lamp socket Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester reflectors: Reflectance is equivalent to the finest porcelain enamel Cannot corrode no enamel to chip and rust Ultraviolet inhibitors are incorporated in the material to prevent discoloration and brittleness
Standard Finishes:
Bodies and guards epoxy powder coat Krydon material high reflectance white
Options:
The following options are available from the factory by adding suffix to fixture Cat. No.: Description Suffix Teflon coating on globe for increased shatter protection (G24 globe 200 watt series only) ............ S808 250V nameplate for export applications............... /250 Plastic polycarbonate see globe .................................... page 856
1L
Ratings (Electrical/Size):
Up to 300 watt, PS-30 medium base lamp 1/2" to 11/4" hubs 120V nameplate is standard for NEC compliance 250V nameplate is optional. Supplied when ordered with suffix: /250
Class I, Division 2 Temperature Performance Data:

(Based on 40C ambient)
Lamp Watts 150 200 300 T-Number T2A T2B T2B Supply Wire C 150C 200C 150C
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
853
1L

Enclosed and Gasketed
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Wet Locations NEMA 3, 3R
Pendant Mount VDA Series

Hub Size /2" 3 /4" 1"
1
Series 150 150 150 200 200 200 300 300 300
Max. Lamp Size 150 watt A-21 200 watt A-23 300 watt PS-25 & PS-30
Complete Cat. # with globe/guard VDA15GP VDA25GP VDA35GP VDA12GP VDA22GP VDA32GP VDA13GP VDA23GP VDA33GP
Luminaire Components Cat. #s Pendant Body Globe Guard VDA15 VDA25 VDA35 VDA12 VDA22 VDA32 VDA13 VDA23 VDA33 G54 G54 G54 G24 G24 G24 G34/G251 G34/G251 G34/G251 P50 P50 P50 P21 P21 P21 P22 P22 P22
/2" /4" 1"

1 3
/2" /4" 1"

1 3
Thru-Feed VDC Series

Hub Size
1
Series
3
Complete Cat. # with globe/guard VDC25GP VDC22GP VDC23GP
Luminaire Components Cat. #s Thru-Feed Body Globe Guard VDC25 VDC22 VDC23 G54 G24 G34/G251 P50 P21 P22
/2 or /4" /2 or 3/4" /2 or 3/4"
150 200 300
Ceiling Mount for Recessed 4" Round Box VXH Series

1L
Series 150 200 300 Max. Lamp Size 150 watt A-21 200 watt A-23 300 watt PS-25 & PS-30 Complete Cat. # with globe/guard VXH15GP VXH12GP VXH13GP Luminaire Components Cat. #s Lamp Socket Body Globe Guard VXH15 VXH12 VXH13 G54 G24 G34/G251 P50 P21 P22
Ceiling Mount with Junction Box VXHF Series

Hub Size
1
Series 150 200 300
Complete Cat. # with globe/guard VXHF25GP VXHF22GP VXHF23GP
Luminaire Components Cat. #s Lamp Socket Body Globe Guard VXH15 VXH12 VXH13 G54 G24 G34/G251 P50 P21 P22
Junction Box VXF20 VXF20 VXF20
/2 or 3/4" /2 or 3/4" /2 or /4"

3
Note: All fixtures supplied with 1/2" reducers, except for pendant mount.
854
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Wet Locations NEMA 3, 3R
1L
Wall Mount VXHT Series

Luminaire Components Cat. #s Wall Bracket Mounting Module Body Globe Guard VXT20 VXT20 VXT20 VXH15 G54 VXH12 G24 P50 P21
Hub Size
1
Series 150 200 300
Complete Cat. # with globe/guard VXHT25GP VXHT22GP VXHT23GP
/2 or 3/4" /2 or 3/4" /2 or /4"

3
VXH13 G34/G251 P22
Wall Mount Adapter Kit

Description Mounts wall mount VXHT Series to a 4" Round Box Cat. # VXT K1
Wall Mount with Junction Box VXHBF Series

Luminaire Components Cat. #s Wall Bracket Mounting Module Body Globe Guard VXT20 VXT20 VXT20 VXH15 G54 VXH12 G24 P50 P21
Hub Size
1
Series 150 200 300
Complete Cat. # with globe/guard VXHBF25GP VXHBF22GP VXHBF23GP
Junction Box VXF20 VXF20 VXF20
/2 or 3/4" /2 or 3/4" /2 or 3/4"
VXH13 G34/G251 P22
1L
Stanchion Mount VXHA Series

Hub Size 11/4" 11/4" 11/4" Max. Lamp Size 150 watt A-21 200 watt A-23 300 watt PS-25 & PS-30 Complete Cat. # with globe/guard VXHA45GP VXHA42GP VXHA43GP Luminaire Components Cat. #s Stanchion Mounting Module Body Globe Guard VXA4 VXA4 VXA4 VXH15 G54 VXH12 G24 P50 P21
Series
VXH13 G34/G251 P22
Note: All fixtures supplied with 1/2" reducers, except for pendant mount.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
855
1L

Parts and Accessories
Medium Base Lamp Receptacle with Strap

Shock Absorbing
Globes and Guards
Plastic Globes
Description Shock Absorbing Medium Base Lamp Receptacle with Strap
Cat. # V84 150 and 200W globe 300W globe
Shatterproof polycarbonate plastic globe
Applications:
For use in: Food processing plants and canneries, dairies, breweries and bakeries Emergency lighting
Reflectors
Max. Lamp Size 200 Watt, A-23, 150 Watt, A-25, A-21 PS-25 Cat. # Cat. # G54 G55* G56* G57* G58* G24 G25 G26 G27 G28 300 Watt, PS-25, PS-30 Cat. # G34G251
Dome
Color Clear (heatresisting) Green Blue Red Amber
Features:
Shatterproof, which precludes contamination of food products with broken particles of glass Designed to comply with U.S. Dept. of Agriculture specification for food processing plants Provides protection against vandalism, with resultant lower replacement and maintenance costs Particularly adaptable for use on emergency police or fire alarm boxes Same size as G24 series glass globes. Existing installations can be changed to plastic globes simply by replacing globe For use with 200 watt series luminaires such as VDA22, etc. For use without guard Max. Wattage, Lamp Size 200 watt, A-23 200 watt, A-23 200 watt, A-23
Guards for Glass Globes

(Not for use with plastic globes)
30 Angle Dome Cat. # RD64 RD71 30 Angle Cat. # RA64 RA71
Max. Lamp Size 150 watt, A-21 200 watt, A-23, A-25, PS-25 and 300 watt, PS-30
1L
Color Natural Green Red
Cat. # G63 G65 G67
VXFT 5 Hubs, 4 Plugs
Guard P50 and P21
Guard P22
Note: Polycarbonate globes for non-hazardous locations only.
Max. Lamp Size 150 watt, A-21 200 watt, A-23, A-25, PS-25 300 watt, PS-30 (with G251 only) Hub Size (In.)
1 3
Cat. # P50 P21 P22
Mounting Adapter Kit
Cat. # VXFT10 VXFT20
/2 /4
For use when rear wiring entry is required. Use in lieu of VXF10 or VXF20.
VXT-K1 Description
Prior to wash-down, globes must be cool. Lamp must be mounted in vertical position base up to 45C (stanchion) only. *With G55, G56, G57, G58 color globes, maximum lamp size is 60 watt for outdoor applications. G24 is available with a TEFLON coating for increased shatter protection by adding suffix S808 (stanchion) only. Globe G251 required when guard P22 is used. Use globe G34 when guard is not used. All glass globes are configured type, having fluted side and stippled bottom.
Cat. #
Allows for the mounting of nonCrouse-Hinds outlet boxes to the VXT K1 VXT20 wall mount bracket and VXH ceiling mount bracket
856
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Family Tree
1L
1L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
857
1L
Photometric Data
Luminaire VXHA45GPRA
Lamp: 150W/A-21 Total Bare Lamp Lumens: 2850
Total Lumens Eff. % With Guard 1490 52.3 66.0
Luminaire With Globe, 30 Angle Reflector and With or Without Guard

Lamp: 100W/A-21 through 200W/A-23 Total Bare Lamp Lumens: 4000
All data provided is for 200W/A-23 incandescent lamp. Use following candlepower/lumen multipliers for other lamp sizes: 100W 0.42; 150 W0.7
Without Guard 1881
Measurements taken from A-A' plane.
Luminaire VXHA42GPRA
Lamp: 300W/PS-30 Total Bare Lamp Lumens: 6300
Total Lumens With Guard 3630 Lamp Size Eff. % 57.6 67.8 100W 150W 200W/A-23 200W/PS-25 Without Guard Total Lumens Eff. % 1141 1890 2700 2174 With Guard Total Lumens Eff. % 949 1582 2260 1819
67.5
56.5
Without Guard 4271
Luminaire With Globe, 30 Angle Reflector and With or Without Guard

1L Lamp: 300W/PS-30 Total Bare Lamp Lumens: 6000
Total Lumens Measurements taken from A-A' plane. With Guard Without Guard 3360 3954 Eff. % 56.0 65.9
858
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Photometric Data
1L
Lamp: 100W/A-21 through 200W/PS-25 Total Bare Lamp Lumens: 4000

All data provided is for 200W/A-23 incandescent lamp. Use following candela/lumen multipliers for other lamp sizes: 100W 0.42; 150W 0.7; 200W/PS-25 0.82
Luminaire With Globe and With or Without Guard

Example: Zonal Lumens for 200W/A-23 lamp with guard for 040 is 272 Zonal Lumens for 150W lamp with guard for 040 is 272 x 0.7 = 190.
Luminaire With Globe, Dome Reflector and With or Without Guard

Example: Zonal Lumens for 200W/A-23 lamp with guard for 040 is 948 Zonal Lumens for 150W lamp with guard for 040 is 948 x 0.7 = 664.
Coefficient of Utilization
Effective Floor Cavity Reflectance 20% % Reflectance Eff. Ceil. Wall 80 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 Room Cavity Ratio 1 2 3 .654 .608 .567 .603 .563 .523 .509 .477 .449 .422 .399 .376 .343 .324 .307 .549 .486 .432 .506 .449 .401 .424 .380 .341 .349 .315 .285 .280 .253 .230 .471 .400 .345 .434 .370 .320 .363 .313 .271 .297 .259 .225 .237 .206 .180 4 .407 .333 .277 .375 .309 .257 .312 .260 .218 .255 .214 .180 .202 .170 .143 9 .226 .162 .118 .208 .150 .110 .175 .126 .092 .143 .103 .075 .114 .080 .057 5 .353 .282 .228 .326 .260 .211 .273 .220 .179 .223 .180 .147 .176 .142 .115 10 .201 .140 .100 .185 .130 .093 .156 .109 .077 .128 .088 .061 .101 .068 .045
Effective Floor Cavity Reflectance 20% % Reflectance Eff. Ceil. Wall 80 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 Room Cavity Ratio 1 2 3 .604 .576 .552 .591 .565 .543 .564 .544 .526 .541 .525 .509 .521 .507 .494 .522 .480 .444 .512 .472 .440 .490 .457 .428 .470 .444 .419 .452 .429 .409 .454 .404 .364 .445 .398 .361 .428 .387 .354 .411 .377 .348 .396 .367 .342 4 .395 .340 .298 .387 .336 .296 .372 .327 .292 .358 .319 .288 .345 .311 .283 9 .222 .170 .135 .219 .168 .135 .211 .166 .134 .204 .162 .133 .198 .159 .131 5 .347 .290 .248 .339 .286 .246 .327 .280 .245 .315 .273 .241
70
70
50
50
30
30
1L
10
10
.304 .268 .238 10 .193 .142 .110 .189 .142 .110 .184 .139 .109 .178 .136 .107 .173 .134 .106
% Reflectance Eff. Ceil. Wall 80 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10
Room Cavity Ratio 6 7 8 .315 .244 .193 .289 .225 .177 .242 .189 .150 .198 .155 .123 .157 .122 .096 .279 .210 .164 .257 .194 .150 .215 .163 .126 .175 .134 .102 .140 .106 .080 .249 .183 .137 .230 .170 .127 .192 .143 .106 .158 .116 .086 .124 .091 .066
70
70
50
50
30
30
10
10
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
859
1L
Photometric Data
Lamp: 300W/PS-30 Total Bare Lamp Lumens: 6000
Luminaire With Globe Only
Luminaire With Globe and Dome Reflector
70
70
50
50
30
30
10
10
1L
70
70
50
50
30
30
10
10
860
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Dimensions
Dimensions in Inches
a b c d e f g h j 150 watt, A-21 127/8 111/8 53/8 313/16 87/16 12 813/16 9 41/2 200 watt, PS-25 167/8 145/8 6 4 91/8 14 101/2 1013/16 611/16
1L
300 watt, PS-30 167/8 145/8 6 4 91/8 14 12 131/8 611/16
VDA Series
VDC Series
VXH and VXHF Series (Omit box for VXF Series)
1L
VXHT and VXHBF Series (Omit box for VXHB series)
Dimensions in Inches
Max. Lamp Size 150 watt, A-21 200 watt, A-23, A-25, PS-25 and 300 watt, PS-30 a 53/8 6
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
861
1L
V-Series Incandescent Luminaires

Wet Locations NEMA 3, 3R
Applications:
V-Series incandescent luminaires are used: Indoors or outdoors in industrial locations where enclosed and gasketed fixtures are required In tunnels, building entrances and similar locations, where moisture, dirt, chemicals, vibration or rough usage are a problem For flush or surface mounting on ceiling or wall, with or without a cast outlet box, pendant or in conduit systems
Standard Materials:
Bodies Feraloy iron alloy Guards copper-free aluminum Globes glass Reflectors Krydon fiberglassreinforced polyester material reflectors
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Copper-free aluminum natural Krydon material high reflectance white
Features:
Designed to exclude dirt, moisture and corrosive vapors from the interior of the fixtures and the conduit system Several body styles provide a wide variety of mountings, while all use the same globes, guards and optional accessories Rugged and corrosion resistant
Options:
Description Corro-free epoxy powder coat Plastic polycarbonate globe Suffix S752 Order separately. See below
Size Ranges:
3/4 hubs Maximum wattage lamp: Glass globes 150W, A23 Polycarbonate 75W, A33

Wet locations NEMA: 3, 3R UL Standard: 1598
VDA
VC Cat. # VC2759 VC275
VG Cat. # VG2759 VG275
VJ Cat. # VJ2759 VJ275
VD Cat. # VD2759 VD275
1L
Description With plain globe and guard Without globe and guard
Cat. # VDA2759 VDA275
Glass Globes and Guards
Polycarbonate Globes Applications:

Polycarbonate globes are used: In food processing plants, canneries, dairies, breweries and bakeries In emergency lighting Emergency police and fire alarm boxes
V63 Color Clear (heat resisting) Green Blue Red Amber 862 Cat. # V63 VN72 VN73 VN75 VN76
V911 Globe Size 63/4" Cat. # V911
Features:
Polycarbonate globes are shatterproof, preclude contamination of food products with broken particles of glass Comply with U.S. Dept. of Agriculture specification for food processing plants Color Natural Red
V470 Cat. # V470 V475
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Incandescent Luminaires
Accessories and Parts For V-Series
1L
Reflectors
Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester (Must be used with V911 Guard)
Receptacles
(medium base)
Description Dome Medium Base Receptacle
Cat. # V46
Gasket
Angle Lamp Size Dome 50150W 30Angle 50150W

Note:
Dia. 12" 12"
Cat. # RD60 RA60
Description Gasket
Cat. # GASK213
Angle reflector cannot always be used with bracket style fixtures. Check distance from mounting surface to center of body against reflector size to determine if reflector will fit.
1L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
863
1L

Enclosed and Gasketed Dimensions
Dimensions
In Inches:
VC Hub Size 1 /2 3 /4
VDA Hub Size 1 /2 3 /4
VD
a /8 7 /8
7
c 311/16 311/16
d 4 4
h 63/16 63/16
k 49/16 49/16
a 415/16 415/16
b 43/16 43/16
c 515/16 63/16
g 21/2 23/4
h 63/16 63/16
k 49/16 49/16
1L
VG Hub Size 1 /2 3 /4 Hub Size 1 /2 3 /4
VJ
c 47/8 47/8
h 63/16 63/16
k 49/16 49/16
b 1 /16 113/16
13
c 4 /8 47/8
7
d
3 3
e 5 /8 53/8
3
h 6 /16 63/16
3
k 49/16 49/16
/8 /8
864
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Luminaires V-Series
Lamp: 150W/A23 Clear Total Bare Lamp Lumens: 2800
All data provided is for 150W incandescent lamp. Use following candela/lumen multipliers for the other lamp sizes: 100W 0.61
Photometric Data
1L
Example: Zonal lumens for 150W lamp for 040 with guard is 252.
70
50
30
10
1L
70
50
30
10
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
865
1L
NDA CorroGard CorrosionResistant Incandescent Luminaires

For Pendant Mounting
Hub Size Max. Lamp Size 300W PS-25 Med. Base 120V Body Only Cat. # Globe Only Cat. # Body With Globe Cat. #
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Corrosive Wet Locations NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 4X
Applications:
CorroGard NDA Series Luminaires made of Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester are used to provide incandescent lighting: Indoors or outdoors in industrial wet or dirty locations and where corrosion is a problem In marine applications, above and below deck, where salt spray corrosion shortens fixture life In food and beverage industries where frequent wash-downs are necessary For walkways, bridges, tunnels, security lighting, cold storage facilities, garages, coal handling areas, shipboard, processing plants, and nuclear generating plant containment areas
/4"
NDA22 G24
NDA22G

(based on 40C ambient)
Max. Lamp Size 300W
Note:
T-Number T2A
Supply Wire (C) 150C
Features:
Luminaire is molded Krydon for excellent corrosion, heat, and impact resistance Accommodates all popular incandescent lamps up to 300W, PS-25 Attractive modern design and color complement other CorroGard products Weighs only 81/2 lbs. complete with lamp and globe Medium screw base porcelain lamp socket has a vibration absorbing mounting bracket All joints are gasketed to ensure watertightness Configured glass globe reduces glare CorroGard reflectors made of Krydon reflect light better than porcelainized steel; do not yellow or discolor with age; cannot chip, peel, rust or dent
Fixtures are not marked with T-Number.
Dimensions
In Inches:
1L

UL Standard: 1598 Wet Locations Suitable for 40C ambient temperature
Accessories & Parts
Reflectors
(Order separately)
Standard Materials:
Bodies and reflectors Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester material Globes configured heat-resistant glass Color
Globe Globe Cat. # G24 G25 G26 G27 G28
Guard Guard Cat. # P21
Dome
Standard Finishes:
Bodies natural Reflectors natural, high reflectance white
Clear (heat resisting) Green Blue Red Amber
30 Angle Type Dome 30 Angle Cat. # RD725 (RD75) RA725 (RA75)
Options:
Description TEFLON coating on G24 globe for increased shatter protection Suffix S808
Replacement Lamp Receptacles with Strap

Shock Absorbing
Description Replacement Lamp Receptacles 866

Cat. # NV84
NDA CorroGard CorrosionResistant Incandescent Luminaires

Lamp: 200W/PS-25
Photometric Data
1L
All data provided is for incandescent with 200W/PS-25 lamp. See Multipliers for other wattages and lamp types.
Luminaire With Globe
Luminaire With Globe and Dome Reflector
Luminaire With Globe and 30 Angle Reflector
Effective Floor Cavity Reflectance 20% % Reflectance Room Cavity Ratio Eff. Ceil. Wall 1 2 3 4 5 80 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 .762 .651 .565 .494 .433 .715 .585 .491 .416 .358 .673 .529 .433 .357 .300 .708 .605 .526 .461 .406 .667 .546 .460 .390 .335 .626 .496 .407 .336 .282 .608 .519 .452 .395 .292 .576 .473 .399 .339 .250 .547 .432 .356 .295 .248 .516 .439 .382 .335 .297 .492 .404 .342 .290 .250 .469 .372 .307 .254 .215 .433 .366 .319 .279 .247 .413 .339 .287 .244 .211 .396 .315 .259 .215 .181
Effective Floor Cavity Reflectance 20% % Reflectance Room Cavity Ratio Eff. Ceil. Wall 1 2 3 4 5 80 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 .809 .703 .615 .541 .481 .773 .647 .550 .470 .408 .742 .601 .499 .416 .354 .791 .688 .604 .531 .470 .758 .636 .542 .465 .403 .729 .595 .494 .413 .315 .756 .659 .580 .510 .455 .729 .617 .528 .453 .395 .706 .579 .485 .408 .349 .726 .634 .558 .492 .439 .705 .599 .514 .442 .385 .684 .566 .477 .402 .344 .699 .610 .539 .475 .424 .663 .580 .501 .431 .378 .580 .553 .468 .396 .340
Total Lumens 2595
Eff. % 80.6
70
70
Multipliers for Other Lamps

Photometric data was developed using a 200 watt/PS-25 inside frosted incandescent lamp (3,220 lumens). For other incandescent watts/lamp size, use the following conversion factors (multipliers): Lamp Lamp Conversion Watts Size Lumens Factor 100 A-19 1750 .54 100 A-21 1690 .52 150 150 200 300 A-21 PS-25 A-23 PS-25 2880 2680 4010 6360 .89 .83 1.25 1.98
50
50
30
30
1L
10
10
0 0 .354 .277 .226 .184 .154 % Reflectance Room Cavity Ratio Eff. Ceil. Wall 6 7 8 9 10 80 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 0 .389 .348 .312 .284 .253 .312 .273 .240 .214 .185 .258 .222 .190 .166 .141 .363 .324 .291 .266 .236 .293 .256 .226 .201 .175 .242 .208 .179 .157 .133 .312 .280 .252 .230 .205 .256 .223 .198 .177 .153 .213 .183 .158 .139 .117 .266 .238 .216 .197 .175 .220 .193 .170 .152 .131 .185 .158 .137 .121 .100 .223 .201 .180 .166 .147 .185 .163 .144 .129 .110 .156 .135 .116 .102 .084 .132 .112 .096 .084 .068
0 0 .647 .536 .451 .378 .323 % Reflectance Room Cavity Ratio Eff. Ceil. Wall 6 7 8 9 10 80 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 0 .431 .386 .347 .317 .277 .360 .317 .280 .250 .211 .309 .269 .231 .204 .169 .423 .380 .342 .312 .272 .356 .312 .277 .247 .211 .305 .265 .231 .204 .169 .408 .368 .331 .302 .265 .348 .305 .272 .243 .207 .303 .263 .229 .202 .167 .396 .355 .321 .294 .257 .342 .301 .266 .238 .203 .300 .260 .227 .201 .165 .383 .346 .311 .285 .250 .334 .295 .262 .235 .200 .297 .258 .225 .199 .163 .281 .243 .210 .184 .150
70
70
50
50
Example: Zonal lumens for 200W/PS-25 luminaire with globe and dome reflector for 3040 is 389. Zonal lumens for 100W/A-21 luminaire with globe and dome reflector for 3040 is 389 .52 = 202.
30
30
10 0
10 0
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
867
1L
868
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
LED Luminaires Industrial and Hazardous Areas
2L
Description
Application/Selection Industrial and Hazardous Area LED Luminaires EV LED Series Champ VMV LED Series LED Tasklight LED N2LPS Light-Pak Emergency Lighting System Ex-Lite Series LED Exit Signs CCH UX Series LED Exit Signs HazardGard Series LED Lantern LED Obstruction Lights and Visual Signals
Page No.
see page 870
see pages 871874 see pages 875878 see pages 879880 see pages 881883 see page 884 see page 885 see page 886 See Section S
2L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
869
2L
LED Luminaires
Applications:
Luminaires included in this section are designed for use: In manufacturing plants; heavy industrial, chemical, petrochemical, or pharmaceutical facilities; platforms; loading docks; tunnels

Environmental: What are the hazardous areas classifications (NEC/CEC) of the locations in which the luminaires will be installed? Must luminaires be suitable for use in marine, hosedown, corrosive applications? Lighting levels required: What wattage luminaire(s) will provide the desired light level? Watts HPS, MH & Pulse Start MH Lamps 36 Watts Hazardous Area & Other Enviromental Suitabilities NEC, CEC, IEC NEC & CEC Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups C, D Cl. I, Zone 1 & 2, Group IIB Cl. II, Groups E, F, G NEC Cl. III, Simultaneous Presence Marine and Wet Locations, Type 4X, IP66 NEC & CEC Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 2 Cl. II, Groups E, F, G Cl. III Simultaneous Presence Wet Location, NEMA 4X NEC & CEC Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Marine and Wet Locations Enclosure Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X; IP66 NEC & CEC Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 2 Marine Wet Locations Suitability, Type 4X NEC & CEC Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 1, AEx em ib IIC Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G NEC Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D IP65, IP66 Wet Locations NEMA 4X NEC & CEC Cl. I, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. II, Groups E, F, G Cl. III NEMA 4X NEC Cl. I, Zone 1 & 2
Series EV LED
Application General Illumination
Champ VMV LED
General Illumination
98 Watts
LED Tasklight
Targeted Illumination
46 Watts
LED N2LPS Light-Pak
Emergency Illumination
Input: 28 Watts max. Lamp: 3 Watts
2L
Ex-Lite
6 Watts
CCH UX
3.2 Watts
HazardGard LED Lantern
Multi-purpose Illumination
6 Watts
870
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EV LED Series Explosionproof LED Luminaires

Factory-sealed Improve safety, reliability and energy efficiency
The EV LED is the first bright white LED Class I, Division 1 luminaire for general illumination. It is built to perform effectively and economically in areas that may be difficult to service, expensive to shut down, or any location requiring an increased degree of safety. High-performance LEDs, a solid-state electronic driver and internal optic provide light where you need it at a fraction of the operating cost of incandescent technologies. The results include improved system performance, superior lumens per watt and significant lifetime cost savings. Compared with conventional lighting, the EV LED luminaire consumes up to 80% less energy and typically lasts as long as 60,000 hours or more.
Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups C, D Cl. I, Zone 1 & 2, Group IIB Cl. II, Groups E, F, G Cl. III, Simultaneous Presence
UL Listed cUL Listed (certified by UL to CSA standards) T6 temperature rating at 55C Marine and wet locations Type 4X, IP66
2L
EV LED Benefits:
Enhance safety and productivity
Instant illumination and re-strike Better visibility with crisp, white light Cold temperature operation / no warm-up required No lights-out feature if a single LED fails, circuit provides enough useable light to remaining LEDs
Reduce operation and labor costs

Easy installation - fixture threads onto mounting module T6 temperature rating safely operate in the most hazardous environments Energy efficient < 40 watts Provides up to 60,000 hours rated life eliminates need for frequent lamp replacement
Applications:
Type 4X, marine, wet locations and hose-down environments Locations requiring consistent light levels in extreme ambient temperatures Areas requiring frequent on-and-off of lights Where flammable vapors, gases, ignitable dusts, fibers or flyings are present; indoors or outdoors Where extremely corrosive, wet, dusty, hot and/or cold conditions exist Manufacturing plants; heavy industrial, chemical, petrochemical or pharmaceutical facilities; platforms; loading docks; tunnels
Reliable performance in any environment

Maintains 70% lumen output through luminaire life Durable, vibration-resistant Ambient suitability for -30 to 55C Factory-sealed, no external seals required Type 4X, marine outdoor locations, IP66 rated Compact size (celiing mount 131/4")
Bright and white and green all over

Low energy consumption (less than 40W) Contains no mercury or other hazardous substances Replace up to 200W incandescents with 36W LED system

NEC & CEC
Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D T6 temperature rating at 55C Class I, Zone 1 & 2, Group IIB Class II, Groups E, F, G Marine and wet locations, Type 4X, IP66 UL Listed cUL Listed (certified by UL to CSA standards)
2L
Standard Materials:
Body, mounting modules and guard copper-free aluminum with Corro-free epoxy powder coat Globe heat and impact-resistant glass Gaskets silicone External hardware stainless steel
Electrical Ratings:
120VAC to 277VAC 50/60 Hz 36 watts 0.5 amps at 120VAC 0.2 amps at 277VAC Power factor > 0.92 THD(I) < 15%
NEC
Class III, simultaneous presence
UL Standards
844 Electric Fixture Hangers for Hazardous Locations 1598 Luminaire 1598A Luminaire for Installation on Marine Vessels
CSA Standards
C22.2 No. 137
LED System:
24 Light Emitting Diodes (LED) Lumileds Luxeon Rebel CRI > 75 CCT 4100 typical Ambient suitability -30C to 55C 70% lumen maintenance at 60k hours
871
2L EV LED Series Explosionproof LED Luminaires

EV LED Series Luminaires Complete Unit
Complete Units Mounting Style
Hub Size
3
Catalog Number EVLEDA2201 EVLEDA3201 EVLEDCX2201 EVLEDCX3201 EVLEDBX2201 EVLEDBX3201
/4
Pendant Mount 1
3
/4
Ceiling Mount 1
3
/4
Wall Mount 1
Bulkhead Mount
/4
EVLEDBH2201
Stanchion Mount
11/4
EVLEDJ4201
EV LED Series Luminaires Components
A complete luminaire consists of: 1. LED luminaire body and globe assembly 2. Mounting module
2. Mounting Module:
Component 2 Pendant Mount Ceiling & Wall Mount Wall Bracket Arm Stanchion Mount Bulkhead Mount Conduit /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1
3
Catalog Number EVMP2 EVMP3 EV22 EV33 EV22&EV87 EV33&EV87 EVMJ4 EVIJ2
1. LED luminaire body and globe assembly: 2L

Component 1 Type Catalog Number
Luminaire with Guard Less Mounting Module
EVLED201
11/4 3 /4
Family Tree:
Stanchion EVMJ4 1-1/4 HUB4 Ceiling EV22 3/4 HUB4 EV33 1 HUB4 Pendant EVMP2 3/4 HUB4 EVMP3 1 HUB4 Wall EV22 & EV87 3/4 HUB4 EV33 & EV87 1 HUB4 Bulkhead EVIJ2 3/4
EVLED201 Housing and Globe Assembly with Guard
872
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EV LED Series Explosionproof LED Luminaires

Photometrics:
UL Listed 2L cUL Listed (certified by UL to CSA standards) T6 temperature rating at 55C Marine and wet locations Type 4X, IP66
EV LED with Internal Optic, Refracting Globe, Protective Grate Lamp: 24 White LED
2L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
873
2L EV LED Series Explosionproof LED Luminaires

Dimensions (inches):
Pendant Mount Ceiling Mount
)
4
6-3/4 4 5/16 1-1/4
Stanchion Mount
13-1/4
12 12-3/4
1 13 13-3/4 1-1/4 conduit 25
12-3/4 13-1/2
7-1/4
7-1/4
Wall Mount
12-9/16 9-7/16 6-13/16 16-1/16 4
Bulkhead
6-3/4 4
1-5/16 4
9-1/4
5/16
2L
13/32 16-1/8
13/16
15-3/8
Net Weight (lbs.):

EV LED with Guard Add Mounting Modules: Pendant Ceiling Wall Bulkhead Stanchion 11 lbs. 1.0 2.0 4.5 2.2 2.5 lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs.
874
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Champ VMV LED Series Luminaires

Improve safety, reliability and energy efficiency
It is a new era for Champ luminaires. This luminaire provides the same durability and reliability of a traditional Champ luminaire, coupled with the low cost of ownership and energy efficiency of Cooper Crouse-Hinds LED technology. Highperformance LEDs and a solid-state electronic driver provide light where you need it, at a fraction of the operating cost of HID technologies.
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 2 Cl. II, Groups E, F, G Cl. III
UL Listed & CSA Certified IECEx / ATEX Simultaneous Presence Wet Location, NEMA 4X, IP66
2L
Champ VMV LED Benefits:

Enhance safety and productivity
Instant illumination and restrike Better visibility with crisp, white light T5 temperature rating safely operate in the most hazardous environments Cold temperature operation / no warmup required No lights-out feature if a single LED fails, circuit provides enough useable light to remaining LEDs
The Champ VMV LED Family

VMV LED Series Luminaires are designed to provide full-spectrum, crisp, white light with a true IES type V distribution. This white light output provides the human eye with better visual acuity compared to the poor rendering and color quality produced by a typical HPS fixture. Three versions of the Champ VMV LED are available, providing ideal solutions for a wide range of applications. VMV5L - Ideal for Low-light Applications The VMV5L luminaire is ideal for locations requiring lower light levels. This fixture provides light output equivalent to many 100W - 150W high pressure sodium (HPS) luminaires. VMV7L - Wide Area Illumination The VMV7L luminaire is designed for wide area illumination and for mounting heights of greater than 12 feet. Using less than 100 watts, the VMV7L provides light output equivalent to many 175W metal halide (MH) fixtures, while providing 60,000 hours of illumination; over 6 times the life of a typical MH luminaire. VMV9L - High Lumen Output The high output VMV9L provides increased lumen performance at the same power level of the 7L model. The VMV9L uses advanced LED technology to achieve a higher lumen/watt rating and can be used for mounting heights up to 20 feet.
Reduce operation and maintenance costs

Easy installation - compact modular fixture attaches onto existing Champ mounting module Energy-efficient technology use up to the power of standard HID luminaires Provides up to 60,000 hours rated life eliminates need for frequent lamp replacement Contains no mercury or other hazardous substances
Standard Materials:
Lamp housing and adapter copperfree aluminum with Corro-free epoxy powder coat Extrusion - aluminum with black anodized finish Lens heat- and impact-resistant glass Gaskets silicone External hardware stainless steel Factory-sealed, no external seals required
Reliable performance in any environment

Shock- and vibration-resistant solidstate luminaires have no filaments or glass components that could break greatly reduces the risk of premature failure Operating ambient -40C to 55C Low temperature starting -30C Dark sky compliant
LED System:
High brightness light emitting diode (LED) arrays Color temperature: 5500k to 6500k (CCT) 70% lumen maintenance at 60,000 hours CRI > 75

NEC Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class I, Zone 2 Class II, Groups E, F, G Class III Simultaneous Presence Wet Location, NEMA 4X, IP66 UL Standards UL 844 UL1598 luminaires, UL1598A marine CSA Standard CSA C22.2 No. 137 IECEx/ATEX Ex II 3 G Ex nA II (T4 at 55C) Ex II 3 G Ex nA II (T5 at 40C) EN60079-0:2006, EN60079-15:2006
2L
Drivers:
90VAC - 264VAC, 50/60Hz 277VAC option available High efficiency 88% at maximum load Inherent thermal protection Line transient protection - 2KV line to line, 4KV line to ground
Applications:
Wide area illumination at mounting heights from 12 to 20 feet Locations requiring continuous and consistent light levels in extreme ambient temperatures Areas requiring frequent on-and-off of lights Where flammable vapors, gases, ignitable dusts, fibers or flyings are present; indoors or outdoors Where extremely corrosive, wet, dusty, hot and/or cold conditions exist NEMA 4X, marine, wet locations and hose-down environments Manufacturing plants; heavy industrial, chemical, petrochemical or pharmaceutical facilities; platforms; loading docks; tunnels
Electrical Ratings:
VMV5L Voltage Range, VAC* Frequency Input Power Input Amps Power Factor Replaces up to
*277V option available for cUL.
VMV7L 120V - 240V 50 / 60 Hz 98 Watts 0.9 / 0.5 >.85 175W MH
VMV9L 120V - 240V 50 / 60 Hz 98 Watts 0.9 / 0.5 >.85 175W MHPS
120V - 240V 50 / 60 Hz 70 Watts 0.6 / 0.3 >.85 150W HPS
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
875
2L

2L
876
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Mounting Style Luminaire Less Mounting Module Pendant Pendant Flexible Pendant Ceiling Mount Thru Feed Ceiling Mount Thru Feed Wall Mount Thru Feed Wall Mount Thru Feed Stanchion 25 Stanchion
2L
Hub Size (in.) ----3 /4 1 3 /4 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 11/2 11/2
5L Series VMV5LDM1/UNV VMV5L2ADM1/UNV VMV5L3ADM1/UNV VMV5L2HADM1/UNV VMV5L2CDM1/UNV VMV5L3CDM1/UNV VMV5L2TWDM1/UNV VMV5L3TWDM1/UNV VMV5LJDM1/UNV VMV5LPDM1/UNV
For CEC/CSA (cUL), add suffix M2 to catalog number (Example: VMV7LDM1/UNV M2). For IECEx/ATEX, add prefix N to catalog number (Example: NVMV7LDM1/UNV).
Options:
Description Teflon coating on lens (NEC/CEC only) for additional shatter protection Suffix S896
Dimensions:
Stanchion Pendant Wall Ceiling
2L
Weights:
Net Luminaire Weight:
Mounting Module add (lb.) Pendant Flexible Pendant Ceiling Wall Angle Stanchion Straight Stanchion
17.8 lb.
1.25 1.50 2.75 4.50 3.50 4.50
8.07 kg.
0.57 0.68 1.25 2.04 1.59 2.04
Ambient Temperature:
Max. Temp. C VMV5L VMV7L VMV9L 40 55 40 55 40 55 Cl. I, Div. 2 T5 T4A T5 T4A T5 T4A Cl. II, Div. 1 & 2 / Cl. III / Simu. Presence T4A T4 T4A T4 T4A T4
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
877
2L

Photometric Data:
2L
*Testing performed in accordance with IES LM-79-08.
878
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
LED Tasklight
Targeted illumination in Class I, Division 2 applications
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL Listed CSA Certified Marine & Wet Locations Enclosure Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X; IP66
2L
The LED Tasklight delivers up to 60,000 hours of white light in a corrosion resistant and watertight package, offering years of maintenance-free operation. This compact fixture delivers light output similar to many lower wattage HID fixtures at a fraction of the energy, resulting in reduced operating costs.
Applications:
Tanks Instrument panels Switchracks Storage areas Motors/generators Pathways Security areas

LED technology improves system performance and lowers costs over the life of the luminaire Up to 60,000 hours of bright LED white light for areas that require constant illumination; maintains 70% lumen output through luminaire life Low power consumption < 50W Instant illumination and re-strike for improved safety and productivity Crisp, white light improves visibility of signs, instrument panels, and equipment Cold temperature operation with no warm-up required for increased safety Extremely durable and vibration resistant for demanding environments Environmentally friendly - contains no hazardous substance such as mercury

Certified by ETL to the following standards: UL844, UL1598A Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D CSA C22.2 No. 137 Marine and wet locations Enclosure Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X; IP66
Catalog Number TX2LW/120 240
* UL test range.
Lumen Maintenance 70% at 60k hrs
Watts 46
Input Voltage/ Input Current 50/60 Hz 120 / 0.4 A 240 / 0.2 A
Power Factor > 0.9
Light Output 3267 Lm
Temperature Performance T4A at 55C
Operating Temp. Range -40C to 55C* -25C to 55C
2L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
879
2L
LED Tasklight
Targeted illumination in Class I, Division 2 applications
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL Listed CSA Certified Marine & Wet Locations Enclosure Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X; IP66
Photometric Data:
Footcandle Values for Isofootcandles Lines
Mounting Height (ft) 4 8 12 16 20 25 30 35 Peak 88.00 22.00 9.78 5.50 3.52 2.25 1.56 1.15 A 60.00 15.00 6.67 3.75 2.40 1.54 1.07 0.78 B 40.00 10.00 4.44 2.50 1.60 1.02 0.71 0.52 C 32.00 8.00 3.56 2.00 1.28 0.82 0.57 0.42 D 20.00 5.00 2.22 1.25 0.80 0.51 0.36 0.26 E 12.00 3.00 1.33 0.75 0.48 0.31 0.21 0.16
Dimensions and Weights:

11.2 [ 284 ] 5.7 [ 145 ]
2L
16.0 [ 406 ] 19.9 [ 505 ]
Weight - 25 lbs.
880
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
LED N2LPS LIGHT-PAK Emergency Lighting System
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 2 Wet Locations, Marine NEMA 3, 3R, 4X Ambient 0C to 55C Certifications and Compliances:
NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C, D, Zone 2 UL Standards: 1598A (Supplemental Requirements for Luminaires for Installation on Marine Vessels) 924 (Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment) 844 (Electric Luminaires Hazardous Locations) CSA Standards: C22.2 No. 141-M1985 unit equipment for emergency lighting C22.2 No. 137-M1981 non-incendive electrical equipment for use in Class I, Division 2 hazardous locations Life Safety Code NFPA101 Section 5-9 (Emergency Lighting) Marine wet locations suitability, Type 4X
2L
Applications:
LED N2LPS Light-Pak emergency lighting systems are used: To provide reliable illumination for egress areas during failure or interruption of power to the normal lighting system In areas where flammable gases or vapors may become present due to abnormal, unusual, or accidental conditions In manufacturing plants, refineries, petrochemical and chemical plants, waste and sewage treatment facilities, oil terminals, food processing facilities, breweries, and other industrial manufacturing or process industry facilities subject to wet or corrosive conditions To illuminate machinery or panels during a loss of AC power Where moisture, dirt, dust, or corrosion will limit the life and reliability of ordinary emergency lighting systems Where required by the National Electrical Code, the Life Safety Code or other applicable codes Outdoor applications
Electrical Ratings:
Power supply Input: 120, 220, 230, 240, or 277 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz; 28 watts max. Output: 12 VDC Luminaire heads Voltage: 12 VDC; Lamp: 3 watt LED Total lumen output: 80
Standard Materials:
Power supply and remote luminaire enclosures Krydon fiberglassreinforced polyester LED lamp head assembly epoxy powder coated stainless steel Exterior hardware nylon, plastic coated, and stainless steel Cover gasket Hypalon synthetic rubber
Features:
Compact, factory-assembled luminaire featuring LED lamps for improved lumen performance, on-time, and lamp life Nonmetallic, enclosed, and gasketed housing provides corrosion protection in the most extreme environments Durable and marine rated LED lamp head assemblies provide protection against water ingress, corrosion, and impact High temperature rated nickel cadmium battery for reliable operation up to 55C ambient Solid state battery charger for long life and reliable battery operation prevents deep discharge by automatically disconnecting the battery from the luminaire Factory-installed "push-to-test" button Self-test, monitoring, and diagnostics reduce costly maintenance checks Remote luminaire head assemblies (one or two) are available for mounting of luminaire heads away from main power system Stainless steel drain minimizes moisture collection Standard battery disconnect switch (Krydon unit)
Unit Net Weights:

N2LPS12222 16 lbs. N2LPS12220 12 lbs. N2RF1221 8 lbs. N2RF1222 9 lbs.

Based on 55C ambient Cat. # Class I, Division 2 N2LPS (all) N2RF (all)
Note:
2L
40C - T5; 55C - T4A T5
Ambient temperature at which the Light-Pak system is rated is 0C to 55C. Operation at temperatures outside this range will affect the battery life and/or charging performance.
National Electrical Code and Life Safety Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association, Inc. Noryl is a registered trademark of General Electric Company.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
881
2L
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 2 Wet Locations, Marine NEMA 3, 3R, 4X Ambient 0C to 55C
Description 28 watt, 12 volt power supply assembly with two 3 watt LED lamp heads 28 watt, 12 volt stainless steel power supply assembly with two 3 watt LED lamp heads 28 watt, 12 volt power supply assembly less luminaire heads Remote luminaire assembly with one 3 watt LED lamp head Remote luminaire assembly with two 3 watt LED lamp heads 28 watt, 120V LED Light-Pak with single sided exit sign** 28 watt, 277V LED Light-Pak with single sided exit sign** 28 watt, 120V LED Light-Pak with double sided exit sign** 28 watt, 277V LED Light-Pak with double sided exit sign**
*Not cUL approved. UL Listed only. **Exit sign operates in both normal and emergency mode.
Cat. # N2LPS12222 N2LPS12222 SS N2LPS12220* N2RF1221* N2RF1222* N2LPS12222/120 N2LPS12222/277 N2LPS12222/120 N2LPS12222/277
EXS DR0391734 EXS DR0391734 EXD DR0391734 EXD DR0391734
Note: Up to four (4) remote LED lamp assemblies can be connected to the N2LPS12222. Up to six (6) remote LED lamp assemblies can be connected to the N2LPS12220.
Wire Sizing for Remote Installation:

For Copper Wire
Running Distance (ft.) Between Power Supply and Remote Luminaire Load In Watts Wire Size 8 16 24 32 Wire Size 16 AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG 26 42 66 13 21 33 6 10 16 3 5 8 10 AWG 8 AWG 6 AWG Load In Watts 8 16 106 168 270 53 84 135
24 26 42 67
32 13 21 33
Maximum distance to limit line voltage drop to 5%.
Dimensions (N2LPS):
1.1
13.5
2L
16.0 5.0
7.5
7.4
13.8 14.5 18.0

Standard N2LPS LED Light-Pak
882
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
2L
Dimensions (N2LPS):
EXS, EXD Option N2LPS LED Light-Pak with Optional Emergency Exit Luminaire
Dimensions (N2RF):
9.50 9.50
2L
3.83
3.83
7.27
4.38
11.77
Detail Indication Logic:

Status Indication * *-* **-** ***-*** Status Description No Light Steady Light (No Blinks) Light Blinks Once Light Blinks Twice Light Blinks Three Times Status Definition AC Power Removed from Circuit Fully Charged Battery Charging Battery Failure Circuit Failure
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
883
2L
Ex-Lite LED Exit Signs
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 1, AEx em ib IIC (NEC) Cl. I, Zone 1, Ex em ib IIC (CEC) Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G (NEC) Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups E, F, G (CEC)
UL Listed IP66
The Ex-Lite Series of LED exit signs are designed for hazardous locations and are ideally suited for marking escape routes and exits in potentially explosive atmospheres. The Ex-Lite Z is available as an AC only version, while the Ex-Lite ZE is available with self-contained battery. As an emergency lighting luminaire with selfcontained battery system, the Ex-Lite ZE features a nickel cadmium battery with automatic test and monitoring feature.
Applications:
In harsh and hazardous environments where illuminated exit signs are required

LED Technology: Long life (>50K hours) for years of maintenance-free operation Energy-efficient for lower cost of operation Low temperature operation with no loss of illumination Rugged and durable light source for the harshest of environments Exit Sign System: Can be used in a hazardous location Conduit or cable entry Can be installed in moist, humid, rain, and wet environments Universal input voltage 110VAC-277VAC and 110VDC-250VDC reduces inventory Ex-Lite ZE with self-monitoring, selfdiagnostic, and test capability Premium heavy-duty nickel cadmium battery 24-hour charge and recharge time increases safety by recovering quickly from outage "EXIT" legend with alternative wings left, right, or left and right; simple field modification Emergency lighting cycle three hours The housing of the luminaire is constructed with a corrosion resistant, robust, lightweight aluminum alloy material and illumination of the sign is provided with red, high-efficient LEDs
Catalog Number Description Light Source Life of LED Rated Voltage, VAC Frequency, Hz Rated Voltage, DC Power Consumption Battery Allowable Temperature Range Mounting Cable Entry Conduit Entry Protection Ex Lite Z AC/DC Exit Sign LED 50K hours 120V-277V 50/60 110V-250V 6VA N/A -4F to 122F (-20C to 50C) Wall Ex-e 3 /4 IP66 Ex Lite ZE with Battery LED 50K hours 120V-277V 50/60 110V-250V 6VA NiCad 41F to 95F (5C to 35C)* Wall Ex-e 3 /4 IP66
2L
*Due to battery chemistry, the charging capacity will be limited at temperatures below 5C and above 35C.
Dimensions
In (mm:)

Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class I, Zone 1, AEx em ib IIC (NEC) Class I, Zone 1, Ex em ib IIC (CEC) Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G (NEC) Class II, Division 2, Groups E, F, G (CEC) IP66 UL844 UL924/CSA22.2 No. 141-02 UL60079/CSA22.2 E60079 UL1203/CSA22.2 E6124-1-1-02
884
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
CCH UX Series LED Exit Signs
UL Listed Available with Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D rating
NEMA 4X, IP66
2L
The Cooper Crouse-Hinds CCH UX Series LED Exit Sign combines the strength and durability of die cast aluminum with architecturallypleasing aesthetics. The CCH UX Series is illuminated by LEDs, providing the customer with a long-life, low maintenance, dependable exit sign for use in conditions where reliability is crucial. Designed for the most severe environments, the CCH UX Series will provide maximum performance against rain, moisture, cold, corrosion, and dust in applications such as manufacturing plants, refineries, petrochemical and chemical plants, waste and sewage treatment facilities, food processing, and other industrial facilities.
Applications:
In locations deemed hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors or gases In areas where the presence of gases or vapors may become present during an abnormal, unusual, or accidental conditions Outdoor and wet applications Where required by the National Electrical Code, Life Safety Code, or other applicable codes

CCH UX Series Exit Sign: -45C (-49F) to 45C (113F) CCH UX-HAZ Hazardous Location Exit Sign: T6 rating at 45C (113F)

Wet location, outdoor rated for use in the most demanding environments Optional hazardous location rating available Dual voltage 120V/277V reduces wiring errors Heavy-duty nickel cadmium battery for long life 24-hour charge and recharge recovery time increases safety Heavy-duty injection molded polycarbonate lens protects against impact and corrosion Brown-out protection protects battery and reduces labor Heavy-duty aluminum die cast housing protects against impact and chemical resistance LEDs provide long life, even illumination, and energy savings Wide operating temperature range (-45C to 45C) Self-diagnostic testing reduces costs by eliminating scheduled equipment verification tests
Electrical Ratings:
Power Supply 120V/277V dual voltage LED Exits - Red Input Power 120V = 2.7W 277V = 3.2W Input Current: (Max.) 120V = .07A 277V = .04A LED Exits - Green Input Power 120V = 2.3W 277V = 3.0W
2L

NEMA 4X, UL50 UL924 wet location IP65, IP66 Available with NEC hazardous location rating - UL844 Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D
Input Current: (Max.) 120V = .08A 277V = .03A
Catalog Number Housing Finish Silver Housing Silver Housing Silver Housing Silver Housing Silver Housing White Housing Black Housing Silver Housing White Housing Black Housing Silver Housing White Housing Black Housing Silver Housing White Housing Black Housing Letter Color Red LED Red LED Green LED Green LED Red LED Red LED Red LED Red LED Red LED Red LED Green LED Green LED Green LED Green LED Green LED Green LED CCH CCH CCH CCH CCH CCH CCH CCH CCH CCH CCH CCH CCH CCH CCH CCH UX70RSDHAZ UX60RHAZ UX70GSDHAZ UX60GHAZ UX70RSD UX70RWHSD UX70RBKSD UX60R UX60RWH UX60RBK UX70GSD UX70GWHSD UX70GBKSD UX60G UX60GWH UX60GBK
Benefits of LED Technology:

Provides safe and reliable exit marking both indoors and outdoors during power failure or interruption of power to normal lighting system Long life (>50K hours) for years of maintenance-free operation Energy-efficient for lower cost of operation Low temperature operation with no loss of illumination Rugged and durable light source for the harshest of environments
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
885
2L
HazardGard LED Lantern

The Industrys Only Class I, Division 1 Rechargeable LED Lantern
UL Listed Cl. I, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 1 & 2 (NEC only) NEMA 4X Cl. II, Groups E, F, G Cl. III
The worlds most demanding environments need smart new lighting ideas and innovative approaches to enhancing safety. The Cooper Crouse-Hinds HazardGard LED Lantern meets those needs, brilliantly combining safety, reliability, and energy efficiency.
Applications
The HazardGard LED Lantern was designed around increased safety, ease of use, and long-lasting illumination for professionals working in hazardous environments. In addition to providing safe illumination, it includes a wide range of features that make it a multi-purpose illumination tool. The HazardGard LED Lantern is safe to use in any hazardous location environment. A patented circuit within the trigger eliminates sparking that normally occurs in an ordinary location lantern. With its frontfocused LEDs, the HazardGard LED Lantern provides the brightest and longest lasting spot/flood illumination. Gas Utility Hazmat Chemical Plant Mining Industrial Fire Fighting Shipboard Helicopter LZ Railroad Law Enforcement Aerial Signaling

Class I, Groups A, B, C, D Class I, Zone 1 & 2 (NEC only) Class II, Groups E, F, G Class III UL 913; CSA C22.2 No. 157-92 Charge rack meets requirements of NFPA 1901-14.1.11.2 NEMA 4X; T4, -20C T, 44C
Induction Charging Technology:

Induction charging is a new patented technology for rechargeable lanterns. This feature allows the lantern to recharge its batteries without the use of traditional metal charging contacts. Induction charging transfers the electrical current from the external charge rack to the rechargeable batteries inside the lantern with no physical contact. This is critical for the intrinsic (explosionproof) rating of the lantern as external metal contacts can cause a spark and explosion if they accidentally touch any exposed metal. Traditional battery charging contact points are also subject to corrosion which can cause failure and require replacement. Induction charging allows the lantern to be totally sealed and charged outside in extreme environments such as offshore oil platforms or other environments where there is high potential for corrosion.

12 hour maximum intensity LED light operates for a full 12 hours and provides additional 30 minutes at reduced light to alert user of low battery Watertight construction - water and dirt will not penetrate the flashlight and damage internal components Floatable - ideal for applications where there is a potential risk of dropping or submersion in water Combo pivoting and rotating head - can pivot 70 and rotate 340 for proper illumination in any work area Added safety - equipped with three sets of blue LED safety lights in the rear of the lantern Four LED light patterns: - on/off - flashing - rotating - SOS mode (front and rear LEDs flash the SOS code simultaneously) Induction charging system - recharge batteries without the use of metal charging contacts Rugged construction - Lexan lens and rubberized impact bumper provide protection to the main LED components Equipped with standard plug and car charger
2L
Catalog Number Battery: (up to 500 charges) Lamp: Case Material: Case Color: Weight with Battery: Dimensions: Lens: Run Time: Charging: Light Output:
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
CHGX1/100-240 Voltage: 6V Amp 1170mA Battery Type: Nickel Metal Hydride K2 LED High-impact ABS Green 6.25 lbs. (H) 5.5 in. (W) 5.5 in. (L) 12.25 in. Unbreakable Lexan 12 hours AC or DC power sources; steady charge, takes up to 8 hours 270 lumens
886
US: 1-866-764-5454
High Intensity Discharge (H.I.D.) Lighting Hazardous and Non-hazardous

Description
Application/Selection Champ Series Integrally Ballasted Luminaires
Accessories Ballast Data (USA) Ballast Data (Canada)
3L
Page No.
see page 888 see pages 943944 see page 836 see page 836 see see see see see see see see page page page page page page page page 908 909 914 916 900 901 905 907
DMV Series 50 250W H.I.D.

Catalog Listings Temperature Data, Dimensions, Weights Photometric Data
LMV Series 50 150W H.I.D

VMV Series 50 175W H.I.D

see page 890 see page 891 see page 896 see pages 898899 see see see see see see see see page page page page page page page page 917 918 923 925 926 927 932 934
VMV High Wattage Series 200 400W H.I.D.

N2MV Non-metallic H.I.D.

nVMV Ex-Protected Luminaire for IEC and ATEX Applications

see page 935 see page 936 see page 937 see pages 939942 see page 945
3L
Photocells
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
887
3L
H.I.D. (High Intensity Discharge) Luminaires

Enclosed & Gasketed Application and Selection
Applications:
Luminaires included in this section are enclosed and gasketed, designed for use with H.I.D. lamps as follows: In locations where protection is required from wet, dirty and corrosive atmospheres Where long life lamps provide desirable maintenance cost savings and return on investment through use of fewer luminaires, circuits and ancillary apparatus Where relamping and maintenance difficulties require long life lamps

Environmental: What are the hazardous areas classifications (NEC/CEC) of the locations in which the luminaires will be installed? Must luminaires be suitable for use in marine, hosedown, corrosive applications? Lighting levels required: What wattage luminaire(s) will provide the desired light level?
Quick Selector Chart*

Series Champ VMV Watts HPS, MH & Pulse Start MH Lamps 50, 70, 100, 150, 175 Mogul Base NEC & CEC Cl. I, Div. 2 Groups A, B, C, D Cl. II, Groups E, F, G Cl. III Simultaneous Presence Hazardous Area & Other Enviromental Suitabilities NEC, CEC, IEC Ballast Voltages
Champ VMV High Wattage
200, 250, 400 Mogul Base
Standard Voltage Ballasts (60 Hz) NEC (UL) Multi-tap: 120, 208, 240 & 277 Volt 60 Hz. Dual-tap: 120 & 277 Volt 60 Hz (50W HPS) 120 Volt 60 Hz 480 Volt 60 Hz
CEC/CSA (cUL) Tri-tap: 120, 277 & 347 Volt 60 Hz Restricted Breathing (Suffix S826) Cl. I, Div. 2 & Zone 2 AEx nR, Ex nR IIC Dual-tap: 120 & 277 Volt 60 Hz (50W HPS) 120 Volt 60 Hz Marine Outdoor & Wet Locations
3L
Champ LMV Low Profile Champ DMV Expanded Class II Suitability
50, 70, 100, 150 Medium Base 50, 70, 100, 150, 175, 250 Mogul Base
Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X IP56 to IP66 IEC Certified for IEC Zone 2 (Suffix S826TB) Ex nR IIC IP56 to IP66
Optional Voltage Ballasts (50 or 60 Hz) 208 240 480 600 CEC/CSA (cUL) Volt 60 Hz CWI Isolated Volt 60 Hz CWI Isolated Volt 60 Hz CWI Isolated Volt 60 Hz CWI Isolated EXPORT 220 Volt 50 Hz 230 Volt 50 Hz 240 Volt 50 Hz 220 Volt 50 Hz 230 Volt 50 Hz 240 Volt 50 Hz 220 Volt 60 Hz 230 Volt 60 Hz 240 Volt 60 Hz
Champ N2MV Non-metallic
50, 70, 100, 150, 175 Mogul Base
Zone 2 according to IEC Ex nR II T...Gc Champ nVMV Ex-Protected Luminaire for IEC and ATEX Applications 70 Medium 100, 150 Medium & Mogul 250, 400 Mogul Zone 21 and 22 according to IEC Ex t IIIC T...C Db IP66 IP66 ATEX
*See specific sections for lamp type and wattage suitability.
888
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Champ H.I.D. Luminaires

VMV, LMV, DMV, VMV High Wattage, N2MV & nVMV Series
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Restricted Breathing Cl. I, Div. 2 & Zone 2 (Suffix S826) Certified for IEC Zone 2 (Suffix S826TB)
Cl. II, Groups E, F, G, Cl. III Simultaneous Presence Marine & Wet Locations 3, 3R, 4, 4X; IP56 to IP66
3L
The Champ family is an extremely versatile industrial lighting system. Six different series of Champ Luminaires embrace a broad range of wattages, lamp sources, compliances, optics, and accessories. Each series is covered in detail on the following pages. General information to help in the proper selection of series and luminaires is shown below.
Applications:
Heavy duty Champ lighting luminaires are used: In manufacturing plants, refineries, chemical, petrochemical, and other industrial process facilities, waste or sewage treatment facilities, offshore, dockside, and harbor installations, and other heavy industrial applications In areas where ignitible concentrations of flammable gases or vapors will be present only due to abnormal, unusual, or accidental conditions Where combustible dusts are present In marine applications where water spray and corrosive atmospheres are considerations In elevated ambient temperatures often found in industrial applications In installations where moisture, dirt, dust, vibration, corrosion, and rough usage are problems Wherever the damaging effects of water, wind, snow, sleet, hot sun, or any combination of these elements are found
Features:
Cast copper-free aluminum construction (less than 0.4 of 1% copper) and epoxy powder finish provide excellent resistance to corrosion. Seven mounting arrangements in each series, to suit any lighting layout pendant, flexible pendant, ceiling, wall bracket, angle stanchion, straight stanchion, and quadmount. Wide range of light sources and wattages to meet specifiers' needs: 50, 70, 100, 150, 200, 250 and 400 watt high pressure sodium (HPS); 70, 100 175, 250, and 400 watt metal halide (MH and Pulse Start MH). Hinged ballast housings for ease of installation and maintenance; all mounting modules fit all ballast housings. Wide choice of photometric distributions. Globes available for lamps up through 400 watt HPS, and 250 watt MH. Glass refractors available for all VMV and DMV units; reflector/lens for 200400 watt VMV units. All luminaires are designed to perform in a 40C ambient temperature. Selected luminaires are suitable for ambient temperatures up to 65C.
3L
Superior gasketing seals between the mounting module, housing, and optical assembly for optimum performance in wet and corrosive environments. Hubs with an integral conduit stop and bushing to help prevent damage to field wiring during installation. Low ambient capability to 40C. Dome and 30 angle reflectors made of bright white Krydon fiberglassreinforced polyester material provide superior reflectivity, with twist-on feature requiring no tools or additional hardware. Will not chip, peel, dent, rust, or corrode. Grounding wire for safety. Ballasts are high power factor (min P.F. 90%) and available in a variety of voltages to meet local area requirements.
889
3L
VMV Series 50175W

Cl. II, Groups E, F, G, Cl. III & Simultaneous Presence (HPS 50W, 70W) Marine & Wet Locations 3, 3R, 4, 4X; IP56 to IP66
Applications:
VMV series Champ luminaires are used: In manufacturing plants, refineries, chemical, petrochemical, and other industrial process facilities, waste or sewage treatment facilities, offshore, dockside, and harbor installations, and other heavy industrial applications In areas in which ignitible concentrations of flammable gases or vapors will be present only due to abnormal, unusual, or accidental conditions Where combustible dusts are present In marine applications where water spray and corrosive atmospheres are considerations In elevated ambient temperatures often found in industrial applications In installations where moisture, dirt, dust, vibration, corrosion, and rough usage are problems Wherever the damaging effects of water, wind, snow, sleet, hot sun, or any combination of these elements are found
Options:
The following special options are available from the factory by adding suffix to luminaire Cat. No.: Description Suffix Factory Sealed Champs.................... S865 Class I, Division 2 & Zone 2 Provides T3 code without conduit or cable seals Restricted breathing/Nonsparking Restricted Breathing Construction.... S826 Class I, Division 2 & Zone 2 Suitabilty Cooler Operating Temperatures (T-Numbers) Certified for IEC Zone 2.....................S826TB Furnished with terminal block, crimp terminals and dedicated voltage ballasts (no MT, DT or TT) Fused to protect ballast and capacitors against abnormal line conditions........................................... S658* (Not available with /MT Ballast) (Not for use in Canada) Quick-Clip - Holds weight of housing when closed. No need to support luminaire while screwing the housing to the cover.................... S890 Ballast-Gard starter cut-out switch prevents starter pulsing when lamp is cycling or inoperative; prolongs ballast and ignitor life. Available for use with 50150W LX HPS only....................... BG Instant restrike enables a hot HPS lamp to immediately restrike after a momentary loss arc due to voltage fluctuation or power outage. It has no effect on the warm-up period of cold lamps. Available for use with 50150W LX HPS only...................... IR Quartz auxiliary lighting comes to full brightness immediately and remains lit until the HID lamp attains 6070% of full illumination. For nonhazardous locations only. Must use R2, R3 and R5 refractors.................. QTZ Refractor Mount - For ballast housing only. Used with R2, R3 and R5 refractors............................... RM Stainless steel insert top hat with stainless steel threaded insert to attach ballast housing................... S806 TEFLON coating on globe for increased shatter protection.............. S808 G24 only. T-Numbers not affected Factory assembled with H.I.D. lamps installed for additional labor savings............................................... FA
Note: BG and IR options cannot be used together. IR and QTZ options cannot be used together.

NEC & CEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D HPS 50W, 70W Class II, Class III & Simultaneous Presence (Class I, Division 2 and Class II) Class I, Zone 2 IEC: Zone 2 Ex nR IIC UL Standards: 844 Hazardous (Classified) Locations 1598 Luminaires 1598A Marine Locations CSA Standards: C22.2 No. 137 IEC Standards: 60079-15
Features:
Compact, lightweight design is ideal for medium and low mounting heights Cast copper-free aluminum construction (less than 0.4 of 1% copper) and epoxy powder finish provide excellent resistance to corrosion Seven mounting arrangements to suit any lighting layout pendant, flexible pendant, ceiling, wall bracket, angle stanchion, straight stanchion, and quad-mount Wide range of light sources and wattages to meet specifiers' needs: 50, 70, 100, and 150 watt high pressure sodium (HPS); 70, 100, 175 watt metal halide (MH and Pulse Start MH) Hinged ballast housing for ease of installation and maintenance Wide choice of photometric distributions. Glass globes, refractors and compact refractors available for all wattage luminaires; plastic refractors (for nonhazardous applications only) for 50100 watt luminaires All luminaires are designed to perform in a 40C ambient temperature. Selected luminaires are suitable for ambient temperatures up to 65C Superior gasketing seals between the mounting module, housing, and optical assembly for optimum performance in wet and corrosive environments Hubs with an integral conduit stop and bushing to help prevent damage to field wiring during installation Low ambient capability to (40C) Dome and 30 angle reflectors made of bright white Krydon material provide superior reflectivity, with twist-on feature requiring no tools or additional hardware. Will not chip, peel, dent, rust, or corrode Grounding wire for safety High power factor ballasts (Min P.F. 90%) and available in a variety of voltages to meet local area requirements Mogul base porcelain lamp socket 890
3L
Standard Materials:
Ballast housings and mountings copper-free aluminum (less than 0.4 of 1%) Exterior hardware stainless steel Reflectors (dome and angle) Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester material Globes heat and impact resistant internally fluted glass Refractors glass (50175 watts); plastic 50100 watts), for non-hazardous applications Guards: Globe copper-free aluminum Refractor stainless steel
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum epoxy powder coat Krydon material high reflectance white Stainless steel natural
Accessories:
See pages 943944 for complete listing.
TEFLON is a registered trademark of E.I. duPont Co. *When ordering fuses for luminaires, option S658, you must specify the operating voltage. S658 cannot be ordered with /MT in the catalog number.
Electrical Ratings:
120, 208, 240, 277, 347, 480, 600, Multitap (120, 208, 240 and 277) 50 to 150W HPS; 70 to 175W MH
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
US: 1-866-764-5454
VMV Series 50150W High Pressure Sodium

Cl. II, Groups E, F, G, Cl. III & Simultaneous Presence (50W, 70W) Marine & Wet Locations 3, 3R, 4, 4X; IP66
3L
To complete the catalog #, include information in notes 1, 2 and 3 below. For guards and other optics see VMV Series - Ordering By Components page. BASIC CATALOG NUMBER Mounting Hub Lamp With G24 Globe With G241 Type I With R5 Glass Style Size Watts and P21 Guard Compact Refractor * Refractor Pendant Mount /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 3 /4 3 /4 3 /4
3
50 70 100 150 50 70 100 150
Flexible Pendant Mount
VMVS2A050GP VMVS3A050GP VMVS2A070GP VMVS3A070GP VMVS2A100GP VMVS3A100GP VMVS2A150GP VMVS3A150GP VMVS2HA050GP VMVS2HA070GP VMVS2HA100GP VMVS2HA150GP
VMVS2A050G241 VMVS3A050G241 VMVS2A070G241 VMVS3A070G241 VMVS2A100G241 VMVS3A100G241 VMVS2A150G241 VMVS3A150G241 VMVS2HA050G241 VMVS2HA070G241 VMVS2HA100G241 VMVS2HA150G241
VMVS2A050R5 VMVS3A050R5 VMVS2A070R5 VMVS3A070R5 VMVS2A100R5 VMVS3A100R5 VMVS2A150R5 VMVS3A150R5 VMVS2HA050R5 VMVS2HA070R5 VMVS2HA100R5 VMVS2HA150R5
Ceiling Mount Thru-Feed
Wall Mount Thru-Feed
Quad-Mount Pendant, Adjustable, Thru-Feed, 25 Angle, 12 Angle
/4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 3 /4 3 /4 3 /4
3
50 70 100 150 50 70 100 150 50 70 100 150
VMVS2C050GP VMVS3C050GP VMVS2C070GP VMVS3C070GP VMVS2C100GP VMVS3C100GP VMVS2C150GP VMVS3C150GP VMVS2TW050GP VMVS3TW050GP VMVS2TW070GP VMVS3TW070GP VMVS2TW100GP VMVS3TW100GP VMVS2TW150GP VMVS3TW150GP VMVS25Q050GP VMVS25Q070GP VMVS25Q100GP VMVS25Q150GP
VMVS2C050G241 VMVS3C050G241 VMVS2C070G241 VMVS3C070G241 VMVS2C100G241 VMVS3C100G241 VMVS2C150G241 VMVS3C150G241 VMVS2TW050G241 VMVS3TW050G241 VMVS2TW070G241 VMVS3TW070G241 VMVS2TW100G241 VMVS3TW100G241 VMVS2TW150G241 VMVS3TW150G241 VMVS25Q050G241 VMVS25Q070G241 VMVS25Q100G241 VMVS25Q150G241
VMVS2C050R5 VMVS3C050R5 VMVS2C070R5 VMVS3C070R5 VMVS2C100R5 VMVS3C100R5 VMVS2C150R5 VMVS3C150R5 VMVS2TW050R5 VMVS3TW050R5 VMVS2TW070R5 VMVS3TW070R5 VMVS2TW100R5 VMVS3TW100R5 VMVS2TW150R5 VMVS3TW150R5 VMVS25Q050R5 VMVS25Q070R5 VMVS25Q100R5 VMVS25Q150R5
3L
Stanchion Mount 25 Angle
11/2 11/2 11/2 11/2
50 70 100 150
VMVSJ050GP VMVSJ070GP VMVSJ100GP VMVSJ150GP
VMVSJ050G241 VMVSJ070G241 VMVSJ100G241 VMVSJ150G241
VMVSJ050R5 VMVSJ070R5 VMVSJ100R5 VMVSJ150R5
Stanchion Mount Straight
11/2 11/2 11/2 11/2
50 70 100 150
VMVSP050GP VMVSP070GP VMVSP100GP VMVSP150GP
VMVSP050G241 VMVSP070G241 VMVSP100G241 VMVSP150G241
VMVSP050R5 VMVSP070R5 VMVSP100R5 VMVSP150R5
* For G243 Type III Compact Refractor, change "241" at end of catalog number to "243". Ex. VMVS2A050G243 For G245 Type V Compact Refractor, change "241" at end of catalog number to "245". Ex. VMVS2A050G245 For R2 Glass Refractor, change "R5" at end of catalog number to "R2". Ex. VMVS2A050R2. For R3 Glass Refractor, change "R5" at end of catalog number to "R3". Ex. VMVS2A050R3.
1. Add voltage suffix to end of catalog number Standard Voltage Ballasts 60Hz NEC/UL Voltage Multi Tap Dual Tap 120V Suffix /MT /DT /120 Multi Tap and Dual Tap ballasts are powered for 277V Optional Voltage Ballasts - 50 or 60Hz CEC/CSA (cUL) - CWI Isolated Ballasts Voltage Suffix 208V CWI /208CWI 240V CWI /240CWI 480V CWI /480CWI 600V CWI /600CWI 220V 60Hz /220 480V /480 Tri Tap /TT CEC/CSA (cUL) Dual Tap /DT 120V /120 2. 150W HPS Luminaires: For 55V lamps - add suffix LX; for 100V lamps - add suffix CE. 50W HPS luminaire is dual tap only. 3. Options - Add the required option suffixes, see page 890, in alpha-numeric order.
EXPORT 220V 50Hz /220 50 230V 50Hz /230 50
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
891
3L
VMV Series 150175W Pulse Start Metal Halide

Marine & Wet Locations 3, 3R, 4, 4X; IP66
To complete the catalog #, include information in note 1 below. For guards and other optics see VMV Series - Ordering By Components page.
Hub Size
3 /4 1 3 /4 1
Lamp Watts 150 175
With G24 Globe and P21 Guard VMVM2A150GP VMVM3A150GP VMVM2A175GP VMVM3A175GP S828 S828 S828 S828
BASIC CATALOG NUMBER With G245 Type V With R5 Glass Compact Refractor * Refractor VMVM2A150G245 VMVM3A150G245 VMVM2A175G245 VMVM3A175G245 S828 S828 S828 S828 VMVM2A150R5 VMVM3A150R5 VMVM2A175R5 VMVM3A175R5 S828 S828 S828 S828
3 3
/4 /4
150 175
VMVM2HA150GP S828 VMVM2HA175GP S828
VMVM2HA150G245 S828 VMVM2HA175G245 S828
VMVM2HA150R5 S828 VMVM2HA175R5 S828
3 /4 1 3 /4 1
150 175
VMVM2C150GP VMVM3C150GP VMVM2C175GP VMVM3C175GP
S828 S828 S828 S828
VMVM2C150G245 VMVM3C150G245 VMVM2C175G245 VMVM3C175G245
S828 S828 S828 S828
VMVM2C150R5 VMVM3C150R5 VMVM2C175R5 VMVM3C175R5
S828 S828 S828 S828
3 /4 1 3 /4 1
150 175
VMVM2TW150GP VMVM3TW150GP VMVM2TW175GP VMVM3TW175GP
S828 S828 S828 S828
VMVM2TW150G245 VMVM3TW150G245 VMVM2TW175G245 VMVM3TW175G245
S828 S828 S828 S828
VMVM2TW150R5 VMVM3TW150R5 VMVM2TW175R5 VMVM3TW175R5
S828 S828 S828 S828
Quad-Mount Pendant, Adjustable ThruFeed, 25 Angle, 121/ 2 Angle
3 3
/4 /4
150 175
VMVM25Q150GP S828 VMVM25Q175GP S828
VMVM25Q150G245 S828 VMVM25Q175G245 S828
VMVM25Q150R5 S828 VMVM25Q175R5 S828
3L
11/2 11/2
150 175
VMVMJ150GP S828 VMVMJ175GP S828
VMVMJ150G245 S828 VMVMJ175G245 S828
VMVMJ150R5 S828 VMVMJ175R5 S828
11/2 11/2
150 175
VMVMP150GP S828 VMVMP175GP S828
VMVMP150G245 S828 VMVMP175G245 S828
VMVMP150R5 S828 VMVMP175R5 S828
* For G241 Type I Compact Refractor, change "245" at end of catalog number to "241". Ex. VMVM2A150G241-S828 For G243 Type III Compact Refractor, change "245" at end of catalog number to "243". Ex. VMVM2A150G243-S828 For R2 Glass Refractor, change "R5" at end of catalog number to "R2". Ex. VMVM2A150R2-S828. For R3 Glass Refractor, change "R5" at end of catalog number to "R3". Ex. VMVM2A150R3-S828.
1. Add voltage suffix to end of catalog number Standard Voltage Ballasts 60Hz NEC/UL Voltage Suffix Multi Tap /MT 120V /120 480V /480 CEC/CSA (cUL) Tri Tap /TT 120V /120
Optional Voltage Ballasts - 50 or 60Hz EXPORT Voltage Suffix 220V 60Hz /220 220V 50Hz /220 50 230V 50Hz /230 50 240V 50Hz /240 50
892
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
VMV Series 70175W Metal Halide

3L
To complete the catalog #, include information in notes 1, 2 and 3 below. For guards and other optics see VMV Series - Ordering By Components page. BASIC CATALOG NUMBER With G241 Type I With R5 Glass Compact Refractor * Refractor VMVM2A070G241 VMVM3A070G241 VMVM2A100G241 VMVM3A100G241 VMVM2A175G241 VMVM3A175G241 VMVM2A070R5 VMVM3A070R5 VMVM2A100R5 VMVM3A100R5 VMVM2A175R5 VMVM3A175R5
Hub Size /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1
3
Lamp Watts 70 100 175
With G24 Globe and P21 Guard VMVM2A070GP VMVM3A070GP VMVM2A100GP VMVM3A100GP VMVM2A175GP VMVM3A175GP
/4 /4 3 /4
3 3
70 100 175
VMVM2HA070GP VMVM2HA100GP VMVM2HA175GP
VMVM2HA070G241 VMVM2HA100G241 VMVM2HA175G241
VMVM2HA070R5 VMVM2HA100R5 VMVM2HA175R5
/4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1
3
70 100 175
VMVM2C070GP VMVM3C070GP VMVM2C100GP VMVM3C100GP VMVM2C175GP VMVM3C175GP
VMVM2C070G241 VMVM3C070G241 VMVM2C100G241 VMVM3C100G241 VMVM2C175G241 VMVM3C175G241
VMVM2C070R5 VMVM3C070R5 VMVM2C100R5 VMVM3C100R5 VMVM2C175R5 VMVM3C175R5
/4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1
3
70 100 175
VMVM2TW070GP VMVM3TW070GP VMVM2TW100GP VMVM3TW100GP VMVM2TW175GP VMVM3TW175GP
VMVM2TW070G241 VMVM3TW070G241 VMVM2TW100G241 VMVM3TW100G241 VMVM2TW175G241 VMVM3TW175G241
VMVM2TW070R5 VMVM3TW070R5 VMVM2TW100R5 VMVM3TW100R5 VMVM2TW175R5 VMVM3TW175R5
Quad-Mount Pendant, Adjustable Thru-Feed, 25 Angle, 121/ 2 Angle Stanchion Mount 25 Angle
/4 /4 3 /4
3 3
70 100 175
VMVM25Q070GP VMVM25Q100GP VMVM25Q175GP
VMVM25Q070G241 VMVM25Q100G241 VMVM25Q175G241
VMVM25Q070R5 VMVM25Q100R5 VMVM25Q175R5
3L
11/2 11/2 11/2
70 100 175
VMVMJ070GP VMVMJ100GP VMVMJ175GP
VMVMJ070G241 VMVMJ100G241 VMVMJ175G241
VMVMJ070R5 VMVMJ100R5 VMVMJ175R5
11/2 11/2 11/2
70 100 175
VMVMP070GP VMVMP100GP VMVMP175GP
VMVMP070G241 VMVMP100G241 VMVMP175G241
VMVMP070R5 VMVMP100R5 VMVMP175R5
* For G243 Type III Compact Refractor, change "241" at end of catalog number to "243". Ex. VMVM2A070G243 For G245 Type V Compact Refractor, change "241" at end of catalog number to "245". Ex. VMVM2A070G245 For R2 Glass Refractor, change "R5" at end of catalog number to "R2". Ex. VMVM2A070R2. For R3 Glass Refractor, change "R5" at end of catalog number to "R3". Ex. VMVM2A070R3.
1. Add voltage suffix to end of catalog number Standard Voltage Ballasts 60Hz NEC/UL Voltage Suffix Multi Tap /MT 120V /120 480V /480 Tri Tap /TT CEC/CSA (cUL) 120V /120 2. 70W ballast not available in 480V. 3. Options - Add the required option suffixes, see page 890, in alpha-numeric order.
Optional Voltage Ballasts - 50 or 60Hz CEC/CSA (cUL) - CWI Isolated Ballasts Voltage Suffix 208V CWI /208CWI 480V CWI /240CWI 600V CWI /600CWI 220V 60Hz /220
EXPORT 220V 50Hz /220 50 230V 50Hz /230 50 240V 50Hz /240 50
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
893
3L
VMV Series Ordering by Components
VMV luminaires are available in components.

A complete luminaire consists of: I. II. III. Champ Cover (Mounting Module) VMV Ballast Housing Include voltage and required option(s) Optical & Guard components Globe, Reflector, Refractor, Guard
I. Champ Cover (Mounting Module):

Type Pendant Flexible Pendant Ceiling Wall Stanchion 25 Degree Angle Stanchion Straight Quad-Mount Conduit /4" 1"
3 3 3
Cat. # APM2 APM3 HPM2 CM2 CM3 TWM2 TWM3 JM5 PM5 QM25
/4"
/4" 1"
3 /4" 1"
11/2" 11/2"
3
/4"
II. Ballast Housings:

Complete catalog number must have the voltage suffix (MT shown) and any options suffixes. Cat. # For Globe and Compact Refractor VMVS050/DT VMVS070/MT VMVS100/MT VMVS150/MT LX VMVM070/MT VMVM100/MT VMVM175/MT Cat. # For Large Refractor VMVS050/MT RM VMVS070/MT RM VMVS100/MT RM VMVS150/MT LX RM VMVM070/TT RM VMVM100/MT RM VMVM175/MT RM
Lamp Type High Pressure Sodium Metal Halide
Lamp Watts 50 70 100 150 70 100 175
3L
III. Globe, Reflectors, Refractors, Guards:

Type Globe Globe Teflon Coated Globe Guard Reflector Dome Reflector Angle Compact Refractor Type 1 Compact Refractor Type 3 Compact Refractor Type 5 Compact Refractor Guard Large Refractor Type 2 Large Refractor Type 3 Large Refractor Type 5 Large Refractor Guard Large Plastic Refractor Type 2 Large Plastic Refractor Type 3 Large Plastic Refractor Type 5 Cat. # G24 G24 S808 P21 RD70 RA70 G241 G243 G245 P241 R2 R3 R5 P23 PR2 PR3 PR5
894
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
VMV Series
Family Tree
3L
3L
*Plastic refractors are for non-hazardous areas only (50100W Max.)
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
895
3L
VMV Series
Temperature Performance Data
Lamp
Rated Ambient C
Class I, Division 2
Class II, Division 1
Class I, Zone 2 Restricted Breathing Suffix S826 w/ Globe (G24)
Supply Wire Suitable For C
Cat. #
Wattage
Type
Globe (G24)
Globe (G24) Globe w/ or w/o Simultaneous (G24) w/ Presence Reflector Reflector Refractor Class I, Div. 2 (RA70 or (RA70 or (G241 or Class II, Div. 2 RD70) RD70) G245) Group
Factory Sealed Suffix S865 Globe AEx nA nR II (G24)
Refractor (G241 or G245)
VMVM70 VMVM70 VMVM70 VMVM100 VMVM100 S849 VMVM100 VMVM150 VMVM175 VMVS50 VMVS50 VMVS50 VMVS70 VMVS70 VMVS100 VMVS100 VMVS150 VMVS150 VMVIG055 VMVIG055
70 70 70 100 100 100 150 175 50 50 50 70 70 100 100 150 150 55 55
MH MH MH MH MH MH MH MH HPS HPS HPS HPS HPS HPS HPS HPS HPS Induction Induction
40 55 65 40 40 55 40 40 40 55 65 40 55 40 55 40 55 40 55
T3A T3 T3 T2D T2 T2D T2A T2A T3A T3A T3 T3 T3 T2C T2B T2A T2 T2C T2C
T3A T3 T3 T2D T2 T2D T2A T2A T3A T3A T3 T3 T3 T2C T2B T2A T2 T2C T2C
T3A T3 T3 T2D T2 T2D T2B T2B T3B T3A T3 T3B T3 T2D T2C T2B T2A EFG EFG EFG EFG EFG EFG EFG T4A T4 T4 T3C T3C T3A T3A T3 T2D T2C T2B T2A
T5 T4 T4 T4 T4 T4 T3 T3 T5 T5 T5 T4 T4 T4 T3 T3 T3 T6 T5
T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3
90 90 90 90 75 90 90 90 75 75 75 75 90 90 105 90 105 65 65
90 90 90 90 75 90 90 90 65 75 75 65 90 75 90 85 105
The Class I, Division 2 T-codes apply to luminaires without the restricted breathing (S826) or factory sealed (S865) options. These luminaires are listed to UL 844. UL844 specifies how the temperatures are measured. The Class I, Zone 2 T-codes are for luminaires that are additionally listed to UL 60079-15 that specify a different method for measuring temperatures. Since NEC 501.1 states that equipment "for use in Class I, Zone 0, 1, or 2 locations shall be permitted in Class I, Division 2 locations" then these luminaires are suitable for Class I, Division 2 but with cooler temperature ratings. They also have the advantage of meeting the more rigorous mechanical tests of UL 844.
3L
896
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
VMV Series
Dimensions and Weights
3L
Dimensions
In Inches:
Net Luminaire Weights:

Lamp Watts Luminaire Series 50 70 Luminaire with Globe, Guards (lbs.): 141/2 VMVS 131/2 VMVM 13 Luminaire with Glass Refractor (lbs.): 223/4 VMVS 213/4 VMVM 21 Type Lbs. Add for mounting modules: Pendant 11/4 Flexible Pendant 11/2 Ceiling 23/4 Wall 41/2 Add for reflectors: Dome 11/2 Type Quad-Mount Angle Stanchion Straight Stanchion 100 141/2 131/4 223/4 211/2 150 141/2 151/2 223/4 233/4 Lbs. 31/ 2 31/ 2 41/ 2 175
Pendant Mount
Ceiling Mount Top View
30 Angle
11/ 2
Deduct: 1/2" lb. for fixture without P21 Guard Quad-Mount Ceiling Mount
25 Angle Stanchion Mount
Straight Stanchion Mount
Wall Mount
3L
Luminaire With: Refractors, Guard
Compact Refractor
Globe, Guard, Reflectors
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
897
3L
VMV Series
Photometric Data
Lamp: 100W/E 231/2 high pressure sodium (HPS) Total bare lamp lumens: 9500
NOTE: All data provided is for high pressure sodium luminaires with 100W/E23-1/2 clear lamps. Use conversion factors (multipliers) shown below for other clear lamp types and wattages. Consult Cooper Crouse-Hinds for additional photometric data on any Champ Series luminaire.
Luminaire with Globe and Dome Reflector

Multipliers (for use with candela curve only). ConLuminaire Lamp version Series Watts Factor VMVS 50 70 150 0.42 0.67 1.68
Isofootcandle Chart: Luminaire with Globe and Dome Reflector
Luminaire spacing ratio: 1.85
Effective Floor Cavity Reflectance 20% % Reflectance Eff. Ceil. Wall 80 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 0 Room Cavity Ratio 1 2 3 .823 .784 .749 .804 .767 .734 .765 .735 .709 .731 .708 .685 .701 .681 .662 .644 .707 .646 .594 .690 .633 .587 .658 .611 .569 .629 .591 .555 .603 .569 .541 .521 .610 .538 .482 .597 .530 .477 .571 .513 .466 .546 .497 .456 .524 .482 .446 .427 4 .529 .451 .391 .517 .445 .388 .494 .431 .381 .473 .419 .375 .454 .406 .367 .348 9 .296 .224 .175 .291 .221 .174 .279 .216 .172 .269 .210 .170 .260 .206 .167 .152 5 .464 .384 .324 .452 .377 .321 .434 .368 .318 .416 .357 .312 .399 .348 .307 .288 10 .258 .187 .142 .252 .187 .142 .244 .182 .140 .235 .178 .137 .227 .173 .135 .120 Isofootcandle charts show illumination in footcandles on work plane 10 feet below light center. Multiply by factor shown to convert to other mounting heights. Height (Ft.) 6 8 12 Factor 2.78 1.56 0.70 Height (Ft.) 14 16 Factor 0.51 0.39
70
Isofootcandle Chart: Luminaire with Globe and 30 Angle Reflector
50
30
3L
10 0
% Reflectance Eff. Ceil. Wall 80 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 0
Room Cavity Ratio 6 7 8 .412 .334 .278 .403 .329 .274 .386 .320 .271 .371 .312 .267 .357 .304 .263 .245 .366 .290 .239 .359 .285 .235 .344 .277 .231 .329 .272 .227 .319 .266 .224 .207 .326 .253 .201 .320 .250 .200 .307 .244 .197 .296 .237 .195 .285 .232 .192 .176
70
50
30
10 0
898
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
VMV Series
Lamp: 100W/E0 231/2 high pressure sodium (HPS) Luminaire with I.E.S. Type V Glass Refractor
NOTE: Photometric data was developed using a 100 watt clear high pressure sodium lamp (9500 lumens). For other clear lamps, use the following conversion factors (multipliers): Luminaire Lamp Series Watts VMVS 50 70 150 Conversion Factor 0.42 0.67 1.68
Photometric Data
3L
Effective Floor Cavity Reflectance 20% % Reflectance Eff. Ceil. Wall 80 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 0 Room Cavity Ratio 1 2 3 .848 .796 .750 .818 .770 .726 .759 .720 .685 .706 .675 .645 .658 .632 .608 .581 .709 .631 .566 .682 .611 .552 .632 .574 .521 .586 .538 .495 .544 .504 .469 .441 .597 .509 .439 .576 .493 .428 .533 .464 .407 .493 .435 .386 .457 .408 .366 .340 4 .508 .414 .341 .489 .402 .334 .451 .377 .318 .417 .354 .302 .385 .331 .286 .260 9 .272 .189 .132 .262 .183 .130 .243 .173 .124 .225 .161 .117 .209 .151 .110 .091 5 .437 .343 .271 .419 .331 .264 .389 .312 .253 .359 .291 .240 .331 .274 .227 .203 10 .238 .159 .103 .229 .156 .105 .214 .146 .099 .198 .136 .093 .134 .127 .087 .070
70
50
30
Luminaire spacing ratio: 2.0 10 0
70
50
30
10 0
3L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
899
3L
LMV Series 50-150W Low Profile Medium Base

Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III & Simultaneous Presence (HPS 35W, 50W) Marine & Wet Locations 3, 3R, 4, 4X; IP66
Applications:
LMV series Champ luminaires are used: In applications involving low luminaire mounting heights or restricted mounting space or where luminaire weight is a factor In areas in which ignitible concentrations of flammable gases or vapors will be present only due to abnormal, unusual, or accidental conditions Where combustible dusts are present Where combustible dusts and flammable vapors are present simultaneously In elevated ambient temperatures often found in industrial applications In marine applications where water spray and corrosive atmospheres are considerations Wherever the damaging effects of wind, snow, sleet, or hot sun are found In manufacturing plants, chemical, petrochemical, and other industrial process facilities, waste or sewage treatment facilities, offshore or dockside installations, cold storage facilities, parking garages or wherever dust, dirt, water, vibration and rough usage are a problem
Options:
The following special options are available from the factory by adding suffix to luminaire Cat. No.: Description Suffix Restricted Breathing Construction.............................. S826 Class I, Division 2 & Zone 2 Suitability Cooler Operating Temperatures (T-Numbers) Certified for IEC Zone 2 ............. S826TB Furnished with terminal block, crimp terminals and dedicated voltage ballasts (no MT, DT, or TT) Fused to protect ballast and capacitors against abnormal line conditions ........................... S658* (Not for use in Canada) Quick-Clip - Holds weight of housing when closed. No need to support luminaire while screwing the housing to the cover.......................................... S890 Ballast-Gard starter cut-out switch prevents starter pulsing when lamp is mcycling or inoperative; prolongs ballast and ignitor life. Available for use with 50100W HPS only............ BG Factory assembled with H.I.D. lamps installed for additional labor savings ............................. FA Stainless steel insert top hat with stainless steel threaded insert to attach ballast housing .......................... S806

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D HPS 35W, 50W Class II, Class III & Simultaneous Presence (Class I, Division 2 and Class II) Class I, Zone 2 IEC: Zone 2 Ex nR IIC UL Standards: 844 Hazardous (Classified) Locations 1598 Luminaires 1598A Marine Locations CSA Standards: C22.2 No. 137 IEC Standards: 60079-15
Features:
Compact, lightweight design is ideal for low mounting heights. Cast copper-free aluminum construction (less than 0.4 of 1% copper) and epoxy powder finish provide excellent resistance to corrosion. Seven mounting arrangements to suit any lighting layout pendant, flexible pendant, ceiling, wall, straight stanchion, angle stanchion, and quad-mount. Wide range of lamp wattages to meet specifiers' needs: 50, 70, 100 and 150 watt (HPS); 70 and 100 watt (MH) medium base lamps. Hinged ballast housing for ease of installation and maintenance. All luminaires designed to perform in a 40C ambient temperature. Selected luminaires are suitable for ambient temperatures up to 65C. Superior gasketing seals between the mounting module, housing, and optical assembly for optimum performance in wet and corrosive environments. Hubs with an integral conduit stop and bushing to help prevent damage to field wiring during installation. Low ambient capability to 40C. Dome and 30 angle reflectors made of bright white Krydon material provide superior reflectivity, with twist-on feature requiring no tools or additional hardware. Will not chip, peel, dent, rust, or corrode. Grounding wire for safety. Medium base lamp sockets. 900
Standard Materials:
Ballast housings and mountings copper-free aluminum (less than 0.4 of 1%) Exterior hardware stainless steel Reflectors (dome and angle) Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester material Globes heat and impact resistant, internally fluted glass Guards copper-free aluminum
Accessories:
See pages 943944 for complete listing
3L
Standard Finishes:
Electrical Ratings:
120 volts, dual-tap (120/277), multi-tap* 50, 70, 100, 150 watts HPS** 70 and 100 watts MH
* When ordering fuses for luminaires, option S658, you must specify the operating voltage. S658 cannot be ordered with /MT in the catalog number. ** 150W HPS is not avalable with multi tap ballast. 120V only.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
LMV Series 50150W High Pressure Sodium

Low Profile - Medium Base Champ H.I.D. Luminaires
Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III & Simultaneous Presence (35W, 50W) Marine & Wet Locations 3, 3R, 4, 4X; IP66
3L
To complete the catalog #, include information in notes 1, 2 and 3 below. For guards and other optics see LMV Series - Ordering By Components page. BASIC CATALOG NUMBER Mounting Style Pendant Mount Hub Size
3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1
Lamp Watts 50 70 100 150 50 70 100 150
With G54 Globe and P50 Guard LMVS2A050GP LMVS3A050GP LMVS2A070GP LMVS3A070GP LMVS2A100GP LMVS3A100GP LMVS2A150GP LMVS3A150GP LMVS2HA050GP LMVS2HA070GP LMVS2HA100GP LMVS2HA150GP
/4 /4 /4 3 /4
3 3 3
3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1
50 70 100 150 50 70 100 150 50 70 100 150
LMVS2C050GP LMVS3C050GP LMVS2C070GP LMVS3C070GP LMVS2C100GP LMVS3C100GP LMVS2C150GP LMVS3C150GP LMVS2TW050GP LMVS3TW050GP LMVS2TW070GP LMVS3TW070GP LMVS2TW100GP LMVS3TW100GP LMVS2TW150GP LMVS3TW150GP LMVS25Q050GP LMVS25Q070GP LMVS25Q100GP LMVS25Q150GP
Quad Mount Pendant, Adjustable Thru-Feed, 25 Angle, 121/ 2 Angle
/4 /4 /4 3 /4
3 3 3
3L
11/2 11/2 11/2 11/2
50 70 100 150
LMVSJ050GP LMVSJ070GP LMVSJ100GP LMVSJ150GP
11/2 11/2 11/2 11/2
50 70 100 150
LMVSP050GP LMVSP070GP LMVSP100GP LMVSP150GP
1. Add voltage suffix to end of catalog number Standard Voltage Ballasts 60Hz NEC/UL Voltage Suffix Multi Tap /MT Dual Tap /DT 120V /120 480V /480 Tri Tap /TT CEC/CSA (cUL) Dual Tap /DT 120V /120
2. 150W HPS Luminaires: For 55V lamps - add suffix LX. 50W HPS luminaire is dual tap only. 150W HPS is not avalable with multi tap ballast. 120V only. 3. Options - Add the required option suffixes, see page 900, in alpha-numeric order.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
901
3L
LMV Series 70-100W Metal Halide

Low Profile - Medium Base Champ H.I.D. Luminaires
To complete the catalog #, include information in notes 1, 2 and 3 below. For guards and other optics see LMV Series - Ordering By Components page. BASIC CATALOG NUMBER Mounting Style Pendant Mount Hub Size
3 /4 1 3 /4 1
Lamp Watts 70 100
With G54 Globe and P50 Guard LMVM2A070GP LMVM3A070GP LMVM2A100GP LMVM3A100GP
3 3
/4 /4
70 100
LMVM2HA070GP LMVM2HA100GP
3 /4 1 3 /4 1
70 100
LMVM2C070GP LMVM3C070GP LMVM2C100GP LMVM3C100GP
3 /4 1 3 /4 1
70 100
LMVM2TW070GP LMVM3TW070GP LMVM2TW100GP LMVM3TW100GP
11/2 11/2
70 100
LMVMJ070GP LMVMJ100GP
3L
11/2 11/2
70 100
LMVMP070GP LMVMP100GP
1. Add voltage suffix to end of catalog number Standard Voltage Ballasts 60Hz NEC/UL Voltage Suffix Multi Tap /MT 120V /120 480V /480 Tri Tap /TT CEC/CSA (cUL) 120V /120
2. 70W ballast not available in 480V. 3. Options - Add the required option suffixes, see page 900, in alpha-numeric order.
902
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
LMV Series Ordering by Components
3L
LMV luminaires are available in components.

A complete luminaire consists of: I. II. III. Champ Cover (Mounting Module) LMV Ballast Housing Include voltage and required option(s) Globe, Guard, Reflector

3 3 3
/4"
/4" 1"
3 /4" 1"
11/2" 11/2"
3
/4"

Complete catalog number must have the voltage suffix (MT shown) and any options suffixes. Lamp Type Lamp Watts Cat. # High Pressure Sodium 50 70 100 150 70 100 LMVS050/120 LMVS070/MT LMVS100/MT LMVS150/120 LX LMVM070/MT LMVM100/MT
Metal Halide
III. Globe, Guards and Reflectors:

Type Globe Globe Guard Reflector Dome Reflector Angle Cat. # G54 P50 RD636 RA636
3L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
903
3L
LMV Series
Family Tree
3L
904
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
LMV Series
Rated Ambient C
3L
Lamp
Cat. # LMVS50 LMVS50 LMVS50 LMVS70 LMVS70 LMVS100 LMVS100 LMVM70 LMVM70 LMVM100 LMVM150
Wattage 50 50 50 70 70 100 100 70 70 100 150
Type HPS HPS HPS HPS HPS HPS HPS MH MH MH HPS 40 55 65 40 55 40

50
Class I, Division 2 Globe (G54) w/ or w/o Reflector (RA636 or RD636) T2D T2C T2C T2B T2B T2 T2B T2B T1 350C
Class II, Division 1 Globe (G54) w/ or w/o Reflector (RA636 or Group RD636) EFG T3C
Simultaneous Presence Class I, Div. 2 Class II, Div. 1 T2B
Class I, Zone 2 Restricted Factory Breathing Sealed Suffix Suffix S826 w/ S865 Globe (G24) AEx nA nR II T5 T4 T4 T4 T4 T4 T3 T4 T4 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3
Supply Wire Suitable for C N/A 75 85 75 85 85 90 75 85 85 85
40 55 40 40
The Class I, Division 2 T-codes apply to luminaires without the restricted breathing (S826) or factory sealed (S865) options. These luminaires are listed to UL 844. UL 844 specifies how the temperatures are measured. The Class I, Zone 2 T-codes are for luminaires that are additionally listed to UL 60079-15 that specify a different method for measuring temperatures. Since NEC 501.1 states that equipment "...for use in Class I, Zone 0, 1, or 2 locations shall be permitted in Class I, Division 2 locations..." then these luminaires are suitable for Class I, Division 2 but with lower temperature ratings. They also have the advantage of meeting the more rigorous mechanical tests of UL 844.
3L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
905
3L
LMV Series
Dimensions
In Inches:
Luminaire Net Weights:

Luminaire Series LMVS Lamp Watts 50 70 100 150 70 100 Luminaire with Globe, Guard (lbs.) 73/4 81/4 83/4 91/4 9 9 Lbs. 11/4 11/2 23/4 31/2 41/2 31/2 41/2 lbs. 1.0 1.0
1
LMVM Pendant Mount Top View
Type Add for mounting modules: Pendant Flexible Pendant Ceiling Quad-Mount Wall Angle Stanchion Straight Stanchion Type Add for reflectors: Dome 30 Angle Deduct for luminaire without guard: P50 Guard
Wall Mount
Ceiling Mount
/2
Quad-Mount
Luminaire with Globe, Guard, Reflectors
3L
906
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
LMV Series
Lamp: 100W/E-17 high pressure sodium (HPS) Total bare lamp lumens: 9500
Photometric Data
3L
All data provided is for high pressure sodium luminaires with 100W/E-17 clear lamps. Use conversion factors (multipliers) shown below for other lamp types and wattages. Consult Cooper Crouse-Hinds for additional photometric data on any Champ Series.

Multipliers (for use with candela curve only). ConLuminaire Lamp version Series Watts Factor LMVS 35 50 70 150 0.24 0.42 0.67 1.68
Effective Floor Cavity Reflectance 20% % Reflectance Eff. Ceil. 80 Wall 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 0 1 .722 .691 .663 .705 .676 .650 .671 .647 .627 .641 .623 .605 .614 .598 .584 .568 2 .628 .579 .537 .613 .568 .531 .585 .548 .514 .560 .529 .501 .537 .510 .488 .471 Room Cavity Ratio 3 .545 .487 .441 .534 .479 .436 .511 .464 .426 .489 .450 .416 .470 .436 .407 .391 4 .473 .408 .358 .463 .403 .355 .442 .390 .349 .424 .379 .342 .407 .367 .335 .319 5 .413 .346 .296 .403 .340 .293 .387 .332 .289 .371 .322 .284
70
50
30
3L
10 0
.356 .341 .279 .263
% Reflectance Eff. Ceil 80 Wall 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 0 6 .366 .300 .253 .358 .295 .249 .343 .288 .246 .330 .280 .242 .317 .272 .238 .223 7
Room Cavity Ratio 8 .288 .225 .180 .282 .223 .179 .271 .217 .177 .261 .210 .175 .251 .206 .172 .158 9 .261 .199 .156 .256 .196 .156 .246 .192 .154 .237 .186 .152 .228 .182 .149 .136 10 .226 .165 .127 .221 .165 .126 .214 .161 .124 .206 .157 .122 .199 .152 .120 .107 Isofootcandle charts show illumination in footcandles on work plane 10 feet below light center. Multiply by factor shown to convert to other mounting heights. Height (Ft.) 6 8 12 Factor 2.78 1.56 0.70 Height (Ft.) 14 16 Factor 0.51 0.39 .324 .259 .215 .318 .255 .212 .305 .248 .209 .292 .243 .205 .282 .237 .202 .187
70
50
30
10 0
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
907
3L
DMV Series 50-250W For Combustible Dusts

Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III & Simultaneous Presence (175W max) Marine & Wet Locations 3, 3R, 4, 4X; IP66
Applications:
DMV series Champ luminaires are used:
In applications made hazardous by the presence of combustible dusts In areas in which ignitible concentrations of flammable gases or vapors will be present only due to abnormal, unusual, or accidental conditions In marine applications where water spray and corrosive atmospheres are considerations In areas where combustible dusts and flammable vapors are present simultaneously In elevated ambient temperatures often found in industrial applications In installations where moisture, dirt, dust, vibration, corrosion and rough usage are problems Wherever the damaging effects of wind, snow, sleet, or hot sun are found In grain handling, storage and processing plants, coal preparation plants, coal conveying areas, food processing plants, manufacturing plants, refineries, chemical, petrochemical, and other industrial process facilities, waste or sewage treatment facilities, offshore, dockside, and harbor installations, and other heavy industrial applications
Options:
The following special options are available from the factory by adding suffix to luminaire Cat. No.:
Description
Suffix
Grounding wire for safety. Ballasts available in voltages of 120, 208, 240, 277, 347, 480, 600 and multi-tap.*

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D 175W max Class II, Class III & Simultaneous Presence (Class I, Division 2 and Class II) Class I, Zone 2 IEC: Zone 2 Ex nR IIC UL Standards: 844 Hazardous (Classified) Locations 1598 Luminaires 1598A Marine Locations CSA Standards: C22.2 No. 137 IEC Standards: 60079-15
Features:
Cast copper-free aluminum construction (less than 0.4 of 1% copper) and epoxy powder finish provide excellent resistance to corrosion. Seven mounting arrangements to suit any lighting layout pendant, flexible pendant, ceiling, wall bracket, angle stanchion, straight stanchion, and quad-mount. Wide range of light sources and wattages to meet specifiers' needs: 50, 70, 100, 150 watt high pressure sodium (HPS); 70, 100, 175, 250 watt metal halide. Hinged ballast housing for ease of installation and maintenance. All luminaires designed to perform in a 40C ambient temperature. Selected luminaires are suitable for ambient temperatures up to 65C. Superior gasketing seals between the mounting module, housing, and optical assembly for optimum performance in wet and corrosive environments. Hubs with an integral conduit stop and bushing to help prevent damage to field wiring during installation. Low ambient capability to (40C.) Dome and 30 angle reflectors made of bright white Krydon material provide superior reflectivity, with twist-on feature requiring no tools or additional hardware. Will not chip, peel, dent, rust, or corrode. Mogul base porcelain lamp socket. Stainless steel open bottom guard permits direct access to the globe for easy relamping.
Standard Materials:
Ballast housings and mountings copperfree aluminum (less than 0.4 of 1% copper) Guard and exterior hardware stainless steel Reflectors (dome and angle) Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester material Globes heat and impact resistant, internally fluted glass
Restricted Breathing Construction.... S826 Class I, Division 2 & Zone 2 Suitabilty Cooler Operating Temperatures (T-Numbers) Restricted Breathing/Non-Sparking.. S865 Class I, Division 2 & Zone 2 Provides T3 code without conduit or cable seals Certified for IEC Zone 2.................... S826TB Furnished with terminal block, crimp terminals and dedicated voltage ballasts (no MT, DT or TT) Fused to protect ballast and capacitors against abnormal line conditions.......................................... S658* (Not available with /MT Ballast) (Not for use in Canada) Quick-Clip - Holds weight of housing when closed. No need to support luminaire while screwing the housing to the cover................... S890 Ballast-Gard starter cut-out switch prevents starter pulsing when lamp is cycling or inoperative; prolongs ballast and ignitor life. Available for use with 50150W LX HPS only........................................... BG Instant restrike enables a hot HPS lamp to immediately restrike after a momentary loss of arc due to voltage fluctuation or power outage. It has no effect on the warm-up period of cold lamps. Available for use with 50150W LX HPS only.................................................... IR Quartz auxiliary lighting comes to full brightness immediately and remains lit until the HID lamp attains 6070% of full illumination. For non-hazardous locations only. (Note: QTZ lamp not included; use 100W single ended lamp Q100DC, Q100CL/DC, or 100Q/CL/DC) Consult factory for top-hat limitations.......................................... QTZ Factory assembled with H.I.D. lamps installed for additional labor savings.............................................. FA TEFLON coated globe for additional protection against breakage. For use with 50150W HPS and 70175W MH (G303 only).. S808
Note: Some T-numbers (operating temperatures) change. See "Temperature Performance Data" section.
3L
Standard Finishes:
Stainless steel insert top hat with stainless steel threaded insert to attach ballast housing.......................
Note:
S806
BG and IR options cannot be used together. IR and QTZ options cannot be used together.
Accessories:
TEFLON is a registered trademark of E.I. duPont Co. *When ordering fuses for luminaires, option S658, you must specify the operating voltage. S658 cannot be ordered with /MT in the catalog number.
Electrical Ratings:
120, multi-tap* (120, 208, 240 and 277), tri-tap (120, 277, 347) 480, 600 volts 50250W HPS; 70250W MH
908
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
DMV Series 50-150W High Pressure Sodium

For Combustible Dust Applications Champ H.I.D. Luminaires
Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III & Simultaneous Presence Marine & Wet Locations 3, 3R, 4, 4X; IP66
3L
To complete the catalog #, include information in notes 1, 2 and 3 below. For guards and other optics see DMV Series - Ordering By Components page. BASIC CATALOG NUMBER Mounting Hub Lamp With G303 Globe With GR305 Glass Style Size Watts and P33 Guard Refractor * 3 Pendant Mount /4 50 DMVS2A050GP DMVS2A050GR305 1 DMVS3A050GP DMVS3A050GR305 3 /4 70 DMVS2A070GP DMVS2A070GR305 1 DMVS3A070GP DMVS3A070GR305 3 /4 100 DMVS2A100GP DMVS2A100GR305 1 DMVS3A100GP DMVS3A100GR305 3 /4 150 DMVS2A150GP DMVS2A150GR305 1 DMVS3A150GP DMVS3A150GR305 3 Flexible Pendant /4 50 DMVS2HA050GP DMVS2HA050GR305 3 Mount /4 70 DMVS2HA070GP DMVS2HA070GR305 3 /4 100 DMVS2HA100GP DMVS2HA100GR305 3 /4 150 DMVS2HA150GP DMVS2HA150GR305
Quad-Mount Pendant, Adjustable Thru-Feed, 25 Angle, 121/ 2 Angle
/4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 3 /4 3 /4 3 /4
3
50 70 100 150 50 70 100 150 50 70 100 150
DMVS2C050GP DMVS3C050GP DMVS2C070GP DMVS3C070GP DMVS2C100GP DMVS3C100GP DMVS2C150GP DMVS3C150GP DMVS2TW050GP DMVS3TW050GP DMVS2TW070GP DMVS3TW070GP DMVS2TW100GP DMVS3TW100GP DMVS2TW150GP DMVS3TW150GP DMVS25Q050GP DMVS25Q070GP DMVS25Q100GP DMVS25Q150GP
DMVS2C050GR305 DMVS3C050GR305 DMVS2C070GR305 DMVS3C070GR305 DMVS2C100GR305 DMVS3C100GR305 DMVS2C150GR305 DMVS3C150GR305 DMVS2TW050GR305 DMVS3TW050GR305 DMVS2TW070GR305 DMVS3TW070GR305 DMVS2TW100GR305 DMVS3TW100GR305 DMVS2TW150GR305 DMVS3TW150GR305 DMVS25Q050GR305 DMVS25Q070GR305 DMVS25Q100GR305 DMVS25Q150GR305
3L
11/2 11/2 11/2 11/2
50 70 100 150
DMVSJ050GP DMVSJ070GP DMVSJ100GP DMVSJ150GP
DMVSJ050GR305 DMVSJ070GR305 DMVSJ100GR305 DMVSJ150GR305
11/2 11/2 11/2 11/2
50 70 100 150
DMVSP050GP DMVSP070GP DMVSP100GP DMVSP150GP
DMVSP050GR305 DMVSP070GR305 DMVSP100GR305 DMVSP150GR305
* For GR302 Type II Refractor, change "GR305" at end of catalog number to "GR302". Ex. DMVS2A050GR302 For GR303 Type III Refractor, change "GR305" at end of catalog number to "GR303". Ex. DMVS2A050GR303
1. Add voltage suffix to end of catalog number Standard Voltage Ballasts 60Hz NEC/UL Voltage Suffix Multi Tap /MT Dual Tap /DT 120V /120 480V /480 Tri Tap /TT CEC/CSA (cUL) Dual Tap /DT 120V /120 2. 150W HPS Luminaires: For 55V lamps - add suffix LX; for 100V lamps - add suffix CE. 50W HPS luminaire is dual tap only. 3. Options - Add the required option suffixes, see page 908, in alpha-numeric order.
Optional Voltage Ballasts - 50 or 60Hz CEC/CSA (cUL) - CWI Isolated Ballasts Voltage Suffix 208V CWI /208CWI 240V CWI /240CWI 480V CWI /480CWI 600V CWI /600CWI 220V 60Hz /220
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
909
3L DMV Series - 150-250W Pulse Start Metal Halide

Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Restricted Breathing Cl. I, Div. 2 & Zone 2 (Suffix S826) Certified for IEC Zone 2 For Combustible Dust Applications (Suffix S826TB)
To complete the catalog #, include information in notes 1 and 2 below. For guards and other optics see DMV Series - Ordering By Components page. BASIC CATALOG NUMBER With GR305 Glass Refractor * DMVM2A150GR305 S828 DMVM3A150GR305 S828 DMVM2A175GR305 S828 DMVM3A175GR305 S828 DMVM2A200GR305 S828 DMVM3A200GR305 S828 DMVM2A250GR305 DMVM3A250GR305 DMVM2HA150GR305 S828 DMVM2HA175GR305 S828 DMVM2HA200GR305 S828 DMVM2HA250GR305
Hub Size
3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 3 /4 3 /4 3 /4
Lamp Watts 150 175 200 250 150 175 200 250
With G303 Globe and P33 Guard
DMVM2A150GP S828 DMVM3A150GP S828 DMVM2A175GP S828 DMVM3A175GP S828 DMVM2A200GP S828 DMVM3A200GP S828 DMVM2A250GP DMVM3A250GP DMVM2HA150GP S828 DMVM2HA175GP S828 DMVM2HA200GP S828 DMVM2HA250GP
3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 3 /4 3 /4 3 /4
150 175 200 250 150 175 200 250 150 175 200 250
DMVM2C150GP DMVM3C150GP DMVM2C175GP DMVM3C175GP DMVM2C200GP DMVM3C200GP DMVM2C250GP DMVM3C250GP
S828 S828 S828 S828 S828 S828 S828 S828
DMVM2C150GR305 DMVM3C150GR305 DMVM2C175GR305 DMVM3C175GR305 DMVM2C200GR305 DMVM3C200GR305 DMVM2C250GR305 DMVM3C250GR305
S828 S828 S828 S828 S828 S828 S828 S828
3L
DMVM2TW150GP S828 DMVM3TW150GP S828 DMVM2TW175GP S828 DMVM3TW175GP S828 DMVM2TW200GP S828 DMVM3TW200GP S828 DMVM2TW250GP S828 DMVM3TW250GP S828 DMVM25Q150GP S828 DMVM25Q175GP S828 DMVM25Q200GP S828 DMVM25Q250GP S828
DMVM2TW150GR305 S828 DMVM3TW150GR305 S828 DMVM2TW175GR305 S828 DMVM3TW175GR305 S828 DMVM2TW200GR305 S828 DMVM3TW200GR305 S828 DMVM2TW250GR305 S828 DMVM3TW250GR305 S828 DMVM25Q150GR305 S828 DMVM25Q175GR305 S828 DMVM25Q200GR305 S828 DMVM25Q250GR305 S828
11/2 11/2 11/2 11/2
150 175 200 250
DMVMJ150GP DMVMJ175GP DMVMJ200GP DMVMJ250GP
S828 S828 S828 S828
DMVMJ150GR305 DMVMJ175GR305 DMVMJ200GR305 DMVMJ250GR305
S828 S828 S828 S828
11/2 11/2 11/2 11/2
150 175 200 250
DMVMP150GP DMVMP175GP DMVMP200GP DMVMP250GP
S828 S828 S828 S828
DMVMP150GR305 DMVMP175GR305 DMVMP200GR305 DMVMP250GR305
S828 S828 S828 S828
* For GR302 Type II Refractor, change "GR305" at end of catalog number to "GR302". Ex. DMVM2A150GR302-S828 For GR303 Type III Refractor, change "GR305" at end of catalog number to "GR303". Ex. DMVM2A150GR303-S828
2. Options - Add the required option suffixes, see page 908, in alpha-numeric order.
910
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
DMV Series 70250W Metal Halide

For Combustible Dust Applications Champ H.I.D. Luminaires
3L
To complete the catalog #, include information in notes 1, 2 and 3 below. For guards and other optics see DMV Series - Ordering By Components page. Mounting Style Pendant Mount Hub Size
3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 3 /4 3 /4 3 /4
Lamp Watts 70 100 175 250 70 100 175 250
With G303 Globe and P33 Guard DMVM2A070GP DMVM3A070GP DMVM2A100GP DMVM3A100GP DMVM2A175GP DMVM3A175GP DMVM2A250GP DMVM3A250GP DMVM2HA070GP DMVM2HA100GP DMVM2HA175GP DMVM2HA250GP
BASIC CATALOG NUMBER With GR305 Glass Refractor * DMVM2A070GR305 DMVM3A070GR305 DMVM2A100GR305 DMVM3A100GR305 DMVM2A175GR305 DMVM3A175GR305 DMVM2A250GR305 DMVM3A250GR305 DMVM2HA070GR305 DMVM2HA100GR305 DMVM2HA175GR305 DMVM2HA250GR305
Quad-Mount Pendant, Adjustable Thru-Feed, 25 Angle, 121/2 Angle
3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 3 /4 3 /4 3 /4
70 100 175 250 70 100 175 250 70 100 175 250
DMVM2C070GP DMVM3C070GP DMVM2C100GP DMVM3C100GP DMVM2C175GP DMVM3C175GP DMVM2C250GP DMVM3C250GP DMVM2TW070GP DMVM3TW070GP DMVM2TW100GP DMVM3TW100GP DMVM2TW175GP DMVM3TW175GP DMVM2TW250GP DMVM3TW250GP DMVM25Q070GP DMVM25Q100GP DMVM25Q175GP DMVM25Q250GP
DMVM2C070GR305 DMVM3C070GR305 DMVM2C100GR305 DMVM3C100GR305 DMVM2C175GR305 DMVM3C175GR305 DMVM2C250GR305 DMVM3C250GR305 DMVM2TW070GR305 DMVM3TW070GR305 DMVM2TW100GR305 DMVM3TW100GR305 DMVM2TW175GR305 DMVM3TW175GR305 DMVM2TW250GR305 DMVM3TW250GR305 DMVM25Q070GR305 DMVM25Q100GR305 DMVM25Q175GR305 DMVM25Q250GR305
3L
11/2 11/2 11/2 11/2
70 100 175 250
DMVMJ070GP DMVMJ100GP DMVMJ175GP DMVMJ250GP
DMVMJ070GR305 DMVMJ100GR305 DMVMJ175GR305 DMVMJ250GR305
11/2 11/2 11/2 11/2
70 100 175 250
DMVMP070GP DMVMP100GP DMVMP175GP DMVMP250GP
DMVMP070GR305 DMVMP100GR305 DMVMP175GR305 DMVMP250GR305
* For GR302 Type II Refractor, change "GR305" at end of catalog number to "GR302". Ex. DMVM2A070GR302 For GR303 Type III Refractor, change "GR305" at end of catalog number to "GR303". Ex. DMVM2A070GR303
1. Add voltage suffix to end of catalog number Standard Voltage Ballasts 60Hz NEC/UL Voltage Suffix Multi Tap /MT 120V /120 480V /480
CEC/CSA (cUL) Tri Tap /TT 120V /120
Optional Voltage Ballasts - 50 or 60Hz CEC/CSA (cUL) - CWI Isolated Ballasts - 175W and 250W MH only Voltage Suffix 208V CWI /208CWI 240V CWI /240CWI 600V CWI /600CWI 220V 60Hz /220
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
911
3L
DMV Series Ordering by Components
DMV luminaires are available in components.

A complete luminaire consists of: I. Champ Cover (Mounting Module) II. DMV Ballast Housing Include voltage and required option(s) III. Globe, Refractor, Guard, Reflector

3 3 3
/4"
/4" 1"
3 /4" 1"
11/2" 11/2"
3
/4"

Complete catalog number must have the voltage suffix (MT shown) and any options suffixes. Lamp Type High Pressure Sodium Lamp Watts 50 70 100 150 70 100 175 250 Cat. # DMVS050/MT DMVS070/MT DMVS100/MT DMVS150/MT LX DMVM070/MT DMVM100/MT DMVM175/MT DMVM250/MT
Metal Halide
3L

Type Globe Globe Teflon Coated Globe Guard Reflector Dome Reflector Angle Refractor Type 2 Refractor Type 3 Refractor Type 5 Large Plastic Refractor Type 2 Large Plastic Refractor Type 3 Large Plastic Refractor Type 5 Refractor Guard High Bay Reflector/Lens Cat. # G303 G303S808 P33 RD739 RA739 GR302 GR303 GR305 PGR302 PGR303 PGR305 P23 GRD4
912
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
DMV Series
Family Tree
3L
3L
*Plastic refractors are non-hazardous areas only (50-100W Max.)
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
913
3L
DMV Series
Rated Ambient C
Lamp
Class I, Division 2 Globe (G303) w/ or w/o Reflector (RA739 or RD739)* T3A T3 T3 T3A T3 T3 T2D T2C T2C T2B T2B T2A T3C* T3B* T3A* T3* T3* T2D* T2B T2A T2A T2B* T2A* T2A* T2 T1 (325) T2 T1 (325) T3A T3A T3 T3 T3A T3 T3
Class II, Division 1 Refractor (G302 or G305) or Globe (G303) T6 T5 T4A T6 T5 T4A T5 T4A T3C T3C T3C T4A T4 T4 T3C T6 T6 T6 T6 T4A T2D
Class I, Zone 2
Cat. # DMVS50 DMVS50 DMVS50 DMVS70 DMVS70 DMVS70 DMVS100 DMVS100 DMVS100 DMVS150 DMVS150 DMVS150 DMVM70 DMVM70 DMVM70 DMVM100 DMVM100 DMVM100 DMVM150 DMVM150 DMVM150 DMVM175 DMVM175 DMVM175 DMVM200 DMVM200 DMVM250 DMVM250 DMVF26 DMVF39 DMVF52 DMVF64 DMVF84 DMVIG85 DMVIG165
Wattage 50 50 50 70 70 70 100 100 100 150 150 150 70 70 70 100 100 100 150 150 150 175 175 175 200 200 250 250 2 3 2 2 2 / / / / / 13 13 26 32 42 (26) (39) (52) (64) (84)
Type HPS HPS HPS HPS HPS HPS HPS HPS HPS HPS HPS HPS MH MH MH MH MH MH MH PS MH PS MH PS MH MH MH MH MH MH MH CF CF CF CF CF Induction Induction
40 55 65 40 55 65 40 55 65 40 55 65 40 55 65 40 55 65 40 55 65 40 55 65 40 55 40 55 40 40 40 40 40 40 40
Refractor (GR302 or GR305) Group T3A EFG T3 EFG T3 EFG T3A EFG T3 EFG T3 EFG T2D EFG T2C EFG T2C T2B EFG T2B EFG T2B EFG T3C T3C T3A T3A T3A T2D T2 T2 T2 EFG EFG EFG EFG EFG EFG EFG EFG EFG
Globe Simultaneous Restricted Globe Factory (G303) Presence Breathing (G303) Sealed with Class I, Div. 2 Suffix with Suffix Supply Reflector Class II, Div. 1 S826 w/ Reflector S865 Wire (RA739 or (with G303 Globe (RA739 or AEx Suitable RD739) Globe only) (G303) RD739) nA nR II for C T6 T3A T6 T6 T3 75 T5 T3 T5 T5 T3 85 T4A T3 T5 T5 T3 90 T6 T3A T6 T6 T3 75 T5 T3 T5 T5 T3 85 T4A T3 T5 T5 T3 90 T5 T3D T6 T6 T3 75 T4A T2C T5 T5 T3 85 T4 T4 T3 90 T3C T2A T5 T5 T3 75 T4 T4 T3 85 T3 85 T4A T4 T4 T3C T6 T6 T4A T2A T2D T6 T5 T5 T5 T5 T4 T4 T4 T4 T4 T4 T3 T4 T3 T4 T3 T6 T6 T6 T6 T4 T6 T5 T6 T5 T5 T5 T5 T4 T4 T4 T4 T4 T4 T3 T4 T3 T4 T3 T6 T6 T6 T6 T4 T6 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 60 75 85 60 75 85 105 105 105 85 85 90 75 90 75 90 60 60 60 60 90 60 75
85 165
3L
The Class I, Division 2 T-codes apply to luminaires without the restricted breathing (S826) or factory sealed (S865) options. These luminaires are listed to UL 844. UL 844 specifies how the temperatures are measured. The Class I, Zone 2 T-codes are for luminaires that are additionally listed to UL 60079-15 that specify a different method for measuring temperatures. Since NEC 501.1 states that equipment "...for use in Class I, Zone 0, 1, or 2 locations shall be permitted in Class I, Division 2 locations..." then these luminaires are suitable for Class I, Division 2 but with lower temperature ratings. They also have the advantage of meeting the more rigorous mechanical tests of UL 844.
*All DMVM 175W and below MH luminaires provided with Catalog number G303-S808 have a T2A T-code. For use with refractor only when this table indicates by means of a T-code that the refractor is suitable for use with Class I, Division 2 luminaires.
914
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
DMV Series
Dimensions
In Inches:
Dimensions & Weights
3L
Net Luminaire Weights (lbs.):

Luminaire Series DMVS DMVM Lamp Watts 50 100 70 175 Luminaire with Globe, Guard (lbs.) 23 241/16 21 221/4 Type Flexible Pendant Wall Angle Stanchion Lamp Watts 70 150 100 250 Luminaire with Globe, Guard (lbs.) 231/16 261/8 211/16 24 Lbs. 11/2 41/2 31/2
Pendant Mount
Quad-Mount
Type Lbs. Add for mounting modules: Pendant 11/4 Ceiling 23/4 Quad Mount 31/2 Straight Stanchion 41/2
Add for reflectors: 30 Angle Dome 11/4 Deduct: 1 lb. for luminaire without P33 Guard. Add: 51/2 lbs. for luminaire with GR305 refractor.
13/4
Top View
Ceiling Mount
3L
Wall Mount
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
915
3L
DMV Series
Photometric Data
Lamp: 150W/E23-1/2 clear high pressure sodium (HPS) Total bare lamp lumens: 16000
NOTE: All data provided is for high pressure sodium luminaires with 150W/E23-1/2 clear lamps. Use conversion factors (multipliers) shown below for other clear lamp types and wattages. Consult Cooper Crouse-Hinds for additional photometric data on any Champ series luminaires.

Multipliers (for use with candela curve only). ConLuminaire Lamp version Series Watts Factor DMVS 50 70 100 0.25 0.40 0.59
70
50
30
3L
10 0
70
50
30
Isofootcandle charts show illumination in footcandles on work plane 10 feet below light center. Multiply by factor shown to convert to other mounting heights. Height (Ft.) 8 12 14 Factor 1.56 .694 .510 Height (Ft.) 16 20 Factor .391 .250
10 0
916
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
VMV High Wattage Series 200-400W For Medium and High Mounting Heights
Applications:
Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III & Simultaneous Presence (with Glass Refractor) Marine (with Globe or Glass Refractor) & Wet Locations 3, 3R, 4, 4X; IP66
3L
Standard Materials:
Ballast housings and mountings copper-free aluminum (less than 0.4 of 1%) Exterior hardware and guards stainless steel Reflectors (dome and angle) Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester material Globes heat and impact resistant internally fluted glass Refractors glass Reflector lens spun Alzak aluminum, tempered glass, stainless steel door frame
VMV high wattage series Champ luminaires are used: In manufacturing plants, refineries, chemical, petrochemical, and other industrial process facilities, waste or sewage treatment facilities, and other heavy industrial applications In applications involving medium and high mounting heights In applications where energy-efficient, high lumen output is required In areas in which ignitible concentrations of flammable gases or vapors will be present only due to abnormal, unusual, or accidental conditions In marine applications where water spray and corrosive atmospheres are considerations In elevated ambient temperatures often found in industrial applications In installations where moisture, dirt, dust, vibration, corrosion and rough usage are problems Wherever the damaging effects of water, wind, snow, sleet, hot sun, or any combination of these elements, are problems
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum epoxy powder coat Alzak aluminum natural Stainless steel natural Krydon material high reflectance white
Features:
Cast copper-free aluminum construction (less than 0.4 of 1% copper) and epoxy powder finish provide excellent resistance to corrosion Six mounting arrangements to suit any lighting layout pendant, ceiling, wall bracket, angle stanchion, straight stanchion and quad-mount Wide range of light sources and wattages to meet specifiers' needs: 200, 250, 400 watt high pressure sodium (HPS); 250 and 400 watt metal halide (MH) and pulse start metal halide Hinged ballast housing for ease of installation and maintenance Wide choice of photometric distributions. Glass globes, glass refractors, and reflector/lens are available All luminaires designed to perform in a 40C ambient temperature. Selected luminaires are suitable for ambient temperatures up to 65C Superior gasketing seals between the mounting module, housing, and optical assembly for optimum performance in wet and corrosive environments Hubs with integral conduit stop and bushing to help prevent damage to field wiring during installation Low ambient capability to (40C) Dome and 30 angle reflectors made of bright white Krydon material and etched Alzak high bay reflectors provide superior reflectivity Grounding wire for safety High power factor ballasts (Min. P. F. 90%) are available in a variety of voltages to meet local area requirements Mogul base lamp socket
Options:
The following special options are available from the factory by adding suffix to luminaire Cat. No.: Description Suffix Restricted Breathing Construction..................................... S826 Class I, Division 2 & Zone 2 Suitability Cooler Operating Temeratures (T-Numbers) Certified for IEC Zone 2...................................................... S826TB Furnished with terminal block crimp terminals and dedicated voltage ballasts (no MT, DT, or TT) Fused to protect ballast and capacitors against abnormal line conditions (Not available with /MT ballast).......................................... S658* Quick-Clip - Holds weight of housing when closed. No need to support luminaire while screwing the housing to the cover......................................................................... S890 Quartz auxilliary lighting comes to full brightness immediately and remains lit until the HID lamp attains 6070% of full illumination. For non-hazardous locations only..................................................................................... QTZ Ballast-Gard starter cutout switch prevents starter pulsing when lamp is cycling or inoperative; prolongs ballast and ignitor life. Available for use with 200400W HPS only............................................................................. BG Factory assembled with H.I.D. lamps installed for additional labor savings...................................................... FA Top hat with stainless steel threaded insert to attach ballast housing.................................................................... S806
Note: (Quartz lamp not included use 100W single ended lamp Q100DC, Q100CL/DC, or 100Q/CL/DC). Consult factory for top-hat limitations.
3L

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D With Glass Refractor - Class II, Class III & Simultaneous Presence (Class I, Division 2 and Class II) Class I, Zone 2 IEC: Zone 2 Ex nR IIC UL Standards: 844 Hazardous (Classified) Locations 1598 Luminaires 1598A Marine Locations CSA Standards: C22.2 No. 137 IEC Standards: 60079-15
Electrical Ratings:
120 to 600 volts and multi-tap 200, 250, 400W HPS and MH
Accessories:
Alzak is a registered trademark of ALCOA. *When ordering fuses for luminaires, option S658, you must specify the operating voltage. S658 cannot be ordered with /MT in the catalog number. Not for use in Canada. Suffix S826 and S826TB cannot be used with GRD4 Reflector/Lens.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
917
3L VMV High Wattage Series 200-400W High Pressure Sodium

For Medium and High Mounting Heights Champ H.I.D. Luminaires
Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III & Simultaneous Presence (with Glass Refractor) Marine (with Globe or Glass Refractor) & Wet Locations 3, 3R, 4, 4X; IP56 to IP66
To complete the catalog #, include information in notes 1 and 2 below. For guards and other optics see VMV High Wattage Series - Ordering By Components page. BASIC CATALOG NUMBER Mounting Style Pendant Mount (Rigid or Flexible) Hub Size
3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1
With G303 Globe and P33 Guard VMVS2A200GP VMVS3A200GP VMVS2A250GP VMVS3A250GP VMVS2A400GP VMVS3A400GP VMVS2C200GP VMVS3C200GP VMVS2C250GP VMVS3C250GP VMVS2C400GP VMVS3C400GP
With GR305 Glass Refractor * VMVS2A200GR305 VMVS3A200GR305 VMVS2A250GR305 VMVS3A250GR305 VMVS2A400GR305 VMVS3A400GR305 VMVS2C200GR305 VMVS3C200GR305 VMVS2C250GR305 VMVS3C250GR305 VMVS2C400GR305 VMVS3C400GR305
With GRD4 Reflector/Lens VMVS2A200GRD4 VMVS3A200GRD4 VMVS2A250GRD4 VMVS3A250GRD4 VMVS2A400GRD4 VMVS3A400GRD4 VMVS2C200GRD4 VMVS3C200GRD4 VMVS2C250GRD4 VMVS3C250GRD4 VMVS2C400GRD4 VMVS3C400GRD4
3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1
200 250 400
3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1
200 250 400
VMVS2TW200GP VMVS3TW200GP VMVS2TW250GP VMVS3TW250GP VMVS2TW400GP VMVS3TW400GP
VMVS2TW200GR305 VMVS3TW200GR305 VMVS2TW250GR305 VMVS3TW250GR305 VMVS2TW400GR305 VMVS3TW400GR305
/4 /4 3 /4
3 3
200 250 400
VMVS25Q200GP VMVS25Q250GP VMVS25Q400GP
VMVS25Q200GR305 VMVS25Q250GR305 VMVS25Q400GR305
VMVS25Q200GRD4 VMVS25Q250GRD4 VMVS25Q400GRD4
11/2 11/2 11/2
200 250 400
VMVSJ200GP VMVSJ250GP VMVSJ400GP
VMVSJ200GR305 VMVSJ250GR305 VMVSJ400GR305
VMVSJ200GRD4 VMVSJ250GRD4 VMVSJ400GRD4
3L
11/2 11/2 11/2
200 250 400
VMVSP200GP VMVSP250GP VMVSP400GP
VMVSP200GR305 VMVSP250GR305 VMVSP400GR305
* For GR302 Type II Refractor, change "GR305" at end of catalog number to "GR302". Ex. VMVS2A200GR302 For GR303 Type III Refractor, change "GR305" at end of catalog number to "GR303". Ex. VMVS2A200GR303
1. Add voltage suffix to end of catalog number Standard Voltage Ballasts 60Hz NEC/UL Voltage Suffix Multi Tap /MT 120V /120 480V /480
CEC/CSA (cUL) Tri Tap /TT 120V /120
918
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
VMV High Wattage Series 250400W Pulse Start Metal Halide

For Medium and High Mounting Heights Champ H.I.D. Luminaires
3L
To complete the catalog #, include information in notes 1and 2 below. For guards and other optics see VMV High Wattage Series - Ordering By Components page. BASIC CATALOG NUMBER Mounting Hub Style Size Pendant Mount 3/4 (Rigid or 1 3 /4 Flexible) 1 3 /4 1 Lamp Watts 250 320 400 With G303 Globe and P33 Guard VMVM2A250GP S828 VMVM3A250GP S828 With GR305 Glass Refractor * VMVM2A250GR305 VMVM3A250GR305 VMVM2A320GR305 VMVM3A320GR305 VMVM2A400GR305 VMVM3A400GR305 S828 S828 S828 S828 S828 S828 With GRD4 Reflector/Lens VMVM2A250GRD4 VMVM3A250GRD4 VMVM2A320GRD4 VMVM3A320GRD4 VMVM2A400GRD4 VMVM3A400GRD4 S828 S828 S828 S828 S828 S828
/4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1
3
250 320 400
VMVM2C250GP S828 VMVM3C250GP S828
VMVM2C250GR305 VMVM3C250GR305 VMVM2C320GR305 VMVM3C320GR305 VMVM2C400GR305 VMVM3C400GR305
S828 S828 S828 S828 S828 S828
VMVM2C250GRD4 VMVM3C250GRD4 VMVM2C320GRD4 VMVM3C320GRD4 VMVM2C400GRD4 VMVM3C400GRD4
S828 S828 S828 S828 S828 S828
/4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1
3
250 320 400
VMVM2C250GP S828 VMVM3C250GP S828
VMVM2TW250GR305 VMVM3TW250GR305 VMVM2TW320GR305 VMVM3TW320GR305 VMVM2TW400GR305 VMVM3TW400GR305
S828 S828 S828 S828 S828 S828
3 3 3
/4 /4 /4
250 320 400
VMVM25Q250GP S828 VMVM25Q250GR305 S828 VMVM25Q320GR305 S828 VMVM25Q400GR305 S828
VMVM25Q250GRD4 S828 VMVM25Q320GRD4 S828 VMVM25Q400GRD4 S828
11/2 11/2 11/2
250 320 400
VMVMJ250GP S828
VMVMJ250GR305 S828 VMVMJ320GR305 S828 VMVMJ400GR305 S828
VMVMJ250GRD4 S828 VMVMJ320GRD4 S828 VMVMJ400GRD4 S828
3L
11/2 11/2 11/2
250 320 400
VMVMP250GP S828
VMVMP250GR305 S828 VMVMP320GR305 S828 VMVMP400GR305 S828
* For GR302 Type II Refractor, change "GR305" at end of catalog number to "GR302". Ex. VMVM2A250GR302-S828 For GR303 Type III Refractor, change "GR305" at end of catalog number to "GR303". Ex. VMVM2A250GR303-S828
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
919
3L
VMV High Wattage Series 250-400W Metal Halide

Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Restricted Breathing Cl. I, Div. 2 & Zone 2 (Suffix S826) Certified for IEC Zone 2 For Medium and High Mounting Heights (Suffix S826TB)
To complete the catalog #, include information in notes 1 and 2 below. For guards and other optics see VMV High Wattage Series - Ordering By Components page. BASIC CATALOG NUMBER Mounting Hub Lamp With G303 Globe With GR305 Glass With GRD4 Style Size Watts and P33 Guard Refractor * Reflector/Lens 3 Pendant Mount /4 250 VMVM2A250GP VMVM2A250GR305 VMVM2A250GRD4 (Rigid or Flexible) 1 VMVM3A250GP VMVM3A250GR305 VMVM3A250GRD4 3 /4 400 N/A VMVM2A400GR305 VMVM2A400GRD4 1 N/A VMVM3A400GR305 VMVM3A400GRD4
3 /4 1 3 /4 1
250 400
VMVM2C250GP VMVM3C250GP N/A N/A
VMVM2C250GR305 VMVM3C250GR305 VMVM2C400GR305 VMVM3C400GR305
VMVM2C250GRD4 VMVM3C250GRD4 VMVM2C400GRD4 VMVM3C400GRD4
3 /4 1 3 /4 1
250 400
VMVM2TW250GP VMVM3TW250GP N/A N/A
VMVM2TW250GR305 VMVM3TW250GR305 VMVM2TW400GR305 VMVM3TW400GR305
3 3
/4 /4
250 400
VMVM25Q250GP N/A
VMVM25Q250GR305 VMVM25Q400GR305
VMVM25Q250GRD4 VMVM25Q400GRD4
11/2
250
VMVMJ250GP
VMVMJ250GR305
VMVMJ250GRD4
3L
11/2
400
N/A
VMVMJ400GR305
VMVMJ400GRD4
11/2 11/2
250 400
VMVMP250GP N/A
VMVMP250GR305 VMVMP400GR305
* For GR302 Type II Refractor, change "GR305" at end of catalog number to "GR302". Ex. VMVM2A250GR302 For GR303 Type III Refractor, change "GR305" at end of catalog number to "GR303". Ex. VMVM2A250GR303
920
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
VMV High Wattage Series Ordering by Components
3L
VMV High Wattage Luminaires are available in components.

A complete luminaire consists of: I. II. III. Champ Cover (Mounting Module) VMV Ballast Housing Include voltage and required option(s) Optical & Guard Components Globe, Reflector, Refractor, Guard

Type Pendant Ceiling Wall Stanchion 25 Degree Angle Stanchion Straight Quad-Mount Conduit /4" 1"
3 3 /4" 1" 3 /4" 1"
Cat. # APM2 APM3 CM2 CM3 TWM2 TWM3 JM5 PM5 QM25
11/2" 1 /2"
1 3
/4"

Complete catalog number must have the voltage suffix (MT shown) and any options suffixes. Lamp Type High Pressure Sodium Lamp Watts 200 250 400 250 400 Cat. # VMVS200/MT VMVS250/MT VMVS400/MT VMVM250/MT VMVM400/MT
Metal Halide

Type Globe Globe Guard Reflector Dome Reflector Angle Refractor Type 2 Refractor Type 3 Refractor Type 5 Refractor Guard High Bay Reflector/Lens Cat. # G303 P33
3L
RD739 RA739 GR302 GR303 GR305 P23 GRD4
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
921
3L
VMV High Wattage Series

Family Tree
3L
922
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

3L
High Pressure Sodium

200 40 55 65 40 55 65 40 55 325 C 325 C 325 C 350 C 350 C 350 C 350 C T1 325 C 325 C 325 C 350 C 350 C 350 C 350 C T1 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T4 T4 T4 T4 T4 T4 T3C T3C T3C T1/T3C T1/T3C T1/T3C T3C T3C T3C 75 75 85 75 85 85 90
250 400
Metal Halide
200 (S828) 250 (Includes S828) 320 (S828) 400 (Includes S828) 40 55 40 55 40 55 40 55 350 C 350 C 350 C 350 C 325 C 350 C 325 C 350 C 325 C 325 C T3 T4 T3 T3 T1 T1 T4 T3 T4 T3 T4 T4 T3B T3B T3B T3B 350 C/T3B 350 C/T3B 350 C/T3B 350 C/T3B T3B T3B T3B T3B 85 90 85 90 85 85
3L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
923
3L

Dimensions
In Inches:
Pendant Mount
Ceiling Mount
Wall Mount
Quad-Mount
Luminaire with Glass Refractor, Guard
3L
Luminaire with Etched Alzak Reflector/Lens

Luminaire Series VMVS VMVM Lamp Watts 200 250 400 250 400 Luminaire with: Globe, Reflector/ Guard (lbs.) Lens 291/2 291/2 381/2 321/2 30 30 39 33 34 Glass Refractor (lbs.) 321/2 321/2 411/2 353/4 351/2 Lbs. 31/2 31/2 41/2 11/2
Type Lbs. Type Add for mounting modules: Quad-Mount Pendant 11/4 Angle Stanchion Ceiling 23/4 Straight Stanchion Wall 41/2 Add for reflectors: 30 Angle Dome 11/2 High Bay 13/4 Deduct: 11/2 lb. for luminaire without P33 Guard 924
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Photometric Data
3L
Lamp: 250W/E18 high pressure sodium (HPS) Total bare lamp lumens: 27500
Note: All data provided is for high pressure sodium luminaires with 250W/E18 clear lamps. Use conversion factors (multipliers) shown below for other clear lamp types and wattages. Consult Cooper Crouse-Hinds for additional photometric data on any Champ series luminaire.

Multipliers (for use with candela curve only). ConLuminaire Lamp version Series Watts Factor VMVS 200 400 0.80 1.82
70
50
30
10 0
70
50
3L
30
10 0
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
925
3L
N2MV Series 50-175W Non-metallic

Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. II, Groups F, G Cl. III & Simultaneous Presence (100W max)
Applications:
N2MV series Champ luminaires are used: In areas in which ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors will be present due to abnormal, unusual or accidental conditions. In installations where moisture, dirt, vibration, corrosion or rough usage are concerns. Wherever the damaging effects of water, wind, snow, sleet, hot sun or any combination of these elements are found. Ideal for marine use; resists the harmful effects of salt water. Withstands the harshest of corrosive environments. To provide low wattage spot and floodlighting. For general area lighting. In areas where the ambient temperature will get as low as 40C (40F). In manufacturing plants, refineries, chemical, petrochemical and other industrial process facilities, wastewater and sewage treatment facilities, offshore, dockside and harbor installations as well as other heavy industrial applications.
Options:
The following special options are available from the factory by adding suffix to luminaire Cat. No.: Description Suffix Wall Mount Arm. For converting ceiling mount luminaire to a wall mount. ................................. N2MV-WM1 Ballast-Gard starter cut-out switch. Prevents starter pulsing when lamp is cycling or inoperative; prolongs ballast and ignitor life. Available for use with 50150 watt HPS ...................... BG Factory Assembled. For a factory assembled luminaire with lamp installed........................................ FA Instant Restrike. Enables a hot HPS lamp to immediately restrike after a momentary loss of arc due to voltage fluctuation or power outage. It has no effect on the warm-up period of cold lamps. Available for use with 50150W LX HPS only................. IR Quartz Auxiliary Lighting. Comes to full brightness immediately and remains lit until the HID lamp attains 6070% of full illumination. For non-hazardous locations only. (Note: QTZ lamp not included; use 100W single ended lamp Q100DC, Q100CL/DC, or 100Q/CL/DC) Consult factory for top-hat limitations..................................... QTZ Fused. To protect ballast and capacitor against abnormal line conditions..................................... S658 (Not available with /MT ballast ) (Not for use in Canada) Furnished with Lamps.................. S714 Teflon Coated Globe. For additional protection against breakage. For use with 50100W HPS, 70175W MH and pulse start MH....................................... S808

NEC and CEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D 100W Maximum Class II, Class III & Simultaneous Presence (Class I, Division 2 and Class II) UL Standards: 844 Hazardous (Classified) Locations 1598 Luminaires 1598A Marine Locations CSA Standards C22.2 No. 137
Features:
Housing and mounting modules made of polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) for strength and maximum resistance to corrosion. Pendant mounting module equipped with integral hub set screws for vibration resistance. Hubs are provided with an integral bushing to help prevent damage to field wiring during installation and ground connection for positive bonding. Guard, hub inserts, stanchion elbow and hardware made of stainless steel for maximum resistance to corrosion. Grounding wire for safety. Stainless steel open bottom guard permits direct access to the globe for easy relamping. Hinged assembly allows the luminaire to hang free during installation to permit the use of both hands when wiring. One external captive screw for ease of installation. Handle hinge assembly doubles as a handle for ease of installation, especially when carrying up a ladder.
Standard Materials:
Housing, mounting modules, component pallets polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) Guard, hub inserts, stanchion elbow, hardware stainless steel Globe heat tempered Gaskets silicone rubber
3L
Electrical Ratings:
120, multi-tap/MT (120, 208, 240 and 277), Dual-Tap/DT (120, 277 volts), Tri-Tap/TT (120,277, 347 volts) 480 volt, 600 volt, 220 / 240 volt-50 Hz 50150W HPS; 70175W MH and Pulse Start MH
Accessories:
926
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
N2MV Series 50150W High Pressure Sodium

Non-metallic Champ H.I.D. Luminaires
3L
To complete the catalog #, include information in notes 1, 2 and 3 below. For guards and other optics see N2MV Series - Ordering By Components page. BASIC CATALOG NUMBER With G303 Globe and With GR305 P33 Guard Glass Refractor * N2MVS2A050GP N2MVS3A050GP N2MVS2A070GP N2MVS3A070GP N2MVS2A100GP N2MVS3A100GP N2MVS2A150GP N2MVS3A150GP N2MVS2C050GP N2MVS3C050GP N2MVS2C070GP N2MVS3C070GP N2MVS2C100GP N2MVS3C100GP N2MVS2C150GP N2MVS3C150GP N2MVSJ050GP N2MVSJ070GP N2MVSJ100GP N2MVSJ150GP N2MVS2A050GR305 N2MVS3A050GR305 N2MVS2A070GR305 N2MVS3A070GR305 N2MVS2A100GR305 N2MVS3A100GR305 N2MVS2A150GR305 N2MVS3A150GR305 N2MVS2C050GR305 N2MVS3C050GR305 N2MVS2C070GR305 N2MVS3C070GR305 N2MVS2C100GR305 N2MVS3C100GR305 N2MVS2C150GR305 N2MVS3C150GR305 N2MVSJ050GR305 N2MVSJ070GR305 N2MVSJ100GR305 N2MVSJ150GR305
Hub Size /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 11/2 11/2 11/2 11/2

3
Lamp Watts 50 70 100 150 50 70 100 150 50 70 100 150
* For GR302 Type II Refractor, change "GR305" at end of catalog number to "GR302". Ex. N2MVS2A050GR302 For GR303 Type III Refractor, change "GR305" at end of catalog number to "GR303". Ex. N2MVS2A050GR303
1. Add voltage suffix to end of catalog number Standard Voltage Ballasts 60Hz NEC/UL Voltage Suffix Multi Tap /MT Dual Tap /DT 120V /120 480V /480 Tri Tap /TT CEC/CSA (cUL) Dual Tap /DT 120V /120
2. 150W HPS Luminaires: For 55V lamps - add suffix LX; for 100V lamps - add suffix CE. 50W HPS luminaire is dual tap only. 3. Options - Add the required option suffixes, see page 926, in alpha-numeric order.
3L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
927
3L
N2MV Series 150175W Pulse Start Metal Halide

To complete the catalog #, include information in notes 1 and 2 below. For guards and other optics see N2MV Series - Ordering By Components page. BASIC CATALOG NUMBER Mounting Style Pendant Mount Hub Size /4 1 3 /4 1
3
Lamp Watts 150 175
With G303 Globe and P33 Guard * N2MVM2A150GP N2MVM3A150GP N2MVM2A175GP N2MVM3A175GP S828 S828 S828 S828
With GR305S828 Glass Refractor N2MVM2A150GR305 N2MVM3A150GR305 N2MVM2A175GR305 N2MVM3A175GR305 S828 S828 S828 S828
/4 1 3 /4 1
3
150 175
N2MVM2C150GP N2MVM3C150GP N2MVM2C175GP N2MVM3C175GP
S828 S828 S828 S828
N2MVM2C150GR305 N2MVM3C150GR305 N2MVM2C175GR305 N2MVM3C175GR305
S828 S828 S828 S828
Stanchion Mount 11/2 25 Angle 11/2
150 175
N2MVMJ150GP S828 N2MVMJ175GP S828
N2MVMJ150GR305 S828 N2MVMJ175GR305 S828
* For GR302 Type II Refractor, change "GR305" at end of catalog number to "GR302". Ex. N2MVM2A150GR302-S828 For GR303 Type III Refractor, change "GR305" at end of catalog number to "GR303". Ex. N2MVM2A150GR303-S828
3L
928
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
N2MV Series 70175W Metal Halide

3L
To complete the catalog #, include information in notes 1, 2 and 3 below. For guards and other optics see N2MV Series - Ordering By Components page. BASIC CATALOG NUMBER Mounting Style Pendant Mount Hub Size
3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1
With G303 Globe and P33 Guard N2MVM2A070GP N2MVM3A070GP N2MVM2A100GP N2MVM3A100GP N2MVM2A175GP N2MVM3A175GP
With GR305 Glass Refractor * N2MVM2A070GR305 N2MVM3A070GR305 N2MVM2A100GR305 N2MVM3A100GR305 N2MVM2A175GR305 N2MVM3A175GR305
3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1
70 100 175
N2MVM2C070GP N2MVM3C070GP N2MVM2C100GP N2MVM3C100GP N2MVM2C175GP N2MVM3C175GP
N2MVM2C070GR305 N2MVM3C070GR305 N2MVM2C100GR305 N2MVM3C100GR305 N2MVM2C175GR305 N2MVM3C175GR305
11/2 11/2 11/2
70 100 175
N2MVMJ070GP N2MVMJ100GP N2MVMJ175GP
N2MVMJ070GR305 N2MVMJ100GR305 N2MVMJ175GR305
* For GR302 Type II Refractor, change "GR305" at end of catalog number to "GR302". Ex. N2MVM2A070GR302 For GR303 Type III Refractor, change "GR305" at end of catalog number to "GR303". Ex. N2MVM2A070GR303
3L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
929
3L
N2MV Series Ordering by Components
N2MV luminaires are available in components.

A complete luminaire consists of: I. N2MV Cover (Mounting Module) II. N2MV Ballast Housing Include voltage and required option(s) III. Globe, Refractor, Guard, Reflector
I. N2MV Cover (Mounting Module):

Type Pendant Ceiling Wall (Use wall bracket accessory with Ceiling Cover) Stanchion 25 Degree Angle Conduit /4" 1"
3 3 /4" 1" 3 /4" 1"
Cat. # N2APM2 N2APM3 N2CM2 N2CM3 N2MV WM1 and N2CM2 N2MV WM1 and N2CM3 N2JM5
11/2"

Complete catalog number must have the voltage suffix (MT shown) and any options suffixes. Lamp Lamp Type Watts Cat. # High Pressure Sodium 50 N2MVS050/MT 70 N2MVS070/MT 100 N2MVS100/MT 150 N2MVS150/MT LX Metal Halide 70 100 175 N2MVM070/MT N2MVM100/MT N2MVM175/MT
III. Globe, Refractors, Guards and Reflectors:

Type Cat. # G303 G303S808 P33 RD739 RA739 GR302 GR303 GR305 P23 PGR302 PGR303 PGR305
3L
Globe Globe Teflon Coated Globe Guard Reflector Dome Reflector Angle Refractor Type 2 Refractor Type 3 Refractor Type 5 Refractor Guard Large Plastic Refractor Type 2 Large Plastic Refractor Type 3 Large Plastic Refractor Type 5
930
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
N2MV Series
Champ H.I.D Luminaires
Family Tree
3L
*Plastic refractors are non-hazardous areas only (50-100W Max.)
3L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
931
3L
N2MV Series

50 40 55 65 40 55 65 40 55 65 40 55 65 T3A T3A T3A T3A T2D T2C T2C T5 T5 T5 T5 T5 T4 T4 T4A T4A T4A T2C/T4A T2C/T4A T2C/T4A T4A T4A T4A 75 85 75 85 85 100 85
70
100
150
3L
Metal Halide
70 40 55 65 40 55 65 40 55 65 40 55 65 T3C T3B T2B T2B T2 T2 T5 T5 T4 T4 T3 T3 T4 T4 T2B/T4 T2B/T4 T4 T4 75 85 85
100 150 (S828) 175 (Includes S828)
932
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
N2MV Series
Dimensions
In Inches:
3L
Ceiling Mount
3L
Pendant Mount

Luminaire Series N2VMS N2MVM Lamp Watts 50 100 70 175 Luminaire with Globe, Guard (lbs.) 23 241/16 21 221/4 Type Flexible Pendant Wall Angle Stanchion Lamp Watts 70 150 100 250 Luminaire with Globe, Guard (lbs.) 231/16 261/8 211/16 24 Lbs. 11/2 41/2 31/2
Type Lbs. Add for mounting modules: Pendant 11/4 Ceiling 23/4 Quad-Mount 31/2 Straight Stanchion 41/2
Wall Arm Mount
Add for reflectors: 30 Angle Dome 11/ 4 Deduct: 1 lb. for luminaire without P33 Guard. 1 Add: 5 / 2 lbs. for luminaire with GR305 refractor.
13/4
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
933
3L
N2MV Series
Photometric Data
Lamp: 150W/E-23-1/2 clear high pressure sodium (HPS) Total bare lamp lumens: 16000
All data provided is for high pressure sodium luminaires with 150W/E-23-1/2 clear lamps. Use conversion factors (multipliers) shown below for other clear lamp types and wattages. Consult Cooper Crouse-Hinds for additional photometric data on any Champ series luminiares.

Multipliers (for use with candela curve only). Conversion Factor 0.25 0.40 0.59
Luminaire Series N2MVS
Effective Floor Cavity Reflectance 20% % Reflectance Eff. Ceil. Wall 80 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 0 Room Cavity Ratio 1 2 3 .759 .719 .683 .740 .703 .669 .703 .672 .645 .669 .646 .622 .640 .619 .600 .582 .643 .582 .530 .627 .570 .523 .595 .548 .506 .567 .528 .492 .541 .508 .479 .459 .551 .480 .424 .538 .471 .418 .512 .455 .408 .488 .439 .399 .466 .424 .389 .370 4 .476 .400 .342 .465 .394 .338 .442 .381 .332 .422 .368 .325 .403 .356 .318 .299 9 .267 .198 .151 .262 .195 .151 .250 .190 .148 .240 .184 .146 .231 .180 .143 .128 5 .418 .340 .283 .406 .334 .280 .388 .324 .276 .370 .314 .270 .354 .305 .265 .247 10 .231 .164 .121 .226 .164 .121 .218 .159 .119 .209 .154 .116 .201 .150 .114 .100 Isofootcandle charts show illumination in footcandles on work plane 10 feet below light center. Multiply by factor shown to convert to other mounting heights. Height (Ft.) 8 12 14 Factor 1.56 .694 .510 Height (Ft.) 16 20 Factor .391 .250
70
50
30
3L
10 0
70
50
30
10 0
934
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
NVMV Series 70-400W Ex-Protected Luminaire for IEC and ATEX Applications
The Champ NVMV design is optimized for Zone 2 gas applications (with standard restricted breathing Ex nR protection), as well as Zone 21 dust applications.
Ex nR II T...Gc Ex t IIIC T...C Db IP66 LCIE 09 ATEX 1002 LCIE 09 ATEX 3008
3L

Application in Zone 2 area acc. IEC 60079-15 Marking to 94/9/EC: Ex II 3 G Ex nR II T*...Gc EC - Type Examination: LCIE 09 ATEX 1002 Application in Zone 21 and 22 areas acc. IEC 61241-1 Marking to 94/9/EC: Ex II 2 D Ex t IIIC T...C(*) Db IP66 EC - Type Examination: LCIE 09 ATEX 3008 General per both application Zone 2 and 21 Temperature ambient of use: -45C to +55C Electromagnetic compatibility: EN 61000-6-4 Degree of protection: acc. EN 60529 IP66
Applications:
NVMV Ex-Protected Luminaires are suitable for applications in Zone 2/Zone 21/Zone 22: In manufacturing plants, refineries, chemical, petrochemical, and other industrial process facilities, waste or sewage treatment facilities, dockside and other heavy industrial applications In areas where combustible dusts or fibers may be present In areas where ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors will be present In installations where moisture, dirt, dust, vibration, corrosion, and rough usage are problematic
NVMV 70W - 250W (Small Housing)
Features:
One product offering for global applications. The Champ family has the required IEC and ATEX certifications to provide solutions for specification requirements around the world. Restricted breathing (Ex nR) protection is standard. This provides better T-ratings, as gases will not enter the lamp chamber and control gear housing. Provides an integrated ballast with thermal cut-off functionality incorporated into the control gear. In the event of abnormal temperatures or when the lamp approaches end of life, the cut-off functionality protects the ballast from overheating or burning out. Identical mounting cover for IEC and NEC applications - regardless of wattage, options, and accessories. Reduce inventory costs and provide greater flexibility for engineering designers, customers, and distributors. HPS lamps restrike in 10-30 seconds with the instant restrike option (IR) should lamp extinguish due to system voltage drop or momentary loss. Optional builtin cut-off feature will shut off the instant restrike to avoid continuous high energy pulsing when lamp is inoperative or nearing end of life. Available with the Champ Quick-Clip. Quick-Clip secures the housing to the cover, providing faster, easier, and safer luminaire installation.

Ballast housing and mountings copper-free aluminum Exterior hardware stainless steel (type 304) Reflectors (dome and angle) Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester Globes heat and impact-resistant glass Guards copper-free aluminum and stainless steel (large housing - stainless steel only)
NVMV 250W - 400W (Large Housing)
3L
Entry Termination Installation Lamp Holder Lamp Type Lamp Power Control Gear Re-lamping Burning Position Ingress Protection Electrical Supply Up to 4 x M20, M25, M32, 1/ 2" NPT and 3/ 4" NPT and 1" NPT cable entries (11/ 2" NPT for stanchion only) 3 Core 6mm2 max. (standard); 6 x 6mm2 for looping (available upon request) Ceiling Mount, Wall Mount, Stanchion Mount, Pendant Mount E27 or E40 HSE/HST (high pressure sodium lamp) and HIE (metal halide lamp) 70W, 100W, 150W, 250W, and 400W Integrated ballast, thermal cut-off functionality incorporated into control gear Access via restricted breathing lamp chamber Base up; up to 25 off vertical IP66 to EN 60529 220, 230, 240V 50Hz and 220, 230V 60Hz
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
935
3L
NVMV Series 70-400W Ex-Protected Luminaire for IEC and ATEX Applications
Ex nR II T...Gc Ex t IIIC T...C Db IP66 LCIE 09 ATEX 1002 LCIE 09 ATEX 3008
Example of Completed Part Number - Small Body: NVMVS1MC075POO NVMV Series S Lamp 1M Entry 1M = M20 2M = M25 3M = M32 1N = 1/ 2" NPT 2N = 3/ 4" NPT 3N = 1" NPT 5N = 1 1/ 2" NPT (For Stanchion) C Mounting* C = Ceiling W = Wall J = Stanchion 07 5 Wattage Voltage 07 = 70W 10 = 100W 15 = 150W 25 = 250W 3 5 6 4 7 = = = = = 220V 230V 240V 220V 230V / / / / / 50 50 50 60 60 Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz P Guard O = Without Guard G34 Globe P = G251 Globe with P22 Alum. Guard S = G251 Globe with P22 SS304 Guard O Body O = Small Body O O = Standard
NVMV S = HSE/HST Luminaire (HPS) IEC Gear M = HIE (MH)
Example of Completed Part Number - Large Body: NVMVS1MC255PLO NVMV Series S Lamp 1M Entry 1M = M20 2M = M25 3M = M32 1N = 1/ 2" NPT 2N = 3/ 4" NPT 3N = 1" NPT 5N = 1 1/ 2" NPT (For Stanchion) C Mounting* C = Ceiling W = Wall J = Stanchion 25 5 Wattage Voltage 25 = 250W 40 = 400W 3 5 6 4 7 = = = = = 220V 230V 240V 220V 230V / / / / / 50 50 50 60 60 Hz Hz Hz Hz Hz P Guard L Body O O = Standard
NVMV S = HSE/HST Luminaire (HPS) IEC Gear M = HIE (MH)
O = Without L = Large Body Guard G303 Globe P = G303 Globe with P33 SS Guard
3L
Description

Suffix Instant restrike (100W HPS and 150W HPS) (alternative solution to dual arc lamps) /IR Dome reflector - small housing /RD70 30 angle reflector - small housing /RA70 Dome reflector - large housing /RD739 30 angle reflector - large housing /RA739 Champ Quick-Clip /S890
*For pendant mounting, order ceiling mount with pendant bracket accessory - please consult factory.
936
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
NVMV Series
Temperature Performance:
3L
Refer to temperature performance data tables (below) to select luminaire that is suitable for your area specifications. These numbers are the maximum surface temperature of the luminaire. Note: T3 - maximum surface temperature 200C T4 - maximum surface temperature 135C For example: atmospheres that contain gasoline and have an ignition temperature of 536C, any fixture with the T-rating in this table can be used. Atmospheres that contain diethyl ether and have an ignition temperature of 160C require a luminaire with T4 ratings.
NVMV 70W - 250W (Small Housing) GAS (Class I, Zone 2) Ex nR II T...Gc Catalog Number Example Watts Lamp Type Rated Lamp With Ambient Holder G34 C Globe Only 40 50 55 40 50 55 40 50 55 40 50 55 40 50 55 40 50 55 40 50 55 40 50 55 T4 T4 T4 T4 T4 T4 T4 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T4 T4 T4 T4 T4 T4 T4 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 With G251 Globe Only T4 T4 T4 T4 T4 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T4 T4 T4 T4 T4 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T2 T2 DUST (Class II, Zone 21) Ex t IIIC T...Db With G251 Globe Only 109C 119C 124C 117C 127C 132C 140C 150C 155C 174C 184C 189C 109C 119C 124C 117C 127C 132C 140C 150C 155C 194C 204C 209C With With G34 G251 Globe Globe and and Reflector Reflector 104C 109C 114C 119C 119C 124C 104C 128C 114C 138C 119C 143C 140C 140C 150C 150C 155C 155C 189C 218C 199C 228C 204C 233C 104C 109C 114C 119C 119C 124C 104C 128C 114C 138C 119C 143C 140C 140C 150C 150C 155C 155C 189C 218C 199C 228C 204C 233C
NVMVS1MC075*00 NVMVS1MC105*00 NVMVS1MC155*00 NVMVS1MC255*00
70W 100W HSE/HST (HPS) 150W 250W
E27 E40 E40 E40
NVMVM1MC075*00 NVMVM1MC105*00 NVMVM1MC155*00 NVMVM1MC255*00
70W 100W HIE (MH) 150W 250W
E27 E27 E27 E40
With With With G34 G251 G34 Globe Globe Globe and and Only Reflector Reflector T4 T4 99C T4 T4 109C T4 T4 114C T4 T4 99C T4 T3 109C T4 T3 114C T3 T3 122C T3 T3 132C T3 T3 137C T3 T2 168C T2 T2 178C T2 T2 183C T4 T4 99C T4 T4 109C T4 T4 114C T4 T4 99C T4 T3 109C T4 T3 114C T3 T3 122C T3 T3 132C T3 T3 137C T3 T2 168C T2 T2 178C T2 T2 183C
3L
Cat. No. - shown with M20 Ceiling Mount, /230V, 50 Hz.
NVMV 250W - 400W (Large Housing) GAS (Class I, Zone 2) Ex nR II T...Gc With G303 With G303 Globe Only Globe and Reflector T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T2 T2 DUST (Class II, Zone 21) Ex t IIIC T...Db With G303 With G303 Globe Only Globe and Reflector 137C 147C 152C 159C 169C 174C 137C 147C 152C 159C 169C 174C 137C 147C 152C 175C 185C 190C 137C 147C 152C 193C 203C 208C
Catalog Number Example
Watts
Lamp Type
Rated Ambient C 40 50 55 40 50 55 40 50 55 40 50 55
Lamp Holder
NVMVS1MC255*L0
250W HSE/HST (HPS)
E40 E40
NVMVS1MC405*L0
400W
NVMVM1MC255*L0
250W HIE (MH)
E40 E40
NVMVM1MC405*L0
400W
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
937
3L
NVMV Series
Dimensions:
3L
938
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
NVMV Series
Photometry - Large Housing:
Photometric Data
3L
3L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
939
3L
NVMV Series
Photometric Data
Photometry - Large Housing:
3L
940
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
NVMV Series
Photometry - Small Housing:
Photometric Data
3L
3L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
941
3L
NVMV Series
Photometric Data
Photometry - Small Housing:
3L
942
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

VMV, LMV, DMV, VMV High Wattage & N2MV Series
Globes
Accessories
3L
Reflectors
Dome Krydon material G54 Lamp Watts 35150 50175 50250 200400 250 50175 Luminaire Series LMVS, LMVM VMVM, VMVS DMVM, DMVS VMVS VMVM N2MVM, N2MVS G24 Type Heat/impact Heat/impact Heat/impact Heat/impact Heat/impact Heat/impact resistant resistant resistant resistant resistant resistant G303 Lamp Watts Cat. # G54 G24 G303 G303 G303 G303 35150 50175 50250 200400 250 50175 Luminaire Series LMVS, LMVM VMVM, VMVS DMVM, DMVS VMVS VMVM N2MV, N2MVF(B)
30 Angle Krydon material Dome Cat. # RD636 RD70 RD739 RD739 RD739 RD739 Angle Cat. # RA636 RA70 RA739 RA739 RA739 RA740
Reflector / Lens Guards
Etched Alzak aluminum reflector/tempered glass lens Lamp Watts P50 use with G54 globe P21 use with G24 globe P33 use with G303 globe 200400 70250 Luminaire Series VMVM, VMVS DMVS, DMVM Type Reflector/Lens Reflector/Lens Cat. # GRD4 GRD4
Globes Teflon Coated

Teflon coated for increased shatter protection
Lamp Watts 50175 50175 Luminaire Series VMVM, VMVS DMVM, DMVS Cat. # G24 S808 G303 S808
3L
Alzak is a registered trademark of Alcoa. Teflon is a registered trademark of E.I. DuPont Co.
P23 use with refractors Lamp Watts 35150 50175 50250 200400 250 Refractors 50175
Luminaire Series LMVS, LMVM VMVM, VMVS DMVM, DMVS VMVS VMVM All N2MVM, N2MVS
Type Copper-free aluminum Copper-free aluminum Stainless steel Stainless steel Stainless steel Stainless steel Stainless steel
Cat. # P50 P21 P33 P33 P33 P23 P33
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
943
3L

VMV, LMV, DMV, VMV High Wattage & N2MV Series
Accessories
Refractors
Safety Lighting Options

Description Suffix Quartz Auxiliary Lamp QTZ The quartz auxiliary lamp comes to full brightness instantly and remains lit until the H.I.D. lamp attains 6070% of full illumination. Quartz auxiliary lamps can be used with all DMV, VMV and VMV High Wattage series Champ luminaires. Use for non-hazardous applications ONLY. VMV luminaires (50175W) ordered with this option must use large glass refractor optics, not compact refractors.
R2, R5, PR2, PR3, PR5 Lamp Watts 50175 Luminaire Series VMVM, VMVS VMVM, VMVS DMVS, DMVM N2MV I.E.S. Type II III V II III V II III V
GR302, GR303, GR305 Glass Cat. # R2 R3 R5 GR302 GR305 GR305 GR302 GR303 GR305 PGR302 PGR303 PGR305 Plastic (100W max. non-hazardous) Cat. # PR2 PR3 PR5
100W single ended lamp Q100CL/DC, Q100DC or 100Q/CL/DC NOT furnished Instant Restrike IR Factory installed instant restrike device will restart a hot High Pressure Sodium lamp after a momentary power interruption, without the typical delay for cooling. For use in 50150W "LX" HPS luminaires. BG Ballast-Gard Ballast-Gard starter cut-out switch prevents starter pulsing after a time delay of approximately two minutes if the lamp fails to start. For use in 50400 watt HPS luminaires only.
200400
50250 50175
I.E.S. Distribution Curves
3L
Type I
Type II
Type III
Type V
Compact Refractors
Lamp Watts 50175
Luminaire Series VMVM, VMVS
I.E.S. Type I III V
Glass Cat. # G241 G243 G245 P241
Optional stainless steel wire guard
944
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Photocells
V2PC, D2S and EV2IH Series
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Maintains Cl. I, Div. 2 Suitability of Cooper Crouse-Hinds Champ Series Luminaires
3L
The only UL recognized photocells for Class I, Division 2 areas. Eliminates the need for an explosionproof box! Cooper Crouse-Hinds factory-sealed, field installed photocells offer reliable, dusk-to-dawn lighting control in Class I, Division 2 locations. These photocells are ideal for walkways, security lighting, and any other outdoor lighting application that utilizes Champ H.I.D. lighting luminaires.
Applications:
Cooper Crouse-Hinds photocells are designed: To provide control for automatic dusk-to-dawn lighting. For safety by turning on outdoor luminaires in critical passageways at night. To save energy by operating luminaires only when necessary. For walkways, parking areas, outdoor process areas, security lighting, or any outdoor lighting application in Class I, Division 2 locations and corrosive environments. For use with LMV, DMV, VMV, VMV High Wattage, N2MV and FMV Series Champ lighting luminaires (V2PC Series). For use on 35400 watt H.I.D., incandescent, or fluorescent lighting luminaires. For remote mounting in FS boxes (D2S Series). For mounting in EIH enclosures for Class I, Division 1 applications (EV2IH Series).

V2PC Series and D2S Series NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL Standard: 844 Hazardous (Classified) Locations CSA: C22.2 No. 55 EV2IH Series NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA: 3, 4, 7BCD, 9EFG UL Standard: 844 Hazardous (Classified) Locations CSA: C22.2 No. 30, 55
Features:
Field-installable. Solid-state design for performance and dependability. Factory sealed components. Explosionproof enclosure not required for Class I, Division 2 locations. Luminaires turn on at 3 footcandles, off at 8 footcandles insuring that the luminaires are operating only when needed. Built-in 10 second time delay to eliminate nuisance tripping. Eight-year operating life. Furnished with 6" stranded 600 volt color coded wire leads. Constructed from corrosion-resistant thermoplastic polyester. Available on a DS cover for use with any FS/FD box (D2S Series). Available in an EIH enclosure for use in Class I, Division 1, Groups B*, C, and D locations (EV2IH Series). No seals required.
*For Group B applications, seal within 11/2" of enclosure in accordance with Section 501-5 of the National Electric Code.
3L

120, 208, 220, 240, 277 VAC 50 / 60 Hz 35400 watt H.I.D., incandescent, or fluorescent V2PC20 3.3A max. current rating V2PC22 1.8A max. current rating V2PC27 1.4A max. current rating
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
945
3L
Photocells
Photocell for field installation in lighting fixtures*
Cat. # V2PC20 V2PC22 V2PC27 Voltage Range 120V, 50/60Hz 208240V, 50/60Hz 277V, 50/60Hz Current Rating 3.3A 1.8A 1.4A
Photocell in DS cover for use with FS/FD box

Cat. # D2S20 D2S208 277 Voltage Range 120V, 50/60Hz 208V-277V
Photocell in EIH enclosure for use in Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, and D; Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, and G; and Class III locations
Cat. # EV2IH20 EV2IH208 277 Voltage Range 120V, 50/60Hz 208-277V 50/60Hz
Replacement Photocell for D2S Cover or EIH Enclosure *

Cat. # V2PCT20 V2PCT208 277 Voltage Range 120V, 50/60Hz 208V-277V 50/60Hz Current Rating 8.33A 4.81A - 3.61A depending on voltage
3L
* Must be factory installed in Canada. When mounting in EIH enclosures for Class I, Division 1 applications (EV21H Series) seals are not required for Groups C & D.
Options:
To order luminaire with photocell factory installed: 1. Specify luminaire dedicated supply voltage (not MT, DT, or TT) 2. Add photocell Cat. No. to fixture Cat. No. as follows: V2PC20 V2PC22 V2PC27 Example: VMVSJ070GP/120-V2PC20 is a 120V 60Hz luminaire with a factory installed photocell. Note: Only the V2PC is available as a factory installed photocell.
946
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Photocells
Dimensions:
In Inches:
V2PC
3L
EV2IH
V2PCT
D2S
Cat. # EV2IH
a 5.00
b 4.25
c 2.60
d 4.54
e 5.25
3L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
947
3L
948
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
High Intensity Discharge (H.I.D.) Luminaires Hazardous

Description
Application/Selection Class I Hazardous Area Lighting Integrally Ballasted Luminaires
EVLS HazardGard Series EVLP Lo-Pro HazardGard Series EVM HazardGard Series HPS, Pulse Start MH, MH, MV
4L
Page No.
see page 950
see pages 951966 see page 967 see page 978
Class II Hazardous Area Lighting Integrally Ballasted Luminaires

EVLP Lo-Pro HazardGard Series EVM HazardGard Series HPS, Pulse Start MH, MH, MV
4L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
949
4L
High Intensity Discharge (H.I.D.) Luminaires

Hazardous Application and Selection Quick Selector Chart
Applications:
Luminaires contained in this section are for use: In indoor or outdoor hazardous locations As general area or spot lighting applications Where longer lamp life provides desirable maintenance cost savings and return on investment through use of fewer luminaires, circuits and ancillary apparatus Where relamping and maintenance difficulties require longer lamp life

Environmental: Make sure luminaire meets NEC/CEC requirements for area in which it will be used Lighting levels required: Can luminaire accept lamp of sufficient size to yield desired light level?
Table 500.8(C) Identification Numbers.

Maximum Temperature Deg. C Deg. F 450 842 300 572 280 536 260 500 230 446 215 419 200 392 180 356 165 329 160 320 135 275 120 248 100 212 85 185 Temp. Class (T Code) T1 T2 T2A T2B T2C T2D T3 T3A T3B T3C T4 T4A T5 T6

Electrical Characteristics Series EVLS HazardGard NEC Compliance Cl. I, Groups B (with suffix GB), C, D Cl. II Cl. III Watts HPS: 50, 70, 100, 150 Metal Halide: 70, 100, 175 480V/60Hz Pulse Start Metal Halide: 150, 175 Tri-tap: 120, 277, 347V/60Hz 220V/60Hz 220/240V /50Hz EVM HazardGard Cl. I, Groups B, C, D 50, 70, 100, 150, 175, 200, 250, 320, 400 (Mogul base) 50, 70, 100, 150, 175 (Mogul base) 70, 100, 150, 175 (Mogul base) 70, 100, 150, 175 (Medium base) 70, 100, 150, 175, 200, 250 (Mogul base) 70, 100 (Medium base) 70, 100, 150, 175 (Mogul base) 120, 208, 240, 277, 347, 480, 600, MT 120, 208, 240, 277, 347, 480, 600, MT 120, 208, 240, 277, 347, 480, 600, MT 120, 208, 240, 277, 347, 480, MT, TT High power factor, constant wattage, reactor or autotransformer, integral High power factor, constant wattage integral High power factor, constant wattage, reactor or autotransformer, integral Volts Multi-tap: 120, 208, 240, 277V/60Hz Ballast
4L
Cl. II, Groups E, F, G Champ Series (see Section 3L) EVLP HazardGard Cl. II, Groups E, F, G
Cl. I, Groups B, C, D
Cl. II, Groups E, F, G Cl. III
120, 208, 240, 277, 347, 480, MT, TT
950
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EVLS HazardGard
Compact & Rugged, Class I, Zone 1, Div. 1 Explosionproof Luminaire
Introducing a compact, affordable, explosionproof luminaire that has the best overall temperature performance ratings in its class! Cooper Crouse-Hinds EVLS HazardGard is perfect as a general area lighting workhorse where space constraints exist. EVLS HazardGard is easy to install, 175 watts and less, has select options that are just right for your budget AND its Class I, Division 1, Group B with GB option!
Cl. I, Div. 1, Group B (with suffix GB), C, D Cl. I, Zone 1, Group IIB + H2 (with suffix GB) Cl. II, Cl. III & Simultaneous Presence Standard Materials:
Bodies, mounting modules and cast guards copper-free aluminum Wire guard stainless steel Globe heat- and impact-resistant glass Gaskets silicone and neoprene
UL and cUL Listed Wet locations (UL1598) Marine locations (UL1598A) Type 4X, IP66
4L
Standard Finishes:
Epoxy powder coat paint
Applications:
Cooper Crouse-Hinds EVLS HazardGard Lighting Fixures are used for general lighting and task lighting in: Areas where flammable or explosive vapors or gases are present Confined spaces or heavy process industry facilities Petroleum refineries; chemical, petrochemical and pharmaceutical plants; oil terminals; gas plants Waste treatment facilities Drilling platforms and other coastal and offshore hazardous areas
Ratings (Electrical Size):

Sources/Wattages: HID Medium Base (initial offering) HPS: 50, 70, 100, 150 watt Metal Halide: 70, 100, 175 watt Pulse Start Metal Halide: 150, 175 watt Voltages: Multi-tap (120, 208, 240, 277V/60 Hz) 480V/60 Hz Tri-tap (120, 277, 347V/60 Hz) 220V/60 Hz 220/240V (or 230V)/50 Hz Transformer Types: HX-HPF Standard CWA Standard on 175W CWA Constant Wattage Autotransformer CWI Constant Wattage Insulation Transformer Available for HPS and MH, for most voltages and wattages (Additional voltages available on request.) Conduit Entries: 3/4" and 1" NPT pendant, ceiling and wall mount 11/2" NPT stanchion
Features:
Compact and rugged - a Division 1 luminaire that fits in tight spaces Smooth turning two start Acme threads for mounting modules and globe attachments save time and eliminate installation damage Quick-connect design facilitates easy installation and saves money - install and wire the mounting module, and then screw in luminaire to make the electrical connection Best overall T-rating in the industry for a medium-base HID lamp - use in elevated ambient and illuminate the most volatile areas of your facility - optimal safety in your high-risk areas Factory-sealed - wired and sealed with no external sealing fittings required in Groups B, C, and D An adapter module is available for direct connection to existing HazardGard modules such as the EV22 ceiling mount
Two Start Acme Threads
4L
Options:
Description Instant Restrike (HPS) Ballast-Gard (HPS) Group B Suitability Suffix IR BG GB
Accessories:
Description Dome Reflector Angle Reflector Guard Suffix RD725 RA725 EV502 or P515
Quick Connect Design

UL (844) and cUL Listed (CSA C22.2 No. 137) for: Class I, Division 1, Groups B (with suffix GB), C, D Class I, Zone 1, Group IIB + H2 (with suffix GB) Class II, Class III & Simultaneous Presence Wet locations (UL1598), Marine locations (UL1598A), Type 4X, IP66
Adapter Module Available
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
951
4L EVLS HazardGard
Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups B (with suffix GB), C, D Cl. I, Zone 1, Group IIB + H2 (with suffix GB) Compact & Rugged, Class I, Zone 1, Cl. II, Cl. III & Simultaneous Presence
UL and cUL Listed Wet locations (UL1598), Marine locations (UL1598A) Type 4X, IP66
Div. 1 Explosionproof Luminaire

Mounting Modules:
Type Adapter Pendant Existing For EVI, EVLP, EVM (must use EVSA adapter) Conduit Catalog Number " 1" EVSA EVMP2 EVMP3 New Mounting Modules Conduit " 1" 25mm 32mm " 1" 25mm 32mm " 1" 25mm 32mm 1" " 25mm For EVLS Only Catalog Number EVSP2 EVSP3 EVSP25 EVSP32 EVSC2 EVSC3 EVSC25 EVSC32 EVSW2 EVSW3 EVSW25 EVSW32 EVSJ5 EVSB2 EVSB25
Ceiling & Wall Box
" 1"
EV22 EV33
Wall Bracket Arm
Use EV22 or EV33 box with
EV87
Stanchion Bulkhead
1" 1"
EVMJ4 EVJ2
Family Tree:
Existing Mounting Modules used on EVI, EVLP, EVM (must use EVSA adapter)
EVMP2 EVMP3 EVMJ4
EV22 EV33
EVJ2 EV22 EV33 + EV87
EVSA ADAPTER
New Mounting Modules for EVLS
EVSJ5 EVSC2 EVSC3 EVSC25 EVSC32
4L
EVSB2 EVSB25 EVSW2 EVSW3 EVSW25 EVSW32
EVSP2 EVSP3 EVSP25 EVSP32
EVLS (For example: EVLS9170)
RA725
RD725
EV502
P515
952
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EVLS HazardGard
Ordering Reference Sheet:
EVLS
HazardGard Low-Profile Luminaire Class I, Div. 1/Class I, Zone 1 Class II, Groups F & G
Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups B (with suffix GB), C, D Cl. I, Zone 1, Group IIB + H2 (with suffix GB) Cl. II, Cl. III & Simultaneous Presence
UL and cUL Listed 4L Wet locations (UL1598), Marine locations (UL1598A) Type 4X, IP66
10
/MT
-IR
A = Pendant Mounting Type BX = Wall CX = Ceiling BH = Bulkhead J = Stanchion M = Mounting Module Adapter 4 = High-Press. Sodium 9 = Metal Halide Lamp Type
Conduit Entry (specify with mtg. modules) 2 = 3/4" NPT (Pendant, Ceiling, Bulkhead & Wall mounts only) 3 = 1" NPT (Pendant, Ceiling & Wall mounts only) 5 = 1-1/2" NPT (Stanchion only) 25 = 25 mm (Pendant, Ceiling, Bulkhead & Wall mounts only) 32 = 32 mm (Pendant, Ceiling & Wall mounts only) Note: Omit for mounting module adapter 05 = 50W HPS 07 = 70W HPS, MH 10 = 100W HPS, MH 15 = 150 HPS, MH Pulse Start 17 = 175W MH, MH Pulse Start 0 = globe only, no guard 1 = stainless steel wire guard 2 = cast aluminum guard Lamp Wattage by lamp type
Guard (optional) Voltage and Frequency

HPS MH 100 150 70 100 150 PS 175 175 PS
50 DT MT TT 120 208 220 220 50 240 240 50 277 347 480
70
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x Options x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
4L
BG = Ballast Guard (lamp type S only) CWI = SCE Ballast GB = Group B suitability IR = Instant Restrike (lamp type S only) S828 = Pulse Start (175W & 150W MH only)
Note: BG and IR options cannot be installed together.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
953
4L EVLS HazardGard

Watts Ambient Temp C High Pressure Sodium 50W 40 55 65 40 55 65 40 55 65 40 55 40 55 65 40 55 65 40 40 40
Class I, Div. 1 & Zone 1 T5 T4A T4A T5 T4A T4A T4A T4 T4 T4A T4 T5 T4A T4A T4A T4A T4 T3C T3C T3C
Class II (Dust) and Class III T5 T5 T3C T3C T4A T4
Supply Wire Temp C 90 90 105 90 90 105 90 90 105 90 90 90 90 105 90 90 105 90 90 90
70W
100W
150W
Metal Halide (including Pulse Start [PS] as indicated) 70W
100W 150 PS 175W 175 PS

Luminaire Series High Pressure Sodium EVLS4 Lamp Watts 50W 70W 100W 150W 70W 100W 150 PS 175W 175 PS Weight with Globe & Wire Guard 18.5 21.5 22.5 24 20 20.5 23 23 23 1 2 3.5 3 2.5 5.5 2 1.5 2
4L
Metal Halide EVLS9 Add for cast guard: Add for mounting modules: Pendant Ceiling Stanchion Bulkhead Wall Adapter Add for reflectors: Dome Angle 954
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EVLS HazardGard
Ordering Information High Pressure Sodium:
Wattage
Hub Size /4" 1" 11/2" 25 mm 32 mm 3 /4" 1" 11/2" 25 mm 32 mm 3 /4" 1" 11/2" 25 mm 32 mm 3 /4" 1" 11/2" 25 mm 32 mm
3
No Guard EVLSA42050 EVLSA43050 EVLSA425050 EVLSA432050 EVLSA42070 EVLSA43070 EVLSA425070 EVLSA432070 EVLSA42100 EVLSA43100 EVLSA425100 EVLSA432100 EVLSA42150 EVLSA43150 EVLSA425150 EVLSA432150
PENDANT Wire Guard EVLSA42051 EVLSA43051 EVLSA425051 EVLSA432051 EVLSA42071 EVLSA43071 EVLSA425071 EVLSA432071 EVLSA42101 EVLSA43101 EVLSA425101 EVLSA432101 EVLSA42151 EVLSA43151 EVLSA425151 EVLSA432151
Cast Guard EVLSA42052 EVLSA43052 EVLSA425052 EVLSA432052 EVLSA42072 EVLSA43072 EVLSA425072 EVLSA432072 EVLSA42102 EVLSA43102 EVLSA425102 EVLSA432102 EVLSA42152 EVLSA43152 EVLSA425152 EVLSA432152
No Guard EVLSBH42050 EVLSBH425050 EVLSBH42070 EVLSBH425070 EVLSBH42100 EVLSBH425100 EVLSBH42150 EVLSBH425150
BULKHEAD Wire Guard EVLSBH42051 EVLSBH425051 EVLSBH42071 EVLSBH425071 EVLSBH42101 EVLSBH425101 EVLSBH42151 EVLSBH425151
Cast Guard EVLSBH42052 EVLSBH425052 EVLSBH42072 EVLSBH425072 EVLSBH42102 EVLSBH425102 EVLSBH42152 EVLSBH425152
50W
70W
100W
150W
Complete Standard Voltage Ballasts catalog number as follows: NEC/UL CEC/CSA (cUL) Voltage Suffix Multi-tap 120V 480V /MT /120 /480 Tri-Tap 120V 208V CWI /TT /120 /208CWI 240V CWI /240CWI 480V CWI /480CWI 600V CWI
Export
4L
220V 60 Hz
220V 50 Hz /220 50
230V 50 Hz /230 50
240V 50 Hz /240 50
/600CWI /220
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
955
4L EVLS HazardGard
Ordering Information High Pressure Sodium (Cont'd):
Wattage
Hub Size No Guard /4" 1" 11/2" 25 mm 32 mm 3 /4" 1" 11/2" 25 mm 32 mm 3 /4" 1" 11/2" 25 mm 32 mm 3 /4" 1" 11/2" 25 mm 32 mm
3
WALL Wire Guard EVLSBX42051 EVLSBX43051 EVLSBX425051 EVLSBX432051 EVLSBX42071 EVLSBX43071 EVLSBX425071 EVLSBX432071 EVLSBX42101 EVLSBX43101 EVLSBX425101 EVLSBX432101 EVLSBX42151 EVLSBX43151 EVLSBX425151 EVLSBX432151
Cast Guard EVLSBX42052 EVLSBX43052 EVLSBX425052 EVLSBX432052 EVLSBX42072 EVLSBX43072 EVLSBX425072 EVLSBX432072 EVLSBX42102 EVLSBX43102 EVLSBX425102 EVLSBX432102 EVLSBX42152 EVLSBX43152 EVLSBX425152 EVLSBX432152
No Guard EVLSCX42050 EVLSCX43050 EVLSCX425050 EVLSCX432050 EVLSCX42070 EVLSCX43070 EVLSCX425070 EVLSCX432070 EVLSCX42100 EVLSCX43100 EVLSCX425100 EVLSCX432100 EVLSCX42150 EVLSCX43150 EVLSCX425150 EVLSCX432150
CEILING Wire Guard EVLSCX42051 EVLSCX43051 EVLSCX425051 EVLSCX432051 EVLSCX42071 EVLSCX43071 EVLSCX425071 EVLSCX432071 EVLSCX42101 EVLSCX43101 EVLSCX425101 EVLSCX432101 EVLSCX42151 EVLSCX43151 EVLSCX425151 EVLSCX432151
Cast Guard EVLSCX42052 EVLSCX43052 EVLSCX425052 EVLSCX432052 EVLSCX42072 EVLSCX43072 EVLSCX425072 EVLSCX432072 EVLSCX42102 EVLSCX43102 EVLSCX425102 EVLSCX432102 EVLSCX42152 EVLSCX43152 EVLSCX425152 EVLSCX432152
EVLSBX42050 EVLSBX43050 EVLSBX425050 EVLSBX432050 EVLSBX42070 EVLSBX43070 EVLSBX425070 EVLSBX432070 EVLSBX42100 EVLSBX43100 EVLSBX425100 EVLSBX432100 EVLSBX42150 EVLSBX43150 EVLSBX425150 EVLSBX432150
50W
70W
100W
150W
4L
Complete Standard Voltage Ballasts catalog number as follows: NEC/UL CEC/CSA (cUL) 208V Voltage Multi-tap 120V 480V Tri-Tap 120V CWI Suffix /MT /120 /480 /TT /120 /208CWI
240V CWI /240CWI
480V CWI /480CWI
600V CWI
Export 220V 220V 60 Hz 50 Hz /220 50
230V 50 Hz /230 50
240V 50 Hz /240 50
/600CWI /220
956
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EVLS HazardGard
Ordering Information High Pressure Sodium (Cont'd):
STANCHION
ADAPTER Luminaire less mounting module and guard EVLS4050 EVLS4070 EVLS4100 EVLS4100
Wattage Hub Size 50W 70W 100W 150W Adapter 11/2" Adapter 11/2" Adapter 11/2" Adapter 11/2"
No Guard EVLSJ45050 EVLSJ45070 EVLSJ45100 EVLSJ45150
Wire Guard EVLSJ45051 EVLSJ45071 EVLSJ45101 EVLSJ45151
Cast Guard EVLSJ45052
No Guard EVLSM4050 EVLSM4070
Wire Guard EVLSM4051 EVLSM4071 EVLSM4101 EVLSM4151
Cast Guard EVLSM4052 EVLSM4072 EVLSM4102 EVLSM4152
EVLSJ45072 EVLSM4100 EVLSJ45102 EVLSM4150 EVLSJ45152
Complete STANDARD VOLTAGE BALLASTS catalog number as NEC/UL CEC/CSA (cUL) follows: Voltage Suffix Multi-tap 120V 480V /MT /120 /480 Tri-Tap 120V 208V CWI /TT /120 /208CWI 240V CWI /240CWI 480V CWI /480CWI 600V CWI
Export 220V 60 Hz 220V 50 Hz /220 50 230V 50 Hz /230 50 240V 50 Hz /240 50
/600CWI /220
4L
Photometrics - EVLS High Pressure Sodium

Fixture with Globe and Domed Reflector (less guard) EVLSA42150RD725 Lamp: 150W/B17 High Pressure Sodium (HPS)
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
957
4L EVLS HazardGard
Photometrics - EVLS High Pressure Sodium:

Fixture with Globe and Guard EVLSA42151 Lamp: 150W/B17 High Pressure Sodium (HPS)
Photometrics - EVLS High Pressure Sodium:

Fixture with Globe and Angled Reflector (less guard) EVLSA42150RA725 Lamp: 150W/B17 High Pressure Sodium (HPS) 4L
958
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EVLS HazardGard
Ordering Information Pulse Start Metal Halide:
Wattage Hub Size 3/4" 1" 11/2" 25 mm 32 mm 3 /4" 1" 11/2" 25 mm 32 mm
No Guard
EVLSA92150-S828 EVLSA93150-S828 EVLSA925150-S828 EVLSA932150-S828 EVLSA92170-S828 EVLSA93170-S828
PENDANT Wire Guard

Cast Guard
No Guard
EVLSBH92150-S828
BULKHEAD Wire Guard

EVLSBH92151-S828
Cast Guard
EVLSBH92152-S828
150W
EVLSBH925150-S828 EVLSBH925151-S828 EVLSBH92170-S828 EVLSBH92171-S828
EVLSBH925152-S828 EVLSBH92172-S828
175W
EVLSBH925170-S828 EVLSBH925171-S828
EVLSBH925172-S828
Ordering Information Pulse Start Metal Halide:
4L
Wattage Hub Size 3 /4" 1" 11/2" 150W 25 mm 32 mm 3 /4" 1" 175W 11/2" 25 mm 32 mm
No Guard
EVLSBX92150-S828 EVLSBX93150-S828 EVLSBX925150-S828 EVLSBX932150-S828 EVLSBX92170-S828 EVLSBX93170-S828
WALL Wire Guard

Cast Guard
No Guard
EVLSCX92150-S828 EVLSCX93150-S828 EVLSCX925150-S828 EVLSCX932150-S828 EVLSCX92170-S828 EVLSCX93170-S828
CEILING Wire Guard
Cast Guard
EVLSCX92151-S828 EVLSCX92152-S828 EVLSCX93151-S828 EVLSCX93152-S828 EVLSCX925151-S828 EVLSCX932151-S828 EVLSCX92171-S828 EVLSCX93171-S828 EVLSCX925152-S828 EVLSCX932152-S828 EVLSCX92172-S828 EVLSCX93172-S828
EVLSBX925170-S828 EVLSBX925171-S828 EVLSBX925172-S828 EVLSCX925170-S828 EVLSCX925171-S828 EVLSCX925172-S828 EVLSBX932170-S828 EVLSBX932171-S828 EVLSBX932172-S828 EVLSCX932170-S828 EVLSCX932171-S828 EVLSCX932172-S828
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
959
4L EVLS HazardGard
Ordering Information Pulse Start Metal Halide (Cont'd):
STANCHION
ADAPTER Luminaire less mounting module and guard
Hub Wattage Size Adapter 3 /4" 1" 150W 11/2" 25 mm 32 mm Adapter 3 /4" 1" 175W 11/2" 25 mm 32 mm
No Guard
Wire Guard
Cast Guard
No Guard
Wire Guard
Cast Guard
EVLSM9150-S828 EVLSM9151-S828 EVLSM9152-S828 EVLS9150-S828
EVLSJ95150-S828 EVLSJ95151-S828 EVLSJ95152-S828
EVLSM9170-S828 EVLSM9171-S828 EVLSM9172-S828 EVLS9100-S828 EVLS9170-S828 EVLSJ95170-S828 EVLSJ95171-S828 EVLSJ95172-S828
4L
Complete catalog Standard Voltage Ballasts number as NEC/UL follows: Multi-tap 120V Voltage Suffix
/MT /120
480V /480
960
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EVLS HazardGard
Ordering Information Metal Halide:
PENDANT Wattage Hub Size 3 /4" 1" 11/2" 25 mm 32 mm 3 /4" 1" 11/2" 25 mm 32 mm 3 /4" 1" 11/2" 25 mm 32 mm No Guard EVLSA92070 EVLSA93070 EVLSA925070 EVLSA932070 EVLSA92100 EVLSA93100 EVLSA425100 EVLSA432100 EVLSA92170 EVLSA93170 EVLSA925170 EVLSA932170 Wire Guard EVLSA92071 EVLSA93071 EVLSA925071 EVLSA932071 EVLSA92101 EVLSA93101 EVLSA425101 EVLSA432101 EVLSA92171 EVLSA93171 EVLSA925171 EVLSA932171 Cast Guard EVLSA92072 EVLSA93072 EVLSA925072 EVLSA932072 EVLSA92102 EVLSA93102 EVLSA425102 EVLSA432102 EVLSA92172 EVLSA93172 EVLSA925172 EVLSA932172 No Guard EVLSBH92070 EVLSBH925070 EVLSBH92100 EVLSBH425100 EVLSBH92170 EVLSBH925170
BULKHEAD Wire Guard EVLSBH92071 EVLSBH925071 EVLSBH92101 EVLSBH425101 EVLSBH92171 EVLSBH925171 Cast Guard EVLSBH92072 EVLSBH925072 EVLSBH92102 EVLSBH425102 EVLSBH92172 EVLSBH925172
70W
100W
175W
Complete Standard Voltage Ballasts catalog number CEC/CSA (cUL) as follows: NEC/UL Voltage Suffix Multi-tap /MT 120V /120 480V /480 Tri-Tap /TT 120V /120 208V CWI /208CWI 240V CWI /240CWI 480V CWI /480CWI 600V CWI /600CWI
Export 220V 60 Hz /220 220V 50 Hz /220 50 240V 50 Hz
4L
/240 50
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
961
4L
EVLS HazardGard
Cl. I, Div. 1, Group B (with suffix GB), C, D Cl. I, Zone 1, Group IIB + H2 (with suffix GB) Cl. II, Cl. III & Simultaneous Presence
Ordering Information Metal Halide (Cont'd):
WALL Wattage Hub Size 3 /4" 1" 11/2" 25 mm 32 mm 3 /4" 1" 11/2" 25 mm 32 mm 3 /4" 1" 11/2" 25 mm 32 mm No Guard EVLSBX92070 EVLSBX93070 EVLSBX925070 EVLSBX932070 EVLSBX92100 EVLSBX93100 EVLSBX425100 EVLSBX432100 EVLSBX92170 EVLSBX93170 EVLSBX925170 EVLSBX932170 Wire Guard EVLSBX92071 EVLSBX93071 EVLSBX925071 EVLSBX932071 EVLSBX92101 EVLSBX93101 EVLSBX425101 EVLSBX432101 EVLSBX92171 EVLSBX93171 EVLSBX925171 EVLSBX932171 Cast Guard EVLSBX92072 EVLSBX93072 EVLSBX925072 EVLSBX932072 EVLSBX92102 EVLSBX93102 EVLSBX425102 EVLSBX432102 EVLSBX92172 EVLSBX93172 EVLSBX925172 EVLSBX932172 No Guard EVLSCX92070 EVLSCX93070 EVLSCX925070 EVLSCX932070 EVLSCX92100 EVLSCX93100 EVLSCX925100 EVLSCX932100 EVLSCX92170 EVLSCX93170 EVLSCX925170 EVLSCX932170
CEILING Wire Guard EVLSCX92071 EVLSCX93071 EVLSCX925071 EVLSCX932071 EVLSCX92101 EVLSCX93101 EVLSCX925101 EVLSCX932101 EVLSCX92171 EVLSCX93171 EVLSCX925171 EVLSCX932171 Cast Guard EVLSCX92072 EVLSCX93072 EVLSCX925072 EVLSCX932072 EVLSCX92102 EVLSCX93102 EVLSCX925102 EVLSCX932102 EVLSCX92172 EVLSCX93172 EVLSCX925172 EVLSCX932172
70W
100W
175W
Complete catalog number as follows: Voltage Suffix
Standard Voltage Ballasts NEC/UL 120V 480V Tri-Tap 120V 208V CWI /120 /480 /TT /120 /208CWI CEC/CSA (cUL) 240V CWI 480V CWI /240CWI /480CWI Export 220V 60 Hz 220V 50 Hz 240V 50 Hz /220 /220 50 /240 50
Multi-tap /MT
600V CWI /600CWI
4L
962
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EVLS HazardGard
4L
Ordering Information Metal Halide (Cont'd):
STANCHION Hub Size Adapter 11/2" Adapter 11/2" Adapter 3 /4" 11/2" No Guard Wire Guard Cast Guard EVLSJ95072
ADAPTER Luminaire less mounting module and guard EVLS9070 EVLS9100 EVLS9100 EVLS9170
Wattage 70W 100W 175W
No Guard Wire Guard EVLSM9070 EVLSM9071 EVLSM9100 EVLSM9101
Cast Guard EVLSM9072 EVLSM9102 EVLSM9172
EVLSJ95070 EVLSJ95071 EVLSJ95100 EVLSJ95101
EVLSJ95102 EVLSM9170 EVLSM9171
EVLSJ95170 EVLSJ95171
EVLSJ95172
Complete catalog number as follows: Voltage Suffix
Standard Voltage Ballasts NEC/UL Multi-tap /MT 120V 480V Tri-Tap /120 /480 /TT 120V /120 208V CWI /208CWI CEC/CSA (cUL) 240V CWI /240CWI 480V CWI /480CWI 600V CWI /600CWI 220V 60 Hz /220 220V 50 Hz Export 230V 50 Hz 240V 50 Hz
/220 50 /230 50 /240 50
EVLS Metal Halide:

Fixture with Globe and Domed Reflector (less guard) EVLSA92170RD725 Lamp: 150W/ED17 Metal Halide (MH) 4L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
963
4L
EVLS HazardGard
EVLS Metal Halide:

Fixture with Globe and Guard EVLSA92171 Lamp: 175W/ED17 Metal Halide (MH)
EVLS Metal Halide:

Fixture with Globe and Angled Reflector (less guard) EVLSA92170RA725 Lamp: 175W/ED17 Metal Halide (MH) 4L
964
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EVLS HazardGard
4L
Dimensions - Shown with new mounting modules:

10.97
3.16
16.36 16.97
16.47
15 17.85
.61
8.47 .61
CEILING MOUNT
BULKHEAD MOUNT
4.11
3.61
15.45 17.18
25 8.28 16.82
17.43
.61
4L
13.78
15.45
8.47 9.51
.61
STANCHION MOUNT
PENDANT MOUNT
16.78 17.39
8.47
.61
WALL MOUNT
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
965
4L
EVLS HazardGard
Dimensions - Shown with existing mounting modules plus EVSA Adapter:

11 15/16"
15 18 5/8" 19 3/16" 21 5/8"
CEILING MOUNT EV22, EV33 BULKHEAD MOUNT EVJ2
18 7/16" 20 1/16" 19 9/16" 25
19 1/16" 19 11/16"
4L
STANCHION MOUNT EVMJ4 9 1/2"
8 7/16" PENDANT MOUNT EVMP2, EVMP3
3 5/16"
19"
19 5/8"
WALL MOUNT BRACKET EV87
966
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EVLP Low Profile HazardGard (H.I.D.) Luminaires

Medium and Mogul Base
Applications:
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Low Profile HazardGard luminaires are used in: Areas where flammable or explosive vapors or gases are present Hazardous areas, both indoors and outdoors, where long life and low maintenance costs are desired Petroleum refineries, chemical, petrochemical and pharmaceutical plants, oil terminals, gas plants and other heavy process industry facilities Waste treatment facilities Drilling platforms and other coastal and offshore hazardous areas
Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups B (GB suffix), C, D Cl. I, Zone 1, Groups IIB + H2 (with suffix GB), IIB, IIA Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G; Class III
4L
Standard Materials:
Mounting modules, cover, ballast housing, globe holder copper-free aluminum Globe heat and impact resistant glass Exterior hardware stainless steel Reflectors (dome & angle) Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum Corro-free powdered epoxy Krydon white Stainless steel guard

Small, compact size is perfect where low mounting restrictions are a concern. Two start Acme threaded construction allows for easier assembly, installation and maintenance. Lightweight copper-free aluminum housing with powdered epoxy finish for superior corrosion resistance. All exterior hardware is corrosionresistant stainless steel. Four mounting arrangements: pendant, ceiling, wall bracket and stanchion suit any lighting layout. Wide range of light sources and wattages to meet specific lighting needs. Marine and NEMA 4X construction suitable for outdoor, hose down, marine and corrosive environments. Integral ballast for lowest installed cost. High power factor (90%+) ballasts allows more fixtures per circuit. Uses same mounting modules as the standard HazardGard for easy retrofitting when the Lo-Pro is the preferred choice. Internally fluted glass globe reduces glare and distributes light evenly ideal for adverse enviroments typical of industrial facilities. Krydon construction dome and angle reflectors wont rust, corrode, dent, chip or peel Now available in components luminaire body, mounting module, guard, reflectors allowing for easy stocking for Quick Ship requirements.
Ratings (Electrical/Size): Certifications and Compliances:

NEC and CEC: Class I, Division 1, Groups B (with suffix GB), C, D All Wattages Class I, Zone 1, Groups IIB + H2 (with suffix GB), IIB, IIA All Wattages Class II and Class III UL Standards: 844, Hazardous (Classified) Locations 1598 Luminaires 1598A Marine Locations CSA Standards C22.2 No. 137 Sources/Wattage: Medium Base 70150W HPS, 70175W MH Mogul Base 70150W HPS, 70250W MH Voltages: Medium & Mogul H.I.D. 120V 60Hz Multi-tap (120, 208, 240, 277V 60Hz) Tri-tap (120, 277, 347V 60Hz) 480V 60Hz Other voltages consult Cooper Crouse-Hinds Conduit Entries: 3/4", 1" NPT pendant, wall bracket, ceiling 11/4" NPT stanchion
Options:
Description Suffix Group B suitability ........................................................................................... GB Ballast-Gard (HPS only) ................................................................................. BG Instant restrike (Mogul Base only) ................................................................... IR 70150W LX HPS Cannot use with BG Option Fused ............................................................................................................... S658* Quartz auxiliary lighting (Mogul Base only) ............................................................................................ QTZ Cannot use with IR option Uses 100W single ended double contract lamp Quartz lamp not included Factory assembled with lamps ........................................................................ FA
*When ordering fuses for luminaires, option S658, you must specify the operating voltage. S658 cannot be ordered with /MT in the catalog number.
4L
Accessories:
Description Dome reflector Angle reflector Cat. # RD739 RA739
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
967
4L
EVLP Low Profile HazardGard

Medium Base
Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups B (GB suffix), C, D Cl. I, Zone 1, Groups IIB + H2 (with GB suffix), IIB, IIA Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G; Class III
Luminaire Body Less Mounting Module & Guard
Pendant Hub With Guard Watt Size (In.) Cat. #
Wall Bracket With Guard Cat. # EVLPBX142071 EVLPBX143071 EVLPBX142101 EVLPBX143101 EVLPBX142151 EVLPBX143151
Ceiling With Guard Cat. # EVLPCX142071 EVLPCX143071
Stanchion With Guard Cat. #
Cat. # EVLP14070

70W Pendant Mount
3 /4 1 11/4 3
EVLPA142071 EVLPA143071 EVLPA142101 EVLPA143101 EVLPA142151 EVLPA143151
EVLPJ144071 EVLPCX142101 EVLPCX143101 EVLPJ144101 EVLPCX142150 EVLPCX143151 EVLPJ144151 EVLPA192151 S828 EVLPBX192151 S828 EVLPCX192151 S828 EVLPA193151 S828 EVLPBX193151 S828 EVLPCX193151 S828 EVLPJ194151 S828 EVLPA192171 S828 EVLPBX192171 S828 EVLPCX192171 S828 EVLPA193171 S828 EVLPBX193171 S828 EVLPCX193171 S828 EVLPJ194171 S828 EVLP19175 S828 EVLP19150 S828 EVLP14151 EVLP14100
/4 100W 1 11/4 /4 150W 1 11/4

3
Pulse Start Metal Halide

/4 150W 1 11/4
3 3 /4 175W 1 11/4
Wall Bracket Mount
Metal Halide
70W /4 1 11/4
3 3
EVLPBX192071 EVLPBX193071 EVLPBX192101 EVLPBX193101 EVLPBX192171 EVLPBX193171
EVLPCX192071 EVLPCX193071 EVLPJ194071 EVLPCX192101 EVLPCX193101 EVLPJ194101 EVLPCX192171 EVLPCX193171 EVLPJ194171
EVLP19070
4L
/4 100W 1 11/4 /4 175W 1 11/4

3
EVLP19100
EVLP19175
Ceiling Mount
Complete Catalog Number as follows:

Standard Voltage Ballasts 60Hz
1. Voltage Suffix Multi Tap /MT NEC/UL 120V /120 480V /480 Tri Tap /TT CEC/CSA (cUL) 120V /120
Optional Voltage Ballasts 50 or 60Hz

*CEC/CSA (cUL) CWI Isolated Ballasts Voltage Suffix 208V CWI /208CWI 240V CWI /240CWI 600V CWI /600CWI 220V 60Hz /220 EXPORT 220V 50Hz /220 50 230V 50Hz /230 50 240V 50Hz /240 50
2. 150W HPS Luminaires only
Stanchion Mount
55V lamps add suffix "LX" 100V lamps add suffix "CE"
Ceiling and bracket mounts have 4 hubs: 3 are plugged.

*CWI Isolated Ballasts are only available for high pressure sodium and 175W metal halide (non pulse start) luminaires.
968
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Mogul Base
Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups B (GB suffix), C, D Cl. I, Zone 1, Groups IIB + H2 (with GB suffix), IIB, IIA Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G; Class III
4L
Pendant With Guard Hub Watt Size(In.) Cat. #
Wall Bracket With Guard Cat. # EVLPBX042071 EVLPBX043071 EVLPBX042101 EVLPBX043101 EVLPBX042151 EVLPBX043151
Ceiling With Guard Cat. # EVLPCX042071 EVLPCX043071
Stanchion With Guard Cat. #
Luminaire Body Less Mounting Module & Guard Cat. # EVLP04070

70W
3 /4 1 11/4 3
EVLPJ044071 EVLPCX042101 EVLPCX043101 EVLPJ044101 EVLPCX042151 EVLPCX043151 EVLPJ044151 EVLPA092151S828 EVLPBX092151S828 EVLPCX092151S828 EVLPA093151S828 EVLPBX093151S828 EVLPCX093151S828 EVLPJ094151S828 EVLPA092171S828 EVLPBX092171S828 EVLPCX092171S828 EVLPA093171S828 EVLPBX093171S828 EVLPCX093171S828 EVLPJ094171S828 EVLPA092201S828 EVLPBX092201S828 EVLPCX092201S828 EVLPA093201S828 EVLPBX093201S828 EVLPCX093201S828 EVLPJ094201S828 EVLPA092251S828 EVLPBX092251S828 EVLPCX092251S828 EVLPA093251S828 EVLPBX093251S828 EVLPCX093251S828 EVLPJ094251S828 EVLPA092071 EVLPA093071 EVLPA092101 EVLPA093101 EVLPA092171 EVLPA093171 EVLPA092251 EVLPA093251 EVLPBX092071 EVLPBX093071 EVLPBX092101 EVLPBX093101 EVLPBX092171 EVLPBX093171 EVLPBX092251 EVLPBX093251 EVLPCX092071 EVLPCX093071 EVLPJ094071 EVLPCX092101 EVLPCX093101 EVLPJ094101 EVLPCX092171 EVLPCX093171 EVLPJ094171 EVLPCX092251 EVLPCX093251 EVLPJ094251 EVLP09250 EVLP09100 EVLP09070 EVLP09250S828 EVLP09201S828 EVLP09170S828 EVLP09150S828 EVLP04150 EVLP04100
/4 100W 1 11/4 Pendant Mount /4 150W 1 11/4

3 3 /4 150W 1 11/4
/4 175W 1 11/4
3
/4 200W 1 11/4
3
Wall Bracket Mount
/4 250W 1 11/4
3
Metal Halide
70W
3 /4 1 11/4 3
/4 100W 1 11/4 /4 175W 1 11/4

3
4L
EVLP09170
Ceiling Mount
/4 250W 1 11/4
3

Standard Voltage Ballasts 60Hz 1. Voltage Multi Tap Suffix /MT NEC/UL 120V /120 480V /480 Tri Tap /TT CEC/CSA (cUL) 120V /120
Optional Voltage Ballasts 50 or 60Hz *CEC/CSA (cUL) CWI Isolated Ballasts Voltage Suffix 208V CWI /208CWI 240V CWI /240CWI 600V CWI /600CWI 220V 60Hz /220
Stanchion Mount
2. 150W HPS Luminaires only 55V lamps add suffix "LX" 100V lamps add suffix "CE" Example: EVLPA043151/MT-LX
Ceiling and wall bracket mounts have 4 hubs: 3 are plugged.

*CWI Isolated Ballasts are only available for high pressure sodium and 175W250W metal halide (non pulse start) luminaires.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
969
4L

Ordering by Components
EVLP Luminaires are available in components.

A complete luminaire consists of: Mounting Module Luminaire Body Guard, Dome Reflector or Angle Reflector
Mounting Modules:
Type Pendant Ceiling & Wall Box Wall Bracket Arm Stanchion Guards Medium Mogul Reflectors Dome Angle Pendant EVMP2 EVMP3 Ceiling EV22 EV33 Stanchion EVMJ4 Conduit /4" 1"
3 3 /4" 1"
Cat. # EVMP2 EVMP3 EV22 EV33 EV87 EVMJ4 EV511 EV512 RD739 RA739 Ceiling EV22 EV33 Wall Bracket EV87 & EV22 or EV33
Use EV22 or EV33 box with EV87 11/4"
4L
Luminaire Body
EVLP0 Series H.I.D. Mogul Lamp EVLP1 Series H.I.D. Medium Lamp
Guards EV511 EV512
Dome Reflector RD739
Angle Reflector RA739
970
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
4L
Medium Base Lamp Luminaires:

Class I, Group B (w/GB suffix) Groups C, D 40C 55C T5 T4A T4 T5 T3C T3C T3C T4A T4A T3C T4A T3C T3B T3B Class II, Groups E, F, G Class III Simultaneous Presence 40C T4A T4 T4
Maximum Ambient High Pressure Sodium
Watts 70W 100W 150W 70W 100W 150W 175W
65C T4A T4 T4A
Supply Wire C 90C 90C 90C 85C 90C 90C 90C
Metal Halide (including pulse start)
Mogul Base Lamp Luminaires:

Class I, Group B (w/GB suffix) Groups C, D Maximum Ambient High Pressure Sodium Watts 70W 100W 150W 70W 100W 150W 175W 200W 250W 40C T6 T5 T4A T6 T5 T4 T4 T3C T3C 55C T5 T4A T4 T5 T4A T3C T3C 65C T5 T5 T4A Class II, Groups E, F, G Class III Simultaneous Presence 40C T5 T4A T4 T5 T4A T3C T3C Supply Wire C 90C 90C 90C 85C 90C 90C 90C 90C 90C
Metal Halide (including pulse start)
4L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
971
4L

Dimensions
In Inches:
A Medium Base Mogul Base 13.92 15.69 B 12.73 14.69 C 16.50 18.25 D 16.71 18.46 E 20.59 22.34 F 19.36 21.30
4L
Weights
(lbs.):
Luminaire w/guard Source High Pressure Sodium Watts 70 100 150 Metal Halide 70 100 150 175 200 250 33.5 34.5 36 36 Medium Add Mounting Modules: Pendant Ceiling Bracket Stanchion Add For Reflectors: RA739 RD739 Deduct for Wire Guard 1 2 4.5 2.5 1 1 0.5 36 37 38.5 38.5 40.5 40.5 Mogul 1 2 4.5 2.5 1 1 0.5 Medium 34 36 36.5 Mogul 36.5 38.5 39
972
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Medium Base
Medium Base
EVLPA143151 Lamp: 150W/B17 High Pressure Sodium (HPS)
Photometric Data
4L
Medium Base
EVLPA143150RD Lamp: 150W/B17 High Pressure Sodium (HPS)
4L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
973
4L

Medium and Mogul Base
Photometric Data
Medium Base
EVLPA143150RA Lamp: 150W/B17 High Pressure Sodium (HPS)
Mogul Base
EVLPA043151 Lamp: 150W/E23-1/2 High Pressure Sodium (HPS)
4L
974
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Mogul Base
Mogul Base
Photometric Data
4L

EVLPA043150RD Lamp: 150W/E23-1/2 High Pressure Sodium (HPS)
Mogul Base
EVLPA043150RA Lamp: 150W/E23-1/2 High Pressure Sodium (HPS)
4L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
975
4L

Mogul Base
Photometric Data
Mogul Base
EVLPA093171 Lamp: 175W/ED28 Metal Halide (MH)
Mogul Base
EVLPA093170RD Lamp: 175W/ED28 Metal Halide (MH)
4L
976
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Mogul Base
Mogul Base
Photometric Data
4L

EVLPA093170RA Lamp: 175W/ED28 Metal Halide (MH)
4L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
977
4L
EVM HazardGard H.I.D. Luminaires

Mogul Base Factory Sealed (Groups C, D)
Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups B (GB suffix), C, D Cl. I, Zone 1, Groups IIB + H2 (with suffix GB), IIB IIA Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G; Class III
Paint Spray (100W max) Marine & Wet Locations 3, 3R, 4, 4X; IP66
Applications:
HazardGard luminaires are used in: Heavy process industries where flammable or explosive vapors, gases or combustible dusts are present Hazardous areas, both indoors and outdoors where long life and low maintenance costs are desired Petroleum refineries, chemical, petrochemical and other heavy process industry facilities Paint spray facilities Hazardous locations requiring elevated ambient capability
Options:
Description Suffix Fused to protect ballast and capacitor against abnormal line conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S658 Instant restrike enables a hot HPS lamp to immediately restrike after a momentary loss of arc due to voltage fluctuation or power outage. It has no effect on the warm-up period of a cold lamp (50-150W LX HPS only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IR* Quartz auxiliary lighting quartz lamp comes to full brightness instantly upon restoration of power to provide emergency illumination during the normal restrike period of the H.I.D. lamp (for use with ED28 lamp). (Quartz lamp not included; use 100 W single-ended lamp Q100DC, Q100CL/DC, or 100Q/CL/DC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QTZ Ballast-Gard to eliminate the normally continuous high voltage pulsing in the event of a cycling lamp, inoperative lamp, or no lamp in the socket extending the life of the ballast. (For use with 50-400W HPS lamps.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BG* Group B suitability luminaires suitable for use in Class I, Group B hazardous (classified) locations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GB HazardGard supplied with trunnion arm for floodlighting applications. For use on pendant mount luminaires only. See S812 Floodlight Section . . . . . . . . . . .
Features:
Luminaire is factory wired; power is fed through "wireless" connection block which serves as a mechanical seal between conduit and ballast compartments, eliminating the need for an external, field installed seal. The result is fast, easy installation. Dome and 30 angle reflectors made of Krydon material won't rust, corrode, dent, chip or peel (order separately see page 981). High bay reflectors of Alzak aluminum for high wattage applications. Internally fluted glass globes reduce glare and provide comfortable viewing light. Wide range of light sources and wattages to meet specific lighting needs 50 400W high pressure sodium (HPS); 70 400W metal halide (MH). High power factor (90%+) ballasts reduce power costs allow more luminaires per circuit. Four mounting arrangements to suit any lighting layout pendant, ceiling, wall bracket and stanchion. Paint spray booth suitability on 50 to 100 watt luminaires provides efficient, economical H.I.D. lighting for areas where paint residue may accumulate on luminaires. Elevated ambient capability permits reliable operation at high ambient temperature. Selected luminaires are suitable for ambient temperature up to 75C. Integral ballasts separate ballasts are not required. Lowest installed cost. Factory sealed, porcelain, mogul base socket.

NEC and CEC: Class I, Division 1, Groups B (with suffix GB), C, D Class I, Zone 1, Groups IIB + H2 (with suffix GB), IIB, IIA 100W max Paint Spray Suitability 175W max Class II, Class III UL Standards: 844 Hazardous (Classified) Locations 1598 Luminaires 1598A Marine Locations CSA Standards: C22.2 No. 137
4L
Standard Materials:
Mounting modules, cover, ballast housing, guard, globe ring copper-free aluminum Globe heat and impact resistant glass Exterior hardware stainless steel Lamp socket porcelain with stainless steel screw shell Reflectors dome and angle: Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester material; high bay: Alzak aluminum
Size Ranges:
3/4", 1" and 11/4" hubs (see ordering information see pages 979980)

120, 208, 240, 277, 347, 480, 600, multi-tap* 50 to 400 watts
*IR and BG options cannot be used together. When ordering fuses for luminaires, option S658, you must specify the operating voltage. S658 cannot be ordered with /MT in the catalog number. Can be used with BG option. CSA Certified are not available with multi-tap ballast or S658 fuse option. Alzak is a registered trademark of ALCOA.
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum epoxy powder coat Krydon high reflectance white Alzak natural (anodized)
978
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
50400W EVM HazardGard H.I.D. Luminaires

Mogul Base Factory Sealed (Groups C, D)
Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups B (GB suffix), C, D Cl. I, Zone 1, Groups IIB + H2 (with suffix GB), IIB, IIA Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G; Class III
Paint Spray (100W max) Marine & Wet Locations 3, 3R, 4, 4X; IP66
4L
Pendant Luminaires Hub Without Size Guard Watts (In.) Cat. # High Pressure Sodium 3 /4 EVMA42050 1 EVMA43050 50 11/4 70 /4 1 11/4
3
Wall Bracket Luminaires Without Guard Cat. # With Guard Cat. # EVMBX42051 EVMBX43051 EVMBX42071 EVMBX43071 EVMBX42101 EVMBX43101 EVMBX42151 EVMBX43151 EVMBX42201 EVMBX43201 EVMBX42251 EVMBX43251 EVMBX42401 EVMBX43401
Ceiling Luminaires Without Guard Cat. # With Guard Cat. #
Stanchion Luminaires (25) Without Guard Cat. # With Guard Cat. #
With Guard Cat. #
EVMA42051 EVMBX42050 EVMA43051 EVMBX43050
EVMCX42050 EVMCX42051 EVMCX43050 EVMCX43051 EVMJ44050 EVMJ44051 EVMCX42070 EVMCX42071 EVMCX43070 EVMCX43071 EVMJ44070 EVMJ44071 EVMCX42100 EVMCX42101 EVMCX43100 EVMCX43101 EVMJ44100 EVMJ44101 EVMCX42150 EVMCX42151 EVMCX43150 EVMCX43151 EVMJ44150 EVMJ44151 EVMCX42200 EVMCX42201 EVMCX43200 EVMCX43201 EVMJ44200 EVMJ44201 EVMCX42250 EVMCX42251 EVMCX43250 EVMCX43251 EVMJ44250 EVMJ44251 EVMCX42400 EVMCX42401 EVMCX43400 EVMCX43401 EVMJ44400 EVMJ44401
EVMA42070 EVMA42071 EVMBX42070 EVMA43070 EVMA43071 EVMBX43070 EVMA42100 EVMA42101 EVMBX42100 EVMA43100 EVMA43101 EVMBX43100 EVMA42150 EVMA42151 EVMBX42150 EVMA43150 EVMA43151 EVMBX43150 EVMA42200 EVMA42201 EVMBX42200 EVMA43200 EVMA43201 EVMBX43200 EVMA42250 EVMA42251 EVMBX42250 EVMA43250 EVMA43251 EVMBX43250 EVMA42400 EVMA42401 EVMBX42400 EVMA43400 EVMA43401 EVMBX43400
100
/4 1 11/4
3
150
/4 1 11/4
3
200
/4 1 11/4
3
250
/4 1 11/4
3
400
/4 1 11/4
3
4L
Complete the Catalog Number by Adding Voltage and Options Suffixes as Follows:
Standard Voltage Ballasts 60Hz NEC/UL 1. Voltage Suffix Multi Tap /MT 120V /120 480V /480 Tri Tap /TT CEC/CSA (cUL) 120V /120
Optional Voltage Ballasts 50 or 60Hz CEC/CSA (cUL) CWI Isolated Ballasts Voltage Suffix 2. 3. 208V CWI /208CWI 240V CWI /240CWI 480V CWI /480CWI 600V CWI /600CWI 220V 60Hz /220
150W HPS Luminaires, 55V Lamps is Standard, for 100V lamps - Add suffix "CE" Options - Add the Required Options Suffixes, see page 978, in alpha-numeric order.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
979
4L
70400W EVM HazardGard H.I.D Luminaires

Factory Sealed (Groups C, D)
Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups B (GB suffix), C, Cl. I, Zone 1, Groups IIB + H2 (with suffix GB), IIB, IIA Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G; Class III
Paint Spray (100W max) Marine & Wet Locations. 3, 3R, 4, 4X; IP66
Pendant Luminaires
Watts Hub Size (In.) Without Guard Cat. # With Guard Cat. #
Wall Bracket Luminaires

Without Guard Cat. # With Guard Cat. #
Ceiling Luminaires
Stanchion Luminaires (25)

Pulse Start Metal Halide 3 EVMA92150 S828 /4 EVMA93150 S828 1 150 11/4 175 /4 1 11/4
3
EVMA92151 S828 EVMA93151 S828
EVMBX92150 S828 EVMBX92151 S828 EVMBX93150 S828 EVMBX93151 S828
EVMCX92150 S828 EVMCX93150 S828
EVMCX92151 S828 EVMCX93151 S828 EVMJ94150 S828 EVMJ94151 S828
EVMA92170 S828 EVMA93170 S828
EVMA92171 S828 EVMA93171 S828
EVMCX92170 S828 EVMCX93170 S828
200
/4 1 11/4
3
EVMA92200 S828 EVMA93200 S828
EVMA92201 S828 EVMA93201 S828
EVMCX92200 S828 EVMCX93200 S828
250
/4 1 11/4
3
EVMA92250 S828 EVMA93250 S828
EVMA92251 S828 EVMA93251 S828
EVMCX92250 S828 EVMCX93250 S828
320
/4 1 11/4
3
EVMA92320 S828 EVMA93320 S828
EVMA92321 S828 EVMA93321 S828
EVMBX92320 S828 EVMBX93320 S828
EVMBX92321 S828 EVMCX92320 S828 EVMBX93321 S828 EVMCX93320 S828
400
/4 1 11/4
3
EVMA92400 S828 EVMA93400 S828
EVMA92401 S828 EVMA93401 S828
EVMCX92400 S828 EVMCX93400 S828
Metal Halide 3 /4 1 70 11/4
EVMA92070 EVMA93070
EVMA92071 EVMA93071
EVMBX92070 EVMBX93070
EVMCX92070 EVMCX93070
EVMCX92071 EVMCX93071 EVMJ94070 EVMJ94071
4L
100
/4 1 11/4
3
EVMA92100 EVMA93100
EVMA92101 EVMA93101
175
/4 1 11/4
3
EVMA92170 EVMA93170
EVMA92171 EVMA93171
EVMCX92170 EVMBX93170
250
/4 1 11/4
3
EVMA92250 EVMA93250
EVMA92251 EVMA93251
400
/4 1 11/4
3
EVMA92400 EVMA93400
EVMA92401 EVMA93401
Complete the Catalog Number by Adding Voltage and Options Suffixes as Follows:
Standard Voltage Ballasts 60Hz NEC/UL 1. Voltage Suffix Multi Tap /MT Dual-Tap /DT 120V /120 480V /480 CEC/CSA (cUL) Tri Tap /TT Dual-Tap /DT 120V /120
Optional Voltage Ballasts 50 or 60Hz *CEC/CSA (cUL) CWI Isolated Ballasts Voltage Suffix 2. 3. 208V CWI /208CWI 240V CWI /240CWI 600V CWI /600CWI EXPORT 220V 60Hz 220V 50Hz 230V 50Hz /220 /220 50 /230 50 240V 50Hz /240 50
150W HPS Luminaires, 55V Lamps is Standard, for 100V lamps - Add suffix "CE" Options - Add the Required Options Suffixes, see page 978, in alpha-numeric order.
*CWI Isolated Ballasts are only available for 175W400W metal halide (non pulse start) luminaires.
980
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Accessories and Temperature Performance Data
4L
Reflectors
Dome
30 Angle
High Bay Type Dome 30 Angle High Bay Cat. # RD739 RA739 EV3912

Maximum Ambient Class II (E, F, G) 65C T6 T5 T4A T4 T4 75C T5 T4A T4A T3 T3 40C T4 T4 T4 T3C T3C T3C T3C T3C Simultaneous Presence 40C T4 T4 T4 T3C T3C T3C T3C T3C Paint Spray Booth 40C T4A T4A T4A T4A T4A Supply Wire C 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 Class I Watts 40C 55C High Pressure Sodium 50 T6 T6 70 T6 T6 100 T5 T5 150 T4A T4A 200 T4A T4A 250 T4 T3C 400 T3C
4L
Metal Halide (Including Pulse Start) 70 T6 T6 T5 100 T5 T5 T4A 150 T4A T4 T4 175 T4A T4 T4 200 T4 T3C 250 T4 T3C 320 T3A 400 T3A
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
981
4L

Dimensions:

H.I.D. Source Lamp Watts Luminaire Only with Globe and Guard (lbs.) 40 40 44 45 44 46 46 55 39 39 42 43 51 Lbs. 41/4 21/4
50 70 100 High 150 (55V) Pressure 150 (100V) Sodium 200 250 400 Metal Halide 70 100 175 250 400
Type Lbs. Type Add for Mounting Modules: Pendant Bracket 1 Ceiling Stanchion 2
Add for Reflectors: RD739 13/4 RA739 2 EV3912 21/2 Deduct: 11/2 lbs. for luminaire without guard.
4L
Guard EV503 EV5140
100, 175, 250W MV 50, 70, 100, All luminaires with QTZ option 150W HPS 70, 100, 175, 250W and 200, 250, 400W HPS MH 400W MV & MH Dome Type EVMA EVMBX EVMCX EVMJ a 251/16 277/8 24 2211/16 b 26 2813/16 2415/16 241/8 f 275/16 301/8 261/4 251/4 g 281/4 311/16 273/16 261/8 c 237/8 2611/16 2213/16 253/8
All Reflectors
High Bay d 267/16 293/4 253/8 2711/16
30 Angle e 289/16 313/8 271/2 283/4
982
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Photometric Data
4L
Lamp: 150W/E-23-1/2 high pressure sodium (HPS) Total bare lamp lumens: 16,000
Luminaire With Globe and Without Guard

Note: Photometric data was developed using a 150 watt clear high pressure sodium lamp (16,000 lumens). For other clear lamps, use the following conversion factors (multipliers): 50W HPS .25; 70W HPS .40; 100W HPS .59. Multipliers are for use with candela curve only. Luminaire spacing ratio is 0.80.
70
50
30
10 0
70
50
30
10 0
4L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
983
4L
Photometric Data
Lamp: 150W/E-23-1/2 high pressure sodium (HPS) Total bare lamp lumens: 16000
Lamp: 150W/E-23-1/2 high pressure sodium (HPS) Total bare lamp lumens: 16000
Luminaire With Globe, Hi-Bay Reflector and Without Guard

Luminaire With Globe, Dome Reflector and Without Guard

70
70
50
50
30
30
4L
10 0
10 0
70
70
50
50
30
30
10 0
10 0
984
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Description
VMVIG Series DMVIG Series
5L
Page No.
see pages 986992 see pages 986992
Induction Lighting is also available with our Champ-Pak Wall Pack Luminares. Please see page 1051 in Section 7L for more details.
5L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
985
5L

VMVIG and DMVIG Series
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 2, Group IIC Restricted Breathing Suffix S826 for CI. I, Div. 2 & Zone 2
Enclosure Type 4X, IP66 Wet Locations Marine Locations UL and cUL Listed
Get uninterrupted light for up to 11 years, without changing a lamp.

Cooper Crouse-Hinds Champ Luminaire with Induction Light Source delivers up to 100,000 hours of white light in a hazardous location, corrosion-resistant watertight package. Thats 5 to 8 times the typical life of conventional fluorescent or HID lamps. And, with no maintenance required for up to 11 years, youll reduce your maintenance and lamp replacement costs. Compelling reasons to choose the new Champ Induction luminaire as the light source for industrial and hazardous locations include: Crisp, white light (80+ color rendering index) provides increased safety by clearly illuminating signs, instrument panels, equipment and more with vibrant natural colors. Up to 100,000 hours of lamp life minimizes routine maintenance costs. If you operate this luminaire for 24 hours, 7 days a week, you will not need to change the lamp for up to 11 years! Instant illumination no waiting for lamp warm-up time. Increases productivity and safety. Delivers the best possible luminaire temperature rating T6 (85C) when used with the Champ restricted breathing option. Ideal for hazardous areas where a low ignition temperature is required. Starts in low temperatures as low as 40C.
165W Champ Induction provides as much light as a 175W Metal Halide but lasts 7 times longer!
Additional Features and Benefits:

The Champ Induction Luminaire is suitable for Class I, Division 2 and Zone 2 areas with the assurance of Cooper Crouse-Hinds quality and reliability. They are ideal for use in hard-to-reach applications and where process requirements demand continuous luminaire operation.
Features:
High lumens per watts (72 lpw for the 165W Champ) will save energy Retains strong light output (retains more than 70% output) throughout the life of the lamp Will not add electrical noise to the circuits Total Harmonic Distortion is less than 10% Excellent power factor of .96 increases useable watts to an excellent level and reduces energy consumption Internal electronics are enclosed to ensure that there is no interference with external instrumentation
5L
986
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

VMVIG and DMVIG Series with Lamps Included
Applications:
5L
Options:
Description Restricted Breathing Construction Class I, Division 2 & Zone 2 suitability Cooler operating temperatures (T-Codes) Corrected color temperature lamp - 4000K Suffix S826 S887
Champ Induction Luminaires are ideal: Where an extra long life lamp source (up to 100,000 hours) is required. In areas that require lamps to reach full illumination immediately. Where cool temperature ratings on the luminaire globe are needed to ensure safe operation in hazardous areas. In hard-to-reach applications where relamping is costly. Where luminaire maintenance is difficult due to continuous process operation requirements that restrict or prohibit shut down except in emergency situations. To provide a cost-effective lighting system (low installed/life cost) by minimizing or even eliminating routine luminaire maintenance. In cold environment applications.
Accessories:
Mounting Modules /4 NPT Pendant 1 NPT Pendant 3 /4 NPT Flexible Pendant 3 /4 NPT Ceiling Mount 1 NPT Ceiling Mount 3 /4 NPT Wall Mount 1 NPT Wall Mount 3 /4 NPT Quad Mount 11/2 NPT Stanchion Mount 25 Degree Angle 11/2 NPT Stanchion Mount Straight
3
Cat. # APM2 APM3 HPM2 CM2 CM3 TWM2 TWM3 QM25 JM5 PM5

NEC & CEC: Class I, Division 2 and Zone 2 Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC Restricted Breathing Suffix S826 for Class I, Division 2 and Zone 2 Marine Locations, Wet Locations, Enclosure Type 3, 3R, 4, 4X; IP66 UL and cUL Listed / ETL UL Standards: 844, 60079-15, 1598, 1598A CSA Standards: C22.2 No.137, E79 Series
Wattage 55W 85W 165W
Dome Reflector Cat. # RD70 RD739 RD739
Angle Reflector Cat. # RA70 RA739 RA739
Dimensions:
See Section 3L for dimensional information on VMV and DMV Series.
Compliances and approvals for the lamp system

RFI < 30 MHz RFI > 30 MHz Harmonics Immunity Safety EN 55015 EN 55022 EN 61000-3-2 EN 61547 EN 61347-2-3 & UL935 EN 60928 EN 60929 IEC 68-2-6-Fc IEC 68-2-29-Eb ISO 9001 ISO 14001
Amperage:
Power consumption for specific voltages 55W Luminaires a. 120VAC x .460mA = 55.70 watts b. 230VAC x .260mA = 59.80 watts 85W Luminaires c. 120VAC x .710mA = 85.20 watts d. 230VAC x .400mA = 92.00 watts 165W Luminaires e. 120VAC x 1.35 = 162.00 watts f. 230VAC x .700mA = 161.00 watts
Performance Vibration & bump tests Quality standards Environmental standard
5L
Standard Materials:
Ballast housings and mountings copper-free aluminum (less than 0.4 of 1%) Exterior hardware stainless steel Reflectors (dome and angle) Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester material Globes heat and impact-resistant internally fluted glass Guards copper-free aluminum (55W), stainless steel (85W)
Standard Finishes:
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
987
5L

Lamp Data:
System Power (W) VMV DMV DMV 55 85 165 Lumen (LM) Initial Mean 3500 6000 12000 2800 4800 9600 Efficacy (LM/W) Initial 65 70 72 Mean 51 57 58 Color Rendering Index* 80 80 80 Lumen Maintenance After 60,000 Hrs (%) 75 75 70
*Lamp sources with 80+ CRI provide excellent color rendering. CRI scale is 0100 with 100 considered as ideal.

Cat. # Watts Ambient Temp. C Supply Wire Temp. C Class I, Div. 2 Temp. Rating Class II, Div. 1, Class III Temp. Rating Simultaneous Presence Class I, Div. 2 T2D Restricted Breathing (Suffix S826) Aex nR IIC, Ex nR IIC Class I, Div. 2/Zone 2 T6 T5 T6 T5 T5
VMVIG055 55 40 60 T2C VMVIG055 55 55 75 T2C DMVIG085 85 40 60 T3 T5 DMVIG085 85 55 75 T2D T4A DMVIG165 165 40 75 T3 Champ Induction DMV 85 watt is now Class II, Div. 1 suitable for dust environments.
To complete Catalog Number, add Voltage and Option suffix(es). 55W Induction Catalog Number (With G24 Globe & P21 Guard) VMVIG2A055GP VMVIG3A055GP VMVIG2HA055GP VMVIG2C055GP VMVIG3C055GP VMVIG2TW055GP VMVIG3TW055GP VMVIG25Q055GP VMVIGJ055GP VMVIGP055GP VMVIG055GP 85W Induction Catalog Number (With G303 Globe & P33 Guard) DMVIG2A085GP DMVIG3A085GP DMVIG2HA085GP DMVIG2C085GP DMVIG3C085GP DMVIG2TW085GP DMVIG3TW085GP DMVIG25Q085GP DMVIGJ085GP DMVIGP085GP DMVIG085GP 165W Induction Catalog Number (With G303 Globe & P33 Guard) DMVIG2A165GP* DMVIG3A165GP* DMVIG2HA165GP* DMVIG2C165GP* DMVIG3C165GP* DMVIG2TW165GP* DMVIG3TW165GP* DMVIG25Q165GP* DMVIGJ165GP* DMVIGP165GP* DMVIG165GP*
Mounting Style Pendant Flexible Pendant Ceiling Mount Wall Mount
Hub Size (Inches)

3
/4 1 /4 /4 1
3 3
/4 1 /4
1
5L
Quad Mount Stanchion Mount 25 Angle Stanchion Mount Straight Luminaire with Globe and Guard less Mounting Module
1 /2 11/ 2
Add the voltage suffix to the above catalog number. Ex. - DMVIG2A085GP/120 Standard Voltage Suffix Range 120V, 50 / 60 Hz /120 Operative range of 108132 VAC 200V277V, 50 / 60 Hz /200 277 Operates on 208, 220, 230, 240, 277 VAC
*165W Champ Induction Luminaires are only available in 200277VAC.
988
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

55 Watt Induction
Luminaire With Globe And Guard VMVIG055GP LAMP: 55W Induction
Photometric Data
5L
85 Watt Induction
Luminaire With Globe And Guard DMVIG085GP LAMP: 85W Induction
5L
Photometric Data: For additional photometric information, see the Resources area of our website. Photometric .ies files for use with our Luxicon Lighting Layout Software are available to download.
989
5L

Photometric Data
165 Watt Induction

Luminaire With Globe
DMVIG165G Lamp: 165W Induction
165 Watt Induction

Luminaire With Globe And Guard
DMVIG165GP Lamp: 165W Induction
5L
Photometric Data: For additional photometric information, see the Resources area of our website. Photometric .ies files for use with our Luxicon Lighting Layout Software are available to download. 990

165 Watt Induction
Luminaire With Globe And RD739 Dome Reflector
DMVIG165G Lamp: 165W Iinduction
Photometric Data
5L
165 Watt Induction

Luminaire With Globe And RA739 (30 Angle) Reflector
DMVIG165G Lamp: 165W Induction
5L
Photometric Data: For additional photometric information, see the Resources area of our website. Photometric .ies files for use with our Luxicon Lighting Layout Software are available to download.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
991
5L

Family Tree
5L
992
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Fluorescent Luminaires Hazardous and Non-Hazardous
6L
Description
Application/Selection General Purpose Luminaires
VF Vaporgard Series
Page No.
see page 994 see page 995 see pages 10261028 see pages 10081012 see pages 998999 see pages 10011007 see pages 10391041 see pages 10291032 see pages 10131018 see page 1042 see pages 10461047 see pages 10221025 see pages 10361038 see pages 10191021 see pages 10331035 see page 1000
Non-metallic Luminaires
NFL Series N2MVF
Hazardous Area Luminaires

CPMVF DMVF eLLB20 Series eLLK Series EVLPF EVF Series EVFDR Series EVFT Illuminator Series FVN Series FVS Series nLLK Series VMVF
6L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
993
6L
Fluorescent Lighting Luminaires

Hazardous and Non-hazardous Application and Selection Quick Selector Chart
Applications:
For use in hazardous or non-hazardous areas (as shown in the Quick Selector Chart below) Low operating cost High light output per watt Low brightness Low glare Uniform light Instant illumination

Having made the determination that a fluorescent luminaire is required, the remaining selection is the type of luminaire (i.e., number and kind of lamps) and placement of luminaire. To determine the number of luminaires: 1. Determine Cavity Ratios for room, ceiling and floor 2. Determine Coefficient of Utilization 3. Determine Light Loss 4. Determine Lamp Lumens required = Footcandles x Area Coefficient of Utilization x Light Loss Factor 5. Determine number of luminaires required = Total Lamp Lumens Required Lamp Lumens per Luminaire

Maximum Temperature Deg. C Deg. F 450 842 300 572 280 536 260 500 230 446 215 419 200 392 180 356 165 329 160 320 135 275 120 248 100 212 85 185 Temp. Class (T Code) T1 T2 T2A T2B T2C T2D T3 T3A T3B T3C T4 T4A T5 T6

Series VF NFL FVN NEC Hazardous Area Compliance Cl. I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Cl. II, Groups F, G; Cl. III Cl. I, Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups E, F, G Cl. I, Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups E, F, G Cl. I, Groups B, C, D; Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III Cl. I, Division 2, Groups B, C, D; Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III Cl. I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III; Simultaneous Presence Cl. I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Class II, Groups F, G; Class III; Simultaneous Presence Cl. I, Division 1, Groups (B), C, D; Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III; Simultaneous Presence Cl. I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Cl. I, Zone 1, Group IIC; Cl. II, Division 2, Groups F, G Cl. I, Zone I & Division 2; Cl. II, Division 2 Cl. I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D; Cl. I, Zone 2 AEx nA II; Cl. II, Division 2, Groups F, G Lamp Watts 9 32, 40 32, 40, 60 Volts 120 120277V 5060Hz 120, 277, 220 / 240 50 or 60Hz No. of Lamps 2 1, 2 2, 3
EVF EVFDR EVFT
32, 40, 60, 110 32, 40, 60, 110 39
120, 277, 347, 220 / 240 50 or 60Hz 120, 277, 220 / 240 50 or 60Hz 120, 277, 220 / 240 50 or 60Hz
1, 2, 3, 4 2 2, 4
FVS
40
6L
120277V, 5060Hz or 347V, 60Hz 120277V, 5060Hz or 347V, 60Hz 120277V, 5060Hz or 347V, 60Hz 120277V, 5060Hz or 347V, 60Hz 120277V, 5060Hz or 347V, 60Hz 120240V, 5060Hz 110230VDC 120254V 120277V, 60Hz
DMVF
26, 32, 42
2, 3
N2MVF
26, 32
EVLP
26, 32
CPMVF eLLB 20
26, 32, 42 17, 32
2 2
eLLK nLLK
32 17, 32
2 2
994
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
VF Series Vaporgard Fluorescent Luminaires
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D* Cl. I, Zone 2 IIC* Wet Locations 3, 3R
6L
Applications:
VF Series Vaporgard Fluorescent Lighting Luminaires are used: Indoors or outdoors in industrial locations where enclosed and gasketed luminaires are required Where the energy efficiency and long life of single twin tube compact fluorescent lamps are desired Where luminaires may be subject to wet, damp, dirty locations Where vibration and rough usage are a problem To retrofit existing Vaporgard incandescent luminaires In tunnels, building entrances, utility rooms, hallways and similar locations With clear or colored globes to illuminate or mark critical locations or processes
Accessories:
See next page for complete listing

Fixture Type VFA VFHF VFHBF 1-Lamp Luminaire With Globe & Guard (lbs.) 43/4 5 71/4 2-Lamp Luminaire With Globe & Guard (lbs.) 5 51/4 71/2 Lbs. 1
Type Lbs. Type Add for Reflectors: Dome 30 Angle 1 Deduct: 1/2 lb. for P21 Guard
Features:
Compact size and light weight allow adaptation and easy installation in many industrial applications Cast copper-free aluminum (less than 0.4 of 1% copper) construction and epoxy powder finish provide excellent resistance to corrosion Variety of mounting arrangements to suit any lighting layout pendant, ceiling, wall bracket, angle stanchion, through feed, box mount VFH luminaire components can be installed on existing Vaporgard incandescent components and standard stamped metal boxes Fixtures available for use with two compact 9 watt fluorescent lamps Dome and 30 angle reflectors made of bright white Krydon material provide superior reflectivity; will not chip, peel, dent, rust, or corrode (order separately see page 996) Glass globes are internally fluted and stippled to reduce glare and provide even light distribution; exteriors are smooth to shed dust All luminaires 120 VAC only! Grounding wire for safety
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum powder epoxy finish Krydon material high reflectance white

Class I, Max. Supply Minimum Lamp Div. 2 Ambient Wire C Operating 9W T3B 40C 75C -4C (25F)
Electrical Ratings:
Input voltage 120 VAC, 60 hertz Wattages: two 9 watt lamps
Dimensions
In Inches:
6L
VFC
VFH
VFHA

UL Standard: 1598, 844 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 137
VFHF
VFHBF
Standard Materials:
Bodies and guards copper-free aluminum (less than 0.4 of 1%) Globes clear or colored, glass or plastic Reflectors Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester material
VFHT
*All mountings except stanchion.
VFA
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
995
6L
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 2 IIC Wet Locations NEMA 3, 3R
Twin Tube Fluorescent with G24 Clear Glass Globe and P21 Guard (lamps not included)
Pendant Mount
Ceiling Mount
Wall Mount (w/Box) Wall Mount (w/Box) Cat. #
Wall Mount (No Box) Wall Mount (No Box) Cat. #
Angle Stanchion Angle Stanchion Mount* Cat. #
Through Box Mount & Feed Mount Retrofit Through Feed Mount Cat. # VFC122GP VFC222GP Box Mount & Retrofit Cat. # VFH122GP
Luminaire Watts 2 Lamps, 9W Each
Pendant Hub Mount Size (In.) Cat. #

1 3
Ceiling Mount Cat. # VFHF122GP VFHF222GP
/2 /4 1 11/4
VFA122GP VFA222GP VFA322GP
VFHBF122GP VFHT122GP VFHBF222GP VFHT222GP VFHA422GP
VF Series with Colored Glass Globes or Plastic Globes

To obtain: Substitute appropriate globe designation for "G" in above Cat. Nos.
Accessories and Components

Reflectors Globes Guards
Type Dome (Cannot be used with wall mount luminaires) 30 Angle
Cat. # RD71 RA71
Globe Color Clear Green Blue Red Amber
Glass Cat. # G24 G25 G26 G27 G28
Plastic Cat. #* G63 G65 G67
Guard For use with glass globes only
Guard Cat. # P21
6L
Junction Boxes and Bracket Bodies
VXF 4 Hubs, 3 Plugs VXF 4 Hubs, 3 Plugs Hub Size (In.)

1 3
VXT 3 Hubs, 2 Plugs VXT 3 Hubs, 2 Plugs Hub Size (In.) Cat. #
1 3
Cat. # VXF10 VXF20
VXA Stanchion Mount (Non-hazardous Locations) VXA Stanchion Mount (Non-hazardous Locations) Hub Size (In.) Cat. # 11/4 VXA4
/2 /4
/2 /4
VXT10 VXT20
VXFT 5 Hubs, 4 Plugs VXFT 5 Hubs, 4 Plugs Hub Size (In.) /2 3 /4

1
VXT-K1 Mounting Adapter Kit Description Cat. # Allows for the mounting of non-Cooper Crouse-Hinds outlet boxes to the VXT20 wall VXT K1 mount bracket and VXH ceiling mount bracket
Cat. # VXFT10 VXFT20
*For non-hazardous locations. All mountings except stanchion.
996
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Family Tree
6L
6L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
997
6L
CPMVF Champ-Pak Compact Fluorescent Luminaires
Applications:
CPMVF Champ-Pak luminaires are used: Indoor and outdoor wall mounting or vertical surface mounting where minimal luminaire depth is required in: Manufacturing plants and heavy industrial facilities Industrial process facilities such as refineries, chemical, petrochemical, pharmaceutical and platforms Waste or sewage treatment plants Offshore, dockside and harbor installations For security and safety lighting in industrial facilities for lighting of loading docks, tunnels, and stairways For marine, wet location, hose down, and corrosive environments

Unique compact shallow-profile design mounts virtually anywhere Side hinged cover with two screw closing for easy installation and maintenance Gray Corro-free epoxy powder coat two-piece housing provides superior corrosion resistance Unique stainless steel wire guard accessory attaches without any additional hardware for easy installation and maintenance Glass refractor provides uniform light distribution to eliminate glare Silicon gaskets make luminaire suitable for NEMA 4X, marine environments High power factor ballasts (+90%) are standard, which allow more luminaires per circuit

Wattages: Two 26, 32, or 42 watt lamps 120277V, 5060Hz 347V, 60Hz 12, 24, and 125VDC (Consult Cooper Crouse-Hinds)
Options:
Description Restricted Breathing Construction........................................... Class I, Division 2 & Zone 2 Suitability Cooler Operating Temperatures (T-Numbers) Suffix S826

NEC and CEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Class III & Simultaneous Presence (Class I, Division 2 and Class II) Class I, Zone 2 IEC: Zone 2 Ex nR IIC UL Standards: 844, 2279 Hazardous (Classified) Locations 1598 Luminaires 1598A Marine Locations CSA Standards: C22.2 No. 137 IEC Standards: 60079-15
Certified for IEC Zone 2 ........................................................... S826TB Furnished with: Terminal Block Crimp Terminals Factory Assembled with Lamp................................................. Fused - protects ballast and capacitors against abnormal line conditions .......................................................................... (Not for use in Canada) (Not for marine use) FA S658
6L
Accessories:
Description Photocell for Field Installation 120V, 50/60Hz ................................................................... 208240V, 50/60Hz ........................................................... 277V, 50/60Hz ................................................................... Stainless Steel Wire Guard .................................................... Cat. # V2PC20 V2PC22 V2PC27 P55
Standard Materials:
Luminaire housing and door frame assembly copper-free aluminum External hardware stainless steel Lens heat- and impact-resistant refractor style glass Gaskets silicon rubber Reflector aluminum light sheet Wire guard stainless steel
Standard Finishes:
Aluminum Corro-free epoxy powder coat Stainless steel natural
Energy Savings:
Less wattage used with compact fluorescent lamps compared to equivalent incandescent lamps providing the same light output. 998
CPMVF Champ-Pak Compact Fluorescent Luminaires

Hub Size (In.)
3 3 3
Ordering Information Temperature Performance Data Dimensions & Weights
6L
Luminaire Watts 25 64 84
Cat. # CPMVF2W052 CPMVF2W064 CPMVF2W084
/4 NPT /4 NPT /4 NPT
STANDARD VOLTAGE BALLASTS NEC/UL & CEC/CSA (cUL) Voltage Suffix 120277V 5060Hz /UNV CEC/CSA (cUL) 347V 60Hz /347
OPTIONAL BALLASTS (Consult Cooper Crouse-Hinds) 125V DC /125VDC 12V DC /012VDC 24V DC /024VDC
CPMVF Temperature Performance Data Consult Cooper Crouse-Hinds
Dimensions
In Inches:
6L
Net Weight:
Description CPMVF Less Guard P55 Guard Lbs. 17 lbs. 0.5 lbs.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
999
6L
VMVF Series Fluorescent Luminaires

Champ Luminaires
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 2, AEx nR II, Ex nR IIC
IEC Zone 2, Ex nR IIC UL/CSA IEC 60079-15
Applications:
VMVF Series Champ Luminaires are used: In refineries, chemical, petrochemical, and pharmaceutical plants, wastewater treatment facilities In shipboard, drilling rigs, drilling platforms In flour and feed mills, grain elevators, sugar and cocoa plants In area/structure lighting, security lighting, parking areas

Increased Productivity Instant-on luminaire eliminates flicker-free starting and increases safety and productivity Consistent Design Luminaire components are of the same materials as standard VMV and DMV Popular components are available from stock; offers visual consistency throughout installation High Lumen Output Compact fluorescent light fixture provides higher lumen output with increased color rendering index (CRI) Reliable Performance in Any Environment Energy-efficient universal ballast suitable for 120-277V 50/60Hz minimum starting temperature of -18C provides long lamp life and lamp end-of-life protection UL marine rated, NEMA 4X/IP66 luminaire prevents water ingress and is suitable for the most adverse outdoor environments

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class I, Zone 2, AEx nR II, Ex nR IIC IEC: IEC Zone 2, Ex nR IIC UL Standards: UL844 Hazardous (Classified) Locations UL1598 Luminaires, UL1598A Marine Locations CSA Standards: C22.2 No. 137 IEC Standards: IEC 60079-15
Ordering Information Example:

VMV F 2A 042 GP /UNV S714
1. Series VMV DMV 2. Lamp/Function F (Fluorescent) FB (Fluorescent with Battery Back-up) 3. Mounting Style Blank No Cover J 1 1/2 Stanchion 25 P 1 1/2 Stanchion Straight 2A 3/4 Pendant 3A 1 Pendant 2C 3/4 Ceiling 3C 1 Ceiling 2HA 3/4 Offset Pendant (low wattage only) 2TW 3/4 Wall Mount 3TW 1 Wall Mount 25Q 3/4 Quad Mount 4. Wattage 042 42W F (VMVF) 084 84W F (DMVF/DMVFB) 5. Globe and Guard GP G24 Globe and P21 Guard (VMVF) GP G303 Globe and P33 Guard (DMVF) 6. Voltage /UNV 120-277V 50/60Hz Fluorescent /347 (For Canada) 7. Sufxes S714 Furnished with Lamps S806 Cover Furnished with Stainless Steel Insert S826 Restricted Breathing (Cl. I, Div. 2 & Zone 2 Suitability, Cooler T-Numbers) S826TB Restricted Breathing Supplied with Terminal Block Connections (Certied for IEC Zone 2) S858 Red Paint for Exterior S890 Quick Clip FA Factory Assembled with Lamps Installed
6L
1000
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
DMVF Series Compact Fluorescent

Champ Luminaires
Applications:
DMVF Series Champ Luminaires are used: In areas made hazardous by abnormal conditions resulting in the presence of flammable vapors or gases In areas made hazardous by the presence of combustible dusts Where combustible dusts and flammable vapors are present simultaneously In marine applications where water spray and corrosive atmospheres are considerations On installations where vibration and rough usage are problematic Where a cool, efficient light source is required In areas that require lamps to reach full illumination immediately In refineries, chemical and petrochemical facilities, grain processing, handling or storage facilities, manufacturing plants, wastewater treatment plants, sewage treatment plants, oil terminals, food processing facilities, breweries, and any other manufacturing or processing facility where safe, reliable, hazardous area fluorescent or auxiliary lighting is needed
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Restricted Breathing Cl. I, Div. 2 & Zone 2 (Suffix S826) Certified for IEC Zone 2 (Suffix S826TB) Certifications and Compliances:
NEC and CEC:
6L
Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Class III & Simultaneous Presence (Class I, Division 2 and Class II) Class I, Zone 2 IEC: Zone 2 Ex nR IIC UL Standards: 844 Hazardous (Classified) Locations 1598 Luminaires 1598A Marine Locations CSA Standards: C22.2 No. 137 IEC Standards: 60079-15
Accessories:
Reflectors (to be used with globe) Type Cat. # Dome 30 Angle
To be ordered separately.
Standard Materials:
Ballast housings and mountings copper-free aluminum (less than 0.4 of 1%) Exterior hardware and guards stainless steel Reflectors Krydon fiberglassreinforced polyester
RD739 RA739
Energy Savings
Less wattage used with compact fluorescent lamps compared to equivalent incandescent lamps providing the same light output
Standard Features:
Housings made of die-cast copper-free aluminum (less than 0.4 of 1% copper) for strength and resistance to corrosion Mounting modules equipped with integral hub set screws for vibration resistance (ceiling, pendant, and quad mounts) Hubs are provided with an integral conduit stop and bushing to help prevent damage to field wiring during installation Epoxy powder finish and stainless steel external hardware for resistance to corrosion Long-life gaskets which provide seals between mounting module, housing, and optical assembly Grounding wire for safety Cool operating design Optional stainless steel open bottom guard permits direct access to the globe for easy relamping Optional battery pack ballast for auxiliary lighting
Globe heat- and impact-resistant internally fluted glass

Wattage: Two 26, 32, or 42 watt lamps 120277V, 5060Hz 347V, 60Hz 12, 24, and 125VDC
Standard Finishes:
Aluminum gray epoxy powder coat Krydon material high reflectance white Stainless steel natural
6L
Options:
Description Suffix Restricted Breathing Construction ................................................................................. S826 Class I, Division 2 & Zone 2 Suitability Cooler Operating Temperatures (T-Numbers) Certified for IEC Zone 2 (Suffix S826TB) ........................................................................ S826TB Furnished with Terminal Block Crimp Terminals Factory assembled with lamps installed for additional labor savings .......................... FA Fused to protect ballast against abnormal line conditions (not available on CSA certified fixtures) ............................................................................................................. S658 Lamps supplied with fixture ........................................................................................... S714 Top hat with stainless steel threaded insert to attach ballast housing ......................... S806 TEFLON coating on globe for increased shatter protection ........................................ S808 Quick-Clip ....................................................................................................................... S890
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1001
6L

Champ Luminaires
DMVF Series Fluorescent with G303 Globe and P33 Guard Cat. # DMVF2A052GP DMVF3A052GP DMVF2A064GP DMVF3A064GP DMVF2A084GP DMVF3A084GP
Hub Luminaire Size (In.) Watts /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1

3
52 64 84
/4 /4 3 /4
3 3
52 64 84
DMVF2HA052GP DMVF2HA064GP DMVF2HA084GP
/4 1 /4 1 3 /4 1
3 3
52 64 84
DMVF2C052GP DMVF3C052GP DMVF2C064GP DMVF3C064GP DMVF2C084GP DMVF3C084GP
/4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1
3
52 64 84
DMVF2TW052GP DMVF3TW052GP DMVF2TW064GP DMVF3TW064GP DMVF2TW084GP DMVF3TW084GP
/4 /4 3 /4
3 3
52 64 84
DMVF25Q052GP DMVF25Q064GP DMVF25Q084GP
6L
11/2 11/2 11/2
52 64 84
DMVFJ052GP DMVFJ064GP DMVFJ084GP
11/2 11/2 11/2
52 64 84
DMVFP052GP DMVFP064GP DMVFP084GP
1.
Catalog numbers are basic numbers. Voltages must be specified. STANDARD VOLTAGE BALLASTS NEC/UL & CEC/CSA (cUL) CEC/CSA (cUL) OPTIONAL BALLASTS 125V DC /125VDC 12V DC /012VDC 24V DC /024VDC
Voltage Suffix
120277V 5060Hz /UNV
347V 60Hz /347
1002
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
DMVF Series Ordering by Components
6L
DMVF luminaires are available in components.

A complete I. II. III. luminaire consists of: Champ Cover (Mounting Module) DMVF Ballast Housing Globe, Globe Guard, Globe Reflectors

Type Pendant Mount Flexible Pendant Ceiling Wall Stanchion - 25 Degree Angle Stanchion - Straight Quad-Mount Conduit /4" 1
3 3 3
/4"
/4" 1
3 /4" 1
11/2" 1 /2"
1 3
/4"

Complete catalog number must have the voltage suffix (UNV shown) and any options suffixes. Lamp Type Compact Fluorescent Lamp Watts 2 (26W) 2 (32W) 2 (42W) Cat. # DMVF052/UNV DMVF064/UNV DMVF084/UNV
III. Globe, Guards and Reflectors:

Type Globe Teflon Coated Globe Guard Globe Reflector-Dome Globe Reflector-Angle Cat. # G303 G303S808 P33 RD739 RA739
6L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1003
6L

Champ Luminaires
Family Tree
6L
*These plastic reflectors are for non-hazardous areas only (50-100W max).
1004
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Champ Luminaires
Lamp Watts Minimum Operating Temperature Maximum Ambient Temp.
Temperature Performance Data Weights
6L
Class I Non-restricted Restricted Breathing Breathing Div. 2 Zone 2 or Div. 2 T6 T6 T6
Class II Division 1 T6 T6 T6
Simultaneous Presence Non-restricted Restricted Breathing Breathing Cl. I, Div. 2/Cl. II T3/T6 T3/T6 T3/T6 Cl. I, Zone 2 or Div. 2/Cl. II T6 T6 T6
Supply Wire C
Fluorescent: DMVF 52 Watt 64 Watt 84 Watt 20C (4F) 20C (4F) 20C (4F)
40C (104F) T3 40C (104F) T3 40C (104F) T3
60 60 60

Luminaire Series Lamp Watts Luminaire with Globe, Guard (lbs.) 181/4 Lbs. 11/4 11/2 23/4 41/2 31/2 31/2 41/2 13/4
DMVF 52, 64, 84 Type Add for mounting modules: Pendant Flexible Pendant Ceiling Wall Quad-Mount Angle Stanchion Straight Stanchion Add for reflectors: Dome 11/4 30 Angle Deduct: 1 lb. for luminaire with P33 Guard
6L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1005
6L

Champ Luminaires
Photometric Data
Note: For 52 watt DMVF applications, use a .75 multiplier. For complete 84W IES files, please log onto www.crouse-hinds.com and go to Services and Support > Photometric Information.
DMVF Photometric Data

Isofootcandle Chart: Luminaire with globe and dome reflector
DMVF064GRD Dome Reflector Coefficient of Utilization

Effective Floor Cavity Reflectance 20% Eff. Ceil. 80* Room Cavity Ratio Wall 50* 30* 10* 50* 30* 10* 50* 30* 10* 50* 30* 10* .50* 30* 10* 0* 1 .741 .694 .652 .722 .679 .640 .686 .650 .617 .653 .623 .596 .622 .598 .576 .557 2 .617 .548 .491 .601 .537 .483 .570 .516 .470 .542 .497 .457 .516 .478 .444 .424 3 .524 .445 .382 .510 .437 .378 .484 .421 .369 .460 .406 .361 .437 .392 .352 .332 4 .452 .370 .308 .440 .364 .305 .418 .351 .299 .398 .340 .293 .379 .329 .287 .267 5 .396 .314 .254 .386 .309 .252 .367 .299 .247 .350 .290 .243 .333 .271 .239 .220 6 .351 .271 .214 .342 .267 .212 .326 .259 .209 .311 .251 .206 .297 .244 .203 .184 7 .314 .237 .183 .307 .234 .182 .293 .227 .180 .280 .221 .177 .268 .215 .175 .157 8 .283 .210 .159 .277 .207 .158 .265 .202 .155 .254 .197 .154 .244 .192 .152 .136 9 .258 .188 .140 .252 .185 .139 .242 .181 .138 .233 .176 .136 .224 .172 .135 .119 10 .236 .169 .125 .231 .167 .124 .223 .163 .123 .214 .160 .121 .206 .156 .120 .105
DMVF064GRD Dome Reflector
70*
50*
Footcandle Values for Isofootcandle Lines

6L
Mtg. Hgt. 8' 10' 12' 16' A 4.00 2.56 1.78 1.00 B 2.00 1.28 0.89 0.50 C 1.00 0.64 0.44 0.25 D 0.50 0.32 0.22 0.13 E 0.25 0.16 0.11 0.06
30*
10* 0*
*Percent Reflectance.
1006
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Champ Luminaires
Dimensions
In Inches:
Dimensions
6L
Pendant Mount
Quad-Mount
Wall Mount
6L
Ceiling Mount
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1007
6L
N2MVF Series Compact Fluorescent

Champ Non-metallic Luminaires
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. II, Groups F, G Cl. III & Simultaneous Presence
Applications:
N2MVF Series Champ Luminaires are used: In areas in which ignitable concentrations of flammable gases or vapors will be present due to abnormal, unusual or accidental conditions In installations where moisture, dirt, vibration, corrosion, or rough usage are concerns Wherever the damaging effects of water, wind, snow, sleet, hot sun, or any combination of these elements are found Ideal for marine use; resists the harmful effects of salt water Withstands the harshest of corrosive environments To provide low wattage spot and floodlighting For general area lighting In manufacturing plants, refineries, chemical, petrochemical and other industrial process facilities, wastewater and sewage treatment facilities, offshore, dockside, and harbor installations as well as other heavy industrial applications

NEC and CEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B C, D Class II, Class III & Simultaneous Presence (Class I, Division 2 and II) UL Standards: 844 Hazardous (Classified) Locations 1598 Luminaires 1598A Marine Locations CSA Standards: C22.2 No. 137
Standard Materials:
Housing, mounting modules polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) Guard, hub inserts, stanchion elbow, hardware stainless steel Globe heat- and impact-resistant, internally fluted glass Gaskets silicone rubber
Options:
Description Suffix Wall-Mount Arm For converting a ceiling-mount luminaire to a wall mount .......... N2MV-WM1 Factory Assembled For a factory assembled luminaire with lamps installed..... FA Fusing To protect ballast against abnormal line conditions ............ S658 Furnished with Lamps ................ S714 Teflon Coated Globe Provides additional protection against shattered glass fragments when subject to thermal shock, etc. ..................... S808
Electrical Ratings:
Wattages: Two 26 or 32 watt lamps 120-277V, 50-60Hz 347V, 60Hz 12, 24, and 125 VDC

Housings and mounting modules made of polyphenylene sulfide (PPS) for strength and maximum resistance to corrosion Pendant mounting module equipped with integral hub set screws for vibration resistance Hubs are provided with an integral bushing to help prevent damage to field wiring during installation and ground connection for positive bonding Guard, hub inserts, stanchion elbow, and hardware made of stainless steel for maximum resistance to corrosion Grounding wire for safety Stainless steel open bottom guard permits direct access to the globe for easy relamping Hinged assembly allows the luminaire to hang free during installation to permit the use of both hands when wiring One external captive screw for ease of installation Handle hinge assembly doubles as a handle for ease of installation, especially when carrying up a ladder
Average Luminaire Weight

Description Body, mounting module, globe, guard, and reflector Lbs. 30
6L
Mounting Style Pendant Mount Hub Size in.
3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1
Lamp Watts 52 64 52 64 52 64
CEC/CSA (cUL) 347V 60Hz /347
With G303 Globe and P33 Guard Cat. # N2MVF2A052GP N2MVF3A052GP N2MVF2A064GP N2MVF3A064GP N2MVF2C052GP N2MVF3C052GP N2MVF2C064GP N2MVF3C064GP N2MVFJ052GP N2MVFJ064GP
Optional Ballasts 125V DC /125VDC 12V DC /012VDC 24V DC /024VDC
Ceiling Mount Thru-Feed Stanchion Mount 25 Angle
11/2 11/2
Standard Voltage Ballasts NEC/UL & CEC/CSA (cUL)
Additional Features:
Fluorescent Energy Savings Less wattage used with compact fluorescent lamps compared to equivalent incandescent lamps providing the same light output
Voltage Suffix
120277V 5060Hz /UNV

Lamp Watts Minimum Operating Temperature Maximum Ambient Temp. 40C (104F) Class I Non-restricted Breathing Division 2 T2D Class II Division 1 T4 85 Supply Wire C
Fluorescent: N2MVF 52 & 64 Watt 18C (0F) 1008

N2MVF Series Ordering by Components
6L
N2MVF Luminaires are available in components.

A complete luminaire consists of: I. N2MV Cover (Mounting Module) II. N2MV Ballast Housing III. Globe, Refractors, Guards, Reflectors
I. N2MV Cover (Mounting Module):

Type Pendant Ceiling Wall (Use wall bracket accessory with Ceiling Cover) Stanchion 25 Degree Angle Conduit /4" 1"
3 3 /4" 1" 3 /4" 1"
Cat. # N2APM2 N2APM3 N2CM2 N2CM3 N2MV WM1 and N2CM2 N2MV WM1 and N2CM3 N2JM5
11/2"

Complete catalog number must have the voltage suffix (UNV shown) and any options suffixes. Lamp Type Lamp Watts Compact Fluorescent 2 (26W) 2 (32W) Cat. # N2MVF052/UNV N2MVF064/UNV
III. Globe, Guards, and Reflectors:

Type Globe Globe Teflon Coated Globe Guard Reflector Dome Reflector Angle Cat. # G303 G303S808 P33 RD739
6L
RA740
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1009
6L

Family Tree
A complete luminaire consists of a cover mount, a ballast housing and a globe, with or without guard, refractor or reflector.
All Components are suitable for use in ordinary locations, Class I, Div. 2 and wet locations.
6L
1010
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Dimensions
In Inches:
Dimensions Weights
6L
Pendant Mount
6L
Ceiling Mount

Luminaire Series N2MVF052 N2MVF064 Lamp Watts 52 64 Luminaire with Mounting Module, Globe, Guard & Refractor (lbs.) 30 30
Accessories:
Reflectors (to be used with globe) Type Cat. # Dome 30 Angle
To be ordered separately.
RD739 (RD79) RA739 (RA79)
Wall Arm Mount
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1011
6L

Photometric Data
N2MVF Photometric Data

Isofootcandle Chart: Luminaire with globe and dome reflector
N2MVF064GRD Dome Reflector
Note: For 52 watt N2MVF applications, use a .75 multiplier.

Mounting Height 8' 10' 12' 16' A 4.00 2.56 1.78 1.00 B 2.00 1.28 0.89 0.50 C 1.00 0.64 0.44 0.25 D 0.50 0.32 0.22 0.13 E 0.25 0.16 0.11 0.06
6L N2MVF064GRD Dome Reflector Coefficients of Utilization

Effective Floor Cavity Reflectance 20%
Room Cavity Ratio Eff. Ceil. 80* Wall 50* 30* 10* 50* 30* 10* 50* 30* 10* 50* 30* 10* 50* 30* 10* 0* 1 .741 .694 .652 .722 .679 .640 .686 .650 .617 .653 .623 .596 .622 .598 .576 .557 2 .617 .548 .491 .601 .537 .483 .570 .516 .470 .542 .497 .457 .516 .478 .444 .424 3 .524 .445 .382 .510 .437 .378 .484 .421 .369 .460 .406 .361 .437 .392 .352 .332 4 .452 .370 .308 .440 .364 .305 .418 .351 .299 .398 .340 .293 .379 .329 .287 .267 5 .396 .314 .254 .386 .309 .252 .367 .299 .247 .350 .290 .243 .333 .271 .239 .220 6 .351 .271 .214 .342 .267 .212 .326 .259 .209 .311 .251 .206 .297 .244 .203 .184 7 .314 .237 .183 .307 .234 .182 .293 .227 .180 .280 .221 .177 .268 .215 .175 .157 8 .283 .210 .159 .277 .207 .158 .265 .202 .155 .254 .197 .154 .244 .192 .152 .136 9 .258 .188 .140 .252 .185 .139 .242 .181 .138 .233 .176 .136 .224 .172 .135 .119 10 .236 .169 .125 .231 .167 .124 .223 .163 .123 .214 .160 .121 .206 .156 .120 .105
70*
50*
30*
10* 0*
1012
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EVLPF Series Compact Fluorescent

Low Profile HazardGard Luminaires
Applications:
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Low Profile HazardGard luminaires are used in: Areas where flammable or explosive vapors or gases are present Hazardous areas, both indoors and outdoors, where long life and low maintenance costs are desired Petroleum refineries, chemical, petrochemical and pharmaceutical plants, oil terminals, gas plants and other heavy process industry facilities Waste treatment facilities Drilling platforms and other coastal and offshore hazardous areas
Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups B (GB Suffix), C, D Cl. I, Zone 1, Groups IIB + H2 (GB Suffix), IIB, IIA Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G; Class III, Simultaneous Presence
6L

Small, compact size Two start Acme threaded construction Lightweight copper-free aluminum housing with powdered epoxy finish All exterior hardware is corrosionresistant stainless steel Four mounting arrangements - pendant, ceiling, wall bracket, and stanchion Wide range of light sources and wattages Marine and NEMA 4X construction Integral ballast High power factor (90%+) ballasts Uses same mounting modules as the standard HazardGard Internally fluted glass globes Krydon construction dome and angle reflectors won't rust, corrode, dent, chip, or peel Now available in components luminaire body, mounting module, guard, reflectors Three wire construction is standard on fluorescent emergency lighting Perfect where low mounting restrictions are a concern Easier assembly, installation and maintenance Superior corrosion resistance Suit any lighting layout Meet specific lighting needs Outdoor, hose down, marine, and corrosive environments suitable Lowest installed cost Allows more luminaires per circuit Easy retrofitting when the Lo-Pro is the preferred choice Reduces glare and distributes light evenly ideal for adverse environments typical of industrial facilities Easily stocked for quick ship requirements For energy conservation, luminaires can be switched off without affecting the emergency operation feature

NEC and CEC: Class I, Division 1, Groups B (GB suffix), C, D Class I, Zone 1, Groups IIB + H2 (GB Suffix), IIB, IIA Class II, Class III & Simultaneous Presence (Class I and Class II) UL Standards: 844 Hazardous (Classified) Locations 1598 Luminaires 1598A Marine Locations CSA Standards C22.2 No. 137
Standard Finishes:
Sources/Wattage: 52W (two 26W lamps) & 64W (two 32W lamps) 120277V, 5060Hz 347V, 60Hz 12, 24, 125 VDC Conduit Entries: 3/4", 1" NPT Pendant, Wall Bracket, Ceiling 11/4" NPT Stanchion
6L
Standard Materials:
Mounting modules, cover, ballast housing, globe holder copper-free aluminum Globe heat- and impact-resistant glass Exterior hardware stainless steel Reflectors (dome & angle) Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester
Options:
Description Suffix Group B suitability ............................................................................................................ GB Fused ................................................................................................................................ S658 Factory assembled with lamps ........................................................................................ FA
Accessories:
Description Cat. # Dome reflector ................................................................................................................ RD739 Angle reflector ................................................................................................................ RA739
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1013
6L

Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups B (GB Suffix), C, D Cl. I, Zone 1, Groups IIB + H2 (GB Suffix), IIB, IIA Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G; Class III, Simultaneous Presence
Pendant
Wall Bracket*
Ceiling*
Stanchion
Hub With Guard With Guard With Guard With Guard Watt Size (In.) Cat. # Cat. # Cat. # Cat. # Cat. # FluorescentHigh Power Factor Ballast (Min. P.F. 90%) 3 EVLPFA02521 EVLPFBX02521 EVLPFCX02521 EVLPF0520 /4 EVLPFA03521 EVLPFBX03521 EVLPFCX03521 52W 1 EVLPFJ04521 11/4 64W Pendant Mount Pendant Wall Bracket* Hub Without Guard Without Guard Watt Size (In.) Cat. # Cat. # FluorescentHigh Power Factor Ballast (Min. P.F. 90%) 3 EVLPFA02520 EVLPFBX02520 /4 EVLPFA03520 EVLPFBX03520 52W 1 11/4 64W /4 1 11/4
3
/4 1 11/4
3
EVLPFA02641 EVLPFBX02641 EVLPFA03641 EVLPFBX03641
EVLPFCX02641 EVLPFCX03641 EVLPFJ04641
EVLPF0640
Ceiling* Without Guard Cat. #

EVLPFCX02520 EVLPFCX03520
Stanchion Without Guard Cat. #
EVLPFJ04520 EVLPFCX02640 EVLPFCX03640 EVLPFJ04640
EVLPFA02640 EVLPFA03640
EVLPFBX02640 EVLPFBX03640

*Wall Bracket Mount
1. Voltages - Add suffix as follows: Standard Voltage Ballasts - 60Hz NEC/UL & CEC/CSA (cUL) Voltage Suffix 120277V 5060Hz /UNV CEC/CSA (cUL) 347V 60 Hz /347 125V DC /125VDC 12V DC /012VDC 24V DC /024VDC Optional Ballasts
6L
*Ceiling Mount
Stanchion Mount
*Ceiling and bracket mounts have 4 hubs: 3 are plugged.
1014
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EVLPF Series Ordering By Components
6L
EVLP Luminaires are available in components.

A complete light fixture consists of: I. Mounting Module II. Fixture Body III. Guard, Dome Reflector, Angle Reflector, or Exit Sign
Mounting Modules:
Type Pendant Ceiling & Wall Box Wall Bracket Arm Stanchion Guards Fluorescent Reflectors Dome Angle Conduit /4" 1
3
Cat. #
EVMP2 EVMP3 EV22 EV33 EV87 EVMJ4 EV512 RD739 RA739
/4" 1
3
Use EV22 or EV33 box with EV87 11/4"
Pendant EVMP2 EVMP3
Ceiling EV22 EV33
Stanchion EVMJ4
Ceiling EV22 EV33
Wall Bracket EV87 & EV22 or EV33
6L
Fixture Body EVLPF0520/UNV EVLPF0521/UNV EVLPF0640/UNV EVLPF0641/UNV
Guards EV512
Dome Reflector RD739

US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Angle Reflector RA739

1015
6L

Class I, Group B (w/GB suffix) Groups C, D Class I, Zone I 40C 52W & 64W T6
Fluorescent Fixtures Maximum Ambient Fluorescent
Class II, Groups E, F, G Class III Simultaneous Presence 40C T6
Supply Wire C 75C
Minimum Operating Temperature 18C
Dimensions
In Inches:
6L
A Fluorescent 15.69
B 14.69
C 18.25
D 18.46
E 22.34
F 21.30
Weights:
Item Fluorescent (EVLPF) Add Mounting Modules: Pendant Ceiling Bracket Stanchion Add For Reflectors & Exit Sign: RA739 RD739 DMVFEXD Deduct .5 lb for Wire Guard Lbs. 31.5 1 2 4.5 2.5 1 1 5
1016
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

EVLPFA03641 Two 32 W Compact Fluorescent
Photometric Data
6L
6L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1017
6L

Photometric Data
Luminaire with Globe and Dome (Less Guard)

EVLPFA03640RD Lamp: Two 32 W Compact Fluorescent

EVLPFA03640RA Lamp: Two 32 W Compact Fluorescent
6L
1018
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
FVS Series Long Twin Tube

Fluorescent Luminaires
Applications:
FVS Compact Fluorescent Luminaires are used: Where low mounting heights or limited mounting room exists For task oriented lighting Where a cool, efficient light source is required In areas that require lamps to reach full illumination immediately In industrial and chemical processing In pulp and paper facilities In waste or sewage treatment facilities In non-hazardous commercial and industrial areas In food and pharmaceutical plants where a non-glass lens is required Where fluorescent lighting has been preferred, but unavailable due to limited space and practicality
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III, Simultaneous Presence
6L
Size Ranges:
All luminaires are 24" L x 12" W x 3.12" H Conduit entrances are 3/4"
Electrical Ratings:
UNV (120277V), 5060 Hz 347V, 60 Hz Two 40 watt long twin tube lamps
Accessories Certifications and Compliances:

NEC and CEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G (Suffix S813) Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III & Simultaneous Presence (Cl. I and Cl. II) Note: Aiming Limitations Cl. II, Cl. III & Simultaneous Presence Aim down to Horizontal Cannot aim up UL Standards 844 Hazardous (Classified) Locations 1598 Luminaires 1598A Marine Locations CSA Standards C22.2 No. 137 FVS Trunnion Mount Kit (FVS-K5) Permits vertical mounting of luminaire on a beam when used with a standard beam clamp Can be mounted directly to a wall or ceiling Can be pole mounted when used in conjunction with a SFA6 slipfitter adapter (ordered separately) Constructed from copper-free aluminum Supplied with a CGB cord connector
Features:
Compact, lightweight, low profile design is ideal for confined areas and tight corners Reaches full illumination immediately and delivers light output equivalent to fixtures twice its size Fast-Latch closure provides quick and easy access for relamping and maintenance no tools necessary Silicone sealing gasket provides exceptional watertight and dust-tight bond, providing excellent performance in wet and corrosive environments Power disconnect switch (Cooper Crouse-Hinds ESWP) automatically cuts power to the lamps and ballast when the lens is opened Shatter-resistant polymeric lens (0.125 thick) provides environmental and corrosion protection Available in UNV (120-277) and 347 50/60 Hz voltages Two lamp fixture, uses single-ended 40 watt lamps Multiple mounting capability Energy saving electronic ballast is standard
FVS with Trunnion Arm and Slipfitter
6L
Options:
Description Suffix Fused to protect ballast under abnormal line conditions (not available on CSA certified fixtures)........................................................................................................... S658 Fixture supplied with two F40BX/SPX35 lamps .......................................................... S714 Corro-free epoxy finish inside and out....................................................................... S753 Tamperproof....................................................................... Consult Cooper Crouse-Hinds

Ambient Style Temp C All 40C All 55C Class I, Div. 2 T3C T3C Simultaneous Class II Presence See Aiming Limitations T6 T3C/T6 Supply Wire 75C 75C Minimum Operating Temperature 18C (0F) 18C (0F)
Standard Materials:
Corrosion-resistant die cast copper-free aluminum housing Shatter-resistant nylon lens Polycarbonate lens (suffix -S813) Silicone rubber gasket Extruded aluminum hinges and closure hardware with stainless steel pivots
Luminaire Weight:
Without Lamps
Type Standard 2 lamp FVS lbs. 12.0
Standard Finishes:
Epoxy powder coated housing Anodized hinges and closure hardware Highly specular aluminum reflector
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1019
6L

Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III, Simultaneous Presence
Luminaire includes all necessary provisions for these installations:
Ceiling Mount
Pendant Mount
Corner Mount
Horizontal Wall Mount
Vertical Wall Mount
FVS compact fluorescent (2 lamp luminaire):

Voltage 120277 (50 or 60 Hz) 347 (50 or 60 Hz) Wattage/ Lamp 40 40 Hub Size (4)
3 3
Cat. # FVS20/UNV FVS23
Cat. # with Class II, Div. 1 Suitability FVS20/UNV S813 FVS23 S813
Accessories (Ordered Separately):

Description Trunnion arm kit Slipfitter adapter to be used with trunnion arm Cat. # FVS K5 SFA6
/4" /4"
Dimensions:
FVS with Trunnion Arm: 261/4" x 13.5" W x 3.12" H
6L
Top View
Side View
FVS With Lens Open
FVS Showing Mounting Strap Positioning
1020
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Luminaire: FVS
Photometric Data
6L
Lamp: (2) F40BX/SPX35/RS single-ended fluorescent. Total initial lumens: 6300
Isofootcandle Chart
Coefficients of Utilization
Effective Floor Cavity Reflectance 20% Room Cavity Ratio Eff. Ceil. 80* Wall 50* 30* 10* 50* 30* 10* 50* 30* 10* 50* 30* 10* 50* 30* 10* 0* 1 .621 .594 .569 .606 .582 .560 .580 .560 .541 .555 .539 .524 .533 .520 .507 .494 2 .538 .495 .459 .526 .487 .453 .503 .470 .442 .483 .455 .431 .464 .441 .421 .407 3 .469 .419 .378 .459 .412 .374 .441 .400 .367 .423 .389 .360 .407 .378 .353 .339 4 .414 .359 .317 .405 .354 .314 .389 .345 .310 .374 .336 .305 .361 .327 .300 .286 5 .367 .312 .270 .360 .308 .268 .347 .300 .265 .334 .293 .262 .322 .287 .258 .245 6 .329 .273 .234 .323 .270 .232 .311 .265 .230 .301 .259 .227 .290 .254 .225 .212 7 .297 .242 .204 .291 .240 .203 .281 .235 .201 .272 .230 .199 .264 .226 .197 .185 8 .269 .216 .180 .265 .214 .179 .256 .210 .178 .248 .207 .176 .241 .203 .175 .163 9 .246 .195 .160 .242 .193 .160 .234 .190 .159 .227 .187 .157 .221 .184 .156 .145 10 .225 .176 .144 .222 .175 .143 .216 .172 .143 .210 .170 .142 .204 .167 .141 .130
6L
70*
50*
30*

Mtg. Hgt. 8' 10' 12' 16' 10* A 5.00 3.20 2.22 1.25 B 3.00 1.92 1.33 0.75 C 1.00 0.64 0.44 0.25 D 0.50 0.32 0.22 0.13 E 0.20 0.13 0.09 0.05 0*
Spacing to Mounting Height Ratio

Along lamp axis (A-A) Across lamp axis (B-B) 0.6 1.1
*Percent Reflectance. FVS suitable for Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G when ordered with suffix S813.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1021
6L
EVFT Illuminator Long Twin Tube

Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups B & C (suffix GB), D Cl. I, Zone 1, Group IIB + H2 (suffix GB), IIA Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. III Simultaneous Presence
Paint Spray Marine & Wet Locations 3, 3R, 4, 4X; IP66
Applications:
Illuminator Compact Fluorescent Luminaires are used: In areas made hazardous by the presence of flammable gases and vapors, combustible dusts, or easily ignitable fibers and flyings In areas where combustible dusts and flammable gases are present simultaneously In applications involving low mounting heights, restricted mounting space, or where luminaire weight must be minimized In areas where corrosion, vibration, moisture, dirt, and rough usage are a problem In refineries, chemical and petrochemical facilities, grain processing, handling and storage facilities, manufacturing plants, wastewater treatment facilities, airline and mass transit maintenance areas, paint spray facilities, breweries, pharmaceutical plants, and other areas where safe, reliable hazardous area lighting is required in a compact, cool operating and efficient light source
4 lamp with stainless steel wire guard and adjustable reflectors

NEC and CEC: Class I, Division 1, Group D Class I, Division 1, Group B, C, D (suffix GB) Class I, Zone 1, Group IIA Class I, Zone 1, Group IIB + H2 (suffix GB) Class II, Groups E, F, G Class III Simultaneous Presence (Cl. I and Cl. II) Paint Spray Note: Aiming Limitations Cl. II, Cl. III & Simultaneous Presence - Aim Down to Horizontal - Cannot aim up UL Standards: 844 Hazardous (Classified) Locations 1598 Luminaires 1598A Marine Locations CSA Standards: C22.2 No. 137
Options:
Description Suffix Fused to protect circuit under abnormal conditions (not available on CSA certified luminaires) ............ S658 Luminaire supplied with lamps ........ S714 Class I, Groups B and C suitability pendant mount only ......................... GB
Features:
Efficient fluorescent light source in 78 and 156 watts Adjustable right and left asymmetrical reflectors provide excellent light "aimability" ideal for task oriented lighting Compact, lightweight, and low profile design allows easy installation and broad industrial application Cast copper-free aluminum with epoxy powder finish (less than 0.4 of 1% copper) provides excellent resistance to corrosion Versatile luminaire housing provides choice of pendant, wall, or ceiling mount Suitable for paint spray areas; linear light source provides excellent color rendition for paint spray tasks; easy to install, disposable, clear tube wrap helps maintain maximum light output during painting operations Threaded construction, factory wiring and sealing help minimize installation time; no external seals are required Fixtures are used with two or four long twin tube single-ended fluorescent lamps Optional stainless steel guard provides extra protection for lamps and lamp tube Optional clear polycarbonate tube provides 360 protection for lamps and lamp tube; ideal for maintenance pit and pharmaceutical applications Grounding connection for safety Available for 120 or 277 VAC Standard electronic ballast
Electrical Ratings:
Input voltage 120 or 277 VAC, 60 Hz Wattages 78 2 lamp luminaire 156 4 lamp luminaire
Fixture Weights
Illuminator lbs. 2 lamp with guard ............................. 19.5 4 lamp with guards ........................... 36.5 RAL1, RAR1 reflectors (each) ........... 3.0 Deduct for luminaire without P51 Guard: 1 lb. for 2 lamp 2 lbs. for 4 lamp
6L
Standard Materials:
Center and ballast housings, end caps copper-free aluminum Lamp tube heat-resistant glass Guards stainless steel or clear polycarbonate material Reflectors aluminum
Standard Finishes:
Center and ballast housings, end caps, guards natural Reflectors white epoxy finish

Luminaire Type 2 and 4 Lamp Minimum Operating Temp. 10C (50F) Maximum Ambient Temp. 40C (104F) Class I, Division 1 & Zone 1 Class II, Division 1 Supply Simultaneous Presence Wire T4A 75C
1022
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups B & C (Suffix B), D Cl. I, Zone 1, Groups IIB + H2 (Suffix B), IIA Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. III, Simultaneous Presence
Paint Spray Marine & Wet Locations 3, 3R, 4, 4X; IP66
6L
Class I Cat. # with Group D Suitability Style 2 Lamp 4 Lamp Hub Size (In.)
3 3 3 3
Class I Cat. # with Group B, C & D Suitability Without Guard EVFT22320 GB EVFT22370 GB EVFT24320 GB EVFT24370 GB With P51 Guard EVFT22321 GB EVFT22371 GB EVFT24321 GB EVFT24371 GB
Luminaire Voltage 120 277 120 277
Without Guard EVFT22320 EVFT22370 EVFT24320 EVFT24370
With P51 Guard EVFT22321 EVFT22371 EVFT24321 EVFT24371
/4 /4 /4 /4
P51 supplied in separate carton.
Accessories:
Type Cat. # Stainless steel wire guard.......... P51 Reflector right hand ................... RAR1 Reflector left hand...................... RAL1 Polycarbonate tube (not used with optional stainless steel wire guard) ........................ PG1 Disposable clear wrap 5 pack (for use with optional polycarbonate tube) ................... PTW1
Aiming Limitations:
In Class II, Class III and Simultaneous Presence locations Aim down to horizontal To prevent dust from accumulating in reflector, do not aim up The Illuminator lighting fixtures are designed for operation with the lamp in a horizontal to base down position
Dimensions:
RAL1 RAR1 Reflectors (as viewed facing front of fixture) Note: For 4 lamp unit, you must order one of each refractor, if required. Illuminator two lamp luminaire with reflector
6L
Stainless steel guard
Polycarbonate tube and retaining plate
Illuminator four lamp luminaire with reflectors Disposable polyester tube wrap (used over optional polycarbonate tube)
For GB suffix (Groups B & C) this dimension is 34.0". For CSA certified fixtures this dimension is 359/ 16". For GB suffix (Groups B & C) this dimension is 8.38".
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1023
6L

Photometric Data
Illuminator two lamp luminaire with reflector (without guard)

Lamps: Two 39 watt BIAX* fluorescent

Mtg. Ht. (ft.) 8 10 12 16 A 10.0 6.4 4.4 2.5 B 5.00 3.20 2.22 1.25 C 2.00 1.28 0.89 0.50 D 1.00 0.64 0.44 0.25 E 0.50 0.32 0.22 0.13 F 0.25 0.16 0.11 0.06
Illuminator four lamp luminaire with reflectors (without guards)

Lamps: Four 39 watt BIAX* fluorescent
6L

Mtg. Ht. (ft.) 10 12 16 20 A 8.0 5.6 3.1 2.0 B 4.00 2.78 1.56 1.00 C 2.00 1.39 0.78 0.50 D 1.00 0.69 0.39 0.25 E 0.50 0.35 0.20 0.13 F 0.20 0.14 0.08 0.05
*BIAX is a trademark of the General Electric Company.
1024
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Coefficients of Utilization
6L
Luminaire: EVFT 22320 with RAR1 Reflector Lamps: Two F39BX/SPX35/RS Lumen Rating: 2900 Lumens/Lamp
Effective Floor Cavity Reflectance 20% % Reflectance Eff. Ceil. Wall 0 1 80 70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 0 .51 .51 .51 .51 .49 .49 .49 .49 .47 .47 .47 .45 .45 .45 .43 .43 .43 .43 .46 .44 .41 .40 .45 .43 .41 .39 .41 .39 .38 .39 .38 .37 .37 .36 .35 .35 Room Cavity Ratio 5 6 .31 .25 .21 .18 .30 .25 .21 .18 .24 .21 .18 .23 .20 .18 .22 .20 .18 .17 .29 .23 .19 .16 .28 .22 .18 .16 .21 .18 .16 .21 .18 .15 .20 .17 .15 .14
2 .41 .38 .35 .32 .40 .37 .34 .31 .35 .33 .31 .34 .32 .30 .33 .31 .29 .28
3 .38 .33 .29 .26 .37 .32 .29 .26 .31 .28 .26 .30 .27 .25 .29 .27 .25 .24
4 .34 .29 .25 .22 .33 .28 .25 .22 .27 .24 .22 .26 .24 .21 .25 .23 .21 .20
7 .26 .20 .16 .14 .26 .20 .16 .14 .19 .16 .13 .19 .16 .13 .18 .15 .13 .12
8 .24 .18 .14 .12 .24 .18 .14 .12 .17 .14 .12 .17 .14 .11 .16 .13 .11 .10
9 .22 .16 .13 .10 .22 .16 .12 .10 .15 .12 .10 .15 .12 .10 .14 .12 .10 .09
10 .21 .15 .11 .09 .20 .14 .11 .09 .14 .11 .09 .14 .11 .09 .13 .10 .08 .08
70
50
30
10 0
DETERMINED IN ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENT IES PUBLISHED PROCEDURES
Luminaire: EVFT 24320 with RAR1 & RAL1 Reflectors Lamps: Four F39BX/SPX35/RS Lumen Rating: 2900 Lumens/Lamp
Effective Floor Cavity Reflectance 20% % Reflectance Eff. Ceil. Wall 0 1 80 70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 0 48 .48 .48 .48 .47 .47 .47 .47 .45 .45 .45 .43 .43 .43 .41 .41 .41 .41 .44 .42 .40 .39 .43 .41 .40 .38 .39 .38 .37 .38 .37 .36 .36 .35 .35 .34 Room Cavity Ratio 5 6 .30 .25 .21 .19 .29 .25 .21 .18 .24 .21 .18 .23 .20 .18 .22 .20 .18 .17 .28 .22 .19 .16 .27 .22 .18 .16 .21 .18 .16 .20 .18 .16 .20 .17 .15 .15
2 .40 .37 .34 .31 .39 .36 .33 .31 .34 .32 .30 .33 .31 .30 .32 .30 .29 .28
3 .37 .32 .29 .26 .36 .32 .29 .26 .30 .28 .26 .29 .27 .25 .28 .26 .25 .24
4 .33 .29 .25 .22 .33 .28 .25 .22 .27 .24 .22 .26 .23 .21 .25 .23 .21 .20
7 .26 .20 .16 .14 .25 .20 .16 .14 .19 .16 .14 .18 .16 .13 .18 .15 .13 .13
8 .24 .18 .14 .12 .23 .18 .14 .12 .17 .14 .12 .17 .14 .12 .16 .13 .12 .11
9 .22 .16 .13 .10 .21 .16 .12 .10 .15 .12 .10 .15 .12 .10 .14 .12 .10 .09
10 .20 .15 .11 .09 .20 .14 .11 .09 .14 .11 .09 .14 .11 .09 .13 .11 .09 .08
6L
70
50
30
10 0
DETERMINED IN ACCORDANCE WITH CURRENT IES PUBLISHED PROCEDURES
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1025
6L
NFL Series Fluorescent Luminaires
Higher Ambient Suitability: 55C Cold Weather Start (32W T8 Lamps) Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 2, Group IIC
Wet Locations 3, 3R, 4, 4X
Applications:
The NFL Light Luminaires are used: In non-hazardous locations where dust, dirt, combustible vapors, smoke, fumes, moisture, corrosive, and wet conditions are present Where lamps may be broken due to physical abuse or movable equipment, such as in manufacturing areas or warehouses Where cleanliness and sanitation are prime factors such as in dairies, canneries, food processing plants, bottling plants, and laboratories In dock areas for protection against salt spray In areas where low mounting height and the even light distribution associated with a line type light source are required
Standard Materials:
Housing non-metallic, one piece fiberglass-reinforced polyester Latches Celcon acetal plastic Lens acrylic plastic Gaskets seamless thermoset polyurethane Mounting Bracket stainless steel
Celecon is a trade name of Hoechst Celanese.
Sources/Wattage: luminaires are for use with the following lamps NFL2140 one 40 W long twin tube NFL4232 two 32W T8 lamps NFL4240 two 34W "F40 Style" T12 lamps Voltages 120V 60Hz 120 277V, 50 60 Hz 347V 60 Hz Conduit Entries Two 1/2" inch Myers hubs, one on each end
Key Features:
UL, cUL Listed for Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D areas with ambient suitability of 40C (104F) and 55C (131F) ambient suitability NEMA 4X with Myers Hubs and threaded metal plug (furnished) Non-metallic construction enclosure is corrosion-resistant Continuous form-in-place gasket ensures dust-tight, moisture-tight, and wet locations integrity Molded-in-place mounting studs eliminate the need of bracket gaskets Standard construction includes: S.S. mounting brackets Electronic ballast Cold weather ballast (4' F32 T8) S.S. mounting bracket combination ceiling and chain S.S. mounting brackets provide superior corrosion resistance Electronic ballast for energy efficiency Cold Weather Ballast (4' F32 T8) Two 1/2" conduit Myers Hubs for end and feed through wiring simplify installation and wiring Full metal fixture interior provides improved photometrics as well as access to and concealment of ballast and wiring Provisions (drill mark) on 4 ft. unit to field drill for pendant mounting for application and installation flexibility
Standard Finishes:
Fiberglass housing white Acrylic plastic lens crepe pattern
Options:
Description Suffix Fused.................................. S658 Factory assembled with lamps installed ................... FA Battery back-up emergency ballast (NFL 2140 and NFL 4232 only).... S799* Increased impact-resistant lens (acrylic crepe pattern).. DR1295046* Polycarbonate lens............. DR1295306* Stainless steel latches........ S863* Tamperproof latches........... S861*
For non-hazardous locations. *UNV voltages: 120, 208, 230, 240, 277, 5060 Hz.
6L

Ambient temperature range suitability: Two lamp, 32W T8, 4 ft luminaire All others Supply wire C -18C to 55C 0C to 55C 75C min.
Luminaire Cat. # NFL2140/UNV NFL2140/347 NFL4232/UNV NFL4240/120 NFL4240/277 NFL4240/347 N2FL4232/UNV N2FL4232/347 2 ft/ 1-lamp 4 ft/2-lamp 4ft/2-lamp 4ft/2-lamp Size/# of Lamp(s) Wattage/ Lamp type 40W T5 compact single ended 32W T8 rapid start 34W T12 "F40 Style" rapid start 32W T8 rapid start Voltage/Hz 120 / 60 120277/5060 347 / 60 120 / 60 120277/5060 120 / 60 277 / 60 347 / 60 347 / 60

UL Listed 844 cUL Wet locations 4X
1026
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Photometric Data
6L
Luminaire: All NFL Luminaires

Candlepower Distribution Curve (in Candelas) Candelas
Angle 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 Along 1049 1034 978 866 762 606 416 228 92 17 19 10 5 4 4 4 4 0 0 Across 1049 1056 1071 1075 1027 939 838 723 549 363 243 131 46 20 9 3 0 0 0 Photometric data, developed using two (2) F32T8/35K 2850 lumen lamps, represents the performance of all NFL series luminaires. Coefficient of Utilization These values are for all NFL series luminaires (Do not use multipliers). Candlepower Distribution Curve (in candelas) and Zonal Lumens These values are for all NFL series luminaires, adjusted by conversion factors (multipliers) below. Example: Candlepower at 20 across for NFL4232 using two (2) F32T/35K lamps (5700 lumen total) is 1071 candelas. Candlepower at 20 across for NFL2140 using one (1) T5 compact lamp (3100 lumen total) is 1071 x .55 = 589 candelas. Lamp Luminaire Series NFL2140 NFL4232 NFL4240 Qty 2 2 1 Watts 32 34 40 Type (Lumens ea.) F32T8/35K (2850) F40T12/RS (2650) T5 Compact (3150) Conversion Factor (multipliers)
Zonal Lumens
Zone 030 040 060 090 0180 Lumens 862 1462 2778 4130 4499
6L
1.0 0.93 0.55
Coefficient of Utilization: For all NFL Series Light Luminaires

Effective Floor Cavity Reflectance 20% % Reflectance Eff. Ceiling Wall 80 70 50 30 10 70 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 0 Room Cavity Ratio 1 2 3 .83 .78 .74 .71 .80 .76 .72 .69 .71 .68 .66 .67 .65 .62 .63 .61 .59 .57 .75 .67 .61 .56 .72 .65 .60 .55 .61 .57 .53 .58 .54 .51 .54 .51 .48 .46 .68 .59 .52 .46 .65 .57 .51 .46 .54 .48 .44 .51 .46 .42 .48 .44 .41 .39 4 .62 .52 .44 .39 .59 .50 .43 .38 .47 .42 .37 .45 .40 .36 .42 .38 .35 .33 5 .56 .45 .38 .32 .54 .44 .37 .32 .42 .35 .31 .39 .34 .30 .37 .33 .29 .27 6 .51 .40 .33 .28 .49 .39 .32 .27 .37 .31 .26 .35 .30 .26 .33 .29 .25 .23 7 .47 .36 .29 .24 .46 .35 .28 .23 .33 .27 .23 .32 .26 .22 .30 .25 .22 .20 8 .44 .32 .25 .20 .42 .31 .25 .20 .30 .24 .20 .28 .23 .19 .27 .22 .18 .17 9 .40 .29 .22 .17 .39 .28 .22 .17 .27 .21 .17 .25 .20 .16 .24 .19 .16 .14 10 .37 .26 .20 .15 .36 .26 .19 .15 .24 .19 .15 .23 .18 .14 .22 .17 .14 .12 1027
70
50
30
10 0
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
6L
Dimensions: Net Luminaire Weights

Luminaire Series NFL2140 NFL4232 NFL4240 Weight (lbs.) 9.1 14.3 14.3

Cat. No. NFL4232 NFL4232 NFL4240 NFL4240 NFL2140 NFL2140 Watts 32 32 34 34 40 40 Ambient Temp. C 40 55 40 55 40 55 Lamp Type T8 T8 T12 T12 T12 T12 Supply Wire Temp. C 60 75 60 75 60 75 Class I, Div. 2 Temp. Rating T6 T5 T6 T5 T6 T5 Class II Temp. Rating Simultaneous Presence Class I, Div. 2 -
6L
1028
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
eLLK Series Fluorescent Non-metallic Luminaires
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 1, Group IIC Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G (Canada) Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G (US) Cl. III, Simultaneous Presence
Wet Locations 3, 3R, 4, 4X; IP66 ATEX Certified
6L
Applications:
eLLK Fixtures are used in hazardous areas where moisture or corrosion may be a problem Offshore oil platforms, pharmaceuticals, plants, oil refineries Where battery back-up is critical In non-hazardous and industrial locations
Features:
IEC: Zone 1 and 2 areas NEC/CEC: Zone 1, Division 2 areas Electronic Ballast: Operates at voltage range of 110254 VAC 10%, 5060 Hz Wide ambient temperature range suitability -25C to 350C Lamps operate independently one lamp failure will not affect remaining lamp operation Standard bi-pin lamps most common lamp used in office enviroments; energyefficient and cost effective Interlocked switch automatically cuts power to both lamps and ballast when the lens is opened Removable lens hinged on both sides for easy installation and maintenance Dual entries extra large wire well eliminates need for separate junction boxes (own with cable gland and conduit hub) Corrosion-resistant construction - nonmetallic body, gasketed lenses, and lens locking system for an IP66, NEMA 4X rating Battery Back-up Features: Operates one lamp for 11/2 hours should power go out Microprocessor monitors the charging functions of the battery LEDs provide visual indication of battery life

NEC and CEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C, D Class I, Zone 1, Group IIC Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G (Canada) Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G (US) Class III, Simultaneous Presence (Cl. I and Cl. II) UL Standards: 1598 Luminaires CSA Standards: E79 Series ATEX Directive 94/9/EC: Ex II 2 G Ex de IIC T4 Ex II 2 D Ex tD A21 IP66 T80C EC-Type Examination Certificate: BVS 09 ATEX E034 GOST-R, GOST-K
6L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1029
6L
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 1, Group IIC Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G (Canada) Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G (US) Cl. III, Simultaneous Presence
Rated Voltage 120V-240V, 50-60 Hz 120V-240V, 50-60 Hz 120V-240V, 50-60 Hz 120V-240V, 50-60 Hz 120V-240V, 50-60 Hz 120V-240V, 50-60 Hz 120V, 50-60 Hz 240V, 50-60 Hz 120V, 50-60 Hz 240V, 50-60 Hz 120V-240V, 50-60 Hz 120V-240V, 50-60 Hz 120V-240V, 50-60 Hz 120V-240V, 50-60 Hz 240V, 50-60 Hz 240V, 50-60 Hz 120V, 50-60 Hz 120V, 50-60 Hz 240V, 50-60 Hz 240V, 50-60 Hz 120V, 50-60 Hz 120V, 50-60 Hz Rated Current
Wet Locations 3, 3R, 4, 4X; IP66 ATEX Certified
Cat. # Description eLLK 92 2217 /U240 1/6 2 NPT 3/4" eLLK 92 2217 /U240 1/6 2 NPT 1/2" eLLK 92 2217 /U240 2/6 2 NPT 3/4" eLLK 92 4232 /U240 1/6 2 NPT 3/4" eLLK 92 4232 /U240 1/6 2 NPT 1/2" eLLK 92 4232 /U240 2/6 2 NPT 3/4" eLLK 92NIB 2217 /U120 2/6 2 NPT 3/4" eLLK 92NIB 2217 /U240 2/6 2 NPT 3/4" eLLK 92NIB 4232 /U120 2/6 2 NPT 3/4" eLLK 92NIB 4232 /U240 2/6 2 NPT 3/4" eLLK 92 018/18 1/6-1 M eLLK 92 018/18 2/6-2 M eLLK 92 036/36 1/6-1 M eLLK 92 036/36 2/6-2 M eLLK 92 018 /18NIB 1/6-1 M eLLK 92 018 /18NIB 2/6-2 M eLLK 92 018 /18NIB 1/6-1 M eLLK 92 018 /18NIB 2/6-2 M eLLK 92 036 /36NIB 1/6-1 M eLLK 92 036 /36NIB 2/6-2 M eLLK 92 036 /36NIB 1/6-1 M eLLK 92 036 /36NIB 2/6-2 M Length & Lamp Type Lamp Watt 2 Lamp Conduit Hub Size* 2 ea. - 3/4" Myers hub 2 ea. - /2" Myers hub
1
Comments
NEC (NOT ATEX CERTIFIED)

1 2265 875 309 1 2265 875 310 1 2265 875 311 1 2266 875 309 1 2266 875 310 1 2266 875 311 1 2260 879 333 1 2260 879 311 1 2261 879 333 1 2261 879 311 2-foot T8 NEC 2-foot T8 NEC 2-foot T8 NEC 4-foot T8 NEC 4-foot T8 NEC 4-foot T8 NEC 2-foot T8 NEC 2-foot T8 NEC 4-foot T8 NEC 4-foot T8 NEC 17W 17W 17W 32W 32W 32W 17W (with battery) 17W (with battery) 32W (with battery) 32W (with battery) 0.38-0.18A 0.38-0.18A 0.38-0.18A 0.7-0.34A 0.7-0.34A 0.7-0.34A 0.38A 0.18A 0.7A 0.34A No through-feed No through-feed Through-feed No through-feed No through-feed Through-feed Through-feed Through-feed Through-feed Through-feed
4 ea. - 3/4" Myers hub 2 ea. - /4" Myers hub

3
2 ea. - /2" Myers hub

1
4 ea. - 3/4" Myers hub 4 ea. - 3/4" Myers hub 4 ea. - /4" Myers hub
3
4 ea. - 3/4" Myers hub 4 ea. - 3/4" Myers hub
IEC (ATEX CERTIFIED)

1 2265 875 109 1 2265 875 111 1 2266 875 109 1 2266 875 111 1 2260 879 109 2-foot T8 IEC 2-foot T8 IEC 4-foot T8 IEC 4-foot T8 IEC 2-foot T8 IEC 2-foot T8 IEC 2-foot T8 IEC 2-foot T8 IEC 4-foot T8 IEC 4-foot T8 IEC 4-foot T8 IEC 4-foot T8 IEC 18W 18W 36W 36W 18W (with battery) 18W (with battery) 18W (with battery) 18W (with battery) 36W (with battery) 36W (with battery) 36W (with battery) 36W (with battery) 0.38-0.18A 0.38-0.18A 0.7-0.34A 0.7-0.34A 0.18A 0.18A 0.38A 0.38A 0.18A 0.18A 0.7A 0.7A 2 ea. - 20mm metric No through-feed 4 ea. - 20mm metric Through-feed 2 ea. - 20mm metric No through-feed 4 ea. - 20mm metric Through-feed 2 ea. - 20mm metric No through-feed 4 ea. - 20mm metric Through-feed 2 ea. - 20mm metric No through-feed 4 ea. - 20mm metric Through-feed 2 ea. - 20mm metric No through-feed 4 ea. - 20mm metric Through-feed 2 ea. - 20mm metric No through-feed 4 ea. - 20mm metric Through-feed
6L
1 2260 879 111 1 2260 879 409 1 2260 879 411 1 2261 879 109 1 2261 879 111 1 2261 879 409 1 2261 879 411
*2 hubs provided. May be connected through-feed or tandam. Cable glands ordered separately for 3/ 4" (remove hubs) or M 25 openings (remove hubs).
Lamp Selection:
NEC LAMP
Type Phillips GE Osram/Sylvania 17W F17T8/Tl841 F17T8/SPX41 F017/841 18W 3 2475 900 081
Weights:
32W F32T8/TL841 F32T8/SPX41 FO32/841 36W 3 2475 900 082
IEC LAMP
Type CEAG 1030
Watts 17W and 17W and 32W and 32W and
Weight 18W 18W (with battery) 36W 36W (with battery) 4.6 Kg. (10 lb.) 10 Kg. (22 lb.) 6.7 Kg. (14 lb.) 12 Kg. (26 lb.)
US: 1-866-764-5454

Accessories: Dimensions
In Millimeters:
Accessories Dimensions
6L
Eyebolt A2
Hexagon Screw S4
Standard Luminaire with Back-up Corrosion Protection Galvanized Stainless Steel Stainless Steel R12 R14 R22 R32 Hot Galvanized CrNi Hot Galvanized Hot Galvanized Pipe DIN 11/4" 11/4" 11/2" 2" Outer D (mm) 3842 3842 4751 5660 42.4 Quantity per Luminaire Cat. # 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2480 002 000 2 2480 054 000 2 2480 092 000 2 2 2 2 2480 2480 2480 2480 462 464 472 482 000 000 000 000
Type Eyebolt A2 Hexagon Screw S4 Ceiling Mounting Bracket D92 Pipe Clamp Ceiling Mounting Bracket D92
Hexagon Key SW13 eLLK 92 Wall Bracket W27 Hot Galvanized
3 2485 000 005 2 2483 027 000
6L
Pipe Clamp
Wall Bracket W27
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1031
6L
Photometric Data
Photometric data developed using two (2) F32T8 3350 lumen lamps. For the 17W eLLK, use a 0.45 multiplier.
Effective Floor Cavity Reflectance 20% Room Cavity Eff. Ceil. Wall Work 1 2 80* 70* 20* 41 49 50* 20* 30 38 30* 20* 23 30 10* 20* 18 25 70* 70* 50* 30* 10* 50* 30* 10* 50* 30* 10* 50* 30* 10* 0* 20* 20* 20* 20* 20* 20* 20* 20* 20* 20* 20* 20* 20* 20* 40 29 22 18 27 21 17 26 20 17 24 20 16 14 47 37 30 24 35 28 24 38 27 23 31 26 22 20 Ratio 3 55 44 36 30 53 42 35 30 40 34 29 37 32 28 35 31 27 25 4 61 50 43 37 58 49 42 36 46 40 35 43 38 34 41 36 33 31 5 65 55 48 42 62 54 47 42 50 45 40 47 43 39 45 41 37 35 6 70 62 55 50 68 60 54 49 56 51 47 58 49 45 50 46 43 41 7 74 67 61 56 71 65 59 54 61 56 52 57 53 50 54 51 48 46 8 77 71 65 61 74 68 64 59 64 60 57 60 57 54 57 54 52 49 9 80 75 70 66 77 72 68 64 68 64 61 64 61 58 60 68 55 53
6L
50*
30*
10* 0*
1032
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
nLLK Series Non-metallic Fluorescent Luminaires
CI. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D CI. I, Zone 2, AEx nA II CI. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Enclosure Type 4X
Wet Locations UL and cUL Listed ATEX Certified
6L
The Cooper Crouse-Hinds SpecOne nLLK Series Fluorescent Luminaire is an ideal source of general illumination indoors or out, in ordinary or hazardous environments. Its heavy-duty, non-metallic construction stands up to tough physical and environmental demands, making it an excellent choice where dust, dirt, gas, vapor, smoke, fumes, moisture, corrosive and wet conditions are present. As with all SpecOne products, the nLLK Luminaire meets the standards and codes of regulating agencies throughout the world, which simplifies product specifying for multinational users.
Applications:
nLLK Series Luminaires are used: In indoor or outdoor, ordinary or hazardous areas Where a heavy-duty, non-metallic luminaire is required to hold up to tough physical and environmental demands including corrosives, water, dust, and extreme temperatures Manufacturing plants Heavy industrial facilities Industrial process facilities Refineries Chemical Petrochemical Pharmaceutical Wastewater and sewage treatment plants In areas where low mounting height, immediate full illumination, and the even light distribution associated with a linetype light source are required Loading docks Tunnels Stairways Where wet location or Type 4X protection is required Dock areas Production platforms In hose down areas where cleanliness and sanitation are prime factors Dairies Canneries Food processing plants Bottling plants Laboratories

NEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class I, Zone 2, AEx nA II Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Wet Locations UL Listed CEC: Class I, Zone 2, Ex nA II Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G cUL Listed (certified by UL) Enclosure: Type 4X IP65 UL Standards: 844 Hazardous (Zones Classified) Locations 1598 Luminaires CSA Standards: C22.2 No. 9 CAN/CSAE79-15
Standard Materials:
One-piece housing fiberglassreinforced polyester Lens polycarbonate Gasket silicone
Standard Finishes:
Fiberglass housing natural (white) Lens natural (clear)
Sources/Wattages Two (2) 17W or two (2) 32W linear fluorescent Voltages 120277 V, 5060 Hz 347 V, 60 Hz consult factory Hub Size Four 25 mm entries, two on each end, three plugged Two Myers STM2 25 mm to 3/ 4" NPT adapter hubs provided standard for through-feed or tandem wiring
6L
ATEX
ATEX Directive 94/9/EC Ex II 3G Ex nA de IIC T4 Ex II 3G Ex nA de mb IIC T4 Type of Protection Ex II 3D Ex tD A22 IP66 T80C EC-Type Examination Certificate BVS 09 ATEX E147
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1033
6L
Wet Locations UL and cUL Listed
IP65, Type 4X heavy-duty construction Non-metallic body, gasketed lens and unique labyrinth lens locking system Dust-tight, water-tight and moisture-tight Corrosion and impact-resistant Ideal for outdoor applications Electronic ballast Lower ambient temperatures suitability to -18C High-power factor ballast (+90%) allows for more luminaires per circuit Standard T8 bi-pin lamps Most common lamp used; energy-efficient and cost-effective Removable lens Hinged on both sides for easy installation and maintenance Easy wiring and installation Four 25 mm entries; two Myers 3/4" NPT adapter hubs supplied standard Suitable for through-feed or tandem applications Extra large wire well eliminates need for separate junction boxes Worldwide suitability NEC/CEC: Class I, Zone 2 and Division 2 areas IEC/CENELEC certified luminaires available (consult factory)
Cat. # 1 3465 217 021 1 3465 217 347 1 3465 232 021 1 3465 232 347 1 3465 218 011 1 3465 218 021 1 3465 236 011 1 3465 236 021 Description nLLK 98 2217 /UNV nLLK 98 2217 /347 2/5 2 NPT 3/4" M UL nLLK 98 4232 /UNV nLLK 98 4232 /347 2/5 2 NPT 3/4" M UL nLLK 08 018/18 nLLK 08 018/18 nLLK 08 036/36 nLLK 08 036/36 Length & Lamp Type 2-foot T8 2-foot T8 4-foot T8 4-foot T8 2-foot T8 2-foot T8 4-foot T8 4-foot T8 Lamp Watt - 2 Lamp 17W 17W 32W 32W 18W 18W 36W 36W Rated Voltage 120V-277V, 60 Hz 347V, 60 Hz 120V-277V, 60 Hz 347V, 60 Hz 220V-240V, 50-60 Hz 220V-240V, 50-60 Hz 220V-240V, 50-60 Hz 220V-240V, 50-60 Hz Rated Current Conduit Hub Size 0.16A 0.16A 0.31A 0.31A 0.16A 0.16A 0.31A 0.31A 2 ea. - 3/4" Myers hub 2 ea. - 3/4" Myers hub 2 ea. - 3/4" Myers hub 2 ea. - 3/4" Myers hub 2 ea. - 25mm metric 2 ea. - 20mm metric 2 ea. - 25mm metric 2 ea. - 20mm metric Comments Through-feed Through-feed Through-feed Through-feed Through-feed Through-feed Through-feed Through-feed
NEC (NOT ATEX CERTIFIED)
IEC (ATEX CERTIFIED) 6L
Accessories:
Description SW13 hexagon key (for maintenance and lamp replacement) Myers 25mm to 3/4" NPT adapter hub Type Eyebolt A2 Hexagon Screw S4 Ceiling Mounting Bracket D92 Pipe Clamp Hexagon Key SW13 eLLK 92 Wall Bracket W27 Corrosion Protection Galvanized Stainless Steel Stainless Steel R12 R14 R22 R32 Hot Galvanized Hot Galvanized CrNi Hot Galvanized Hot Galvanized Pipe DIN 11/4" 11/4" 11/2" 2" Outer D (mm) 3842 3842 4751 5660 42.4 Quantity per Luminaire 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 Cat. # 3 2485 000 005 STM 2 Cat. # 2 2480 002 000 2 2480 054 000 2 2480 092 000 2 2 2 2 2480 2480 2480 2480 462 464 472 482 000 000 000 000
3 2485 000 005 2 2483 027 000
1034
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Wet Locations UL and cUL Listed
6L
Photometric Data:
Accessories:
Temperature Performance:
Minimum Starting Temperature: -18C Class I, Div. 2 Class II, Div. 1 (CEC) Watts Ambient (Class I, Zone 2) Class II, Div. 2 (NEC) Two 17W T8 lamps 40C T4 T6 Two 32W T8 lamps 40C T4 T6 Supply Wire Temp.C 60 60
Eyebolt A2
Hexagon Screw S4
6L
Maintenance and Relamping:

(eLLK Series Div. 1/Zone 1 luminaire is shown. Maintenance procedures are the same for the nLLK.) 1.One quarter turn with the SW13 hexagon key or a 5/16" (M8) Allen hex head wrench releases multiple locking points. 2.Lamps can be stored in open lens, freeing up hands for easy relamping. 3.Replace the bi-pin lamp lock with one quarter turn of the wrench for an IP65, Type 4X seal.
Ceiling Mounting Bracket D92
Dimensions (mm) and Weight:

Weight: 8.8 lbs. (4.0 kg.)18W 13.2 lbs. (6.0 kg.)36W
Pipe Clamp
Wall Bracket W27
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1035
6L
FVN Series Fluorescent Luminaires
CI. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D CI. I, Zone 2, Group IIC CI. II, Div. 1, Groups F, G CI. III & Simultaneous Presence
Applications:
FVN Luminaires are ideal for use: In areas made hazardous by the abnormal conditions resulting in the presence of flammable vapors or gases and combustible dusts as defined by the National Electrical Code Where broken lamps would damage machinery or processes, or harm people working in the area In areas where stringent sanitation requirements exist
Features:
One-piece seamless sheet steel housing with welded end caps keeps dirt, dust and moisture away from ballast and lamps; easy to clean A silicone rubber gasket provides a dust-tight seal between the lens/frame assembly and housing Lens/frame assembly is hinged and wireway cover is held by safety chain for ease of lamp replacement and maintenance Polyester powder coat finish provides high reflectance and corrosion resistance for long life and dependable service Two 1/ 2" NPT pendant hubs and two 1/2" NPT thru-feed end hubs are standard Electronic ballast is standard on 32 and 54 watt luminaires (/UNV only) FVN Fluorescent Luminaires with T5 HO lamps offer: High lumen output per watt provides energy savings versus other higher wattage fluorescent luminaires with similar lumen output Longer lamp life and good lumen maintenance reduced maintenance and lamp replacement costs
Standard Materials:
Luminaire housing 20-gauge seamless sheet steel Lens/frame assembly stainless steel Glass 3/ 16" tempered Suspension flanges seamless sheet steel Gaskets silicone Lampholders white thermoset plastic Clamps stainless steel
Standard Finishes:
Reflector housings corrosion-resistant white polyester powder coat Lens/frame natural
Dimensions
In Inches:
40 8 1/2 53 1/4 15 7 1/4

NEC and CEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class I, Zone 2, Groups IIC Class II, Division 1, Groups F, G Class III Simultaneous Presence (Cl. I and Cl. II) UL Standards: 844 Hazardous (Classified) Areas 1598 Luminaires CSA Standards: C22.2 No. 137
6L
Ordering Information (Lamps not supplied):

Lamp Watts 32 32 40 40 40 60 60 60 60 Line Voltage/Hertz 120277/5060 347 / 60 120 / 5060 277 / 60 347 / 60 120 / 60 277 / 60 347 / 60 220 / 50 Lamp Type T8 T8 T12 T12 T12 T12HO T12HO T12HO T12HO Hub Size /2 1 /2 1 /2 1 /2 1 /2 1 /2 1 /2 1 /2 1 /2
1
2-Lamp Cat. # FVN4232TG/UNV FVN4232TG/347 FVN4240TG/120 FVN4240TG/277 FVN4240TG/347 FVN4260TG/120 FVN4260TG/277 FVN4260TG/347 FVN4260TG/200 50 FVN4254TG/UNV FVN4254TG/347
3-Lamp Cat. # FVN4332TG/UNV FVN4332TG/347 FVN4340TG/120 FVN4340TG/277 FVN4340TG/347
NPT NPT NPT NPT NPT NPT NPT NPT NPT
FVN Fluorescent Luminaires with T5 HO Lamps (Lamps not supplied) 1 54 120277/5060 T5HO /2 NPT 1 54 347 / 60 T5HO /2 NPT
1036
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
CI. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D CI. I, Zone 2, Group IIC CI. II, Div. 1, Groups F, G CI. III & Simultaneous Presence
6L
Options:
The following special options are available from the factory by adding suffix to luminaire Cat. No.: Description Low temperature electromagnetic ballast, 40W rated 0F (-18C), 60W rated -20F (-29C)............................................................. 45 angle brackets (field installed)........................................................................................................................................................ Adjustable angle brackets (field installed)............................................................................................................................................ Angle bars for chain suspension (field installed).................................................................................................................................. Individually fused ballast (internal)........................................................................................................................................................ Emergency lighting battery unit (Class I, Division 2 only). Also available for use with T5 lamps. Supplied with charging indicator light and instructions for use with a remote push-to-test station........................................................................................................
*If push-to-test operator installed in the luminaire is required, consult factory.
Suffix BY AG KH CX FB S799*

(Based on 40C ambient)
Cl. I, Div. 2 & Zone 2 Lamp 32W 40W 54W 60W T5 T5 T3C T4 2-Lamp T5 T5 3-Lamp T6 T6 T6 T6 2-Lamp T6 T6 Class II 3-Lamp Simultaneous Presence 2-Lamp T4 T4 T3C/T6 T4 T4 T4 3-Lamp Supply Wire 60C 60C 75C 90C
Photometric Data:
Luminaire with two 54W High Output T5 Linear Fluorescent Lamps FVN4254
6L
FVN .ies photometric files for use with our Luxicon Lighting Layout Software are available from our website.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1037
6L
Photometric Data
Luminaire: FVN with 2-40W lamps (tempered lens)

Lamp: Zonal Degrees: Zonal Lumens: Total Bare Lamp Lumens: 240/T-12 030 1182 6300 040 060 090 1971 3555 4284
Luminaire: FVN with 340W lamps (tempered lens)

Lamp: Zonal Degrees: Zonal Lumens: Total Bare Lamp Lumens: 340/T-12 030 1695 9450 040 060 090 2834 5099 6079
All data provided is for 2-lamp 40W RS cool white luminaires with tempered glass. Use 1.37 multiplier for 2-lamp 60W luminaires with tempered glass. Use .92 multiplier for 2-lamp 32W luminaires with tempered glass.
All data provided is for 2-lamp 40W RS cool white luminaires with tempered glass. Use 1.37 multiplier for 2-lamp 60W luminaires with tempered glass. Use .92 multiplier for 2-lamp 32W luminaires with tempered glass.
70
70
50
50
30
30
6L
10 0
10 0
70
70
50
50
30
30
10 0
10 0
1038
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
eLLB20 Series
Recessed Mount Fluorescent Luminaires
Applications:
eLLB Series Luminaires are used: For flush or surface ceiling mounting In clean room areas where it is important to have smooth, flush surfaces Where extreme cleanliness is required as in pharmaceutical, chemical, and electronics manufacturing facilities, as well as in paint shops and spray booths For tough environmental conditions involving corrosives, water, dust, and extreme temperatures In areas that require lamps to reach full illumination immediately Indoor and outdoor ordinary or hazardous areas For wet locations and areas with hose down / wash down requirements
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G (Canada) Cl. I, Zone 1, Group IIC Wet Locations ATEX Certified Enclosure Type 4X and IP66
6L

NEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class I, Zone 1, AEx ed IIC Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G UL Listed CEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class I, Zone 1, Ex eds IIC Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G cUL Listed Enclosure: Type 4X IP66 UL Standards: 844 Hazardous (Classified) Locations 1598 Luminaires CSA Standards: C22.2 No. 9 CAN/CSA-E60079-0:02 CAN/CSA-E60079-1:02 CAN/CSA-E60079-7 CAN/CSA-E61241-1-1:02

One-piece welded housing with fitted cover frame; the cover frame is an integral part of the housing to seal out dust and moisture Adjustable mounting clamps: Permanently attached and adjustable through the cover frame for easy installation Allow recess mounting in ceilings from 25mm to 100mm (1" to 4" approx.) thick for maximum mounting flexibility Support lugs (M8 x .6) to secure the luminaire to ceiling structural support members for safety Frameless tempered glass lens: 6mm (1/4") thick for added safety Interior hinge for maximum dust shedding Fitted with captive screws for ease of lamp replacement and maintenance Isolating switch turns off power to the ballast and lamps when the lens is opened for added safety 4 entries (2 on each end) supplied with (2) 3/4" NPT adapter hubs and extra large wire well for feed-through and tandem applications without the need for separate junction boxes Electronic ballast: High power factor (95%) for energy efficiency, more luminaires per circuit and supply voltage flexibility Features 2 channel circuitry for safety if one lamp fails, the 2nd lamp remains in operation Uses T8 linear fluorescent lamps for high efficiency and reduced operating costs 5 wire terminal block and through wiring are standard for quick and easy balancing of lighting loads on 3-phase systems
ATEX
ATEX Directive 94/9/EC Type of Protection Ex II 2 G Ex II 2 D T80C Ex ed IIC T4 Ex ed ib IIC T4 (CG-variant) DMT 02 ATEX E 069
Adjustable Mounting Clamps
EC-Type Examination Certificate
Standard Materials:
One-piece welded housing and cover frame - sheet steel or stainless steel Lens 6mm (1/4") thick tempered glass Gaskets silicone External hardware stainless steel
6L
Hinged Glass Lens
Standard Finishes:
Sheet steel white epoxy coat Lens clear Stainless steel natural
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1039
6L
eLLB20 Series
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 1, Group IIC ATEX Certified
Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G (Canada) Wet Locations Enclosure Type 4X and IP66
Ratings (Electrical / Size):

Sources/Wattages Two 32W or 17W T8 Linear Fluorescent Voltages 120240V, 5060 Hz 110230VDC Hub Size Four 25mm entries, 2 on each end, 3 plugged Two 3/4" NPT adapter hubs provided standard, for feed-through or tandem wiring Terminals 5 wire terminal block, one on each end (L1, L2, L3, N, Ground) Two 6mm2 (#10 AWG) maximum per terminal

Minimum Starting Temperature: -20C
Watts Two 17W T8 lamps Two 32W T8 lamps Ambient Temp. 50C 50C Cl. I, Div. 2 Cl. I, Zone 1 & 2 T4 T4 Class II T6 T6 Supply Wire Temp. 60C 60C
Accessories:
Description 3/4" NPT adapter hub Mounting Accessories: Eye Bolt for Support Lugs Hexagon Screw for Support Lugs Cat. # STM 2 2 2480 002 000 2 2480 054 000
Cat. # Hub Size
3
Wattage/Lamp Two 17 Watt T8 Rapid Start Two 32 Watt T8 Rapid Start
Voltage/Hz 120240V, 5060 Hz 110230 VDC
Operating Current .18A .34A
Epoxy Coated Steel Enclosure ELLB202217/U240 ELLB204232/U240
Stainless Steel Enclosure ELLB202217SS/U240 ELLB204232SS/U240
/4" NPT /4" NPT
120240V, 5060 Hz 110230 VDC IEC / CENELEC certified luminaries are available. Consult factory.
3
Dimensions (Inches) and Weights:

Item eLLB20 2217 eLLB20 4232 Weight 33 lbs. 48 lbs.
6L
1040
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
eLLB20 Series
Photometric Data:
Photometric Data
6L
Coefficients Of Utilization Zonal Cavity Method Effective Floor Cavity Reflectance 20%
Room Cavity Ratio Eff. Ceil.
80*
6L
Wall 50* 30* 10* 50* 30* 10* 50* 30* 10* 50* 30* 10* 50* 30* 10* 0*
1 0.679 0.654 0.631 0.664 0.641 0.621 0.637 0.618 0.601 0.612 0.597 0.583 0.589 0.577 0.566 0.553
2 0.597 0.556 0.522 0.585 0.547 0.516 0.562 0.531 0.504 0.542 0.515 0.492 0.522 0.501 0.481 0.468
3 0.528 0.478 0.439 0.518 0.472 0.435 0.499 0.460 0.427 0.482 0.448 0.420 0.465 0.437 0.413 0.400
4 0.468 0.414 0.372 0.459 0.409 0.369 0.443 0.399 0.364 0.429 0.390 0.360 0.415 0.382 0.355 0.341
5 0.412 0.355 0.313 0.405 0.351 0.311 0.391 0.344 0.308 0.379 0.337 0.304 0.367 0.330 0.301 0.288
6 0.368 0.310 0.269 0.632 0.307 0.268 0.350 0.302 0.266 0.339 0.296 0.263 0.329 0.291 0.261 0.248
7 0.329 0.272 0.233 0.324 0.270 0.232 0.314 0.265 0.230 0.305 0.261 0.228 0.296 0.257 0.257 0.214
8 0.294 0.239 0.200 0.290 0.237 0.200 0.281 0.233 0.198 0.273 0.229 0.197 0.265 0.226 0.196 0.183
9 0.263 0.209 0.172 0.259 0.207 0.172 0.252 0.204 0.171 0.245 0.201 0.170 0.238 0.198 0.169 0.156
10 0.239 0.186 0.151 0.235 0.185 0.151 0.229 0.182 0.150 0.223 0.180 0.149 0.217 0.177 0.149 0.137
70*
50*
30*
10*
0*
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1041
6L
EVF Series Fluorescent Luminaires
Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups C, D Cl. I, Zone 1, Group IIB Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. III, Simultaneous Presence
Paint Spray (Suffix S718) Wet Locations (Suffix S718) 3, 3R, IP54 (Suffix S718)
Applications:
EVF Luminaires are used in areas where hazardous fumes, gases, or dusts are present EVF Luminaires with S718 option are designed specifically for use inside paint spray booths where hazardous fumes, gases, and paint residue are present; this includes powder paint process areas EVF Luminaires with S718 option are also suitable for use in wet locations
3-lamp
2-lamp with angle reflector
Features:
All EVF Luminaires:
Provide cool, even light with natural color rendition Reduce relamping schedule (long lamp life) Continuous and uniform illumination made possible by mounting end to end (no space needed between luminaires for relamping) No special tools required for relamping; threaded lamp tube cover provides quick and easy access for relamping Threaded joints on lamp tube and wiring chamber covers permit easy access for lower maintenance costs Reflectors can be removed or replaced with only a screwdriver Easy to install; factory-sealed and wired luminaire facilitates installation Standard electronic ballast for 32 watt and 40 watt rapid start luminaires Standard energy-efficient ballast for 40 watt slimline, 60 watt and 110 watt luminaires Low temperature ballast is supplied as standard on 32 watt T8 (0F), 40 watt slimline (0F), 60 watt and 110 watt luminaires (-20F) All exposed hardware is stainless steel for maximum protection against corrosion, and for longer luminaire life Copper-free aluminum construction throughout means lighter luminaire weight, easier installation, and excellent corrosion resistance All exterior materials are non-sparking Type P ballasts furnished in compliance with NEC Heavy-duty glass lamp tubes provide maximum strength and impact resistance to protect lamps
Furnished For Use with Hub Line Volts 1-Lamp Size 60 Hz Cat. # 120277 347 110125 277 347 110125 277 347 110125 277 347 110125 277 347 2-Lamp Cat. # 3-Lamp Cat. # 4-Lamp Cat. #
32 watt, T-8 medium 3/4" Bi-pin 265MA lamps 3/4" 40 watt, T-12 medium 3/4" 3 Bi-pin rapid start /4" 3 430MA lamps /4" 40 watt, T-12 single pin, slimline 425MA lamps 60 watt, T-12 recessed contact, 800MA lamps 110 watt, T-12 recessed contact, 1500MA lamps
50 Hz not available.
EVF21029/UNV EVF22029/UNV EVF23029/UNV EVF24029/UNV EVF21029/347 EVF22029/347 EVF23029/347 EVF24029/347 EVF21082 EVF21087 EVF21089347 EVF22082 EVF23082 EVF24082 EVF22087 EVF23087 EVF24087 EVF22089/347 EVF23089/347 EVF24089/347
/4" /4" 3 /4"

3 3
EVF21032 EVF22032 EVF23032 EVF24032 EVF21037 EVF22037 EVF23037 EVF24037 EVF21039/347 EVF22039/347 EVF23039/347 EVF24039/347 EVF21062 EVF22062 EVF23062 EVF24062 EVF21067 EVF22067 EVF23067 EVF24067 EVF21069/347 EVF22069/347 EVF23069/347 EVF24069/347 EVF21072 EVF22072 EVF23072 EVF24072 EVF21077 EVF22077 EVF23077 EVF24077 EVF21079/347 EVF22079/347 EVF23079/347 EVF24079/347
/4" /4" 3 /4"

3 3 3 3 3
/4" /4" /4"
Options:
Description Suffix
EVF Luminaires with S718 Option:

All joints sealed Inside paint booth mounting capabilities provide greater flexibility in luminaire placement, avoids necessity of complicated design and installation work, and improves task lighting control Smooth, simple design makes it easy to remove any accumulated deposits of paint residue
For suitability for wet NEC and CEC: locations and locations Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D having deposits of Class I, Zone 1, Group IIB readily combustible Class II, Groups E, F, G paint residue................... S718 Class III Corro-free epoxy Simultaneous Presence (Cl. I powder coat.................... S752 and Cl. II) With 45 angle reflectors in lieu of straight down Paint Spray (S718) reflectors......................... S369 UL Standards: Clear disposable Consult 844 Hazardous (Classified) polyester tube wrap Cooper Locations Crouse1598 Luminaires Hinds CSA Standards: Fused.............................. S658 C22.2 No. 137 Furnished with lamps...... S714 Low temperature electromagnetic ballast Copper-free aluminum except for 40 watt T12 rapid sheet aluminum reflectors start luminaires rated for 0F............................. BY Natural except reflectors Reflectors white epoxy powder coat
Mounting Accessories:
Various hazardous area fittings are used to mount EVF Luminaires. The fittings shown on next page support the unwired (relamping) end. For the wired (ballast) end any of the luminaire hangers for hazardous locations (listed in Section 8L) can be used. CPS conduit outlet bodies with hub covers (listed in Section 3F) are also suitable.
6L
Size Ranges:
1, 2, 3, and 4-lamp
Standard Materials: Standard Finishes:

32 to 110 watts

(Based on 40C Ambient)
Class I/Class II/Zone 1 Lamp Type 1-Lamp 2-Lamp 3-Lamp 4-Lamp Supply Wire
32/40W 60W 110W
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
T5 T5 T4
T5 T5 T4
T5 T5 T4
T5 T5 T4
75C 75C 90C
1042
US: 1-866-764-5454
Accessories Relamping Information
6L
Ceiling Saddle
Conduit Support
Size (In.) Cat. #
3
Relamping Information
Description Ceiling Saddle for Conduit Support
/4
EVF20
Ceiling Saddle
Support Hook
Adjacent ends of two fixtures suspended in line close together Description Ceiling Saddle for Support Hook Cat. # EVF021 One cover removed and lamp partly withdrawn Where fixtures abut, space for relamping is obtained by lowering one end of the tube assembly as shown. Without tools, the lamp receptacle and mounting plate assemblies can be removed and the lamp withdrawn. In inserting, the reverse procedure is followed.
Support Hook for Conduit

Description Support Hook for Conduit Size (In.)
3
Cat. # EVF21 End of one fixture lowered for relamping
/4
Dimensions:
End view
6L
Fixture Type 32 watt, T-8 Bi-pin 40 watt, T-12 Bi-pin 40 watt, T-12 Single pin slimline 60 watt, T-12 Recessed contact 110 watt, T-12 Recessed contact
No. Lamps
1 or 2 3 or 4
44 11 461/2 81/2
533/8 55 533/8 55
95 101/4 100 101/4
No. of Lamps 1-Lamp 2-Lamp 3-Lamp 4-Lamp
Width 61/8 111/2 18 241/2
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1043
6L
Photometric Data
Luminaire: All 1-Lamp EVF Luminaires

Lamp: Zonal Degrees: Zonal Lumens: Total Bare Lamp Lumens: 1-40/T-12, 1-60/T-12 030 040 580 953 3100 060 090 1633 1897

2-40/T-12, 2-38/T-12, 2-60/T-12, 2-110/T12 Lamp: 030 040 060 090 Zonal Degrees: 1055 1765 3262 4125 Zonal Lumens: Total Bare Lamp Lumens: 6300 All data provided is for 40W rapid start cool white lamps. Use following candlepower/lumen multipliers for other lamp sizes: 32W 0.90 40W Slimline 0.84 60W Cool white 1.29 110W Cool white 2.19 Example: Zonal lumens of 240W lamp for 060 is 3262. Zonal lumens of 260W lamps for 060 is 3262 x 1.29 = 4208
All data provided is for 40W rapid start cool white lamps. Use following candlepower/lumen multipliers for other lamp sizes: 32W 0.90 40W Slimline 0.84 60W Cool white 1.29 110W Cool white 2.19 Example: Zonal lumens of 140W lamp for 060 is 1633. Zonal lumens of 160W lamp for 060 is 1633 x 1.29 = 2107
70
70
50
50
30
30
6L
10
10
70
70
50
50
30
30
10
10
1044
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Photometric Data
6L

Lamp: Zonal Degrees: Zonal Lumnes: Total Bare Lamp Lumens: 3-40/T-12, 3-38/T-12, 3-60/T-12, 3-110/T-12 030 040 060 090 1917 3226 6066 7919 9300 All data provided is for 40W rapid start cool white lamps. Use following candlepower/lumen multipliers for other lamp sizes: 32W 0.90 40W Slimline 0.84 60W Cool white 1.29 110W Cool white 2.19 Example: Zonal lumens of 340W lamps for 040 is 3226. Zonal lumens of 340W Slimline lamps for 040 is 3226 x 0.84 = 2710

4-40/T-12, 4-38/T-12, 4-60/T-12, 4-110/T-12 Lamp: 030 040 060 090 Zonal Degrees: 1961 3305 6250 8224 Zonal Lumens: Total Bare Lamp Lumens: 12400 All data provided is for 40W rapid start cool white lamps. Use following candlepower/lumen multipliers for other lamp sizes: 32W 0.90 40W Slimline 0.84 60W Cool white 1.29 110W Cool white 2.19 Example: Zonal lumens of 440W lamps for 030 is 1961. Zonal lumens of 4110W Slimline lamps for 030 is 1961 x 2.19 = 4295
70
70
50
50
30
30
10
10
6L
70
70
50
50
30
30
10
10
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1045
6L
EVFDR Series Fluorescent Luminaires
Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups C, D Cl. I, Zone 1, Group IIB Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. III, Simultaneous Presence
Applications:
EVFDR Luminaires are suitable for wet locations and marine environments, above and below deck, where hazardous vapors, gases or dusts are present Ideally suited for use on offshore drilling/production platforms and on shipboard in hazardous areas For mounting where headroom is limited For hazardous areas where watertightness and corrosion resistance are required
Features:
Exterior surfaces finished with gray epoxy enamel for corrosion resistance Exterior hardware stainless steel All joints sealed and gasketed for watertightness Vibration resistant Shock mounts Sockets are spring loaded for tight lamp contact connection Heavy duty glass lamp tubes for maximum strength and impact resistance All exterior materials are non-sparking C-type beam clamps provide quick and easy mounting Luminaire is adjustable 30 either side of fixture axis, allowing for control of light output Beam clamp support is adjustable allowing beam clamp to be located to suit structure Low profile luminaire height is 713/16" with standard mounting, 1111/16" with shock mounting option for maximum clearance where headroom is critical Provides cool light with natural color rendition Continuous and uniform illumination made possible by mounting end to end (no space needed between luminaires for relamping) see page 1043 for relamping information Relamping is accomplished without tools; quarter-turn fastener allows end of luminaire to be lowered quickly; cable supports end of luminaire while relamping both hands are free; threaded lamp tube cover provides quick and easy access to lamp and receptacle Reflectors can be removed or replaced with only a screwdriver Ballast housing readily accessible Minimum weight copper-free aluminum construction throughout Type P ballast furnished in compliance with NEC Standard electronic ballast for 32 watt and 40 watt rapid start
Standard energy-efficient electromagnetic ballast (40W slimline, 60W and 110W) is standard Low temperature ballasts are standard on 32W T8, 40W slimline, 60W and 110W; 32 watt and 40 watt low temperature ballasts are rated for 0F; 60 and 100 watt low temperature ballasts are rated for -20F
Options:
Description Suffix Furnished with lamps.................... S714 Furnished with safety cable for high vibration areas................. S715 Beam clamps with shock mounts are available for ease of installation and resistance to vibration.................................... KIT40 Beam clamps only........................ KIT41 Low temperature electromagnetic ballast: 40W rapid start rated 0F...................... BY Emergency lighting battery unit.... S799

NEC and CEC: Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D Class I, Zone 1, Group IIB Class II, Groups E, F, G Class III Simultaneous Presence (Cl. and Cl. II) UL Standards: 844 Hazardous (Classified) Locations 1598 Luminaires 1598A Marine Locations CSA Standards: C22.2 No. 137
Size Ranges:
2lamp only

32, 40, 60 and 110W

(Based on 40C Ambient)
2-Lamp 32, 40W 60W 110W Class I Class II Zone 1 T5 T5 T4 Supply Wire 75C 75C 90C
Standard Materials:
Housing copper-free aluminum Exposed hardware stainless steel
6L
Standard Finishes:
All exterior metal components gray epoxy enamel Reflectors white epoxy powder coat
Furnished For Use With 32 watt, T-8 medium Bi-pin 265MA lamps 40 watt, T-12 medium Bi-pin rapid start 430MA lamps 60 watt, T-12 recessed contact, 800MA lamps 110 watt, T-12 recessed contact, 1500MA lamps
50 Hz not available.
Hub Size
3 3 3 3
Line Volts 60 Hz. 120277 347 110125 277 110125 277 110125 277
2-Lamp Cat. # EVFDR22029/UNV EVFDR22029/347 EVFDR22082 EVFDR22087 EVFDR22062 EVFDR22067 EVFDR22072 EVFDR22077
/4" /4" /4" /4" /4" /4" /4" /4"
3 3 3 3
1046
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EVFDR Series Fluorescent Luminaires
Photometric Data and Dimensions
6L
Luminaire: All EVFDR Luminaires

Lamp: Zonal Degrees: Zonal Lumens: Total Bare Lamp Lumens: 2-40/T-12, 2-60/T-12, 2-110/T-12 030 040 060 090 1416 2352 4263 5863 8600 All data provided is for two 60 watt, T-12 recessed contact 800MA cool white lamps (EVFDR22062). For other wattages use the following conversion factors: 32W 40W, Rapid Start 40W, Slimline 110W, Cool White .67 .73 .70 1.60
Dimensions:
Example: Zonal lumens for EVFDR226 fixture, across the axis, for 4050" is 1,060. Zonal lumens for EVFDR223 fixture, across the axis, is 4050" is: 1,060 x .70 = 742
Effective Floor Cavity Reflectance 20%
% Reflectance Eff. Ceil. Wall 80 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 50 30 10 0 Room Cavity Ratio 1 2 3 .735 .700 .670 .714 .682 .653 .673 .647 .624 .636 .616 .596 .603 .585 .570 .551 .645 .594 .551 .627 .580 .542 .593 .554 .520 .562 .530 .502 .533 .507 .483 .465 .570 .512 .466 .557 .501 .458 .528 .482 .444 .501 .463 .430 .477 .444 .416 .399 4 .506 .442 .394 .494 .435 .388 .468 .418 .378 .446 .403 .368 .425 .388 .358 .340 9 .304 .243 .202 .297 .240 .201 .285 .233 .197 .274 .226 .193 .263 .220 .189 .175 5 .452 .387 .339 .440 .380 .334 .420 .368 .327 .401 .354 .319 .383 .343 .311 .294 10 .266 .207 .169 .260 .206 .168 .250 .199 .164 .240 .193 .160 .231 .188 .157 .144
70
50
30
6L
10 0
70
50
30
10 0
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1047
6L
6L
1048
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Champ-Pak Wall Pack & Floodlight Luminaires Hazardous and Non-hazardous

Description
Application/Selection Floodlights Champ-Pak
CPMV
7L
Page No.
see page 1050
see page 1051 see see see see see pages 10601063 pages 10641066 pages 10671070 pages 10711074 pages 10751077 see page 1078
H.I.D.
FMV nR Series FMV1000 nR High Wattage Series Voyager nR Stainless Steel Series F2MV Mini Floodlight Series FZD Series EVMA S812 HazardGard with Trunnion Arm
Incandescent
RCDE Series
see pages 10791080
7L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1049
7L
Champ-Pak Wall Pack & Floodlight Luminaires
Applications:
General illumination of hazardous and non-hazardous areas

Environmental: What is the hazardous area classification NEC/CEC) of the location in which the luminaires will be installed? Lighting levels required: What wattage luminaire(s) will provide the desired light levels? Physical arrangement: Type of luminaire mounting required, threaded hub or mounting feet

Maximum Temperature Deg. C Deg. F 450 842 300 572 280 536 260 500 230 446 215 419 200 392 180 356 165 329 160 320 135 275 120 248 100 212 85 185 Temperature Class (T Code) T1 T2 T2A T2B T2C T2D T3 T3A T3B T3C T4 T4A T5 T6

Luminaire CPMV EVMA-S812 VOYAGER nR (SSFMV) F2MV, FMV, FMV High Wattage FZD RCDE-6 NEC Hazardous Area Compliance Cl. I, Division 2 Cl. I, Groups C, D Cl. I, Groups B (suffix GB), C, D Cl. I, Division 2 Cl. I, Zone 2 Cl. I, Division 2 Cl. I, Division 1, Groups B, C, D Cl. I, Groups C, D Cl. I, Group D Cl. I, Group D Lamp Size (Watts) 50150 HID 50400 HID 150400 HID 701500 HID 150400 HID 150 Incandescent 300 Incandescent 500 Incandescent Lamp Base Mogul Mogul Mogul Mogul Mogul Medium Extended Mogul End Prong
7L
RCDE-10
1050
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Champ-Pak Wall Pack Luminares
Cl. II, Groups F, G Cl. III & Simultaneous Presence Marine & Wet Locations Enclosure Type 4X, IP66
7L
The first low-profile wall pack designed specifically for hazardous areas.
The Cooper Crouse-Hinds Champ-Pak Wall Pack Luminaire is ideal for low-profile mounting in hazardous and industrial environments. In fact, it is suitable for any area with adverse conditions such as dust, dirt, moisture, vibration, high-pressure hose downs, and high thermal ambients. Its precisely designed glass refractor minimizes fixture depth while providing uniform, glare-free illumination. Unique compact shallow-profile design mounts virtually anywhere Side-hinged cover with two-screw closing for easy installation and maintenance Gray Corro-free epoxy powder coated two-piece housing provides superior corrosion resistance Unique stainless steel wire guard accessory attaches without any additional hardware for easy installation and maintenance Glass refractor provides uniform light distribution to eliminate glare Vertical lamp design provides even lamp heat distribution for cooler operation, providing expanded hazardous area suitability Silicone gaskets make luminaire suitable for enclosure Type 4X, marine, and IP66 environments Available in two different conduit entry configurations to permit flexible installation and mounting Four 3/4" NPT hubs, one on each side Two 1/2" NPT hubs on bottom for feed-through applications
7L
Applications:
Indoor and outdoor wall mounting or vertical surface mounting where minimal fixture depth is required in: Manufacturing plants and heavy industrial facilities Industrial process facilities such as refineries, chemical, petrochemical, pharmaceutical, and production platforms Waste or sewage treatment plants Offshore, dockside, and harbor installations For security and safety lighting in industrial facilities For lighting of loading docks, tunnels, and stairways For marine, wet location, hose down, and corrosive environments

Variety of lamp types and wattagesHID, fluorescent, and inductionto meet specific lighting needs High power-factor ballasts (+90%) are standard, which allow more luminaires per circuit Up to 65C ambient suitability on select lamp types and wattages; ambient suitability of +40C is standard; allows for installation in higher ambient environments commonly found in industrial facilities Low ambient starting capability (to 40C) perfect for colder climates Shock-absorbing HID mogul base lamp socket cushions lamp, improves lamp life in harsh environments Compact fluorescent emergency luminaire provides 90 minutes of lighting during power outages, meeting UL924 and Life Safety Code Cost-effective induction lamp system provides extra long lamp life up to 100,000 hours; reaches full illumination immediately, providing crisp, white light NEC/CEC restricted breathing construction is available to provide cooler temperature classes (T codes) for expanded hazardous area suitability Simplified method for compliance to NEC restricted breathing conduit sealing requirements makes installation easier
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1051
7L

Luminaires For Use With ANSI Lamps (Mogul Base): UL/cUL Listed NEC and CEC Class I, Division 2 and Class I, Zone 2 Restricted Breathing Class I, Division 2 and Zone 2 (suffix S826) Class II, Groups F, G Class III Simultaneous Presence Certified for IEC Zone 2 (suffix S826TB) Wet Locations; Marine Locations; Enclosure Type 4X; IP66 UL Standards: 844 Hazardous (Divisions Classified) Locations 1598 Luminaires 1598A Luminaires for Marine Vessels 924 Emergency Lighting (Fluorescent Emergency Luminaire) CSA Standards: C22.2 No. 9 and 137 CAN/CSA-E60079-15:02 IEC Standards: 60079-15
Sources/Wattages
High-pressure sodium (HPS) mogul base 50, 70, 100 & 150 Metal halide (MH) mogul base 70, 100 & 150 Compact fluorescent 26, 32, 42, 52, 64 & 84 Emergency fluorescent 26 Induction 55 & 85
Voltages
HID Standard-Voltage Ballasts Dual tap (120 & 277 V, 60 Hzfor 50 W HPS only)prewired at 277 V Multi-tap (120, 208, 240 & 277 V, 60 Hz)prewired at 277 V Tri-tap (120, 277 & 347 V, 60 Hz)prewired at 347 V 120 V, 60 Hz 480 V, 60 Hz Fluorescent Standard Voltage Ballasts 120277 V, 5060 Hz 120 V, 50 Hz (for Canada only) 347 V, 60 Hz (for Canada only) Induction Standard Voltage Ballasts 120 V, 5060 Hz (also 120 V DC) 230 V, 5060 Hz (also 240 V DC) HID Optional Voltage Ballasts 220 V, 50 Hz 220 V, 60 Hz 240 V, 50 Hz Fluorescent Optional Voltage Ballasts (Consult Factory) 125 V DC 12 V DC 24 V DC Isolated Ballasts And Specials (Consult Factory) 208 V, 60 Hz CWI Isolated Ballast 240 V, 60 Hz CWI Isolated Ballast 480 V, 60 Hz CWI Isolated Ballast
Standard Materials:
Fixture housing and door frame assembly copper-free aluminum External hardware stainless steel Refractor lens borosilicate glass Gasket silicone Reflector aluminum light sheet Wire guard stainless steel
Standard Finishes:
7L
Conduit Entries
Four 3/4" NPT entries, one on each side, top and bottom (3 plugged) Two 1/2" NPT entries on bottom for feed-through (1 plugged) Metric entries consult factory
1052
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
7L
Ordering Information HID Luminaires:

Hub Size High-Pressure Sodium Four 3/4" NPT (one each side) Two 1/2" NPT (on bottom) Four /4" NPT (one each side) Two 1/2" NPT (on bottom)
3
Ordering Information Fluorescent Luminaires:

Cat. # CPMVS2W050 CPMVS1W050 CPMVS2W070 CPMVS1W070 CPMVS2W100 CPMVS1W100 Hub Size Four 3/4" NPT (one each side) Two 1/2" NPT (on bottom) Four 3/4" NPT (one each side) Two 1/2" NPT (on bottom) Four 3/4" NPT (one each side) Two 1/2" NPT (on bottom) Four 3/4" NPT (one each side) Two 1/2" NPT (on bottom) Four 3/4" NPT (one each side) Two 1/2" NPT (on bottom) Four 3/4" NPT (one each side) Two 1/2" NPT (on bottom) Lamp Watts 26 (one 26 W lamp) 32 (one 32 W lamp) 42 (one 42 W lamp) Cat. # CPMVF2W026 CPMVF1W026 CPMVF2W032 CPMVF1W032 CPMVF2W042 CPMVF1W042
Lamp Watts
50 70 100
Four 3/4" NPT (one each side) Two 1/2" NPT (on bottom) Four /4" NPT (one each side) Two 1/2" NPT (on bottom)
3
CPMVS2W150 150 (for 55 V lamp) CPMVS1W150 70 100 CPMVM2W070 CPMVM1W070 CPMVM2W100 CPMVM1W100 CPMVM2W150 S828 CPMVM1W150 S828
CPMVF2W052 52 (two 26 W lamps) CPMVF1W052 CPMVF2W064 64 (two 32 W lamps) CPMVF1W064 84 (two 42 W lamps) CPMVF2W084 CPMVF1W084
Metal Halide Four 3/4" NPT (one each side) Two 1/2" NPT (on bottom) Four 3/4" NPT (one each side) Two 1/2" NPT (on bottom) Metal HalidePulse Start Four 3/4" NPT (one each side) Two 1/2" NPT (on bottom)
Voltage Suffixes:
Voltage Suffix NEC/CEC (UL, CSA, cUL) 120277 V (5060 Hz) /UNV CEC (CSA, cUL) 347 V (60 Hz) /347
150
To complete Catalog Number, add Voltage and Option suffix(es).
Voltage Suffixes:
Voltage (60 Hz) Suffix Voltage (60 Hz) Suffix Dual Tap /DT Dual Tap /DT NEC/UL Multi Tap /MT 120 /120 480 /480
Ordering Information Fluorescent Emergency Luminaires Continuous Operation:

Hub Size Lamp Watts Cat. # Four 3/4" NPT (one each side) CPMVFB2W026 26 (one 26 W lamp) CPMVFB1W026 Two 1/2" NPT (on bottom)
CEC (CSA/cUL) Tri Tap 120 /TT /120
50W HPS is available only with suffix /DT.
Ordering Information Induction Luminaires With Lamp (100,000 hours):

Hub Size Four 3/4" NPT (one each side) Two 1/2" NPT (on bottom) Four 3/4" NPT (one each side) Two 1/2" NPT (on bottom) Lamp Watts 55 85 Cat. # CPMVIG2W055 CPMVIG1W055 CPMVIG2W085 CPMVIG1W085
Voltage Suffixes:
Voltage Suffix NEC/CEC (UL, CSA, cUL) 120277 V (5060 Hz) /UNV CEC (CSA, cUL) 120 V 347 V (60 Hz) (60 Hz) /120 CAN /347
7L
Compelling reasons to choose the new Champ induction luminaire as the light source for industrial and hazardous locations include:
Crisp, white light (80+ color rendering index) provides increased safety by clearly illuminating signs, instrument panels, equipment, and more with vibrant natural colors Up to 100,000 hours of lamp life minimizes routine maintenance costs; if you operate this luminaire for 24 hours, 7 days a week, you will not need to change the lamp for up to 11 years! Instant illumination no waiting for lamp warm-up time; increases productivity and safety Delivers the best possible luminaire temperature rating T6 (85C) when used with the Champ restricted breathing option; ideal for hazardous areas where a low ignition temperature is required Starts in low temperatures as low as -40C
Voltage Suffixes:
Voltage Suffix 120 V (also 120 V DC) (5060 Hz) /120 230 V (also 240 V DC) (5060 Hz) /230
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1053
7L
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Restricted Breathing Cl. I, Div. 2 & Zone 2 (Suffix S826) Certified for IEC Zone 2 (Suffix S826TB) Accessories:
(Order Separately) Description Photocell For Field Installation 120 V, 5060 Hz 208240 V, 5060 Hz 277 V, 5060 Hz
Cl. II, Groups F, G Cl. III & Simultaneous Presence Marine & Wet Locations; Enclosure Type 4X, IP66
Options:
Description Suffix Ballast-Gard starter cut-out switch ........................................ BG Not available with IR or QTZ options Factory Assembled with Lamp Installed.................................. FA Instant Restrike .......................................................................... IR Not available with BG or QTZ options GuardFactory Installed on Luminaire ................................... P (Guard suffix follows wattage designation, e.g., CPMVS2W100P/MT) Quartz Auxiliary .......................................................................... QTZ Fused ........................................................................................... S658* Not available with CPMVIG and CPMVFB luminaires Restricted Breathing Construction (AEx nR, Ex nR)............... S826 Certified For IEC Zone 2 (Ex nR) (UL Classified to the IEC Standard) ....................................................................... S826TB Furnished with: 4 mm2, 3-point terminal block Crimp internal wiring connections P55 guard V2PC PhotocellFactory Installed 120 V, 5060 Hz................................................................. /V2PC20 208240 V, 5060 Hz ......................................................... /V2PC22 277 V, 5060 Hz................................................................. /V2PC27 Optional Voltage Ballasts for HID Luminaires 220 V, 50 Hz....................................................................... /220 50 220 V, 60 Hz....................................................................... /220 60 240 V, 50 Hz....................................................................... /240 50 Optional Voltage Ballasts for Fluorescent Luminaires (Consult Factory) 125 V DC............................................................................ /125 VDC 12 V DC.............................................................................. /12 VDC 24 V DC /24 VDC Isolated Ballast for HID Luminaires (Consult Factory) 208 V, 60 Hz....................................................................... /208CWI 240 V, 60 Hz....................................................................... /240CWI 480 V, 60 Hz....................................................................... /480CWI
Cat. # V2PC20 V2PC22 V2PC27 P55
In Canada, use factory-installed photocell only. Stainless Steel Wire Guard
7L
*When ordering fuses for luminaires, option S658, you must specify the operating voltage. S658 cannot be ordered with /MT in the catalog number. TEFLON is a registered trademark of E.I. duPont Co.
Dimensions (In Inches):
Note: Approximate weight less guard 28 lbs. P55 guard 0.5 lbs.
1054
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Photometric Data
7L
CPMV Photometric Data

Luminaire With Refractor Less Wire Guard
CPMVS2W150 Lamp: 150 W/E23-1/2 Clear High Pressure Sodium (HPS)

CPMVM2W150-S828 Lamp: 150 W/ED28 Clear Pulse Start Metal Halide
7L
For additional photometric data, contact Cooper Crouse-Hinds.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1055
7L
Photometric Data

CPMVF2W084 Lamps: (2) PL-T 42W/30/4P Compact Fluorescent
For additional photometric data, contact Cooper Crouse-Hinds.
7L
1056
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
7L

Class I Division 2 and Zone 2 Simultaneous Presence Class I/Class II (Gas and Dust Present in the Same Area) Restricted Breathing AEx nR/Ex nR Option S826 Suitable for Class I, Division 2 or Zone 2 and Class II T5 T4* T5
Watts
Ambient Temp.C
Standard Product
Restricted Breathing AEx nR/Ex nR Option S826 T6 T6 T5 T6 T6 T5 T5 T4 T4 T6 T6 T5 T6 T5 T6 T6 T6 T6 T6 T6 T6 T6 T6 T6 T6 T6 T6 T6 T6 T6 T6 T6
Class II and Class III T5 T4A* T5
Standard Product Suitable for Class I, Division 2/Class II T3A/T5 T3/T4A* T3A/T5
Supply Wire Temp.C 90 105 105 90 105 105 90 105
HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM 40 T3A 55 T3A 50 65* T3 70 100 150 METAL HALIDE 70 100 150PS (S828) 40 55 65* 40 40 T3C T3C T3C T3 T2D 40 55 65* 40 55* 40 T3A T3A T3 T2C T2C T2B
Consult Factory for Class II Suitability with 105C Supply Wire T5 T6 T6 T6 T6 T6 T6 T3C/T5 T3B/T6 T3B/T6 T3B/T6 T3B/T6 T3/T6 T5 T6 T6 T6 T6 T6 T6
105 90 105 105 90 105 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 75 90 75 90 90 75 75 75 75
COMPACT FLUORESCENT 26 40 T3B 26 (347 V) 32 32 (347 V) 55 40 40 55 40 55 40 40 55 40 55 40 T3A T3 T3B T3A T3 T3B T3A T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T2C
42 (120277 V) 40 42 (347 V) 52 64 84
7L
EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT 26 40* T3B INDUCTION 55 85

Note:
40* 55* 40*
T2D T2D T2B
*Fuses (suffix S658) are not available for indicated light sources and ambient temperatures. Luminaires requiring 105C supply wire are furnished with 3 ft. of rated wire for external wiring connection.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1057
7L
Champ Floodlight Family

The Standard for Safety and Reliability
Cl. I, Div. 2 Cl. I, Zone 2
Whenever Cooper Crouse-Hinds develops a new product, system, or procedure, we focus on one overriding question: Will it lower the total cost of ownership for our customers? With our new expanded line of Champ Floodlights, the answer is most definitely, Yes. Cooper Crouse-Hinds utilized more than 100 years of hazardous lighting expertise to design a global floodlight line of unmatched reliability, quality, and performance for your area lighting needs. Energy-efficient with optimal light output and beam distribution The most accessible ballast assembly in the industry Restricted breathing is standard on all floodlights Offered with both North American ballast (made to ANSI standard) and European style IEC ballast gear (pending) UL marine rated, NEMA Type 4X and IP66
7L
Champ FMV nR Series Floodlight

The Champ FMV nR Series Floodlight offers exceptional indoor and outdoor illumination in industrial areas. Because of its superior corrosion resistance and restricted breathing being standard, the FMV floodlight is the ideal choice for diverse industrial applications that include wet and marine environments. Differentiations: Full frame trunnion mounting bracket Restricted breathing standard 55C and 65C ambient air suitability Standard with terminal blocks Class I, Division 2/Zone 2 Removable ballast tray
Champ F2MV Mini-Floodlight

The F2MV is a compact floodlight that consists of a Corro-Free epoxy coated copper-free aluminum enclosure with stainless steel external hardware and an impact-resistant glass lens. It is suitable for marine and wet locations and is ideal where space constraints restrict the use of larger floodlights. Differentiations: Small, compact size Easy mounting installationonly 2 bolts! Powerful light distribution for floodlight and task applications Rated for use in 65C ambient air for hazardous location applications
1058
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Champ Floodlight Family

The Standard for Safety and Reliability
Cl. I, Div. 2 Cl. I, Zone 2
7L
Champ FMV1000 nR High Wattage Floodlight

The Champ FMV1000 nR prides itself on offering restricted breathing and easy-to-wire terminal blocks as standard components. It is NEMA Type 4X and IP56 watertight and due to its heavy-duty vaportight, copper-free aluminum housing and stainless steel hardware, it is exclusively designed for harsh and industrial areas requiring broad area lighting. The Champ FMV1000 nR provides a robust design for optimal use in the most corrosive/marine environments. Differentiations: Hazardous location high wattage floodlight for Class I, Division 2, Zone 2 Restricted breathing standard T3 rating in Class I, Zone 2 40C and 55C ambient air suitability Hinged removable door Available in 600, 750, 1000, and 1500W systems (1500W for non-hazardous locations only) Product Selector Chart
Champ Voyager nR Stainless Steel Floodlight

The Champ Voyager nR Floodlight offers the industry's coolest temperature rating and is the only mogul-base Class I, Division 2 and Zone 2 stainless steel floodlight with restricted breathing as standard construction. It boasts a wide, powerful beam to deliver more light to your process, and with the standard terminal block and removable ballast-component tray, the Champ Voyager is perfect for outdoor, marine, corrosive, and high temperature locations. Differentiations: Housing, door and external parts are all 316 stainless steel Restricted breathing standard with T-ratings of T3 and T4 Pre-wired with terminal blocks for easy wiring Hinged door and removable ballast tray
7L
F2MV MINI Hazardous Hazardous Restricted Breathing (Ex nR) ATEX Certification with IEC Ballast and Lamp Socket Wet Marine NEMA Type 4, 4X NEMA 7x6 Corrosion Resistant Confined Areas Wattage High Pressure Sodium Metal Halide Class I, Division 2 Class I, Zone 2 NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 2 Class I, Zone 2 IEC Zone 2 IEC Zone 2 Ex nR II ATEX 50150 70175
FMV nR
FMV1000 nR
Voyager nR
pending 150400 175400
pending 600, 750, 1000 1000, 1500
150400 175400
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1059
7L
Champ FMV nR Floodlights
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 2, AEx nR II
Marine locations NEMA Type 4X and IP66 Wet locations
The Champ FMV nR Series Floodlight offers exceptional illumination in industrial areas, both indoors and out. And, it comes standard as a restricted breathing luminaire. The Champ FMV nR Series Floodlight is easily adjusted to aim light where its needed and is available in a wide variety of energy-saving mogul base HID light sources and wattages including: 150400W High Pressure Sodium 175400W Metal Halide
Applications:
The FMV is made with heavy-duty, diecast aluminum components and stainless steel hardware. It offers superior corrosion resistance to ensure longer life, which makes the FMV floodlight the ideal choice for a wide variety of industrial applications, including wet and marine environments.
3-axis resonance withstand and UL844 vibration compliantcan stand up to the tough jobs Precision formed aluminum reflector superior beam control, distribution and efficiency Multi-tap ballastsoffering a choice of 120, 208, 240 and 277V; 220V 50Hz, 240V 50Hz, Tri-Tap (120, 277 and 347), and 480V ballasts are also available High light output with a low cost of operationcost-effectiveness in a high wattage floodlight For use with SFA6 Slipfitter Adapter and SWB6 Wall Mount Bracket accessoriesfurther enhances mounting flexibility
The only full frame trunnion mount floodlight with a T3 rating and a removable ballast tray assembly.

NEC/CEC (NEC Ballast Gear and Socket): Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class I, Zone 2, AEx nR II Marine locations NEMA Type 4X and IP66 Wet locations IEC (IEC Ballast Gear and Socket): IEC Zone 2, Ex nR II (pending) UL/cUL Standards: 844Hazardous (Divisions Classified) Locations 60079-15 1598Luminaires 1598ASupplemental Requirements for Luminaires for Installation on Marine Vessels IEC Standards: 60079-15

AEx nR, Ex nR restricted breathing rating is standarda hazardous location luminaire without additional accessories or options; restricted breathing offers cooler T-numbers for increased hazardous locations suitability NEMA 7x6 butterfly beam floodlight patternwide, uniform and far reaching to provide excellent efficiency and more light where you need it NEMA Type 4X and IP66 construction is designed for use indoors and outdoors in marine and wet locationswith stainless steel external hardware suitable for saltwater and corrosive applications Easy wiringstandard terminal block with marked terminals saves time and eliminates wiring errors Vapor-tight sealing cable connector standard Will accommodate existing mounting hardwareSFA6 slipfitter for pole and SWB6 wall mount Optional metric machining will accept M20 or M25 (must be specified on order) 40C, 55C and 65C ambient suitabilityaddresses high ambients common at industrial facilities Low ambient capability to -40C perfect for colder climates Heavy-duty, die-cast copper-free aluminum enclosure with epoxy coating and stainless steel hardwareprovides a robust design with industrial grade construction and corrosion resistance Hinged door frame assemblyhas captive cover screws for ease of relamping Yoke mount designstandard construction provides the greatest mounting flexibility, can be mounted vertically (wall), horizontally (rooftop or floor), or any angle in between 1060
Industry Best for Ease of Installation:

1. Removable ballast tray 2. Prewired to terminal blocks 3. Substantial room for wiring
Sources/Wattages (Mogul Base Lamps)
HPS150, 250, and 400W MH175, 250, and 400W
7L
Standard Materials:
Fixture housing and door frame assemblydie-cast aluminum External hardwarestainless steel Lensheat- and impact-resistant tempered glass Yokealuminum
Voltages
Standard Voltage Ballasts Multi-tap (120, 208, 240, and 277V 60Hz) Dual-tap (120 and 277V) 480V 60Hz Tri-tap (120, 277, 347V 60Hz) Optional Voltage Ballasts 220V or 240V 50Hz (for export) 220V 60Hz (for export) Isolated Ballasts 208, 240, or 480V (for Canada)
Standard Finishes:
Enclosure and yokeCorro-Free epoxy powder coat Stainless steelnatural
Hub Size
Standard3/4" NPT Optional25 mm (M25 x 1.5) or 20 mm (M20 x 1.5)
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
7L
Ordering Information for Floodlight with NEC Ballast:

Lamp Type High Pressure Sodium Watts 150 250 400 175 Metal Halide 250 400 Yoke Mount 3/ 4" NPT Hub FMVSY150/MT 76 FMVSY250/MT 76 FMVSY400/MT 76 FMVMY175/MT 76 FMVMY250/MT 76 FMVMY400/MT 76
Photometric Data:
Isofootcandle Chart FMV 400W High Pressure Sodium (HPS) Catalog Number: FMVSY400-76 Lamp: 400W Clear HPS Lumen Rating: 50,000 For 150W HPS, multiply footcandles by .32. For 250W HPS, multiply footcandles by 0.6. Fixture located at 0, 0 aiming angle at 45 (Note: See Figures 1 and 2).
Voltage Suffixes
Voltage (60Hz) Suffix Dual-Tap /DT Tri-Tap /TT Multi-Tap /MT 480 /480
To complete catalog number, add voltage and options suffix(es).
Options Example:
FMVMY400/MT 76 M25 V2PC20

Series Yoke Watt Voltage Beam Spread Metric Entry Photocell Lamp Type
Isofootcandle Chart FMV 400W Metal Halide (MH) Catalog Number: FMVMY400-76 Lamp: 400W Clear MH Lumen Rating: 34,000 For 250W MH, multiply footcandles by 0.6. Fixture located a 0, 0 aiming angle 45
150W HPS fixtures are furnished with ANSI spec/S55 ballasts for 55V lamps. For 100V lamps, add suffix "CE" after voltage suffix. Example: FMVSY150/MT CE 76.
(Note: See Figures 1 and 2).
Options:
Description Suffix Instant Restrike and Ballast Guard Instant restrikeenables a hot HPS lamp to immediately restrike after a momentary loss of arc due to voltage fluctuation or power outage Ballast guard starter cut out switchprevents starter pulsing when lamp is cycling or inoperative; prolongs ballast and ignitor life. 150W LX HPS only.............................................................. TIR Factory assembled with HID lamp installed ......................... FA Fused (not suitable for marine applications)......................... S658 20mm metric thread for conduit opening ............................. M20 25mm metric thread for conduit opening ............................. M25 3 / 4" NPT hub conduit opening ............................................... NPT75 Furnished with lamps (not installed) ..................................... S714 Retention chain ..................................................................... S831 Pulse-Start Metal Halide ....................................................... S828 Enclosure machined for 2 conduit/cable entries .................. S886
Effective Projected Area (EPA):

For windloading For proper pole selection Aiming Angle 0 30 45 EPA 2.9 FT2 2.5 FT2 2.1 FT2
7L
Footcandle Table:
Mounting Height 15' 20' 25' 30' 35' 40' A 8.0 4.5 2.9 2.0 1.5 1.1 Footcandle Values for Isofotcandle Lines B C D E 4.0 2.0 0.80 0.40 2.3 1.1 0.50 0.23 1.4 0.7 0.30 0.14 1.0 0.5 0.20 0.10 0.7 0.4 0.15 0.07 0.6 0.3 0.11 0.06
Options for Photocell*:

Description Suffix Photocell 120V, 50/60Hz installed ....................................... V2PC20 Photocell 208-240V, 50/60Hz installed ................................ V2PC22 Photocell 277V, 50/60Hz installed ....................................... V2PC27
*Photocell for Div. 2 installation only.
Accessories (Order Separately):

Slipfitter Adapter To be mounted to yoke mount fixture Fits onto 2" pipe/conduit ............................................... Wall Bracket Use with slipfitter adapter SFA6 for easy wall mounting and increased adjustability..................... SFA6 SWB6
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1061
7L
Weights and Dimensions:

Net Fixture Weights (Lbs.): Fixtures 150W 175250W 400W FMVS 37 40 44 FMVM 37 42 44
SFA6 (Slipfitter Adapter)Add 4 lbs., SWB6 (Wall Bracket)Add 6 lbs.
6.8 [173.9]
18.0 [458.0]
20.0 [508.0] 23.6 [600.1]
19.1 [485.8]
4.8 [120.7]
.6 DIA. [14.3]
7L
90 30 60 30
120 90 90
180 90
FIGURE 1
FIGURE 2
FIGURE 3
1062
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A,B,C,D Cl. I, Zone 2, AEx nR II
7L

40C Ambient Lamp Catalog Series Type Watts 150 FMVS High Pressure Sodium 250 400** 175 Metal Halide 250* 400** FMVM 175 PulseStart Metal Halide 250* 320** 350** 400** Temparature Code Class I, Zone 2 T4 T4 T3 T4 T4 T3 T3 T3 T3 T4 T4 T3 T4 T4 T3 T3 T3 T3 T4 T4 T3 T4 T4 T3 T3 T3 T3 Class I, Div. 2 325 325 325 325 325 325 T1 T1 T1 325 325 350 325 325 350 325 325 T1 325 325 350 325 325 350 350 350 T1 Supply Wire C 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 105 105 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 105 105 90 90 90 90 90 90 105 105 105 55C Ambient Temperature Code Class I, Zone 2 T4 T3 T3 T4 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T4 T4 T3 T4 T4 T3 T3 T3 T2 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 Class I, Div. 2 325 325 325 325 325 325 T1 T1 T1 325 325 350 325 325 350 325 325 T1 325 325 T1 325 325 T1 350 T1 T1 Supply Wire C 90 105 105 90 105 105 105 125 125 90 105 125 90 105 125 105 125 125 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 125 125 65C Ambient Temperature Code Class I, Zone 2 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 Class I, Div. 2 325 325 325 325 325 325 325 325 T1 325 325 T1 325 325 T1 325 325 T1 Supply Wire C 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 105 90 120 180 90 120 180 90 120 180 90 120 180 90 120 180 90 120 180 90 120 180 90 120 180 90 120 180 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 Fixture Aiming Range Figure
*Suitable for use in 65C ambient without optional fuses. **Suitable for use in 55C ambient without optional fuses.
Lamp Selection (Mogul Base):

Fixture FMVSY150 FMVSY250 FMVSY400 FMVMY175 FMVMY250 FMVMY400
Photometrics are available online.
Watts Type 150 HPS 250 HPS 400 HPS 175 MH 250 MH 400 MH
Bulb ED23 1/ 2 BT25 ED18 1/ 2 or ET18 ED37 1/ 2 BT37 ED28 or BT28 ED28 or BT28 ED37 or BT37
G.E. LU150/55 LU250 LU400 MVR175/U MVR250/U MVR400/U
Osram LU150/55 LU250 LU400 M175/U M250/U M400/U
Philips C150S55 C250S50 C400S51 MH175/U MH250/U MH400/U
7L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1063
7L
Champ FMV1000 nR High Wattage Floodlights
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Marine locations Cl. I, Zone 2, AEx nR II, Group IIC NEMA Type 4X and IP56 Wet locations
The Champ FMV1000 Series High Wattage Floodlight is the best in its class with heavy-duty vapor-tight housing designed exclusively for harsh industrial areas requiring broad area lighting. The FMV1000 Series Floodlight boasts restricted breathing and easy-to-wire terminal blocks as standard. It is available in the following HID lamp sources and wattages: 600, 750, 1000W High Pressure Sodium 1000, 1500W Metal Halide
Restricted breathing comes standard with this NEMA Type 4X and IP56 rated floodlight.
Applications:
The Champ FMV1000 Series is NEMA Type 4X and IP56 watertight, and its heavy-duty welded extruded aluminum housing and stainless steel hardware provide a robust design suitable for the most corrosive/marine environments.

AEx nR, Ex nR restricted breathing rating is standarda hazardous location luminaire without additional accessories or options; restricted breathing offers cooler T-numbers for increased hazardous locations suitability NEMA 7x6 butterfly beam floodlight patternwide, uniform and far reaching to provide excellent efficiency and more light where you need it NEMA Type 4X and IP56 construction is designed for use indoors and outdoors in marine and wet locationswith stainless steel external hardware suitable for saltwater and corrosive applications Easy wiringstandard terminal block with marked terminals saves time and eliminates wiring errors Vapor-tight sealing cable connectorstandard Standard machiningwill accept 3/4 inch NCGB or 3/4 inch Myers hub (Myers hub is an option). Optional metric machining will accept M20 or M25 (must be specified on order) Low and high ambient capability to -40Cperfect for colder climates, 50C workhorse in hot climates Heavy-duty, extruded copper-free aluminum enclosure with epoxy coating and stainless steel hardwareprovides a robust design with industrial grade construction and corrosion resistance Precision formed aluminum reflectorsuperior beam control, distribution and efficiency High light output with a low cost of operationcost-effectiveness in a high wattage floodlight
Industry Best for Ease of Installation: 1. Removable ballast tray 2. Prewired to terminal blocks 3. Substantial room for wiring
Standard Finishes:
AluminumCorro-Free epoxy powder coat Stainless steelnatural
7L
Sources/Wattages (Mogul Base Lamps) HPS600, 750, and 1000W MH1000W MH1500W non-hazardous location rated

NEC/CEC (NEC Ballast Gear and Socket): Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class I, Zone 2, AEx nR II, Group IIC Marine locations IP56 Wet locations NEMA Type 4X IEC (IEC Ballast Gear and Socket)pending: IEC Ex Class I, Zone 2 Ex nA nR IIC
Voltages:
Standard Voltage Ballasts Multi-tap (120, 208, 240, and 277V 60Hz) 480V 60Hz Tri-tap (120, 277, 347V 60Hz) Optional Voltage Ballasts 220V or 240V 50Hz (for export) 220V 60Hz (for export) Isolated Ballasts 208, 240, or 480V (for Canada)
Standard Materials:
Housingextruded aluminum External hardwarestainless steel Yoke316 stainless steel Lensheat- and impact-resistant tempered glass Gasketingneoprene
Hub Size:
3/4" NPTstandard M20 or M25optional Dual entryNPT or metric
1064
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 2, AEx nR II, Group IIC
7L

Lamp Type High Pressure Sodium Metal Halide
*To complete catalog number, add voltage and options suffix(es).
Watts 600 750 1000 1000 1500
Base Catalog Number* FMVSY600__ 76 FMVSY750__ 76 FMVSY1000__ 76 FMVMY1000__ 76 FMVMY1500__ 76
Voltage Suffixes:
Voltage (60Hz) Suffix Dual-Tap /DT Options Example: Tri-Tap /TT Multi-Tap /MT 480 /480
FMVS Y1000/MT 76 M25 S828

Series Yoke Watt Voltage Lamp Type Metric Pulse-start Entry Metal Halide Only Beam Spread

40C Ambient
75 30 45
50C Ambient Temperature Code Class I, Zone 2 TS T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 Class I, Div. 2 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 Supply Wire C 105 105 105 105 105 105 Supply Wire C 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 90
Fixture Aiming
Lamp Catalog Series FMVS Type High Pressure Sodium Metal Halide PulseStart Metal Halide Wattage 600 750 1000 1000 750 750 1000 1000
Temperature Code Class I, Zone 2 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 Class I, Div. 2 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1
Range 90 90 90 90 75 90 75 90
Figure 2 2 2 2 1 2 1 2
Figure 1 90 30 60
FMVM
7L

Slipfitter adapter: To be mounted to yoke mount fixture; fits onto 2" pipe/conduit....................................... SFA6 Wall bracket: Use with slipfitter adapter SFA6 for easy wall mounting and increased adjustability............... SWB6 Photocell in DS cover for use with FS/FD box: 120V, 50/60Hz................................................................................................................................................. D2S20 208-277, 50/60Hz............................................................................................................................................ D2S208 277
Options:
Description Suffix 20mm metric thread for conduit opening........................... M20 25mm metric thread for conduit opening........................... M25 3 /4" NPT hub conduit opening............................................. NPT75 Pulse-start metal halide only.............................................. S828 Retention chain................................................................... S831 Enclosure machined for 2 conduit/cable entries................ S886 FA Factory assembled, lamp installed in lampholder..............
540 21.3
279.2 11.0
557.5 21.9
30.1

Net Fixture Weights (Lbs.): Fixture Series FMVSY600 FMVSY750 FMVSY1000 FMVMY1000 FMVMY1500 78 76 83 76 84
13.5 .5 MTG HOLES
120.7 4.8
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1065
7L
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 2, AEx nR II, Group IIC

Photometric Data:
ISO Footcandle Chart FMV 1000W High Pressure Sodium (HPS) Catalog Number: FMVSY1000-76 Lamp: 1000W Clear HPS Lumen Rating: 140,000 Fixture located at 0, 0 aiming angle at 45 (Note: See Figures 1 and 2). ISO Footcandle Chart FMV 1000W Metal Halide (MH) Catalog Number: FMVMY1000-76 Lamp: 1000W Clear MH Lumen Rating: 110,000 For 1500W MH, multiply footcandles by 1.4 Fixture located a 0, 0 aiming angle at 45 (Note: See Figures 1 and 2).
7L

Fixture FMVSY600 FMVSY750 FMVSY1000 FMVMY750 FMVMY1000 FMVMY1500 Watts Type 600 HPS 750 HPS 1000 HPS 750 MH 1000 MH 1500 MH Bulb T15 ED37 E25 ED37 BT56 BT56 G.E. LU600/T LU750 LU1000 MVR750/VBU/PA MVR1000/U MVR1500/U/SPORTS Osram Philips C600S106 C1000S52/ED37 MH1000/U MH1500/BD
1066
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 2, AEx nR II, Group IIC IEC Zone 2, Ex nR II ATEX
Marine locations Wet locations
7L
The Cooper Crouse-Hinds Champ Voyager nR Stainless Steel Floodlight offers the industrys coolest temperature ratingsso it can operate below the ignition temperature of vapors and gases in your classified area. The Champ Voyager nR Floodlight boasts a wide, powerful beam to deliver more light to your process or pathway. Standard terminal blocks and a removable ballast component tray bring you the best combination of easy wiring and simple maintenance in one rugged package.
Applications:
This unique combination of features makes the Champ Voyager nR Floodlight ideal for outdoor, marine, corrosive, and high temperature locations. And because the Champ Voyager nR Floodlight meets international standards, you can install it anywhere in the world.

AEx nR, Ex nR restricted breathing rating is standarda hazardous location luminaire with excellent T3 and T4 ratings without additional accessories or options NEMA 7x6 "butterfly beam" floodlight patternwide, uniform and far reaching to reduce the number of luminaires you need, providing excellent luminaire efficiencymore light where you need it Easy wiringstandard terminal block with marked terminals saves time and eliminates wiring errors Removable ballast component trayfor capacitor, igniter and terminal block to simplify maintenance and save money Housing, hinges, door frame and mounting yoke are all 316 stainless steel for marine and wet locationsrobust construction suitable for saltwater and corrosive applications
Now available with IEC gear and certified to the IEC Ex ATEX Directive. The only mogul base Class I, Division 2 and Zone 2 stainless steel floodlight with restricted breathing (vapor-tight design) as standard construction.

NEC/CEC (NEC Ballast Gear and Socket): Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class I, Zone 2, AEx nR II, Group IIC NEMA Type 4X and IP66 IEC (IEC Ballast Gear and Socket): IEC Zone 2, Ex nR II ATEX UL/cUL Standards: 844Hazardous (Divisions Classified) Locations 1598Luminaires Marine Locations 1598ASupplemental Requirements for Luminaires for Installation on Marine Vessels
7L
Industry Best for Ease of Installation: 1. Removable ballast tray 2. Prewired to terminal blocks 3. Substantial room for wiring
Standard Materials:
Enclosure (housing and lens frame)316 stainless steel Lensheat- and impact-resistant tempered glass Gasketssilicone rubber Yoke and yoke bracket316 stainless steel Reflectorformed specular (dimpled glossy surface) aluminum Cable gland cord grip and locknutpolyamide 6, neoprene bushing
High Pressure Sodium (HPS) 150, 250, and 400W Metal Halide (MH) 175, 250, and 400W
Voltages:
Standard Voltage Ballasts Multi-tap (120, 208, 240, and 277V 60Hz) 480V, 60Hz Tri-tap (120, 277, 347V 60Hz) Optional Voltage Ballasts (for export) 220V or 240V, 50Hz 220V, 60Hz Isolated Ballasts 208, 240, or 480V (for Canada)
Standard Finishes:
316 stainless steelnatural
Hub Size:
Standard: 3/ 4" NPT with a 3/ 4" gland sealing connector
1067
7L
Ordering Information for Floodlight with IEC Ballast:

Lamp Type HPS MH IEC Ref. HSE/HST HIE Watts 150 250 400 150 250 400 Catalog Number* NSSFMVSY150/220 NSSFMVSY250/220 NSSFMVSY400/220 NSSFMVMY150/220 NSSFMVMY250/220 NSSFMVMY400/220

Lamp Type High Pressure Sodium Metal Halide Watts 150 250 400 175 250 400 Catalog Number* SSFMVSY150__ 76 SSFMVSY250__ 76 SSFMVSY400__ 76 SSFMVMY175__ 76 SSFMVMY250__ 76 SSFMVMY400__ 76
*Uses IEC lamp socket E40. NSSFMV Floodlights are designed with IEC ballast gear and lamp socket, providing certification to the IEC Ex ATEX Directive.
Voltage Suffixes:
Voltage Tri-Tap (120, 277, 347V, 60Hz) Multi-Tap 120, 208, 240, 277V, 60Hz) 480V, 60Hz 240V, 60Hz Suffix /TT /MT /480 /MV Voltage 220 50Hz 220 60Hz 240 50Hz 240 60Hz Suffix /220 50 /220 /240 50 /240 60
*To complete catalog number, add voltage and options suffix(es) Example: SSFMVSY150/MT 76.

40C Ambient Lamp Catalog Series SSFMVS SSFMVM Type High Pressure Sodium Metal Halide Watts 150** 250** 400 175** 250** 400 Class I, Zone 2 T4 T4 T3 T3 T3 T3 Temperature Code Class I, Div. 2 T2B 350 T1 T2 325 325 Supply Wire C 90 90 90 90 90 105 Class I, Zone 2 T4 T3 T3 T3 55C Ambient Temperature Code Class I, Div. 2 T2B 350 T2 325 Supply Wire C 105 105 105 105 Fixture Aiming Range 120 90 90 120 90 90 Figure 2 1 1 2 1 1
**Suitable for use in 55C ambient without optional fuses. For U.S. market, use MH Pulse Start option.
7L

Stainless steel slipfitter adapter........................................... SFA6 SS Stainless steel wall mount bracket....................................... SWB6 SS Standard slipfitter adapter SFA6 (cast aluminum).................................................................. Standard wall mount bracket SWB6 (cast aluminum).................................................................. Photocell in DS cover for use with FS/FD box: 120V, 50/60Hz.................................................................... D2S20 208-277V, 50/60Hz............................................................ D2S208 277 FIGURE 1
FIGURE 2
1068
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
7L


Net Fixture Weights (Lbs.) Luminaire 150W 175W 250W 400W HPS 39 39 43 45 MH 39 39 41 43
Options:
7L
Description Suffix Instant Restrike and Ballast Guard Instant Restrikeenables a hot HPS lamp to immediately restrike after a momentary loss of arc due to voltage fluctuation or power outage Ballast guard starter cut out switchprevents starter pulsing when lamp is cycling or inoperative; prolongs ballast and ignitor life............................................................................................................................................. TIR 150W LX HPS only Factory assembled with HID lamp installed.................................................................................................................................................. FA Fused (not suitable for marine applications).................................................................................................................................................. S658 20mm metric thread for conduit opening...................................................................................................................................................... M20 25mm metric thread for conduit opening...................................................................................................................................................... M25 3 /4" NPT hub conduit opening........................................................................................................................................................................ NPT75 Furnished with lamps (not installed).............................................................................................................................................................. S714 Pulse-start metal halide only......................................................................................................................................................................... S828 Enclosure machined for 2 conduit/cable entries........................................................................................................................................... S886 Yoke mount and slipfitter............................................................................................................................................................................... SFA6
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1069
7L
Photometric Data:
MH Wide Beam Reflector HPS Wide Beam Reflector
ISOFOOTCANDLE CHART 400W Metal Halide (MH) Catalog Number: SSFMVMY400/MT Lamp: 400W Clear MH Lumen Rating: 34,000 Luminaire located at 0, 0 aiming angle at 45 down from horizontal For 175W MH, multiply footcandles by 0.42. For 250W HPS, multiply footcandles by 0.65.
ISOFOOTCANDLE CHART 400W High Pressure Sodium (HPS) Catalog Number: SSFMVSY400/MT Lamp: 400W Clear HPS Lumen Rating: 50,000 Luminaire located at 0, 0 aiming angle at 45 down from horizontal For 150W HPS, multiply footcandles by 0.32. For 250W HPS, multiply footcandles by 0.57.
Mounting Height
Footcandle Values for Isofootcandle Lines A B 20.000 8.889 5.000 3.200 2.222 1.633 1.250 39.000 3.555 2.000 1.280 0.889 0.653 0.500
C 4.000 1.778 1.000 0.640 0.444 0.327 0.250
D 2.000 0.889 0.500 0.320 0.222 0.163 0.125
E 0.800 0.356 0.200 0.128 0.089 0.065 0.050
F 0.400 0.178 0.100 0.064 0.044 0.033 0.025
10' 15' 20' 25' 30' 35' 40'
7L
Mounting Height
Footcandle Values for Isofootcandle Lines A 40.000 17.778 10.000 6.400 4.444 3.265 2.500 B 20.000 8.889 5.000 3.200 2.222 1.633 1.250 C 8.000 3.555 2.000 1.280 0.889 0.653 0.500 D 4.000 1.778 1.000 0.640 0.444 0.327 0.250 E 2.000 0.889 0.500 0.320 0.222 0.163 0.125 F 0.800 0.356 0.200 0.128 0.089 0.065 0.050
10' 15' 20' 25' 30' 35' 40'
1070
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Champ F2MV Mini-Floodlights
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 2, Group IIC
Marine locations NEMA Type 4X Wet locations
7L
F2MV is a compact floodlight consisting of a Corro-Free epoxy coated copper-free aluminum enclosure, with stainless steel external hardware and impact-resistant glass. It is available for use with the following energy-saving mogul base HID lamp types and wattages: High Pressure Sodium (HPS)50, 70, 100, and 150W Metal Halide (MH)70, 100, and 175W
Applications:
Available in a variety of voltage ratings, this compact floodlight is suitable for marine and wet locations.

Small, compact sizeeasy to install and maintain 40C, 55C, and 65C ambient suitabilityaddresses high ambients common in industrial facilities Low ambient capability to 40Cperfect for colder climates Heavy-duty, copper-free aluminum enclosure with epoxy coating and stainless steel hardwareprovides a robust design with industrial grade construction and corrosion resistance Continuous silicone gasketingensures wet and marine locations integrity Stainless steel tether chain and captive cover screwssecure cover to housing ensures ease of maintenance Trunnion (yoke) mount designstandard construction provides the greatest mounting flexibility, can be mounted vertically (wall), horizontally (rooftop or floor), or any angle in between Requires only two bolts to mountsimplifies installation Heat- and impact-resistant tempered glass lensprovides exceptional stability Shock-absorbing mogul base lamp socketcushions lamp, improves lamp life in harsh environments 3-axis resonance withstand and UL844 vibration compliant stands up to the tough jobs Precision formed aluminum reflectorsuperior beam control, distribution and efficiency NEMA 7x6 floodlight pattern with lamp orientation base downthe ideal light distribution for industrial applications Multi-tap ballastsoffering a choice of 120, 208, 240, and 277V; 220V, 50Hz; 240V 50Hz; Tri-Tap (120, 277, and 347) and 480V ballasts are also available High light output with a low cost of operationa cost-effective, high wattage floodlight For use with SFA6 slipfitter adapter and SWB6 wall mount bracket accessoriesfurther enhances mounting flexibility Restricted breathing compliancecooler T-numbers for increased hazardous locations suitability

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Marine locations NEMA Type 4X Wet locations IEC/NEC/CEC: Class I, Zone 2, Group IIC With suffixS826 and S826TBrestricted breathing (Ex nR) option Class I, Zone 2 Class I, Division 2 UL Standards: 844Hazardous (Divisions Classified) Locations 2279Hazardous (Zones Classified) Locations 1572Ordinary and Wet Locations, Marine Outside Type CSA Standards: C22.2 No. 137 CAN/CSA-E79 Series IEC Standards: 60079-15
7L
HPS50, 70, 100, and 150W MH70, 100, and 175W
Voltages:
Standard Voltage Ballasts Multi-tap (120, 208, 240, and 277V 60Hz) Dual-tap (120, 277V 60Hz)50W HPS only 480V 60Hz Tri-tap (120, 277, 347V 60Hz) Optional Voltage Ballasts (Consult Cooper Crouse-Hinds) 220V or 240V 50Hz (for export) 220V 60Hz (for export) Isolated Ballasts (Consult Cooper Crouse-Hinds) 208, 240, or 480V (for Canada)
Standard Materials:
Enclosure (housing and lens cover)copper-free aluminum Cover chain and external hardwarestainless steel Lensheat- and impact-resistant glass Gasketssilicone rubber Yokecopper-free aluminum Reflectordiffused aluminum lighting sheet
Standard Finishes:
Enclosure and yokeCorro-Free epoxy powder coat Stainless steelnatural
Hub Size:
Standard(2) 3/4" NPT Optional(2) 25 mm (M25 x 1.5) or (2) 20 mm (M20 x 1.5)
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1071
7L
Base Catalog Number* Lamp Type High Pressure Sodium Metal Halide Watts 50 70 100 150 70 100 175
3
/4" NPT Hub
25mm Hub F2MVS25Y050__ F2MVS25Y070__ F2MVS25Y100__ F2MVS25Y150__ F2MVM25Y070__ F2MVM25Y100__ F2MVM25Y175__
F2MVSY050__ F2MVSY070__ F2MVSY100__ F2MVSY150__ F2MVMY070__ F2MVMY100__ F2MVMY175__
* To complete catalog number, add voltage and options suffix(es). For 20mm metric threads, change 25 to 20 in catalog number. Example: F2MVS20Y050/MT.
Voltage Suffixes:
Voltage (60Hz) Suffix Dual-Tap /DT Tri-Tap /TT Multi-Tap /MT 480 /480
Options Example:
F2MVSY070/MT V2PC20
Series Yoke Lamp Type Watt Voltage Photocell
Options:
Description Suffix Instant Restrike and Ballast Guard Instant Restrikeenables a hot HPS lamp to immediately restrike after a momentary loss of arc due to voltage fluctuation or power outage Ballast guard starter cut out switchprevents starter pulsing when lamp is cycling or inoperative; prolongs ballast and ignitor life TIR 150W LX HPS only................................................................................................................................................................................... Factory assembled with HID lamp installed................................................................................................................................................ FA Fused (not suitable for marine applications)................................................................................................................................................ S658 Furnished with lamps (not installed)............................................................................................................................................................ S714 Pulse-start metal halide only....................................................................................................................................................................... S828 Photocell 120V, 50/60Hz installed............................................................................................................................................................... V2PC20 Photocell 208-240V, 50/60Hz installed........................................................................................................................................................ V2PC22 Photocell 277V, 50/60Hz installed............................................................................................................................................................... V2PC27
7L
1072
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
7L
Photometric Data:
Isofootcandle Chart F2MV 150W High Pressure Sodium (HPS) Catalog Number: F2MVSY150 Lamp: 150W Clear HPS Lumen Rating: 16,000 For 100W HPS, multiply footcandles by .55. For 70W HPS, multiply footcandles by .40. For 50W HPS, multiply footcandles by .24. Isofootcandle Chart F2MV 175W Metal Halide (MH) Catalog Number: F2MVMY175 Lamp: 175W Clear MH Lumen Rating: 14,000 For 100W MH, multiply footcandles by .58. For 70W MH, multiply footcandles by .37.

Slipfitter adapter To be mounted to yoke mount fixture Fits onto 2" pipe/conduit.......................................................................... Wall bracket Use with slipfitter adapter SFA6 for easy wall mounting and increased adjustability........................ SFA6 SWB6

Footcandle Table:
7L
Mounting Height 10' 15' 20' 25' 30'
Footcandle Values for Isofootcandle Lines A 8.00 3.56 2.00 1.28 0.89 B 4.00 1.78 1.00 0.64 0.44 C 2.00 0.89 0.50 0.32 0.22 D 0.80 0.36 0.20 0.13 0.09 E 0.40 0.18 0.10 0.06 0.04
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1073
7L
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A,B,C,D Cl. I, Zone 2, Group IIC

40C Ambient Lamp Catalog Series Type High Pressure Sodium Metal Halide Temperature Code Class I, Div. 2 T3C T3A T2D T2A T3C T2D T2A Supply Wire C 75 60 75 75 75 75 75 55C Ambient Temperature Code Class I, Zone 2* T6 T5 T4 T4 T5 T4 T3 Class I, Div. 2 T3C T3A T2C T2A T3A T2D T2A Supply Wire C 75 75 90 85 75 75 85 65C Ambient Temperature Code Class I, Zone 2* T3B T3 T3 T4 T4 T3 Class I, Div. 2 T5 T4 T2A T3A T2C T2A Supply Wire C 75 85 110 85 85 110 Fixture Aiming Range Figure 90 90 90 90 90 90 90 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Class I, Watts Zone 2 50 70 100 150** 70 100 175** T6 T6 T4 T4 T6 T4 T3
F2MVS
F2MVM
*Restricted breathing explosion protection, requires suffix S826 (TB). **Suitable for use in 65C ambient without optional fuses.

Fixture F2MVSY050 F2MVSY070 F2MVSY100 F2MVSY150 F2MVMY070 F2MVMY100 F2MVMY175 Watts Type 50 HPS 70 HPS 100 HPS 150 HPS 70 MH 100 MH 175 MH Bulb ED23 ED23 ED23 ED23 ED28 ED28 ED28 /2 1 /2 1 /2 1 /2
1
G.E. or or or or ET23 ET23 ET23 ET23 /2 1 /2 1 /2 1 /2

1
Osram LU50 LU70 LU100 LU150/55 M175/C/U
Philips C50S68 C70S62 C100S54 C150S55 MH175/C/U
Venture MH70W/U/ED28 MH100/U/ED28 MH175/C/U
or BT28
LU50 LU70 LU100 LU150/55 MVR175/C/U

Fixture Weight: 26 lbs.
7L
1074
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
FZD Series Floodlight Luminaire
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. I, Zone I Marine Locations Wet Locations, IP66
7L
Finally, a true floodlight luminaire for hazardous areas.

Cooper Crouse-Hinds FZD Series Luminaires are the first to deliver NEMA 7 x 6 floodlight distribution patterns for Class I, Division 1 and Zone 1 environments. That means youll need fewer of them to illuminate a given area. With their labor-saving features and flexible mounting options, the FZD Series is ideal for: Heavy process industries where flammable or explosive vapors or gases are present Hazardous areas, both indoors and outdoors, including those requiring elevated ambient capability, where long life and low maintenance costs are desired Petroleum refineries, chemical, petrochemical, and other heavy process industrial facilities Mounting to a wall, structure, or pole (with pole mount adapter accessory)
FZD with separate ballast enclosure

NEMA 7 6 floodlight distribution pattern is standard ideal light distribution for industrial applications; requires fewer luminaires in general lighting applications than required when using general area luminaires with high bay reflectors Internal reflector available in wide and narrow beam options; enclosed in glass tube, reducing maintenance and enhancing light output Heavy duty, cast copper-free aluminum construction with epoxy powder coat finish and stainless steel hardware provides long life in industrial, abusive environments Explosionproof threaded construction suitable for hazardous and industrial applications; easy to maintain with no bolted covers O-ring gaskets on all threaded openings allow NEMA Type 4X and marine listing for the harshest outdoor environments 40C, 55C, and 65C ambient suitability ideal for use in high ambient temperature areas common in industrial facilities Factory-sealed ballast housing keeps ballast isolated from wiring chamber Trunnion (yoke) mount design standard construction provides the greatest mounting flexibility; can be vertically (wall) or horizontally (rooftop or floor) mounted Simple installation requires only two bolts to mount Mounting flexibility pole mount with SFA6-XP pole mount adapter (shown below) or wall or ceiling mount with FZD-KIT1 mounting accessory kit (shown above).

NEC/CEC Class I, Division 1, Group B (with suffix GB*), C, D Class I, Zone 1, Group IIB+H2 (with suffix -GB*), IIB AEx d IIB+H (with suffix -GB*), IIB Ex d IIB+H2 (with suffix -GB*), IIB Marine Locations Wet Locations Enclosure Type 4X IP66 UL Listed (UL Standards 844, 1598, 1598A, 2279) cUL Listed (certified by UL to CSA Standard C22.2 No. 137 and CAN/CSAE60079-1)
*See options for Group B and IIB+H2 ordering information.
Pole Mount Adapter
Ratings:
Sources/Wattages (Mogul Base Lamps) HPS 150, 250 & 400 watts MH 175, 250 & 400 watts Voltages Standard Voltage Ballasts Multi-tap (120, 208, 240 & 277 V, 60 Hz) 120 V, 60 Hz 480 V, 60 Hz Tri-tap (120, 277 & 347 V, 60 Hz) Optional Voltage Ballasts 220 V, 60 Hz 220 V, 50 Hz Hub Size Standard: Two 3/4" NPT entries Optional: Two 25 mm (M25) entries (consult Cooper Crouse-Hinds)
Standard Materials:
Luminaire housing, covers, socket holder, lamp tube end rings copperfree aluminum External hardware stainless steel Glass lamp tube heat- and impactresistant tempered glass O-ring gaskets neoprene/silicone Yoke aluminum Trunnion adapter brass
7L
Standard Finishes:
Aluminum Corro-free epoxy powder coat Stainless steel natural Brass natural
Luminaire Weights
(lbs.):
Luminaire FZDS (HPS) FZDM (MH) 150 watt 72 75 175 to 250 watt 77 77 400 watt 80 80
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1075
7L
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. I, Zone I Marine Locations Wet Locations, IP66
Lamp Type Wide Beam Reflector 7 x 6 Distribution High Pressure Sodium Watts Cat. #* Yoke Mount With 3 /4" NPT Hubs
Voltage Suffixes:
Standard Voltages Multi-tap (120, 208, 240, 277 V, 60 Hz) Tri-tap (120, 277, 347 V, 60 Hz) 120 V, 60 Hz 480 V, 60 Hz Suffix /MT /TT /120 /480 Optional Voltages 220 V, 50 Hz 220 V, 60 Hz Suffix /220 50 /220
150 250 400 175 250 400 175 250 400
FZDS2NY150W/MT FZDS2NY250W/MT FZDS2NY400W/MT FZDM2NY175W/MT FZDM2NY250W/MT FZDM2NY400W/MT FZDM2NY175W/MT S828 FZDM2NY250W/MT S828 FZDM2NY400W/MT S828
Metal Halide
Options:
Description Suffix Ballast-Gard starter cut-out switch prevents starter pulsing when lamp is cycling or inoperative; prolongs ballast and igniter life (HPS only; not available with IR option).................. BG Factory assembled with HID lamp installed for additional labor savings............................................................................ FA Factory certified: Class I, Division 1, Group B and Class I, Zone 1, Group IIB + H2........................................................... GB Instant restrike enables a hot HPS lamp to immediately restrike after a momentary loss of arc due to voltage fluctuation or power outage; it has no affect on the warmup period of cold lamps; available for use with 150 watt HPS only.................................................................................. IR Fusing protects ballast and capacitor against abnormal line conditions................................................................................ S658*
Pulse Start Metal Halide Narrow Beam Reflector Spotlight Distribution High Pressure Sodium
150 250 400 175 250 400 175 250 400
FZDS2NY150N/MT FZDS2NY250N/MT FZDS2NY400N/MT FZDM2NY175N/MT FZDM2NY250N/MT FZDM2NY400N/MT FZDM2NY175N/MT S828 FZDM2NY250N/MT S828 FZDM2NY400N/MT S828
Metal Halide
To complete the catalog number, add option suffix(es) if desired. Example: FZDS2NY400W/MT-S658 *All FZD catalog numbers shown above are with multi-tap ballasts (120, 208, 240 & 277 V, 60 Hz). The "MT" in the catalog number may be changed to any of the voltage suffixes listed below. 150 watt HPS luminaires are furnished with ANSI spec/S55 ballasts for 55 V lamps.
Accessories:
(order separately) For Pole Mounting Pole mount adapter Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, D Attach to yoke; fits 2" NPT conduit pole Flexible explosionproof coupling Elbow fitting For Wall Or Ceiling Mounting Kit includes: EABC26-SA conduit outlet box, ECLK236 flexible explosionproof coupling, and EL296-SA elbow fitting Cat. # SFA6-XP
FZD With Separate Ballast Enclosure:

Glass Fiber Reinforced Polyester Ballast Enclosure With Cable Entry
Lamp Type Watts Wide Beam Reflector NEMA 7 HPS/MH 250 Metal Halide 400 High Pressure Sodium 400 Narrow Beam Reflector HPS/MH Metal Halide High Pressure Sodium T-Code Cat. # x 6 Distribution T4 NOR 000 005 192 506 T3 NOR 000 005 194 106 T3 NOR 000 005 194 006
ECLK236 EL296-SA FZD-KIT1
7L
Spotlight Distribution 250 T4 NOR 000 005 192 505 400 T3 NOR 000 005 194 105 400 T3 NOR 000 005 194 005

Lamp 150 watt HPS Ambient Temp. C 40 55 65 40 55 65 40 55 65 40 55 65 40 55 65 40 55 65 Class I, Division 1, Zone 1 T3C T3C T3B T3C T3C T3B T3C T3C T3B T3A T3 T3 T3A T3 T3 T3A T3 T3 Supply Wire C 75 75 90 75 75 90 75 75 90 75 75 90 75 75 90 75 75 90
Stainless Steel Ballast Enclosure With Cable Entry

Lamp Type Watts T-Code Wide Beam Reflector 7 x 6 Distribution HPS/MH 250 T4 Metal Halide 400 T3 High Pressure Sodium 400 T3 Narrow Beam Reflector HPS/MH Metal Halide High Pressure Sodium Cat. # 250 watt HPS NOR 000 005 192 502 NOR 000 005 194 102 NOR 000 005 194 002
400 watt HPS 175 watt Metal Halide 250 watt Metal Halide 400 watt Metal Halide
Spotlight Distribution 250 T4 NOR 000 005 192 501 400 T3 NOR 000 005 194 101 400 T3 NOR 000 005 194 001
1076
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Photometric Data
7L
Photometrics:
Note: There are no aiming angle limitations for the FZD. The only limitations are those encountered by interference of the trunnion arm. The trunnion arm may be mounted on vertical or horizontal surfaces to overcome any limitations.
HPS Narrow Beam Reflector

Isofootcandle Chart
FZD 400W High Pressure Sodium (HPS) Catalog Number FZDS2NY400N Lamp: 400 W Clear HPS Lumen rating: 50,000 Luminaire located at 0,0Aiming Angle at 45down from horizontal For 150W HPS, multiply footcandles by 0.32. For 250 W HPS, multiply footcandles by 0.6.
HPS Wide Beam Reflector

Isofootcandle Chart
FZD 400W High Pressure Sodium (HPS) Catalog Number FZDS2NY400W Lamp: 400W Clear HPS Lumen rating: 50,000 Luminaire located at 0,0Aiming Angle at 45down from horizontal For 150W HPS, multiply footcandles by 0.32. For 250W HPS, multiply footcandles by 0.6.
Footcandle Values For Isofootcandle Lines

Mtg. Ht. 10' 12' 16' 20' 25' A 200.00 138.89 78.13 50.00 32.00 B 100.00 69.44 39.06 25.00 16.00 C 50.00 34.72 19.53 12.50 8.00 D 20.00 13.89 7.81 5.00 3.20 E 10.00 6.94 3.91 2.50 1.60 F 5.00 3.47 1.95 1.25 0.8 G 2.00 1.39 0.78 0.50 0.32

Mtg. Ht. 10' 12' 16' 20' 25' A 20.00 13.89 7.81 5.00 3.20 B 10.00 6.94 3.91 2.50 1.60 C 5.00 3.47 1.95 1.25 0.80 D 2.00 1.39 0.78 0.50 0.32 E 1.00 0.69 0.39 0.25 0.16 F 0.50 0.35 0.20 0.13 0.08
MH Narrow Beam Reflector

Isofootcandle Chart
FZD 400W Metal Halide (MH) Catalog Number FZDM2NY400N Lamp: 400W Clear MH Lumen rating: 34,000 Luminaire located at 0,0Aiming Angle at 45down from horizontal For 175W MH, multiply footcandles by 0.38. For 250W MH, multiply footcandles by 0.6.
MH Wide Beam Reflector

Isofootcandle Chart
FZD 400W Metal Halide (MH) Catalog Number FZDM2NY400W Lamp: 400W Clear MH Lumen rating: 34,000 Luminaire located at 0,0Aiming Angle at 45down from horizontal For 175W MH, multiply footcandles by 0.38. For 250W MH, multiply footcandles by 0.6.
7L

Mtg. Ht. 10' 12' 16' 20' 25' A 100.00 64.99 39.06 25.00 16.00 B 50.00 34.72 19.53 12.50 8.00 C 20.00 13.89 7.81 5.00 3.20 D 10.00 6.94 3.91 2.50 1.60 E 5.00 3.47 1.95 1.25 0.80 F 2.00 1.39 0.78 0.50 0.32 G 1.00 0.69 0.39 0.25 0.16

Mtg. Ht. 10' 12' 16' 20' 25' A 20.00 13.89 7.81 5.00 3.20 B 10.00 6.49 3.91 2.50 1.60 C 5.00 3.47 1.95 1.25 0.80 D 2.00 1.39 0.78 0.50 0.32 E 1.00 0.69 0.39 0.25 0.16 F 0.50 0.35 0.20 0.13 0.08

For windloading For proper pole selection Aiming Angle 0 45 EPA 1.8 ft2 2.3 ft2
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1077
7L
HazardGard H.I.D. Floodlights

Factory-sealed
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D (add suffix GB) Cl. I, Zone 1 Marine Locations, IP66 Wet Locations
Applications:
HazardGard Luminaires with Trunnion Arm (S812 suffix) and EV912 High Bay Reflector are used in: Heavy process industries where flammable or explosive vapors or gases are present Hazardous areas, both indoors and outdoors where long life and low maintenance costs are desired Petroleum refineries, chemical, petrochemical, and other heavy process industry facilities Hazardous locations requiring elevated ambient capability For mounting to a wall or structure Mounted on a pole, when used with the SFA6 slipfitter adapter
Standard Materials:
Mounting module, cover, ballast housing, guard, globe ring copper-free aluminum Globe heat- and impact-resistant glass Exterior hardware stainless steel Lamp socket porcelain with stainless steel screw shell Reflector high bay: Alzak aluminum
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum epoxy powder coat Alzak natural (anodized)
Options:
Description Suffix Fused .................................................. S658 Ballast-Gard ...................................... BG 50-400 HPS only Instant Restrike................................... IR Cannot be used with BG or QTZ options 50-150W LX HPS only Quartz Auxiliary Lighting..................... QTZ Not available with 400W MH Uses 100 watt single-ended lamp Lamp not included Group B Suitability ............................. GB

HazardGard Luminaire with Trunnion Arm (S812 suffix)
Maximum Ambient Class I Watts 40C 55C High Pressure Sodium 50 T4 T4 70 T4 T4 100 T4 T4 150 T4 T4 200 T3A 250 T3A 400 T3A Metal Halide 70 T3 100 T3 175 T3 250 T3 400 T2D T3 T3 T3 T3 65C T3C T3C T3C T3C
Features:
Luminaire is factory wired; power is fed through "wireless" connection block which serves as a mechanical seal between conduit and ballast compartments, eliminating the need for an external, field-installed seal; the result is fast, easy installation High bay reflectors of Alzak aluminum Internally fluted glass globes reduce glare and provide comfortable viewing light Wide range of light sources and wattages to meet specific lighting needs 50, 70, 100, 150, 200, 250 and 400W high pressure sodium (HPS); 70, 100, 175, 250 and 400W metal halide (MH) High power factor (90%+) ballasts reduce power costs allow more luminaires per circuit Elevated ambient capability permits reliable operation at high ambient temperature; selected luminaires are suitable for ambient temperatures up to 65C Integral ballasts separate ballasts are not required; lowest installed cost Factory-sealed, porcelain, mogul base socket The trunion arm gives you the ability to offer a HazardGard floodlight with varying degrees of adjustability between -90 and +90 When mounting on a wall, there are numerous mounting arrangements due to the pre-drilled openings in the wall bracket
Size Ranges:
3/4"

120, 208, 240, 277, 347, 480, 600, multi-tap* 50 to 400 watts
Note: See Section 4L for additional luminaire information.
7L
Catalog number includes guard, trunnion arm, and high bay reflector Hub Luminaire Size Cat. # Watts (In.) High Pressure Sodium 3 EVMA42051/volts S812 EV3912 50 /4 3 EVMA42071/volts S812 EV3912 70 /4 3 EVMA42101/volts S812 EV3912 100 /4 3 EVMA42151/volts S812 EV3912 150 /4 3 EVMA42201/volts S812 EV3912 /4 3 EVMA42251/volts S812 EV3912 /4 3 EVMA42401/volts S812 EV3912 /4 Metal Halide
EVMA92071/volts EVMA92101/volts EVMA92171/volts EVMA92251/volts EVMA92401/volts
Note:
Required Accessories:
EABC
Cat. # EABC26 Hub Size (In.)
3
/4

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B (with GB suffix), C, D UL Standard: 844, 595 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 137
S812 S812 S812 S812 S812
EV3912 EV3912 EV3912 EV3912 EV3912
70 100 175 250 400
/4 /4 3 /4 3 /4 3 /4
3 3
UNL
90 Angle
Cat. # UNL205 Size
3
/4 to 3/4
Replace "volts" with Suffix from Voltage Suffix Table below
ECGJH
Cat. # ECGJH230 Flexible Length 30 Size
3
/4
*CSA certified luminaires are not available with multi-tap ballast or S658 fuse option. Alzak is a registered trademark of ALCOA.
1078
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
RCDE Series
Incandescent Floodlights
Applications:
RCDE Incandescent Lighting Luminaires are permanently installed to provide general illumination in locations having hazardous atmospheres, such as: Oil refineries Oil and gasoline loading docks Aircraft servicing docks and shelters Distilleries Paint manufacturing plants Pumping stations Other Class I, Groups C and D locations
Cl. I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups C, D Cl. I, Zone 1
7L

NEC/CEC: RCDE Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups C, D; Class I, Zone 1 (see photometric data listing) UL Standard: 844 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 137 (RCDE6 only)
CEC/CSA Certified RCDE-6 - Cooper Crouse-Hinds Canada luminaires only.
Standard Materials:
Body copper-free aluminum Lens glass-, heat- and impact-resistant
Features:
RCDE Incandescent Lighting Luminaires have fixed mountings as follows: RCDE-6 junction box base with four mounting feet or 2" threaded hub (fill sealing chamber with Chico A after conductors are in place) RCDE-6 adjustment allows rotation of 360 horizontally and 75 vertically Locking screws hold housing firmly in position RCDE-10 junction box base with four mounting feet Door which threads into housing includes heat- and impact-resistant lens; door has notches or holes provided for ease of removing or tightening Factory wired leads through explosionproof seal to junction box Adjustment that allows rotation of 360 horizontally and 135 vertically; locking bolts or clamps hold housing firmly in position
RCDE-6
Description Cat. # Junction box base 44978A (2" threaded hub) Junction box base (4 mtg. feet) 44719B
Standard Finishes:
Natural
Size Ranges:
RCDE fixed mounting 3/ 4" hubs
Capacity Ranges:
RCDE-6 150 watt, PAR38 or R40; 300 watt, R40 (medium base) RCDE-10 500 watt, PAR64 Ext. Mog End Prong)
After identifying the hazardous area, select the model of lighting luminaire required for that area. Then from the photometric data, select appropriate Cat. No. based on type of mounting desired (Example: RCDE-10 No. 47282).
RCDE-10
Description Cat. # 47282A Junction box base (4 mtg. feet)
7L

(based on 40C Ambient)
150W RCDE-6 RCDE-10 T3B 300W T2B T3C 500W
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1079
7L
RCDE Series
Incandescent Floodlights
Dimensions & Weights Photometric Data Cl. I, Div. 1 and 2, Group D Explosionproof
Dimensions (In.):
RCDE-6 RCDE-10
Fixture Weights:
Cat. # RCDE-6 44719B 44978A RCDE-10 47282A Lbs. (Net) 21.0 21.0 26.0
Photometric Data:
Beam Spread Lamp Watts and Type RCDE-6 150 Watt PAR38 Flood 150 Watt PAR38 Spot 300 Watt* R40 Flood 300 Watt R40 Spot RCDE-10 500 Watt, PAR64 (500 PAR64/NSP) 500 Watt, PAR64 (500 PAR64/MFL) 500 Watt, PAR64 (500 PAR64/WFL) 55
*CSA certified fixtures are for 150 watt lamp maximum.
Location
Hor. 60 28
Vert. 60 28 123 60 14 19 32
Beam Lumens 1690 1200 3200 3100 3000 3300 3400
Av. Max. Candle Power 4000 11500 1950 8900 110000 37000 13000
Class I, Groups C, D
7L
Class I, Group D
123 60 19
Class I, Group D
35
1080
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Lighting Accessories Hazardous and Non-hazardous
8L
Description
Application/Selection Hazardous Area Hangers Adjustable Type
UNR
Page No.
see page 1082
see page 1099 see page 1093 see page 1099 see page 1094 see page 1097 see page 1096 see page 1095
Flexible Type
EC Series
Locking Coupling
COUP Series
Outlet Box Type

EAHC/EFHC Series GUA/GUF Series CPS Series
Outlet Box Type with Flexible Cushion

EFHX Series
Non-hazardous Area Fittings Conduit Clamps

CHS Series
see page 1091
Non-hazardous Area Hangers Flexible Type Ball and Cushion

ARB Series UNJ/UNJC Series
see page 1089 see page 1087 see page 1087 see page 1091 see page 1090
Cushion Vaportight
AHG Series UNHC Series
Hooks and Loops

UNE, UNH, UNHC Series
Outlet Box Ball and Cushion

AL Series
8L
Quick Disconnect Type

FHM Series
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1081
8L
Luminaire Hangers and Accessories For Pendant Mount

Applications:
Luminaire hangers listed in this section are used for pendant suspension of incandescent, high intensity discharge, and fluorescent industrial luminaires They are especially suitable for use in locations where moisture, dust, and corrosion are a problem
Typical Luminaire Weights:

Luminaire Weight Type (lbs.) Incandescent: VAPORGARD Series VDA12 11/2 VDA12G 4 VDA12GP 41/4 VDA15 11/4 VDA15G 3 VDA15GP 31/4 VDA23 11/2 VDA23G 4 V Series V275 23/4 V2759 41/4 EV Series EVI301 11 EVI501 24 EVA292 18 CorroGard Series NDA32 51/2 NDA32G 71/2 NDA33 NDA33G 81/4 Luminaire Type H.I.D.: Champ Series DMVC2A250GP DMVM2A175GP DMVM2A250GP DMVS2A070GP DMVS2A100GP DMVS2A150GP LMVS2A035GP LMVS2A050GP LMVS2A070GP LMVS2A100GP VMVM2A175GP VMVM2A250GP VMVM2A250GR305 VMVM2A250GRD4 VMVM2A400GR305 VMVM2A400GRD4 VMVS2A050GP VMVS2A070GP VMVS2A100GP VMVS2A150GP VMVS2A200GP VMVS2A200GR305 VMVS2A200GRD4 VMVS2A250GP VMVS2A250GR305 VMVS2A250GRD4 VMVS2A400GP VMVS2A400GRD4 Weight (lbs.) Luminaire Type Hazard-Gard Series EVMA50W HPS EVMA70W HPS EVMA100W HPS EVMA150W HPS (55V) EVMA150W HPS (100V) EVMA175W MH EVMA200W HPS EVMA250W HPS EVMA250W MH EVMA400W HPS EVMA400W MH Fluorescent: DMVF2A026GP DMVF2A039GP DMVFB2A026GP DMVFB2A039GP EVF22062 EVF24062 EVF22082 FVN4240 FVN4340 FVN4260 NFW4240 VFA222G EVFT (2 Lamp) EVFT (4 Lamp) FVS Reflector/Refractor Type EV3912 RA64, 636 RA70, 71, 739, 725 RD64, 636 RD70, 71, 739, 725 PR2, 3, 5 R2 R5 GRD4 G241 G245 GR305, GR205 Weight (lbs.)
Hangers for Non-hazardous Locations:

Hangers listed provide a wide variety of mounting means; luminaires may be suspended from cast outlet boxes, stamped steel outlet boxes, or directly from the conduit system; also offered are several styles of hook type hangers, used to suspend luminaires by means of conduit stems or support rods from span wires, horizontal conduit and luminaire loops All hangers are flexible, permitting luminaire and supporting stem to swing freely; this feature permits luminaires to hang plumb and prevents damage to the luminaire, stem, and outlet box in case of high wind or accidental impact Hangers are constructed so that luminaires cannot be rotated, thereby eliminating wire twisting and possible damage to connections Cushion hangers, listed for most styles, include a spring which carries the weight of the luminaire; this feature prolongs lamp life and protects the luminaire assembly from shock or vibration All hangers are easily installed; with many, the luminaire, stem, and support member can be assembled and wired at the work bench before making the final installation; with several, a quick disconnect plug and receptacle feature is either provided or can be easily arranged, to facilitate luminaire installation and removal for maintenance
313/4 33 333/4 303/4 313/4 34 103/4 113/4 113/4 121/4 171/4 34 37 341/2 38 351/2 151/4 161/4 161/4 161/2 31 34 311/2 31 34 311/2 40 401/2
41 41 45 46 45 43 47 47 44 56 52 191/4 221/4 191/2 57 94 52 52 54 58 21 4 191/2 361/2 12 1 11/4 1 1 3 131/2 13 133/4 21/4 21/4 14
8L

Location: Will it require more stringent corrosion protection material? Will it be a hazardous or non-hazardous location? Lighting luminaire to be used: Some hangers can be used with a multitude of luminaires; others are specialized Weight of luminaire is a consideration in selecting cushion hangers
Hangers for Hazardous Locations:

As required by NEC Article 501 and CEC Part I Section 18, rigid conduit luminaire stems longer than 12" must be permanently and effectively braced or flexibility provided in the form of a fitting or flexible support A variety of hangers is offered for both rigid conduit suspension and flexible suspension; flexible luminaire hangers listed comply with NEC Article 501 and CEC Part I Section 18 and also permit luminaires to hang plumb
1082
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Luminaire Weight Capacity (Cushion) 3-48 lbs. Luminaire Weight Capacity (Ball or Plain Type) 125 lbs.
8L
Hanger Type AL
Function Outlet box and hanger
NEC/CEC Hazardous Area Compliances Cl. I, Div. 2
Use with Luminaire Type Any non-hazardous or Class I, Div. 2
Use with Mtg. Box None needed
Standard Material Body Feraloy iron alloy Nipple malleable iron Cover sheet steel Body copperfree aluminum Cover steel Loop and assembly copper-free aluminum or steel Housing malleable iron and Feraloy iron alloy Stem support Feraloy iron alloy Body malleable iron Clamp copper-free aluminum Body Feraloy iron alloy Malleable iron, copperfree aluminum Body bronze hose Fittings steel Boxes Feraloy iron alloy Cover copperfree aluminum Body Feraloy iron alloy Cover copperfree aluminum Feraloy iron alloy Feraloy iron alloy
FHM
Quick disconnect between luminaire and outlet box
Not applicable
Any non-hazardous
None needed
125 lbs.
AHG
Gasketed hanger (vaportight)
Cl. I, Div. 2; Cl. II, Div. 2; Cl. III Wet locations NEMA 3, 3R
Any non-hazardous or Div. 2 luminaires
Any
4-30 lbs.
UNJ/UNJC
Ball and cushion hanger
Cl. I, Div. 2
Any non-hazardous or Class I, Div. 2
Any
6-48 lbs.
125 lbs.
ARB
Ball or cushion hanger Quick disconnect hanger hook Explosionproof flexible hanger Explosionproof boxes and hanger covers Explosionproof hanger
Cl. I, Div. 2
Any non-hazardous or Class I, Div. 2 Any non-hazardous or Class I, Div. 2 Any hazardous Any hazardous
GRF
4-30 lbs.
125 lbs.
UNE, UNH, UNHC EC
Cl. I, Div. 2
Not applicable Any
12-64 lbs.
125 lbs.
8L
Cl. I, Groups A, B, C, D; Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III Cl. I, Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III Cl. I, Groups A, B, C, D; Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III Cl. I, Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III Cl. I, Groups C, D; Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III
GUA, GUJ, GUF
None needed
125 lbs.
EAHC, EFHC
Any hazardous
None needed
125 lbs.
UNR
Explosionproof adjustable hanger Explosionproof boxes and hangers
Any hazardous or non-hazardous Any hazardous
Any
125 lbs.
EFH
None needed
65 lbs.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1083
8L

8L
1084
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

8L
8L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1085
8L
AL Flexible Luminaire Hangers

For Pendant Mount
Features:
Functions as both conduit outlet box and luminaire hanger; hubs are provided for threading the conduit directly into the hanger body; for use with incandescent, H.I.D., and fluorescent luminaires Supporting nipple, ball or cushion type, is a universal joint permitting luminaire to swing through an angle of 20 degrees in any direction from the perpendicular Cover has one screw hole and one open slot easily swung aside for wiring without removal and possible loss of cover Luminaire, conduit stem, and nipple can be assembled and wired at the work bench; the assembly is then placed in the hanger body and luminaire wires spliced to the circuit wires Provided with a separate grounding wire for ground connections
ALC
ALT
Ball
Ball
Standard Materials:
Body Feraloy Nipple malleable iron Cover sheet steel
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy and malleable iron zinc electroplate and aluminum acrylic paint Sheet steel electrogalvanized with chromate finish
Cushion
Cushion
Ball
Luminaire Stem Size /2 /4 3 /4
1 3
Ball
Conduit Size
3 3
Size Ranges:
Conduit hubs 3/4" to 1" Luminaire stem 1/2" and 3/4" Luminaire weight cushion type, 3 to 48 lbs.; ball type, 125 lbs.
Cat. # ALC21 ALC22 ALC32
Luminaire Stem Size /2 3 /4 3 /4

1
3
Cat. # ALT21 ALT22 ALT32
/4 /4 1
Cushion
Luminaire Luminaire Stem Conduit Weight Size Size (Lbs.) Cat. # /2 /4 3 /4
1 3
Cushion
Luminaire Luminaire Stem Conduit Weight Size Size (Lbs.) Cat. # /2 /4 3 /4
1 3 3 3
8L
Options:
The following special options are available from the factory by adding the suffix to the Cat. No.: Description Suffix Suspension attachment for span wire or threaded rod (see listings) S1
/4 /4 1
3 3
3 to 6
ALC214 ALC224 ALC324 ALC218 ALC228 ALC328 ALC2116 ALC2216 ALC3216 ALC2132 ALC2232 ALC3232
/4 /4 1 /4 /4 1 /4 /4 1 /4 /4 1
3 to 6
ALT214 ALT224 ALT324 ALT218 ALT228 ALT328 ALT2116 ALT2216 ALT3216 ALT2132 ALT2232 ALT3232
Suspension Attachment
For horizontal cable or vertical support rod
/2 /4 3 /4
1 3
/4 /4 1
3 3
6 to 12
/2 /4 3 /4
1 3
3 3
6 to 12
/2 /4 3 /4
1 3
/4 /4 1
3 3
12 to 24
/2 /4 3 /4
1 3
3 3
12 to 24
/2 /4 3 /4
1 3
/4 /4 1
3 3
24 to 48
/2 /4 3 /4
1 3
3 3
24 to 48
AL hangers can be furnished with a loop fastened to the top of the body to provide a means for suspending luminaires from vertical support rods or horizontal span wires. The loop will take a wire or cable with a maximum diameter of 3/ 8". The boss on top of the loop is tapped 3/ 8"-16 to accept a threaded rod.
1086
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
AHG, UNJ and UNJC Flexible Luminaire Hangers

For Pendant Mount
Features:
For connection to conduit hub or hub cover of supporting conduit fitting For incandescent, H.I.D., and fluorescent luminaires Cushion support for conduit stem is a universal joint permitting luminaire to swing through an angle of 8 degrees in any direction from the perpendicular Gasketed by means of a durable neoprene diaphragm which excludes moisture and dirt from both luminaire and conduit system
AHG Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III Wet Locations, NEMA 3, 3R UNJ, UNJC Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Standard Materials:
Housing: top cap malleable iron; bottom cap Feraloy iron alloy Luminaire stem support Feraloy iron alloy
8L
AHG
Cushion Vaportight for Class I, Div. 2; Class II, Div. 2: Class III
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy and malleable iron electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint
Size Ranges:
Male nipple 3/4" Luminaire stem 3/4" Luminaire weight 4 to 30 lbs.

Class I, Division 2 Class II, Division 2 Class III Wet Locations NEMA 3,3R
Luminaire Male Luminaire Stem Nipple Weight Size* Size* (Lbs.) Cat. # /4 /4 3 /4
3 3 3 3 3
/4 /4 /4
4 to 8 8 to 16 16 to 30
AHG22103 AHG22104 AHG22111
Features:
For connection to conduit hub or hub cover of supporting conduit fitting For incandescent, H.I.D., and fluorescent luminaires Supporting nipple, ball or cushion type, is a universal joint permitting luminaires to swing through an angle of 20 degrees in any direction from the perpendicular
UNJ
UNJC
8L

NEC: Class I, Division 2
Standard Materials:
Body and nipple malleable iron Clamp copper-free aluminum
Standard Finishes:
Malleable iron electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Copper-free aluminum natural finish
Ball
Luminaire Stem Size /2 3 /4
1
Cushion
Male Nipple Size /2 3 /4
1
Cat. # UNJ1 UNJ2
Luminaire Stem Size* /4 /4 1 /2 3 /4

3 3
Male Nipple Size* /4 /4 1 /2 3 /4

3 3
Luminaire Weight (Lbs.) Cat. # 6 to 12 12 to 24 24 to 48 24 to 48 UNJC28 UNJC216 UNJC132 UNJC232
Size Ranges:
Male nipple 1/2" and 3/4" Luminaire stem 1/2" and 3/4" Luminaire weight: cushion type 6 to 48 lbs.; ball type 125 lbs.
*1/2" connection can be made by using reducers.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1087
8L
Flexible Luminaire Hangers

For Pendant Mount Dimensions
Dimensions
In Inches:
AL Series - Cushion
UNJ
8L
AL Series - Ball
UNJC
AHG
1088
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
ARB Flexible Luminaire Hangers

For Pendant Mount
Features:
Available in two styles one for direct attachment to GRF cast outlet boxes by 4 screws, the other for direct attachment to 4" octagonal stamped steel outlet boxes by 2 screws; for incandescent, H.I.D., and fluorescent luminaires Both styles available with ball or cushion support for conduit stem to permit luminaire swing in any direction; ball type provides 11 degree swing, cushion type 8 degree swing from the perpendicular Gasketed cushion hangers for GRF are provided with a durable neoprene diaphragm which excludes moisture and dirt from both luminaire and conduit system
8L
For GRF and VXF outlet boxes only
ARB Fits GRF and VXF Outlet Boxes

Ball
Luminaire Stem Description Size 1 Surface /2 1 /2 Flush 3 Surface /4 Luminaire Weight (Max.) 125 125 125 Cat. # ARB62 ARB67 ARB662
Ball
Cushion
Cushion Surface
1
Luminaire Weight (Lbs.) 4 to 8 8 to 16 16 to 30
Cat. # ARB82 ARB102 ARB122
Standard Materials:
Mounting plate for GRF Feraloy iron alloy; for 4" outlet boxes sheet steel Hanger body and luminaire stem support Feraloy iron alloy
Cushion Surface Vaportight with Neoprene Diaphragm

For GRF and VXF outlet boxes and 4" octagonal outlet boxes
1
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Sheet steel electrogalvanized with chromate finish
Size Ranges:
Luminaire stem 1/2" and 3/4" Luminaire weight: cushion type 4 to 30 lbs.; ball type 125 lbs. (ARB6 and ARB2 maximum weight 60 lbs.)
ARB Fits GRF, VXF and 4" Outlet Boxes

Ball
Luminaire Stem Size /2 3 /4
1
Ball
Cushion
Luminaire Weight (Max.) 60 60
Cat. # ARB6 ARB2
Cushion
1
8L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1089
8L
UNE, UNH and UNHC Flexible Luminaire Hangers

For Pendant Mount
The following applies to all items on this page:
Applications:
Provides a simple, inexpensive, quick disconnect method for hanging pendant luminaires; for incandescent, H.I.D., and fluorescent luminaires Permits free swing in any direction to prevent damage to luminaire stem; cushion style provides additional protection from vibration to prolong lamp life
Features:
Female hooks and loops are used with rigid conduit luminaire stems to suspend luminaires; they may also be used with male hooks and loops, threaded into a conduit outlet hub All hooks and loops are provided with openings for passage of luminaire wires; luminaire, conduit stem, and hook or loop can be assembled and wired at the work bench; the assembly is then hung on the fixed hook and connection made For ease of relamping and maintenance, the outlet fitting can be equipped with an attachment plug receptacle cover and a matching plug cap used with the luminaire assembly; for permanent wiring, a wire hole cover may be used Applicable to UNE and UNH (upper listings) only: Male UNH Female Male UNE Female
UNE and UNH Flexible Luminaire Hangers

For Pendant Mount
Type UNH Female Male UNE Female Style Male Luminaire Stem Size /2 3 /4 1 /2 3 /4
1
Luminaire Weight (Lbs.) 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125
Cat. # UNH16 UNH26 UNH1 UNH2 UNE16 UNE26 UNE1 UNE2
/2 /4 1 /2 3 /4
1 3
Features:
Shape of hooks is such that accidental disengagement is impossible Diameter of wire opening: 1/2"
Standard Materials:
Malleable iron
8L
Standard Finishes:
Cadmium electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint
Size Ranges:
Luminaire stem or hub 1/2" and 3/4" Luminaire weight 125 lbs. Applicable to UNH and UNHC (lower listings) only: Female Female Cushion
UNH and UNHC Flexible Luminaire Hangers

Type UNH UNHC Style Female Female Cushion Luminaire Stem Size
1 3
Features:
Hooks are shaped to permit easy installation of large heavy luminaires, such as H.I.D. and fluorescent units Diameter of wire opening: 5/8"
Luminaire Weight (Lbs.) 125 12 to 24 24 to 48 48 to 64
Cat. # UNH182 UNHC216 UNHC232 UNHC264
/2
/4 3 /4 3 /4
Standard Materials:
Standard Finishes:
Natural
Size Ranges:
Luminaire stem 1/2" and 3/4" Luminaire weight: cushion type 12 to 64 lbs.; plain type 125 lbs.
1090
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
UNHC Flexible Luminaire Hangers

For Support Only CHS Conduit Clamp; UNH Conduit Hook; For Pendant Mount Fluorescent Luminaires
Applications:
Used for support of pendant fluorescent luminaires UNHC provides cushion support for luminaires suspended by 1/4" or 5/16" threaded rod, and is used with the ring of CHS conduit clamps UNH hook provides an extremely simple means of conduit suspension for the unwired end of a fluorescent luminaire, as it merely hooks over the horizontal supporting conduit
No Wireway Opening
8L
UNHC Cushion Luminaire Hangers
CHS Conduit Clamp and UNH Hook
Features:
The bushing in UNHC cushion hangers is tapped for both 1/4" and 5/16" suspension rod, with the lower half tapped 5/16"; either size rod can be used without reversing the bushing CHS conduit clamp firmly grips the conduit and the ring at bottom accepts either a hooked rod or the UNHC cushion hanger for threaded rod; will also accept UNH and UNHC hangers for conduit stem listed on the preceding page The UNH conduit hook fits over conduit up to and including 1" and has a hub for attachment of a 1/2" conduit stem Clamp Luminaire Weight (Lbs.) 12 to 24 24 to 48 48 to 64 Support Rod Tap /4"-20 and 5 /16"-18
1
Hook Hook Cat. # UNH13 Hook Hub Size

1
Cat. # UNHC2816 UNHC2832 UNHC2864
Conduit Size
1 3
Clamp Cat. # CHS1437 CHS2437 CHS3437
/2 /4 1
/2
Standard Materials:
UNHC copper-free aluminum CHS: body malleable iron; clamp copper-free aluminum; ring steel wire UNH Feraloy iron alloy
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum natural finish Feraloy and malleable iron electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Steel wire electrogalvanized with chromate finish
8L
Size Ranges:
Luminaire stem (UNH) 1/2" Conduit (CHS): 1/2" to 1" Luminaire weight: UNHC cushion 12 to 64 lbs.; CHS, UNH 125 lbs.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1091
8L
FHM Power Hook Luminaire Hangers

For Pendant Luminaires
Features:
For mounting H.I.D. type luminaires in non-hazardous locations Power hook housing has two 3/4" through-feed hubs and one 3/4" hub on the top for pendant mounting; throughfeed hubs are furnished with flush plugs Cast mounting lugs are provided for direct ceiling mounting Housing contains a roomy 15 cu. in. splicing chamber and interlocking type receptacle with leads Plugs and receptacles are interlocking type to prevent accidental disengagement; when plug is inserted, hook is blocked and luminaire assembly cannot be removed; to service the luminaire, pull the plug, unhook the loop luminaire assembly, and take it to a convenient servicing area Loop can move a maximum of 30, allowing the power hook to be mounted on a canted ceiling; the luminaire assembly will hang true to the vertical Loop and hook are shaped for selfalignment and resist twisting of luminaire by gusts of wind or light drafts Supporting loop is furnished with 16" of #16-3/C type SO cord and an interlocking type plug
FHM
For H.I.D. Type Luminaires with Voltages up to 480 Volts
Loop Plain Hubs*
3
Luminaire Stem*
3
Luminaire Weight (Lbs.) 125
Cat. # FHM201
/4
/4
Plain
Dimensions
In Inches:

Meet UL and NEMA requirements for the listed electrical ratings
Standard Materials:
Power hook body copper-free aluminum Access cover zinc plated cold rolled steel Loop copper-free aluminum
8L
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum natural finish Steel electrogalvanized with chromate finish Plain
Size Ranges:
Hubs 3/4" Luminaire weights: loop up to 125 lbs. Loop luminaire stem size 3/4"

480 volts, 14 amps, 2 wire, 3 pole
*1/2" connection can be obtained by using reducers.
1092
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
ECHF Flexible Luminaire Supports

For Pendant Mount
Applications:
ECHF Series Flexible Luminaire Supports are used in hazardous locations: Where a luminaire must hang more than 12" from its supporting junction box (as specified by NEC Article 501 and CEC Part I Section 18) To assure that luminaires hang plumb and will swing freely if accidentally struck; prevents damage to luminaire and supporting outlet fitting
8L
ECHF
Description Flexible Length 4 6 8 10 12 15 18 Nipple Size /2 3 /4
1 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
Features:
Complies with NEC Article 501/CEC Part I Section 18 Free swinging in any direction through a large arc Good electrical continuity no bonding jumpers needed Watertight construction Insulating liner of asphalt impregnated fiber to protect conductors Constructed to reinforced flexible metal hose Two female end fittings, each with a removable short nipple Nipples fit set-screw type luminaire hubs Female end fittings are equipped with set-screws to prevent turning during relamping and loosening of fitting with vibrations
Overall Length 10 10 12 12 14 14 16 16 18 18 21 21 24 24
Cat. # ECHF14 ECHF24 ECHF16 ECHF26 ECHF18 ECHF28 ECHF110 ECHF210 ECHF112 ECHF212 ECHF115 ECHF215 ECHF118 ECHF218
/2 /4 /2 /4 /2 /4 /2 /4 /2 /4 /2 /4

NEC/CEC: Class I, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Groups E, F, G Class III UL Standard: 886 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
8L
Standard Finishes:
Brass and bronze natural
Standard Materials:
Inner core brass Outer braid bronze End fittings bronze End fittings brass (CSA certified units)
Options:
Description Suffix Material stainless steel hose and end fittings............................................ S516 Finish flexible neoprene protective coating.................................................. S758 Special lengths and sizes available........................Detailed information on request
Size Ranges:
Flexible length 4" to 18" Nipple size 1/2" and 3/4" (see "Options") Luminaire weight up to 125 lbs.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1093
8L
EAHC and EFHC Luminaire Hangers

For Pendant Mount
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups A*, B*, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III
Applications:
EAHC and EFHC Luminaire Hangers are for use in hazardous areas to: Suspend explosionproof pendant luminaires from the conduit system Function as both conduit outlet box and luminaire hanger
EAHC* and EFHC
Mounting Strap
Mounting strap can be furnished to fasten luminaire hangers to mounting surface, independent of conduit straps. To order, add suffix S294 to EAHC or EFHC Cat. No.
Features:
Through-feed hubs are provided for threading the conduit directly into the hanger body Has large threaded cover for accessibility and ease of wiring Bottom hub, threaded or union style, is equipped with set-screws to securely lock luminaire stem in place; takes conduit stem or EC flexible luminaire hanger for stems longer than 12" (in compliance with NEC Article 501 and CEC Part I Section 18)
Suspension Attachment
With Union Hub EAHC and EFHC hangers can be furnished with a loop fastened to the top of the body to suspend luminaire and conduit from vertical support rods or horizontal span wires. The loop will take a wire or cable with a maximum diameter of 3/ 8". The boss on top of the loop is tapped 3/ 8"16 to accept a threaded rod. To order, add suffix S1 to Cat. No. With Threaded Hub

NEC/CEC: EAHC Class I, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Groups E, F, G Class III EFHC Class I, Groups C, D Class II, Groups E, F, G Class III UL Standard: 886 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
Luminaire Hub Stem Size Size EAHC* 1 /2 3 /4 3 /4
1
Threaded Hub for Luminaire Stem Cat. #
Union Hub for Luminaire Stem Cat. #
EAHC2701 EAHC2601 EAHC2702 EAHC2602 EAHC3701 EAHC3601 EAHC3702 EAHC3602 EFHC2701 EFHC2601 EFHC2702 EFHC2602 EFHC3701 EFHC3601 EFHC3702 EFHC3602
8L
Standard Materials:
/2 /4 /2 /4 /2 /4
EFHC
1 3
/4
3 1
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Copper-free aluminum natural
Dimensions
In Inches:
Options:
Description Suffix Finish Corro-free epoxy enamel ..... S752 Suspension attachment for span wire or threaded rod (see listings) ................... S1 Mounting strap (see listings) ............... S294
Size Ranges:
Conduit hubs 3/4" and 1" Luminaire stem 1/2" and 3/4" Luminaire weight 125 lbs.
*EAHC only.
1094
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EFH Flexible Cushion Luminaire Hangers

For Pendant Mount
Applications:
EFH Flexible Cushion Luminaire Hangers are used in hazardous locations: Where a luminaire must hang more than 12" from its supporting junction box (as required by NEC Article 501 and CEC Part I Section 18) To assure that luminaires hang plumb and will swing freely if accidentally struck; prevents damage to luminaire, stem, and supporting outlet box To provide a cushion support, prolonging lamp life and protecting the luminaire from shock and vibration; for luminaires weighing up to 65 lbs.
Cl. I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III
8L
EFHX
Body Hub Size*
1 1
Luminaire Stem Size

1 3
With Mtg. Feet Cat. # EFHX111 EFHX221
Features:
Complies with NEC Article 501 and CEC Part I Section 18 Free swinging in any direction through an angle of 15 degrees from perpendicular Weight of luminaire is supported by a high strength brass bellows and a stainless steel cushioning spring Two part assembly consisting of luminaire hanger cover and CPS12 outlet box; provides a wide variety of conduit arrangements; a set-screw locks the conduit stem in place
/2 and 3/4 /2 and 3/4
/2 /4

NEC/CEC: Class I, Groups C, D Class II, Groups E, F, G Class III UL Standard: 886 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
Cushion Luminaire Hanger Only

Stem Size
1 3
Cat. # EFH01 EFH02
/2 /4
Dimensions
In Inches: 8L
Standard Materials:
Feraloy iron alloy
Standard Finishes:
Size Ranges:
Conduit hubs 3/4" with 3/4" to 1/2" reducers Luminaire stem 1/2" and 3/4" Luminaire weight 65 lbs. max.
*Furnished with four
/ " standard taper tapped, integrally bushed hubs. Each hub as a / " to / " reducer. Three hubs are plugged.
4 3 4 1 2
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1095
8L
Condulet Conduit Outlet Boxes with Covers
Applications:
CPS Series Conduit Outlet Boxes are installed in conduit systems in hazardous areas to: Protect conductors in threaded rigid conduit Act as pull and splice boxes Change conduit direction Interconnect lengths of conduit Act as luminaire hangers with hub covers Provide access to conductors for maintenance and future system changes
Box with Hub Cover

Hub Size Body* /2 and 3/4 1 /2 and 3/4
1
Box with Blank Cover

Hub Size
1
Cover /2 3 /4
1
Cat. # CPS12021 CPS12022
Cat. # CPS12026
/2 and 3/4
Features:
CPS Conduit Outlet Boxes have: Two types of cover: -Blank for splice or pull box use -Threaded hub for mounting luminaires Wide, accurately machined body and cover mating surfaces, to ensure flame-tight joint Blind tapped holes for cover screws to further ensure flame-tightness Removable mounting feet for flush or surface mounting to wall or ceiling

Body
Hub Size*
1
Hub Covers
Cat. # CPS12
3 4
Hub Size
1 3
Cat. # CPS021 CPS022

3 4 1 2
/2 and /4
3
/2 /4
*Furnished with four plugged.
/ " standard taper tapped, integrally bushed hubs. Each hub has a / " to / " reducer. Three hubs are
Dimensions
In Inches:
8L
Standard Materials:
Feraloy iron alloy
Standard Finishes:
Options:
Description Corro-free epoxy enamel Suffix (information available on request)
1096
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
GUFX Outlet Bodies and Luminaire Hanger Covers
8L
GUFX
Luminaire Hanger Covers

For GUA and GUF Series Junction Boxes
Hub Size
1 3
Cat. # GUFX160 GUFX260
/2 /4
Nom. Dia. Luminaire Luminaire Luminaire Covers Nipple Cover Stem Canopies Union Hub Covers Opening Size Cat. # Cat. # Cat. # 3
3
/4
GUA068
GUA0687
GUA0672
Dimensions
In Inches:
Hanger Covers GUA 068
8L
GUF Series Hub Size 1 /2 3 /4 1 a 31/2 31/2 3 /2

1
b 2 2 2 /8
3
c 3 3 3
d /8 3 /4
5 7
e /8 7 /8
7
f /16 5 /16
5 5
g 53/8 53/8 5 /8
3
GUA 0687
/8
/16
GUA 0671
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1097
8L
GUA Series Outlet Bodies
Applications:
GUA, GUF and GUJ Outlet Bodies are used: With luminaire canopies, union hub and nipple covers for mounting EVA, EVM, EVLP, and EVF luminaires
Features:
A threaded cover opening in the side of the canopy permits access to the interior for making splices or taps The luminaire with its conduit stem and canopy is wired before installation, which eliminates wire twisting when the canopy is screwed into the outlet body Union hub covers permit the cover to be screwed into the body without twisting wire leads All covers have set-screws to lock the conduit stem or EC series flexible luminaire support firmly to the cover
GUA
Hub Size (In.)
1 3
GUAT
Cat. # GUA160 GUA260 GUA360 Hub Size (In.) /2 3 /4 1
1
Cat. # GUAT160 GUAT260 GUAT360
/2 /4 1

GUAC
Hub Size (In.) /2 3 /4 1
1
GUAX
Cat. # GUAC160 GUAC260 GUAC360 Hub Size (In.) /2 3 /4 1
1
Cat. # GUAX160 GUAX260 GUAX360
Standard Materials:
Outlet bodies: GUA Series Feraloy iron alloy GUFX copper-free aluminum Luminaire hanger covers: GUA068 Feraloy iron alloy GUA0687, GUA0672 copper-free aluminum
8L
GUAL
Hub Size (In.) /2 /4 1
1 3
Cat. # GUAL160 GUAL260 GUAL360
Standard Finishes:
Dimensions
In Inches:
Options:
Description Suffix Finish Corro-free epoxy enamel................................................ S752
Size Ranges:
Bodies 1/2" to 1" hubs Canopies 1/2", 3/4" and 11/4" luminaire stem Union hub and nipple covers 1/2" and 3 /4" luminaire stem Hub Size /2 3 /4 1
1
GUA Series a 31/2 31/2 31/2 b 2 2 25/16 c 3 3 3 d /8 3 /4 7 /8

5
e /8 /8 1
7 7
1098
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
UNR Adjustable Luminaire Hangers; COUP Locking Couplings

For Pendant Mount
Applications:
UNR Adjustable Luminaire Hangers are used in hazardous areas to: Mount between a luminaire and its outlet box so that the luminaire can be adjusted within the range of 0 degrees to 90 degrees Permit pendant type luminaires to illuminate vertical surfaces such as a control board Hang luminaires plumb when the supporting outlet box is not horizontal
8L

NEC: Class I, Groups C, D Class II, Groups E, F, G Class III UL Standard: 886
UNR
Adjustable Luminaire Hanger
Standard Materials:
Feraloy iron alloy
Features:
The luminaire is nippled onto one end of the UNR, and the other end of the UNR is nippled into the support outlet box Set-screws are located on each end to lock the nipples in place to prevent loosening in relamping or from vibration Adjustment of UNR to the angle setting needed provides for the desired angle of the luminaire Degree markings are cast into the UNR Two set-screws and a large stud and nut are provided, which are tightened to clamp the unit rigid
Standard Finishes:
Size Ranges:
Hub 3/4" Luminaire weight 125 lbs.
Hub Size
3
Angle Adjustment 0 to 90
Cat. # UNR29
/4
Dimensions
In Inches:
Applications:
COUP Locking Couplings are used in both hazardous and non-hazardous areas to: Lock a luminaire conduit stem into a conduit hub to prevent the conduit stem from loosening when the luminaire is relamped and torque transferred to luminaire stem Prevent loosening of luminaire stem due to vibration Hang pendant type luminaires from standard cast outlet boxes which do not have set-screws in the hub where the luminaire stem is attached

UL Standard: 886
COUP
Locking Couplings 8L
Standard Materials:
Feraloy iron alloy
Standard Finishes:
Size Ranges:
Hub size 1/2" to 1" Stem size 1/2" and 3/4" Hub Size /2 3 /4 3 /4 1
1
Stem Size /2 1 /2 3 /4 3 /4
1
Cat. # COUP101 COUP201 COUP202 COUP302
Features:
The large end is slipped over the cast hub and the set-screws tightened; the luminaire stem is slipped through the small end and threaded securely into the cast hub; the set-screws in the small end are then tightened, thereby preventing the stem from turning Permits support of luminaire from conduit hub of a hazardous location outlet body
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1099
8L
1100
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Portable Lighting Hazardous and Non-hazardous
9L
Description
Application/Selection Hand Lamps
VS Series Incandescent EVH Series Incandescent EVH Series Fluorescent
Page No.
Portable Floodlights
RCDER Series Incandescent EVP Series H.I.D.
Work Lights
EVH Series Fluorescent
9L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1101
9L
Portable Lighting
Hazardous and Non-hazardous Locations Application and Selection Quick Selector Chart
Applications:
Portable luminaires and accessories can be used: In areas made hazardous by the abnormal presence of flammable gases and vapors, combustible dusts, or easily ignitable fibers and flyings In areas where combustible dusts and flammable gases are present simultaneously In aircraft manufacturing and maintenance facilities, shipyards, paint spray booths, refueling depots, storage tank cleanings, railcar manufacturing and maintenance facilities, refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants, textile mills, grain elevators, pharmaceutical plants, sewage treatment plants, and wastewater treatment plants During plant 'shut downs' for maintenance and installation requirements In any adverse environment where portable lighting is preferred or required In locations where fixed lighting is not practical For task oriented lighting For emergency lighting applications When inspecting aircraft wing tanks, vats, process vessels, fuel tanks, etc. (hand lamps)

Environmental: What is the hazardous area classification (NEC/CEC) of the location in which the luminaires will be installed? What wattages and light source (ie. fluorescent) will provide the desired light levels? Type of luminaire required: handlamp, portable flood, or other special requirements
Table 500.8(C) Identification Numbers.

Maximum Temperature Deg. C Deg. F 450 842 300 572 280 536 260 500 230 446 215 419 200 392 180 356 165 329 160 320 135 275 120 248 100 212 85 185 Temperature Class (T Code) T1 T2 T2A T2B T2C T2D T3 T3A T3B T3C T4 T4A T5 T6

Luminaire EVH Hand Lamp (Incandescent) EVH Hand Lamp (Fluorescent) EVP NEC Hazardous Area Compliances Cl. I, Groups C and D Cl. II, Group G Cl. III Cl. I, Groups C and D Cl. II, Groups E, F, G Cl. III Cl. I, Groups C and D Cl. II, Groups F and G Cl. III Cl. I, Groups C and D Non-hazardous areas Lamp Watts 100 max. Volts 250 VAC
9L
13, 15
120, 220-50
35-150
120, 277, 347
RCDER VS
150-500 100 max.
1102
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
VS Portable Hand Lamps

Incandescent Accessories
Applications:
The incandescent VS Portable Hand Lamps are used: In wet or corrosive locations to exclude moisture, dirt, corrosive chemicals, etc. Where an incandescent lamp of up to 100 watts is required in a portable hand lamp
Weather Resistant
9L
Glass Globes
Polycarbonate Globes
Features:
Enclosed and gasketed Flexible cord or cable is attached through a watertight gland in the handle Is of rugged construction Clamp type guard available Provision is made in the lamp receptacle for a third conductor to ground all noncurrent carrying metal parts Maximum Lamp Size
Description Clear Glass, (Heat Resisting) Clear, Polycarbonate, Plain (No Cable Included) Globe Length 67/8"
Note:
Cat. #
100W, V63 A-23 67/8"* 75W, A-21"* V470

Weather resistant UL Standard: 298
(Note: CEC/CSA Certified VS Hand Lamps - Cooper Crouse-Hinds Canada fixtures only).
Max. Lamp Size 100W A-23*
Guards
Cord Dia. 0.125 to 0.625 Rubber Cat. # VS30
Standard Materials:
Handle molded rubber Globe clear, plain glass Guard cast aluminum or steel wire
Furnished with clear globe, wire guard and 4 rubber bushings.
Standard Finishes:
Handle natural Guard zinc plated
Description Steel Wire
Size
Cat. #
67/8" Globe VS97
Size Ranges:
Up to 100 watt, A-23 lamp 0.250 to 0.625 cord O.D.
Lamp Receptacle (medium base)
9L
Description Composition keyless
Size
Cat. #
660W, GS156 600V
Cord Gland Bushings
Description Size Rubber 0.125 to 0.250 Cord 0.250 to 0.375 Cord 0.375 to 0.500 Cord 0.500 to 0.625 Cord
Cat. # BUSH92 BUSH93 BUSH94 BUSH05
*Will take lamps with maximum dimensions of 61/2" long and 27/8" diameter.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1103
9L
EVH Portable Hand Lamp
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1 & 2, Group G Cl. III Cl. I, Zone 1 IIB
Applications:
EVH106 is used: As a portable hand lamp in hazardous areas In inspecting aircraft wing tanks, vats, process vessels, fuel tanks, etc.
Features:
Pressure connector terminals for portable cord Lightweight 41/4" lbs. Designed for rough service swivel hook, ease in relamping

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups C, D 100 watts max. Class I, Zone 1 IIB Class II, Division 1 and 2, Group G 75 watts max. Class III 75 watts max. UL Standard: 781 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 137
Standard Materials:
Guard and globe holder copper-free aluminum Handle molded phenolic composition Globe glass, heat- and impact-resistant
Cat. # EVH106 Type Model M10 Cord Dia. 0.375 to 0.625
Replacement Parts
Description Guard and globe assembly Handle assembly (including lampholder) Cord connector assembly Lampholder only Cat. # EVH606 EVH607 EVH605 EVH:05-279-A
Standard Finishes:
Natural
9L
Size Ranges:
#16 3 type SO cord/cable is to be used (not supplied)
Capacity Ranges:
50 to 100 watt, A-21 Max. volts 250 VAC

Class I, Groups C, D Class II, Group G Class III T3C T3C T3C
Note: See Section 2P of this catalog for suitable male plug. 1104
Portable Floodlights
Incandescent
Applications:
RCDER Portable Incandescent Luminaires provide general illumination in locations having hazardous atmospheres, such as: Oil refineries Oil and gasoline loading docks Aircraft servicing docks and shelters Distilleries Paint manufacturing plants Pumping stations Other Class I, Groups C and D locations
Cl. I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups C, D Cl. I, Zone 1 II(B) A
9L
Standard Materials:
Body copper-free aluminum Lens glass, heat- and impact-resistant
RCDER-6
RCDER-10
Standard Finishes:
Natural
Size Ranges:
Take cable with O.D. of 0.375" to 0.500"
Capacity Ranges:
RCDER-6 150 watt, PAR38 or R40; 300 watt, R40 (medium base) RCDER-10 500 watt, PAR64 (Ext. Mog End Prong)
Features:
Wheel base Carrying handle Adjustment allows rotation of 75 vertically Locking screws hold housing firmly in position Door which threads into housing includes heat- and impact-resistant lens; door has notches or projections for ease of removing or tightening Factory-sealed
After identifying the hazardous area, select the model of luminaire required for that area. Then from the photometric data, select appropriate Cat. No. based on type of mounting desired (Example: RCDER-10 No. 47283A).
Cat. No. 44655B
Cat. No. 47283A

NEC/CEC: RCDER Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups (C), D; Class I, Zone 1 II(B) A (see photometric data listing) UL Standard: 844 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 137 (RCDER6 only)
(Note: CEC/CSA Certified RCDER6 - Cooper CrouseHinds Canada luminaires only).
9L

150W RCDER-6 RCDER-10 T3B 300W T2B T3C 500W
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1105
9L
Portable Mounted Lights

Photometric Data Dimensions and Weights
RCDER Photometric Data:

Beam Spread Lamp Watts and Type RCDER-6 150 Watt PAR38 Flood 150 Watt PAR38 Spot 300 Watt R40 Flood 300 Watt R40 Spot RCDER-10 500 Watt, PAR64 (500 PAR64/NSP) 500 Watt, PAR64 (500 PAR64/MFL) 500 Watt, PAR64 (500 PAR64/WFL) Location Class I, Groups C, D (Zone 1 IIB) Class I, Groups D (Zone 1 IIA) Hor. 60 28 123 Vert. 60 28 123 Beam Lumens 1690 1200 3200 Av. Max. Candle Power 4000 11500 1950
60 19 Class I, Group D 35 (Zone 1 IIA) 55
60 14
3100 3000
8900 110000
19 32
3300 3400
37000 13000
Dimensions
In Inches:
9L
RCDER-6
RCDER-10
Fixture Weights:
Cat. # RCDER-6 RCDER-10 44655 47283 Lbs. (Net) 26.0 25.0
1106
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EVP Portable H.I.D. Floodlight
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1 & 2, Groups F, G Cl. III Cl. I, Zone 1 IIB Wet Locations Marine Locations Benefits
9L
Applications:
The EVP Portable H.I.D. Floodlight is suitable for maintenance or emergency lighting: In areas made hazardous by the presence of flammable gases and vapors, combustible dusts, or easily ignitable fibers and flyings In aircraft manufacturing and maintenance facilities, shipyards, refueling depots, storage tank cleaning, railcar manufacturing and maintenance facilities, refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants, textile mills, grain elevators and pharmaceutical plants, printing operations, wastewater, and sewage treatment plants In any adverse environment where portable lighting is preferred or required In locations where lighting is not practical For task oriented lighting
Key Features

EVP and EVPG NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class I, Zone 1 IIB Class II, Division 1 and 2, Groups F, G Class III Wet Locations Marine Locations UL Standards: 781, 595, 1572 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 137, No. 12
Strong spun aluminum Provides stability, allows wheel base fixture to be hung on a wall or lowered in an inverted position Sturdy hand knob Tightens to hold position for steady illumination and easy aiming Plastic rib covered Firm, non-slip grip for handle transporting fixture Aluminum specular Directs intense beam for reflector better visibility Tempered, 3/4" thick Heavy duty service cover glass Nitrile rubber O-ring Excellent sealing for use in gasket wet locations Strain relief clamps Provides extra protection against cord damage Pre-wired, factory Saves on installation time and sealed 100' of 16/3 maintenance costs type SOW cord supplied Lightweight (25 lbs.) Easy to handle when transporting Fixture housing has a Highly visible for safety safety yellow finish precautions
Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Group F 70 watts HPS, 120 volts 100 watts HPS, 120 volts 150 watts HPS, 120 volts 70 watt MH, 120 volts 70 watt MH, 277 volts 70 watt MH, 347 volts
Note:
Cat. # EVP4070 EVP4100 EVP4150* EVP9070 EVP9070/277 EVP9070/347
Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups F, G Cl. III 100 watts HPS, 120 volts 70 watt MH, 120 volts 70 watt MH, 277 volts 70 watt MH, 347 volts
Cat. # EVPG4100 EVPG9070 EVPG9070/277 EVPG9070/347
Standard Materials:
Housing copper-free aluminum Wheel base spun aluminum Handle plastic rib covered aluminum Reflector aluminum O-ring gasket Nitrile rubber
Fixtures for grain dust applications have a special limiting device to prevent the fixture head from being positioned in an upright position limiting dust build-up.

Class I, Division 1 Cat. # EVP4070 EVP4100 EVP4150 EVP9070 EVPG4100 EVPG9070 Max. Ambient C 40 40 25 40 40 40 T-Rating T4A T4A T3C T4 T4A T4 Groups C, C, C, C, C, C, D D D D D D Class II, Division 1 T-Rating T3 T3 T3 T3C T4 Groups F F F F, G F, G
9L
Electrical Ratings:
High pressure sodium (medium base) 70, 100, & 150 watt 120 volt 60 Hz Metal Halide (double end) 70 watt 120, 277 & 347 volt; 60 Hz
Fixture Weight:
25.5 lbs.
Photometric Data:
EVP fixtures are not supplied with plug. *Class II not available.
EVP4070
EVP4100 Degree from beam axis
EVP4150
Dimensions: 121/2" D 131/8" W 157/8" H

1107
9L
EVH Fluorescent Hand Lamps & Work Lights
Cl. I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III Cl. I, Zone 1 IIB
Applications:
Portable hand lamps and work lights can be used: In areas made hazardous by the presence of flammable gases and vapors, combustible dusts, or easily ignitable fibers and flyings In aircraft manufacturing and maintenance facilities, shipyards, refueling depots, storage tank cleaning, railcar manufacturing and maintenance facilities, refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants, textile mills, grain elevators, pharmaceutical plants, sewage treatment plants, and wastewater treatment plants During plant 'shut downs' for maintenance and installation requirments In any adverse environment where portable lighting is preferred or required In locations where fixed lighting is not practical For task oriented lighting For emergency lighting applications When inspecting aircraft wing tanks, vats, process vessels, fuel tanks, etc.
Features:
Built-in metal reflector which eliminates glare and blinding, focusing all light on subject Protected by patented shock absorbers to withstand rough usage Enclosed ballast, remote from light source for easier handling and maneuverability Special rubber compound bumper guards and end caps combined with cast guard and metal rods, protecting against damage from falling objects, bumping, or dropping Luminaires come complete with lamp(s) and cord The new EVH2625E and EVH2650E incorporate an electronic ballast in the handle for efficiency, cool operation, and easy handling

Based on 40C Ambient Temperature
Cat. # EVH1525 EVH1550 EVH1325 EVH1350 EVH2625 EVH2650 EVH1325 IB EVH1350 IB EVH2625E EVH2650E Class I, Div. 1 T-Rating Groups T5 T5 T5 T5 T3 T3 T5 T5 T6 T6 D D C, C, C, C, C, C, C, C, Class II, Div. 1 T-Rating Groups T5 T5 T5 T5 T3 T3 T5 T5 T6 T6 E, E, E, E, E, E, E, E, E, E, F, F, F, F, F, F, F, F, F, F, G G G G G G G G G G

NEC: Fluorescent Work Lights (15 watt units) Class I, Division 1 and 2, Group D Class I, Zone 1 IIB Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEC: Fluorescent Hand Lamps (13 and 26 watt units) Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III FM: Classification 3615 CSA: C22.2
D D D D D D D D
EVH Fluorescent Work Lights
Cord Line Voltage Watts Length (ft.) Lamp Type 60 Hz 15 25 ft. F15T8 120 15 50 ft. F15T8 120 Cat. # EVH1525 EVH1550
9L
EVH Fluorescent Hand Lamps (with Magnetic Ballast in Cord)

Line Voltage 60 Hz 120 120 120 120 50 Hz 220 220 220 220 Cord Watts Length (ft.) Lamp Type 13 13 26 26 13 13 26 26 25 50 25 50 25 50 25 50 ft. ft. ft. ft. ft. ft. ft. ft. F13TT F13TT F26DTT F26DTT F13TT F13TT F26DTT F26DTT Cat. # EVH1325 EVH1350 EVH2625 EVH2650 EVH1325/220 EVH1350/220 EVH2625/220 EVH2650/220 50 50 50 50
Standard Materials:
Body and inline ballast unit aluminum Tube shield annealed glass Bumper guards rubber
Standard Finishes:
Aluminum body white epoxy (hand lamps) Aluminum body natural (work lights) Inline ballast unit natural Rubber bumper guards safety yellow
Options:
Description Suffix An isolated ballast is available on the EVH 13 Watt hand lamps for additional protection IB
EVH Fluorescent Hand Lamps (with Electronic Ballast in Handle)

Cord Line Voltage Watts Length (ft.) Lamp Type Cat. # 60 Hz 26 25 ft. CF26DD/E/841 EVH2625E 120 26 50 ft. CF26DD/E/841 EVH2650E 120
Size Ranges:
Supplied with 18 / 3 SOW cord (25 ft or 50 ft)
Electrical Ratings:
13 to 26 Watts Max. volts 220VAC
1108
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EVH Fluorescent Hand Lamps & Work Lights
9L
Dimensions
In Inches:
Work Light
Hand Lamp (Magnetic Ballast Handlamps Only)
9L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1109
9L
9L
1110
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Exit Signs and Emergency Luminaires Hazardous and Non-hazardous

Description
Exit Signs
EXL Series EVLPF(B)-EXD DMVF(B)-EXD Ex-Lite CCH UX Series
10L
Page No.
see see see see see
1112 1114 1115 1127 1128
Light-Pak Emergency Lighting Systems

ELPS Series N2LPS Series
Remote Luminaire Heads

EVLA N2RF
Compact Fluorescent Emergency Luminaires

CPMVFB DMVFB EVLPFB
10L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1111
10L
EXL Explosionproof Exit Sign

Factory-sealed
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. I, Zone 1 IIB Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G
Applications:
EXL Exit Signs are used: In locations deemed hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors or gases, or combustible dusts In any building or enclosed area where people work where illuminated exit signs are required To provide distinct, highly visible exit marking To indicate the direction of travel to exits
When ordering an EXL Series Exit Sign, you will need to specify: (A) Voltage (120VAC or 120VDC) (B) Mounting (Wall, End Bracket, or Pendant) (C) Exit Sign Designation All units come standard with 3/4" hubs and exit signs with red lettering and white background. Complete catalog numbering is as follows: EXL (A) 2 (B) (C) (A) Voltage: 120VAC ............ leave blank 120VDC .......................... D (B) Mounting: Wall................................. 1 End Bracket.................... 2 Pendant .......................... 3 (C) Exit Sign Designation: A Single Face (Wall Mount) AA Double Face (End Bracket & Pendant) AB Double Face, one side arrowhead right, the other no arrowhead (End Bracket & Pendant) AC Double Face, one side arrowhead left, the other no arrowheads (End Bracket & Pendant) AD Double Face, one side arrowhead both ends, the other no arrowheads (End Bracket & Pendant) B Single Face, arrowhead right (Wall Mount) BC Double Face, one side arrowhead right, the other arrowhead left (End Bracket & Pendant) BD Double Face, one side arrowhead both ends, the other arrowhead right (End Bracket & Pendant) C Single Face, arrowhead left (Wall Mount) CD Double Face, one side arrowhead both ends, the other arrowhead left (End Bracket & Pendant) D Single Face, arrowhead both ends (Wall Mount) DD Double Face, both sides arrowhead both ends (End Bracket & Pendant) Mounting Type Wall End Bracket Pendant Sign Panel Description Single face Double face Double face Hub Size (In.) /4 /4 3 /4
3 3
Features:
Two incandescent lamps (not included) wired in parallel to provide extra margin of light source reliability Solid state circuit for extended lamp life in AC units Six inch red letters on white acrylic sign panel make word "exit" stand out boldly and clearly Edge lighting characteristic of sign panel makes visibility excellent at all lighting levels Factory-sealed explosionproof housing Pendant, wall, and end bracket mounts provide universal installation options Impact-resistant acrylic sign panel needs no guard makes cleaning easy Internal rectifier extends lamp life beyond 1,000-hour rated life reduces relamping cost Relamping tool provided
Pendant Style
End Bracket Style

NEC: Class I, Groups C, D Class II, Groups E, F, G UL Standard: 844 NFPA Life Safety Code No. 101-1991
10L
Standard Materials:
Body copper-free aluminum Sign panel acrylic
Conduit Entrance:
3/4" hubs
Lamp Wattage:
Two 60 watt, 60T10 clear lamps for AC units Two 25 watt, 25T10 clear lamps for DC units Lamps not included with luminaire
Wall Style AC Cat. # EXL21A EXL22AA EXL23AA DC Cat. # EXLD21A EXLD22AA EXLD23AA
Electrical Ratings:
120VDC or 120VAC operation

(for both AC & DC operation):
Ambient Temp. (C) 25 40 1112 Class I (C, D) Class II (E, F, G) T3C T3C Supply Wire C 150C
Options:
Description Suffix Exit signs with green lettering on white background........................................................ GN Unit provided with epoxy powder coat............................................................................. S752 277VAC (Order ECT413 Transformer Separately)
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EXL Explosionproof Exit Sign

Factory-sealed Dimensions
Dimensions
In Inches:
10L
Pendant Style
Wall Style
10L
End Bracket Style
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1113
10L
EVLPF(B) Exit Sign Fluorescent Luminaire
Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups B (suffix GB), C, D Cl. I, Zone 1, Groups IIB + H2 (GB suffix), IIB Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G; Class III, Simultaneous Presence
Applications:
EVLPF(B)-EXD Exit Signs are used: In any building or enclosed area where people work where illuminated exit signs are required To provide distinct, highly visible exit marking To indicate the direction of travel to exits In locations deemed hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors, gases, or combustible dusts

NEC and CEC: Class I, Division 1, Groups B (GB suffix), C, D Class I, Zone 1, Groups IIB + H2 (GB Suffix), IIB, IIA Class II, Class III & Simultaneous Presence (Class I and Class II) UL Standards: 844 Hazardous (Classified) Locations 1598 Luminaires 1598A Marine Locations CSA Standards: C22.2 No. 137

Six inch red letters on white glass sign panel make the word "EXIT" stand out boldly and clearly Lightweight copper-free aluminum housing with powdered epoxy finish All exterior hardware is corrosionresistant stainless steel Three mounting arrangements: pendant, ceiling, and wall bracket Integral ballast High power factor (90%+) ballasts Easier assembly, installation, and maintenance Outdoor, hose down, marine and corrosive environments suitable Ideal for adverse environments typical of industrial facilities Ground wire for safety Optional battery back-up for operation during power outage
Sources/wattage: 52W (2-26W lamps) 120-277V, 50-60 Hz 120V, 60 Hz 347V, 60 Hz Conduit entries: 3/4", 1" NPT pendant, wall bracket, ceiling
Standard Materials:
Mounting modules, cover, ballast housing, globe holder copper-free aluminum Globe heat- and impact-resistant glass Exterior hardware stainless steel
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum Corro-free powdered epoxy
Options:
Description Group B suitability Factory assembled with lamps Suffix GB FA
About the Battery:

Bodine fluorescent battery pack ballasts are UL component recognized Sealed, maintenance-free, high temperature nickel cadmium Solid state chargers are sealed inside the ballast case 90 minute illumination time 10-year life expectancy 2-year full warranty During emergency use 1 lamp has continuous operation Red indicator light indicates the battery is charging Wiring instructions for a "Push-to-Test" button is supplied with the luminaire
Mounting Type Pendant Supply Voltage Volts/Hertz 120277V / 5060 Hz 120V / 60 Hz (Canada) 347V / 60 Hz 120277V / 5060 Hz 120V / 60 Hz (Canada) 347V / 60 Hz 120277V / 5060 Hz 120V / 60 Hz (Canada) 347V / 60 Hz Fluorescent Cat. # EVLPFA02520/UNV EXD EVLPFA02520/347 EXD Fluorescent with Battery Back-up Cat. # EVLPFBA02520/UNV EXD EVLPFBA0520/120CAN EXD EVLPFBA0520/347 EXD
10L
Ceiling
EVLPFCX02520/UNV EXD EVLPFBCX02520/UNV EXD EVLPFBCX02520/120CAN EXD EVLPFCX02520/347 EXD EVLPFBCX02520/347 EXD EVLPFBX02520/UNV EXD EVLPFBBX02520/UNV EXD EVLPFBBX02520/120CAN EXD EVLPFBX02520/347 EXD EVLPFBBX02520/347 EXD
Wall
Energy Savings:
1114
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
DMVF(B) Exit Sign Fluorescent Luminaire
Cl. I, Div. 2; Groups A, B, C, D Restricted Breathing Cl. I, Div. 2 & Zone 2 (Suffix S826) Certified for IEC Zone 2 (Suffix S826TB) Certifications and Compliances:
Cl. II, Groups E, F, G, Cl. III & Simultaneous Presence Marine & Wet Locations 3, 3R, 4X; IP66
10L
Applications:
DMVF(B) Exit Signs are used: In any building or enclosed area where people work Where illuminated exit signs are required To provide distinct, highly visable exit markings To indicate the direction of travel to exits In locations deemed hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors or gases, or combustible dusts
Features:
Six inch letters on white glass sign panel make the word "exit" stand out boldly and clearly Housings made of die-cast copper-free aluminum (less than 0.4 of 1% copper) for strength and resistance to corrosion) Mounting module equipped with integral hub set-screws for vibration resistance (ceiling and pendant mounts) Hubs are provided with an integral conduit stop and bushing to help prevent damage to field wiring during installation Epoxy powder finish and stainless steel external hardware for resistance to corrosion Long life gaskets which provide seals between mounting module, housing, and globe assembly Grounding wire for safety Cool operating design Optional emergency battery back-up operation during power outage
NEC and CEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Class III & Simultaneous Presence (Class I, Division 2 and Class II) Class I, Zone 2 IEC: Zone 2 Ex nR IIC UL Standards: 844, 2279 Hazardous (Classified) Locations 1598 Luminaires 1598A Marine Luminaires CSA Standards: C22.2 No. 137 IEC Standards: 60079-15
Standard Materials:
Ballast housings and mountings copperfree aluminum (less than 0.4 of 1%) Exterior hardware stainless steel Globe heat- and impact-resistant internally fluted glass
Standard Finishes:
Options:
Description Suffix Lamps supplied with exit sign............................................... S714 Top hat with stainless steel threaded insert.......................... S806 Restricted breathing construction.......................................... S826 Class I, Division 2 & Zone 2 suitability Cooler operating temperatures (T-Numbers) Certified for IEC Zone 2......................................................... S826TB Furnished with: Terminal Block Crimp Terminals Dedicated voltage ballasts (no MT, DT or TT)
About the Battery:

Bodine fluorescent battery pack ballasts are UL component recognized Sealed, maintenance-free, high temperature nickel cadmium Solid state chargers are sealed inside the ballast case 90 minute illumination time 10-year life expectancy 2-year full warranty During emergency use 1 lamp has continuous operation A red indicator light indicates the battery is charging Wiring instructions for a "Push-to-Test" button is supplied with the fixture
10L

52 Watt 120277V, 5060 Hz 120V, 60 Hz 347V, 60 Hz
Mounting Type Pendant Supply Voltage Volts/Hertz 120277V / 5060 Hz 120V / 60 Hz (Canada) 347V / 60 Hz 120277V / 5060 Hz 120V / 60 Hz (Canada) 347V / 60 Hz 120277V / 5060 Hz 120V / 60 Hz (Canada) 347V / 60 Hz
US: 1-866-764-5454
Energy Savings:
Fluorescent Cat. # DMVF2A052G/UNV EXD DMVF2A052G/347 EXD DMVF2C052G/UNV EXD DMVF2C052G/347 EXD
Fluorescent with Battery Back-up Cat. # DMVFB2A052G/UNV EXD DMVFB2A052G/120CAN EXD DMVFB2A052G/347 EXD DMVFB2C052G/UNV EXD DMVFB2C052G/120CAN EXD DMVFB2C052G/347 EXD
Ceiling
Wall
DMVF2TW052G/UNV EXD DMVFB2TW052G/UNV EXD DMVFB2TW052G/120CAN EXD DMVF2TW052G/347 EXD DMVFB2TW052G/347 EXD
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1115
10L
ELPS Light-Pak Emergency Lighting System
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D (with suffix GB) Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. III
Cl. I, Zone 1 Simultaneous Presence Wet Locations NEMA 3, 3R, 12
Applications:
ELPS Series Emergency Lighting Systems are used: To provide safe, reliable illumination indoors or outdoors to designated areas during failure or interruption of power to the normal lighting system In areas made hazardous by the presence of flammable gases and vapors, combustible dusts, or easily ignitible fibers and flyings In areas where corrosion, vibration, moisture, dirt, and rough usage may be encountered Where required by the National Electrical Code, the Life Safety Code, or other codes In refineries, chemical and petrochemical facilities, grain processing, handling or storage facilities, manufacturing plants, wastewater treatment facilities, and other areas where safe, reliable, hazardous area emergency lighting is needed
CID 101 corrosion inhibitor device is provided with each ELPS system to help protect electrical components and connections Rugged, long-life, maintenance-free, nickel cadmium battery provides 30 watts of power for the required 11/2 hours Solid state battery charger for long life and reliable service prevents deep discharge by automatically disconnecting luminaires from battery
Electrical Ratings:
Power Supply: Input: 120, 220/240, 277 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz 0.5 Amps Maximum Output: 12 VDC UL listed for 28 watts for 11/2 hours at 0 40C Luminaires: Voltage: 12 VDC Lamp Type: #789, miniature Tungsten halogen, G4, 2-pin, 14 watt

NEC: Class I, Groups B, C, D Class II, Groups E, F, G Class III Simultaneous Presence NEMA: 3R, 4X*, 12 (ELPS power supply) Suitable for wet locations (EVLA fixtures) Marine (EVLA fixtures) UL Standard: 844 Electric Luminaire Hazardous Locations 924 Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment 1203 Explosionproof and DustIgnitionproof Electrical Equipment Life Safety Code: Section 5-9 (Emergency Lighting) Suitable for Wet Locations NEMA 3, 3R, 12 Marine Terminal block facilitates field wiring connections Instruction sheet and maintenance record card provided with unit in a protective plastic envelope A time delay is standard; time delay is preset at factory for 5 minute delay but can be field set for 5 seconds or 15 minutes, thus allowing HID type lamps time to restrike and reach desired illumination levels Solid state battery charger will accept 120, 220/240 or 277 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Features:
Compact factory-sealed luminaire assemblies are each furnished with a 12 watt tungsten-halogen lamp and inner reflector for appropriate photometrics in hazardous areas Luminaire assemblies are fully adjustable and lockable on two axes to provide flexible and consistent light aiming capabilities Luminaire lens ring is threaded for easy relamping and locks in place with hex head set-screw; will not loosen due to vibration Ground joint cover with external flange design permits large opening and easy access to internal components; stud bolts in diagonally opposite corners of body ease cover removal and installation Neoprene cover gasket seals out moisture for superior protection of internal components against wetness and corrosion Lightweight, compact size, and mounting feet ease installation and allow placement in confined areas Two 1" NPT drilled and tapped conduit openings, with plugs, are standard, for choice of top or bottom feed Factory-installed PUSH-TO-TEST pushbutton enables easy testing of system MAIN POWER ON pilot light indicates AC power is being supplied to the battery charger; pilot light jewel is threaded for easy lamp replacement Stainless steel drain minimizes moisture collection; stainless steel breather with aluminum cap provides ventilation, minimizes moisture collection
Options:
Description Suffix Remote mounted lamp head and arm .... EVLA12 Key operated disconnect switch as part of the ELPS502 emergency light system .......................... S794 Keyless operated designated disconnect switch as part of the ELPS502 emergency light system .......... S854
Description Cat. # Standard unit with ELPS502 adjustable heads............ Replacement power interior, includes circuit ELPS K50 board and battery pack Power supply ................. ELPS50 Lamphead and arm ....... EVLA12 Exit sign, double sided ELPS502 EXD with EVI, red letters........ Exit sign, double sided ELPS502 EXD GN with EVI, green letters.... Exit sign, single or double sided with Group B EVA, ELPS502 EXD GB red letters....................... Exit sign, single or double sided with Group B EVA, green letters ............................. ELPS502 EXD GB GN Exit sign, single sided with EVI, red letters........ ELPS502 EXS Exit sign, single sided with EVI, green letters ................... ELPS502 EXS GN
10L
Standard Materials:
Power supply enclosure and luminaire assembly copper-free aluminum (less than 0.4 of 1% copper)
Standard Finishes:
Power supply enclosure and fixture assemblies powder coat epoxy paint finish
*NEMA 4X pending with new ECD 4X breather and drain. Base unit comes standard with Class I, Division 1, Group B.
1116
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
ELPS Light-Pak Emergency Lighting System
Temperature Performance Data Photometric Data Dimensions and Weights
10L

Cat. # Class Maximum Ambient Temperature 55C I II* EVLA12 III* Maximum Ambient Temperature 40C ELPS EVI ELPS EVA T3C T4 T3C T4 T-number T4A T3B T3B
Photometric Data:
*For Class II and Class III applications, fixtures must not be aimed more than 30 above horizontal (see diagram below).
Dimensions
In Inches:
10L
Unit Net Weights:

ELPS502 complete emergency lighting system 50 lbs. ELPS50 power supply 40 lbs. EVLA12 luminaire assembly 5 lbs.
Status Indication:
LED Status Condition No light Steady light (no blinking) Light blinks once Light blinks twice Light blinks three times Light blinks four times Meaning of the Indication AC power is removed from the circuit Fully charged Charging Battery failure Circuit failure Lamp failure
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1117
10L
Applications:
LED N2LPS Light-Pak emergency lighting systems are used: To provide reliable illumination for egress areas during failure or interruption of power to the normal lighting system In areas where flammable gases or vapors may become present due to abnormal, unusual, or accidental conditions In manufacturing plants, refineries, petrochemical and chemical plants, waste and sewage treatment facilities, oil terminals, food processing facilities, breweries, and other industrial manufacturing or process industry facilities subject to wet or corrosive conditions To illuminate machinery or panels during a loss of AC power Where moisture, dirt, dust, or corrosion will limit the life and reliability of ordinary emergency lighting systems Where required by the National Electrical Code, the Life Safety Code or other applicable codes Outdoor applications

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups B, C, D, Zone 2 UL Standards: 1598A (Supplemental Requirements for Luminaires for Installation on Marine Vessels) 924 (Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment) 844 (Electric Luminaires Hazardous Locations) CSA Standards: C22.2 No. 141-M1985 unit equipment for emergency lighting C22.2 No. 137-M1981 non-incendive electrical equipment for use in Class I, Division 2 hazardous locations Life Safety Code NFPA101 Section 5-9 (Emergency Lighting) Marine wet locations suitability, Type 4X
Electrical Ratings:
Power supply Input: 120, 220, 230, 240, or 277 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz; 28 watts max. Output: 12 VDC Luminaire heads Voltage: 12 VDC; Lamp: 3 watt LED Total lumen output: 80
Standard Materials:
Power supply and remote luminaire enclosures Krydon fiberglassreinforced polyester LED lamp head assembly epoxy powder coated stainless steel Exterior hardware nylon, plastic coated, and stainless steel Cover gasket Hypalon synthetic rubber
Features:
Compact, factory-assembled luminaire featuring LED lamps for improved lumen performance, on-time, and lamp life Nonmetallic, enclosed, and gasketed housing provides corrosion protection in the most extreme environments Durable and marine rated LED lamp head assemblies provide protection against water ingress, corrosion, and impact High temperature rated nickel cadmium battery for reliable operation up to 55C ambient Solid state battery charger for long life and reliable battery operation prevents deep discharge by automatically disconnecting the battery from the luminaire Factory-installed "push-to-test" button Self-test, monitoring, and diagnostics reduce costly maintenance checks Remote luminaire head assemblies (one or two) are available for mounting of luminaire heads away from main power system Stainless steel drain minimizes moisture collection Standard battery disconnect switch (Krydon unit)
Unit Net Weights:

N2LPS12222 16 lbs. N2LPS12220 12 lbs. N2RF1221 8 lbs. N2RF1222 9 lbs.

Based on 55C ambient Cat. # Class I, Division 2 N2LPS (all) N2RF (all)
Note:
10L
40C - T5; 55C - T4A T5
Ambient temperature at which the Light-Pak system is rated is 0C to 55C. Operation at temperatures outside this range will affect the battery life and/or charging performance.
National Electrical Code and Life Safety Code are registered trademarks of the National Fire Protection Association, Inc. Noryl is a registered trademark of General Electric Company.
1118
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
10L
Description 28 watt, 12 volt power supply assembly with two 3 watt LED lamp heads 28 watt, 12 volt stainless steel power supply assembly with two 3 watt LED lamp heads 28 watt, 12 volt power supply assembly less luminaire heads Remote luminaire assembly with one 3 watt LED lamp head Remote luminaire assembly with two 3 watt LED lamp heads 28 watt, 120V LED Light-Pak with single sided exit sign** 28 watt, 277V LED Light-Pak with single sided exit sign** 28 watt, 120V LED Light-Pak with double sided exit sign** 28 watt, 277V LED Light-Pak with double sided exit sign**
*Not cUL approved. UL Listed only. **Exit sign operates in both normal and emergency mode.
Cat. # N2LPS12222 N2LPS12222 SS N2LPS12220* N2RF1221* N2RF1222* N2LPS12222/120 N2LPS12222/277 N2LPS12222/120 N2LPS12222/277
EXS DR0391734 EXS DR0391734 EXD DR0391734 EXD DR0391734
Note: Up to four (4) remote LED lamp assemblies can be connected to the N2LPS12222. Up to six (6) remote LED lamp assemblies can be connected to the N2LPS12220.
Wire Sizing for Remote Installation:

For Copper Wire
Running Distance (ft.) Between Power Supply and Remote Luminaire Load In Watts Wire Size 16 AWG 14 AWG 12 AWG 8 26 42 66 16 13 21 33 24 6 10 16 32 3 5 8 Wire Size 10 AWG 8 AWG 6 AWG Load In Watts 8 106 168 270 16 53 84 135 24 26 42 67 32 13 21 33
Maximum distance to limit line voltage drop to 5%.
Dimensions (N2LPS):
1.1
13.5
10L
16.0 5.0
7.5
7.4
13.8 14.5 18.0
Standard N2LPS LED Light-Pak
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1119
10L
Dimensions (N2LPS):
EXS, EXD Option N2LPS LED Light-Pak with Optional Emergency Exit Luminaire
Dimensions (N2RF):
9.50 9.50
10L
3.83
3.83
7.27
4.38
11.77
Detail Indication Logic:

Status Indication * *-* **-** ***-*** Status Description No Light Steady Light (No Blinks) Light Blinks Once Light Blinks Twice Light Blinks Three Times Status Definition AC Power Removed from Circuit Fully Charged Battery Charging Battery Failure Circuit Failure
1120
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
CPMVFB Emergency Compact Fluorescent

Continuous Operation Champ-Pak Luminaires
Applications:
Where emergency lighting is required to permit workers in industrial areas to safely encounter their surroundings during power failures Where emergency egress lighting is required, such as: catwalks, walkways, tunnels, doorways, stairs, stairwells, ramps and aisles Indoor and outdoor wall mounting or vertical surface mounting where minimal luminaire depth is required in: Manufacturing plants and heavy industrial facilities Industrial process facilities such as refineries, chemical, petrochemical, pharmaceutical, and platforms Waste or sewage treatment plants Offshore, dockside, and harbor installations For security and safety lighting in industrial facilites for lighting of loading docks, tunnels, and stairways For marine, wet location, hose down, and corrosive environments
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Restricted Breathing Cl. I, Div. 2 & Zone 2 (Suffix S826) Certified for IEC Zone 2 (Suffix S826TB) Standard Materials:
Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III & Simultaneous Presence* Marine & Wet Locations 3, 3R, 4, 4X; IP66 Emergency Lighting
10L
Luminaire housing and door frame assembly copper-free aluminum External hardware stainless steel Lens heat- and impact-resistant refractor style glass Gaskets silicon rubber Reflector aluminum light sheet Wire guard stainless steel
Standard Finishes:
Options:
Description Suffix Restricted breathing construction................................................................................. S826 Class I, Division 2 & Zone 2 suitability Cooler operating temperatures (T-numbers) Certified for IEC Zone 2 (Suffix S826TB)....................................................................... S826TB Furnished with: Terminal Block Crimp Terminals Dedicated voltage ballasts (no MT, DT or TT) Factory assembled with lamp installed......................................................................... FA Fused - projects ballast and capacitors against abnormal line conditions.................. S658 (Not for use in Canada) (Not for Marine use)

Unique compact shallow profile design mounts virtually anywhere Side hinged cover with two screw closing for easy installation and maintenance Gray Corro-free epoxy powder coat two-piece housing provides superior corrosion resistance Unique stainless steel wire guard accessory attaches without any additional hardware for easy installation and maintenance Glass refractor provides uniform light distribution to eliminate glare Silicon gaskets make luminaire suitable for NEMA 4X, marine enviroments High power factor ballasts (+90%) are standard, which allow more luminaires per circuit

52 watts 120277V, 5060 Hz 120V, 60 Hz 347V, 60 Hz
About the Battery:

Bodine fluorescent battery pack ballasts are UL component recognized Sealed, maintenance-free, high temperature nickel cadmium Solid state chargers are sealed inside the ballast case 90 minute illumination time 10-year life expectancy 2-year full warranty During auxiliary use 1 lamp has continuous operation A red indicator light indicates the battery is charging Wiring instructions for a "Push-to-Test" button is supplied with the fixture
10L

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Class III & Simultaneous Presence (Class I, Division 2 and Class II) Class I, Zone 2 IEC: Zone 2 Ex nR IIC UL Standards: 844, 2279 Hazardous (Classified) Locations 1598 Luminaires 1598A Marine Locations CSA Standards: C22.2 No. 137 IEC Standards: 60079-15
*Consult Cooper Crouse-Hinds.
Accessories:
Description Stainless steel wire guard............................................................................................. Cat. # P55
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1121
10L
CPMVFB Emergency Compact Fluorescent

Continuous Operation Champ-Pak Luminaires
Ordering Information Dimensions & Weights
Hub Size
3
Lamp Watts 26
Cat. # for use with ANSI Lamps CPMVFB2W026
/4 NPT
Standard Voltage Ballasts

Voltage Suffix NEC/UL 120277V 5060 Hz /UNV CEC/CSA (cUL) 120V/60 Hz 347V 60 Hz /120CAN /347
Dimensions
In Inches:
10L
Net Weights:
Luminaire Less Guard P55 Guard 18.6 lbs. 0.5 lbs.
1122
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
DMVFB Emergency Compact Fluorescent

Continuous Operation Champ Luminaires
Applications:
DMVF Series Champ Lighting Luminaires are used: Where emergency lighting is required to permit workers in industrial areas to safely encounter their surroundings during power failures Where emergency egress lighting is required, such as: catwalks, walkways, tunnels, doorways, stairs, stairwells, ramps, and aisles In areas made hazardous by abnormal conditions resulting in the presence of flammable vapors or gases In areas made hazardous by the presence of combustible dusts Where combustible dusts and flammable vapors are present simultaneously In marine applications where water spray and corrosive atmospheres are considerations On installations where vibration and rough usage are problematic Where a cool, efficient light source is required In areas that require lamps to reach full illumination immediately In refineries, chemical and petrochemical facilities, grain processing, handling or storage facilities, manufacturing plants, wastewater treatment plants, sewage treatment plants, oil terminals, food processing facilities, breweries, and any other manufacturing or processing facility where safe, reliable hazardous area fluorescent or auxiliary lighting is needed
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Restricted Breathing Cl. I, Div. 2 & Zone 2 (Suffix S826) Certified for IEC Zone 2 (Suffix S826TB) Certifications and Compliances:
Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III & Simultaneous Presence Marine & Wet Locations 3, 3R, 4, 4X; IP66 Emergency Lighting
10L
NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Class III & Simultaneous Presence (Class I, Division 2 and Class II) Class I, Zone 2 Emergency Lighting IEC: Zone 2 Ex nR IIC UL Standards: 844, 2279 Hazardous (Classified) Locations 1598 Luminaires 1598A Marine Locations 924 Emergency Lighting CSA Standards: C22.2 No. 137 IEC Standards: 60079-15
Standard Materials:
Ballast housings and mountings copperfree aluminum (less than 0.4 of 1%) External hardware guards stainless steel Reflectors Krydon fiberglassreinforced polyester material Globe heat- and impact-resistant internally fluted glass

52, 64, and 84 watts 120277V, 5060 Hz 347V, 60 Hz
Standard Finishes:
Accessories:
(Order separately) Description Dome 30 Angle Cat. # RD739 RA739
Standard Features:
Housings made of die-cast copper-free aluminum (less than 0.4 of 1% copper) for strength and resistance to corrosion Mounting modules equipped with integral hub set-screws for vibration resistance (ceiling, pendant, and quad mounts) Hubs are provided with an integral conduit stop and bushing to help prevent damage to field wiring during installation Epoxy powder finish and stainless steel external hardware for resistance to corrosion Long-life gaskets which provide seals between mounting module, housing, and optical assembly Grounding wire for safety Cool operating design Optional stainless steel open bottom guard permits direct access to the globe for easy relamping Battery pack ballast for emergency lighting
10L
Options:
Description Suffix Restricted breathing construction................................ S826 -Class I, Division 2 & Zone 2 suitability -Cooler operating temperatures (T-numbers) Certified for IEC Zone 2............. S826TB -Furnished with: Terminal Block Crimp Terminals Emergency operation only Consult Cooper-Hinds Factory assembled with lamp installed....................................... FA Fused to protect ballast against abnormal line conditions (not for use in Canada) (not for marine use).................................. S658 Lamps supplied with luminaire... S714 Top hat with stainless steel threaded insert to attach ballast housing........................................ S806 TEFLON coating on globe for increased shatter protection....... S808
Energy Savings
About the Battery (DMVFB Units):

Bodine fluorescent battery pack ballasts are UL component recognized Sealed, maintenance-free, high temperature nickel cadmium Solid state chargers are sealed inside the ballast case 90 minute illumination time 10-year life expectancy 2-year full warranty During auxiliary use 1 lamp has continuous operation A red indicator light indicates the battery is charging Wiring instructions for a "Push-to-Test" button is supplied with the fixture
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1123
10L
DMVFB Emergency Compact Fluorescent

Continuous Operation Champ Luminaires
DMVFB Series Fluorescent with Battery Back-Up with G303 Globe and P33 Guard Cat. # DMVFB2A052GP DMVFB3A052GP DMVFB2A064GP DMVFB3A064GP DMVFB2A084GP DMVFB3A084GP
Cl. II, Groups E, F, G; Cl. III & Simultaneous Presence Marine & Wet Locations 3, 3R, 4, 4X; IP66 Emergency Lighting
Hub Lamp Size (In.) Watts /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1

3
52 64 84
/4 /4 3 /4
3 3
52 64 84
DMVFB2HA052GP DMVFB2HA064GP DMVFB2HA084GP
/4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1
3
52 64 84
DMVFB2C052GP DMVFB3C052GP DMVFB2C064GP DMVFB3C064GP DMVFB2C084GP DMVFB3C084GP
/4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1
3
52 64 84
DMVFB2TW052GP DMVFB3TW052GP DMVFB2TW064GP DMVFB3TW064GP DMVFB2TW084GP DMVFB3TW084GP
Note: For technical information on family trees, temperature performance data, dimensions, weights, and photometrics, refer to Series in Section 6L.
10L
/4 /4 3 /4
3 3
52 64 84
DMVFB25Q052GP DMVFB25Q064GP DMVFB25Q084GP
11/2 11/2 11/2
52 64 84
DMVFBJ052GP DMVFBJ064GP DMVFBJ084GP
11/ 2 11/ 2 11/ 2
52 64 84
DMVFBP052GP DMVFBP064GP DMVFBP084GP
1. Catalog numbers are basic numbers. Voltage must be specified. Standard Voltage Ballasts NEC/UL 1. Voltage Suffix 120277V 5060 Hz /UNV 120V/60 Hz /120CAN CEC/CSA (cUL) 347V 60 Hz /347
1124
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EVLPFB Emergency Compact Fluorescent

Continuous Operation Low Profile Luminaires
Applications:
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Low Profile HazardGard Luminaires are used in: Areas that require lamps to reach full lumination immediately Where emergency lighting is required to permit workers in industrial areas to safely encounter their surroundings during power failures Where emergency lighting is required such as: catwalks, walkways, tunnels, doorways, stairs, stairwells, ramps, and aisles Areas where flammable or explosive vapors or gases are present Hazardous areas, both indoors and outdoors, where long life and low maintenance costs are desired Petroleum refineries, chemical, petrochemical and pharmaceutical plants, oil terminals, gas plants and other heavy process industry facilities Waste treatment facilities Drilling platforms and other coastal and offshore hazardous areas
Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups B (GB Suffix), C, D Cl. I, Zone 1, Groups IIB + H2 (GB suffix), IIB, IIA Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G; Class III, Simultaneous Presence
Marine & Wet Locations 3, 3R, 4, 4X; IP66 Emergency Lighting
10L
Standard Materials:
Mounting modules, cover, ballast housing, globe holder copper-free aluminum Globe heat- and impact-resistant glass Exterior hardware stainless steel Reflectors (dome & angle) Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester
Sources/Wattage: Fluorescent continuous operation emergency lighting 52W (2-26W lamps) and 64W (2-32W lamps) compact fluorescent voltages Fluorescent emergency lighting 120277V, 5060 Hz 120V, 60 Hz 347V 60Hz Conduit entries: 3/4", 1" NPT pendant, wall bracket, ceiling 11/4" NPT stanchion

Small, compact size Two start Acme threaded construction Easier assembly, installation, and maintenance Lightweight copper-free aluminum housing with powdered epoxy finish All exterior hardware is corrosionresistant stainless steel Four mounting arrangements: pendant, ceiling, wall bracket, and stanchion Integral ballast High power factor (90%+) ballasts Uses same mounting modules as the standard HazardGard Internally fluted glass globes Krydon construction dome and angle reflectors won't rust, corrode, dent, chip, or peel Now available in components luminaire body, mounting module, guard, reflectors Three wire construction For energy conservation, luminaires can be switched off without affecting the emergency operation feature
Standard Finishes:
Energy Savings
Options:
Description Group B suitability Fused (not for use in Canada) (not for marine use) Factory assembled with lamps Emergency operation only Consult Cooper Crouse-Hinds Suffix GB S658* FA
10L
Accessories:
Description Dome reflector Angle reflector Cat. # RD739 RA739

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1, Groups B (with GB suffix), C, D Class I, Zone 1, Groups IIB + H2 (GB Suffix), IIB, IIA Class II, Class III & Simultaneous Presence (Class I and Class II) Emergency Lighting UL Standards: 844 Hazardous (Classified) Locations 1598 Luminaires 1598A Marine Locations 924 Emergency Lighting CSA Standards: C22.2 No. 137
About the Battery:

Bodine fluorescent battery pack ballasts are UL component recognized Sealed, maintenance-free, high temperature nickel cadmium Solid state chargers are sealed inside the ballast case; 90 minute illumination time; 10-year life expectancy 2-year warranty During emergency use, 1 lamp has continuous operation A red indicator light indicates the battery is charging Wiring instructions for a "Push-to-Test" button is supplied with the fixture
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1125
10L
EVLPFB Emergency Compact Fluorescent

Continuous Operation Low Profile Luminaires
Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups B (GB Suffix), C, D Cl. I, Zone 1, Groups IIB + H2 (GB suffix), IIB, IIA Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G; Class III, Simultaneous Presence
Marine & Wet Locations 3, 3R, 4, 4X; IP66 Emergency Lighting
Pendant Mount
Pendant Wall Bracket Hub Size With Guard With Guard Watt (In.) Cat. # Cat. # Fluorescent with Emergency Ballast High Power 3 /4 EVLPFBA02521 EVLPFBBX02521 EVLPFBA03521 EVLPFBBX03521 52W 1 11/4 64W
3 /4 1 11/4
Ceiling
Stanchion
With Guard With Guard Cat. # Cat. # Factor Ballast (Min. P.F. 90%) EVLPFBCX02521 EVLPFBCX03521 EVLPFBJ04521 EVLPFBCX02641 EVLPFBCX03641 EVLPFBJ04641
Cat. # EVLPFB0520
EVLPFBA02641 EVLPFBA03641
EVLPFBBX02641 EVLPFBBX03641
EVLPFB0640
Complete Catalog Numbers as follows:

Standard Voltage Ballasts
NEC/UL 1. Voltage Suffix 120277V 5060 Hz /UNV 120V/60 Hz /120CAN CEC/CSA (cUL) 347V 60 Hz /347
2.
Example: EVLPFB02521/UNV Other Voltages Consult Cooper Crouse-Hinds
Wall Bracket Mount
Note: For technical information on family trees, temperature performance data, dimensions, weights, and photometrics, refer to DMVF Series in Section 6L.
EVFPFB Fluorescent Emergency Lighting

Three wire construction, for switching purposes, is standard on fluorescent emergency lighting. For energy conservation, luminaires can be switched off without affecting the emergency operation feature.
10L
Ceiling Mount
*Test switch is remote mounted. Use Cooper Crouse-Hinds EDSC218 (Not furnished).
Stanchion Mount
Ceiling and bracket mounts have 4 hubs: 3 are plugged.
1126
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Ex-Lite LED Exit Signs
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 1, AEx em ib IIC (NEC) Cl. I, Zone 1, Ex em ib IIC (CEC) Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G (NEC) Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups E, F, G (CEC)
UL Listed IP66
10L
The Ex-Lite Series of LED exit signs are designed for hazardous locations and are ideally suited for marking escape routes and exits in potentially explosive atmospheres. The Ex-Lite Z is available as an AC only version, while the Ex-Lite ZE is available with self-contained battery. As an emergency lighting luminaire with selfcontained battery system, the Ex-Lite ZE features a nickel cadmium battery with automatic test and monitoring feature.
Applications:
In harsh and hazardous environments where illuminated exit signs are required

LED Technology: Long life (>50K hours) for years of maintenance-free operation Energy-efficient for lower cost of operation Low temperature operation with no loss of illumination Rugged and durable light source for the harshest of environments Exit Sign System: Can be used in a hazardous location Conduit or cable entry Can be installed in moist, humid, rain, and wet environments Universal input voltage 110VAC-277VAC and 110VDC-250VDC reduces inventory Ex-Lite ZE with self-monitoring, selfdiagnostic, and test capability Premium heavy-duty nickel cadmium battery 24-hour charge and recharge time increases safety by recovering quickly from outage "EXIT" legend with alternative wings left, right, or left and right; simple field modification Emergency lighting cycle three hours The housing of the luminaire is constructed with a corrosion resistant, robust, lightweight aluminum alloy material and illumination of the sign is provided with red, high-efficient LEDs
Catalog Number Description Light Source Life of LED Rated Voltage, VAC Frequency, Hz Rated Voltage, DC Power Consumption Battery Allowable Temperature Range Mounting Cable Entry Conduit Entry Protection Ex Lite Z AC/DC Exit Sign LED 50K hours 120V-277V 50/60 110V-250V 6VA N/A -4F to 122F (-20C to 50C) Wall Ex-e 3 /4" IP66 Ex Lite ZE with Battery LED 50K hours 120V-277V 50/60 110V-250V 6VA NiCad 41F to 95F (5C to 35C)* Wall Ex-e 3 /4" IP66
*Due to battery chemistry, the charging capacity will be limited at temperatures below 5C and above 35C.
10L
Dimensions
In (mm):

Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class I, Zone 1, AEx em ib IIC (NEC) Class I, Zone 1, Ex em ib IIC (CEC) Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G (NEC) Class II, Division 2, Groups E, F, G (CEC) IP66 UL844 UL924/CSA22.2 No. 141-02 UL60079/CSA22.2 E60079 UL1203/CSA22.2 E6124-1-1-02
1127
10L
CCH UX Series LED Exit Signs
UL Listed Available with Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D rating
NEMA 4X, IP66
The Cooper Crouse-Hinds CCH UX Series LED Exit Sign combines the strength and durability of die cast aluminum with architecturallypleasing aesthetics. The CCH UX Series is illuminated by LEDs, providing the customer with a long-life, low maintenance, dependable exit sign for use in conditions where reliability is crucial. Designed for the most severe environments, the CCH UX Series will provide maximum performance against rain, moisture, cold, corrosion, and dust in applications such as manufacturing plants, refineries, petrochemical and chemical plants, waste and sewage treatment facilities, food processing, and other industrial facilities.
Applications:
In locations deemed hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors or gases In areas where the presence of gases or vapors may become present during an abnormal, unusual, or accidental conditions Outdoor and wet applications Where required by the National Electrical Code, Life Safety Code, or other applicable codes

CCH UX Series Exit Sign: -45C (-49F) to 45C (113F) CCH UX-HAZ Hazardous Location Exit Sign: T6 rating at 45C (113F)

Wet location, outdoor rated for use in the most demanding environments Optional hazardous location rating available Dual voltage 120V/277V reduces wiring errors Heavy-duty nickel cadmium battery for long life 24-hour charge and recharge recovery time increases safety Heavy-duty injection molded polycarbonate lens protects against impact and corrosion Brown-out protection protects battery and reduces labor Heavy-duty aluminum die cast housing protects against impact and chemical resistance LEDs provide long life, even illumination, and energy savings Wide operating temperature range (-45C to 45C) Self-diagnostic testing reduces costs by eliminating scheduled equipment verification tests
Electrical Ratings:
Power Supply 120V/277V dual voltage LED Exits - Red Input Power 120V = 2.7W 277V = 3.2W Input Current: (Max.) 120V = .07A 277V = .04A LED Exits - Green Input Power 120V = 2.3W 277V = 3.0W Input Current: (Max.) 120V = .08A 277V = .03A
10L

NEMA 4X, UL50 UL924 wet location IP65, IP66 Available with NEC hazardous location rating - UL844 Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D
Catalog Number Housing Finish Silver Housing Silver Housing Silver Housing Silver Housing Silver Housing White Housing Black Housing Silver Housing White Housing Black Housing Silver Housing White Housing Black Housing Silver Housing White Housing Black Housing Letter Color Red LED Red LED Green LED Green LED Red LED Red LED Red LED Red LED Red LED Red LED Green LED Green LED Green LED Green LED Green LED Green LED CCH CCH CCH CCH CCH CCH CCH CCH CCH CCH CCH CCH CCH CCH CCH CCH UX70RSDHAZ UX60RHAZ UX70GSDHAZ UX60GHAZ UX70RSD UX70RWHSD UX70RBKSD UX60R UX60RWH UX60RBK UX70GSD UX70GWHSD UX70GBKSD UX60G UX60GWH UX60GBK
Benefits of LED Technology:

Provides safe and reliable exit marking both indoors and outdoors during power failure or interruption of power to normal lighting system Long life (>50K hours) for years of maintenance-free operation Energy-efficient for lower cost of operation Low temperature operation with no loss of illumination Rugged and durable light source for the harshest of environments
1128
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Specialty Lighting
Tank, Task and Gauge Lighting Hazardous and Non-hazardous Locations
Description
Application/Selection Gauge Light Tank Light
V160 EVA160
11L
Page No.
Task Light
EVTL1B50 EVTL1L50
11L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1129
11L
Specialty Lighting
Tank, Task and Gauge Hazardous and Non-hazardous Locations Application and Selection
Applications:
Specialty lighting luminaires are used: For various task lighting requirements in locations that are hazardous (classified) due to the presence of combustible dusts or easliy ignitible fibers and flyings In areas where conventional lighting is not acceptable due to size and/or location In locations where an adequate light source is necessary for tank, instrument, and gauge applications In manufacturing plants, refineries, pharmaceutical, chemical, petrochemical, and other industrial process facilities, waste or sewage treatment facilities, grain processing and handling facilities, and other heavy industrial applications

Environmental: What is the hazardous area classification (NEC)/(CEC) of the location in which the luminaire will be installed? Lighting levels required: What wattage luminaire(s) will provide the desired light level? Physical Arrangement: Type of fixture mounting needed
Product Selection:
EV Tank Lights are suitable for use in Class I, Groups C, D hazardous (classified) locations; tank lights are used to light the inside of tanks, vats, process vessels, etc. EVTL Explosionproof Task Lights are suitable for use in Class I, Group B, C, D and Class II, Groups E, F, G hazardous (classified) locations; EVTL Lights are ideal for applications in which water spray and corrosive atmospheres are considerations ELG Gauge Lights are suitable for use in Class I, Groups C, D hazardous (classified) location; the light is used to illuminate liquid level gauges and to direct the light over the length of the column
11L
1130
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
V Observation Incandescent Luminaire
Watertight
11L
Applications:
The incandescent V Observation Luminaire is used: In tanks or kettles where food is processed To light the inside of tanks for observation of the contents through a window
Features:
Watertight Supported by a mounting ring which contains holes for riveting when placed around a hole in the tank; it can also be welded or brazed to the tank Heavy heat and impact-resistant glass globe eliminates breakage and resultant contamination of food from glass particles Relamping is easily accomplished by removal of the two thumb-screws which fasten the body to the mounting ring The flexible cord or cable should be connected by an EC flexible coupling or CG Series connector
Furnished with EV10 Globle, and C166 Medium Base Lamp Receptacle Hub Lamp Size 11/2" Size 50, 60, 75 or 100W, A-21 Cat. # V160
Dimensions
In Inches:

UL Standard: 1571 CSA Standard: C22.2
Standard Materials:
Mounting ring silicon bronze Fixture body Feraloy iron alloy Globe heat-resisting glass
11L
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Bronze natural
Size Ranges:
Up to 100 watt, A-21 lamp
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1131
11L
EV Tank Luminaires
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. I, Zone I & 2, IIB Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G EVO only
Applications:
EV Tank Light Luminaires are used: To light inside of tanks, vats, process vessels, etc. In chemical plants, petrochemical plants and petroleum process industries Suspended over tank porthole by EC flexible hanger (EVO style) Mounted directly in tank wall (EVA)

Based on 40C Ambient
Cat. # EVO2376 EVA160
*All mounting positions.
Class I, Groups C, D T3C T3C*
Class II, Groups E, F, G T3C
Supply Wire (C) 75 75
Dimensions
In Inches:
Features:
High light output Compact design EVA160: Furnished with tank ring having eight 3/16" holes for riveting to tank Can be brazed if desired Luminaire ring is attached to the tank ring by eight 1/4-20 Allen Head cap screws Luminaire attached to luminaire ring by four wing screws EC flexible luminaire support should be used so relamping can be accomplished without disturbing the globe
EVO2376 EVO2376

NEC: Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups C, D EVO and EVA Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G EVO only UL Standard: 844
Standard Materials:
Bodies EVO: copper-free aluminum; EVA: receptacle housing and intermediate ring Feraloy iron alloy; Tank ring silicon bronze Globes EVO glass, heat strengthened plate glass; EVA: glass, heat- and impact-resistant
EVA160
EVA160
11L
Cat. # EVO2376 EVA160 Watts 75 100, A-21 Lamp (not furnished) 75R 30/SP reflector spot (medium base) Medium base Hub Size
1 1
/2 & 3/4 /2
Tank Ring Mounting

EVA160
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum epoxy powder coat Feraloy iron alloy cadmium electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Silicon bronze natural
Size Ranges:
1/2" and 3/4" hubs
Capacity Ranges:
EVO 75 watt, reflector spot max. EVA 100 watt, A-21 max.
1132
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EVTL Explosionproof Task Light
Cl. I, Groups B, C, D Cl. I, Zone I, IIB+H2 Cl. II, Groups E, F, G Class III Simultaneous Presence
Wet Locations Marine Locations NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 4X
11L
Applications:
EVTL Task Light Luminaires are used: For various task lighting requirements in locations that are hazardous (classified) due to the presence of flammable gases or vapors, combustible dusts, or easily ignitible fibers and flyings In marine applications where water spray and corrosive atmospheres are considerations In areas where conventional lighting is not acceptable due to size and/or location In locations where an adequate light source is necessary for tank, instrument, and gauge applications In porthole or sightglass applications where a spotlight is required for visibility inside tanks, vats, and process vessels In manufacturing plants, refineries, pharmaceutical, chemical, petrochemical, and other industrial process facilities, waste or sewage treatment facilities, grain processing and handling facilities, and other heavy industrial applications
EVTL1B50
EVTL1L50

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Group E, F, G Class III Class I, Zone 1 & 2, Group IIB + H2 Wet locations Marine locations NEMA 4X NEC: Simultaneous Presence UL Standards: 844Hazardous (Divisions Classified) Locations 1571Ordinary and Wet Locations, Marine Outside Type CSA Standards: C22.2 No. 137
Standard Materials:
Housing copper-free aluminum 3/4" NPT hub and plug aluminum Mounting bracket(s) and external hardware stainless steel Gasket silicone rubber Lens heat- and impact-resistant clear glass

Class I, II, III, Simultaneous Presence suitable for most hazardous (classified) areas Class I, Group B standard - suitable for areas containing hydrogen Wet and marine (NEMA 4X) suitability perfect for hose down applications 55 ambient suitability addresses higher ambients typical of industrial plants Cast copper-free aluminum housing with Corro-free epoxy powder coat finish for superior corrosion resistance Stainless steel mounting brackets and hardware for superior corrosion resistance Two mounting styles (bracket and leg) to maximize mounting flexibility Bracket (universal) for ceiling, wall, or base mounting Leg (site glass) for site glass mounting Uses standard 50 watt PAR 20 medium base 120V lamps - improved light output, economical, long life 2000-2500 hour light source Uses 50PAR20 130V lamps for added lamp life - increase lamp life to 5000+ hours while maintaining 76% lumen output 50PAR20 lamps available in both flood and spot light patterns - vary the illumination characteristics by simply changing lamps Easy access interior reduces maintenance and lamp replacement time Seal within 5 ft. (not 18") of luminaire provides greater flexibility in seal location
Standard Finishes:
Aluminum housing (exterior) Corro-free epoxy powder coat Stainless steel natural
Source/Wattage (Medium Base Lamps)
50PAR20 type50W 120V halogen parabolic reflector; lamp life 2000-2500 hrs. 130V lamps available to extend lamp life to 5000+ hrs.
11L
Voltage
120V 60 Hz
Hub Size
(1) 1/ 2" NPT For through-feed, use EVTL-TF1
Cat. # EVTL1B50 EVTL1L50 Conduit Entry /2" 1 /2"
1
Mounting Style Bracket (Universal) Leg (Site Glass)
Wattage 50 50

Maximum Ambient C 40 40 Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C, D Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Class III Simultanenous Presence Class I, Zone 1, IIB + H T3B T3B Supply Wire C 85 85
Cat. # EVTL1B50 EVTL1L50
Install luminaire within aiming ranges shown on nameplate (see Dimensions).
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1133
11L
Aiming Range:
Dimensions:
Bracket Mount
11L
Dimensions:
Leg Mount

(lbs.)
Luminaire Cat. # EVTL1B50 EVTL1L50 EVTL-TF1 Weight (lbs.) 7 7 1 /2
1134
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Photometric Data
11L
Lamp Light Distribution (Philips lamp data shown. Similar for other manufacturers.) Data shown is for 120 volt lamps. For 130 volt lamps adjust data using a .76 multiplier.
11L
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1135
11L
ELG Gauge Luminaires
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. I, Zone 1 & 2, IIB Explosionproof
Applications:
ELG Gauge Lights are used: In hazardous areas to illuminate liquid level gauges over entire length of gauge Clamped to rear of liquid level gauge and conduit is attached to the ELG hubs; light is reflected by Lucite reflector along the entire length of the gauge; liquid level shows on front of gauge; all light is concentrated on liquid column no spill light
Features:
Even illumination over entire length of gauge Variety of sizes to fit many gauges Several lights can be used in tandem to illuminate long gauge

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups C, D ELG329 with LE49 reflector
Standard Materials:
Body copper-free aluminum Reflectors plexiglass
Description Gauge Light (less reflector) Short Style Reflector Long Style Reflector Length (L) (inches) Cat. # 4 /2 51/2
1
Dimensions:
Plexiglass Reflectors Short Style
Standard Finishes:
Body electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint
ELG329 LE34 LE35 LE46 LE47 LE48 LE49 LE410 LE412 LE413
Size Ranges:
1" conduit through-feed
Capacity Ranges:
120V medium screw base "A19" style incandescent lamp 58W maximum 25 watt medium base 1000 hour life 52 watt medium base 2500 hour life 58 watt medium base 3000 hour life
13 15 17 193/4 22 251/4 263/4
Long Style
11L

Based on 40C ambient
58 Watt T4A Maximum
Options:
Description Suffix Group B suitability ........................... GB
Suggested Lamps:
Lamps not furnished
Manufacturer General Electric Osram/Sylvania Philips Cat. # 25 52 Watt Watt 25A 25A 25A 60A/52WMP/98 60A/52/SS/XL 60A-52A/99/EW 58 Watt 58A19/62 Volts 120 120 120
1136
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Signaling Devices Visual and Audible

Section S
A comprehensive range of signaling products specifically designed for use in areas where harsh environmental conditions prevail and where there is a risk of explosion due to the presence of flammable atmospheres.
Signaling Devices - Visual and Audible

Table of Contents
Section S of the Cooper Crouse-Hinds catalog contains the following product groupings:
Section 1S
Fire Alarm or Emergency Call Points and Heat Detectors
(for use in hazardous areas) Call points are used for fire alarm activation, evacuation, and process shutdown. Heat detectors are used in turbine/generator skids, switchgear or motor control status rooms, and process tank areas or transmission lines SM87PBL SM87BG PB BG BG2 BG3 HD1
Section 5S
Speakers and Tone Generators
(for use in hazardous areas) For plant-wide alarm notifications and audible process alarms DB1 DB3 DB4 DB5 DB12 Db15 DB16 UL ETH855, ETH845 ETH840, ETH640 ETH W2H WH ESR
Section 6S
Visual and Audible Combination Units
(for use in hazardous areas) Strobe light and audible tone generator in one package DB3 / XB11 DB3 / SM87HX DB12 / XB13
Section 2S
Strobe Lights
(for use in hazardous and non-hazardous areas) Strobe lights for condition signaling, security alerts, equipment obstruction warnings, and emergency evacuation signaling XB15 VWL XB12 XB16 UL OX2L XB13 SM87 HXB VX2L EXFASC XB11 OAL EXR XB4 VAL OWL
Section 3S
Steady-On Beacons
(for use in hazardous areas) For safety lighting, continuous communication sources, obstacle warnings, exit or entrance lights, and for identifying the location of safety equipment such as showers or emergency telephones FB4 FL4 FB11 UL FB12 UL FB15 SM87 LU3 SM87 LU1 EXSO, EXDSO VF
Section 4S
Status Lights
(for use in hazardous areas) For process status, messaging, and alert or emergency condition indication SM87 SL XB11 SLUL XB12 SL, FB12 SL
1138
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Visual and Audible Signaling Devices

For Hazardous and Non-hazardous Locations
Visual and Audible Signaling Devices as tough as your environment
The broadest line of harsh and hazardous signaling, alarm and communication products available in both IEC and NEC designs and certifications. Hazardous area call points (fire alarm or emergency notification devices) provides you a unique product offering unequalled by any other manufacturer of hazardous location signaling products. Worldwide listings with UL, cUL, ATEX, GOST, CSA and CQST (Chinese) approvals provide customer solutions that the competition cant match. Superior enclosure materials providing unmatched ingress protection and corrosion resistance from the harshest conditions. A unique signaling product offering integral visual and audible signaling capability pre-wired for simultaneous output activation. Heat detectors for early indication of potential processing problems.
Manual Call Points
Strobes and Beacons
Applications:
For use in hazardous and non-hazardous areas. As visual signals or warning lights. To identify the location of safety equipment such as emergency shower, eye wash stations, and emergency telephones, fire extinguishers and emergency stop switches. For status indication of machinery or processes. To indicate dangerous areas or areas requiring caution. To signal dangerous or hazardous conditions. Where a high-decibel sound is required for alert or evacuation.
Horns and Speakers
Combination Units
What Types of Visual Signals are Available?

1. Strobe Lights Used for signaling or warning of various conditions. Emits a powerful blast of bright light. 2. Rotating Beacons Used to signal over a large area when the light must be seen from a long distance. 3. Steady-on Beacons Typically used as a continuous source to warn, commumicate or draw attention to an area, machine or process. 4. Stack Lights Used for multiple indication in one signaling device. Compact and versatile, the three-color (red, amber and green) is most popular.
Lens Color and Their Applications

Most Cooper Crouse-Hinds strobes, steady, and flashing beacons come in six lens colors: amber, blue, clear, green, magenta and red. Cooper Crouse-Hinds LED signals come in amber, blue, green, red and, in some cases, white. The following are examples of how various lens colors are used in industrial and commercial signaling environments: Amber - Demotes caution Blue - Used for safety and security Clear (or White) and Green - Used to indicate normal run operation Magenta - Used for radiation alarms Red - Denotes emergency or warning

Environmental: What is the hazardous area classification (NEC/CEC) of the location in which the luminaire will be installed? Signaling Requirements: What will the visual signal be used for (communicating, alerting, warning)? Physical Arrangements: Type of luminaire mounting needed.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1139
S
1140
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Call Points and Heat Detectors

Hazardous
Description Fire Alarm or Emergency Call Points
BG, BG2, BG3 PB SM87
1S
Page No.
see pages 11421148 see pages 11421148 see page 11421148 see pages 11491151
Heat Detectors
HD1
1S
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1141
1S
Fire Alarm or Emergency Call Points

MEDC Series
Hazardous Locations Weatherproof Marine
Class I, Div. 2, Zone 2 Touch-safe coated glass for finger activation. These manual fire alarm call points have been designed for use in hazardous locations and harsh environmental conditions. They offer: The broadest range of hazardous location manual fire alarm activation devices in the industry. The compact design, activation choices such as pushbutton or break glass, housing color choices and comprehensive worldwide certifications make this product family a project closer. Flexibility as all units accept metric cable or NPT conduit entries, and each unit can be custom designed for a specific fire alarm or emergency activation requirements.
Class I, Div. 2, Zone 2 Push to activate.
Class I, Div. 1 Push to activate. Key switch to reset.
Applications:
Fire alarm activation Emergency evacuation Process shut-down
Industries:
Liquid natural gas terminals Energy exploration Chemical Refinery Power generation

In-line and end-of-line resistors fitted for use in fire activation circuits Optional LED to indicate operation Plastic break glass element available easy activation yet safe to touch Corrosion resistant GRPideal for marine applications Retained stainless steel cover screws wont corrode and never lose screws Optional lift flap for protection
1S
1142
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

MEDC Series
1S
SM87PBL
Push Button Fire Alarm Call PointExplosionproof

Certification UL Listed for: Certified Ambient Temperature Ingress Protection Material Entries Weight Options UL, CSA, ATEX Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D Class I, Zone 1 67F to +158F 55C to +70C NEMA 4X & 6 IP66 & 67 Marine Grade Alloy Stainless Steel (ATEX only) Up to 4 1/ 2" or 3/ 4" NPT 5.5lb/2.5kg Body color, certification Cat. # SM87PBLAUL3T3B3NNR Standard Product Configuration Explosion protected, 2 1/2" NPT entries, duty label "FirePress Here," single pushbutton switchlatching, marine grade alloy, red finish
Certification UL, CSA, Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D, Zone 1
Ordering Code 36200102
SM87BG
Break Glass Call PointExplosionproof

Certification Intrinsically Safe Flameproof Certified Ambient Temperature Ingress Protection Material Entries Weight Options ATEX, CSA, GOST-R, GOST-K, GB ATEX Ex II 1G, Exia IIC T4 ATEX Ex II 2G, Exd IIC T6 55C to +70C 20C to +55C (LED) IP66 & 67 Stainless Steel or Alloy Up to 4 x 20mm or 25mm 3.8kg (Steel) 2.5kg (Alloy) Body color, 3 & 4 pole changeover switch, certification Cat. # SM87BGLAD1B1NNR Standard Product Configuration Break glass call point, Ex II 2GD, Exd IIC T6, IP 66 & 67, 1 M20 bottom entries, duty label, "Fire Breakglass," alloy material, red finish
Certification ATEX Ex II 2GD
PB
Push Button Fire Alarm Call PointHazardous Locations

Certification UL Listed for: Certified Ambient Temperature Ingress Protection Material Entries Weight Options: UL, ATEX Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class I, Zones 1 & 2 13F to +158F 25C to +70C NEMA 4X & 6 IP66 & 67 Corrosion-free GRP Up to 4 1/ 2" NPT, M20 2.6lb/1.2kg Body color, certification Cat. # PBUL4C6C0DSN7R Standard Product Configuration Explosion protected, 2 1/2" NPT bottom entries, no duty label, DC, single pushbutton switch latching, painted red GRP Explosion protected, Ex II 2GD, Exe, IIC, T6, Zone 1 & 2, 2 M20 entries, DC, single switch, red finish Ordering Code 869105
1S
Certification UL, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D, Zone 1 & 2 ATEX Ex II 2GD
800010
PBEB4B6B0DSN6R
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1143
1S

MEDC Series
BG
Break Glass Fire Alarm Call PointHazardous Locations

Certification UL Listed for: Certified Ambient Temperature Ingress Protection Material Entries Weight Options: UL, ATEX Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class I, Zone 2 13F to +131F 25C to +55C NEMA 4X & 6 IP66 & 67 Corrosion-free GRP Up to 4 1/ 2" NPT, M20 2.6lb/1.2kg Body color, certification, lift flap, LED, tag & duty label, series and EOL resistor Standard Product Configuration Explosion protected, 2 1/ 2" NPT bottom entries, single break glass switch latching, painted red GRP finish Explosion protected, Zone 0, 1 & 2, DC, 2 M20 bottom entries, single break glass switch latching, single switch, red finish
Certification
Type
Ordering Code Cat. # 869101 800002 800003 BGUL4C6C1DSN7R BGIB4B6B1DSN6R
UL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Haz. Loc. Groups A, B, C, D, Zone 2 ATEX Ex II 1GD ATEX Ex II 2GD Intrinsically Safe Increased Safety
Explosion protected Ex II 2GD, Exed, IIC, T6, Zone 1 & 2, BGEB4B6B1DSN6R DC, 2 M20 bottom entries, single break glass switch latching, red finish BGWN4B6B1ASN6R Dust-tight and weatherproof, uncertified AC, 2 M20 bottom entries, single break glass switch latching, red finish
IP66 & 67
Waterproof 800001
BG2
Break Glass Call PointHazardous Locations

Certification Intrinsically Safe Increased Safety Certified Ambient Temperature Ingress Protection Material Entries Weight Options ATEX ATEX Ex II 1GD, Exia IIC T4 ATEX Ex II 2GD, Exed(m) IIC T4 (T6) 40C to +55C (Exia) 20C to +50C (Exed) IP66 & 67 Corrosion-free GRP 2 M20 1.2kg Lift flap Standard Product Configuration Explosion protected, Zone 0, 1 & 2, DC, 2 M20 bottom entries, single break glass switch latching, red finish Explosion protected, Zone 1 & 2, DC, 2 M20 bottom entries, single break glass switch latching, red finish
Certification ATEX Ex II 1GD
Type Intrinsically Safe
Ordering Code Cat. # 800005 BG2INN1N BG2EDC1N
1S
Increased Safety Increased Safety 800004
BG3
Break Glass Call PointExplosionproof & Weatherproof

Certification UL Listed for: Certified Ambient Temperature Ingress Protection Material Entries Weight Options ATEX, GB ATEX Ex II 1G, Exia IIC T4 55C to +55C (Exia) IP66 & 67 Corrosion-free GRP 2 M20 0.5kg Body color, lift flap Cat. # BG3I1NBN BG3W1NBN Standard Product Configuration Explosion protected, Zone 0 / 1 & 2 DC, standard models are surface mount version, have 2 M20 bottom entries, single break glass switch latching, duty label "Burning House," red GRP finish Uncertified, dust-tight & weatherproof, 24V DC, single break glass switch latching, duty label "Burning House," red finish
Certification ATEX Ex II 1G ATEX Ex II 1G 1144
Type Intrinsically Safe Weatherproof

Ordering Code 800007 800006

US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

MEDC Series
1S
SpecificationSM87PBL Unit
Certification: UL Listed: Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D and Class I, Zone 1. Listing No: E186629. CSA Certification: I.S. Version Class I, Groups A, B, C, D Exd Class I, Div. 2 1/ 2 Group D Enclosure type 4, Cert. No. 79120 ATEX approved: EN50014, EN50018 Cert. No. Baseefa 03ATEX0075 24V AC/DC 2 amp 2 pole c/o, wired to terminals Will accept up to 14AWG cable Up to 4 1/2" or 3/4" NPT, 20mm, 25mm A red high intensity LED can be fitted for alarm indication LM 25 TF Marine Grade Alloy or Grade 316 ANCHB stainless steel 5.5 lb/2.5kg (approx.) Epoxy paint finish as standard or to customer's specification Exd/Exi: 55C to 70C 20C to +55C (LED version only) UL: 67F to +158F (55C to +70C) 4F to +131F (20C to +55C) LED version only CSA: 58F to +131F (50C to +55C) (Exd) 58F to +104F (50C to +40C) (Exi) NEMA 4X and 6, IP66 & 67 SM87 PB IP68 (40m for 8 hours) Consult MEDC for specification 470R minimum (DC & I.S. units only)
Voltage: Rating: Switches: Terminals: Entries: Optional Indicator: Material:
Field Installed Duty Labels

Use with SM87 Call Points: SM87PBL/SM87BGL SM87PBL/SM87BGL SM87PBL/SM87BGL SM87PBL/SM87BGL Duty Label Blank Fire Emergency Shut Down Suppression Release Ordering Code 869530 869526 869532 869534
Weight: Finish: Certified Temperature:
Ingress Protection: Addressable: Resistor Values:
Ordering Requirements
The following code is designed to help in the selection of the correct unit. Build up the reference number by inserting the code for each component into the appropriate box.
1S
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1145
1S

MEDC Series
SpecificationSM87BGL Unit
Break glass unit, latching Lift flap, break glass, latching Voltage: Rating: Switches: Terminals: Entries: Optional Indicator: Material: Both the ExiaIICT4 units and the ExdIICT6 units have the same external appearance. Also the internal components are identical throughout the range. Each unit can be wired for either NO, NC or CO contacts to customer specification. Weight: Finish: Certification: Type SM87BGL Type SM87LBGL

Use with SM87 Call Points: SM87PBL/SM87BGL SM87PBL/SM87BGL SM87PBL/SM87BGL SM87PBL/SM87BGL Duty Label Blank Fire Emergency Shut Down Suppression Release Ordering Code 869530 869526 869532 869534
Exd 24V AC/DC Exia 28V 2 amp 2 pole c/o, wired to terminals Optional up to 4 pole Will accept up to 2.5mm2 cable Up to 4 x 20mm or 25mm ISO EExd/EExia A red high intensity LED can be fitted for alarm indication Grade 316 ANC4B Stainless Steel or LM 25 TF Marine Grade Alloy 3.8 kg. steel (approx.) or 2.5 kg. alloy (approx.) Epoxy paint finish as standard or to customer's specification CENELEC EN 50014, EN50018 (for Exd) and EN50020 (for Exi) ExiaIIC T4 Cert No. Baseefa 02 ATEX 0152X ExdIIC T5/T6 Cert No. Baseefa 03 ATEX 0075 CSA Certification: Class I Groups A-D I.S. version (SM87 PBI only) Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Group D (Exd SM87 PB & SM87 BG) GOST 'R' Certification: 1Exib IIC T4, 1Exd IIC T4* GOST 'K' Certification: Exib IIC T4* Chinese Certification: CQST Exia IIC T4, Exd IIC T5/T6*
*Available upon request
Certified Temperature:
Exd/Exi* 55C 20C CSA 50C 50C
to +70C to +55C (LED version only) to +55C (Exd) to +40C (Exi)
*Note: includes ATEX, GOST & Chinese versions.
Ingress Protection:
IP66 and IP67 SM87 PB IP68 (40m for 8 hours)
Resistor Values: 470R minimum (DC & I.S. units only)
1S
1146
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

MEDC Series
1S

Use with PB Call Points: PB PB PB PB Duty Label Blank Fire Emergency Shut Down Suppression Release Ordering Code 869530 869526 869532 869534
SpecificationPB Unit
Certification: UL Listed Hazardous locations: Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D and Class I, Zone 2 UL Listing No. E186629 Ordinary locations: Fire Alarm Boxes. UL Listing No. S8117 CSA Certified to C22.2 (PB only), Nos. 0-M, 0.4M, 14-M, 25,30-M, 94, 142-M 1987, 157M 1987, 15792, Enclosure Type 4, 4A, Class I, Groups A, B, C, D, Cert. No. 79120 ATEX Approved: EN50014, EN50018, EN50019, EN50028 Cert. No. BAS02ATEX2105X (BG & PB), Exed II C T6 (switch only), Exedm IIC T4 (other versions) Up to 240V BGUL/PBUL: 13F to +131F (25C to + 55C) PB (CSA): 58F to +104F (50C to +40C) NEMA 4X & 6, IP66 & 67 7 x 14 AWG standard Max Rating 240VAC, 3A Up to 4 entries 1/ 2" NPT or 20mm 2.6 lb/1.2kg (varies with model & entries) Glass reinforced polyester Red epoxy painted finish as standard or to customers specification Various configurations available on versions up to 24V, 470R minimum A high intensity red LED can be fitted as an optional extra to indicate operation on versions up to 24V PB & BG duty label worded to clients requirements (riveted on) PB & BG tag label worded to clients requirements (screwed on)
Voltage: Certified Temperature:
Basic single changeover switch wiring diagram
Ingress Protection: Terminals: Switch Rating (1 or 2 changeover switches fitted): Cable Entries: Weight: Material: Finish: Resistors: LED Indication: Labeling:
Basic double changeover switch wiring diagram For versions containing in-line and end-of-line resistors, please specify your requirements.
1S
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1147
1S

MEDC Series

Use with BG Call Points: BG BG BG BG Duty Label Blank Fire Emergency Shut Down Suppression Release Ordering Code 869531 869525 869533 869535
SpecificationBG Unit
Certification: UL Listed Hazardous locations: Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D and Class I, Zone 2 UL Listing No. E186629 Ordinary locations: Fire Alarm Boxes. UL Listing No. S8117. CSA Certified to C22.2 (PB only), Nos. 0-M, 0.4M, 14-M, 25,30-M, 94, 142-M 1987, 157M 1987, 15792, Enclosure Type 4, 4A, Class I, Groups A, B, C, D, Cert. No. 79120 ATEX Approved: 58F to +104F (50C to +40C) Cert. No. BAS02ATEX2105X (BG & PB), Exed II C T6 (switch only), Exedm IIC T4 (other versions) Up to 240V BGUL/PBUL: 13F to +131F (25C to + 55C) PB (CSA): 58F to +104F (50C to +40C) NEMA 4X & 6, IP66 & 67 7 x 14 AWG standard Max Rating 240VAC, 3A Up to 4 entries 1/2" NPT or 20mm 2.6 lb/1.2kg (varies with model & entries) Glass reinforced polyester Red epoxy painted finish as standard or to customers specification Various configurations available on versions up to 24V, 470R minimum A high intensity red LED can be fitted as an optional extra to indicate operation on versions up to 24V BG glass label reads either: (1) Fire break glass press here (2) Break glass press here (3) Worded to clients requirements PB & BG tag label worded to clients requirements (screwed on) PB & BG duty label worded to clients requirements (riveted on) Basic double changeover switch wiring diagram For versions containing in-line and end-of-line resistors, please specify your requirements. Basic single changeover switch wiring diagram
Voltage: Certified Temperature:
Ingress Protection: Terminals: Switch Rating (1 or 2 changeover switches fitted): Cable Entries: Weight: Material: Finish: Resistors: LED Indication: Labeling:
1S
1148
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Heat Detectors
MEDC Series
Explosionproof & Intrinsically Safe
1S
Exd version (optional guard) The MEDC heat detector has been designed for use in hazardous environments. These units are suitable for fire alarm and/or suppression systems in offshore and onshore applications including paint spray booths, flammable material stores, turbine rooms, extract ductwork and other hazardous areas throughout the oil & gas, petrochemical and process industries. Comprising a Fenwal rate-compensated detector with all-stainless steel external construction, mounted to either a type SM87 marine grade alloy enclosure (Exd version) or JB10 corrosion-free GRP enclosure (Exia, Exem/UL versions). The contact in the detector CLOSES at alarm temperature. To select appropriate temperature setting, see specification on reverse.
Exia/Exem/UL versions (optional guard)

Zone 0, Zone 1 and Zone 2 Exia IIC T4/T6, Exd IIB T3/T6 or Exem II T6 ATEX approved Ex II 1G (Exia) Ex II 2G (Exd/Exem) BASEEFA certified UL listed for USA and Canada Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D GOST 'R' & 'K' certified Chinese (CQST) certified IP66 & IP67 Certified temperature: 20C to +125C (Exd)* 20C to +55C (Exem/UL) 55C to +55C (Exia) Stainless steel probe Detector temperature settings: 60C to 385C, (140F to 725F) Marine grade Alloy or GRP enclosure Optional guard
*Model dependent.
Applications:
Compressor turbine/generator skids Switchgear or motor control status rooms Process tank areas or transmission lines
Typical Industries:
Power generation Nuclear plants Chemical processing Upstream/downstream oil and gas
1S
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1149
1S
Heat Detectors
MEDC Series
HD1
Heat Detector Explosionproof & Intrinsically Safeu

Certification Flameproof Increased Safety Intrinsically Safe Certified Ambient Temperature Ingress Protection Material Temperature Settings Entries Weight Options: cULus, ATEX, GOST-R, GOST-K, GB ATEX Ex II 2G, Exd IIB T6 ATEX Ex II 2G, Exem II T6 ATEX Ex II 1G, Exia IIC T6 20C to +125C Exd (T3) ATEX/GOST 'R' 20C to +55C Exd (T6)/Exem 55C to +55C Exia IP66 & 67 Marine Grade Alloy (Exd) Corrosion-free GRP (Exia/Exem) 140F to 725F (60C to 385C) 2 M20 1.12.0kg (model dependent) Enclosures, color, tag and duty labels, temperature setting
Compensated Heat Detector with Guard Fitted Natural Black Finish

To select appropriate temperature settings, choose detector at 56C (100F) above maximum ambient temperature. Temperature Setting Tolerance Color Code Certification (F) (C) (F) (C) Detector Tip Ordering Code 140 160 190 UL, cUL, Class I, Div 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class I, Zone 2, IIC 225 275 325 360 450 Certification ATEX Exd ATEX Exd ATEX Exd ATEX Exd ATEX Exd ATEX Exd ATEX Exd ATEX Exd ATEX Exd ATEX Exd ATEX Exem ATEX Exem ATEX Exem ATEX Exem ATEX Exem ATEX Exem ATEX Exem ATEX Exem 60 71 88 107 135 163 182 232 +7/-8 +7/-8 +7/-8 +7/-8 10 10 10 15 4 4 4 4 6 6 6 8 Black Black White White Blue Red Red Green 46500152 46500153 46500154 46500155 46500156 46500157 46500158 46500159 Ordering Code 465607 465602 465603 465614 465609 465605 46500043 465601 46500045 46500104 46500026 465301 465305 465304 46500031 465306 46500072 465303
Cat. # HD1ULE140GN HD1ULE160GN HD1ULE190GN HD1ULE225GN HD1ULE275GN HD1ULE325GN HD1ULE360GN HD1ULE450GN Cat. # HD1BD140NG HD1BD160NG HD1BD190NG HD1BD225NG HD1BD275NG HD1BD325NG HD1BD360NG HD1BD450NG HD1BD600NG HD1BD725NG HD1BE140NN HD1BE160NN HD1BE190NN HD1BE225NN HD1BE275NN HD1BE325NN HD1BE360NN HD1BE450NN
Standard Product Configuration 140F detector, marine grade alloy enclosure, painted gray 160F detector, marine grade alloy enclosure, painted gray 190F detector, marine grade alloy enclosure, painted gray 225F detector, marine grade alloy enclosure, painted gray 275F detector, marine grade alloy enclosure, painted gray 325F detector, marine grade alloy enclosure, painted gray 360F detector, marine grade alloy enclosure, painted gray 450F detector, marine grade alloy enclosure, painted gray 600F detector, marine grade alloy enclosure, painted gray 725F detector, marine grade alloy enclosure, painted gray 140F detector, GRP enclosure, natural black 160F detector, GRP enclosure, natural black 190F detector, GRP enclosure, natural black 225F detector, GRP enclosure, natural black 275F detector, GRP enclosure, natural black 325F detector, GRP enclosure, natural black 360F detector, GRP enclosure, natural black 450F detector, GRP enclosure, natural black
1S
1150
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Heat Detectors
MEDC Series
1S
SpecificationHD1 Unit
Certification: CENELEC EN50014, 19 & 28 Exd IIB T6 (T3 at +125C), Cert.No. Baseefa 03ATEX0447 Exia IIC T6 (T4 with diodes/resistors), Cert. No. Baseefa 03ATEX0427 Exem II T6, Cert. No. Baseefa 03ATEX0428 UL listed for USA and Canada Class I, Div 2, Groups A, B, C & D UL Listing No. E252920 GOST 'R' & 'K' Certification: Exd, Exi & Exem versions Russian Fire Alarm (VNIIPO) approved Chinese Certification: CQST Exd, Exi & Exem versions Detector: Enclosures: Optional Guard: Finish: Detector: Enclosures: 316 stainless steel Exd LM25 marine grade alloy Exia/Exem/UL GRP (anti-static) Stainless steel cover screws 316 stainless steel Sand blasted Exd Epoxy painted gray as standard or to customers specification Exia/Exem/UL Self colored black or epoxy painted to customers specification
Material:
Weight:
Exd, 2kg. Exia/Exem/UL, 1.1kg.
Certified Temperature: 20C to +125C Exd (T3) ATEX & GOST R only 20C to +55C Exd (T6)/Exem/UL, 55C to +55C Exia Ingress Protection: Operation: IP66 & IP67 The detector contact is normally open and CLOSES at alarm temperature
Listed Temperature Settings: To select appropriate temperature settings, choose detector at 56C (100F) above maximum ambient temperature. Temperature Setting Tolerance Color Code (F) (C) (F) (C) Detector Tip 140 60 +7/-8 4 Black 160 71 +7/-8 4 Black 190 88 +7/-8 4 White 225 107 +7/-8 4 White 275 135 10 6 Blue 325 163 10 6 Red 360 182 10 6 Red 450 232 15 8 Green 600 316 20 11 Orange 725 385 25 14 Orange Contact Rating: Terminals: Labels: Cable Entries: Resistor: Diodes: Exd/Exem/UL: 125V AC 5A, 125V DC 0.5A, 48V DC 1A. Exia: 30V 300mA 6 x 4mm2 (BK6) Optional stainless steel tag and duty labels 2 x M20 ISO (ATEX/Exd/Exe/Exi versions) 2 x 1/2" NPT via adaptors (UL version) 2 x M20 ISO (ATEX/Exd/Exe/Exi versions) 2 x 1/2" NPT via adaptors (UL version) Up to 2 off available in Exd, Exi & UL versionscontact sales office
1S
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1151
1S
1S
1152
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Strobe Lights
Description
Strobe Lights - MEDC Series
SM87 HXB XB4 XB11 XB12 XB13 XB15 XB16 UL
2S
Page No.
see pages 11591160 see pages 1162, 1164 see pages 1159, 1161 see pages 1162, 1165 see pages 1163, 1166 see pages 1155, 1157 see pages 1156, 1158 see page 1167 see pages 11711173 see pages 11681170
Strobe Lights - HazardGard EX Series

EXFASC EXR EXS, EXDS
2S
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1153
2S
Strobe Lights
MEDC Series
Hazardous Locations Weatherproof
XB16 These listed strobes have been designed for use in potentially explosive atmospheres and harsh environmental conditions. The enclosures are suitable for use offshore or onshore, where a lightweight product combined with corrosion resistance is required. The housing is manufactured from a U.V. stable, glass reinforced polyester, with the lens manufactured from a U.V. stable polycarbonate. Stainless steel screws are used, ensuring a totally corrosion-free product. The strobes contain supervisory diode and four wire leads for fire alarm applications. This strobe is also available UL 1971 (ADA) Listed for hearing impaired applications. Units can be painted to customer specification and supplied with identification labels.
XB15 Pipe Mount (with cast guard)

UL Listed for USA and Canada Hazardous locations for USA and Canada Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D* UL 1971 compliant version available Ordinary locations: Visual Signal Device NEMA 4X and 6, IP66 & 67 Certified temperature 67F to +158F 55C to +70C
Typical Industries:
Utility gas plants Wastewater treatment plants Mining Petroleum refineries Chemical and petrochemical Pulp and paper
2S
Applications:
Condition signaling Security alert Equipment obstruction warning Emergency evacuation signaling

Pipe mount with 1/2" NPT entry Corrosion resistant GRP enclosure XB16 580,000 peak candlepower XB15 520,000 peak candlepower Polycarbonate lens, various colors available 4 wire diode monitored board Optional relay initiate Optional lens guard
UL 1971 version available with clear lens only (XB16 only). *Conforms to UL regulated voltage.
1154
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Strobe Lights
MEDC Series
XB15
2S
15 Joule Flashing XenonHazardous & Ordinary Locations

Certification UL Listed for: Certified Ambient Temperature Ingress Protection cULus, ATEX Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class I, Zones 1 & 2, AExd IIC T5/T6 -67F to +158F -55C to +70C NEMA 4X & 6 IP66 & 67 Corrosion-free GRP Up to 3 x 1/ 2" NPT or 3 x 3/ 4" NPT 68lb/2.6-3.6kg
Material Entries Weight
Options: Body & lens color, voltages 1248V DC, 110254V AC Certification UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Voltage 120V AC 120V AC 120V AC 120V AC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 120V AC 120V AC 120V AC 120V AC 120V AC 120V AC Lens Color Red Amber Red Amber Clear Green Blue Red Amber Clear Green Blue Red Amber Clear Green Blue Clear Green Blue Ordering Code 869400 869401 869402 869403 27600042 27600043 869393 869398 869399 27600047 27600048 869394 869396 869397 27600052 27600053 869405 27600057 27600058 869404 Cat. # XB15UL12006RWBNN XB15UL12006AWBNN XB15UL12006RWPNN XB15UL12006AWPNN XB15UL02406CWBNN XB15UL02406GWBNN XB15UL02406BWBNN XB15UL02406RWBNN XB15UL02406AWBNN XB15UL02406CWPNN XB15UL02406GWPNN XB15UL02406BWPNN XB15UL02406RWPNN XB15UL02406AWPNN XB15UL12006CWBNN XB15UL12006GWBNN XB15UL12006BWBNN XB15UL12006CWPNN XB15UL12006GWPNN XB15UL12006BWPNN 15 joule beacon, 60 flashes per minute, wire guard, pipe mounting, 1 x 3/4" NPT entry, natural black enclosure 15 joule beacon, 60 flashes per minute, wire guard, backstrap, 2 x 3/4" NPT entries, natural black enclosure 15 joule beacon, 60 flashes per minute, wire guard, pipe mounting, 1 x 3/4" NPT entry, natural black enclosure 15 joule beacon, 60 flashes per minute, wire guard, backstrap, 2 x 3/4" NPT entries, natural black enclosure Standard Product Configuration 15 joules, direct mount w/backstrap, x 3/4" NPT side entries, wire guard, 60 flashes per minute, natural black finish 15 joules, pipe mount, 1 x 3/4" NPT entry, wire guard, 60 flashes per minute, natural black finish
2S
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1155
2S
Strobe Lights
MEDC Series
XB16 UL
10 Joule Flashing XenonHazardous & Ordinary Locations

Certification UL Listed for: Certified Ambient Temperature Ingress Protection Material Entries Weight Options cULus, UL 1971 compliant Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D -67F to +158F -55C to +70C NEMA 4X & 6 IP66 & 67 Corrosion-free GRP Standard 1 x 1/2" NPT 2.2lb/1kg Body & lens color, lens guard, voltages 1248V DC, 110254V AC
Certification
Voltage
Lens Color
Ordering Code
Cat. #
Standard Product Configuration UL 1971 Listed for signaling devices for the hearing impaired. Suitable for fire alarm indication. 10 joule beacon, 60 flashes per minute, lens guard, pipe mounting, 1 x 3/4" NPT entry, natural black enclosure
UL 1971 compliant
24V DC
Clear
29600023
XB16US02460CYNN
UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D
120V AC 120V AC 120V AC 120V AC 120V AC 120V AC 120V AC 120V AC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC
Blue Red Amber Clear Green Blue Red Amber Green Blue Red Amber
869406 869407 869408 29600013 29600014 29600011 29600003 29600004 29600016 29600017 869410 869411
XB16UL12060BYNN XB16UL12060RYNN XB16UL12060AYNN XB16UL12060CYNN XB16UL12060GYNN XB16UL12060BYNN XB16UL12060RYNN XB16UL12060AYNN XB16UL02460GYNN XB16UL02460BYNN XB16UL02460RYNN XB16UL02460AYNN 10 joule beacon, 60 flashes per minute, lens guard, pipe mounting, 1 x 3/4" NPT entry, natural black enclosure 10 joule beacon, 60 flashes per minute, lens guard, pipe mounting, 1 x 3/4" NPT entry, natural black enclosure 10 joules, 60 flashes per minute, 1 x 3/4" NPT entry, 240 Cd, lens guard, natural black finish
2S
1156
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Strobe Lights
MEDC Series
2S
SpecificationXB15 Unit
Certification: UL Listed for USA and Canada: Hazardous locations Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class I, Zone 1, AExd IIC T5/T6 UL listing No. E187894 Ordinary locations: Visual Signal Device UL listing No. S8128 CENELEC/ATEX approved CENELEC EN50014 & EN50018 ATEX Cert. No. Baseefa 04ATEX0009X Material: Body: Glass reinforced polyester Lens: Glass Backstrap: stainless steel 316 Wire Guard (optional): stainless steel wire Cast Guard (optional): aluminium LM25M Natural black or epoxy painted to customer specification 24, 48V DC 110, 120, 230, 240, 254V AC >1 x 106 flashes 60, 80, 120 fpm
Finish: Voltage:
Electrical Ratings:
DC Voltage Current (A) at 60 fpm Current (A) at 80 fpm Current (A) at 120 fpm Effective Candlepower 24 .78 .99 .99 48 .67 .73 .73 110 0.4 0.4 0.4 120 0.4 0.4 0.4 AC 230 0.2 0.2 0.2 240 0.2 0.2 0.2 254 0.17 0.17 0.17
Tube Energy: 15 joules Tube Life: Flash Rate:
Certified 67F to +131F (55C to +55C) T6 Temperature: 67F to +158F (55C to +70C) T5 Weight: Ingress Protection: Entries: Pipe mount: 53/4 lb/2.6kg; Direct mount: 61/2 lb/3.0kg NEMA 4X & 6, IP66 & IP67 Supplied as 2 x 3/4" NPT (direct mount) or 3/4" (pipe mount) as standard Other options available: Up to 3 x 1/2" NPT or 3 x 3/4" NPT (direct mount); 1 /2" NPT (pipe mount) contact sales office to order Direct mount: 12 x 14AWG Pipe mount: 8 x 14AWG
330 (Effective candlepower is the intensity that would appear to an observer if the light was burning steadily) 520,000 (Peak candlepower is the maximum light intensity generated by a flashing light during its light pulse)
Peak Candlepower
Terminals: Multiplying Factor for Colored Lenses: Red 0.15 Blue 0.12 Amber 0.51 Green 0.49 Yellow 0.86
Relay Initiate: Available on all units suitable for 24V DC supplies only Labels: Tag/Duty label option
2S
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1157
2S
Strobe Lights
MEDC Series
SpecificationXB16UL Unit
Certification: UL Listed for USA and Canada: Hazardous locations for USA and Canada Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL listing No. E251185 Ordinary locations: Visual Signal Device: UL1638 UL listing No. E251185 Hazardous locations for hearing impaired: UL1971 UL listing No. E251185 Body: Glass reinforced polyester Lens: U.V. stable polycarbonate Lens screws: stainless steel 316 Natural black or painted to customer specification 24, 48V DC 110, 120, 230, 240, 254V AC Conforms to UL regulated voltage output (12V DC, 24V DC, 120V AC, 240V AC) 67F to +158F (55C to +70C) 10 joules > 1 106 flashes 2.2lb/1.0kg NEMA 4X & 6, IP66 & IP67 Standard 1 1/2" NPT pipe mount 8 14AWG Tag/Duty label option
Electrical Ratings:
For Hazardous Locations and Ordinary Locations (UL1638) Units
DC AC Voltage 24 48 110 120 230 240 254 Current (A) at 60 fpm 0.89 0.30 0.38 0.38 0.22 0.22 0.18 Current (A) at 80 fpm 0.89 0.30 0.38 0.38 0.22 0.22 0.18 Current (A) at 120 fpm 0.89 0.30 0.38 0.38 0.22 0.22 0.18 Effective intensity (Cd): 240 at 80 f.p.m. Peak candlepower: 580,000 (Peak candlepower is the maximum light intensity generated by a flashing light during its light pulse)
Material:
Finish: Voltage:
For UL1971 Units Only

DC AC Voltage 24 48 110 120 230 240 254 Current (A) at 60 fpm 1.22 1.52 0.38 0.38 0.78 0.78 0.18 Current (A) at 80 fpm 1.22 1.52 0.38 0.38 0.78 0.78 0.18 Current (A) at 120 fpm 1.22 1.52 0.38 0.38 0.78 0.78 0.18 Effective intensity (Cd): 240 at 80 fpm. Peak candlepower: 580,000 (Peak candlepower is the maximum light intensity generated by a flashing light during its light pulse) On UL1971 units, max. current rating is based on in-rush current. This is why the current ratings are not propotional as with other beacons/strobes. UL 1971 On-axis output: 15 Cd.
Note: 24V DC units are cerified for use in regulated 24V DC supplies (1633V AC). 110/120V DC units are certified for use on regulated 120V AC supplies (96132V AC). 230/240V DC units are certified for use on regulated 240V AC supplies (192264V AC).
Certified Temperature: Tube Energy: Tube Life: Weight: Ingress Protection: Entries: Terminals:
2S
Labels:
Multiplying factor for colored lenses: Red 0.15 Blue 0.12 Amber 0.51 Green 0.49 Yellow 0.86
1158
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Strobe Lights
MEDC Series
Medium Intensity
2S
SM87 HXB
5 Joule Xenon StrobeExplosionproof

Certification UL Listed for: Certified Ambient Temperature Ingress Protection Material Entries Weight Options cULus, CSA, ATEX Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D Class I, Zone 1 67F to +158F 55C to +70C NEMA 4X & 6 IP66 & 67 Alloy Up to 2 1/2" or 3/4" NPT, M20, M25 4.4lb/2.0kg approx. Body & lens color, certification, lens guard, voltages 2448V DC,110254V AC Lens Color Red Amber Red Amber Red LED Red Amber Red Amber Ordering Code 813005 813006 813007 813008 813009 869161 869162 869165 869166 Standard Product Configuration 5 joules, 2 M20 Entries, 29Cd, Exd IIc 7 joules, 2 M20 Entries, 39Cd, Exd IIc 192Cd, 2 M20 Entries, Exd IIc
Certification ATEX ATEX ATEX ATEX EX EX EX EX II II II II 2GD 2GD 2GD 2GD
Voltage 24V DC 24V DC 240V AC 240V AC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 110V AC 110V AC
Cat. # SM87HXBAB024RN1R1LNNR SM87HXBAB024AN1R1LNNR SM87HXBAB240RN1R1LNNR SM87HXBAB240AN1R1LNNR SM87LEDAB024RN1R1LNNR
ATEX EX II 2GD UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D
SM87HXBAUL024RN3R3LNNR Standard models are in alloy, red body color, no tag or duty labels, 2 1/2" NPT SM87HXBAUL024AN3R3LNNR entries, 29Cd, 60 flashes per minute SM87HXBAUL110RN3R3LNNR Standard models are in alloy, red body color, no tag or duty labels, 2 1/2" NPT SM87HXBAUL110AN3R3LNNR entries, 32Cd, AExd IIB, 60 flashes per minute
XB11
5 Joule Xenon StrobeHazardous Locations

Certification UL Listed for: Certified Ambient Temperature Ingress Protection Material Entries Weight Options cULus, ATEX Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D Class I, Zones 1 & 2, AExd IIB T5 67F to +158F 55C to +70C NEMA 4X & 6 IP66 & 67 Corrosion-free GRP 2 1/ 2" NPT, 20mm 2.6lb/1.2kg Body & lens color, voltages 24V DC, 110254V AC Voltage Groups Groups Groups Groups Groups C, C, C, C, C, D 24V DC D 24V DC D 24V DC D 24V DC D 110V AC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC Body Color Red Red Natural Black Red Red Natural Black Natural Black Natural Black Natural Black Lens Color Red Amber Clear Clear Red Red Amber Red Amber Ordering Code 869171 869172 869173 869174 869175 811101 811102 811103 811104 Cat. # XB11UL02406RNBNNNR XB11UL02406ANBNNNR XB11UL02406CNBNNNN XB11UL02406CNBNNNR XB11UL11006RNBNNNR XB11B02406RNBNNNN XB11B02406ANBNNNN XB11B24006RNBNNNN XB11B24006ANBNNNN Standard Product Configuration No tag or duty labels, 2 1/ 2" NPT entries, 60 flashes per minute GRP, natural black body, no tag or duty labels, backstrap mounting, 2 M20 entries, 60 flashes per minute
2S
Certification UL, cUL Listed, Class UL, cUL Listed, Class UL, cUL Listed, Class UL, cUL Listed, Class UL, cUL Listed, Class ATEX EX II 2GD ATEX EX II 2GD ATEX EX II 2GD ATEX EX II 2GD I, I, I, I, I, Div. Div. Div. Div. Div. 2, 2, 2, 2, 2,
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1159
2S
Strobe Lights
MEDC Series
Medium Intensity
SpecificationSM87HXB Unit
Certification: UL Listed for USA and Canada for Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D and Class I, Zone 1. Listing No. E187894. CSA Certification: to C22.2, Nos. 0, 0.4, 0.5, 9, 30-M 1986, 94-M91, 137-M 1981, Class I, Div. 1, Group 0, Enclosure 3/4, Cert. No. 96406. ATEX approved: EN50014, EN50018, EN50019 Cert. No. Baseefa 03ATEX0222, Exd IIC T6 Material: LM25 TF Marine Grade Alloy Lens: Toughened Glass Finish: Epoxy paint finish as standard or to customer's specification Weight: 5.5lb/2.5kg. approx. Certified Standard unit SM87 HXB: Temperature: 67F to +158F, 55C to +70C High temperature unit: 67F to +185F, 55C to +85C Ingress NEMA 4X & 6, IP66 & 67 Protection: 4 off suitable for up to 14AWG conductor size Terminals: Labels: Duty & tag labels optional Entries: Up to 4 off 1/2" or 3/4" NPT Voltage Tube Energy (joules) Peak Current Consumption (mA) Power Consumption (Watts) Effective Intensity (Cd) Peak Candle Power 24 5 320 7.2 29
DC 48 5 170 7.6 29 110 6 250 25 32
AC 50/60Hz 120 240 7 275 27 39 7 135 27 39
254 8 150 35 44
22213 22213 25061 30187 30187 34174
The above figures (Cd) are for a clear lens @ 1Hz flash rate.
For Colored Lenses

Color Multiplying Factor Red 0.15 Blue 0.12 Amber 0.51 Green 0.49 Yellow 0.86
The photometric data has been independently verified. A report is available if required.
2S
1160
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Strobe Lights
MEDC Series
Medium Intensity
2S
Certification: UL Listed for USA and Canada Hazardous locations: Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D Class I, Zones 1 & 2, AExd IIB T5 UL Listing No. E187894 Ordinary locations: Visual Signal Device UL Listing No. S8128 ATEX approved: Exd IIB T5/T6 Cert. No. 99 ATEX 2195X CENELEC EN50014 and EN50018 Body: Glass reinforced polyester Lens: Glass Cover Screws + Backstrap: Stainless steel 316 Natural black or painted to customer specification 5.5lb/2.5kg Standard unit SM87 HXB: 67F to +158F, 55C to +70C 67F to +158F, 55C to +70C High temperature unit: 67F to +185F, 55C to +85C 6 off suitable for up to 14 AWG conductor size Duty/tag label optional 2 1/2" NPT, 20mm The beacon may be combined with an MEDC Sounder to create a visual/audible alarm. Contact MEDC for price and specification. Voltage XB11 Tube Energy (joules) Peak Current Consumption (mA) Effective Intensity (Cd) Peak Candle Power Power Consumption (Watts)
The Cd figures are for a clear lens @ 1Hz flash rate.
DC 24 5
AC 50/60Hz 110 240 5 5
320 29 22213 8
100 29 22213 11
60 29 22213 18
Material:
Finish: Weight: Certified Temperature:
For Colored Lenses

The photometric data has been verified by BSI. A report is available if required.
Ingress Protection: NEMA 4X & 6, IP66 & 67 Terminals: Labels: Entries: Strobe/Sounder Unit:
2S
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1161
2S
Strobe Lights
MEDC Series
High Intensity for Outdoor Use
XB4
21 Joule Xenon StrobeExplosionproof

Certification UL Listed for: Certified Ambient Temperature cULus, ATEX Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D Class I, Zone 1, AExd IIB T4, T5 67F to +158F 55C to +70C
Ingress Protection NEMA 4X & 6 IP66 & 67 Material Entries Weight Options Alloy Up to 3 1/2" or 3/4" NPT, 20mm, 25mm 14.5lb/6.6kg Body & lens color, lens guard, certification, voltages 24V DC, 110V AC & 240V AC
Certification ATEX Approved Ex II 2G ATEX Approved Ex II 2G UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D
Voltage 24V DC 240V AC
Lens Color Red Red
Ordering Code 814001 814002
Cat. # XB4BB8D2B3B06AN0RN1R XB4BH8D2B3B06AN0RN1R
Standard Product Configuration 21 joules, 2 M20 entries, 355Cd, 60 flashes per minute, no labels, red finish
24V DC
Red
869121
XB4ULB8D2E3E06ANRN1R Marine grade alloy, 2 3/4" NPT entries, no lens guard, 60 flashes per minute, red finish
24V DC 110V AC 110V AC
Amber Red Amber
869122 869125 869126
XB4ULB8D2E3E06ANAN1R XB4ULE8D2E3E06ANRN1R XB4ULE8D2E3E06ANAN1R
XB12
21 Joule Xenon StrobeHazardous Locations

Certification UL Listed for: cULus, ATEX Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D Class I, Zones 1 & 2, AExd IIB T4 Certified Ambient Temperature Ingress Protection Material 67F to +158F 55C to +70C NEMA 4X & 6 IP66 & 67 Corrosion-free GRP Up to 2 1/2" NPT, 20mm 15.5lb/7.0kg Body & lens color, lens guard, certification, voltages 24V DC, 110254V AC Lens Color Red Amber Red Amber Red Amber Red Amber Ordering Code 812101 812102 812103 812104 869181 869182 869185 869186 Cat. # XB12B02406RNBNNNN XB12B02406ANBNNNN XB12B24006RNBNNNN XB12B24006ANBNNNN XB12UL02406RNBNNNR XB12UL02406ANBNNNR XB12UL11006RNBNNNR XB12UL11006ANBNNNR
2S
Entries Weight Options
Certification ATEX ATEX ATEX ATEX Approved Approved Approved Approved Ex Ex Ex Ex II II II II 2G 2G 2G 2G
Voltage 24V DC 24V DC 240V AC 240V AC 24V DC 24V DC 110V AC 110V AC
Standard Product Configuration 21 joules, 2 M20 entries, 355Cd, 60 flashes per minute, no labels, black body
UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D 1162
Red painted GRP, no tag or duty labels, 2 1/2" NPT, 60 flashes per minute, 355 Cd
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Strobe Lights
MEDC Series
XB13
2S
10 Joule Flashing XenonWeatherproof and Heavy Duty

Certification UL Listed for: Certified Ambient Temperature Ingress Protection Material Entries Weight Options Weatherproof IP66 & 67 67F to +158F 55C to +70C NEMA 4X & 6 IP66 & 67 Corrosion-free GRP Up to 3 20mm via knockouts 1.1kg Body & lens color, lens guard, voltages 1224V DC, 115230V AC Ordering Code 813101 813102 813103 813104
Certification Weatherproof, IP66 & 67 Weatherproof, IP66 & 67
Voltage 24V DC 24V DC
Lens Color Red Amber Red Amber
Cat. # XB13024RNNN XB13024ANNN XB13230RNNN XB13230ANNN
Standard Product Configuration
Weatherproof, IP66 & 67 230V AC Weatherproof, IP66 & 67 230V AC
Dust-tight and weatherproof, uncertified, no tag or duty labels, 3 20mm entries via knockouts, 60 flashes per minute, dual and single flash modes, natural red GRP
2S
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1163
2S
Strobe Lights
MEDC Series
Certification: UL Listed for USA and Canada Hazardous locations: Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D Class I, Zone 1, AExd IIB T4 UL Listing No. E187894 Ordinary locations: Visual Signal Device UL Listing No. S8128 ATEX approved: Exd IIC T5 Cert. No. Baseefa 02ATEX0224X LM25TF Marine Grade Alloy body Grade 316 ANC4B Stainless Steel body Toughened Wellglass Red epoxy paint finish as standard or to customer's specification LM25: 14.5lb/6.6kg. Stainless Steel: Add 18.5lb/8.5kg. 67F to +158F 55C to +70C 8 off suitable for up to 8 AWG conductor size Up to 3 1/2" or 3/4" NPT, 20mm, 25mm Voltage Tube Energy (joules) Peak Current Consumption (mA) Effective Intensity (Cd) Peak Intensity (Cd)
Note:
DC 24 21 1400 355 123691
AC 50/60Hz 110 21 350 355 123691 240 21 185 355 123691
Materials:
The above figures (Cd) are for a clear lens @ 1Hz flash rate.
For Colored Lenses

Color Multiplying Factor (Approximate) Red 0.15 Blue 0.12 Amber 0.51 Green 0.49 Yellow 0.86
Finish: Weight: Certified Temperature: Terminals: Entries:
The photometric data has been independently verified. A report is available if required.
Ingress Protection: NEMA 4X & 6, IP66 & 67
2S
1164
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Strobe Lights
MEDC Series
2S
SpecificationXB12
Certification: UL Listed for USA and Canada Hazardous locations: Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D Class I, Zone 1 & 2, AExd IIB T4/T5 UL Listing No. E187894 Ordinary locations: Visual Signal Device UL Listing No. S8128 ATEX approved: Exd IIB T4/T5 Cert. No. 99 ATEX 2196 Body: Glass reinforced polyester Lens: Toughened Glass Cover Screws + Backstrap: Stainless steel 316 Natural black or painted to customer specification 151/2 lb/7.0kg 67F to +158F (55C to +70C) hazardous locations 67F to +131F (55C to +55C) ordinary locations NEMA 4X and 6, IP66 & 67 6 off suitable for up to 10 AWG conductor size Duty/tag label optional 2 1/2" NPT, 20mm Voltage XB12 Tube Energy (joules) Peak Current Consumption (mA) Effective Intensity (Cd) Peak Intensity (Cd) Power Consumption (Watts)
DC 24 21
AC 50/60Hz 110 21 240 21
1400 355 123691 33.6
350 355 123691 38.5
185 355 123691 44.4
Materials:
Finish: Weight: Certified Temperature:
The Cd figures are for a clear lens @ 1Hz flash rate.
For Colored Lenses

Ingress Protection: Terminals: Labels: Entries:
The photometric data has been verified by BSI. A report is available if required.
2S
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1165
2S
Stobe Lights
MEDC Series
Materials: UV stable glass reinforced polyester body UV stable polycarbonate cover/lens Retained stainless steel cover screws Self colored red as standard or epoxy coated to customers specification 10 joules (second flash 7.5 joules) 1.1kg IP66 & IP67 >1 106 flashes 12V DC, 24V DC, 115V AC, 230V AC Voltage 12V DC 24V DC 115V AC 230V AC Xenon discharge Various colors available 8 x 2.5mm2 1 flash per second Time between dual flashes = 0.5 seconds Charging time = 1 second Cycle repeats every 1.5 seconds Duty and tag labels available Up to 3 M20 via knockouts Effective intensity 220 Cd. Peak intensity 75,000 Cd. (Figures are for clear lens at 1Hz flash rate). Current Consumption 1.4A 650mA 180mA 100mA
Finish: Tube Energy: Weight: Ingress Protection: Tube Life: Voltage: Current Consumption:
Operating Temperature: 55C to +70C
Tube Type: Lens Color: Terminals: Flash Rate: Dual Flash Rate:
Labels: Tube Type: Intensity:
For Colored Lenses

2S
1166
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Fire Alarm Strobe Light HAZARDGARD Series
Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups C, D Cl. I, Zone 1 and 2, Group IIB Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Class III
UL and cUL Listed NEMA 4X; IP66
2S
The HazardGard EXFASC Series is a visual fire alarm signaling device for hazardous areas. The EXFASC Series strobes are UL 1971 Listed for indoor signaling applications for the hearing impaired in non-sleeping areas. They are also UL Listed for Type 3R, 4X installations. The strobes are available for pendant, wall and ceiling mounts. The EXFASC Series Fire Alarm Explosionproof Strobe contains a supervisory diode for use in fire alarm applications. Under normal operation the diode is reversed biased, meaning it blocks voltage from being applied to the strobe light and prevents it from lighting. When a fire-initiating device such as a smoke alarm is activated, the diodes polarity is reversed through a fire alarm panel. The diode becomes forward biased, allowing voltage to the device and activating the strobe.
Applications:
Visual fire alarm signaling device for hazardous areas
Typical Industries:
Energy exploration Utilities Wastewater treatment plants Pulp and paper plants Petrochemical plants Petroleum refineries Oil rigs

See page 1169

Meets NFPA requirements for fire safety warning devices State of the art electronic design (full wave rectified design) Low current draw is efficient 24V DC regulated full wave rectified Limited in-rush current favorable to other fire alarm system components Proven, reliable circuitry designed specifically for use with fire alarm control panels Available in pendant, wall and ceiling mount Strobe light produces 65 flashes per minute Factory sealedno external seals required Quick connectstrobe fixture threads onto mounting module for easy installation Small compact sizeceiling mount is 133/ 4-inch long
Ratings:
1633V DC Operating Current: 1.080.83 amps Peak Candlepower: 800,000
Hub Size:
3/4-inch NPT pendant, ceiling and wall mount
Step 1 - Order Strobe Type
Catalog Number Voltage Lens Color FIRE ALARM RATED EXPLOSIONPROOF STROBE 24 VDC regulated EXFASC301/16 33 Clear full wave rectified NEMA Rating 3R, 4X

Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D Class I, Zones 1 and 2, Group IIB Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class III UL 1638 and 1203 Listed UL 1971 Listed for indoor visual signaling for the hearing impaired in non-sleeping areas cUL Listed C22.2 No. 205 NEMA 4X watertight, IP66
Step 2 - Order Mounting Module 2S

Catalog Number EVMP2 EV22 & EV87 EV22 EVMJ4 Hub Size /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 11/4"
3
Mounting Style Pendant Wall Ceiling Stanchion
Materials & Finishes:

Body, mounting modules and guardCopper-free aluminum GlobeHeat and impact-resistant glass GasketsSilicone External hardwareStainless steel Internal componentsSolid-state electronics in a moistureresistant and heat-dissipating epoxy Epoxy powder coated for corrosion resistance
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1167
2S
Explosionproof Strobe Lights HAZARDGARD Series
The HazardGard EXS and EXDS Series Explosionproof Strobe Lights are designed for installation indoors and outdoors in locations which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors or gases, ignitible dusts or ignitible fibers and flyings. The units are UL Listed for Type 3R and 4X installations. The 120V and 24V DC models are Marine Rated. The strobes are available for pendant, wall, stanchion and ceiling mounts, and come in six different globe colors. The EXDS Series is diode polarized for use in electrically supervised circuits. Electrically supervised circuits are typically used in life-safety or security applications. Under normal operation the diode is reversed biased, meaning it blocks voltage from being applied to the strobe and prevents it from lighting. When an initiating device such as a smoke detector is activated, the diodes polarity is reversed through a circuit panel. The diode becomes forward biased, allowing voltage to the device and activating the strobe.
Applications:
Condition signaling Equipment obstruction warning Security alert Emergency evacuation signaling In areas where audible signals cannot be heard
Typical Industries:
Utility gas plants Petroleum refineries Wastewater treatment plants Chemical and petrochemical Mining Pulp and paper


Strong strobe signal that produces 65 flashes per minute Compact design will not obstruct in low ceiling or small areas, ceiling mount is only 133/4"inch long Quick connectstrobe fixture threads onto mounting module for easy installation Factory sealedno external seals required Available in pendant, wall, stanchion and ceiling mount Available in six different globe colorsclear, red, blue, amber, green and magenta Silicone gasket seals out dirt and moisture
Ratings:
120V AC (EXS), 1248V DC (EXSNM) and 24V DC nominal, voltage operating range is 1633V DC (EXDS) Operating Current: 0.10 amps at 120V AC 1.23.8 amps at 1248V DC 0.8 amps at 24V DC Peak Candlepower: 800,000
Hub Size:
3/4-inch NPT pendant, ceiling and wall mount 11/4-inch NPT stanchion mount

Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D Class I, Zones 1 and 2, Group IIB Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class III UL and cUL 1638, UL 1203 and UL 844 Listed 1598A Marine Listed (120V AC and 24V DC only) cUL Listed C22.2 No. 205 NEMA 4X watertight, IP66
2S
1168
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
2S
Step 1 - Order Strobe Type
Cat. # Explosionproof Strobes EXS301A/120 EXS301B/120 EXS301C/120 EXS301G/120 EXS301M/120 EXS301R/120 EXSNM301A/12 48 EXSNM301B/12 48 EXSNM301C/12 48 EXSNM301G/12 48 EXSNM301M/12 48 EXSNM301R/12 48 EXDS301A/24 EXDS301B/24 EXDS301C/24 EXDS301G/24 EXDS301M/24 EXDS301R/24 Voltage 120V AC 120V AC 120V AC 120V AC 120V AC 120V AC 1248V DC 1248V DC 1248V DC 1248V DC 1248V DC 1248V DC 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V 24V DC DC DC DC DC DC Lens Color Amber Blue Clear Green Magenta Red Amber Blue Clear Green Magenta Red Amber Blue Clear Green Magenta Red NEMA Rating 3R 3R 3R 3R 3R 3R 3R 3R 3R 3R 3R 3R 3R 3R 3R 3R 3R 3R 4X, 4X, 4X, 4X, 4X, 4X, 4X 4X 4X 4X 4X 4X 4X, 4X, 4X, 4X, 4X, 4X, Marine Marine Marine Marine Marine Marine
Step 2 - Order Mounting Module

Cat. # EVMP2 EV22 and EV87 EV22 EVMJ4 Hub Size /4" 3 /4" 3 /4" 11/4"
3
Mounting Style Pendant Wall Ceiling Stanchion
Diode Polarized Explosionproof Strobes Marine Marine Marine Marine Marine Marine
Class I, Div. 1, 2, Ambient Groups C, D Class II, Class II, Class III, Max. Supply Class I, Zone 1, Class III, Div. 1, Div. 2, Temp. Wire Group II B Groups E, F, G Groups F, G 40C 55C 40C 55C 65C 40C 55C 65C 40C 55C 75C 90C 75C 90C 105C 75C 90C 105C 75C 90C T6 (85C) T5 (100C) T6 (85C) T6 (85C) T6 (85C) T6 (85C) T6 (85C) T6 (85C) T6 (85C) T5 (100C) T4A (120C) T4 (135C) T4A (120C) T4 (135C) T4 (135C) T4A (120C) T4 (135C) T4 (135C) T4A (120C) T4 (135C) T4A (120C) T4 (135C) T4A (120C) T4 (135C) T4 (135C) T4A (120C) T4 (135C) T4 (135C) T4A (120C) T4 (135C)
EXFASC Series Fire Alarm Voltage 24V DC Regulated Full Wave Rectified (Operating Range 1633V DC) (Marine Listed) EXS Series Strobe Light Voltage 120V AC (Marine Listed)
EXSNM Series Strobe Light Voltage 1248V DC (Not Marine Listed)
2S
EXDS Series Strobe 40C Light-Diode Polarized Voltage 24V DC (Marine Listed)
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1169
2S
Dimensions
In Inches:
Wall Mount
Ceiling Mount
2S
Stanchion Mount
Pendant Mount

Type Luminaire Housing with Guard Type Add mounting modules: Pendant Ceiling Wall Stanchion lbs. 11.0 lbs. 1.0 1.0 4.5 2.5
1170
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Explosionproof Rotating Beacons HAZARDGARD Series
UL and cUL Listed Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups C, D Cl. I, Zone 1 and 2, Group IIB NEMA 4X; IP66 Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Class III
2S
Cooper Crouse-Hinds HazardGard EXR Series Explosionproof Rotating Beacons are designed for installation in hazardous locations, such as manufacturing plants, heavy industrial facilities, refineries, chemical, petrochemical, pharmaceutical and off-shore drilling platforms. The units are UL Listed for Type 3R, 4X and marine installations. The rotating beacons are available for pendant, wall, stanchion and ceiling mounts, and come in six different globe colors. The EXDR Series Explosionproof Rotating Beacon is diode polarized for use in standard 2428V DC electrical circuits or in electrically supervised circuits. Electrically supervised circuits are typically used in life-safety or security applications. Under normal operation in an electrically supervised circuit, the diode is reversed biased, meaning it blocks voltage from being applied to the rotating beacon and prevents it from lighting. When a warning detecting device is activated, the diodes polarity is reversed through a circuit panel. The diode becomes forward biased, allowing voltage to the device and activating the rotating beacon.
Applications:
Security alert Equipment obstruction warning Obstacle warning Status indication of a process Areas under construction Supplement audible signaling or off limits

Body, mounting modules and guardCopper-free aluminum GlobeHeat and impact-resistant glass GasketsSilicone External hardwareStainless steel Internal componentsSolid-state electronics in a moisture-resistant and heat-dissipating epoxy Epoxy powder coated for corrosion resistance
Typical Industries:
Utility gas plants Pharmaceutical plants Wastewater treatment plants Refineries Chemical plants Mining
Ratings:
120V AC (EXR) and 2428V DC (EXDR) Operating Current: 0.382 amps at 120V AC 0.8 amps at 2428V DC Peak Candlepower: 3328 (EXR) 2838 (EXDR)

Powerful halogen rotating beacon emits bright light to provide critical visual warning Available in pendant, wall, stanchion and ceiling mount Available in six different globe colorsamber, blue, clear, green, magenta and red Beacon produces 75 rotations per minute Factory sealedno external seals required Quick connectstrobe fixture threads onto mounting module for easy installation
Hub Size:
2S

Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class I, Zones 1 & 2, Group IIB Class III UL and cUL 1638, UL 1203 and UL 844 Listed 1598A Marine Listed NEMA 4X watertight, IP66
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1171
2S
Step 1 - Order Rotating Beacon Type
Cat. # Voltage Explosionproof Rotating Beacons EXR301A/120 EXR301B/120 EXR301C/120 EXR301G/120 EXR301M/120 EXR301R/120 120V 120V 120V 120V 120V 120V AC AC AC AC AC AC Lens Color Amber Blue Clear Green Magenta Red NEMA Rating 3R, 3R, 3R, 3R, 3R, 3R, 3R, 3R, 3R, 3R, 3R, 3R, 4X, 4X, 4X, 4X, 4X, 4X, 4X, 4X, 4X, 4X, 4X, 4X, Marine Marine Marine Marine Marine Marine Marine Marine Marine Marine Marine Marine

Cat. # EVMP2 EV22 & EV87 EV22 EVMJ4 Hub Size Mounting Style /4" /4" 3 /4" 11/4"
3 3
Pendant Wall Ceiling Stanchion
Diode Polarized Explosionproof Rotating Beacons EXDR301A/24 28 2428V DC Amber EXDR301B/24 28 2428V DC Blue EXDR301C/24 28 2428V DC Clear EXDR301G/24 28 2428V DC Green EXDR301M/24 28 2428V DC Magenta EXDR301R/24 28 2428V DC Red

Ambient Max. Temp. 40C 55C 65C 40C 55C 65C Class I, Div. 1, 2, Groups C, D Class I, Zone 1, Group IIB T6 (85C) T5 (100C) T5 (100C) T6 (85C) T6 (85C) T6 (85C) Class II, Class III, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G T4A (120C) T4 (135C) T4 (135C) T4A (120C) T4 (135C) T4 (135C) Class II, Class III, Div. 2, Groups F, G T4A (120C) T4 (135C) T4 (135C) T4A (120C) T4 (135C) T4 (135C)
Description EXR Series Rotating Beacon Voltage 120V AC
Supply Wire 75C 90C 105C 75C 90C 105C
EXR Series Rotating BeaconDiode Polarized Voltage 2428V DC
2S
1172
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
2S
Dimensions
In Inches:
Wall Mount
Ceiling Mount
2S
Stanchion Mount
Pendant Mount

Type Luminaire Housing with Guard Type Add mounting modules: Pendant Ceiling Wall Stanchion lbs. 11.0 lbs. 1.0 1.0 4.5 2.5
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1173
2S
2S
1174
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Steady-On Beacons
Hazardous
Description Steady-On Beacons - MEDC Series
FB4 FB11 UL FB12 UL FB15 FL4 SM87 LU3 SM87 LU1
3S
Page No.
see pages 11771178 see pages 1179, 1181 see pages 1179, 1181 see pages 1180, 1182 see pages 11771178 see pages 11831184 see pages 11831184 see pages 11851187 see pages 11881189
Steady-On Beacons - HazardGard EX Series

EXSO, EXDSO
Steady-On Beacons - Compact Fluorescent

VF
3S
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1175
3S
Steady-On Beacons
MEDC Series
Cl. I, Div. 1 (FB4 & FL4) Cl. I, Div. 2 (FB11, FB12 & FB15) Cl. I, Zone 1
NEMA 4X IP66 & IP67
FB15 Direct Mount (with wire guard)
FB15 Pipe Mount (with cast guard)
The units are UL Listed for Type 3R, 4X and marine installations. The steady-on beacons are available for pendant, wall, stanchion and ceiling mounts, and come in six different globe colors. Typical industrial and commercial applications include food processing plants, refineries, mines, tankers, laboratories, sewage treatment plants, off-shore oil rigs, water and filtration plants and chemical plants. The diode polarized steady-on beacon is used in electrically supervised circuitry for life-safety or security applications.

Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D Class I, Zone 1 & 2, Group IIB Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class III UL and cUL 1638, UL 1203 and UL 844 Listed 1598A Marine Listed NEMA 4X watertight, IP66
Applications:
Safety lighting Continuous source to communicate Obstacle warning Exit or entrance lights For identifying the location of safety equipment such as showers or emergency telephones
3S
Typical Industries:
Chemical plants Storage handling Dust conveyor systems Energy exploration Textile mills Flour and feed mills
1176
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Steady-On Beacons
MEDC Series
NEMA 4X IP66 & IP67
3S
FB4
100 Watt Steady Incandescent Light - Explosionproof

Certification UL Listed for: cULus, ATEX Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D Class I, Zone 1, AExd IIB T4
Certified Ambient Temperature 67F to +131F 55C to +55C Ingress Protection Material Entries Weight Options: NEMA 4X & 6 IP66 & 67 Alloy Up to 3 1/ 2" or 2 3/ 4" NPT 13lb/6.4kg Body & lens color, lens guard, certification, voltage 120V AC only Cat. # FB4EUL8U1N100B1N1G Standard Product Configuration Marine grade alloy, 120V AC, 100W bulb (not included) blue lens, lens guard, no labels, gray finish
Certification UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D
FL4
1339 Watt Steady Fluorescent LightExplosionproof

Certification UL Listed for: UL, ATEX Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D Class I, Zone 1, AExd IIC T5
Certified Ambient Temperature 67F to +158F 55C to +70C Ingress Protection Material Entries Weight Options: NEMA 4X & 6 IP66 & 67 Alloy Up to 3 1/ 2" NPT or 2 3/ 4" NPT 14.5lb/6.6kg Body & lens color, lens guard, certification, voltages 24V DC, 120V, 240V AC Cat. # FL4BUL8U2M3M13R1N1RZ Standard Product Configuration Marine grade alloy, 24V DC, 2 x " NPT entries, 13W tube (not included), red lens, lens guard, red finish, one certified plug
Certification UL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D
3S
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1177
3S
Steady-On Beacons
MEDC Series
NEMA 4X IP66 & IP67
SpecificationFL4 and FB4 Units

Certification: UL Listed for USA and Canada Hazardous locations: Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D Class I, Zone 1, AExd IIB T4/T5 UL Listing No. E187894 Ordinary locations: Visual-Signal Device (FL4 only). UL Listing No. S8128. ATEX approved: Exd IIC Certificate No. Baseefa 02ATEX0224X LM25TF Marine Grade Alloy body Grade 316 ANC48 Stainless Steel body Toughened Wellglass FL4: Up to 3 x 13 Watt PL compact fluorescent lamps FB4: 100 watt GLS incandescent lamps. E27 holder as standard Gray epoxy paint finish as standard or to customer's specification FL4: 24V DC, 120V AC, 240V AC 10% 50/60hz. FB4: 120V AC 10% 50/60hz. FL4: 1417lb/6.57.9kg (add 19lb/8.4kg for stainless steel) FB4: 13lb/6.4 kg
Material:
Models:
FL4 Lamp Details

Unit Type FL4 DC FL4 AC Lamp Type Osram Dulux D/E 13W Philips PLC 13W Osram Dulux D 13W Lamp Ref. DD/E 13/XX PLC 13 P4 DD 13 Holder Type G24q-1 G24q-1 G24d-1
Finish: Voltage: Weight:
Philips PLC 13W PLC 13 G24d-1 Osram Color XX = (21 = Cool white) ( 31 = Warm white) (41 = Interna)
Temperature Ratings
Type FL4 FB4 Voltage/Wattage DC units AC units 60W 100W Lamp Ref. DD/E 13/XX PLC 13 P4 DD 13 PLC 13 Max. Amb. 55C 55C 55C 55C
Certified FL4: 4F to +131F (20C to + 55C) Temperature: FB4: 67F to +131F (55C to + 55C) Ingress Protection: Lamps: Terminals: Entries: NEMA 4X & 6 IP66 & IP67 Units are supplied without lamps 8 off suitable for up to 8 AWG conductor size Up to 3 1/ 2" NPT or 2 3/ 4" NPT
3S
1178
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Steady-On Beacons
MEDC Series
NEMA 4X IP66 & IP67
3S
FB11 UL
10 Watt Steady Incandescent LightHazardous Locations

Certification UL Listed for: cULus, ATEX Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D Class I, Zone 1, AExd IIB T4/T5 67F to +131F 55C to +55C NEMA 4X & 6 IP66 & 67 Corrosion-free GRP Up to 2 1/2" NPT, M20 6.2lb/2.8kg Body & lens color, lens guard, certification, voltage 24, 48V DC, 110120V AC
Certified Ambient Temperature Ingress Protection Material Entries Weight Options
Certification ATEX UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D
Ordering Code 32500004 32500028 32500029
Cat. # FB11B02410RNBNNN FB11UL02410GNBNNR FB11UL11010GNBNNR
Standard Product Configuration 24V DC, 10W bulb, red lens, mounting bracket, natural black finish 10W incandescent beacon, 24V DC, green lens, no lens guard, 2 1/2 NPT entries, painted red enclosure 10W incandescent beacon, 110V AC, green lens, no lens guard, 2 1/2 NPT, painted red enclosure
FB12 UL
60W/100W Steady Incandescent LightHazardous Locations

Certification UL Listed for: Certified Ambient Temperature Ingress Protection Material Entries Weight Options cULus, ATEX Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D Class I, Zone 1, AExd IIB T4/T5 67F to +131F 55C to +55C NEMA 4X & 6 IP66 & 67 Corrosion-free GRP Up to 2 1/ 2" NPT, M20 2.6lb/1.2kg Body & lens color, lens guard, certification, voltage 120V AC Cat. # FB12UL12060CNBNNN FB12UL12060GNBNNR FB12UL02460GNBNNR FB12UL120100GNBNNR Standard Product Configuration 120V AC, 60W bulb, clear lens, mounting bracket, no labels, natural black finish 60W incandescent beacon, 120V AC, green lens, no lens guard, 2 1/ 2 NPT entries in a painted red enclosure 60W incandescent beacon, 24V DC, green lens, no lens guard, 2 1/ 2 NPT entries, painted red enclosure 100W incandescent beacon, 24V DC, green lens, no lens guard, 2 1/ 2 NPT entries, painted red enclosure
3S
Certification UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D
Ordering Code 326023 32600035 32600036 32600037
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1179
3S
Steady-On Beacons
MEDC Series
NEMA 4X IP66 & IP67
FB15
100W Steady Incandescent LightHazardous & Ordinary Locations

Certification UL Listed for: cULus, ATEX Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class I, Zone 1, AExd IIC T3/T4 Certified Ambient Temperature Ingress Protection Material Entries Weight Options 67F to +158F 55C to +70C NEMA 4X & 6 IP66 & 67 Corrosion-free GRP Up to 3 x 1/2" NPT or 3 x 3/4" NPT 68lb/2.63.6kg Body & lens color, lens guard, lamp wattage, unit fixing, mounting method, voltages 1248V DC, 110254V AC Cat. # FB15UL120100GNANR FB15UL120100ANPNN FB15UL120100RNPNN FB15UL120100GNPNN FB15UL120100CNPNN FB15UL120100BNPNN FB15UL024100ANPNN FB15UL024100RNPNN FB15UL024100GNPNN FB15UL024100CNPNN FB15UL024100BNPNN Standard Product Configuration 120V AC, 100W bulb, green lens, mounting bracket, no labels, red finish 100W incandescent beacon, 120V AC, amber lens, no lens guard, pipe mounting, 1 x 3/4 NPT entry, natural black enclosure 100W incandescent beacon, 120V AC, red lens, no lens guard, pipe mounting, 1 x 3/4 NPT entry, natural black enclosure 100W incandescent beacon, 120V AC, green lens, no lens guard, pipe mounting, 1 x 3/4 NPT entry, natural black enclosure 100W incandescent beacon, 120V AC, clear lens, no lens guard, pipe mounting, 1 x 3/4 NPT entry, natural black enclosure 100W incandescent beacon, 120V AC, blue lens, no lens guard, pipe mounting, 1 x 3/4 NPT entry, natural black enclosure 100W incandescent beacon, 24V DC, amber lens, no lens guard, pipe mounting, 1 x 3/4 NPT entry, natural black enclosure 100W incandescent beacon, 24V DC, red lens, no lens guard, pipe mounting, 1 x 3/4 NPT entry, natural black enclosure 100W incandescent beacon, 24V DC, green lens, no lens guard, pipe mounting, 1 x 3/4 NPT entry, natural black enclosure 100W incandescent beacon, 24V DC, clear lens, no lens guard, pipe mounting, 1 x 3/4 NPT entry, natural black enclosure 100W incandescent beacon, 24V DC, blue lens, no lens guard, pipe mounting, 1 x 3/4 NPT entry, natural black enclosure
Certification UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D
Ordering Code 47600001 47600020 47600021 47600022 47600023 47600024 47600025 47600026 47600027 47600028 47600029
3S
UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D
1180
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Steady-On Beacons
MEDC Series
NEMA 4X IP66 & IP67
3S
SpecificationFB11 and FB12 Units

Models: Certification: FB11 & FB12Incandescent UL Listed for USA and Canada Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D Class I, Zone 1, AExd IIB T4/T5 UL listing No. E187894 ATEX approved: CENELEC EN50014 and EN50018 FB11: Cert. No. 99 ATEX 2195X FB12: Cert. No. 99 ATEX 2196 FB11: 24, 48V DC 110, 220, 240, 250V AC FB12: 120V AC FB11: 10W incandescent fitted as standard FB12: 60W or 100W incandescent fitted as standard Body: Glass reinforced polyester Lens: Glass Cover screws + backstrap: stainless steel 316 Finish: Terminals: Labels: Entries: Certified Temperature: Natural black or painted to customer specification FB11: 6 x 14 AWG FB12: 6 x 10 AWG Duty/Tag Label optional 2 x 1/2" NPT FB11: 67F to +131F (55C to +55C) T4 67F to +104F (55C to +40C) T5. FB12: 67F to +131F (55C to +55C) T4 67F to +104F (55C to +40C) T5. FB11: 6.2lb / 2.8kg. FB12: 16.7lb / 7.6kg. Ingress Protection: NEMA 4X & 6, IP66 & IP67
Voltage:
Incandescent:
Weight:
Material:
4S
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1181
3S
Steady-On Beacons
MEDC Series
NEMA 4X IP66 & IP67
SpecificationFB15 Unit
Certification: UL Listed for USA and Canada: Hazardous locations Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class I, Zone 1, AExd IIC T3/T4 UL listing No. E187894 Ordinary locations: Visual Signal Device UL listing No. S8128 CENELEC/ATEX approved CENELEC EN50014 & EN50018 ATEX Cert. No. Baseefa 04ATEX0009X Material: Body: Glass reinforced polyester Lens: Glass Backstrap: Stainless steel 316 Wire Guard (optional): Stainless steel wire Cast Guard (optional): Aluminium LM25M Natural black or epoxy painted to customer specification 24, 48V DC 110, 120, 230, 240, 254V AC 60W or 100W GLS incandescent
Finish: Voltage: Lamp Type: AC 230
Electrical Ratings:
Voltage Current (A) 60W lamp Current (A) 100W lamp DC 24 48 110 120 240 254 0.24 0.39 2.5 .67 0.55 0.50 0.26 0.25 4.2 .73 0.91 0.83 0.43 0.42
Lamp Holder: E27 as standard Certified 60W: 67F to +131F (55C to +55C) T4 67F to +158F (55C to +70C) T3 Temperature: 100W: 67F to +104F (55C to +40C) T4 Weight: Ingress Protection: Entries: Pipe mount: 5.75lb/2.6kg; Direct mount: 6.5lb/3.0kg NEMA 4X & 6, IP66 & IP67 Supplied as 2 x M20, up to 3 x M20 or 3 x M25 Supplied as 2 x 1/2" NPT (direct mount) or 3/4" (pipe mount) as standard Other options available: Up to 3 x 1/2" NPT or 3 x 3/4" NPT (direct mount); 1 /2" NPT (pipe mount)contact sales office to order Direct mount: 12 x 14AWG Pipe mount: 8 x 14AWG Tag/duty label option
Terminals: Labels:
The following code is designed to help in the selection of the correct unit. Build up the reference number by inserting the code for each component into the appropriate box. Standard products available for immediate shipping - contact sales office for details.
3S
1182
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Steady-On Beacons
MEDC Series
NEMA 4X IP66 & IP67
3S
SM87 LU3
10 Watt Steady Incandescent LightExplosionproof

Certification UL Listed for: cULus, CSA, ATEX Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D Class I, Zone 1, AExd IIB
Certified Ambient Temperature 67F to +131F 55C to +55C Ingress Protection Material Entries Weight Options NEMA 4X & 6 IP66 & 67 Alloy 2 x 1/2" or 3/4" NPT, 20mm, 25mm 4.4lb/2.0kg Body & lens color, lens guard, certification, voltages 1248V DC, 110V254V AC Cat. # SM87LU3AUL024RN3R3LNR SM87LU3AB024GN1T1BNR SM87LU3AUL024GN3T3BNR Standard Product Configuration 24V DC, red lens, 2 x 1/2" NPT entries, no labels, red finish Exd, IIC, T4/T6 incandescent beacon, 24V DC, green lens, no lens guard, 2 x M20 cable entries, painted red enclosure 24V DC, green lens, 10W incandescent bulb, marine grade alloy, red finish
Certification UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D ATEX UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D
Ordering Code 762311 46200122 46200096
SM87 LU1
10 Watt Steady Fluorescent LightExplosionproof

Certification UL Listed for: cULus, ATEX Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D Class I, Zone 1, AExd IIB
Certified Ambient Temperature 67F to +131F 55C to +55C Ingress Protection Material Entries Weight Options NEMA 4X & 6 IP66 & 67 Alloy 2 x 1/2" or 3/4" NPT, 20mm, 25mm 4.4lb/2.0kg Body & lens color, lens guard, certification, voltages 1248V DC, 120V254V AC Cat. # SM87LU1AUL024RN4T4BNR SM87LU1AUL024GN4T4BNR SM87LU1AB024GN1T1BNR Standard Product Configuration 24V DC, red lens, 2 x 3/4" NPT entries, no labels, red finish 24V DC, green lens, 10W fluorescent bulb, marine grade alloy, red finish Exd, IIC, T4/T6 fluorescent beacon, 24V DC, green lens, no lens guard, 2 x M20 cable entries, painted red enclosure
Certification UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D ATEX
Ordering Code 46200054 46200052 46200121
3S
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1183
3S
Steady-On Beacons
MEDC Series
NEMA 4X IP66 & IP67
SpecificationSM87LU1/SM87LU3 Units
Models: Certification: SM87 LU1: Fluorescent SM87 LU3: Incandescent UL Listed for USA and Canada: Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D and Class I, Zone 1. Listing No: E187894. CSA Certified for Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Group D Certificate No. 96406 ATEX approved: Exd IIC T3-T6 (model dependent) Certificate No. 03ATEX0222X NEMA 4X and 6 IP66 & IP67 Marine Grade Aluminium Alloy LM25TF with glass lens Epoxy paint finish as standard or to customer's specification 10 Watt tube light output 600 Lumens (240V & 254V AC versions) 5 Watt tube max. light output 250 Lumens (DC versions)
Ingress Protection: Material: Finish: Fluorescent:
Incandescent: Single incandescent fitted as standard 10 watts. Others may be available, please contact MEDC with your requirements Weight: Certified Temperature: Voltage: Terminals: Entries: 4.4lb/2.0kg approx. SM87LU1/3 67F to +131F 55C to +55C 12, 24, 48V DC, 110V (LU3 only), 220V, 240V, 254V AC 50Hz as standard. 60Hz available if required SM87: 4 off for up to 14 AWG cable SM87LU1& 3: 2 x 1/2" or 3/4" NPT, 20mm, 25mm
Power LU1 7 Watts for 12V DC, 24V DC, 48V DC, 220V AC Consumption: 14 Watts for 240V AC, 15 Watts for 254V AC LU3 Single incandescent fitted as standard 10W. Other options are availableplease contact MEDC with your requirements
3S
1184
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
HAZARDGARD
Steady-On Beacons
Cooper Crouse-Hinds HazardGard EXSO and EXDSO (Diode Polarized) Series Explosionproof Steady-On Beacons are designed for installation in hazardous locations where a visual signal is required for tough environmental conditions involving corrosives, water, dust and extreme temperature. The units are UL Listed for Type 3R, 4X and marine installations. The steady-on beacons are available for pendant, wall, stanchion and ceiling mounts, and come in six different globe colors. Typical industrial and commercial applications include food processing plants, refineries, mines, tankers, laboratories, sewage treatment plants, off-shore oil rigs, water and filtration plants and chemical plants. The diode polarized steady-on beacon is used in electrically supervised circuitry for life-safety or security applications.
Division 1, Zone 1
3S
Applications:
Safety lighting Exit or entrance lights Obstacle warning Continuous source to communicate For identifying the location of safety equipment such as showers or emergency telephones

Class I, Division 1, Groups C, D Class I, Zones 1 & 2, Group IIB Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class III UL and cUL 1638, UL 1203 and UL 844 Listed 1598A Marine Listed (120V AC and 24V DC only) cUL Listed C22.2 No. 205 NEMA 4X watertight, IP66
Typical Industries:
Chemical plants Storage handling Dust conveyor systems Energy exploration Textile mills Flour and feed mills


Powerful halogen light source for clear visual indication Available in six different globe colorsamber, blue, clear, green, magenta and red Factory sealedno external seals required Quick connectSteady-on beacon fixture threads onto mounting module for easy installation Small compact sizeceiling mount is 133/4-inch long Available in pendant, wall, stanchion and ceiling mount
Ratings:
120V AC (EXR) and 2428V DC (EXDR) Operating Current: 0.35 amps at 120V AC (EXSO); 0.8 amps at 2428V DC (EXDSO, diode polarized) Peak Candlepower: 3328
Hub Size:
3S
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1185
3S
HAZARDGARD
Steady-On Beacons
Division 1, Zone 1
Step 1 - Order Rotating Beacon Type
Cat. # Voltage Explosionproof Steady-On Beacons EXSO301A/120 EXSO301B/120 EXSO301C/120 EXSO301G/120 EXSO301M/120 EXSO301R/120 EXDSO301A/24 28 EXDSO301B/24 28 EXDSO301C/24 28 EXDSO301G/24 28 EXDSO301M/24 28 EXDSO301R/24 28 120V AC 120V AC 120V AC 120V AC 120V AC 120V AC 2428V DC 2428V DC 2428V DC 2428V DC 2428V DC 2428V DC Lens Color Amber Blue Clear Green Magenta Red Amber Blue Clear Green Magenta Red NEMA Rating 3R, 4X, Marine 3R, 4X, Marine 3R, 4X, Marine 3R, 4X, Marine 3R, 4X, Marine 3R, 4X, Marine 3R, 4X, Marine 3R, 4X, Marine 3R, 4X, Marine 3R, 4X, Marine 3R, 4X, Marine 3R, 4X, Marine

Cat. # Hub Size Mounting Style Pendant Wall Ceiling Stanchion
3 EVMP2 /4" EV22 & EV87 3/4"
EV22 EVMJ4
/4"
1
1 /4"
Diode Polarized Explosionproof Steady-On Beacons

Class I, Div. 1, 2, Class II, Ambient Groups C, D, Class III, Max. Supply Class I, Zone 1, Div. 1, Temp. Wire Group IIB Groups E, F, G 40C 55C 65C 75C 90C 105C 75C 90C 105C T6 (85C) T5 (100C) T5 (100C) T6 (85C) T6 (85C) T6 (85C) T4A (120C) T4 (135C) T4 (135C) T4A (120C) T4 (135C) T4 (135C) Class II, Class III, Div. 2, Groups F, G T4A (120C) T4 (135C) T4 (135C) T4A (120C) T4 (135C) T4 (135C)
Description EXSO Series Steady-On Beacon Voltage 120V AC
EXDSO Series Steady-On BeaconDiode Polarized Voltage 2428V DC 40C 55C 65C
3S
1186
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
HAZARDGARD
Steady-On Beacons
Dimensions
In Inches:
Division 1, Zone 1
3S
Wall Mount
Ceiling Mount
3S
Stanchion Mount
Pendant Mount

Description Luminaire Housing with Guard Add mounting modules: Pendant Ceiling Wall Stanchion Weight 11.0 lbs. 1.0 1.0 4.5 2.5 lbs. lbs. lbs. lbs.
1187
3S
VF "Steady On" Beacon

Compact Fluorescent Warning and Visual Indication Light
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 2, Groups IIC Wet Locations 3, 3R
Green Safety Shower Blue Emergency Telephones Red Danger Amber Warning Visual Signal
Applications:
VF series "Steady On" fluorescent beacons are used indoors or outdoors: Where the energy efficiency and long life of compact fluorescent lamps are desired For continuous signaling requirements Where a continuous "Steady-On" fluorescent light signal is required Where ambient noise makes audible signals difficult to hear As visual signals or warning lights on loading docks; at obstructions, exits or entrances For identifying the location of safety equipment such as safety showers or emergency telephones For call signals For status indication or area lighting on offshore rigs, mines, refineries etc. In locations which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors or gases and where dampness or corrosion are present To identify a potentially dangerous obstacle As a continuous source to warn or communicate Typical Applications are: Green - Identify safety shower locations Blue - Identify emergency telephones Amber - Caution signal Red - Danger signal Red & Amber - Emergency situations Blue & Red - Security or malfunctioning equipment Green & Clear - Equipment end of cycle

NEC and CEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class I, Zone 2 UL Standards: 844 1598 Luminaires CSA Standards: C22.2 No. 137
Features:
Extremely energy-efficient, only 18 watt (2-9 watt compact fluorescent lamps) Packs considerable punch for ample visibility even in harsh enviroments Compact size and light weight allow adaptation and easy installation in many industrial applications Cast copper-free aluminum (less than 0.4 of 1% copper) construction and epoxy powder finish provide excellent resistance to corrosion Variety of mounting arrangements to suit any lighting layout pendant, ceiling, wall bracket, angle stanchion Glass globes are internally fluted and stippled to enhance visibility; exteriors are smooth to shed dust Grounding wire for safety
Standard Materials:
Bodies and guards copper-free aluminum (less than 0.4 of 1%) Globes glass
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum powder epoxy finish
Electrical Ratings:
Input voltage 120 VAC, 60 hertz Wattages: 18W (Two 9W lamps)
3S
Style Pendant Wall Ceiling Stanchion Cat. # - by Globe Color Red Amber VFA222GRP VFHBF222GRP VFHF222GRP VFHA422GRP VFA222GAP VFHBF222GAP VFHF222GAP VFHA422GAP Green VFA222GGP VFHBF222GGP VFHF222GGP VFHA422GGP Blue VFA222GBP VFHBF222GBP VFHF222GBP VFHA422GBP Clear VFA222GP VFHBF222GP VFHF222GP VFHA422GP
Weights:
Luminaire Type VFA VFHF VFHBF 2-Lamp Luminaire With Globe & Guard (lbs.) 5 51/4 71/2

Style 1&2 Lamp 9W Class I, Div. 2 T3B Max. Ambient 40C Supply Wire C 75C Minimum Operating 4C (25F)
1188
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
VF "Steady On" Beacon

Compact Fluorescent Warning and Visual Indication Light
Dimensions
In Inches:
Pendant
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. I, Zone 2, Groups IIC Wet Locations 3, 3R
Green Safety Shower Blue Emergency Telephones Red Danger Amber Warning Visual Signal
3S
Wall
Stanchion
VFA
VFHBF Ceiling
VFHA
VFHF
3S
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1189
3S
3S
1190
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Status Lights
Hazardous
Description Status Lights - MEDC Series
FB12 SL SM87 SL XB11 SLUL XB12 SL
4S
Page No.
see see see see
11921195 11921195 11921195 11921195
4S
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1191
4S
Status Lights
MEDC Series
Explosionproof Weatherproof
XB12 SL
SM87 SL
NOTE: Units shown are for representation only. Other variations are available.

4wire monitored connection for supervisory circuits* Marine grade alloy or GRP Pre-wired to customers requirements
The most rugged and reliable status lights for harsh and hazardous applications. Available as Xenon, incandescent and fluorescent beacons/strobes. The SM87 SL range is manufactured in marine grade alloy and the XB12 SL in corrosion-free GRP to provide a wide range of status lights to suit your requirements. All units can be supplied as 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5 stacks.

UL Listed for USA and Canada* Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class I, Zone 1, AExd IIB T6 CSA certified* ATEX approved Xenon, fluorescent, incandescent* NEMA 4X & 6, IP66 & 67 Certified temperature 67F to +131F* 55C to +55C
Applications:
Process status Messaging Alert or emergency condition indication
4S
Typical Industries:
Offshore & onshore Energy exploration & transmission Refining Chemical & petrochemical Pharmaceutical
*Depending on model.
1192
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Status Lights
MEDC Series
SM87 SL
4S
Xenon, Incandescent & Fluorescent Status LightsExplosionproof

Certification UL Listed for: Certified Ambient Temperature Ingress Protection Material Entries Max. No. of Ways Options cULus, CSA, ATEX Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D Class I, Zone 1, AExd IIB T4 67F to +158F 55C to +70C NEMA 4X & 6 IP66 & 67 Alloy Up to 1 x 1/2" NPT 4 Body & lens color, certification, voltages 2448V DC, 110254V AC Ordering Code 26200043 26200055 Cat. # SM87SL3 SM87SL2 Standard Product Configuration Explosion protected, three stack, one 1/2" NPT entry on bottom, no lens guards, xenon strobe with red, green, and clear lens Xenon status lamp, two stack 5 joule beacons interconnected on a painted red stainless steel baseplate, one red and one green lens color, 1/2" NPT entry in the bottom unit for customer connection
Certification UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D
Voltage 24V DC 24V DC
24V DC
26200056
Incandescent status lamp, two stack 40 watt beacons interconnected on SM87SL2 a painted red stainless steel baseplate, one red and one green lens color, 1/2" NPT entry in the bottom unit for customer connection SM87SL2 Fluorescent status lamp, two stack 5 watt beacons interconnected on a painted red stainless steel baseplate, one red and one green lens color, 1 /2" NPT entry in the bottom unit for customer connection Xenon status lamp, two stack 5 joule beacons interconnected on a painted red stainless steel baseplate, one red and one green lens color, 1/2" NPT entry in the bottom unit for customer connection Xenon status lamp, three stack 5 joule beacons interconnected on a painted red stainless steel baseplate, one red, one amber and one green lens color, 1/2" NPT entry in the bottom unit for customer connection
24V DC
26200057
UL, cUL Listed, Class I, 110V AC Div. 1, Groups C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D 24V DC
26200058
SM87SL2
26200059
SM87SL3
24VDC
26200060
Incandescent status lamp, three stack 40 watt beacons interconnected on SM87SL3 a painted red stainless steel baseplate, one red, one amber and one green lens color, 1/2" NPT entry in the bottom unit for customer connection SM87SL3 Fluorescent status lamp, three stack 5 watt beacons interconnected on a painted red stainless steel baseplate, one red, one amber and one green lens color, 1/2" NPT entry in the bottom unit for customer connection Xenon status lamp, three stack 5 joule beacons interconnected on a painted red stainless steel baseplate, one red, one amber and one green lens color, 1/2" NPT entry in the bottom unit for customer connection
24V DC
26200061
UL, cUL Listed, Class I, 110V AC Div. 1, Groups C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, 110V AC Div. 1, Groups C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, 220V AC Div. 1, Groups C, D
26200062
SM87SL3
4S
26200066
Incandescent status lamp, three stack 40 watt beacons interconnected on SM87SL3 a painted red stainless steel baseplate, one red, one amber and one green lens color, 1/2" NPT entry in the bottom unit for customer connection SM87SL3 Fluorescent status lamp, three stack 5 watt beacons interconnected on a painted red stainless steel baseplate, one red, one amber and one green lens color, 1/2" NPT entry in the bottom unit for customer connection
26200063
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1193
4S
Status Lights
MEDC Series
XB11 SLUL
Xenon Strobe & Incandescent Status LightsHazardous Locations

Certification UL Listed for: Certified Ambient Temperature Ingress Protection Material Entries Max. No. of Ways Options UL, ATEX Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D Class I, Zones 1 & 2, AExd IIB T4 67F to +158F 55C to +70C NEMA 4X & 6 IP66 & 67 Corrosion-free GRP 1 x 1/2" NPT 5 Body & lens color, tag & duty labels Ordering Code 42500005 Cat. # Standard Product Configuration
Explosion protected, 3 stack, one 1/2" NPT entry on bottom, 24V DC, XB11ULSL3 green incandescent on top, yellow xenon flashing in middle, red xenon flashing on bottom, no lens guards, red finish
XB12 SL/FB12 SL
Xenon Strobe & Incandescent Status LightsHazardous Locations

Certification UL Listed for: Certified Ambient Temperature Ingress Protection Material Entries Max. No. of Ways Options UL, ATEX Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D Class I, Zones 1 & 2, AExd IIB T4 67F to +158F 55C to +70C NEMA 4X & 6 IP66 & 67 Corrosion-free GRP 1 x 1/2" NPT 5 Body & lens color, certification, voltages 24V DC, 110254V AC
Cat. # XB12ULSL3
Standard Product Configuration 110V AC, explosion protected, three stack, one 1/2" NPT entries, red xenon flashing on top, amber xenon flashing in middle, clear xenon flashing on bottom; no lens guards, red finish 24V DC xenon status lamp, two stack 21 joule beacons interconnected on a painted red stainless steel baseplate, one red and one green lens color, 1/2" NPT entry in the bottom unit for customer connection 24V DC incandescent status lamp, two stack 60W beacons interconnected on a painted red stainless steel baseplate, one red and one green lens color, 1/2" NPT entry in the bottom unit for customer connection 24V DC xenon status lamp, three stack 21 joule beacons interconnected on a painted red stainless steel baseplate, one red, one amber and one green lens color, 1/2" NPT entry in the bottom unit for customer connection 24V DC incandescent status lamp, three stack 60W beacons interconnected on a painted red stainless steel baseplate, one red, one amber and one green lens color, 1/2" NPT entry in the bottom unit for customer connection
4S
UL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D
42600007
XB12ULSL2
42600008
FB12ULSL2
42600009
XB12ULSL3
42600010
FB12ULSL3
1194
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Status Lights
MEDC Series
4S
SM87 SL Typical four unit assembly. Various options are available.
XB12 SL Typical two unit assembly. Various options are available.
SM87 SL typical three unit assembly
XB11 SL XB12 SL Xenon 21 joules Incandescent 60W 24V DC, 110V, 240V AC (see XB12 data sheet for further information) 120V AC (see FB12 data sheet for further information)
SpecificationSM87SL Unit and XB12SL Unit

Lamp Types SM87 SL Xenon 5 joules maximum Fluorescent 10W or 5W Incandescent 40W maximum 24, 48V DC 110, 120, 240, 254V AC (see SM87 HXB data sheet for further information) 12, 24, 48V DC, 110, 220, 240, 254V AC (see SM87 LU3 data sheet for further information) 12, 24, 48V, 220, 240, 254V AC (see SM87 LU1 data sheet for further information) Red, Amber, Yellow, Green, Blue or Clear UL Listed for USA and Canada Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D, Class I, Zone 1, AExd IIB T6. Listing No. E187894. CSA Certified: Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Group D. Cert. No. 96406. ATEX Approved: Exd IIC T4 (incandesent), Exd IIC T6 (Fluorescent & Xenon) Cert. No. Baseefa 03ATEX0222X CENELEC EN50014, EN50018 Will accept up to 14AWG cable UL Listed for USA and Canada Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D, Class I, Zones 1 & 2, AExd IIB T4/T5 Listing No. E187894 ATEX Approved: Exd IIB T4/T5 Cert. No. 99 ATEX 2196 CENELEC EN50014 and EN50018 Will accept up to 6 off 10AWG cable
Voltage Frequency Xenon Voltages Incandescent Voltages Fluorescent Voltages Lamp Colors
50 Hz as standard. 60 Hz available if required.
4S
Certification
Terminals Wiring Entries Enclosure Lens Finish Ingress Protection Ambient Temp.
NOTE: XB11 SLUL also available.
Standard configuration of internal wiring is to common the negative/neutral connections If individually wired lamps are required, please state requirements Up to 3 x 1/2" or 3/4" NPT LM 25TF Marine Grade Alloy Glass Epoxy paint as standard or to customers specification 13F to 131F (25C to +55C) Class I, Div 1 67F to +131F (55C to +55C) Class I, Zone 1 Natural black or epoxy paint to customers specification NEMA 4X and 6, IP66 & 67 67F to +158F (55C to +70C) 1 x 1/2" NPT GRP
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1195
4S
4S
1196
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Audible Signaling Devices

Hazardous
5S
Description
Speakers and Tone Generators - MEDC Series
DB1 DB3 DB4 DB5 DB12 DB15 DB16 UL
Page No.
see see see see see see see pages pages pages pages pages pages pages 11981209 11981209 11981209 11981209 11981209 11981209 11981209
Speakers and Tone Generators - FlexTone Series

ETH640, ETH840 ETH645, ETH845 ETH655, ETH855
see page 1212 see page 1211 see page 1210 see pages 12161217 see page 1213 see page 1214 see page 1215
Signaling Horns and Bells

ESR ETH W2H WH
5S
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1197
5S
Speakers & Tone Generators

Up to 30 Watts
Loudspeakers and tone generators provide high decibel communication for messaging, alert and evacuation in harsh and hazardous locations. Metallic and non-metallic housings Explosionproof and Class I, Division 2 horns and speakers Mounting brackets that allow a full 180 swivel Products designed for both conduit wiring and/or cable connection (NPT or metric entries available) Selectable tones This range of loudspeakers, intended for use in potentially explosive gas and dust atmospheres, has a power rating of up to 30 Watts and is suitable for use in the harsh environmental conditions found offshore and onshore in the oil, gas and petrochemical industries. The flamepaths, flare and body, are manufactured from a UV stable glass reinforced polyester. Stainless steel screws and mounting stirrup are incorporated to ensure a corrosion-free product.
Applications:
Plant-wide alarm notificiaton Audible process alarms DB16
Typical Industries:
Refineries Chemical plants Oil and gas exploration Marine terminals for transportation & storage

UL Listed for USA and Canada Hazardous locations: Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D* Class I, Zone 1, AExde IIB/IIC T3/T4* Ordinary locations: Signalling Speaker ATEX approved NEMA 4X & 6, IP66 and IP67 Certified temperature: -67F to +104F -50C to +40C

GRP corrosion-free flamepath Up to 112dBA at 30 Watts at 10 feet*
5S
Power tappings via integral transformer Ratcheted swivel mounting stirrup Stainless steel fixtures 100V line or 8 ohm versions available
*Model dependent.
1198
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Up to 30 Watts
5S
DB1
103dB(A) @ 10ft HornExplosionproof

Certification UL Listed for: Certified Ambient Temperature Ingress Protection Material Entries Weight No. of Tones Options: UL, ATEX Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D Class I, Zone 1 13F to +158F 25C to +70C NEMA 4X & 6 IP66 & 67 Alloy Up to 3 x 1/2 " or 3/4" NPT, 20mm, 25mm 7.7lb/3.5kg (model dependent) Multiple tones available Body color, certification, voltages 1248V DC, 110V ACC Output 103dB(A) Up to 96dB(A) @ 10ft Ordering Code 801001 869111 Cat. # DB1BA024A1A3NNNR DB1PULA024D1D2NNNR Standard Product Configuration Choice of 6 tones, red finish
Certification ATEX approved Ex II 2GD UL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D
Two-stage alarms, with 26 tones, 24V DC, alloy, red body color, no tag or duty labels, 2 x 3/4" NPT UL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D Up to 103dB(A) @ 10ft 869115 DB1HPULA024D1D2NNNR entries Sounder, 110V AC, 2 x 1/2" NPT UL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D Up to 96dB(A) @ 10ft 17300108 DB1PULA110C1C3NNNR entries, red painted enclosure
DB3
108dB(A) @ 10ft HornHazardous Locations

Certification UL Listed for: Certified Ambient Temperature Ingress Protection Material Entries Weight No. of Tones Options: cULus, ATEX Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class I, Zones 1 & 2, AExd IIC T4 67F to +158F 55C to +70C NEMA 4X & 6 IP66 & 67 Corrosion-free GRP Up to 2 x 1/2" NPT, 20mm 13.2lb/6.0kg 27 + 5 Programmable Body color, certification, voltages 1248V DC, 110V254V AC
5S
Certification UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D ATEX Ex II 2GD ATEX Ex II 2GD ATEX Ex II 2GD ATEX Ex II 2GD ATEX Ex II 2GD
Body Color Red Red Red Natural Black Natural Black Red Red Red
Voltage 1248V DC 1248V DC 110V AC 1248V DC 240V AC 1248V DC 240V AC 1248V DC
Type* Single Stage Two Stage Single Stage Two Stage Single Stage Two Stage Single Stage Single Stage
Ordering Code 869131 869132 869135 803121 803122 803123 803124 803125
Cat. # DB3UL048N2CNRZ DB3PUL048N2CNRZ DB3UL110N2CNRZ DB3PD048N2BNNZ DB3D240N2BNNZ DB3PD048N2CNRZ DB3D240N2BNRZ DB3D048N2CNRZ
Standard Product Configuration 27 tones, no tag or duty labels, 108 dB(A) output, NEMA 4X & 6, 2 x 1/2" NPT entries with certified plug 27 tones, no tag or duty labels, 2 x M20 entries with one certified plug fitted
*Single Stage 4 wired diode monitored connectionon board diode allows unit to be operated in supervisory mode when monitoring line in reverse polarity.
*Two Stage Switchable unit available in DC versions only either by: (i) Reversing the polarity of the supply, or, (ii) By a 3 wire common +ve system, switching between the ve lines.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1199
5S

Up to 30 Watts
SpecificationDB1 Unit
Certification:
UL Listed for Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D and Class I, Zone 1 UL Listing No. E187688 ATEX Approved: Exd, IIB T3 Cert. No. Baseefa 02ATEX0207 for DB1(P) Cert. No. Baseefa 02ATEX0209 for DB1H(P) LM25 corrosion resistant alloy with stainless steel cover screws ABS flare Epoxy paint finish as standard or to customer's specification DB1P=933dB(A) (863dB(A) for 12V DB1) DB1HP=100 3dB(A) @ 10 feet
Note: Sound level is dependent upon the tone selection.
Material:
Finish: Max. Sound Levels:
Weight: Certified Temperature: Ingress Protection: Tone Selection:
DB1P 7.7lb/3.5kg approx. DB1HP. 12.3lb/5.6kg approx. 13F to +158F 25C to +70C NEMA 4X, IP66 27 user selectable tones
Tone Tone Frequency

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Alt Tones 800/970Hz at 1/4 sec. Sweeping 800/970Hz at 7 Hz Sweeping 800/970Hz at 1 Hz Continuous at 2850 Hz
Tone Tone Frequency

15 16 17 18 554 Hz for 0.1S/440 Hz for 0.1S Int 660 Hz 150 mS on 150 mS off Int 660 Hz 1.8 sec. on 1.8 sec. off Int 660 Hz 6.5 sec. on 13 sec. off Continuous 660 Hz Alt 554/440 Hz at 1 Hz Int 660 Hz at 7/8 Hz Int 2850 Hz 150 mS on 100 mS off Sweep 800970 Hz at 50 Hz Sweep 24002850 Hz at 50 Hz 3x970 Hz pulses 0.5 off, 1.5 off 3x2850z pulses 0.5 on/0.5 off, 1.5 off. Int 3100 Hz 0.3 sec. on 0.7 sec. off
Sweeping 24002850 Hz at 7 Hz 19 Sweeping 24002850 Hz at 1 Hz 20 Slow Whoop Sweep 1200500 Hz at 1 Hz 21 22
Alt Tones 2400/2850Hz at 2 Hz 23 Int Tones of 970 Hz at 1 Hz Alt Tones 800/970Hz at /8 Hz

7
24 25 26 27
Int Tone at 2850 Hz at 1 Hz 970 Hz at 1/4 sec. on 1 sec. off Continuous at 970 Hz
Single Stage
4 wired diode monitored connectionon board diode allows unit to be operated in supervisory mode when monitoring line in reverse polarity.
Two Stage
Switchable unit available in DC versions only either by: (i) Reversing the polarity of the supply, or, (ii) By a 3 wire common +ve system, switching between the ve lines.
5S
Current Consumption:
Voltage 12V 24V 48V 110V
DB1P 125mA 250mA 250mA 60mA
DB1HP 900mA 700mA 200mA
Labels: Entries: Terminals:
Duty and tag labels optional Up to 3 x 1/2" or 3/4" NPT Suitable to accept up to 12 AWG conductor size
1200
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Up to 30 Watts
5S
Certification:
UL Listed for USA and Canada Hazardous locations: Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class I, Zones 1 & 2, AExd IIC T4 UL Listing No. E203310 Ordinary locations: Audible Signal Device UL Listing No. S8116 ATEX approved: CENELEC EN50014, 18, 19 Cert. No. BAS00ATEX2097X, Exd IIC Cert. No. BAS00ATEX2098X, Exde IIC Zones 1 & 2 Body & horn in anti-static, UV stable, glass reinforced polyester Swivel bracket and captive cover screws in stainless steel Body and horn, natural black or epoxy paint coated to clients color requirements DB3 105 3dB(A) Typical at 10 feet (tone dependent) Integral volume control *Nominal Output (dBa) 83 95 98 101 102 104 105 Input Current (mA) 50 100 150 200 250 300 350
Material:
Finish: Sound Output: Volume Control:
Terminals: Mounting: Labels: Cable Entries: Tone Selection: Horn/Strobe Unit:
4 x 14 AWG (AC), 6 x 14 AWG (DC) Stainless steel bracket with rachet facility Duty and tag labels optional UP TO 2 /2" NPT
1
*Output measured with 24V input voltage. Tone set to 970Hz continuous.
Weight: Certified Temperature: Ingress Protection: Voltage: Current Consumption:
13.2lb/6.0kg approx. 67F to +158F 55C to +70C NEMA 4X & 6, IP66 & 67 Up to 48V DC Up to 254V AC V 12V DC 24V DC 48V DC 110V AC 120V AC 220V AC 230V AC 240V AC 254V AC I 760mA 380mA 190mA 135mA 124mA 68mA 65mA 62mA 62mA
27 user selectable tones available The DB3 may be combined with an MEDC strobe to create a combined audio/visual alarm. Contact MEDC for price and specification.
Two Stage Unit: DB3P Switchable between any two tones by either:
(i) Reversing the polarity of the supply, or (ii) by a 3 wire common +ve system, switching between the two ve lines. Note: Two stage unit available in DC versions only.
5S
3 & 4 Tone Unit:
Remote 3 & 4 tone unit availablecontact sales office for details.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1201
5S

Up to 30 Watts
DB4
8-25 Watt SpeakerHazardous Locations

Certification UL Listed for: Certified Ambient Temperature cULus, ATEX Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class I, Zone 1, AExd IIC T4 67F to +158F 55C to +70C
Ingress Protection NEMA 4X & 6 IP66 & 67 Material Output Entries Weight Options Certification UL, cUL Listed Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, cUL Listed Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D ATEX Approved ExII 1G ATEX Approved ExII 1G Power 25W 25W 15W 25W Corrosion-free GRP 97 dB(A) at 1W at 10 feet 109 dB(A) at 25W at 10 feet Up to 2 x 1/2" NPT, 20mm 11lb/5.0kg Body color, transformer, certification, power 25W, 15W, 8W Ordering Code 869142 869144 804215 804225 Cat. # DB425ULX(100)N2CNR DB425ULX(70)N2CNR DB415DXN2BNZ DB425DXN2BNZ Standard Product Configuration 100V line transformer, no labels, 2 x 1/2" NPT entries, red finish 70V line transformer, no labels, 2 x 1/2" NPT entries, red finish 100V line transformer, no labels, 2 x M20, one certified plug, flameproof enclosure, natural black finish
DB5
Up to 93dB(A) @ 10ft HornIntrinsically Safe

Certification FM Approved for: Certified Ambient Temperature Ingress Protection Material Entries Weight No. of Tones FM, ATEX Class I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D 4F to +131F 20C to +55C NEMA 4 IP65 Corrosion-free ABS Up to 2 x 13/16" via knockouts 0.7lb/0.3kg 26 Body color, certification, voltages 12V240V DC Cat. # DB5B012NR DB5B024NR DB5FM2NR Standard Product Configuration Intrinsically safe, up to 3 x M20 entries via knockouts, no labels, natural red finish Intrinsically safe, 26 tones, 93 dB(A) output, natural red body color, no tag or duty labels, 2 x 13/16" entries via knockouts
5S
Options Certification ATEX Approved ExII 1G ATEX Approved ExII 1G Voltage 12V DC 24V DC Ordering Code 805001 805002 869150
FM Approved for Class I, 24V DC Div. 1 & 2, Groups A, B, C, D
1202
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Up to 30 Watts
5S
DB12
110dB(A) SounderWeatherproof & Heavy Duty

Certification UL Listed for: Weatherproof
Certified Ambient Temperature 55C to +70C Ingress Protection Material Entries Weight No. of Tones Options Certification CE Certification CE Certification Voltage 115/230V AC 24V DC Type Single Stage Two Stage Ordering Code 808003 869155 NEMA 4X & 6 IP66 & 67 Corrosion-free GRP Up to 3 x 20mm 1kg 27 + 5 programmable Body color, voltages 12V & 24V DC Cat. # DB12115NN DB12P024NN Standard Product Configuration Weatherproof, dust-tight, no labels, choice of 27 tones, natural red finish, 3 x M20 knockouts Weatherproof, choice of 27 tones, natural red finish, 3 x M20 knockouts
DB15
Certification UL Listed for:
110dB(A) Tone GeneratorWeatherproof & Heavy Duty

Weatherproof 55C to +70C NEMA 4X & 6 IP66 & 67 Corrosion-free GRP 2 x M20 2.6kg 27 + 5 programmable Body color, two stage alarm (DB15P) version, earth continuity, EOL resistor, voltages 1248V DC, 110254V AC Ordering Code 808110 808115 808120 808125 Cat. # Standard Product Configuration
Certified Ambient Temperature Ingress Protection Material Entries Weight No. of Tones Options
Certification
Voltage
Type Two Stage Two Stage Single Stage Single Stage
CE Certification 1248V DC CE Certification 1248V DC CE Certification CE Certification 240V AC 240V AC
Weatherproof, dust-tight, no labels, choice of 27 tones, painted DB15P048NN gray finish DB15P048NR DB15240NN DB15240NR Weatherproof, dust-tight, no labels, choice of 27 tones, painted red finish Weatherproof, dust-tight, choice of 27 tones, natural gray finish Weatherproof, dust-tight, choice of 27 tones, painted red finish
5S
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1203
5S

Up to 30 Watts
DB16 UL
Certification UL Listed for:
30 Watt Speaker Hazardous & Ordinary Locations

cULus, ATEX Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D / A, B, C, D Class I, Zone 1, AExde IIB T3/IIC T110C 61F to +90F 50C to +40C NEMA 4X & 6 IP66 & 67 Corrosion-free GRP Groups C & D:100dB(A) at 1Watt at 10 ft. 112dB(A) at 30 Watts at 10 ft. 3dB(A) less than C & D versions Up to 2 x 1/2" NPT or 2 x 3/4" NPT, 20mm, 25mm 12.1lb/5.5kg Body color, transformer Cat. # DB16UCXN2MPN Standard Product Configuration Unit suitable for gas Groups A, B, C, D, 70V line transformer, 2 x 1/2" NPT, one certified plug, natural black finish
Certified Ambient Temperature Ingress Protection Material Output Groups A, B, C, D: Entries Weight Options: Certification UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div 2, Groups C & D Ordering Code 28600006
Tappings @ 30 Watts 30, 25, 12, 6, 4, 2
5S
1204
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Up to 30 Watts
5S
Specification - DB4 Unit

Rated Power: Certification: 8, 15 or 25 watts RMS continuous (at 77F) UL Listed for USA and Canada Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class I, Zone 1, AExd IIC T4 UL Listing No. E203310 ATEX approved: EN50014, 18, 19 Cert. No.BAS00ATEX2097X, Exd IIC T4/T5 Cert. No. BAS00ATEX2098X, ExDC IIC T4/T5 Zones 1 and 2; not for use in atmospheres containing carbon disulphide Body & horn in anti-static, UV stable, glass reinforced polyester Swivel bracket in stainless steel Captive cover screws in stainless steel Body and horn, natural black or epoxy paint coated to clients color requirements 97 dB(A) at 1 watt at 10 feet 109 dB(A) at 25 watts at 10 feet Measured in accordance with IEC 268 11lb/5.0kg approx. dependent on model
Material:
Finish: Output:
Weight:
Certified Temperature: 67F to +158F 55C to +70C Ingress Protection: Frequency Range: NEMA 4X and 6, IP66 & 67 400Hz to 8kHz
Voice Coil Impedence: 8 ohms Transformer: Used to vary the rated power by selecting different tappings (see table below). Transformer Tappings 1:2 2:3 3:4 1:3 2:4 1:4 25W 25.0 12.5 6.0 4.0 2.0 1.0 Power 15W 15.0 7.5 5.0 4.0 2.0 0.8 8W 8.0 4.0 2.0 1.5 0.7 0.4
Transformer Options: i) Loop in/Loop out: (4 x 2) terminal tap change (8 terminals). ii) Optional Tapping: 4 terminal tap change with 2 terminals (5 & 6) directly connected to driver (8 ohms). Other tappings & driver impedances available on request. 8 x 14AWG Terminals: Other terminal arrangements available on request Mounting: Labels: Cable Entries: Bracket with ratchet facility Duty and tag labels optional Up to 2 x 1/2" NPT
5S
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1205
5S

Up to 30 Watts
Certification: FM approved for Class I, Div. 1,Groups A, B, C, D, J.I. 3001835 CSA certified to C22.2 Nos. 0, 0.4, 0.5, 25, 30, 205, Class I, Groups A, B, D, Cert. No. 79122 ATEX approved, EN50014 and EN50020 & EN50284 Exia IICT4. 12/24V version Cert. No. BAS00ATEX 1259 (unit) and 01E2024 (system) HSE(M) to EN50014, EN50020 and EN50303 Exia 1 Cert. No. MECS01ATEX4260 (unit) and 94Y7095 (system) A.B.S. (Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene) Available in red as standard 4F to +131F 20C to +55C 0.7lb/0.3kg Up to 1 x 13/16" on each side via knockouts 90 3dB(A) at 10 feet for 12V and 24V versions Typical max value onlyvariable with tone
Material: Finish: Certified Temperature: Weight: Entries: Sound Output: Current Consumption:
24V model14 mA max. nominal 12V model12 mA max. nominal
5S
1206
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Up to 30 Watts
5S
Material: Finish: Sound Output: Volume Control: UV stable glass reinforced polyester. Retained stainless steel cover screws Self colored red as standard or epoxy coated to customers specification 107 3dB(A) at 1 meter Typical value onlyvariable with tone Integral volume control *Nominal Output (dBa) 92 100 104 109 Tone Selection: Single Stage DB12: Two stage Unit DB12P: Input Current (mA) 60 70 80 90
27 user selectable tones Switchable between any two tones by either: (i) Reversing the polarity of the supply, or (ii) by a 3 wire common +ve system, switching between the two -ve lines.
Note: Two stage unit available in DC versions only.
Weight: Operating Temperature: Ingress Protection: Voltage: Current Consumption: Terminals: Labels: Cable Entries:
1.0 kg. Dc, 1.2kg AC 55C to +70C IP66 & IP67 DC: 12V, 24V AC: 115/230V 24V operation 55mA100mA 12V operation 55mA90mA 6 x 2.5mm2 Duty and tag labels available Up to 3 x M20 via knockouts 115V operation 85mA140mA 230V operation 45mA60mA
AFNOR NF S 32 001 compliant version availablecontact sales office for details.
5S
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1207
5S

Up to 30 Watts
Material: Body & horn in UV stable, glass reinforced polyester Swivel bracket in stainless steel Cover screws in stainless steel Body and horn, natural gray to RAL 7035 or epoxy paint coated to clients color requirements DB15 117dB(A) maximum Integral volume control *Nominal Output (dBa) 100 105 108 110 112 Input Current (mA) 150 250 350 450 550
Finish:
Sound Output: Volume Control:
Tone Selection: DB15: 27 user selectable tones available. Additional 5 tones may be programmed. DB15P (Two stage unit): Switchable between any two of the 27 tones by either: (i) Reversing the polarity of the supply, or (ii) by a 3 wire common +ve system, switching between the two ve lines.
Note: Two stage unit available in DC versions (DB15P) only.
Weight: Ingress Protection: Voltage: Current Consumption:
2.6kg approx. dependent on model IP66 and IP67 Up to 48V DC Up to 254V AC V 12V DC 24V DC 48V DC 110V AC 120V AC 220V AC 240V AC 254V AC I 900mA 600mA 280mA 150mA 175mA 93mA 86mA 80mA
Temperature Range: 55C to +70C
AFNOR NF S 32 001 compliant version availablecontact sales office.
Terminals: Earth Continuity: Mounting: Labels: Cable Entries:
4 x 2.5mm2 (AC), 6 x 2.5mm2 (DC) Available Stainless steel bracket with ratchet facility Duty and tag labels optional 2 x M20 ISO
5S
1208
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Up to 30 Watts
Rated Power: Certification: 30 Watts RMS continuous (at 77F/25C)
5S
UL Listed for USA and Canada Hazardous locations: Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D, Class I, Zone 1, AExde IIB T3 Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D, Class I, Zone 1, AExde IIC T110C UL Listing No. E203310 Ordinary locations: Signalling Speaker; UL Listing No. 58847 CENELEC EN50014, 18, 19 IIB Version: Cert. No. Baseefa04ATEX0166X ATEX Ex II 2G Exde IIB T3 (Tamb. -50C to +40C) IIC Version: Cert. No. Baseefa04ATEX0167X ATEX Ex II 2GD Exde IIC T110C (Tamb. -50C to +40C) Zones 1 and 2 Body & horn in anti-static, UV stable, glass reinforced polyester Mounting stirrup and fixtures in stainless steel All natural or body and horn can be painted to clients requirements Groups C, D Version: Maximum output at 1W at 10 feet is 100dBA Maximum output at 30W at 10 feet is 112dBA Groups A, B, C, D Version: Maximum output at 1W at 10 feet is 97dBA Maximum output at 30W at 10 feet is 109dBA 12lb/5.5kg approx. NEMA 4X & 6, IP66 & IP67 370Hz to 8kHz Used by combining the rated power tappings below
Material: Finish: Output:
Weight: Ingress Protection: Voltage: Transformer:
Certified Temperature: 67F to +104F (-50C to +40C)
Voice Coil Impedence: 8 ohms
Transformer Tapping Options: Transformer Tappings 1:2 2:3 3:4 1:3 2.4 1.4 Power (W) 30 25 12 6 4 2 (ii) Loop in/loop out (2 x 2) 8 ohm; 4 terminals Terminals: Mounting: Labels: Cable Entries: 8 x 2.5mm
2
(i) Loop in/loop out (4 x 2) power tap change; 8 terminals
5S
Earth Continuity: Available via optional earthing stud or by internal earth plate Via stirrup with ratchet facility Optional stainless steel tag and duty labels Up to 2 x 1/2" NPT or 2 x 3/4" NPT into termination chamber, 20mm, 25mm
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1209
5S
ETH FlexTone Series Signaling Devices

Electronic Signals
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1 & 2, Groups E, F, G Cl. III UL and cUL 464 and 1203 listed
Cooper Crouse-Hinds FlexTone Series Electronic Signals are explosionproof, heavy-duty, tone-selectable signaling devices capable of producing volume-controlled, high-decibel tones. Certified for use in Class I, Division 1, Group B, C, and D applications, the FlexTone Series is ideal for signaling warning or emergency conditions. The FlexTone ETH855 accepts up to two contact closures and delivers two audible output signals selected from 55 available tones. The two tones are selected by setting miniature switches within the unit. One of the tones can be assigned a priority status to override the other tone. The FlexTone ETHD855 is diode polarized for applications requiring electrical supervision of signaling circuit field wiring. The signal delivers one audible output signal selected from the 55 tones available.
Explosionproof Electronic Signal Stand - Alone Unit

Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class III UL and cUL 464 and 1203 Listed
Applications:
For use where a high-decibel sound is required for alert or evacuation in hazardous locations.

Heavy-duty zinc cast construction. 55 tone capacity no additional tone modules needed. Internal volume control with internal potentiometer. Corrosion-resistant heat-flowed epoxy finish. Supplied with factory sealed 1/2" threaded fitting for quick installation. Speaker can swivel 180 vertically or horizontally depending on orientation of mounting bracket. Mounts onto any surface using only three bolts. 30" numbered wire leads.

Body Heavy-duty zinc cast construction External hardware Stainless steel
Ratings:
24VDC, 36VDC, 125VDC, 250VDC, 24VAC, 120VAC and 240VAC (ETH) 20 31VDC (ETHD)
Output Sound Pressure:

109 decibel (dBA) output
Cat. # Voltage Explosionproof, Two Output ETH855/24 24VDC ETH855/36 36VDC ETH655/24 24VAC, 50 / 60Hz ETH655/120 120VAC ETH655/240 240VAC ETH855/125 125VDC ETH855/250 250VDC Signal OFF Signal ON Standby Current (Amps) Operating Current (Amps) 0.061 0.077 0.250 0.088 0.091 0.031 0.019 0.250 0.380 0.950 0.260 0.190 0.130 0.070
5S
Diode Polarized, Explosionproof, Single Output For Fire Alarm Applications Meets min. 75 dBA for fire alarm indication ETHD855/24 20 31VDC 0.061 0.950
1210
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Remote Speaker / Amplifier
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1 & 2, Groups E, F, G Cl. III UL and cUL 464 and 1203 listed
5S
Cooper Crouse-Hinds FlexTone Series Explosionproof Remote Speaker/Amplifier is designed for remote mounting in Division 1 areas where simultaneous high-decibel signaling is required. Used in connection with the Panel Control Signaling Generator, the FlexTone ETH845 operates directly from local power sources, allowing remote speaker/amplifiers of different voltages to be connected within the same system. Available in both AC and DC voltages, the FlexTone can be mixed and matched throughout an application using the available line power. ETH845 Series Remote Speaker/Amplifiers must be used with Cooper Crouse-Hinds FlexTone Panel Control Signal Generator on next page.
Applications:
For use where simultaneous signaling of a high-decibel sound is required for alert or evacuation in hazardous locations.
Explosionproof Remote Speaker/Amplifier

Class I, Division 1, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class III UL and cUL 464 and 1203 Listed

Heavy-duty zinc cast construction. Individual volume control. Corrosion-resistant heat-flowed epoxy finish. Supplied with factory sealed 1/2" threaded fitting for quick installation. Speaker can swivel 180 vertically or horizontally depending on orientation of mounting bracket. Mounts onto any surface using only three bolts. 30" numbered wire leads.

Body Heavy-duty zinc cast construction External hardware Stainless steel
Ratings:
120VAC, 240VAC, 125VDC and 250VDC
Output Sound Pressure:

109 decibel (dBA) output
Cat. # Voltage Explosionproof Remote Speaker/Amp ETH845/24 24VDC ETH645/24 24VAC, 50/60Hz ETH645/120 120VAC ETH645/240 240VAC ETH845/125 125VDC ETH845/250 250VDC Signal OFF Standby Current (Amps) 0.061 0.250 0.088 0.091 0.031 0.091 Signal ON Operating Current (Amps) 0.250 0.950 0.260 0.190 0.130 0.070
ETH845 Series Remote Speaker/Amplifiers must be used with Cooper Crouse-Hinds FlexTone Panel Control Signal Generator on next page.
5S
ETH845 Series Remote Speaker/Amplifiers accept a 10VAC audio signal from FlexTone Panel Control Signal Generator.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1211
5S

Control Signal Generator
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III
UL 464 and 1604 listed NEMA 3R, IP 44
Cooper Crouse-Hinds FlexTone Series Panel Control Signal Generator controls and initiates a synchronous signaling sound from all FlexTone 3 Remote Speaker/Amps installed in a system. The Panel Control Signal Generator is mounted in a Division 2 area, while controlling the FlexTone 3 Speaker/Amps that are remotely mounted in Division 1 areas. The Panel Control Signal Generator produces 27 sounds. Four tones may be activated from field-wired, normally open contacts, or a 24VDC or 120VAC external voltage source such as an output from a PLC.

Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III UL 464 and 1604 Listed cUL C22.2 No. 205 CE Marked CENELEC LV and EMC Directives NEMA 3R, IP44
Applications:
Hazardous area applications calling for high-decibel output with simultaneous signal delivery over all speakers installed in a system Emergency warning systems, plant evacuation alarms, security intrusion alarms, process monitoring, shift start and dismissal horns, and paging signals

27 tone capability no additional tone modules needed. Centralized programmable tone selection. PLC compatible. System-wide priority tone. 24 VDC battery back-up terminals. Short circuit protected.

Zinc-cast construction with an epoxy powder coat finish
Ratings:
See table below
Cat. # Voltage Panel Control Signal Generator ETH840/24E74 24VDC ETH640/24E13 24VAC, 50/60Hz ETH640/120E36 120VAC, 50/60Hz ETH640/120M38 120VAC, 50/60Hz ETH640/120E32 120VAC, 50/60Hz ETH640/240E20 240VAC, 50/60Hz ETH840/125E21 125VDC ETH840/250E10 250VDC ETH640/120M31 120VAC, 50/60Hz ETH640/240M20 240VAC, 50/60Hz ETH840/125M20 125VDC ETH840/250M10 250VDC ETH640/120R31 120VAC, 50/60Hz ETH640/240R20 240VAC, 50/60Hz ETH840/125R20 125VDC ETH840/250R10 250VDC Input Card Activation Voltage 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 120VAC 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 24VDC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC 120VAC RS485 RS485 RS485 RS485 Signal OFF Standby Current (Amps) 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.02 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.02 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.02 Signal ON Operating Current (Amps) 0.74 1.30 0.36 0.38 0.32 0.20 0.21 0.10 0.31 0.20 0.20 0.10 0.31 0.20 0.20 0.10
5S
FlexTone Panel Control Signal Generator must be used with Cooper Crouse-Hinds ETH845 Remote Speaker/Amps on previous page.
Dimensions
In Inches:
1212
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
ETH Horn Signals

Factory Sealed
Applications:
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 7BCD, 9EFG
5S
ETH horn signals are used: For call signals, alarms, and various other signalling applications In specific hazardous atmospheres as found in chemical plants, oil and gas refineries, bulk loading stations, paint and varnish manufacturing plants, grain processing industries and grain elevators, as well as in certain metal, coal, combustible fiber processing or handling areas In conduit systems and mounted on a flat surface with the projectors aimed in the desired direction
ETH grill type horn signal
Features:
No external conduit seal is required. The AC signals do not have arcing contacts. The DC horns have factory sealed wire leads in the interconnecting nipple and hub. The body cover joint of AC horn signals is of serrated construction, machined to close tolerance to ensure flametightness and secured by a clamping ring. The DC unit has a ground joint design.
Table 1
Operating Current in Amperes at the Nominal Voltage for Horn and Siren Signals Horn Signal
Amperes Single Projector Grill Type 50 to 60 hertz AC ETH2313, ETH2316, ETH2312 0.625 0.13 0.065

NEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III UL Standard: 464, 1203 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
Nom. Volts 24 115 230
50 to 60 hertz AC ETH2702, ETH2703 .45 .2
DC ETH2416 0.16
Nom. Nom. Supply Volts* Watts Single Projector Horn Signal 115 33 50 to 60 230 33 hertz AC Grill Type Horn Signals 24 50 to 60 115 49 hertz AC 230 DC 24 30 Minimum audibility rating (dB) at 10': 105 dB 105 dB 100 dB 100 dB 100 dB 100 dB Hub Size
1 1
Cat. # ETH2703 ETH2702 ETH2316 ETH2313 ETH2312 ETH2416
Standard Materials:
/2 /2
Standard Finishes:
Natural
/4 /4 3 /4
3 3 3
Size Ranges:
Hub 1/2" or 3/4" size
/4
Dimensions
In Inches:
Sound Levels:
See Ordering Information table for individual ratings

Nominal voltage 24, 115, 230 VAC 24 VDC
5S
Single Projector
Grill type horns are certified for Group B. * See Table 1 for more complete ratings
Grill Type
Dimensions are approximate, not for construction purposes. www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds
1213
5S
W2H Signaling Devices
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, D Cl. II, Div. 2, Group G NEMA 3, 7ABCD (Div. 2), 9G (Div. 2) Raintight
Dust-tight Wet Locations
Applications:
W2H series signaling devices are used: As independent audible signal or warning devices In Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D hazardous areas where flammable vapors or gases may be present due to accidental or abnormal operation In Class II, Division 2, Group G hazardous areas where combustible dusts may be present due to accidental or abnormal operation
Features:
The W2H is solid-state, compact, rugged but lightweight. The system is programmable, which allows the convenience of tone selection, without the need for separate tone modules. Each unit can be programmed for any one of four different tones (whoop, wail, hi-lo and horn), by wiring to the corresponding terminal on the units terminal strip. Separate sound modules not required. Unit may be field wired for multiple signal selection by manual or automatic control. 180 speaker rotation allows flexibility in direction of sound. Corrosion-resistant conformal coating protects the printed circuit and other interior components.
Signal Selection:
Signal Terminal #4 Whoop #5 Wail #6 Hi-Lo #7 Horn Sound Description Ascending low to high, repeated Conventional Siren Alternating Hi-Lo Steady Audible Frequency Low tone 400 Hz High tone 850 Hz 400 1100 Hz Low tone 650 Hz High tone 850 Hz 630 Hz Repetition Rate 48 cy/min. 48 cy/min. 24 cy/min. 24 cy/min. 24 cy/min. Continuous

UL: Standard 886 NEC: Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class II, Division 2, Group G NEMA 3, 7ABCD Division 2, 9G Division 2

Nominal voltage 24, 120, 240 AC; 60 Hz 24 DC
Standard Materials:
Body die-cast aluminum Projector spun aluminum Hardware stainless steel
Ordering Information - Normal Power

Nominal Voltage 24VDC 24VAC 120VAC 240VAC Operating Current 0.55A 1.25A 0.27A 0.15A Standby Current 0.06A 0.13A 0.03A 0.02A Cat. # W2H840 W2H640 W2H620 W2H660
Standard Finishes:
Body and projector gray hammertone enamel Stainless steel natural
Sound Levels:
Minimum audibility rating (dB) at 10': W2H Series 93dB
Dimensions
In Inches:
5S
1214
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
WH Vibrating Horn Signals
Weather Resistant
5S
Applications:
WH vibrating horn signals are used: For code or call signals, or as a general alarm in a signal system that might involve hours of continuous operation In non-hazardous atmospheres of industrial areas such as warehouses, yards, exteriors of buildings, and in-plant areas Mounted on walls or other flat surfaces with projectors aimed in a desired direction
Features:
The joint between the body and horn assembly is gasketed for raintightness WH with grill WH with single projector

UL Standard: 464
Standard Materials:
Copper-free aluminum and die cast zinc
Standard Finishes:
Gray hammertone enamel
Capacity Ranges:
Minimum audibility rating (dB) at 10': AC 87 decibels
WH with double projector

Nominal voltage 120 AC, 50 / 60 hertz Operating characteristics Voltage range +10%, 20% Nominal watts 18 VA on 120 VAC
Nominal Voltage .15 Nominal Voltage 120 AC 50 to 60 Hz Grill Cat # WH13503 Single Projector Cat. # WH13513 Double Projector Cat. # WH13523
Dimensions
In Inches: 5S
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1215
5S
ESR Bell Signals

Factory Sealed
Applications:
ESR bell signals are used: For call signals, alarms, or in various other signalling applications In specific hazardous atmospheres such as in chemical plants, oil and gas refineries, bulk loading stations, paint and varnish manufacturing plants, grain processing industries and grain elevators, as well as in certain metal, coal, combustible fiber processing or handling areas In conduit systems, and mounted on a vertical flat surface with the striker at the bottom
Features:
The conduit hub contains an integral bushing. The body cover assembly permits the location of a hub at the top, bottom or either side (the striker must be located at the bottom for proper operation). There are no external seals required except when used in Group B hazardous areas. The AC signal does not have arcing contacts. Binding screw terminals are provided in AC signals for supply conductors. A vibrating or single stroke striker mechanism is furnished with 6 or 10 inch diameter gongs.
Size Ranges:
Hub one 3/4" size
Sound Levels:
See Table 1 below for individual ratings

Nominal voltage 12, 24, 48, 115, 230 AC
See Table 1 for complete ratings.

Standard Units: NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA/EEMAC: 7CD, 9EFG UL Standard: 464, 1203 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30 Group B Units: NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA/EEMAC: 7BCD, 9EFG UL Standard: 464, 1203 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
Dimensions
In Inches:
Dia. Gong 6 10
a 6 10
b 63/4 103/4
c 51/4 6
5S
Standard Materials:
Body Feraloy iron alloy Cover copper-free aluminum Junction box body Feraloy iron alloy cover copper-free aluminum Gong steel
Table 1
Operating Current in Amperes at the Nominal Voltage For Bell Signals
Nom. Volts Amperes All Vibrating 25 to 60 Hz AC 1.67 .53 .44 .189 .092 All Single Stroke 50 to 60 Hz AC 1.75 .62 .41 .189 .086
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Aluminum natural Steel gray matte
12 24 48 115 230
1216
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
ESR Bell Signals

Factory Sealed
5S
Hub Size
Supply
Nom. Volts 12 24 48 115 230
Voltage Range 9.6 to 13.2 19.2 to 26.4 38.4 to 52.8 92 to 126.5 184 to 253 9.6 to 13.2 19.2 to 26.4 38.4 to 52.8 92 to 126.5 184 to 253
Dia. Bell
Vibrating Hammer (25 to 60 hertz) Standard Group B Units Cat. # Units Cat. # ESR2675 ESR2674 ESR2673 ESR2672 ESR2671 ESR2615 ESR2614 ESR2613 ESR2612 ESR2611 ESR2675 ESR2674 ESR2673 ESR2672 ESR2671 ESR2615 ESR2614 ESR2613 ESR2612 ESR2611 GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB GB
Minimum audibility rating (dB) at 10': 67 82 88 88 85 82 85 85 91 85
Single Stroke Hammer (50 to 60 hertz) Cat. # ESR2665 ESR2664 ESR2663 ESR2662 ESR2661 ESR2625 ESR2624 ESR2623 ESR2622 ESR2621
Minimum audibility rating (dB) at 10': 64 64 67 67 67 64 64 67 67 67
/4
AC 12 24 48 115 230 10
Install seal within 11/2" of conduit opening.
5S
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1217
5S
5S
1218
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Combination Visual & Audible Signaling Devices

Hazardous
Description
Combination Units - MEDC Series
DB3/SM87 DB3/XB11 DB12/XB13
6S
Page No.
6S
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1219
6S

MEDC Series
Truly a unique product offering with integral visual and audible signaling devices pre-wired for simultaneous output activation. Suitable for Class I, Division 2 applications Strobe light and audible tone generator in one package Mounts with ease and facilitates quick field wiring UL, cUL, Ex and ATEX for worldwide acceptance
This range of lightweight all GRP, explosionproof horns intended for use in potentially explosive atmospheres has been designed with high ingress protection to cope with the harsh environmental conditions found offshore and onshore in the oil, gas and petrochemical industries. The flamepaths, flare, and body are manufactured completely from a UV stable glass reinforced polyester. Stainless steel screws and sinter are incorporated thus ensuring a corrosion-free product. A tapered flamepath is used to overcome the problems of assembly of parallel spigot flamepaths.

All GRP corrosion-free Up to 108dBA output at 10 feet Integral volume control 27 tones, user selectable Horn/Strobe Combination Unit available Horn/Strobe Combination Unit

UL Listed for USA and Canada Hazardous locations: Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D Class I, Zones 1 & 2, AExd IIC T4 Ordinary locations: Audible Signal device ATEX approved NEMA 4X & 6, IP66 & 67 Certified temperature 67F to +158F 55C to +70C
6S
1220
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

MEDC Series
6S
Visual & Audible Combination UnitsHazardous Locations, Weatherproof
Certification ATEX Ex II 2GD UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D
Voltage 24V DC
Lens/Body Color Red/Red Red/Natural Black Red/Red
Cat. # DB3/XB11B24V RED/RED
Standard Product Configuration DB3/XB11, Exd IIB T5, choice of 27 tones, 115dB(A) at 1m output, 29 Cd, no labels, 1 x M20 entry
24V DC
869200
DB3/XB11UL24V RED/NB DB3/XB11, GRP material, NEMA 4X & 6, choice of 27 tones, 106dB(A) at 10 feet output, 29 Cd, no labels, 1 x " NPT entries
24V DC
869205
DB3/XB11UL24V RED/RED
110V AC
Red/Red
869210
DB3/XB11UL110V RED/RED
Certification UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 1, Groups C, D UL, cUL Listed, Class I, Div. 2, Groups C, D
Voltage 24V DC
Lens/Body Color Red/Red
24V DC
Red/Red
Standard Product Configuration 24V DC, alloy sounder, interconnected 62500182 DB1P/SM87HXBUL 24V RED/RED to, painted red stainless steel baseplate, alloy 5 joule beacon GRP sounder interconnected to, 62500183 DB3/SM87HXBUL 24V RED/RED painted red stainless steel baseplate, alloy 5 joule beacon Cat. #
Ordering Code
6S
Certification Voltage
Lens/Body Color Red/Red
Cat. #
Standard Product Configuration IP66 & 67 weatherproof only, 24V DC, GRP sounder interconnected to, on a painted red stainless steel baseplate, a IP66 & 67 weatherproof only, GRP 10 joule beacon
Ex II 2GD
24V DC
DB12/XB13 24V RED/RED
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1221
6S
6S
1222
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Plugs & Receptacles

Section P
Rugged construction, extensive configurations, custom capabilities and numerous interlocked designs provide safe and reliable NEC and IEC solutions for fixed or portable power applications
New Products in the Plugs & Receptacles Product Line

150A Arktite ArkGard ENR Receptacles ArkGard ENC Connectors IEC 309 Light Industrial Devices Custom Cable Assemblies Posi-Max Power Distribution Panels Portable Power Carts
Section
1P 2P 2P 5P 10P 10P 10P
Notable changes to the Plugs & Receptacles section of this catalog

New section 10P for Portable Power solutions

The Plugs and Receptacles Section of the Cooper Crouse-Hinds Product Catalog contains complete technical information on the Cooper Crouse-Hinds line of these products. In addition to product listings and features, the section contains information on interchangeability of plugs and receptacles, the different grounding methods incorporated in the construction of the units, and separate sections devoted to receptacles interlocked with switches and/or circuit breakers. The Plug, Receptacles, and Interlocks featured in this section include the Arktite pin and sleeve offering, ArkGard NEMA blade-style units, IEC 309 devices, Ark-Trol electrical connectors, and Cable-Gard cord and cable reels.
Cable-Gard Series
Electric cord and cable reels are used extensively in modern factories for "managing" all loose extension cables to ensure safety, increase efficiency, and extend cable and portable equipment life. Electric reels automatically transmit electric current (power or control) from a stationary position to a moving consumer of current.
This method is used on plugs and receptacles for hazardous areas, on configured Arktite and on all Arktite products made of Krydon material. It meets the National Electrical Code/Canadian Electrical Code requirements for this equipment. The Arktite line offers a choice of both methods; other plugs and receptacles are offered in one of the two styles (details are given on the individual pages). Details on construction and diagrams of both methods are found in Section 1P, see pages 1230-1231.

The considerations in the selection of plugs and receptacles are the electrical ratings desired and the physical location of the units. This information, together with the product features, construction details, and customer benefits, is shown on the individual pages in selecting the proper plugs and receptacles, other factors in addition to the electrical ratings and the physical aspects regarding location of the application (e.g., hazardous areas) should be considered. Principally, these factors are: interchangeability of plug and receptacle, interlocking and grounding.
Interlocked Units
Where added safety is desired and for units of higher ratings, Sections 3P and 4P detail receptacles with interlocked switches and/or circuit breakers. The ability to break the load before removal of the plug, circuit protection and disconnect capability are the prime benefits to be derived from equipment shown in those sections.
Arktite Series
Metallic and non-metallic Arktite series units are available for use in hazardous and nonhazardous areas for general purpose, heavy duty applications in power circuits. All units through 100 ampere rating offer circuit breaking capability under load; some units are offered with interlocking mechanism with switch and/or circuit breaker, where dead front receptacles are desired, 400 ampere units are for service disconnect use only and are not for current interrupting. An interchangeability table on the next page graphically shows interchangeability between products in the complete line of pin and sleeve type plugs and receptacles. Full electrical rating details are shown in the interchangeability charts at the beginning of each section in the Plugs and Receptacles Section of this catalog.
Interchangebility Between Cooper Crouse-Hinds Product Families

A unique capability exists throughout much of the Cooper Crouse-Hinds plug and receptacle line that enables a variety of receptacles to be used with the same plug provided the electrical rating and style of plug and receptacle are the same (see Interchangeability Table on next page). Where a common wiring system is in use, it is possible to use the same standard plug with a number of different receptacle assemblies located in different areas where each receptacle is selected to meet the physical or environmental requirement of the specific area. For example, a process industry facility could include Class I, Groups C and D areas and Class II, Group G areas as well as non-hazardous areas. A portable device suitable for use in the hazardous areas could be equipped with an APJ Arktite plug or NPJ Arktite plug made of Krydon material and be used in all areas of the plant. The receptacle installation could include AR or NR units in the non-hazardous areas; DBR interlocked receptacles in the Class II, Groups F and G areas and FSQC or EPC interlocked receptacles in the Class I, Groups C and D areas all of which will accept the same APJ or NPJ plug. CPH plugs can also be used with any receptacle which accepts a standard APJ or NPJ Arktite plug of the same ampere rating, style, and number of poles. This feature permits the use of a portable device, suitable for hazardous locations, in all areas of a plant, but prevents the use of an "ordinary locations" device in the hazardous areas. The following table is a summary of possible combinations. Full details describing the possibilities for interchanging plugs and receptacles are given in this section of the Cooper Crouse-Hinds Product Catalog.
Grounding
Cooper Crouse-Hinds utilizes two methods for completing the grounding circuit in plugs and receptacles. Style 1: A Style 1 plug is one in which the grounding conductor in the flexible cable is bonded to the plug sleeve by a pressure connector. A Style 1 receptacle is one which is grounded by virtue of the fact that it is an integral part of a grounded conduit system. On insertion, the plug sleeve makes contact with detent springs of the grounded receptacle housing before line and load poles engage, and on withdrawal, remains in contact until after line and load poles disengage. Therefore, exposed metal parts of the portable equipment or plug are suitably grounded. Style 2: A Style 2 plug is one in which the grounding conductor in the flexible cable is bonded to the extra (grounding) pole and sleeve by a pressure connector. A Style 2 receptacle is one in which the extra (grounding) pole is electrically connected to the equipment grounding conductor and the receptacle housing which itself is grounded by virtue of the fact that it is an integral part of a grounded conduit system. In a Style 2 receptacle, the grounding connection is made before line and load poles engage, and is broken after line and load poles disengage. Furthermore, upon insertion, the plug sleeve of metal shelled units makes contact with detent springs of the grounded receptacle housing before line and load poles engage, and on withdrawal, remains in contact until after line and load poles disengage. Therefore, exposed metal parts of the portable equipment or plug are suitably grounded.
ArkGard Series
The ArkGard series is the ideal solution for rugged and industrial NEMA blade-style applications up to 20 amperes. This offering now includes the ArkGard Premier line of receptacles and connectors that are rated NEMA 4 watertight while not in use. This design also includes value-added features that provide ease of installation, added safety, reduced maintenance costs, and increased product life.
IEC 309 Series

Cooper Crouse-Hinds has combined years of field-proven Arktite pin and sleeve expertise with German-North American precision engineering and manufacturing to offer the worlds best IEC 309 plug and socket product line. Now available in light industrial, heavy duty industrial, and hazardous area designs, this global product line features the latest technological innovations to lead the way in IEC 309 performance.
ARK-trol Series
Units are available for use in hazardous and nonhazardous areas for special purpose application in power and/or control circuits where environmental factors are important or a wide range of contacts, sizes and configurations is required.
1224
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Interchangeability Table
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Pin and Sleeve Design Plugs
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Heavy Duty Receptacles and Connectors Cat. Pg. Delayed Action for Hazardous Areas CPS CES/CESD APR AR CPR NR NPR BHR EBBR EPC EPCB FSQC SRD CSR DBR NBR NSR WSR WSQC WSRD WSRD SS WSRDW see pages 12621264 see page 1277 see page 1230 see page 1230 see page 1266 see page 1247 see page 1247 see pages 13081309 see pages 13051306 see page 1312 see pages 13151316 see page 0000 see page 1310 see pages 12901292 see page 0000 see page 1294 see page 1296 see page 1284 see page 1293 see page 1284 see pages 12861288 see page 1284 APJ AP BHP CPH CPP DP NPJ SP
Non-interlocked For Non-hazardous Areas
Interlocked for Hazardous Areas
Interlocked for Non-hazardous Areas
Plugs mate with indicated receptacles. Consult individual catalog pages for complete listing of Cooper Crouse-Hinds plugs, receptacles and connectors.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1225

Table of Contents
Section 1P
Industrial Heavy Duty Plugs and Receptacles
(for use in non-hazardous areas) Receptacles Plugs AR AP, APJ, CPH, CPP, NPJ APR AP, APJ, APQ, CPH, CPP, NPJ, NPQ NR APJ, CPH, CPP, NPJ NPR APJ, CPH, CPP, NPJ, NPQ
Section 6P
Wiring Devices with Covers
(for use in non-hazardous areas) WLRS/WLRD Covers GFCI Covers
Section 7P
Industrial Cord and Cable Reels
Cable-Gard Series Static Discharge Reels
Section 2P
Industrial Heavy Duty Plugs and Receptacles
(for use in hazardous areas) Receptacles Plugs CES, CESD CPH CPR* CPP CPS APJ, NPJ ENR ENP Connectors ENC*
Section 8P
Special Purpose Plugs and Receptacles
(for use in non-hazardous areas) Ark-trol Series RPC RPE
Section 9P
(for use in hazardous areas) Ark-trol Series RPX
Section 3P
Interlocked Heavy Duty Plugs and Receptacles
(for use in non-hazardous areas) Receptacles Plugs CSR APJ, NPJ NBR APJ, CPH, WSR, WSRD APJ, CPH, NSR APJ, CPH, WSQC APJ, CPH,
Section 10P
Portable Power Solutions
(for use in hazardous and non-hazardous areas) Cable Assemblies Posi-Max Power Distribution Panels Custom Portable Power Solutions
NPJ NPJ NPJ NPJ
Section 4P
Interlocked Heavy Duty Plugs and Receptacles
(for use in hazardous areas) Receptacles Plugs BHR BHP, SP DBR APJ, CPH, NPJ EPC APJ, DP, CPH, NPJ EBBR APJ, CPH, NPJ EPCB APJ, CPH, NPJ FSQ APJ, BP, CPH, NPJ SRD SP, BHP
Section 5P
IEC 309 Pin & Sleeve Devices
(for use in hazardous and non-hazardous areas) IEC 309 Light Industrial IEC 309 Heavy Duty
*Not suitable for hazardous areas in the United States in compliance with NEC regulations.
P
1226
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Plugs and Receptacles Industrial Heavy Duty Non-hazardous

Description
Application/Selection Arktite Series
1P
Page No.
see page 1228
Technical Data Aluminum AR/APJ Style

20A 30A 60A 100A 150A 200A 400A
see page 1230 see page 1235 pages 12361237 pages 12381239 pages 12401241 pages 12401241 pages 12421244 pages 12451246 see page 1250 see page 1247 see page 1248 see page 1254 see page 1256
see see see see see see
Back Boxes Krydon NR/NPJ Style Technical Data

30, 60, 100A
Flanged Panel Mount Motor Plugs
1P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1227
1P

Industrial Heavy Duty Application and Selection
Applications:
Distribution of secondary electrical power Provide quick disconnect from power source

Electrical System: Amperage and voltage required for application Wiring system and number of conductors required. See page 1233 for contact sizes. Compatibility with System: Need for interchangeability with plugs in existing system and within parts of new system. Grounding styles. Two styles utilized. See page 1231 for complete description to determine which is suitable for needs. Mounting Arrangement: Three types of mounting available surface, flush and panel Application: Fixed receptacle for power outlet; cable connectors for portable cable extensions Other Considerations: Wire sizes and recess dimensions available. See page 1233 for complete details. National Electrical Code, UL, NEMA, Canadian Electrical Code, CSA compliances Environment need for operation in harsh, dirty or corrosive conditions
Options:
Special polarity arrangements available as well as special back boxes and hub arrangements. See listing pages for details.

Electrical Characteristics Receptacle Series APR AR AR Panel Mount NPR NR Receptacle Type Portable cable Fixed Fixed Portable cable Fixed Amperage (Range) 20, 30, 60, 100, 200, 400 20, 30, 60, 100, 150, 200, 400 30, 60, 100, 200 30, 60, 100 30, 60, 100 Volts (Max.) 600VAC 250VDC 600VAC 250VDC 600VAC 250VDC 600VAC 250VDC 600VAC 250VDC No. of Poles (Range) 25 25 24 34 34 Grounding Style 1-2 1-2 1-2 2 2 Back box (surface) Back box (surface) Panel mtg. (semi-flush)
Mounting
Mating Plug APJ, NPJ, APQ, AP APJ, NPJ, AP APJ, NPJ, AP NPQ, APJ, NPJ (fixed) APJ, NPJ
See page 1231 for detailed explanation.
1P
1228
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Industrial Heavy Duty Interchangeability Chart
Interchangeability Chart
Many of the plugs listed in this section can be used interchangeably with receptacles from other sections, both in hazardous and non-hazardous areas, provided electrical rating and style of plug and receptacle are the same. The following table is a summary of possible combinations. Plugs Shown in Section 1P APJ, NPJ* Can be Used with These Receptacle Series DBR Listed in Section 4P Plugs & Receptacle Electrical Rating 30, 60, 100 amp. 3-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 4-pole 30 amp. 2-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 4-pole 30, 60, 100 amp. 2-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 4-pole 30, 60, 100 amp. 3-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 4-pole 30, 60, 100 amp. 3-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 4-pole 60 amp. 3-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 4-pole
1P
FSQ
4P
EPC, EPCB, EBBR
4P
NBR, NSR
3P
WSR
3P
WSRD
3P
*NPJ, NR and NPR available in 2-wire, 3-pole and 3-wire, 4-pole electrical ratings only. 150A EBBR available in 3-wire, 4-pole electrical rating.
1P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1229
1P
Arktite Heavy Duty Circuit Breaking Plugs and Receptacles

Industrial Heavy Duty Non-hazardous Areas
NEMA 4 Watertight
Applications:
Arktite circuit breaking plugs and receptacles are used: To supply power to portable electrically operated devices such as motorgenerator sets, compressors, heating and cooling units, welders, conveyors, lighting systems and similar equipment Where temporary power is needed, such as at trailers, building units, heavy machinery and similar equipment Wherever electrical loads must be quickly disconnected from power source In a typical installation, where a large machine utilizes a number of electrical motor drives and for ease of adjustment, removal, maintenance and replacement, each motor is connected by portable cord and Arktite receptacles rather than permanently wired In areas where dust, dirt, moisture and corrosion are a problem Indoors and outdoors in non-hazardous areas of chemical plants, process industry facilities, meat packing plants, manufacturing plants and similar industrial locations

UL Standards: 1682, 514; 1010 (APJ and NPJ plugs only) CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 182.1
Features:
Circuit breaking: plugs through 100 ampere rating may be disconnected under load; 150-400 ampere units are for service disconnect use only. Receptacles accept only plugs of the same amperage rating, style and number of poles, making it impossible to mismate, and provides for positive polarization. Extra wide electrical spacing allows for maximum safety. Insulator materials are the result of intensive testing. Selection has been made based on highest dielectric strength, maximum mechanical and impact resistance, lowest moisture absorption and highest arc tracking resistance. A variety of installations is possible due to the availability of several types of back boxes. Designed to withstand rough usage and the effects of adverse environments. Reversible interiors, 30, 60 and 100 ampere (except 30 and 60 ampere, 5-pole) Arktite plug and receptacle interiors are interchangeable using a screwdriver. This makes it possible to feed a normally de-energized receptacle from an energized plug with usual Arktite safety; no energized contacts are exposed.
The additional features below are called out in the illustration on this page 1 The ground contact is bonded to the 1 receptacle housing (Style 2) 2 Easy access terminals make 2 wiring simple 3 Grounding contacts that make-first and 3 break-last in the unlikely event of keyway failure 4 An arc formed when the plug is being 4 removed is instantly snuffed in the deep confined insulated arcing chamber 5 A detent spring forms a parallel 5 grounding path through the metallic plug sleeve and receptacle housing and is the first contact to make and the last to break
6 The plug sleeve is keyed to the receptacle to prevent mispolarization 7 The gasketing system provides unsurpassed watertight integrity (NEMA 4) 8 All aluminum Uni-Shell construction provides superior strength in abusive environments 9 The Tri-Lock cable grip has three clamps which provide even gripping and superior cord clamping 10 0 The unique Sure-Seal cable gland provides a complete environmental seal around the cable (NEMA 4) 1 Wrenching surfaces make Arktite plugs 11 quick and easy to assemble
1P
1230
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Grounding: Style 1 vs. Style 2
NEMA 4 Watertight
1P
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Arktite devices utilize two methods, or styles, for completing the grounding circuit in plugs and receptacles. NEC reference 250.138 (A) & (B).
Style 1 Metallic
A Style 1 plug is one in which the grounding conductor in the flexible cable is bonded to the plug sleeve by a pressure connector. A Style 1 receptacle is one which is grounded by virtue of the fact that it is an integral part of a grounded conduit system. On insertion, the plug sleeve makes contact with detent springs of the grounded receptacle housing before line and load poles engage, and on withdrawal, remains in contact until after line and load poles disengage. Therefore, exposed metal parts of the portable equipment or plug are suitably grounded.
Style 2 Metallic
A Style 2 metallic housing plug is one in which the grounding conductor in the flexible cable is bonded to the extra (grounding) pole and metal plug sleeve by a pressure connector. A Style 2 metallic housing receptacle is one in which the extra (grounding) pole is electrically connected to the equipment grounding conductor and the metal receptacle housing which itself is grounded by virtue of the fact that it is an integral part of a grounded conduit system. In Style 2, nonmetallic housing plugs and receptacles, the extra pole is used for grounding since the housings are non-conductive.
Style 2 Non-metallic
In a Style 2 receptacle, the grounding connection is made before line and load poles engage, and is broken after the line load poles disengage. Furthermore, upon insertion, the plug sleeve of metal shelled units makes contact with detent springs of the grounded receptacle housing before line and load poles engage, and on withdrawal, remains in contact until after line and load poles disengage. Therefore, exposed metal parts of the portable equipment or plug are suitably grounded.
Made of non-metallic Krydon material
Metal shelled type
1P
Style 1 Ground conductor attaches to shell.
Style 2 Ground conductor attaches to contact, which is bonded to shell.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1231
1P

NEMA 4 Watertight
Standard Materials:
Metallic receptacle housings, plug and cord connector bodies high impact strength copper-free aluminum Non-metallic receptacles, plugs and cord connectors Krydon fiberglassreinforced polyester material Back boxes: 20, 30, 60, 100, 150 and 200 ampere cast aluminum; 400 ampere Feraloy iron alloy Insulation (metallic products): (2-, 3-, and 4-pole) 30, 60, 100, 200, 400 ampere fiberglass-reinforced polyester; 20, 30 ampere (5-pole) melamine Contacts: pressure, solder, binding screw brass; crimp/solder 20, 30, 60, 100 ampere leaded red brass; crimp/solder 150, 200, 400 ampere telurium copper Arktite receptacles have a cast raised rib located inside the receptacle sleeve. The location of the rib is in a specific relationship to the receptacle insulator that houses the contacts.
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Aluminum natural Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester material gray Fiberglass-reinforced polyester insulation (red) Melamine natural (brown) Brass natural Leaded red brass electro-tin-plate The mating plug has a cast groove located on the outside of the plug sleeve. This groove lines up with the raised rib.
Accessories:
Accessories include a variety of angle adapters, panel adapters and back boxes for Arktite receptacles. See pages 12501253. Included throughout 1P are wire mesh cable grips and protective caps for Arktite plugs.
Options:
The following special options are available from factory by adding the suffix to the Cat. #: Description Suffix Reversed contacts. Receptacle assembled with plug interior (exposed contacts), plug assembled with receptacle interior (recessed contacts). For applications where plug is energized to feed normally de-energized receptacle. Available on 30 through 400 ampere units... S22 Special polarity. For use where two or more receptacles of the same ampere rating, style and number of poles are to be installed in the same area for use on different voltages and/or frequencies. Prevents insertion of a plug in a receptacle with different electrical rating. Available on 20 through 400 ampere units as follows: Receptacle interior rotated 221/2 to right and plug changed to match (see photo to right)..............S4 Corro-free epoxy powder finish for added corrosion resistance...... S752
1P
150A, 200A and 400A rated units are for service disconnect use only.
1232
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Arktite Horsepower Ratings
Locked-Rotor Interrupting
Motor Horsepower Ampere Rating 120 240 480 Plug and Receptacle Volts Volts Volts Single-phase Electrical System 30 2 3 7.5 60 5 10 25 100 10 20 200 15 40 Three-phase Electrical System 30 3 60 10 100 15 200 30 5 20 30 60 10 40 40 25 600 Volts 10 20
NEMA 4 Watertight
1P
Maximum Horsepower for Plug and Receptacle Combinations by Input Voltage*

Following values are typical horsepower ratings based on NEC Article 430 tables. HP Ratings are based on the largest conductor size for each plug and receptacle combination per the Wire Size table below. Ampere Rating Plug and Receptacle 10 50 25 15 30 60 100 150 200 Motor Horsepower 240 480 600 Volts Volts Volts 15 20 30 40 60 30 40 60 75 125 40 50 75 100 150
Wire Sizes:
The table below lists the diameter of the wire recess in Arktite plug and receptacle contacts so that maximum size of bare conductor can be figured. Range of wire sizes shown in table is intended only as a guide. Depending on type of wire used (building wire, flexible or extra flexible cable) and its construction (number and size of strands), bare copper diameters vary widely.
Diameter of Wire Recess in Plug and Receptacle Contacts

Ampere Rating 20 30 (2, 3, & 4-pole) 30 (2, 3, & 4-pole) 30 (5-pole) 60 (2, 3, 4 & 5-pole) 60 (3 & 4-pole) 100 (2, 3 & 4-pole) 100 (3 & 4-pole) 150 (4-pole) 200 (3 & 4-pole) 200 (Std. 3 & 4-pole) 200 (Lg. 3 & 4-pole) 400 (Std. 3 & 4-pole) 400 (Lg. 3 & 4-pole) Contact Type Binding Screw Pressure Crimp/Solder Solder Pressure Crimp/Solder Pressure Crimp/Solder Pressure Pressure Crimp/Solder Crimp/Solder Crimp/Solder Crimp/Solder Diameter of Recess N/A .281 .180 .188 .312 .277 .390 .390 .390 .687 .560 .750 .840 1.25 Wire Size Building #14#12 #10#6 #10#8** #12#6 #6#4 #6#4** #4#1 #2#1** #22/0 2/04/0 #14/0 4/0250MCM 250500MCM 5001000MCM Extra Flex #14#12 #10#8 #10#8 #12#8 #8#4 #8#4 #4#2 #2#2 #21/0 2/03/0 #13/0 3/0250MCM 250400MCM 400750MCM
150A, 200A and 400A rated units are for service disconnect use only. Horsepower ratings are based on Cooper Crouse-Hinds testing in which locked-rotor currents were interrupted by withdrawing the plug from the receptacle. It is highly recommended, however, that such use be limited to emergency conditions only; and that a horsepower rated switch be used for motor disconnect. * This guide is for reference only. Consult your local electrical codes before installation. Cooper Crouse-Hinds does not recommend our plug and receptacle be used for disconnect under load. **Smaller sizes may be used with well reducers information available upon request. Do not use wire size smaller than minimum size recommended.
1P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1233
1P
1P
1234
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Arktite Heavy Duty Circuit Breaking Receptacles, Plugs and Connectors

20 A, 600 VAC/250 VDC, 50** 400 hertz
NEMA 4 Watertight
1P
Receptacle with Back Box

Config. 2W 2P Hub Size
1 1
Descrip. Spring Door Threaded Cap Spring Door Threaded Cap
Cat. # ARE2211 ARE2271 ARE2212 ARE2272
/2 /2 /4 /4
2W 2P
3 3
Receptacle
Config. 2W 2P Descrip. Spring Door Threaded Cap Cat. # AR221 AR227
Plug
Config. 2W 2P Cable Dia. Descrip. .250.500 .250.500 2W 2P .500.875 .500.875 Fastening Ring Without Fastening Ring Fastening Ring Without Fastening Ring Cat. # APJ2271 APJ2251 APJ2273 APJ2253
Connector
Config. 2W 2P Cable Dia. Descrip. .250.500 .500.850 Connector Connector Cat. # APR2251 APR2253
Dimensions
In Inches:
1P
Hub size a 1 11 /2 /16 3 13 /4 /16 ARE Assembly AR Receptacle Spring Door AR Receptacle Open and With Cap APJ Plug
Note: For listing of additional back boxes, see page 1251. **When used on systems less than 60 hertz, the receptacles, plugs and connectors are for disconnect use only.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1235
1P
Arktite Heavy Duty Circuit Breaking Receptacle Assemblies and Housings

30 A, 600 VAC/250 VDC, 50 400 hertz
NEMA 4 Watertight
Receptacle Assembly With ARE Back Boxes Hub Spring Door Size (In.) Cat. #
1 3
Receptacle Receptacle Housings Only Spring Door Cat. # Threaded Cap Only Cat. #
Mating Plug Mating APJ Plugs Cat. # Cable Dia.
Mating Connector Mating APR Connectors Cat. # Cable Dia.
Description
Style 1
} 3-wire, 3-pole } 4-wire, 4-pole } 5-wire, 5-pole }

2-wire, 2-pole
/2 /4
3 /4 1
ARE3211 ARE3212 ARE3312 ARE3313 ARE3412 ARE3413 ARE3513
AR321 AR331 AR341 AR351
AR327 AR337 AR347
APJ3275 APJ3375 APJ3475 APJ3573
0.39 to 1.20 0.39 to 1.20 0.39 to 1.20 .500 to .875
APR3255 APR3355 APR3455 APR3553
0.39 to 1.20 0.39 to 1.20 0.87 to 1.20 .500 to .875
/4 1
3
Style 2
} 3-wire, 4-pole } 4-wire, 5-pole }

2-wire, 3-pole
3 /4 1
ARE3322 ARE3323 ARE3422 ARE3423 ARE3523
AR332 AR342 AR352
AR338 AR348
APJ3385 APJ3485 APJ3583 APJ3585
.0.39 to 1.20 0.39 to 1.20 .500 to .875 .875 to 1.375
APR3365 APR3465 APR3563 APR3565
.0.39 to 1.20 0.39 to 1.20 .500 to .875 .875 to 1.375
/4 1
3
Dimensions
In Inches:
ARE Assembly
AR Receptacle Spring Door
Plug
1P
AR Receptacle Open and With Cap

For use on systems less than 60 hertz the receptacles, plugs and connectors are for disconnect use only.
Connector
1236
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

30 A, 600 VAC/250 VDC, 50 400 hertz
Plug Closure Caps: Applications:
CPK caps for Arktite plugs are used: Where portable equipment is on a standby basis and plugs are not in use To effectively protect insulation and contacts from excessive moisture, dirt, dust and corrosion With 30, 60, 100, 150 and 200 ampere plugs with fastening ring and standard 200 ampere plugs for the clamp door housing
NEMA 4 Watertight
1P
Config. 2P & 3P & 4P 5P Cat. # CPK13 CPK32
Standard Materials:
Standard Finishes:
Natural
Replacement Parts:
Config. 2W 2W 3W 3W 4W 2P 3P 3P 4P 4P
Receptacle Interior ATP275 ATP278 ATP276 ATP279 ATP277 ATP125 ATP94
Plug Interior ATP270 ATP273 ATP271 ATP274 ATP272 ATP109 ATP73
Spring Door
Screw Cap
QE50
QE13
4W 5P 5W 5P
N/A
N/A
Replacement Pin & Sleeve Contacts:

Description Available as a kit only. 5 phase contacts & 1 ground contact included. Recep AR30CONKIT Plug AP30CONKIT
1P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1237
1P

60 A, 600 VAC/250 VDC, 50 400 hertz
NEMA 4 Watertight
Receptacle Assembly With AJ Back Boxes and Angle Adapters Hub Spring Door Threaded Cap Description Size (In.) Cat. # Only Cat. # With ARE Back Boxes Spring Door Cat. # ARE6213 ARE6214 ARE6313 ARE6314 ARE6414 ARE6415 AREA6574 AREA6575 AREA6323 AREA6324 AREA6424 AREA6425 AREA6584 AREA6585 ARE6323 ARE6324 ARE6424 ARE6425 AR632 AR642
Receptacle Receptacle Housing Only Spring Door Cat. # AR621 AR631 AR641 Threaded Cap Only Cat. # AR627 AR637 AR647 AR657 Cable Dia.
Mating Plug
Mating Connector
Cat. #
Cat. # APR6255 APR6355 APR6455
Style 1
} 3-wire, 3-pole } 4-wire, 4-pole } 5-wire, 5-pole }

2-wire, 2-pole
1 11/4 1 11/4 11/4 11/2 11/4 11/2 1 11/4 11/4 11/2 11/4 11/2
AREA6213 AREA6214 AREA6313 AREA6314 AREA6414 AREA6415
0.50 to 1.45 APJ6275 0.50 to 1.45 APJ6375 0.50 to 1.45 APJ6475 0.50 to 1.45 APJ6575
Style 2

2-wire, 3-pole
AR638 AR648 AR658
0.50 to 1.45 APJ6385 0.50 to 1.45 APJ6485 0.75 to 1.45 APJ6585
APR6365 APR6465 APR6585 APR6567
ARE Assembly
AR Receptacle Spring Door
APJ Plug
1P
AR Receptacle Open and With Cap
APR Connector
Config. 2P or 3P 4P 5P
Plug b c
Connector a b c
81/2 53/4 35/8 61/2 35/8 215/16 81/2 513/16 33/4 81/4 35/8 215/16 9 63/16 47/16 81/4 35/8 31/4
1238
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

60 A, 600 VAC/250 VDC, 50 400 hertz
NEMA 4 Watertight
1P
Config. 2P & 3P 4P Cat. # CPK32 CPK34
Standard Materials:
Standard Finishes:
Natural
Replacement Parts:
Config. 2W 2P 2W 3P 3W 3P 3W 4P 4W 4P 4W 5P 5W 5P
Receptacle Interior ATP295 ATP298 ATP296 ATP299 ATP297 ATP385 ATP384
Plug Interior ATP290 ATP293 ATP291 ATP294 ATP292 ATP387 ATP386
Spring Door
Screw Cap
QE51
QE32
QE52 N/A N/A
QE34
AR:11393B

Description Available as a kit only. 5 phase contacts & 1 ground contact included.
Recep AR60CONKIT
Plug AP60CONKIT
1P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1239
1P

100 A, 600 VAC/250 VDC, 50 400 hertz 150 A, 600 VAC/250 VDC, 50 400 hertz
NEMA 4 Watertight
Receptacle Assembly
Receptacle Receptacle Housings Only Spring Door Threaded Cap Cat. # Only Cat. #
Mating Plug Cable Dia.
Mating Connector
Description
Hub Size (In.) 11/4 11/2 1 /4 11/2

1
Spring Door Cat. # AREA10214 AREA10215 AREA10314 AREA10315 AREA10415 AREA10416 AREA10324 AREA10325 AREA10425 AREA10426
Cat. #
Cat. #
100A - Style 1

2-wire, 2-pole
AR1021 AR1031 AR1041
AR1027 AR1037 AR1047
0.875 to 1.70 0.875 to 1.70 0.875 to 1.70
APJ10277 APJ10377 APJ10477
APR10257 APR10357 APR10457
11/2 2 11/4 11/2 1 /2 2

1
100 A - Style 2
} 3-wire, 4-pole }
AR1032 AR1042
AR1038 AR1048
0.875 to 1.70 0.875 to 1.70
APJ10387 APJ10487
APR10367 APR10467
150 A - Style 2 *
AR1542
AR1548
0.875 to 1.70
APJ15487
ARE Assembly
AR Receptacle Spring Door No. Poles 2 or 3 4 f

9 13
APJ Plug No. Poles 3 4 b 6 /16 65/8

9
c 33/4 41/8
/32 /32
No. Poles 2 or 3 4 2 or 3 4
Housing open open with cap with cap
c 33/16 37/16 311/16 37/8
1P
No. Poles 3 4
b 33/8 31/2
c 33/16 37/16 AR Receptacle Open and With Cap APR Connector
For use on systems less than 60 hertz the receptacles, plugs and connectors are for disconnect use only. * For 150A - Consult factory for additional options and configurations. Consult factory for certifications information.
1240
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

100 A, 600 VAC/250 VDC, 50 400 hertz 150 A, 600 VAC/250 VDC, 50 400 hertz
NEMA 4 Watertight
1P
Config. 2P & 3P 4P Cat. # CPK62 CPK64
Standard Materials:
Standard Finishes:
Natural
Replacement Parts:
Receptacle Interior Config. 2W 2P 2W 3P 3W 3P 3W 4P 4W 4P 4W 5P 5W 5P Receptacle Interior ATP315 ATP318 ATP316 ATP319 ATP317 N/A N/A
Plug Interior Plug Interior ATP310 ATP313 ATP311 ATP314 ATP312 N/A N/A
Spring Door Spring Door QE53
Screw Cap Screw Cap QE62
QE54 N/A
QE64 N/A

Description Available as a kit only. 5 phase contacts & 1 ground contact included. Recep AR100CONKIT Plug AP100CONKIT
1P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1241
1P
Arktite Heavy Duty Circuit Breaking Receptacle Assemblies

200 A, 600 VAC/250 VDC, 50 400 hertz
NEMA 3R
See pages 12301233 for general Application, Features, Grounding, Standard Materials, Standard Finishes, Options, Accessories, Compliances, Electrical Rating Ranges, and Wire Sizes.

Features:
Grounding contact wire terminators will accommodate ground wire of same size as phase wire Spring band contact design provides multiple points of electrical contact. Improves electrical reliability and significantly reduces effort required for insertion and withdrawal Crimp/solder and mechanical lug type contacts are available Large wire wells are available for "extra flexible" wire Larger wire well size connectors will interchange with connectors of other wire well size of same amperage and contact configuration Mechanical lug connectors will interchange with crimp/solder connectors of the same amperage and contact configuration Self-closing spring doors on receptacles and cord connectors provide environmental sealing Threaded nuts provide positive plug retention Two piece plug and cord connector design provide easy installation 1. For listing of additional back boxes, see page 1251. 2. S22 suffix for reverse interiors is available from factory only. Field conversion cannot be done. 3. Replacement interiors for standard units vs. S22 units vary in length. Specify the unit type when ordering parts.
Config. 3P 4P Cat. # CPK102 CPK104
Standard Materials:
Standard Finishes:
Natural
Wire Mesh Grips: Applications:

Wire mesh grips are used: To provide secure cable termination To extend cable life With 20, 200 and 400 ampere plugs
Dimensions
In Inches:
Features:
Eliminate sharp radius of cable bend at the point where cable enters plug, thereby reducing cable failure Absorb longitudinal stresses placed on the point of termination caused by pulling the cable Gripping action increases in direct proportion to amount of tension applied to cable
Standard Material and Finishes:

Stainless steel wire braid Natural
Plug Cable Range AREA Assembly 1.375 to 1.875 1.875 to 2.500 Nominal Grip LengthInches Grip Range 1.375 to 1.625 8 1.625 to 1.875 11 1.875 to 2.000 10 2.000 to 2.250 113/4 Grip Cat. # K163 K188 K200 K225
1P
AR Receptacle No. Poles 3 4 c d
AP Plug
APR Connector
43/16 31/4 49/16 35/8
For use on system less than 60 hertz the receptacles, plugs and connectors are for disconnect use only.
1242
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

200 A, 600 VAC/250 VDC, 50 400 hertz
NEMA 3R
1P
Ordering Information - Mechanical Lug Termination:
Receptacle Assembly Receptacle Assembly with AJ Back Boxes and Angle Adapters Hub Description Size (In.) Cat. #
Receptacle w/ Mechanical Lug Receptacle Housings only Cable Cat. # Dia. 0.875 to 1.375 1.375 to 1.875 1.875 to 2.500 0.875 1.375 1.875 2.500 to to to to 1.375 1.875 2.500 3.000
Mating Plug
Mating Connector
Plug Cat. # APL20355 APL20357 APL20358 APL20455 APL20457 APL20458 APL20451 APL20365 APL20367 APL20368 APL20465 APL20467 APL20468
Connector Cat. # APRL20315 APRL20317 APRL20318 APRL20415 APRL20417 APRL20418 APRL204113 APRL20325 APRL20327 APRL20328 APRL20425 APRL20427 APRL20428
Style 1 Wire Well Takes 0.687" Maximum Conductor Size AREAL20315 11/2 3-wire, 2 AREAL20316 ARL2031 3-pole 21/2 AREAL20317 4-wire, 4-pole 2 21/2 AREAL20416 AREAL20417 ARL2041
Style 2 Wire Well Takes 0.687" Maximum Conductor Size 11/2 AREAL20325 2-wire, 2 AREAL20326 ARL2032 3-pole 21/2 AREAL20327 3-wire, 4-pole 11/2 2 21/2 AREAL20425 AREAL20426 AREAL20427 ARL2042
0.875 to 1.375 1.375 to 1.875 1.875 to 2.500 0.875 to 1.375 1.375 to 1.875 1.875 to 2.500
Ordering Information - Crimp/Solder Termination:

Receptable Assembly with AJ Back Boxes and Receptacle Housings only Angle Adapters Hub Cable Description Size (In.) Cat. # Cat. # Dia. Style 1 Wire Well Takes 0.56" Maximum Conductor Size 11/2 AREA20315 0.875 to 1.375 3-wire, 2 AREA20316 1.375 to 1.875 AR2031 3-pole 1 2 /2 AREA20317 1.875 to 2.500 4-wire, 4-pole 2 21/2 AREA20416 AREA20417 AR2041 0.875 to 1.375 1.375 to 1.875 1.875 to 2.500 Plug Cat. # AP20355 AP20357 AP20358 AP20455 AP20457 AP20458 Connector Cat. # APR20315 APR20317 APR20318 APR20415 APR20417 APR20418
Style 1 Wire Well Takes 0.75" Maximum Conductor Size 11/2 AREA203125 3-wire, 2 AREA203126 AR20312 3-pole 21/2 AREA203127 4-wire, 4-pole 2 21/2 AREA204126 AREA204127 AR20412
1.375 to 1.875 1.875 to 2.500 1.375 to 1.875 1.875 to 2.500 2.500 to 3.000 0.875 to 1.375 1.375 to 1.875 1.875 to 2.500 0.875 to 1.375 1.375 to 1.875 1.875 to 2.500 0.875 to 1.375 1.375 to 1.875 1.875 to 2.500 1.375 to 1.875 1.875 to 2.500
AP203511 AP203512 AP204511 AP204512 AP204513 AP20365 AP20367 AP20368 AP20465 AP20467 AP20468 AP203610 AP203611 AP203612 AP204611 AP204612
APR203111 APR203112 APR204111 APR204112 APR204113 APR20325 APR20327 APR20328 APR20425 APR20427 APR20428 APR203210 APR203211 APR203212 APR204211 APR204212
Style 2 Wire Well Takes 0.56" Maximum Conductor Size 11/2 AREA20325 2-wire, 2 AREA20326 AR2032 3-pole 21/2 AREA20327 3-wire, 4-pole 11/2 2 21/2 AREA20425 AREA20426 AREA20427 AR2042
1P
Style 2 Wire Well Takes 0.75" Maximum Conductor Size 11/2 AREA203225 2-wire, 2 AREA203226 AR20322 3-pole 1 2 /2 AREA203227 3-wire, 4-pole 11/2 2 21/2 AREA204225 AREA204226 AREA204227 AR20422
For use on system less than 60 hertz the receptacles, plugs and connectors are for disconnect use only. www.crouse-hinds.com US: 1-866-764-5454 CAN: 1-800-265-0502 Copyright 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds
1243
1P

200 A, 600 VAC/250 VDC, 50 400 hertz
Weatherproof
200A Replacement Parts
Receptacle Interior .56 wire well Config. Cat. # 200A Standard and S4 ATP401 2W 3P 3W 3P ATP397 3W 4P ATP403 4W 4P ATP399 200A ST22 and S4 S22 2W 3P ATP417 3W 3P ATP413 3W 4P ATP419 4W 4P ATP415 .75 wire well Cat. # ATP402 ATP398 ATP404 ATP400 ATP418 ATP414 ATP420 ATP416
Plug Interior .56 wire well Cat. # ATP433 ATP429 ATP435 ATP431 ATP449 ATP445 ATP451 ATP447 .75 wire well Cat. # ATP434 ATP430 ATP436 ATP432 ATP450 ATP446 ATP452 ATP448
Brass Retaining Shoe .56 wire well Cat. # 0490335 0490327 0490337 0490331 0490335 0490327 0490337 0490331 .75 wire well Cat. # 0490335 0490328 0490337 0490332 0490335 0490328 0490337 0490332
Cord Grip Assembly Cord Diameter Range .875 1.375 AP2 KIT1 M80 1.375 1.875 AP2 KIT2 M80 1.875 2.500 AP2 KIT3 M80 Plug Clamp Nut 2W 3P 3W 3P 2W 3P 3W 4P AP:0401965 AP:0401964 Rec Spring Door AR:0401502-2 AR:0401502-1

Type 200A Standard & S4 Phase Contact Ground Contact 200A S22 & S4 S22 Phase Contact Ground Contact 200A Mechanical Lug Phase Contact Ground Contact Receptacle Cat. # Cat. # .56 wire well .75 wire well 0490339 0490343 .56 wire well 0490351 0490347 .687 wire well 0403688 0403687 0490340 0490344 .75 wire well 0490352 0490348 Plug Cat. # .56 wire well 0490319 0490323 .56 wire well 0490355T 0490359 .687 wire well 0403678 0403677 Cat. # .75 wire well 0490320 0490324 .75 wire well 0490356 0490360
1P
For use on system less than 60 hertz the receptacles, plugs and connectors are for disconnect use only.
1244
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Arktite Heavy Duty Receptacle Assemblies

400 A, 600 VAC/250 VDC, 50400 hertz
Features:
Grounding contact wire terminators will accommodate ground wire of same size as phase wire Spring band contact design provides multiple points of electrical contact. Improves electrical reliability and significantly reduces effort required for insertion and withdrawal Crimp/solder type contacts are standard Large wire wells are available for "extra flexible" wire Larger wire well size connectors will interchange with connectors of other wire well size of same amperage and contact configuration Self-closing spring doors on receptacles and cord connectors provide environmental sealing Threaded nuts provide positive plug retention Two piece plug and cord connector design provide easy installation For disconnect use only not for current interrupting 1. For listing of additional back boxes, see page 1251. Illustration shows 3 blank plates and 1 hub plate. 2. S22 suffix for reverse interiors is available from factory only. Field conversion cannot be done. 3. Replacement interiors for standard units vs. S22 units vary in length. Specify the unit type when ordering parts.
Weatherproof
1P
Wire Mesh Grips: Applications:

Wire mesh grips are used: To provide secure cable termination To extend cable life With 20, 200 and 400 ampere plugs
Features:
Eliminate sharp radius of cable bend at the point where cable enters plug, thereby reducing cable failure Absorb longitudinal stresses placed on the point of termination caused by pulling the cable Gripping action increases in direct proportion to amount of tension applied to cable
Standard Material and Finishes:

Stainless steel wire braid Natural
Plug Cable Range 1.375 to 1.875 1.875 to 2.500 Grip Range 1.375 to 1.625 1.625 to 1.875 1.875 to 2.000 2.000 to 2.250 Nominal Grip LengthInches 8 11 10 113/ 4 Grip Cat. # K163 K188 K200 K225
Dimensions
In Inches:
AP Plugs
1P
AR Receptacles
APR Connectors
AREX Assemblies
Description With blank hub plate With hub plate max. a /16 45/8
5
No. Poles 3 4
c 53/16 513/16
d 43/16 411/16
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1245
1P
Arktite Heavy Duty Receptacle Assemblies

400 A, 600 VAC/250 VDC, 50400 hertz
Weatherproof
Receptacle Assembly With AJ Back Boxes and Angle Adapters Hub Spring Door Description Size (In.) Cover Cat. # 3-wire, 3-pole 4-wire, 4-pole 21/2 3 21/2 3 3 31/2 4 4 5 2 21/2 3 21/2 3 3 31/2 4 4 5 AREX40317 AREX40318 AREX40417 AREX40418 AREX403128 AREX403129 AREX4031210 AREX4041210 AREX4041212 AREX40326 AREX40327 AREX40328 AREX40427 AREX40428 AREX403228 AREX403229 AREX4032210 AREX4042210 AREX4042212
Receptacle Receptacle Housings only Spring Door Cat. #
Mating Plug
Mating Connector
Cable Dia. 1.375 to 1.875 1.875 to 2.500 1.375 to 1.875 1.875 to 2.500 2.500 to 3.000 3.000 to 3.800 2.500 to 3.000 3.000 to 3.800 1.375 to 1.875 1.875 to 2.500 1.375 to 1.875 1.875 to 2.500 2.500 to 3.000 3.000 to 3.500 2.500 to 3.000 3.000 to 3.500
Plug Cat. # AP40357 AP40358 AP40457 AP40458 AP403510 AP403512 AP404510 AP404512 AP40367 AP40368 AP40467 AP40468 AP403610 AP403612 AP404610 AP404612
Connector Cat. # APR40317 APR40318 APR40417 APR40418 APR403110 APR403112 APR404110 APR404112 APR40327 APR40328 APR40427 APR40428 APR403210 APR403212 APR404210 APR404212
Style 1 Wire Well Takes .84" Maximum Conductor Size

AR4031 AR4041
Style 1 Wire Well Takes 1.25" Maximum Conductor Size

3-wire, 3-pole 4-wire, 4-pole AR40312
AR40412
Style 2 Wire Well Takes .84" Maximum Conductor Size

2-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 4-pole AR4032
AR4042
Style 2 Wire Well Takes 1.25" Maximum Conductor Size

2-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 4-pole AR40322 AR40422
1P
Hub plates and blank plates may be interchanged to permit conduit feed from bottom or sides.
1246
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Non-metallic Arktite Heavy Duty Circuit Breaking Plugs and Receptacles

Made of Krydon Material, 600 VAC/250 VDC, 50400 hertz
Applications:
Arktite circuit breaking plugs, receptacles, cord connectors and motor plugs are used: To supply power to portable electrical devices such as welders, motors, pumps, conveyors and other similar equipment Where electrical loads must be quickly disconnected from power sources In areas where severe corrosion hose down, moisture, dirt and dust are problems Indoors and outdoors in non-hazardous areas of chemical plants, sewage treatment facilities, cement plants, pulp and paper plants, food processing plants and other similar industries
Watertight Corrosion-Resistant NEMA 4X
1P
Interchangeability of Plugs With Other Non-hazardous and Hazardous Location Receptacles:

Plugs listed for use with NRE/NREA assemblies are standard NPJ Arktite plugs. Other standard APJ and CPH plugs of the same rating, style and number of poles may be used with NR receptacles, as well as with AR and AREA, receptacles listed in Section 1P, with DR receptacles listed in Section 2P, with DBR, NBR, NSR, WSR, CSR, WSQC, and WSRD receptacles listed in Section 3P and with FSQ, EPC, FSQC, W2SR, C2SR and EPCB receptacles listed in Section 4P. Portable equipment, suitable for locations and equipped with the proper NPJ plug, can be used with nonhazardous AR receptacles; with DBR and WSR interlocked receptacles located in non-hazardous locations; with EPC, EPCB and FSQC receptacles for Class I, Groups B, C, D hazardous locations; with DR and DBR receptacles for Class II, Groups F, G hazardous locations; and with NBR/NSR, CSR interlocked receptacles for hose down and corrosive locations.
Features:
Plugs, receptacles, cord connectors, and motor plugs are molded of Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester material which is highly resistant to corrosion, heat, weathering and physical abuse 1 Molded of Krydon fiberglass-reinforced non-metallic material which is highly resistant to corrosion, heat, weathering, and physical abuse 2 Grounding contacts that make-first and break-last in the unlikely event of a keyway failure 3 Split-pin contact design provides 360 of electrical contact 4 Spring door provides environmental protection of receptacle (NEMA 4) 5 Keyed for a perfect match in the molded one-piece insulator housing 6 Sealing gaskets at all critical points inside Arktite plugs and receptacles protect against dust, dirt, mud, water, and corrosive contaminants 7 Plugs can be used in both hazardous and non-hazardous areas when used with appropriately rated Arktite receptacles 8 Total interchangeability with all existing Arktite products for comparable ratings and configurations 9 A unique patented strain relief design prevents stress from reaching wire terminations at the contacts
Standard Materials: Grounding:

NPJ plugs are Style 2, which includes a grounding conductor in the flexible cord or cable that is electrically connected to the extra (grounding) pole. NR receptacles are Style 2, in which the ground connection is made before line and load poles engage, and is broken after line and load poles disengage. The National Electrical Code and Canadian Electrical Code requires that under conditions favorable to corrosion, the grounding conductor for enclosures and equipment be of copper or other corrosion-resistant material in alternating current systems. This necessitates running another conductor, usually of copper, back to the common grounding electrode. This may be run through the conduit containing the circuit conductors. At the receptacle, this grounding conductor should be connected to the extra (grounding) pole by the pressure connector provided for that purpose. Where such an extra ground conductor is required, Style 2 receptacles should be used. Housing, interiors, spring doors, clamping rings Krydon fiberglassreinforced polyester material Gaskets and o-rings neoprene Cable clamping basket nylon Contacts pressure brass; crimp/solder leaded brass Snap-on cap molded elastomer Back boxes copper-free aluminum
Standard Finishes:
Krydon material natural (gray) Neoprene natural Elastomer natural Brass natural Leaded red brass electro-tin-plated Aluminum natural Stainless steel natural

UL Standard: 1682 UL 1010 hazardous locations (NPJ plug only) Wet and damp locations, watertight CSA Standard C22.2 No. 182.1
Options:
Description Suffix Alternate polarization (4-pole plugs and receptacles only) receptacle interior rotated 221/2 to right and plug changed to match................. S4 Crimp/solder terminals......... T Corro-free epoxy powder coat on back boxes and Information angle adapters...................... on request
1P
Wet and damp locations when used with spring door or snap-on cap, watertight when used with QE threaded cap.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1247
1P

Made of Krydon Material, 30 A, 60 A and 100 A 600 VAC/250 VDC, 50 400 hertz
Watertight Corrosion-Resistant NEMA 4X
NREA Receptacle Assembly
NRE Receptacle Mating Plugs Mating Connectors Motor Plugs
Amps
Description 2-wire, 3-pole
Hub Size (In.) /4 1 3 /4 1

3
Snap-on Cap/ Spring Door Cat. # NRE3322 NRE3323 NRE3422 NRE3423 NRE6323 NRE6324 NRE6424 NRE6425 NREA10324 NREA10325 NREA10425 NREA10426
Snap-on Cap/ Spring Door Cat. # NR332 NR342 NR632 NR642 NR1032 NR1042
Cord Dia.
Plug Cat. #
Cord Connector Cat. # NPR3363 NPR3364 NPR3463 NPR3464 NPR6364 NPR6365 NPR6464 NPR6465 NPR10366 NPR10367 NPR10466 NPR10467
Motor Plug Cat. # NPQ338 NPQ348 NPQ638 NPQ648 NPQ1038 NPQ1048
0.550.70 NPJ3383 0.700.85 NPJ3384 0.550.70 NPJ3483 0.700.85 NPJ3484 0.751.07 NPJ6384 1.071.35 NPJ6385 0.751.07 NPJ6484 1.071.35 NPJ6485 0.93-1.21 1.21-1.50 0.93-1.21 1.21-1.50 NPJ10386 NPJ10387 NPJ10486 NPJ10487
30 3-wire, 4-pole 2-wire, 3-pole 60 3-wire, 4-pole 2-wire, 3-pole 100 3-wire, 4-pole
1 11/4 1 /4 11/2
1
1 /4 11/2
1
11/2 2
For use on systems less than 60 hertz the receptacles, plugs and connectors are for disconnect use only. Wet and damp locations when used with spring door or snap-on cap, watertight when used with QE threaded cap. Krydon Arktite Receptacles are supplied with both a spring door and snap-on cap. AJ back boxes are square, making it possible to install with hub in several positions.
1P
1248
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Made of Krydon Material, 30 A, 60 A and 100 A 600 VAC/250 VDC, 50 400 hertz
Dimensions
In Inches:
Dimensions
1P
Fig. 1 30 A Receptacle Assemblies
Fig. 2 60 A Receptacle Assemblies
Fig. 3 60 and 100 A Receptacle Assemblies
Fig. 6 NPQ Motor Plugs
Fig. 4 Spring Door Housings
Fig. 5 Housings with Cap
Fig. 7 NPJ Plugs
NRE 30 and 60 A Assemblies Fig. 1 and 2

Hub Size 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2 Dimension a Dimension b 30 A 60 A 30 A 60 A
13 15
NREA 60 and 100 A Assemblies Fig. 3

Dim. a b c 60 A Hub Size 100 A Hub Size 11/4, 11/2 2 1, 11/4, 11/2 9 11 115/16 91/4 12 19/16 913/16 12 19/16 Fig. 8 NPR Cord Connectors
/16 /16
/16 13/16 15/16

15
17/8 2
29/16 25/8 211/16
NPQ Motor Plugs Fig. 6

Amps/Poles 30 / 3 or 4 60 / 3 or 4 100 / 3 or 4 Amps/Poles 30 / 3 or 4 60 / 3 60 / 4 100 / 3 100 / 4 Amps/Poles 30 / 3 or 4 60 / 3 60 / 4 100 / 3 100 / 4 a 81/2 91/2 91/2 111/4 111/4 a 87/8 93/4 93/4 111/2 111/2 a 23/4 31/2 31/2 b 33/8 41/4 41/4 b 7 613/16 613/16 73/4 73/4 b 29/16 215/16 31/4 33/16 37/16 c 215/16 45/16 57/16 c 33/16 35/8 4 4 41/4 c 25/8 215/16 215/16 35/16 35/16 1249
Housings - Fig. 4 and 5

Amps 30 No. Poles Housing 3 or 4 3 or 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 Spring Door Open Spring Door Spring Door Open Open Spring Door Spring Door Open Open a 31/4 213/16 41/2 41/2 41/16 41/16 53/4 53/4 55/16 55/16 b 33/8 33/8 41/4 41/4 41/4 41/4 41/4 41/4 41/4 41/4 c 29/16 215/16 31/4 33/16 37/16 d 23/ 4 23/4 31/ 2 31/2 31/2 31/2 31/2 31/2 31/2 31/2 e 1224 1224
5
NPJ Plugs Fig. 7 1P
60
/16-18 5 /16-18 5 /16-18 5 /16-18 /16-18 /16-18 5 /16-18 5 /16-18

5 5
100
NPR Cord Connectors Fig. 8
For use on systems less than 60 hertz the receptacles, plugs and disconnectors are for disconnect use only.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1P
AR Back Boxes and Accessories for 20, 30, & 60 A Receptacle Housings
ARRC
Dimensions see pages 12521253
ARE
AR 15 Angle Adapter
For ARRH and ARRC back boxes
For steel panel or cabinet
Hub Size /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2

1
20 / 30 A Cat. # ARE13 ARE23 ARE33
60 A Cat. #
Hub Size /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2

1
20 / 30 A Cat. # ARRC13 ARRC23 ARRC33
60 A Cat. #
Mounts On ARRH and ARRC back boxes ARRH and ARRC back boxes Steel panel or cabinet
Takes AR Receptacle Housings 20 and 30 amp. 60 amp. 60, 100 and 150 amp.
Cat. # AR30
ARE36 ARE46 ARE56
ARRC36 ARRC46 ARRC56
AR60 AR610
ARRH
ARD
Spring Door Assembly
Hub Size /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2

1
20 / 30 A Cat. # ARRH13 ARRH23 ARRH33
60 A Cat. #
Hub Size /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2

1
20 / 30 A Cat. # ARD13 ARD23 ARD33
60 A Cat. #
Used With 30 amp, 2, 3 & 4-pole 60 amp, 2 & 3-pole 60 amp, 4-pole 100 and 150 amp, 2 & 3-pole 100 and 150 amp, 4-pole
Cat. # QE50 QE51 QE52 QE53 QE54
ARRH36 ARRH46 ARRH56
ARD36 ARD46 ARD56
ARJ
ARJG
Cap and Chain
Hub Size
20 / 30 A Cat. # ARJ13 ARJ23 ARJ33
60 A Cat. #
Hub Size /2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2

1
20 / 30 A Cat. # ARJG13 ARJG23 ARJG33
60 A Cat. #
Used With 30 amp, 2, 3 & 4-pole 60 amp, 2 & 3-pole 60 amp, 4-pole 100 and 150 amp, 2 & 3-pole 100 and 150 amp, 4-pole
Cat. # QE13 QE32 QE34 QE62 QE64
1P
/2 3 /4 1 11/4 11/2
1
ARJ36 ARJ46 ARJ56
ARJG36 ARJG46 ARJG56
1250
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
AJ and AJC Back Boxes with Angle Adapters for 60, 100, 200 & 400 A Receptacle Housings AJX Assemblies and Component Parts For 200 and 400 A Receptacle Housings
Dimensions see pages 12521253
1P
AJX Assemblies
Back Box with Angle Adapter, 3 Blank Plates and 1 Hub Plate
Hub Size AJ Back Box with 60 / 100 / 150 A Angle Adapter AJ Back Box with 200 / 400 A Angle Adapter 2 21/2 3 31/2 4 5
400 A Cat. # AJX69 AJX79 AJX89 AJX929 AJX9210 AJX9212
AJX Component Parts

For use in making up assemblies with arrangements of hub plates (4 required) other than those listed.
AJC Back Box with 60 / 100 / 150 A AJA Angle Adapter
AJC Back Box with 200 A Angle Adapter
Back Box Type Back Box 400 A Angle Adapter 400 A
Angle Adapter Cat. # AJX99 AJ245
AJ and AJC Back Boxes

60, 100 & 150 A Hub Size Type One Hub Feed Thru One Hub 11/4" Feed Thru One Hub 1 1 /2" Feed Thru One Hub 2" Feed Thru One Hub 21/2" Feed Thru One Hub 3" Feed Thru Angle Adapter 1" Box Only AJ56* AJC56* AJ56* AJC56* AJ56* AJC56* AJ66 AJC66 Box & Adapter Assembly AJ37 AJC37 AJ47 AJC47 AJ57 AJC57 AJ67 AJC67 Box Only 200 A Box & Adapter Assembly Box Only 400 A Box & Adapter Assembly
Hub Plate AJ71* AJ71* AJ71* AJC71 AJ58 AJ68 AJ78 AJC78 AJ82* AJ82* AJ82* AJ69 AJ79 AJ89 AJA2 Hub Size 2 21/2 3 31/2 4 5 Hub Plate 400 A Cat. # YYP96 YYP97 YYP98 YYP99 YYP910 YYP9012
Blank Plate Blank Plate 400 A Cat. # YYP900
1P
AJA6
AJA1
*Reducer supplied with assembly. AJ and AJC back boxes are square, making it possible to install with hub in several positions. Use AJ69, AJ79 or AJ89 for cables up to 2 #350MCM, 3 #300MCM or 4 #250MCM. For larger cables, use AJX69, etc., listed under assemblies.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1251
1P
Back Boxes
Dimensions
Dimensions (In Inches): ARE Back Boxes
AJX Back Body 400 Amperes
20, 30 A Cat. # 13 23 33 36 46 56 Rating 20, 30 A 20, 30 A 20, 30 A 60 A 60 A 60 A Size /2 3 /4 1 1 11/4 11/2

1
60 A a 127/32 127/32 131/32 29/ 16 25/8 211/16 b /16 /16 15 /16 15 / 16 13/16 15/16
11 13
Hub Plate - 400 Amperes
ARJG Back Boxes
Cat. # YYP96 YYP97 YYP98 YYP99 YYP910 YYP9012 Cat. # 13 23 33 36 46 56 Rating 20, 30 A 20, 30 A 20, 30 A 60 A 60 A 60 A Size
1 3
Hub Size 2 21/2 3 31/2 4 5
"A" 33/4 37/8 37/8 37/8 37/8 45/8
"B" 111/16 25/16 25/16 29/16 213/16 37/16
a 33/8 33/8 33/8 41/4 41/4 41/4
b 415/32 415/32 419/32 55/8 511/16 53/4
c 23/4 23/4 23/4 411/16 411/16 411/16
d 41/4 41/4 41/4 51/4 51/4 51/4
e 13/8 13/8 13/8 15/8 15/8 15/8
h Dia. /32 /32 11 /32 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8

11 11
AJ Angle Adapter
/2 /4 1 1 11/4 11/2
AJ and AJC
With 60, 100, 150, 200 and 400 Ampere Angle Adapters
1P
Cat. # 37, 47, 57 67 58, 68, 78 69, 79, 89
Rating 60, 100 A 60, 100 A 200 A 400 A
Size 1, 11/4, 11/2 2 11/2, 2, 21/2 2, 21/2, 3
a 57/8 57/8 8 9
b 8 8 103/4 115/8
c 77/16 8 97/8 1113/16
d 47/8 47/8 63/4 73/4
e 7 7 91/2 103/8
f 15 15 45 45
1252
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Back Boxes
Dimensions
ARRC and ARRH Back Boxes AR30 and AR60 Angle Adapters
1P
Cat. # Cat. # 13 23 33 36 46 56 Rating 20 20 20 60 60 60 / 30 A / 30 A / 30 A A A A Size

1 3
Rating 20 / 30 A 60 A
a 33/8 41/4
b 41/8 415/16
a 33/8 33/8 33/8 41/4 41/4 41/4
b 55/16 55/16 55/16 61/2 61/2 61/2
c 25/8 25/8 25/8 31/2 31/2 31/2
d 49/16 49/16 49/16 53/4 53/4 53/4
e 21/4 21/4 21/4 31/8 31/8 31/8
f Dia. /32 /32 11 /32 7 /16 7 /16 7 /16

11 11
g /16 /16 15 /16 13/8 13/8 13/8

11 13
AR30 AR60
/2 /4 1 1 11/4 11/2
AR610 Angle Adapter
ARD Back Boxes
Cat. # 13 23 33 36 46 56
Rating 20 20 20 60 60 60 / 30 A / 30 A / 30 A A A A
Size /2 3 /4 1 1 11/4 11/2

1
a 33/8 33/8 33/8 41/4 41/4 41/4
b 55/16 55/16 55/16 71/16 71/16 71/16
c 323/32 323/32 323/32 53/4 53/4 53/4
d 41/4 41/4 41/4 51/8 51/8 51/8
e 127/32 127/32 127/32 23/4 23/4 23/4
f Dia. /32 11 /32 11 /32 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8

11
g /16 /16 /16 15/16 15/16 15/16

11 13 15
ARJ Back Boxes
1P
Cat. # 13 23 33 36 46 56
Rating 20 20 20 60 60 60 / 30 A / 30 A / 30 A A A A
Size /2 3 /4 1 1 11/4 11/2

1
a 33/8 33/8 33/8 41/4 41/4 41/4
b 35/8 35/8 35/8 411/16 411/16 411/16
c 23/4 23/4 23/4 411/16 411/16 411/16
d 45/8 45/8 45/8 5 5 5
e 17/32 17/32 17/32 123/32 123/32 123/32
f 55/16 55/16 55/16 63/8 63/8 63/8
h Dia. /32 11 /32 11 /32 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8

11
j /16 /16 15 /16 15/16 15/16 15/16

15 15
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1253
1P
AR Arktite Circuit Breaking Round Flange Receptacle Housings for Panel Mounting
30/60/100/200 A, 600 VAC/250 VDC
Weatherproof For use with APJ and AP Plugs
Applications:
AR round flange receptacle housings are designed specifically for semi-flush mounting in sheet metal panels or cabinets.
Features:
Back boxes are not needed for these receptacle assemblies. Where wiring behind a panel is exposed and subject to either mechanical injury or contact by personnel, suitable shields or guards should be provided.
APJ Plugs with cable grip, neoprene bushing and fastening ring

UL Standard: 1682
AR Receptacle housings with round flange and threaded cap
APJ Plugs with cable grip, neoprene bushing and fastening ring
Standard Materials:
Receptacle housings copper-free aluminum Plug exteriors copper-free aluminum Insulation: 30, 60, 100, 200 ampere fiberglass-reinforced polyester Pressure and solder contacts brass Crimp/solder contacts leaded red brass
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum natural Brass natural Fiberglass-reinforced polyester natural (red) Leaded red brass electro-tin-plate
Options:
Description Suffix Available with these assemblies are: Reversed interiors........................... S22 Special polarity............................... S4 See page 1232 for details. For general information on application, features and grounding, see pages 1230-1233.
1P
1254
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
AR Arktite Circuit Breaking Round Flange Receptacle Housings for Panel Mounting
30/60/100/200 A, 600 VAC/250 VDC
Recept. Amps Style Description Cat. # 1 30 2 3-wire, 3-pole* 4-wire, 4-pole* 3-wire, 4-pole* 3-wire, 3-pole* 4-wire, 4-pole* 3-wire, 4-pole* 3-wire, 3-pole* 4-wire, 4-pole* 3-wire, 4-pole* 3-wire, 3-pole 2-wire, 3-pole Cable Dia. 0.60 to 1.20 0.60 to 1.20 0.60 to 1.20 0.75 to 1.45 0.75 to 1.45 0.75 to 1.45 1.00 to 1.70 1.00 to 1.70 1.00 to 1.70 Plug Cat. # APJ3375 APJ3475 APJ3485 APJ6375 APJ6475 APJ6485 APJ10377 APJ10477 APJ10487
Weatherproof For use with APJ and AP Plugs
1P

AR Round Flange Receptacles
1 60 2
1 100 2 1 200 2
} } } } } } } } } } }
AR6337 AR6347 AR6348 AR6637 AR6647 AR6648 AR61037 AR61047 AR61048 AR62031
AR62032
{ {
.875 to 1.375 AP20355 1.875 to 2.500 AP20358
Description 30 amp. 2, 3, 4-pole 60 amp. 2, 3-pole 60 amp. 4-pole 100 amp. 2, 3-pole 100 amp. 4-pole 200 amp. 3-pole
a 2 2 2 2 2 33/8
b 1224 1224 1224 1224 1224 3 /8-16
c 43/4 43/4 43/4 43/4 43/4 73/4
d 27/16 213/16 31/8 31/16 35/16 43/16
e 15/8 17/8 17/8 17/8 17/8 27/8
f 21/4 33/8 33/8 49/16 49/16 51/8
.875 to 1.375 AP20365 1.875 to 2.500 AP20368
Style 1 Grounded through shell. Style 2 Grounded through extra pole and shell. 200 ampere size is provided with clamp cover. *Pressure connectors are standard. Crimp/solder type terminators are optionally available for 2, 3 and 4-pole 30 ampere, 3 and 4-pole 60 and 100 ampere. For details, see page 1233. To specify, add the suffix "T" to the catalog number. For example: APJ3375-T (Plug) AR6337-T (Receptacle).
AP 200 A Plugs
APJ 30, 60 and 100 A Plugs
Amps 30 60 60 100 100 200
No. Poles 2, 3 or 4 2 or 3 4 2 or 3 4 3
a 61/2 81/2 81/2 101/8 101/8 143/4
b 413/16 53/4 513/16 69/16 65/8 1011/16
c 215/16 35/8 33/4 33/4 41/8 63/4
These dimensions are approximate and vary with cable size.
1P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1255
1P
APQ Arktite Circuit Breaking Motor Plugs

APJ Plugs, APR Cable Connector Receptacles 30/60/100 A, 250 VDC/600 VAC, 50 400 hertz
NEMA 4 Watertight
Applications:
APQ motor plugs are used: On portable electric equipment
Features:
Eliminates problem of storing and protecting a long length of portable cord and plug on portable device Connection to fixed receptacle used as power source is made with cord sets which may be hung on wall, out of the way Cord sets are made up using an APR receptacle at one end and an APJ plug at the other Cord sets may be used singly or connected together to provide longer lengths when needed With spare cord sets on hand, portable equipment may be kept in service while normal cord replacement is being made Where design of portable equipment permits, APQ motor plugs can be attached directly to a sheet metal panel or cabinet May be mounted on AR and AJ back boxes for conduit connection See typical installation diagram on next page
APR Cable Connector Receptacles with cable grip, neoprene bushing, and protected contacts.
APQ Motor Plugs with square flange, gaskets, fastening ring, and exposed contacts.
APJ Plugs with cable grip, neoprene bushing, exposed contacts, and fastening ring.
Amps Style 1 30 2 Description 2-wire,* 2-pole 3-wire,* 3-pole 2-wire,* 3-pole 3-wire,* 4-pole 2-wire,* 2-pole 1 60 2 3-wire,* 3-pole 4-wire,* 4-pole 2-wire,* 3-pole 3-wire,* 4-pole 2-wire,* 2-pole 1 100 2 3-wire,* 3-pole 4-wire,* 4-pole 2-wire,* 3-pole 3-wire,* 4-pole Plug Cat. # APJ3275 APJ3375 APJ3385 APJ3485 APJ6275 APJ6375 APJ6475 APJ6385 APJ6485 APJ10277 APJ10377 APJ10477 APJ10387 APJ10487 Cable Dia. 0.87 to 1.02 0.87 to 1.02 0.87 to 1.02 0.87 to 1.02 0.87 to 1.02 0.87 to 1.37 0.87 to 1.37 0.87 to 1.37 0.87 to 1.37 0.87 to 1.37 1.37 to 1.50 1.37 to 1.50 1.37 to 1.50 1.37 to 1.50 1.37 to 1.50 Cable Connector Receptacle Cat. # APR3255 APR3355 APR3455 APR3365 APR3465 APR6255 APR6355 APR6455 APR6365 APR6465 APR10257 APR10357 APR10457 APR10367 APR10467 Motor Plug Cat. # APQ327 APQ337 APQ347 APQ338 APQ348 APQ627 APQ637 APQ647 APQ638 APQ648 APQ1027 APQ1037 APQ1047 APQ1038 APQ1048

UL Standards: 1682 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 182.1
Standard Materials:
Motor plugs: mounting plate Feraloy, iron alloy; protective sleeve copper-free aluminum Plug and receptacle exteriors copper-free aluminum Back boxes copper-free aluminum Insulation fiberglass-reinforced polyester Pressure and solder contacts brass Crimp/solder contacts leaded red brass
4-wire,* 4 -pole APJ3475
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Copper-free aluminum natural Brass natural Fiberglass-reinforced polyester natural (red) Leaded red brass electro-tin-plate
Style 1 Grounded through shell. Style 2 Grounded through extra pole and shell. *Pressure connectors are standard. Crimp/solder type terminators are optionally available for 2, 3 and 4-pole 30 ampere, 3 and 4-pole 60 and 100 ampere. For details, see page 1233. To specify, add the suffix "T" to the catalog number. For example:APJ3375-T (Plug) AR6337-T (Receptacle).
1P
Options:
Available with these assemblies are: Description Suffix Special polarity .................................. S4 See page 1232 for details.
1256
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Typical Back Boxes

For APQ Arktite Circuit Breaking Motor Plugs
Weatherproof
1P
Typical back boxes used with APQ Motor Plugs
ARE
For APQ 30 Amp.
Hub Size
1 3
AJ
For APQ 60 and 100 Amp.
Cat. # ARE13 ARE23 ARE33 Hub Size 1 11/4 11/2 2 Cat. # AJ37 AJ47 AJ57 AJ67
/2 /4 1
For APQ 60 Amp.

Hub Size 1 11/4 11/2 Cat. # ARE36 ARE46 ARE56
Dimensions
In Inches:
APQ Motor Plugs

Amps 30 60 100 (2 & 3-pole) 100 (4-pole) a 23/4 31/2 31/2 31/2 b 33/8 41/4 41/4 41/4 c 35/8 47/8 61/8 67/16 s 1224 /16-18 5 /16-18 5 /16-18
5
1P
For additional back box listings, see pages 1250-1253. For back box dimensions, see pages 12521253.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1257
1P
1P
1258
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Arktite Plugs and Receptacles Industrial Heavy Duty Hazardous
2P
Description
Application/Selection Arktite Delayed Action Circuit Breaking
Page No.
see pages 12601261 see pages 12621263 see pages 12641265 see pages 12641265 see page 1266 see see see see see page page page page page 1267 1267 1270 1272 1274
Technical Data 20 & 30A CPS Receptacle 20 & 30A CPP Plug 20A CPR Connector
ArkGard NEMA Interlocked/Circuit Breaking

Technical Data 15 & 20A Premier ENR Receptacles & ENP Plugs 15 & 20A Value ENR Receptacles & ENP Plugs 20A Premier ENR-GFS Assemblies 15 & 20A Premier ENC Connector
GFS Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Delayed Action/Circuit Breaking

Technical Data 7 thru 60A CES/CESD Receptacles CPH Plugs
2P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1259
2P
Plugs and Receptacles For Industrial Heavy Duty Hazardous Area Use
Applications:
To connect portable or movable electrical equipment, such as motors, motor-generator sets, tools, light systems.

Environmental: The environment of the enclosure location in terms of NEC/CEC compliance. Material and construction to withstand rough usage and atmospheric conditions. Electrical: Sufficient current carrying capacity to meet load requirements. Compatibility with electrical system (new or existing installation). Interchangeability of plugs with other hazardous and non-hazardous area receptacles. See "Quick Selector" below and "Interchangeability Chart" on next page .
Options:
Special polarity arrangements available as options, as well as special back boxes and hub arrangements for some series. See listing pages for details.

Electrical Rating Receptacle Series CES, CESD NEC Compliances Cl. I, Division 1 and 2, Groups C, D Poles 2-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 4-pole Amps & Volts 30A, 120240VAC 7A, 460VAC 60A, 115230VAC 30A, 460VAC 20A, 125250VAC 20A, 18VDC 20A, 125250VAC 20A, 18VDC 30A, 125250VAC 7A, 480VAC 30A, 125250VAC 7A, 460VAC 15A, 15A, 20A, 20A, 125VAC 250VAC 125VAC 250VAC ENP Mating Plug CPH
CPR CPS
Non-hazardous Cl. I, Division 1 and 2, Groups C, D
CPP CPP
3-wire, 4-pole ENR Cl. I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Division 1 and 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 5&6 Config.
CSA certified units are rated at 600 VAC. If higher ratings are needed, refer to receptacles interlocked with safety switches and circuit breakers in Section 4P.
WARNING: CPR Arktite cable connectors are for use in non-hazardous areas only.
2P
1260
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Plugs and Receptacles For Industrial Heavy Duty Hazardous Area Use
Interchangeablility Chart
Many of the plugs listed in this section can be used interchangeably with receptacles from other sections, both in hazardous and non-hazardous areas, provided electrical rating and style of plug and receptacle are the same. The following table is a summary of possible combinations. Plugs Shown in Section 2P APJ Can be Used with these Receptacle Series AR, NR, NPR FSQ, EPC, EPCB, EBBR DBR, WSR, NSR, NBR CPH AR, NR, NPR FSQ, EPC, EPCB, EBBR DBR, WSR, NBR, NSR CPP AR, NR, NPR
2P
Listed in Section 1P 4P 3P, 4P 1P 4P 3P, 4P 1P
Plugs & Receptacle Electrical Rating 30 and 60 amp. 2-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 4-pole 30 and 60 amp. 3-wire, 4-pole 30 and 60 amp. 2-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 4-pole 30 and 60 amp. 3-wire, 4-pole 30 amp. 2-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 4-pole 30 amp. 3-wire, 4-pole
DBR, WSR, NBR, NSR
3P, 4P
2P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1261
2P
Arktite Circuit Breaking CPS Receptacles and CPP Plugs

Delayed Action Factory Sealed
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Explosionproof Wet Locations
Applications:
CPS receptacles, angle and straight types, and CPP plugs are used: With portable electrically operated devices such as motor-generator sets, compressors, conveyors, portable tools, lighting systems and similar equipment In locations which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors or gases In damp or corrosive locations In petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants, and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist
Features:
The delayed action feature permits the plug to be used as an emergency pushpull switch CPS receptacles are equipped with a rotating mechanism which prevents complete withdrawal of the CPP plug in one continuous movement. Details of operation are illustrated and explained below Figure 1 shows a CPS angle type receptacle assembly with CPP plug fully engaged. Figure 2 shows the plug withdrawn until it is stopped by the delayed action mechanism. In this position the circuit has been broken and the arc has been snuffed in the contact chambers. To completely withdraw the plug as shown in Figure 3, the delayed action release lever mush be rotated counterclockwise. The time required to actuate the mechanism permits dissipation of the arc-generated heat before contacts and arcing chambers are opened to the atmosphere. When inserting the plug, the reverse procedure is followed. CPS receptacles are factory sealed to simplify installation and wiring external seals are not required Series 152 receptacles have top hinged cover design, with 45 downward angled receptacle housing, to provide superior environmental protection from accumulations of dust, snow, ice, and water Back boxes used for angle type receptacles are standard EDS bodies. Assemblies are listed with single and two gang bodies and dead end or through feed hubs 1/ 2" to 1" sizes Back boxes used for straight type rceptacles are available with a variety of hub arrangements in 1/ 2" and 3/ 4" sizes All receptacles and 30 ampere plugs are provided with pressure terminals for ease of field wiring. 20 ampere plugs have solder terminals.
Standard Materials:
Receptacle housings die cast copperfree aluminum EDS Back boxes Feraloy iron alloy (U.S.)/Copper-free aluminum (Canada) Other back boxes Feraloy iron alloy Plug exteriors copper-free aluminum or Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester material (see listings) Insulation all receptacles and plugs Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester material Pressure or solder contacts brass Crimp/solder contacts leaded red brass
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum aluminum acrylic paint Feraloy electrogalvanized and aluminum lacquer Fiberglass-reinforced polyester natural (red, white) Brass natural Leaded red brass electro-tin-plate

Angle type 20 and 30 amperes; 125 and 250 VAC Straight type 20 amperes; 125 and 250 VAC
Fig. 1
Grounding:
NEC Article 501 and CEC Part 1 Section 18 requires that metal frames or exposed non-current-carrying metal parts of portable devices used in hazardous locations be grounded through an extra conductor in the portable cord CPS receptacles and CPP plugs are provided with an extra grounding pole In plugs, provision is made for attachment of the grounding wire to the grounding pole. In addition, direct connection is provided between plug and receptacle housings and the grounding pole. In the receptacle, grounding is accomplished through the conduit system
Fig. 2

NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups C, D UL Standard: 1010 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30
Interchangeability of Plugs with Non-hazardous Location Receptacles:

30 ampere CPP plugs can also be used with standard 30 ampere AR Arktite receptacles of the same style and number of poles, thus permitting portable devices suitable for use in hazardous locations to be connected to receptacles in both hazardous and nonhazardous areas
Note: Equipment to be used in hazardous areas must be suitable for use in the specific hazardous location.
2P
Fig. 3
1262
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Options:
2P
The following special options are available from factory by adding suffix to Cat. #: Description Suffix Material: copper-free aluminum, natural finish, is available on certain back boxes. See listings......................................................................... SA Receptacle interior rotated 221/ 2 to right (viewed from face) and plug changed to match. 30 ampere units only.............................................. S4 Combination of receptacles and EFS/EFD or EDS series devices, such as pilot lights, switches, pushbutton stations, etc., can be furnished using three, four and five gang bodies.......................................................................................................................................... Specify Hub arrangements other than those listed can be supplied.......................................................................................................................... Specify
Dimensions
In Inches: Angle Type Receptacles Straight Type Receptacles
20 Ampere Plugs
Series 152
Cat. # CPP516 CPP512
a 83/8 7
b 67/8 51/2
c 13/4 13/4
d 19/16 19/16
These dimensions are approximate and vary with cable size. 20 amp plugs are furnished with solder terminations at standard, ground contacts have pressure terminations.
30 Ampere Plugs
Series 532 and 732 a = 31/2 for single gang 73/16 for two gang
2P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1263
2P

CPS152 Single gang angle type
CPS152 Two gang angle type
CPS152R Receptacle unit only
CPP Plugs with mechanical cable grip and neoprene bushing
Style 2 Grounded Through Extra Pole and Shell

Hub Size (In.) Dead End 2-wire, 3-pole Through Feed Dead End 2-wire, 3-pole Through Feed Dead End 3-wire, 4-pole Through Feed /2 /4 1
1 3
Rating 20A, 1 HP, 125250VAC, 60 hertz, 20A, 18VDC
Description
Single Gang Receptacle Assembly Cat. #
Two Gang Receptacle Assembly Cat. #
Cable Dia. (In.)
Plug with Aluminum Handles Cat. #
Plug with High Impact Molded Composition Handle Cat. #
Receptacle Unit only Cat. #
/2 /4 1
1 3
CPS152 101* CPS152 102* CPS152 201* CPS152 202* CPS152 301* CPS152 302* CPS152 111* CPS152 112* CPS152 211* CPS152 212* CPS152 311* CPS152 312* CPS532 101 CPS532 201 CPS532 301 CPS532 111 CPS532 211 CPS532 311 CPS732 101 CPS732 201 CPS732 301 CPS732 111 CPS732 211 CPS732 311 CPS532 102 CPS532 202 CPS532 302 CPS532 112 CPS532 212 CPS532 312 CPS732 102 CPS732 202 CPS732 302 CPS732 112 CPS732 212 CPS732 312
/2 3 /4 1
1
} } }
.312 to .625
CPP516
CPP512
CPS152R
30A, 11/ 2 HP, 125250VAC, 60 hertz, 7A, 1/ 2 HP, 480VAC**, 60 hertz
/2 /4 1
1 3
.375 to .875
CPP4553
CPS532R
/2 3 /4 1
1
30A, 3 HP, 125250VAC, 60 hertz, 7A, 1 HP, 480VAC**, 60 hertz
/2 /4 1
1 3
2P
.375 to .875
CPP4752
CPS732R
*Back boxes are available in copper-free aluminum. To order, add suffix SA to the Cat. No. ** CSA certified units are rated at 600 VAC at 7A. Receptacles will take any of the plugs grouped in the bracket opposite the receptacle listings. 20 amp plugs are furnished with solder terminations at standard, ground contacts have pressure terminations.
1264
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

CPS Straight Type
2-wire, 3-pole 20A, 1HP, 125250VAC, 60400 hertz, 20A, 18VDC
2P
CPS Dead End
CPS Through Feed
Hub Size (In.)

1 3
Assembly Cat. # CPS14 120 CPS14 20
Body Cat. # CPS120 CPS20
Hub Size (In.)

1 3
Assembly Cat. # CPS14 121 CPS14 21
Body Cat. # CPS121 CPS21
/2 /4
/2 /4
CPS Receptacle Unit

With Spring Door
CPP Plugs
With Mechanical Cable Grip and Neoprene Bushing
With aluminum handle
With high impact molded composition handle Type CPS Receptacle Unit with Spring Door Cat. # CPS14R Cable Dia. (In.) Aluminum Cat. # Composition Cat. # CPP512
.312 to .625 CPP516
2P
CPS straight type shown with plug
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1265
2P
Arktite CPR Cable Connector Receptacles Delayed Action Circuit Breaking

Style 2 Grounded Through Extra Pole and Shell
For Use With CPP516 and CPP512 Series Plugs
Applications:
CPR Arktite delayed action cable connector receptacles are used in non-hazardous areas only*: To make up adapter sets for connecting portable devices having CPP plugs to receptacles in non-hazardous areas. This is accomplished by equipping one end of the length of cable with the CPR receptacle and the other with a plug to mate with the receptacle in the non-hazardous area. To make up extension cords using the CPR receptacle at one end and a CPP plug at the other.
Features:
Spring door housing with the same delayed action rotating mechanism provided in CPS receptacles Pressure terminals are furnished for ease of wiring Gland nut with mechanical cable grip and bushing for effective strain relief
Rating 20A, 1HP, 125250VAC, 60 hertz 20A, 18 VDC
Cable Dia. .375 to .625
Cat. # CPR154
Standard Materials:
Housing copper-free aluminum Insulation fiberglass-reinforced polyester Contacts brass
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum natural Fiberglass-reinforced polyester natural (red) Brass natural
*CSA certified unit suitable for Class I, Groups C and D (not available in USA).
2P
1266
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
ArkGard ENR Receptacles

Premier and Value Series
ArkGard Premier Series:
2P
The premier line of ENR Receptacles (M4) come equipped with an exclusive cover design that provides a watertight NEMA 4 rating while not in use. This design provides superior protection in environments that are NEMA 4 and where extra protection is required against blowing sand and dust. There is no other product offering on the market today that can offer these hazardous NEMA style units with this level of watertight protection. The premier ENR Receptacle series also includes value-added features that provide ease of installation, added safety, reduced maintenance costs, and increased product life.
ArkGard Value Series:

The value line of ENR Receptacles is the ideal solution for rugged and industrial NEMA configured application up to 20 amperes. Like the premier line, this product comes equipped with built-in safety features that reject standard NEMA configuration plugs that could cause an arc in hazardous areas.
FEATURES AND BENEFITS - Premier Solution (M4)

Gasketed Flamepath:
For maximum sealing when mounted on EDS or EFS backboxes to meet NEMA 4 hosedown application requirements
Gasketed Screw Cap Cover Design:

Rated NEMA 4 while not-in-use Offers superior protection from harsh environments for increased product life Eliminates the need to purchase a separate environmental cover for added protection
Complies with OSHA lockout/tagout requirements:

Lockout tagout hole in cover gives users the ability to lock the cover closed while not-in-use
Spring-Loaded Sliding Key Offers Increased Safety:

Rejects standard NEMA/EEMAC conguration plugs that could cause an arc in a hazardous area. Also prevents the receptacle faceplate from being rotated until the ENP plug is fully inserted.
Hex Head Mounting Screws:

Gasketed screw design to achieve NEMA 4 rating when mounted to EDS or EFS back boxes
Integral Bushings: Saddle Clamp Terminals:

Reduce installation and maintenance costs easy to wire, time-saving terminals Note: Premier series with NEMA 4 design only available when ordered with M4 sufx Taper tapped hubs protect wire installation during wire-pulling
FEATURES AND BENEFITS - Traditional Value Solution
Top hinged cover design with 45 downward angle provides protection in damp, wet and dirty locations
2P
To make connection, simply insert the ENP plug and rotate to close the circuit Built-in features cause the ENP plug to become locked in the receptacle and cannot be accidentally disengaged while in use
Molded-in contact design provides for superior interior contact reliability Incorporates three spring-loaded slide keys that prevent the receptacle face plate from being rotated until the ENP plug us fully inserted into the receptacle.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1267
2P
ENR Premier Series Dead Front Interlocked Circuit Breaking Receptacles

ENP Plugs
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1 & 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7BCD, 9FG, 12
Applications:
ArkGard products are used: In applications that require additional environmental protection, or in NEMA 4 hosedown environments where washdown/hosedowns occur With portable or fixed electrical equipment such as motor generator units, welders, pumps, compressors, heating and cooling units, cellular relay stations, conveyors, lighting systems, and similar equipment In areas made hazardous by the presence of flammable vapors and gases or combustible dusts When power requirements do not exceed 20 amperes
Options:
Description Suffix Corro-free epoxy powder finish for added corrosion resistance ..................................................................................... S752

Receptacles: 15 amperes; 20 amperes; Plugs: 15 amperes; 20 amperes; 125 VAC and 250 VAC, 50400 hertz 125 VAC and 250 VAC, 50-400 hertz 125 VAC and 250 VAC, 50400 hertz 125 VAC and 250 VAC, 50400 hertz

NEC: Class I, Division 1, Groups B*, C, D Class II, Groups F, G Class III NEMA 3, 3R, 4X, 7 CEC: Class I, Division 1, Groups B*, C, D Class II, Groups G Class III NEMA 3, 3R, 4X, 7
Grounding:
NEC Article 501 and CEC Section 18 requires that metal frames or exposed non-current-carrying metal parts of portable devices used in hazardous locations be grounded through an extra conductor in the portable cord. ENR Receptacles and ENP Plugs are provided with an extra grounding pole.
Dimensions
In Inches:
66.7 2 5/8" 8.7 11/32"
Standard Materials:
Receptacle housing, spring door and plug body die cast copper-free aluminum Interiors: receptacle Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester material; plugs nylon 100 Contacts: receptacle blade brass; receptacle switch silver; plug brass Receptacle cover hinge pin and spring stainless steel Receptacle gasket neoprene Plug bushing neoprene
149.2 5 7/8" 129.4 5 3/32"
171.7 6 3/4"
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum aluminum acrylic paint Brass natural Type Single Gang Double Gang
174.4 6 7/8" A
A =3 1/2" FOR SINGLE GANG B = 7 9/16" FOR TWO GANG
Dimension A 31/2" 79/16"
2P
*Single gang assemblies purchased with an EDS back box are suitable for Class I, Group C, D only. For self-certified Class I, Group B rating, add the suffix "GB" to the catalog number (i.e. ENR21201 GB M4). Dual gang assemblies purchased with an EDS back box are suitable for Class I, Group C, D only. For self-certified Class I, Group B rating, add the suffix "GB" to the catalog number (i.e. ENR22201 GB M4). 15A units are CSA Listed only.
1268
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
ENR Premier Series Dead Front Interlocked Circuit Breaking Receptacles

ENP Plugs
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B*, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1 & 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7BCD, 9FG, 12
2P
15A
15 A Receptacle Rating
Description Dead End
Hub Size
1 3
Single Gang* Receptacle Assembly Cat. # ENR11151 M4 ENR21151 M4 ENR31151 M4 ENRC11151 M4 ENRC21151 M4 ENRC31151 M4 ENR11152 M4 ENR21152 M4 ENR31152 M4 ENRC11152 M4 ENRC21152 M4 ENRC31152 M4 Single Gang* Receptacle Assembly Cat. # ENR11201 M4 ENR21201 M4 ENR31201 M4 ENRC11201 M4 ENRC21201 M4 ENRC31201 M4 ENR11202 M4 ENR21202 M4 ENR31202 M4 ENRC11202 M4 ENRC21202 M4 ENRC31202 M4
Two Gang** Receptacle Assembly Cat. # ENR12151 M4 ENR22151 M4 ENR32151 M4 ENRC12151 M4 ENRC22151 M4 ENRC32151 M4 ENR12152 M4 ENR22152 M4 ENR32152 M4 ENRC12152 M4 ENRC22152 M4 ENRC32152 M4 Two Gang** Receptacle Assembly Cat. # ENR12201 M4 ENR22201 M4 ENR32201 M4 ENRC12201 M4 ENRC22201 M4 ENRC32201 M4 ENR12202 M4 ENR22202 M4 ENR32202 M4 ENRC12202 M4 ENRC22202 M4 ENRC32202 M4
Receptacle Unit Only Cat. #
NEMA Config.
15 A Plug Cat. #
NEMA Config.
/2" /4"
15 Amp 125 Volt Through Feed
1"
1 3
ENR5151 M4
ENP5151
G W
/2" /4"
1" Dead End 15 Amp 250 Volt Through Feed

1 3
5-15R
5-15P
/2" /4"
1"
1 3
ENR6152 M4
G W
ENP6152
W
/2" /4" 1"
6-15R
6-15P
20A
20 A Receptacle Rating
Hub Size
1 3
NEMA Config.
20 A Plug Cat. #
NEMA Config.
/2" /4" 1"
20 Amp 125 Volt Through Feed
ENR5201 M4
ENP5201
W
1 3
/2" /4"
1" Dead End 20 Amp 250 Volt Through Feed

1 3
5-20R
5-20P
/2" /4"
1"
1 3
ENR6202 M4
ENP6202
W
/2" /4" 1"
6-20R
6-20P
2P
*Single gang assemblies purchased with an EDS back box are suitable for Class I, Group C, D only. For self-certified Class I, Group B rating, add the suffix "GB" to the catalog number (i.e. ENR21201 M4 GB). ** Dual gang assemblies purchased with an EDS back box are suitable for Class I, Group C, D only. For self-certified Class I, Group B rating, add the suffix "GB" to the catalog number (i.e. ENR22201 M4 GB). Receptacle units alone (i.e. ENR5201) are not suitable for Class I, Group B. ENP Plugs use #12 or #14 AWG type S, SO, ST or STO cord with range of .540 to .635 inches diameter. Note: 15A with copper-free aluminum EDS, EDSC back boxes. 20A with Feraloy iron alloy EDS, EDSC back boxes.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1269
2P
ENR Value Series Dead Front Interlocked Circuit Breaking Receptacles

ENP Plugs
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1 & 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7BCD, 9FG, 12
Applications:
ENR receptacles and ENP plugs are used: With portable electrical equipment such as compressors, tools, lighting systems, and similar devices In areas made hazardous by the presence of flammable vapors and gases or combustible dusts Wherever portable electrical equipment is likely to be transferred from hazardous to non-hazardous areas In damp and corrosive areas When power requirements do not exceed 20 amperes Where general purpose application is required

NEC: Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1 and 2, Groups F, G Class III ANSI/UL Standard 1010 NEMA/EEMAC 3, 7BCD, 9FG CEC: Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1 and 2, Group G Class III
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum aluminum acrylic paint Brass natural

Receptacles: 20 amperes; 125 VAC and 250 VAC, 50-400 hertz Plugs: 15 amperes; 125 VAC and 250 VAC, 50400 hertz 20 amperes; 125 VAC and 250 VAC, 50400 hertz
Features:
ArkGard 2 receptacle incorporates three spring-loaded slide keys that prevent the receptacle face plate from being rotated until the ENP plug is fully inserted into the receptacle. To make the connection, the ENP plug is fully inserted, and the receptacle face moved inward by pushing the plug forward. The plug is then rotated, closing the circuit. As rotation begins, the plug becomes locked in the receptacle and cannot be accidentally disengaged. In making or breaking the circuit, any resulting electrical arc is confined in the factorysealed chamber. Factory-sealed chamber encloses the potential arcing components between two explosionproof threaded joints. These threads are specially coated to guarantee freedom of movement, which ensures on-off action. No additional seals are required. One piece molded gasket seals cover plate and ENP plug when plug is inserted, providing full environmental protection at the receptacle face. Top-hinged cover design with 45 downward angle provides superior protection in damp, wet, and dirty locations. Molded-in contact design provides superior interior contact reliability. ENP plugs can be used in non-hazardous areas with standard U-ground NEMA/EEMAC configuration 5 and 6 receptacles, eliminating the need for two separately equipped portable units of the same type. The ENR receptacle will not accept standard NEMA/ EEMAC configuration plugs. ENP plug handle body is designed with an internal cord strain relief mechanism and a cable sealing grommet which will accept various cable diameters. Field assembly is accomplished with standard tools. Use standard EDS back boxes.
Standard Materials:
Receptacle housing, spring door and plug body die cast copper-free aluminum Interiors: receptacle Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester material; plugs nylon 100 Contacts: receptacle blade brass; receptacle switch silver; plug brass Receptacle cover hinge pin and spring stainless steel Receptacle gasket neoprene Plug bushing neoprene
Grounding:
NEC Article 501 and CEC Section 18 requires that metal frames or exposed non-current-carrying metal parts of portable devices used in hazardous locations be grounded through an extra conductor in the portable cord. ENR Receptacles and ENP Plugs are provided with an extra grounding pole. CAUTION: To reduce the risk of ignition of hazardous atmospheres, do not use plugs or receptacles in Class II, Group F locations that contain electrically conductive dusts.
Dimensions
In Inches:
a = 31/2 for single gang; 79/16 for two gang.
2P
Receptacle units alone (i.e. ENR5201) are not suitable for Class I, Group B.
1270
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
ENR Value Series Dead Front Interlocked Circuit Breaking Receptacles

ENP Plugs
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1 & 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7BCD, 9FG, 12
2P
15 A Receptacle 15 A Rating Description Dead End 15 Amp 125 Volt Through Feed
Single Gang* Receptacle Hub Assembly Size Cat. #

1 3
Two Gang** Receptacle Assembly Cat. # ENR12151 ENR22151 ENR32151 ENRC12151 ENRC22151 ENRC32151 ENR12152 ENR22152 ENR32152 ENRC12152 ENRC22152 ENRC32152 Two Gang Receptacle Assembly Cat. # ENR12201 ENR22201 ENR32201 ENRC12201 ENRC22201 ENRC32201 ENR12202 ENR22202 ENR32202 ENRC12202 ENRC22202 ENRC32202
NEMA Config.
15 A Plug Cat. #
NEMA Config.
/2" /4"
ENR11151 ENR21151 ENR31151 ENRC11151 ENRC21151 ENRC31151 ENR11152 ENR21152 ENR31152 ENRC11152 ENRC21152 ENRC31152
1" /2" /4" 1"

1 3 1 3
ENR5151
ENP5151
G W
5-15R
5-15P
Dead End 15 Amp 250 Volt Through Feed
/2" /4"
1" /2" /4" 1"

1 3
ENR6152
G W
ENP6152
W
6-15R
6-15P
20 A Receptacle 20 A Rating Description Dead End 20 Amp 125 Volt Through Feed
Single Gang Receptacle Hub Assembly Size Cat. #

1 3
NEMA Config.
20 A Plug Cat. #
NEMA Config.
/2" /4"
ENR11201 ENR21201 ENR31201 ENRC11201 ENRC21201 ENRC31201 ENR11202 ENR21202 ENR31202 ENRC11202 ENRC21202 ENRC31202
1" /2" /4" 1"

1 3 1 3
ENR5201
ENP5201
W
5-20R
5-20P
Dead End 20 Amp 250 Volt Through Feed
/2" /4"
1" /2" 3 /4" 1"

1
ENR6202
ENP6202
W
6-20R
6-20P
Receptacle units alone (i.e. ENR5201) are not suitable for Class I, Group B. *Single gang assemblies purchased with an EDS back box are suitable for Class I, Group B. **Dual gang assemblies purchased with an EDS back box are suitable for Class I, Group C, D only. For Class I, Group B rating, add the letter B to the Cat. No. Example: ENRB22201. Seals must be installed within 11/2" of each conduit opening. ENP Plugs use #12 or #14 AWG type S, SO, ST or STO cord with range of .540 to .635 inches diameter. Note: 15A with copper-free aluminum EDS, EDSC back boxes. 20A with Feraloy iron alloy EDS, EDSC back boxes.
2P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1271
2P
ArkGard Premier Series ENR-GFS Assemblies
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, G Cl. II, Div. 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA/EFC 7CD, 9EFG, 12
Applications:
Premier ENR-GFS Assemblies are used: With portable electrical equipment such as tools, lighting systems, compressors and similar devices for personnel protection In areas made hazardous by the presence of flammable vapors, gases or combustible dusts In branch circuits of 15 to 20 amperes at 125 volts AC

NEC/CEC Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III ANSI/UL Standard: 943, 1203 NEMA/EEMAC 7CD, 9EFG, 12 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30, 144
Features:
Premier ENR-GFS Assemblies are installed on two-gang EDS back boxes. They are NEMA 3 rated and self-certified to meet UL requirements for Class I, Div. 1, Group B environments. Allows for a single part number to be specified, ordered and delivered on-site, significantly reducing the cost of order processing, material handling and misplacement of materials. Premier ENR-GFS components meet all UL and CSA requirements for ground fault protection in hazardous locations. Includes all of the value-added features of the Premier ENR Receptacle series: NEMA 4 cover design, OSHA lockout/tagout compliance, and a spring-loaded sliding key for added safety. The GFCI protects personnel against possible injury due to unwanted ground faults; meets requirements for personnel protection as defined in the National Electrical Code.
Standard Materials:
Receptacle housing, spring door and plug body die cast copper-free aluminum Interiors: receptacle Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester material Contacts: receptacle blade brass; receptacle switch silver Receptacle cover hinge pin and spring stainless steel Receptacle gasket neoprene
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum aluminum lacquer Stainless steel natural Polycarbonate natural (ivory) Brass natural

20 amperes 125 VAC
2P
1272
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
ArkGard Premier Series ENR-GFS Assemblies
2P
20 A Certifications 20 A Receptacle Rating Two Gang Receptacle Assembly Cat. # ENR12201 M4 GFS ENR22201 M4 GFS ENR32201 M4 GFS NEMA Config. 20A Plug Cat. # NEMA Config.
Hub Size
1 3
20 Amp 125 Volt
/2" /4" 1"
ENP5201
Through Feed
/2" 3 /4" 1"

1
ENRC12201 M4 GFS ENRC22201 M4 GFS ENRC32201 M4 GFS
5-20R
5-20P
Dimensions
In Inches:
66.7 2 5/8" 8.7 11/32"
149.2 5 7/8" 129.4 5 3/32"
171.7 6 3/4"
174.4 6 7/8"
A =3 1/2" FOR SINGLE GANG B = 7 9/16" FOR TWO GANG
Type Single Gang Double Gang
Dimension A 31/ 2" 79/ 16"
2P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1273
2P
ArkGard ENC Connectors
Hazardous Locations: Cl. I, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Group G Cl. III NEMA 3R, 4
Non-hazardous Locations: NEMA 3R, 4 UL Listed
ENC Connector:
This NEMA 4 connector makes it safe and easy to bring power wherever it is needed. It provides versatility for making cord sets for connecting portable devices in non-hazardous locations and hazardous locations
Applications:
ENC Connectors are used: In abusive locations where product durability is critical With portable or fixed electrical equipment such as motor generator units, work lights, pumps, compressors, heating and cooling units, conveyors, lighting systems, and similar equipment Wherever portable electrical equipment is likely to be transferred from hazardous to non-hazardous areas In damp and corrosive areas When power requirements do not exceed 20 amperes
Features:
Offering includes: 15A and 20A, 125V Users no longer have to make up their own ENR/EDS female extension cord ends, which are heavy to move, difficult to store, and offer no form of strain relief Hinged, locking cover provides a watertight NEMA 4 rating with superior protection in damp, wet, and dirty locations Molded-in contact design provides superior interior contact reliability Lockout/tagout feature in cover provides safety and complies with OSHA requirements Impact resistant center plate design ensures long product life ArkGard products come with unsurpassed easy-to-wire, timesaving terminals and an internal cord strain relief that provides superior pull strength Equipped with time-tested industry-leading features of Arktite Plugs and Connectors, including: Uni-Shell handle body, The Tri-Lock cable grip and Sure-Seal cable gland
Standard Materials:
Connector bodies high impact strength copper-free aluminum Insulation fiberglass-reinforced polyester material Contacts: receptacle blade brass; receptacle switch silver; plug brass

Non-hazardous Locations NEMA 3R, 4 UL Listed UL 498 Hazardous Locations Class I, Groups B, C, D Class II, Groups G, Coal Dust Class III NEMA 3R, 4 CSA Certified CSA C22.2 No. 159M
Standard Finishes:
Aluminum natural Fiberglass-reinforced polyester - red
Options:
Description Suffix Corro-free epoxy powder finish for added corrosion resistance ................................................................................ S752

20 amperes 125 VAC
2P
1274
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
ArkGard ENC Connectors
2P
15A/20A Rating 15 Amp 125 Volt Cord Range 0.39-1.20 Connector Cat. # ENC5151 ENC5151 CAN 20 Amp 125 Volt 0.39-1.20 NEMA Config.
G
Plug Cat. # ENP5151
NEMA Config.
G W
5-15R
G
5-15P
G W
ENC5201 ENC5201 CAN
ENP5201
5-20R
5-20P
Dimensions
In Inches:
73.6 2 7/8"
77.6 3 1/16"
193.4 7 5/8"
2P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1275
2P
GFS Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter
Applications:
GFS ground fault circuit interrupters are used: With portable electrical equipment such as tools, lighting systems, compressors and similar devices for personnel protection In areas made hazardous by the presence of flammable vapors, gases or combustible dusts In branch circuits of 15 to 20 amperes at 125 volts AC In conjunction with ENR or CPS152 receptacles
Application Recommendations:
GFS-1 can be installed in an EDS back box (see page 503) for point-of-use protection or for protection of downstream receptacles.
Features:
Factory sealed chamber encloses the ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) and its potentially arcing components in an enclosure with explosionproof ground joints. No additional sealing is required when proper body is used. GFCI protects personnel against possible injury due to unwanted ground faults; meets requirements for personnel protection as defined in the National Electrical Code. GFCI is feed-through type to serve several receptacles. Decentralized GFCI protection on branch circuits permits immediate identification of circuit where a ground fault is occurring; does not interrupt power on total branch circuit if tripped or when periodically tested; significantly reduces incidence of nuisance tripping; provides for use of 125 VAC portable lighting even when working on metal floors or catwalks. Field installation is accomplished with standard tools. Can be installed on any Cooper CrouseHinds single or multiple gang EDS or EDSC device box.
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum aluminum lacquer Stainless steel natural Polycarbonate natural (ivory) Brass natural GFS-1 with EDS271 back box

20 amperes 125 VAC 5 milliampere trip setting Class A per ANSI/UL943
GFS-1 can be used with ENR or CPS receptacles and EDS back box for circuit interrupter protection of portable equipment.
Amps 20 Description Factory-sealed ground fault circuit interrupter 5 milliampere trip Cat. # GFS1

NEC/CEC Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1, Groups E, F, G Class II, Division 2, Groups F, G Class III ANSI/UL Standard: 943, 1203 NEMA/EEMAC 7CD, 9EFG, 12 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 30, 144
GFS-1 with EDS172 back box and ENR5201 M4 receptacle
Dimensions
In Inches:
2P
Standard Materials:
Cover sand cast copper-free aluminum Sealing well die cast copper-free aluminum Pushbuttons and guards stainless steel Shaft seals neoprene Interior: body polycarbonate; contacts brass 1276
CES and CESD Arktite Receptacles

Delayed Action Circuit Breaking CPH Plugs
Applications:
CES and CESD receptacles with CPH plugs are used: With portable electrically operated devices such as motor-generator sets, compressors, conveyors, portable tools, lighting systems and similar equipment In locations which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors or gases In damp or corrosive locations At petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants, and other process industry facilities where similar hazards exist
CESD Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Group D* CES Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Explosionproof Wet Locations Factory Sealed Standard Materials:
2P
Back boxes Feraloy iron alloy Receptacle housings 30 ampere copper-free aluminum; 60 ampere Feraloy iron alloy Plug bodies copper-free aluminum Insulation Krydon fiberglassreinforced polyester Contacts brass or hard-drawn copper
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Copper-free aluminum natural Krydon material red Brass and copper natural
Features:
CES and CESD receptacles are equipped with a delayed action rotating sleeve which prevents complete withdrawal of the CPH plug in one continuous movement The delayed action feature permits the plug to be used as an emergency pushpull switch Details of operation are illustrated and described to the right: Receptacles are factory sealed to simplify installation and wiring. External seals are not required. The 30 ampere receptacles are provided with pressure terminals for field connection. The 60 ampere receptacles have flexible leads. Plugs are equipped with solder terminals. Two arrangements are provided for the 3 /4" and 11/4" conduit hubs, as shown in the listings and dimensions on page see page 1278.
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Grounding:
NEC article 501 and CEC Part 1 Section 18 require that metal frames or exposed non-current-carrying metal parts of portable devices used in hazardous locations be grounded through an extra conductor in the portable cord. CES and CESD receptacles and CPH plugs are provided with an extra grounding pole for attachment of the grounding wire. In the plugs, provision is made for attachment of the grounding wire to the grounding pole. In addition, direct connection is provided between plug and receptacle housings and the ground pole. In the receptacles, grounding is accomplished through the conduit system.
Fig. 3
Fig. 4
Figure 1 above shows a CES receptacle assembly with CPH plug fully engaged. Figure 2 shows the plug withdrawn until it is stopped by the delayed action sleeve. In this position the circuit has been broken and the arc has been snuffed in the contact chambers. Figure 3 shows the delayed action receptacle sleeve rotated approximately 45 to allow withdrawal of plug from receptacle. Figure 4 shows the plug completely withdrawn. To accomplish this, the delayed action sleeve must be rotated counterclockwise. The time required to actuate the mechanism permits dissipation of the arc-generated heat before contacts and arcing chambers are opened to the atmosphere. When inserting the plug, the reverse procedure is followed.

NEC/CEC: CES Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups C, D; CESD Class I, Division 1 and 2, Group D* ANSI/UL Standard: 1010 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 182.1
Interchangeability of Plugs with Non-hazardous Location Receptacles:

CPH plugs can also be used with standard AR and NR receptacles of the same ampere rating, style and number of poles, thus permitting portable devices which are suitable for use in hazardous locations to be connected to receptacles in both hazardous and nonhazardous areas Portable devices for non-hazardous areas equipped with APJ and NPJ Arktite plugs cannot be used with CES and CESD receptacles

2P
30 and 60 amperes
Options:
The following special options are available from the factory by adding the suffix to the Cat. #: Description Suffix Special polarity for use where two or more receptacles of the same ampere rating, style and number of poles are to be installed in the same area for use on different voltages. Receptacle interior rotated 221/ 2 clockwise when viewed from face and S4 plug changed to match ..................................................................................................
*For U.S. CESD are also suitable for Class I, Group C when used with immediately adjacent seals.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1277
2P

Delayed Action Circuit Breaking CPH Plugs Dimensions
CESD Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Group D* CES Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Explosionproof Wet Locations Factory Sealed
Dimensions
In Inches:
CES
Cat. # CES2213 CES2214 CES4233 CES4234 a 77/16 12 b 45/8 7 c 23/16 27/8 d 33/8 51/4 e 23/4 43/8 f 41/8 61/8 g
5
CESD
h
11
j
7
Cat. # CESD2213 CESD2214 CESD4233 CESD4234
a 75/8 131/2
b 63/8 95/8
e 41/4 61/4
f 5 71/4
g 17/8 3
h
11
j
13
/16 /16
/32 /32
/8
/32 /32
/16
13
11/8
13
13/16
CPH
Cat. # CPH7713 CPH7913 CPH7714 CPH7914 CPH7733 CPH7933 CPH7734 CPH7934 a 6 67/16 6 67/16 73/4 81/8 73/4 81/8 b 23/8 23/8 23/8 23/8 23/4 23/4 31/16 31/16 c 45/16 43/4 45/16 43/4 5 53/8 5 53/8
2P
*In U.S. CESD are also suitable for Class I, Group C when used with immediately adjacent seals.
1278
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Delayed Action Circuit Breaking CPH Plugs
CESD Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Group D* CES Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Groups C, D Explosionproof Wet Locations Factory Sealed
2P
CES Receptacles with three hubs one on CESD Receptacles with vertical through each side and one at top and two pipe feed hubs and one pipe plug. Removable plugs with CPH plug fully engaged. threaded cover at top to facilitate pulling wires.
CES/CESD Receptacles
Hub Size (In.)
3
Circuit 2-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 4-pole 2-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 4-pole
Phase 1 3 1 3
Max. HP /2 11/2
1
Max. Amps 7 30 7 30 30 60 30 60
Volts at 60 Cycles AC 480 120 to 240 480 120 to 240 480 120 to 240 480 120 to 240
CES Cat. # CES2213 CES2214 CES4233 CES4234
CESD Cat. # CESD2213 CESD2214 CESD4233 CESD4234
/4 /4
1 3 3 5
11/4 11/4
CPH Plugs with mechanical cable grip and neoprene bushing.
CPH Plugs
Cable Diameter Circuit 2-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 4-pole 2-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 4-pole Max. Phase HP 1 3 1 3 /2 11/ 2
1
Max. Volts at Amps 60 Cycles AC 7 30 7 30 30 60 30 60 480 120 to 240 480 120 to 240 480 120 to 240 480 120 to 240
2P
.375 to .875 .500 to .875 .875 to 1.375 CPH7713 CPH7913 CPH7714 CPH7733 CPH7734 CPH7914 CPH7933 CPH7934
1 3 3 5
CSA certified units are rated at 600 volts. *In U.S. CESD are also suitable for Class I, Group C when used with immediately adjacent seals.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1279
2P
2P
1280
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Plugs and Receptacles Industrial Heavy Duty Interlocked Non-hazardous

Description
Application/Selection Interlocked Receptacle with Disconnect Switch
WSR 30, 60, 100A Aluminum WSRD 30, 60, 100A Sheet Metal WSRDW 30, 60, 100A Viewing Window WSRD SM S901 Stainless Steel
3P
Page No.
see pages 12821283
see page 1284 see page 1284 see page 1284 see pages 12861288 see pages 12901292 see page 1293 see page 1296 see page 1294
Rotary Switch
CSR 30 & 60A Non-metallic NEMA 4X WSQC 30 & 60A Aluminum
Watertight Krydon NEMA 4X

NSR 30, 60 & 100A Switch NBR 30, 60 & 100A Breaker
3P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1281
3P

Industrial Heavy Duty Interlocked Application and Selection
Applications:
Where extra protection is a requirement; interlocked units provide dead front receptacles; connection cannot be made or broken when unit is under load In areas where dirt, moisture, and corrosion are a problem; to supply power for portable electrical equipment and provide safe disconnect means and short circuit protection

Environmental: The environment of the enclosure location in terms of NEMA/EEMAC type required Material and construction to withstand rough usage and corrosive atmospheric conditions Electrical: Sufficient current carrying capacity to meet load requirements Compatibility with electrical system (new or existing installations) Interchangeability of plugs with hazardous and non-hazardous area receptacles Function: Switch vs. circuit breaker See "Quick Selector Chart" below and "Interchangeability Chart" on next page.
Options:
Special polarity and conduit arrangements are available to meet specific needs. See individual listing pages for details.

Series CSR Receptacle Interlocked With Disconnect switch NEMA/EEMAC Rating 3, 4X, 12 Mating Plug APJ/NPJ Electrical Characteristics Circuit breaker: 30, 60 amp. 600VAC Fusible or non-fusible Circuit breaker: 100 amp. frame size 250VDC/600VAC 3-pole Switch: 30, 60, 100 amp. 250VDC/240VAC 600VAC 3-pole Fusible or non-fusible Switch: 30, 60, 100 amp. 250VDC/240VAC 600VAC 3-pole Fusible or non-fusible Switch: 60 amp. 250VDC/240VAC 600VAC 3-pole Fusible or non-fusible Receptacle: 30, 60 amp. 600VAC 3-wire, 4-pole Receptacle: 30, 60, 100 amp. 250VDC/600VAC 3-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 4-pole Receptacle: 30, 60, 100 amp. 250VDC/600VAC 3-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 4-pole Receptacle: 30, 60, 100 amp. 250VDC/600VAC 3-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 4-pole Receptacle: 60 amp. 250VDC/600VAC 3-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 4-pole
NBR
Circuit breaker
3, 12
APJ/NPJ
NSR
Disconnect switch
3, 12
APJ/NPJ
WSR
Disconnect switch
3R, 4, 12
APJ/NPJ
WSRD
Disconnect switch
3R, 12
APJ/NPJ
3P
1282
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Industrial Heavy Duty Interlocked Interchangeability Chart
Many of the plugs listed in this section can be used interchangeably with receptacles from other sections, both in hazardous and nonhazardous areas, provided electrical rating and style of plug and receptacle are the same. The following table is a summary of possible combinations. Can be Used with these Receptacle Series AR AR DBR, EBBR FSQ, EPC, EPCB BHR
3P
Plugs Shown in Section 3P AP APJ/NPJ
Listed in Section 1P 1P 4P 4P 4P
Plug & Receptacle Electrical Rating 200 and 400 amp. 3-wire, 4-pole 30, 60, 100 amp. 3-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 4-pole 30, 60, 100 amp. 2-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 4-pole 4-wire, 5-pole
SP
3P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1283
3P
WSR, WSRD, WSRDW Interlocked Arktite Receptacles with Enclosed Disconnect Switches
WSR WSRD
30, 60, 100A NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 12 Raintight Watertight Corrosion-Resistant WSRDW
Aluminum NEMA 3R, 4, 12
Sheet Metal NEMA 3R, 12
Sheet Metal Viewing Window NEMA 3R, 12
Applications:
The WSR and WSRD disconnect switches are used as a service outlet for portable or fixed electrical equipment generators, compressors, welders, etc. They are designed for use in nonhazardous areas where dust, moisture and corrosion may be a problem. Designed for flush or surface mounting. A fusible type switch, when used, also provides short circuit protection.
Features:
WSR and WSRD: Switches are NEMA type HD heavy duty 3-pole, with visible blades; a quick make-and-break mechanism with reinforced, positive pressure type blade and jaw construction. Fusible types have fuse clips with steel reinforcing springs of positive pressure type. Pressure connectors are used for wire connectors. For maximum safety, the spring door receptacle at the bottom of the unit is mechanically interlocked with the switch operating mechanism. The switch cannot be closed until the plug is fully inserted and the plug cannot be withdrawn or inserted unless the switch is open. With the switch open, accidental plug withdrawal is prevented by the interlock mechanism. Withdrawal can only be accomplished by activation of the interlock release lever located on the receptacle. Enclosures are compact and rectangular in shape with a gasketed, hinged door. Enclosure, handle and other exterior parts are corrosion resistant.
The switch enclosure covers are interlocked with the body and operating mechanism and cannot be opened when the plug is engaged and the switch is closed ("ON"). When the switch is open, the switch cannot be put in a closed ("ON") position with the door open. WSR: Mounting lugs may be rotated 90 or moved to the vertical centerline portion for pole mounting. Side hinged covers are retained in a closed position by compression spring draw-pull catches, which permit the opening or closing of the cover without tools. The switch operating handle may be padlocked in the "ON" or "OFF" position, thereby preventing unauthorized operation of the switch and/or opening of the enclosure. Up to three padlocks may be used. In addition, a unique hinge arrangement has been devised to allow the door of the unit to be padlocked. This feature allows operation while preventing unqualified or unauthorized entry.
Standard Materials:
WSR and WSRD: Receptacle housings and plug exteriors copper-free aluminum Insulation (plug and receptacle) fiberglass-reinforced polyester Pressure contacts brass Crimp/solder contacts leaded red brass WSR: Enclosure copper-free aluminum Operating handle copper-free aluminum Other exterior parts stainless steel WSRD: Enclosure sheet steel Operating handle sheet steel Other exterior parts stainless steel
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum WSR enclosure, plug exteriors natural Leaded red brass electro-tin-plate Brass natural Sheet steel baked grey enamel Fiberglass-reinforced polyester natural (red)

WSR: NEMA 3R, 4, 12 (enclosure) UL Standard 98 WSRD: NEMA 3R, 12 UL Standard 98

3 and 4 pole; fusible or non-fusible; 240 VAC, 250 VDC; 600 VAC 30, 60, 100 amperes 71/2 to 75 HP
3P
Options:
Description Suffix Interiors rotated 221/2 to the right (viewed from face).......................... S4 Auxiliary switch, 600 VAC-DC heavy duty pushbutton station rating, can be supplied, and its contacts will close after safety switch contacts open and close before safety switch opens............. S483
1284
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
WSR, WSRD, WSRDW Interlocked Arktite Receptacles with Enclosed Disconnect Switches
APJ/NPJ Plugs
WSR Conduit Opening Sizes 1 11/ 4 11/ 2 1 11/ 4 11/ 2 1 11/ 4 11/ 2 1 11/ 4 11/ 2 240VAC 600VAC 250VDC Cat. # WSR3351* WSR6351* WSR10351* WSR3352* WSR6352* WSR10352* WSR33541 WSR63541 WSR103541 WSR33542 WSR63542 WSR103542 Max. HP Rating 240VAC 71/ 2 15 30 71/ 2 15 30 71/ 2 15 30 71/ 2 15 30 Max. HP Rating 480VAC 15 30 60 15 30 60 15 30 60 15 30 60
30, 60, 100A NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 12 Raintight Watertight Corrosion-Resistant
3P
WSRD For viewing window see note 2 Max. HP Rating 600VAC 20 50 75 20 50 75 20 50 75 20 50 75 600VAC 250VDC Cat. # WSRD3351* WSRD6351* WSRD10351* WSRD3352* WSRD6352* WSRD10352* WSRD33541 WSRD63541 WSRD103541 WSRD33542 WSRD63542 WSRD103542 Max. HP Rating 480VAC 15 30 60 15 30 60 15 30 60 15 30 60 Max. HP Rating 600VAC 20 50 75 20 50 75 20 50 75 20 50 75
System 3-Wire, 3-Pole Style 1, Fusible 3-Wire, 4-Pole Style 2, Fusible 3-Wire, 3-Pole Style 1, Nonfusible 3-Wire, 4-Pole Style 2, Nonfusible
Amps 30 60 100 30 60 100 30 60 100 30 60 100
*Arranged for NEC Class H fuses. May be field converted to NEC Class J fuses. Furnished with reducer which may be removed to obtain one size larger opening. Locknut and bushing used must meet NEC requirements (WSR only). Ratings of unfused and fusible switches with time delay fuses. Viewing window add "W" to prefix, i.e.: WSRDW6352. Conduit entrances not furnished.
APJ/NPJ Plugs
Amps Max. Volts 250 DC 600 AC 250 DC 600 AC 250 DC 600 AC Outside Dia. of Cable, Flexible Conduit or Armored Cable 0.60 to 1.20 0.55 to .070 0.70 to 0.85 0.75 to 1.45 0.75 to 1.07 1.07 to 1.35 1.00 to 1.70 0.93 to 1.21 1.21 to 1.50 Style 1 3-wire, 3-pole Cat. # APJ3375 Style 2 3-wire, 4-pole Cat. # APJ3485 NPJ3483 NPJ3484 APJ6485 NPJ6484 NPJ6485 APJ10487 NPJ10486 NPJ10487
Style 1 - Grounded through shell. Style 2 - Grounded through extra pole and shell. For a detailed description of these grounding methods, see page 1230.
30 60
APJ6375
100
APJ10377
Dimensions
In Inches: WSR
Dims. 30 Amps a 113/4 b 201/16 c 69/16 d 71/4 e 215/32 f 2711/16 g 43/4 gg 7 Mtg. Holes 3/8 60 Amps 100 Amps 113/4 201/16 69/16 71/4 215/32 2811/16 51/4 613/16 3 /8 147/8 265/16 99/16 81/4 27/8 353/8 71/4 73/4 7 /16
Dim. "g" and "gg" are exposed portion of plug when engaged with receptacle.
WSRD
WSR WSRD Dims. g gg Mtg. Holes 60 Amps 513/16 613/16 5 /16
3P
Dim. "g" and "gg" are exposed portion of plug when engaged with receptacle.
APJ
NPJ
APJ
NPJ
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1285
3P
Arktite WSRD SM S901 Stainless Steel Interlocked Receptacles

Fused and Non-fused
30, 60 and 100 Amp Enclosure Type 3, 4, 4X, 12 IP66 UL and cUL Listed
WSRD SM S901 Series Stainless Steel Arktite Interlocked Receptacles

Cooper Crouse-Hinds Arktite Stainless Steel Interlocks prevent engagement and disengagement of the plug under load, providing safe portable connections and extended product life. Available in 30100 Amp in both fused and non-fused versions, the Stainless Steel Interlock is rated Enclosure Type 4X watertight and features an optional viewing window.
Arktite Stainless Steel Interlocked Receptacles:

Supply power to portable or fixed electrical equipment such as welders, compressors, conveyors, portable tools, lighting systems and similar equipment. Are used in damp or corrosive locations. Are ideal for use in wet locations and hosedown areas.

Heavy duty Arktite receptacle is compatible with existing Cooper Crouse-Hinds Arktite plugs of same rating and configuration Self-wiping, naval brass contacts in receptacle assure reliable performance and long dependable life Stainless steel interior hardware Ground bar supplied as standard and connected to 4th wire in receptacle UL and cUL Listed
Ordering Information: 3-Pole, 4-Wire - 600 VAC

Amps Cat. # 30 30 30 60 60 60 100 100 100 1286
Description Fused w/Window Non-fused Non-fused w/Window Fused w/Window Non-fused Non-fused w/Window
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Weight Mating Arktite Plug (lbs.) Cat. # 24 22 22 30 29 29 36 35 35 APJ3485 & NPJ3485 APJ3485 & NPJ3485 APJ3485 & NPJ3485 APJ6485 & NPJ6485 APJ6485 & NPJ6485 APJ6485 & NPJ6485 APJ10487 & NPJ10487 APJ10487 & NPJ10487 APJ10487 & NPJ10487
3P
WSRDW3352 SM S901 WSRD33542 SM S901 WSRDW33542 SM S901 WSRDW6352 SM S901 WSRD63542 SM S901 WSRDW63542 SM S901
WSRDW10352 SM S901 Fused w/Window WSRD103542 SM S901 Non-fused WSRDW103542 SM S901 Non-fused w/Window
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Fused and Non-fused
3P
Optional window allows viewing of both visible blade and indicating type fuses.
Plug locks into receptacle, providing positive, worry-free power engagement as well as watertight protection.

UL Listed (UL Standards 98, 1682) cUL Listed (Certified by UL to CSA Standards C22.2 Nos. 4, 182.1) Enclosure Type 3, 4, 4X, 12 IP66 Enclosure Complies with OSHA lockout/tagout requirements.
Standard Materials:
Enclosure Type 304 stainless steel Hardware stainless steel Receptacle Housing aluminum Power Contacts naval brass Interlock Mechanism stainless steel
Standard Finishes:
Stainless Steel natural Aluminum Corro-free epoxy powder Brass natural
3P
Options:
Description Suffix Factory Installed Auxiliary Contacts........................................ S483 Rotated Interior (221/2 to right)................................................ S4 Heavy-duty, epoxy coated cast aluminum receptacle with stainless steel interlocking mechanism for superior durability and corrosion resistance.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1287
3P

Fused and Non-fused
Horsepower Ratings
Cat. # WSRD33542 SM S901 WSRDW33542 SM S901 WSRDW3352 SM S901 WSRD63542 SM S901 WSRDW63542 SM S901 WSRDW6352 SM S901 WSRD103542 SM S901 WSRDW103542 SM S901 WSRDW10352 SM S901 Amps 30 30 30 60 60 60 100 100 100 Fusing Non-fused Non-fused Fused Non-fused Non-fused Fused Non-fused Non-fused Fused 240 VAC (1 PH) 5 5 1.5 (3) 10 10 3 (10) 15 15 7.5 (15) 240 VAC (3 PH) 10 10 3 (7.5) 20 20 7.5 (15) 40 40 15 (30) 480 VAC (1 PH) 7.5 7.5 3 (7.5) 20 20 5 (20) 30 30 10 (30) 480 VAC (3 PH) 20 20 5 (15) 50 50 15 (30) 75 75 25 (60) 600 VAC (1 PH) 10 10 3 (10) 25 25 10 (25) 40 40 15 (40) 600 VAC (3 PH) 30 30 7.5 (20) 60 60 15 (50) 100 100 30 (75) 250 VDC 5 5 5 10 10 10 20 20 20
Note: Values for Non-Fused units are maximum horsepower. Values for Fused units are standard horsepower with standard fuse and (maximum horsepower with time delay).
Dimensions
In Inches:
Amps 30 60 100
A 5.47 7.99 8.47
B 16.49 18.49 24.18
C 23.49 25.49 31.18
D 9.00 11.52 12.00
E 8.61 8.61 8.61
3P
1288
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
3P
3P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1289
3P
Arktite CSR Series Non-metallic Interlocked Receptacles

Fused and Non-fused
CSR Series Compact Interlocked Arktite Receptacles

Cooper Crouse-Hinds interlocked receptacles prevent engagement and disengagement of the plug under load, providing safe portable connections and extended product life.
Arktite Compact Interlocked Receptacles are Used:

To supply power to portable or fixed electrical equipment such as welders, compressors, conveyors, portable tools, lighting systems and similar equipment. In damp or corrosive locations. In wet locations. In hosedown areas.

Enclosure Type 4X, Watertight, IP66. Compact enclosure is designed to fit into the web of an I-beam. Heavy duty Arktite receptacle is compatible with existing Cooper Crouse-Hinds Arktite plugs of same rating and configuration. Bussmann CubeFuse with Indicator the world's first "finger-safe" industrial power fuse. Front mounted handle permits the interlocked receptacles to be easily mounted side by side or in tight spots. Molded-in-place mounting feet require only four screws to mount the entire unit. UL and cUL Listed.
Ordering Information: 600 VAC

Amps Configuration 3W, 3W, 3W, 3W, 4P 4P 4P 4P Hub Size 1" 1" 11/4" 11/4" Fusing Fused Non-fused Fused Non-fused Cat. # CSR3352 CSR33542 CSR6352 CSR63542 Mating Cat. # APJ3485/NPJ3484 APJ3485/NPJ3484 APJ6485/NPJ6484 APJ6485/NPJ6484
3P
30 30 60 60
1290
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Fused and Non-fused
3P
Fully rated for 30A and 60A at 600 VAC. For use with Bussmann CubeFuse. Fuses not included.
Plug locks into receptacle, providing positive, worry-free power engagement as well as watertight protection.

UL Listed (UL Standards 508, 1682) cUL Listed (Certified by UL to CSA Standards C22.2 Nos. 14, 182.1) Enclosure Type 3, 4, 4X, 12 IP66 Enclosure
Complies with OSHA lockout/ tagout requirements.
Standard Materials:
Enclosure fiber reinforced polyester Hardware stainless steel Receptacle Housing aluminum Power Contacts naval brass Interlock Mechanism stainless steel
Standard Finishes:
Aluminum Corro-free epoxy powder Brass natural Stainless Steel natural
3P
Options:
Description Suffix Factory Installed Auxiliary Contacts................................... S483 Rotated Interior (221/2 to right)........................................... S4 Heavy-duty, epoxy coated cast aluminum receptacle with stainless steel interlocking mechanism for superior durability and corrosion resistance.
Horsepower Ratings
Amps 30 60 250 VAC 10 HP 20 HP 480 VAC 20 HP 40 HP 600 VAC 25 HP 40 HP
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
US: 1-866-764-5454
1291
3P

Fused and Non-fused
Dimensions
In Inches:
Amps 30 30 60 60
Style Fused Non-fused Fused Non-fused
Dimension A 18.26 18.26 19.26 19.26
Dimension B 8.00 7.87 8.00 7.87
Hub Size 1" 1" 11/4" 11/4"
3P
1292
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
WSQC Interlocked Arktite Receptacles with Enclosed Switches

APJ Plugs
Applications:
WSQC dead front interlocked receptacles with APJ, NPJ, BP or FP plugs are used: To supply power to portable electrical equipment such as hand lamps, lighting systems, power tools, conveyors, welders, compressors, etc. In damp, wet or corrosive locations Indoors or outdoors in non-hazardous areas In locations where mounting area is confined and compact equipment is required
30 and 60A 600 VAC NEMA 3R, 12
Raintight Dust-tight
3P
Features:
NEMA 3R, 12 Rainproof, dust-tight Available in 30 and 60 amps Horsepower rated switch Smallest footprint for interlocked receptacles Padlockable in OFF position; meets OSHA lockout/tagout requirements Compatible with Arktite APJ aluminum and NPJ Krydon material non-metallic plugs
Dimensions
In Inches:

NEMA 3R, 12 CSA Standard: C22.2 No. 14, 182.1 UL and cUL Listed
Standard Materials:
Enclosure copper-free aluminum Cover and spring door copper-free aluminum Insulator Krydon material Contacts brass Cover gasket neoprene
Amps 30A 60A
A 31/8 5
B 93/4 147/16
C 81/2
D 53/4 7
E 3 /8 13 /32
Horsepower Ratings:
Single Phase Amps 30A 60A 120V 2 240V 5 10 480V 71/2 25 600V 71/2 30 120V 3 Three Phase 240V 71/2 10 480V 15 25 600V 15 30
Amps Hub /4" 1" 3 /4"
3
Config. 2W3P 2W3P 3W4P 3W4P 2W3P 3W4P
Cat. # WSQC2330 WSQC3330 WSQC2340 WSQC3340 WSQC5630 WSQC5640
Options:
Description Suffix Interior rotated 221/2 to the right (viewed from face)................................. S4 ex: WSQC5640 S4
3P
30A
1" 60A 11/2" 11/2"
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1293
3P
NBR Arktite Interlocked Receptacles with Enclosed Circuit Breakers

APJ/NPJ Arktite Plugs
NEMA 3, 3R, 4*, 4X*, 12 ANSI/UL Standard: 489 UL Standard: 1682 CSA
NEMA 3, 3R, 4*, 4X*, 12 Watertight Corrosion-Resistant
Applications:
NBR Arktite interlocked receptacles with enclosed circuit breakers are used: To supply power and provide short circuit protection, thermal overload protection, and a disconnect means for portable electrical equipment such as motor generator sets, compressors, conveyors, and other similar equipment In locations where corrosion is present such as in offshore and marine locations, pulp and paper mills, chemical plants, food processing, and sewage treatment plants Indoors and outdoors in damp, wet or hosedown locations
Standard Materials:
Enclosure, covers and operating handles Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester material Operating shafts stainless steel Receptacle housings copper-free aluminum Receptacle insulators Krydon material Crimp/solder contacts leaded red brass
Features:
Enclosures are made of Krydon high impact strength fiberglass-reinforced polyester material having excellent resistance to corrosion and heat Receptacles are mechanically interlocked with circuit breakers which provide a disconnect means, short circuit protection, and thermal time delay overload protection For maximum safety, the spring door receptacle at the bottom is mechanically interlocked with the circuit breaker operating mechanism. The circuit breaker cannot be closed until the plug is fully inserted and the plug cannot be withdrawn unless the breaker is open Enclosure has hinged access door for easy wiring and maintenance. Three screws, hidden behind access door in door frame, prevent disassembly when door is locked Enclosure access door is mechanically interlocked with operating handle and cannot be opened unless operating handle operator is in "OFF" position A Krydon material hub (not mounted) is supplied with each enclosure as follows: Rating 30A 60A 100A Hub Size (In.)
3
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum baked on powder epoxy Stainless steel natural Enclosure natural Receptacle insulators natural (red) Brass natural Leaded red brass electro-tin-plated

Receptacles 30, 60 and 100 amperes Circuit Breakers 100 ampere frame size Note: For additional dimensional data, see page 496, enclosure catalog number NCB1024.

Plugs listed for use with NBR assemblies are standard Arktite APJ/NPJ plugs. Other standard APJ/NPJ and CPH plugs of the same rating, style and number of poles may be used with NBR receptacles, as well as EBBR, EPC and EPCB receptacles listed in Section 4P Portable equipment, suitable for the locations and equipped with the proper plug, can be used with non-hazardous rated AR receptacles, DBR and WSR interlocked receptacles located in nonhazardous locations, with EBBR, EPC and EPCB receptacles for Class I, Groups B, C, D hazardous locations, with DR and DBR interlocked receptacles for Class II, Groups F, G hazardous locations, and with NBR/NSR interlocked receptacles for wet and corrosive locations
Options:
Description Suffix Special polarity for use where two or more receptacles of the same ampere rating, style and number of poles are to be installed on the same premises for use of different voltages. Receptacle interior rotated 221/2 to right (viewed from face) and plug changed to match ..................... S4 Hubs for other conduit sizes can be supplied. See page 646.
Cat. # NHUB2 NHUB4 NHUB6
/4 11/4 2
For alternate hub sizes, see page 646 Receptacle has self-closing spring door assembly to provide environmental protection Operating handle can be padlocked in "OFF" position. Breaker is trip-free of handle and will open under short circuit or overload when handle is in the "ON" position Provided with top and bottom mounting feet which may be rotated 90 to vertical or horizontal mounting positions
3P
*30 and 60A Style 2 only.
1294
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
NBR Arktite Interlocked Receptacles with Enclosed Circuit Breakers

3-Pole, 600 VAC NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 Watertight Corrosion-Resistant
3P
100 Ampere Frame Size with Non-interchangeable Trip

Enclosure Receptacle With Spring Door Housing Hub Size (In.) Ckt. Brkr. Amps 20 30 40 50 50 60 70 90 100 60 70 90 100 20 30 40 50 50 60 70 90 100 60 70 90 100 Without Circuit Breaker Cat. # With Cutler-Hammer Circuit Breaker Cat. # NBR53731 NBR53731 NBR53731 NBR53731 NBR56731 NBR56731 NBR56731 NBR56731 NBR56731 NBR51731 NBR51731 NBR51731 NBR51731 NBR53742 NBR53742 NBR53742 NBR53742 NBR56742 NBR56742 NBR56742 NBR56742 NBR56742 NBR51742 NBR51742 NBR51742 NBR51742 WT20 WT30 WT40 WT50 3 3 3* 3*
APJ/NPJ Plugs
600 VAC With Cable Grip and Neoprene Bushing
Style 1
30 amp., 3-wire, 3-pole 60 amp., 3-wire, 3-pole 100 amp., 3-wire, 3-pole
3
/4
NBR53731
11/4
NBR56731
WT50 3 WT60 3 WT70 3* WT90 3* WT100 3* WT60 3 WT70 3 WT90 3 WT100 3 WT20 WT30 WT40 WT50 3 3 3* 3*
APJ
NBR51731
Style 2
30 amp., 3-wire, 4-pole 60 amp., 3-wire, 4-pole 100 amp., 3-wire, 4-pole
3
/4
NBR53742
1 /4
1
NBR56742
WT50 3 WT60 3 WT70 3* WT90 3* WT100 3* WT60 3 WT70 3 WT90 3 WT100 3
NPJ Cable O.D. Amps Range 30 Style 1 3-wire, 3-pole Cat. # Style 2 3-wire, 4-pole Cat. #
NBR51742
*Circuit breaker trip rating may exceed receptacle rating for welding equipment applications only, as higher trip rating may not protect wiring. Style 1 Grounded through shell. Style 2 Grounded through extra pole and shell. For a detailed description of these grounding methods, see page 1231. Also available with interchangeable trip breakers. Specify on order. For detailed information on circuit breaker selection, see Section 3C.
0.60 to 1.20 APJ3375 APJ3485 0.55 to 0.70 NPJ3483 0.70 to 0.85 NPJ3484 0.75 to 1.45 APJ6375 APJ6485 0.75 to 1.07 NPJ6484 1.07 to 1.35 NPJ6485 1.00 to 1.70 APJ10377 APJ10487 0.93 to 1.21 NPJ10486 1.21 to 1.50 NPJ10487
60
Pressure connectors are standard. Crimp/solder type terminators are optionally available for 3 and 4-pole 30, 60 and
100 ampere. For details, see page 1233. To specify, add the suffix "T" to the catalog number. For example: APJ3375-T (Plug).
100
Amps 30 60 100
b 313/ 8 33 333/ 4
a 413/ 16 513/ 16 65/ 8
aa 7 613/ 16 73/ 4
Dim. "a" and "aa" are exposed portion of plug when engaged with receptacle.
3P
APJ
NPJ
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1295
3P
NSR Arktite Interlocked Receptacles With Enclosed Disconnect Switches

NEMA 3, 3R, 4*, 4X*, 12 Watertight Corrosion-Resistant
Applications:
NSR Arktite interlocked receptacles with enclosed disconnect switches are used: To provide a power disconnect for fixed or portable electrical equipment such as welders, generators and compressors where the switch will be subject to frequent operation To provide short circuit protection when a fusible switch is needed In non-hazardous indoor or outdoor areas where corrosion, dust, hosedown and moisture may be a problem such as in offshore and marine locations, pulp and paper mills, chemical plants, sewage treatment plants and food processing facilities
Features:
Enclosures are made of Krydon high impact strength fiberglass-reinforced polyester material having excellent resistance to corrosion and heat Switches are NEMA type HD heavy duty 3-pole, enclosed blade; a quick makeand-break mechanism with reinforced, positive pressure type blade and jaw construction. Fusible switches have fuse clips with steel reinforcing springs For maximum safety, the spring door receptacle at the bottom is mechanically interlocked with the switch operating mechanism. The switch cannot be closed until the plug is fully inserted and the plug cannot be withdrawn unless the switch is open Switch enclosure access door is mechanically interlocked with switch and cannot be opened unless switch operator is in "OFF" position Enclosure has hinged access door for easy wiring and maintenance. Three screws, located behind access door in door frame, prevent disassembly when door is locked A Krydon material hub (not mounted) is supplied with each enclosure as follows: Rating 30A 60A 100A Hub Size (In.)
3

Plugs listed for use with NSR assemblies are standard Arktite APJ/NPJ plugs. Other standard APJ/NPJ and CPH plugs of the same rating, style and number of poles may be used with NSR receptacles, as well as with EBBR, EPC and EPCB receptacles listed in Section 4P Portable equipment, suitable for the locations and equipped with the proper plug, can be used with non-hazardous rated AR receptacles, DBR and WSR interlocked receptacles located in nonhazardous locations, with EBBR, EPC and EPCB receptacles for Class I, Groups B, C, D hazardous locations, with DR and DBR interlocked receptacles for Class II, Groups F, G hazardous locations, and with NBR/NSR interlocked receptacles for wet and corrosive locations
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum baked-on powder epoxy Stainless steel natural Leaded red brass electro-tin-plated Enclosure natural (gray) Insulator (plug and receptacle) natural (red)
Options:
Description Suffix Special polarity for use where two or more receptacles for the same ampere rating, style and number of poles are to be installed in the same area for use on different voltages. Receptacle interior rotated 221/2 to right (viewed from face) and matching plug ................................... S4 Hubs for other conduit sizes can be supplied. See page 646.
Cat. # NHUB2 NHUB4 NHUB6
/4 11/4 2
For alternate hub sizes, see page 646 Receptacle has self-closing spring door assembly to provide environmental protection Mounting feet may be rotated 90 to horizontal or vertical mounting positions Switch operating handle may be padlocked in the "OFF" position, preventing unauthorized operation of the switch
3P
Standard Materials:
Receptacle housings copper-free aluminum Insulators (plug and receptacle) Krydon material Crimp/solder contacts leaded red brass Enclosure and operating handle Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester material Other exterior parts stainless steel
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

NEMA 3, 3R, 4*, 4X*, 12 UL Standard: 1682, 98 1296
*30 and 60A Style 2 only.
US: 1-866-764-5454
NSR Arktite Interlocked Receptacles With Enclosed Disconnect Switches

240VAC/250VDC Conduit Opening Sizes
3 /4 11/4 2
240 and 600 VAC 250 VDC NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 12 Watertight Corrosion-Resistant
600VAC/250VDC AC HP Rating 3 5 10 71/2 20 30 DC HP Rating 5 10 20 5 10 20 Style 1 3-wire, 3-pole Cat. # NSR3351* NSR6351* NSR10351* NSR33541 NSR63541 NSR103541 Style 2 3-wire, 4-pole Cat. # NSR3352* NSR6352* NSR10352* NSR33542 NSR63542 NSR103542 AC HP Rating 71/2 20 30 20 50 75
3P
Amps Fusible 30 60 100
Style 1 3-wire, 3-pole Cat. # NSR331 NSR631 NSR1031 NSR3341 NSR6341 NSR10341
Style 2 3-wire, 4-pole Cat. # NSR332 NSR632 NSR1032 NSR3342 NSR6342 NSR10342
DC HP Rating 5 10 20 5 10 20
Non-Fusible 3 30 /4 60 11/4 100 2
APJ/NPJ Plugs
600VAC/250VDC, with Cable Grip and Neoprene Bushing
Cable Style 1 Amps O.D. Range 3-wire, 3-pole Cat. # 30 0.60 to 1.20 0.55 to 0.70 0.70 to 0.85 0.75 to 1.45 0.75 to 1.07 1.07 to 1.35 1.00 to 1.70 0.93 to 1.21 1.21 to 1.50 APJ3375
Style 2 3-wire, 4-pole Cat. # APJ3485 NPJ3483 NPJ3484 APJ6485 NPJ6484 NPJ6485 APJ10487 NPJ10486 NPJ10487
*Arranged for NEC Class H fuses. May be field converted to NEC Class J fuses. Fuse clips accommodate NEC Class H fuses. For NEC Class J fuses, use 600V switches. Style 1 Grounded through shell. Style 2 Grounded through extra pole and shell. For a detailed description of these grounding methods, see page 1231. For alternate hub sizes, refer to catalog page see page 818. Style 1 - Grounded through shell. Style 2 - Grounded through extra pole and shell. For a detailed description of these grounding methods, see page 1231 Pressure connectors are supplied as standard. To specify crimp/solder type terminators add the suffix "T" to the catalog number. For example: APJ3375-T (Plug).
APJ6375
60
APJ10377
100
Dimensions
In Inches:
Amps 30 60 100 b 313/8 33 333/4 a 413/16 513/16 65/8 aa 7 613/16 73/4
Dim. "a" and "aa" are exposed portion of plug when engaged with receptacle.
3P
APJ
NPJ
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1297
3P
3P
1298
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Plugs and Receptacles Industrial Heavy Duty Interlocked Hazardous

Description
Application/Selection Interlocked Receptacle with H.P. Rated Switch
Technical Data FSQC 30A & 60A / APJ Plugs FSQC 100A / APJ Plugs
4P
Page No.
see pages 13001301
see page 1302 see pages 13021303 see page 1304 see pages 13081309 see page 1310 see pages 13051307 see page 1312 see pages 13151316 see page 1317
Factory Sealed Switch

BHR 30A, 60A & 100A / BHP Plugs SRD 30A & 60A / SP Plugs
Circuit Breaker
EBBR 30A, 60A, 100A EPC, 30A, 60A, 100A, 200A EPCB 30A, 60A, 100A DBR 30A, 60A, 100A
4P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1299
4P

Industrial Heavy Duty Interlocked Application and Selection Hazardous
Applications:
Where extra protection is a requirement. Interlocked units provide dead front receptacles; connection cannot be made or broken when unit is under load. In areas made hazardous by flammable vapors, gases or dusts; to supply power for portable electrical equipment and provide safe disconnect means and short circuit protection.

Environmental: The environment of the enclosure location in terms of NEC/CEC compliance and NEMA/EEMAC type required. Material and construction to withstand rough usage and atmospheric conditions. Electrical: Sufficient current-carrying capacity to meet load requirements. Compatibility with electrical system (new or existing installation). Interchangeability of plugs with other hazardous and non-hazardous area receptacles. Function: Switch vs. circuit breaker.
Options:
Special polarity arrangements, material options, accessories, and optional arrangements of enclosure interiors are available to meet specific application needs. See listing pages for details.

Series BHR NEC/CEC & NEMA/EEMAC Compliances Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1 and 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA: 3, 4, 7BCD, 9FG, 12 NEC: Class II, Division 1 and 2, Groups F, G NEC: Class III NEMA/EFC: 3, 9FG, 12 CEC: Class II, Division 1 and 2, Group G CEC: Class III Encl. 3, 5 Receptacles Interlocked With Factory sealed switch Page See pages 13081309 Mating Plugs BHP Electrical Rating 30, 60, 100 amp. 480VAC 2-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 4-pole 4-wire, 5-pole Circuit breaker: 100 amp. frame size 250VDC/600VAC Receptacle: 30, 60, 100 amp. 2-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 4-pole Receptacle: 30, 60, 100, 150 amp. 3-wire, 4-pole Circuit breaker: 100 amp. frame size 480VAC/250VDC Receptacle: 30, 60, 100 amp. 2-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 4-pole Circuit breaker: 225 amp. frame size 600VAC/250VDC Receptacle: 200 amp. 3-wire, 4-pole Circuit breaker: 100 amp. frame size 600VAC/250VDC Receptacle: 30, 60, 100 amp. 2-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 4-pole
DBR
Circuit breaker
See page 1317
APJ/NPJ
EBBR
Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1 and 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA 3, 3R, 7BCD, 9FG, 12 NEC: Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups C, D NEC: Class II, Division 1 and 2, Groups F, G NEC: Class III NEMA: 3, 7CD, 9FG, 12 CEC: Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups C, D CEC: Class II, Division 1 and 2, Group G CEC: Class III Encl. 3, 4 Class I, Division 1 and 2, Group D Class II, Division 1 and 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA: 3, 7D, 9FG, 12
Circuit breaker
See pages 13051307
APJ/NPJ
EPC
Circuit breaker
See pages 13121314
APJ/NPJ
EPC
Circuit breaker
See pages 13121314
DP
4P
EPCB
NEC: Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D NEC: Class II, Division 1 and 2, Groups F, G NEC: Class III NEMA: 3, 7BCD, 9FG, 12 CEC: Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D CEC: Class II, Division 1 and 2, Group G CEC: Class III Encl. 3, 4
Circuit breaker
See pages 13151316
APJ/NPJ
1300
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Industrial Heavy Duty Interlocked Quick Selector and Interchangeability Chart Hazardous
Series FSQ NEC/CEC & NEMA/EEMAC Compliances NEC: Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D NEC: Class II, Division 1 and 2, Groups F, G NEC: Class III NEMA: 3, 7BCD, 9FG, 12 CEC: Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D CEC: Class II, Division 1 and 2, Groups G CEC: Class III Encl. 3, 5 Class I, Division 1 and 2, Group D Class II, Division 1 and 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA: 3, 7D, 9FG, 12 Receptacles Interlocked With Switch Page See pages 13021304 Mating Plugs APJ/NPJ
4P
Electrical Rating 30A 250V/20A 600VAC 2-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 4-pole 60 & 100 amp. 2-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 4-pole
SRD
Factory sealed switch
See pages 13101311
5P
30 & 60 amp. 480VAC 2-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 4-pole 4-wire, 5-pole
Many of the plugs listed in this section can be used interchangeably with receptacles from other sections, both in hazardous and non-hazardous areas, provided electrical rating and style of plug and receptacle are the same. The following table is a summary of possible combinations. Plugs Shown in Section 4P Can be Used with These Receptacle Series AR, NR EPC, EPCB, DBR, EBBR, CSR, FSQC APJ/NPJ NBR, NSR, WSR, CSR, WSRD, WSRDW, WSQC, WSRD SM S901 BHR SRD Plug & Receptacle Electrical Rating 30, 60, 100 amp. 3-wire, 4-pole
Listed in Section 1P 4P
3P
30, 60, 100 amp. 3-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 4-pole
BHP
4P
30, 60, 100 amp. 2-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 4-pole 4-wire, 5-pole 30, 60 amp. 2-wire, 3-pole 3-wire, 4-pole 4-wire, 5-pole
CAUTION: To reduce the risk of ignition of hazardous atmospheres, do not use plugs or receptacles in Class II, Group F locations that contain electrically conductive dusts.
SP
BHR SRD
4P
4P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1301
4P
FSQC Arktite Dead Front Interlocked Receptacles and Switches

Cl. I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1 and 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA/EEMAC 3, 7BCD, 9FG, 12
Applications:
FSQC dead front switched interlock receptacles are used: To supply power to portable electrical equipment such as hand lamps, lighting systems, power tools, conveyors, welders and similar equipment. In areas which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors or gases and combustible dusts. In damp, wet or corrosive locations. Indoors or outdoors at petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants and facilities for processing and handling grain, flour and starch.
Features:
Compatible with Arktite APJ aluminum and NPJ Krydon plugs Switch cannot be turned "ON" until plug is fully inserted and rotated Plug cannot be withdrawn under load Cover cannot be removed when switch is "ON" Satisfies OSHA lockout tagout requirement Smallest mounting footprint for interlocks
Options:
Description Suffix Special polarity, receptacle interior rotated 221/2....................... S4
Interchangeability of Plugs with Other Hazardous and Non-hazardous Location Receptacles:

Plugs listed for FSQC receptacles on 1043 are standard APJ/NPJ plugs. Other standard APJ/NPJ of the same rating, style and number of poles may be used with FSQC receptacles as well as with DBR, EBBR, EPC and EPCB receptacles listed in Section 2P and 4P. As a result, portable equipment suitable for the location and equipped with the proper plug can be used with AR series receptacles for non-hazardous areas, EBBR, EPC, EPCB, and FSQC receptacles for Class I hazardous locations; DBR receptacles for Class II hazardous locations.

NEMA 3, 7BCD, 9FG, 12 NEC/CEC: Class I, Division 1 & 2, Groups B, C, D Class I, Zone 1, Group IIB + Hydrogen Class II, Division 1 & 2, Groups F, G Class III ANSI/UL Standards: 1010 UL Listed CSA Standards: C22.2 No. 30 cUL Listed & C22.2 No. 159
Dimensions
In Inches:
30 Amp FSQC 60 Amp FSQC
Materials:
Enclosure copper-free aluminum Cover and spring door copper-free aluminum Insulator Krydon Contacts brass
4P
Dimensions
Cat. # FSQC2320, 3320 FSQC2430, 3430 FSQC2390, 3390 Maximum Dimensions a c d 43/4 31/8 53/4 e 93/4 f
3
/8
1302
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
FSQC Arktite Dead Front Interlocked Receptacles and Switches

FSQC Receptacles
With Spring Door Through Feed Hubs
Cl. I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1 and 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA/EEMAC 3, 7BCD, 9FG, 12
4P
Horsepower Rating:
Amps 30A 60A 120V 2 120V 3 Single Phase 240V 480V 5 10 71/2 25 600V 71/2 30 600V 15 30
Amps 30A 60A
Three Phase 240V 480V 71/2 10 15 25
Amps Hub
3
Config. 2W3P 3W4P 2W3P 3W4P 2W3P 3W4P
Description 2-Pole Switch 3-Pole Switch 2-Pole 3-Pole 2-Pole 3-Pole Switch Switch Switch Switch
Cat. # FSQC2320 FSQC2430 FSQC3320 FSQC3430 FSQC5630 FSQC5640
Matching Plug APJ3385 APJ3485 APJ3385 APJ3485 APJ6385 APJ6485
/4"
30A 1" 60A 11/2"
FSQC for Use with Magnetic Motor Starters or Contactors

FSQC units listed below operate in the same way as standard units but are intended only for use with magnetic motor starters or contactors (see Wiring Diagram 1). Receptacles have leads for splicing to conductors from the load side of contactor. The switch actuated by the plug is wired into the starter or contactor coil circuit and controls only this circuit. The starter or contactor is energized only when the plug is fully inserted and rotated to close the switch. Since the plug is inserted or withdrawn only when the switch is open, the circuit cannot be made or broken under the load. Plugs used are standard APJ units and special polarity units listed are recommended where interchange with devices for other wiring systems is possible.
FSQC Receptacles
With Spring Door Through Feed Hubs
No. of Hub Receptacle Poles Size Cat. # Standard Configuration 3 /4 FSQC2390 3W, 4P 3W, 4P 1 FSQC3390 3W, 4P 1 Special Polarity Configuration 3 3W, 4P /4 FSQC2390 S4 3W, 4P 1 FSQC3390 S4 Cable Dia. Mating Plug Cat. # APJ3485 NPJ3483 NPJ3484 APJ3485 S4 NPJ3483 S4 NPJ3484 S4
Wiring Diagram 1 FSQC2390 and 3390 only
4P
} }
0.39-1.20 0.55-0.70 0.70-0.85 0.39-1.20 0.55-0.70 0.70-0.85
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1303
4P
100 Amp FSQ Dead Front Interlocked
Cl. I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1 and 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 4X*, 7BCD, 9FG, 12 Explosionproof
NEMA 4 Watertight
Applications:
To supply power to portable or fixed electrical equipment such as welders, pumps, motors, machine tools, conveyors, oil rigs, mixers, grain elevators, petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants In hazardous areas containing flammable vapors or gases and combustible dusts In damp, wet or hosedown environments In highly corrosive locations
Materials:
Body copper-free aluminum Cover copper-free aluminum Locking collar Feraloy iron alloy Insulator Krydon material Contacts brass
Options:
Description Suffix Special polarity receptacle interior rotated 221/2 to right......... S4 (example: FSQC61040 S4) NEMA 4X epoxy powder coated S752 (example: FSQC61040 S752) Auxiliary contact............................ S483 Breather/Drain............................... S756V
Features:
NEMA Type 4 watertight Suitable for Group B Compact housing Simple operation Compatible with Arktite APJ aluminium and NPJ Krydon plugs H.P.-rated enclosed switch 4 mounting feet can be rotated for flexibility in positioning to surface Wiring channel provided under switch for easy wire routing to terminals Dual bottom-feed hubs and one top hub for convenient feed-through installation Bread-loose fork lugs case in place for easy removal of cover
Safety First:
Power cannot be turned "on" until plug is fully inserted and Uni-Loc collar is rotated When Uni-Loc collar is in "on" position, plug is locked in place to prevent disengagement under load Cover cannot be removed while switch is "on" Cover-Loc design prevents switch from being turned "on" while cover is removed Uni-Loc collar aligns with lug on housing to permit OSHA lockout/tagout in the "off" position

NEMA 3, 3R, 4, 4X*, 7BCD, 12 Class I, Divisions 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D Class I, Zone 1, Group IIB + H2 Class II, Divisions 1 and 2, Groups F, G Class III ANSI/UL Standards: 1010 and 98 UL Listed cUL Listed, CSA Standard C22.2 No. 30, C22.2 No. 159
*NEMA 4X when ordered with suffix S752.
Electrical Rating:
100A, 600VAC
Hub HP Rating Config. Size Rating 100A, 600 VAC 3W4P 2" Cat. # 50 HP @ 600V, FSQC61040 480V
Dimensions
In Inches:
4P
1304
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EBBR Series Interlocked Arktite Receptacles with Circuit Breakers

30, 60, 100 Amp Interlocked Receptacles
Applications:
EBBR interlocked receptacles with circuit breakers are used: As a service outlet for portable equipment indoors or outdoors in damp, wet, corrosive locations, without the need for a protective shelter. In areas which are hazardous due to flammable vapors, gases or combustible dust, e.g., refineries, chemical plants, and other processing and handling facilities of a hazardous nature. In areas where frequent washdowns are necessary or where heavy rain or water spray is prevalent.
Cl. I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1 and 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 3R, 7BCD, 9FG, 12 Explosionproof
Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Wet Locations
4P
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum natural Fiberglass-reinforced polyester natural (red) Brass natural Leaded red brass electro-tin-plated Stainless steel natural

Circuit breakers 20150 amps Receptacles 30, 60, 100, 150 amp 3-wire, 4-pole configuration
Options:
The following options are available from the factory by adding suffix to the Cat. #: Description Suffix Receptacle interior rotated 221/2 to right (viewed from face) and plug changed to match.................S4 Breather (ECD13) at top, Drain (ECD11) at bottom........................ S198V Group B Breather and Drain......... S756V External Powder Epoxy Finish...... S752
Features:
Rugged, corrosion resistant, cast copper-free aluminum construction. Accepts compatible Arktite plug of same rating and configuration. Mechanical interlock mechanism for dead front construction. Receptacles are mechanically interlocked with circuit breakers to provide disconnect means, short circuit protection and thermal time delay overload protection. A spring door receptacle, located at the bottom of the unit, is mechanically interlocked with the circuit breaker operating mechanism for safe and dependable operation. Plug and receptacle contacts cannot be made or broken under load. The circuit breaker cannot be closed until the plug is fully inserted and the plug cannot be withdrawn unless the breaker is de-energized. Operating handles can be padlocked in either "ON" or "OFF" positions. Breakers are trip-free of the handles and will open under short circuit or overload even if the handle is locked in the "ON" position. Component operating handles located through the right side wall of the body permits visual confirmation of correct component assembly and operation. Total compliance to the wiring and room requirements of the National Electrical Code. Semi-clamshell enclosure design, with an external machined flat joint flamepath between body and cover makes interior components easily accessible. Minimum enclosure-to-enclosure spacing with little interference between the opened cover and an adjacent enclosure. Copper-free aluminum hinges allow the cover to swing well out of the way. Stainless steel, quick release, captive, hex head cover bolts. Stainless steel springs provide clear indication cover bolts are fully retracted from body. Versatile, internal operating mechanisms allow for field adjustment to accommodate popular manufacturers' breakers.
Grounding:
Simple, straightforward installation of breaker on pre-drilled mounting plate within enclosure. Neoprene cover gasket permanently attached to the cover seals out moisture. Bodies have top drilled and tapped entrance for power conduit (11/2") plus one at the top and one at the bottom for a breather and drain (1/2"). Breather and drain entrances are plugged. Tap-on mounting feet. EBBR interlocked receptacles and matching plugs are provided with an extra grounding pole for attaching a grounding wire. In addition, direct connection is provided between receptacle and metallic plug and the grounding pole. If a compatible non-metallic plug made of Krydon fiberglass-reinforced polyester material is used, grounding is accomplished through the extra grounding pole only. If a separate grounding wire is not installed in the enclosure, grounding is accomplished through the conduit system.
Caution: To reduce the risk of ignition of hazardous atmospheres, do not use plugs or receptacles in Class II, Group F locations that contain electrically conductive dusts.

NEC: Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1 and 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA: 3, 3R, 7BCD, 9FG, 12 UL Standard: 1203
Standard Materials:
Body, cover, and receptacle copperfree aluminum Contact insulator (receptacles and plugs) fiberglass-reinforced polyester Receptacle contacts leaded red brass Pressure contacts (plugs) brass Operating handle copper-free aluminum Operating shafts and bushings stainless steel Interior parts heavy gauge sheet steel, zinc plated Cover bolts, washer and retractile springs stainless steel
4P
1305
4P


Plugs listed for use with EBBR receptacles are standard Arktite APJ/NPJ plugs. Standard APJ/NPJ and also CPH plugs of the same rating, style and number of poles may be used with EBBR receptacles, as well as with DBR, EPC and EPCB receptacles listed in Section 4P of the catalog. As a result, portable equipment suitable for the location and equipped with the proper plug can be used with AR/NR series receptacles for non-hazardous locations; EBBR, EPC and EPCB receptacles for Class I and II hazardous locations; and DR and DBR receptacles for Class II hazardous locations.
Complete EBBR receptacle with circuit breaker installed.
Receptacle With Spring Door Housing 30 Amp 3-wire 4-pole Style 2 60 Amp 3-wire 4-pole Style 2 100 Amp 3-wire 4-pole Style 2 150 Amp 3-wire 4-pole Style 2 Hub Size (In.) 1 /2
1
Circuit Breaker Rating Amps 3-pole 480VAC+ or 250 VDC 3-pole 480VAC+ or 250 VDC 3-pole 480VAC+ or 250 VDC 3-pole 480VAC+ or 250 VDC 20 30 40 50 50 60 70 90 100 50 60 70 90 100 100 125 150
Without Circuit Breaker Cat. # EBBRA304 EBBRA304 EBBRA304 EBBRA304 EBBRA604 EBBRA604 EBBRA604 EBBRB604 EBBRB604 EBBRA104 EBBRA104 EBBRA104 EBBRB104 EBBRB104 EBBRB154 EBBRB154 EBBRB154
w/Cutler-Hammer Breaker EBBRA304 EBBRA304 EBBRA304 EBBRA304 WT20 WT30 WT40 WT50 3 3 3* 3*
w/G.E. Breaker EBBRA304 EBBRA304 EBBRA304 EBBRA304 TT20 TT30 TT40 TT50 3 3 3* 3*
w/Square D Breaker EBBRA304 EBBRA304 EBBRA304 EBBRA304 DT20 DT30 DT40 DT50 3 3 3* 3*
11/2
EBBRA604 WT50 3 EBBRA604 WT60 3 EBBRA604 WT70 3* EBBRB604 WT90 3* EBBRB604 WT100 3* EBBRA104 WT50 3 EBBRA104 WT60 3 EBBRA104 WT70 3 EBBRB104 WT90 3 EBBRB104 WT100 3 EBBRB154 WT100 3 EBBRB154 WT125FDB 3 EBBRB154 WT150FDB 3
EBBRA604 TT50 3 EBBRA604 TT60 3 EBBRA604 TT70 3* EBBRB604 TT90 3* EBBRB604 TT100 3* EBBRA104 TT50 3 EBBRA104 TT60 3 EBBRA104 TT70 3 EBBRB104 TT90 3 EBBRB104 TT100 3
EBBRA604 DT50 3 EBBRA604 DT60 3 EBBRA604 DT70 3* EBBRB604 DT90 3* EBBRB604 DT100 3* EBBRA104 DT50 3 EBBRA104 DT60 3 EBBRA104 DT70 3 EBBRB104 DT90 3 EBBRB104 DT100 3
11/2
11/2
4P
+Enclosures with 600 Volt circuit breakers are available. Add suffix "FDB" Ex: EBBRA304 WT20FDB-3. *Circuit breaker trip rating may exceed receptacle rating for welding equipment applications only, as higher trip rating may not protect wiring. 150A also available in A size enclosure for areas with space constraints (ie EBBRA154). Caution: To reduce the risk of ignition of hazardous atmospheres, do not use plugs or receptacles in Class II, Group F locations that contain electrically conductive dusts.
1306
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Cable O.D. Range 0.60 to 1.20 0.55 to 0.70 0.70 to 0.85 0.75 to 1.45 0.75 to 1.07 1.07 to 1.35 1.00 to 1.70 0.93 to 1.21 1.21 to 1.50 3-wire, 4-pole Cat. # Krydon Aluminum material APJ3485 NPJ3483 NPJ3484 APJ6485 NPJ6484 NPJ6485 APJ10487 NPJ10486 NPJ10487
4P
APJ and NPJ Arktite Plugs
Amps 30
60
100
Aluminum APJ series
Krydon material NPJ series (non-metallic)
Both APJ and NPJ series plugs may be used with EBBR series interlocked receptacles.
Dimensions
In Inches:
EBBRA
Amps 30 60 100 150 A 19.40 19.40 19.40 19.40 B 22.85 23.95 24.70 24.70 C 17.25 17.25 17.25 17.25 D 14.50 14.50 14.50 14.50
EBBRB
A 26.90 26.90 26.90 B 31.45 32.20 32.20 C 24.75 24.75 24.75 D 22.00 22.00 22.00
Caution: To reduce the risk of ignition of hazardous atmospheres, do not use plugs or receptacles in Class II, Group F locations that contain electrically conductive dusts.
4P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1307
4P
BHR Dead Front Interlocked Receptacles with Factory Sealed Switch

BHP Plugs
Cl. I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1 and 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7BCD, 9FG, 12 Explosionproof
Applications:
BHR dead front interlocked receptacles and switches with BHP plugs are used: To supply power to portable electrical equipment such as motor-generator sets, compressors, heating and cooling units, lighting systems, conveyors, and similar equipment Primarily in areas which are hazardous due to the presence of hydrogen or gases, or vapors of equivalent hazard such as manufactured gas In damp, wet, or corrosive locations Indoors or outdoors in hydrogen areas of process industries, missile bases where hydrogen fuel is used, and gas manufacturing plants
Standard Materials:
Receptacle housings copper-free aluminum Seals malleable iron Plug exteriors copper-free aluminum Insulation high impact glass filled phenolic Contacts brass
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum natural Malleable iron electrogalvanized and aluminum lacquer Phenolic natural (black) Brass silver plated BHR/BHP in use.
Features:
BHR receptacles feature a built-in rotary switch which is operated automatically when the plug is inserted and withdrawn. The switch, capable of making and breaking the circuit at full rated load, is operated by a helical blade in the center of the plug The plug and receptacle contacts cannot be made or broken under load. When the plug is inserted, the plug and receptacle contacts engage before the switch closes. When the plug is withdrawn, the switch opens before the plug and receptacle contacts disengage. This sequence of operation provides maximum safety in a dead front receptacle. Arcing is isolated in a flame and dust-tight chamber Operation is simple, safe and positive. To disconnect the portable device, the plug fastening ring is unscrewed and the plug simply pulled straight out. No separate interlock device or operating handle need be actuated Positive engagement without mismatching is assured by a distinct physical polarization of the plug and receptacle in every rating Plugs are furnished with pressure terminations. Receptacles are furnished with flexible leads for splicing to the supply conductors. A large threaded cover provides access to the wiring compartment As shown in the listings, assemblies are available for top, bottom or through feed conduit arrangements in 3/4" to 2" sizes
Options:
Special polarity where two or more receptacles of the same ampere rating and number of poles are to be installed in the same areas for use on different voltages, alternate polarizations can be furnished. Details on request.

30, 60 and 100 amperes, 480VAC
Grounding:
BHR receptacles and BHP plugs are provided with an extra grounding pole. In plugs, provision is made for attachment of the grounding wire to the grounding pole. In addition, direct connection is provided between the plug and receptacle housings and the grounding pole. In the receptacle, grounding is accomplished through the conduit system
BHR/BHP separated showing helical driver.
Dimensions
In Inches:
4P

Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1 and 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA: 3, 4, 7BCD, 9FG, 12 ANSI/UL Standard: 1010
BHR/BHP
BHR only
1308
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
BHR Dead Front Interlocked Receptacles with Factory Sealed Switch

BHP Plugs, 480 VAC, 60400 hertz
Receptacles
Cl. I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1 and 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 4, 7BCD, 9FG, 12
4P
Receptacles are supplied ready to install with a threaded cap. Through feed hubs are standard. Sealing fittings, nipples and closure plugs ordered separately depending on application. Receptacles can be configured for Top Feed, Bottom feed or Through feed. Amps Config. 2-wire, 2-wire, 3-wire, 3-wire, 4-wire, 4-wire, 2-wire, 2-wire, 3-wire, 3-wire, 4-wire, 4-wire, 2-wire, 2-wire, 3-wire, 3-wire, 4-wire, 4-wire, 3-pole 3-pole 4-pole 4-pole 5-pole 5-pole 3-pole 3-pole 4-pole 4-pole 5-pole 5-pole 3-pole 3-pole 4-pole 4-pole 5-pole 5-pole Hub Size (In.) /4 1 3 /4 1 1 11/4
3
Cat. # BHRC3382N BHRC3383N BHRC3482D BHRC3483D BHRC3583 NW BHRC3584 NW BHRC6384N BHRC6385N BHRC6484D BHRC6485D BHRC6584 NW BHRC6585 NW BHRC10384N BHRC10385N BHRC10485D BHRC10486D BHRC10585 NW BHRC10586 NW
30
60
11/4 11/2 11/4 11/2 11/4 11/2 11/4 11/2 11/2 2 11/2 2
100
Plugs
Plugs mate to BHR receptacles. Plugs are supplied with threaded locking ring that threads onto receptacle housing for secure connection and environmental seal. Mechanical external cord grip and neoprene bushing provided for secure cord retention and environmental seal. Amps Config. 2-wire, 2-wire, 3-wire, 3-wire, 4-wire, 4-wire, 2-wire, 2-wire, 3-wire, 3-wire, 4-wire, 4-wire, 2-wire, 2-wire, 3-wire, 3-wire, 4-wire, 4-wire, 3-pole 3-pole 4-pole 4-pole 5-pole 5-pole 3-pole 3-pole 4-pole 4-pole 5-pole 5-pole 3-pole 3-pole 4-pole 4-pole 5-pole 5-pole Cable Dia. .500 - .875 .875 - 1.375 .500 - .875 .875 - 1.375 .500 - .875 .875 - 1.375 .500 - .875 .875 - 1.375 .500 - .875 .875 - 1.375 .875 - 1.375 1.375 - 1.875 .875 - 1.375 1.375 - 1.875 .875 - 1.375 1.375 - 1.875 .875 - 1.375 1.375 - 1.875 Cat. # BHP3383N BHP3385N BHP3483D BHP3485D BHP3583 NW BHP3585 NW BHP6383N BHP6385N BHP6483D BHP6485D BHP6585 NW BHP6587 NW BHP10385N BHP10387N BHP10485D BHP10487D BHP10585 NW BHP10587 NW
30
60
100
4P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1309
4P
SRD Dead Front Interlocked Receptacles with Factory Sealed Switch

SP Plugs, 480 VAC, 60400 hertz
Standard Materials:
Cl. I, Div. 1 and 2, Group D Cl. II, Div. 1 and 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7D, 9FG, 12 Explosionproof
Applications:
SRD dead front interlocked receptacles, switches, and SP plugs are used: To supply power to portable electrical equipment such as motor-generator sets, compressors, heating and cooling units, lighting systems, conveyors and similar equipment In areas which are hazardous due to the presence of flammable vapors or gases and combustible dusts In damp, wet or corrosive locations Indoors or outdoors at petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants, as well as facilities for processing and handling grain, flour and starch
Back box Feraloy iron alloy Threaded cover copper-free aluminum Receptacle housings and plug exteriors copper-free aluminum Insulation high impact glass filled phenolic Contacts brass
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy iron alloy electrogalvanized and aluminum acrylic paint Copper-free aluminum natural Phenolic natural (black) Brass silver plated
Features:
SRD receptacles feature a built-in rotary switch that operates automatically when the plug is inserted and withdrawn. The switch, capable of making and breaking the circuit at full rated load, is operated by a helical blade in the center of the plug. The plug and receptacle contacts cannot be made or broken under load. When the plug is inserted, the plug and receptacle contacts engage before the switch closes. When the plug is withdrawn, the switch opens before the plug and receptacle contacts disengage. This sequence of operation provides the maximum safety of a dead front receptacle. Arcing is isolated in a flame and dust-tight chamber. Operation is simple, safe and positive. To disconnect the portable device, the plug is simply pulled straight out. No separate interlock device or operating handle need be actuated. Positive engagement without mismating is assured by a distinct physical polarization of plug and receptacle in every rating. Plugs are furnished with pressure terminations. Receptacles are furnished with flexible leads for splicing to the supply conductors. A threaded cover at the top provides access to the wiring compartment. Back box is provided with 11/4" vertical through feed hubs.
Options:
Special polarity where two or more receptacles of the same ampere rating and number of poles are to be installed in the same area for use on different voltages, alternate polarizations can be furnished. Details on request.

30 and 60 amperes, 480VAC
Grounding:
SRD receptacles and SP plugs are provided with an extra grounding pole. In plugs, provision is made for attachment of a grounding wire to the grounding pole. In addition, direct connection is provided between plug and receptacle housings and the grounding pole. In the receptacle, grounding is accomplished through the conduit system.
Dimensions
In Inches:

NEC: Class I, Division 1 and 2, Group D Class II, Division 1 and 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA 3, 7D, 9FG, 12 ANSI/UL Standard: 1010
4P
1310
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
SRD Dead Front Interlocked Receptacles with Factory Sealed Switch

SP Plugs, 480 VAC, 60400 hertz
Cl. I, Div. 1 and 2, Group D Cl. II, Div. 1 and 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA 3, 7D, 9FG, 12 Explosionproof
4P
SRD Receptacle with spring door
SP Plug
SRD Receptacle with threaded cap
SP Plug with fastening ring
Back Box 11/4" Vertical Through Feed Hubs

With Spring Door Cat. # SRD3324N SRD3424D SRD3524 NW SRD6324N SRD6424D SRD6524 NW With Cable Grip and Neoprene Bushing Cable Dia. Cat. # to .875 [ .500 .875 to 1.375 to .875 [ .500 .875 to 1.375 to .875 [ .500 .875 to 1.375 to .875 [ .500 .875 to 1.375 to .875 [ .500 .875 to 1.375 to 1.375 [ .875 1.375 to 1.875 SP3363N SP3365N SP3463D SP3465D SP3563 NW SP3565 NW SP6363N SP6365N SP6463D SP6465D SP6565 NW SP6567 NW With Threaded Cap Cat. # SRD3384N SRD3484D SRD3584 NW SRD6384N SRD6484D SRD6584 NW With Cable Grip and Neoprene Bushing Cable Dia. Cat. # to .875 [ .500 .875 to 1.375 to .875 [ .500 .875 to 1.375 to .875 [ .500 .875 to 1.375 to .875 [ .500 .875 to 1.375 to .875 [ .500 .875 to 1.375 to 1.375 [ .875 1.375 to 1.875 SP3383N SP3385N SP3483D SP3485D SP3583 NW SP3585 NW SP6383N SP6385N SP6483D SP6485D SP6585 NW SP6587 NW
Rating
30 amp.
3-wire, 4-pole 4-wire, 5-pole 2-wire, 3-pole
60 amp.
4P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1311
4P
EPC Circuit Breakers and Enclosures with Interlocked Arktite Receptacles

APJ/NPJ and DP Arktite Plugs
Cl. I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups C, D Cl. II, Div. 1 and 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA/EFC 3, 7CD, 9FG, 12 Explosionproof
Applications:
The EPC interlock receptacle is designed for use as a service outlet for portable equipment It is designed for use in damp, wet and corrosive locations, indoors or outdoors, in areas which are hazardous due to flammable vapors, gases or combustible dust. For example: refineries, chemical plants, and other processing and handling facilities of a hazardous nature
Standard Materials:
Bodies, covers and receptacle housings copper-free aluminum Operating handles copper-free aluminum Operating shafts stainless steel Interior parts sheet steel Insulation (receptacles and plugs) fiberglass-reinforced polyester Pressure contacts brass Crimp/solder contacts leaded red brass
Features:
Mechanical interlock mechanism for dead front construction Receptacles are mechanically interlocked with circuit breakers to provide disconnect means, short circuit protection and thermal time delay overload protection A spring door receptacle, located at bottom of 30, 60 and 100 ampere units and at front of 200 ampere units, is mechanically interlocked with the circuit breaker operating mechanism for maximum safety Plug and receptacle contacts cannot be made or broken under load. The circuit breaker cannot be closed until the plug is fully inserted and the plug cannot be withdrawn unless the breaker is open Operating handles can be padlocked in either "ON" or "OFF" positions. Breakers are trip-free of the handles and will open under short circuit or overload even if the handle is locked in the "ON" position Quick installation and leveling is provided by the three-point mounting arrangement which has one keyhole slot at top and two open slots at bottom Bodies have four taper-tapped conduit hubs with integral bushings. Two are located at top and two directly below. Sizes are as shown in the listings.
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum natural Stainless steel natural Sheet steel electrogalvanized with chromate finish Brass natural Fiberglass-reinforced polyester natural (red) Leaded red brass electro-tin-plate
30, 60 and 100 ampere size EPC

Receptacle ratings: 30, 60, 100 and 200 amperes Circuit breakers: 100 and 225 ampere frame sizes
Grounding:
EPC interlocked receptacles and matching plugs are provided with an extra grounding pole for attaching a grounding wire. In addition, direct connection is provided between plug and receptacle and the grounding pole. If a separate grounding wire is not installed in the enclosure, grounding is accomplished through the conduit system.
200 ampere size EPC
Options:
The following special options are available by adding suffix to Cat. #: Description Suffix Special polarity used where two or more receptacles of the same ampere rating, style and number of poles are to be installed in the same area for use on different voltages. Available on 30, 60 and 100 ampere units as follows: Receptacle interior rotated 221/2 clockwise when viewed from face of receptacle and plug changed to match........................................................................................... S4 Side bosses drilled and tapped same size as standard hubs, 30, 60 and 100 ampere units only ................................................................................................... S366 Back boss drilled and tapped same size as standard hubs, 30, 60 and 100 ampere units only ................................................................................................... S367 Breather and drain (Class I, Class II) ............................................................................. S198V Breather and drain (Class I only).................................................................................... S454V
CAUTION: To reduce the risk of ignition of hazardous atmospheres, do not use plugs or receptacles in Class II, Group F locations that contain electrically conductive dusts. Pressure connectors are standard. Crimp/solder type terminators are optionally available for 2, 3 and 4-pole 30 ampere, 3 and 4-pole 60 and 100 ampere. For details, see page 1233. To specify, add the suffix "T" to the catalog number. For example: APJ3365-T (Plug).

NEC: Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1 and 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA: 3, 7CD, 9FG, 12 ANSI/UL Standard: 1010 CEC: Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups C, D Class II, Division 1 and 2, Group G Class III Encl. 3, 4
4P
1312
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EPC Circuit Breakers and Enclosures with Interlocked Arktite Receptacles
4P

Plugs listed for use with 30, 60 and 100 ampere EPC assemblies are standard Arktite APJ/NPJ plugs. Other standard APJ and CPH plugs of the same rating, style and number of poles may be used with EPC receptacles, as well as with DBR, EBBR and EPCB receptacles listed elsewhere in this section. As a result, portable equipment suitable for the location and equipped with the proper plug can be used with AR/NR series receptacles for non-hazardous locations: EBBR, EPC and EPCB receptacles for Class I hazardous locations; DR and DBR receptacles for Class II hazardous locations.
100 Ampere Frame Size Thermal-magnetic Circuit Breaker with Non-interchangeable Thermal Trip and Non-adjustable Magnetic Trip
Circuit Breaker Enclosure With Circuit Breaker Receptacle with Spring Door Housing 30 amp. 2-wire, 3-pole, Style 2 30 amp. 3-wire, 4-pole, Style 2 60 amp. 2-wire, 3 pole, Style 2 60 amp. 3-wire, 4-pole, Style 2 100 amp. 2-wire, 3-pole, Style 2 100 amp. 3-wire, 4-pole, Style 2 Hub Size (In.) 600VAC 1 /4
1
Rating 2-pole, 480VAC or 250 VDC 3-pole, 480VAC or 250 VDC 2-pole, 480VAC or 250 VDC 3-pole, 480VAC or 250 VDC 2-pole, 480VAC or 250 VDC 3-pole, 480VAC or 250VDC
Ckt. Bkr. Amps 20 30 40* 50* 20 30 40* 50* 50 60 70* 90* 100* 50 60 70* 90* 100* 60 70 90 100 60 70 90 100
Without Circuit Breaker Cat. # EPC43032
Cutler-Hammer "EHD" Cat. # EPC43032 EPC43032 EPC43032 EPC43032 EPC43042 EPC43042 EPC43042 EPC43042 EPC46032 EPC66032 EPC66032 EPC66032 EPC66032 EPC46042 EPC66042 EPC66042 EPC66042 EPC66042 EPC61032 EPC61032 EPC61032 EPC61032 EPC61042 EPC61042 EPC61042 EPC61042 WT20 WT30 WT40 WT50 WT20 WT30 WT40 WT50 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3
General Electric "TED" Cat. # EPC43032 EPC43032 EPC43032 EPC43032 EPC43042 EPC43042 EPC43042 EPC43042 EPC46032 EPC66032 EPC66032 EPC66032 EPC66032 EPC46042 EPC66042 EPC66042 EPC66042 EPC66042 EPC61032 EPC61032 EPC61032 EPC61032 EPC61042 EPC61042 EPC61042 EPC61042 TT20 TT30 TT40 TT50 TT20 TT30 TT40 TT50 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3
600VAC
11/4
EPC43042
11/4 600VAC 2 11/4 600VAC 2
EPC46032 EPC66032 EPC46042 EPC66042
WT50 2 WT60 2 WT70 2 WT90 2 WT100 2 WT50 3 WT60 3 WT70 3 WT90 3 WT100 3 WT60 2 WT70 2 WT90 2 WT100 2 WT60 3 WT70 3 WT90 3 WT100 3
TT50 2 TT60 2 TT70 2 TT90 2 TT100 2 TT50 3 TT60 3 TT70 3 TT90 3 TT100 3 TT60 2 TT70 2 TT90 2 TT100 2 TT60 3 TT70 3 TT90 3 TT100 3
600VAC
EPC61032
600VAC
EPC61042
225 Ampere Frame Size Circuit Breaker with Interchangeable Thermal Magnetic Trip
Circuit Breaker Receptacle with Spring Door Housing 200 amp. 3-wire, 4-pole, Style 2 Enclosure With Circuit Breaker Hub Size (In.) 3 3 Ckt. Bkr. Amps 125 150 175 200 225* Without Circuit Breaker Cat. # EPC604 2042 EPC605 2042 Cutler-Hammer "KB" Cat. # EPC604 EPC604 EPC604 EPC604 EPC604 2042 2042 2042 2042 2042 WT125 WT150 WT175 WT200 WT225 3 3 3 3 3 General Electric "TFK" Cat. # EPC605 EPC605 EPC605 EPC605 EPC605 2042 2042 2042 2042 2042 TT125 TT150 TT175 TT200 TT225 3 3 3 3 3
4P
Rating 3-pole, 600VAC or 250 VDC
*Circuit breaker trip rating may exceed receptacle rating for welding equipment applications only, as higher trip rating may not protect wiring. 200 ampere units are suitable for Class I, Group D (NEMA 7D). Enclosures with 600 volt circuit breakers from U.S.A. are available. Information on request. CSA Certified units are supplied with 600VAC FDB frame circuit breakers.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1313
4P
APJ/NPJ and DP Arktite Plugs with Cable Grip and Neoprene Bushing
APJ Plug
NPJ Plug
DP Plug
Ordering Information - APJ/NPJ and DP Arktite Plugs

600VAC/250VDC with Cable Grip and Neoprene Bushing Style 2
Amps 30 Cable O.D. Range 0.60 to 1.20 0.55 to 0.70 0.70 to 0.85 0.75 to 1.45 0.75 to 1.07 1.07 to 1.35 1.00 to 1.70 0.93 to 1.21 1.21 to 1.50 1.875 to 2.50 2-wire, 3-pole Cat. # APJ3385 NPJ3383 NPJ3384 APJ6385 NPJ6384 NPJ6385 APJ10387 NPJ10386 NPJ10387 3-wire, 4-pole Cat. # APJ3485 NPJ3483 NPJ3484 APJ6485 NPJ6484 NPJ6485 APJ10487 NPJ10486 NPJ10487 DP20468
60
100 200
Pressure connectors are supplied as standard. To specify crimp/solder type terminations add the suffix "T" to the catalog number. For example: APJ3385-T (Plug).
Dimensions
In Inches:
4P
APJ
NPJ
Recept. 30 Amp. 60 Amp. 60 Amp. 100 Amp. 200 Amp.
Breaker 2050 Amp. 50 Amp. 70100 Amp. 70100 Amp. 125225 Amp.
a 24 241/2 241/2 251/4 36
b 105/8 105/8 1213/16 1213/16 18
c 143/8 143/8 143/8 143/8 27
d 93/8 93/8 93/8 93/8
e 711/16 711/16 711/16 711/16 131/2
f 113/4 113/4 113/4 113/4
g 49/16 51/16 51/16 513/16
h 413/16 513/16 513/16 65/8
hh 7 613/16 613/16 73/4
j 203/4 203/4 203/4 203/4 341/4
k 73/8 73/8 91/4 91/4
l 21/16 21/16 25/8 25/8
51/2
Dim. "h" and "hh" are exposed portion of plug when engaged with receptacle.
1314
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
EPCB Circuit Breakers and Enclosures with Interlocked Arktite Receptacles

Applications:
The EPCB interlock receptacle is designed for use as a service outlet for portable equipment. The circuit breaker provides overcurrent and short circuit protection It has a mechanical interlock mechanism for dead front construction and no load make or break feature It is designed for use in damp, wet and corrosive locations, indoors or outdoors, in areas which are hazardous due to flammable vapors, gases or combustible dust. For example: refineries, chemical plants, and other processing and handling facilities of a hazardous nature
Cl. I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D Cl. II, Div. 1 and 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA/EFC 3, 7BCD, 9FG, 12 Explosionproof
4P
Standard Materials:
Bodies, covers and receptacle housings copper-free aluminum Operating handles copper-free aluminum Operating shafts stainless steel Interior parts sheet steel Insulation fiberglass-reinforced polyester Pressure contacts brass Crimp/solder contacts leaded red brass
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum natural Stainless steel natural Sheet steel zinc electroplate with chromate finish Brass natural Fiberglass-reinforced polyester natural (red) Leaded red brass electro-tin-plate
Features:
Spring door receptacle located at the bottom is mechanically interlocked with the circuit breaker operating mechanism for maximum safety. Plug and receptacle contacts cannot be made or broken under load. The circuit breaker cannot be closed until the plug is fully inserted and the plug cannot be withdrawn unless the breaker is open Operating handles can be padlocked in either "ON" or "OFF" positions. Breakers are trip-free of the handles and will open under short circuit or overload even if the handle is locked in the "ON" position Quick installation and leveling is provided by the three-point mounting arrangement having one keyhole slot at top and two open slots at bottom Bodies have four 11/4" taper tapped conduit hubs with integral bushings. Two are located at top and two directly below When installing, seals suitable for Class I, Group B hazardous areas must be located within 11/2" of each conduit opening

Receptacle ratings: 30, 60 and 100 amperes Circuit breakers: 100 ampere frame size
Options:
The following special options are available by adding the suffix to the Cat. #: Description Suffix Special polarity. For use where two or more receptacles of the same ampere rating, style and number of poles are to be installed in the same area for use on different voltages. Receptacle interior rotated 221/ 2 to right (viewed from face) and plug changed to match ......................................................................................................... S4 Side bosses drilled and tapped same size as standard hubs ...................................... S366 Back boss drilled and tapped same size as standard hubs......................................... S367

NEC: Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1 and 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA: 3, 7BCD, 9FG, 12 ANSI/UL Standard: 1010 CEC: Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D Class II, Division 1 and 2, Group G Class III Encl. 3, 4

Plugs listed for use with EPCB assemblies are standard Arktite APJ/NPJ plugs. Other standard APJ and CPH plugs of the same rating, style and number of poles may be used with EPCB receptacles as well as DBR and EPC receptacles listed elsewhere in this section As a result, portable equipment suitable for the location and equipped with the proper plug can be used with AR/NR series receptacles for non-hazardous locations; EBBR, EPC and EPCB receptacles for Class I hazardous locations; DR and DBR receptacles for Class II hazardous locations
Grounding:
EPCB interlocked receptacles and matching plugs are provided with an extra grounding pole for attaching a grounding wire. In addition, direct connection is provided between plug and receptacle and the grounding pole. If a separate grounding wire is not installed in the enclosure, grounding is accomplished through the conduit system
4P
Pressure connectors are supplied as standard. To specify crimp/solder type terminations add the suffix "T" to the catalog number. For example: APJ3365-T (Plug).
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1315
4P
EPCB Circuit Breakers and Enclosures with Interlocked Arktite Receptacles

100 Ampere Frame Size Thermal-magnetic Circuit Breaker with Non-interchangeable Thermal Trip and Non-adjustable Magnetic Trip
Circuit Breaker Receptacle with Spring Door Housing Rating 30 amp. 2-wire, 3-pole, Style 2 30 amp. 3-wire, 4-pole, Style 2 60 amp. 2-wire, 3-pole, Style 2 60 amp. 3-wire, 4-pole, Style 2 100 amp. 2-wire, 3-pole, Style 2 100 amp. 3-wire, 4-pole, Style 2 2-pole, 600VAC or 250 VDC 3-pole, 600VAC or 250 VDC 2-pole, 600VAC or 250 VDC 3-pole, 600VAC or 250 VDC 2-pole, 600VAC or 250 VDC 3-pole, 600VAC or 250 VDC Enclosure with Circuit Breaker Hub Ckt. Size Bkr. (In.) Amps Cutler-Hammer 1 /4
1
General Electric 2 2 2 2 EPCB43632 EPCB43632 EPCB43632 EPCB43632 EPCB43642 EPCB43642 EPCB43642 EPCB43642 EPCB46632 EPCB46632 EPCB46632 EPCB46632 EPCB46632 EPCB46642 EPCB46642 EPCB46642 EPCB46642 EPCB46642 TT20TED TT30TED TT40TED TT50TED TT20TED TT30TED TT40TED TT50TED 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3
20 30 40* 50* 20 30 40* 50* 50 60* 70* 90* 100* 50 60* 70* 90* 100* 70 90 100 70 90 100
EPCB43632 EPCB43632 EPCB43632 EPCB43632 EPCB43642 EPCB43642 EPCB43642 EPCB43642 EPCB46632 EPCB46632 EPCB46632 EPCB46632 EPCB46632 EPCB46642 EPCB46642 EPCB46642 EPCB46642 EPCB46642
WT20HFD WT30HFD WT40HFD WT50HFD
1 /4
1
WT20HFD 3 WT30HFD3 WT40HFD 3 WT50HFD 3 WT50HFD 2 WT60HFD 2 WT70HFD 2 WT90HFD 2 WT100HFD 2 WT50HFD 3 WT60HFD 3 WT70HFD 3 WT90HFD 3 WT100HFD 3
11/4
TT50TED 2 TT60TED 2 TT70TED 2 TT90TED 2 TT100TED 2 TT50TED 3 TT60TED 3 TT70TED 3 TT90TED 3 TT100TED 3
Pressure connectors are supplied as standard. To specify crimp/solder type terminators add the suffix "T" to the catalog number. For example: APJ3385-T (Plug). *Circuit breaker trip rating may exceed receptacle rating for welding equipment applications only, as higher trip rating may not protect wiring. For detailed information on circuit breaker selection see Section 3C.
11/4
11/4
EPCB41632 WT70HFD 2 EPCB41632 TT70TED 2 EPCB41632 WT90HFD 2 EPCB41632 TT90TED 2 EPCB41632 WT100HFD 2 EPCB41632 TT100TED 2 EPCB41642 WT70HFD 3 EPCB41642 TT70TED 3 EPCB41642 WT90HFD 3 EPCB41642 TT90TED 3 EPCB41642 WT100HFD 3 EPCB41642 TT100TED 3
1 /4
1

600VAC/250VDC with Cable Grip and Neoprene Bushing Style 2
APJ Plug NPJ Plug Amps 30 2-wire, 3-pole Cat. # APJ3385 NPJ3383 NPJ3384 APJ6385 NPJ6384 NPJ6385 APJ10387 NPJ10386 NPJ10387 3-wire, 4-pole Cat. # APJ3485 NPJ3483 NPJ3484 APJ6485 NPJ6484 NPJ6485 APJ10487 NPJ10486 NPJ10487
Dimensions
In Inches:
Cable O.D. Range 0.60 to 1.20 0.55 to 0.70 0.70 to 0.85 0.75 to 1.45 0.75 to 1.07 1.07 to 1.35 1.00 to 1.70 0.93 to 1.21 1.21 to 1.50
60
100
4P
Receptacle 30 Amp. 60 Amp. 100 Amp. Receptacle 30 Amp. 60 Amp. 100 Amp.
a 261/ 4 263/ 4 271/ 2 g 139/ 16 139/ 16 139/ 16
b 115/ 16 115/ 16 115/ 16 h 415/ 16 57/ 16 63/ 16
c 113/ 4 113/ 4 113/ 4 j 413/ 16 513/ 16 65/ 8
d 85/ 8 85/ 8 85/ 8 jj 7 613/ 16 73/ 4
e 5 5 5 k 243/ 4 243/ 4 243/ 4
f 73/ 4 73/ 4 73/ 4 l 83/ 16 83/ 16 83/ 16 m 15/ 8 15/ 8 15/ 8
APJ
NPJ
Dim "j" and "jj" are exposed portion of plug when engaged with receptacle.
1316
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
DBR Interlocked Arktite Receptacles With Enclosed Circuit Breakers

Applications:
DBR interlocked Arktite receptacles with enclosed circuit breakers and APJ/NPJ Arktite plugs are used: To supply power to portable electrical equipment such as motor-generator sets, compressors, heating and cooling units, conveyors, and similar equipment In locations where hazardous dusts are present, as in grain processing and handling plants, chemical plants and certain food processing industries Indoors or outdoors in damp, wet or corrosive locations
Cl. II, Div. 1 and 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA/EEMAC 3, 9FG, 12 Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum plug exterior, enclosure and receptacle housing natural Stainless steel natural Brass natural Fiberglass-reinforced polyester natural (red) Leaded red brass electro-tin-plate
4P
Options:
The following special options are available by adding suffix to Cat. #: Description Suffix Special polarity for use where two or more receptacles of the same ampere rating, style and number of poles are to be installed in the same area for use on different voltages. Receptacle interior rotated 221/ 2 clockwise when viewed from receptacle face and plug changed to match .......... S4 Breather (drain furnished as standard)........................................ S219 Conduit arrangements other than standard can be supplied. Details on request.
Features:
Receptacles are mechanically interlocked with circuit breakers to provide disconnect means, short circuit protection and thermal time delay overload protection. Enclosures are compact and rectangular in shape permitting close spacing. For maximum safety, the spring door receptacle at the bottom is mechanically interlocked with the circuit breaker operating mechanism. The circuit breaker cannot be closed until the plug is fully inserted and the plug cannot be withdrawn unless the breaker is open. Operating handles can be padlocked in either "ON" or "OFF" positions. Breakers are trip-free of the handles and will open under short circuit or overload even if the handle is locked in the "ON" position. Enclosure is provided with a drilled and tapped conduit opening at top center, equipped with a threaded-in bushing. The size furnished is 11/2", and removing the bushing permits the use of a 2" conduit.

Receptacle ratings: 30, 60 and 100 amperes Circuit breakers: 100 ampere frame size
Dimensions
In Inches:

Plugs listed for use with DBR assemblies are standard Arktite APJ/NPJ plugs. Other standard APJ/NPJ and CPH plugs of the same rating, style and number of poles may be used with DBR receptacles, as well as with EBBR, EPC and EPCB receptacles listed in Section 4P. As a result, portable equipment suitable for the locations and equipped with the proper plug can be used with AR receptacles for non-hazardous locations, with EBBR, EPC and EPCB receptacles for Class I hazardous locations, and with DR and DBR interlocked receptacles for Class II hazardous locations.

NEC: Class II, Division 1 and 2, Groups F, G Class III NEMA/EEMAC: 3, 9FG, 12 UL Standard: 698, 1010 CEC: Class II, Division 1 and 2, Group G Class III Encl. 3, 5
4P
Standard Materials:
Bodies, covers and operating handles copper-free aluminum Operating shafts stainless steel Receptacle housings and plug exteriors copper-free aluminum Insulation: plugs and receptacles fiberglass-reinforced polyester Pressure contacts brass Crimp/solder contacts leaded red brass
Dimensions:
Amps 30 60 100 a 213/4 223/4 231/2 b 61/2 81/2 101/8 bb 7 613/16 73/4 APJ NPJ
Dim. "b" and "bb" are exposed portion of plug when engaged with receptacle. Pressure connectors are standard. Crimp/solder type terminators are optionally available for 3 and 4-pole, 30, 60 and 100 ampere. For details, see page 1233. To specify, add the suffix "T" to the catalog number. For example: AP3375-T (Plug).
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1317
4P
DBR Interlocked Arktite Receptacles With Enclosed Circuit Breakers
Cl. II, Div. 1 and 2, Groups F, G Cl. III NEMA/EEMAC 3, 9FG, 12 Dust-Ignitionproof Raintight
100 Ampere Frame Size with Non-interchangeable Thermal Trip and Non-adjustable Magnetic Trip
Enclosure Receptacle With Spring Door Housing 30 amp., 3-wire, 3-pole, Style 1 30 amp., 2-wire, 3-pole, Style 2 30 amp., 3-wire, 4-pole, Style 2 60 amp., 3-wire, 3-pole, Style 1 60 amp., 2-wire, 3-pole, Style 2 60 amp., 3-wire, 4-pole, Style 2 100 amp., 3-wire, 3-pole, Style 1 100 amp., 2-wire, 3-pole, Style 2 100 amp., 3-wire, 4-pole, Style 2 Circuit Breaker Rating 3-pole 600VAC 2-pole 600VAC or 250 VDC 3-pole 600VAC Hub Size (In.) 1 /2
1
Ckt. Bkr. Amps 20 30 40 50 20 30 40 50 20 30 40 50 50 60 70 90 100 50 60 70 90 100 50 60 70 90 100 60 70 90 100 60 70 90 100 60 70 90 100
Without Circuit Breaker Cat. # DBR53731
With Circuit Breaker Cat. # Cutler-Hammer "FDB" DBR53731 DBR53731 DBR53731 DBR53731 DBR53732 DBR53732 DBR53732 DBR53732 DBR53742 DBR53742 DBR53742 DBR53742 DBR56731 DBR56731 DBR56731 DBR56731 DBR56731 DBR56732 DBR56732 DBR56732 DBR56732 DBR56732 DBR56742 DBR56742 DBR56742 DBR56742 DBR56742 DBR51731 DBR51731 DBR51731 DBR51731 DBR51732 DBR51732 DBR51732 DBR51732 DBR51742 DBR51742 DBR51742 DBR51742 WT20 WT30 WT40 WT50 WT20 WT30 WT40 WT50 WT20 WT30 WT40 WT50 3 3 3* 3* 2 2 2* 2* 3 3 3* 3*
DBR53732
11/2
DBR53742
11/2
DBR56731
3-pole 600VAC
11/2
WT50 3 WT60 3 WT70 3* WT90 3* WT100 3* WT50 2 WT60 2 WT70 2* WT90 2* WT100 2* WT50 3 WT60 3 WT70 3* WT90 3* WT100 3* WT60 3 WT70 3 WT90 3 WT100 3 WT60 2 WT70 2 WT90 2 WT100 2 WT60 3 WT70 3 WT90 3 WT100 3
*Circuit breaker trip rating may exceed receptacled rating for welding equipment applications only, as higher trip rating may not protect wiring. For detailed information on circuit breaker selection, see Section 3C. Style 1 Grounded through shell. Style 2 Grounded through extra pole and shell. For a detailed description of these grounding methods, see page 1231.
2-pole 600VAC or 250 VDC
DBR56732
11/2
DBR56742
3-pole 600VAC
11/2
DBR51731
3-pole 600VAC 2-pole 600VAC or 250 VDC 3-pole 600VAC
1 /2
1
DBR51732
11/2
DBR51742
11/2

4P
Amps 30
Cable O.D. Range 0.60 to 1.20 0.55 to 0.70 0.70 to 0.85 0.75 to 1.45 0.75 to 1.07 1.07 to 1.35 1.00 to 1.70 0.93 to 1.21 1.21 to 1.50
Style 1 3-wire, 3-pole Cat. # APJ3375
Style 2 2-wire, 3-pole Cat. # APJ3385 NPJ3383 NPJ3384 APJ6385 NPJ6384 NPJ6385 APJ10387 NPJ10386 NPJ10387
3-wire, 4-pole Cat. # APJ3485 NPJ3483 NPJ3484 APJ6485 NPJ6484 NPJ6485 APJ10487 NPJ10486 NPJ10487
APJ6375
60
APJ10377
100
APJ Plug
NPJ Plug
1318
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
IEC 309 Plugs, Connectors, Receptacles, Inlets, and Interlocks

Non-hazardous and Hazardous
Description
Non-hazardous Light Industrial IEC 309 Offering
Applications, Technical Data Ordering Information Dimensional Data
5P
Page No.
see page 1320 see pages 13231324 see pages 13301333 see page 1334 see page 1338 see page 1342 see pages 13441345 see pages 13461347 see page 1348
Non-hazardous Heavy Duty Industrial IEC 309 Offering

Hazardous Heavy Duty IEC 309 Offering

5P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1319
5P
IEC 309 Plugs, Connectors, Receptacles, and Inlets

Non-hazardous Light Industrial
NEMA 4X IP67 Watertight / Splashproof
Applications:
In indoor and outdoor environments In locations with splashing water (IP44) or hose down locations (IP67) Where lightweight, non-metallic devices are desirable Ideal for light industrial applications, such as: construction sites, light manufacturing, agriculture, food and beverage processing, computer/computer power equipment, restaurants/industrial kitchen equipment
Making a Connection is Easy

A clock face is used to represent the grounding contact position for all female connectors and receptacles. With the keyway at the bottom, the female grounding contact will appear to one of the twelve hour positions. To identify the system voltage, identify the housing color and hour location of the connector or receptacle grounding contact.
Ordering is Easy
CH
Prefix CH = Cooper CrouseHinds Light Industrial
4
1st digit 3 = 3 pole 4 = 4 pole 5 = 5 pole
20
2nd4th digit 16 = 16 Amp 20 = 20 Amp 30 = 30 Amp 32 = 32 Amp 60 = 60 Amp 63 = 63 Amp 100 = 100 Amp 125 = 125 Amp
R
1st letter P = Plug C = Connector R = Receptacle Straight RA = Receptacle 15 Angled RA80 = Receptacle 80 Angled B = Inlet MI = Mechanical Interlock MIB = Circuit Breaker Interlock SMR = Surface Mount Receptacle
7
Last digit Clock position of female grounding contact
W
Last letter W = Watertight S = Splashproof
5P
1320
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Retaining Device Holds the plug in position with a connector or socketoutlet and prevents unintentional withdraw.
5P
Internal Strain Relief with Swing-Away Feature
Designed to rmly grip outer cable jacket and internal conductors. Eliminates strain on the terminals while providing high pull-out values.
Shrouded Pins
Pins are recessed in the nylon housing and protected from deforming. Eliminates touching the live contacts while the plug is partially engaged.
External Cable Gland with Onion Ring Neoprene Bushing
The watertight compression type cable gland serves as a secondary method of eliminating strain on the terminals and conductors.
Electro Zinc Plated Steel Screws
Corrosion resistant and no loose parts to handle or misplace.
Locking Ring and Gasket
Protects against intrusion of dirt, dust and moisture when devices are connected.
Spring Loaded Gasketed Cover
Terminal Identication
Ground, neutral and phase terminals are clearly identied.
Color Coded
Avoid mismatching and confusion.
Protects against accidental encounter with live contacts, intrusion of dirt, dust and moisture.
High Impact Thermoplastic Housing
Nonconductive and nonmetallic device is corrosion resistant and enhances safety.

Staggered Contacts Recessed Contacts
Ground, neutral and phase contacts are positioned to assure rst make and last break.
Retaining Device
Contact sleeves are recessed in the narrow contact tubes providing a ngerproof device.
Cooper Crouse-Hinds pin & sleeve devices are provided with a mechanical arrangement which holds a plug or connector in position when it is in proper engagement, and prevents its unintentional withdraw.
Double Terminal Screws
Maximum clamping pressure without damaging strands. Double terminal screws create a large area of safe and secure contact between conductor and terminal. Screws are captive, easily accessible and supplied in the open position.
Solid Brass Pins
Low contact resistance and high conductivity. Long lasting, reliable electrical contact.
5P
Split Contact Sleeve with Nickel Plated Steel Springs
Provides optimum insertion/ withdraw force and constant contact pressure.
Chamfered Terminals
Funnel Entry. Guides and captures all wire strands.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1321
5P
IEC 309-1 and 309-2 Mechanical Interlocks

7.2" (183mm) Max.
Compliance with OSHA Lockout Requirements
Compact Size
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Mechanical Interlocks bright red handle can be locked in the OFF position as a method of compliance with OSHA lockout requirements. The handle can accept up to a 5/16" padlock shaft.
All versions and sizes are designed to t within the web of an 8" column. This compact size allows the use of columns as a mounting location.
Watertight NEMA 4X, 12K Enclosure
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Mechanical Interlocks are gasketed and rated as a Watertight NEMA 4X, 12K enclosure. The nonmetallic enclosure, while abuse and corrosion resistant, is also nonconductive which enhances the safety of the product.
Easy Identication
Catalog number, rating and certications are indicated on the label for easy identication of mating devices.
Grounding Plate
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Mechanical Interlocks are supplied with a free oating grounding plate. Because of this unique method of grounding, conduit entry may be made from the top, bottom or side. No other brand offers this type of installation versatility.
Color Coded Receptacle Covers
Receptacle covers are color-coded by voltage in accordance with IEC 309 standard.
A Pre-Molded Offset Dimple
Completely Compatible
Cooper Crouse-Hinds does not install a hub at the top of our mechanical interlocks, rather a pre-molded offset dimple (drill point) is provided instead of a conduit entry hole. This allows the installer to choose the size of the conduit to be used, and the location where the conduit will be attached to the enclosure (top, bottom or side entry) without the use of knockout plugs and reducers. Arranging the conduit entry hole at the dimple location will prevent condensation from falling directly on the interior electrical components, such as the switch. It will also allow for more room to pull conductors when wiring. Approximately 40% of all entry is from the bottom.
Swivel Mount Feet (135)
Completely compatible with not only Cooper Crouse-Hinds IEC 309-1 and 309-2 plugs, but with any manufacturers plugs that conform to the IEC 309 standards and color coding system anywhere in the world. When Cooper Crouse-Hinds IP67 plugs are used in conjunction with NEMA 4X rated Cooper Crouse-Hinds Mechanical Interlocks, both devices are NEMA 4X rated.
Micro Switch
Swivel mount feet
Swivel mount feet can be used for installations where irregular or tight t applications exist.
5P
Available upon request. May be used to transmit signal when plug is inserted or when switch is turned to the ON position. May also be used for indicator light to display and conrm when switch is turned ON or OFF. Consult technical service for price and delivery.
Horsepower Ratings:
Amperage 20 and 30 20 and 30 20 and 30 60 and 100 60 and 100 60 and 100 1322 Wires/Poles 2W, 3P 3W, 4P 4W, 5P 2W, 3P 3W, 4P 4W, 5P 120VAC 2 2 10 3 3 15 Three Phase 240VAC 5 10 7.5 15 480VAC 10 20 20 15 25 25 600VAC 25 25 30 30
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Non-hazardous Light Industrial Ordering Information
Pin and Sleeve Ordering Information:
20A and 30A North American Ratings Series 2 16A and 32A International Ratings Series 1
5P
Watertight Devices*
Configuration Wires Amps and Receptacle/ Plug/ Poles Connector Inlet 16A
2W3P 2W3P 3W4P 4W5P
Voltage
Surface Mount Straight Angled 15 Receptacle Receptacle Receptacle

CH316R4W CH316R6W CH416R6W CH516R6W CH320R4W CH320R6W CH320R7W
Plug
Connector
Inlet
Interlock Unfused
Circuit Breaker Interlock
110-130 220-240 380-400 220-380 & 240-415 125 250 480 125/250 3250 3480 3600
CH316RA4W CH316SMR4W CH316P4W CH316RA6W CH316SMR6W CH316P6W CH416RA6W CH416SMR6W CH416P6W CH516RA6W CH516SMR6W CH516P6W CH320RA4W CH320SMR4W CH320P4W CH320RA6W CH320SMR6W CH320P6W CH320RA7W CH320SMR7W CH320P7W
CH316C4W CH316B4W CH316MI4W CH316MIB4W CH316C6W CH316B6W CH316MI6W CH316MIB6W CH416C6W CH416B6W CH416MI6W CH416MIB6W CH516C6W CH516B6W CH516MI6W CH516MIB6W CH320C4W CH320B4W CH320MI4W CH320MIB4W CH320C6W CH320B6W CH320MI6W CH320MIB6W CH320C7W CH320B7W CH320MI7W CH320MIB7W
20A
2W3P 2W3P 2W3P 3W4P 3W4P 3W4P 3W4P 4W5P 4W5P 4W5P
CH420R12W CH420RA12W CH420SMR12W CH420P12W CH420C12W CH420B12W CH420MI12W CH420MIB12W CH420R9W CH420R7W CH420R5W CH420RA9W CH420SMR9W CH420P9W CH420RA7W CH420SMR7W CH420P7W CH420RA5W CH420SMR5W CH420P5W CH520RA9W CH520SMR9W CH520P9W CH520RA7W CH520SMR7W CH520P7W CH520RA5W CH520SMR5W CH520P5W CH330RA4W CH330SMR4W CH330P4W CH330RA6W CH330SMR6W CH330P6W CH330RA7W CH330SMR7W CH330P7W CH420C9W CH420B9W CH420MI9W CH420MIB9W CH420C7W CH420B7W CH420MI7W CH420MIB7W CH420C5W CH420B5W CH420MI5W CH420MIB5W CH520C9W CH520B9W CH520MI9W CH520MIB9W CH520C7W CH520B7W CH520MI7W CH520MIB7W CH520C5W CH520B5W CH520MI5W CH520MIB5W CH330C4W CH330B4W CH330MI4W CH330MIB4W CH330C6W CH330B6W CH330MI6W CH330MIB6W CH330C7W CH330B7W CH330MI7W CH330MIB7W
3Y120/208 CH520R9W 3Y277/480 CH520R7W 3Y347/600 CH520R5W 125 250 480 125/250 3250 3480 3600 CH330R4W CH330R6W CH330R7W
30A
CH430R12W CH430RA12W CH430SMR12W CH430P12W CH430C12W CH430B12W CH430MI12W CH430MIB12W CH430R9W CH430R7W CH430R5W CH430RA9W CH430SMR9W CH430P9W CH430RA7W CH430SMR7W CH430P7W CH430RA5W CH430SMR5W CH430P5W CH530RA9W CH530SMR9W CH530P9W CH530RA7W CH530SMR7W CH530P7W CH530RA5W CH530SMR5W CH530P5W CH332RA4W CH332SMR4W CH332P4W CH332RA6W CH332SMR6W CH332P6W CH432SMR6W CH432P6W CH430C9W CH430B9W CH430MI9W CH430MIB9W CH430C7W CH430B7W CH430MI7W CH430MIB7W CH430C5W CH430B5W CH430MI5W CH430MIB5W CH530C9W CH530B9W CH530MI9W CH530MIB9W CH530C7W CH530B7W CH530MI7W CH530MIB7W
3Y120/208 CH530R9W 3Y277/480 CH530R7W 3Y347/600 CH530R5W 110-130 220-240 380-400 220-380 & 240-415 CH332R4W CH332R6W CH432R6W CH532R6W
5P
CH530C5W CH530B5W CH530MI5W CH530MIB5W CH332C4W CH332B4W CH332MI4W CH332MIB4W CH332C6W CH332B6W CH332MI6W CH332MIB6W CH432C6W CH432B6W CH432MI6W CH432MIB6W CH532C6W CH532B6W CH532MI6W CH532MIB6W
32A
2W3P 2W3P 3W4P 4W5P
CH532RA6W CH532SMR6W CH532P6W
*Splashproof IP44 products are also available - please contact factory. Angled 80 receptacles are also available. To order, add suffix "80" directly after "RA" in the angled 15 receptacle catalog number (Example: CH330RA804W). 250VDC and Barge Overflow products are also available - please contact factory.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1323
5P
Cl. I, Div. 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D IEC 309 Plugs, Connectors, II, Div. 1 and 2, Groups F, G Receptacles, Inlets, and Interlocks Cl. Cl. III
Non-hazardous Light Industrial Ordering Information

Pin and Sleeve Ordering Information:
60A and 100A North American Ratings Series 2 63A and 125A International Ratings Series 1
NEMA/EFC 3, 7BCD, 9FG, 12 Explosionproof
Watertight Devices*
Wires CONFIGURATION and Receptacle/ Plug/ Amps Poles Connector Inlet
Voltage
125 250 480 125/250 3250 3480 3600 3Y120/208 3Y277/480 3Y347/600 220-240 380-400 220-380 & 240-415 125 250 480 125/250 3250 3480 3600
Straight Angled 15 Receptacle Receptacle

CH360R4W CH360R6W CH360R7W CH460R12W CH460R9W CH460R7W CH460R5W CH560R9W CH560R7W CH560R5W CH363R6W CH463R6W CH563R6W CH3100R4W CH3100R6W CH3100R7W CH360RA4W CH360RA6W CH360RA7W CH460RA12W CH460RA9W CH460RA7W CH460RA5W CH560RA9W CH560RA7W CH560RA5W CH363RA6W CH463RA6W CH563RA6W CH3100RA4W CH3100RA6W CH3100RA7W
Surface Mount Receptacle

-
Plug
CH360P4W CH360P6W CH360P7W
Connector
CH360C4W CH360C6W CH360C7W CH460C12W CH460C9W CH460C7W CH460C5W CH560C9W CH560C7W CH560C5W CH363C6W CH463C6W CH563C6W
Inlet
CH360B4W CH360B6W CH360B7W CH460B12W CH460B9W CH460B7W CH460B5W CH560B9W CH560B7W CH560B5W CH363B6W CH463B6W CH563B6W
Interlock Unfused
CH360MI4W CH360MI6W CH360MI7W
Circuit Breaker Interlock

CH360MIB4W CH360MIB6W CH360MIB7W
60A
CH460SMR12W CH460P12W CH460SMR9W CH460SMR7W CH460SMR5W CH560SMR9W CH560SMR7W CH560SMR5W CH463SMR6W CH563SMR6W CH460P9W CH460P7W CH460P5W CH560P9W CH560P7W CH560P5W CH363P6W CH463P6W CH563P6W
CH460MI12W CH460MIB12W CH460MI9W CH460MI7W CH460MI5W CH560MI9W CH560MI7W CH560MI5W CH363MI6W CH463MI6W CH563MI6W CH460MIB9W CH460MIB7W CH460MIB5W CH560MIB9W CH560MIB7W CH560MIB5W CH363MIB6W CH463MIB6W CH563MIB6W
63A
2W3P 3W4P 4W5P
100A
CH3100SMR4W CH3100P4W CH3100SMR6W CH3100P6W CH3100SMR7W CH3100P7W
CH3100C4W CH3100B4W CH3100MI4W CH3100MIB4W CH3100C6W CH3100B6W CH3100MI6W CH3100MIB6W CH3100C7W CH3100B7W CH3100MI7W CH3100MIB7W
CH4100R12W CH4100RA12W CH4100SMR12W CH4100P12W CH4100C12W CH4100B12W CH4100MI12W CH4100MIB12W CH4100R9W CH4100R7W CH4100R5W CH4100RA9W CH4100RA7W CH4100RA5W CH5100RA9W CH5100RA7W CH5100RA5W CH3125RA4W CH4125RA6W CH4125RA7W CH5125RA6W CH4100SMR9W CH4100P9W CH4100SMR7W CH4100P7W CH4100SMR5W CH4100P5W CH5100SMR9W CH5100P9W CH5100SMR7W CH5100P7W CH5100SMR5W CH5100P5W CH3125SMR4W CH3125P4W CH4125SMR6W CH4125P6W CH4125SMR7W CH4125P7W CH5125SMR6W CH5125P6W CH4100C9W CH4100B9W CH4100MI9W CH4100MIB9W CH4100C7W CH4100B7W CH4100MI7W CH4100MIB7W CH4100C5W CH4100B5W CH4100MI5W -
3Y120/208 CH5100R9W 3Y277/480 CH5100R7W 3Y347/600 CH5100R5W 110-130 380-400 500 220-380 & 240-415 CH3125R4W CH4125R6W CH4125R7W CH5125R6W
CH5100C9W CH5100B9W CH5100MI9W CH5100MIB9W CH5100C7W CH5100B7W CH5100MI7W CH5100MIB7W CH5100C5W CH5100B5W CH5100MI5W -
5P
125A
2W3P 3W4P 3W4P 4W5P
CH3125C4W CH3125B4W CH3125MI4W CH3125MIB4W CH4125C6W CH4125B6W CH4125MI6W CH4125MIB6W CH4125C7W CH4125B7W CH4125MI7W -
CH5125C6W CH5125B6W CH5125MI6W CH5125MIB6W
*Splashproof IP44 products are also available - please contact factory. Angled 80 receptacles are also available. To order, add suffix "80" directly after "RA" in the angled 15 receptacle catalog number (Example: CH330RA804W). 100A and 125A inlets are straight. 250VDC and Barge Overflow products are also available - please contact factory.
1324
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Non-hazardous Light Industrial Back Boxes and Accessories
5P
Back Boxes - for use with straight watertight and splashproof receptacles
Cat. # BE3-B75 BE3-B100 Description 20 angle for 20A, 4 and 5 pole receptacles and all 30A receptacles 20 angle for all 60A receptacles 20 angle for all 100A receptacles Hub Size
3
Dimensions (Inches) A 3.34 3.34 4.41 4.41 5.18 5.18 B 0.97 0.97 1.41 1.41 1.78 1.78 C 1.12 1.12 2.09 2.09 2.50 2.50 D 4.12 4.12 5.63 5.63 7.71 7.71 E 4.00 4.00 5.00 5.00 5.50 5.50 F 0.25 0.25 0.28 0.28 0.34 0.34 G 3.00 3.00 4.00 4.00
Cubic Inch Capacity 20.4 20.4 59.7 59.7 96.6 96.6
/4"
1" 11/4" 11/2" 11/2" 2"
BE6-B125 BE6-B150 BE10-B150 BE10-B200
Epoxy coated cast aluminum junction boxes are corrosion-resistant and designed to pass the 500-hour salt spray test, the UL hose down, and external icing tests.
Back Box Adapter Plates - for use with Hubbell back boxes
Cat. # CHAP20H CHAP30H CHAP60H CHAP100H Receptacle 20A, 3-Pole 20A, 4- & 5-Pole 30A, 3-, 4- & 5-Pole 60A, 3-, 4- & 5-Pole 100A, 3-, 4- & 5-Pole For Use with Hubbell Back Box BB201W, BB301W, FT202W, or FT302W BB201W, BB301W, FT202W, or FT302W BB601W, BB602W, or FW60/100 BB1001W, BB1002W, or FW60/100
Watertight Closure Caps - for use with watertight male plugs and inlets
Cat. # CHCC320 CHCC3430 CHCC60 CHCC100 CHCC420 CHCC3430 CHCC60 CHCC100 CHCC520 CHCC530 CHCC60 CHCC100 Poles 3 Amperage Rating 20A 30A 60A 100A 20A 30A 60A 100A 20A 30A 60A 100A Std. Pkg. Qty. 5 5 2 2 5 5 2 2 5 5 2 2
5P
Pre-installed Closure Caps

Closure caps provide watertight or splashproof protection to disconnected plugs and inlets. The possibility of removing or misplacing the cap can be eliminated by securing the chain or nylon strap to the inlet flange. If the closure cap will be fastened to a plug, Cooper Crouse-Hinds can pre-install the cap on the device. This factory installation assures safe and reliable utilization of the two components. Contact customer service for ordering information.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1325
5P

Non-hazardous Light Industrial North American Performance Specifications
Electrical:
Insulation Resistance 500V for 1 min. resistance 5M Dielectric Voltage Withstand 3000V for 1 min. Ground Path Current See "Minimum Ground Path Current Test" table Endurance, Connect, and Disconnect Cycles See "Minimum Endurance Test" table Current Interrupting Certified for current interrupting at full rated current and voltage Overload Test (Power factor 0.75-0.80) Tested for current interrupting at 150% of the rated current and 100% of the rated voltage for 50 cycles Temperature Rise Maximum 30C rise at full rated current (after overload) Resistance to Arcing Continuation of overload test for an additional 200 cycles
Environmental:
Flammability V-2 or better per UL94 or CSA 22.2 No. 0.6 Ambient Temperature Range Minimum: -25C (-13F) with impact Maximum: 90C (194F) Resistance to Corrosion Ferrous parts immersed for 10 min. in a 10% solution of ammonium chloride at a temperature of 20C Moisture Resistance Watertight (IP67): Device immersed for 24 hours in water at a temp. of 25C, the highest point of the device being 2" (5cm) below the water level Splashproof (IP44): Device is sprayed with water for 10 min. and immediately afterwards subjected to splashing water in all directions (360) UV Resistance Exposed plastic materials are UV stabilized
Minimum Ground Path Current Test:

Minimum Size Device Rating Amperes 20 30 60 100 A test current that far grounding wires. Grounding Conductor AWG 12 10 10 8 exceeds the device mm Time, Seconds Test Current, Amperes
Mechanical:
Mold Stress Relief 70C (158F) for 7 hours Humidity 32C (89.6F), 93% humidity for 7 days (168 hours) Cable Secureness See "Minimum Cable Secureness Test" table Impact A device is wired with a 90" (2300mm) length of flexible cord and dropped from 30" (760mm) 8 times; the device is then conditioned for 6 hours at -25C and immediately subjected to a repeated impact test Crushing 250 lbs. for 1 minute; the device is then conditioned for 6 hours at -25C and immediately subjected to a repeated crushing test Withdrawal Force See "Minimum Withdrawal Forces Test" table Strength of Insulating Base and Support 110% of specified tightening torque on terminal screws Polarization Integrity Matching devices will not mate so that the ground is energized, even when polarization feature is removed and 40 lb. (180 N) insertion force is applied
3.3 4 470 5.3 4 750 5.3 4 750 8.4 4 1180 rating is passed through the mating devices and
Minimum Endurance Test:

Device Rating Amperes Cycles with Load at Rated Current and Voltage No-Load Cycles Sequence
20 5000 30 1000 60 1000 100 250 A test sequence is conducted by using a no-load, factor of the load is 0.75 to 0.80.
0 1000 Alternating 1000 Alternating 250 Alternating followed by a load sequence. The power
Minimum Cable Secureness Test:

Maximum Device Force Torque Displacement Rating Amperes lb. N ft-lb. Nm Inches mm 3 20 30 133 0.4 0.54 /32 2.38 3 30 75 333 0.5 0.68 /32 2.38 3 60 150 667 1.0 1.4 /32 2.38 3 100 150 667 2.0 2.7 /32 2.38 The flexible cord or cable is simultaneously twisted and pulled. Values for the applied twisting torque and force of pull are shown. In all cases, the cord displacement is less than 3 /32 inches.
Minimum Withdrawal Forces Test:

Device Minimum Withdrawal Force Rating Amperes lb. N Time, Min.
5P
20 5 22 1 30 6 27 1 60 15 67 1 100 20 89 1 The pressure exerted by mating contacts of a plug and connector must be sufficient to prevent unintentional withdrawal during normal use. During the test, any locking rings or retaining means are not to be engaged. These products are listed to applicable UL Standards and requirements by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. UL1682, UL1686.
1326
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Non-hazardous Light Industrial International Performance Specifications
Electrical:
Insulation Resistance (Per IEC 309-1, Clause 19) 500V for 1 min. resistance 5M Dielectric Strength (Per IEC 309-1, Clause 19) 3000V for 1 min. Norm. Operation, Connect & Disconnect Cycles (Per IEC 309-1, Clause 21) See "Minimum Connect and Disconnect Cycles" table Breaking Capacity (Per IEC 309-1, Clause 20) Tested at 110% of the rated operating voltage and 125% of the rated current Temperature Rise (Per IEC 309-1, Clause 22) Maximum 50K rise at full rated current
5P
Environmental:
Flammability Self-extinguishing per IEC 309-1, Clause 27 Ambient Temperature Range Minimum: -25C with impact Maximum: 90C Moisture Resistance Watertight (IP67): Device immersed for 24 hours in water at a temp. of 25C, the highest point of the device being 5cm (2") below the water level Splashproof (IP44): Device is sprayed with water for 10 min. and immediately afterwards subjected to splashing water in all directions (360) UV Resistance Exposed plastic materials are UV stabilized
Mechanical:
Cable Secureness (Per IEC 309, Clause 23) See "Minimum Cable Secureness Test" table Impact (Per IEC 309, Clause 24) A device is wired with a 2.25m length of flexible cord and dropped from a height of 75cm, 8 times; the device is then tested for applicable degrees of protection against moisture
Minimum Connect and Disconnect Cycles:

Device Rating Amperes Cycles with Load at Rated Current and Voltage No-Lead Cycles Sequence Alternating Alternating Alternating
16 5000 p.f. of 0.6 0 32 1000 p.f. of 0.6 1000 63 1000 p.f. of 0.6 1000 125 250 p.f. of 0.7 250 The test sequence is conducted by using a no-lead, following by a load sequence.
Minimum Cable Secureness Test:

Device Rating Amperes 16 32 63 125 The flexible cord or cable is twisted and displacement is less than 2mm. Force N Torque Nm Maximum Displacement mm
80 0.350068 2 100 0.425 2 120 0.8 2 200 1.5 2 pulled. Values for the applied twisting torque and force of pull are shown. In all cases, the cord
5P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1327
5P
IEC 309-1 and 309-2 Mechanical Interlocks

Non-hazardous Light Industrial Performance Specifications
Electrical:
Dielectric Voltage Withstand 3000V Maximum Working Voltage 600V RMS (switch version); 480V RMS (circuit breaker version) Current Interrupting Certified for current interrupting at full rated current and voltage Short Circuit Withstand Rating Suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 10,000 RMS symmetrical amperes at the voltage rating of the receptacle Operations Mechanical: 10,000 cycles Electrical: 6,000 cycles
Environmental:
Moisture Resistance Watertight IP67 (washdown); UL Type 4X splashproof (IP44) Flammability UL94-5VA & V0 classifications Operating Temperatures Maximum Continuous: 60C (140F) Minimum Continuous: -40C (-40F) UV Resistance UV stabilized material Chemicals Resists most standard industrial hydrocarbons, acids, bases, and solvents
Mechanical:
Impact Resistance In accordance with UL746C Terminal Identification In accordance with UL, CSA, and international conventions Product Identification Identification, ratings, and color code in accordance with UL, CSA, and IEC requirements Lockout / Tagout "ON" and "OFF" lockout/tagout capability at switch handle; complies with OSHA Reg. 29CFR 1910.147 Mounting Switch Version (internal or external adjustable mounting feet) Compact Version (internal mounting) Circuit Breaker Version (internal or external adjustable mounting feet)
Materials:
Enclosure (all exterior components) UL94-5VA/V0, UV stabilized, impact modified Valox Contact Carrier Molded arc resistant UL94-V0 thermoplastic Gaskets Neoprene or EPDM Contacts (NEMA 4X, Watertight IP67) Brass, nickel plated Contacts (Splashproof IP44) Brass Hardware (screws and springs) Steel with zinc plated blue chromate or nickel plating
Approvals and Compliances:

UL508 (switch version) motor disconnect UL508 (compact version) manual motor controller UL231 & UL489 (circuit breaker version) UL1682 & 1686 CSA C22.2 No. 14, 182.1 IEC 309-1 & IEC 309-2
5P
1328
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Non-hazardous Light Industrial Materials
Plug:
Assembly Screws* - steel, electro zinc plated Friction Ring* - steel, electro zinc plated Gland Cap - polycarbonate blend Grommet - solid neoprene Housing (Front and Back) - type 6 nylon Internal Cord Clamp - type 6 nylon Locking Ring - type 6 nylon Pins (Watertight) - brass, nickel plated Pins (Splashproof) - brass Sealing Gasket - neoprene Terminal Screws - steel, nickel plated
5P
Connector:
Assembly Screws* - steel, electro zinc plated Cover - type 6 nylon Cover Fastener - nickel plated brass, brass, or macrolon Cover Spring - stainless steel (A2) Friction Ring* - steel, electro zinc plated Gland Cap - polycarbonate blend Grommet - solid neoprene Housing (Front and Back) - type 6 nylon Internal Cord Clamp - type 6 nylon Sealing Gasket - neoprene Sleeve Spring - steel, nickel plated Sleeves (Watertight) - brass, nickel plated Sleeves (Splashproof) - brass Terminal Screws - steel, nickel plated
Inlet:
Housing - type 6 nylon Locking Ring - type 6 nylon Mounting Flange - type 6 nylon Pins (Watertight) - brass, nickel plated Pins (Splashproof) - brass Sealing Gasket - neoprene Terminal Screws - steel, nickel plated
Receptacle:
Cover - type 6 nylon Cover Fastener - nickel plated brass, brass, or macrolon Cover Spring - stainless steel (A2) Housing - type 6 nylon Mounting Flange - type 6 nylon Sealing Gasket - neoprene Sleeve Spring - steel, nickel plated Sleeves (Watertight) - brass, nickel plated Sleeves (Splashproof) - brass Terminal Screws - steel, nickel plated
*Stainless steel available upon request.
5P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1329
5P

Non-hazardous Light Industrial Dimensions
Watertight Plugs (IP67) Dimensions:
Amps N.A. Intl. Poles Dimensions A B inch (mm) inch (mm) 20 20
B A
Cord Grip Range N. American 0.275-0.530 (7.0-13.5) 0.395-0.825 (10.0-21.0) 0.395-0.825 (10.0-21.0) International 0.275-0.530 (7.0-13.5) 0.275-0.630 (7.0-16.0) 0.275-0.630 (7.0-16.0)
16 16 16 32 32 32 63 125
3 4 5 3 4 5 3, 4 & 5
4.96 (126) 5.20 (132) 5.20 (132) 6.14 (156) 6.14 (156) 6.14 (156) 9.57 (243)
2.83 (72) 3.19 (81) 3.46 (88) 3.78 (96) 3.78 (96) 4.06 (103) 4.33 (110)
20 30 30 30 60 100
0.395-0.825 (10.0-21.0) 0.395-0.825 (10.0-21.0) 0.650-1.10 (16.5-28.0) 0.650-1.10 (16.5-28.0) 0.650-1.50 (16.5-38.0) 0.950-1.90 (24.0-48.0) 0.395-0.825 (10.0-21.0) 0.395-0.825 (10.0-21.0) 0.650-1.50 (16.5-38.0) 0.950-1.90 (24.0-48.0)
3, 4 & 5 12.40 (315) 5.12 (130)
Watertight Connectors (IP67) Dimensions:

Amps N.A. 20 20
B A
Dimensions Poles 3 4 5 3 4 5 3, 4 & 5 3, 4 & 5 Unit of Measure inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm A 5.35 136 5.63 143 5.63 143 6.97 177 6.97 177 6.97 177 10.0 255 13.1 332 B 2.83 72 3.19 81 3.46 88 3.78 96 3.78 96 4.06 103 4.33 110 5.12 130 C 3.07 78 3.35 85 3.58 91 3.78 96 3.78 96 4.13 105 4.61 117 5.12 130
Cord Grip Range N. American 0.275-0.530 7.0-13.5 0.395-0.825 10.0-21.0 0.395-0.825 10.0-21.0 0.395-0.825 10.0-21.0 0.650-1.10 16.5-28.0 0.650-1.10 16.5-28.0 0.650-1.50 16.5-38.0 0.950-1.90 24.0-48.0 International 0.275-0.530 7.0-13.5 0.275-0.630 7.0-16.0 0.275-0.630 7.0-16.0 0.395-0.825 10.0-21.0 0.395-0.825 10.0-21.0 0.395-0.825 10.0-21.0 0.650-1.50 16.5-38.0 0.950-1.90 24.0-48.0
Intl. 16 16 16 32 32 32 63 125
20 30 30 30 60 100
Watertight Receptacles (IP67) Dimensions - Straight:

Amps
C B
Dimensions Poles 3 4 5 3&4 5 3, 4 & 5 3, 4 & 5 Unit of Measure inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm A 2.82 71.5 3.19 81 3.46 88 3.78 96 4.06 103 4.29 109 5.12 130 B 2.05 52 2.05 52 2.05 52 2.56 65 2.56 65 3.27 83 3.78 96 C 1.10 28 1.10 28 1.10 28 1.06 27 1.06 27 2.05 52 2.52 64 D 1.81 46 2.36 60 2.36 60 2.36 60 2.36 60 3.54 90 3.54 90 E 2.44 62 2.95 75 2.95 75 2.95 75 2.95 75 3.94 100 4.49 114 F 2.44 62 2.95 75 2.95 75 2.95 75 2.95 75 4.21 107 4.49 114 G 1.85 47 2.36 60 2.36 60 2.36 60 2.36 60 3.03 77 3.54 90 H 1.85 47 2.36 60 2.36 60 2.36 60 2.36 60 3.35 85 3.54 90
N.A. 20
Intl. 16 16 16 32 32 63 125
F H
20
5P
G E G
20
H
5.5mm (.22) 20 and 30A 6.5 mm (.26) 60 and 100A

D
30 30 60 100
1330
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

5P
Watertight Receptacles (IP67) Dimensions - Angled 15:

C
15
Amps N.A. Intl. 16 16 16 32 32 63 125 Poles 3 4 5 3&4 5 3, 4 & 5 3, 4 & 5 Unit of Measure inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm A 2.82 71.5 3.19 81 3.46 88 3.78 96 4.06 103 4.29 109 5.12 130 B 1.93 49 2.05 52 2.05 52 2.20 56 2.36 60 3.23 82 3.70 94 C 1.61 41 1.50 38 1.50 38 1.85 47 1.85 47 2.52 64 2.95 75
Dimensions D 2.01 51 2.87 73 2.87 73 2.87 73 2.87 73 3.19 81 3.54 90 E 2.44 62 3.62 92 3.62 92 3.62 92 3.62 92 3.94 100 4.49 114 F 2.68 68 3.94 100 3.94 100 3.94 100 3.94 100 4.21 107 4.49 114 G 1.85 47 3.03 77 3.03 77 3.03 77 3.03 77 3.03 77 3.54 90 H 1.85 47 3.35 85 3.35 85 3.35 85 3.35 85 3.35 85 3.54 90
F H
20
A
20
G E G
20 30
5.5mm (.22) 20 and 30A 6.5mm (.26) 60 and 100A
30
D
60 100
E G
Watertight Receptacles (IP67) Dimensions - Angled 80:

Amps N.A.
C
Dimensions Poles 3 4 5 3&4 5 3, 4 & 5 Unit of Measure inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm A 2.83 72 3.19 81 3.46 88 3.78 96 4.06 103 4.33 110 B 3.46 88 4.25 108 4.25 108 4.76 121 4.84 123 5.63 143 C 4.29 109 4.84 123 4.84 123 5.71 145 5.71 145 7.99 203 D max 1.18 30 1.50 38 1.50 38 1.73 44 1.73 44 2.20 56 E 2.56 65 3.15 80 3.15 80 3.54 90 3.54 90 4.49 114 F 2.05 52 2.60 66 2.60 66 2.95 75 2.95 75 4.49 114 G 2.17 55 2.68 68 2.68 68 3.07 78 3.07 78 3.54 90 H 1.18 30 1.57 40 1.57 40 1.77 45 1.77 45 3.54 90
FH
Intl. 16 16 16 32 32 63
20 20
B G
20 30
5.5mm (.22) 20 and 30A 6.2mm (.24) 60A
30
D
60
E G
Watertight Inlets (IP67) Dimensions - Angled 80:

Amps N.A. Intl. 16 16 16 32 32 32 63 Poles 3 4 5 3 4 5 3, 4 & 5 Unit of Measure inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm A 2.83 72 3.19 81 3.50 89 3.78 96 3.78 96 4.02 102 4.33 110 B 3.19 81 3.90 99 4.06 103 4.45 113 4.45 113 4.61 117 5.00 127 C 3.86 98 4.33 110 4.45 113 5.12 130 5.12 130 5.12 130 7.20 183
F C
Dimensions D 1.18 30 1.50 38 1.50 38 1.73 44 1.73 44 1.73 44 2.20 56 E 2.56 65 3.15 80 3.15 80 3.54 90 3.54 90 3.54 90 4.49 114 F 2.05 52 2.60 66 2.60 66 2.95 75 2.95 75 2.95 75 4.49 114 G 2.17 55 2.68 68 2.68 68 3.07 78 3.07 78 3.07 78 3.54 90 H 1.18 30 1.57 40 1.57 40 1.77 45 1.77 45 1.77 45 3.54 90
20 20
5P
B G
20 30 30
H
5.5mm (.22) 20 and 30A 6.2mm (.24) 60 and 100A
30
D
60
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1331
5P

Watertight Inlets (IP67) Dimensions - Straight:

Amps N.A. Intl. 100 100 100 125 125 125 Unit of Poles Measure 3 4 5 inch mm inch mm inch mm Dimensions A 5.12 130 5.12 130 5.12 130 B 3.70 94 3.70 94 3.70 94 C 2.20 56 2.20 56 2.20 56 D 3.54 90 3.54 90 3.54 90 E 5.12 130 5.12 130 5.12 130 F 5.12 130 5.12 130 5.12 130 G 4.09 104 4.09 104 4.09 104 H 4.09 104 4.09 104 4.09 104
Watertight Receptacles (IP67) Dimensions Surface Mount, Angled 80:

Amps N.A. Intl. 20 20 20 30 30 30 16 16 16 32 32 32 Unit of Wire Measure 3 Wire 4 Wire 5 Wire 3 Wire 4 Wire 5 Wire inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm A 2.83 72 3.19 81 3.46 88 3.78 96 3.78 96 4.06 103 B 5.51 140 5.67 144 5.79 147 6.06 154 6.06 154 6.14 156 C1 6.46 164 6.46 164 6.46 164 6.93 176 6.93 176 6.93 176 Dimensions C2 7.13 181 7.13 181 7.13 181 7.60 193 7.60 193 7.60 193 D 3.78 96 3.78 96 3.78 96 3.78 96 3.78 96 3.78 96 E 3.74 95 3.74 95 3.74 95 3.74 95 3.74 95 3.74 95 F 2.62 66.5 2.62 66.5 2.62 66.5 2.62 66.5 2.62 66.5 2.62 66.5 G 1.87 47.5 1.87 47.5 1.87 47.5 1.87 47.5 1.87 47.5 1.87 47.5 Hub Size
3
/4" /4" /4" /4" /4" /4"

Amps Unit of N.A. Intl. Wire Measure 60 60 63 63 4 Wire 5 Wire inch mm inch mm A 4.33 110 4.33 110 B 7.01 178 7.01 178 C1 8.82 224 8.82 224 Dimensions C2 9.76 248 9.76 248 D 6.77 172 6.77 172 E 4.76 121 4.76 121 F 4.09 104 4.09 104 G 5.35 136 5.35 136 Hub Size 1 1/4" 1 1/4"

Amps Dimensions A 5.12 130 5.12 130 5.12 130 B 7.48 190 7.48 190 7.48 190 C1 16.0 406 16.0 406 16.0 406 C2 16.9 430 16.9 430 16.9 430 D 10.4 263 10.4 263 10.4 263 E 8.66 220 8.66 220 8.66 220 F 7.87 200 7.87 200 7.87 200 G 9.45 240 9.45 240 9.45 240 Hub Size 2" 2" 2"
5P
Unit of N.A. Intl. Wire Measure 100 100 100 125 125 125 3 Wire 4 Wire 5 Wire inch mm inch mm inch mm
1332
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

IEC 309-1 and 309-2 Mechanical Interlock Dimensions:
Wires Amps and N.A. Intl. Poles 20 20 20 30 30 30 60 60 60 16 16 16 32 32 32 63 63 63 2W3P 3W4P 4W5P 2W3P 3W4P 4W5P 2W3P 3W4P 4W5P Unit of Measure inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm inch mm NEMA 4X IP44 IP67 a b b1 c d e f f 7.60 193 7.64 194 7.72 196 7.91 201 7.91 201 7.91 201 8.23 209 8.23 209 8.23 209 7.20 5.94 4.49 0.26 9.33 7.20 7.17 183 151 114 6.5 237 183 182 7.20 5.94 4.49 0.26 9.33 7.20 7.36 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 183 151 151 151 151 151 151 151 151 114 114 114 114 114 114 114 114 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5 237 237 237 237 237 237 237 237 183 183 183 720 183 183 183 183 183 187 184 187 7.36 187 189 196 196 196 7.20 5.94 4.49 0.26 9.33 7.20 7.24 7.20 5.94 4.49 0.26 9.33 7.20 7.36 7.20 5.94 4.49 0.26 9.33 IP44 n 10.55 268 10.63 270 10.75 273 11.10 282 11.10 282 11.18 284 11.89 302 11.89 302 11.89 302
5P
NEMA 4X IP67 n 10.63 270 10.71 272 10.91 277 11.22 285 11.22 285 11.38 289 12.17 309 12.17 309 12.17 309
7.20 5.94 4.49 0.26 9.33 7.20 7.44 7.20 5.94 4.49 0.26 9.33 7.20 7.72 7.20 5.94 4.49 0.26 9.33 7.20 7.72 7.20 5.94 4.49 0.26 9.33 7.20 7.72
e b c
IEC 309-1 and 309-2 Mechanical Interlock Dimensions:

Amps Wires and Poles 2W3P 3W4P 4W5P Unit of Measure inch mm inch mm inch mm NEMA NEMA 4X 4X IP44 IP44 a 12.44 316 12.44 316 12.44 316 b 5.94 151 5.94 151 5.94 151 b1 4.96 126 4.96 126 4.96 126 c 0.26 6.5 0.26 6.5 0.26 6.5 d 14.57 370 14.57 370 14.57 370 e 7.20 183 7.20 183 7.20 183 f 9.57 243 9.57 243 9.57 243 n 17.72 450 17.72 450 17.72 450
d a l1
n 20
N.A. 100 100
Intl. 125 125 125
b1
100
5P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1333
5P
IEC 309 Plugs, Connectors, Receptacles, Inlets, and Mechanical Interlocks

Non-hazardous Heavy Duty Industrial
NEMA 4X IP66 Watertight
Applications:
Where complete protection against dirt, dust, water jets, and even temporary flooding is required In damp or corrosive locations In areas prone to vibration, hard use, and abuse In environments that demand safety, ease of use, reliability, and durability Ideal for heavy duty industrial applications, such as: shipyards, military, marine/marina environments, pulp and paper, heavy manufacturing, wastewater treatment, portable power
Features:
Voltage, configured, color coded Watertight Impact- and corrosion-resistant Receptacles mount to Cooper Crouse-Hinds back boxes Innovative finger lock keeps cord grip secured Positive grommet seal system at cord entry Funneled wire pockets Lockout/tagout High grade brass contacts V insulating material Multi-lam sleeve bands
Standard Materials:
Receptacle Housing - RIP, nylon, V Contact Carrier - fiber-reinforced thermoplastic, V Pins and Sleeves - brass Multi-lam Bands - copper beryllium Assembly Screws - stainless steel Plug - type 6/6 nylon, V Receptacle Hinge Pin - stainless steel Gaskets - silicon

Listed UL498, 1682, and 1686 CSA C22.2 No. 182.1 IEC 309-1 and 309-2 NEMA 4X IEC IP66
Making a Connection is Easy

A clock face is used to represent the grounding contact position for all female connectors and receptacles. With the keyway at the bottom, the female grounding contact will appear to one of the twelve hour positions. To identify the system voltage, identify the housing color and hour location of the connector or receptacle grounding contact.
Ordering is Easy
GH
Prefix GH = Cooper Crouse-Hinds Heavy Duty Industrial
4
1st digit 3 = 3 pole 4 = 4 pole 5 = 5 pole
20
2nd4th digit 16 = 16 Amp 20 = 20 Amp 30 = 30 Amp 32 = 32 Amp 60 = 60 Amp 63 = 63 Amp 100 = 100 Amp 125 = 125 Amp
R
1st letter P = Plug C = Connector R = Receptacle Straight B = Inlet MI = Mechanical Interlock
7
Last digit Clock position of female grounding contact
W
Last letter W = Watertight
5P
1334
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
IEC 309 Plugs, Connectors, Receptacles, Inlets, and Mechanical Interlocks

Non-hazardous Heavy Duty Industrial
Plug
5P
Locking finger seats into web pockets when cord grip is tightened down, securing back cap in place even under heavy usage and vibration.
Nickel-plated brass contacts offer long-life corrosion protection. Compression lugs provide reliable mechanical wire
Funneled wiring pockets for ease of inserting stranded wire. Deep pocket marked X, Y, and Z keep bare conductors safely confined and isolated from adjacent wires.
Receptacle
Cooper Crouse-Hinds standard mounting footprint fits all existing Cooper Crouse-Hinds back boxes.
Impact-resistant thermoplastic contact carrier provides superior electrical insulation and V flammability rating. Brass contacts with self-cleaning, field-proven, multi-lam pressure bands for smooth pin insertion, low heat rise, and quality electrical performance. Funneled wire termination pockets have all screw heads on same side for easy conductor insertion and quick wiring.
Color coded cap accurately identifies mating plug of correct voltage.
5P
Lockout/tagout hole for OFF position.
Watertight cap meets NEMA 4X, IP66 hose down standards.
US: 1-866-764-5454
1335
5P
IEC 309 Pin and Sleeve Mechanical Interlocks

Non-hazardous Heavy Duty Industrial 20 & 30A - North American Ratings Series 2 16 & 32A - International Ratings Series 1
Applications:
To supply power to portable or fixed electrical equipment, such as welders, motor generator sets, compressors, conveyors, portable tools, lighting systems, and similar equipment In damp or corrosive locations In wet locations In hose down areas For short circuit protection when ordered with optional fusing
Standard Materials:
Enclosure - fiber-reinforced polyester External Hardware - stainless steel Contacts - brass Contact Carrier - fiber-reinforced thermoplastic
Horsepower Ratings:
Three Phase Amps 20A 30A 60A 100A Description Unfused Unfused Fused Unfused Fused Unfused 250VAC 7.5 10 10 20 20 25 480VAC 15 20 20 40 40 50 600VAC 20 25 25 40 50 40
Features:
Mechanically interlocked, dead-front receptacle - plug cannot be engaged or disengaged under load Enclosure has continuous form-in-place gasket Meets OSHA's lockout/tagout requirements - can be padlocked in "OFF" position Industrial switch is horsepower rated for motor load applications Available with optional fusing for short circuit protection

UL Standards: 508, 1682 CSA Standard: C22.2 Nos. 14, 182.1 Enclosure type: 3, 4X, 12 IP66
Options:
Description Suffix Auxiliary contacts for PLC or pilot light applications................... S483
5P
1336
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Non-hazardous Heavy Duty Industrial 20 & 30A - North American Ratings Series 2 16 & 32A - International Ratings Series 1
5P
5P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1337
5P

Non-hazardous Heavy Duty Industrial 20 and 30A - North America Ratings Series 2 16 and 32A - International Ratings Series 1
Watertight Devices
Configuration Wires & Amps Poles 16A 2W3P 2W3P 3W4P 4W5P 20A 2W3P 2W3P 2W3P 3W4P 3W4P 3W4P 3W4P 4W5P 4W5P 4W5P 30A 2W3P 2W3P 2W3P 3W4P 3W4P 3W4P 4W5P 4W5P Recept./Conn. Plug/Inlet Voltage 110120 220240 380415 220/380 240/415 125 250 480 125/250 3250 3480 3600 3Y120/208 3Y277/480 3Y347/600 125 250 480 3250 3480 3600 3Y120/208 3Y277/480 3Y347/600 110120 220240 380415 220/380 Receptacle GH316R4W GH316R6W GH416R6W GH516R6W GH320R4W GH320R6W GH320R7W Plug GH316P4W GH316P6W GH416P6W GH516P6W GH320P4W GH320P6W GH320P7W Connector GH316C4W GH316C6W GH416C6W GH516C6W GH320C4W GH320C6W GH320C7W Inlet GH316B4W GH316B6W GH416B6W N/A GH320B4W GH320B6W GH320B7W Interlock Unfused GH316MI4W* GH316MI6W* GH416MI6W GH516MI6W* GH320MI4W* GH320MI6W* GH320MI7W*
GH420R12W GH420P12W GH420C12W GH420B12W GH420MI12W GH420R9W GH420R7W GH420R5W GH520R9W GH520R7W GH520R5W GH330R4W GH330R6W GH330R7W GH430R9W GH430R7W GH430R5W GH530R9W GH530R7W GH530R5W GH332R4W GH332R6W GH432R6W GH532R6W GH420P9W GH420P7W GH420P5W GH520P9W GH520P7W GH520P5W GH330P4W GH330P6W GH330P7W GH430P9W GH430P7W GH430P5W GH530P9W GH530P7W GH530P5W GH332P4W GH332P6W GH432P6W GH532P6W GH420C9W GH420C7W GH420C5W GH520C9W GH520C7W GH520C5W GH330C4W GH330C6W GH330C7W GH430C9W GH430C7W GH430C5W GH530C9W GH530C7W GH530C5W GH332C4W GH332C6W GH432C6W GH532C6W GH420B9W GH420B7W GH420B5W N/A N/A N/A GH330B4W GH330B6W GH330B7W GH430B9W GH430B7W GH430B5W N/A N/A N/A GH332B4W GH332B6W GH432B6W GH420MI9W GH420MI7W GH420MI5W GH520MI9W* GH520MI7W* GH520MI5W* GH330MI4W GH330MI6W GH330MI7W GH430MI9W GH430MI7W GH430MI5W GH530MI9W GH530MI7W GH530MI6W GH332MI4W GH332MI6W GH432MI6W GH532MI6W
5P
4W5P 32A 2W3P 2W3P 3W4P 4W5P
*Alternate Switch Design. Does not have a switch handle. Switch is activated by inserting plug: rotating plug to turn switch 'ON'.
1338
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Non-hazardous Heavy Duty Industrial 60 and 100A - North America Ratings Series 2 63 and 125A - International Ratings Series 1
5P
Watertight Devices
Configuration Wires & Amps Poles 60A 2W3P 2W3P 2W3P 3W4P 3W4P 3W4P 3W4P 4W5P 4W5P 4W5P 63A 2W3P 3W4P 4W5P 100A 2W3P 2W3P 2W3P 3W4P 3W4P 3W4P 3W4P 4W5P 4W5P 4W5P 125A 2W3P 3W4P 4W5P Recept./Conn. Plug/Inlet Voltage 125 250 480 125/250 3250 3480 3600 3Y120/208 3Y277/480 3Y347/600 220240 380415 220/380 240/415 125 250 480 125/250 3250 3480 3600 Receptacle GH360R4W GH360R6W GH360R7W GH460R12W GH460R9W GH460R7W GH460R5W GH560R9W GH560R7W GH560R5W GH363R6W GH463R6W GH563R6W GH3100R4W GH3100R6W GH3100R7W Plug GH360P4W GH360P6W GH360P7W GH460P12W GH460P9W GH460P7W GH460P5W GH560P9W GH560P7W GH560P5W GH363P6W GH463P6W GH563P6W GH3100P4W GH3100P6W GH3100P7W Connector GH360C4W GH360C6W GH360C7W GH460C12W GH460C9W GH460C7W GH460C5W GH560C9W GH560C7W GH560C5W GH363C6W GH463C6W GH563C6W GH3100C4W GH3100C6W GH3100C7W Inlet GH360B4W GH360B6W GH360B7W GH460B12W GH460B9W GH460B7W GH460B5W GH560B9W GH560B7W GH560B5W GH363B6W GH463B6W GH563B6W GH3100B4W GH3100B6W GH3100B7W Interlock Unfused GH360MI4W GH360MI6W GH360MI7W GH460MI12W GH460MI9W GH460MI7W GH460MI5W GH560MI9W GH560MI7W GH560MI5W GH363MI6W GH463MI6W GH563MI6W GH3100MI4W GH3100MI6W GH3100MI7W
GH4100R12W GH4100P12W GH4100C12W GH4100B12W GH4100MI12W GH4100R9W GH4100R7W GH4100R5W GH4100P9W GH4100P7W GH4100P5W GH5100P9W GH5100P7W GH5100P5W GH3125P6W GH4125P6W GH5125P6W GH4100C9W GH4100C7W GH4100C5W GH5100C9W GH5100C7W GH5100C5W GH3125C6W GH4125C6W GH5125C6W GH4100B9W GH4100B7W GH4100B5W GH5100B9W GH5100B7W GH5100B5W GH3125B6W GH4125B6W GH5125B6W GH4100MI9W GH4100MI7W GH4100MI5W GH5100MI9W GH5100MI7W GH5100MI5W GH3125MI6W GH4125MI6W GH5125MI6W
3Y120/208 GH5100R9W 3Y277/480 GH5100R7W 3Y347/600 GH5100R5W 220240 380415 220/380 240/415 GH3125R6W GH4125R6W GH5125R6W
5P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1339
5P
Angled Back Box Adapters

Non-hazardous Heavy Duty Industrial For 20, 30, 60 & 100 Amp IEC 309 Receptacles and Inlets
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Angled Back Box Adapters install IEC 309 receptacles or inlets to existing back boxes at a 15 angle, eliminating plug cord stress and maximizing wiring capacity. Designed with a square footprint, the angled back box adapter allows the conduit openings to be positioned vertically or horizontally.
Angled adapters install directly onto existing Cooper Crouse-Hinds Back Boxes!
Features:
Square footprint on adapter allows back box conduit openings to be positioned vertically or horizontally 15 angle eliminates cord stress on attached plug Heavy duty cast aluminum back boxes are ideal for abusive environments Epoxy powder coat finish available for additional corrosion resistance Stainless steel hardware Quick and easy to install Neoprene gasket provided between adapter and back box for additional weather resistance
20/30 Amp
60 Amp
100 Amp
Rating of Receptacle or Inlet 20A 30A 60A 100A Angled Adapter Cat. # AR30 AR30 AR601 AR100 Mating Square Back Box Cat. # ARRH/ARRC 13, 23, 33 ARRH/ARRC 13, 23, 33 ARRH/ARRC 36, 46, 56 AJ/AJC 46, 56
Dimensions
In Inches:
5P
Cat. # AR30 AR601 AR100
A 3.4 4.3 5.9
B 3.9 4.9 6.2
Receptacle/Inlet Footprint 2.74 2.74 3.03 3.34 4.09 4.09
1340
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Adapter Plates
Non-hazardous Heavy Duty Industrial For 20, 30, 60 & 100 Amp IEC 309 Receptacles and Inlets
Cooper Crouse-Hinds H-Series Adapter Plates permit a Cooper Crouse-Hinds IEC 309 receptacle or inlet to be mounted to a Hubbell back box.
5P
Features:
Heavy duty aluminum plate fits directly to the Hubbell footprint Adapter plate is engineered to be used with the gasket that is provided with the Cooper Crouse-Hinds receptacle or inlet Provided gasket maintains watertight integrity between adapter plate and Hubbell box Stainless steel hardware provided for attaching adapter plate to back box and receptacle or inlet to adapter plate Corrosion-resistant Quick and easy to install
Dimensions
In Inches:
Rating of Cooper Crouse-Hinds Receptacle or Inlet 20A/30A 60A 100A Cat. # of Hubbell Back Box BB201W/BB301W BB601W/BB602W BB1001W/BB1002W Adapter Plate Cat. # CHAP30H CHAP60H CHAP100H
Cat. # CHAP30H CHAP60H CHAP100H
Overall Size A B 4.03 4.53 5.53 3.78 4.53 5.53
Hubbell Footprint C D 3.13 3.88 4.88 3.13 3.88 4.88
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Footprint E F 2.74 3.03 4.09 2.74 3.35 4.09
5P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1341
5P
IEC 309 Pin and Sleeve Devices

Non-hazardous Heavy Duty Industrial Dimensions
Plug Dimensions
In Inches:
Amps 20/16A 30/32A 60/63A 100/125A A 7.37 7.37 10.71 12.32 B 3.00 3.00 4.33 5.16 Cord Range 3-Pole 0.3150.748 0.3140.748 0.6301.378 0.8271.89 4-Pole 0.3150.748 0.3150.748 0.6301.378 0.8272.28 5-Pole 0.4720.827 0.4720.827 0.8271.378 1.222.28
Receptacle Dimensions
In Inches:
Amps 20/16A 30/32A 60/63A 100/125A A 2.95 3.35 4.57 4.81 B 4.37 4.92 6.18 6.56 C 3.31 3.74 4.61 4.80 D 3.38 3.38 4.13 5.12 E 3.38 3.38 4.13 5.32 F Dia. 0.236 0.236 0.236 0.250 MTC. Dims. X Y 2.74 2.74 3.50 4.09 2.74 2.74 3.50 4.09
Connector Dimensions
In Inches:
Amps 20/16A 30/32A 60/63A 100/125A A 8.58 10.40 12.52 13.40 B 3.38 3.82 4.61 5.32 Cord Range 3-Pole 0.3150.748 0.3150.748 0.6301.378 0.8271.89 4-Pole 0.3150.827 0.3150.827 0.6301.378 0.8272.28 5-Pole 0.4720.827 0.4720.827 0.8271.378 1.222.28
Interlock Dimensions
In Inches:
Amps 20/16A* 20/16A 30/32A 60/63A 100/125A
*3 Pole only.
A 8.8 9.3 11.2 18.7 21.1
B 6.7 6.9 8.07 12.3 13.3
C 3.5 4.3 4.7 7.9 8.9
X 3.7 3.9 4.3 7.1 8.1
Y 4.5 5.3 6.7 10.9 11.9
20, 30 16, 32, 60, 100A 63, 125A Hub Cable Gland /2 /4 1 11/4 11/2
1 3
M20 M25 M32 M40 M63
Inlet Dimensions
In Inches: 5P
Amps 20/16A 30/32A 60/63A 100/125A A 3.27 4.26 5.44 5.48 B 3.02 3.75 4.34 5.20 C 3.38 3.38 4.13 5.12 D 3.38 3.38 4.13 5.32 F Dia. 0.236 0.236 0.236 0.250 MTC. X 2.74 2.74 3.50 4.09 Dims. Y 2.74 2.74 3.50 4.09
1342
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
IEC 309 Pin and Sleeve Devices

Non-hazardous Heavy Duty Industrial Accessories
Back Box Dimensions
In Inches: 60A & 63A Cast Aluminum
5P
16, 20, 30, & 32A Cast Aluminum
Cat. # ARE13 ARE23 ARE33
Hub /2 3 /4 1
1
A 1.84 1.84 1.97
B 0.69 0.81 0.94
Cat. # ARE36 ARE46 ARE56
Hub 1 11/4 11/2
A 2.56 2.62 2.69
B 0.69 1.19 1.31
Cat. # ARRH13 ARRH23 ARRH33 ARRC13 ARRC23 ARRD33
Hub /2 3 /4 1 1 /2 3 /4 1
1
Hub Config. Dead End Dead End Dead End Feed Thru Feed Thru Feed Thru
G 0.69 0.81 0.94 0.69 0.81 0.94
*Footprint: 2.74 x 2.74
Footprint: 5.4 x 2.74
*Footprint: 2.74 x 2.74
100A & 125A Cast Aluminum
30A Non-metallic
Aluminum Fits ARRH and ARRC 30A Angle Adapter Cast
Cat. # CHBB1
Type 100A & 125A Cast Aluminum Cat. # CHBB2 Type 30A Non-metallic Cat. # AR30 A 3.38 B 4.12
Footprint: 4.09 x 4.09
*Footprint: 2.74 x 2.74 (Not UL Listed)
Type 20/16A 3-pole 4-pole 5-pole 3-pole 4-pole 5-pole 3-pole 4-pole 5-pole 3-pole 4-pole 5-pole
Plug Closure Cap CHCC320 CHCC420 CHCC520 CHCC3430 CHCC530
Enclosure Myers Hub STM 1 STM 2 STM 3
Enclosure Cable Gland CHCG20 CHCG25 CHCG40
Enclosure Closure Plug CHCP20 CHCP25 CHCG40
30/32A
5P
60/63A
CHCC60
STM 4
CHCG50
CHCP50
100/125A
CHCC100
STM 5
CHCG63
CHCP63
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1343
5P
IEC 309 Plugs and Interlocks

Hazardous Heavy Duty
Cl. I, Zone 1 & 2, Div. 2 NEMA 4X IP66
Color-coded receptacle cover and plug.
Rainshedding watertight profile.
Fiber-reinforced nylon type 12 impact- and corrosion-resistant enclosure and plug. Dual bottom entries in NPT or metric thread for cable or conduit.
Molded in place mounting feet.
Locking finger seats into web pockets securing back cap in place even under heavy usage and vibration.
HEAVY DUTY STRAIN RELIEF

Offering superior pullout protection and significantly reducing the occurrence of seal failure, our external stain relief system absorbs all tensile and torsional forces. In addition, an extremely long and dependable inside seal provides added protection.
Nickel-plated brass contacts offer long-life corrosion protection. Compression lugs provide reliable mechanical wire termination.
5P
1344
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

5P
Easy to wire. Cover removes along an innovative break line that permits full access to internal switch terminations.
Brass contacts with field-proven, self-cleaning multi-lam pressure bands for smooth plug insertion, low heat rise and uniform electrical contact.
Factory sealed switch provides Zone 1 & 2, Div. 2 explosion protection. Receptacle is deadfront until plug is fully engaged and rotated to activate switch. Plug cannot be removed under load. Switch is horsepower, and AIC-rated.
Applications:
Where hazardous gases may be present In areas prone to dust, dirt, vibration, hard use, and abuse In locations where complete protection against water jets and even temporary flooding is required In corrosive environments caused by chemicals, atmospheres, and water Ideal for heavy duty industrial applications, such as: chemical plants, mining, drilling, steel/grain/flour mills, pharmaceuticals, portable power

AEx de IIC T6 Class I, Zone 1, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D EEx ed IIC T6 II 2G/D UL*, cUL PTB 99 ATEX 1039 IP66, NEMA 4X CE VDE
Features:
Mechanically interlocked plug and receptacle - plug cannot be engaged or disengaged under load Simple "insert plug and twist" design to activate internal switch Self-cleaning multi-lam contacts provide reliable power connection Compact size, easy to handle and install OSHA lockout/tagout Dual bottom entry Zone 1 Myers Hubs Full wiring access, saves time and money V rated materials
*20A, 30A, 60A, 100A Pin Configuration to IEC 309 - 1/2 Series 2 - UL Listed 16A, 32A, 63A, 125A Pin Configuration to IEC 309 - 1/2 Series 1 - Not UL Listed
Standard Materials:
Enclosure - type 12 nylon Plug Body - fiber-reinforced nylon Hardware - stainless steel Contacts - brass
Options:
Description Suffix Auxiliary contacts for PLC or pilot light applications...... S483
5P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1345
5P

Hazardous Area Pin and Sleeve Ordering Information:
Configuration Amps 16A Cable Gland M20 M20 M25 M25 M25 M25 M25 20A
1
Myers Hub
Wires and Poles 2W3P 2W3P 3W4P 3W4P 3W4P 3W4P 4W5P
Receptacle / Connector
Plug / Inlet
Voltage 110-120 220-240 220-240 380-415 500 690 380-415 125 250 3250 3480 3600 3250 3480 3600 220-240 380-415 500 690 380-415 3250 3480 3600
Interlock Receptacle GHG 511 4304 R3001 GHG 511 4306 R3001 GHG 511 4409 R3001 GHG 511 4406 R3001 GHG 511 4407 R3001 GHG 511 4405 R3001 GHG 511 4506 R3001 GHG 511 4304 L3001 GHG 511 4306 L3001 GHG 511 4409 L3001 GHG 511 4407 L3001 GHG 511 4405 L3001 GHG 512 4409 L3001 GHG 512 4407 L3001 GHG 512 4405 L3001 GHG 512 4409 R3001 GHG 512 4406 R3001 GHG 512 4407 R3001 GHG 512 4405 R3001 GHG 512 4506 R3001 GHG 514 4409 L3001 GHG 514 4407 L3001 GHG 514 4405 L3001
Plug GHG 511 7304 R0001 GHG 511 7306 R0001 GHG 511 7409 R0001 GHG 511 7406 R0001 GHG 511 7407 R0001 GHG 511 7405 R0001 GHG 511 7506 R0001 GHG 511 7304 L0001 GHG 511 7306 L0001 GHG 511 7409 L0001 GHG 511 7407 L0001 GHG 511 7405 L0001 GHG 512 7409 L0001 GHG 512 7407 L0001 GHG 512 7405 L0001 GHG 512 7409 R0001 GHG 512 7406 R0001 GHG 512 7407 R0001 GHG 512 7405 R0001 GHG 512 7506 R0001 GHG 514 7409 L0001 GHG 514 7407 L0001 GHG 514 7405 L0001
/2 /2 /4 /4 /4
2W3P 2W3P 3W4P 3W4P 3W4P 3W4P 3W4P 3W4P 3W4P 3W4P 3W4P 3W4P 4W5P
30A
1 1 1
32A
M32 M32 M32
5P
M32 M32 60A 11/4 11/4 11/4
3W4P 3W4P 3W4P
1346
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

5P
Hazardous Area Pin and Sleeve Ordering Information:
Amps 63A
Cable Gland M40 M40 M40 M40 M40
Myers Hub
Wires and Poles 3W4P 3W4P 3W4P 3W4P 4W5P
Configuration Receptacle / Plug / Connector Inlet
Voltage 220-240 380-415 500 690 380-415 125/250 3250 3480 3600 230-400 220-240 380-415 500 690 380-415
Interlock Receptacle GHG 514 4409 R3001 GHG 514 4406 R3001 GHG 514 4407 R3001 GHG 514 4405 R3001 GHG 514 4506 R3001 GHG 515 4412 L3001 GHG 515 4409 L3001 GHG 515 4407 L3001 GHG 515 4405 L3001 GHG 515 4506 L3001 GHG 515 4409 R3001 GHG 515 4406 R3001 GHG 515 4407 R3001 GHG 515 4405 R3001 GHG 515 4506 R3001
Plug GHG 514 7409 R0001 GHG 514 7406 R0001 GHG 514 7407 R0001 GHG 514 7405 R0001 GHG 514 7506 R0001 GHG 515 7412 L0001 GHG 515 7409 L0001 GHG 515 7407 L0001 GHG 515 7405 L0001 GHG 515 7506 L0001 GHG 515 7409 R0001 GHG 515 7406 R0001 GHG 515 7407 R0001 GHG 515 7405 R0001 GHG 515 7506 R0001
100A
11/2 11/2 11/2 11/2 11/2
125A
M63 M63 M63 M63 M63
5P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1347
5P

Hazardous Interlock Receptacle Dimensions

16/20A 3P B X T Y L H 3.50 3.15 4.80 4.53 6.10 8.80 4/5P 4.30 3.94 5.80 5.31 6.90 9.30 30/32A 4/5P 4.70 4.33 6.60 6.70 8.10 11.50 60/63A 4/5P 7.90 7.09 8.90 10.87 14.60 18.70 100/125A 8.90 8.10 10.00 11.90 13.30 21.10
Hazardous Plug Dimensions

16/20A 3P A B Cord Dia. Range (In.) 6.70 2.80 4P 7.40 3.00 5P 7.40 3.30 30/32A 4/5P 9.80 3.90 0.5151.102 60/63A 4/5P 10.70 4.30 0.6301.378 100/125A 12.32 5.16 0.827-2.28
0.515-0.827
Additional Products
10A and 20A multi-pin interlock receptacle and plugs are available - please contact factory for ordering information.
16A and 32A flange receptacles and connectors are available - please contact factory for ordering information.
5P
1348
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Wiring Devices With Covers Non-hazardous
6P
Description
Wet Location Covers
Applications/Features Ordering Information
Page No.
see pages 13501351 see pages 13501351
6P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1349
6P
WLRS, WLRD and WLGF Wet Location Covers

For NEMA Configuration Receptacle Interiors For FS and FD Cast Device Boxes Flush Device Boxes
Applications:
WLRS, WLRD and WLGF series covers are suitable for use in wet and damp locations. WLGF is suitable for damp and wet locations only when cover is closed. WLRS and WLRD series wiring device covers are designed to meet the total NEC Code requirements for wet locations Article 410-57: "A receptacle installed outdoors where exposed to weather or in other wet locations shall be in a weatherproof enclosure, the integrity of which is not affected when the receptacle is in use (attachment plug cap inserted)." Use WLRS, WLRD and WLGF: Wherever portable equipment is required As general purpose utility receptacle covers For industrial, commercial or residential use In areas where electrical requirements do not exceed medium duty ratings To mount FS and FD single-gang or multi-gang boxes having individual cover openings (see Sect. 2F for listings) To mount on most flush device boxes (see Accessories)
Standard Materials:
WLRS, WLRD and WLGF face plate and cover die cast copper-free aluminum Cover hinge spring stainless steel Cover screws corrosion resistant metal Gasket WLRS and WLRD ethylene propylene rubber (EPDM) Gasket WLGF neoprene
Standard Finishes:

15 amperes; 125, 250, or 277 volts 20 and 30 amperes; 125, 250, 277, 480, 600, 125/250, 208/120, 480/277 or 600/347 volts Typical Installation
Accessories:
Flush mounting adapter WLRA-1 required for mounting on device boxes (not required with WLGF)
Features:
WLRS, WLRD and WLGF covers: Self-closing spring door assures protection of wiring device at all times, in wet and damp locations One piece EPDM gasket provides environmental protection of wiring device at all times Specially formulated elastomeric gasketing material offers excellent resistance to ozone, weather and temperature extremes of 50F to 260F Die cast, copper-free aluminum construction with aluminum lacquer finish provides maximum corrosion resistance Positive ground path ensured for all exposed metal parts NEMA configuration receptacle interiors: Comply with NEMA Standards WD-1 and WD-5 Grounded through an extra contact in all types except 3-phase applications; selfgrounded in duplex variety Back and side wired Offered in single and duplex configurations for use with standard plugs Specification grade
Single Cover Cat. # WLRS1 WLRS2 WLRD1

*Patent Number 4,058,358
Duplex Cover Description Single cover Single cover Duplex cover Opening Dia. 13/8" 11/2" 13/8"
Dimensions
In Inches:
6P

ANSI/UL Standard: 514A NEC Code 410-57 NEMA Standards: WD-1, 1983 (Straight Blade) and WD-5, 1982 (Locking Type) 1350
WLRS, WLRD and WLGF Wet Location Covers
6P
Covers with and without NEMA Configuration Receptacles

Single Device
NEMA Configuration Complete Cover with Receptacle Assy. Cat. # Spring Door Cover & Gasket Only Cat. #
Duplex Device
NEMA Configuration Complete Cover with Receptacle Assy. Cat. # Spring Door Cover & Gasket Only Cat. #
Type
Volts
Type
Volts
For Non-locking Blade Plugs 2-Pole 3-Wire Grounding 15 Amp 2-Pole 3-Wire Grounding 20 Amp 125V 250V 125V 250V 5-15R 6-15R 5-20R 6-20R WLRS 5 15 WLRS 6 15 WLRS 5 20 WLRS 6 20 WLRS1 WLRS1 WLRS1 WLRS1
For Non-locking Blade Plugs 2-Pole 3-Wire Grounding 15 Amp 2-Pole 3-Wire Grounding 20 Amp 125V 250V 125V 250V 5-15R 6-15R 5-20R 6-20R WLRD 5 15 WLRD 6 15 WLRD 5 20 WLRD 6 20 WLRD1 WLRD1 WLRD1 WLRD1
For Locking Blade Plugs 2-Pole 3-Wire Grounding 15 Amp 2-Pole 3-Wire Grounding 20 Amp 125V 250V 125V 250V L5-15R L6-15R L5-20R L6-20R WLRS L5 15 WLRS1 WLRS L6 15 WLRS1 WLRS L5 20 WLRS2 WLRS L6 20 WLRS2
For Locking Blade Plugs 2-Pole 3-Wire 125V Grounding 15 Amp
L5-15R
WLRD L5 15 WLRD1
Wet Location Covers for GFCI Duplex Receptacles:
WLGF - horizontal mount for flush device boxes.
WLGF FS - horizontal mount for FS and FD device boxes.
WLGF FSV vertical mount for FS and FD device boxes.
Dimensions
In Inches:
6P
WLGF
WLGF-FS & WLGF-FSV
Must be used with a wet locations rated wiring device.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1351
6P
6P
1352
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Cable-Gard Industrial Cable Management System Non-hazardous

Description
Static Discharge Reels Cable Reels
Application Technical Data Lifting/Stretching Reels Retrieve Reels
7P
Page No.
see page 1354 see pages 13551356 see pages 13551356 see page 1357 see page 1358
7P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1353
7P
Cable-Gard Static Discharge Reels
Applications:
Static discharge reels are used for grounding portable machines and equipment in hazardous areas, such as fuel transfer trucks, grain elevators, dockside loading facilities and barges. When properly clamped to ground the static discharge reel safely dissipates static electrical build-up and reduces the chance of sparking and the potential for explosion.
Features:
Automatic rewinding Rugged steel construction Compact enclosed design Positive ratchet lock Lock on/lock off switch Steel cable installed 100 amp universal jaw-type grounding clamp Safety orange polyester baked-on finish
SDR-50
Standard Materials:
Housing steel construction
Standard Finishes:
Housing orange polyester; baked on finish
Cable Length (Feet) 50 50 50 Description Single 7 30 steel* 35' plus 2 15' for Y (steel*) Nylon covered cable* Weight Complete lbs. (Kg) 12 13 12 (5.4) (5.9) (5.4) Cat. # SDR 50 SDR 50Y SDR 50N
*Static discharge reels are supplied complete with 3/ 32" steel aircraft cable. DC resistance is approximately one ohm per 50 ft. of steel cable.
Dimensions
In Inches:
7P
1354
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Cable-Gard Cable Reels
NEMA 3, 3R Raintight
7P
Applications:
Cable-Gard cable reels are designed for the constant, predictable pull of a machine and are designed for reliable operation in many applications. Typical uses include travelling cars, mobile hoists and various objects being lifted under power such as lifting magnets on cranes.
Options:
Description Suffix Ball stop keeps cable from rewinding out of reach in hand-pull applications. Cable Range O.D. Min./Max. Suffix .38 .50............................................. C1 .50 .75............................................. C2 .75 1.00........................................... C3 Ball stop may be ordered separately; use suffix number as catalog number. Pivot base Pivot base allows 340 rotation of reel. Required for applications demanding reel selfalignment to direction of the cable run.................................................. S To order separately: Series Pivot Base Cat. # W14 W16 W19 PB14 PB16 PB19 NS
Features:
Unitized slip ring assembly transfers current from stationary to rotary. Brushes are an integral part of the slip ring assembly. Safe to change spring motor that is sized per application, clock type spring with window shade type action. Sealed in disposable housing, spring is never exposed to unravel and possibly harm. Watertight cable entrance terminates cord to reel spool with positive grip, watertight seal. Large junction box with 3/ 4" NPT conduit entrance may be positioned in choice of four directions. Multi-position roller guide is adjustable to 4 different positions. Allows easy adaptation of reel to positioning requirements of the application and controlled uniform retraction of cable onto spool. Roller guides are optional; consult factory. Baked-on powder epoxy finish provides tightly bonded, homogenous shield to abrasion and corrosion. Ratchet lock is provided for window shade type action. May be easily disengaged in field for constant tension applications.
Electrical Ranges:
600 VAC (cable reel) Cord: #16 #10, Type "SO", #8, Type "W", or Type "G" (see listings).
Reel supplied less cable................
Dimensions
In Inches:

ANSI/UL 355 CSA C22.2 NEMA 3, 3R
Frame Size W14 W16 W19
3.75 2.75 13.75 8.25 7.00 9.25 6.12 16.25 15.00 8.12 8.00 14.25 2.50 1.25 5.50 2.75 15.75 9.31 7.00 9.25 7.94 18.25 17.00 9.12 8.50 16.25 3.00 1.25 5.75 2.75 19.00 10.00 10.50 9.25 7.00 20.50 20.25 10.75 11.00 18.50 3.50 1.25
Standard Materials:
Frame, spool steel
Slip Ring Housing Dimensions: W14 W16

Poles/Amps 14; 30 Amps 58; 30 Amps 912; 30 Amps 14; 55 Amps A 4.50 6.00 7.50 6.00 B 5.69 7.19 8.69 7.19 Poles/Amps 14; 30 Amps 58; 30 Amps 912; 30 Amps 14; 54 Amps A 4.50 6.00 7.50 6.00 B 5.94 7.44 8.94 7.44
W19
Poles/Amps 14; 30 Amps 58; 30 Amps 912; 30 Amps 14; 55 Amps A 3.25 4.50 6.00 4.50 B 5.44 6.69 8.19 6.69
Standard Finishes:
Baked on powder epoxy orange
7P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1355
7P
Cable-Gard Cable Reels
NEMA 3, 3R Raintight
Catalog Numbering System:
Reel Selection Process:

Determine:
1. Cable Size and No. of Conductors Be sure to choose cable that will adequately handle the current load (include ground when stating number of conductors). If the desired cable is not listed, consult factory. 2. Cable Length Reels in this brochure will handle up to 150 feet of cable. Decide how far your equipment will travel from the reel and choose the appropriate column. The amount of cable needed to install the cable on the reel has been included. However, you must add: 1) the amount of cable needed for Hook-Up to your equipment, and 2) Cable Sag Allowance if "Stretch" applications (see footnote*). Round up to the nearest footage on the selection chart. Cable Length Needed = Equipment Travel Distance Plus HookUp Plus Sag Allowance. (Sag allowance needed for "stretch" applications only.) 3. Type Of Cable This is important as stranding and construction vary. Cable-Gard reels are provided with cable as listed in the electrical ranges listed on previous page. 4. Application
7P
*Sag allowance must be considered when figuring cable length for STRETCH applications. Add 1 ft. of cable for each 50 ft. of working cable calculated for your application. (Working cable excludes hook-up length.)
1356
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Lifting/Stretching Reels
7P
Reels for Lifting/Stretching:

EXAMPLES: A hoist is to travel 52 feet along an I-beam this is a Stretch application. Required cable is 4 Conductor/No. 14. Hook-up is 2 feet. The following EXAMPLES appear in bold type in the selection charts. 1. If the reel must be END MOUNTED, the required cable length would be 52 feet, plus 2 feet for the hook-up plus 2 feet for sag consideration*. Round up to 60 feet per the available footage in the chart below. The correct model to choose would be W16L-B04060. 2. If the reel may be CENTER MOUNTED, only half as much cable is required it will be used in both directions. Half of the required length would be 26 feet, plus 2 feet for the hook-up plus 1 foot for sag consideration for a total of 29 feet. Round up to 30 feet and choose model W14L-B04030. A savings will be realized because less cable was used and, thus, a smaller reel was required.
Selection Chart:
Wire Size No. of Cond. 3 4 16 6 8 10 12 3 4 14 6 8 10 12 3 12 4 6 8 3 10 4 6 2 8 3 3 4 20 Feet W14L A03020 W14L A04020 W14L A06020 W16L A08020 W16L A10020 W16L A12020 W14L B03020 W14L B04020 W14L B06020 W14L B08020 W14L B10020 W16L B12020 W14L C03020 W14L C04020 W14L C06020 W14L C08020 W14L D03020 W14L D04020 W16L D06020 W14L E02020 W16L E03020 W14L F03020 W16L E04020 W16L E02030 W16L E03030 W16L F03030 W16L E04030 W16L E02040 W19L E03040 W19L F03040 W19L E04040 W19L E02050 30 Feet W14L A03030 W14L A04030 W14L A06030 W16L A08030 W16L A10030 W16L A12030 W14L B03030 W14L B04030 W14L B06030 W16L B08030 W16L B10030 W16L B12030 W14L C03030 W14L C04030 W16L C06030 W16L C08030 W14L D03030 W14L D04030 40 Feet W14L A03040 W14L A04040 W14L A06040 W16L A08040 W16L A10040 W16L A12040 W14L B03040 W14L B04040 W16L B06040 W16L B08040 W19L B10040 W19L B12040 W14L C03040 W14L C04040 W16L C06040 W19L C08040 W14L D03040 W16L D04040 W16L D03050 W16L D04050 W16L D03060 W19L D04060 W19L D03070 W19L D04070 W14L C03050 W16L C04050 W19L C06050 W16L C03060 W16L C04060 W19L C06060 W19L C03070 W19L C04070 50 Feet W16L A03050 W16L A04050 W14L A06050 W16L A08050 W16L A10050 W16L A12050 W14L B03050 W14L B04050 W16L B06050 W16L B08050 60 Feet W16L A03060 W16L A04060 W16L A06060 W16L A08060 W19L A10060 W19L A12060 W16L B03060 W16L B04060 W16L B06060 W19L B08060 70 Feet W19L A03070 W19L A04070 W19L A06070 W19L A08070 W19L A10070 W19L A12070 W16L B03070 W16L B04070 W19L B06070 W19L B08070
*Sag allowance must be considered when figuring cable length for Stretch applications. Add 1 foot of cable for each 50 feet of working cable calculated for your application. (Working cable excludes hook-up length.) Type "G" cable.
7P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1357
7P
Retrieve Reels
Reels for Retrieving:

EXAMPLES: A moving car is to travel 55 feet. Required cable is 4 Conductor/No. 10. Extra cables needed to hook up to the car is 2 feet. The following EXAMPLES appear in bold type in the selection charts. 1. If the reel must be END MOUNTED, the required cable length would be 55 feet, plus 2 feet for the hook-up. Round up to 60 feet per the available footage in the chart below. The correct model to choose would be W19R-D04060. 2. If the reel may be CENTER MOUNTED, only half as much cable is required it will be used in both directions. Half of the required length would be 27.5 feet, plus 2 feet for the hook-up for a total of 29.5 feet. Round up to 30 feet and choose model W14R-D04030. A savings will be realized because less cable was used and, thus, a smaller reel was required.
Selection Chart:
Wire Size No. of Cond. 3 4 16 6 8 10 12 3 4 14 6 8 10 12 3 4 12 6 8 10 12 3 10 4 6 8 2 8 3 3 4
Type "G" cable.
20 Feet W14R A03020 W14R A04020 W14R A06020 W14R A08020 W14R A10020 W14R A12020 W14R B03020 W14R B04020 W14R B06020 W14R B08020 W14R B10020 W16R B12020 W14R C03020 W14R C04020 W14R C06020 W14R C08020
50 Feet W16R A03050 W16R A04050 W14R A06050 W16R A08050 W16R A10050 W16R A12050 W14R B03050 W14R B04050 W16R B06050 W19R B08050
W14R C03050 W16R C04050 W19R C06050
W16R C03060 W16R C04060 W19R C06060
W16R C03070 W19R C04070 W19R 06070
W14R D03020 W14R D04020 W14R D06020 W19R D08020 W14R E02020 W14R E03020 W14R F03020 W16R E04020
W14R D03030 W14R D04030 W19R D06030 W19R D08030 W16R E02030 W16R E03030 W16R F03030 W16R E04030
W14R D03040 W16R D04040 W19R D06040 W16R E02040 W19R E03040 W19R F03040 W19R E04040
W16R D03050 W16R D04050
W16R D03060 W19R D04060
W16R D03070 W19R D04070
W19R E02050
W20AR E02060
7P
1358
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Special Purpose Plugs and Receptacles Non-hazardous

Description
Application/Selection Circuit Breaking Power Connectors ARK-trol RPC Series
Accessories Adapters and Back Boxes Dimensions General Information Listings
8P
Page No.
see page 1360
see page 1374 see page 1375 see pages 13761377 see page 1361 see pages 13641371
Control Circuit and Power Connectors ARK-trol RPE Series

Accessories Adapters and Back Boxes Dimensions General Information Listings
see page 1374 see page 1375 see pages 13761377 see page 1361 see pages 13721373
8P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1359
8P

Application
Applications:
Special purpose plugs and receptacles listed in this section are for use in nonhazardous areas, where environmental or application considerations require nonstandard plugs and receptacles. Included in this section are ARK-trol plugs and receptacles (RPC and RPE).
ARK-trol Plugs and Receptacles (RPC and RPE):

Are used with a wide range of equipment requiring a variety of contact configurations under conditions of hard usage and exposure to rigorous environments. Two basic types: RPC circuit breaking power connectors; RPE control circuit, power and welding connectors. RPC A variety of configurations (with a maximum of five-poles) are available for one and three-phase circuits. Electrical range is 30, 60, 100, 200 amperes at a maximum of 600 VAC. RPE A wider range of configurations are available, including options with up to 39 pins. Both types are available (either as standard or as option) with solder well terminals for high reliability, or crimp or pressure terminals for ease of installation. Listings on the following pages show complete assemblies with mating plugs and components. For information on features, options, components and complete assemblies, see page 1361, see page 1362 & see page 1363.
8P
1360
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
ARK-trol Electrical Connectors

RPC Circuit Breaking Power Connectors RPE Control Circuit and Power Connectors
Applications:
ARK-trol RPC circuit breaking power connectors and RPE control circuit power connectors are used: With a wide variety of portable electrical equipment For connection of devices ranging from simple lighting units, power tools, and similar portables requiring only a power supply circuit, to sophisticated control and instrumentation assemblies requiring disconnect Under conditions of hard usage and where exposed to dust, dirt, water, corrosion and chemical attack, providing high reliability and trouble-free service Indoors or outdoors in non-hazardous areas of petroleum refineries, chemical and petrochemical plants, manufacturing plants, military installations and similar locations On machine tools and similar equipment unless otherwise specified. Crimp contacts are available in all sizes and configurations. Pressure contacts, due to increased terminal area, are available only in certain assemblies as shown in the listings. For cable strain relief and watertight seal, plugs and cord connector recpetacles are provided with gland nut and tapered neoprene bushing. Contacts are removable and, for ease of installation, are snapped into the insert assemblies after wire termination. Termination methods employed are solder, crimp and pressure. Solder well contacts are standard and are furnished unless otherwise specified. Crimp contacts are available in all sizes and configurations. Pressure contacts, due to increased terminal area, are available only in certain assemblies as shown in the listings. For cable strain relief and watertight seal, plugs and cord connector recpetacles are provided with gland nut and tapered neoprene bushing.
8P
Standard Materials:
Back boxes and adapters copper-free aluminum Plug, receptacle and cord connector shells impact extruded aluminum Insulation diallyl phthalate (DAP) Insulation fiberglass-reinforced polyester material Sealing wafer silicone rubber Contacts hard drawn copper
Standard Finishes:
Copper-free aluminum natural Impact extruded aluminum hard coat anodized Diallyl phthalate natural (blue) Fiberglass-reinforced polyester material natural (red) Silicone natural (grey) Copper silver plated
Features:
All ARK-trol connectors have the same properties, characteristics and environmental capabilities outlined under "Compliances"
Options:
Alternate polarities ungrounded connectors. Standard polarity is position "N" shown below. Alternate positions "V", "W", "X" or "Y" can be furnished. To order, substitute for the letter "N" in the listed Cat. No., the letter for the desired polarization. Example: RPC217-127SO1N-ARE23 with polarity "X" becomes RCP217-127SO1XARE23.
Positive Polarization:
Polarization of ARK-trol connectors is such that plugs and receptacles cannot be mated incorrectly. Insert assemblies must be correctly aligned and will fit plug and receptacle shells in one position only, because of a raised key on the inner wall of the shells. Seven keys on the inner wall of the receptacle and seven mating keyways on the outer diameter of the plug shell are spaced so that the plug and receptacle can be mated in one position only. One key and one keyway are larger than the other six as a guide to rapid connection, easily performed under adverse field conditions even in total darkness.
Construction:
All ARK-trol plug, receptacle and cord connector shell parts are of high-strength impact extruded aluminum, hard coated with a high density anodize finish. The resultant assemblies are lightweight, extremely strong, free from surface defects and flaws, and with superior resistance to abrasion, corrosion and chemical attack. "Tri-Disc" insert assemblies consist of two rigid insulators with a silicone rubber wafer between to provide a cushioning action against mechanical damage and to effect a positive seal against penetration by water, moisture, dust, gas and other undesirable matter. Assembly of the inserts compresses the silicone wafer to seal against the inner wall of the plug or receptacle shell, and around each individual contact. ARK-trol insulating material is of high dielectric and mechanical strength with low moisture absorption and excellent resistance to arc tracking. Socket contacts are each enclosed in a separate chamber in the silo insulator. Arcs formed while making or breaking a circuit are quickly snuffed out in the chambers. Contacts are removable and, for ease of installation, are snapped into the insert assemblies after wire termination. Termination methods employed are solder, crimp and pressure. Solder well contacts are standard and are furnished
Interchangeability:
Shell components and insert assemblies in each diameter are interchangeable. Both male and female basic shells will accept either pin or socket inserts. This feature permits the use of both plug and receptacle in either an energized or deenergized condition. Alternate polarities grounded connectors. Standard polarity is position "A" shown below. Alternate positions "B", "C", "D" or "E" can be furnished. To order, substitute for the letter "A" in the listed Cat. No., the letter for the desired polarization. Example: RPC217-127SO2A-ARE23 with polarity "D" becomes RPC217-127SO2DARE23.
Grounding:
Grounded connectors have pin and socket contacts with integral grounding straps which press against the inner wall of plug, receptacle and cord connector shells, effectively bonding the shells to the grounding contacts. Grounding socket contacts are longer than current carrying contacts to make first and break last, assuring a positive ground before circuits are energized and after circuits are de-energized.
8P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1361
8P

RPC Circuit Breaking Power Connectors RPE Control Circuit and Power Connectors
Raintight
Options
(continued):
Contact Size AWG #16 #12 #10 #4 1/0 4/0
Crimp type contacts available on all assemblies with solder well contacts. To order, add letter "T" to Cat. No., immediately following polarity letter. Examples: RPC217-127S01N-ARE23 and RPC217-127S02A-ARE23 except with crimp contacts would be ordered as RPC217-127S01NT-ARE23 and RPC217127S02AT-ARE23 respectively. Alternate cable strain relief methods for plugs and connectors: Stainless steel wire mesh cord grip. To order, add letter "K" to first section of Cat. No. Example: RPC117-150P01N with wire mesh grip would be ordered as RPCK117-150P01N.
RPC Circuit Breaking Connectors NEC Rating 20A 30A 60A 100A 200A
RPE Connectors Non-Interrupting Ampere Rating MS(AN) 22 41 57 135 250 335 NEC 16 30 40 90 160 225

Properties Industrial use Driptight Weather resistant (weatherproof) Watertight Dust-tight Characteristics excludes dust, lint, fibers and flying, oil seepage and coolant seepage meets J.I.C. Standard excludes falling moisture or dirt materials unaffected by condensation performs normally in outdoor areas excludes water by hose spray or stream excludes dust, but performs normally if dust is accidentally enclosed during disconnect high resistant to alkalis, strong caustics, acids, petroleum base and organic solvents 300 psi external 200 psi internal
Adapter for use with liquid tight/rigid conduit. To order, add letters "LT" to first section of catalog number. Example: RPC117-150P01N with liquid tight/conduit adapter would be ordered as RPCLT117-150P01N.
Chemical resistance Pressure
Compliance with Military Specifications

Voltage 250, 480 and 600VAC Frequency 50* to 400 hertz See listings for specific ratings
Environment Corrosion resistance Temperature Air leakage Dust resistance Shock resistance Vibration Humidity & moisture
Performance Data salt spray 300 days. MIL-STD-810E 80F to 275F, meeting requirements of MIL-STD-810E exceeds Class E specification MIL-STD-810E exceeds requirements of MIL-STD-810E 50G exceeds MIL-STD-810E exceeds 20G, method II, MIL-STD-810E exceeds Class E specification MIL-STD-810E
Ampere Ratings:
Ratings given in the table at right are applicable to RPC circuit breaking power connectors and RPE control connectors, as indicated. RPC connectors are capable of making or breaking circuits at the full rated load indicated in the table on the listing pages. Contact assemblies of RPE connectors have the current carrying capabilities shown in the table, as defined by applicable military specifications (MS) and NEC requirements, for circuits not made or broken under load. It should be noted that these non-interrupting ampere ratings exceed the NEC rating of the corresponding wire size.
ANSI/UL Standard 498

*For use on system less than 60 hertz the receptacles, plugs and connectors are for disconnect use only.
8P
1362
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Catalog Numbering System
8P
Connector Series:
RPC circuit breaking RPE for disconnect use only RPX hazardous (gasoline or equivalent hazards, see Section 9P)
Component Accessories:
This code indicates the combination of shell parts to fit your application; e.g., 014 = square flanged receptacle with insert retaining nut and dust cap; 150 = plug handle body, bushing, and clamping nut for cable with a diameter of .250 to .625.
Contact Termination:
Blank = Solder well (standard unless noted) R = Pressure (See complete ordering information that follows for availability) T = Crimp (available in all configurations)
Additional Cable Strain Relief (Optional):

K = Wire mesh cord grip LT = Liquidtight/conduit connection
Contact Type:
P = Pin (male) S = Socket (female)
Plugged Contact Openings (Optional):

This option allows greater flexibility, allowing for unique wiring requirements. The number following the slash indicates the total number of contacts that will be supplied (including ground contact, if applicable); all other openings in the insert assembly will be plugged.
Shell Parts Designation:

0 = No shell part required 1= Plug shell 2 = Receptacle 3 = Cord connector 4 = Connector handle body only 5 = Plug shell (long) 6 = Receptacle (long) 7 = Cord connector (long)
Contact Configuration:
This assigned code indicates the actual configuration of the contacts (pin and socket) in the insert assembly for a particular shell size. This is based upon electrical ratings (amperage and voltage) and the number of contacts required. It does not indicate the number of contacts in the configuration.
Back Boxes (Optional):

See page 1375 for back box information.
Shell Size:
Inside Diameter measured in X/16" (017, 021, 033, 041, i.e., 017 shell size = 17/ 16")
Polarity Designation:
N = Standard position ungrounded V, W, X or Y = Alternate positions (ungrounded) A = Standard position grounded B, C, D or E = Alternate positions (grounded)
8P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1363
8P

RPC Circuit Breaking Power Connectors With Solder Well Terminals
Raintight
Circuit Description 20 Amps Grounded 4w, 5p
Volts (VAC) 480
Contact Size #12
Shell Size 017
Hub Size (In.) /4 1

3
Square Flanged Receptacle, Dust Cap and Back Box Cat. # (For Surface Mounting)* RPC217 014 S09A ARE23 RPC217 014 S09A ARE33 RPC217 014 S08N ARE23 RPC217 014 S08N ARE33 RPC217 014 S02A ARE23 RPC217 014 S02A ARE33 RPC217 014 S04A ARE23 RPC217 014 S04A ARE33 RPC221 014 S17A ARE23 RPC221 014 S17A ARE33 RPC217 014 S01N ARE23 RPC217 014 S01N ARE33 RPC217 014 S03N ARE23 RPC217 014 S03N ARE33 RPC221 014 S16N ARE23 RPC221 014 S16N ARE33 RPC233 014 S08A ARE46 RPC233 014 S08A ARE56 RPC233 014 S09A ARE46 RPC233 014 S09A ARE56 RPC233 014 S05N ARE46 RPC233 014 S05N ARE56 RPC233 014 S06N ARE46 RPC233 014 S06N ARE56
Motor Plug with Dust Cap Cat. # RPC117 157 P09A
Ungrounded 30 Amps Grounded
5w, 5p
480
#12
017
/4 1
3 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1
RPC117 157 P08N
2w, 3p 3w, 4p 4w, 5p
480 480 480 480 480 480
#10 #10 #10 #10 #10 #10
017 017 021 017 017 021
RPC117 157 P02A RPC117 157 P04A RPC121 157 P17A RPC117 157 P01N RPC117 157 P03N RPC121 157 P16N
Ungrounded
3w, 3p 4w, 4p 5w, 5p
60 Amps Grounded
3w, 4p 4w, 5p
600 480 600 480
#4 #4 #4 #4
033 033 033 033
11/4 11/2 11/4 11/2 11/4 11/2 11/4 11/2
RPC133 157 P08A RPC133 157 P09A RPC133 157 P05N RPC133 157 P06N
Ungrounded
4w, 4p 5w, 5p
8P
1364
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Raintight
8P
Cable Diameter Range .250 to .625 .625 to .875 .250 to .625 .625 to .875 .250 to .625 .625 to .875 .250 to .625 .625 to .875 .625 to 1.000 1.000 to 1.187 .250 to .625 .625 to .875 .250 to .625 .625 to .875 .625 to 1.000 1.000 to 1.187 .875 to 1.375 1.375 to 1.625 1.625 to 1.875 .875 to 1.375 1.375 to 1.625 1.625 to 1.875 .875 to 1.375 1.375 to 1.625 1.625 to 1.875 .875 to 1.375 1.375 to 1.625 1.625 to 1.875
Cord Connector Cat. # RPC317 160 S09A RPC317 161 S09A RPC317 160 S08N RPC317 161 S08N RPC317 160 S02A RPC317 161 S02A RPC317 160 S04A RPC317 161 S04A RPC321 161 S17A RPC321 395 S17A RPC317 160 S01N RPC317 161 S01N RPC317 160 S03N RPC317 161 S03N RPC321 161 S16N RPC321 395 S16N RPC333 163 S08A RPC333 396 S08A RPC333 397 S08A RPC333 163 S09A RPC333 396 S09A RPC333 397 S09A RPC333 163 S05N RPC333 396 S05N RPC333 397 S05N RPC333 163 S06N RPC333 396 S06N RPC333 397 S06N
Plug Cat. # RPC117 150 P09A RPC117 151 P09A RPC117 150 P08N RPC117 151 P08N RPC117 150 P02A RPC117 151 P02A RPC117 150 P04A RPC117 151 P04A RPC121 151 P17A RPC121 387 P17A RPC117 150 P01N RPC117 151 P01N RPC117 150 P03N RPC117 151 P03N RPC121 151 P16N RPC121 387 P16N RPC133 153 P08A RPC133 388 P08A RPC133 389 P08A RPC133 153 P09A RPC133 388 P09A RPC133 389 P09A RPC133 153 P05N RPC133 388 P05N RPC133 389 P05N RPC133 153 P06N RPC133 388 P06N RPC133 389 P06N
Solder well terminals provided as standard. Crimp contacts are optionally available, add suffix T to catalog number. Example: RPC217-014-S09AT-ARE23. For square flanged receptacle without dust cap, change the middle three digits of the catalog number from 014 to 127. Example: RPC217-127-S09A-ARE23. *For square flanged receptacle with dust cap for panel mounting, delete the last digits of the catalog number specifying the backbox. Example: RPC217-014-S09A. For plugs and cord connectors: Liquidtight/Conduit Adapter To order with adapter, add letters "LT" to first section of catalog number. Example: RPCLT317-160-S09A. Additional Cable Strain Relief Options Stainless steel wire mesh grip To order, add letter "K" to first section of catalog number. Example: RPCK317-160-S09A.
Note: RPC with pressure terminals are also available, see pages 13681371.
8P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1365
8P

Raintight
Circuit Description 100 Amps Grounded Ungrounded 200 Amps Grounded 4w, 5p 5w, 5p
Volts (VAC) 600 600
Contact Size
1
Shell Size 041 041
Hub Size (In.) 11/2 2 11/2 2 2 21/2
Square Flanged Receptacle, Dust Cap and Back Box Cat. # (For Surface Mounting)* RPC641 014 S04A AJ57 RPC641 014 S04A AJ67 RPC641 014 S02N AJ57 RPC641 014 S02N AJ67 RPC641 014 S10A AJ68 RPC641 014 S10A AJ78
Motor Plug Cat. # RPC541 157 P04A RPC541 157 P02N
/0 /0
3w, 4p
480
/0
041
RPC541 157 P10A
8P
1366
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Raintight
8P
Cable Diameter Range 1.375 1.875 2.062 1.375 1.875 2.062 to to to to to to 1.875 2.062 2.250 1.875 2.062 2.250
Cord Connector Cat. # RPC741 RPC741 RPC741 RPC741 RPC741 RPC741 164 398 399 164 398 399 S04A S04A S04A S02N S02N S02N
Solder well terminals provided as standard. Crimp contacts are optionally available, add suffix T to catalog number. Example: RPC217-014-S09AT-ARE23. For square flanged receptacle without dust cap, change the middle three digits of the catalog number from 014 to 127. Example: RPC217-127-S09A-ARE23. *For square flanged receptacle with dust cap for panel mounting, delete the last digits of the catalog number specifying the backbox. Example: RPC217-014-S09A. For plugs and cord connectors: Liquidtight/Conduit Adapter To order with adapter, add letters "LT" to first section of catalog number. Example: RPCLT317-160-S09A. Additional Cable Strain Relief Options Stainless steel wire mesh grip To order, add letter "K" to first section of catalog number. Example: RPCK317-160-S09A.
Plug Cat. # RPC541 RPC541 RPC541 RPC541 RPC541 RPC541 154 390 391 154 390 391 P04A P04A P04A P02N P02N P02N
1.375 to 1.875 1.875 to 2.062 2.062 to 2.250
RPC741 164 S10A RPC741 398 S10A RPC741 399 S10A
RPC541 154 P10A RPC541 390 P10A RPC541 391 P10A
Note: RPC with pressure terminals are also available, see pages 13681371.
8P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1367
8P

RPC Circuit Breaking Power Connectors With Pressure Terminals
Raintight
Circuit Description 30 Amps Grounded Ungrounded 60 Amps Grounded 2w, 3p 3w, 3p
Volts (VAC) 600 600
Contact Size #10 #10
Shell Size 021 021
Square Flanged Receptacle, Dust Cap and Back Box Hub Cat. # (For Surface Size (In.) Mounting)
3 /4 1
Motor Plug Cat. # RPC121 157 P04AR RPC121 157 P02NR
RPC221 014 S04AR ARE23 RPC221 014 S04AR ARE33 RPC221 014 S02NR ARE23 RPC221 014 S02NR ARE33 RPC233 RPC233 RPC233 RPC233 014 014 014 014 S08AR S08AR S09AR S09AR ARE46 ARE56 ARE46 ARE56
3 /4 1
3w, 4p 4w, 5p
600 480 600 480
#4 #4 #4 #4
033 033 033 033
11/4 11/2 11/4 11/ 2 11/4 11/2 11/4 11/2
RPC133 157 P08AR RPC133 157 P09AR RPC133 157 P05NR RPC133 157 P06NR
Ungrounded
4w, 4p 5w, 5p
RPC233 014 S05NR ARE46 RPC233 014 S05NR ARE56 RPC233 014 S06NR ARE46 RPC233 014 S06NR ARE56
For alternate polarizations, see page 1361, "Options" section.
8P
1368
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Raintight
8P
Cable Diameter Range .250 to .625 .625 to 1.000 .250 to .625 .625 to 1.000 .875 to 1.375 1.375 to 1.625 1.625 to 1.875 .875 to 1.375 1.375 to 1.625 1.625 to 1.875 .875 to 1.375 1.375 to 1.625 1.625 to 1.875 .875 to 1.375 1.375 to 1.625 1.625 to 1.875
Cord Connector Cat. #* RPC321 160 S04AR RPC321 161 S04AR RPC321 160 S02NR RPC321 161 S02NR RPC333 163 S08AR RPC333 396 S08AR RPC333 397 S08AR RPC333 163 S09AR RPC333 396 S09AR RPC333 397 S09AR RPC333 163 S05NR RPC333 396 S05NR RPC333 397 S05NR RPC333 163 S06NR RPC333 396 S06NR RPC333 397 S06NR
Plug Cat. #* RPC121 150 P04AR RPC121 151 P04AR RPC121 150 P02NR RPC121 151 P02NR RPC133 153 P08AR RPC133 388 P08AR RPC133 389 P08AR RPC133 153 P09AR RPC133 388 P09AR RPC133 389 P09AR RPC133 153 P05NR RPC133 388 P05NR RPC133 389 P05NR RPC133 153 P06NR RPC133 388 P06NR RPC133 389 P06NR For square flanged receptacle without dust cap, change the middle three digits of the catalog number from 014 to 127. Example: RPC221-127-S04AR-ARE23. For square flanged receptacle with dust cap for panel mounting, delete the last digits of the catalog number specifying the backbox. Example: RPC221-014-S04AR. *For plugs and cord connectors: Liquidtight/Conduit Adapter To order with adapter, add letters "LT" to first section of catalog number. Example: RPCLT321-160-S04AR. Additional Cable Strain Relief Options Stainless steel wire mesh grip To order, add letter "K" to first section of catalog number. Example: RPCK321-160-S04AR.
8P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1369
8P

Raintight
Circuit Description 100 Amps Grounded Ungrounded 4w, 5p 5w, 5p
Volts (VAC) 600 600
Contact Size
1
Shell Size 041 041
Square Flanged Receptacle, Dust Cap and Back Box Hub Cat. # (For Surface Size (In.) Mounting) 11/2 2 11/2 2 RPC641 014 S04AR AJ57 RPC641 014 S04AR AJ67 RPC641 014 S02NR AJ57 RPC641 014 S02NR AJ67
Motor Plug Cat. # RPC541 157 P04AR RPC541 157 P02NR
/0 /0
For alternate polarizations, see page 1361, "Options" section.
8P
1370
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

Raintight
8P
Cable Diameter Range 1.375 to 1.875 1.875 to 2.062 2.062 to 2.250 1.375 to 1.875 1.875 to 2.062 2.062 to 2.250
Cord Connector Cat. #* RPC741 164 S04AR RPC741 398 S04AR RPC741 399 S04AR RPC741 164 S02NR RPC741 398 S02NR RPC741 399 S02NR
Plug Cat. #* RPC541 154 P04AR RPC541 390 P04AR RPC541 391 P04AR RPC541 154 P02NR RPC541 390 P02NR RPC541 391 P02NR
For square flanged receptacle without dust cap, change
the middle three digits of the catalog number from 014 to 127. Example: RPC221-127-S04AR-ARE23. For square flanged receptacle with dust cap for panel mounting, delete the last digits of the catalog number specifying the backbox. Example: RPC221-014-S04AR. *For plugs and cord connectors: Liquidtight/Conduit Adapter To order with adapter, add letters "LT" to first section of catalog number. Example: RPCLT321-160-S04AR. Additional Cable Strain Relief Options Stainless steel wire mesh grip To order, add letter "K" to first section of catalog number. Example: RPCK321-160S04AR.
8P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1371
8P

RPE Control Circuit and Power Connectors With Solder Well Terminals
Raintight
Circuit Description Control 6w, 7p 7w, 7p 12w, 12p 18w, 19p 19w, 19p 38w, 39p 39w, 39p
Contact Size #12 #12 #16 #12 #12 #12 #12
Amps 20 20 16 20 20 20 20
Volts (VAC) 480 480 250 250 250 250 250
Shell Size 017 017 017 021 021 033 033
Hub Size (In.)

3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1
Square Flanged Receptacle, Dust Cap and Back Box Cat. # (For Surface Mounting)* RPE217 014 S06A ARE23 RPE217 014 S06A ARE33 RPE217 014 S05N ARE23 RPE217 014 S05N ARE33 RPE217 014 S07N ARE23 RPE217 014 S07N ARE33 RPE221 014 S08A ARE23 RPE221 014 S08A ARE33 RPE221 014 S09N ARE23 RPE221 014 S09N ARE33 RPE233 014 S19A ARE46 RPE233 014 S19A ARE56 RPE233 014 S17N ARE46 RPE233 014 S17N ARE56
Motor Plug Cat. # RPE117 157 P06A RPE117 157 P05N RPE117 157 P07N RPE121 157 P08A RPE121 157 P09N RPE133 157 P19A RPE133 157 P17N
11/4 11/2 11/4 11/2
8P
1372
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

RPE Control Circuit and Power Connectors With Solder Well Terminals
Raintight
8P
Cable Diameter Range .250 to .625 .625 to .875 .250 to .625 .625 to .875 .250 to .625 .625 to .875 .625 to 1.000 1.000 to 1.187 .625 to 1.000 1.000 to 1.187 .875 to 1.375 1.375 to 1.625 .875 to 1.375 1.375 to 1.625
Cord Connector Cat. # RPE317 160 S06A RPE317 161 S06A RPE317 160 S05N RPE317 161 S05N RPE317 160 S07N RPE317 161 S07N RPE321 161 S08A RPE321 395 S08A RPE321 161 S09N RPE321 395 S09N RPE333 163 S19A RPE333 396 S19A RPE333 163 S17N RPE333 396 S17N
Plug Cat. # RPE117 150 P06A RPE117 151 P06A RPE117 150 P05N RPE117 151 P05N RPE117 150 P07N RPE117 151 P07N RPE121 151 P08A RPE121 387 P08A RPE121 151 P09N RPE121 387 P09N RPE133 153 P19A RPE133 388 P19A RPE133 153 P17N RPE133 388 P17N
Solder well terminals provided as standard. Crimp contacts are optionally available, add suffix T to catalog number. Example: RPE633-014-S24NT-AJ57. For square flanged receptacle without dust cap, change the middle three digits of the catalog number from 014 to 127. Example: RPE633-127-S24N-AJ57. *For square flanged receptacle with dust cap for panel mounting, delete the last three digits of the catalog number specifying the backbox. Example: RPE633-014S24N. For plugs and cord connectors: Liquidtight/Conduit Adapter To order with adapter, add letters "LT" to the first section of the catalog number. Example: RPELT733396-S24N. Additional Cable Strain Relief Options Stainless steel wire mesh grip To order, add letter "K" to first section of the catalog number. Example: RPEK733-396-S24N.
8P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1373
8P
RPC and RPE Connectors

Accessories
For #16 Through #10 Contacts:

The RPE017-440 crimping tool has been designed to crimp a wide range of solid and stranded type conductors. The crimping head is adjusted and sealed at the factory. The tool automatically crimps and gauges all size contacts without readjustment.
Dust Caps:
For Receptacles For RPC or RPE Series
Cat. # RPE017 RPE021 RPE033 RPE041 009 009 009 009
Description Dust Cap w/Eyelet for Receptacle
Contact Removal Tools:

The contact removal tool extracts the contact from the insert assembly without complete disassembly of the connector. Cat # Description
RPE017 402T for use with #16 contacts. RPE017 403T for use with #12 contacts. RPE017 404T for use with #10 contacts.
8P
1374
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Back Boxes and Adapters

For Mounting RPC and RPE Square Flanged Receptacles
8P
45 Angle adapter
Flat adapter
Back Boxes
FS and FSC
Hub Size in. /2 3 /4 1
1
Adapters
Shell Sizes of Square Flanged Receptacles
FSC Cat. # FSC1 SA FSC2 SA FSC3 SA 45 Angle 017 Cat. # 021 Cat. # RPE021 156 Flat 017 Cat. # RPE017 141 021 Cat. # RPE021 142
FS Cat. # FS1 SA FS2 SA FS3 SA
FS Back Box
] ] ] ] ]
RPE017 156
ARE
Hub Size in.
1 3

Cat. # ARE13 ARE23 ARE33 ARE36 ARE46 ARE56 Rating 30A Flat 017 Cat. # RPE017 143 021 Cat. # RPE021 144 033 Cat. # 041 Cat. #
/2 /4 1 1 11/4 11/2
60A
RPE033 145
RPE041 146
ARE Back Box
AJ
Hub Size in. 1 11/4 11/2 2 11/2 2 21/2 AJ Black Box Cat. # AJ37 AJ47 AJ57 AJ67 AJ58 AJ68 AJ78 Rating 60A and 100A

Flat 033 Cat. # RPE033 145 041 Cat. # RPE041 146
200A
RPE041 147
8P
Any of the FS or FD single gang, two gang tandem or multiple gang boxes with individual cover openings may be used with these adapters. For listings, dimensions and other details refer to Section 3F. Other AR and AJ back boxes may be used with these adapters. For listings, dimensions and other details refer to Section 1P.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1375
8P

RPC Circuit Breaking Power Connectors RPE Control Circuit and Power Connectors Dimensions (Inches)
Square Flanged Receptacle
Shell Type and Size 217 221 233 241 633 641 a 0.1875 0.250 0.375 0.500 b 1.375 1.750 2.375 2.813 2.375 2.813 c 1.317 1.692 2.317 2.817 2.317 2.817 d 2.165 2.165 2.165 2.165 2.915 2.915 e 1.562 2.000 2.625 3.187 2.625 3.187 f .190 .190 .214 .250 .214 .250 g 1.750 2.250 2.875 3.438 2.875 3.438
Contact for AWG Wire #16, #12, #10 #4 1 /0 4 /0
Square Flanged Receptacle with Dust Cap

Shell Type and Size 217 221 233 241 633 641 b 1.375 1.750 2.375 2.813 2.375 2.813 c 1.317 1.692 2.317 2.817 2.317 2.817 d 2.812 2.812 2.812 2.812 3.552 3.552 e 1.927 2.468 3.145 3.754 3.145 3.754 f .190 .190 .214 .250 .214 .250 g 1.750 2.250 2.875 3.438 2.875 3.438
Dimension a same as above
Plug
Shell Type and Size 117 121 133 141 533 541 a 5.033 5.090 6.093 6.653 6.843 7.403 b 4.133 4.190 5.193 5.753 5.193 5.753 c 1.270 1.675 2.295 2.800 2.295 2.800 d 1.921 2.468 3.140 3.750 3.140 3.750
These dimensions are approximate and vary with cable size.
8P
1376
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

RPC Circuit Breaking Power Connectors RPE Control Circuit and Power Connectors Dimensions (Inches)
Cord Connector Receptacle
Shell Type and Size 317 321 333 341 733 741 a 5.033 5.090 6.093 6.653 6.843 7.403 b 4.116 4.173 5.176 5.736 5.176 5.736 c 1.562 1.885 2.625 3.187 2.625 3.187 d 1.812 2.300 3.140 3.730 3.140 3.730
8P
Square flanged receptacle
Panel Mounting Methods

Back Mounting Shell Size a d e 3 017 13/8 /16 119/32 3 021 13/4 /16 21/32 7 033 23/8 /32 221/32 7 13 1 041 2 /16 /4 3 /32 Front Mounting b d e 117/32 131/32 221/32 35/32 13/8 13/4 23/8 213/16 /16 /16 7 /32 1 /4
3 3
AJ Back Boxes
Form C and D C and D E Size /4, 1, 11/4, 11/2 2 11/2, 2, 21/2
3
a 57/8 57/8 8
b 8 8 103/4
c 77/16 8 97/8
d 47/8 47/8 63/4
e 7 7 91/2
f 57/8 57/8 8
g 15 15 45
ARE Back Boxes

Form B B B C C C Size
1 3
a 3 /8 33/8 33/8 41/4 41/4 41/4

3
b 3 /8 35/8 35/8 411/16 411/16 411/16

5
c 2 /4 23/4 23/4 411/16 411/ 16 411/ 16

3
d 4 /4 41/ 4 41/ 4 51/ 4 51/ 4 51/ 4

1
e 1 1 1 15/ 8 15/ 8 15/ 8
f / 32 / 32 / 32 15 / 16 1 11/ 16
27 27 31
h dia. / 32 / 32 / 32 3 /8 3 /8 3 /8
11 11 11
/2 /4 1 1 11/4 11/2
FS/FSC Boxes
Series FS Hub Size /2 3 /4 1
1
a /8 7 /8 1
7
b /8 3 /4 7 /8
5
c 17/8 17/8 17/8
d 111/16 111/16 111/16
8P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1377
8P
8P
1378
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Special Purpose ARK-trol Plugs and Receptacles Hazardous

Description
Application/Selection Delayed Action
RPX "Time-Slot" Series
9P
Page No.
see page 1381 see pages 13821383
9P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1379
9P
9P
1380
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

RPX "Time Slot" Delayed Action Connectors Hazardous Locations
Applications:
RPX "Time-Slot" delayed action connectors are used: In areas which are hazardous due to the presence of gasoline or gases or vapors of equivalent hazard (comparable to NEC Class I, Group D), where construction and test procedures are required to meet applicable sections of MIL-STD-810E For connection of devices ranging from simple lighting units, power tools and similar portables requiring only a power circuit to sophisticated control and instrumentation assemblies requiring disconnect
Cl. I, Div. 1 and 2, Group D* Explosionproof Raintight Dimensions see page 1386
9P
C. Turn plug clamping nut an additional 45 counterclockwise to the release position, thereby effecting delayed action.
Features:
The same basic features, described in detail in Section 8P for RPC and RPE connectors, apply to RPX connectors as well and include the following: High-strength impact extruded aluminum shell parts "Tri-Disc" insert assemblies Contacts snap in after termination Positive polarization Interchangeability of inserts in each shell size Grounding contacts, where used, make first and break last The RPX "Time-Slot" delayed action feature prevents complete withdrawal of the plug in one continuous movement, eliminating the possibility of a circuitbreaking arc occurring in a hazardous area. Details of operation are shown in the illustrations below.
D. Disengage plug and receptacle.

RPX delayed action connectors have the same physical properties, characteristics and environmental capabilities of RPC and RPE connectors listed in Section 8P. For detailed information on these properties, see page 1362. In addition to these properties, the "Time-Slot" delayed action feature permits disconnect under full rated load with no possibility of an exposed arc, thus meeting the stringent requirements of Military Specifications MIL-STD-810E
Standard Materials:
Back boxes and adapters Feraloy iron alloy Plug, receptacle and cord connector shells impact extruded aluminum Insulation diallyl phthalate (DAP) Sealing wafer silicone rubber Contacts hard drawn copper
Options:
The following options available for RPC and RPE connectors are also applicable to RPX connectors. For complete details see pages 13611362 Alternate polarities ungrounded and grounded connectors Crimp type contacts Wire mesh cord grip
A. Turn plug clamping nut counterclockwise 45 to unlock plug.
Standard Finishes:
Feraloy zinc electroplate and aluminum acrylic paint Impact extruded aluminum hard coat anodized Diallyl phthalate natural (blue) Silicone rubber natural (grey)

10, 20, 30 and 60 amperes 50 to 400 hertz 250, 480 and 600VAC See listings for specific ratings
9P
B. Pull to disengage pin and socket contacts, breaking circuit while contacts are still inside the receptacle. Any resulting electrical arc is quenched within the receptacle sockets.
*RPX series are suitable for hazardous areas due to the presence of gasoline or other gases or vapors of equivalent hazard (comparable to N.E.C. Class I, Group D), where construction and test procedures are required to meet applicable sections of MIL-STD-810E. For use on systems less than 60 hertz the receptacles, plugs and connectors are for disconnect use only.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1381
9P
Special Purpose; ARK-trol Electrical Connectors

RPX "Time-Slot" Delayed Action Connectors With Solder Well Terminals, Hazardous Areas*
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Group D* Explosionproof Raintight Dimensions see page 1386
POWER 20 amps Grounded Ungrounded 30 amps Grounded
Circuit Description 4w, 5p 5w, 5p
Contact Size #12 #12
Amps 20 20
Volts (VAC) 480 480
Shell Size 017 017
Hub Size (In.) /4 1

3
Square Flanged Receptacle, Dust Cap and Back Box Cat. # (For Surface Mounting) RPX217 914 S09A EDSC271 RPX217 914 S09A EDSC371 RPX217 914 S08N EDSC271 RPX217 914 S08N EDSC371
/4 1
3
2w, 3p 3w, 4p 4w, 5p
#10 #10 #10 #10 #10 #10
30 30 30 30 30 30
480 480 480 480 480 480
017 017 021 017 017 021
/4 1
3 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1
RPX217 914 S02A EDSC371 RPX217 914 S04A EDSC271 RPX217 914 S04A EDSC371 RPX221 914 S17A EDSC271 RPX221 914 S17A EDSC371 RPX217 914 S01N EDSC271 RPX217 914 S01N EDSC371 RPX217 914 S03N EDSC271 RPX217 914 S03N EDSC371 RPX221 914 S16N EDSC271 RPX221 914 S16N EDSC371
Ungrounded
3w, 3p 4w, 4p 5w, 5p
9P
1382
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

9P
Cable Diameter Range .250 to .625 .625 to .875 .250 to .625 .625 to .875 .250 to .625 .625 to .875 .250 to .625 .625 to .875 .625 to 1.000 1.000 to 1.187 .250 to .625 .625 to .875 .250 to .625 .625 to .875 .625 to 1.000 1.000 to 1.187
Cord Connector Cat. # RPX317 160 S09A RPX317 161 S09A RPX317 160 S08N RPX317 161 S08N RPX317 160 S02A RPX317 161 S02A RPX317 160 S04A RPX317 161 S04A RPX321 161 S17A RPX321 395 S17A RPX317 160 S01N RPX317 161 S01N RPX317 160 S03N RPX317 161 S03N RPX321 161 S16N RPX321 395 S16N
Plug Cat. # RPX117 150 P09A RPX117 151 P09A RPX117 150 P08N RPX117 151 P08N RPX117 150 P02A RPX117 151 P02A RPX117 150 P04A RPX117 151 P04A RPX121 151 P17A RPX121 387 P17A RPX117 150 P01N RPX117 151 P01N RPX117 150 P03N RPX117 151 P03N RPX121 151 P16N RPX121 387 P16N
For alternate polarizations, see page 1361, "Options" section. Solder well terminals provided as standard. Crimp contacts are optionally available, add suffix T to catalog number. Example: RPX217-914-S09AT-EDSC271. For square flanged receptacle without dust cap, change the middle three digits of the catalog number from 914 to 913. Example: RPX217-913-S09A-EDSC271. For plugs and cord connectors: Liquidtight/Conduit Adapter To order with adapter, add letters "LT" to first section of catalog number. Example: RPXLT317-160-S09A. Additional Cable Strain Relief Options Stainless steel wire mesh grip To order, add letter "K" to first section of catalog number. Example: RPXK317160-S09A.
*RPX series are suitable for hazardous areas due to the presence of gasoline or other gases or vapors of equivalent hazard (comparable to N.E.C. Class I, Group D), where construction and test procedures are required to meet applicable sections of MIL-E-5272C and MIL-E-4970A.
9P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1383
9P

POWER 60 Amps
Circuit Description
Contact Size
Amps
Volts (VAC)
Shell Size
Hub Size (In.)
Square Flanged Receptacle, Dust Cap and Back Box Cat. # (For Surface Mounting)
3w, 4p Grounded 4w, 5p 4w, 4p Ungrounded 5w, 5p CONTROL 6w, 7p 7w, 7p 18w, 19p 19w, 19p 38w, 39p 39w, 39p
#4 #4 #4 #4
60 60 60 60
600 480 600 480
033 033 033 033
11/4 11/4 11/4 11/4
RPX233 914 S08A CES42 RPX233 914 S09A CES42 RPX233 914 S05N CES42 RPX233 914 S06N CES42
#12 #12 #12 #12 #12 #12
20 20 20 20 20 20
480 480 250 250 250 250
017 017 021 021 033 033
/4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 3 /4 1 11/4
3
RPX217 914 S06A EDSC271 RPX217 914 S06A EDSC371 RPX217 914 S05N EDSC271 RPX217 914 S05N EDSC371 RPX221 914 S08A EDSC271 RPX221 914 S08A EDSC371 RPX221 914 S09N EDSC271 RPX221 914 S09N EDSC371 RPX233 914 S19A CES42 RPX233 914 S17N CES42
1 /4
1
9P
1384
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502

9P
Cable Diameter Range .875 to 1.375 1.375 to 1.625 1.625 to 1.875 .875 to 1.375 1.375 to 1.625 1.625 to 1.875 .875 to 1.375 1.375 to 1.625 1.625 to 1.875 .875 to 1.375 1.375 to 1.625 1.625 to 1.875 .250 to .625 .625 to .875 .250 to .625 .625 to .875 .625 to 1.000 1.000 to 1.187 .625 to 1.000 1.000 to 1.187 .875 to 1.375 1.375 to 1.625 .875 to 1.375 1.375 to 1.625
Cord Connector Cat. # RPX333 163 S08A RPX333 396 S08A RPX333 397 S08A RPX333 163 S09A RPX333 396 S09A RPX333 397 S09A RPX333 163 S05N RPX333 396 S05N RPX333 397 S05N RPX333 163 S06N RPX333 396 S06N RPX333 397 S06N RPX317 160 S06A RPX317 161 S06A RPX317 160 S05N RPX317 161 S05N RPX321 161 S08A RPX321 395 S08A RPX321 161 S09N RPX321 395 S09N RPX333 163 S19A RPX333 396 S19A RPX333 163 S17N RPX333 396 S17N
Plug Cat. # RPX133 153 P08A RPX133 388 P08A RPX133 389 P08A RPX133 153 P09A RPX133 388 P09A RPX133 389 P09A RPX133 153 P05N RPX133 388 P05N RPX133 389 P05N RPX133 153 P06N RPX133 388 P06N RPX133 389 P06N RPX117 150 P06A RPX117 151 P06A RPX117 150 P05N RPX117 151 P05N RPX121 151 P08A RPX121 387 P08A RPX121 151 P09N RPX121 387 P09N RPX133 153 P19A RPX133 388 P19A RPX133 153 P17N RPX133 388 P17N
For alternate polarizations, see page 1361, "Options" section. Solder well terminals provided as standard. Crimp contacts are optionally available, add suffix T to catalog number. Example: RPX217-914-S09AT-EDSC271. For square flanged receptacle without dust cap, change the middle three digits of the catalog number from 914 to 913. Example: RPX217-913-S09A-EDSC271. For plugs and cord connectors: Liquidtight/Conduit Adapter To order with adapter, add letters "LT" to first section of catalog number. Example: RPXLT317-160-S09A. Additional Cable Strain Relief Options Stainless steel wire mesh grip To order, add letter "K" to first section of catalog number. Example: RPXK317160-S09A.
*RPX series are suitable for hazardous areas due to the presence of gasoline or other gases or vapors of equivalent hazard (comparable to N.E.C. Class I, Group D), where construction and test procedures are required to meet applicable sections of MIL-E-5272C and MIL-E-4970A.
9P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1385
9P

RPX "Time-Slot" Delayed Action Connectors
Dimensions
In Inches:
RPX Cord Connector Receptacle CES42*
Cord Connector Receptacle

Shell Type and Size 317 321 333 a 5.033 5.090 6.093 b 4.116 4.173 5.176 c 1.560 2.000 2.625 d 1.812 2.300 3.140
CES42*
Size 11/4 a 51/4 b 51/4 c 311/16 d 43/8 e
7
f 51/4
h dia.
7
j 11/8
k 27/8
/16
/16
RPX Plug
RPX Connectors Square Flanged Receptacle with Dust Cap
Back Boxes
RPX Plug
Shell Type and Size 117 121 133 a b c d 5.033 4.133 1.270 1.921 5.090 4.190 1.675 2.468 6.093 5.193 2.295 3.140
RPX Connectors Square Flanged Receptacle with Dust Cap

Shell Type and Size 217 221 233 a b c d .190 1.375 1.317 1.750 .190 1.750 1.692 2.250 .214 2.375 2.317 2.875
Back Boxes
Cat. # EDSC271 EDSC371 h /8 1
7
l
13 15
/16 /16
Dimension "f"; 0.1875 for #16, #12 and #10 contacts 0.250 for #4 contacts. These dimensions are approximate and vary with cable size. *CES42 takes 60 ampere receptacle housings.
9P
1386
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Portable Power
10P
Description
Portable Power Capabilities Cable Assemblies Posi-Max Power Distribution Panel Power Carts and Speciality Products
Page No.
see page 1388 see pages 13891390 see pages 13911393 see page 1394
10P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1387
10P
Portable Power Capabilities

Total solutions from Cooper Crouse-Hinds to meet the industry's ever-increasing need for safe and reliable temporary power
Virtually all industries today need equipment to provide temporary power, either in the event of an emergency or during standard operations such as maintenance in a factory. Cooper Crouse-Hinds offers turn-key solutions as well as traditional out-of-the box products that effectively meet these needs.
The Cooper Crouse-Hinds Advantage:

Custom turn-key capabilities allow customers to specify and order complete portable power carts and enclosures Increase safety for temporary power needs by eliminating the opportunity of incorrect product being assembled together for temporary power and maintenance turnarounds which can result in injury to on-site personnel and contractors Minimize time for maintenance work, plant turnaround planning, and preparation by having completely assembled, reliable and robust solutions provided directly to site Dedicated staff with a focus on the oil and gas, military, disaster relief, and entertainment industries Engineering support, including AutoCAD and design specifications UL approved assemblies, including suitability for Class I, Division 1 & 2 applications
Classifications and Available Electrical Standards:

NEC Solutions - NEC designs, components, and standards compliance IEC Solutions - IEC designs, components, and standards compliance
Portable Power Solutions Offering:

Pre-assembled cable assemblies Power distribution receptacle panels Power carts and specialty products
Target Markets and Applications:

Petrochemical facilities (land and offshore) Cellular towers and telecommunications Disaster relief Generator / power packs / power distribution center manufacturers Military bases / installations (defense contractors) Government agencies (Department of Homeland Security, etc.) Gas stations / convenience stores / pharmacies Shipyards (new construction and repair) Entertainment Food service / commissaries Manufacturing Surface mining Wind or solar power Backfeeding buildings for super structures; hard-wired outlets fed from generators or power packs and carts; provision of power to engines, conveyor belts, welding equipment, ventilation fans; cable assemblies and wiring harnesses; construction applications; special customized applications for the provision of temporary power
10P
1388
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Custom Cable Assemblies
uL / cUL Listed
10P
Cooper Crouse-Hinds provides the broadest offering of custom cable assembly solutions to be utilized in conjunction with portable power needs. Customers can choose from a variety of connectors, sizes, and lengths. Whether you are looking for NEC configurations such as a Cam-Lok, Posi-Lok, or Arktite, or IEC configurations such as IEC 309 or Ex-Link, Cooper Crouse-Hinds can meet customers' needs. The cable assembly incorporates a custom-made solution utilizing either Cooper Crouse-Hinds branded connectors or any other connector on the market. These units are offered in jumper and tail configurations from 52A to 600A solutions. They can be customized to meet the needs of the customer with UL/cUL listed devices and UL1581 standard cable. Canadian specific cable requirements are also available. Not only will you receive a complete turn-key solution of the best quality, you will also have the reputation of Cooper Crouse-Hinds behind your product.
Features:
Customizable assembly offers a turn-key solution, providing significant cost and time savings Offers a one-stop solution and eliminates contractors assembling on-site Color coded assemblies (available in black, yellow, red, orange, green, white, blue, and brown) provide easy mateability identification and ensure safety Temperature rated cable allows for reliable performance in demanding environments Resistant to oil, solvent, ozone, aging, and abrasion Flame retardant jacket Ranges from 52 amp - 600 amp
Applications:
Heavy Industrial Applications Mining Hazardous locations Facility maintenance Military grade needs Emergency Preparedness / Disaster Relief Hurricane regions Severe weather (ice storms / tornadoes) Data centers Cell towers Pharmacies Banks Retail Water treatment Utilities Gas stations Toll roads Construction Applications Portable generators Welding equipment Heavy tools

UL/cUL listed devices ATEX certified devices UL1581 standard cable Canadian specific cable requirements available MSHA OSHA compliant
10P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1389
10P
Custom Cable Assemblies
uL / cUL Listed
Ordering Information - Cable Assembly Configurator*
10P
* Cooper Crouse-Hinds is able to manufacture multiple combinations of extension and feeder cable assemblies for both NEC and IEC applications. Cable assemblies can be custom designed using a large variety of product series, cable lengths and cable types. Splitter or adapter combinations are also available (Arktite to Cam-Lok, Arktite to IEC, IEC to Mil-spec, Arktite to Mil-spec, etc.) Please consult factory for custom configurations.
1390
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Posi-Max Series Power Distribution Panel
uL / cUL Listed components
10P
Customized solutions for providing temporary power. No other manufacturer has the unique ability to deliver customized portable power solutions quickly and safely in the event of a power outage. Cooper Crouse-Hinds Posi-Max is a power distribution panel that provides a quick and safe method of connection to portable generators. The unique Posi-Max design allows for quick and safe restoration of essential power services. The Posi-Max Series is available in 200A to 1200A and the enclosure can be customized to meet specific environmental and configuration needs. The heart of the system is the field-proven Posi-Lok power distribution system designed to meet Articles 520.53(K) and 530.22(A) of the NEC. The sequential port interlock requires the user to connect and disconnect each plug in the proper sequence ensuring ground connection. This single pole system allows for easy connection in any situation.
Applications:
The Posi-Max Series is used to back feed buildings for quick power restoration in the event of an outage. It is an ideal solution for safe and reliable power restoration for: Banks Cell Towers Data Centers Gas Stations Pharmacies Retail Stores Stadiums, Sports Arenas Toll Roads Utilities Water Treatment Facilities
Posi-Max panel in cold rolled steel with epoxy powder paint
Component Certifications and Compliances:

NEMA 3R, 4*, 4X*, 12 Enclosure UL and cUL listed Posi-Lok panel UL and CSA Listed Posi-Lok and Cam-Lok connector UL and CSA Listed Article compliance: 520.53(K) and 530.22(A) of the NEC

Enclosure: Cold rolled steel - epoxy powder paint Stainless steel - natural Hardware - stainless steel Gasket - neoprene
*NEMA 4, 4X when bottom panel door is closed.

200A - 1200A service Color coded polarity for ease of use Quick access cable entry door Lockout capability for safety and security Available with E1016 Cam-Lok connection for enhanced safety and sequential interlocked capability Available with manual transfer switches Quick restoration of essential services Limit switch options available
10P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1391
10P
uL / cUL Listed
Posi-Max Features:
Quick release latch for a tool-free operation. Padlock hasp provides lockout/tagout compliance
Factory wired to distribution block for ease of installation
Color coded polarity - for easy recognition of mating plug preventing electrical damage to equipment
Posi-Lok Power Distribution System - allows for use of lighter, single conductor cables rated at higher amperages
Foam-in-place gasketed doors for NEMA 3R, 4*, 4X*,12 rating - ideal for wet and inclement weather
Smooth entry integral bushing design allows for safe cable pulling preventing damage to cable installation
NEMA 4, 4X when bottom panel door is closed
Easy access hinged bottom panel allows for quick power up while providing environmental protection while not in use
Sequential port interlock connections require the user to connect or disconnect each plug in sequence for increased (built-in) safety
Custom Capabilities
We can design the Posi-Max unit to meet your exact specications for color, material, and nish.
10P
All the design choices are yours!
1392
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
uL / cUL Listed components
10P
Posi Max Type Example: Options: PM1 PM1 (Wired to distribution block) PM2 (Direct wire; no distribution block) PM3 (With disconnect options) Connection Type Amp EO EO (Posi Lok) CO (Cam Lok) 400 200 Panel Posi / Cam-Lok Color Configuration 1687 1685 (Female GR, WH, BK) 1686NN (Female Non Neutral GR, BK, RD, BU) Limit Switch Enclosure Type Options N3RPS N1PS (NEMA 1 Painted Steel) N3RPS (NEMA 3R Painted Steel) LS5 LS1 (1st Position) LS2 (2nd Position) LS3 (3rd Position) LS4 (4th Position) LS5 (5th Position) LS6 (6th Position) LSAll (All Positions) Disconnect Options (PM3 only) CB CB (Circuit breaker) FDS (Fused disconnect switch) NFDS (Non-fused disconnect switch) CBMTS (Circuit breaker manual transfer switch) FMTS (Fused manual transfer switch) NFMTS (Non-fused manual transfer switch) NFMTS (Non-fused manual transfer switch)
315
400
N3RSS (NEMA 1696 3R Stainless (Female GR, WH, BK, RD) Steel) 1687 (Female GR, WH, BK, RD, BU) 1702* / 1890 (Female GR, WH, BR, ORG, YEL) 1885 (Female GR, WH, WH, BK, RD, BU) 1660 (Male GR, WH, BK) 1661NN (Male Non Neutral GR, BK, RD, BU) 1672 (Male GR, WH, BK, RD) 1662 (Male GR, WH, BK, RD, BU) 1703** / 1891 (Male GR, WH, BR, ORG, YEL) 1860 (Male GR, WH, WH, BK, RD, BU)
600
800
1200
Note: *1702 panel configuration for 315 AMP to 1200 AMP; 1890 panel configuration for 200 AMP. **1703 panel configuration for 315 AMP to 1200 AMP; 1891 panel configuration for 200 AMP. Voltage and AIC rating required. Voltage required. Panel Posi / Cam Lok Configuration Code: - BK: Black - BR: Brown - BU: Blue - GR: Green - ORG: Orange - RD: Red - WH: White - YEL: Yellow
10P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1393
10P
Power Carts and Specialty Portable Power Products
Cooper Crouse Hinds Power Carts and Specialty Portable Power products provide a customized solution that is suitable for all of your portable power needs. The products are designed, engineered, and manufactured by Cooper CrouseHinds experienced and qualified personnel, resulting in the most efficient, reliable and safe customized portable power solutions. Power carts and specialty portable power products can be tailored for industrial, harsh or hazardous applications around the globe to meet NEC, CEC and IEC codes and standards.
Examples of Power Carts and Specialty Portable Power Products:
Job Site Trailer Distribution Rack NEMA 3R, Skid Mounted
Transformer Cart 45 KVA, Skid Mounted
Applications:
Manufacturing Food Service and Processing Utilities Government Mining Marine - Military, Shipyards, Cargo, Commuter Ferries, etc. Rail Transportation Pulp and Paper Entertainment Military
Transformer Cart 30KVA, 480V, 2 Wheels

Minimize time for planning and preparation of plant turnarounds by having customized, reliable and robust solutions provided by a qualified manufacturer Increase safety during maintenance turnarounds by eliminating the use of incorrect or unsafe product that could result in injury to on-site personnel and contractors
Main Breaker Cart 250A, 122/208V, 2 Wheels
Transformer Cart 480V, NEMA 3R, 2 Wheels
10P
Portable Floodlight Class I, Division 2, 2 wheels
Hanging Floodlight Class I, Division 2
1394
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Power Carts and Specialty Portable Power Products
10P
Ordering Information Checklist:

Cooper Crouse-Hinds power carts and specialty portable power solutions are custom-built to meet each customer's exact requirements. Utilize the questions below to consider options available to you and to capture your specific needs. Then contact your local Cooper CrouseHinds Sales Representative and we'll work with you design a custom portable power solution just for you. Classification: What is the classification of the area where this unit is to be used? NEMA 1 NEMA 3 / 3R NEMA 4 / 4X Class I, Division 1 Class I, Division 2 Class II, Division 1 Class II, Division 2 Class I, Zone 1 Class I, Zone 2 IP54 IP66 Voltage: What are the voltage requirements for this application? Phases: Is this a single phase or three phase application? Transformer: Is there a transformer required, and if so, what are the primary and secondary voltage requirements? MCB or Disconnect Switch: Does this unit require circuit protection and/or a disconnect switch on the primary, and if so, what are the electrical rating requirements? Fuse: Must the solution be fused or non-fused? Lifts: Must the solution provide fork blade access, lifting eyes, or casters for this unit? If lifting eyes or casters are required, what size and type? Size: Are there any size constraints that we should be aware of? Distribution Panel: If a distribution panel is utilized on the secondary distribution, what type is preferred? Load Center: Do you want a load center (plug in breakers) or panelboard (bolt on breakers)? Interrupting Requirements: What are the interrupting requirements for this application? 10KAIC, 14KAIC, 22KAIC, or higher? Connection Type: What type of connection do you want on the primary? (Arktite or IEC 309). What types and how many receptacles are required on the secondary of this unit? (50 amp twist lock, 30 amp twist lock, GFIs, etc.) Painting/Markings: Are there any requirements as far as paint or markings? Do you want Safety Yellow or Orange or do you want it painted in your company colors? Do you want to have reflector strips applied on the unit? Do you want to have your company name, logo, and phone number on the unit? Certifications: What listings are required for this unit (UL, ETL, FM, ATEX, etc.)? Lead Time Requirements: Are there any special lead time requirements for this inquiry that we should be aware of?
10P
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1395
10P
10P
1396
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Wireless Solutions and Solar Power Sources

Section W
A platform of smart, enabled products that optimize cost and performance and meet customer needs for information and interoperability.
New Products in the Wireless Solutions and Solar Power Product Line
Wireless Receivers, Transmitters, Transceivers and Gateways Wireless Modems Photovoltaic Module Kits with Battery Back-up Solar Combiner Boxes, Recombiners, and Disconnects
Section
1W 2W 5W 5W
Wireless Solutions and Solar Power Sources

Table of Contents
Section 1W
Input/Output Radios and Gateways
D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 D2 W LT W LR W SIO NW SER W MIO WG
Section 4W
Enclosures for Wireless Devices
EJB GUB FJDS FXDJ
Section 5W
Solar Power Sources
SOL Solar Combiners
Section 2W
Serial and Ethernet Modems
D2 W MDME 900 D2 W MDME 2400
Section 3W
Antennas and Wireless Accessories
Antennas CFD890EL SG900EL SG900 6 D1 NW ANT 1 900 DG900 1 WH900 SMA YU6 900 YU16 900 WH2400 SMA SG2400EL MD2400EL Y2400 18EL Z2400EL CTX 2400 TR Accessories ANT BR YAG KIT ANT BR COL KIT CBLSER DB9 CBLSER RJ45 CC900TAIL CC Series A53649A A10832A CBLETH C5A CBLETH C5X PS 110 20 PS DR Series MA15 Series IOP32 Series CSD 900
W
1398
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Introduction to Wireless Solutions
Providing reliable, secure, industrial wireless systems:

Wireless connectivity from Cooper Crouse-Hinds. If motion, hazards, obstacles, expense, or distance make your wired solutions impractical or impossible, look no further. Cooper Crouse-Hinds can help. Wireless systems are becoming more and more vital to streamlining operations in industrial environments. These systems eliminate the high cost of wiring and free up resources from having to manually collect process information in hazardous environments. In many applications, it is impossible to run wires to plant assets, but wireless systems allow you to transmit information to process monitoring systems so operators can monitor and prevent expensive shutdowns. Wireless systems also allow plant personnel to optimize the use of plant assets, and to coordinate preventative maintenance tasks, materials, and schedules. Wireless systems from Cooper Crouse-Hinds can help.
Types of Wireless Products:

Cooper Crouse-Hinds industrial wireless products provide secure and reliable solutions for a wide range of industries and applications as an alternative for signal and data wiring. The products fall into two groups: Wireless I/O (which includes transceivers, gateways, receivers, and transmitters) and Wireless Modems. All wireless devices are rated and CSA certified for Class I, Division 2 applications when housed in a suitable enclosure for the environment. Wireless I/O: Transceivers connect directly to sensor and control signals and transmit and receive signal values by radio. These units can also be used as a repeater to wirelessly re-transmit signals from other radios to increase distance and avoid obstructions. Gateways perform similarly to transceivers, but can also connect signals to various protocols of databus devices, such as Programmable Logic Controllers (PLCs), Distributed Control Systems (DCS), or Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA). Receivers receive commands from transmitters or transceivers to operate a certain device. These units have three digital outputs and one analog output, and are an economical way of delivering data to a remote location. Transmitters are an economical way of sending a signal from a sensor or control system to monitor or control a process. Two types of transmitters exist: D2 W LT transmits a signal to a transceiver, receiver, or gateway D2 W SIO transmits a signal to a transceiver, receiver, or gateway, but can also better manage power consumption by reverting to sleep mode and operating with a small battery pack. Wireless Networks: Cooper Crouse-Hinds transceivers form networks which optimize wireless density and are configured to ensure a reliable signal. The signals are transmitted by radio and re-created as output signals, or output to control systems.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1399
Wireless System Architecture
Cooper Crouse-Hinds' innovative WIB-net communications protocol is specifically designed for highly reliable and secure operation on open license-free radio bands. Cooper Crouse-Hinds wireless units form a WIB network Wireless Information Backbone. A WIB is an effective plant-wide wireless information network for transferring data and connecting signals and databuses in a highly efficient exceptionreporting, peer-to-peer network. WIB-net provides the following features: Exception-reporting, or change-of-state transmissions, reduces needless radio messaging, preserving bandwidth for eventdriven/significant monitoring/control messaging. I/O points have configurable integrity checking to monitor the radio link for reliability. The combination of event-driven communications and integrity checking of the radio path mitigates radio congestion, while ensuring the radio link is maintained.
Wireless mesh structure. WIB-net enables every Cooper Crouse-Hinds wireless gateway/transceiver to act as a repeater to optimize wireless message propagation. Messages can hop through multiple gateway/transceiver units to reach a destination. Providing these units have a reliable wireless link to at least one other gateway/transceiver, a wireless mesh can be configured to ensure reliable links to the whole network.
Error-checking with automatic re-transmission for high reliability operation. Every radio message has a probability of corruption. Therefore, automatic error detection, acknowledgement, and retransmission is critical to reliable operation. WIB-net will send and then re-transmit up to five times. After the fifth attempt, a communication failure status is logged and an alarm set externally. Listen-before transmit wireless operation to maximize the chance of successful message transmission. Peer-to-peer networking, giving the maximum network flexibility. Each Cooper Crouse-Hinds wireless gateway and transceiver unit can transmit/receive directly to/from any other wireless gateway and transceiver, and can transmit/receive to/from multiple wireless units. There are no master units and no slaves. Any module in a network can talk to any other. Input signals can be transmitted to multiple destinations. High security encryption. WIB-net uses a highly secure data encryption technique to protect against misuse of wireless data. The level of security of Cooper Crouse-Hinds wireless networks is at an equivalent or higher level than wired networks.
W
1400
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Wireless System Architecture
Input/Output Mapping:
Process signals or sensors convey the value of an input value to a designated output channel: System address (15-bit, 1 32768) Source module address (1 127) Destination module address (1 127) Repeater addresses (up to 5 addresses) Output channel number I/O signal value (16-bit) CRC error-checking (16-bit) All modules in the same system share a unique system address to avoid cross-talk between systems in the same radio environment. The configuration software automatically generates a random system address for each system. Destination or repeater modules automatically acknowledge messages when received with a correct error-check value, except for messages from transmit-only units. If an acknowledgement is not received within 500 milliseconds, the message is re-transmitted. The message will be transmitted up to five times with random re-try times. After the fifth attempt, a comms-fail event will be set, which can be used to trigger an output alarm or register.
Message Control:
The WIB-net protocol is based on exception-reporting for optimum performance. Messages can be triggered by any of the following: Exception change in input value compared to user-configurable sensitivity values Update time user-configurable time period since the last message, individually configured for each I/O register Real time block mappings only; messages transmitted on realtime values On demand block mappings only; poll command from another wireless unit or by a write command by a connected databus device Before a message is transmitted, the radio channel is checked to ensure it is clear (listen-before-transmit). The message is preceded by a lead-in transmission; the length depends on the radio model to allow all other units to lock onto the transmitted message.
Security Encryption:
Security encryption of wireless messages is user-selectable. A 64-bit secure proprietary encryption algorithm is used. The 64-bit key is randomly generated by the configuration software and is never disclosed to the user or transmitted by radio. Configuration files are protected by password, up to 256 characters.
Block Messages:
Block messages are similar to other transmissions. However, signal information is condensed into blocks and these blocks are sent at programmed intervals. Each block message contains up to 64 x 16 bits of values. Block messages are only transmitted or repeated by the wireless gateway product range (D2 W G). Discrete/digital values can be packed (i.e. up to 1024 (64 x 16) digital values can be packed into a block message and unpacked at the destination gateway). Block messaging creates a more robust, reliable, and efficient system by reducing the chance that messages will become corrupt and by minimizing radio frequency congestion.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1401
W
1402
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Class I Hazardous Input/Output Devices and Gateways
1W
Description
Unidirectional Transmitter/Receiver Unit Single Sensor Transmitter Serial Unit Transceiver Wireless Gateway
Page No.
see pages 14041407 see pages 14081410 see page 1414 see pages 14111413 see pages 14161419
1W
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1403
1W
Unidirectional Transmitter / Receiver Units
Cl. I, Div. 2 CSA Certified
D2 W LT (transmitter) D2 W LR (receiver)
The unidirectional wireless range of products is suitable for connecting to a single sensor or group of sensors and provides an economical solution for remote monitoring systems. The unidirectional products can also be used in more complex networks with other Cooper Crouse-Hinds radios.
Transmitter Unit:
Input-only transmitter unit, two digital/pulse inputs, one analog input, and one thermocouple mV input
Note: Antenna sold separately.
Transmits to receiver unit as a matched pair where the input signals are re-created as output signals or can transmit to a transceiver or gateway unit
Applications:
Wireless connection of flowmeters or energy meters Monitoring of storage tanks Monitoring cathodic protection on pipelines Wireless alarms from power reticulation fault-relays
Up to 3000 wireless transmitters can be used in a network (255 inputs can be linked to any radio unit address) External inputs plus internally calculated values, including analog set-point status, pulse count, power supply voltage Thermocouple input -10 to +100mV with cold-junction compensation and linearization for J, K, or T-type Set-point status generated by comparing analog input to high and low set-points Digital inputs can also be used as pulse count inputs Power supply 9 30VDC, with power supply monitoring function 24VDC 30mA analog loop supply internally provided RS232 configuration and diagnostics port RS232 - RJ45 cable required for set-up (catalog number: CBLSER RJ45)
Features:
Up to 5 intermediate transceiver or gateway units can be configured as repeaters to link inputs and outputs between transmitters and receivers Can be ordered as a matched transmitter/receiver pair with choice of two antenna (included) User-configurable with wireless I/O configuration program

Class I, Division 2 hazardous areas approved (CSA certified to U.S. and Canadian standards)
1W
1404
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1W
Receiver Unit:
Output-only receiver unit, three digital contact outputs, and one analog output Receives radio commands from transmitter unit as a matched pair where the input signals are re-created as output signals, or can receive commands from a transceiver or gateway unit Up to 3000 wireless receivers can be used in a network (255 inputs can be linked to any radio unit address) Power supply 9 30VDC; 24VDC Communications failure indication and configurable output Outputs can be configured as retained or reset (fail-safe) on communications failure LED indication of radio signal strength RS232 configuration and diagnostics port RS232 - RJ45 cable required for set-up (catalog number: CBLSER RJ45)
Cat. # D2 W LT 900 D2 W LR 900 D2 WL P1 900 D2 WL P2 900 Description Wireless Transmitter (900 MHz) (Antenna sold separately) Wireless Receiver (900 MHz) (Antenna sold separately) Wireless Transmitter / Receiver Pair with DG900 1 Whip Antenna (900 MHz) Wireless Transmitter / Receiver Pair with CFD890EL Dipole Antenna (900 MHz)
1W
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1405
1W
Dimensions:
Transmitter Inputs:
Input Type Digital Pulse Total Analog Thermocouple Set-point Supply Voltage Source external external external external internal internal Function status count analog analog status analog
Input values transmitted as per WIB-net protocol - exceptionreporting on signal change, and update time.
Digital / Pulse Inputs:

Two inputs, suitable for voltage-free contacts / NPN, or voltage input 0-1 VDC on / >3 VDC off pulse input max. rate 10 Hz, 50 msec on time. Pulse counted as 16-bit register.
Frequency: frequency hopping spread spectrum 902-928 MHz, sub-bands available, 1W Sensitivity: line-of-sight range 20 miles (4W ERP - effective radiated power), 15 km (1W ERP); 3000 / 1000 m in obstructed industrial environments; radio distances can be increased by up to 5 intermediate transceiver or gateway units used as repeaters Antenna Connector: SMA female coaxial connector Temperature: -40 to 60C / -40 to 140F Humidity: 0 - 99% RH Regulatory Approvals: EMC compliant 89/336 EEC, EN 301 489, AS3548, FCC Part 15, Approved to FCC Part 15.247, RS210 Housing: DIN rail thermo-plastic enclosure 3.9"x 0.9 x 4.7" (100 x 22 x 120 mm) Transmitter Unit: Power/OK, radio TX, DIN1, DIN2, analog setpoint status Receiver Unit: Power/OK, radio RX, DO1, DO2, DO3, communications fail LEDs also used to provide radio signal strength indication Transmission Rate: 19.2 Kb/s (transmitter and receiver)
Analog Inputs:
0-20 mA (4-20mA, 0-10mA) Floating differential input, resolution 16-bit, accuracy < 0.1%
Thermocouple Inputs:
Millivolt (-10mV to +100mV), J, K, or T-type linearization with onboard cold-junction compensation Accuracy better than 1C
Power Supply:
Normal Supply: 9 - 30VDC, power consumption Transmitter normal 70mA, transmitting max. 600mA at 12VDC Analog loop supply internally generated, 24VDC 35mA Internal monitoring of supply voltage may be transmitted as an input (transmitter unit only)
1W
1406
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1W
Set-point Status:
High and low set-points generate internal digital status - set-point status sets (on) when analog value < low set-point and resets (off) when analog value > high set-point. Status is transmitted as per digital input, set-point values are set via the front panel rotary switch or configuration software. Separate set-points for analog (4-20 mA), thermocouple and supply inputs are configurable.
Configuration and Diagnostics:

Factory configuration transmitter/receiver matched pair, AI to AO, 2DI to 2DO, SP status to DO3 via RS232 - RJ45 cable. User configuration via serial port. Unidirectional units can be configured to network with multi-I/O and gateway units. Diagnostics features: read input values, write output values, radio signal strength, monitor communication messages.
Receiver Outputs:
Digital Outputs:
Three relay contact outputs, 260VAC 1A or 50VDC 1A
Analog Outputs:
0-20mA, source output, 12-bit resolution, 0.1% accuracy
Communication Failure:
Internal status based on configurable time-out value Comms-fail status can be configured to a local output
Fail-Safe:
On comms-fail, outputs user-configurable as retained last correct value or reset (fail-safe)
Serial Port:
RS232 RJ45 female DCE (Data Communications Equipment), used for configuration and diagnostics
LED Indication:
Transmitter Unit:
Power/OK, radio TX, DIN1, DIN2, analog set-point status
Receiver Unit:
Power/OK, radio RX, DO1, DO2, DO3, communications fail LEDs also used to provide radio signal strength indication
1W
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1407
1W
Single Sensor Transmitters
Cl. I, Div. 2 IP66 Rating
D2 W SIO
D2 W SIO wireless modules are economical solutions for monitoring remote process signals and are housed in a weatherproof (IP66) enclosure. They connect to discrete, pulse, or analog signals from process transducers, and transmit these signal values by radio. Capable of being powered by battery-only supplies, these products are particularly suitable where power is not available.
Applications:
Wireless connection of flowmeters or energy meters Monitoring of storage tanks Monitoring cathodic protection on pipelines Wireless alarms from power reticulation fault-relays
Features:
Input-only transmitter unit, two digital/pulse inputs and one analog input Networks with multi-I/O, gateway, and receiver radios Sensor signals, inputs are transmitted to a transceiver module where the signals are re-created as output signals or passed by a gateway device to a host device such as a PLC or SCADA system Extremely low power consumption by reverting to sleep mode, allowing unit to be powered by line voltage or the battery pack. Multiple power supply options including battery-only supply Up to 3000 wireless units per network Inputs on any D2 W SIO can be wirelessly linked to an output on any unit capable of receiving a signal. Inputs can be linked to multiple outputs. Up to 5 intermediate transceiver or gateway units can be configured to link SIO inputs to outputs on other units Interfaces to a variety of industrial protocols (i.e. Modbus RTU, EtherNet/IP) via the gateway device I/O available for transmission: external inputs plus internally calculated values, analog set-point status, pulse rate and pulse total, power supply voltage, and power supply alarm Set-point status generated by comparing analog input to high and low set-points Antenna sold separately Pulse inputs generate a separate pulse count value and a pulse rate value. Pulse rates are treated as internal analog registers with a configurable maximum value. Power supply generates internal signal which can be transmitted as low normal supply voltage status, low battery voltage status, and battery voltage (analog) Can connect to up/down counter transducers such as shaftencoders Easily configured to repeat the transmission up to four additional times after the initial transmission to ensure that the transmission is received correctly Easy-to-use Cooper Crouse-Hinds wireless I/O software

Class I, Division 2 hazardous areas approved (CSA certified to U.S. and Canadian standards) Weatherproof (IP66) enclosures
Cat. # D2 W SIO 900 Description Wireless Transmitter (900 MHz) (Antenna sold separately)
1W
1408
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1W
The D2 NW BAT 2 is a battery pack for the D2 W SIO wireless device. The battery pack is used in applications where power lines are either not installed or not allowed.
Applications:
Used to power D2 W SIO units atop of water tanks for monitoring fluid level Used to power D2 W SIO units to monitor pipeline cathodes Used where line power is not available Ideal for safety showers and other applications requiring IP66 protection
Features:
9V, 6 AA alkaline batteries Housed in a weatherproof (IP66) enclosure

Class I, Division 2
Specifications:
Expected Life: up to 1 year, depending on usage and power settings (D2 W SIO will indicate low battery status)
Cat. # D2 NW BAT 2 Description Battery Pack for D2 W SIO
1W
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1409
1W
Dimensions:
Inputs and Outputs:

Input Type Digital Pulse Total Pulse Rate (D2 W SIO only) Analog Set-point Supply Voltage (D2 W SIO only) Supply Low Voltage (D2 W SIO) Source external external internal external internal internal internal Function status count analog analog status analog status
Digital Inputs:
Two inputs, suitable for voltage-free contacts / NPN, or voltage input 0-1VDC on / >3 VDC off Status transmission on change of input signal and on time elapsed since last transmission - update time period 10 sec. - 5 days, a separate update time can be configured when the discrete input is on
Pulse Inputs:
Pulse input max. rate 100 Hz, 3 msec on time (1000 Hz available using a 1/ 10 divider). Pulse counted as 16-bit register with a 16-bit overflow register (total count 32-bit). Transmissions occur when count change exceeds configured increase or on time elapsed since last transmission. Update time 10 sec. - 5 days. Change-ofstate transmissions may be suspended if increase exceeds a configured value to reduce radio traffic. Up/Down Pulse Count: the two pulse inputs may be configured to a single count to suit quadrature or incremental shaft encoder transducers Pulse Rate: calculated from rate of pulse input and treated as an internal analog input. Configurable scaling. Transmitted as per analog input.
Analog Inputs:
Frequency: frequency hopping spread spectrum 902-928 MHz, sub-bands available Power: 1W Max. Range (line-of-sight): 20 miles (4 ERP), 15 km (1 ERP); 3000 / 1000 m in obstructed industrial environments Antenna Connector: SMA female coaxial connector Temperature: -40 to 60C / -40 to 140F Humidity: 0-99% RH Regulatory Approvals: approved to FCC Part 15.247, RS210; EMC compliant 89/336 EEC, EN 300 683, AS3548, FCC Part 15 Housing: weatherproof (IP66) painted aluminum enclosure 6.7" x 2.5" x 1.4" (170 x 64 x 36 mm); weatherproof connector for external connections Transmission Rate: 19.2 Kb/s (radio) Each transmission may be configured to be sent 1 to 5 times LED indicators - radio TX, operation OK High and low set-points generate internal digital status. Set-point status sets (on) when analog value < low set-point and resets (off) when analog value > high set-point status transmitted as per digital input.
0-25 mA (4-20mA, 0-10mA) available, 0-10V also available floating differential input, resolution 12-bit, accuracy < 0.1% measurement continuous or sampled, sample time configurable 0 - 9.1 hours, transducer warm-up time configurable 0.5 - 127 sec. Analog value transmitted on change of input signal or time elapsed since last transmission, change sensitivity configurable from 0.7 75%, update time configurable from 0.1 min. - 5 days
Power Supply:
Battery Supply: D2 NW BAT battery pack, 6 x AA batteries, 9VDC Normal Supply: 6-30VDC, power consumption @12VDC quiescent (sleep mode) 140A, operating mode 300mA @ 1W during transmission (35 msec.) Analog loop supply internally generated (50mA at 24VDC) Internal monitoring of supply low voltage status may be transmitted to remote modules as an input Power consumption increases for pulse inputs > 10 Hz
Set-point Status:
High and low set-points generate internal digital status. Set-point status sets (on) when analog value < low set-point and resets (off) when analog value > high set-point. Status transmitted as per digital input.
1W
Serial Port:
RS232 DB9 female DCE used for configuration and diagnostics 1410
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Transceivers
1W
D2 W MIO
A transceiver is a wireless device made up of a transmitter and receiver. Since each module can manage both input and output signals, it can be used to monitor transducers and control industrial processes. This module can also be used as a repeater to relay another wireless devices transmission, thus increasing the overall range of the system.
Features:
Multiple inputs/output channels for monitoring and control functions
Applications:
Wireless junction box in a process plant to connect a large number of signals to other parts of the plant and to the plant control center Simple Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) in a SCADA system, connecting sensors/instrumentation/process signals in pump stations, sub-stations, pipeline regulator stations, etc. Machine-2-Machine wireless connectivity in factories
Up to 95 wireless units per network Each wireless unit can connect to input/output expansion modules via RS485 multi-drop with up to 10 expansion modules per wireless unit Sensor signals connected at one module; input signals are transmitted to another module where the signals are re-created as output signals or passed via serial to a host device such as a PLC or SCADA system Short distance and long distance applications with license-free and licensed products Multi-hop repeater functions up to 5 intermediate units can be configured in any input/output link Four versions available Any input on any unit can be wirelessly linked to any output on another unit. Inputs can be linked to multiple outputs. Inputs and outputs can be added via additional serial units The units can be pre-programmed to consider analog set-points, pulse rate and pulse total, power supply voltage, power supply alarm Set-point status generated by comparing analog inputs to high and low set-points. Available on AI1 of -1 units, and AI1-4 of -2 units. Pulse inputs generate a separate pulse count value and a pulse rate value. Pulse rates are treated as internal analog registers with a configurable maximum value. Wide voltage power supply, with integral UPS battery charger (to 12 AHr) and solar regulator Power supply generates internal signal values which can be transmitted, low normal supply voltage status, low battery voltage status, and battery voltage (analog) Multiple communication failure diagnostics with output status. Fail-to-transmit alarm and fail-to-receive alarm status. Radio receives signal and background RF noise measurement / logging diagnostics Input measurement display and output forcing diagnostics Communication logging diagnostics Easy-to-use Cooper Crouse-Hinds wireless I/O configuration software Antenna sold separately
1W
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1411
1W
Transceivers

Cat. # D2 W MIO 1 900 Description Wireless Transceiver, Multiple Inputs & Outputs Wireless Transceiver, Multiple Inputs & Outputs Wireless Transceiver, Multiple Inputs & Outputs Wireless Transceiver, Multiple Inputs & Outputs Digital Inputs 4 voltage-free contacts 4 voltage-free contacts 0 voltage-free contacts 4-16 voltage-free contacts Digital Outputs 4 relaycontacts (5A @ 50VAC output) 1 field effect transistor* 8 field effect transistors* 4-16 field effect transistors* Analog Inputs 2 4-20mA 6 0-20mA 0 Analog Outputs 2 4-20mA 0 Pulse Inputs 1 100 Hz 4 1 x 1 KHz, 3 x 100 Hz 0 4 1 x 1 KHz, 3 x 100 Hz Pulse Outputs 1 100 Hz 0 100 Hz 4 100 Hz 4 100 Hz
D2 W MIO 2 900
D2 W MIO 3 900
8 0-20mA 0
D2 W MIO 4 900
*Transistor outputs .5a (500 milliamp) @ 30VDC. Note: Pulse and digital I/O are the same connection. The D2 W MIO-4 has 4 fixed inputs and 4 fixed outputs and a further 12 which may be configured as input or output combinations.
1W
1412
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Transceivers
1W
Dimensions:
Inputs and Outputs:

Digital Inputs:
Opto-isolated (5000V) inputs suitable for voltage-free contacts or NPN transistor, contact wetting current 5mA Type-1 & -2 - four inputs Type-4 - up to 16 inputs (4 inputs + 12 selectable I/O). The 12 selectable inputs are surge protected, but not isolated.
Digital Outputs:
Type-1 - four relay, contacts, Form A, AC 50V 5A / DC 30V 2A Type-2 - 1 FET output 30VDC 500mA Type-3 - 8 FET output 30VDC 500mA Type-4 - up to 16 FET output (4 outputs + 12 selectable I/O)
Analog Inputs:
Floating differential inputs, common mode voltage 27V. 24VDC for powering external loops provided. Digital filtering 1 sec. Type-1 - two 4-20mA resolution 15-bit, accuracy 0.1% (over range indication 2-25mA) Type-2 - six 0-20mA resolution 12-bit, accuracy 0.1% (over range indication 0-25mA)
Analog Outputs:
Current sink to common, max. loop voltage 27V, max. loop resistance 1000 ohms Type-1 - two 4-20mA resolution 15-bit, accuracy 0.1% (over range indication 0.5-25mA) Type-3 - eight 0-20mA resolution 12-bit, accuracy 0.1% (over range indication 0-20.5mA)
Pulse Inputs:
Frequency: frequency hopping spread spectrum 902-908 MHz, sub-bands configurable Power: transmit power 1W, approved to FCC Part 15.247, RSS210 Sensitivity: receiver data sensitivity: -108dBm Max. Range (line-of-sight): USA/Canada - 4W ERP, 20+ miles; other countries - 1W ERP, 15+ km depending on local conditions Transmission Rate: 19.2 Kb/s with forward-error correction Antenna Connector: SMA female coaxial connector Temperature: -40 to 60C / -40 to 140F Humidity: 0-99% RH Regulatory Approvals: EMC FCC Part 15, AS3548, 89/336/EEC, EN 301 489 Housing: extruded aluminum case, 5.1" x 7.3" x 2.4" (130 x 185 x 60 mm) with DIN rail mounting Removable terminals up to 2.5 sqmm (12 gauge) wires LED indication for power supply, module status, digital I/O
Specifications as per digital inputs, max. pulse rate 100Hz, pulse width min. 5 ms Type-1 - one input (DI1) Type-2 - four inputs (DI1-4) - first pulse input (DI1) max. 1000 Hz, pulse width min. 0.5 ms Type-4 - four inputs (DI1-4) - first pulse input (DI1) max. 1000 Hz, pulse width min. 0.5 ms
Pulse Outputs:
FET 30VDC 500mA max. 100 Hz Type-1 - one Type-3 & -4 - four
Power Supply:
Battery Supply: 11.5-15.0VDC Normal Supply: 12-24VAC or 15-30VDC, over-voltage and reverse power protected Internal monitoring of power fail, solar charge status, and battery voltage. These values may be transmitted to remote modules for monitoring. Internal DC/DC converter provides 24VDC 150mA for analog loop supply Battery charging circuit included for 1.2-12 AHr sealed battery Solar regulator for direct connection of solar panel (up to 30W) and solar battery (100 AHr)
Serial Port:
A serial port can be used to configure transceivers and to hardwire one transceiver to another when desired. This connection avoids the need to add wireless nodes to circumvent impenetrable obstructions, and provides a redundant path for critical applications. RS232/RS485 serial port 9600 baud, 8 bits, no parity, 1 stop bit RS232 9 pin DB9 female connector RS485 terminal connections (max. cable distance 2000 m)
1W
1413
1W
Serial Units
D2 NW SER
The D2 NW SER is a wired device capable of interfacing with other Cooper CrouseHinds wireless radios to increase the number of signals radios can monitor/control. They can also be used as a slave to any Modbus control system.
Applications:
Expansion I/O for D2 W MIO wireless units - up to 10 x D2 NW SER units can be connected to each wireless unit via RS485 Serial unit multiplexer, signal transfer via RS485 - up to 10 units per multi-drop link Expansion I/O for Modbus devices - up to 99 x D2 NW SER units can be connected to each Modbus master via RS485
RS485 multi-drop up to 2 km (1 mile) depending on installation environment Three versions available Set-point status generated by comparing analog inputs to high and low set-points RS485 cable required; serial units are powered by radios via cable (not provided) Analog inputs selectable as floating dual-terminal inputs or commoned single-terminal inputs. Configurable current (0-10 / 0-20 / 4-20mA) or voltage (0-5 / 0-10 / 1-5V). Configurable scaling, zero and span parameters. Analog outputs selectable as single-terminal source or sink outputs. Configurable current (0-10 / 0-20 / 4-20mA) or voltage (0-5 / 0-10 / 1-5V). Pulse inputs generate separate pulse count value and a pulse rate value. Pulse rates are treated as internal analog registers with a configurable maximum value. Multiple communication failure diagnostics with output status Input measurement display and output forcing diagnostics Easy-to-use Cooper Crouse-Hinds wireless I/O configuration tool
Features:
Connected via RS485 multi-drop Selectable communications via WIB-net or Modbus protocol (both RTU and ASCII formats) Sensor signals connected at one module; input signals are transmitted to another module where the signals are re-created as output signals to a host device such as a PLC or SCADA system Connect to D2 W MIO wireless units for I/O expansion - up to 10 serial addresses per wireless unit, with a twisted pair cable Connect D2 NW SER units together to form a serial multi-drop system - up to 10 serial addresses per multi-drop link; no master device is required to control communications Connect up to 99 x D2 NW SER units as multi-drop Modbus I/O. RS485 extenders/isolators required for more than 10 units per single multi-drop length.

Cat. # D2 NW SER 11* D2 NW SER 12* Description Non-wireless Serial Unit Non-wireless Serial Unit Non-wireless Serial Unit Digital Inputs up to 16 up to 8 voltagefree contacts up to 8 Digital Outputs up to 16 up to 8 field effect transistors up to 8 Analog Inputs 0 4 floating/8 commoned 0-20mA/0-10V 0 Analog Outputs 0 0 8 sink/source 0-20mA /0-10V Pulse Inputs 4 1 KHz 0 0 Pulse Outputs 8 100 Hz 8 100 Hz 8 100 Hz
1W
D2 NW SER 13*
*Cannot be used with D2 W GMD 900. Note: Digital inputs and outputs are combined channels. When a channel is used as an output, it is not available as an input. Pulse and digital I/O are same connection.
1414
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Serial Units
1W
Dimensions:
Temperature: -40 to 60C / -40 to 140F Humidity: 0-99% RH Regulatory Approvals: EMC FCC Part 15, AS3548, 89/336/EEC Housing: high density thermo-plastic, 5.91 x 7.09 x 1.38 (150 x 180 x 35 mm) with DIN rail mounting Removable terminals up to 12 gauge (2.5 sqmm) wires LED indication for power supply, processor OK, serial TX and RX, digital I/O
Inputs and Outputs:

Digital Inputs:
Suitable for voltage-free contacts or NPN transistor, contact wetting current 5mA, inputs are surge protected Type -11 - up to 16 selectable I/O Type -12, -13 - up to 8 selectable I/O
Digital Outputs:
Field Effect Transistor (FET) outputs, 30VDC 200mA Type -11 - up to 16 selectable I/O Type -12, -13 - up to 8 selectable I/O
Analog Inputs:
Floating differential inputs, common mode voltage 27V, 24VDC for powering external loops provided, 0-20mA/0-10V, resolution 12-bit, accuracy 0.1% Type-12 - 8 input channels, selectable as 4 dual-terminal floating inputs or 8 single-terminal commoned inputs
Analog Outputs:
Selectable as current/voltage source or current sink to common, max. loop voltage 27V, max. loop resistance 1000 ohms, 0-20mA/0-10V, 12-bit, accuracy 0.1% Type -13 - 8 channels
Pulse Inputs:
Specifications as per digital inputs, max. pulse rate 1kHz, pulse width min. 0.5 ms Type -11 - 4 inputs (DIO1-4)
Pulse Outputs:
Specifications as per digital outputs, max. pulse rate 100 Hz, pulse width min. 5ms Type -11,-12,-13 - 8 outputs (DIO1-8)
Power Supply:
Battery Supply: 9 - 30VDC, over-voltage and reverse power protected Internal monitoring of supply voltage. These values may be transmitted to remote modules for monitoring. Internal DC/DC converter provides 24VDC 250mA for analog loop supply
Serial Port:
RS485 serial port configurable up to 115.2 Kb/s, 7 or 8 data bits, none/even/odd parity, 1 or 2 stop bits RS232 configuration port 9 pin DB9 female connector, 9.6 Kb/s, 8/n/1 RS485 max. cable distance 2000 m terminal connections
1W
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1415
1W
Wireless Gateways
D2 W G
Wireless gateways interface between other Cooper Crouse-Hinds wireless devices and control systems (such as PLCs, DCS, and SCADA). In addition to channeling the wireless network data into one central control system, they can also act as an eight input/output transceiver.
Wireless gateways connect to popular process control and automation databuses, and convert signal information to Cooper Crouse-Hinds proven WIB-net wireless protocol.
Main benefits:
Wireless extension of factory automation, providing a high security firewall. The wireless gateway connects to a databus and transfers I/O values to another wireless gateway unit via WIB-net communications. The other gateway interfaces to its own databus. Multiple gateway units can communicate in a WIB peer-to-peer network. There is an efficient wireless protocol conversion in the modules enabling an efficient transfer of data to Modbus, Profibus (Slave or Master), EtherNet/IP, DF1, DeviceNet, and/or Modbus Plus Interface between PLCs, DCS, HMI, or SCADA and Cooper Crouse-Hinds wireless units. The wireless gateway keeps an image of the remote wireless network in its memory and interfaces this image to the databus.
Applications:
Wirelessly connect PLCs on a new machine to an existing factory automation system Interface different automation systems in different sections of a plant Connect protocol devices into a common wireless network Cooper Crouse-Hinds wireless units are used to wirelessly transmit signals for PLCs or DCS Network wireless units and gateways to connect sensor signals and control systems
1W
1416
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Wireless Gateways
1W
Features:
Connects to databus at full bus speed Can interconnect master-slave, slave-slave and master-master Provides a peer-to-peer wireless network using WIB-net High security data encryption Automatic acknowledgment and error-correction Multiple path routing by configuration Eight on-board discrete I/O, individually configurable as input or output Network configuration is performed with easy-to-use free software Wide range power supply with integral back-up battery-charging feature Antenna sold separately

Cat. # D2 W GMD 900 D2 W GPR1 900 D2 W GPR2 900 D2 W GET1 900 D2 W GDET1 900 D2 W GM1 900
Cannot be used with D2 NW SER Series. *Antenna sold separately.
Description Wireless Gateway - Modbus RTU, DF1 (900 MHz)* Wireless Gateway - Profibus Slave (900 MHz)* Wireless Gateway - Profibus Master (900 MHz)* Wireless Gateway - Allen-Bradley EtherNet/IP, Modbus TCP, TCP/IP Functions (900 MHz)* Wireless Gateway - DeviceNet Slave (900 MHz)* Wireless Gateway - Modbus Plus (900 MHz)*
1W
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1417
1W
Wireless Gateways
Dimensions:
Frequency: frequency hopping spread spectrum 902-928 MHz, sub-bands configurable Power: transmit power 1W, approved to FCC Part 15.247, RSS210 Sensitivity: receiver data sensitivity: -108dBm Max. Range (line-of-sight): USA/Canada, 4W ERP 20+ miles; other countries, 1W ERP, 15+ km depending on local conditions Data Rate: 19.2 Kb/s with forward-error correction Antenna Connector: SMA female coaxial connector Temperature: -40 to 60C / -40 to 140F (Modbus/DF1 version); 0 to 60C / 30 to 140F (Profibus, Ethernet, DeviceNet, and Modbus Plus versions) Humidity: 0 - 99% RH (Modbus/DF1 version); 0 - 95% RH (Profibus, Ethernet, DeviceNet, and Modbus Plus versions) Regulatory Approvals: EMC Compliant EN 301 489, FCC Part 15 Housing: extruded aluminum case 5.1" x 7.3" x 2.4" (130 x 185 x 60 mm), DIN rail mounting, removable terminal blocks for ease of module replacement, terminals suitable for 12 gauge (2.5 sqmm) wire Transmission Rate: 19.2 Kb/s (radio) LED indication for processor OK, radio TX and RX, serial TX and RX, active status Wireless Communications: Radio communications can be configured for combination of event-reporting (change-of-state), update time, read/write blocks, and poll response. Radio message includes system addressing, unit addressing, error-checking, and configurable security encryption. Communication control includes message acknowledgments and up to four re-transmissions. Peer-to-peer addressing. Messages may be routed through five intermediate repeater addresses. Fail-to-transmit and fail-to-receive alarms are configurable
1W
1418
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Wireless Gateways
1W
Inputs and Outputs:

Eight discrete I/O, individually configurable as input or output. Inputs suitable for voltage-free contacts. Outputs are FET, 30VDC 500mA.
Serial Port:
Modbus: Modbus RTU (binary), master / slave configurable; RS232 or RS485, 300 - 19200 bit/sec. DF1: Allen Bradley DF1 full duplex; RS232 only, 300 - 19200 bit/sec. Profibus: Profibus-DP functionality according to EN 50170; RS485 optically isolated with on-board DC/DC converter, automatic baud rate detection (9600 bit/s. - 12 Mbit/s.) Ethernet: 10/ 100 Mbit/s., RJ45 connector, transformer isolated interface; Modbus/TCP class 0, class 1, and partially class 2 slave; EtherNet/IP level 2 I/O server; embedded web system (dynamic HTTP), on-board file system via a 1.4 MB flash disc, user downloadable web pages through FTP server, e-mail functionality (SMTP) DeviceNet: DeviceNet 2.0 Slave, optically isolated RS422 with selectable baud rate between 125, 250, and 500 Kbit/sec. Modbus Plus: Modbus Plus Slave, optically isolated RS485 with standard baud rate of 1 Mbit/sec., global database transactions with routing for up to six networks
Power Supply:
Battery Supply: battery charging circuit included for 12V back-up battery, max. charge current regulated to 0.7A (>12V supply) Normal Supply: 9 - 30VDC / 12 - 24VAC Normal Current Drain: 12V 150mA; 24V 90mA (MD1 version); 12V 270mA; 24V 170mA (other versions); add 5mA per active I/O For current drain during radio transmission, add to above: 12V 350mA; 24V 200mA
I/O Capability:
Modbus/DF1: 4300 I/O points (analog plus discrete) Profibus Master, Ethernet, Modbus Plus: 2048 bytes input and 2048 bytes output up to 4300 discrete I/O points, or up to 1024 analog in / 1024 analog out Profibus Slave: 416 I/O bytes up to 1952 DI / 1952 DO, or up to 122 AI / 122 AO DeviceNet: 512 bytes input and 512 bytes output up to 4300 discrete I/O points, or up to 256 analog in / 256 analog out

Diagnostics include online read/write of I/O registers, radio signal strength values from remote units, and off-line testing of databus protocol
1W
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1419
1W
1W
1420
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Serial and Ethernet Modems
2W
Description
Wireless Ethernet Modem 900 Series Wireless Ethernet Modem 2400 Series
Page No. see page 1424 see page 1426
2W
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1421
2W
Wireless Modems
Introduction to Wireless Modems
Modem Overview:
Wireless modems transmit serial or Ethernet data, for connecting PLC to PLC, linking SCADA to a group of PLCs, or to form a wireless PLC LAN. These modems provide a transparent data transfer and offer encrypted AES wireless transmissions via an embedded firewall. Modems are well suited for industrial or remote environments, and are easily configured. Modems also have the ability to send or receive multiple combinations of input or output signals using any of the D2 NW SER units, and do not wirelessly communicate with the remainder of the I/O line of products. Each Ethernet modem is configured as: 1) an Access Point or a Client; and 2) a Bridge or a Router. The Wireless Access Point (WAP) acts as the master device, and can connect to a wireless network using Wi-Fi and communicate with multiple clients. Modems are available at two different frequencies and various transmitting power capabilities. The D2 W MDME 900 (900 MHz Ethernet, 1W) and D2 W MDME 2400 (2.4 GHz Ethernet, 100mW or 300mW) modems can communicate in a point-to-point or point-tomultipoint mode. Both modems can be configured to allow for a selfhealing of communications between network points (nodes) via Spanning Tree Algorithm technology. The D2 W MDME 2400 products can also use Wireless Distribution System (WDS) technology to extend radio coverage by linking two Access Points (AP/AP connectivity). Wireless Access Points and Clients
Repeater
2W
1422
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Wireless Modems
Introduction to Wireless Modems
2W
Mesh Network
The Spanning Tree Algorithm function was introduced to handle network loops and provide redundant paths in networks. The Spanning Tree Algorithm can be configured; however, the factory default setting is disabled. There is some overhead in maintaining a network utilizing the Spanning Tree Algorithm. Users wishing to increase their throughput, at the expense of redundancy, should disable Spanning Tree.
A router joins separate Ethernet networks together (i.e. links a LAN to a different LAN). The router has different IP addresses on its wired and wireless ports, reflecting the different IP addresses of the separate Ethernet networks. When devices on one network wish to communicate with devices on the other network, they direct their packets at the router for forwarding.
Router Consider this network above which has a redundant wireless link. If the Spanning Tree Algorithm function is enabled, one of the two wireless links will be disabled - that is, all wireless data will be transferred by one link only. If the active link fails, the other link will automatically start transferring the wireless data.
Bridges are typically used to connect sections of the same IP network together. For a bridge, the IP section for the wireless side is the same as the Ethernet side. Two routers can exist within the same radio network. There is no limit to the number of bridges in the same network - although, there is a limit of 128 (for the D2 W MDME 2400) and 255 (for the D2 W MDME 900) clients linked to any one Access Point.
Bridge
2W
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1423
2W
Wireless Ethernet Modems - 900 Series
D2 W MDME 900
The D2 W MDME 900 Wireless Ethernet Modem is an ideal solution for Ethernet connections in process control and automation applications with PLCs, DCS, and SCADA acquisition. The D2 W MDME 900 can handle multiple applications simultaneously.
Applications:
Remote RTU connectivity PLC connectivity
Features:
License-free frequency for North and South America, Australia/New Zealand, Hong Kong, India 10/100 BaseT Ethernet, wireless data up to 200 Kbit/sec. 902 - 928 MHz, 0.1 - 1W, frequency hopping spread spectrum Typical line-of-sight distance: 20+ miles North America when using a higher gain antenna; 15 km elsewhere (1W ERP) Configurable as Access Point / Client; Bridge / Router Security, reliability, redundancy Multiple layers of error detection and correction Automatic changeover to another Access Point if a wireless link fails Military grade AES security encryption of wireless data Firewall protection and efficient wireless management Message filtering at MAC and IP address level Filtering via Black or White List Two serial interfaces: RS232 and RS485 Serial connectivity + Ethernet connectivity at the same time, both RS232 and RS485 PPP and serial server functionality Serial Modbus to Modbus TCP conversion Discrete channel for status I/O, for failure status or external status transfer Easy-to-use configuration and powerful diagnostics Configuration and diagnostics via web browser Remote configuration and diagnostics via the wireless link Antenna sold separately

Cat. # D2 W MDME 900 Description Wireless Ethernet Modem (900 MHz)
2W
1424
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
2W
Dimensions:
Discrete I/O:
One I/O channel Input: voltage-free contact / Output: FET 30VDC 500mA
Networking:
Configurable as Access Point / Client; Bridge / Router Point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, user-configurable addressing Repeater functionality MAC filtering and IP filtering, White List or Black List
Radio:
Frequency hopping spread spectrum Frequency bands USA/Canada: 902 - 928 MHz Transmit power 0.1 - 1W (20 - 30dBm) configurable Receiver sensitivity: -108dBm @ 10-6 Bit Error Rate (BER) Data rates 19.2, 38.4, 100, 200 Kb/s or auto rate selection Protocol CSMA/CA with 32-bit CRC and auto-correction Radio range up to 60 miles with repeaters, 20 miles line-of-sight / 100 km line-of-sight using high gain antennas (up to 4W ERP permitted in USA/Canada) SMA female coaxial antenna connection
Security:
128-bit AES or 64-bit proprietary encryption (configurable) MAC filtering and IP filtering Password protected configuration
Configuration and Diagnostics: Technical Specifications:

Antenna Connector: SMA female coaxial connector Temperature: -40 to 140F / -40 to 60C Humidity: 99% RH Power Supply: 10 - 30VDC Current When Idle: 280mA (12V), 150mA (24V) Current When Transmitting: (1W) 500mA (12V), 300mA (24V) Housing: case - heavy-duty painted aluminum, DIN rail mounting Approvals: FCC 15.247, RSS210 HTTP with remote configuration via wireless link Receive Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI), channel noise, BER, connection monitoring and statistics Firmware upgrade via radio or Ethernet port
Ethernet:
10/ 100 BaseT RJ45 connection, IEEE 802.3 compliant Bridge / Router functions work with all Ethernet protocols (Embedded Protocols: TCP/IP, UDP ARP, PPP, ICMP, HTTP, FTP, TFTP, TELNET, Modbus TCP Client and Server)
Serial:
RS232 V.24 DCE, 1.2 to 115.2 Kb/s RS485, 1.2 to 115.2 Kb/s Serial server, PPP, Modbus TCP to Modbus RTU conversion
2W
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1425
2W
D2 W MDME 2400
The D2 W MDME 2400 Wireless Ethernet Modem provides reliable and secure highspeed wireless Ethernet connectivity across a broad range of applications in process and automation plants.

Cat. # D2 W MDME 2400 1 D2 W MDME 2400 3 Description 100mW Wireless Ethernet Modem (2.4 GHz) 300mW Wireless Ethernet Modem (2.4 GHz)
Applications:
PLC connectivity SCADA data transfer Wireless Ethernet Wireless video feeds
Features:
Uses global 2.4 GHz ISM band 10/100 BaseT Ethernet, wireless data up to 11 Mbit/sec. 802.11b compliant 2.4 GHz Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS), 100mW or 300mW Typical line-of-sight distance: 3+ mi/5+ km North America when using a higher gain antenna (300mW model); 1 km elsewhere (100mW ERP) Configurable as Access Point / Client; Bridge / Router Security, reliability, redundancy High RF output and superior receiver sensitivity gives excellent penetration in congested industrial environments Wireless Distribution System (WDS) mesh networking Multiple layers of error detection and correction Automatic changeover to another Access Point if a wireless link fails Industrial ratings down to -35C Military grade WPA2 AES security encryption of wireless data Firewall protection and efficient wireless management Message filtering at MAC and IP address level Filtering via Black or White List Two serial interfaces: RS232 and RS485 Serial connectivity + Ethernet connectivity at the same time, both RS232 and RS485 PPP and serial server functionality Serial Modbus to Modbus TCP conversion Discrete channel for status I/O, for failure status or external status transfer Easy-to-use configuration and powerful diagnostics Configuration and diagnostics via web browser Remote configuration and diagnostics via the wireless link Dual SMA female coaxial antenna connection for antenna diversity (for improved performance in difficult environments) Antenna sold separately
2W
1426
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
2W
Dimensions:
Ethernet:
10/100 BaseT RJ45 connection, IEEE 802.3 compliant Bridge / Router functions work with all Ethernet protocols (Embedded Protocols: TCP/IP, UDP ARP, PPP, ICMP, HTTP, FTP, TFTP, TELNET, Modbus TCP)
Serial:
RS232 V.24 DCE, 1.2 to 115.2 Kb/s RS485, 1.2 to 115.2 Kb/s Serial server, PPP, Modbus TCP to Modbus RTU conversion
Discrete I/O:
One I/O channel Input: voltage-free contact / Output: FET 30VDC 500mA
Networking:
Configurable as Access Point / Client; Bridge / Router Point-to-point, point-to-multipoint, user-configurable addressing WDS self-organizing mesh networking MAC filtering and IP filtering, White List or Black List Serial gateway TELNET
Wireless:
2.400 - 2.484 GHz Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS), 13 selectable zones 802.11b compliant, auto rate selection 1 MB, 2 MB, 5.5 MB, 11 MB Transmit power 100mW (20dBm) / 300mW (25dBm), dependent on local regulations Receiver sensitivity: -96dBm @ 1 MB/s, -91dBm @ 11 MB/s < 8% BER Line-of-sight range: 1 km @ 100mW ERP, 8 km @ 4W ERP Range may be extended using repeater features Dual SMA female coaxial antenna connection for antenna diversity (for improved performance in difficult environments)
Antenna Connector: SMA female coaxial connector Temperature: -35 to 150F / -35 to 65C Humidity: 99% RH Power Supply: 9 - 30VDC, current 240mA (12VDC), 150mA (24VDC) Housing: case - heavy-duty painted aluminum, DIN rail mounting Approvals: FCC 15.247, CE ETS 300 328, RSS210 Certifications: IEC 60950, CSA
Security:
128-bit AES encryption (WPA), TKIP (WPA), or 128-bit / 64-bit WEP MAC address and IP address filtering Password protected configuration

HTTP with remote configuration via wireless link Web-based system management, RF signal strength, Bit Error Rate, connection monitoring and statistics PPP protocol access to diagnostics Firmware upgrade via radio or Ethernet port
2W
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1427
2W
2W
1428
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
3W
Description
Page No.
see pages 14301434
3W
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1429
3W
Antennas
Antennas
Antennas should be selected considering the desired transmit distance, line-of-sight, RF cable length, and height of transmission. Each of these parameters should be evaluated in selecting the right antenna for your application. For more information, please visit crousehinds.com/WirelessIO/. Cooper Crouse-Hinds Sales Representatives can also help you select the right antenna using a diagnostic tool embedded in the Demonstration Kit transceiver modules.
900 MHz Dipole Antenna (CFD890EL):

0dB gain (including cable loss) Used in applications where signal strength is important in all directions from the antenna A ground independent half wave dipole suitable for 900 MHz products 15' (5 m) of RG58 coaxial cable already terminated with a crimped SMA male connector Includes a 304 stainless steel standard pole bracket and clamps
900 MHz Division 1 Antenna (D1 NW ANT 1 900):

2dB gain Designed for use in hazardous/classified and industrial applications Omni-directional and designed for flexible mounting on a variety of explosionproof housings (with a 3/4" NPT pipe thread) Mounting base is made of heavy, nickel plated brass with an integrated TNC (female) coaxial connector for ease of installation with a (catalog number: A53649A) cable The radome is optimized for rugged industrial applications, while maintaining maximum radio frequency transmission and reception efficiency May be mounted up to 18 away from the enclosure within a hazardous location without an additional seal
900 MHz Collinear Antenna (SG900EL):

5dB gain A short RG58 coaxial tail is terminated with a crimped N-Type female connector; the CC3 SMA, CC10 SMA, and CC20 SMA coaxial extender kits are also suitable for use with this antenna Includes a 304 stainless steel standard pole bracket and clamps
900 MHz Whip Antenna (DG900 1):

-2dB gain Fitted with approximately 3.28' (1m) coaxial cable with SMA male connector; further coaxial extensions are not recommended Designed for short range use only (2 miles maximum) Mounted from the base through a 3 /8" (10 mm) hole or with a bracket (ordered separately - catalog number: ANT BR COL KIT)
900 MHz Collinear Antenna (SG900 6):

8dB gain A short RG58 coaxial tail is terminated with a crimped N-Type female connector; the CC3 SMA, CC10 SMA, and CC20 SMA coaxial extender kits are also suitable for use with this antenna Mounted at the base tube by a U-bracket (ordered separately - catalog number: ANT BR COL KIT) Used when maximum range is required or as a base station antenna
900 MHz Whip Antenna (WH900 SMA):

-2dB gain Made for use with the D2 W DEMO 900 Demonstration Kit Measures only 3.5" (90 mm) in length Designed for internal use only; may be connected directly to Cooper Crouse-Hinds modules Fitted with a SMA male connector
3W
1430
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Antennas
3W
900 MHz 6 Element Yagi Antenna (YU6 900):

10dB gain Focuses power in a forward direction for longer range applications Higher gain antennas direct power into a tighter beam Requires a single mounting bracket (ordered separately - catalog number: ANT BR YAG KIT) A standard female N-Type connection from a 6" (150 mm) tail provides a simple connection method when using the CC3 SMA, CC10 SMA, or CC20 SMA extender cable The narrow beam width and high front-to-back ratio is effective in reducing the effects of interference and counteracting losses in long coaxial runs
2.4 GHz Collinear Antenna (MD2400EL):

1dB gain (including cable) Approximately 15' (5 m) of low loss RG58 coaxial cable is terminated with a male SMA connector Includes a 304 stainless steel standard pole bracket and clamps
2.4 GHz 18 Element Yagi Antenna (Y2400 18EL):

18dB gain Suitable for use with the CC3 SMA, CC10 SMA, and CC20 SMA coaxial extenders A standard female N-Type connection from a 150 mm tail provides a simple connection method Includes mounting brackets
900 MHz 16 Element Yagi Antenna (YU16 900):

15dB gain Suitable for use when extended coaxial cable runs are encountered with 9dB loss or greater Equivalent to the YU6 900, but has additional director elements which provide additional gain A standard female N-Type connection from a 6" (150 mm) tail provides a simple connection method when using the CC3 SMA, CC10 SMA, or CC20 SMA extender cable
2.4 GHz Collinear Antenna (Z2400EL):

10dB gain An N-Type female connector is built into the stainless steel mount tube Mounting brackets (ordered separately - catalog number: ANT BR COL KIT) are ideal for mounting to a mast up to 50 mm in diameter
2.4 GHz Whip Antenna (WH2400 SMA):

0dB gain Made for use with the D2 W MDME 2400 Wireless Ethernet Modem Measures only 3.5" (90 mm) in length Fitted with SMA male connector
2.4 GHz Division 1 Antenna (CTX 2400 TR):

2dB gain Designed for use in hazardous/classified and industrial applications Omni-directional and designed for flexible mounting on a variety of explosionproof housings (with a 3/4" NPT pipe thread) Mounting base is made of heavy, nickel plated brass with an integrated TNC (female) coaxial connector for ease of installation with a (catalog number: A10832A) cable
2.4 GHz Collinear Antenna (SG2400EL):

5.1dB gain A short RG58 coaxial tail is terminated with a crimped NType female connector Includes a 304 stainless steel standard pole bracket Designed for use with the CC10 SMA or custom coaxial cable extender kits At data link 2.4 GHz frequencies, it is important to keep cable runs to the shortest length possible; where a long run is unavoidable, a suitable low loss cable should be used
3W
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1431
3W
Wireless Accessories
Brackets and Cables
Brackets:
Brackets are available to provide a solid support for any antenna. Mounting brackets may be replaced if the antenna is dismantled for maintenance. The brackets are suitable for pole sizes up to a maximum of 2" (50 mm) in diameter.
Coaxial Cable (CC900TAIL):

A 24" (800 mm) RG58 coaxial lead; tail is terminated with a SMA (male) connector for module connection and a flanged N-Type (female) bulkhead connector
Yagi Antenna Brackets (ANT BR YAG KIT):

The Yagi antenna requires a single mounting bracket Bracket assembly consists of 1 x U-bolt, 1 x D-plate with nuts and washers Brackets are zinc plated mild steel
Coaxial Extension Cable (CC Series):

Lengths: CC3 SMA - 10 (3 m); CC10 SMA - 33 (10 m); CC20 SMA - 66 (20 m)
Cables are terminated and ready for use with a SMA male and N-Type male connector; the SMA connector is provided for direct module connection, and the N-Type connects directly to the antenna tail lead
Collinear Antenna Brackets (ANT BR COL KIT):

The collinear antenna requires two mounting brackets to hold the antenna in position Bracket assembly consists of 1 x U-bolt, 3 x D-plates with nuts and washers Brackets are zinc plated mild steel
Coaxial Cable (A53649A):

Length: 2 Ideally suited for connecting any radio or modem to the 900 MHz Division 1 antenna (D1 NW ANT 1 900) Fitted with a TNC male and a SMA male connector
Coaxial Cable (A10832A):
Cables:
Cables are available for use between any Cooper Crouse-Hinds radio and its antenna, or between a PC and radio for configuration and diagnostics.
Length: 2 Ideally suited for connecting any radio or modem to the 2.4 GHz Division 1 antenna (CTX 2400 TR) Fitted with a RPTNC male and a SMA male connector
Serial Cable (CBLSER DB9):

A RS232 serial cable used for Cooper Crouse-Hinds telemetry products requiring connection to a computer or laptops RS232 port for diagnostic and configuration purposes Fitted with a molded DB9 male and DB9 female straight-through connector
Straight-through Configuration Cable (CBLETH C5A):

Used to connect to and communicate with Cooper Crouse-Hinds Wireless Ethernet Modems using a PC or via a network router, switch, or hub Length: 2 m Fitted with two RJ45 male connectors
Crossover Configuration Cable (CBLETH C5X): Serial Cable (CBLSER RJ45):

Equivalent to the CBLSER DB9, but is fitted with a molded RJ45 male (Ethernet connector) and a DB9 female connector for use with D2 W LT and D2 W LR radios only Used to connect to and communicate with the D2 W GET1 900 Ethernet gateway using a PC or via a network router, switch, or hub Length: 2 m Fitted with two RJ45 male connectors
3W
1432
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Power Supplies and Surge Devices
3W
Power Supplies:
Power supplies are available for any radio, and come either standard or DIN rail mounted.
Surge Devices:
These components are ideally suited for protecting panel-mounted equipment, and are typically used in the controls section of a motor control center (MCC).
Power Supply (PS 110 20): *

Designed for use with Cooper Crouse-Hinds telemetry modules 110 Volt AC pack that mounts directly into a wall-mounted power outlet
15 Amp Surge / Filter Device (MA15 Series): *

AC/DC mains power surge protector, filter, and ring suppressor Absorbs transient surges that may otherwise damage equipment Filters noise in the system Prevents surges, causing the filter to ring (oscillate) under low load conditions
DIN Rail Mounted Power Supply (PS DR Series): *

Designed for use with Cooper Crouse-Hinds telemetry modules Single power output Universal AC input / full range (110/240VAC) Can be mounted on TS-35/7.5 or 15 DIN rail
I/O Signal Surge Diverter (IOP32 Series): *

Redirects electrical surges safely to ground, and then resets automatically Cost-effective surge protection solution which uses minimal space
Antenna Surge Diverter (CSD 900): *

Installed between the antenna and any Cooper Crouse-Hinds wireless device to reduce lightning surge voltages from entering the radio module Fitted with a male SMA connector and a female SMA connector
3W
* Device not certified or rated for use in Class I, Division 2 locations. Must use EJB enclosure or suitable alternative enclosure for Class I hazardous locations.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1433
3W
Accessory Ordering Information:

Cat. #
CFD890EL SG900EL SG900 6 D1 NW ANT 1 900 DG900 1
Description
Dipole Antenna with 15' RG58 Coax Cable Collinear Antenna with 1 /4" Pole Bracket
1
Gain (dBd)
0 5 8 2 -2 -2 10 15 0 5.1 1 18 10 2 -0.8 (900 MHz); -1.2 (2.4 GHz) -1 (900 MHz); -2 (2.4 GHz) -3.2 (900 MHz); -5.9 (2.4 GHz) -6.2 (900 MHz); -11.4 (2.4 GHz) -1.1 -1.3 -0.2
Connector
SMA (male) N-Type (female) N-Type (female) TNC (female) SMA (male) SMA (male) N-Type (female) N-Type (female) SMA (male) N-Type (female) SMA (male) N-Type (female) N-Type (female) RPTNC (female) DB9 (male); DB9 (female) DB9 (female); RJ45 (male) SMA (male); N-Type (female) SMA (male); N-Type (male) SMA (male); N-Type (male) SMA (male); N-Type (male) TNC (male); SMA (male) RPTNC (male); SMA (male) RJ45 (male); RJ45 (male) RJ45 (male); RJ45 (male) SMA (male); SMA (female)
Collinear Antenna Division 1 Antenna with RG58 Coaxial Lead Whip Antenna with 3.28' (1m) RG58 Coaxial lead
1
ANTENNAS & BRACKETS
WH900 SMA YU6 900 YU16 900 WH2400 SMA SG2400EL MD2400EL Y2400 18EL Z2400EL CTX 2400 TR ANT BR YAG KIT ANT BR COL KIT CBLSER DB9 CBLSER RJ45 CC900TAIL CC3 SMA
/4 Wave Whip Antenna
Yagi Antenna, 6 Element Yagi Antenna, 16 Element 2.4 GHz Demo Whip Antenna 2.4 GHz Collinear Antenna 2.4 GHz Dipole Antenna 5M RG58 2.4 GHz Yagi Antenna 2.4 GHz Antenna 2.4 GHz Division 1 Antenna Yagi U-bolt Bracket Collinear U-bolt Bracket PC Serial Cable PC Serial Cable RG58 Coaxial Lead - 24" (0.8 m) long RG58 Coaxial Extender Kit - 10 (3 m) long RG58 Coaxial Extender Kit - 33 (10 m) long RG58 Coaxial Extender Kit - 66 (20 m) long RG58 Coaxial Cable - 24" long RG58 Coaxial Cable - 24" long Ethernet Cable - Direct Ethernet Cable - Crossover 20VDC Power Supply DIN Rail 12VDC Power Supply DIN Rail 24VDC Power Supply Battery Pack 110VAC Single Phase Power Surge Protector 240VAC Single Phase Power Surge Protector Single Channel, 24VDC I/O Signal Surge Diverter Dual Channel, 24VDC I/O Signal Surge Diverter 900 MHz Coax Surge Diverter
CABLES
CC10 SMA CC20 SMA A53649A A10832A CBLETH C5A CBLETH C5X PS 110 20
POWER SUPPLY SURGE PROTECTION
PS DR3012 PS DR3024 D2 NW BAT 2 MA15 D 1 SI MA15 D 2 SI IOP32 IOP32D CSD 900
3W
1434
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Enclosures for Wireless Devices
4W
Description
EJB Series GUB Series FJDS Series FXDJ Series
Page No.
4W
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1435
4W
EJB Enclosures
For Wireless Components
Cl. I, Div. 1, Groups B, C, D* Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups B, C, D*
NEMA 3, 4, 7B Div. 2, 7CD, 12 Explosionproof Watertight
EJBs are used to house Cooper Crouse-Hinds radios, terminal blocks, and other electrical devices in indoor or outdoor areas which are wet and hazardous due to combustible gases and dust.

Class I, Division 1 and 2, Groups B, C, D* NEMA 3, 4, 7B Div. 2, 7CD, 12 Explosionproof, watertight
Design Features:
Special neoprene cover gasket provides a watertight seal to meet NEMA 4 requirements, and provides superior protection for enclosed equipment against water corrosion Steel cover bolts External flange design - wide unobstructed cover opening provides a completely accessible interior for wiring and electrical equipment Furnished with a mounting plate, DIN rail, tapped and plugged conduit entries, and tapped and plugged drain and antenna entries
Note: AC/DC power supply will not fit in this enclosure with certain radios. Please consult factory for larger enclosure options.
Dimensions:
Cat. # EJB120604 MP SA RF KIT**
**EJB120604 MP SA RF KIT assembly includes the following: (1) EJB120604 MP SA (Explosionproof Junction Box drilled and tapped per above drawing) (1) MTG PLATE 1299003 (Mounting Plate) (1) PLG1 SA (1/2" Plug) (3) PLG2 SA (3/4" Plug) (1) 1298201 (4" DIN Rail)
Description EJB Enclosure Assembly (Recommended for use with G, MIO, MDME)
*All conduit entries must be sealed per installation instructions. Mounting instructions and provisions provided.
4W
1436
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
GUB Enclosures
Cl. I, Div. 1 & 2, Group D NEMA 3, 7D, 12 Explosionproof Raintight
4W
GUBs are used in applications similar to the EJB Series, but offer a glass window for quick visual inspection of internal devices which are protected in harsh and wet environments.

Class I, Divisions 1 & 2, Group D NEMA 3, 7D, 12 Explosionproof, raintight
Design Features:
Domed cover or glass window cover can be selected: Glass window cover offers visibility of LED lights used for diagnostics Furnished with a mounting plate, DIN rail, tapped and plugged conduit entries, and tapped and plugged drain and antenna entries
Note: A larger GUB kit is available (catalog number: GUB319 MP SA RF KIT) to house radios and additional components.
Dimensions:
10.50 9.50
7.75
6.91
8.88
4.28
7.23
Cat. # GUB06 SA RF KIT
GUB06 SA RF KIT assembly includes the following: (1) GUB06 (Explosionproof Junction Box) (1) GUB0108 (Glass Window Cover) (1) PLG1 SA (1/ 2" Plug) (3) PLG2 SA (3/ 4" Plug) (1) 1298201 (4" DIN Rail) Note: Mounting plate not required.
Description GUB Enclosure Assembly (Recommended for use with LT, LR, MDME)
All conduit entries must be sealed per installation instructions. Mounting instructions and provisions provided.
4W
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1437
4W
FJDS Non-metallic Enclosures

Cl. I, Div. 2
NEMA 1, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 6P, 7 Div. 2, 12 Watertight Raintight Dust-tight Corrosion Resistant
The FJDS Series is a cost-effective solution for housing Cooper Crouse-Hinds radios in environmentally harsh conditions.

Class I, Division 2 NEMA 1, 3, 3R, 4, 4X, 6P, 7 Division 2, 12 Watertight, raintight, dust-tight, corrosion resistant
Design Features:
Lift off cover design Surface flat stainless steel screw Integral mounting flange Soft, rounded edges Overhang cover Stainless steel beaded cover retention chain Provided with a mounting plate and DIN rail for easy mounting of Cooper Crouse-Hinds radio components
Dimensions:
7.65
9.66
11.63
6.00
9.39 #10" S.S. BEAD CHAIN 5.08
Cat. # FJDS100804 MP FG RF KIT*
*FJDS100804 MP FG RF KIT assembly includes the following: (1) FJDS100804 (Enclosure Box) (1) 1299013 (Mounting Plate) (1) 1298628 (6" DIN Rail)
Description Lift Cover Enclosure Kit (Recommended for use with G, MIO, SIO, MDME, BAT)
4W
1438
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
FXDJ Non-metallic Enclosures

Cl. I, Div. 2
NEMA 1, 3, 4X, 7 Div. 2, 12 Watertight Raintight Dust-tight Corrosion Resistant
4W
The FXDJ Series provides easy access to Cooper Crouse-Hinds wireless devices, and will keep all electrical components free from rain and dust.

Class I, Division 2 NEMA 1, 3, 4X, 7 Division 2, 12 Watertight, raintight, dust-tight, corrosion resistant
Design Features:
Latched cover allows for quick entry (can also be locked) Latch lies flat on side of enclosure Can be lifted and turned with ease Full 180 door opening Provided with a mounting plate and DIN rail for easy mounting of Cooper Crouse-Hinds radio components
Dimensions:
7.97
9.95
10.86
11.63
6.00 9.58
PADLOCKING LL150 LATCH
8.09
Cat. # FXDJ100808 MP FG RF KIT**
**FXDJ100808 assembly includes the following: (1) FXDJ100808 (Enclosure Box) (1) 1299013 (Mounting Plate) (1) 1298628 (6" DIN Rail)
Description Latched Cover Enclosure Kit (Recommended for use with G, MIO, LT, LR, MDME)
4W
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1439
4W
4W
1440
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Solar Power Sources
5W
Description
Photovoltaic Module Kit with Battery Back-up Solar Combiner Boxes Solar Pass Through Boxes Solar Cord Grips
Page No.
see pages 14421445 see pages 14461449 see page 1450 see page 1451
5W
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1441
5W
Photovoltaic Module Kit with Battery Back-up
Cl. I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D (NEC Only)
NEMA 3R NEMA 4 NEMA 4X
Cooper Crouse-Hinds solar kits provide reliable power in remote applications, eliminating expensive utility power investments. These systems are pre-wired per the National Electrical Code (NEC) and Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) to minimize installation time and wiring errors. Solar kits are installed in weatherproof enclosures to withstand harsh weather conditions (such as rain, dust, ice, etc.) and high wind loads. Pre-configured systems can be selected to minimize purchasing and specification efforts, and they are constructed from quality components to maximize reliability and system life.
Applications:
Solar kits are: Installed with devices and equipment in remote locations (e.g. wireless radios), offering added flexibility for applications requiring DC power Especially well suited for sunny locations Used for obstruction lighting; instrumentation; cathodic protection; navigational aids; seismic monitoring; video surveillance; irrigation monitoring and control; telecommunications; tank and well level monitors; flow meters

Solar Panel cULus Listed FM Certified: Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D T3C: Ta = 60C Regulator UL Listed: UL1604 CSA Certified: CSA 22.2 No. 213-M1987 FM Certified: Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D Enclosure cULus Listed UL Listed: UL508A NEMA 3R (standard) NEMA 4 and 4X options available (consult factory) Circuit Protection UL Listed: UL489 FM Certified (for Div. 2 version): Units < 10A: Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D, T6 Units 10A: Class I, Division 2, Groups A, B, C, D, T4A UL1077 Battery UL Listed: UL1989
Features:
Supply power to monitor remote assets and their locations to improve emergency response time and eliminate time-consuming, on-site inspection Solar power is a mature technology which has been used for over 30 years in many applications requiring safe/reliable power sources Eliminate the need for conduit, cables, cable tray, and the necessary infrastructure involved in developing grid power in remote applications Pre-wired kits allow for quick installation by any qualified electrician Long, maintenance-free battery life (4-6 years) eliminates the need for frequent battery replacement Recommended temperature range: -30C to 50C (consult factory for more extreme temperatures) Class I, Division 2 assemblies available
Solar panel assembly shown with wireless transceiver and antenna installed as example. Radio and antenna to be ordered separately.
Standard Materials:
PV module (solar panel) clear anodized aluminum frame, potted or terminal-type junction box, high transmission 1/ 8" thick tempered glass front with white polyester back and EVA (ethylene vinyl acetate) encapsulant Enclosure - aluminum NEMA 3R standard - painted sheet steel NEMA 4 (optional) - 316 stainless steel NEMA 4X (optional)
Electrical Ratings:
0-20A, 12VDC (consult factory for applications above 20A) Regulator prevents the battery from deep discharging by disconnecting the battery at 11.5V and re-connecting the battery at 12.5V
5W
NEMA 4 and NEMA 4X enclosures available upon request.
1442
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
5W
Components: PV Module (Solar Panel)

Cooper Crouse-Hinds solar panels are made of high efficiency polycrystalline silicon modules durable materials capable of weathering any environment. Features and benefits: Multi-crystalline modules offer high efficiency Small footprint - more compact than other solar technologies Fully encapsulated panel resists harsh weather conditions (hail, rain, wind, etc.) J-version junction box with terminal connection block accepts various conduit sizes, providing ease of installation 25 year expected life Provided with 15 feet of UV resistant cord for field connection of assemblies 30 watts and higher
Components: Circuit Protection

These components will ensure the protection and integrity of your equipment in the field. Factory-sealed circuit protectors are available for use in Division 2 hazardous applications. Features and benefits: Compact DIN rail mounted design 100 Megaohm insulation resistance for complete protection of internal components Sound, proven, and reliable design Custom configuration offers flexibility to meet a wide variety of needs
Components: Battery
Cooper Crouse-Hinds batteries supply the load when sunlight decreases at night. Each system can be designed to provide as many days of back-up power that your application requires. Batteries have been selected to support the repeated loading and unloading cycles encountered in solar power systems. Features and benefits: Battery is designed for maintenance-free deep cycling solar applications Low stand loss minimizes deterioration between transport and storage Tank formed plates ensure that cells have equal voltages Non-spillable ICAO, IATA, and DOT ratings ensure safe transport without the need for special containers Cooper Crouse-Hinds wireless radio can detect and send a low battery status
Components: Regulator
Regulators manage your power requirements even in the harshest conditions. Regulators are used to channel the sun's energy into your equipment when energy is needed, or to charge the battery when energy is not required. Features and benefits: Efficient and reliable solid state components Adjustable duty cycle for improved control Robust design rated for 25% overloads Encapsulated in epoxy potting for superior corrosion resistance Marine rated terminals/anodized case provides corrosion resistance Temperature compensation provides reliable power supply at extreme temperatures Green charging/red low voltage disconnect (LVD) indicators help expedite troubleshooting
Components: Enclosure
Cooper Crouse-Hinds enclosures are specifically designed to protect your solar kit components and equipment from the elements (wind, rain, snow, debris, etc.). These enclosures can be used with the Division 2 certified components listed to meet the needs of Division 2 rated locations. Features and benefits: Corrosion resistant enclosures house all electrical components (battery/regulator/wiring), improve system reliability, and minimize maintenance Enclosures include mounting features, offering several different mounting options (poles, walls, or other structures) Enclosures have latches to ensure the door is sealed effectively and can be padlocked for tamper resistance
5W
NEMA 4 and NEMA 4X enclosures available upon request.
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1443
5W
Ordering Information Example:
**Enclosures suitable for other environments available upon request. Surge protection also available upon request. NEMA 4 and NEMA 4X enclosures available upon request.
5W
1444
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
5W
Selecting a System:
Key questions to select a system: - What location to install (i.e. how much sun)? - What load, in amperes and volts? (size the panel and the battery) - How often will the load need power? - How many days of system autonomy are needed? Determine the installation location, the load you wish to supply, and its duty cycle (what percentage of the time you wish to apply the load) following the three simple steps below: 1) Use a solar insolation map to determine the sun hours in your area. 2) Determine the load requirements for your application in Amphours / day. Please refer to the solar calculator on the Cooper Crouse-Hinds website for wireless load calculations. Determine the duty cycle (i.e. 100% for continuous vs. 50% for 12 hours per day) of your load. Adjust for a 1.2 Service Factor to account load requirement variability. 3) Select the solar kit capable of meeting or exceeding the load requirements (in Amp-hours / day) for your application. Please consult factory for higher load requirements.
Solar Insolation Map:
Amp-Hours / Day Calculation:

Load requirement (Amp-hours / day) = (amps of device x duty cycle x Service Factor) x 24 hours / day Example: 16.5 mA, continuous duty cycle, temperature = 10C (50F) Load requirement = (16.5 mA x 100% x 1.2) x 24 hours / day = 475 mA-hr / day Load requirement = 0.475 Amp-hours / day
Insolation map courtesy of BP Solar. **For specific color information, see the following Web site: http://www.crousehinds.com/wirelessIO/Solar_Calculator.cfm. ***Please consult Cooper Crouse-Hinds for insolation maps of additional continents.
Pre-configured Solar Kits - Ordering Information:

Equivalent Sun Hours Solar Kit Cat. # SOL SOL SOL SOL SOL SOL SOL SOL SOL SOL SOL SOL SOL SOL 5W 12V 7 WR 3R 20W 12V 36 WR 3R 20W 12V 48 WR 3R 30W 12V 36 WR 3R 30W 12V 48 WR 3R 30W 12V 70 WR 3R 40W 12V 36 WR 3R 40W 12V 48 WR 3R 40W 12V 70 WR 3R 50W 12V 48 WR 3R 50W 12V 70 WR 3R 65W 12V 48 WR 3R 75W 12V 70 WR 3R 80W 12V 99 WR 3R 2 0.54 2.38 2.38 3.56 3.56 3.56 4.60 4.60 4.60 5.80 5.80 7.38 8.60 9.00 / / / / / / / / / / / / / / 10.30 12.10 16.10 8.10 10.80 15.70 6.30 8.30 12.20 6.60 9.60 5.20 6.50 8.80 3 0.81 / 6.90 3.57 / 8.10 3.57 / 10.80 5.34 / 5.40 5.34 / 7.20 5.34 / 10.50 6.90 / 4.20 6.90 / 5.60 6.90 / 8.10 8.70 / 4.40 8.70 / 6.40 11.07 / 3.30 12.90 / 4.30 13.50 / 5.90 4 1.08 / 5.18 4.76 / 6.10 4.76 / 8.10 7.12 / 4.10 7.12 / 5.40 7.12 / 7.80 9.20 / 3.10 9.20 / 4.20 9.20 / 6.00 11.60 / 3.30 11.60 / 4.80 14.76 / 2.60 17.20 / 3.30 18.00 / 4.40 5 1.35 / 4.10 5.95 / 4.80 5.95 / 6.50 8.90 / 3.30 8.90 / 4.30 8.90 / 6.30 11.50 / 2.50 11.50 / 3.40 11.50 / 4.80 14.50 / 2.60 14.50 / 3.80 18.45 / 2.00 21.50 / 2.60 22.50 / 3.50 6 1.62 / 3.40 7.14 / 4.10 7.14 / 5.40 10.68 / 2.70 10.68 / 3.50 10.68 / 5.20 13.80 / 2.00 13.80 / 2.80 13.80 / 4.00 17.40 / 2.20 17.40 / 3.20 22.14 / 1.70 25.80 / 2.10 27.00 / 2.90
NEMA 4 and NEMA 4X enclosures available upon request. First number in table indicates the system production in amp-hours/day at 12VDC. Second number indicates the days of autonomy of the solar kit (days the battery can provide power to the specified load). Larger power requirements may be accommodated. Please consult factory for custom designs, or for applications involving other types of equipment (additional Amp-hours / day production, additional days of autonomy, etc.).
5W
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1445
5W
Solar Combiner Solutions
Combiners and disconnects that offer superior resistance and durability from harsh weather and abusive solar environments
Leading the way in Solar Technology Cooper Crouse-Hinds combiner boxes and disconnects for the solar market integrate a comprehensive line of electrical products with expert support, industry insights, and local availability to improve safety and productivity in the most demanding industrial, commercial and residential environments worldwide. Solar Background Information A solar array may be one panel or many in series, and may range from a single 12 volt panel up to multi-panel high voltage array for grid-tie systems. Grid-tie systems can go as high as 1000 VDC, while battery systems are typically 12, 24, or 48 V. Higher voltage systems (over 48 V) have different NEC code requirements than those for low voltage battery systems, and the two types are NOT interchangeable. Cooper Crouse-Hinds Solar Combiners are designed for higher voltage circuits used in grid-tie applications. All meet NEC requirements and are made in accordance with UL requirements. Cooper Crouse-Hinds Solar Combiners have additional breakers, disconnects, and fuses for the combined high current buss.
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Product Offering Solar Combiners Cooper Crouse-Hinds Solar Combiners are used to group input wires/circuits from several arrays and/or solar panels. The combined circuit results in fewer output circuits and combines them into one main buss or feed going to the inverter, saving labor and material costs. Solar Recombiners Cooper Crouse-Hinds Recombiner Boxes are used in larger photovoltaic systems. A Recombiner Box effectively groups the output wires from several combiner boxes into one main output feed which then goes to the inverter. Solar Disconnects The National Electrical Code requires a disconnect switch which provides circuit interruption to the down stream inverter. The disconnect can be internally mounted in the combiner or externally mounted between the combiner and inverter. The disconnect switch can be located at one of two places: either inside the building nearest the point of entrance of the system conductors, or outside the building. If the solar disconnect is not located near the utility company's meter, then a plaque is required by the front door stating where the solar disconnect is located. Solar Cable Assemblies A comprehensive offering of solar cable assemblies are also available in molded to cable or mechanical termination configurations. Typical conductor size is #12 or #10. Available in standard or custom cable lengths. Consult factory for more details. Cooper Crouse-Hinds Solar Protection for Fiberglass Enclosures The Cooper Crouse-Hinds solar protection formula provides the enclosure the strength and durability to provide long, dependable service even in the most demanding environmental conditions. Cooper Crouse-Hinds fiberglass enclosures retain gloss and color even when exposed to harsh UV light and offer superior resistance to chemicals and are fire retardant. A special UV absorber is added into this solar protection formula and works to absorb UV energy and release it without damaging the fiberglass enclosure, thus providing increased protection of the polyester material and increased resistance to the damaging effects of UV radiation. For additional information on Cooper Crouse-Hinds Solar Protection, choose Fiberglass Enclosures from: http://www.crouse-hinds.com/contractorcorner
5W
1446
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Solar Combiners
5W
Solar Combiners Application:

Cooper Crouse-Hinds Solar Combiner Solutions are designed and built to minimize system costs by providing maximum flexibility. Solar Combiner Solutions offer a range of 1 to 48 input circuits, with a durable non-metallic (NEMA 4X) enclosure, engineered and manufactured to perform in the harshest environmental conditions. Built in accordance with UL1741 standard, providing peace of mind and plenty of wiring room for ease of installation.
Features:
RATED FOR 600 VDC - CONTINUOUS DUTY Built to UL 1741 Standards 90C output terminals Fiberglass enclosures provided as standard; also available in NEMA 3R painted steel or NEMA 4X stainless steel Touch-Safe fuse holders and power distribution blocks for safe operation Configured for positive and negative grounded arrays Optional 1000VDC rated

Hot compression molded fiberglass-reinforced thermoset polyester Non-conductive, impact resistant, UV resistant, flame retardant Captive cover screws cant be dropped or lost Poured polyurethane seamless gasket provides watertight, dust-tight environmental seal Stainless steel used on all external hardware
Solar Combiners with Integral Disconnects Application:

Cooper Crouse-Hinds Solar Combiners with Integral Disconnects provide all the strong and durable features of our standard Solar Combiners and are available with 1-48 input circuits. Integral disconnects save material costs, installation time and labor by joining the combiner box and disconnect within one enclosure and eliminating the need for a disconnect in a separate enclosure.
Features:
RATED FOR 600 VDC - CONTINUOUS DUTY Built to UL 1741 Standards 90C output terminals Fiberglass enclosures provided as standard; also available in NEMA 3R painted steel or NEMA 4X stainless steel Touch-Safe fuse holders and power distribution blocks for safe personnel operation Configured for positive and negative grounded arrays
Integral Disconnect Rating:

To determine the rating of the integral disconnect, simply multiply the number of input circuits by the ampacity rating of each fuse in these circuits. Round to the next (higher) trip rating. In NO case can the max current exceed the trip rating of the disconnect switch or breaker. Example: a 12 string combiner box with every input circuit with a fuse rated at 8 Amps is 12 x 8 = 96. Required rating for the switch or circuit breaker would be 100 Amps.

Hot compression molded fiberglass-reinforced thermoset polyester Non-conductive, impact resistant, UV resistant, flame retardant Captive cover screws cant be dropped or lost Poured polyurethane seamless gasket provides watertight, dust-tight environmental seal Stainless steel used on all external hardware
BASE SOLAR COMBINER

WITH OPTIONAL FACTORY SUPPLIED FUSES WITH OPTIONAL INTEGRAL DISCONNECT
CCBF
12
15
CB
200
SP
Enclosure Type

Fused
Fuse Amperage
Integral Disconnect

Surge Protection
5W
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1447
5W
Solar Recombiners and Disconnect Switches
Recombiners Application:
In large photovoltaic (PV) systems, multiple combiner boxes are often necessary, and the outputs of these combiner boxes may need to be combined againrecombinedbefore reaching a central inverter. Cooper Crouse-Hinds Recombiner Boxes allow for ease of installation, saving time, labor, and most importantly, system costs.
Consult factory for ordering information
Disconnects Application:
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Solar Disconnect Solutions are used as a disconnecting means and rated for 600 VDC/AC. The disconnects are offered separately in a sheet steel enclosure or as an integral mounted device to the Cooper Crouse-Hinds Combiner Solutions, offering reduced space and cost of installation, the ability to disconnect power from a remote location, and provide short circuit protection.
Features:
Switches are heavy duty 3-pole, with visible blades; a quick makeand-break mechanism with reinforced, positive pressure type blade and jaw construction. Fusible types have fuse clips with steel reinforcing springs of positive pressure type. Pressure connectors are used for wire connectors. Switch enclosure covers are interlocked with the body and operating mechanism and cannot be opened when the switch is closed ("ON"). When the switch is open ("OFF"), the switch cannot be put in a closed ("ON") position with the door open. The switch operating handle may be padlocked in the "ON" or "OFF" position. In addition, the interlock construction has been designed to allow the door of the unit to be padlocked. This feature allows operation while preventing unqualified or unauthorized entry.

Enclosure sheet steel Operating handle non-metallic Other exterior parts stainless steel
Enclosure Certification & Compliances:

NEMA Type 3R UL Standard: 98

3 and 4 Pole; fusible or non-fusible; 240 VAC/250 VDC; 600 VAC/600 VDC 30, 60, 100, 200 or 400 amperes
Disconnect Switches Ordering Information Specifications:

30 Amp Heavy Duty Disconnect Switch - 600 VDC 3-Pole Catalog Number - Fusible Catalog Number - Non-fusible Sheet Steel CH361R CHU361R 60 Amp Sheet Steel CH362R CHU362R 100 Amp Sheet Steel CH363R CHU363R 200 Amp Sheet Steel CH364R CHU364R
For 4-Pole, 400 Amp or disconnect switches in a fiberglass or stainless steel enclosure - Consult Factory.
5W
1448
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
5W
Combiner Technical Information:

Number of input circuits Catalog number (i.e. CCBF12) 1 TO 4 CCBF (1-4) 5 TO 6 CCBF (5-6) 7 TO 12 CCBF (7-12) 13 TO 20 CCBF (13 TO 20) 21 TO 24 CCBF (21 TO 24) 25 TO 28 CCBF (21 TO 28) 29 TO 37 CCBF (29 TO 41) 38 TO 48 CCBF (42 TO 48)
Maximum Input Fuse 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 Rating (A) Maximum Continuous 60 90 180 300 360 420 555 720 Operating Current (A) SCCR at 600VDC (KAIC) 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 Maximum Voltage (VDC) 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 600 Operating Voltage Range 0-600 0-600 0-600 0-600 0-600 0-600 0-600 0-600 - Combiner Only (VDC) Operating Voltage Range - Combiner With Integral 0-600 0-600 0-600 0-600 0-600 0-600 0-600 0-600 Disconnect (VDC) Positive Input Wire Size #8-#18 #8-#18 #8-#18 #8-#18 #8-#18 #8-#18 #8-#18 #8-#18 (AWG) Positive Input Terminal 16-22 16-22 16-22 16-22 16-22 16-22 16-22 16-22 Torque (in-lbs) Negative Input Wire Size #10-#14 #10-#14 #4-#14 #4-#14 #4-#14 #4-#14 #4-#14 #4-#14 (AWG) Negative Input Terminal 20 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 Torque (in-lbs) Positive Output Wire Size 1 1 /0-#10 /0-#10 350kcmil-#6 (2) 300kcmil-#4 (2) 350kcmil-#6 (2) 350kcmil-#6 (2) 600kcmil-#2 (2) 600kcmil-#2 (AWG) Positive Output Terminal 35 35 120 275 120 120 500 500 Torque (in-lbs) Negative Output Wire Size 2 /0-#8 500kcmil-#6 350kcmil-#6 (2) 300kcmil-#4 (2) 350kcmil-#6 (2) 350kcmil-#6 (2) 600kcmil-#2 (2) 600kcmil-#2 (AWG) Negative Output Terminal 120 500 120 275 120 120 500 500 Torque (in-lbs) Ground Output Wire Sizes #4-#14 #4-#14 250-#6 250-#6 250-#6 250-#6 250-#6 250-#6 (AWG) Ground Output Terminal 20-35 20-35 275 275 275 275 275 275 Torque (in-lbs) Enclosure NEMA Rating 3/3R/4/4X 3/3R/4/4X 3/3R/4/4X 3/3R/4/4X 3/3R/4/4X 3/3R/4/4X 3/3R/4/4X 3/3R/4/4X Enclosure Size 12X10X5 12X10X5 16X14X6 18X16X8 20X16X8 24X20X8 30X20X6 36X30X8 Maximum # of inputs 4 6 12 20 24 28 37 48
Overcurrent Protection - PV Fuse-Links:

Current Rating 8A 10A 12A 15A 3 7 10 20 Energy Integrals (A2s) Pre-Arcing Total at 1000V 32 50 100 200 Power Loss (watts) 0.8 In 0.5 0.6 1.3 1.8 In. 2.0 2.1 2.6 3.0
Combiner Dimensional Information:

# of Input Circuits 1-6 7-12 13-20 21-24 25-28 29-37 38-48 Enclosure Size Inches (H x W x D) 12 16 18 20 24 30 36 x x x x x x x 10 14 16 16 20 20 30 x x x x x x x 5 6 8 8 8 6 8 Overall Dimensions Inches (H x W x D) 13.56 x 11.43 x 5.21 17.53 x 15.46 x 6.23 19.62 x 17.61 x 8.82 22.00 x 17.68 x 8.83 27.00 x 21.24 x 9.90 32.86 x 20.99 x 7.89 39.31 x 32.50 x 10.05 Inside Dimensions Inches (H x W x D) 11.79 x 9.80 x 4.94 15.63 x 13.60 x 5.94 17.69 x 15.69 x 8.45 19.72 x 15.72 x 8.45 24.05 x 20.39 x 9.25 29.90 x 20.14 x 7.23 36.31 x 31.69 x 9.36 Mounting Dimensions Inches (H x W) 12.75 x 8.00 16.75 x 12.00 18.88 x 12.00 21.25 x 10.00 25.75 x 14.00 30.75 x 14.25 38.13 x 23.88 Approximate Weight (lbs) 10 18 27 33 47 60 112
5W
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1449
5W
Solar Pass Through Boxes
Applications:
Cooper Crouse-Hinds Solar Pass Through Boxes (sometimes referred to as transition boxes) are used in residential applications to provide a low profile, cost effective way to group input wires/circuits from several arrays and/or solar panels and transition from solar (PV) cable to regular building wire. The Pass Through Box was designed for PV applications where over current protection is not necessary due to the low power rating of the PV string.

NEMA 4X

Hot compression molded fiberglass reinforced thermoset polyester Non-Conductive, impact resistant, UV resistant, flame retardant Poured Polyurethane seamless gasket provides water-tight, dusttight environmental seal Stainless steel used on all external hardware
Features:
Rated 600VDC continuous duty Constructed in accordance with UL 1741 standards providing spacious wiring room for quick easy wire termination Factory installed multi-hole solar cord grip provides dependable secure wire termination to enclosure and saves field installation eliminating the need for enclosure drilling saving time & labor Fiberglass enclosure (UV absorbing) provided as standard offering long dependable service in the most environmental conditions Available in N3R sheet steel enclosures consult factory Light weight design offers easy mounting capabilities. Optional mounting feet are available for increased customer flexibility
Solar Pass Through Box Ordering Information

Cat. # CPBF03 CPBF04 Description 3 Circuit Pass Through Box 4 Circuit Pass Through Box
For additional configurations, please consult factory
5W
1450
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
Solar Non-metallic Cord Grips
5W
Applications:
Features:

Standard Materials:

5W
US: 1-866-764-5454
CAN: 1-800-265-0502
1451

2010 Catalogo Americano Completo

Transféré par

Informations du document

Description originale:

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

2010 Catalogo Americano Completo

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Full-Line Product Catalog

Electrical products for hazardous, industrial and commercial applications worldwide

General Information Section G

see page G66 see page G70 see page G71

Quick Ship Delivery Services

see page G72

Copyright 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds

Organization of the Catalog

Copyright 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds

Product Section and Product Family

Condulet Conduit Outlet Boxes With Covers

Cat. # EABC16 EABC26 EABC36

Cat. # EABX16 EABX26 EABX36

Typical Product Applications & Key Product Features

EABY Ordering Information

Hub Size Cat. # EABT16 EABT26 EABT36

Cat. # EABY16 EABY26

Complete Certications and Compliances

Certications and Compliances:

Cat. # EABL16 EABL26 EABL36

Standard Finishes: Standard Materials and Standard Finishes of Construction

Options, Accessories and Additional Technical Specs

a 33/4 33/4 33/4

b 217/32 225/32 225/32

e 55/16 59/16 59/16

f 33/32 33/32 33/32

Copyright 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds

Copyright 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds

Hazardous (Classified) Locations

Temperature Identification Numbers.

Class II (Dusts) E Metal F Carbonaceous G Grain (organic)

Class III (Fibers & Flyings) No groups

Copyright 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds

Copyright 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds

Copyright 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds

Copyright 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds

Copyright 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds

Copyright 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds

950 356 356 338 932 356 1310 1166

510 180 180 170 500 180 710 630

Copyright 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds

Minimum Cloud or Layer Ignition Temp. F C

460 430 710 380 420 400 520 420 250

550 440 390 470 320 530

Copyright 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds

Copyright 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds

Copyright 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds

Cooper Crouse-Hinds Products Available in Corrosion Resistant Materials

Corro-Free Epoxy Coating

Copyright 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds

y Feralo um Alumin r-Free Coppe

Bronze Silicon oating poxy C Free E Corro-

PPS Steel inless 316 Sta

y Feralo um Alumin r-Free Coppe

Bronze Silicon oating poxy C Free E CorroC C C A A A A A A A A C A B A A A A A A A C A A A C A A C A A A A

PPS Steel inless 316 Sta

Copyright 2010 Cooper Crouse-Hinds

y Feralo um Alumin r-Free Coppe

Bronze Silicon oating poxy C Free E CorroC A A C A C B B A A A A A A A A D B B A A A A A A A C B B B A A A B A A

PPS Steel inless 316 Sta

y Feralo um Alumin r-Free Coppe

Bronze Silicon oating poxy C Free E Corro-

PPS Steel inless 316 Sta